IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


A. 


m 


IM 


^  y,2 


■  2.2 
£^0     1^ 


il  116 


6" 


«' 


Photographic 

Sciences 
Corporation 


23  WEST  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  N.Y.  14580 

(716)  872-4503 


&*■-. 


«' 


M 


CIHM/ICMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 


CIHM/ICIVIH 
Collection  de 
microfiches. 


jr 


Canadian  Institute  for  Historical  Microreproductions  /  Institut  Canadian  de  microreproductions  historiques 


MPMM 


mm 


Technical  and  Bibliographic  IMotes/Notes  techniques  et  bibliographiques 


The  Institute  has  attempted  to  obtain  the  best 
original  copy  available  for  filming.  Features  of  this 
copy  which  may  be  bibliographically  unique, 
which  may  alter  any  of  the  images  in  the 
reproduction,  or  which  may  significantly  change 
the  usual  method  of  filming,  are  checited  below. 


H 


Coloured  covers/ 
Couverture  de  couleur 


I      I    Covers  damaged/ 


Couverture  endommag^e 

Covers  restored  and/or  laminated/ 
Couverture  restaur6e  et/ou  pellicul6e 

Cover  title  missing/ 

Le  titre  de  couverture  manque 

Coloured  maps/ 

Cartes  g6ographiques  en  couleur 

Coloured  init  (i.e.  other  than  blue  or  black)/ 
Encre  de  couleur  (i.e.  autre  que  bleue  ou  noire) 

Coloured  plates  and/or  illustrations/ 
Planches  et/ou  illustrations  en  couleur 

Bound  with  other  material/ 
Reli6  avec  d'autres  documents 


D 


D 


W 


Tight  binding  may  cause  shadows  or  distortion 
along  interior  margsn/ 

La  re  liure  serr^e  peut  causer  de  I'ombre  ou  de  la 
distortion  le  long  de  la  marge  int^rieure 

Blank  leaves  added  during  restoration  may 
appear  within  the  text.  Whenever  possible,  these 
have  been  omitted  from  filming/ 
II  se  peut  que  certaines  pages  blanches  ajout6es 
lors  d'une  restauration  apparaiss*  it  dans  le  texte, 
mais.  lorsque  cela  6tait  possible,  ces  pages  n'ont 
pas  6t6  filmdes- 

Additional  comments:/ 
Commentaires  suppldmentaires;         , 


fl^dr<ii^  ^  U^M^ 


L'Institut  a  microfilm^  le  meilleur  exemplaire 
qu'il  lui  a  hxh  possible  de  se  procurer.  Les  details 
de  cet  exemplaire  qui  sont  peut-dtre  uniques  du 
point  de  vue  bibliographique,  qui  peuvent  modifier 
une  image  reproduite,  ou  qui  peuvent  exiger  une 
modification  dans  la  methods  normale  de  filmage 
sont  indiquAs  ci-dessous. 


n 
n 

n 

D 
D 
D 
D 
D 


This  item  is  filmed  at  the  reduction  ratio  checked  below/ 

Ce  document  est  fiim6  au  taux  de  rMuction  indiqud  ci-dessous. 

10X  14X  18X  22X 


Coloured  pages/ 
Pages  de  couleur 

Pages  damaged/ 
Pages  endommagdes 

Pages  restored  and/or  laminated/ 
Pages  restaurdes  et/ou  pellicul6es 

Pages  discoloured,  stained  or  foxed/ 
Pages  d6color6es,  tachetdes  ou  piqu^es 

Pages  detached/ 
Pages  d6tach6es 

Showthrough/ 
Transparence 

Quality  of  print  varies/ 
Quality  indgaie  de  I'impression 

Includes  supplementary  material/ 
Comprend  du  materiel  suppldmentaire 

Only  edition  available/ 
Seule  Edition  disponible 


C) 


Pages  wholly  or  partially  obscured  by  errata 
slips,  tissues,  etc.,  have  been  refiimad  to 
ensure  the  best  possible  image/ 
Les  pages  totalement  ou  partiellement 
obscurcies  par  un  feuillet  d'errata,  une  pelure, 
etc.,  ont  ixh  filmtes  h  nouveau  de  fa^on  d 
obtenir  la  meilleure  image  possible. 


26X 


30X 


12X 


16X 


20X 


H 


24X 


28X 


32X 


"t^ip:- 


ils 

lu 

iifier 

ne 

age 


) 


ita 


lure. 


] 


The  copy  filmed  here  has  been  reproduced  thanks 
to  the  generosity  of: 

Library  of  Congress 
Photoduplication  Service 

The  images  appearing  here  are  the  best  quality 
possible  considering  the  condition  and  legibility 
of  the  original  copy  and  in  keeping  with  the 
filming  contract  specifications. 


Original  copies  in  printed  paper  covers  are  filmed 
beginning  with  the  front  cover  and  ending  on 
the  last  page  with  a  printed  or  illustrated  impres- 
sion, or  the  back  cover  when  appropriate.  All 
other  original  copies  are  filmed  beginning  on  the 
first  page  with  a  printed  or  illustrated  impres- 
sion, and  ending  on  the  last  page  with  a  printed 
or  illustrated  impression. 


The  last  recorded  frame  on  each  microfiche 
shall  contain  the  symbol  ^^>  (meaning  "CON- 
TINUED"), or  the  symbol  ▼  (meaning  "END"), 
whichever  applies. 

Maps,  plates,  charts,  etc.,  may  be  filmed  at 
different  reduction  ratios.  Those  too  large  to  be 
entirely  included  in  one  exposure  are  filmed 
beginning  in  the  upper  left  hand  corner,  left  to 
right  and  top  to  bottom,  as  many  frames  as 
required.  The  following  diagrams  illustrate  the 
method: 


1 

2 

3 

L'exemplaire  film6  fut  reproduit  grdce  d  la 
g6n6rosit6  de: 

Library  of  Congress 
Photoduplication  Service 

Les  images  suivantes  ont  6x6  reproduites  avec  le 
plus  grand  soin,  compte  tenu  de  la  condition  et 
de  la  nettetd  de  l'exemplaire  film6,  et  en 
conformity  avec  les  conditions  du  contrat  de 
filmage. 

Les  exemplaires  originaux  dont  la  couverture  en 
papier  est  imprim6e  sont  film6s  en  commenpant 
par  le  premier  plat  et  en  terminant  soit  par  la 
dernidre  page  qui  comporte  une  empreinte 
d'impression  ou  d'iliustration,  soit  par  le  second 
plat,  salon  le  cas.  Tous  les  autres  exemplaires 
originaux  sont  film6s  en  commenqant  par  la 
premiere  page  qui  comporte  une  empreinte 
d'impression  ou  d'iliustration  et  en  terminant  par 
la  dernidre  page  qui  comporte  une  telle 
empreinte. 

Un  des  symboles  suivants  apparattra  sur  la 
dernidre  image  de  cheque  microfiche,  selon  !e 


cas:  le  symbols  — ^  signifie 
symbols  y  signifie  "FIN". 


'A  SUIVRE",  le 


Les  cartes,  planches,  tableaux,  etc.,  peuvent  dtre 
film6s  d  des  taux  de  reduction  diff6rents. 
Lorsque  le  document  est  trop  grand  pour  dtre 
reproduit  en  un  seul  clich6,  11  est  film6  d  partir 
de  I'angle  supdrieur  gauche,  de  gauche  d  droite, 
et  de  haut  en  bas,  en  prenant  le  nombre 
d'images  ndcessaire.  Les  diagrammes  suivants 
illustrent  la  mdthode. 


1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

>ma)Himmsumit 


J 


No.  100. 


HYDROGRAPHIC  OFFICE. 


SAILING  DIRECTIONS 


VOB 


THE  GULF  AND  RIVER  ST.  LAWRENCE 


SECOND  EDITION. 


-♦•^•- 


WASHINGTON: 

GOVERNMENT   PRINTING   OFFICE, 
1897, 


3  ; 


'? 


^K 


8 

■ 

<? 

vr 

.^^.1 


w 


w 


I 


CONTENTS 


Preface '  ^»«; 

Note ..."..."!."!!."!. vi 

Index  chart ^m 

List  of  Hydro(j;raphio  Office  agents '.'  411 

List  of  Hydrographic  Offlue  publications 4O6 

CHAPTER  I. 

General  remarks— Ice,  fogs,  winds  anil  weather,  currents— General  directions, 
St.  Lawrence  Gulf  and  Kiver j 

CHAPTER  II. 
Islands  in  the  Gnlf  of  St.  Lawrence 32 

CHAPTER  III. 

Capts  Breton  Island,  west  coast  and  St.  George  Bay 57 

CHAPTER  IV. 
Northumberland  Strait,  sonth  and  west  shores,  Cape  St.  George  to  Miramichi 

^^y 71 

CHAPTER  V. 

Prince  Edward  Island,  Northumberland  Strait,  north  shore 107 

CHAPTER  VI. 

Gnlf  of  St.  Lawrence,  west  coast,  Miramichi  Bay  to  Gasp^  Bay 157 

CHAPTER  VII. 

St.  Lawrence  River,  f,o'ith  shore,  Cape  Gaspd  to  Green  Island 203 

CHAPTER  VIII. 

Remarks  on  Belle  Isle  Strait— Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence,  north  coast.  Belle  Isle 
Straitto  Cape  Whittle 219 

CHAPTER  IX. 

Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence,  north  coast.  Cape  Whittle  to  Point  des  Monta 256 

CHAPTER  X. 

St.  Lawrence  River,  north  shore.  Point  des  Monts  to  Saguenay  River,  and  the      292 
Saguenay  River 

ui 


4 


'I 


*▼  OOMTEMTS. 

CHAPTER  XI. 

St.  Lawrence  River,  Green  IsUnd  and  Red  Islet  to  South  Traverse  and  Coudres  ''*' 
Wand gjjjj 

CHAPTER  XII. 
St.  Lawrence  River,  South,  Middle,  and  North  Channels  to  Quebec 329 

CHAPTER  XIII, 
St.  Lawrence  River,  above  Queoec 3^^ 


Page. 
309 


329 


364 


PREFACE 


This  publication  is  a  revision  of  the  first  edition,  from  the  latest  infor- 
mation, by.  AJr.  K.  0.  liay,  U.  8.  Navy,  in  the  Division  of  Sailing 
Directions.    The  first  edition  was  compiled  by  Mr.  R.  II,  Orr. 

The  meteorological  remarks  in  the  opening  chapter  were  prepared  by 
Mr.  James  Page,  in  the  Division  of  Marine  Meteorology. 

The  description  of  the  southeast  and  east  coasts  of  Oape  Breton 
Island,  found  in  the  first  edition,  has  been  omitted,  and  the  description 
relating  to  the  south  shore  of  the  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence,  in  the  first 
edition  of  Hydrographic  Office  publication  No.  99,  added. 

Since  much  of  the  coast  described  is  imperfectly  surveyed,  mariners 
are  requested  to  point  out  to  the  U.  S.  Hydrographic  Ofiice,  either 
directly  or  through  one  of  its  branch  offices,  any  errors  and  omissions 
that  they  may  discover.  With  a  view  of  making  the  next  editii.n  of 
this  publication  more  useful  and  complete,  new  information  is  also 
requested. 

J.  B.  Oraio, 
Commands,  U.  S.  Navy,  Hydrographer. 
U.  S.  Htdbogeaphio  Officb, 

Washington,  D.  C,  October  1, 1897. 

V 


^ 


NOTTS. 

The  bearings,  courses,  and  trend  of  the  laud  are  true,  but,  lor  cou- 
veuieuce,  the  corresiMjiiding  magnetic  bearings  to  tbe  nearest  degree 
follow  in  parentheses  (variation  in  1897).  The  directions  of  the  winds 
are  given  for  the  points  from  which  they  blow;  the  directions  of  the 
currents  for  the  points  toward  which  they  set.  Distances  are  expresst^ 
in  nautical  miles;  soundings,  unless  otherwise  stated,  are  retluced  to 
mean  low  water.  ^^ 


it,  lor  cou- 
est  degree 
'  the  winds 
,ou8  of  the 
ft  expresstMl 
reduced  to 


VI 


INDEX    TO    H 

ALLUDED  TO  IN  PUBLIC 


Ihviii.'ii  ,,l<  hull  r,,i,.-.lvii,ti,:ii   llWLxttUhuti-i  AKxiHl-nil  in  t'liiitj/r. 


INDEX    TO    H.  O.   CHARTS 

DED  TO  IN  FUBLICATIONS  NO S.  99  AND  11)0 


.  S*1>1«I 


NewT/brh  teFlemiaK  Cap.  inctudin^\ 
ths  9ulf  of  St.Lwi^enc9  and.  the     J  1*12 
OnatBarUc  of  ttn/fcumdlimd: 


J 

9BI 


W* 


Xtnmm.  Ijy  O  Koetxxl, 


En«ro»-e<I  hy  tUlJlanUl  aiul  CAXciU 


I 


:.'*5int:;?^  ^i«iaft-;_-_ 


CHAPTER    I. 

GENERAL  REMARk3-ICE,    F(»G8,  WINDS    AND  WEATHER,   CURRENTS- 
GENERAL  DIRECTIONS,  ST.  LAWRENCE  GULF  AND  RIVER 

General  Remarks.-Tlie  navigation  of  the  gulf  and  river  of  St 
Lawrence  (in  tlie  present  chapter  spoken  of  as  the  gulf  and  the  river) 
requires  much  careful  attention;  the  irregularity  of  the  tides  and  cur- 
rents, the  severity  of  the  climate,  especially  toward  the  close  of  the 
navigable  season,  and,  above  all,  the  frequent  fogs,  are  difficulties 
which  may  well  cause  much  anxiety  in  the  mind  of  the  seaman  and 
which  call  for  the  exercise  of  all  his  vigilance,  prudence,  and  ability 

In  thick  weather  the  continuous  use  of  the  deep-sea  lead  in  some 
form  so  as  to  obtain  accurate  depths  is  necessary  for  safety,  and  wheu 
near  the  land  the  speed  should  be  slow. 

The  Variatioa— The  navigator  is  reminded  that  the  variation  of 
the  compass  differs  nearly  two  points  between  the  limits  of  the  places 
described  in  this  work. 

The  Deviation  or  local  attraction  of  the  compass  needle  is  another 
source  of  error,  independent  of  charts  altogether.  This  subject  is  one 
of  great  importance  in  approaching  and  navigating  the  gulf,  as  from 
the  increase  of  the  magnetic  dip  and  the  decrease  in  the  horizontal 
magnetic  force  that  is  found  here— two  elements  affecting  the  ship's 
magnetism— the  original  deviation  of  the  compass  will,  in  all  proba- 
bihty,  be  much  increased.  In  many  vessels  it  has  been  ascertained  by 
direct  observation  that  their  maximum  deviation  has  been  increased 
by  one-third. 

Magnetic  Attraction  of  the  flhores.— An  opinion  is  prevalent  that 
the  compasses  of  vessels  are  disturbed  in  the  gulf  and  river,  and  such 
disturbance  has  been  attributed  to  the  magnetic  ores  of  iron  in  the 
hills,  particularly  those  of  the  north  coast.  The  magnetic  oxide  of 
iron  does  exist  abundantly,  and  attracts  the  needle  very  powerfully  at 
some  points,  particularly  along  the  coast  from  the  Bay  of  Seven  Islands 
eastward.  Among  the  Mingan  Islands  the  variation  was  found  to  vary 
from  this  cause  from  19o  to  31o  w.  At  Port  Neuf  and  on  Manicougau 
Point  the  needle  was  also  disturbed.  But  these  eflfects  were  only 
noticed  when  the  instrument  was  placed  on  the  shore. 

When  running.from  place  to  place,  at  greater  distances  than  2  miles 
from  the  coast,  nothing  of  the  kind  was  noticed;  so  that  in  nine  cases 
out  of  ten  where  this  source  of  erroneous  reckoning  has  been  alleged  as 
the  cause  of  accidents  to  vessels,  they  probably  originated  either  in 
errors  of  the  chart  or  in  the  local  attraction  on  board  the  vessels 
themselves. 

Lights  -The  intrinsic  power  of  a  light  should  always  be  considered 
1161 1 


GULP   OF   ST.    LAWRENCE. 


when  expecting  to  make  it  in  thick  weather.  A  weak  light  ia  easily 
obscured  by  haze,  and  no  dependence  can  bo  placed  on  its  being  seen. 
The  i)ower  of  a  light  can  be  estimated  by  remarking  its  order,  as  given 
in  the  Light  List,  and  in  some  cases  by  noting  how  much  its  visibilit.\-, 
in  clear  weather,  falls  short  of  the  range  due  to  the  height  at  which  it 
is  placed.  Thus,  a  light  placed  at  200  feet  above  the  sea,  and  only 
recorded  as  visible  10  miles  in  clear  weather,  is  manifestly  of  little 
brilliancy,  as  if  of  any  power  its  height  would  permit  it  to  be  seen  over 
20  miles. 

Under  certain  atmospheric  conditions,  and  especially  with  the  more 
powerful  lights,  the  glare  is  visible  considerably  bejoud  the  radius 
given,  which  is  calculated  for  the  actual  flame  of  the  light. 

In  some  conditious  of  the  atmosphere  white  lights  may  have  a  red- 
dish hue.  The  mariner,  therefore,  should  not  trust  solely  to  color 
where  there  are  sectors,  but  verify  the  position  by  taking  a  bearing  of 
the  light.  On  either  side  of  the  line  of  demarcation  between  white  and 
red,  and  also  between  white  and  green,  there  is  always  a  small  arc  of 
uncertain  color. 

In  the  St.  Lawrence  River  below  Quebec  the  lighthouses,  including 
Point  de  Monts,  Cape  Chatte,  and  Egg  island,  are  lighted  on  April  1 
and  extinguished  December  10.  Those  in  the  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence, 
Strait  of  Belle  Isle,  Northumberland  Strait,  Prince  Edward  Island,  and 
Gut  of  Canso  are  extinguished  December  20.  Bird  Bocks  light  and 
the  lights  on  St.  Paul  Island  jxre  shown  from  April  1  to  December  31, 
or  even  later,  if  navigation  is  open.  The  lightvessels  are  replaced  in 
position  each  spring  as  soon  as  the  state  of  the  ice  permits. 

Lightbuoys  are  withdrawn  November  10,  and  are  replaced  as  soon 
after  May  11  as  possible.  Other  buoys  are  withdrawn  on  November  14, 
except  those  at  Beaujeu  Bank,  Channel  Patch,  Middle  Ground,  St. 
Eoch  des  Auluets,  and  South  Traverse,  which  remain  in  position  till  the 
last  vessel  has  passed. 

Uniform  System  of  Buoyage. — Throughout  the  ports  and  chan- 
nels of  the  Dominion  of  Canada,  approaching  from  seaward,  all  buoys 
on  the  starboard  side  of  the  channel  are  painted  red,  and,  if  numbered, 
marked  with  even  numbers,  and  must  be  left  on  the  starboard  hand. 

Approaching  from*  seaward,  all  buoys  on  the  port  side  are  painted 
black,  with  odd  numbers,  if  any,  and  must  be  left  on  the  port  hand. 

Buoys  painted  red  and  black  in  horizontal  bands  mark  obstructions 
or  middle  grounds,  and  may  be  left  on  either  hand. 

Buoys  painted  white  and  black  in  vertical  stripes  mark  mid-channel, 
and  must  be  passed  close  to  to  avoid  danger. 

All  other  distinguishing  marks  to  buoys  are  in  addition  to  the  fore- 
going, and  indicate  particular  spots,  a  detailed  description  of  which 
is  given  wlun  the  mark  is  iirst  established. 

Perches  with  balls,  cages,  etc.,  will,  when  placed  on  buoys,  be  at  turning 
points,  the  color  and  number  indicating  on  which  hand  they  are  to  be  left. 


i! 


BUOYAGE. 


Starboard  hand  spar  buoys,  entering  channels  or  harbors,  will  in 
some  cases  be  surmounted  by  a  ball;  these  buoys  will  be  red. 

The  rule  for  coloring  buoys  is  equally  applicable  to  beacons  and  other 
day  marks,  so  far  as  it  may  bo  practicable  to  carry  it  out. 

Caution.— Buoys  marking  outlying  dangers,  owing  to  tlieir  exposed 
positions,  are  always  liable  to  break  adrift  or  to  other  accident;  there- 
fore implicit  reliance  should  not  be  placed  on  their  being  in  position. 

Buoys  Removed  during  Winter.— All  the  buoys  are  removed  at 
the  end  of  navigation  iri  each  season  in  the  following  areas  in  the  Prov- 
ince of  Quebec :  Chaleur  Bay  and  Magdalen  Islands,  in  Gaspc  Basin,  in 
the  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  from  Souris  Eock,  near  Fame  Point,  to  Ma- 
tane,  in  the  St.  Lawrence  River  from  Matane  and  Bersimis  to  St. 
Croix,  and  in  Saguenay  and  Richelieu  Rivers. 

Eight  spar  buoys  are  moored  below  Quebec,  to  assist  late  vessels 
leaving  that  port,  after  the  ordinary  buoys  have  been  removed,  but 
these  are  liable  to  be  displaced  by  ice  in  the 
spring  of  the  year. 

In  the  Province  of  New  Brunswick  all  the 
buoys  in  harbors  and  rivers  that  are  not  navi- 
gable during  the  winter  months  are  taken  up 
about  November  20,  and  some  coast  buoys  about 
December  15. 

With  regard  to  the  buoyage  of  Nova  Scotia, 
all  the  buoys  east  of  Halifax  are  withdrawn 
during  the  winter. 

Prince  Edward  Island  buoys  are  all  with- 
drawn, with  the  exception  of  a  spar  buoy  marking  Eitzroy  Rock  and 
another  marking  St.  Peters  Island  Spit,  near  the  mouth  of  Charlotte- 
town  Harbor,  and  a  spar  buoy  marking  Wheeler  Bar  and  Knoll  Shoal 
in  Georgetown  Harbor. 

Wrecks.— Buoys,  and  the  top  sides  of  vessels  used  for  marking 
wrecks,  are  painted  green  with  a  white  inscription,  and  moored,  when 
possible,  near  the  side  of  the  wreck  next  to  mid-channel. 

The  following  are  exhibited  from  wreck  vessels: 

By  day.— Three  balls  from  a  yard,  20  feet  above  the  sea;  two  placed 
vertically  on  the  side  that  shipping  may  safely  pass,  and  one  on  the 
other  side. 

By  night— Three  fixed  white  lights,  similarly  arranged,  but  the  ordi- 
nary riding  light  will  not  be  shown. 

Mariners  will  therefore  know  on  sighting  a  wreck-marking  vessel  that 
she  IS  thus  employed,  and  they  should  pass  on  that  side  of  her  on  which 
the  two  balls  or  two  lights  are  shown. 

Telegraph  and  Signal  Stations.— The  Government  of  the  Dominion 
of  Canada  has  given  notice,  dated  February  20, 1886,  that  the  marine 
telegraph  system,  established  in  the  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  in  the  inter- 
ests of  navigation  and  fisheries,  is  now  in  operation. 


4 


GULF    OF   ST.    LAWRENCE. 


1.  Vessels  exhibiting  their  distinctive  numbers  will  have  their  names 
transmitted  to  the  local  press  (for  publication  only)  free  of  charge. 

1'.  Dispatches  to  or  from  vessels  within  signaling  distance,  by  the 
international  code  of  all  nations,  either  by  Hags  or  semaphores,  will  be 
duly  delivered  as  addressed. 

3.  Dispatches  will  be  charged  for  at  the  ordinary  telegraph  rates 
between  stations;  but  no  charge  will  be  make  for  signaling  between 
coast  stations  and  vessels  at  sea. 

4.  Dispatches  may  (by  special  request)  be  delivered  in  cipher,  other- 
wise they  will  be  transmitted  in  ordinary  language. 

5.  Vessels  may  obtain  information  as  to  winds,  weather,  and  ice  at 
any  signal  station  within  the  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  free  of  charge. 

stations. 


Nanie  of  Btation. 


SijcnnlB  in 
use. 


I 

St.  Paul  Island  (S) i  Flags. 

Meat  CovH ...do  .. 

UrosBolHlo  (S) l...do  .. 

AVolf  Islet I 

House  Harbor I 

Amherst  Island  liighthouso  (S) {  Flags. 

A  nilierst  Harbor I 

Fox  Bav 


Juuil<^r"Kiver  ((Jhallop  Creek) . 

Salt  Lake  Hay 

Soutli  west  Point  Lighthiinse  (S) .' I  Flags . 

BecHcio  River ! 

West  Point  Lighthouse  (S) Flags. 

Macquvreau  Point  Lighthouse  (S) I. ..do  . 

Cape  Despair  Lightliouse  (S) do  . 

I'ointSt.  Peter 

l)ouglast4iwn 

Oaspti  liasin 

Peninsula 

O  rand  ( Irftvo >. 

Capo  Kosier  Lighthouse  (S) ■ 


Flags . 


GritfinCovo 

Fox  Kivcr i 

Fame  Point Ligbtbouse (S) Flags. 

The  Great  Pond  <Crrand  Etang) I 

Choloi',v<lornie  (about  lOmilesl^W.of  Fame  Point) 


Flags. 
Flags. 


Flags . 


Graiiil  Vnih\v  (Grande  VallOe) 

Magdalen  IJi ver 

Cnpe  Mai;dalen  Ligiithonse  (S) 

Mount  Liiuis  River 

Martin  Hi ver  Ligiithouse  (S) 

St.  Anne  Point  (St.  Anne  des  Monts) 

Cape  (;iintto  Village 

Cai)eCliatie  Li<!hthouHa  (S) 

Les  Mc'cbins  (near  Cape  Miuhaux) 

St.  Ft'licitu  (near  Cnpe  Balance) 

Matane  Ligiithouse  (S) 

Little  Metis  Lighthouse  (8) 

Grand  Metis 

St.  Flavio  (about  10  miles  SW.  of  Metis  Point) 

Father  Point*Lighthou8e  (S)  

Rimouski  (S) 

Rivi(iroduLoup(S) 

L'Islet  (S) I. ..do 

Egg  Island  Lighthouse '...do  . 

Point de  Monts  Lighthouse  (S) '...do  . 

Manicouagan  Point  (S) ...do  . 

Portueiif Xighthouse (S)  L..do  . 


Flags . 
. .do . . 


Flags . 
do., 
do.. 


I 


Situation. 


Heath  Point  Liehtliouse  (S) |  Flags 

South  Point  Lighthouse  (S) L.  do 


Cabot  Strait. 

Do. 
IvLdgdalcn  Islands, 

Do! 

Do. 

Do. 
Anticosti  Island. 

Do. 

Do. 

Do. 

Do. 

Do. 

Do. 

Do. 
Chaleur  Bay,  north  side  of 
entrance. 

Do. 
Gasp6  Bay. 

Do! 

Do. 

Do. 
St.  Lawrence  River,  sooth 
shore. 

Do. 

Do, 

Do. 

Do, 

Do, 

Do, 

Do, 

Do, 

Do, 

Do, 

Do, 

Do, 

Do, 

Do. 

Do. 

Do, 

Do. 

Do. 

Do. 

Do, 

Do, 

Do, 

Do, 
St,   Lawrence    Gulf,   north 

shore. 
St.  Lawrence   Rirer,  north 
shore. 

Do. 

Do. 


The  stations  in  the  above  list  marked ' 
signals  is  used. 


S  "  are  also  signal  stations  at  which  the  international  code  of 


Crt  W  :-»SfBWM"*^  W-'.'P*V* 


3ir  names 
argo. 
36,  by  the 
!8,  will  be 

iipli  rates 
between 

er,  otlier- 

nd  ice  at 
jirge. 


ion. 


ids. 


north  side  of 


River,  sonth 


Gulf,   north 
RiTur,  north 


tionalcodeof 


ICE.  f 

Ice.— Among  the  difficulties  of  navigation  may  be  mentioned  the  ice. 
In  spring,  generally  in  the  month  of  3Iay,  the  entrance  and  eastern 
parts  of  the  gulf  are  frequently  covered  with  drift  ice,  and  vessels  are 
sometimes  beset  by  it  for  many  days.  If  unprepared  for  contending 
with  this  danger  they  often  sutler  from  it  and  are  occasionally  lost; 
but  serious  accidents  from  this  cause  do  not  frequently  occur,  because 
the  ice  is  generally  more  or  less  in  a  melting  state  from  the  powerful 
effect  of  the  sun  in  spring.  In  the  fall  of  the  year  accidents  from  ice 
seldom  happen,  except  when  the  winter  commences  unusually  early,  or 
when  vessels  have  lingered  imprudently  late  from  the  temptation  of 
obtaining  high  freights. 

Cabot  Strait  is  never  frozen  over,  but  vessels  built  in  the  ordinary 
way  can  not  navigate  it  in  safety  between  January  1  and  May  1  on 
account  of  the  heavy  drift  ice.  Sealing  steamers  pass  through  at  all 
times,  but  are  occasionally  fast  in  the  ice  for  days  together. 

Nearly  every  year  the  great  rush  of  ice  outot  the  Gulf  of  St.  Law- 
rence  in  the  spring  causes  a  stoppage,  locally  known  as  the  "Bridge," 
between  St.  Paul  Island  and  Cape  Ray.  The  "Bridge"  sometimes  lasts 
for  2  or  .i  weeks,  and  completely  prevents  the  passage  of  sliips;  it  is 
recorded  that  .'$00  sail  have  at  one  time  been  detained  by  this  obstacle, 
and  many  wrecks  have  occurred  in  consequence  on  the  Newfoundland 
coast.  The  usual  time  of  the  formation  of  the  "Bridge"  is  between 
the  middle  and  end  of  Ai)ril  to  the  middle  of  May. 

The  prevalence  of  northwesterly  and  northerly  winds  orives  the  ice 
toward  the  entrance  to  the  gulf  and  along  the  west  coast  of  Capo 
Breton,  and  incoming  vessels  will  meet  no  ice  except  SW.  of  St.  Paul 
Island.  A  SW.  gale  opoasionally  brings  the  ice  out  from  the  channel 
between  the  Magdalen  Islands  and  Cape  Breton,  which  meets  the  main 
body,  flowing  past  Bird  Rocks,  and  closes  the  strait  between  St.  Paul 
and  Cape  Anguilla.  The  strait  often  appears  to  clear  rapidly;  in  36 
hours  very  little  ice  may  be  seen  from  Cape  Ray,  but  bodies  of  ice  will 
pass  many  days  after  navigation  is  open,  particularly  if  the  winds  are 
northerly.  The  ice  usually  passes  out  of  the  gulf  in  the  direction  of 
Banquereau,  the  eastern  edge  extending  halfway  between  Scatari  and 
St.  Pierre.  Occasionally  it  is  drifted  along  the  south  coast  of  New- 
foundland  and  reaches  St.  Pierre,  although,  according  to  the  report  of 
the  Canadian  department  of  marine,  no  ice  has  been  sighted  from  that 
island  aft«r  the  middle  of  April  during  the  past  7  years  (1889-1895). 
The  coast  between  Cape  North  and  Scatari  often  holds  the  ice  during 
easterly  winds  until  late  in  May. 

The  early  stream  of  slob  made  on  the  Labrador  coast  and  the  north 
usually  passes  into  the  gulf  during  the  month  of  December  and  mixes 
with  the  gulf  sheet  when  it  is  made  eariy,  but  it  is  often  open  water. 
The  east  winds  and  snow  build  this  thin  ice  and  produce  a  form  of  white 
slob.  The  northern  slob  enters  the  gulf  about  the  9th  of  January  with 
variations  extending  over  a  month,  but  it  may  not  be  permitted  to  pass 


% 


6 


GULP   OP   ST.    LAWRENCE. 


Blanc  Sablon  if  tlie  wind  i.s  NW.  The  ice  can  not  at  present  be  fol- 
lowed;  It  may  arrive  off  Bonne  Bay  during  January  or  February,  or  it 
may  be  driven  into  the  Labrador  coast,  ail  depending  on  the  wind 

The  gulf  sheet  majjes  early  and  rapidly  during  the  cold  season  and 
18  often  111  sheets  a  mile  or  two  in  length,  and  occasionally  it  win  be  fust 
for  a  few  days  from  Meccatina  to  Cow  Read  in  Februarv.  Generally 
speaking,  it  is  loose,  witli  lanes  and  lakes  extending  in  tlie  direction  of 
the  wind  and  current,  and  is  navigated  by  small  vessels  during  March 
and  April  sailing  from  Natashquan  and  Esquimaux  Point. 

ICE   IN  THE   GULF   OF  ST.  LAWRENCE   AND  VICINITY.  ' 

During  December  and  January  the  harbors  and  bays  around  the 
Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  begin  to  freeze,  and  by  January  20  ice  will  have 
formed  over  most  of  them.  In  some  the  ice  made  there  will  eventually 
become  thick  enough  to  interfere  with  navigation,  while  in  others  it 
Will  completely  close  the  port  and  prevent  the  entrance  of  all  vessels 
By  February  1,  the  open  water  in  the  gulf  will  be  full  of  ice  fields 
formed  there,  while  other  ice  will  enter  through  the  Strait  of  Belle  Isle 
and  from  the  St.  Lawrence  River.  j 

Off  the  coast  the  ice  is  in  constant  motion,  drifting  with  the  winds 
tides,  and  currents,  and  is  slowly  working  down  toward  Cabot  Strait' 
through  which  it  passes  and  finds  its  way  to  seaward.  Its  path  broad' 
ens  when  through  the  strait,  and  will  be  governed  generally  by  the 
prevailing  winds.  Under  the  influence  of  currents  alone  it  will  drift  to 
the  southward  and  westward,  and  in  latitude  45°  N.  may  be  from  10  to 
7o  miles  wide.  Much  of  this  is  very  heavy,  and  will  prevent  the  passage 
through  it  of  all  vessels  not  specially  built  to  go  through  ice. 

Its  thickness  will  be  anything  from  a  few  inches  to  several  feet  It  is 
only  in  the  Strait  of  Belle  Isle  that  bergs  are  encountered,  but  rarely 
farther  west  than  Greenly  Island,  though  a  few  have  been  known  to 
find  their  way  south  through  Cabot  Strait. 

Within  the  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  navigation  opens  during  the  month 
ot  April.  Ice  is  generally  found  to  the  north  and  west  of  Bird  Rocks 
up  to  the  middle  of  April,  and  the  last  reports  of  ice  within  the  gulf 
generally  precede  May  10.  The  fleet  of  sealing  schooners  leaves 
Pleasant  Bay,  Magdalen  Islands,  between  March  20  and  April  10,  and 
Esquimaux  Point  about  a  week  earlier.  During  the  period  1889-1896 
the  last  transatlantic  steamship  has  left  the  gulf  between  November 
21  and  December  5,  and  the  first  has  arrived  between  April  20  and 
April  26.  Sailing  vessels  are  from  10  days  to  2  weeks  earlier  in  leaving 
and  later  in  arriving,  respectively. 

The  harbors  along  the  northeast  coast  of  New  Brunswick  and  Nova 
Scotia  are  closed  by  ice  for  a  portion  of  each  year.  The  records  kept 
at  Sydney  during  several  years  past  show  that  the  harbor  is  rarely 
closed  before  the  latter  part  of  January  and  is  generally  open  after 
April  15.    The  Gut  of  Canso  and  Northumberland  Strait  are  rarely 


Y 


t  at  present  be  fol- 
or  February, or  it 
g  on  the  wind. 
Uo  cold  season  and 
nally  it  win  be  fust 
ruary.  Generally 
in  the  direction  of 
sels  during  March 
Point. 


VICINITY. 

bays  around  the 
ry  20  ice  will  have 
jre  Avill  eventually 
while  in  others  it 
nee  of  all  vessels. 

full  of  ice  fields 
Itrait  of  Belle  Isle 

g  with  the  winds, 
ard  Cabot  Strait, 
Its  path  broad- 
generally  by  the 
ane  it  will  drift  to 
nay  be  from  10  to 
event  the  passage 
ugh  ice. 

everal  feet.  It  is 
itered,  but  rarely 
)  been  known  to 

luring  tl^e  month 
St  of  Bird  Rocks 
e  within  the  gulf 
schooners  leaves 
rud  April  10,  and 
period  1889-1896 
;ween  November 
sen  April  20  and 
earlier  in  leaving 

swick  and  N^ova 
rhe  records  kept 
harbor  is  rarely 
erally  open  after 
Strait  are  rarely 


AVERAGE  TIME  OF  OPENINC 


PiMMI. 


Harbor  froirn  am.         I  DimppeBranr*  of  harbiir  iri> 


Arrival  of  Aald  Im. 


Pof 


'*  w^Mbiiry.  Can*  Hn-ton Fnb.S.lMM. 

r;    llarlMir  (NIC. ami),  Capn  HrcloB Ian.  15 


Cow  II  ,,    Cape  Itrelon Rarrly  (rcpxr*.  :i  tliiipa  in 

laKl  X>  \ran. 
Hydney.  Ca|i«  llrelon •  Jan.  14,  I8M 


Pnrtllond,  Capx  Breton '  Jan.  IS  to  Feb.  I 

Uaddwk,  CapnBrelun Jan.  33 


I 


Oeorgetown,  I'rinrr  KilwanI  lalanil Ilac.X. 

Chariot 


Tottotown.  I'rinn-  EilwanI  laland Dae.Sl. 


Apr.Zl.tlM 

Ilrpaltii  up  with  aoiitiierly 

winii.  I 

NiiBf  rirepl  in  dncka ; 


Feb.  TIKM.... 
AlHiiit  Mar.  I? 


Apr. 20.  IMA 

Apr.  IS  to  May  I. 
Apr.  13 


Apr.  31 


Vrh  litttH 

UcniTally  in  Jan . 


■Inn.  15  to  Feb.  I . 
Nona    


Jan. 
Non«' 


flnmmaralda,  I'rinrr  EilwanI  laland Vve.  II 

Uaacumpeqiia,  I'rinrr  MwanI  laland Ian.  3,  IM7 

KiobniondBay.  I'rinor  F^ward  laland Abontllec.lS 

Ualprqnr,  Prlncr  Edward  laland |  Not  nntil  oIommI  by  Arid  Icr.' 


Sooria,  Prlnca  Edward  laland  . 
Ptctou,  Nora  Srotia 


Jan.  4  to  10. 
Uee.M 


Shadlae,  New  Bmnawirk Dee.!.. 

lllramlchl  Bay,  New  Bmnawlek I)ee.S  . 

HhipprKan,  New  Bmnawlek r  Ilrc.S.. 

Caraiiarttr.  New  Bmnawlek I>er.  II. 

lialhauiiir,  Nrw  Bmnawlek Ilac.S.. 

Uaap«,  New  Bmnawlek l>ao.  10. 

Cape  MaKdaten,  Quebec » Dae.  16  to  Jan.  1. 

Father  Point,  Quebec 


Stnerra 

St.  Paula  laland . 


Amherat,  8.  If afdalen  laland 

Antlcoati,  gouthweat  Point 

Cape  Norman.  Newfonndland 

Canada  Bay,  Newfonndland 

Wblta  Bay  (waatam  ann),  Nawfonndland . 


Twilinnta  Harbor,  Newfoundland 

Little  Bay  (Betto  Core),  Newfonndland . 


Bzplolta  Bunt  laland,  Newfoundland. 

TouUngnet,  Newfonndland 

FoKo  Harbor,  Newfonndland 

Oander  Bay,  Newfoundlawl 

Qiaanapond,  Newfoundland ,. 


BonaTlata  Harbor,  Newfoundland. 
Trinity  Harbor,  Newfoundland. . . 


Hanta  Harbor.  NawAmndland.. 
Hearta  Content,  Newfoundland. 

Harbor  Grace,  Newfoundland . . 


St  Jobna  Harbor,  Newfoundland . 

Ferryland,  Newfoundland 

Cape  Race,  Newfoundland 

Trepaaay  Harbor,  Newfoundland. 
Plaoentla,  Newfonndland 


Lamelin  Harbor,  Kawfoundland. 


Grand  Bank,  Nawfonndland.... 
Harbor  Breton,  Newfoundland . 


La  Hunr  Bay,  Newfoundland. 
Biirco,  Newfoundland 


La  I'oiln  Harbor,  Newfonndland. 
Cliannvl,  Newfoundland 


Itny  of  lalnnda  (Humlirr  Rivrr),  Newfonndland 

Ihinue  Bay.  Newfoundland 

Itli'li  Point,  Nrwfounilland 

<>re<-uly  Island 


Apr.  m 

Apr  a.  ISM 

AiMHit  Apr.  I .  bay  ice  iiflen 

tbick  and  liani  on  May  I. 

May  I 


Apr.  1  to  10 . 
Apr.lt 


Apr.  M  . 
Apr.  31  . 
May  4.. 


Klrer  rarrly  fteeiea;  only 
moving  ice. 


Mays 

Apr.  15 

May  10 

Apr.  lu  to  36. 


Once  in  40  yrara . 


Jan.l 

Dec  35 

Dee.  36  to  Jan.  le. 


Dee.  30. 


Jan. 33 

Jan.lto30. 


Ja 


Jan.  1  to  Feb.  30,  averaging 
about  Jan.  30. 

Jan.Otolt 

Jan.l 

Jau.U 


Jan.  30. 
Jan.  SI. 


RareW  f reotea 

Jan.  It  to  Feb.  30,  averaging 

about  Fab.  I. 
Jan.  lot*  Feb.  SO 


Barely  fteeiea'. 


Oeeasinnally    blocked     by 

aeldice. 
About  Feb.l 


Occaaionally  blocked  by 
field  ire  lu  days  at  a  t  ime, 
and  fhnan  over  at  inter- 
vala  varying  fhmi  S  to  10 
yeara. 

Never 


Outer  aneborag*  aeldom 
froien  for  more  than  3  or 
S  days.  Inner  anchorage 
flrorn  Jan.  I  to  Apr.  IS. 

About  Dec.  1,  but  earily 
broken  up. 

Never  frozen ;  occaMionally 
bloi'keil  by  drift  ice  from 
ailiacent  eovea. 

Feb.  10 


Itarely  frozen. 


I»re.2« 

Jnn.  15 

|)e<*.  15 

Dec.  l5to.laVi.2i! 


Belk>Islr I 

battle  Harbor.  Lubmdor I>er.l3.    Navintion  i-losen 

4  we«-k«  earfli-r  or  later. 

according  to  neason. 


Fab.  to  Mar.,  flnntlng  lee 
fhim  aiUaoant  eovea. 


May  10  . 
Mar.  31 
May  20, 


May  10  . 


MayO 

May  I  to  10. 


.do 


Apr.  36  to  June  4,  averaging 
alHint  May  10. 

Apr.23 

Apr.n 

Mar.O 


Mar.  30. 
Mar.  36, 


Mar.  4  to  May  33,  averaging 

Apr.  10. 
Mar.ltoApr.l 


Mar.  SO. 


Apr.  1 


...do    

.Ian.  4.  18H7 

Apr  I;  drtveabaok  harbor 

Ice. 
Jan.  IS 


About  Feb  1 

But  HttIa  field  iaa. 


None 

..do   

None  aince  apring  of  !•?•, 
.    than  May  14. 

None 

...do 


Dae.  9,  mean  of  4  yeara. 


Feb.  IS; 
Jan.  13. 


dapandanpon  wind 


Jan. IS 

Jan.  1  to  16.. 
Dec.24,IS«7. 


Dec.  36  to  Jan.  10. 


Feb.  10  to  30  . 
Jan.  10 


Jan.  16  to  SO. 

Jan.  18 

Jan.  14 


Mar.  11  . 

Feb.  IB.. 
Apr.  It . 


Apr.l  .. 
Apr.  16 . 


Jan.  30  to  Feb.  30. 


Jan.  to  Fab.  16. 


FM>.  10  to  Apr.  10, 

38  veara. 
Jan.°30  toMar.  17, 

38  yeara. 


Barely  any,  only  with  aouth- 
arly  wind  after  ice  has 
rounded  Cape  Race. 


About  Mar.  1  . 
Feb.  36 


Veaaels  can  nearly  always 

enter  by  April. 
Moves  oir  with  northerly 

wind,  and  disappears  in 

April. 
Mar.20 


Apr.  24 

Apr.  15 

Mav  20 

Mar.  I  to  10 


May  11 


Feb.  (rare  occurrence) . 


Rarely  comea 

For  a  few  days  in  Feb.  and 
Mar. 

Jan.l 

.Ian.  15 1  Apr.  15 

.Ian. 15 1  May  15 

Jan.l  to  10 June  10  to  30. 


Disappearance  of  field  loo. 


Feb.  33, 1886  ... 
About  AprSO  . 


Varira.  about  May  I. 
With  wmtcrly  winda 


Apr  15  to  May  1. 
Nona 


Kml  ol  Apr. 
None 


...do   

May  10 

Apr.  1  to  May  1. 

May  IS 


Apr.l  to  May  1. 


Nona 

...do 

June  4, 1IT8. 

Nona 

...do 

...do 

...do 


Apr.  8,  mean  of  4  yenra. 


BnralTrei 

of  timo. 

May  81  .. 


any  length 


May  18 

Mar.  SI  to  Apr. SO.. 

Jnna  II.  ISSlT. 

May  10  to  June  35. 
May  10  to  June  IS. 


Apr.34 

May  1  to  10 . 


MayltoSO 

May» 

May  1  to  June  I 


May  11  . 

May  30. 

Apr.St . 


Uneartain 
May  IS.... 


May  1  to  St. 


Apr.orMay 

Feb.  36  to  Apr.  SO, 

28  years. 
Mar.  13  to  June  7, 

SSyanrs. 


About  Apr.  1 
Mar.  36 


Apr.l 


Apr.  15 


Jan.  3  to  F<-l>.  13. 
Jan.  to  Apr.  IS.. 


June  14. 
May  18  . 


1151 Face  page  7 


rERAOE  TIME  OF  OPENINO  AND  CLOSING  OF  PORTS. 


lappearuire  of  Aeld  loe. 


)  23,  IWM  ... 
out  Apr.W. 


rim .  about  May  I . . 
(Ii  wmtcrly  wind*. 


r  lA  li>  May  1. 
na 


il  nl  Apr. 

dr 


do    

ly  10    

r.l  tollayl. 

\jU 


iMtoMajl. 


do 

m4,  itn. 


do. 
do. 
do. 


tr.  I,  maao  or4  ycara. 


tralr  remaina  aoy  laagtb 

if  tinM. 

tyU 


»yi« 

ir.SltoAar.W.. 

iBall.iaair. 

ay  10  to  Jon*  SS . 
ay  lotoJnaelS. 


pr.M 

ay  1  to  10 . 


ay  I  to  90 

•y« 

ay  1  to  Jane  1 


ay  11  . 

•yao. 

pr.M  . 


Dcartaln  .. 
ay  IS 

ay  1  to  20. 


pr.orHay 

th.  IS  to  Apr.  30, 

28yeara. 

ar.  13  to  Jnne  7. 

aSywura. 


boat  Apr.  1  . 
ar.2S 


Dcpartara  of  last  vtwael 
Mfora  loo  aaaaoB 


Arrival  of  flmt  vraaf  I  aflrr 
lee  I 


iplctely  or  partially 
do     ■ 


Interval.  If  mimpletely 
eloaod. 


DM-.n.  KM. 
Feb.  90 


About  Feb.  I. 
Jan.ft.  IIM... 


Jan.  I. 
Jan.  6. 


Apr.  5.  IHM. 
Mir.  IS 


Qencrally  la  Mar . 
Apr.  U  1«M 


AtlBterrsIa 

At  iuterrala  by  Seld  lea  — 

At  iBtorrala  by  llald  Iro; 

naver  by  harrnir  Int. 
Averam  i  montba  each  year 


Jan  I  to  Apr.  IS 

Houlhweal    arm    open    all 
» Intor. 


iTeramS 
rioaed. 


llayl '  Cnmplately  at  timea 

Apr.94 Htine    yean   at    Interrala, 

otbar  yaara  oonpletely. 


Dm.  90 Apr.9t . 


Dao.tl 

Dae.  30  tea. 
Bod  of  Dec. 


Miildla  of  Dae. :  aeldom  any 
Im  to  pravpDt  veaaola  laaT 
IDB  nntilJan. 

JaB"9 

D«c.» 


Dec.!... 
Nov.  96  . 
Mot.  19  . 


KoT.9S 

NoT.lt 

U«o.4to» 

Not.  3S  to  Dee.  S  . 


Nor.  U,  moan  of  8  yean . 


Open  at  all 
Dec.  13 


Dae.  17.. 
Dec.S... 
Mot.  la  . 


Not.  ao  . 


I>M>.7 

iut.  1  to  10. 


About  Jan.  1 . 


Jan.». 
Ju.'7..' 


Doc  90. 
Jar.  98. 

Dm).9S. 


Teaaala  eone  and  go  all  year 
round :  aamotlmea  delayed 
by  ileld  lee. 

....do 


pr.l 


pr.  15 

pr.  1.5    

«y  ]R 

line  lu  tu30. 

line  14 

ay  18 


Dms.94. 
Dee.  IS. 


Open  at  all 

Ajrri  ve  and  depart  at  all  aea- 
aons. 

Navigation  nearly  always 

open  in  buy. 
Generally  open  all  tli«  year 

roumL 

Jan.l 

Jan.] 

Nov.lO 

NoT.Stull 


Apr.94 

Apr.  99 

May  I  to  10 . 

May  16 


Coinpletaly  . 
...do 


.do. 
.do, 
.do. 


Jaa.  to  Apr 

Jan.  IS  to  Apr.  16. 
Jaa.  10  to  Apr.  II. 


Jaa.  to  Apr — 
Dae.  90  to  Apr. 


At  intarvaU  antU  Tab.  1. . 


Canpletely . 
,...do 


Apr.9i 

Apr.90 

Apr.lO ....do 

May7 ....do 

May  91 j.-do 

May  19 '....do 

May  6 '....do 

Mavll ....do 

Apr.90  to  May  1 i  Generally  In  motion  all  win- 

trr. 
Apr.  94,  mean  of  7  yaara —   (Junipletely  at  Intarvala — 


Dae.  10  to  Apr.  10 

Jan.  1  to  Apr.  10 

Dec.  10  to  May  1 :  shinning 

plaea  open  lalor  In  fall. 
Complotaly  flroB  Fab.  1  to 


Jan.  14  to  Apr.  •■ 
Jan.*  t4i  Apr.3  . 


Apr.  11. 


May  10 

Apr.  IS  to  May  4. 
Jane  • 


Mayl 

Mav9S 

May  I  to  10. 


May  1  to  10. 


▲pr.7. 


Apr.  98  . 


May  1  (at  intenrala  all  win 

ter). 
Mar.6 


Attr.lS. 


Mar.  9.. 

Apr.  30. 


May  12 

Mayl 

May  IS    

.1  uoe  10  to  20. 


Oeeaalonally  obatmeted  by 
Bebl  lee. 


Dee.  17  to  May  10 . 

Completaly 

...do 


Doe.itoApr.lt 

BarlyiaDae.t*Apr.lS. 
■ariy  in  Dae,  to  May  10. 


Dm.  10  to  May!.. 
Dec.  IS  to  May*.. 
Dor.  9K  to  May  10. 
Jan.  I  to  Apr.  96.. 


Mavlgatiua  chiaod  Iwtweaa 
Dee.  lOand  Apr.  10:  potba 
ars  opw  aboat  half  of  tka 


Jan.  1  to  Apr.  1. 
Doe.  to  May 


Completely i  DFe.toMay. 


.do. 
.do 


Completaly . 
doaipisleljr" 


At  laterrala  tnm  Jan.  91 
toM^II. 

At  iatarraUi  altar  94  honra 
of  aontbwaat  wind  too- 
aelaean  enter  harbor. 

AtinterTala 


At  interTals  Ihw  Jw.  90  to 
Mar.  90. 

At  interraU  by  flaU  lee  . . . 


Completely  rioaed  twiee  in 

30  years. 
At  intenrala  by  fleld  ice  — 


Only  at  intenrala . 


At  intervals  fhim  Mar.  1  to 

20. 
At  interTals  by  fleld  ice  — 


Completely  . . 

ilo 

.  .do 

At  intenrals. 


Jaa.  a  to  Apr.W. 
Jan.  S  to  May  10.. 


V^ltoApr.l. 


JaiLlltoApr.lI. 


Completely  fkom  Feb.  I  to 
Mar.  0,  at  intorrala  tnm 
Jan.  II  to  Feb.  a. 


Feb.  9t  to  Mar.  95. 


Tbiekasss  o(  Ico. 


.\boat9  feet 

Northraat  arm  Ato  19  incbrs 

Harbor  Ire  about  4  Inebes  . 

6  to  lu  Inches 


itinehao. 
...do.... 


...do   

19  lo  II  Inches  , 


19ln«hee 

8  to  13  inrhea  . 
Aboutlfert.. 


lto9llMt 

lu  to  2U  Incheo  . 


90  to  as  inebee  . 

9  to  3  feet 

10  to  M  inebee . 


9tol  feet 

4  feet 

a  fret 

10  lo  9i)  inebee . 


Ordinary  Held  lee. 


1  to  I  feet. 
IMinehea.. 


9toafbot. 


...do. 
9  feet. 


.do. 


9  foot. 


Ifoot 

II 


a  to  13  inobea  . 
atoiainohaa. 


Harhor  lee  1  or  9  Inohee. 


ainchea. 
4 inebee. 


Dee. 95  to  Apr. 30 ISinebea. 

Jan.  to  Apr ;  2feet .... 

Dee.  IS  to  May  20 Sfeet.... 

Coni|iletely  nt  Umea  |;y  fleld    3  to  S  feet, 
ice. 


Itemarlis.  and  records  of  previous 
years. 


Kerorri  23  years,  open  ganarally  all 
the  year  round. 


Mean  of  3U  years. 

Mean  of  llyeara'  cloatng:  ramaiadar 

mean  of  IS  yiKin, 
Mean  of  a  years. 

Maaa  of  19  years. 


of  la  yaara. 
Mean  of  S  years,  ferry. boat  ran  In 

traali  exespt  t*om  Fab.  6  to  la. 
Maaa  at  t  yaara. 

of  Bi  J 


Mean  of  5  yi 
Mean  of  19  yi 


Tbora  is  rarsly  aay  boary  tea  natil 
sad  of  Dae.  Tboralaalwayaaeban. 
aal  of  opaa  water  on  aorth  or  aontb 
aide  of  tbo  rlrer.  dependlac  apon 
wlad.  Wlad  Talodty  of  7  maaa  par 
boar  aaSekat  to  drtvo  lee  to  mid- 
ekaanol.  Sometlaiea  epaa  water 
laataamoathatattaM. 

Fak.  16  to  Apr.  91; 

MaaaofMfwua. 

Mean  of  99  yaara. 

Fleld  lea  baa  remained  antll  Joly  1 
and  baa  diaappeared  by  Apr.  10. 

Mean  of  10  yearai  aeaUag  ateanors  ea* 
ter  all  moathss  other  ataamiaa  «aa 
oeeaataa«Uy  enter. 

Opea  at  iatarrala  beti 
llayM. 


Oeeasioaally  opoa. 
Mean  of  11  ] 


Apr.  1 1 


Dataa  Tarlabk 
Mean  of  It  yi 


Mean  of  10  years  i  noTor 
more  than  a  weeka  at  a  time. 


Mail  atoamer  unable  to  enter  only  I 
times  in  30  yeara. 


NaTigation  eloaed  only  S  or  a  tin 
SUyean. 


I  in 


KoTer  fnisrn  until  arrival  of  fleld  ice. 


ICE — FOGM. 


The  hill bor  of  rictmi  in  fieiincntly  cpeii 


<!lo8('<l  by  ice  after  April  LT.. 
two  weeks  earlier  tliiin  this. 

West  of  Cape  Canso  the  ice  r„  -ly,  if  ever,  interferes  with  naviKa- 
t  on.  Hahtax,  for  example,  has  only  b.ei.  closed  once  in  3r,  years,  and 
then  for  only  a  short  time,  by  ice  fro/en  ,n  the  harbor,  though  ice  im 
inch  or  two  in  thickness  freciuontly  freezes  there. 

Heavy  ice  is  noticed  at  the  month  of  the  St.  Lawrence  River  in  the 
latter  part  of  December  and  lasts  until  April  10  or  ir,,  hut  all  duriny 
the  season  leads  can  be  found  when  the  wind  .Irives  the  ice  to  either 
side  of  the  river.  The  north  shore  of  the  river,  in  the  vicinity  of  the 
SaKuenay,  during  certain  years  remains  open  after  the  surrounding 
waters  are  filled  with  ice,  and  a  vessel  would  find  no  diHiculty  in  male 
mg  Tadousac  Harbor.  The  river,  from  Quebec  to  Montreal,  generally 
opens  during  the  last  week  in  April. 

In  the  Strait  of  Jielle  Isle  thin  sheet  ice  makes  its  appearance  between 
December  lo  and  December  25,  and  close-packed  ice  a  little  later 
Bergs  do  not  appear  in  any  great  numbers  until  after  April  1,  but  from 
that  time  until  the  following  September  they  are  numerous  and  some- 
times  very  large.  They  sometimes  make  their  way  through  the  strait 
and  are  seen  occasionally  as  far  west  as  Greenly  Island  and  as  far 
south  as  Rich  Point.  Since  1889  the  first  transatlantic  steamer  has 
passed  through  the  strait  within  a  day  or  two  of  June  17,  although 
navigation  has  frequently  been  open  some  days  earlier.  The  date  of 
the  last  passage  during  the  same  period  has  varied  from  November  6 
to  December  7. 

At  the  time  of  the  opening  and  the  closing  of  navigation,  full  reports 
as  to  the  condition  of  the  ice  at  various  points  of  the  river  and  gulf  of 
St.  Lawrence  are  forwarded,  for  the  benefit  of  commerce,  to  the  Boards 
of  Trade  oi  Montreal,  St.  John,  New  Brunswick,  and  Quebec,  and  to 
the  Chamber  ot  Commerce,  Halifax,  Nova  Scotia.  Full  information  is 
a  so  supplied  by  the  Marine  Department  to  their  agents  at  Anticosti, 
Magdalen  Islands,  Meat  Cove,  Cape  Breton,  Cape  Bay,  Low  Point 
North  Sydney,  and  Cape  Race  as  to  weather,  wind,  and  movement  and 
condition  of  the  ice  in  the  gulf  and  river  St.  Lawrence  up  to  Montreal, 
for  the  guidance  of  any  vessel  calling  for  information. 

Fogs  may  occur  at  any  time  during  the  open  or  navigable  season, 
and  they  sometimes  last  several  days  in  succession,  but  are  most  fre- 
quent  in  the  early  part  of  summer,  and  seldom  fail  to  accomimny  an 
easterly  wind  of  any  strength  or  duration.  In  the  months  of  October 
and  November  the  fogs  and  rain  that  accompany  easterly  gales  are 
replaced  by  thick  snow.  During  westerly  winds  they  are  rare,  and 
never  of  long  continuance. 

The  above  general  observation  is  subject,  however,  to  restriction,  ac- 
cording to  locality  or  season.  Thus  winds  between  the  south  and  west, 
which  are  usually  clear-weather  winds  above  Anticosti,  are  frequently 
accompanied  with  fog  in  the  eastern  parts  of  the  gulf.    Winds  between 


8 


GULF   OP   ST.    LAWRENCE. 


the  south  and  east  are  almost  always  accompanied  with  rain  and  fog  in 
every  part.  NE.  winds  above  Point  des  Monts  are  often  east  or  more 
to  the  southward  in  the  gulf,  changed  in  direction  by  the  high  lands  of 
the  south  coast,  and  have  therefore  in  general  the  same  fogpy  charac- 
ter. Winds  of  considerable  strength  and  duration  are  here  meant,  and 
■which  probably  extend  over  great  distances. 

Moderate  and  partially  fine  weather  winds  may  occur  without  fog  in 
any  season  and  in  any  locality.  In  the  early  part  of  the  navigable  sea- 
son, especially  in  the  months  of  April  and  May,  clear  weather  NE. 
winds  are  of  frequent  occurrence,  and  they  also  sometimes  occur  at 
other  seasons  in  every  part  of  the  gulf  and  river. 

The  fogs  which  accompany  easterly  gales  extend  high  above  the  sea, 
and  can  not  be  seen  over  from  V\e  masthead  of  a  vessel;  occasionally 
they  admit  the  land  or  other  objects  to  be  distinguished  at  the  dis- 
tance of  ^  mile  or  more  in  the  day  time.  The  fogs  that  occur  in  calms, 
■especially  after  strong  winds,  are  frequently  so  dense  as  to  conceal 
a  vessel  within  hail ;  these  fogs  are  usually  not  much  elevated  above  the 
sea,  so  that  when  objects  are  hidden  at  50  yards  from  the  deck  they  can 
be  plainly  seen  by  a  person  50  or  60  feet  up  in  the  rigging. 

When  within  sight  of  land  in  foggy  weather  the  usual  effect  of  fog 
is  that  of  causing  estimations  of  distance  to  be  erroneously  in  excess. 
No  gi'eat  reliance  should  be  placed  upon  an  assumption  of  position 
depending  upon  the  distance  at  which  the  sound  of  surf  breaking  on 
a  rocky  shore  can  be  heard,  but  on  many  portions  of  the  coast  where 
steep  cliffs  extend  to  the  shore  the  proximity  of  a  steamer  to  them 
may  be  detected  by  the  echo  of  the  whistle.  There  is  no  safe  guide  but 
the  constant  nse  of  the  lead. 

Winds. — The  prevailing  winds  during  the  navigable  season  are 
either  directly  up  or  directly  down  the  estuary,  following  the  course 
of  the  chains  of  highlands  on  either  side  of  the  great  valley  of  the  St. 
Lawrence.  The  westerly  winds  do  not  appear  to  be  so  much  guided 
in  direction  by  the  highlands,  excepting  along  the  south  coast,  where 
a  SW.  wind  at  the  island  of  Bic  was  observed  to  become  a  NW.  wind 
at  Cape  Gasp^.  These  wincio  T.  equently  blow  strong  for  3  or  4  days  in 
succession;  the  westerly  winds  being  almost  always  accompanied  by 
fine,  dry,  clear,  and  sunny  weather;  the  easterly  winds  as  frequently 
the  contrary — cold,  wet,  and  foggy. 

In  the  spring  easterly  winds  mostly  prevail,  frequently  blowing  sev- 
eral weeks  in  succession.  As  the  summer  advances  the  westerly  winds 
become  more  frequent,  and  the  SW.  wind  may  be  said  to  be  the  pre- 
vailing wind  in  summer  in  all  parts  of  the  river  and  gulf.  Light  south 
winds  blow  occasionally;  but  north  winds  are  not  common  in  summer, 
although  they  sometimes  occur.  Steady  NW.  winds  do  not  blow  fre- 
quently before  September,  excepting  for  a  few  hours  at  a  time,  when 
they  generally  succeed  easterly  winds  which  have  died  away  to  a  calm, 
forming  the  commencement  of  strong  winds  and  usually  veering  to  the 


I  .! 


n  and  fog  in 
east  or  more 
ligh  lands  of 
jggy  cliarac- 
3  meant,  and 

ithoiit  fog  in 
avigable  sea- 
weather  NB. 
nes  occur  at 

bove  the  sea, 
occasionally 
d  at  the  dis- 
cur  in  calms, 
IS  to  conceal 
ted  above  the 
leek  they  can 

r 

1  effect  of  fog 
sly  in  excess, 
in  of  position 
breaking  on 
5  coast  where 
mer  to  them 
afe  gnide  but 

season  are 

the  course 

oy  of  the  St. 

much  guided 

coast,  where 

a  NW.  wind 

or  i  days  in 

iompanied  by 

1,8  frequently 

jlowing  sev- 
BSterly  winds 
o  be  the  pre- 

Light  south 
ft  in  summer, 
not  blow  fre- 
a  time,  when 

ay  to  a  calm, 

eeriug  to  the 


WINDS.  9 

SW.  The  NW.  wind  is  dry,  with  bright  clear  skj',  flying  clouds,  and 
showers.  After  the  autumnal  equinox,  winds  to  the  northward  of  west 
become  more  common,  and  are  then  often  strong  steady  winds  of  con- 
siderable duration.  In  the  months  of  October  and  Nov'embor  the  NW. 
wind  frequently  blows  with  great  violence  in  heavy  squalls,  with  i>a8sing 
showers  of  hail  and  snow,  and  attended  with  sharp  frost. 

Thunder-storms  are  not  uncommon  in  July  and  August.  They  sel- 
dom last  more  than  an  hour  or  two,  but  the  wind  proceeding  from  them 
is  in  general  violent  and  sudden,  imrticularly  when  near  the  mountainous 
part  of  the  coast.  Sail  should,  therefore,  be  fully  and  quickly  reduced 
on  their  approach. 

Strong  winds  seldom  veer  quickly  from  one  quarter  of  the  compass 
to  the  opposite.  They  generally  fall  calm,  and  are  succeeded  by  a  wind 
in  the  opposite  direction.  It  is  not  meant,  however,  by  this  observa- 
tion that  they  may  not  veer  to  the  amount  of  several  joints.  The  NW. 
winds  seldom  or  never  veer  round  by  north  and  NE.  to  east  and  8K., 
but  they  do  frequently  by  degrees  to  the  SW.,  after  becoming  moderate. 
SW.  winds  seldom  veer  by  the  NW.  and  north  to  the  eastward,  but 
sometimes  by  the  south  to  SE.  and  east.  Easterly  winds  gener.ally 
decrease  to  a  calm,  and  are  succeeded  by  a  wind  from  the  ojjposite 
direction. 

In  the  fine  westerly  winds  of  summer  a  fresh  breeze  will  often  decrease 
to  a  light  breeze  or  calm  at  night,  and  spring  up  again  from  the  same 
quarter  on  the  following  morning.  Under  these  circumstances  only 
may  a  land  breeze  off  the  north  coast  be  looked  for.  The  same  has  been 
observed  off  the  south  coast  also,  but  not  so  decidedly  or  extending  so 
far  off  shore.  The  north  land  wind  may  occasionally  be  carried  nearly 
over  to  the  south  coast  just  before  daylight,  but  the  south  land  wind 
seldom  extends  more  than  5  or  6  miles  off,  and  that  very  rarely.  Under 
the  same  circumstances,  that  is,  with  a  fine  weather  westerly  wind 
going  down  with  the  sun,  a  SW.  land  breeze  will  frequently  be  found 
blowing  off  the  north  coast  of  Anticosti  at  night  and  during  the  early 
part  of  the  morning.  If,  however,  the  weather  be  not  settled  fair,  and 
the  wind  does  not  fall  with  the  sun,  it  will  usually  prove  worse  than 
useless  to  run  a  vessel  close  inshore  at  night  in  the  hope  of  a  breeze  off 
the  land. 

Such  is  the  usual  course  of  the  winds  in  common  seasons,  in  which  a 
very  heavy  gale  of  wind  will  probably  not  be  experienced  from  May  to 
October,  although  close-reefed  topsail  breezes  are  usually  common- 
enough.  Occasionally,  however,  there  are  years  the  character  of  which 
is  decidedly  stormy.  Gales  of  wind  of  considerable  strength  then  fol- 
low each  other  in  quick  succession  and  from  opposite  quarters. 

Barometer. — When,  after  a  continuance  of  Avesterly  winds  and  flue 
weather,  the  barometer  has  risen  nearly  to  its  greatest  height,  say  some 
tenths  above  30  inches,  or  begins  to  fall  a  little,  an  easterly  wind  may 
soon  be  expected.    If  to  this  notice  given  by  the  barometer  be  added 


I 


' 


10 


GULF    OF    ST.    LAWKENCE. 


a  warm  bazy  atmosphere  during  the  day,  and  a  heavy  precipitation  of 
dew  at  night,  with  very  bright  twinkling  stars,  or  a  colored  aurora 
borealis,  the  approach  of  a  southerly  or  an  easterly  wind  is  almost  cer- 
tain. If  land  be  in  sight  at  such  a  time,  and  appears  much  distorted 
by  terrestrial  refraction,  or  if  vessels  in  sight  have  the  relative  propoi- 
tlon  of  their  hull  and  sails  changed  by  the  mirage,  or  present  double  or 
treble  images,  such  appearances  will  render  the  before  probable  indi- 
cations of  the  barometer  certain.  At  the  commencement,  the  southeily 
or  easterly  wind  will  probably  be  light,  with  fine  clear  weather;  but 
this  will  not  last  above  a  few  hours  if  the  barometer  continues  to  fall. 
On  the  contrary,  the  wind  will  gradually  increase,  and  as  it  does  so  the 
sky  will  become  overcast  by  degrees  until  it  is  completely  clouded. 
Eain  and  fog  will  follow,  and  continue  during  the  continuance  of  the 
southerly  or  easterly  wind,  with  little  intermission  until  they  are  dissi- 
pated by  a  fresh  breeze  from  a  contrary  quarter. 

If  the  fall  of  the  barometer,  during  the  continuance  of  the  southerly 
or  easterly  wind,  be  very  slow,  the  gale  wiU  probably  continue  and  not 
be  violent;  if  rapid,  it  will  probably  be  of  short  duration  and  of  greater 
strength ;  at  any  rate,  when  the  mercury  falls  toward  29  inches,  a 
change  is  certainly  at  hand  and  the  gale  will,  in  general,  come  from  tlie 
NW.  The  strength  of  this  succeeding  gale  will  be  in  proportion  to  the 
fall  of  the  barometer  and  to  the  strength  of  the  southerly  or  easterly 
gale  which  preceded  it.  In  such  a  case  there  is  seldom  many  hours* 
interval  between  the  one  gale  and  the  other.  The  southerly  or  easterly 
wind  generally  dies  away  to  a  calm,  and  in  a  very  few  hours,  and  some- 
times in  a  much  less  time,  the  NW.  gale  springs  up.  A  heavy  cross 
sea  remains  for  some  time  from  the  previous  gale. 

The  barometer  sometimes  begins  to  jise  in  the  interval  of  the  calm 
which  precedes  the  XW.  gale,  at  others,  at  its  commencement;  the  fog 
and  rain  cease,  and  the  weather  becomes  quite  clear,  generally  in  a  few 
hours,  and  sometimes  almost  immediately.  The  strength  of  the  west- 
erly gale  is  usually  greatest  soon  after  its  commencement,  and  dimin- 
ishes as  the  bai'ometer  rises,  veering  gradually  to  the  west  and  SW. 
It  is  worthy  of  remark  that  the  circumstances  just  mentioned  are 
exactly  the  reverse  of  those  attending  the  easterly  gale.  The  latter 
usually  commences  with  clear  weather  and  a  high  barometer,  light  at 
first  from  the  south  or  SE.  and  gradually  increasing  as  it  veers'  to  the 
eastward,  with  a  falling  barometer. 

To  return  to  the  westerly  galfe.  If,  after  it  has  veered  to  the  SW.  and 
become  moderate,  the  barometer  remains  steady  at  a  moderate  height, 
fine  weather  may  be  expected.  If  it  remains  at  a  considerable  height, 
but  still  fluctuating  and  unsteady,  within  certain  limits,  variable,  but 
not  heavy,  winds  and  variable  weather  may  be  expected.  If,  on  the 
contrary,  it  rises  quickly  to  a  great  height,  a  repetition  of  the  south- 
erly or  easterly  gale  will  not  be  improbable.  Seasons  have  been  ex- 
perienced in  which  the  barometer  may  be  said  to  have  been  no  sooner 


jipitation  of 
>red  aurora 
almost  cer- 
;h  distorted 
tivo  propoi'- 
it  double  or 
>bable  imli- 
le  soutbeily 
eather;  but 
Ques  to  fall, 
does  so  the 
ly  clouded, 
ance  of  the 
)y  are  dissi- 

le  southerly 
uie  and  not 
1  of  greater 
9  inches,  a 
ne  from  tlie 
rtion  to  the 
or  easterly 
aany  hours' 
■  or  easterly 
I,  and  some- 
tieavy  cross 

of  the  calm 
nt;  the  fog 
lly  in  a  few 
>f  the  west- 
and  dimin- 
it  and  SW. 
itioned  are 
The  latter 
;er,  light  at 
reers  to  the 

lie  SW.  and 
*ate  height, 
Me  height, 
iriable,  but 
If,  on  the 
^  the  south- 
ro  been  ex- 
I  no  sooner 


WINDS. 


11 


blown  up  by  one  wind  than  it  was  blown  down  by  another,  and  this 
stormy  alternation  to  have  continued  for  several  months,  whilst  in  others 
there  has  been  scarcely  a  double-reefed  topsail  breeze  during  the  whole 
summer. 

There  is  in  fact  so  great  a  difference  in  the  phenomena  of  the  weather 
in  different  seasons,  that  it  becomes  difficult  to  write  anything  respect- 
ing it  that  shall  not  be  liable  to  many  exceptions.  There  are,  however, 
some  strongly  marked  cases  of  connection  betwten  the  indications  of 
the  barometer  and  changes  of  tlie  winds  and  weather  wl.ich  have  been 
subject  to  few,  or  almost  no  exceptions.  The  flrst  of  these  cases  is  that 
most  common  one  of  a  southerly  or  an  easterly  gale,  with  a  falling 
barometer,  being  always  wet  and  foggy,  and  succeeded  by  a  strong 
wind  from  the  opposite  quarter,  with  a  rising  barometer,  and  fine 
weather. 

A  second  case  not  of  so  frequent  occurrence  in  commcm  seasons, 
excepting  in  spring  or  early  in  summer,  is  the  northeasterly  wind  with 
a  rising  barometer;  which,  although  it  may  not  bo  at  first  for  a  few 
hours,  will  almost  always  become  fine  and  clear,  and  end  in  fine  wea- 
ther. A  third  case  may  be  considered  certain:  Jf  the  barometer  fall 
suddenly  and  greatly  at  any  time,  a  northerly,  and  most  probably  a 
NW.  gale  of  great  strength  may  be  confidently  expected.  It  does  not 
follow  that  It  will  be  immediate,  for  it  may  be  preceded  by  a  strong  gale 
from  SW.  for  a  few  hours,  during  which  the  barometer  will  seldom  rise, 
and  even,  probably,  continue  to  fall;  but  when  the  SW.  gale  dies  away 
the  northerly  or  NW.  will  soon  succeed,  with  a  rising  barometer. 

In  conclusion  it  may  be  remarked  that  as,  on  the  one  hand,  a  con.sid- 
erable  fall  of  the  barometer  may  occur  without  being  folIowe«l  by  a 
strong  wind,  so,  on  the  other,  a  breeze  of  considerable  strength  may 
come  on  without  any  indication  from  the  barometer;  but  not  anything 
that  deserves  the  name  of  a  gale.    There  lias  never,  within  our  experi- 
ence, occurred  a  gale  so  heavy  as  to  be  of  serious  consequence  to  a  good 
vessel  the  approach  of  which  has  not  been  indicated  by  the  barometer. 
But  it  must  be  remembered  that  a  high  barometer  in  this  climate,  and 
under  the  circumstances  which  have  been  mentioned,  is  often  indicative 
of  a  southerly  or  an  easterly  gale.    It  is  remarkable  that  in  the  gulf 
and  estuary  of  the  St.  Lawrence  a  high  barometer  may  be  considered 
as  the  forerunner  of  wet  and  foggy  weather,  which  usually  accompanies 
Its  fall;  whilst  a  low  barometer  renders  it  equally  probable  that  dry 
weather  will  ensue,  since  it  as  often  accompanies  its  rise.    The  nmrine 
barometer,  therefore,  is  of  the  greatest  as-^istance  in  the  navigation  of 
the  gulf  and  river;  and  by  attending  constantly  to  its  state  and 
changes,  with  reference  to  the  winds  and  weather  which  preceded  them, 
combined  with  the  indications  afforded  by  the  appearance  of  the  sky, 
etc.,  those  changes  of  the  wind  and  weather  which  are  about  to  take 
place  may  be  anticipated  with  a  degree  of  certainty  sufficient,  in  most 
cases,  to  enable  a  vessel  to  avoid  being  caught  on  a  lee-shore  or  in  an 


12 


GULF   OF    8T.    LAWRENCE. 


unsaft}  anchorage,  as  well  as  to  regulate  her  course  in  anticipation  of 
the  coming  change. 

Currents. — In  the  main  entrance  of  the  gulf,  between  Newfound- 
land and  ('ai)e  Breton  Isliind,  a  current  is  very  often  found  setting  to 
the  southeastward  during  westerly  winds,  or  in  calm  weather;  but 
easterly  winds  retard  it  and  sometimes  cause  it  to  run  in  the  contrary 
direction.  It  is  frequently  deflected  to  the  southward  towards  Cape 
Breton  Island  by  northerly  winds.  But  winds,  both  present  .and  at  a 
distance,  act  so  powerfully  and  irregularly  on  the  rate  and  direction  of 
the  currents  and  tides  in  this  entrance  of  the  gulf,  as  to  render  it  diffi- 
cult to  say  anything  respecting  them  that  is  not  aubject  to  exceptions. 

Current  observations  conducted  during  August  and  September,  1894 
and  Irffto,  showed  that  between  Cape  North  and  St.  Paul  Island  the 
current  varied  in  direction  from  NNW.  to  NNE.,  and  ranged  in  velocity 
from  i^ft,  knot  to  2  knots  per  hour.  East  of  St.  Paul  Island  the  cur- 
rent showed  the  same  variation  in  direction,  but  the  velocitj'^  ranged 
from  1^1  knot  to  1  ,^f  knots.  Off  Cape  North  he  current  is  stated  to 
run  continuously  from  a  northwesterly  direction,  except  that  sometimes 
it  may  'be  checked  or  reversed  for  a  few  days  by  heavy  southeasterly 
winds.  The  current  is  no  stronger  in  the  spring  than  at  other  times. 
From  the  Magdalen  Islands  toward  Cape  North,  the  current  has  a  more 
tidal  character,  but  it  makes  to  the  southeastward.  When  sealing  in 
the  spring,  vessels  caught  in  the  ice  will  drift  southeastward  past 
Cape  North  and  sometimes  as  far  as  St.  IMerre  Island. 

According  to  information  as  to  13  trips,  dating  from  June  16  to  Octo- 
ber 17, 1895,  returned  by  the  steamers  plying  between  Montreal  and 
Sydney,  Cape  Breton,  the  current  between  Magdalen  Islands  and  Cape 
NortU  was  found  to  run  8  times  in  the  outward  direction,  from  NW., 
west,  or  SW.,  with  a  velocity  of  J  to  one  knot;  and  twice  from  SE.  or 
south  with  a  velocity  of  half  a  knot.  Also  three  times  there  was  no 
current  appreciable.  It  is  also  noted  that  in  the  vicinity  of  Cape  North 
during  easterly  winds  the  current  appears  to  divide;  and  to  the  west- 
ward of  that  cape  a  current  is  found  which  runs  from  NNE.,  as  if  it 
were  a  branch  from  the  main  current. 

In  the  region  between  Gasp(g  and  the  Magdalen  Islands,  the  elTect  of 
the  tide  from  Chaleur  Bay  was  felt  as  far  as  30  miles  out  from  Miscou 
Island  at  the  mouth  of  the  bay.  This  may  therefore  occasion  an  appar- 
ent cross  current  in  that  vicinity  at  times,  and  thus  account  for  some 
of  the  irregularities  there  met  with. 

On  the  south  coast  of  Newfoundland,  between  St.  Pierre  Island  and 
Cape  Kay,  the  current  makes  to  the  westward,  and  jjasses  around  Cape 
Eay  into  the  gulf.  This  was  found  to  be  the  case  at  the  stations  off 
Cape  Ray  where  observations  were  taken  during  1894  and  1895,  and  it 
is  also  shown  by  the  movement  of  icebergs  oft"  St.  Pierre  Island, 
which  make  westward  even  against  a  NW.  wind.  The  experience  of 
masters  of  vessels  and  of  flsherineu  frequenting  these  waters  confirms 


CURRENTS. 


m 


ipatiou  of 

rewfound- 
setting  to 
ther;  but 
3  contrary 
arils  Cape 
t  and  at  a 
irection  of 
ler  it  diffl- 
xceptions. 
mber,lS94 
Island  the 
in  velocity 
d  tbe  cur- 
ity  ranged 
stated  to 
sometimes 
itheasterly 
tber  times, 
has  a  more 
I  sealing  in 
;ward  past 

16  to  Octo- 
utreal  and 
3  and  Cape 
fropi  NW., 
om  SE.  or 
ere  was  no 
!ape  North 
}  the  west- 
E.,  as  if  it 

lie  effect  of 

»m  Miscoa 

an  appar- 

t  for  some 

sland  and 
ouud  Cape 
stations  off 
895,  and  it 
re  Island, 
lerieiice  of 
s  confirms 


the  result  of  the  observations,  and  goes  to  show  that  the  current  is 
distinctly  felt  for  a  width  of  8  or  10  miles  out,  and  that  it  must  often 
extend  considerably  farther,  as  it  sometimes  occupies  half  the  width  of 
Cabot  Strait. 

The  inward  current  past  Cape  Kay  is,  however,  not  constant.  There 
are  instances  of  sealing  schooners  in  the  ice  about  the  month  of  March, 
which  drifted  in  the  opposite  direction  past  Cape  Kay.  It  appears, 
however,  that  while  the  inward  current  prevails,  the  water  is  usually 
open  and  free  from  drift  ice,  as  it  remains  open  off  tlie  south  coast  of 
Newfoundland  throughout  the  Avinter  and  spring.  The  evidence  goes 
to  show  that  when  there  is  ice  in  the  oftlng  of  St.  Georges  Bay  and  off 
Cape  Kay,  it  comes  from  the  opposite  direction,  carried  by  the  general 
current  which  makes  across  the  gulf  from  Gaspe  toward  Cape  North, 
and  at  times  when  this  current,  or  a  branch  of  it,  is  driven  farther  to 
the  eastward  than  usual. 

The  ice  is  thus  brought  there  under  conditions  which  make  it  an  indi- 
cation of  the  disturbance  of  the  current,  as  otherwise  the  water  would 
remain  open.  This  disturbed  condition  is  also  accompanied  by  circling 
movements  in  the  ice.  A  schooner  in  the  ice  off  St.  George  Bay  has 
circled  around  for  several  days  between  Cape  St.  George  and  Cape  Kay 
without  passing  either  of  these  capes.  When  there  is  ice  in  this  local- 
ity, circling  movements  of  a  similar  kind  occur  also  in  Cabot  Strait 
itself,  which  indicate  an  outward  current  in  some  part  of  the  strait. 

It  is  not  clear  what  becomes  of  the  current  that  passes  in  at  Cape  Kay. 
As  a  rule  there  U  no  appreciable  current  off"  St.  George  Bay,  and  very 
little  from  Cape  St.  George  to  the  Bay  of  Islands.  We  can  not  thus 
trace  this  inflowing  water  as  an  actual  current,  but  it  is  probable  that 
it  makes  to  the  northeastward,  and  diffuses  itself  over  the  gulf,  because 
we  find  that  the  density  of  the  water  throughout  the  northeastern  por- 
tion of  the  gulf  is  the  same  as  in  the  open  Atlantic,  and  this  density 
could  not  be  so  maintained  M'ithout  some  inflow  of  this  character. 

Through  Strait  of  Belle  Isle. — There  has  been  a  widespread  impres- 
sion that  the  current  in  the  Strait  of  Belle  Isle  runs  constantly  inward, 
the  statement  being  generally  made  that  a  branch  of  the  Arctic  current 
flows  through  the  strait  into  the  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence,  and  again 
enters  the  Atlantic  iu  a  southeasterly  direction  between  Cape  Breton 
Island  and  Newfoundland. 

The  idea  of  a  constant  inward  flow  appears  to  be  based  on  the  drift 
of  icebergs,  and  as  they  are  most  usually  seen  drifting  inward,  it  has 
been  inferred  that  this  is  the  constant  direction  of  the  current.  The 
converse  of  this,  however,  is  much  nearer  the  truth,  and  it  may  be 
stated  in  general  that  when  icebergs  are  numerous  at  the  outer  end  of 
the  Strait  of  Belle  Isle,  and  are  also  found  within  the  strait,  this  indi- 
cates that  the  direction  of  the  current  has  been  predominantly  inward 
irom  the  east  during  the  days  previous,  while  the  absence  of  icebergs 
indicates  a  current  pred'^minantly  out  from  the  west.    This,  of  coarse, 


•i 


.-'  ..J.  !!-!U.W 


1wrrfriTftiitr^"Yh7VTiHTri''-"''''f^  •'■"'•'^  •'"■'■'" ''™"''''"'' 


31 


14 


GULF   OP  ST.    LAWRENCE. 


refers  to  the  preseuce  or  absence  in  the  strait  of  floating  bergs,  and  not 
to  bergs  which  may  be  aground  near  either  shore.  It  may  also  be  noted 
that  only  a  very  small  percentage  of  the  bergs  of  the  outer  end  of  the 
strait  ever  enter  it. 

A  recent  investigation  of  the  currents  of  this  region  by  theOanadian 
department  of  marine,  from  the  report  of  which  the  present  informa- 
tion has  been  compiled,  has  shown  that  the  current  in  the  Strait  of 
Belle  Isle  is  fundamentally  tidal.  The  best  com])arison  of  the  current 
with  the  tide  showed  a  complete  correspondence  between  the  two, 
especially  in  moderate  weather  and  during  the  prevalence  of  moderate 
Avesterly  winds.  On  such  occasions  there  were  several  days  during  the 
period  of  observation  when  the  current  ran  east  and  west  for  an  equal 
length  of  time  in  each  direction,  and  turned  regularly  with  the  rise  and 
fall  of  the  tide. 

During  the  period  of  greatest  regularity,  the  current  ran  inward  from 
the  east  during  the  rise  of  the  tide,  and  would  either  stop  at  high  water 
or  still  continue  to  run  inward  for  some  time  after.  The  greatest  length 
of  time  after  high  water  during  which  it  was  observed  to  run  inward 
was  2  hours  and  15  minutes.  The  current  then  turned  and  ran  outward 
from  the  west  during  the  fall  of  the  tide,  and  would  continue  in  that 
direction  for  a  length  of  time  after  low  water,  which  varied  from  40 
minutes  to  2  hours  and  55  minutes.  The  greatest  velocity  of  the  cur- 
rent in  either  direction  under  ordinary  conditions  of  tidal  regularity  did 
not  exceed  2  knots  per  hour. 

With  a  heavy  and  long-continued  wind,  the  current  would  first  run 
for  a  longer  time  with  it,  and  a  shorter  time  against  it,  and  would  even- 
tually run  continuously  in  the  same  direction  as  the  wind^  with  a  fluc- 
tuation in  velocity  corresponding  to  the  tide.  The  most  marked 
example  of  a  persistent  current  running  out  of  the  strait  occurred  from 
Monday,  July  16,  to  Thursday,  July  19.  During  these  3  days  the  cur- 
rent (as  observed  3  miles  oft'  the  north  shore),  ran  in  from  the  east  for 
only  5  hours,  and  out  fi'om  the  west  for  19  hours,  each  day.  The  maxi- 
mum velocity  of  the  current  fi:om  the  east  was  1^-  knots  per  hour; 
from  the  west,  2i^^  knots  per  hour.  The  best  example  of  a  persistent 
current  running  in  through  the  strait  from  the  east  occurred  from 
Wednesday,  September  5,  to  Saturday,  September  8.  All  the  indications 
concurred  in  showing  that  the  current  ran  continuously  in  the  one  direc- 
tion during  these  days,  although  the  observations  were  much  inter- 
rupted by  bad  weather.  The  observed  motion  of  the  icebergs  seen  in 
the  strait  at  this  time  agreed  with  the  regular  observations  in  showing 
that  the  current  ran  continuously  inward  from  the  eaat.  The  currerv 
then  varied  from  a  minimum  of  ^^  knot  per  hour  to  a  maximum  of 
3,J;fu  knots,  in  one  direction.  The  tides  themselves  were  anomalous, 
as  the  low  water  for  5  successive  tides  scarcely  fell  below  mean  sea 
level,  and  the  whole  rise  was  less  than  2  feet,  or  abput  half  the  usual 
amount. 


M<*-.ij|il\ 


<  I'lli  M-..-»M.lUUHt.J„j.g^^ 


i,  and  not 
t  be  noted 
nd  of  the 

Canadian 
;  intbrma- 

Strait  of 
le  current 

the  two, 

moderate 

luring  tlie 

'  an  equal 

te  rise  and 

ward  from 
tiigb  water 
%st  length 
un  inward 
in  outward 
lue  in  that 
id  from  40 
of  the  cur- 
ularitydid 

d  first  run 
rould  even- 
1th  a  ttuc- 
8t  marked 
urred  from 
ys  the  cur- 
ie east  for 
The  maxi- 
per  hour; 
>ersistent 
irred  from 
indications 
one  direo* 
inch  inter- 
'gs  seen  in 
in  showing 
he  currer'- 
ftximum  of 
momalous, 
mean  sea 
the  usual 


CURRENTS.  f(| 

The  gi'iieral  characteristics  of  the  current  may  be  set  down  as  follows: 

1.  The  current  is  fundamentally  tidal  in  its  nature,  and  under  normal 
conditions  it  runs  east  and  west  witli  velocities  which  are  nearly  e«iual. 
It  attains  at  times  a  velocity  of  2  knots  per  hour  in  each  din'ctir)n. 

2.  The  conditions  are  normal  in  moderate  weather  and  during  the 
prevalence  of  moderate  westerly  winds. 

3.  During  heavy  winds,  especially  when  easterly  or  westerly  in  direc- 
tion, the  current  whicih  runs  with  the  wind  becomes  stronger  than  the 
current  against  it,  and  eventually  the  current  may  come  to  be  contin- 
uous ill  the  same  direction  as  the  wind. 

4.  The  greatest  velocities  of  the  current  which  were  observed  during 
heavy  winds  (in  the  months  of  .Inly  and  September)  were  as  follows: 
From  the  east,  3-iV,t  knots;  from  the  west,  2i  knots  per  hour. 

In  reply  to  circulars  issued,  reports  have  been  received  from  the 
captains  of  transatlantic  steamships  of  the  leading  lines,  which  state 
the  direction  of  the  currents  met  with  on  oacli  trip  through  the  strait, 
between  Belle  Isle  and  its  western  end,  a  distance  of  about  75  miles. 
The  result  is  as  follows :  In  1895,  from  July  11  to  October  18,  only  8 
trips  were  reported.  Out  of  this  number,  a  current  set  outward  to  the 
east  3  times,  with  a  velocity  of  ^  knot  to  li  knots  per  hour  on  the  average 
during  the  whole  run  through  the  strait,  and  twice  there  was  no  cur- 
rent, or  it  was  partly  in  enrh  direction.  In  1896  there  were  twenty- 
six  trips  reported,  ■which  wme  made  between  June  27  and  October  30. 
Out  of  this  number,  the  current  set  outward  15  times  with  a  velocity  of 
4  to  2  knots  on  the  average  during  the  run;  it  set  inward  to  the  west  5 
times,  with  an  average  velocity  of  f  to  1.^  knots,  and  6  times  there  was 
either  no  current,  or  it  was  part  of  the  time  in  each  direction. 

Beports  have  also  been  received  from  the  captains  of  transatlantic 
steamers  with  regard  to  the  currents  encountered  on  the  run  between 
Heath  Point  and  Greenly  Island,  the  result  being  as  follows :  In  1895, 
from  July  il  to  October  18,  eight  trips  were  reported.  Of  this  number 
there  were  C  times  when  there  was  no  current  appreciable;  and  twice 
thecurrent  set  to  the  westward  with  the  velocityof  half  aknot.  In  1896, 
there  were  twenty-four  trips  reported,  which  were  made  between  July  5 
and  October  30.  Ten  times  there  was  no  current  appreciable ;  nine  times 
the  current  set  eastward  with  a  velocity  which  ranged  from  f^  to  i^^ 
knot  per  hour  on  the  average  during  the  above  run ;  five  times  the  cur- 
rent set  westward  with  a  velocity  which  ranged  from  -^o  to  to^o  knot. 

On  account  of  the  tidal  character  of  the  current  in  the  Strait  of  Belle 
Isle  it  is  clear  that  no  great  volume  of  water  can  enter  the  Gulf  of  St. 
Lawrence  from  that  quarter.  During  the  summer  season  the  current 
Hows  through  the  strait  in  both  directions  with  velocities  which  are 
nearly  equal,  and  there  is  only  a  difference  in  favor  of  inward  flow  from 
tbe  east,  which  on  the  whole  does  not  probably  amount  to  more  than  a 
moderate  percentage.  There  is  reason  to  believe  that  in  the  early 
spring  the  preponderance  of  flow  from  the  east  may  be  proiwrtionally 


I 
I 


4 


16 


GULP   OF   8T.    LAWRENCE. 


II 


fc'reater  tlian  at  other  seasoim.  There  is  some  evidence  to  show  that 
the  incoming  water  may  then  penetrate  the  gulf  as  far  as  Bonne  Bay 
on  the  west  coast  of  Newfonudland.  But  no  reasons  have  been  found 
for  supposmg  that  this  water  passes  completely  round  the  west  coast  of 
Newfoundland  and  finds  its  way  out  into  the  Atlantic  through  Cabot 
btrait,  between  Cape  North  and  Cape  Ray,  in  accordance  with  the 
theory  which  has  been  more  or  less  accepted  up  to  the  present  time 
The  water  in  the  Strait  of  Belle  Isle  is  exceedingly  clear.  It  is  also  very 
cold,  having  as  late  as  September  an  average  temperature  from  surface 
to  bottom  of  less  tiian  45o.  Its  density  is  as  high  as  that  of  any  water 
found  within  the  gulf,  being  on  an  average  1.0244  at  the  surface.  The 
water  in  Cabot  Strait  is  quite  diflerent  from  this  in  character  The 
outflowing  current  is  on  the  side  next  to  Cape  North,  or  the  farther 
side  from  Belle  Isle.  The  greater  part  of  the  width  of  the  strait  is 
occupied  by  water  having  the  usual  milky-greea  color  of  ordinary  sea 
water.  The  outflowing  current  has  also  a  distinctly  brown  tinge  Its 
Hnrface  temperature  ranges  from  55©  to  G5o,  and  its  average  density  to 
a  depth  ot  10  fathoms  from  the  surface  is  1.0230. 

There  is  not  only  this  difference  in  the  charactei-  of  the  water  in 
these  two  straits,  but  also  a  want  of  connection  between  them  The 
few  observations  obtained  along  the  west  coast  of  Newfoundland  show 
that  there  is  a  slight  current  from  the  SW.  It  is  also  stated  by  Lieu- 
tenant  Betty,  li.  N.,  navigating  lieutenant  of  H.  M.  S.  Pelican,  that  the 
current  between  Cape  Gregory  and  Eich  Point  runs  almost  constantly 
from  the  SW.,  and  is  only  intercepted  by  the  ebb  and  flood  tides 
running  in  and  out  of  the  larger  bays  on  the  coast. 

The  fishermen  on  this  coast  anchor  their  boats  as  much  as  10  or  12 
miles  otf  shore,  in  about  30  fathoms  of  water.  They  thus  have  an 
excellent  opportunity  of  observing  the  behavior  of  the  current.  It  will 
be  understood,  however,  that  their  information  refers  chiefly,  if  not 
entirely,  to  the  surface  current.  They  state  that  its  prevalent  direc- 
tion IS  to  the  ENE.,  parallel  to  the  shore;  it  wiU  run  constantly  in  that 
direction  3  or  4  days  together,  and  on  the  whole  it  has  that  direction 
for  rather  more  than  two-thirds  of  the  time.  For  12  to  20  hours  before 
the  arrival  of  a  southwesterly  gale  it  sets  more  strongly  in  its  usual 
direction,  and  before  a  northeasterly  gale  arrives  it  slacks;  although 
this  IS  not  so  certain  an  indication  of  wind,  as  it  may  also  slack  at 
other  times.  With  long-cou  tinned  easterly  winds  it  may  be  reversed 
in  direction.  It  may  also  set  directly  off  or  on  shore  for  3  or  4  hours 
or  even  longer.  .  ' 

The  ciurent  is  stronger  near  the  shore  and  weaker  farther  out,  as  it 
IS  found  that  a  schooner  going  westward  will  make  better  headway 
with  long  tacks;  but  if  going  eastward,  with  short  tacks  inshore. 

GASPli:  CURRENT. 

1.  The  usual  currents.— WhilQ  the  ordinary  weather  for  the  season  of 
the  year  prevails,  the  current  in  the  offing  of  the  Gasp6  Coast  runs 


ub>«i<*<iAi^ 


CURRENTS. 


17 


show  that 
}oi)uo  Bay, 
been  found 
est  coast  of 
>ugh  Cabot 
B  with  the 
Bseut  time, 
is  also  very 
'ODi  surface 
'  any  water 
:face.  The 
icter.  The 
the  farther 
le  strait  is 
fdinary  sea 
tinge.  Its 
)  density  to 

e  water  in 
hem.  The 
Hand  show 
3d  by  Lieu- 
en,  that  the 
constantly 
flood  tides 

as  10  or  12 
have  an 
It.  It  will 
efly,  if  not 
ent  direc- 
tly in  that 
direction 
turs  before 
its  usual 
although 
slack  at 
reversed 
)r  4  hours, 

out,  as  it 
headway 
lore. 


season  of 
oast  runs 


constantly  outward  from  the  NNW.  luul  north.  It  usually  occupies  a 
belt  about  V2  miles  in  width,  lying  from  13  to  1-1  miles  otV  shore,  in  the 
vicinity  of  Fame  Point.  This  belt  appears  to  become  narrower  and 
the  current  stronger  toward  (Jape  liosier,  and  between  it  and  the 
shore  there  is  a  tidal  current  in  both  directions.,  as  shown  on  the  Admi- 
ralty (Miart,  No.  1021.  [n  passing  Capo  (laspt';  it  keeps  closer  to  the 
shore,  cutting  off  the  inshore  tide,  and  its  <lirecti<>n  therefore  varies 
from  NNW.  to  NNE.  This  current  past  Cape  Gasp*'*  was  found  to 
be  constant  during  very  varying  conditions  of  the  current  elsewhere. 
Tbe  velocity  of  the  current  generally  ranges  from  one  to  2"  knots, 
the  highest  observed  being  2  ,\-  knots  per  hour. 

2.  Displacement  of  the  currrent. — The  main  current  from  the  NW., 
consisting  of  water  of  the  least  density  was  found  at  times  to  lie  in 
the  middle  of  the  papsage  between  the  Gasp<^  Coast  and  Anticosti,  and 
to  have  approximately  the  position  shown  by  the  line  along  the  middle 
of  the  passage  marked  "Constant  Current"  on  Admiralty  Charts  Nos. 
2516  and  1021.  When  the  current  is  in  this  position,  the  area  between 
it  and  the  Oasp6  Coast  may  be  occupied  by  weak  and  fluctuating  cur- 
rents or  even  by  a  reverse  current  setting  inward  from  the  8B.  This 
position  of  the  current  in  tbe  middle  of  the  passage  may  therefore  be 
regarded  as  a  displacement  of  the  current,  or  an  alternative  route  which 
it  may  take. 

3.  Reversal  of  the  current. — When  the  current  takes  this  route  along 
the  middle  of  the  passage,  there  may  be  a  reverse  current  running 
inward  from  the  SE.,  along  the  Gaspii  Coast.  Such  a  current  may 
occupy  a  belt  lying  between  2  and  12  miles  from  shore,  and  may  run 
constantly  from  the  SE.  for  as  much  as  6  days  with  a  velocity  which 
ranges  from  -^  to  ItV  knots  per  hour.  This  reverse  current  may  thus 
occupy  the  site  of  the  usual  outward  current  along  the  Gasp6  Coast, 
and  it  appears  to  be  caused  by  the  current  in  the  middle  of  the  passage 
circling  round  and  turning  back.  While  this  takes  place,  the  current 
past  Gape  Gasp6  still  runs  from  the  north,  and  its  direction  will  proba- 
bly be  a  little  east  of  north.  This  appears  to  be  a  branch  which  leaves 
the  main  current  at  the  bend  where  it  turns  back  to  form  the  current 
from  the  SE. 

4.  Off  and  on  shore  directions  of  the  current. — It  Is  possible  for  the 
current,  while  veering  in  direction,  to  set  directly  off  or  on  shore  for  a 
few  hours  at  a  time. 

5.  Tidal  influence. — When  the  current  runs  constantly  in  one  direc- 
tion, whatever  position  it  may  take,  and  whether  it  runs  with  its  usual 
outward  direction  or  is  reversed,  it  is  always  subject  to  a  fluctuation 
in  velocity  which  corresponds  with  the  tide.  When  the  current  has 
its  usual  direction  from  the  NW.,  or  outward  from  the  St.  Lawrence 
toward  the  gulf,  it  is  strongest  at  low  water,  but  when  the  current  runs 
inward  the  reverse  is  the  case. 

1161 a  '       * 


I 


"TT.I'Wr*- 


■  — 


18 


GULP  OP  ST.   LAWRENCE. 


6.  Return  flow. — It  is  evident  that  there  most  be  some  retnm  flow 
to  compensate  for  the  ontflowiiitc  water  of  the  Gaspi^  Current,  as  its 
vohune  is  more  tlian  6()  times  as  great  as  the  average  discharge  of 
the  8t.  Lawrence  River.  The  current  in  the  Mingan  Channel  is  a  tidal 
one,  in  botti  directions,  with  only  a  very  slight  difl'erence  of  How  in 
favor  of  the  inward  direction.  Also  the  deep  water  in  the  channel 
between  (iasp«'^  and  Anticosti  was  found  to  be  without  movement.  It 
would  therefore  appear  probable  that  the  return  flow  must  consist  of 
an  inward  movement  of  the  water  In  somo  part  of  the  width  of  the 
main  ch'annel,  and  perhaps,  usually  on  the  Anticosti  side,  and  that  this 
movement  occurs  either  at  the  surface  or  as  an  undercurrent  at  a 
moderate  depth. 

7.  Inftuente  of  the  wind. — It  appears  probable  that  the  <!hief  reason 
the  current  keeps  along  the  Caspi';  Coast  is  because  the  prevailing 
winds  (»n  the  lower  St.  Lawrence  are  toward  the  SB.  side.  Whei  *.he 
winds  are  also  northwesterly  in  the  GasiK'  Kegioii  they  assist  in  keep- 
ing the  current  along  that  shore,  and  tend  to  increase  its  speuU.  On 
the  other  hand,  the  current  appears  to  be  kept  away  from  the  coasi  and 
to  be  most  disturbed  when  the  winds  are  I'om  the  southward,  WSW., 
on  the  lower  St.  Lawrence,  and  at  the  same  time  south  or  SE.  in  the 
Gaspi''  Region.  The  winds  then  blow  in  upon  both  ends  of  the  water- 
way which  forms  the  entrance  to  the  St.  Lawrence,  and  they  have  an 
ofi'shore  direction  along  that  part  of  the  coast  which  uhe  Gasp^  Current 
asnally  follows.  The  winds  can  only  have  the  above  l^ections  in  these 
regions  when  a  low-pressure  area  or  storm  center  is  uraveMng  along  a 
course  which  lies  to  the  northward  of  the  St.  Lawrence  Valley.  This 
northern  course  for  an  area  of  low  pressure  is  less  frequent,  as  the 
usual  path  of  storms  lies  to  the  south  of  the  St.  Lawrence  Valley,  or 
along  the  Atlantic  seaboard.  The  conditions  above  indicated  are  there- 
fore unusual ;  and  if  the  displacement  and  the  reversal  of  the  Gar,p^ 
Current  are  dependent  upon  them,  it  is  clearly  correct  to  consider  these 
conditions  of  the  (;urrent  itself  as  exceptional. 

It  may  therefore  be  said,  in  general,  that  vessels  may  expect  to  And 
the  usual  outgoing  current  from  the  NW.  along  the  Gaspe  Coast, 
unless  they  have  reason  to'  infer  from  the  weather  they  meet  with  that 
a  low-pressure  area  or  storm  center  is  passing  to  the  iiorthward; 
accompanied  by  winds  which  are  southward  of  WSW.  along  the  lower 
St.  Lawrence,  and  strong  southerly  winds  with  a  falling  or  low  barom- 
eter at  the  entrance  to  the  St.  Lawrence  south  of  Anticosti.  The  con- 
dition of  the  current  will  then  be  disturbed,  and  it  may  lie  in  the  mid- 
dle of  the  passage  between  the  Gasp^  Coast  and  Anticosti;  wbile  a 
current  which  is  irregular,  or  possibly  inward  from  the  SE.,  may  be 
foand  in  the  offing  of  the  Gasp<J  Coast.  Vessels  making  inward,  espe- 
cially if  the  weather  is  foggy,  must  not  count  too  deflinitely,  however,  on 
the  absence  of  the  outward  current  as  an  assistance  in  roonding  the 


PILOTS — DraECTIONS. 


19 


some  retnm  flow 
}6  Current,  as  its 
rage  diHcIiarge  of 
Ohaiinel  is  a  tidal 
erence  of  flow  in 
sr  ill  tlie  channel 
ut  movement.  It 
w  must  consist  of 
the  widtli  of  tlie 
lide,  and  that  this 
ndercurrent  at  a 

the  <ihief  reason 
se  tlie  prevailing 
side.  Wher  *.he 
sy  assist  in  k^ricp- 
«e  its  specii.  On 
'om  the  coasi  and 
uthward,  WSW., 
utli  or  SB.  in  the 
ttds  of  the  water- 
uid  they  have  au 
le  Oasp^  Current 
■"ections  in  these 
rave'ing  along  a 
ce  Valley.    This 

frequent,  as  the 
Tence  Valley,  or 
iicated  are  there- 
lal  of  the  Crar.p^ 
-o  consider  these 

y  exjiect  to  find 
e  Gaspe  Coast, 
meet  with  that 
the  uorthward; 
along  the  lower 
g  or  low  barom- 
Bosti.  The  eon- 
^  lie  in  the  mid- 
ticosti;  while  a 
he  SE.,  may  be 
g  inward,  espe- 
sly,  however,  on 
u  rounding  the 


Gaspt'^  Coast  is  under  these  disturbed  conditions  there  an;  tin  .'s  when 
the  current  may  be  setting  more  or  less  on  shore. 

(The  above  information  is  ilerived  from  the  report  of  progress  of  the 
"Survey  of  Tides  and('urrents  in  Canadian  VVators.) 

Pilots. — Pilots  for  the  Ht.  Lawrence  cruise  in  their  schooners  in  the 
entrance  of  the  river,  and  during  the  day  these  vessels  cany  a  white 
and  red  flag  (upper  half  white,  lower  half  red);  by  night  one  white  li^ht 
on  the  middle  stay,  just  before  the  mainmast,  but  they  Ore  Hash  lights 
at  least  every  tpiarter  of  an  hour.  During  fogs  a  patent  bellows  horn  is 
sounded.  Their  cruising  ground  is  comprised  in  4  stations,  namely. 
Pilot  station  No.  1 ,  across  the  St.  Lawrence  in  a  northwesterly  direc- 
tion from  the  east  extreme  of  Bic  Lsland;  Pilot  station  No.  2,  in  the 
same  direction  from  the  west  extreme  of  Hie  Island ;  Pilot  station  No. 
3,  in  the  same  direction  from  Port  au  Pic,  about  8  or  !>  miles  westward 
of  Bic  Island;  Pilot  station  No.  4,  between  liazade  Islets  and  (Jreen 
Island.  A  yacht  is  kept  at  the  entrance  to  Saguenay  River  for  vessels 
wishing  to  ascend  that  river.  In  bad  weather,  with  fog  and  easterly 
winds,  the  westernmost  schooner  anchors  off  the  west  end  of  Green 
Island,  and  the  yacht  from  Saguenay  Ifiver  goes  to  Brandy  Pots,  where 
vessels  are  waited  for.  In  heavy  weather,  when  it  is  dangerous  to 
board  vessels,  signals  are  made  to  follow  the  pilot  schooners  to  leeward 
of  Bic  Island,  where  the  pilot  can  be  shipi>ed  in  smooth  water. 

General  Directions. — Full  Powered  Steamers  proceeding  to  the 
gulf  through  Cabot  Strait  in  the  spring,  should,  if  the  weather  be  clear, 
pass  near  enough  to  Galantry  Head,  St.  Pierre  Island,  to  obtain  infor- 
mation from  the  signal  station  as  to  the  state  of  the  ice;  or,  failing  this, 
seek  the  same  intelligence  either  iVom  Cape  Kay  with  northerly  winds, 
or  from  the  station  on  St.  Paul  Island  under  other  circumstances. 
After  the  ice  has  disappeared,  generally  about  the  end  of  May,  they 
should  keep  farther  off  Galantry  Head,  to  avoid  the  dense  fogs  that 
prevail  in  that  neighborhood  during  the  months  of  June  and  July,  and 
pay  due  regard  to  the  strong  current  that  occasionally  sets  into  the 
bays  on  the  soath  coast  of  Newfoundland.  A.lso,  during  the  same 
period,  it  is  better  to  be  near  St.  Paul  Island  than  Cape  Bay,  when 
passing  through  Cabot  Strait. 

Auxiliary  Powered  Steamers  should  follow  the  same  directions  as 
those  with  Aill  power. 

Sailing  Vessels  bound  to  any  of  the  ports  in  the  Gulf  of  St.  Law- 
rence should  endeavor  to  make  St.  Paul  Island,  which,  being  of  con- 
siderable elevation,  bold  all  round,  and  well  lighted,  may  be  safely  made 
at  night  or  in  daylight,  or  with  care  and  good  lookout, -be  steered  for 
even  in  fogs,  unless  they  are  very  thick. 

Caution. — In  approaching  St.  Paul  Island  from  the  SE.  with  northerly 
winds  the  current,  mentioned  as  at  times  coming  from  the  north- 
ward and  setting  toward  the  shore  of  Cape  Breton  Island,  should  be 


20 


GULF   OF   ST.    LAWRENCE. 


giinriled  apfninst  by  atteiHliiig  to  the  Hounding  on  the  bank,  which 
extends  about  2't  niiles  ott'  8(raturi  Island,  and  oil'  tlio  eastern  coast  of 
Cape  Ilreton  Island  as  far  northward  as  Ingonish;  beyond  whicit  tlie 
deptli  is  too  great  to  atl'ord  any  guidance.  Tlie  south  coast  of  New- 
foundland, eastward  of  Cape  Itay,  is  broken,  rocky,  and  dangerous. 
The  tidal  streams  being  intluoMced  by  the  winds  are  irregular,  while 
southerly  and  easterly  winds  bring  a  thick  fog,  which  is  njost  dense  near 
the  lee  shore.  On  these  accounts  the  coast  should  not  be  approached, 
excei)ting  with  a  decidedly  northerly  wind  an<l  clear  weather. 

St  Paul  to  Bird  Rocks  and  Magdalen  Islands.— Aftei!-  having 
passed  St.  Paul  Island,  vessels  bound  across  the  gulf  should  endeavor, 
if  the  weather  be  clear,  to  make  Bird  Hocks;  Creat  Hird  Hock,  the 
largest  or  southeasternmost,  bears  from  the  north  point  of  St.  Paul  N. 
48°  W.  (N.  21°  W.  mag.)  65  miles. 

In  thick  weather,  which  almost  always  accompanies  easterly  and 
southerly  winds,  the  bank  surrounding  Magdalen  Islands  is  an  excel- 
lent guide  up  to  Bird  Bocks,  but  under  such  circumstances  if  the  light 
cau  uot  be  seen  it  will  be  safer  to  run  along  the  northern  edge  of  the 
bank,  taking  care  not  to  come  into  less  than  40  fathoms,  than  to  attempt 
to  make  the  rocks.  When  well  past  them  by  the  reckoning  a  course 
cau  be  shaped  up  the  gulf. 

lu  northerly  winds  the  weather  is  usually  clear;  and,  if  the  vessel  be 
far  enough  to  windward,  it  will  be  advisable  to  stand  to  the  westward  and 
endeavor  to  make  Entry  Island,  taking  care  to  avoid  Doyle  Beef  and 
the  sandy  spitofi"  the  east  end  of  Magdalen  Islands  by  not  approaching 
the  islands  in  that  part  nearer  than  the  depth  of  20  fathoms.  Under 
the  lee  of  these  islands  a  smooth  sea  will  be  found,  sufficient  guidance 
by  the  soundings,  and  good  shelter  and  excellent  anchorage  in  Pleasant 
Bay. 

Another  advantage  of  following  this  course  arises  from  the  circum- 
stance that  the  winds  generally  veer  to  the  SW.;  so  that,  if  a  vessel 
has  passed  to  leeward  of  Magdalen  Islands  with  northerly  or  NW. 
winds  on  the  starboard  tack,  the  succeeding  SW.  wind  will  enable  her 
to  stand  on  the  opposite  tack  towards  Cape  Gasp^. 

Through  the  G-ut  of  Canso. — Proceeding  to  the  Gulf  of  St.  Law- 
rence through  the  Gut  of  Canso,  vessels  when  approaching  the  gulf 
have  to  cross  the  banks  which  lie  off  the  much  exposed  and  dangerous 
coast  of  Nova  Scotia.  Of  these  banks,  the  principal  in  extent  and 
most  important  in  position,  are  the  Banquereau  and  Sable  Banks,  the 
former  being  the  easternmost  of  what  may  be  correctly  designated  the 
Nova  Scotia,  Bank  8. 

Banquereau  Bank,  an  extensive  plateau  of  sand,  gravel,  and  shell, 
with  15  to  20  fathoms  water,  is  distinguished  from  contiguous  banks  by 
numerous  flat  sea  eggs  without  prickles,  which  are  found  on  the  bot- 
tom. It  extends  from  about  latitude  44°  30'  N.,  longitude  57°  20'  W., 
in  a  westerly  direction  about  120  miles  to  the  meridian  of  60<^  W.    This 


mm*' 


BANKS. 


21 


bank,  which 
stern  coast  of 
nd  which  the 
;oaHt  of  New- 
d  (langorous. 
regular,  while 
j»t  dense  near 
i  approached, 
ther. 

Aftei-  having 
mid  endeavor, 
ird  Hock,  the 
)f  St.  Paul  N. 

easterly  and 
Is  is  an  excel- 
ces  if  the  light 
rn  edge  of  the 
lan  to  attempt 
}ning  a  course 

f  the  vessel  be 
westward  and 
oyle  Beef  and 
►t  approaching 
horns.  Under 
jient  guidance 
,ge  Id  Pleasant 

m  the  circum- 

lat,  if  a  vessel 

lerly  or  NW. 

rill  enable  her 

f  of  St.  Law- 
shing  the  gulf 
ind  dangerous 
in  extent  and 
)le  Banks,  the 
lesignated  the 

rvel,  and  shell, 
uous  banks  by 
td  on  the  bot- 
de  57°  20'  W., 
60°  W.    This 


bank  is  Hcparated  from  Sr.  Piern;  Hunk  l)y  ;i  drep  Ktilly,  nearly  00  miles 
wide,  having  from  lioo  t<»  •>00  fatiioms,  muddy  bottom;  and  from  the 
east  edge  (if  Sable  Isliuirl  by  another  gully  of  deep  water,  9  miles  across 
its  narrowest  part. 

On  reftMTing  to  th»!  chart  it  will  be  seen  that  the  shoalest  part  of  the 
BanquiM-eau  Hank,  with  1')  fathoms,  in  latitude  4  P  .'t5'  N.,  and  longi- 
tude .17^ '>('  W.,  is  the  apex  of  a  ridge  (having  less  than  .'tO  fathoms' 
water),  about  40  miles  in  length  NH.and  HW.,  and  that  rehitively  with 
the  dangers  of  Sable  Island  it  is  not  only  a  safe  ottliig  for  vessels 
intending  to  pass  to  the  northward  of  tie  lai»l,  named  danger,  but  by 
k('ei)ing,  if  possible,  on  the  parellel  of  t'le  bank,  this  continuous  line 
of  comparatively  shoal  water  would  enable  a  vessel,  under  ordinary 
circumstances,  to  feel  her  way  with  some  degree  of  contldence,  until 
she  has  passed  to  the  westward  of  Sable  Island. 

Soundings  obtained  by  the  French  cruiser  Na'iade,  in  1894,  indicate 
that  Banquereau  Bank  extends  more  to  the  eastward  than  is  indicated 
on  the  charts.  This  vessel  obtained  a  sounding  of  40^  fathoms  in  lati- 
tude 44°  4;v  N.,  longitude  57"^  18'  15"  W.,  half  an  hour  before  not  bay 
ing  found  bottom  in  109  fathoms.  From  the  above  imsition  the  Na'iade 
stood  west  at  a  speed  of  6  to  6A  knots,  sounding  every  half  hour,  and 
obtained  soundings  of  32,  28A,  29,  244,  10,  20  and  20  fathoms. 

Misaine  and  Canso  Banks. — Misaine  Bank  lies  to  the  northward 
of  Banquereau  Bank,  between  the  latter  and  Scatari  Island,  and 
between  its  NW.  edge,  with  00  fathoms  water,  and  a  similar  depth  on 
the  outer  edge  on  a  bank  extending  from  the  shores  of  Cape  Breton 
Island,  there  is  a  deep  gully  20  miles  wide,  with  from  70  to  130  fathoms. 
The  least  water  yet  found  on  this  bank  is  30  fathoms,  the  general  depth 
being  more  than  40  fathoms,  with  a  bottom  of  stone  and  broken  shell. 
The  outline  of  the  bank  is  very  irregular;  its  eastern  limit  is  in  45° 
28'  N.,  longitude,  58°  10'  W.,  and  its  western  extremity  is  connected 
with  Canso  Bank  by  the  60-fathom  line. 

The  least  water  found  on  Canso  Bank  is  35  fathoms,  sandy  bottom; 
the  bank  is  separated  from  the  north  end  of  Middle  Ground  by  a  space 
of  deep  water  with  112  fathoms,  and  from  the  bank  extending  from 
Cape  Canso  by  a  narrow  deep-water  channel  with  84  fathoms. 

Artimon  Bank,  at  the  east  end  of  the  deep-water  gully  separating 
Misaine  Bank  from  Banquereau,  is  of  small  extent,  the  least  water  found 
being  37  fathoms,  over  a  bottom  of  stone  with  starfish  and  sea  eggs. 

Bird  Rocks  to  Anticosti  Island.— After  leaving  the  bank  of  sound- 
ings, northward  of  Bird  Rocks,  the  water  is  deep  until  near  the  shores 
of  Anticosti.  In  making  this  part  of  the  voyage  the  southerly  current 
should  be  considered,  and  the  lead  should  be  frequently  hove.  By 
consulting  the  chart,  it  will  be  seen  that  there  are  soundings  to  be 
obtained  nearly  all  the  way  upon,  and  to  southward  of,  a  line  joining 
Bird  Bocks  and  Cape  Gaspe,  while  a  few  miles  to  the  northward  of  that 
line  the  depth  is  200  fathoms. 


Jonii^i&Mlia^' 


n 


GULP  OF   ST.   LAWRENCE. 


With  a  fair  wind  make  Southwest  Point  of  Anticosti  which  is  marked 
by  a  revolving  white  light;  and,  with  westerly  winds  any  part  of  the 
coast  of  that  island  which  can  be  attained.  The  fixed  white  light  on 
Heath  Point,  at  the  east  end  of  that  island,  renders  it  easy  to  make  at 
night,  if  the  weather  be  clear;  and,  if  the  weather  be  thick,  the  bank 
of  soundings,  which  extends  23  miles  southeastward,  may  serve  to 
determine  the  vessel's  position  by  the  lead. 

Approaching  Anticosti,  especiallj'^  from  the  eastward,  soundings 
should  be  obtained  until  the  vessel's  position  has  been  accurately 
determined,  as  sometimes,  owing  to  peculiar  atmospheric  conditions, 
that  island  is  said  to  be  difficult  to  distinguish,  even  when  the  weather 
is  moderately  clear.  The  loss  of  the  steamers  Titania  and  Brooklyn 
was  as(;ribed  to  these  causes. 

Passage  North  of  Anticosti  Island. — In  the  event  of  making  East 
Cape,  or  the  light  on  Heath  Point,  with  a  SW.  wind,  it  will  often  be 
preferable  to  proceed  to  the  northward  of  the  island,  where  there  is  a 
good  channel,  rather  than  to  tack  arid  stand  back  to  the  southward  and 
eastward.  Under  the  lee  of  Anticosti,  a  vessel  will  have  a  smooth  sea 
and  often  clear  weather,  while  there  is  a  heavy  swell  and  frequently  a 
thick  fog  to  windward  of  it.  She  will,  moreover,  avoid  the  current  out 
of  the  St.  lawrence,  which  runs  constantly  with  westerly  winds 
between  the  south  coast  of  the  gulf  and  Anticosti;  and  thus  be  able  at 
all  times  to  make  way  to  the  westward  in  moderate  weather.  At  night, 
or  in  foggy  weather,  the  bank  of  soundings  off"  the  Labrador  Coast,  and 
farther  westward  the  bank  off  Mingan  Islands  will  safely  guide  her, 
even  although  the  land  should  not  be  visible,  as  from  !N^atashquan 
Point  to  St.  John  River  westward  of  Mingan  Islands  there  are  banks 
of  sand,  gravel,  broken  shell,  and  bits,  of  coral  extending  off  the  coast 
many  miles.  Southward  of  these  banks,  and  between  them  and  Anti- 
costi, there  is  a  deep  channel,  in  which,  with  the  exception  of  the  part 
northward  of  North  Point  of  Anticosti,  the  bottom  Is,  for  the  most 
part,  of  blue  mud.  Such  a  remarkable  difference  in  the  nature  of  the 
bottom,  as  well  as  in  the  depth  of  water,  renders  it  comparatively  easy 
to  take  a  vessel  through  this  channel  at  night,  or  in  foggy  weather. 
But  in  order  to  eft'ect  this  with  safety  the  vessel  should  be  furnished 
with  a  patent  sounding  machine,  which  must  be  freely  used  as  she  runs 
along  the  southern  edge  of  the  banks  of  saud,  gravel,  and  shell,  sheering 
occasionally  to  the  southward  into  the  deep  water  and  muddy  bottom, 
to  make  sure  of  not  getting  too  far  to  the  northward. 

The  dangers  of  this  channel  may  be  said  to  commence  with  the  reefs 
off  St.  Genevieve  and  Hunting  Islands,  on  approaching  which  from  the 
eastward,  the  chart  should  be  carefully  consulted,  for  they  are  very 
dangerous,  an'l  there  are  deep  soundings,  inside  the  outer  banks,  which 
might  lead  to  a  mistake  if  care  were  not  taken  to  keep  on  the  southern 
edge  of  the  outer  banks. 

To  pass  the  narrow  part  of  this  channel  safely  at  night  or  in  foggy 


«iff«inaMpi»' 


I 


DIRECTIONS. 


23 


;i  which  is  marked 
i  any  part  of  the 
id  white  light  on 
t  easy  to  make  at 
B  thick,  the  bank 
rd,  may  serve  to 

iward,  soundings 
been  accurately 
)heric  conditions, 
when  the  weather 
nia  and  Brooklyn 

it  of  making  East 
,  it  will  often  be 
where  there  is  a 
he  southward  and 
iave  a  smooth  sea 
1  and  frequently  a 
id  the  current  out 

westerly  winds 
nd  thus  be  able  at 
sather.  At  night, 
brador  Coast,  and 
safely  guide  her, 
rom  Natashquan 

there  are  banks 
ling  off  the  coast 
a  them  and  Anti- 
sption  of  the  part 
is,  for  the  most 
the  nature  of  the 
imparatively  easy 
"  foggy  weather, 
uld  be  furnished 
/  used  as  she  runs 
nd  shell,  sheering 
1  muddy  bottom, 

nee  with  the  reefs 
ag  which  from  the 
or  they  are  very 
liter  banks,  which 
p  on  the  southern 

night  or  in  foggy 


weather  it  is  necessary  that  the  lead  should  be  kept  constantly  going 
as  the  vessel  runs  along  the  southern  edge  of  the  bank  off  Miugan 
Islands,  and  she  should  not  be  allowed  to  go  to  the  northward  into  less 
than  30  fathoms  of  water. 

Should  westerly  winds  be  experienced,  the  weather  will  be  clear,  and 
the  Avhite  cliffs  on  the  north  side  of  Anticosti,  which  extend  from  the 
East  Cape  westward  to  opposite  St.  Genevieve  Ishuid,  will  easily  be 
seen.  In  clear  weather  a  vessel  may  stand  in  toward  the  north  coast 
of  Anticosti  to  within  one  or  2  miles,  as  with  the  exception  of  the  reefs 
off  Fox  Bay  it  is  bold  and  free  from  danger.  To  the  M-estward  of  West 
Cliff,  the  coast  is  low  and  shelving  and  reefs  extend  farther  off.  When 
standing  to  the  northward  the  soundings  on  the  banks  will  show  when 
to  tack. 

Currents.— It  has  been  remarked  already  that  in  westerly  winds 
there  is  a  weak  easterly  current,  but  it  is  not  constant  and  its  rate 
seldom  exceeds  half  a  knot.  Sometimes  it  is  imperceptible  during  the 
westerly  stream  and  runs  even  westerly  the  other  way,  on  the  approach 
of  easterly  winds.  On  arriving  off  North  Point  of  Anticosti  with  a 
west  or  SW.  wind,  this  current  will  almost  always  be  found  setting  to 
the  NE.,  being  turned  in  that  direction  by  the  west  end  of  the  island. 
Confined  M'ithin  a  comparatively  narrow  channel,  it  is  here  stronger 
than  elsewhere,  running  during  the  easterly  stream  abotit  one  knot,  and 
during  the  westerly  rtream  half  a  knot,  in  the  ofBng. 

Passage  South  i-"!  Anticosti — Vesscils  experiencing  westerly  winds 
in  the  south  channel  should  stand  over  toward  Anticosti  and  make 
boards,  off  and  on,  of  9  to  12  miles,  to  avoid  the  current  out  of  the  St. 
Lawrence.  In  beating  between  Cormorant  Point  and  South  Point,  off 
which,  at  the  distance  of  one  mile  from  the  shore,  there  is  a  rock  with 
16  feet  water,  keep  the  lighthouse  on  Heath  Point  open  of  Cormorant 
Point.  In  standing  inshore  at  night  in  the  neighborhood  of  Southwest 
Point,  do  not  bring  the  light  on  this  point  to  bear  westward  of  N.  50°  W. 
(K  23°  W.  mag.),  or  when  standing  inshore  to  the  westward  of  it, 
southward  of  S.  56°  E.  (S.  29°  W.  mag.). 

Caution. — In  moderate  weather  a  vessel  will  generally  gain  ground 
to  windward  all  along  the  south  coast  of  Anticosti,  but  care  should  be 
taken  to  avoid  being  becalmed  near  the  shore  between  Southwest  and 
West  Points,  where  both  the  swell  and  current  set  inshore,  and  where, 
the  bottom  being  of  clean  flat  limestone,  an  anchor  will  not  hold.  It  is 
by  no  means  uncommon  off  this  part  of  the  coast  for  the  fine- weather 
westerly  breeze  of  summer  to  die  away  suddenly  to  a  calm,  so  that  a 
vessel  should  stand  off  shore  on  the  first  appearance  of  a  decrease  of 
wind  to  avoid  being  driven  into  danger. 

Having  made  Southwest  Point,  and  being  4  or  6  miles  oft'  it,  with 
a  fair  wind,  a  course  should  be  steered  along  the  coast,  so  as  to  pass 
8  or  10  miles  southward  and  westward  of  Cape  Henry  and  West  Point. 
In  thick  weather  the  lead  should  be  hove  constantly,  and  a  depth 


t 

I 


i  ? 


24 


GULF   OP   ST.   LAWRENCE. 


of  40  fathoms  or  upward  maintained.  With  this  precaution,  there  is 
no  danger  of  being  too  near  the  coast,  even  when  the  lights  can  not 
be  seen,  since  there  are  depths  of  less  than  40  fathoms  at  a  distance 
varying  from  5  to  3  miles  oft"  shore  all  the  way  from  Southwest  Point 
to  the  west  end  of  the  island. 

Anticosti  to  Point  de  Monts. — An  inspection  of  the  chart  will 
show  that  there  are  depths  of  from  50  to  100  fathoms  from  the  western 
end  of  Anticosti  to  nearly  opposite  Seven  Islands,  whilst  to  the  south- 
ward the  depths  are  much  greater.  This  is  useful  in  ascertaining  the 
position  of  a  vessel  when  light  winds  and  fogs  prevail  for  several  days 
in  succession,  and  the  land  in  consequence  has  not  been  seen.  When 
the  vessel  has  arrived  off  the  West  Point  of  Anticosti,  with  a  fair  wind 
still  continuing,  a  course  should  be  steered  well  to  the  northward,  espe- 
cially with  northerly  winds,  say  for  about  Egg  Island.  She  will  thus 
avoid  the  strength  of  the  current  and  the  possibility  of  being  set  over 
too  near  the  south  shore  by  its  acting  on  her  starboard  bow.  When 
she  has  run  about  half  way  across  she  should  haul  more  to  the  south- 
ward so  as  to  insure  clearing  Point  de  Monts. 

Caution. — If  the  weather  be  thick,  as  it  commonly  is,  with  a  fair  wind 
for  running  up,  great  caution  is  necessary.  In  such  circumstances, 
after  having  run  within  about  15  miles  of  Point  de  Monts  by  the  reck- 
oning, sail  should  be  reduced,  so  as  to  have  the  vessel  under  complete 
command,  and  soundings  obtained  so  as  to  insure  that  she  is  not  to 
the  northeastward  of  the  point,  and  this  should  be  repeated  frequently 
until  the  light  be  seen,  the  fog  gun  heard,  or  until  it  is  certaiu  that  it 
is  passed. 

If  the  vessel  be  to  the  noitheastward  of  Trinity  Bay,  soundings 
will  be  obtained  in  less  than  GO  fathoms,  from  4  to  G  niles  off  shoie. 
Directly  off  Trinity  Bay,  there  is  the  same  depth  3  iiiles  off  shore; 
while  at  the  same  distance  off  Point  de  Monts,  there  h  no  bottom  at 
100  fathoms.  If  the  distance  to  Point  de  Monts  has  been  run  by  the 
reckoning  without  finding  bottom  at  70  fathoms,  it  will  be  almost 
certain  that  the  vessel  is  not  to  the  northward;  but  still,  as  the  effects 
of  currents  can  not  be  exactly  calculated  and  reckonings  are  liable 
to  error,  it  will  be  prudent  to  shape  a  course  well  to  the  southward  of 
the  point,  till  there  remains  no  doubt  of  its  having  been  passed. 

In  making  the  light  on  Point  de  Monts,  remember  that  it  is  not  on 
the  extremity  of  the  point,  but  has  been  placed  IJ  miles  to  the  north- 
eastward, along  the  coast  toward  Trinity  Bay. 

Point  de  Monts  may  be  approached  to  f  mile  with  safety,  but  not 
nearer  in  a  large  vessel,  to  avoid  the  dangers  off  that  point. 

The  foregoing  remarks  apply  where  the  object  is  to  make  the  light- 
house, or  light,  on  Point  de  Monts,  but  this  is  no  longer  absolutely  nec- 
essary, as  there  are  numerous  lighthouses  from  which  to  obtain  the 
vessel's  position. 

TVorking  to  Windiivard. — Vessels  beating  up  against  westerly 


'SBSSSST" 


DIRECTIONS. 


25 


ition,  there  is 

lights  can  not 

at  a  distance 

ithwest  Point 

:he  chart  will 
m  the  western 
t  to  the  south- 
icertaining  the 
ir  several  days 
I  seen.  When 
ith  a  fair  wind 
►rthward,  espe- 
She  will  thus 
being  set  over 
1  bow.  When 
*e  to  the  south- 

ith  a  fair  wind 
circumstances, 
its  by  the  reck- 
iinder  complete 
bt  she  is  not  to 
ated  frequently 
I  certain  that  it 

^ay,  soundings 

iiiles  off  shove. 

liles  off  shore; 
no  bottom  at 

leen  run  by  the 

will  be  almost 
as  the  effects 

ings  are  liable 
southward  of 
passed, 
lat  it  is  not  on 

ss  to  the  north- 
safety,  but  not 

tint. 

nake  the  light- 
absolutely  nec- 
to  obtain  tho 

aiust  westerly 


winds  should  stand  over  to  the  northward,  as  soon  as  they  can  weather 
Anticosti,  unless  the  baronetcr  or  uthei-  indications  render  it  probable 
that  the  wind  will  veer  to  the  southward.  During  the  tiiiod  tides, 
make  short  boards  off  and  on  the  north  coast,  to  take  advantage  of  it, 
for  it  runs  strongest  inshore.  During  the  ebb,  keep  farther  off  the 
land,  for  that  tide  also  runs  strongest  near  the  shore.  The  streams,  in 
general,  are  weak  along  this  coast,  and  a  vessel  will  always  make  way 
to  windward  in  moderat«  weAther. 

From  Seven  Islands  to  Point  de  Monts  is,  in  general,  the  easiest 
part  of  the  passage,  tor  the  westerly  wind,  which,  in  this  part,  is  the 
most  common,  is  off  the  land,  so  that  a  vessel  can  frequently  fettdi  up 
to  Point  de  Monts  in  smooth  water,  ])articularly  at  night,  when  the 
wind  in  fine  weather  generally  veers  a  point  or  two  to  the  northward. 
She  will  also  have  the  benefit  of  the  flood  tide,  whilst  the  ebb,  being 
turned  off  by  Point  de  Monts,  is  scarcely  felt. 

If  it  blows  fresh,  and  the  flood  be  nearly  done  on  arriving  near  Point 
de  Monts,  there  will  be  no  use  attempting  to  beat  round  it  till  next  tide, 
and  then  only  in  fine  weather.  In  this  case.  Trinity  Bay,  with  westerly 
winds,  is  a  good  anchorage  with  moderate  depth  of  water,  good  ground, 
and  plenty  of  room  to  get  under  way. 

Point  de  Monts  to  Bicquette  Island.— In  the  comparatively  nar- 
row estuary,  where  the  tides  and  currents  are  much  stronger,  and  more 
various  in  their  direction,  than  in  the  wider  parts  previously  treated  of, 
and  where  there  are  shoals  extending  on  the  north  side  several  miles 
oft'  the  shore,  a  good  look  out  and  constant  attention  to  the  soundings 
become  indispensably  necessary  at  night,  or  during  the  fogs,  which  are 
so  prevalent  and  embarrassing  in  this  locality. 

Tidal  Streams. — After  taking  a  departure  from  the  Point  de  Monts, 
the  course  to  be  steered  must  vary  under  different  circumstances  of 
wind  and  tide.  The  downward  stream  is  not  only  turned  oft'  to  the 
southward  by  Point  de  Monts,  but  Mauicouagau  and  Bersimis  Points 
also  produce  the  same  effect,  although  in  a  less  degree,  during  the  ebb 
stream ;  to  which  must  be  added  the  streams  out  of  the  large  Mani- 
couagan,  Ontarde,  and  Bersimis  Bivers.  During  the  flood  tide  the 
streams  out  of  these  rivers  cease,  the  general  stream  is  checked  in  the 
oflQng,  whilst  inshore,  within  a  few  miles  of  the  north  coast,  a  stream  of 
flood  will  be  found. 

A  vessel  taking  her  departure  ftom  Point  de  Monts,  with  a  whole  ebb 
tide  before  her,  is  therefore  very  differently  circumstanced  from  one 
which  does  the  same  at  the  commencement  of  the  flood,  and  must  reckon 
upon  being  set  over  toward  the  south  coast  much  faster  in  the  former 
than  in  the  latter  case. 

Directions  will  first  be  given  for  a  fair  wind,  and  afterwards  for  beat- 
ing winds. 

Directions  up  the  Estuary. — Having  made  the  light  on  Point  de 
Monts,  and  being  3  or  4  miles  oft'  it  to  the  southward,  with  the  usual 


•^w 


m^ 


26 


OULF   OP   ST.    LAWRENCE. 


easterly  winds,  nearly  or  right  up  the  estuary,  steer  S.  53°  W.  (S.  76° 
W.  mag.)  until  nearly  abreast  the  ^[anicouagan  Peninsula,  then  keep 
half  a  point  more  to  the  southward,  S.  47°  W.  (S.  70°  W.  mag,).  These 
are  safe  courses  with  either  ebb  or  flood,  and  if  the  vessel  has  left  Point 
de  Monts  at  or  near  the  commencement  of  the  ebb  tide,  will  usually 
bring  her  into  soundings  oif  Metis,  where  30  fathoms  over  sandy  bottom 
will  be  fonnd  3  miles  off  shore,  and  50  fathoms  5  miles  off  shore,  and  on 
the  edge  of  the  bank. 

If,  on  the  contrary,  the  vessel  has  left  Point  de  Monts  early  on  the 
flood,  she  will  probably  be  farther  to  the  northward ;  we  say  probably, 
because  the  strength  of  the  current  is  too  uncertain  to  allow  of  saying 
that  she  positively  will  be  so.  However,  the  degree  of  uncertainty 
which  the  irregular  rate  of  current  gives  rise  to  must  be  met  by  the 
use  of  the  lead.  If,  therefore,  the  weather  be  thick,  and  the  land  not 
seen,  round-to  in  time,  particularly  if  the  vessel  has  had  the  ebb  tide 
against  her,  and  get  a  cast  of  the  lead,  to  make  sure  that  she  has  not 
been  set  too  near  the  south  coast. 

If  no  bottom  be  found  at  60  fathoms,  the  S.  47°.  VV.  (8.  70°  W.  mag.) 
course  may  be  continued  until  the  vessel  is  up  as  high  as  Metis  by  the 
reckoning,  then  let  soundings  again  be  tried  for,  and  if  still  without  find- 
ing bottom,  haul  in  gradually  to  the  southward,  under  easy  sail,  and 
with  the  deep-sea  lead  going,  so  as  to  endeavor  to  strike  soundings  on 
the  bank  off  Father  Point,  which  may  be  accomplished  safely,  since  the 
bank  in  that  part  extends  several  miles  off  shore. 

To  Pass  Bicquette  Island. — The  revolving  light  on  IMcquette  Island 
will  now  be  distant  about  15  miles  to  the  SW.,  and  visible  in  clear  weather ; 
but  if  it  be  foggy,  and  the  light  not  seen,  proceed  as  follows,  attending 
to  the  fog  V:Ii;stlc:  Bun  along  the  northern  edge  of  the  bank  of  sound- 
ings, with  the  lead  going,  taking  particular  care  not  to  go  to  the  south- 
ward into  less  than  30  fathoms.  When  it  is  judged  that  the  vessel  is 
approaching  near  Bicquette,  having  passed  Barnabe  Island,  haul  out  a 
little  to  the  northward  until  she  is  out  of  soundings,  and  then  steer 
S.  54°  W.  (8. 75°  W.  mag.),  still  heaving  the  lead,  and  having  the  vessel 
under  moderate  sail  for  the  purfiose  of  getting  bottom,  still  certain  that 
she  is  well  above  the  Northwest  reef  of  Bicquette.  If  soundings  less 
than  30  fathoms  are  struck,  whilst  running  past  this  dangerous  island, 
on  which  many  vessels  have  been  wrecked,  the  vessel  must  be  hauled  off 
immediately  tu  tlie  northward  out  of  soundings,  and  then  steer  as  before. 
Two  miles  north  of  Bicquette  there  are  30  fathoms,  and  only  14  miles 
north  of  Northwest  Reef  there  is  the  same  depth,  with  sandy  bottom. 
Farther  off  no  bottom  will  be'  found  at  50  or  60  fathoms.  Both  the 
island  and  reef  are  bold  to  the  northward,  having  12  fathoms  close  to 
them. 

When  it  is  quite  certain  the  vessel  is  past  Bicquette  and  its  reefs, 
haul  in  to  the  southward  by  degrees,  till  the  edge  of  the  bank  is  gained 
again,  and  keep  it  up  to  Green  Island  Keef. 


J 


DIRECTIONS. 


n 


t 


3  W.  (S.  76° 
a,  then  keep 
ag.).  These 
as  left  Point 
will  usually 
andy  bottom 
shore,  and  on 

early  on  the 
lay  probably, 
ow  of  saying 
f  uncertainty 
)e  met  by  the 
the  laud  not 

I  the  ebb  tide 
it  she  has  not 

70°  W.  mag.) 
J  Metis  by  the 

II  without  find- 
easy  sail,  and 

3  soundings  on 
ifely,  since  the 

Icquette  Island 
clear  weather; 
ows,  attending 
bank  of  sound- 
po  to  the  south- 
It  the  vessel  is 
and, haul  out  a 
md  then  steer 
iviug  the  vessel 
till  certain  that 
soundings  less 
ngerous  island, 
ist  be  hauled  ofif 

steer  as  before, 
id  only  H  miles 

sandy  bottom, 
oms.  Both  the 
'athoms  close  to 

e  and  its  reefs, 
bank  is  gained 


Tt  would  not  be  prudent  for  vessels  without  a  pilot  to  attempt  run- 
ning inside  of  Bic  Island  in  foggy  weather,  unless  well  acquainted.  If, 
however,  it  be  necessary  to  do  so,  for  the  purjiose  of  anchoring,  the 
directions  for  that  locality  should  be  followed. 

From  Point  de  Monts  with  Southerly  Winds. — We  have  hitherto 
been  speaking  of  the  case  when  vessels  are  running  up  with  easterly 
winds  and  thick  weather;  but  a  second  case  is  when  the  wind  is  from 
the  southward;  then  a>  direct  course  H.  bO°  W.  (S.  73°  W.  mag.)  may  be 
steered  if  the  vessel  be,  as  before,  close  off  Point  de  Monts,  or  S.  ~>C)0 
W.  (S.  79°  W.  mag.)  if  she  be  nearer  the  south  coast;  allowing  still  for 
the  set  of  the  current  to  the  southward,  according  to  the  tide,  and 
sounding  in  time  if  the  land  be  not  in  sight.  Whenever  the  weather  is 
foggy,  and  the  land  can  not  be  seen,  the  object  should  always  be  to 
strike  the  bank  of  soundings  along  the  south  coast  about  Metis,  or 
Father  Point  at  farthest,  and  then  follow  it  as  a  guide  to  the  westward. 

With  Northerly  Winds. — A  third  ease,  of  fre(iuent  occurrence  in 
the  autumn,  is  when  there  is  a  fresh  northerly  wind.  The  weather  is 
then  invariably  clear,  an^,  as  the  land  can  be  seen,  there  is  no  danger 
of  getting  on  shore  with  a  good  look  out;  but  the  strength  of  the  cur- 
rent to  the  southward  is  increased  by  this  wind,  and  therefore  the 
vessel  must  be  kept  well  to  the  northward,  to  prevent  being  set  over  to 
the  lee  shore,  being  in  consequence  obliged  to  tack  (upon  the  wind 
veering  a  point  or  two  to  the  westward)  and  stand  all  the  way  back 
again. 

Supposing  the  vessel  to  be  in  the  same  position  as  before,  3  or  4  miles 
to  the  southward  of  Point  de  Monts,  she  may  steer  S.  05°  W.  (S.  88° 
W.  mag.)  for  the  first  20  miles,  or  as  long  as  the  light  is  seen.  Take  the 
bearing  of  the  light  frequently,  and  lay  it  down  on  the  chart,  in  order 
that  the  efiect  of  the  current  may  be  seen;  take  care  not  to  bring  the 
light  to  bear  to  the  eastward  of  2f.  53°  E.  (N.  76°  E.  mag.),  as  in  that 
case  the  vessel  would  be  set  too  near  Manicouagan  Shoals.  Abreast 
Manicouagan,  get  a  cast  of  the  lead,  for  although  these  shoals  are 
steep  to  on  their  east  side,  and  also  to  the  westward  of  Manicouagan 
Point,  yet  there  are  soundings  off  their  south  point. 

When  past  these  dangerous  and  extensive  shoals,  the  south  point  of 
which  extends  2^  miles  off  a  low  point  of  the  same  name,  which  can 
seldom  be  clearly  distinguished  at  night  in  consequence  of  the  higher 
land  behind  it,  a  vessel  may  haul  up  well  under  the  north  shore,  coming 
no  nearer  than  3  miles,  and  taking  care  to  avoid  the  shoal  off  Bersimis 
point,  which  extends  nearly  1 J  miles  off  a  low  poitit,  also  difficult  to  be 
seen  at  night. 

Working  from  Point  de  Monts  to  Green  Island,  against  westerly 
winds,  which  are  almost  always  accompanied  with  clear  weather,  there 
is  little  difficulty,  with  the  assistance  of  the  charts,  other  than  that 
which  arises  from  the  set  of  the  tides  and  currents. 

It  requires  a  tolerably  smart  sailing  vessel  and  a  flood  tide  to  beat 


:*'ii-«iatj^:£-;it-t:i^  m 


28 


OULB'    OF    ST.    LAWRENCE. 


past  Point  de  Monts  against  a  foul  Aviud,  but  sbort  boards  round  tbe 
point  and  along  tbe  nortb  coast  up  to  Cape  St.  Nicbolas  will  most  read- 
ily succeed.  It  is  not,  bowever,  advisable  to  keep  tbis  sbore  close  aboard 
nnicb  fiirther  to  tbe  westward,  lest  tbe  wind  sbould  fall  to  a  calm,  for 
tbere  is  a  strong  indraugbt  toward  tbe  uioutb  of  Mauicouagan  Kiver 
during  tbe  flood  tide;  and  if  an  easterly  wind  sbould  cbance  to  spring 
up,  after  tbe  vessel  bad  been  drifted  in  near  tbe  moutb  of  Euglisb  Bay, 
it  might  be  difficult  to  beat  out,  or  to  weatber  the  eastern  side  of  tbe 
Manicouagan  Hboals.  The  light  on  Point  de  Monts  can  not  be  seen  on 
any  bearing  to  tbe  southward  of  N.  70°  E.  (S.  87°  E.  mag.),  being  inter- 
cepted by  tbe  high  land  to  tbe  westward  of  it;  and  when  it  appears,  a 
vessel  off  Godbout  River  will  be  only  one  mile  from  tbe  bar,  or  off  Cape 
St.  Nicbolas  little  more  tbau  2  miles  off  shore;  so  that  it  is  a  safe  rule, 
in  standing  in  toward  tbe  coast  at  night,  to  tack  as  soon  as  tbe  light 
bears  N.  60°  E.  (N.  83°  E.  mag.). 

When  the  ebb  makes,  stretch  over  to  the  southward  into  tbe  middle 
of  the  estuary,  where  that  tide  is  less  strong  than  near  either  sbore, 
but  do  not  go  farther  to  the  southward,  and  be  back  again  at  the  north 
coast  at  the  return  of  flood. 

The  best  time  to  get  past  Point  de  Monts,  when  fine  weather  and 
westerly  winds  prevail,  is  at  night,  or  in  the  flrst  hours  of  tbe  morning, 
for  then  vessels  are  often  assisted  by  a  northerly  land  wind.  If  it  has 
blown  fresh  from  the  westward  during  tbe  preceding  day  a  heavy  bead 
sea  may  be  expected  oft'  the  pitch  of  tbe  point;  the  flood  from  along  the 
land  in  the  direction  of  tbe  Seven  Islands  meeting  tbe  downward  cur- 
rent off  tbe  point  assists  in  causing  tbis. 

If,  after  passing  Point  de  Monts  in  the  morning,  with  a  northerly  land 
wind,  there  are  signs  of  its  dying  away,  or  veering  to  the  westward  as 
tbe  day  advances,  continue  tbe  board  to  the  southward  and  westward, 
instead  of  tacking  to  keep  the  north  land  on  board,  as  directed  when 
the  wind  is  settled  right  down ;  for  the  land  wind  of  the  night  wili 
probably  be  succeeded  by  tbe  fine-weather  day  wind,  which  usually 
becomes  a  steady  breeze  about  9  a.  ni.,  after  commencing  at  SW., 
and  thus  affords  an  advantageous  board  toward  the  north  coast. 

In  the  fine  weather  of  tbe  summer  the  wind  will  probably  veer  by 
degrees  during  tbe  day  back  to  west,  thus  offering  another  good  board 
to  tbe  southwestward.  Pilots  and  others  who  are  experienced  in  read- 
ing the  indications  of  the  winds  and  weatber  frequently  gain  more 
ground  to  the  westward  by  calculating  upon  these  probable  changes  of 
the  wind  than  by  keeping  on  the  north  shore  out  of  tbe  current. 

With  tbe  exception  of  the  low  points  of  Manicouagan,  Bersiniis,  and 
Mille  Vacbes,  tbe  land  can  in  general  be  plainly  seen  at  night  during 
tbe  continuance  of  westerly  winds;  and  where  its  features  are  suffi- 
ciently remarkable,  there  will  be  Tittle  difficulty  in  making  it  out. 
Mount  Camille  especially,  being  an  isolated  mountain  2,036  feet  above 
high-water  mark,  can  easily  be  distinguished,  as  \vell  as  tbe  summit  of 


! 


DIRECTIONS. 


29 


I  rouud  the 
most  read- 
lose  aboard 
a  calui,  for 
ngan  Kiver 
36  to  spring 
uglish  Bay, 
side  of  the 
t  be  seen  on 
being  inter-     ' 
t  appears,  a 
,  or  off  Cape 
I  a  safe  rule, 
as  the  light 

9  the  middle 
sither  shore, 
at  the  north 

iveather  and 
the  morning, 
d.  If  it  has 
I  heavy  head 
Dm  along  the 
wnward  cur- 

)rtherly  land 
(westward  as 
id  westward, 
rected  when 
le  night  wili 
hich  usually 
ling  at  SW., 
coast. 

ably  veer  by 
r  good  board 
need  in  read- 
gain  more 
e  changes  of 
rrent. 

iersiniis,  and 
tiight  during 
res  are  suffl- 
king  it  out. 
J6  feet  above 
le  summit  of 


the  high  land  of  Bic,  1,236  feet  high.  Their  bearings  will  often  be  of 
great  service  to  vessels  on  clear  nights,  and  will  show  when  they  are 
high  enough  up  to  fetch  Father  Point. 

On  arriving  oft"  Father  Point,  or  any  where  between  it  and  Bic,  if  the 
flood  be  done  and  the  wind  be  light  it  will  be  better  to  anclkor  on  the  bank 
of  soundings,  weighing  again,  if  there  be  a  breeze,  in  sntlicient  time  to 
stand  over  and  meet  the  first  of  tlie  flood  on  the  north  shore.  By  this 
mode  of  proceeding  vessels  will  gain  much  more  ground  to  the  west- 
ward than  by  remaining  on  the  south  shore,  for  although  there  be  a 
weak  stre.tm  of  flood  upon  the  bank  of  sound  in ;;s  from  Father  Point  to 
Bic  Island,  yet  there  is  little  above  that  island,  and  none  after  the 
first  quarter  flood,  excepting  so  close  inshore  as  to  be  useless  to  large 
vessels 

From  Mille  Vaches  Bay  to  within  3  miles  of  the  entrance  of  the 
Saguenivy  Biver,  with  the  exception  of  a  shoal  extending  a  short  dis- 
tance off'  shore  from  the  bay  next  westward  of  Cape  Bondesir,  the  coast 
is  moderately  high  and  very  bold,  the  flood  strong,  and  the  ebb  com- 
paratively weak.  Vessels  should,  therefore,  make  short  boards  along 
this  shore  until  up  to  Bergeron  Coves,  and  then  stretch  over  to  the 
anchorage  under  Green  Island  Reef,  to  wait  for  the  next  flood ;  for  it 
will  require  a  whole  tide,  even  with  a  good  working  breeze  and  a  fair 
sailing  vessel,  to  beat  through  between  Green  Island  and  Bed  Islet,  and 
reach  good  anchorage  above  before  the  ebb  makes. 

Red  Islet  Bank  is,  however,  very  dangerous,  and  the  first  of  the 
flood  sets  strongly  over  it  in  a  direction  from  Bergeron  Coves  toward 
Green  Island.  The  ebb  out  of  the  Sagnenay  also  sets  upon  it,  so  that 
a  stranger  should  not  make  too  free  with  it.  If  a  vessel  can  not  fetch 
the  anchorage  under  Green  Island  Reef  she  may  anchor  anywhere,  in 
fine  weather,  along  the  south  bank  between  Bic  and  Green  Islands,  and 
will  have  good  ground  in  12  fathoms  at  low  water  and  plenty  of  room 
to  get  under  way. 

In  coming  up  with  a  NW.  wind,  the  north  shore  should  be  kept  close 
aboard  until  up  to  Bergeron,  and  if  it  be  flood  tide  the  vessel  may  pass 
either  northward  or  southward  of  Red  Islet,  as  may  be  preferred,  but 
the  former  passage  should  not  bo  attempted  with  this  wind  during  the 
ebb,  nor  yet  the  other,  except  by  those  who  are  well  acquainted  with 
the  set  of  the  tides. 

Although  the  passage  to  the  nothward  of  Red  Islet  is  the  quickest, 
there  being  a  much  stronger  stream  of  flood  in  that  channel,  yet  it  can 
pot  by  any  means  be  recommended ;  on  the  contrary,  it  should  never 
be  attempted  unless  the  breeze  appears  certain  to  continue,  for  if  it  fell 
calm  the  vessel  would  run  great  risk  of  being  drawn  in  by  the  stream 
of  flood  among  the  dangerous  shoals  off  the  mouth  of  the  Saguenay,  or 
being  set  down  upon  Red  Islet  Bank  when  the  rapid  ebb  made  ont  of 
that  river,  which  is  so  strong  and  the  water  so  deep  that  no  anchor 
would  hold. 


30 


GULF   OF   ST.   LAWRENCE. 


ii 


To  pass  to  the  southward  of  lied  Islet  with  the  same  wind,  haul  roniid 
the  east  end  of  the  reef,  and  a.s  close  to  the  southward  of  it  as  is  jirudeut, 
coming  no  nearer  tliau  a  depth  of  20  fathoms  until  past  the  islet.  To 
those  who  are  well  acquainted  both  with  tlie  soundings  and  set  of  the 
tides  it  may  be  desirable  to  keep  closer  in  attempting  the  passage  with 
an  ebb  tide,  but  it  can  not  be  recommended  to  strangers. 

Directions  down  the  Estuary  and  Gulf— For  the  return  voyage 
down  the  estuary  and  gulf  little  or  no  instruction  seems  necessary  as 
long  as  the  wind  remaiiLS  fair  and  the  weather  clear,  beyond  what  may 
be  gathered  from  the  charts  and  the  preceding  remarks.  But  where 
vessels  are  met  by  easterly  winds  and  thick  weather  anywhere  above 
Point  de  Monts,  great  caution,  attention  to  the  soundings,  and  set  of  the 
tides  and  currents  become  necessary  to  insure  safety,  particularly 
during  the  long  nights  and  wild  weather  in  the  fall  of  the  year. 

Vessels  iiroceeding  down  the  St.  Lawrence,  after  they  have  passed 
Green  Island,  finding  that  the  fair  wind  fails  Jind  they  are  met  with  an 
easterly  wind  before  they  have  arrived  near  Bic  Island,  should,  in  that 
case,  run  up  to  Brandy  Pots,  especially  if  late,  or  very  early  in  the  navi 
gable  season.  But  if  they  have  reached  far  enough  down  at  the  com- 
mencement of  the  adverse  wind,  Bic  Island  affords  good  shelter  and 
anchorage,  which  should  be  sought  in  time,  before  tlie  fog  commences. 

There  is  no  other  anchorage  which  can  be  recommended  lower  down 
nearer  than  Seven  Islands,  and  after  that  Gasp6. 

In  a  vessel  beating  down,  the  south  bank  should  be  the  guide  in  thick 
weather  or  at  night.  She  should  tack  from  it,  after  striking  soundings 
on  its  edge,  and  should  not  stand  to  the  northward  more  than  half- 
channel  over  in  any  part,  to  keep  in  the  strength  of  the  downward 
stream,  and  avoid  the  possibility  of  accident  from  the  shoals  of  the 
north  coast. 

Effects  of  Tides. — It  will  be  almost  always  seen,  when  the  vessel 
comes  upon  the  south  bank  of  soundings,  by  there  being  so  much  less 
sea  there  than  in  the  deep  water,  and  strength  of  the  weather  current, 
outside;  a  strong  ripple  will  be  observed  at  the  edge  of  the  bank  dur- 
ing the  flood  tide. 

In  the  board  from  near  Bicquette,  during  the  flood  tide,  the  vessel 
will  go  to  the  northward  rather  faster  than  to  the  southward  back 
again,  whilst  in  the  ebb  the  contrary  will  be  the  case.  But  above 
Bazade  Islets  she  will  go  much  faster  to  the  southward  than  to  the 
northward  in  both  tides.  Lower  down  the  estuary,  and  as  far  down  as 
Gape  St.  Anne,  she  Avill  generally  go  faster  to  the  southward  than  to 
the  northward  during  the  ebb  tide;  whilst  in  the  flood  an  indraught 
into  the  rivers  will  be  felt  on  approaching  near  the  north  coast  from 
Bersimis  Point  nearly  down  to  Cape  St.  Nicholas.  The  least  reflection 
upon  what  has  been  previously  said  of  the  set  of  the  lides  and  cr.rreuts 
will  account  for  these  effects. 

Caution. — In  a  vessel  beating  down  in  a  dark  night  or  thick  weather 


mm 


DIRECTIONS. 


•I 


tl,  haul  ronnd 
AS  is  i>rudeut, 
he  islet.  To 
ind  set  of  the 
passage  with 

Btuni  voyage 
necessary  as 
lid  what  may 
.  But  where 
irwhere  above 
aud  set  of  the 
,  particularly 
i  year. 

have  passed 
e  met  with  an 
bould,  ill  that 
ly  in  the  iiavi- 
n  at  the  coui- 
d  shelter  and 
g  commences, 
d  lower  down 

^uide  in  thick 
ing  soundings 
)re  than  half- 
he  downward 
shoals  of  the 

en  the  vessel 

so  much  less 

aether  current, 

he  bank  dur- 

de,  the  vessel 
ithward  back 
I.  But  above 
1  than  to  the 
IS  far  down  as 
iward  than  to 
an  indraught 
uh  coast  from 
east  reflection 
»  aud  currents 

thick  weather 


there  is  no  safety  unless  the  lead  be  kept  constantly  going;  when  she  is 
approaching  the  south  coast,  in  the  board  'o  the  southward,  sail  should 
be  sufficiently  reduced  for  soundings  to  im  easily  obtained  and  evoiy- 
thing  in  readiness  to  tack  or  veer  at  the  shortest  notice.  These  pre- 
cautions become  the  more  necessary  as  tlie  vessel  descends  the  estuary 
and  the  bank  of  soundings  becomes  narrower.  Off  Mataiie  there  -ire 
30  fathoms,  sandy  bottom,  IS  miles  off  shore,  and  00  fathoms  ut  .$  miles 
oft,  whilst  at  the  distance  of  T.  miles  from  the  land  no  bottom  will  be 
found  at  100  fathoms.  The  south  bank  b  comes  narrower  still  to  the 
eastward  of  Matane,  and  ceases,  in  consequence,  to  be  of  use  to  vessels 
Oft  Cape  Chatte  there  are  30  fathoms  water  little  more  than  .\  mile 
from  the  shore;  a  short  distance  farther  oft"  there  are  no  soundin'jr.s  .,t 
70  fathoms;  and  between  it  and  the  Point  de  Monts,  from  150  to  170 
fathoms,  blue-mud  bottom. 

Below  Point  de  Monts  there  is  plenty  of  sea  room,  and  although 
the  lead  will  there  be  of  little  use,  yet  the  south  coast  is  so  high  and 
boldthatitmay  generally  be  seen,  if  the  fog  be  no  thicker  than  is  usual 
with  a  regular  easterly  wind  up  the  St.  Lawrence. 

Lower  down  still,  with  a  beating  wind  and  thick  weather,  soundings 
may  be  struck  off  the  west  end  of  Anticosti,  or  between  the  West  and 
Southwest  Points  of  that  island,  if  it  be  wisheil  to  ascertain  how  far 
the  vessel  is  over  to  the  northward  before  night.  Eastward  of  South- 
west  Point  to  Pavilion  Eiver  the  bank  of  soundings  off  the  south  side 
of  the  island  is  very  narrow;  but  from  the  latter  to  the  East  Point 
there  18  plenty  of  warning  by  the  deep-sea  lead,  as  will  be  seen  bv  the 
soundings  in  the  chart. 

The  channel  northward  of  Anticosti  can  not  be  recommended  in  the 
voyage  down  the  St.  Lawrence,  because  there  is  not  only  less  room 
but  also  less  current  in  favor;  neither  the  route  by  the  Strait  of  Belle 
Isle,  on  account  of  the  straggling  icebergs,  which  are  in  general  to  be 
met  with  there  through  all  the  navigable  season.  Toward  the  fall  of 
the  year,  however,  vessels  occasionally  pass  through  it,  in  anticipation 
of  the  northerly  winds  which  prevail  at  that  season  in  the  Atlantic 

The  foregoing  general  directions  have  purposely  not  been  interrupted 
by  particular  descriptions  of  the  coasts,  or  places,  alluded  to ;  the  latter 
together  with  direct.oPs  for  the  harbors,  anchorages,  and  dangers,  will 
be  found  in  the  following  chapters. 


-'^AiA^iA;Si»B5*ijflStai»*iiaGaf'-- ' 


.p 


Sii'riSa);  '.■i'^v.»'»r  - 


CMIAVTER    IT. 

ISLANDS  IN  THE  (UILF  OF  8T.  LAWRENCE. 
(H.  O.  Chart  No.  611.) 

St  Paul  Island,  lying  in  Oabot  Strait,  tlio  main  entrance  to  the 
Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence,  between  the  8W.  extreme  of  NewfonudlanO  and 
the  north  extreme  of  CaiKi  Breton  Island,  is  composed  of  primary  rocks, 
principally  mica  slate,  dipping  at  an  angle  of  not  less  than  4")  degrees 
to  the  southward.  It  is  nearly  3  miles  long,  by  one  mile  broad.  Its 
NE.  point  is  a  smajl  detached  islet  (although  it  does  not  appear  as  such 
from  the  sea),  separated  by  a  very  narrow  channel  from  a  peninsula, 
between  .'WO  and  400  feet  high,  which,  together  with  the  isthmus,  is  so 
precipitous  as  tt>  be  nearly  inaccessible.  The  remaining  greater  part 
of  the  island,  which  is  also  steep  and  precipitous  toward  the  sea,  has 
two  parallel  ranges  of  hills,  that  on  the  eastern  coast  being  the  higher 
and  attaining  an  elevation  of  500  feet. 

A  valley  runs  through  between  these  hills,  having  two  small  lakes  or 
ponds  200  or  300  feet  above  the  sea.  These  supply  the  principal  stream 
on  the  island,  which  is  about  2  yards  wide,  of  yellowish  brown  water, 
well-tasted  and  wholesome,  and  descending  into  the  sea  in  the  southern 
part  of  Trinity  Cove.  There  are  several  other,  but  much  smaller,  runs 
of  water,  one  of  which  is  into  Atlantic  Cove.  These  two  coves  are 
nearly  one  mile  from  the  SW.  extremity  of  the  island,  the  first  being 
on  the  gulf  side  and  the  other  on  that  which  is  toward  the  Atlantic, 
as  its  name  implies.  They  aflord  the  only  shelter  for  boats,  and  the 
only  good  landing  on  the  island  which  is  easier  of  ascent  ftom  them 
than  at  any  other  part. 

The  islancl,  is  partially  wooded  with  dwarf  and  scrubby  spmce  trees, 
useless,  excepting  for  fuel. 

Provision  Depot— The  men  in  charge  of  a  depot  of  provisions  for 
the  relief  of  shipwrecked  persons,  and  furnished  by  the  Government 
of  the  Dominion  of  Canada,  reside  on  the  north  point  of  Trinity  Cove, 
where  there  is  a  dwelling-house  and  store.    Fish  are  plentiful  around 

the  island. 

Anchorage.— Off  Trinity  and  Atlantic  Coves  small  fishing  schooners 
anchor,  with  the  wind  off  shore,  in  10  or  12  xa,*,hom8,  sand  and  gravel 
bottom,  and  at  the  distance  of  400  yards  fi*om  the  rocks.  In  very  fine 
weather  large  vessels  might  venture  to  ride  in  ftom  25  to  30  fathoms, 
about  J  mile  off  shore,  but  should  be  in  constant  readiness  to  weigh  at 
the  first  sign  of  a  change  in  the  wind  or  weather.  There  is  little  or  no 
32 


trance  to  the 
xiiulland  and 
rimary  rocks, 
in  4')  degrees 
e  broad.  Its 
ppear  as  such 

a  peninsula, 
isthmus,  is  so 

greater  part 
1  the  sea,  has 
ing  the  higher 

small  lakes  or 
incipal  stream 
brown  water, 
n  the  southern 
I  smaller,  runs 
two  coves  are 
bhe  first  being 
I  the  Atlantic, 
t)oats,  and  the 
)nt  from  them 

y  spruce  trees, 

provisions  for 
le  Government 
'  Trinity  Cove, 
eutiful  around 

hing  schooners 
,nd  and  gravel 
I.  In  very  fine 
>  to  30  fathoms, 
ess  to  weigh  at 
e  is  little  or  no 


ST.    PAUL    ISLAND. 


BS 


warning  by  the  lead  in  approaching  this  island  In  foggy  weather  On 
this  account,  although  so  bold  and  high,  it  is  extren.ely  dangerous,  and 
many  shipwrecks,  attended  with  sacrifice  of  hunum  life,  have  tkkeii 
place  upon  its  shores. 

The  irregularity  of  the  tidal  streams  and  currents  add  much  to  the 
danger  arising  from  the  fogs,  which  prevail  in  southerly,  easterly,  and 
often  also  with  SW.  winds.  During  the  whole  of  a  Me  calm  diy  ^ 
the  end  ot  June,  the  current  set  to  the  SE.  at  the  rate  of  one  knot  past 
the  north  point  of  the  island.  ' 

,  ^*8j^*»--T«'o  lighthouses  stand  on  St.  Paul  Island-one  on  the 
detached  rock  at  the  north  point  and  the  other  on  the  extreme  SW 
point.  • 

The  northern  lighthouse  is  40  feet  high,  of  an  octagonal  shape,  and 
painted  white.    It  exhibits  a  fixed  white  light,  which  can  be  seen  from 
seaward  on  any  bearing,  excepting  between  ]!f.  Uo  w.  (N.  15o  E  matr ) 
and  N.  40O  E.  (N.  06°  E.  mag.),  when  it  is  hidden  by  the  island! 

The  southern  lighthouse  is  also  an  octagonal  white  building,  40  feet 
high,  and  exhibits  a  revolving  white  light  every  minute,  which  is  visi- 
Die  from  seaward  on  all  bearings,  except  between  S.  51©  E.  (S  25o  e 
mag.)  and  S  68°  W.  (N.  86°  W,  mag.),  when  it  is  obscured  by  the 
intervening  land,  .loth  lights  are  elevated  140  feet  above  the  level  of 
ttie  sea,  and  when  ihe  wreather  is  clear  they  may  be  seen  20  miles. 
These  lights  are  exhibited  only  from  April  I  to  December  31,  or  after- 
wards  if  navigation  is  open. 

Fog  Signal.— During  thick  weather  or  in  snowstorms  a  steam  foe 
whistle,  m  Atlantic  Cove,  on  the  south  side  of  the  island,  is  sounded 
five  seconds  m  every  minute. 

Ice  Report.-There  is  a  telegraph  and  signal  station  at  the  main 
estabhshment  on  St.  Paul  Island,  from  which  information  respecting 
ice,  weather,  and  the  state  of  navigation  may  be  obtained.  The  cable 
extends  from  the  island  to  Meat  Cove,  at  the  north  extreme  of  Cape 
xireton  Island.  ^ 

There  are  two  surf-boats  on  St.  Paul  Island  to  aid  seamen  in  distress 

Beacons.-A  tidal-gauge  house,  painted  white,  erected  about  40  feet 
above  high-water  mark  in  the  bight  of  Atlantic  Cove,  now  forms  a  con- 
spicuous  landmark  on  the  coast  of  the  island. 

A  circular  white  bea<;on  has  been  placed  on  the  side  of  the  hill,  above 
the  gauge.    These  two  marks,  in  line  bearing  N.  70°  W   (N  44©  w 
mag.),  lead  clear  to  the  southward  of  Big  Dick,  a  dangerous  detached 
rock,  on  which  the  sea  breaks  very  heavily,  off  the  NE.  horn  of  the  cove 

The  above  alignment  affords  a  good  guide  to  vessels  anchoring  off 
the  cove  m  15  fathoms.  ^ 

(H.  O.  Chart  No.  1092.) 

Bird  Rock».-Lyiug  about  NW.,  55  miles  from  St.  Paul  Island,  are 
two  rocks  of  coarse  red  sandstone,  dipping  very  slightly  U  the  SW 
which  are  constantly  diminishing  in  size  from  the  action  of  the  sea! 


»4 


GULP   OF   8T.    LAWRENCE — ISLANDS. 


J* 


Th<>y  present  iMrpeiiiUcular  cliflfb  on  every  side;  yet  it  \n  poHslble  to 
ascend  them  with  great  difttciilty  in  one  or  two  places,  but  tliere  is  no 
lauding  uiM)n  tlteni  except  in  the  calmest  sea.  Every  ledge  and  flssure 
of  the  clitt'M  is  oct;upied  by  gannets,  and  the  summits  of  both  rucks 
are  literally  cuveied  with  them.  The  white  plumage  of  these  birds  gives 
these  rocks  the  api)earance  of  being  cajiped  with  snow,  and  renders 
them  visible  through  a  night  glass  in  a  clear  and  moonlight  niglit  from 
the  distance  of  7  or  S  miles. 

The  two  ro(;ks  are  about  ^{  mile  apart.  Sunken  rocks  leave  only  a  boat 
passage  between  them.  The  southeasternmost  is  the  larger  and  higher, 
though  scarcely  400  yards  long,  and  not  more  than  140  feet  high  above 
the  sea.  The  other  is  divided  into  two  precipitous  mounds  Joined 
together  bv  a  low  ledge.  The  lesser  of  these  mounds  resembles  a  tower. 
A  reef  extends  about  ^  mile  to  the  eastward  i¥om  North  Bird  Kock,  and 
there  is  a  patch  of  breakers  nearly  midway  between  the  two,  and  rather 
to  the  SW.  of  the  line  drawn  from  one  to  the  other,  (rreat  Bird  Hock 
is  quite  bold,  excepting  in  the  direction  of  the  other  rock. 

Light — On  Great  Bird  Kock  stands  an  hexagonal  tower,  39  feet  higb^ 
and  painted  white,  from  which,  at  an  elevation  of  140  feet,  is  exhibited 
a  fixed  white  light  visible  17  miles.  This  light  is  shown  from  April  1 
to  December  31  each  year,  or  afterwards  if  navigation  is  open.  The 
tower  is  on  the  summit  of  the  rock ;  the  keeper's  dwelling,  painted 
white,  is  near  the  lighthouse. 

Fog  Signal — During  tliick  and  foggy  weather,  and  in  snowstorms, 
a  cotton  powder  cartridge  is  fired  every  twenty  minutes. 

Soundings. — The  soundings  eastward  of  Bird  Rocks  afford  ample 
warning  and  assistance  to  vessels  at  night,  or  in  foggy  weather,  as 
will  be  seen  in  the  chart.  Between  them  and  East  Point  of  Magdalen 
Islands  the  depth  nowhere  exceeds  16  or  17  fathoms,  over  a  bottom  of 
reddish  sand,  and  sea  eggs  are  very  frequently  brought  up  by  the  lead. 

Caution. — Between  Bird  Hocks  and  Bryou  Island  there  is  a  ridge  of 
rocky  and  foul  ground,  on  some  parts  of  which  it  has  been  said  there 
is  as  little  as  4  fathoms  water,  because  bottom  has  been  seen  in  calm 
weather.  Nothing,  however,  less  than  7  fathoms  could  be  found ;  but 
it  may  nevertheless  exist,  so  that  a  vessel  of  large  draft)  had  better  not 
cross  this  ridge  wlien  there  is  much  sea  running.  The  two  cliffy  points 
on  the  north  side  of  Bryon  Island,  in  line,  mark  the  northern  limits  of 
this  rocky  ground. 

Pr/on  Island  is  rather  more  than  4  miles  long,  W.  by  S.  and  E. 
by  N.,  with  the  extreme  breadth  of  rather  more  than  one  mile.  Its 
eastern  end  bears  trova.  East  Point  of  Magdalen  Islands,  N.  4°  W.  (N. 
22°  E.  mag.)  lOJ  miles,  but  its  SW.  point  approaches  to  within  8f  miles 
of  North  Cape  of  Grosse  Isle.  There  was  noopportunity  of  measuring 
the  height  ot  Bryon  Island,  but  it  nowhere  exceeds  200  feet  above  the 
sea.  The  cliffs  on  the  north  side  are  much  higher  than  those  on  the 
soutli,  where  there  are  several  small  coves  in  which  boats  may  landl 
easily  with  the  wind  off  shore. 


H  possible  to 
it  there  is  no 
je  and  Assure 
>f  botb  rocks 
so  birds  gives 
,  and  readtTH 
;htiiigbtfroin 

ve  only  a  boat 
er  and  bigber, 
et  bigb  above 
lounds  joined 
mbles  a  tower. 
Jird  Kock,  and 
wo,  and  rather 
eat  Bird  Kock 

sr,  39  feet  high; 
)t,  is  exhibited 
L  from  April  1 
is  open.  The 
Blling,  painted 

in  snowstorms, 

s  afford  ample 
gy  weather,  as 
at  of  Magdalen 
'er  a  bottom  of 
up  by  the  lead. 
ire  is  a  ridge  of 
)een  said  there 
a  seen  in  calm 
be  found;  but 
I  had  better  not 
jwo  cliffy  points 
rthern  limits  of 

.  by  S.  and  E. 

one  mile.  Its 
s,  N.  40  W.  (N. 
•  within  8|  miles 
ity  of  measuring 
)  feet  above  the 
an  those  on  tUe 
)oat8  may  land 


mmm 


HKYON    I.SLANr.  3:) 

This  island  is  formed  of  alternating  and  nearly  horizontal  stratii  of 
red  sandstone,  red  ocherous  ciii\ ,  and  shaly  gray  saiidMt«>n«'.  Tlicso 
rocks  are  soft  and  friable,  forming;  pcrpendiciiliir  or  overliaiigiiig  clitl's 
nearly  all  around  tlie  island,  which  are  broken  in  lioles  and  caverns, 
showing  liow  fast  tiiey  are  giviiiir  way  to  tlie  action  of  the  waves.  A 
great  part  of  the  island  is  wooiit-d  witli  dwarf  spruce  trees,  and  tlicie 
is  a  large  upland  tract  covered  witli  good  native  grass.  Tiiere  aie  a 
few  inhabitants  on  this  ishinti  who  raise  good  crops,  besides  cattle  and 
sheep. 

TVater. — Water  is  neither  plentiful  nor  easy  to  be  obtained,  luit  it 
may  be  had  in  small  ifuantities  by  digging,  and  there  is  a  spring  on  the 
north  side  of  the  narrow  isthmus  which  joins  tlie  eastern  peninsula  to 
the  renminder  of  the  land. 

Reefa. — There  are  three  reefs  ott"  Bry()n  Island.  One  oil'  its  east  end 
extends  nearly  ^  mile  to  th(»  northeastward;  another  off  the  west  end 
extends  I4  miles  to  the  westward,  and  the  third,  off  the  sandy  SW. 
point,  1^  miles  to  the  southward.  No  marks  can  be  given  for  clearing 
these  reefs,  but  the  bearings  of  the  land  will  afford  suttlcient  guidance 
to  the  seamen.  The  reef  oft"  the  SW.  point  obstructs  the  channel  so 
much  that  it  may  be  useful  to  add  that  from  the  southern  ridge  of  this 
reef,  Bryon  Islaiul  subtends  an  angle  of  97  degrees,  so  that  with  the 
island  subtending  any  less  angle  the  reef  may  be  passed.  The  south 
reef  assists  greatly  in  turning  off'  the  sea  from  the  roadstead  to  the 
eastward  of  it,  where  vessels  nmy  safely  anchor  in  <>  fathoms  water  and 
a  sandy  bottom,  at  the  distance  of  a  mile  or  more  from  the  shore,  and 
with  all  winds  from  the  northward.  Small  vessels  during  NW.  gales 
lie  at  anchor  close  under  the  reef. 

Shoal. — There  is  an  extensive  patch  of  foul  and  rocky  ground  lying 
SW.  from  the  west  end  of  Bryon  Island,  and  having  a  clear  channel 
on  either  side  of  it.  Not  less  than  5  fathoms  could  be  found  here,  and 
although  the  fishermen  see  bottom  upon  it  in  calm  weather,  there  is 
every  reason  to  think  that  there  is  no  less  water.  Nevertheless,  ves- 
sels of  large  draft  had  better  not  run  over  it  when  there  is  a  heavy  sea 
running,  for  a  small  point  of  iv^ck,  with  a  few  feet  less  water,  might 
escape  the  most  rigorous  examini.  tion. 

Fishing  Groimd8.--iThe  rocky  places  are  called  fishing  grounds  by 
the  inhabitants  of  Magdalen  Islands  because  codfish  abound  upon 
them.  There  is  one  having  11  fathoms  water  2^  miles  north  of  Bryon 
Island,  and  which  extends  a  considerable  distance  parallel  to  the  island. 
There  is  sandy  bottom  and  a  great  depth  of  water  within  this  ridge, 
and  vessels  may  anchor  in  fine  weather  and  southerly  winds  off'  the 
bay  on  the  north  side  of  the  island.  The  soundings  extend  so  far  oft' 
Bryon  Island  to  seaward  in  every  direction  that  there  is  no  possibility 
of  a  vessel  on  a  voyage  being  endangered  by  it  if  the  lead  be  used. 
Great  caution  is  requisite  in  approachiug  the  reefs,  for  they  are  very 
steep,  especially  that  which  extende  tc  the  southward. 


I 


I 


li 


36 


GULP   OF   ST.    LAWRENCE — ISLANDS. 


Magdelc?  Islands. — Tliis  chain  of  islauds  assume  an  irregular 
curved  direction,  the  greatest  length  of  which,  from  Southwest  Cape  of 
Amherst  Island  to  East  Point,  is  .35  miles. 

The  central  parts  of  these  islands  rise  into  hills,  with  rounded  and 
frequently  dome-shaped  summits,  and  which  are  in  general  of  igneous 
or  trap  rocks.  No  rock  salt  has  been  found  upon  the  islands,  but  the 
water  of  many  springs  and  small  streams  is  sufficiently  saline  to  be 
nearly  unfit  for  use.  Gypsum  forms  an  article  of  commerce,  and  some 
valuable  ocherous  pigments  are  also  found  upon  the  islands,  but  the 
principal  dependence  of  the  iiihabitants  is  upon  the  codflshery.  The 
herring  and  seal  fisheries  are  also  prosecuted  to  a  limited  extent.  The 
islands  are  partially  wooded,  but  the  trees  are  small,  and  iriostly  spruce, 
juniper,  birch,  and  Canadian  poplar.  The  unwooded  i^arts  produce 
good  grass,  and  afford  pasturage  for  cattle  and  sheep. 

The  climate  is  severe ;  not  quite  so  cold  as  at  Quebec  in  winter,  but  less 
warm  in  summer.  Bains,  and  especially  fogs,  are  extremely  frequent, 
and  without  this  humid  atmosphere  the  islands  would  be  deprived  of 
the  little  fertility  which  they  possess,  the  dry  and  meager  soil  requiring 
continual  supplies  of  moisture. 

When  first  sighted  from  sea,  Magdalen  Islands  api>ear  like  several 
hilly  islands,  with  channels  between,  but  on  a  nearer  approach  they 
are  seen  to  be  all  connected  together,  with  the  exception  of  Entry 
Island,  by  a  double  line  of  sand  bars  and  beaches,  inclosing  extensive 
lagoons,  having  very  narrow  entrances,  by  which  the  tide  finds  access 
and  egress.  These  sand  bars  are  in  some  parts  only  a  few  feet  above 
the  sea,  while  in  others  they  rise  into  hills  of  blown  sand  of  consider- 
able elevation.  They  appear  to  be  increasing,  since  they  are  generally 
ridges  of  sand  with  from  9  to  12  feet  of  water  parallel  to,  and  from  50 
to  100  fathoms  outside,  the  beach.  There  are  3  and  4  fathoms  water 
between  these  ridges  and  the  shore,  a  circumstance  which  has  often 
proved  fatal  to  the  crews  of  vessels  wrecked  upon  these  shores.  In 
stormy  weather  it  is  dangerous  to  attempt  making  the  islands,  for  in 
approaching  the  lower  parts  the  breakers  would  probably  be  the  first 
thing  seen  from  a  vessel. 

Population. — According  to  a  census  taken  in  1891,  there  were  upon 
Magdalen  Islands  4,942  inhabitants.  These  are  distributed  on  Am- 
herst, Grindstone,  and  Alright  Islands,  with  the  exception  of  a  few 
families  divided  between  Entry  Island,  Grosse '  Isle^,  and  East  Island, 
near  the  NE.  extremity  of  the  chain. 

Seals. — During  the  spring  of  the  year  the  fishermen  leave  the  islands 
for  seal  hunting  on  the  ice  of  the  gulf.  Many  seals  which  are  driven 
on  the  ice  to  the  shores  of  the  islands  by  winds  are  killed  by  the  inhab- 
itants.   Seals  are  also  taken  by  means  of  nets  in  Pleasant  Bay. 

Supplies. — Vessels  may  obtain  limited  supplies  of  fresh  provisions, 
especially  at  Entry  Island,  and  water  most  readily  from  Amherst  Har- 
bor, either  from  a  spring  which  issues  from  under  Demoiselle  Hill,  or 


<"inM«|liiqif!)|;;|)|||{;p|«R.. 


p- - 


MAGDALEN   ISLANDS. 


37 


I 


ime  an  irregular 
loutliwest  Cape  of 

with  rounded  and 
general  of  igneous 
le  islands,  but  the 
iently  saline  to  be 
mnierce,  and  some 
10  islands,  but  the 
9  codfishery.  The 
lited  extent.  The 
md  mostly  spruce, 
led  parts  produce 
►. 

5  in  winter,  but  less 
ttremely  frequent, 
aid  be  deprived  of 
ager  soil  requiring 

bppear  like  several 
rer  approach  they 
xception  of  Entry 
nclosing  extensive 
e  tide  finds  access 
iy  a  few  feet  above 
I  sand  of  consider- 
they  are  generally 
ilel  to,  and  from  50 
1  4  fathoms  water 
!e  which  has  often 
I  these  shores.  In 
'  the  islands,  for  in 
'obably  be  the  first 

1,  there  were  upon 
istributed  on  Am- 
jxception  of  a  few 
,  and  East  Island, 

m  leave  the  islands 
s  which  are  driven 
silled  by  the  inhab- 
Basant  Bay. 
)f  fresh  provisions, 
rom  Amherst  Har- 
Demoiselle  Hill,  or 


from  a  small  stream  which  falls  into  Cabaiie  Bay,  ncnir  Southwest  Cape. 
Wood  for  fuel  is  beconnnjLT  scarce  near  tlie  sottleuients.  Small  spars  of 
spruce  and  juniper  may  be  obtained.  The  latter,  of  wbidi  the  inhabit 
ants  build  their  fishing  boats  and  slialioi.s  or  small  schooners,  some- 
whut  resembles  larch  wood.  It  is  said  to  be  extremely  strong  and 
durable. 

Harbors.— Magdalen  Islands  possess  no  harbor  for  large  but  three 
for  small  vessels,  named  Amherst,  House,  and  Grand  Entry  Harbors. 

East  Point,  forming  the  NE.  extreme  of  Magdalen  Islands,  is  of  low 
sand,  inclosing  several  shallow  ponds,  and  having  several  sand  hills, 
some  of  which  are  ir^ar  its  extremity,  while  others,  of  greater  elevation 
and  farther  westward,  extend  in  a  chain  nearly  to  Northeast  Cape. 
These  last-mentioned  sand  hills  are  inland,  and  on  the  margin  of  the 
northeastern  part  of  Great  Lagoon.  Northeast  Cape  is  a  hill  on  East 
Island,  at  the  head  of  Grand  Entry  Harbor.  It  is  a  remarkable  cape, 
and  Its  isolated  cliffs,  being  230  feet  high,  can  be  seen  over  all  the  sand 
hills  and  sand  bars,  so  that,  when  these  lust  are  below  the  horizon,  the 
cape  appears  to  be  the  eastern  extremity  of  the  chain. 

Long  Spit— A  ridge  of  sand,  with  2  to  3  fathoms  water,  extends 
ESE.  rather  more  than  U  miles  off  East  Point,  and  for  I4  miles  far- 
ther in  the  same  direction  the  depth  is  from  4  to  G  fathoms.  To  clear 
this  spit,  observe  that  the  southern  part  of  Coffin  Island  is  a  peninsula, 
forming  the  southern  shore  of  Oyster  Pond,  and  connected  to  the 
remainder  of  the  island  by  a  low  neck  or  isthmus  at  the  west  end  of 
the  pond.  Tlie  mark  for  the  3-fathom  extremity  of  the  si)it  is  the 
north  side  of  this  peninsula  in  line  with  Old  Harry  Head.  And  the 
south  side  of  the  northern  part  of  Coffin  Island  (where  the  narrow  neck 
joins  it,  as  above  mentioned),  in  line  with  Old  Harry  Head,  will  lead 
over  the  spit  in  4  fathoms. 

The  mariner  with  the  chart  before  him  will  have  little  difficulty  in 
making  out  these  leading  marks,  but  may,  if  he  pleases,  pass  round  the 
spit,  by  the  lead,  in  5  or  6  fathoms,  taking  care  not  to  bring  Old  Harry 
Head  to  bear  southw^trd  of  S.  64°  W.  (west  mag.).  To  know  when  a 
vessel  from  the  eastward  has  passed  it,  observe  that  the  summit  of 
North  Cape  in  line  with  the  east  side  of  Northeast  Cape  leads  nearly 
i  mile  to  the  SW.,  which  mark  will  be  useful  to  a  vessel  approaching 
it  from  the  westward.  The  tides  set  rapidly  over  this  spit,  and, 
together  with  the  shoal  water,  cause  a  heavy  breaking  sea.  It  is 
extremely  dangerous,  and  vessels  should  take  care  not  to  get  becalmed 
near  it  without  an  anchor  clear. 

Doyle  Reef  lies  S.  7ao  E.  (S.  50©  E.  mag.)  65  miles  from  East  Point, 
and  consists  of  pointed  rocks.  It  is  very  small,  being  only  600  yards 
long  and  100  y.jrds  wide  from  the  depth  of  0  fathoms  to  G  fathoms  on 
either  side  of  it.  The  Jeast  water  is  3  fathoms  on  one  spot  nearly  in 
the  center,  and  there  are  12  and  13  fathoms  all  around  it.  The  only 
mark  for  this  reef  is  North  Cape,  open  two-thirds  of  its  breadth  NE.  of 


U 


k 


uji:  :-tJi£c-£iaiJ!;  Lattaai^jSr/'j 


4'i 


38 


GULP   OF    ST.    LAWRENCE — ISLANDS. 


Northeast  Cape.    Ou  the  reef  the  angle  between  these  marks  and  the 
western  point  of  Coffin  Island  is  24°  27'. 

Lying  directly  in  the  way  of  vessels,  and  very  seldom  showing,  the 
sea  breaking  upon  it  only  in  heavy  gales,  Doyle  Keef  may  jnstly  be 
considered  as  one  of  the  worst  dangers  off  Magdalen  Islands. 

Old  Harry  Head,  the  8E.  point  of  Coffin  Island,  is  formed  of  red 
sandstone  cliffs  of  moderate  height,  with  a  reef  off  it  i  mile  to  the 
SE.  It  is  the  first  headland  southwestward  of  East  Point,  from  which 
it  is  distant  4^  miles.  Between  them  is  a  sandy  bay,  in  which  vessels 
may  anchor,  with  good  shelter,  in  all  winds  from  WSW.,  round  by 
north,  tt>  NNE. ;  but  it  is  not  a  place  to  be  recommended,  because  a  vessel 
would  be  there  very  much  embayed  by  the  shoals  on  either  side,  and 
might  find  it  difficult  to  get  out  on  the  occurrence  of  a  sudden  shift  of 
wind  either  at  night  or  during  a  fog. 

Columbine  Shoals.— The  outermost  of  these  shoals  is  a  patch  of 
rocks  with  3  fathoms  over  it,  from  which  Old  Harry  Head  bears  N.2o  E. 
(N.  28°  E.  mag.)  2^  miles.  Within  this,  and  toward  Coffin  Island,  are 
numerous  small  shoal  patches  and  pointed  rocks,  on  some  of  which 
there  are  not  more  than  3  feet  at  low  water. 

These  shoals  are  extremely  dangerous,  and  much  in  the  way  of 
vessels  hauling  round  East  Point  with  northerly  winds.  To  clear  their 
NE.  side,  the  whole  of  the  high  Northeast  Cape  must  be  kept  well  open 
eastward  of  Old  Harry  Head.  There  are  no  good  marks  for  clearing 
the  west  side,  or  for  leading  clear  outside  of  them,  so  that  the  only 
guide  for  the  latter  purpose  is  not  to  bring  East  Point  to  bear  eastward 
of  N.  19°  E.  (N.  45°  E.  mag.).  But  although  there  are  no  good  marks, 
an  angle  with  a  sextant  will  answer  the  purpose  as  well  and  as  easily. 
On  the  outer  edge  of  these  shoals,  the  angle  between  Old  Harry  Head 
and  the  left  or  west  extremity  of  Coffin  Island  is  77  degrees;  conse- 
quently, with  these  points  subtending  any  less  angle,  the  vessel  wiU 
pass  outside  of  the  shoals. 

Co£Eln  Island  extends  4  miles  southwestward  of  Old  Harry  Head, 
having  on  its  SE.  side  a  lagoon  with  a  very  narrow  outlet,  named 
Oyster  Pond,  which  boats  can  only  enter  in  fine  weather.  Off  the  coast 
of  the  island  there  are  several  rocks,  besides  Columbine  Shoals,  but  as 
these  are  inshore,  and  out  of  the  way  of  vessels,  it  is  sufficient  to  refer 
to  them,  and  to  remark  that  this  is  a  very  dangerous  part  of  the  islands, 
which  should  never  be  approached  at  night  or  in  fogg;-  weather. 

arand  Entry  Harbor  has  its  entrance  between  the  SW.  end  of 
Coffin  Island  and  the  sand  bars  westward  of  it,  and  has  water  enough 
within  for  large  vessels;  but  this  entrance  is  extremely  narrow,  not 
exceeding  100  yards  in  breadth,  and  the  narrow  channel  leading  to  it, 
between  sandy  shoals  which  are  said  to  shift,  extends  U  miles  west- 
ward. A  native  pilot  should  be  employed,  or  the  channel  buoyed  or 
staked,  and  even  then  the  entrance  should  not  be  attempted  excepting 
with  a  leading  wind,  flowing  tide,  and  fine  weather.    The  greatest 


U 


-m 


wmmm 


marks  and  the 

I  showing,  the 
may  jiistly  be 
lands. 

formed  of  red 
^  mile  to  the 
int,  from  which 
I  which  vessels 
iW.,  round  by 
ecause  a  vessel 
either  side,  and 
sudden  shift  of 

1  is  a  patch  of 
I  bears  N,  2°  E. 
tffin  Island,  are 
some  of  which 

in  the  way  of 
To  clear  their 
I  kept  well  open 
•ks  for  clearing 
)  that  the  only 
}  bear  eastward 
110  good  marks, 
1  and  as  easily. 
Hd  Harry  Head 
degrees;  couse- 
the  vessel  will 

Id  Harry  Head, 
7  outlet,  named 
\    Off  the  coast 
e  Shoals,  but  as 
iiflBcient  to  refer 
t  of  the  islands, 
weather, 
the  SW.  end  of 
18  water  enough 
lely  narrow,  not 
lel  leading  to  it, 
3  li  miles  west- 
mnel  buoyed  or 
npted  excepting 
-.    The  greatest 


MAGDx\LEN    ISLANDS.  ^ 

depth  that  can  be  carried  in,  at  low  water,  is  10  feet;  at  liigli  wat*-.-, 
neap  tides,  12  feet,  and  in  spring  tides,  13  feet,  Tliere  are  2.S  feet 
water  at,  and  immediately  within,  the  entrance.  The  ebb  tide  runs  out 
with  great  rapidity,  and  tlie  Hood  in  is  also  strong.  There  are  no  settle- 
ments at  the  harbor,  but  there  are  a  few  families  in  the  vicinity  of 
Northeast  Cape  who  breed  cattle. 

Within  this  harbor  there  is  a  large  expanse  of  water,  from  one  to  3 
fathoms  deep,  extending  northeastward  to  the  southern  shores  of  (Jrosse 
Isle,  and  communicating  by  a  narrow  channel  with  a  large  shallow  pond, 
which  washes  the  base  of  Northeast  Cape,  and  extends  to  within  ab(»ut 
2  miles  of  t'le  eastern  extremity  of  the  chain.  This  great  lagoon  also 
extends  south  westward,  between  a  double  line  of  sandbars,  to  the  north- 
eastern shores  of  Grindstone  Island,  and  is,  in  all,  23  miles  long  and 
from  i  mile  to  3  miles  wide.  Throughout  its  whole  extent  there  is  a 
communication  for  boats  at  high  water,  quite  sheltered  from  the  sea. 
There  are  a  t  present  three  entrances  into  this  lagoon  irom  the  sea,  namely. 
Grand  Entry  Harbor;  another  3 J  miles  westward,  wliich  is  very  shal- 
low, and  House  Harbor,  near  its  SW.  extremity,  between  Alright  and 
Grindstone  Islands. 

Shag  Isla-TiC  -^  small  and  low,  and  of  sandstone,  lying  off  the  east 
coast  of  Mafcdf'  "  T:?lands,  about  ^  mile  from  the  sand  bars,  nearly 
midway  betwef  c  in  and  Alright  Islands,  and  out  of  the  way  of 
vessels. 

Cape  Alright,  U^  miles  SW.  of  Old  Harry  Head,  is  the  SE.  point 
of  Alright  Island.  The  cliffs,  of  a  grayish-white  color,  with  occasional 
brick-red  low  down,  are  400  feet  high  at  the  highest  part,  which  is 
about  a  mile  to  the  eastward  of  the  cape,  and  those  to  the  westward  of 
the  cape,  toward  House  Harbor,  are  also  very  high  and  of  the  same 
color.  Nearly  a  mile  inland  is  the  summit  of  Alright  Island,  420  feet 
high.  Between  this  summit  and  the  cape  there  is  a  hill  named  Butte 
Bonde.  The  south  extremity  of  the  cape  is  low,  with  a  small  rock 
close  off  it. 

Alright  Ree^  the  outer  edge  of  which  lies  N.  72°  E.  (S.  83°  E.  mag.), 
34  miles  from  Cape  Alright,  is  800  yards  long  by  600  yards  wide,  and  is 
composed  of  white  and  pointed  rocks,  with  6  feet  least  water.  When  on 
this  reef  Butte  Ronde  is  in  one  with  the  summit  of  Grindstone  Island, 
the  west  side  of  Cape  Alright  is  in  line  with  the  west  side  of  Cape 
Meule,  and  the  whole  of  the  woody  Wolf  Island  is  just  open  to  west- 
ward of  Shag  Island.  The  well-marked  summit  of  Grindstone  Island, 
open  to  the  southwestward  of  Cape  Alright,  will  lead  to  the  SW.,  and 
the  east  side  of  the  woods  of  Wolf  Island  (seen  over  the  sanrf  bars), 
open  to  the  eastward  of  Shag  Island,  will  lead  to  the  SE. 

Pearl  Reef,  small  and  dangerous,  is  of  white  pointed  rocks,  like  most 
of  the  reefs  around  these  islands.  It  is  round  and  about  400  yards  in 
diameter,  with  9  feet  least  water ;  and  even  with  a  moderate  swell  the  sea 
breaks  heavily  upon  it.    From  the  reef  Cape  Alright  bears  N.  63^  W. 


■:i-C3fckiZ«i:-:Sa.^^ii-.>',l:-:T3iiif*'., 


GULF   OF   ST.    LAWRENCE ISLANDS. 

(N.  38°  W.  mag.)  8 J  miles;  the  NE.  point  of  Entry  Island  S.  57°  W. 
(S.  820  W.  mag.)  U  miles.  Demoiselle  Hill,  shut  in  behind  the  north 
side  of  Entry  Island,  8.  GOo  W.  (N.  89°  W.  mag.),  will  lead  to  the  south- 
ward, and  the  Demoiselle,  kept  more  than  half  a  point  open  to  the 
northward  of  Entry  Island,  will  lead  to  the  northward. 

House  Harbor  lies  2f  miles  from  Cape  Alright.  Its  entrance  is  a 
narrow  and  crooked  channel,  with  a  depth  of  only  6  feet  at  low  water 
and  n  feet  at  high  water. 

Cape  Meule,  formed  of  gray  sandstone,  is  about  1^  miles  southward 
of  the  entrance  to  House  Harbor.  Meule  Bocks,  extending  !^  mile 
seaward  of  Capo  Meule,  are  marked  on  their  outer  extremity  by  a  black 
buoy  moored  in  14  feet  water  100  yards  east  from  a  6-foot  patch. 

Vessels  entering  House  Harbor  should  pass  SB.  of  the  buoy,  and 
those  intending  to  anchor  in  Leslie  Cove  should,  after  passing  south- 
ward and  westward  of  the  buoy,  steer  to  the  NW. 

Red  Cape,  SW.  by  W.  5^  miles  from  Cape  Alright,  is  the  southeast- 
ern point  of  Grindstone  Island  and  the  north  point  of  Pleasant  Bay. 
The  opposite  point  of  the  bay,  Sandy  Hook,  is  the  east  point  of  Amherst 
Island,  and  bears  from  Red  Cape  S.  40°  E.  (S.  15o  E.  mag.)  G  miles. 
From  this  line  to  the  shore  of  Amherst  Island  at  the  head  of  the  bay 
the  distance  is  ^  miles. 

G-rindstone  Island  is  the  second  largest  of  the  chain,  being,  in  this 
respect,  intermediate  between  Amherst  and  Alright  Islands.  Its  sum- 
mit is  elevated  550  feet  above  the  sea  at  high  water. 

Light— On  the  west  side  of  Grindstone  Island,  about  f  mile  north- 
ward of  the  entrance  to  Etang  du  Nord,  is  a  square  lighthouse,  42  feet 
high,  and  painted  white,  which  exhibits  at  an  elevation  of  200  feet  a 
revolving  white  light  every  minute  and  a  half.  The  light  should  be 
visible  20  miles. 

Amherst  Island,  the  largest  and  southwesternmost  of  Magdalen 
Islands,  is  connected  with  Grindstone  Island  by  a  double  line  of  sand 
bars,  inclosing  an  extensive  lagoon,  TJ  miles  long  and  from  one  to  3 
miles  wide,  the  southern  part  of  which  is  named  Basque  Harbor.  This 
lagoon  is  full  of  sands,  which  are  dry  at  low  water,  and  has  three  out- 
lets into  Pleasant  Bay,  the  southernmost  being  the  deepest,  but  having 
only  3  feet  water  over  its  bar  at  low  water.  The  others,  including  three 
through  the  sand  bars  of  the  NW.  coast,  will  only  admit  boats  at  high 
water,  and  when  the  surf  is  not  too  high. 

The  hills  in  the  interior  of  Amherst  Island  rise  to  a  height  of  550 
feet  above  the  sea.  Toward  the  SE.  part  of  the  island,  and  about  one 
mile  WNW.  of  Amherst  Harbor,  is"  the  very  remarkable  conical  bill 
named  Demoiselle  Hill,  of  trap  rock,  and  280  feet  high.  The  perpen- 
dicular and  dark  red  cliffs  of  this  hill  are  washed  by  the  waters  of 

Pleasant  Bay. 

Amherst  Harbor  is  formed  by  a  peninsula,  presentmg  cliffs  of  gray 
sandstone  to  seaward,  in  the  SE.  corner  of  Pleasant  Bay.    Its  entrance, 


MM 


MAGDALEN   ISLANDS. 


41 


md  S.  57°  W. 
ind  the  north 
d  to  tlie  south - 
t  open  to  the 

i  entrance  is  a 
fc  at  low  water 

iles  southward 
ending  ij  mile 
(lity  by  a  black 
it  patch, 
the  buoy,  and 
passing  south- 

the  southeast- 
Pleasant  Bay. 

int  of  Amherst 
mag.)  G  miles. 

ead  of  the  bay 

1,  being,  in  this 
inds.  Its  sum- 
it  f  mile  north- 
ithouse,  42  feet 
m  of  200  feet  a 
light  should  be 

«t  of  Magdalen 
)le  line  of  saud 
I  from  one  to  3 
>  Harbor.  This 
L  has  three  out- 
>est,  but  having 
including  three 
it  boats  at  high 

a  height  of  550 
,  and  about  one 
ible  conical  hill 
h.  The  perpen- 
jy  the  waters  of 

ng  cliflfs  of  gray 
r.    Its  entrance, 


between  this  peninsula  and  the  sands  southward,  is  2i  miles  within  or 
southwestward  of  the  extremity  of  Sandy  Hook,  which  is  a  long  and 
narrow  sandy  point  with  sand  hills.  The  harbor  is  the  easiest  of  access 
and  egress  of  any  in  the  Magdalen  Islands,  and  lias,  moreover,  the 
advantage  of  an  excellent  roadstead  outside,  where  vessels  may  wait 
their  opportunity  of  running  in.  Nevertheless,  its  entrance  is  extremely 
narrow  and  rather  crooked,  so  that,  Avithout  a  pilot,  it  would  be  neces- 
sary to  buoy  or  stake  the  channel. 

The  depth  over  the  bar,  which  is  rocky,  is  8  feet  at  low  and  11  feet  at 
high  water  springs.  Within  the  harbor  there  are  from  10  to  18  feet, 
over  a  bottom  of  soft,  blaek,  and  fetid  mud,  well  sheltered  from  every 
wind.  It  is  proposed  to  construct  a  breakwater  on  the  north  side  of 
the  entrance  to  the  harbor. 

Ice. — The  harbor  is  usually  frozen  over  about  January  1,  and  clear  of 
ice  about  May  10,  being  completely  closed  between  January  1  and  May  1. 
Field  ice  generally  drifts  in  toward  the  shores  of  the  island  about 
January  15,  and  disai>pears  about  May  12.  The  first  vessel  arrives 
from  sea  about  May  10,  and  the  last  one  leaves  about  December  17. 

Pleasant  Bay  is  the  best  roadstead  in  the  Magdalen  Islands,  and 
the  only  one  where  vessels  can  venture  to  lie  with  all  winds  during 
the  three  finest  months  of  summer— June,  July,  and  August.  In  those 
mouths  a  gale  of  wind  from  the  eastward  so  heavy  as  to  endanger  a 
vessel  with  good  anchors  and  cables  does  not  occur  above  once  in  3  or 
4  years.  The  riding,  however,  is  often  heavy  enough  in  NE.  gales,  and 
a  vessel  should  be  well  moored  and  all  snug  aloft. 

Anchorage. — The  best  and  most  sheltered  anchorage  is  in  4  fathoms, 
with  the  rocky  point  of  entrance  of  Amherst  Harbor  bearing  S.  27°  W. 
(S.  520  W.  mag.)  §  mile,  and  a  little  more  than  J  mile  from  high-water 
mark  on  the  sandy  beach  to  the  southward.  A  vessel  of  large  draft 
should  anchor  farther  ofl'.  The  bottom  is  everywhere  excellent  for  hold- 
ing, and  of  red  sandy  clay.  Even  when  the  wind  comes  right  in  the 
sea  is  much  lessened  by  passing  over  so  much  of  shoal  water;  neverthe- 
less, the  attempt  to  ride  out  a  heavy  easterly  gale,  either  before  June 
or  after  August,  will  be  attended  with  great  danger. 

Sandy  Hook  Channel,  between  Amherst  and  Entry  Islands,  has  a 
navigable  breadth  of  little  more  than  J  mile  between  Sandy  Hook  Flat 
and  the  rocky  shoals  off  the  west  side  of  Entry  Island.  There  are  sev- 
eral rocky  patches  of  2J  fathoms  off  the  SW.  point  of  Entry  Island, 
reaching  to  fully  f  mile  from  the  shore.  The  ebb  tide  sets  strongly 
through  this  ciiannel  and  over  Sandy  Hook  Flat,  so  that  vessels  of 
large  draft  should  go  round  to  the  eastward  of  Entry  Island. 

Directions. — Four  fathoms  is  the  most  that  can  be  carried  through 
Sandy  Hook  Channel  by  a  good  pilot,  but  3h  fathoms  is  the  utmost  that 
can  be  safely  reckoned  on  by  a  stranger.  Off  the  NE.  end  of  Sandy 
Hook  Shoal,  which  is  steej)  to,  a  red  buoy  is  moored  in  5  fathoms.  Ves- 
sels must  pass  eastward  of  this  buoy. 


irt.y.*igft6^tf:^.u-*i--..*.^w- 


■  r 


42 


GULP   OP   ST.    LAWRENCE — ISLANDS. 


To  I'lin  through  Sandy  Hook  Channel  firom  the  southward,  keep  the 
east  side  of  Alright  Island  just  open  to  the  westward  of  Northwest 
Spit  until  abreast  of  the  SW.  point  of  Entry  Island,  then  haul  up  for 
the  summit  of  Grindstone  Island. 

Entry  Island  is  the  highest  of  Magdalen  Islands,  its  summit  being 
580  feet  above  the  sea,  the  red  cliff's  rising  at  the  NE.  point  to  a  height 
of  330  feet,  and  at  the  south  i)oint  to  400  feet.  Oii'  the  NE.  point 
there  is  High  Rock,  about  100  yards  from  the  clitts,  and  on  its  north 
side  the  remarkable  Tower  Rock,  of  red  sandstone,  joined  to  the  island, 
and  which  can  be  seen  from  the  SW.  over  the  low  NW.  point,  as  well 
as  from  the  NE. 

Light. — On  the  SW.  side  of  Entry  Island  is  a  square  lighthouse,  42 
feet  high,  and  painted  white,  which  exhibits  at  an  elevation  of  93  feet 
a  fixed  white  light.  The  light  should  be  visible  12  miles  from  S.  87°  W. 
(N.  68°  W.  mag.),  through  north  and  east,  to  S.  26°  E.  (S.  1°  E.  mag.). 

Supplies. — The  inhabitants  of  Entry  Island  raise  cattle  and  sheep, 
depending  more  iipon  the  sale  of  fresh  provisions  than  the  fisheries. 
Vessels  may,  therefore,  almost  always  obtain  suixplies. 

Anchorage. — Vessels  generally  anchor  under  Entry  Island  in  north- 
erly and  easterly  winds,  but  it  is  rough  riding,  by  reason  of  the  sea 
which  rolls  round  the  island.  The  best  anchorage  in  easterly  winds  is 
in  Sandy  Hook  Channel  under  Northwest  Spit,  in  5  fathoms  sand. 

Besides  the  rocky  patches  in  Sandy  Hook  Channel,  and  off  the  SW. 
point  of  Entry  Island,  there  are  others  ofl'  the  south  and  SE.  sides, 
extending  4  mile  off  shore. 

Andromache  Rocks  are  several  mere  points  of  rock  with  deep 
water  between  them,  lying  off  the  NE.  point  of  Entry  Island.  The  two 
nearest  the  shore,  with  11  feet  water,  do  not  extend  beyond  260  yards 
from  High  Rock.  Two  others,  with  17  feet  water,  are  distant  400  yards 
and  460  yards,  respectively,  from  High  Rock  on  the  same  line  of  bearing; 
and  lastly,  there  is  a  patch,  with  3^  fathoms  water,  fully  ^  mile  out  in 
the  same  direction.  There  is  a  clear  channel  between  these  rocks  and 
Pearl  Reef,  which  lies  NE.,  4  miles  farther  off,  and  vessels  passing  east- 
ward of  Entry  Island  will  therefore  be  in  no  danger,  if  vhey  do  not 
haul  round  High  Rock  at  a  less  distance  than  ^  mile. 

Amherst  Island. — The  south  coast  of  Amherst  Island,  consisting  of 
sand  hills  and  beaches,  with  shoal  water  ^  mile  off,  curves  round  west- 
ward, for  6  or  7  miles,  to  the  entrance  of  the  Basin,  which  extends 
nearly  across  the  island  to  within  less  than  ^  mile  of  Pleasant  Bay. 
The  Basin  is  now  so  nearly  closed  with  sand,  that  boats  can  only  enter 
at  high  water,  and  in  the  finest  weather.  There  is  good  anchorage  off 
the  entrance,  in  from  6  to  9  fathoms,  sandy  bottom,  and  with  winds 
from  WN  W.,  round  by  north  to  ENE. 

Westward  1^  miles  from  the  entrance  to  the  Basin,  cliffs  commence 
and  continue,  except  in  Cabane  Bay,  to  West  Cape,  which  is  the  highest 
cliff  of  Amherst  Island,  its  summit  being  300  feet  above  the  sea.    There 


""mm 


MAGDALEN   ISLANDS. 


41 


ard,  keep  the 
of  Northwest 
n  haul  up  for 

summit  being 
it  to  a  height 
le  NE.  poiut 
I  on  its  north 
to  the  island, 
point,  as  well 

lighthouse,  42 
tion  of  93  feet 
romS.SToW. 
J.  1°  E.  mag.)> 
ble  and  sheep, 
.  the  fisheries. 

)land  in  north- 
ion  of  the  sea 
iterly  winds  is 
cms  sand, 
id  off  the  SW. 
ind  SE.  sides, 

ok  with  deep 
and.  The  two 
)nd  260  yards 
ttant  400  yards 
ine  of  bearing; 
T  \  mile  out  in 
lese  rocks  and 
3  passing  east- 
f  vhey  do  not 

1,  consisting  of 
38  round  west- 
(phich  extends 
Pleasant  Bay. 
can  only  enter 
anchorage  off 
id  with  winds 

iffs  commence 

is  the  highest 

he  sea.    There 


is  a  remarkable  rock  above  water  close  to  the  shore,  and  about  \  mile 
southward  of  it. 

Light. — On  South  Cape  of  Amherst  Island  is  an  hexagonal-shaped 
building,  'A  feet  high  and  painted  white,  which  exhibits  an  alternating 
light,  showing  red  for  thirty  seconds  and  white  for  thirty  seconds  in 
each  minute,  at  an  elevation  of  107  feet,  that  should  be  visible  20  miles. 
This  light  is  obscured  to  the  westward  by  the  high  land  of  Southwest 
Cape  or  from  8.  81°  W.  (N.  74°  W.  mag.)  to  S.  81°  E.  (S.  .">6^  E.  mag.). 

Ice  Report. — There  is  a  telegraph  and  ■'^'^nalstationatthis  lighthouse 
which  receives  and  transmits  sp""    I  ts  on  the  ice  and  the     ,,      ^f 

navigation  in  the  gulf  during  tho  ...onth.        April  and  May. 

Cabane  Bay  is  a  small  bight,  between  South  and  Southwest  capes 
of  Amherst  Island,  where  vessels  may  safely  anchor  with  northerly  and 
easterly  winds,  and  where  good  water  may  easily  be  obtained.  The 
best  berth  is  in  8  or  9  fathoms,  sandy  bottom,  off  the  center  of  the  bay, 
with  South  Cape  and  Cape  Perc6  in  line,  %  mile  off  shore. 

Deadman  Islet,  W.  by  N.,  7 J  miles  neariy  from  West  Cal)e  of  Mag- 
dalen Islands,  is  small,  being  not  more  than  600  yards  long,  and  less  than 
half  that  in  breadth.  It  is  about  170  feet  high,  with  steejdy  sloping 
sides,  meeting  at  the  summit  like  a  prism,  so  that  when  seen  end  on  it 
resembles  a  pyramid.  When  seen  from  a  distance,  with  its  longest  sides 
presented  to  view,  its  outline  very  much  resembles  tliat  of  a  botly  laid 
out  for  burial,  from  which  circumstance  its  name  is  derived.  The  islet 
is  composed  principally  of  trap  rocks,  and  when  seen  close  to,  on  a 
bright  sunny  day,  with  the  white  surf  dashing  against  its  variously 
colored  sides,  is  a  very  beautiful  object.  It  is  so  bold  on  the  west  side 
that  a  vessel  may  pass  at  the  distance  of  400  yards  with  safety,  but  a 
reef  extends  \  mile  toward  Amherst  Island. 

About  one  mile  northward  of  this  islet  there  is  a  rocky  fi.shing 
ground  with  S  fathoms  least  water,  and  6  miles  south  of  it  there  is 
another  with  11  fathoms.  There  is  no  danger  nearer  than  White 
Horse,  and  vessels  may  safely  pass  between  it  and  Amherst  Island. 
It  is,  however,  much  in  the  way  of  those  passing  round  the  west  end 
of  Magdalen  Islands,  and  they  should  beware  of  it  at  night,  or  in  foggy 
weather,  for  the  lead  will  give  little  warning,  since  there  is  nearly  as 
much  water  within  \  mile  of  it  as  at  the  distance  of  several  miles. 

G-ull  Island. — From  West  Cape  of  Amherst  Island  the  remainder 
of  the  seacoast  of  Amherst  Island  consistts  of  red  cliffs,  Avithout  beach, 
all  the  way  to  W^est  Lake,  a  small  pond  at  the  SW.  end  of  the  sand 
bars  which  Join  Amherst  and  Grindstone  Islands.  At  the  north 
extremity  of  these  sand  bars  is  Gull  Lsland,  which  is  small,  rocky,  and 
close  to  the  western  point  of  Grindstone  Island,  and  has  shoal  water 
off  its  west  point  to  the  distance  of  \  mile.  About  14  miles  to  the  SW. 
of  it,  and  with  the  west  side  of  Gull  Island  and  Gros  Cap  in  line,  lies 
a  rocky  shoal  with  3  fathoms  at  low  water,  and  leaving  no  good  passage 
between  it  and  the  shore.  Close  to  the  NE.  of  Gull  Island  is  the 
Etang  du  Nord,  a  small  inlet,  affording  good  shelter  to  boats. 


■vMsevm 


"  ■-'>■*«»=  ,»^..^:^^ .J 


44 


GULF   OF    8T.    LAWRENCE — ISLANDS. 


Hospital  Rock.— The  northern  shore  of  Grindstone  Island  is  of  red 
sandstone  clitVs,  loss  high  than  those  of  Amherst  Island.  Near  their 
NE.  extreme  lies  Hospital  IJock,  dose  to  the  shore,  and  also  some  rocky 
3-fathom  i)atclie8,  more  than  ^  mile  from  the  shore. 

White  Horse  is  the  name  of  a  tlangerous  reef  lying  N.  36°  E.  (N.  61° 
E.  mag.)  7  miles  from  Deadman  Lslet,  and  west  5^  miles  from  Gull 
Island.  It  is  scarcely  more  than  200  yards  iu  diameter,  and  has  9  feet 
least  water  over  pointed  rocks,  on  which  the  sea  often  breaks.  On  this 
reef  the  summit  of  Entry  Island  is  seen  over  a  low  part  of  the  sand  bars, 
at  the  NE.  outlet  of  Basque  Harbor,  but  this  mark  can  not  be  easily 
discerned  by  a  stranger. 

When  on  the  reef  the  western  extremity  of  Amherst  Island  and 
Hospital  Cape  (the  northeastern  extremity  of  the  cliffs  of  Grindstone 
Island)  subtend  an  angle  of  91°  30' ;  consequently,  with  these  points 
subtending  a  less  angle  by  3  or  4  degrees,  the  vessel  will  pass  outside 
of  the  reef.  With  a  greater  angle,  94  or  95  degrees,  she  will  pass 
inside  of  it,  or  between  it  and  the  shore. 

There  are  irregular  soundings  and  foul  ground  between  this  reef  and 
the  shore,  but  nothing  less  than  5  fathoms,  excepting  what  has  been 
already  mentioned. 

Pierre  de  G-ros  Cap,  another  dangerous  reef  of  rocks,  nearly  of  the 
same  size  as  White  Horse,  and  having  18  feet  least  water,  is  seldom 
seen,  as  the  sea  breaks  upon  it  only  in  very  heavy  weather.  It  lies 
N.  58°  W.  (N.  33°  W.  mag.)  3iJ  miles  off  Cape  le  Trou,  the  nearest  point 
of  Grindstone  Island. 

When  on  the  reef,  the  summit  of  Alright  Island  is  seen  over  the  NE. 
point  of  Grindstone  Island,  which  is  in  the  lagoon,  and  very  nearly  iu 
line  with  Hospital  Oape,  and  Butte  de  Portage,  a  hill  of  Amherst  Island 
about  1 J  miles  WNW.  of  Demoiselle  Hill,  is  midway  or  in  the  center  of 
the  narrow  passage  between  Gull  Island  and  the  west  point  of  Etang 
du  Nord.  These  marks  kept  open  will  lead  NE.  and  SW.  of  the  reef, 
and  a  vessel  will  pass  well  clear  outsida  of  it,  and  also  of  White  Horse, 
if  Deadman  Islet  be  not  brought  to  bear  westward  of  S.  25°  W.  (S.  60° 
W.  mag.). 

Wolf  Island.— From  Hospital  Oape  to  Wolf  Island,  off  which  there 
is  a  rocky  3-fathom  shoal  nearly  ^  mile  from  the  shore,  the  northern 
coast  of  Magdalen  Islands  consists  merely  of  sand  beaches  and  sand 
hills  for  a  distance  of  10  miles.  The  low  sandstone  cliffs  of  Wolf 
Island,  which  is  about  f  mile  long,  interrupt  the  continuance  of  the 
sandy  shore;  the  sand  beaches  then  recommence,  and  continue,  with 
high  sand  hills,  occasionally,  9  miles  farther  to  North  Oape.  In  this 
part  the  sand  bars  may  be  safely  approached  by  the  lead  as  near  as  10 
or  9  fathoms  depth  of  water. 

North  Cape  of  Magdalen  Islands  is  the  northern  point  of  Grosse 
Isle,  and  a  precipice  of  considersiblc  height,  but  not  so  high  as  the 
west  point  of  the  same  island,  which  is  in  the  Great  Lagoon,  and  300 
feet  above  the  sea. 


MAGDALEN   ISLANDS. 


46 


laud  is*  of  red 
.  Near  their 
so  some  rocky 

36oE.(N.61^ 
ies  from  Gull 
md  has  9  feet 
aks.  On  this 
the  saud  bars, 
not  be  easily 

it  Island  and 
of  Grindstone 

I  these  points 

II  pass  outside 
she  will  pass 

n  this  reef  and 
what  has  been 

8,  nearly  of  the 
ater,  is  seldom 
sather.  It  lies 
e  nearest  point 

u  over  the  NE. 

very  nearly  in 

Lmherst  Island 

in  the  center  of 

point  of  Etang 

W.  of  the  reef, 

White  Horse, 

250  w.  (S.  50° 

off  which  there 

B,  the  northern 

iches  and  sand 

cliffs  of  Wolf 

nuance  of  the 

continue,  with 

Gape.    In  this 

id  as  near  as  10 

loint  of  Grosse 
so  high  as  the 
lagoon,  and  300 


The  north  coast  of  Magdalen  Islands  continues  from  North  Cape,  in 
a  curved  line  of  sand  beaches  and  sand  hills,  for  about  6  miles,  to  East 
Point. 

North  Cape  Rooks,  some  of  which  always  show,  lie  westward  of 
North  Oape,  the  outermost  being  1,200  yards  off  shore.  The  west  end 
of  these  rocks  bears  N.  48°  W.  (N.  22°  W.  mag.)  from  the  high  SW. 
side  of  Grosse  l(<le,  and  their  extent  to  the  eastward  is  marked  by  the 
NE.  sides  of  Nort4i  and  Northeast  Gapes  in  line.  Therefore,  in  running 
down  from  the  westward  to  anchor  under  North  Cape,  do  not  come 
nearer  the  shore  than  one  mile  until  the  above-named  marks  are  open. 

Ice  Report— Tiiere  is  a  telegra]>h  and  signal  station  at  Grosse  Isle, 
which  receives  and  transmits  special  reports  on  ice,  etc.,  during  the 
months  of  April  and  May. 

Water  may  be  had  in  small  quantities  near  the  houses  on  the  east 
side  of  North  Cape,  but  there  are  no  good  watering  places  excepting 
those  already  mentioned. 

Anchorage. — In  the  anchorage,  eastward  of  North  Cape,  vessels 
may  ride  in  8  or  9  fathoms,  over  sandy  bottom,  with  all  southerly 
winds,  and  will  find  good  holding  ground,  and  plenty  of  room  to  get 
under  Avay. 

Directions. — Entry  Island,  when  first  made  from  the  eastward,  will 
appear  like  a  double-peaked  hill,  sloping  somewhat  abruptly  down  to 
perpendicular  and  high  cliffs  on  either  side.  Southwest  Cape  of 
Amherst  Island  is  also  a  steep  cliff,  but  of  less  height,  and  as  there  is 
no  land  southward  and  westward  of  it,  it  can  not  be  mistaken.  The 
land  rises  from  it  in  undulations  to  the  higher  parts  of  the  island. 
Should  the  weather  be  foggy,  the  soundings  will  safely  guide  vessels 
passing  southeastward  of  the  islands. 

The  general  soundings  aruund  Magdalen  Islands,  which  extend  off 
them  so  uiany  miles  in  every  direction,  will  afford  an  invaluable  assist* 
ance  to  vessels  at  night  or  in  foggy  weather,  and  will  be  better  under- 
stood from  the  charts  than  by  any  written  directions. 

Tides. — At  Amherst  Harbor  it  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at 
8h.  20m.;  ordinary  springs  rise  3  feet,  and  neaps  2  feet. 

The  tidal  streams  or  currents  around  Magdalen  Islands  are  so  irreg- 
ular that  the  most  experienced  and  intelligent  pilots  for  the  islands, 
who  are  also  fishermen,  and  have  passed  their  lives  in  fishing  craft 
around  them,  can  give  no  certain  account  of  their 'rate  and  direction, 
but  all  agree  in  stating  that  they  vary  in  both  respects,  either  from  the 
effects  of  winds,  or  other  and  unknown  causes.  Nevertheless,  the  fol- 
lowing ob.9ervations  will  hold  good  as  a  general  rule,  and  although 
subject  to  occasional  interruption,  the  set  of  the  tidal  streams  about  to 
be  described  will  be  found  to  recur  with  considerable  constancy  in  fine 
weather : 

A  few  miles  outside  Bryon  Island  and  Bird  Bocks  there  appears  to 
be  usually  a  current  setting  to  the  southeastward,  out  of  the  Gulf  of 
St.  Lawrence;  but  the  stream  of  flood  tide  flows  between  them  and 


* 


46 


OULP   OF    8T.    LAWRENCE — ISLANDS. 


Magdalen  iHlands.  The  stream  of  Hood  comets  from  the  SK.,  and  i.s 
divided  by  theeast  pointof  Ma((da]en  Lslaiids.  One  braiich  of  the  stream 
sets  strongly  over  the  Long  Spit,  whicli,  with  Ohl  Harry  Head  and  the 
shnals  off  it,  turn  it  off  to  the  south  westward  toward  Kntry  Island, 
leaving  nearly  slack  water  in  the  bay  between  (.'oflin  Ishuul  and  Cape 
Alright,  and  also  in  Pleasant  Bay.  Tlie  other  branch,  tu  the  northward 
of  the  islands,  follows  the  shore  from  East  Point  round  to  Southwest 
Cape  of  Amherst  Island,  whence  the  greater  part  of  the  stream  contin- 
ues its  coarse  to  the  SW.;  whilst  the  remainder,  following  the  shore, 
runs  round  and  along  the  southern  coast  of  Amherst  Island,  until  it 
meets  the  before-mentioned  other  branch  of  the  stream  from  the  East 
Point,  setting  oft"  the  east  side  of  Entry  Island.  It  is  overcome  by  this 
other  branch,  and  turned  gradually  round  to  join  the  general  weak 
stream  of  flood  to  the  westward  in  the  offing. 

On  the  SE.  side  of  the  islands  the  stream  of  the  ebb  tide  sets  strongly 
out  of  the  lajfoons  and  out  of  Pleasant  Bay,  between  the  Sandy  Hook 
and  Entry  Island.  It  i.s  also  often  found  running  to  the  westward 
along  the  southern  shores  of  Amherst  Island,  and  right  round  it  in  like 
manner,  but  contrary  in  direction,  to  the  course  of  the  flood  already 
described.  In  the  offing,  at  the  same  time,  the  stream  of  ebb  is  from 
the  SW.,  and  sets  over  the  Long  Spit  oft'  the  East  Point,  where  it  meets 
the  stream  from  the  NW.,  which,  has  followed  the  north  shore  of  the 
islands,  round  from  Amherst  Island  to  the  East  Point.  The  met^tiug  of 
these  two  streams  of  the  ebb  tide,  together  with  the  shoalness  of  the 
water,  causes  so  heavy  a  breaking  sea  in  strong  easterly  winds  that  the 
fishing  shallops  dare  not  venture  at  times  to  pass  the  point. 

The  rate  of  either  stream  seldom  amounts  to  a  knot,  excepting  close 
inshore,  or  round  the  points.  The  ebb,  however,  is  generally  the 
strongest  stream,  and  its  rate  is  increased  by  westerly  winds,  as  is  that 
of  the  flood  by  winds  from  the  eastward. 

(II.  O.  Charts  Nus.  1108  and  1109.) 

Anticosti  Island  is  122  miles  long  and  30  miles  in  extreme  breadth. 
Its  shores  are  everywhere  of  rock,  affording  in  some  parts  excellent 
building  stone,  of  which  the  two  lighthouses  have  been  constructed. 
On  and  near  the  coasts  the  limestone  is  covered  with  a  thick  and  often 
impenetrable  forest  of  dwarf  spruce,  which,  in  some  exposed  situations, 
is  only  a  few  feet  in  height,  with  gnarled  branches,  so  twisted  and 
matted  together  that  a  man  may  wnlk  for  &  considerable  distance  on 
their  summits.  Extensive  banks  of  limestone  shingle,  bush  swamps, 
morasses,  and  also  beds  of  peat  are  of  common  occurrence. 

Anticosti  is  nowhere  higher  than  700  feet  above  the  sea.  Its  south 
coast  is  low  and  shelving,  with  reefs  of  flat  limestone  which  dry  at  low 
water.  There  is,  however,  a  range  of  highlands  in  rear  of  Soutliwest 
Point,  and  extending  for  some  miles  both  to  the  northwestward  and 
southeastward  of  it.    The  north  coast  for  70  or  80  miles  to  the  Avest- 


n 


ANTIC08TI    ISLAND. 


47 


the  SK.,  and  is 
Kill  of  the  stream 
y  Head  and  the 
I  Kntry  Island, 
fland  and  Cape 
)  the  northward 
il  to  Southwest 
D  stream  contin- 
uing the  shore, 
Island,  until  it 
I  from  the  East 
s'crcome  by  this 
e  general  weak 

de  sets  strongly 
lie  Sandy  Hook 

the  westward 
round  it  in  like 
e  flood  already 

of  ebb  is  from 
,  where  it  meets 
th  shore  of  the 

The  met^ting  of 
hoalness  of  the 

winds  that  the 
oint. 

excepting  close 
}  generally  the 
rinds,  as  is  that 


ctreme  breadth, 
parts  excellent 
en  constructed, 
thick  and  often 
osed  situations, 
80  twisted  and 
t)le  distance  on 
,  bush  swamps, 
nee. 

sea.  Its  sonth 
hich  dry  at  low 
r  of  Sontliwest 
liweatward  and 
es  to  the  Avest- 


ward  of  Kast  Cape  is  bold,  precipitous,  and  of  considerable  elevation. 
Tlio  headlands  end  in  magnificent  clin's  of  limestone,  which  are  exter- 
nally so  nearly  white  from  the  oflects  oi'  tlie  weatlu'r  as  to  reseujble 
chalk.  The  remainder  of  the  north  (Mnist  is  low,  witli  reefs  of  flat 
limestone,  like  the  southern  shores. 

Harbors.— It  is  unusual  to  find  an  island  so  huge  as  Anficosti  with- 
out a  good  harbor;  the  best  are  only  suitable  for  vessels  drawing  10  to 
15  feet, 

Tlie  reefs  of  flat  limestone,  extending  in  some  parts  to  IJ  miles  from 
the  shore,  the  want  of  anchorage  off  most  ])arts  of  the  coast,  and,  above 
all,  the  freciuent  fogs,  render  great  caution  necessary  in  approaching  the 
coast  of  til  is  island. 

Productions.— The  interior  of  Anticosti  is  probably  less  sterile,  for 
white  spruce  spars  have  been  seen  large  enough  for  the  masts  of  a 
schooner  of  UO  tons,  and  others  of  juniper  (a  species  of  larch),  of  excel 
lent  quality,  and  of  suflicient  size  to  form  the  keel  of  a  vessel  of  the 
same  dimensions.  Black  and  white  birch,  and  ash,  the  latter  of  bad 
quality,, complete  the  list  of  trees  which  attain  to  any  si/e  upon  the 
island. 

risheriea  and  Bacports.— Many  of  the  streams  abound  with  trout, 
and  are  periodically  visited  by  numbers  of  salmon.  Seals  frequent  the 
reefs  and  are  killed  annually  in  great  numbers.  Codfish  and  halibut 
are  taken  off  several  parts  of  the  coast,  which  is  occasionally  resorted 
to  by  fishing  vessels  from  the  maritime  provinces  of  tlie  Dominion  of 
Canada.  Black  bears  ar«  numerous  in  the  interior  of  the  island.  Their 
skins,  salted  fish,  seal  skins,  and  oil,  with  the  furs  of  smaller  animals, 
form  the  greater  portion  of  the  exports. 

Wild  geese,  outardes,  and  ducks  of  various  spe^jies  are  abundant. 

Population.— The  inhabitants  of  Anticosti,  including  the  lighthouse 
keepers  and  their  families,  numbered  253  in  1891,  and  resided  prin- 
cipally at  Jupiter,  Pavilion,  and  Becscie  rivers,  and  at  Salt  Lake  and 
Fox  Bays. 

Climate.— The  climate  of  Anticosti,  from  its  proximity  to  an  open 
sea,  is  probably  not  more  severe  in  winter  than  that  of  Quebec,  although 
liarther  to  the  north,  but  the  summers  are  cold,  wet,  and  stormy,  with 
frequent  fogs.  Frosts  are  common  in  August,  and  in  some  severe  sea- 
sous  they  occur  in  every  mouth  of  the  year.  It  is  probable  that  no 
other  grain  but  barley  would  ripen  here,  unless  it  might  be  oats  occa- 
sionally  in  sheltered  situations.  Potatoes  are  frequently  prevented  by 
early  frosts  from  coming  to  perfection,  although  planted  in  the  most 
favorable  situations. 

Communication.— The  Dominion  steamer,  carrying  supplies  to  the 
lighthouses,  visits  Anticosti  twice  annually,  and  La  Canadienne,  another 
Dominion  steamer,  calls  officially  from  Gaspe  five  or  six  times  during 
each  summer. 

Rivers.— Streams  of  excellent  water  descend  to  the  sea  on  every  part 


48 


GULP   C)l'    81'.    LAWKKNCK — ISLANDH. 


of  the  coasts  of  Antlrosti.  They  me  Kt'iuTully  too  sinsill  to  admit  boats, 
becoming  nipid  imratMliiitely  within  their  cntiaiicea,  and  even  the  hirgeHt 
of  them,  Observation  Ilivor,  northward  of  S«mtliwest  I'oint,  is  barred 
witli  sand,  excepting  for  short  intervals  of  time  after  the  spring  freshets 
or  heavy  rains. 

Lights.— Four  lighthouses  are  erected  on  Anticiosti— one  on  Heath 
Point,  at  the  east  end  of  the  island;  one  on  Bagot  Bluff',  ij  mile  from 
South  Point;  another  on  Southwest  Point,  and  the  fourtli  on  West 
Point.    These  lights  will  be  described  in  their  places  hereafter. 

Ice  Report— At  each  of  the  lighthouses  on  Anticosti  there  is  a  tele- 
graph and  signal  station,  which  receives  and  transmits  special  reiwrts 
on  ice,  etc.,  during  the  months  of  April  and  May. 

Telegraph  Signal  Stations.— In  addition  to  the  lighthouses  there 
are  marine  telegraph  and  signal  stations  at  Bescie  Itiver,  Jupiter  River, 
and  Shallop  Creek,  all  of  which  are  connected  together  and  to  the  main- 
land at  Great  Fox  River  by  telegraph  lines. 

There  are  direction  boards  erected  on  the  shore,  or  nailed  to  trees 
from  which  the  branches  have  been  cut  off,  near  the  beach,  and  on  vari- 
ous parts  of  the  coast.  These  boards  are  intended  to  point  out  to  ship- 
wrecked i)er8ons  the  way  <>  the  provision  posts,  and  were  placed  on 
the  following  parts  of  the  shore :  At  30  miles  westward  of  Shallop  Creek 
and  at  21  miles  eastward  of  Shallop  Creek. 

East  Cape  is  a  long,  rounded  projection,  the  southeastern  termina- 
tion of  one  of  the  numerous  densely  wooded  ridges  in  this  portion  ot 
the  island,  the  seaward  extremity  being  a  limestone  cliff  49  feet  high. 
The  northern  side  of  the  cape  is  steep-to,  but  from  the  SB.  extreme  a 
ledge,  dry  at  low  water,  extends  i  mile.  Two  of  the  boilers  of  S.  S.  Ctrce, 
lost  in  1801,  are  prominent  objects  on  this  ledge. 

A  conspicuous  patch  of  sand  in  the  face  of  a  steep  slope  lies  close 
south  of  this  ledge,  and  southward  of  it  the  cliff"  rises  to  a  height  of  UO 
feet,  falling  again  to  45  feet  in  a  projection  that  forms  the  north  side  of 

Wreck  Bay. 

Wreck  Bay  is  a  shallow  bight,  and  the  shores  are  foul  to  the  dis- 
tance of  nearly  ^  mile,  while  near  the  north  side  is  an  isolated  rock  with 
10  feet  on  it  at  low  water.  The  holding  ground  is  of  rock,  and  the  bay 
affords  indifferent  anchorage,  but  it  is  frequented  by  fishing  vessels 
during  NW.  winds.  With  southerly  or  easterly  winds  tlie  bay  should 
not  be  approached,  as  a  heavy  sea  rolls  in.  Landing  may  generally  be 
effected,  except  in  bad  weather,  in  the  western  corner  of  the  bay  near 
a  small  storehouse,  where  a  projection  of  the  shore  reef  gives  some  shel- 
ter to  boats;  but  if  there  is  much  swell,  the  shore  must  be  approached 
with  great  caution.  There  is  a  lake  of  fresh  water  close  inshore  of  the 
landing  place. 

Heath  Point  is  of  limestone,  about  10  feet  high,  with  a  superstratum 
of  peat,  in  which  there  are  several  ponds  of  dark  bog  water.  Being  so 
low,  this  point  disappears  below  the  horizon  at  a  distance  of  a  few 


I 

i- 


-    ■-•to  • 


ANTIC08TI    18LANI). 


49 


)  a<lmit  l)«)ntH, 

lint,  irt  biiired 
priiig  freshets 

y\w  oil  Heivth 
or,  ij  mile  from 
iirth  on  West 
•eafter. 

there  is  a  tele- 
ipecial  rei)ort8 

ithousea  there 
.Inpiter  River, 
ndtothe  tnain- 

nailed  to  trees 
oh,  and  on  vari- 
»int  out  to  ship- 
ivere  placed  on 
f  Shallop  Creek 

astern  termina- 
this  portion  ot 

iff  49  feet  high. 
SB.  extreme  a 

rs  of  S.  S.  Circe, 

slope  lies  close 

a  height  of  90 

he  north  side  of 

foul  to  the  dis- 

jlated  rock  with 

)ck,  and  the  bay 

fishing  vessels 

the  bay  should 

lay  generally  be 

of  the  bay  near 

gives  some  shel- 

t  be  approached 

ie  inshore  of  the 

a  superstratum 
Fater.  Being  so 
stance  of  a  few 


miles;  the  lighthouse  thon  apitears  like  a  sail  ott'  the  island,  and  is 
extremely  usetbl  in  niaiking  the  extent  of  the  low  land  to  vesHeln, either 
from  the  eastward  or  westward,  as  well  as  in  showing  itH  position  from 
the  southward,  front  which  direction  the  low  poitit  can  not  be  made 
out  at  night,  being  obHcured  by  the  high  land  behind  or  to  the 
northward. 

Light — The  lighthouse  on  Heath  Point  is  a  circular  tower,  05  feet 
high,  and  painted  white,  with  one  red  horizontal  band  that  exhibits 
between  the  bearings  of  S.  27°  VV,  (S.  55°  W.  mag.)  and  N.  (>1°  10.  (N. 
89<^  B.  mag.),  at  an  elevation  of  110  feet,  a  fixed  white  light  which  should 
be  visible  15  miles. 

Fog  Signal. — During  thick  weather,  fogs,  or  snowstorms,  a  !otton 
powder  cartridge  will  be  fired  every  twenty  minutes. 

Heath  Point  Reef  extends  with  foul  ground  1^  miles  southeastward 
from  the  lighthouse  to  the  depth  of  5  fathoms.  A  rock,  with  .'i  fathoms 
water  over  it,  lies  east  (8.62°  E.  mag.)  1^  miles  from  the  lighthouse, 
with  depths  of  6  to  7  fathoms  between  it  and  the  shore  reef,  but  with 
any  swell  there  are  breakers  over  both  reef  and  shoal.  A  bank,  with  10 
fathoms  water  on  it,  lies  8. 84°  E.  (S.  56°  E.  mag.)  4  miles  from  the  ligJit- 
house,  and  ^  mile  farthur  southward  is  another  bank  with  11  fathoms 
water  over  it.  Over  all  these  shoals  there  are  strong  tide  rips  during 
spring  tides,  and  in  bad  weather  overfalls  resembling  breakers. 

Caution. — The  attention  of  mariners  is  directed  to  the  great  change 
of  variation  between  Belle  Isle  Strait  and  the  SE.  end  of  Anticosti 
Island,  as  there  is  a  difference  of  over  7  degrees  between  Belle  Isle  and 
Heath  Point.  This,  if  not  allowed  for,  has  the  tendency  of  setting 
vessels  toward  Anticosti  when  bound  southward  through  the  strait. 

Ample  warning  of  approach  to  the  land  can  be  obtained  by  the  lead. 

Soundings. — The  deep  water  eastward  of  Anticosti  approaches  nearer 
the  island  than  hitherto  charted.  The  lines  of  20  and  .'iO  fathoms,  which 
oft'  East  Cape  are,  respectively,  i  mile  and  1^  miles  distant  from  the 
shore,  turn  abruptly  southeastward,  forming  a  projecting  led}..  '^^'  Heath 
Point,  from  which  the  20  fathoms  line  is  7^  miles  and  the  •<'  fathoms 
line  is  13  miles  distant,  respectively.  The  line  of  60  fathoms,  which  off 
Table  Head  is  only  4  miles  from  the  land,  extends  to  2.'5  miles  K.  by  S. 
from  Heath  Point.  Southward  of  this  point  the  lin<i  of  50  fathoms 
again  approaches  the  shore,  being  only  8  miles  disiant  south  from 
Heath  Point,  o.^  miles  from  Goose  Point,  and  3.}  milps  from  South  Point, 
whih  the  line  of  10  fathoms  is  only  1:^  "dies  fi-om  South  Point,  with  no 
danger  southward  of  it. 

Cormorant  Point  is  a  conspicuous  steep  slope  of  red  clay  20  feet 
high,  backed  by  wooded  ridges,  which  here  approach  close  to  the  shore. 
Near  it  is  a  shallow  bight  in  which  is  a  lobster  factory,  abreast  which 
there  is  a  break  in  the  limestone  reef  that  elsewhere  fronts  the  coast  for 
distances  varying  from  100  to  800  yards.  Foul  ground  extends  ^  mile 
from  Cormorant  Point,  and  is  generally  shown  by  breakers. 
1151 4 


.A-4S;iUMki^ii^^^ii*xfisatr-JiiiMMc=' 


I 


l.t 


GULF   OF   ST.    LAWRENCE — ISLANDS. 


The  Coast  from  Oormoraut  Point  trends  westward  in  a  series  of 
small  bights  se])arated  by  low  points.  Goose  Point,  the  next  westward, 
may  be  distinguished  by  a  remarkable  clump  of  trees  $  mile  northeast- 
ward of  it.  A  lobster  factory  is  situated  2^  miles  eastward  of  Goose 
Point.  The  shore  reef  extends  from  Goose  Point  If  miles  to  the  depth 
of  3  fathoms. 

From  this  point  westward  the  shore  rises  to  a  height  of  300  feet  at 
4  miles  inland,  with  occasional  patches  of  swampy  land  and  numerous 
ponds.  Otter  River,  a  small  stream  that  boats  can  enter  at  high  water, 
lies  westward  of  Goose  Point,  and  at  4  miles  from  this  point  is  La 
Croix  Point.  Two  other  small  streams  that  boats  can  enter  at  high 
water,  the  western  known  as  Bell  Blver,  lie  between  this  and  South 
Point. 

South  Point  is  low  and  flat,  with  some  small  ponds  just  inshore  of  it, 
and  no  trees  within  a  distance  of  ^  mile  from  the  shore. 

Beacon. — A  wooden  beacon,  40  feet  high,  is  e^^cted  on  the  extreme 
of  the  point. 

Bagot  Bluff  is  a  slight  rise  in  the  coast  ^  mile  northwestward  of 
South  Point.  A  break  in  the  shore  reef  occurs  at  800  yards  westward 
of  the  lighthouse,  where  boats  can  land  in  moderate  weather. 

A  Rock  with  16  feet  water  on  it  lies  west  (N.  62°  W.  mag.)  2^  miles 
from  the  lighthouse  on  Bagot  Bluff. 

Light— On  Bagot  Bluff  is  an  hexagonal  tower,  54  feet  high,  painted 
white,  with  one  red  vertical  stripe,  which  exhibits,  at  an  elevation  of 
75  feet,  a  flashing  white  light  showing  a  flash  every  twenty  seconds. 
The  light  should  be  visible  14  miles. 

Fog  SignaL — During  snowstorms  and  in  thick  or  foggy  weather  a 
steam  horn,  100  yards  east  of  the  lighthouse,  will  be  sounded  for  a 
period  of  ten  seconds  in  every  minute,  with  an  interval  of  fifty  seconds 
between  blasts.  If  the  horn  is  out  of  order  a  whistle  will  sound  at  the 
same  intervals.    Neither  horn  nor  whistle  are  reliable. 

Aspect  of  Coast — From  South  Point  to  the  lighthouse  on  South- 
west Point,  a  distance  of  56  miles,  there  is  such  a  sameness  iu  the 
character  of  the  coast  that  it  is  very  difBculib  to  make  out  one  part 
from  another.  Fox  Biver,  a  small  stream,  lies  6  miles  westward  of 
Bagot  Bluft". 

Mariners  are  reminded  that  it  is  most  undesirable  to  close  this  shore 
without  due  cause,  as  the  survey  is  very  incomplete. 

In  this  distance  the  coast  is  very  low,  but  It  begins  to  rise  at  Pavilion 
Biver,  there  being  a  high  ridge  close  in  rear  of  the  coast  all  the  way  to 
Southwest  Point,  and  beyond  it  for  some  miles. 

Beaoon. — At  the  entrance  of  Pavilion  Biver,  where  there  is  a  lime- 
stone cliff,  is  a  white  beacon,  40  ieet  high. 

A  large  white  beacon,  40  feet  high,  is  placed  4  miles  SE.  of  Salt 
Lake  Bay. 

Salt  Lake  Bay,  11  miles  southeastward  of  Southwest  Point,  has 
fine  sandy  beaches,  inclosing  lagoons  or  ponds,  into  which  the  tide 


ANTICOSTI    ISLAND. 


51 


rd  in  a  series  of 
le  next  westward, 
^  mile  northeast- 
istward  of  Goose 
ailes  to  the  depth 

ght  of  300  feet  at 
tid  and  numerous 
ter  at  high  water, 
this  point  is  La 
Ban  enter  at  high 
a  this  and  South 

I  just  inshore  of  it, 

re. 

d  on  the  extreme 

northwestward  of 

lO  yards  westward 

weather. 

W.  mag.)  24  miles 

feet  high,  painted 
at  an  elevation  of 
y  twenty  seconds. 

r  foggy  weather  a 
be  sounded  for  a 
fal  of  fifty  seconds 
e  will  sound  at  the 
le. 

bthouse  on  South- 
a  sameness  iu  the 
lake  out  one  part 
miles  westward  of 

to  close  this  shore 

3  to  rise  at  Pavilion 
soast  all  the  way  to 

ere  there  is  a  lime- 
miles  SE.  of  Salt 

ithwest  Point,  has 
ito  which  the  tide 


flows.  Off  the  center  of  this  bay,  and  with  its  NW.  point  bearing  N. 
12°  W.  (N.  15°  E.  mag.),  distant  1^  miles,  there  is  very  indifferent 
anchorage,  in  7  fathoms,  over  sandy  bottom.  Vessels  should  be  care- 
ful not  to  anchor  farther  southward  and  eastward,  since  there  is  some 
foul  and  rocky  ground  about  one  mile  in  that  direction  from  the  position 
which  has  just  been  recommended.  There  are  7  fathoms  rocky  bottom 
marked  in  the  chart  on  the  spot  alluded  to,  and  there  is  probably  less 
water  between  it  and  the  southeastern  point  of  the  bay,  so  that  no  one 
should  attempt  to  pass  between  it  and  the  shore. 

Caution.— Between  South  and  Southwest  Points  of  Anticosti  the 
reefs  extend  one  mile  from  shore,  and  are  so  steep  that  there  is  little 
warning  by  the  lead.    This  part  of  the  south  coast  of  the  island  should 
therefore  be  approached  very  cautiously  at  night  or  in  foggy  weather. 
When  far  enough  westward  to  see  the  revolving  light  on  Southwest 
Point,  care  should  be  taken  not  to  bring  it  to  bear  to  the  westward  of 
N.  490  W.  (N.  220  W.  mag.). 
Telegraph.— There  is  a  telegraph  station  at  Salt  Lake  Bay. 
Southwest  Point  is  a  low  projecting  mound  of  limestone,  having  a 
small  cove  on  its  north  side,  which  forms  it  into  a  peninsula.    The  land 
rises  gradually  in  the  rear  of  this  to  the  summit  of  the  ridge  already 
mentioned.    On  the  south  side  of  the  point  there  is  a  beach  of  lime- 
stone gravel  on  which  boats  may  land,  as  well  as  in  the  cove  on  the 
north  side,  when  the  wind  is  off  shore  and  the  sea  smooth.    On  the 
north  side  of  the  point,  and  fop  several  miles  along  the  coast  to  Obser- 
vation River,  the  cliffs  are  perpendicular,  anc'  washed  by  the  sea.    A 
reef  extends  west  and  SW.  from  the  point  not  more  than  ^  mile;  and 
2  miles  oft",  in  the  same  direction,  there  are  30  fathoms,  over  rocky 
bottom,  deepening  rapidly  to  65  fathoms,  with  sand  and  shell  at  the 
distance  of  3  miles. 

L^ht— Southwest  Point  Lighthouse  stands  on  the  western  extremity 
of  the  point,  and  forms  a  conspicuous  landmark  by  day.  The  tower  is 
circular,  90  feet  high,  and  painted  white,  with  two  red  horizontal  bands, 
•and  exhibits  at  an  elevation  of  94  feet  a  revolving  white  ligbt  every 
minute;  the  light  should  be  visible  15  miles. 

Anchorage —Vessels  may  anchor  in  the  bay  on  the  north  side  of  the 
point  in  12  or  13  fathoms,  over  a  bottom  of  sand,  gravel,  and  broken 
shell,  with  the  extremity  of  the  point  bearing  south  (S.  270  W.  mag.) 
f  mile,  when  the  cliffs  eastward  will  be  at  the  same  distance.  The 
shelter  is  from  N.  by  W.,  roun'^.  easterly,  to  S.  by  E.,  and  small  vessels 
may  lie  closer  under  the  point,  but  it  is  a  dangerous  place  to  be  caught 
in  by  westerly  winds,  which  are  preceded  by  a  heavy  swell.  The  ground 
is  not  to  be  trusted,  and  no  vessel  can  be  recommended  to  anchor  here 
unless  in  case  of  necessity.  The  telegraph  cable  from  Great  Fox  River 
is  landed  on  the  outer  part  of  the  western  cove  of  this  bay.  Vessels 
should  anchor  nearer  the  eastern  shore  to  avoid  fouling  it. 

There  is  no  anchorage  from  Southwest  Point  to  Ellis  Bay.  The  reefs 
of  flat  limestone  extend  from  it,  in  most  parts,  fully  one  mile,  and  often 


^ 


■V-:^-igafeta;»!fe;*£;-v.-4^^-vffj,.--.-^f.-  ^ 


52 


GULF   OF   ST.    LAWRENCE — ISLANDS. 


Lave  10  or  12  fathmis  of  water  close  outside  of  them;  but  vessels  with 
the  lead  going  may  safely  stand  in  as  near  as  2  miles  or,  which  will  be 
safer  than  an  estimated  distance,  had  better  tack  in  17  fathoms. 

Observation  River,  5^  miles  northward  of  Southwest  Point,  is  the 
largest  stream  on  the  island,  having  5  or  0  feet  water  in  its  entrance, 
after  the  melting  of  the  snows  in  the  spring  of  the  year,  but  soon 
becomes  barred  with  saud  by  the  8W.  gales.  Its  source  does  not 
appear  to  be  known  to  the  people  of  tiie  island.  Immediately  north- 
ward of  this  river  there  are  conspicuous  and  high  sandy  cliffs. 

St  Mary  Cliffs,  21  miles  from  Southwest  Point,  are  also  of  sand, . 
less  high,  and  less  remarkable,  but  yet  not  difficult  to  distinguish. 

Beacon. — On  St.  Mary  Cliffs  is  a  beacon  40  feet  high,  painted  white. 

Becscie  River,  at  7  miles  northwestward  of  St.  Mary  Cliffs  and  12 
miles  southeastward  of  Ellis  Bay,  is  a  small  stream  at  the  head  of  a 
cove  affording  shelter  to  boats,  where  there  is  one  resident  family. 

Ellis  Bay  affords  the  only  tolerably  sheltered  anchorage  in  Anticosti. 
Vessels,  if  their  draft  is  not  too  great  lor  a  depth  of  3  fathoms,  may 
safely  lie  there  during  the  three  finest  months  of  summer,  namely,  June, 
July,  and  August,  but  they  should  moor  with  an  open  hawse  to  the 
southward.  If  of  larger  draft,  and  only  wishing  to  remain  for  a  few 
hours,  they  may  anchor  farther  out,  in  3J  and  4  fathoms,  but  neither 
the  ground  nor  the  shelter  will  be  found  so  good  as  farther  up  the  bay. 

Anchorage. — The  best  berth  in  Ellis  Bay  is  in  a  line  between  Cape 
Henry  and  White  Cliff",  Captain  Setter's  (formerly  Gamache)  house,  N. 
15°  W.  (N.  12°  E.  mag.),  and  Cape  Eagle,  S.  51°  E.  (S.  24°  E.  mag.), 
nearly.  The  vessel  will  then  be  in  3  fathoms  over  muddy  bottom,  uis- 
taut  about  600  yards  from  the  flats  on  either  side,  and  about  J  mile  from 
those  at  the  head  of  the  bay.  Southerly  winds  are  of  rare  occurrence; 
and  never  last  long.  Moreover,  when  they  do  occur  the  sea  is  much  less 
at  the  anchorage  than  might  be  expected,  although  very  heavy  in  the 
entrance  between  the  reefs. 

Heefs.— These  reefs  are  of  flat  limestone,  and  dry  at  low  water;  and 
as  the  tides  only  rise  from  4  to  7  feet,  the  sea  always  breaks  upon  them 
when  there  is  the  least  swell.  The  reef  off'  Cape  Henry  extends  nearly 
one  mile  southeastward,  and  that  oft"  Cape  Eagle  nearly  ^  mile  south- 
westward.  The  entrance  between  them  is  J  mile  wide,  between  the 
depth  of  3  fathoms  on  either  side.  Extensive  flats  proceed  from  these 
reefs  quite  around  the  ba,> ,  and  do  not  entirely  dry  at  low  water,  except 
in  very  low  spring  tides,  but  there  are  immense  bowlders  upon  them 
which  always  show.  These  flats  occasion  the  landing  to  be  very  bad, 
except  at  high  water,  which  is  the  only  time  that  supplies  of  good  water 
can  be  obtained  from  Gamache  Eiver. 

Directions. — Ellis  Bay  can  be  easily  made  out  from  the  sea,  for  Cape 
Henry  is  a  bluff  point,  and  the  land  being  very  low  at  the  head  of  the 
bay,  occasions  the  opening  to  show  distinctly.  On  a  nearer  approach, 
Cape  Eagle  and  White  Cliff"  on  the  east  side,  and  the  houses  near  the 
head  of  the  bay,  will  be  easily  recognized,  whilst  two  ridges  or  hills 


ut  vessels  with 
',  which  will  be 
fathoms. 
St  Point,  is  the 
u  its  entrance, 
year,  but  soon 
)urce  does  not 
lediately  north- 
er cliffs. 

e  also  of  sand, . 
istinguish. 
,  painted  white, 
ry  Cliffs  and  12 
;  the  head  of  a 
eut  family, 
ge  in  Anticosti. 
'i  fathoms,  may 
',  namely,  June, 
II  hawse  to  the 
emain  for  a  few 
ms,  but  neither 
her  up  the  bay. 
e  between  Cape 
ache)  house,  N. 
i.  240  E.  mag.), 
;dy  bottom,  liis- 
30ut  ^  mile  from 
'are  occurrence; 
sea  is  much  less 
iry  heavy  in  the 

low  water;  and 
eaks  upon  them 
'  extends  nearly 
ly  ^  mile  south- 
le,  between  the 
ceed  from  these 
w  water,  except 
iers  upon  them 
to  be  very  bad, 
es  of  good  water 

;he  sea,  for  Cape 
the  head  of  the 
learer  approach, 
houses  near  the 
0  ridges  or  hills 


ANTICOSTI    ISLAND. 


53 


MP 


will  be  seen  far  back  in  the  country,  and  to  the  northward  and  east- 
ward.   The  long  line  of  breakers  on  either  «ide,  and  the  numerous  large 
stones  80  tar  from  the  shore  ahead,  will  present  anything  but  an  agree- 
able appearance  to  those  who  may  approach  this  bay  for  the  first  time, 
but  there  wil  be  no  danger  if  the  following  directions  are  attended  to- 
In  approaching  Ellis  Bay  from  the  westward,  with  westerly  winds 
run  down  along  the  outside  of  the  reefs  off  Cape  Henry  by  the  lead 
and  in  10  fathoms,  until  the  west  side  of  White  Cliff  is  in  line  with  the 
east  side  of  the  western  of  two  hills  far  back  in  the  country,  and  bear- 
in^     '-n^'f-  ^'°  ^-  '""^•^'  '^'^'^  ''""^  "1^  ^^'tt  «^e«e  «'arks  on,  afd 
they  wdl  lead  into  smooth  water  close  under  Cape  Henry  Reef,  in  U 
fathoms.     Continue  running  in  with  these  marks  on  till  Setter  house 
bears  N.  150  W.  (N.  12o  E.  mag.);  then  haul  up  for  it,  and  anchor  in 
the  line  be  ween  Cape  Henry  and  White  Cli-;  as  previously  recom- 
mended.   The  lead  should  be  kept  going,  and  the  reefs  on  either  side 
should  not  be  approached  nearer  than  a  depth  of  3  fathoms  Avater  in 
any  part  until  the  vessel  arrives  at  the  anchorage 
In  running  for  the  bay  from  the  southeastward,  with  an  easterly 

InfhT?  r.r*'"'  ^"^  ^^"^  ''*'*  P**^"*  ^^  ^*P«  Eagle  Reef  than  the 
depth  of  7  fathoms,  until  the  east  side  of  White  Cliff  comes  in  line 
with  the  east  side  of  the  same  hul  as  before;  then  haul  up  with  this 
mark  on  until  Setter  house  bears  N.  150  W.  (S.  12°  E.  mag.),  and  pro- 
ceed  as  above  directed.  Take  notice  that  the  west  side  of  White  Cliff 
IS  used  for  the  leading  mark  in  westerly  winds  and  the  east  side  in 
easterly  winds,  the  intention  being  to  keep  the  vessel  in  either  case 
from  going  too  near  the  lee  side  of  the  channel. 

Boats  can  only  land  near  high  water. 

Tides.-It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Ellis  Bay  at  Ih.  45m  • 
ordinary  springs  rise  6  feet,  and  neaps  4  feet. 

Aspect  of  Coast-On  the  outside  of  Cape  Henry,  and  continuing  to 

!  P«"'' reefs  extend  li  miles  from  the  shore,  and  vessels  approach- 

charts  '"^^  ^'*"'^'  ^""^  ^^^''•^  ^  *^"  soundings  in  the 

West  Point  is  low  and  wooded,  with  reefs  which  do  notextend  beyond 
one  mile  from  the  shore,  and  vessels  may  pass  it  in  15  fathoms  water  at 
the  distance  of  If  miles. 

Light-^The  lighthouse  on  West  Point  is  a  circular  tower,  lOG  feet 
high,  painted  white,  with  two  red  vertical  stripes,  and  exhibits  at  an 
elevation  of  112  feet  above  the  sea  a  fixed  white  light,  which  should  be 
visible  in  clear  weather  from  a  distance  of  15  miles.  The  keener's 
dwelling  is  attached  to  the  lighthouse. 

Fog  SignaL-A  cotton  powder  cartridge  is  fired  every  twenty 
mmutes  during  foggy  weather  and  snowstorms. 

J'Tt  Pf^'^-Tlie  "oith  coast  of  Anticosti,  between  West  and 
^orth  Points,  IS  low,  with  reefs  of  flat  limestone,  extending  one  mile 
from  the  shore.  There  are  soundings,  in  moderate  depths,  for  more 
than  one  mile  out  from  the  reefs.    Vessels  should  not  go  nearer  than  a 


J 


54 


GULF   OF   ST.   LAWRENCE — ISLANDS. 


depth  of  25  fathoms  water.  In  the  rear  of  the  coast,  and  about  mid- 
way between  West  and  North  Points,  are  the  two  hills  or  ridges 
mentioned  as  forming  one  of  the  leading  marks  for  Ellis  Bay. 

North  Point  is  wooded,  of  moderate  height,  and  without  any  cliff. 
It  is  80  little  remarkable  as  to  be  only  distinguished  by  the  change 
which  takes  place  at  it  in  the  direction  of  the  coast     High  Cliff  Point, 
distant  13  miles  from  North  Point,  is  easily  recognized,  being  the  only 
cliff  on  the  island  that  has  a  talus  in  front  of  it,  or  that  has  not  its 
base  washed  by  the  sea  at  high  water. 
Beacon.— On  North  Point  is  a  whitewashed  beacon,  30  feet  high. 
Coast— From  High  Cliff  Point  to  West  Cliff,  a  distance  of  26  miles, 
the  coast  is  low  in  front,  with  ridges  of  considerable  elevation  a  few 
miles  back  in  the  country.    This  is  the  most  dangerous  part  of  the 
north  coast,  for  the  reefs  extend  nearly  2  miles  out  from  high-water 
mark,  beginning  at  some  low  cliff's  7  miles  eastward  of  High  Cliff  Point, 
and  continue  to  do  so  for  4  or  5  miles  eastward,  after  which  they  grad- 
ually diminish  in  breadth,  till  at  West  Cliff  they  are  not  more  than  one 
mile  from  the  shore.    There  is  more  or  less  warning  by  the  deep-sea 
lead  all  along  this  part  of  the  coast  until  West  Cliff  is  approached,  off 
which  there  are  70  fathoms  at  the  distance  of  IJ  miles  from  the  surf. 
Beacon.— On  West  Cliff  is  a  whitewashed  beacon, 30  feet  high. 
West  Cliff  is  very  remarkable,  for  there  is  no  other  high  cliff  near 
it.    It  appears  like  a  white  patch  on  the  land,  and  can  be  seen  from 
a  distance  of  20  miles.    Low  cliffs  commence  4  miles  southeastward  of 
West  Cliff',  and  continue  to  Charleton  Point,  under  which  vessels  may 
anchor  in  fine  weather  with  westerly  winds,  and  obtain  wood  and  wa,ter. 
Cape  Observation,  10  miles  farther  southeastward,  is  a  bold,  high, 
and  remarkable  headland.    On  its  west  side  there  is  a  magnificent 
range  of  grayish-white  cliffs  several   hundred  feet  high.     At  the 
extremity  of  the  cape  these  cliffs  become  suddenly  ^nuch  lower,  and 
then  rise  again  to  their  former  elevation  for  a  short  distance  on  the 
east  side.   Vessels  may  anchor  under  the  lee  of  Cape  Observation  with 
westerly  winds  and  fine  weather,  and  obtain  supplies  of  wood  and 
water  very  conveniently. 

Bear  Head  lies  12^  miles  farther  southeastward,  it  is  composed  ot 
grayish-white  cliffs  400  feet  high,  and  in  some  degree  resembles  Cape 
Observation.  The  intervening  coast  has  the  same  character,  is  bold, 
and  has  small  bays  between  the  cliff's.  Cape  Observation  has  no 
equally  high  cliffy  headlands  westward  of  it,  whilst  Bear  Head  has,  a 
difference  which  will,  independently  of  the  beacon  on  Bear  Head,  pre- 
vent the  one  from  being  mistaken  for  the  other. 

From  West  Cliff  to  Bear  Head  the  coast  is  bold,  there  being  in  most 
parts  a  depth  of  100  fathoms  within  3  miles  of  the  shore. 

Beacon.— On  Bear  Head  Cliff  is  a  beacon,  30  feet  high,  with  diamond- 
shaped  top  and  whitewashed. 

Bear  Bay  between  Bear  Head  and  Cape  Robert,  which  are  distant 
nearly  6  miles  from  each  other  NW.  and  SE.,  is  by  far  the  best  roadstead 


i-.\ 


ANTICOSTI    ISLAND. 


55 


ad  about  mid- 
ills  or  ridges 
Bay. 

jout  any  cliff. 
)y  the  chauge 
;li  Cliff  Point, 
»eing  the  only 
at  has  not  its 

)  feet  high. 
ce  of  26  miles, 
evation  a  few 
IS  part  of  the 
)m  high- water 
igh  Cliff  Point, 
ich  they  grad-  . 
more  than  one 
y  the  deep-sea 
bpproached,  off 
rom  the  snrf. 
feet  high, 
high  cliff  near 
a  be  seen  from 
iitheastward  of 
ch  vessels  may 
ood  and  water, 
s  a  bold,  high, 
a  magnificent 
bigh.     At  the 
uch  lower,  and 
[istance  on  the 
bservation  with 
8  of  wood  and 

;  is  composed  of 
resembles  Cape 
aracter,  is  bold, 
rvation  has  no 
ear  Head  has,  a 
iear  Head,  pre- 

•e  being  in  most 

e. 

I,  with  diamond- 

hich  are  distant 
e  best  roadstead 


on  the  north  coast  of  Anticosti,  and,  indeed,  the  only  one  in  which  a 
vessel  of  large  draft  would  like  to  anchor,  unless  she  had  some  partic- 
ular object  in  view.  It  is  sufficiently  roomy,  tlie  bottom  is  excellent 
for  holding,  the  depth  of  water  moderate,  and  the  shelter  extends  from 
NW.,  round  by  west  and  south,  to  SB.  by  E. 

Cape  Robert  consists  of  cliffs  of  the  same  color  and  elevation  as 
those  of  Bear  Head.  There  are  two  other  points  of  cliffs  300  feet  high 
within  the  bay,  the  southeasteruuiost  of  wliich  is  named  Tower  Point. 
The  best  anchorage  is  between  Tower  Point  and  Cape  Robert,  at  a  dis- 
tance of  one  mile  from  the  former,  as  well  ns  from  the  western  shore, 
and  in  13  fathoms  water  over  a  bottom  of  brown  mud. 

Bear  Bay  is  divided  into  three  smaller  bays  by  the  two  high  points 
of  cliff  already  mentioned.  In  each  of  these  bays  there  are  fine  bold 
beaches  of  sand  and  limestone  shingle,  and  streams  where  water  may 
be  easily  obtained.  But  the  principal  stream  is  Bear  River,  wliich 
enters  the  southernmost  of  the  tliree  bays  close  to  the  SB.  side  of 
Tower  Point.  It  is  too  shallow  and  rapid  to  admit  boats,  but  the  water 
IS  clear  and  good.  The  cliff's  in  Bear  Bay  are  of  grayish-white  lime- 
stone, m  thin  strata,  dipping  very  slightly  to  the  southward,  and  are 
perpendicular  or  overhanging.  At  the  extremities  of  the  points  the 
chffs  are  rounded  by  the  action  of  the  waves  and  atmosphere  so  as  to  re- 
semble towers,  which  resemblance  is  rendered  stronger  by  the  masonry- 
like appearance  of  th-  rock.    The  trees  are  of  diminutive  growth. 

Deep  Bay,  immediately  northwestward  of  Table  Head,  has  excellent 
shelter  at  the  head  in  5  to  9  fathoms  water,  with  a  bottom  of  clay  or 
mild,  from  all  winds  between  NNW.  round  by  west  to  BSE. 

Water  may  be  easily  obtained  from  a  stream  which  flows  into  the  SB. 
corner  of  the  bay. 

Table  Head  rises  to  a  height  of  260  feet  in  a  densely  wooded  sum- 
mit, but  the  form  of  a  table,  which  apparenUy  suggested  the  name,  is 
difficult  of  recognition.  A  limestone  ledge  extends  i  mile,  and  the  line 
of  5  fathoms  is  800  yardt,  respectively,  distant  from  the  head. 

The  coast  southward  trends  3^  miles  to  Pox  Point  and  has  a  flat 
reef  extending  nearly  ^  mile  from  it.  Nearly  midway  between  these 
points  18  a  break  in  the  reef  whero  boats  can  obtain  sheltered  landing 
at  lew  water  in  moderate  weather.  Thickly  wooded  ridges,  rising  to  a 
height  of  220  feet,  extend  southeastward  at  a  distance  of  2  miles  from 
the  coast,  the  intervening  space  alternating  in  swamps  and  patches  of 
dense  wood. 

Fox  Bay,  IJ  miles  southward  of  Fox  Point,  is  about  one  mile  wide 
and  deep,  with  a  sandy  beach  at  its  head,  where  there  is  a  stream  drain- 
ing the  ponds  and  swamps  mentioned  before.  The  north  shore  is  foul 
for  a  distance  of  600  yards  and  the  south  shore  for  400  yards.  In  the 
center  there  are  depths  of  2^  to  2f  fathoms,  the  latter  over  a  muddy 
bottom,  and  it  affords  anchorage  to  the  small  vessels  whi(!h  resort  here 
in  the  summer  for  fishing,  and  is  fairly  well  sheltered  from  the  sea  by 
the  shoals  fronting  the  bay. 


wm 


-■■-■*»u*4*»6E«*., .  ■i^»i*i»M^'aagfe<..Vft^»4  w  *:^  ■'Mt^tM.....*.^! 


Xi^ijifj^ii'f.ilia  -tnu-f-f^..- 


56  GULF    OP   ST.    LAWRENCE — ISLANDS. 

The  telegraph  station  and  the  houses  of  about  10  resident  families 
are  on  the  southern  shore. 

Reef  Point,  the  south  entrance  point  of  Fox  Bay,  is  low  avid  flat, 
and  behind  it  are  several  lagoons  and  swamps.  Shoal  water  extends 
north  i  mile  to  the  depth  of  3  fathoms,  and  close  beyond  it  is  a  detached 
shoal  with  9  feet  on  it  at  low  water,  and  occupying  a  space  ^  mile  long 
and  400  yards  broad.  The  whole  of  the  summit  of  the  ridge  on  Table 
Head  open  east  of  Fox  Point  leads  close  eastward  of  this  shoal. 

Wreck  Point  is  3  miles  southward  of  Reef  Point,  the  intermediate 
coast  forming  a  small  bight.  The  shore  reef  extends  more  than  200 
yards  froip  this  ])oint,  and  foul  ground  extends  southward  one  mile. 

The  ridge  rises  to  a  conspicuous  woo^Jed  summit  316  feet  above  high 
water,  at  Ijf  miles  inland,  with  a  bluflf  at  the  north  extreme,  and  a  little 
southward  of  it  are  two  remarkable  detached  summits  on  the  ridge 
extending  toward  East  Oape.  This  is  the  most  conspicuous  land  in  the 
southeastern  part  of  the  island. 

Cape  Sandtop  is  a  remarkable  headland  rising  steeply  to  a  height 
of  120  feet,  and  is  composed  of  marl  and  gravel  that  from  seaward 
resembles  white  sand.  Thert  is  no  secure  anchorage  in  the  bight 
between  this  and  Wreck  Point.  Southward  of  Cape  Sandtop  the  lime 
stone  cliflFs  continue  to  a  conspicuous  perpendicular  bluft'  116  feet  high, 
and  from  this  they  fall  gradually  toward  East  Oape,  forming  a  small 
bight,  in  which  there  is  sheltered  anchorage  with  westerly  winds  in  JO 
to  12  iathoms  over  sand  and  rock. 

Tides.— It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Heath  Point  at  llh. 
20m. ;  springs  rise  4 J  feet  and  neaps  rise  2  feet.  The  tidal  streams  run 
strongly  round  the  point  at  spring  tides  to  a  distance  of  5  or  0  miles 
from  the  shore.  The  flood  stream  runs  generally  northeastward  and 
the  ebb  southwestward,  but  at  a  distance  of  5  miles  from  the  land 
the  streams  turn  at  1^  hours  before  high  and  low  water  by  the  shore. 
During  neap  tides  these  streams  are  much  modified  both  in  ibrce  and 
direction  by  the  wind.  Between  East  Cape  and  Table  Head  there  is 
an  almost  constant  stream  to  the  southward,  with  an  occasional  weak 
eddy  northeastward  close  to  the  shore.  This  stream  sometimes  sets 
sharply  round  Bast  Cape  into  Wreck  Bay,  and  necessitates  caution  in 
this  locality.  Westward  of  Cormorant  Point  the  flood  stteam  runs 
westward  and  the  ebb  eastward,  but  the  rates  and  directions  are  much 
affected  by  the  wind,  and  occasionally  the  stream  has  been  noticed  to 
run  in  one  or  the  other  direction  for  a  whole  day  without  change,  and 
generally  the  tidal  streams  are  very  irregular.  Between  West  Cliff 
and  Table  Head  there  is  generally  very  little  stream  in  any  direction. 
Occasionally  winds  from  the  westward  converge  from  both  sides  of  the 
island  toward  Heath  Point.  Between  the  junction  of  the  winds  and 
the  shore  there  is  generally  a  space  of  light  and  variable  airs  from  6 
to  8  miles  eastward  of  the  island.  Sailing  vessels  should  be  careful 
under  these  circumstances  not  to  approach  the  island  within  this  space. 


J! 


dent  families 

low  avid  flat, 
'ater  extends 
is  a  detached 
e  ^  mile  long 
idge  on  Table 
sboal. 

intermediate 
ore  than  200 
L  one  mile, 
it  above  high 
te,  and  a  little 
on  the  ridge 
as  land  in  the 

ly  to  a  height 
^om  seaward 
in  the  bight 
dtop  the  lime 
116  feet  high, 
miug  a  small 
y  winds  in  JO 

Point  at  lib. 
il  streams  run 
)f  5  or  G  miles 
eastward  and 
i'om  the  laud 
by  the  shore. 
h  in  ibrce  and 
Head  there  is 
casional  weak 
ometimes  sets 
btes  cantion  in 
[  stteam  runs 
ions  are  much 
eeu  noticed  to 
t  change,  and 
en  West  Cliff 
any  direction. 
)h  sides  of  the 
;he  winds  and 
le  airs  from  5 
lid  be  careful 
liin  this  space. 


CHAPTER    III. 

CAPE  BRETON  ISLAND,  WEST  COAST,  AND  3T.  GEORGE  BAY. 

CAPE  BRETON  ISLAND. 

H.  O.  CLurtNo.  611. 

West  Coast— The  west  coast  of  Cape  Breton  Island  is  dangerous  of 
access  and  possesses  no  harbor  but  Port  Hood. 

Caution.— It  is  a  dangerous  coast  to  be  near  in  autumn  or  early  win- 
ter, when  the  prevailing  NW.  winds  send  in  a  heavy  sea,  and  the  set 
ot  the  current  is  often  in  the  same  direction.  The  swell  frequently 
precedes  the  wind  by  many  hours,  and  as  there  is  no  good  holding 
ground,  it  becomes  dangerous  to  vessels  caught  close  inshore. 

The  Fisheries  are  valuable.  Salmon  are  taken  in  all  the  principal 
streams,  and  the  Margaree  is  so  celebrated  for  its  salmon  fishery  that 
It  has  sometimes  been  called  the  Salmon  River.  Herring,  mackerel, 
cod,  etc.,  abound  in  their  seasons,  and  are  frequently  taken  in  large 
quantities.  The  seal  fishery  is  also  attempted  occasionally,  but  is  a 
precarious  pursuit. 

Currents.— Even  with  a  smooth  sea  and  in  fine  summer  weather,  ves- 
sels are  set  in  toward  this  coast,  an  efifect  which  seems  to  be  due  some- 
times to  the  general  current  from  the  NW.  coming  from  between  the 
Magdalen  Islands  and  Prince  Edward  Island,  and  at  other  times  to  the 
direction  of  the  ebb  stream  from  Northumberland  Strait,  inclining 
toward  these  sliores.  These  streams,  beinginconstant  and  irregular  both 
m  strength  and  direction,  are  therefore  the  more  dangerous,  and  require 
the  more  to  be  guarded  against.  In  the  summer  months,  however,  tlie 
rate  of  the  current  or  tides  will  not  be  found  to  exceed  one  knot  even 
close  inshore,  excepting  round  Cape  St.  Lawrence  and  Cape  Nortb 
where  it  sometimes  runs  at  the  rate  of  2  or  3  knots,  causing  a  heavy 
breaking  sea.  Its  direction  for  three-fourths  the  time  is  from  the  west- 
ward. This  appears  to  be  due  to  the  combined  action  of  the  current 
and  ebb  tide  predominating  over  the  flood  stream  from  the  NM,  so  as 
to  render  it  nearly  imperceptible,  excepting  at  or  near  the  spring  tides. 
There  is  no  doubt  that  winds,  present  or  at  a  distance,  also  influence 
these  streams,  as  they  have  been  observed  to  do  fh  aft  parts  of  the 
gulf. 

Cape  Worth,  the  north  extremity  of  Cape  Breton  Island,  is  a  bold 
and  rocky  headland,  of  slate  in  nearly  vertical  strata,  rising  abruptlv 
from  the  sea  to  the  height  of  1,00(>  feet.    Tliere  is  no  shallow  water  off 

57 


-'■^m 


iiJ* 


''WBSBBier,'.:_-i^„,  iH^ ,- . 


>'^^1Wffift'ife^j>.TM^M 


i 


4:  I 


68 


CAPE   BRETON    ISLAND — WE8T   COAST. 


it,  only  some  rocks  above  water, -which  at  Money  Point,  a  mile  to  the 
SE.  of  the  cjipe,  run  off  a  short  distance.  The  passage  between  this 
headland  and  St.  Tanl  Island  is  13  miles  wide,  with  deep  water,  and  no 
other  danger  than  that  which  arises  from  the  frequent  and  heavy 
squalls  whi(!h  i)revail  off  this  great  promontory. 

Light— North  Cape  lighthouse,  a  square  building  with  a  white 
tower  erected  on  it,  26  feet  high,  stands  one  mile  SE.  of  Money  Point. 
The  light  is  exhibited  74  feet  above  the  sea  level  and  is  a  revolving  red 
and  white  light  every  forty-flve  seconds.  It  should  be  visible  15  miles. 
Tides.— It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Cape  North  at  8h.; 
si)ring8  rise  4  feet. 

St  Lawrence  Bay,  between  Cape  North  and  Black  Point,  is  4J 
miles  wide  and  1^  miles  deep,  with  bold  shores,  and  a  depth  of  water 
not  too  great  for  anchoring;  but  the  bottom  is  not  to  be  trusted,  being 
either  of  rock  or  loose  sand.  V^essels  requiring  supplies  may  anchor 
there  in  the  summer  mouths,  when  strong  northerly  winds  are  of  rare 
occurrence,  and  will  find  9  or  10  fathoms  water  at  the  distance  of  i  mile 
ofl'  shore  in  the  bottom  of  the  bay,  but  they  should  be  ready  to  weigh 
immediately  on  the  approach  of  a  wind  from  the  sea.  At  Deadman 
Pond  and  Wreck  Cove  there  are  settlements  and  good  landing,  the 
principal  fishing  establishment  being  at  the  first-named  place. 

Cape  St  Lawrence,  which  forms  the  NW.  termination  of  the  west 
coast  of  Cape  Breton  Island,  is  of  slate  rock,  affording  no  landing 
except  on  the  west  side,  where  there  is  a  brook,  and  a  steep  stony 
beach,  on  which  a  boat  can  be  hauled  up  with  difficulty.  Round  this 
headland  to  the  SB.  is  the  remarkable  Bear  Hill,  a  sugarloaf  750  feet 
high,  and  close  to  the  shore.  This  is  distant  leas  than  a  mile  from  the 
cape;  and  at  an  equal  distance  farther  is  Black  Rock,  always  above 
water,  and  about  360  yards  off  shore. 

Meat  Cove,  where  there  is  a  settlement  and  good  lauding  for  boats, 
lies  600  yards  farther  in  the  same  direction,  and  about  a  mile  westward 
from  Black  Point. 

Lights.— On  the  north  extreme  of  Cape  St.  Lawrence  there  is  a 
8(iuare  white  lighthouse,  56  feet  high,  from  which  is  exhibited  two  fixed 
white  lights,  at  137  feet  and  95  feet  above  high-water  mark,  visible, 
respectively,  17  and  15  miles. 

The  upper  light  is  visible  seaward  from  N.  58°  E.  (N.  84°  E.  mag.)  to 
S.  69°  W.  (N.  85°  W.  mag.)  and  the  lower  light  from  N.  61°  E.  (N.  87° 
E.  mag.)  to  S.  06°  W.  (N.  88°  W.  mag.). 
The  keeper's  dwelling  is  attached  to  the  lighthouse. 
Telegraph  and  Signal  Station.— Meat  Cove  is  in  telegraphic  com- 
munication with  the  United  States  and  Canada. 

Information  as  to  ice,  wind,  temperature,  and  weather  indications 
may  be  obtained  during  the  months  of  April  and  May,  by  communi- 
cating with  the  signal  station.    The  signals  used  are  flags. 
Coast— From  Cape  St.  Lawrence  to  Grandanse,  a  distance  of  15 


mm 


,  a  mile  to  the 

between  this 

water,  and  no 

it  and  heavy 

with  a  white 
Money  Point, 
revolving  red 
sible  15  miles. 
North  at  8h.; 

s.  Point,  is  4J 
lepth  of  water 
trusted,  being 
is  may  anchor 
ds  are  of  rare 
tance  of  ^  mile 
eady  to  weigh 
At  Deadman 
1  landing,  the 
place. 

)n  of  the  west 
ig  no  landing 
a  steep  stony 
r.  Bound  this 
arloaf  750  feet 
b  mile  from  the 
,  always  above 

ding  for  treats, 
mile  westward 

ace  there  is  a 

bited  two  fixed 

mark,  visible, 

34°  E.  mag.)  to 
61°  E.  (N.  87° 


ilegraphic  com- 

iier  indications 
f,  by  communi- 

kgS. 

distance  of  15 


CHETICAN   ISLAND   AND   HARBOR. 

miles,  the  coast  is  mountainous,  with  precipitous  shores,  attording  an 
iiiditt'e'ent  landing  for  boats  at  one  or  two  places,  niul  there  only  with 
a  smojth  sea.  At  Grandause  there  is  a  settlement,  and  a  small  river 
silted  u;>  by  a  shingle  beach  on  which  boats  can  land  and  be  Imuled 
over  in  case  of  need.  From  Orandanse  to  Pres([u'ile,  where  the  foot  of 
the  mountains  are  close  to  the  shore,  there  are  no  inhabitants  nor  any 
good  landing  place. 

Jerome  Ledge,  with  only  5  feet  water,  lies  N.  30°  E.  (N.  55°  E.  mag.) 
from  Cape  Gros,  and  at  the  distance  of  1^  miles,  it  is  of  considerable 
extent,  being  g  mile  long,  and  its  NPi.  point  reaches  to  the  distance  of 
a  mile  from  the  shore.  The  line  of  10  fathoms  water  is  only  000  yards 
outside  this  ledge  and  the  Caveau  Shoals.  There  is,  therefore,  little 
warning  from  the  lead,  but  vessels  beating  along  shore  and  standing 
toward  them  will  avoid  them  by  tacking  when  the  points  on  the  outside 
of  Cheticaii  Island  come  in  line,  bearing  S.  27°  W.  (S,  51}°  W,  mag.). 

Caveau  Shoals.— Caveau  Shoals,  which  are  much  in  tlie  way  of 
vessels  wishing  to  anchor  off  the  entrance  of  Chetican  Harbor,  are  two 
rocky  patches,  with  11  feet  least  water,  lying  at  the  distance  of  ^  mile 
off  Caveau  Point,  and  N.  30°  E.  (N.  55°  E.  mag.),  from  ^  to  f  mile  from 
Cape  Gros. 

Chetican  Island. — Chetican  Island  is  only  an  island  when  high  tides 
overflow  the  low  and  narrow  beach  of  sand  and  shingle  which  at  other 
times  unites  it  to  the  mainland  at  its  southern  extremity.  This  beach 
forms  the  shore  of  the  bay,  within  the  SW.  point  of  the  island,  where 
the  vessels  employed  in  the  fisheries  usually  lie  moored  during  the 
summer  months,  receiving  some  shelter  from  the  shoal  which  runs  out 
J  mile  southward  from  Chetican  Point,  out  completely  exposed  to 
winds  from  between  SSW.  and  WNW.,  which  send  in  a  heavy  sea. 
The  depth  of  water  on  this  roadstead  is  4*  fathoms,  but  the  bottom, 
of  sand  and  gravel,  is  so  loose  and  bad  for  holding  that  the  anchor- 
age becomes  quite  unsafe  after  the  month  of  August. 

At  no  time  is  this  anchorage  to  be  recommended,  and  therefore  ves- 
sels merely  wishing  to  communicate  with  the  shore  had  better  anchor 
outside  at  the  distance  of  a  mile  or  two,  where  they  will  have  room  to 
weigh  in  the  event  of  the  wind  coming  in  from  the  westward. 

There  is  no  landing  on  the  outside  of  Chetican  Island,  where  the 
cliffs  of  sandstone,  containing  coal  fossils,  are  everywhere  perpendicular 
or  overhanging,  being  constantly  undermined  by  the  sea.  These  cliff's, 
which  extend  the  whole  length  of  the  island,  from  Enragee  Point  south 
to  Chetican  Point,  are  nearly  equal  in  elevation  to  any  part  of  the 
island,  rising  in  one  part  to  the  height  of  200  feet  above  the  sea. 

Chetican  Harbor,  between  the  island  and  the  mainland,  is  entered 
from  the  northward  between  the  shingle  pit  at  Cape  Gros,  the  NE. 
extreme  of  the  Island,  and  Caveau  Point.  Within  this  entrance,  but 
outside  the  bar,  which  is  ^  mile  farther  in,  small  fishing  vessels  some- 
times anchor,  but  the  northerly  winds  send  in  so  heavy  a  sea  that  this 


■  ■■«f*««»6iW<i«iaw«4*^«Wi«s**M»|«is-3»S^ 


J 


■♦^p 


.±ll.tkl.j;..,f^-_ 


60 


CAPE    HKETON    I8LAND — WEST   C0A8T. 


18  considered  even  loss  secure  than  the  unHafe  anchorage  ut  the  SW. 
end  of  the  island.  'I'here  is  a  depth  of  3i  fathoms  witliin  the  liarbor, 
but  only  2  feet  at  low  water  over  its  bar  of  sand,  which  is  then  in  great 
part  dry. 

Supplies. — The  establishment  on  Chotican  Point  is  the  principal 
fishing  station  on  this  coast,  and  will  be  easily  recognized  by  the  build- 
ings, fish  stages,  and  fiagstaft'.  There  are  several  other  houses  on  the 
inner  side  of  the  island,  and  a  settlement  of  Acadians  on  the  mainland 
opposite,  where  supplies  of  fresh  provision  to  a  limited  extent  may  be 
obtained,  and  also  water,  which  can  not  be  had  good  or  in  any  consid- 
erable quantity  upon  the  island. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Ohetican  Harbor  at 
8:ili. ;  ordinary  springs  rise  3i  feet,  neaps  2  feet.  NE.  winds  cause  high 
tides,  and  SW.  winds  the  contrary. 

Lights. — The  square  building,  24  feet  high  and  painted  white,  erected 
on  the  SW.  end  of  Ohetican  Island,  exhibits  at  an  elevation  of  149  feet 
a  revolving  white  light  every  forty-iive  seconds,  and  visible  20  miles. 

Two  leading  lights  are  exhibited  on  the  eastern  side  of  Chetican 
Eastern  Harbor. 

The  trout  light  is  a  iixed  red  light,  at  the  height  of  4.')  feet  above  high- 
water  mark,  and  is  visible  over  a  small  a;-c  uu  either  side  of  the  lights 
in  line,  8  miles.    It  is  00  feet  from  the  water. 

The  rear  light  is  a  fixed  white  light,  62  feet  above  high  water.  It 
is  S.  6°  E.  (S.  190  W.  luag.)  330  yards  from  the  front  light,  and  is 
visible  over  a  small  arc  on  either  bide  of  the  alignment,  13  miles. 

Each  light  is  exhibited,  from  a  four-sided,  pyramidal  building,  painted 
white,  with  red  lantern.  The  front  lighthouse  is  30  feet  high  iind  the 
rear  one  38  fe^t. 

The  lights  in  line  lead  through  the  dredged  channel,  which  is  marked 
by  spar  buoys  on  both  sides,  to  the  anchorage  in  Eastern  Harbor. 

Squirrel  Pond. — Between  Chetican  Island  and  Margaree  Eiver,  10 
miles  to  the  southward,  there  are  several  places  where  boats  can  land 
in  fine  weather,  especially  at  Squirrel  Pond,  distant  3  miles  from  Chet- 
ican. There  are  farms  all  along  this  part,  the  mountains  running 
parallel  to  the  shore  at  a  short  distance  back,  and  attaining  at  Mount 
Squirrel,  in  rear  of  Squirrel  Pond,  an  elevation  of  1,220  feet  above 
the  sea. 

Margaree  River  has  5  feet  over  its  rocky  bar  at  low  water,  in  a 
very  narrow  and  intricate  channel,  through  which  the  tides  run  at  the 
late  of  4  knots.  It  is  only  under  favorable  circumstances  of  wind  and 
weather,  and  with  a  smooth  sea,  that  schooners  can  safely  attempt  to 
enter  it.  The  surf  on  the  bar  is  at  times  heavy  and  dangerous  to  boats, 
especially  when  the  strong  tide  is  running  out  against  the  wind  and 
sea.  The  shores  of  this  river  are  well  settled.  In  1881  the  population 
of  Margaree  district  numbered  1,755  inhabitants. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Margaree  River  at  8h. 


;e  ut  the  8W. 

in  the  harbor, 

tlieii  in  great 

the  principal 
[  by  the  bniUl- 
housca  on  the 
the  mainland 
jxtent  may  be 
in  any  consid- 

an  Harbor  at 
[ids  canse  high 

white,  erected 
;ionofl49feet 
ble  20  miles, 
le  of  Chetican 

3et  above  high- 
Q  of  the  lights 

igh  water.    It 
t  light,  and  is 
13  miles, 
lilding,  painted 
t  high  iind  the 

hich  is  marked 
■n  Harbor, 
jaree  River,  10 
)oats  can  land 
liles  from  Chet- 
itains  rnnning 
ning  at  Mount 
220  feet  above 

)W  water,  in  a 
ides  run  at  the 
;es  of  wind  and 
ely  attempt  to 
;erou8  to  boats, 
the  wind  and 
the  population 

ee  River  at  8h. 


1 


SEA    WOLF   ISLAND — MABOU    RIVKB. 


61 


40m.;  ordinary  springs  rise  .'^  feet,  neaps  2  feet,     lloats  can  aH(;end  5 
or  0  miles  from  the  entrance,  at  which  distance  the  tide  ends. 

Light. — A  harbor  liglit  is  exhibited  frotii  a  lighthouse  on  the  outer 
end  of  the  breakwater  pier,  on  south  side  of  Margaree  River  entrance. 

The  light  is  a  flxed  red  light  between  the  bearings  of  S.45<^  K.  (S.  20^ 
E,  mag.)  and  S.  26°  W.  (S.  5(P  \V.  mag.)  and  fixed  white  on  the  east- 
ern and  western  sides.  It  is  21  feet  above  high-water  mark,  and  should 
be  visible  4  miles. 

The  lighthouse,  21  feet  high,  is  a  white  square  tower. 

This  light  is  to  guide  into  Margaree  l\iver,  and  in  order  to  keep  the 
channel  should  be  passed  closely  on  the  eastern  side. 

Sea  Wolf  Island,  7^  miles  SW.  of  Margaree  River,  is  of  an  oval 
shape,  liV  miles  long,  parallel  to  the  shore,  600  yards  broad,  and  2t)0 
feet  high.  It  is  of  sandstone,  precipitous  and  quite  bold  all  around, 
excepting  at  the  NE.  point,  and  there  the  shallow  water  extends  only 
to  the  distance  of  200  yards.  It  aftbrds  some  shelter  to  small  Ashing 
vessels  and  boats,  which  can  land  upon  it  only  in  fine  summer  weather; 
at  other  times  the  sea  rolls  completely  round  it,  and  the  anchorage  is 
never  safe,  the  ground  being  everywhere  rocky. 

The  deptli  between  this  island  and  the  shore,  from  which  it  is  distant 
rather  more  than  2  miles,  is  7  fathoms,  over  a  bottom  of  rock,  with  loose 
sand  and  gravel  occasionally. 

The  neighboring  sea  abounds  with  fish. 

Light — The  lighthouse,  erected  on  the  summit  an<l  near  tlie  middle 
of  Sea  Wolf  Island,  is  a  square  white  building,  showing  at  298  feet 
above  the  level  of  the  sea  a  fixed  white  light,  visible  21  miles. 

Caution. — To  vessels  in  dangerous  proximity  to  the  island,  the  light 
may  become  obscured  by  the  abrupt  clitt's  on  the  sides  of  the  island. 

Mabou  Highland  commences  at  Cape  Mabou,  about  14  nules  SW. 
of  Sea  Wolf  Island,  and  is  a  very  remarkable  feature  of  the  coast, 
seen  from  great  distances  seaward.  It  extends  11  miles  along  the  coast 
to  the  NE.,  forming  a  lofty  and  precipitous  shore,  and  rising  to  the 
height  of  1,000  feet  above  the  sea.  After  passing  these  highlands,  the 
coast  becomes  less  elevated,  the  beaches  and  landing  places  more  fre- 
quent, and  the  settlements  are  c<mtinuous  until  past  Cheticau  Island. 

Mabou  River,  at  5  miles  from  Port  Hood,  admits  small  schooner)^, 
having  6  feet  at  low  water  over  its  bar  of  sand  through  a  dredged  chan- 
nel. The  bar  shifts  occasionally  during  heavy  NW.  gales,  but  is  seldom 
disturbed  during  the  summer  months,  when  those  gales  are  of  rare 
occurrence. 

From  the  entrance  to  the  bridge,  a  distance  of  3J  miles,  this  river 
resembles  a  mountain  lake,  being  in  one  part  ^  mile  wide  and  carrying 
8  fathoms  water.  Boats  can  ascend  with  the  tide  to  2  or  3  miles  above 
the  bridge,  where  the  fresh  water  forms  only  a  small  stream.  Besides 
the  Mabou,  which  is  the  main  branch,  there  are  two  other  smaller 
streams,  the  Southwest  Arm  and  Becket  River,  which  last  enters  from 
the  northeastward. 


CAPE    BRETON   ISLAND — WEST   COAST. 


I- 

t 


\l 


Thu  shores  of  the  Mubou  are  well  settled,  farms  arc  seen  on  either 
side,  and  there  is  a  church  ou  the  northern  bank  .'»  miles  within  the 
entrance.  Tlie  scenery  is  Vv.ry  beautifn:,  rlie  mountainH  riHinjriinmcdi- 
ately  from  the  northero  nhore  to  the  hoijjlit  of  ><7(>  feet. 

Light*.— Two  leading  lights  are  exhibited  from  masts,  with  white 
sheds  at  tlie  base,  at  Mabou  Harbor  entraiurc. 

The  outJir  lijrht  iH  a  fixed  white  lijrlit,  nhown  from  tlie  extrendty  of 
the  l>roiikwatcr  |)ier  on  the  S\V. , side  of  the  dredged  channel ;  it  i«  25 
feet  above  high  water,  and  should  be  visible  0  miles. 

The  inner  light  is  a  tlxed  red  liglit,  shown  on  the  shore  at  McFay- 
dens  wharf,  and  distant  1,00<>  yards  from  the  other  light;  it  is  30  feet 
above  high  water,  and  should  be  visible  7  miles. 

The  lights  in  line  lead  through  the  dredged  channel  past  the  break 
water. 

Tides. — The  entrance  to  Mabou  River,  at  the  southern  end  of  a  low 
sand  bar,  is  oni>  i«JO  yards  wide,  and  the  tides  frequently  run  there  at 
the  rate  of  4  knots;  it  is  therefore  a  dangerous  place  to  enter,  excejit 
ing  with  a  flowing  tide  and  a  smooth  sea.  It  js  high  water  there,  full 
and  change,  at  about  9h. ;  ordinary  springs  rise  4  feet,  neaps  2  feet. 
NE.  winds  often  cause  high  tides;  8W.  winds  the  contrary.. 

Coal  Mine  Cove  is  2 J  miles  northward  of  Mabou ;  here  a  breakwater 
320  feet  long  has  been  built  and  a  double  track  laid  to  the  mine;  the 
Dominion  (fovernment  are  adding  an  extension  100  feet  long.  It  is 
intended  to  have  18  feet  water  at  the  loading  ground.  In  fine  weather 
both  of  these  wharves  can  be  used  for  shipping  coal. 

Port  Hood,  the  only  safe  anchorage  on  the  west  coast  of  Cape  Bre- 
ton Island  to  the  north  of  the  Gut  of  Canso,  was  formerly  a  much 
more  secure  harbor.  Smith  Island  being  then  a  peninsula,  united  to  the 
mainland  by  a  range  of  high  sand  hills,  which  has  since  been  entirely 
swept  away. 

Anchorage. — At  the  anchorage  in  the  NW.  part  of  Port  Hood, 
formed  by  the  east  side  of  Smith  Island,  there  are  depths  of  3  to  4J 
fathoms,  mud,  and  the  heavy  swell  is  prevented  from  rolling  in  round 
the  NE.  extreme  of  the  island  by  a  shoal  which  extends  about  800  yards 
southward  Irom  Smith  Point,  with  2  to  4  feet  water,  and  is  marked 
by  a  small  red  buoy. 

Supplies. — The  village  of  Port  Hood  will  be  seen  on  the  mainland 
opposite  the  northern  part  of  Smith  Island;  it  is  well  situated,  and 
will  be  recognized  by  the  steeple  of  the  church  and  the  courthouse  of 
stone.  Supplies  of  fresh  provisions  may  be  obtained  there,  but  there 
is  no  good  watering  place,  the  supply  from  the  wells  of  Smith  Island 
being  scanty  and  not  very  good,  while  the  brooks  of  the  mainland  are 
difficult  of  access,  and  sometimes  nearly  dry  in  summer. 

Spithead,  a  sandy  flat,  nearly  dry  at  low  water,  extending  1,200  yards 
northeastward  from  Portsmouth  Point,  the  south  extremity  of  Smith 
Island,  affords  partial  shelter  from  south  winds,  but  a  strong  south  or 
southwesterly  gale  of  any  duration  sends  in  a  heavy  swell. 


I 


PORT    HOOD. 


fi3 


seen  on  either 
les  within  the 
riHinjriniintHli- 

sts,  with  white 

lie  extremity  of 
hunuel;  it  i«  25 

here  at  McFay- 
fht;  it  i8  30  feet 

post  the  break- 
em  end  of  a  low 
itly  run  there  at 
to  enter,  except- 
water  there,  full 
jet,  neaps  2  feet. 

:rary.. 

lere  a  breakwater 

to  the  mine;  the 

feet  long.    It  is 

In  ftne  weather 

tast  of  Cape  Bre- 
formerly  a  niucb 
I,  united  to  the 
ice  been  entirely 

of  Port  Hood, 
lepths  of  3  to  4J 

rolling  in  round 
is  about  800  yards 
r,  and  is  marked 


on  the  mainland 

^ell  situated,  and 

he  courthouse  of 

there,  but  there 

of  Smith  Island 

Ithe  mainland  are 

aer. 

tndingl,200  yards 

Vtremity  of  Smith 

la  stroivg  south  or 

Igwell. 


Clearing  Marks. — A  vesHel  will  pai4s  to  the  eastward  of  tiie  S]>lth«>u(l 
(which  is  steep-to  andean  usually  be  seen)  by  keeping  the  Houth  end  of 
the  trees  NK.  of  the  town  in  line  with  the  Itoiiian  (Jiitholit;  chnrcli  bear- 
ing N.  19^  K.  (N.  43^  E.  mug.)  and  the  east  end  of  II.  Smith's  himse  in 
line  with  the  west  end  of  tiie  ehaj>el  bearing  N.  2i"  W.  (north  niag.). 

Dean  Shoal,  on  the  mainland  side  of  the  port,  extends  (»<H)  yards 
i^om  the  sandy  beach  at  .Mill  Creek.  It  is  a  Hteep  sandy  tlat,  which, 
together  with  the  shallow  water,  as  far  out  as  opposite  Portsmouth 
Point,  but  not  farther  to  the  south,  will  be  cleared  at  the  distance  of 
200  yards  >iy  keeping  Cape  Linzee  and  Isthmus  Point  in  line,  bearing 
about  N.  9°  W.  (N.  15^  K.  mag.)- 

Rooky  Shoal. — On  the  same  side,  but  outside  the  entrance  of  the 
harbor,  a  rocky  shoal,  with  12  feet  least  water,  runs  ont  700  yards  from 
the  shore  ^  mile  northward  of  Wagged  I'oiiit.  This  being  steep-to, 
must  be  carefully  avoided  by  a  vessel  of  large  draft. 

Smith  Island  is  2  miles  long  and  210  feet  high;  it  possesses  much 
fertile  land,  and  there  are  farms  on  the  inner  side  of  the  island.  With 
the  exception  of  the  sandy  beach  in  the  harbor,  the  island  is  every 
where  surrounded  by  cliffs  of  various  heights  up  to  123  feet.  They  are 
formed  of  soft  reddisli  sandstones,  shales,  and  marls,  containing  occa- 
sionally thin  seams  of  coals,  with  beds  of  gypsum,  limestone,  and  trap, 
which  last  are  well  shown  at  the  NW.  end  of  the  island. 

St.  G-eorge  Bay.— See  page  G7. 

Henry  Island,  or  Just  an  Corps,  lies  about  a  mile  S  W.  of  Smith  Island. 
It  is  one  mile  long  and  its  greatest  height  is  195  feet.  It  is  of  rock 
formation,  and  nearly  surrounded  with  cliffs  which  yield  rapidly  to  the 
action  of  the  waves  and  of  the  atmosphere,  and  which  on  the  outer  side 
attain  the  elevation  of  100  feet.  It  has  no  permanent  inhabitants,  but 
is  much  frequented  by  tishermeu  during  the  fishing  seasons. 

This  island  is  bold  to  seaward,  but  shallow  water  runs  out  from 
Fishery  Point,  its  SE.  extremity,  ^  mile  to  the  depth  of  3  fathoms  and 
J  mile  to  5  fathoms. 

The  passage  between  the  islands  is  rendered  so  extremely  intricate 
and  dangerous  by  rocky  shoals  that  it  should  never  be  attempted  unless 
in  a  very  small  vessel  and  with  fine  weather. 

Bnoyage. — The  following  buoys  are  removed  at  the  end  of  the 
navigable  season,  namely : 

At  Portsmouth  Point  Spit,  a  black  buoy;  Spithead  Shoal,  a  black 
buoy;  Dean  Shoal,  a  red  buoy. 

A  small  red  buoy  marks  the  southeastern  and  a  similar  buoy  the 
southwestern  extremes  of  the  shoal  extending  southward  from  Smith 
Point. 

Caution. — Too  much  reliance  must  not  be  placed  in  the  buoyage,  as 
they  are  frequently  out  of  position. 

Light — The  lighthouse  erected  on  the  cliff  southward  of  Mill  Creek, 
at  the  east  side  of  the  south  entrance  to  Port  Hood,  is  a  small  square 
building,  painted  white.    It  exhibits,  at  55  feet  above  high  water,  a 


ifio^tiiii' 


it 


64 


CAPE    BRETON   ISLAND — WEST   COAST. 


fixed  light,  which  shows  red  from  S.  22°  E.  (S.  2°  W.  mug.)  to  S.  85°  E. 
(S.  61°  E.  mag.)  and  white  from  S.  85o  e.  (S.  61^  E.  mag.)  to  north 
(N.  24°  E.  mag.).    These  lights  should  be  visible  10  miles. 

Ice. — The  harbor  is  usually  frozen  over  about  January  20  and  is 
clear  of  ice  about  April  20,  being  completely  closed  between  those 
dates;  field  ice  comes  in  and  disappears  about  the  same  time  as  the 
harbor  ice. 

Tbe  first  vessel  arrives  about  May  1  and  the  last  one  leaves  about 
January  1. 

Directions. — Having  a  fair  wind,  pass  to  the  southward  of  Henry 
Island  at  a  distance  not  less  than  |  mile,  steering  N.  76°  E.  (S.  80°  E. 
mag.)  until  the  south  end  of  the  trees  is  in  line  witb  tbe  spire  of  the 
Eoman  Catholic  church,  bearing  N.  19°  E.  (N.  43°  E.  u  ag.),  which  will 
lead  east  of  the  Portsmouth  and  Spithead  8hoals,  and  when  the  east 
end  of  H.  Smith's  house  is  in  line  with  the  west  end  of  the  chapel, 
bearing  N.  24°  W.  (north  mag.),  steer  for  the  anchorage  in  the  NW. 
part  of  the  ])ort. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  iull  and  change,  at  Port  Hood  at  9h. ;  ordi- 
nary springs  rise  4^  feet,  nea])s  2  feet.  The  tidal  streams  are  weak  at 
the  anchorage,  and  their  rate  does  not  ordhiarily  amount  to  one  knot 
anywhere  within  the  harbor.  The  Hood  comes  from  the  north  and  the 
ebb  from  the  south.  The  flood  stream  from  the  north  meets  that  which 
comes  in  through  the  (xut  of  Canso,  off  Long  Point,  whence  they  set  to 
the  NW.,  curving  round  tlie  bay  toward  Cape  George. 

Coast. — South  of  Port  Hood  at  Emersion  Point  the  coast  is  danger- 
ous to  approach,  and  continues  so  to  Long  Point,  a  low  cliff  of  red 
sandstone,  a  distant  of  7  oi'  8  miles;  off  this  stretch  are  JudiqueBank 
and  Shoals. 

Judique  Pond,  close  to  the  north  of  Judique  church,  is  barred  by  a 
sandy  ridge  so  as  only  to  admit  boats  at  high  water.  The  shallow 
water  extends  oft'  it  to  the  distance  of  H  miles.  Catherine  Pond  and 
Susan  Creek,  distant  3  and  5  miles,  respectively,  to  the  north  of  the 
church,  are  similar  places;  the  latter  admits  boats  at  high  water,  and 
is  just  to  the  north  of  Cape  Susan,  rendered  remarkable  by  the  white 
gypsum  in  its  cliffs. 

From  Long  Point  to  Heft'ernan  Point  there  are  no  detached  dangers, 
nor  does  the  shallow  water  anywhere  extend  to  the  distance  of  ^  mile 
from  the  shore.  The  laud  is  high  and  rather  barren  looking,  rising  at 
the  distance  of  ^  mile  from  the  shore  to  the  summit  of  a  ridge  850  feet 
above  the  sea,  and  which  runs  parallel  to  the  coast  line.  The  only 
remarkable  object  in  this  interval  is  the  church  at  Craignish. 

Judique  Shoal,  the  greatest  danger  on  this  coast  and  in  St.  George 
Bay,  is  of  rock,  and  about  ^  mile  in  length,  if  the  very  shallow  part  is 
only  reckoned,  but  there  are  patches  with  2  or  3  fathoms,  and  much 
rocky  ground  both  to  the  north  and  south  of  it. 

The  least  water,  4  fett,  is  close  to  the  outer  point  of  tbe  shoal,  and 


■I? 


OUT   OP   CAN80. 


66 


.)toS.  850E. 

lag.)  to  north 

i. 

,ry  20  and  is 

etween  those 

B  time  as  the 

I  leaves  about 

rard  of  Henry 

0  E.  (S.  80°  E. 
le  spire  of  the 
ig.),  which  will 
when  the  east 
of  the  chapel, 
;e  in  the  NW. 

odat9h.;ordi- 
ns  are  weak  at 
int  to  one  knot 

1  north  and  the 
teets  that  which 
snce  they  set  to 

joast  is  danger- 
low  cliff  of  red 
i  Judique  Bank 

,  is  barred  by  a 
•.  The  shallow 
erine  Pond  and 
le  north  of  the 
ligh  water,  and 
le  by  the  white 

ached  dangers, 

itance  of  ^  mile 

>oking,  rising  at 

a  ridge  860  feet 

ine.    The  only 
ignish. 
d  in  St.  George 

shallow  part  is 
lonis,  and  much 

the  shoal,  and 


when  en  it  the  western  extremity  of  the  highland  of  Cape  Porcupine 
will  appear  in  the  same  line  as  Flat  and  Hefternan  Points,  which  form 
the  right  extremity  of  Breton  Island  at  the  entrance  of  the  Gut  of 
Canso,  antl  which  bear  S.  20°  E.  (S.  4°  W.  mag.). 

There  are  4  fathoms  water  between  the  shoal  and  the  land,  but  only 
small  craft  should  attemi»t  the  ])a8sage. 

Clearing  Marks. — By  keeping  the  whole  of  tlie  highland  of  Cape 
Porcapine  open  to  the  west  of  Hetternan  Point,  it  will  lead  to  the  west- 
ward of  the  shoal  in  6  or  7  fathoms ;  or  if  the  church  at  Port  Hood  be 
kept  open  to  the  west  of  Cape  Susan,  the  shoal  will  be  cleared  in  not 
less  than  4  fathoms. 

Buoy. — A  red  buoy  is  placed  on  Judique  Shoal  about  the  1st  of  May 
and  taken  up  in  November. 

Judique  Bank  lies  NW.  2f  miles  from  the  Judique  Shoal;  it  has  4^ 
fathoms  least  water  on  a  small  rocky  patch,  with  much  foul  ground 
around  it.  When  on  this  patch,  Portsmouth  Point  (the  south  end  of 
Smith  Island)  and  Cape  Linzee  will  appear  touching,  and  bearing 
N.  40  E.  (N.  28°  E.  mag.);  Judique  church,  N.  84°  E.  (S.  72°  E.  mag.) 
34  miles,  and  the  left  or  eastern  termination  of  the  highland  of  Cape 
Porcupine  just  shut  in  behind  Hefi'ernan  Point. 

Clearing  Marks. — A  vessel  will  pass  to  the  westward  of  Judique 
Bank,  which  is  only  dangerous  to  vessels  of  large  draft  when  there  is 
a  heavy  rea  running,  by  keeping  Cape  Linzeo  shut  in  beliind  Smith 
Island,  or  the  whole  of  the  highland  of  Cape  Porcupine  open  to  the 
westward  of  Hefternan  Point. 

Gut  of  Canso,  separating  Cape  Breton  Island  from  Nova  Scotia  and 
forming  the  southern  entrance  to  the  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence,  is  described 
in  U.  S.  Hydrographic  Publication  No.  99,  Bay  of  Fuudy,  SE.  coast  of 
Nova  Scotia,  and  the  SE.  and  east  coasts  of  Cape  Breton  Island. 
Directions  only  for  passing  through  the  gut  will  be  given  here. 

Directions. — When  bound  through  the  Gut  to  the  southward,  the 
distance  from  Cape  St.  George  to  the  light  at  the  north  entrance  of  the 
Gut  is  20^  miles.  The  approach  in  this  direction,  through  St.  George 
Bay,  is  unattended  with  difliculty  or  danger,  excepting  when  fogs  or 
snowstorms  hide  from  view  the  light  which  has  been  judiciously  placed 
at  its  northern  entrance.  The  soundings  are  then  the  only  guides,  and 
they  will  be  found  sufficient,  in  all  ordinary  cases,  for  the  safety  of 
vessels  prudently  conducted,  with  their  leads  going.  In  vessels  so  cir- 
cumstanced, the  endeavor  should  be  to  strike  soundings  on  the  bank  off 
Long  Point,  and  then  to  follow  its  ledge  along  the  shore  of  Cape  Bre- 
ton Island,  in  the  low-water  depth  of  10  fathoms,  to  the  entrance  of  the 
Gut.  It  is  seldom  so  thick,  especially  in  a  breeze  of  wind,  but  that 
some  part  of  the  shore  will  be  seen  before  the  vessel  has  run  far  after 
entering  so  narrow  a  strait.  With  a  beating  wind,  she  should  board  off 
and  on  the  same  shore,  nntil  soundings  are  struck  (in  the  board  to  the 
westward,  and  after  crossing  the  deep  water)  on  the  edge  of  the  bank 
1151 5 


,1* 


66 


ST.    GEORGE   BAY. 


off  Cape  Jack,  whore,  if  it  be  night,  and  the  fog  so  thick  that  the  light 
can  not  be  seen,  or  if  the  tide  be  nearly  done,  it  will  be  advisable  to 
anchor,  and  wait  for  a  change.  The  ground  there  is  not  good,  but  it  is 
out  of  the  strength  of  the  tides,  and  an  anchor  will  hold  in  moderate 
weather.  The  anchorage  ^  mile  to  the  SE.  of  the  lighthouse  and  on 
the  same  side  of  the  channel  should  be  iireferred  if  attainable.  There 
are  some  spots  of  mud  there  in  which  :\n  anchor  holds  well  in  7  to  9 
fathoms,  and  where  the  strength  of  the  tide  is  not  great. 

Vessels  outward  bound,  and  proceeding  through  the  Gut  to  the 
southward,  very  frequently  meet  a  south  or  SE.  wind,  with  its  usual 
accompaniments  of  fog  and  rain.,  in  which  case  the  roadstead  oil"  Port 
Hawkesbnry  will  be  found  the  most  roomy  and  convenient  ancliorage. 
Eddy  Gove,  from  its  more  advanced  position  at  the  entrance  of  the  Gut, 
offers  to  vessels  sading  with  the  first  of  a  fair  wind,  a  better  chance  of 
clearing  Ohedabucto Bay  and  the  Canso  Ledges  before  dark;  but  it  can 
only  be  recommended  in  fine  settled  summer  weather,  for  the  ground  is 
not  good,  and  the  anchorage  is  much  exposed  on  the  occurrence  of  a 
sudden  'jhange  of  wind.  Turbalton  Bay  is  much  more  secure,  but  it  is 
rather  small  for  a  large  and  weakly  manned  vessel  to  weigh  from  in  the 
event  of  a  strong  wind  setting  in  suddenly  from  the  westward. 

Tides.— It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  the  north  and  south 
entrances  of  the  Gut  at  9h.  15m.  and  8h.,  respectively.  Ordinary 
springs  rise  4  feet,  neaps  2  feet;  but  extraordinary  tides  may  r:se  6 
or  7  feet  or  only  2  feet,  owing  to  the  irregular  influence  of  unknown 
causes— probably  strong  winds  at  a  distance.  The  rise  and  fall  of  the 
tides  on  the  shore  usually  continue  through  nearly  equal  periods  of 
time,  but  the  duration  of  the  tidal  streams  (the  flood  being  to  the  north- 
ward and  the  ebb  to  the  southward)  varies  from  one  to  4  hours  after  it 
is  high  or  low  water  by  the  shore,  even  in  the  fine  weather  of  summer; 
whilst  in  the  blowing  weather,  so  frequent  on  the  approach  of  winter 
or  in  early  spring,  they  are  reports  to  be  still  more  iiTegular,  running 
at  times  in  the  snrae  direction  for  several  days  in  succession;  but  this 
never  occurred  during  the  Admiralty  survey. 

The  rate  of  these  streams  oft'  Cape  Porcupine,  where  it  is  most  rapid, 
is  ordinarily  about  4  knots,  but  is  increased  occasionally  to  5  knots  by 
strong  winds.  At  most  of  the  anchorages,  and  under  almost  every 
point,  there  are  eddies,  usually  running  in  the  opposite  direction  to  the 
mam  stream  outside,  but  at  a  much  inferior  rate,  and  they  render  great 
attention  necessary  to  insure  a  clear  anchor. 

The  set  of  the  flood  stream  from  the  north  entrance  of  the  Gut  is 
nearly  toward  Cape  St.  George,  diminishing  rapidly  in  strength  as  it 
expands  in  advancing  to  the  northward.  It  is  weak  in  the  western  part 
of  St.  George  Bay,  sweeping  round  it  tc  the  NW.,  with  slight  indraughts 
toward  Pomquet,  Antigonish,  etc.  The  ebb  stream  will  be  found  set- 
ting in  the  contrary  direction. 
On  the  eastern  side  of  St.  George  Bay  the  flood  stream  from  the  Gut 


;  the  light 
/^isable  to 
I,  but  it  is 
moderate 
se  and  on 
e.  There 
in  7  to  9 

at  to  the 

its  usual 
d  off  Port 
iicliorage. 
f  the  Gut; 

chance  of 
but  it  can 
ground  is 
rence  of  a 
B,  but  it  is 
'om  in  the 
d. 
and  south 

Ordinary 
nay  r^ae  6 

unknown 
fall  of  the 
periods  of 
the  north- 
irs  after  it 
f  summer; 
I  of  winter 
r,  running 
i;  but  this 

Qost  rapid, 
5  knots  by 
aost  every 
tiou  to  the 
nder  great 

the  Gut  is 
uigth  as  it 
Bstern  part 
indraughts 
found  set- 

tm  the  Gut 


<«••■ 


ST.    GEORGE   BAY. 


67 


is  usually  met  by  much  weaker  and  contrary  stream  of  flood,  coming 
from  the  NB.,  along  the  west  coast  of  Cape  liretou.  These  opj)osiiig 
flood  streams  will  be  found,  in  general,  to  unite  somewhere  ofl'  the 
Judique  Shoals,  and  then  to  set  toward  the  NW.  Tlie  two  correspond- 
ing ebb  streams  generally  diverge  from  about  the  same  place,  the  one 
setting  toward  the  Gut,  with  increasing  strength  as  it  j>rocee.ds  to 
the  southward,  and  the  other  in  the  contrary  direction,  toward  Port 
Hood.  All,  however,  that  has  been  said  respecting  these  streams  must 
be  understood  as  of  usual,  and  not  of  constant,  occurrence,  since  they 
must  necessarily  partake  of  the  irregularity  in  the  strengtli  and  dura- 
tion of  the  tidal  streams  of  tlie  Gut  of  Canso. ,  Nevertheless,  it  will  be 
highly  useful,  and  may  materially  aid  the  progress  of  the  vessel,  to  bear 
in  mind  the  usual  set  of  these  streams. 

NOVA  SCOTIA. 
(H.  O.  Chart  No.  1066.) 

St.  Qeorge  Bay  is  of  great  extent,  being  13^  miles  wide  at  entrance, 
between  Henry  Island  and  Cape  St.  George,  and  20  miles  deep,  from 
the  same  cape  to  the  Gut  of  Canso.  It  i s  traversed  by  all  the  numerous 
vessels  which  pass  in  or  out  of  the  gulf  by  its  southern  entrance, 
and  hence  its  navigation  assumes  a  more  <^iian  usual  degree  of  nautical 
importance. 

Anchorage.— Half  mile  SE.  of  the  lighthouse  at  the  north  entrance, 
and  on  the  same  side  of  the  Gut,  there  is  tolerable  anchorage  in  all 
but  northerly  winds.    Vessels  frequently  stop  there  to  wait  tide. 

Ligbt— The  lighthouse  at  the  north  entrance  of  the  Gut  of  Canso  is 
a  conspicuous  object,  standing  on  a  bank  on  the  western  or  Nova  Scotia 
shore,  120  yards  within  the  high-water  mark.  It  is  a  Sfimtre  building, 
35  feet  high,  and  painted  white.  It  exhibits  at  an  elevation  of  110  feci 
a  fixed  white  light,  which  can  be  seen  in  favorable  weather  from  al> 
the  northern  parts  of  St.  George  Bay  about  16  miles. 

Havre  Bouche  is  a  small  but  convenient  harbor  for  schooners,  lying 
between  Cape  Jack  and  the  lighthouse  at  the  north  entrance.  It  has 
4  feet  at  low  water  in  its  narrow  entrance  between  stony  points^,  i;  ving 
no  bar  outside,  and  13  or  11  feet  within.  There  is  a  small  stream  at 
its  head.  The  shores  and  neighborhood  are  well  cultivated,  and  tlie 
church  will  be  seen  near  the  shore  and  a  mile  to  the  westward  of  the 
entrance,  or  half  way  toward  Cape  Jack. 

Lights.— On  the  SW.  shore  of  Havre  Bouche  Harbor  is  a  square 
white  lighthouse,  32  feet  high,  from  which,  at  an  elevation  of  30  feet, 
is  exhibited  a  fixed  white  light. 

At  473  yards  S.  12o  W.  (S.  36o  W.  mag.)  froni  the  above  light  stands 
a  smiilar  lighthouse,  exhibiting  from  an  elevation  of  107  feet  a  hxed 
red  light.  These  lights  should  be  visible  9  miles,  and  in  line  indicate 
the  dredged  channel  leading  to  the  harbor. 


68 


ST.    GEORGE    BAY. 


Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  cliaiige,  at  Havre  Bouche  at  about 
9h.  .'{Om.,  and  the  rise,  unless  increased  by  northerly  winds,  is  from  4 
to  2  feet,  accordingly  as  it  may  be  spring  or  neap  tides. 

Jack  Shoal. — Cape  .lack,  a  clitt"  of  red  sandstones  45  feet  high,  is  the 
most  prominent  headland  on  this  part  of  the  coast.  .lack  Shoal  runs 
out  from  the  cape  one  mile  to  3  lathoms  water,  and  1 A  miles  to  5  fathoms. 
Between  the  distances  of  ^  and  '|  mile  off  shore  there  are  two  large 
patches  of  rock,  whidi  dry  at  half  tide,  leaving  a  passage  carrying  II 
or  12  feet  water  for  small  craft  between  them  and  the  cape. 

Caution. — The  .Jack  Shoal  has  often  ])roved  dangerous  to  vessels  in 
thick  weather,  when  it  should  be  approached  with  great  cautiou,  espe- 
cially from  the  eastward,  the  soundings  on  that  side  being  irregular 
and  deep  near  the  shoal,  but  nevertheless  quite  sufficient  to  insure 
safety  if  the  lead  be  kept  going.  On  the  outer  point  of  the  shoal,  in  3 
fathoms,  the  lighthouse  at  the  north  entrance  of  the  Gut  of  Canso 
bears  S.  72°  E.  (S.  48°  E.  mag.)  3;^  miles.  If  the  light  can  not  be  seen 
the  shoal  should  not  be  approached  nearer  than  the  low  water  depth  of 
10  fathoms. 

Little  Tracadie  Harbor  has  only  one  foot  at  low  water  over  its  bar. 
Its  entiance  is  in  the  bay  between  Cape  Blue  and  Barrio  Head,  the 
liitler  being  a  cliff  of  red  sandstone  110  feet  high;  the  former  remark- 
able from  being  of  limestone,  and  sheltering  the  entrance  from  NE. 
winds.  T''e  inhabitants  of  these  small  harbors,  including  Pomquet, 
are  Acfidians,  of  French  extraction,  who  live  principally  by  agriculture. 

Tra6adie  i^arbor  has  its  narrow  entrance  about  J  mile  eastward 
of  Bowman  Head.  It  is  extensive,  and  has  14  feet  of  water  in  some 
parts  witliin,  with  many  coves,  islets,  and  small  streams,  the  prin- 
iiipal  of  which,  called  Trac^adie  Itiver,  is  at  the  head  of  the  eastern 
arm,  2^  miles  in  from  the  sea.  The  depth  over  its  dangerous  bar  of 
gravel  and  stone  is  only  2  feet  at  low  water,  in  a  narrow  and  crooked 
channel;  it  therefore  admits  only  boats  or  very  small  vessels  at  high 
water. 

Tracadie  Village  and  the  <!hurch  are  about  a  mile  within  the  entrance. 
The  church  is  large,  and  can  be  seen  from  a  great  distance  out  at  sea. 
Tlie  village  had  440  inhabitants  in  LS91. 

Railway. — Tracadie  is  connected  with  the  Intercolonial  Railway. 

Pomquet  Road. — PouKpiet  or  Bayfield  Island,  which  is  SE.  by  S. 
J4|  miles  from  Cape  George,  is  of  red  sandstone,  low,  wooded,  about 
i  mile  long,  and  is  joined  by  a  reef  to  Pomquet  Point,  from  which  it  is 
distant  350  yards.  The  reef  dries  out  from  the  point  more  than  half 
way  over  toward  the  ishind,  and  leaves  a  passage  with  only  3  or  4  feet 
in  it  at  low  water.  Shallow  water  runs  out  from  tbe  island  nearly  800 
yards  NE.,  and  a  reef,  with  a  large  rock  near  the  end  of  it,  dries  out 
from  its  eastern  shore  300  yards. 

This  roadstead,  which  is  considered  safe  during  the  summer  months, 
but  where  the  riding  must  be  very  heavy  in  NE.  gales,  is  in  the  bay 


POMQUET   ROAD    AND    HARBOR. 


69 


at  about 
is  I'rom  4 

igh,i8tlie  r 
lioal  runs 
» fatlionis. 
two  large 
irrying  H 

vessels  iu 
tiou,  espe- 
l  irregular 
-,  to  insure 
shoal,  iu  3 
b  of  Causo 
lot  be  seen 
,er  depth  of 

iver  its  bar. 
(  Head,  the 
aer  remark- 
6  from  NB. 
g  Pomquet, 
agriculture, 
le  eastward 
,ter  iu  some 
8,  the  prin- 
the  eastern 
irons  bar  of 
and  crooked 
sels  at  high 

;he  entrance, 
e  out  at  sea. 

Railway. 
is  SE.  by  S. 
coded,  about 
■in  which  it  is 
ore  than  half 
ily  3  or  4  feet 
nd  nearly  800 
it,  dries  out 

nmer  months, 
is  iu  the  bay 


between  Pomquet  Point  and  Little  River,  which  last  admits  boats  only 
at  high  water,  and  with  its  church  and  settlement  will  be  seen  to  the 
southward  a  long  mile  from  the  island. 

Anchorage. — Vessels  may  anchor  in  any  depth  from  3  to  6  fathoms 
over  sandy  bottom,  but  the  best  sheltered  berth  is  in  4  fathoms  at  low 
water,  with  the  south  point  of  the  island  bearing  N.  7°  W.  (N.  17°  E. 
mag.),  distant  k  mile. 

Pomquet  Road  is  sheltered  by  the  island  and  its  reefs  from  all  points 
excepting  between  north  and  ENE. 

Light. — From  a  square  tower,  painted  white,  on  the  NE.  end  of  Pom- 
quet Island  a  fixed  red  light  is  exhibited  at  an  elevation  of  50  feet, 
and  should  be  seen  in  clear  weather  9  miles.  The  light  is  obscured  on 
easterly  bearings. 

Directions. — To  run  for  this  anclw>rage  from  the  northward,  pass 
the  eastern  shore  of  Pomquet  f  sland  at  the  distance  of  i  mile,  or  in  not 
less  than  8  fathoms  water,  until  Poniquet  Point  comes  in  sight  to  the 
southward  of  the  island,  when  haul  to  the  westward  into  the  bay. 

Approaching  from  the  eastward  Bowman  Bank  must  be  avoided  in  a 
vessel  of  large  draft,  either  by  the  lead,  or  by  not  bringing  the  north 
point  of  the  island  to  bear  to  the  westward  of  S.  43°  W.  (S.  GG°  W. 
mag.)  until  the  north  point  of  the  bank  is  passed.  The  bank  is  of  great 
ext«nt,  running  oft'  fully  2  miles  northwestward  from  Quarry  Point  and 
Bowman  Head,  and  has  rocky  patches  on  it,  with  13,  16,  and  19  feet  at 
low  water,  at  various  distances,  from  ^  to  1^  miles  oft'  shore. 

Pomquet  Banks  lie  oft'  Pomquet  Island  to  the  northward,  distant 
from  3  to  6  miles.  The  soundings  on  them  are  rocky  and  irregular,  the 
least  water,  6  fathoms,  being  on  the  outer  and  smaller  of  the  two  banks, 
with  the  church  at  the  Little  River  shut  in  behind  the  east  side  of 
Pomquet  Island,  bearing  S.  3°  E.  (S.  20°  W.  mag.)  .5^  miles  from  Pom- 
quet lighthouse. 

Pomquet  Harbor  has  its  narrow  entrance,  at  the  eastern  extremity 
of  a  range  of  low  sand  hills  and  sand  beach,  2h  miles  SE.  from  Monk 
Head,  and  in  the  bay  between  it  and  lomquet  Point.  It  is  an  exten- 
sive place,  branching  into  two  principal  and  many  smaller  inlets,  coves, 
and  islets.  It  is  navigable  for  small  craft  and  boats  nearly  3  miles  in 
from  the  sea,  but  it  is  of  no  use  to  shipping,  h.^ving  usually  only  a 
depth  of  2  feet  at  low  water  over  its  shifting  bar  of  sand.  The  prin- 
cipal settlements  and  the  church  are  on  the  western  shore  of  the  NW. 
arm,  and  the  Indians  have  a  chapel  and  a  reservation  of  land  on  the 
eastern  and  larger  branch,  at  the  head  of  Avhich  is  Pomquet  River,  a 
small  stream  (I860). 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Pomquet  Harbor  at  9h. 
15m.;  springs  rise  4  feet,  neaps  2^  feet. 

Monk  Head  is  a  clift'  of  gypsum  45  feet  high,  2^  miles  from  the 
entrance  of  A ntigonish  Harbor.  A  rocky  bank,  with  3  fathoms  least 
water,  extends  off"  it  .^  mile  to  the  eastward,  and  there  are  no  mere  than 
4^  fathoms  at  double  that  distance  from  shore. 


70 


ST.    GEORGE   BAY. 


H 


Antigonish  Harbor,  at  2^  miles  westward  of  Monk  Head,  is  nearly 
200  yards  wide  at  the  entrance,  between  low  points  of  sand,  from  which 
a  dangerous  bar  extends  to  the  distance  of  ^  mile.  The  bar  and  the 
deep  water  up  the  ha-^or  are  marked  by  spar  buoys  on  either  side 
(1871).  The  bar  has  a  depth  of  6  feet  at  low  water,  but  both  the  depth 
and  direction  of  the  very  narrow  channel  are  said  to  change  occasion- 
ally. The  anchorage  off  the  bar  (rock)  is  not  good,  and  would  be  quite 
unsafe  in  a  gale  from  the  NE. 

The  harbor  is  of  great  extent,  running  in  6  or  7  miles  to  the  SW., 
the  channel,  between  flats  of  mud  and  weeds,  having  in  some  places 
6  or  ()  tailioins  water.    There  are  flourishing  farms  on  either  side. 

Ant;-3oni8h,  containing  two  churches,  stands  at  the  head  of  the 
westc  arm,  distant  6^  miles  from  the  entrance.  In  1891  Autigionish 
Di*ist'>;i  contained  6,331  people.  Gypsum  abounds  here,  forming, 
trjvli  luiiioer  and  the  produce  of  an  increasing  agriculture,  the  cargoes 
of  r.w  s"  Doners  which  frequent  the  harbor. 

Tiie  United  States  is  represented  by  a  consular  agent. 

TiACi;.--  Tt  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  the  entrance  of  Antig- 
onish M:  J  bor  at  about  9h.;  ordinary  springs  rise  4  feet,  neaps  2  feet. 
Northerly  winds  cause  high  tides  and  southerly  winds  tlu?  contrary. 
The  rate  of  the  tides  in  the  entrance  seldom  exceeds  2  knots,  unless  it 
may  be  in  spring,  after  the  melting  of  the  winter's  snow. 

Maclsaac  Rock,  with  9  feet  least  water,  is  the  center  of  a  small 
detached  shoal,  distant  nearly  GOO  yards  from  the  shore,  between 
Maclsaac  Point  and  a  remarkable  patch  of  white  gypsum  olift".  This 
rock,  which  is  the  only  danger  on  the  west  side  of  St.  George  Bay,  bears 
from  the  gypsum  patch  N.  49^  E.  (N.  72°  E.  mag.)  §  mile;  it  is  2$  mites 
northward  of  the  entrance  of  Antigonish,  and  is  shown  occasionally  by 
heavy  breakers. 

Cape  St.  George,  the  NW.  point  of  St.  George  Bay,  is  a  bold  Kv.id 
precipitous  headland,  composed  principally  of  slate,  conglomerate,  and 
trap  rocks,  attainuig  the  elevation  of  600  feet  above  the  sea.  The 
shallow  water  does  not  extend  off  it  beyond  ^  mile,  but  as  th«^ro  is  a 
depth  of  20  fathoms  at  double  that  distance,  the  lead  affords  but  little 
warning,  and  it  should  therefc  '  be  f^  ;. reached  with  caution  in  thick 
weather.  A  phurch  has  been  biii:  L  westward  of  the  lighthouse,  forming 
a  useful  landmark.  Off  Ballaii  viie  Cove,  on  tlio  astern  side  of  the 
cape,  there  is  an  anchorage  iu  >,  esterly  winds,  but  the  ground  is  not 
very  good. 

Light. — From  a  square  lighthouse,  39  feet  high,  painted  white,  on 
the  north  side  of  Cape  St.  George,  is  exhibited,  at  an  elevation  of 
350  feet,  a  revolving  whit«  light,  attaining  its  greatest  brilliancy  every 
thirty  seconds,  visible  in  clear  weather  25  miles.  The  light  is  said  not  to 
be  seen  when  bearing  to  the  eastward  of  S.  68°  B.  (S.  45°  E.  mag.) 

Tides. — It  is  high  svater,  full  and  change,  at  Cape  St.  George  at  9h. 
15m. ;  springs  rise  4  feet,  neaps  2  t'eet. 


fiCK 

diffil 
his 
the 
the 

is  b»j 
extij 
uinJ 
chaj 
20(1 

giiitj 

tirf>;t| 

pasf 

Islal 

Suvl 

butf 

OldJ 

an 


« 


is  nearly 
)ni  which 
:  and  the 
ther  side 
the  depth 
occasion- 
l  be  quite 

the  SW., 
ne  places 
side. 

ad  of  the 

.utigoniah 

forming, 

[le  cargoes 


I  of  Autig- 
aps  2  feet, 
i  contrary. 
i,  unless  it 

of  a  small 
5,  between 
cliff.  This 
.  Bay,  bears 
is  24  mites 
tsionally  by 

a  bold  tv.^.d 
aierate,  and 
3  sea.  The 
18  there  is  a 
ds  but  little 
ion  in  thick 
use,  forming 
side  of  the 
round  is  not 

ad  white,  on 
elevation  of 
lliancy  every 
is  said  not  to 
B.  mag.) 
jeorge  at  9h. 


CHAPTER    IV. 

NORTHUMBERLAND  STRAIT,  SOUTH  AND  WEST  SHORES— CAPE  ST. 
GEORGE  TO  MIRAMICHI  BAY. 

NOVA  SCOTIA. 
(H.  O.  Chart  No.  1066.) 

The  Coast  from  Oape  St.  George  to  Merigomish  Harbor,  27  miles 
SW.,  is  bold  and  free  from  danger.  The  land,  rising  from  the  sea  to 
the  summit  of  a  ridge  2  or  3  miles  in  rear  of  and  parallel  to  the  coast 
line,  is  well  settled,  the  cultivation  extending  occasionally  to  the  sum- 
mit of  the  ridge,  which  attains  the  extreme  elevation  of  1,100  feet 
above  the  sea. 

Malignant  Bay  has  a  small  stream  at  its  head,  affording  good  land- 
ing for  boats,  and  will  be  known  by  the  Sugar  Loaf  Hill,  a  mile  in  rear 
of  it,  and  680  feet  above  the  sea. 

There  is  no  harbor  in  this  distance,  the  wooden  pier  at  the  village  of 
Arisaig  affording  shelter  only  to  boats  and  shallops  in  easterly  winds, 
but  none  in  winds  from  between  north  and  west. 

The  remarkable  rock  called  Frenchman  Barn  lies  nearly  a  mile 
eastward  of  this  pier  and  ^  mile  NE.  from  Arisaig  church,  which  last 
is  14  miles  from  the  entrance  of  Merigomish. 

Merigomish  Harbor  has  14  feet  at  low  water  over  'ts  bar,  and  suf- 
ficient depth  within  for  vessels  of  large  draft;  but  it  is  so  inLiicate  and 
difficult  of  entrance  that  no  directions  would  enable  a  stranger  to  take 
his  ship  in  safely,  and  the  northerly  winds  send  in  so  heavy  a  sea  over 
the  bar  that  to  get  on  shore  going  in  would  probably  be  attended  with 
the  loss  of  the  vessel.  The  outer  entrance  of  the  harbor  ('|  mile  wide) 
is  between  Merigomish  Point  and  King  Head,  the  former  being  the  west 
extreme  of  Merigomish  Island.  Tlie  bar  is  formed  by  rocky  shoals  ruu- 
uing-  out  from  these  points  of  entrance,  ^  mile  to  the  northward.  The 
channel  over  the  bar,  and  leading  in  from  it  between  the  shoala,  is  over 
20(1  yards  wide ;  but  tae  shoiils  are  so  steep  that  the  lead  affords  little 
guidance,  and  there  are  no  leading  marks.  The  course  running  iu  is  at 
first  to  the  southward,  and  then  by  a  sharp  turn  to  the  ivtstward  close 
past  Savage  Point  (the  sandy  spit  at  the  SW.  extreme  of  Merigomish 
Island)  into  the  harbor.  This  inner  entrance  of  the  harboi,  i^etween 
Savage  Point  and  the  east  end  of  Oldiug  Island,  is  about  ^  mile  w  ide; 
but  the  navigable  breadth  is  redu'-^d  to  100  yards  by  the  shoal  off 
Olding  Island,  and  the  tides  freqjiently  run  there  at  the  rate  of  5  miles 
an  hour. 

n 


72 


NORTHUMBERLAND  STRAIT — SOUTH  SHORE. 


■  ''4 


This  harbor  is  seldom  visited  by  anything  larger  than  a  coasting 
schooner.  The  pilots  are  therefore  incompettilit  from  want  of  practice, 
and  the  channel  is  no  longer  buoyed  as  it  used  to  be.  The  harbor  is 
of  great  extent,  running  in  5  or  G  miles  to  tlm  eastward,  within  Merigo- 
niish  Island  and  the  sand  bar  which  joins  it  to  the  mainland,  and  also 

4  miles  to  the  westward,  up  a  bay  full  of  islands,  coves,  and  precipitous 
headlands.  Several  small  streams  enter  the  harbor,  of  wliich  French 
Jiiver,  opposite  the  east  end  of  Oiding  Island,  is  the  principal.  It  is 
approached  by  a  very  narrow  channel,  through  tlats  of  mud  nnd  weeds, 
and  can  be  ascended  by  boats  to  the  bridge,  about  a  mile  within  its 
entrance. 

Merigomish  Island,  3^  miles  long  and  1^  miles  broad,  is  of  clay  and 
sandstone,  belonging  to  the  coal  Ibrniation,  rising  to  the  lieight  of  150 
feet  above  the  sea.  Thin  seams  of  coal  may  be  seen  at  Coal  Point, 
where  the  cliffs,  which  form  the  northern  shore  of  the  island,  are  35 
feet  high.  Its  southern  shore  is  broken  into  coves,  clifty  islets,  and 
peninsulated  points  similarly  to  the  western  jiart  of  the  harbor.  A 
sand  bar  2.^  miles  long  iinitcs  the  island  and  mainland  to  the  eastward, 
excepting  in  unusually  high  tides,  when  the  water  washes  over  one 
part  of  it  into  the  harbor. 

Merigomish  is  9^  miles  by  rail  from  New  Glasgow,  Shipbuilding  is 
cariied  on. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Betty  Point,  in  Merigo- 
mish Harbor,  at  lOh.  Cm.;  springs  rise  5,^  feet,  neaps  3J  feet;  but  the 
diurnal  inequality  is  strongly  marked  here,  as  well  as  at  Pictou,  caus- 
ing a  considerable  difterence  in  the  times  and  the  heights  of  the  two 
iides  on  the  same  day. 

Little  Harbor. — In  the  shoal  bay  between  Colquhoun  and  Evans 
Points,  which  are  distant  0^  **"♦!  *''  Jniles,  respectively,  from  the  light- 
house in  Pictou  Harbor,  are  two  narrow,  dangerous,  and  intricate 
channels,  leading  through  shoals  into  Little  Harbor.  Of  these  chan- 
nels, tlie  eastern  and  uest  turns  sharp  in  to  tlie  eastward,  within  Roy 
Island,  and  close  round  the  sandy  spit  at  its  SW.  extreme.  The  other 
has  only  a  foot  or  two  of  water,  and  leads  into  the  western  part  of  Mie 
harbor,  which  is  several  miles  in  extent,  and  broken  into  bays,  coves, 
and  picturesque  points,  but  only  lit  for  boats,  being  nearly  all  dry  at 
low  water,  excepting  the  intricate  and  narrow  channels. 

Roy  Ledge,  a  small  rocky  shoal,  with  9  feet  least  water,  lies  off  the 
north  shore  of  Roy  Island  at  the  distance  of  700  yards  and  ^  mile 
N.  73^  W.  (N.  50^  W.  mag.)  from  Colquhoun  Point.  Theve  is  also  a 
reef  of  sandstone,  in  great  part  dry  at  low  water,  running  out  from 
Colquhoun  Point  ^  mile  to  the  eastward  j  c.nd  as  all  these  dangers  have 

5  fathoms  water  close  to  them,  vessels  should  be  careful  not  to  stand 
into  less  than  G  fathoms  along  this  part  of  the  coast. 

Roy  Island  is  united  at  its  east  end  to  the  mainland  by  a  long  and 
narrow  sand  bar,  stretching  to  the  SE.  across  the  east  end  of  Little 
Harbor  to  within  ij  mile  of  King  Head. 


% 


PICTOU   HARBOR. 


m 


coasting 
jractice, 
arbor  is 
Merigo- 
aud  also 
licipitous 
1  French 
al.  It  is 
1(1  weeds, 
ritbiu  its 

'  clay  and 
ht  of  150 
)al  Point, 
id,  are  35 
slets,  and 
irbor.  A 
eastward, 
over  one 

luilding  is 

in  Merigo- 
b;  but  the 
•ton,  caus- 
3f  the  two 

ind  Evans 
the  light- 
L  intricate 
liese  chan- 
vithiu  Roy 
Tlie  other 
part  (/f  the 
lays,  coves, 
r  all  dry  at 

lies  off  the 
and  I  mile 
e  is  also  a 
g  out  from 
augers  have 
tot  to  stand 

a  long  and 
id  of  Little 


Roaring  Bull,  dist;;nt  4  miles  eastward  of  the  lightliouse  In  Pictou 
Harbor,  is  the  cliffy  north  point  (with  a  remarkable  red  patch  on  it)  of 
a  small  peninsula,  united  to  the  mainland  at  its  western  end  by  a  sandy 
beach,  and  having  at  the  other  extremity  the  gully  or  entrance  to 
Chance  Harbor,  dry,  or  nearly  so,  at  low  water.  A  reef  of  sandstone 
runs  out  NE.  from  the  Roaring  Bull,  600  yards  to  the  3-fathom  line  of 
soundings. 

Pictou  Harbor,  in  every  respect  the  linest  on  the  southern  shore  of 
the  gulf,  derives  additional  importance  from  the  coal  mines,  valmible 
quarriea  of  building  stone,  and  finely  settled  country  in  its  neighbor- 
hood. It  is  at  the  bottom  of  a  bay,  which  is  Ij^  miles  wide  at  its  entrance, 
from  Mackenzie  Head  to  Logan  Point,  and  IJ  miles  deep.  Mackenzie 
Head  will  be  recognized  by  its  sharp-pointed  cliff  of  clay  and  sandstone, 
40  feet  high,  with  a  small  white  house  on  the  edge,  and  by  its  bearing 
S.  23°  W.  (south  mag.)  from  Logan  Point. 

Opposite  the  town  the  harbor  expands  into  three  large  arms,  at  the 
heads  of  which  are  the  East,  Middle,  and  West  Rivers.  The  channels 
of  the  last  two  are  seldom  used,  excepting  by  boats  or  very  small  craft, 
unless  it  be  to  bring  down  newly  built  vessels,  when  they  are  staked 
for  the  purpose.  They  may  be  navigated  without  much  difficulty  for  2 
or  3  miles  above  their  confluence;  but  higher  up  they  become  divided 
into  (Several  narrow  channels,  often  obstructed  by  oyster  beds,  and 
winding  through  extensive  flats  of  mud  and  weeds,  which  render  land- 
ing difficult  at  low  water. 

The  shores  of  the  West  Arm  are  well  settled  all  the  way  to  the  head 
of  the  tide,  5  miles  from  Pictou,  and  the  post  road  to  Truro  and  Halifax 
passes  along  the  northern  shore.  Several  of  the  hills  to  the  westward 
of  this  arm  are  of  considerable  height.  Rogers  Hill,  5  miles  from  Pictou, 
is  546  feet,  and  Dalhousie  Mountain,  3  miles  farther  SW.,  the  highest 
point  of  which  is  950  feet  above  the  sea  at  high  water.  West  River, 
above  the  tide  water,  is  a  considerable  stream,  although  shallow  and 
rapid.  It  winds  its  way  through  a  beautiful  and  wdlcultivated  valley, 
containing  a  large  population. 

Middle  Arm  runs  in  5J  miles  from  Pictou  to  the  SSW.,  at  which  dis- 
tance the  tide  ends,  and  the  river  is  rapid  and  fordable  at  low  water. 

East  Arm  is  navigable  by  vessels  for  2^  miles  from  Pictou,  to  the 
coal-loading  place,  or  railway  terminus  from  the  Albion  Mines.  Its 
chanu«l,  which  Joins  the  harbor  directly  opposite  Pictou,  is  of  the  aver- 
age breadth  of  180  yards,  and  marked  out  by  spruce-bush  stakes  driven 
into  the  mud  flats  at  intervals  on  either  side.  Half  a  mile  below  the 
loading  plac4?  a  bar  of  hard  ground  with  12  feet  at  low  water  crosses 
the  channel;  3ud  therefore  vessels  must  not  be  laden  to  draw  more  than 
15  feet  neap  <nd  18  feet  ia  spring  tides.  At  a  short  distance  above 
the  loH^Jiug  place  the  ohannel  is  so  divided  and  obstructed  by  old  oyster 
beds  that  it  is  difficult  to  carry  the  depth  of  3  or  4  feet  through  at  low- 
water,  and  similar  obstnictioiis  occur  several  times  up  to  the  bridge  at 
New  Glasgow,  6^  miles  from  Pictou. 


74 


NORTHUMBKKLAND    gTRAlT SOUTH    SHORE. 


i  -^  \r' 


t. 


i  1 


New  Glasgow  i»  a  huge  town  on  the  east  side  of  Ea^t  Arm,  owing 
its  existence  to  the  coal  mines  which  are  about  2  miles  higher  up  ar*! 
to  which  boats  can  ascend  with  the  tide.  New  vessels  of  considerable 
burden  are  built  at  the  town  and  are  taken  down  the  river  when  light 
with  the  assistance  of  tlui  tide. 

Pictou  stands  on  the  north  shore  of  the  harbor,  2  miles  witliin  the 
lighthouse,  on  tlie  declivity  of  a  ridge,  v  1ii<h  rises  to  the  height  of  2(M» 
feet  above  the  s<'ii,  at  a  short  distance  in  rear  of  the  town.  A  spur  trom 
this  ridfi'e  forms  Battery  Point,  which  shelters  the  place  from  the  NE. 
winds.  On  Town  Toint  has  been  built  the  customhouse,  a  new  brick 
buildiii"  faced  with  stone,  aiid  having  a  squ  ue  tower  at  its  south 
extreme  The  uiost  conspicuous  of  ihe  new  public  buildings  is  tbo 
Roman  (Jatholic  chmch,  a  red-brick  edifice  with  a  spire,  near  the  sum- 
mit  of  an  eminence  to  the  eastward  of  the  town ;  the  convent,  a  large, 
square  brick  house,  stands  near  this  church.  The  academy  is  a  square 
building  of  brick,  surmounted  by  a  small  pinnacle,  and  on  the  summit 
of  the  hill  over  the  town.  The  shore  margin  of  the  town  has  been 
improved  by  the  erection  of  new  wharves. 

A  little  more  than  ^  mile  west  of  the  lighthouse  and  on  the  same 
shore  are  three  coaling  wharves,  alongside  which  large  steamers  are 
loaded  with  great  dispatch,  and  farther  westward  is  the  railway 
wharf,  at  that  terminus  of  the  International  Railway,  known  as  Pictou 
Land  in  cr. 

From  this  wluirf  a  sveam  ferryboat  plies  at  alternate  hours  to  and 
from  Pictou. 

The  United  States  is  represented  by  a  consular  agent. 

Port  Charges. — Entrance  fee,  from  25  cents  to  $2.50.  Tonnage  tax, 
in,  2  cents  per  ton;  out,  ih  cents  per  ton.  Port  dues,  1^  cents  per  ton. 
Wharfage,  $2  per  day.  Berthing  dues,  $4.  Shifting  rates,  $5.  Tow- 
age, 3  cents  a  ton;  not  necessary.  Tugs  are  available  and  of  sufficient 
size  and  power.  Vessels  in  distress  or  in  ballast  are  not  relieved  from 
dues;  those  calling  for  orders  are. 

Health  dues  are  ?  cents  per  ton.  Bill  of  health,  $1.  There  are  no 
quarantine  or  hospital  fees. 

Pilotage  is  compulsory.  The  rate  for  vessels  in  is  2  J  cents  per  ton 
for  vessels  of  1,000  tons  and  upward.  For  smaller  vessels  it  goes  by 
"lump  sum."  The  rate  out  is  2  cents  per  ton  for  size  named  above. 
Rates  are  the  same  whether  with  cargo  or  in  ballast.  Detention  rates, 
$3  per  day.    Pilot  rates  for  moving  in  port,  $4. 

Pilots. — The  branch  pilots  of  Pictou  are,  for  the  most  part,  able  and 
experienced  men,  and  are  always  on  the  lookout  for  vessels. 

Supplies. — Fresh  meat  plentiful  and  cheap;  water  plentiful  and 
good;  cost,  $5  per  1,000  gallons;  put  on  board  by  water  boat. 

Coal  may  be  obtained  at  the  Acadia  Company's  wharf;  the  facilities 
for  coaling  are  such  that  150  tons  an  hour  have  been  put  on  board 
colliers.  Vessels  go  alongside  head  upstream,  and  secure  to  spar  buoys 
one  on  each  bow  and  another  on  the  starboard  quarter. 


tn,  owing 
T  up  ar»l 
siderftblP 
ben  light 

itl»iu  tlie 
rht  of  200 
spur  troiii 
1  tbe  NE. 
aew  brick 
its  south 
gs  is  tlio 

the  sum- 
t,  a  large, 
i  a  square 
16  summit 

has  been 

tbe  same 
ainers  are 
e  railway 

as  Pictou 

irs  to  and 


nnags  tax, 
its  per  ton. 
$5.  Tow- 
f  sufficient 
ieved  from 

lere  are  no 

its  per  ton 
it  goes  by 
ued  above, 
tttlon  rates, 

rt,  able  and 

Bntiful  and 

it. 

he  facilities 

it  on  board 

1  spar  buoys 


PICTOL-    HARMOR. 


75 


From  1,000  to  2,000  tons  can  be  supplied  immediately;  heavy  draft 
vessels  unable  to  cross  the  bar  can  bo  coaled  outside  by  li^jhtcrs. 

The  trade  in  coal  has  greatly  developed,  the  harbor  is  geiieriilly 
crowded  with  shipping,  and  there  are  several  coaling  stations  in  cuch 
of  the  three  rivers. 

Cost,  trimmed  in  bunkers,  $2.r)0  per  ton. 

Quarantine  and  Hospital. — Pictou  is  a  minor  quarantine  station 
and  has  a  hospital  for  mariners. 

Repairs.— A  marine  railway  with  two  cradles — largest    '  tons, 

smallest  800  tons.    Charges,  first  day,  ir>  cents  per  ton;  sue*  >      mydays, 
half  rates.    Divers  may  be  obtained ;  charges,  $3  per  da,\ 

Telegraph. — Pictou  is  in  telegraphic  communication  wii  '  s  of 

Canada  and  the  United  States.    It  is  connected  with  Halitax, ,  ^.  Juiin,' 
and  Quebec  by  the  Intercolonial  Railway;  also  with  Poit  ilawkesbury 
in  the  Gut  of  Canso.    Passenger  steamers  ran  to  all  parts  of  the  gulf. 

Mackenzie  Shoal  is  a  rocky  bank  nearly  ^  mile  in  diameter,  with 
16  feet  least  water,  and  with  12  or  20  feet  between  it  and  the  shallow 
water  to  the  westward.  Vessels  of  large  draft  should  not  attempt  to 
pass  within  or  to  the  southward  and  westward  of  it.  Caribou  and 
Doctor  Points  in  one,  bearing  N.  41°  W.  (N.  18°  W.  mag.)  will  lead  200 
yards  northeastward  of  the  shoal,  and  the  tower  of  the  customhouse 
in  line  with  the  north  extreme  of  the  lighthouse  embankment  bearing 
S.  69°  W.  (N.  88°  W.  mag.)  will  lead  to  the  northward. 

Entrance. — The  shallow  water  extends  a  long  J  mile  northward 
from  Mackenzie  Head,  and  its  edge,  in  3  fathoms,  trends  thence  west- 
ward toward  the  lighthouse,  the  whole  bay  on  that  side  being  shoal, 
with  ridges  of  sand  drying  out  to  a  considerable  distance  ft-om  the 
shore  at  low  water.  In  the  bay  between  Mackenzie  Head  and  the 
lighthouse,  and  on  the  west  side  of  Powell  Point,  is  Boat  Harbor,  the 
entrance  of  an  extensive  inlet  or  lake,  full  of  mud  and  weeds,  and 
which  boats  can  traverse  only  when  the  tide  is  in.  On  the  opposite  or 
northern  side  reefs  extend  off  Logan  Point  east  and  SE.,  a  long  ^  mile 
to  the  3-fathom  line  of  soundings. 

Cole  Point,  which  is  of  clay  and  sandstone  cliff  3a  feet  high,  and 
lies  a  short  mile  farther  in  or  south  of  Logan  Point,  has  also  a  reef 
stretching  out  eastward  J  mile,  and  the  shallow  water  continues  from 
It  southwestward  to  the  commencement  of  Loudon  Beach  on  the  north 
side  of  the  entrance  of  the  harbor. 

Pictou  Bar  and  Road.— The  distance  across  the  harbor's  mouth 
from  the  lighthouse,  on  the  sandy  pit,  to  Loudon  Beach  is  about 
400  yards,  and  the  greatest  depth  is  7  fathoms  water;  but  the  channel 
over  the  bar  is  much  narrower,  and  has  besides  a  turn  in  it,  which, 
together  with  the  necessity  of  knowing  exactly  the  set  of  the  tides, 
renders  a  pilot  indispensable  in  a  large  ship.  After  passing  the  bar 
the  depth  will  increase  to  5,  0,  and  7  fathoms,  sand. 

Anchorage.— There  is  good  anchorage,  although  exposed  t^  NE. 
winds,  in  Pictou  Boad,  where  the  depth  is  5  fathoms,  clay  and  mud 


''S. 


76 


NORTHUMBERLAND   STRAIT SOUTH    SHORE. 


'    i 


^J 


i   .J 


bott«im.  \'«8sels  running  or  beating  up  to  tluH  road  at  night  will  find 
tliu  8(mndin<;8  in  the  chart  Hiitticient  gui(lan<;e,  when  kee])ing  the  south- 
ern shore  aboard  with  the  prevailing  8W.  winds;  and  on  the  o])posite 
side  or  with  northerly  winds  will  have  the  advantage  of  the  tbllowing 
excellent  leading  nuirka:  The  light  on  Lighthouse  Point  can  be  seen  in 
a'clear  night  from  a  distance  of  about  11  miles,  and  when  in  one  with 
Cole  I'oint  bearing  S.  40°  W.  (8.  «»!P  W.  mag.)  lea<l.s  a  long  A  mile  to  the 
eastward  of  the  reef  otl"  the  east  end  of  Pictou  Island,  and  also  clears  the 
southern  extremity  of  the  Pictou  Island  Bank  in  ofathoms,  therefore,  if 
beating,  tack  in  the  board  to  the  northward  the  instant  the  light  begins 
to  disappear  behind  Cole  Point;  and  if  running,  keep  the  lightjust  open 
to  the  southward  of  Cole  Point  until  soundings  are  struck  in  the  low- 
water  depth  at  5  fathoms,  on  the  edge  of  the  bank  off  Logan  Point; 
then  follow  the  same  depth  about  li  miles  to  the  8W.,  taking  care  not 
to  bring  the  light  to  bear  to  the  northward  of  S.  G!)^  W.  (N.  88°  W. 
mag.),  and  the  vessel  will  be  in  safe  anchorage  in  the  road,  where  she 
may  wait  for  daylight,  or  a  pilot,  act^ordiug  to  circumstances.  Although 
19  feet  at  low  water,  in  ordinary  spring  tides,  can  be  carried  over  the 
bar,  yet  the  aid  of  an  able  and  experienced  pilot  would  be  re(iuired  to 
insure  that  depth. 

Lights — South  Entrance  Point. — The  lighthouse,  standing  close  to 
the  water  at  the  extremity  of  the  f  >)t  forming  the  south  side  of  the 
entrance  to  Pictou  Uarbor,  is  au  octa^"  al  1  i  l<liug,  50  feet  high,  painted 
vertically  with  red  and  white  stripes  and  exhibits  at  au  elevation  of  05 
feet  a  fixed  white  light,  which  '^^'h  aid  be  visible  11  miles.  A  small 
fixed  red  light  is  shown  25  feet  L. oiow  the  white  light,  to  clear  the  reefs 
off  Pictou  Island. 

Customhouse. — From  the  highest  window  in  the  tower  of  the  cus- 
tomhouse is  exhibited,  at  an  elevation  of  00  feet,  a  fixed  white  (gas) 
light,  which  should  be  visible  8  miles.  The  masts  of  vessels  moored  in 
Pictou  Harbor  occasionally  obscure  this  light  from  seaward. 

These  lights  in  line  bearing  S.  09°  W  (N.  88°  W.  mag.)  lead  through 
the  channel  seaward  of  the  bar. 

Fraser  Farm. — Two  leading  lights  are  established  on  the  north  side 
of  the  entrance  to  Pictou  Harbor,  which  are  exhibited  throughout  the 
season  of  navigation,  and  during  the  winter  whenever  steamers  are 
running  into  the  harbor. 

The  lights  are  fixed  red  lights,  visible  through  a  small  arc  on  each 
side  of  their  line  of  direction  from  a  distance  of  8  miles. 

The  towers  are  square  buildings,  surmounted  by  square  lanterns,  the 
whole  painted  white.  The  rear  light  is  384  feet  N.  83°  W.  (N.  00°  W. 
mag.)  from  the  front  light,  and  the  range  shows  the  direction  of  the 
channel  between  the  sand  spit  off  Pictou  Bar  on  the  south  and  Murdoch 
Shoal  on  the  north. 

Buoys. — A  black  buoy,  marked  1,  is  moored  in  14^  feet  at  low  water 
near  tjhe  north  extreme  of  the  bank  eastward  of  the  lighthouse  on 
Lighthouse  Point.  ,  ' 


-.:S^^i'^iMi^iiiii^M^^M^iM^, 


w 


lit  will  find 
jj  the  soutli- 
lie  oi)i)Osite 
iio  following 
n  bo  seen  iu 
in  one  with 
h  mile  to  the 
so  I'luai'S  the 
,  therefore,  if 
light  begins 
;i;ht. just  open 

I  in  the  low- 
ogan  I'oint; 
ing  care  not 
.  (N.  88°  W. 
il,  where  she 
i.  Although 
ried  over  the 
B  recjuired  to 

id  ing  close  to 

II  side  of  the 
high,  painted 
levation  of  65 
en.  A  small 
ilear  the  reefs 

er  of  the  cus- 
i  white  (gas) 
sels  moored  in 
ird. 

I  lead  through 
<)    '- 

the  north  side 

iroughout  the 

steamers  are 

II  arc  on  each 

e  lanterns,  the 
W.  (N.  60°  W. 
irection  of  the 
a  and  Murdoch 

;t  at  low  water 
lighthouse  on 


I' 


~^mmim:s>sm^^ss^sm^s!^s^sm^is&gmf^^s^ss^^!^^^m'^^^i'^:^^^' 


^ 

^^^ 

v^,^' 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


■^  Kii   |2.2 

!^  1^   12.0 

lit 


HiotDgraphic 

Sciences 

Corporation 


iiafS,^ 


*,. 


CIHM/ICMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 


CIHM/ICIVIH 
Collection  de 
microfiches. 


Canadian  Institute  for  Historical  IVHcroraproductions  /  Institut  Canadian  de  microreproductions  historiques 


M.'ff*-^'««B(aaR3(^wi|i(w«,^^ 


(S 
E, 

01 

ai 

P< 
14 

1,' 
of 

of 
9 
lee 
dr 

dn 
an 

thi 
lin 
br( 
be 
W 
] 
boi 
hai 
aiii 
tio 
an( 

r 

Ha 

is  ; 

rec 

of 

tid 

the 


PICTOU   HARBOR.  ^^ 

A  red  spar  bxioy  in  12  feet  water  lies  X.  7.3o  w,  (X.  50°  W.  mag.)  1^ 
miles  iTom  Mackenzie  Head.  During  the  strength  of  the  ebb  this  buoy 
almost  disappears,  and  is  difficult  to  see. 

A  red  buoy,  marked  1,  in  13  feet  water,  lies  N.  84°  E.  (S.  73°  E.  mag.) 
from  Cole  I'oiiit,  J  mile  from  the  high-water  line. 

A  red  buoy,  marked  Macdonald  liecf,  lies  in  23  feet  water  S.  76°  B. 
(S.  53°  E.  mag.)  930  yards  from  Logan  Point. 

A  red  buoy,  marked  SMnner  Beef,  lies  in  4  fathoms  IST.  50°  E.  (N.  73o 
E.  mag.)  l,GfiO  yards  from  Doctor  Point. 

A  black  can  buoy  is  placed  on  the  east  side  of  entrance  to  East  River 
on  the  edge  of  the  bank. 

A  black  can  buoy  marks  the  point  of  the  spit  at  the  junction  of  West 
and  Middle  Eivers. 

A  red  spar  buoy  is  placed  on  the  edge  of  the  bank  SW.  of  Town 
Point,  to  mark  the  port  side  of  entrance  to  a  channel  50  feet  wide  with 
14  feet  least  water. 

The  direction  of  this  channel  is  N.  63°  W.  (N.  40°  W.  mag.)  for  about 
1,200  feet,  to  a  pier  built  out  400  feet  from  the  shore. 

These  buoys  are  laid  down  in  the  spring  and  removed  in  the  autumn 
of  each  year. 

Ice.— The  harbor  is  usually  frozen  over  about  December  26,  and  clear 
of  ice  about  April  18,  being  completely  closed  between  about  January 
9  and  April  3.  The  first  vessel  arrives  about  April  20  and  the  last 
leaves  about  December  21.  A  small  quantity  of  field  ice  occasionally 
drifts  in  after  the  harbor  has  opened. 

Directions. — A  pilot  would  be  indispensable  in  a  vessel  of  large 
draft  with  beating  winds,  and  even  smaller  vessels  must  xnow  the  tides 
and  the  place  well  to  beat  in  or  out  with  safety. 

To  enter  Pictou  Harbor,  having  a  fair  wind  and  being  farther  out 
than  Mackenzie  Shoal,  keep  Pictou  Bar  and  the  customhouse  lights  in 
line  bearing  S.  69°  W.  (N.  88o  W.  mag.)  until  Frazer  Farm  lights  are 
brought  in  line  bearing  N.  83°  W.  (N.  60°  W.  mag.),  which  should  then 
be  steered  for  until  Pictou  Bar  light  is  nearly  abeam,  whence  a  S.  62° 
W.  (S.  85°  W.  mag.)  course  will  lead  to  the  anchorage  off  Pictou. 

Prom  the  lighthouse  to  the  usual  anchorage,  in  6  or  7  fathoms,  mud 
bottom,  off  the  easternmost  wharves  at  Pictou,  the  channel  of  the 
harbor  is  direct,  nearly  J  mile  wide,  deep  enough  for  the  largest  ships, 
and  clear  of  danger.  The  chart  will  therefore  afford  all  further  informa- 
tion that  may  be  necessary,  for  the  vessel  will  be  in  safety,  and  may 
anchor  as  convenient  within  Lighthouse  Point. 

Tides.— It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  the  entrance  of  Pictou 
Harbor  at  loh.;  springs  rise  6  feet,  neaps  4  feet.  With  a  good  tide  it 
is  possible  to  carry  2d  feet  over  the  bar,  and  23  feet  may  generally  be 
reckoned  upon.  The  harbor,  therefore,  is  capable  of  admitting  vessels 
of  large  draft,  but  it  must  be  remembered  that  the  best  of  the  two 
tides  is  always  spoken  of  in  the  24  hours,  for  the  diurnal  inequality  in 
the  rise  of  the  tides,  which  occurs  more  or  Iwss  in  all  parts  of  North- 


78  NORTHUMBERLAND    STRAIT— SOUTH    SHORE. 

umberland  Btrait,  Is  very  strongly  marked  in  this  harbor.  "  .nay^^«« 
bHdded  that  in  the  month  of  August,  when  these  observations  ^eie 
^ade  the  a'm.  tides  were  always  the  highest,  ^f  ^^^^/^J^^/^^^^; 
Ta  St  of  the  moon  with  north  declination  in  the  flrst  part  o  th  bu.a- 
tion  and  the  superior  transit  with  south  declination  m  the  latte  part 
U  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  ^^ew  Glasgow  Bridge  at  12h.; 

^^:Z:tl^:^'^^^-  -<!  WNW.  and  IJ  miles  wide, 
is  of  Xy  and  tndstone,  rising  in  the  central  parts  to  the  extreme 
heilt  of  150  feet  above  the  sea.  It  is  wooded  on  the  northern  side, 
SlLre  are  settl  ..aents  and  farms  along  its  southern  shore.  Low 
^^Zu^lo.Uu.e,  with  the  exception  of  several  smal  bays  and 
tger  Point,  on  the  siuth  side,  which  is  of  sand,  and  attords  the  best 

'' Wesf  Pointy  be  passed  in  3  fathoms  water  within  ^  mile;  but 
on  either  side  oT  the  west  end  of  the  island  there  are  rock,  nearly  dry 

T  e  southern  shore  maybe  approached  to  5  fathoms;  but  ^^  I'^^«  J^^^* 

"'nl^rtea  Sho'r-In*mo»t  of  tLe  old  charts  a  ,b„a.  i,  laid  down 
ab^^f^Uef^tlard  of  PWoa  Island,  but  no  indications  of  .ts 

PTfiatfiuce  were  discovered  during  the  survey  ot  ims. 
Lter-^rherightLouse,on  tLe  SE.pointof  Picto^ 

tower32  feet  hi|h,  painted  white,  and  exhibits  at  jjlevati^  of  52 
fPPt  a  fixed  white  light,  which        ^l.d  be  visible  12  miles. 

Cautn  -Whe,;8tanding  t.  eastward  through  Northumberland 
StraU  remember  that  Pictou  i...  ad  light  does  not  open  out  uptU  it 
beirs  S  Too  W  (S.  39o  W.  mag.) ;  also  the  light  on  Cape  St.  George  is 
not  seen  to  the  eastward  of  S.  G8o  E.  (S.  45°  E.  i"ag.) 

Lifeboat.-A  lifeboat  is  stationed  near  the  lighthouse  on  P.ctou 

^'plctou  Island  Bank  extends  from  Pictou  Island  to  the  we^t  and 
so!S  mUef  It  is  of  irregular  outline,  of  great  extent  a.do  sand^ 
stone  thinly  covered  with  sand,  gravel,  mud,  and  b«-oken  shell  The 
depths  are  as  irregular  as  the  nature  of  the  bottom,  being  from  2|  to  6 
fathoms,  excepting  on  the  Middle  Shoals 

The  Middle  Shoals  are  a  chain  of  rocky  patches,  with  11  fact  least 
water  s^  etching  across  the  northern  part  of  the  bank  li  miles  m  a 
ru'hwest^rly  direction,  so  as  to  approach  within  |  mile  of  the  Caribou 


ORE. 

•bor.  It  may  also 
observations  were 
wing  the  inferior 
t  part  of  the  lima- 
in  the  latter  part. 
V  Bridge  at  12h. ; 

uul  li  miles  wide, 
ts  to  the  extreme 
;he  northern  side, 
;hern  shore.  Low 
al  snmll  bays  and 
id  affords  the  best 

within  i  mile;  but 
e  rocks,  nearly  dry 
ling  to  the  distance 
accasionally  to  the 
iiich  should  not  be 
s  in  the  nighttime. 
;  but  at  East  Point 
ans  out  J  mile  to  3 
'here  are  9  fathoms 
istward.  It  should 
i,  but  especially  at 

shoal  is  laid  down 
0  indications  of  its 

3. 

itt  Island,  is  a  square 

b  an  elevation  of  52 

miles. 

igh  Northumberland 

ot  open  out  until  it 

a  Cape  St.  George  is 

ghthouse  on  Pictou 

and  to  the  west  and 

extent,  and  of  sand- 

L  broken  shell.    The 

m,  being  from  2|  to  6 

es,  with  11  foet  least 
ebank  IJ  miles  in  a 
^  mile  of  the  Caribou 


CARIBOU   HARBOR.  ' 

Channel,  on  tlie  one  hand,  and  within  IJ  miles  of  the  west  point  of  Pic- 
tou Island  on  the  otlier.  There  is  but  little  doubt  that  at  least  .'JJ 
fatlioms  at  low  water  can  be  carried  through  between  these  shoals 
and  Pictou  Island,  although  the  irregular  soundings  forbid  absolute 
certainty.  Koger  Point  and  West  Point  (Pictou  Island),  bearing  east 
(S.  (MO  E.  mag.),  will  lead  close  to  the  northward  of  them  in  4  fathoms, 
but  large  ships  had  better  not  approach  tiiem  on  that  side  nearer  than 
7  fathoms. 

Buoy.— A  red  buoy  is  moored  near  the  11-foot  patcij  on  the  Middle 
Shoal. 

Caribou  Harbor,  between  Doctor  and  Caribou  Islands  and  the  main- 
land, is  an  extensive  place,  being  (J  luiles  long  from  the  southern 
entrance  to  the  West  Gully,  and  in  some  parts  a  mile  wide.  The 
whole  of  this  large  space  is  occupied  by  shallow  water,  excepting  the 
narrow  channel  of  the  harbor,  which  is  deep  enough  for  vessels  of  far 
larger  draft  than  can  pass  the  bar,  but  does  not  run  through,  being  lost 
in  mud  flats  at  the  distance  of  3^  miles  from  the  southern  entrance. 
The  West  Gully  is  dry  at  low  water;  about  a  mile  within  it  Caribou 
River  enters  the  harbor,  and  is  navigable  tor  boats  to  the  distance  of 
2  or  3  miles.  There  are  settlements  and  farms  along  the  southern  shore 
of  the  harbor,  also  upon  the  inner  side  of  the  islands,  and  a  road  from 
the  former  to  Pictou. 

The  vessel  entrance  to  this  harbor  between  Widow  Point  and  Doctor 
Spit  is  only  120  yards  -vide,  and  the  navigable  breadth  is  reduced  by 
the  shallow  water  off  Widow  Point  to  80  yards.  The  depth  is  here  5 
fathoms,  but  an  abrupt  turn  and  a  tide  of  4  knots  render  so  nairow  a 
channel  extremely  difficult.  Outside  the  entrance  the  channel  between 
the  shoals  becomes  wider,  and  the  depth  diminishes  gradually  out  to 
the  bar  at  the  distance  of  a  mile,  and  over  which  only  9  feet  can  be 
carried  at  low  water.  The  great  superiority  of  the  neighboring  harbor 
of  Pictou  renders  it  in  the  highest  degree  unlikely  that  this  harbor 
will  ever  be  much  frequented  by  shipping;  and  its  bar  and  entrance 
are  too  difficult  and  dangerous  to  be  attempted  without  some  special 
object,  and  then  a  pilot  should  be  employed.  Widow  Point,  the  south 
or  mainland  point  of  entrance  of  the  harbor,  is  of  sand  and  shingle, 
and  Oak  Tree  Point,  a  steep  clay  bank,  with  a  house  and  barn  upon  it| 
IS  the  first  point  of  the  mainland  within  the  entrance,  from  which  it  is 
distant  ^  mile. 

Light— The  lighthouse  on  the  NE.  part  of  Caribou  or  Gull  Island  is 
square,  26  feet  high,  painted  white,  and  exhibits  at  an  elevation  of  35 
feet  a  revolving  white  light  every  minute,  which  should  be  visible  10 
miles. 

Directions.— To  enter  Caribou  Harbor— having  a  fair  wind,  and 
being  in  not  less  than  5  fathoms  water— bring  the  high-water  extremes  of 
Widow  and  Oak  Tree  Points  in  one  bearing  N.  89°  W.  (N.  66°  W.  mag.), 
and  run  toward  them  till  the  vessel  has  passed  the  bar  in  the  low- water 


80 


NORTHUMBERLAND   STRAIT — SOUTH    SHORE. 


depth  of  9  feet  and  lias  deepened  to  13  or  14  feet;  then  lookout  when 
Caribou  and  Doctor  Points  come  in  one,  bearing  N.  36°  W.  (X.  13°  \V. 
mag.)»  when  sheer  immediately  to  the  northward  sufficiently  to  bring 
Oak  Tree  Point  and  Doctor  Spit  in  one,  bearing  S.  85°  W.  (X.  72'^  W 
mag.).  Keep  the  last-named  marks  accurately  in  one,  or  closely  touch- 
ing, until  the  vessel  is  not  more  tiiau  60  yards  from  the  end  of  the  spit, 
when  sheer  to  the  SW.  so  as  to  pass  its  south  extreme  at  the  same 
distance  into  the  harbor.  The  channel  for  the  first  ^  mile  in  from  the 
entrance  is  not  more  than  180  yards  wide,  the  tide  is  stronger  there, 
and  the  bottom  not  quite  so  good  as  farther  in,  where  the  channel 
expands  to  260  yards  in  width,  with  a  depth,of  from  4  to  7  fathoms  over 
mud  bottom. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Caribou  Harbor  at  10  h., 
the  diurnal  inequality  causing  at  times  a  ditterence  of  nearly  2  hours 
in  the  two  tides  of  the  same  day,  and  also  2  feet  in  the  height  of  the 
water.  The  rise  of  the  highest  of  the  two  ordinary  spring  tides  of  the 
same  day  is  6  feet,  and  of  neap  tides  4  feet;  there  are,  therefore,  15 
feet  over  the  bar  at  high-water  ordinary  springs.- 

Ca/ibou  Channel,  between  the  Caribou  Keef  and  the  Picton  Island 
Bank,  has  sufficient  depth  for  vessels  of  large  draft,  and  in  breadth,  at 
the  narrowest  part,  exceeds  ^  or  ^  mile,  according  as  it  is  conceived  to  be 
bounded  on  either  side  by  the  3-tathom  or  the  5-fathom  line;  but  it  is 
nevertheless  difficult, because  so  crooked  that  no  marks  can  lead  through 
its  whole  extent. 

The  safest  mode  of  running  through  this  channel  to  the  westward  is 
to  strike  soundings  in  0  or  7  fathoms  on  the  edge  of  the  shoal  water  off 
Doctor  Island,  and  follow  it  to  the  NW.  until  McKenzie  Head  is  just 
shut  in  behind  Logan  Point,  bearing  S.  17°  E.  (S.  6°  W.  mag.);  then 
steer  from  those  marks,  keeping  the  head  just  shut  in,  and  they  will 
lead  across  the  deep  water,  and  afterwards  along  the  western  edge  of 
the  Pictou  Island  Bank  out  to  sea.  If  the  wind  were  strong  from  the 
SW.  with  an  ebb  tide,  it  would  be  preferable  to  keep  on  the  weather 
side  of  the  channel,  in  which  case  the  edge  of  the  shoal  water  off  Doc- 
tor Island  should  be  followed  farther  to  the  NW.,  until  Logan  Point  is 
only  a  little  open  to  the  eastward  of  Doctor  Point,  bearing  S.  23°  E. 
(south  mag.).  Those  points  in  one  lead  along  the  east  side  of  Caribou 
Eeef  in  4  fathoms  water.  Keep  Logan  Point  a  little  open,  and  it  will 
lead  clear  out  to  sea  in  not  less  than  4^  fathoms. 

The  same  marks  and  directions  taken  in  the  reverse  order  will  ena- 
ble a  vessel  to  take  this  channel  from  the  northward  or  westward,  it 
being  only  necessary  to  add  that  she  should  not  haul  to  the  eastward 
until  the  Hawksbill  is  well  shut  in  behind  Caribou  Point,  nor  open  out 
the  former  again,  after  having  shut  it  in,  until  the  lighthouse  at  Pictou 
is  open  to  the  southward  of  Cole  Point,  the  lighthouse  and  Cole  Point 
in  line,  bearing  S.  44°  W.  (S.  07°  W.  mag.),  being  the  mark  for  clearing 
the  south  extreme  of  the  Pictou  Island  Bank  in  5  fathoms. 


iE. 


CARIBOU   HARBOR — AMET   SOUND. 


81 


L  lookout  Avhen 
W.  (K  i;{o  W. 
iently  to  bring 
W.  (N.  72-^  W 
r  closely  toucli- 
entl  of  the  spit, 
le  at  the  same 
[lile  in  from  the 
stronger  there, 
ire  the  channel 
7  fathoms  over 

Harbor  at  10  h., 
'  nearly  2  hours 
le  height  of  the 
■ing  tides  of  the 
re,  therefore,  15 

e  Pictou  Island 
d  in  breadth,  at 
,  conceived  to  be 
in  line;  but  it  is 
an  lead  through 

the  westward  is 
)  shoal  water  off 
le  Head  is  just 
V.  mag.);  then 
[1,  and  they  will 
western  edge  of 
Istrong  from  the 
on  the  weather 
[l  water  off  Doc- 
Logan  Point  is 
laring  S.  23°  E. 
side  of  Caribou 
ipen,  and  it  will 

order  will  ena- 

|or  westward,  it 

the  eastward 

it,  nor  open  out 

thouse  at  Pictou 

and  Cole  Point 

irk  for  clearing 

^ms. 


Allow  for  a  strong  set  over  Pictou  Bank,  according  to  the  tide. 

The  light  on  Caribou  Island  is  a  very  brilliant  one,  and  from  an 
elevation  of  25  feet  has  been  seen  19  or  20  miles. 

Doctor  Island,  at  the  entrance  to  Caribou  Ilarbor,  forms  two 
entrances  into  the  harbor,  of  which  the  northern,  between  two  sandy 
spits,  is  800  yards  wide,  but  has  only  4  feet  in  it  at  low  water. 

Doctor  Reef,  very  dangerous,  extends  from  Doctor  Point  eastward 
14  miles,  to  the  depth  of  3  fathoms,  and  shows  rocks  dry  at  low  water 
to  the  distance  of  ^  mile.  Southward  of  this  reef,  and  §  mile  SE.  by 
B.  ^  E.  from  Doctor  Point,  lie  the  Seal  Rocks,  dry  at  low  water,  and 
from  which  the  shallow  water,  forming  the  bar  of  Caribou  Harbor, 
extends  to  Logan  Point,  the  north  point  of  Pictou  Bay. 

Buoy. — Skinner  Beef  buoy  is  red,  and  is  moored  in  4  fathoms  N.  50° 
B.  (N.  730  E.  mag.)  1,«60  yards  from  Doctor  Point. 

Caribou  Reef.— Caribou  Reef,  of  large  stones,  which  dry  out  to  the 
distance  of  600  yards  from  the  shore,  is  also  very  dangerous,  the  deep 
water  approaching  nearly  close  to  its  north  point  and  eastern  side. 
It  stretches  out  from  Caribou  Point  northward  ^  mile  to  the  3-lathom 
and  %  mile  to  the  5-fathom  line  of  soundings. 

The  Coast — From  the  Caribou  Point  to  West  Gully  the  coast  is 
formed  by  the  northern  shore  of  Caribou  Island,  appearing  from  a  dis- 
tance like  several  islands;  bat  on  a  nearer  approach  the  wooded  parts- 
are  found  to  be  joined  together  by  sand  bars.  From  West  Gully  of 
Caribou  to  Cape  John  it  is  nearly  straight,  unbroken,  and  free  from 
danger,  the  shoal  water  nowhere  extending  beyond  ^  mile  oft'  shore. 
Cliffs  of  clay  and  sandstone,  not  exceeding  the  height  of  50  feet,  and 
in  general  much  lower,  form  the  x)i'edominating  feature;  but  there  is, 
nevertheless,  good  landing  for  boats  almost  everywhere  in  fine  weather. 

Amet  Sound  is  very  extensive,  affording  excellent  anchorage  for 
any  number  and  class  of  vessels.  Cape  John  and  Mullegash  Point,  its 
eastern  and  western  points  of  entrance,  are  more  than  4  miles  apart, 
but  there  are  detached  dangers  outside,  or  oft'  the  entrance,  which 
require  to  be  described  before  directions  can  be  given  for  entering  by 
either  of  the  three  channels  which  they  form. 

Amet  Isle  in  very  small,  and  is  divided  into  two  parts,  of  which  the 
western  is  the  larger,  presenting  clay  cliffs  on  every  side,  excepting 
where  they  are  joined  together  by  a  sandy  heck.  It  is  flat  at  top,  bare 
of  trees,  covered  with  a  coarse  grass,  and  about  20  feet  above  the  sea 
at  high  water. 

This  islet  was  formerly  much  larger  than  at  present,  and  the  cliffs 
still  continue  to  be  undermined  by  every  heavy  gale  and  high  tide;  the 
frosts  also  aid  in  the  work  of  destruction,  so  that  the  time  can  not  be 
very  distant  when  there  will  only  remain  a  reef  of  the  highly  inclined 
sandstone  which  at  present  forms  the  base  of  the  islet,  and  dries  out 
about  400  yards,  excepting  on  the  southern  side,  where  boats  can 
generally  laud  at  all  times  of  tide  (I860).  Shallow  water  extends 
1151 6 


82 


NORTHUMBERLAND   STRAIT — SOUTH   SHORE. 


off  the  islet  000  yards  westward,  and  will  be  cleared  in  not  less  than 
34  fathoms  if  St.  John's  church  steeple,  at  the  Jo.ni  River,  be  kept  in 
line  with  Reef  Point  S.  50o  E.  (8.  28°  E.  mag.);  but  vessels  of  large 
draft  should  stand  in  only  to  6  fathoms,  remembering  that  iu  every 
other  direction  shallow  water  extends  from  the  island  to  far  greater 

Amet  ShoalB  are  rocky,  with  very  irregular  soundings,  av  <\  are  much 
more  extensive  and  dangerous  than  have  been  hitherto  represented. 
They  extend  nearly  4  miles  from  the  islet  to  the  eastward,  and  also  J 
miles  to  the  SB.  toward  Cape  John.  In  both  directions  there  are  rocky 
patches,  with  no  more  than  5  or  6  feet  of  water,  a  long  mile  out  from 
the  islet;  at  a  greater  distance  than  2  miles  there  are  not  less  than  16 
feet;  but  there  is  East  Patch,  with  that  depth,  fully  3  miles  to  the  east- 
ward of  the  islet.  The  marks  for  EaSt  Patch  are  the  north  extreme  of 
Amet  Islet  and  Treen  Bluflf  in  line  and  Cape  John  S.  19°  W.  (S.  41° 

W.  mag.). 

Conn  House  and  Cape  John  bearing  S.  25°  W.  (S.  47°  W.  mag.), 
lead  about  a  i  mile  SE.  of  it  iu  4  fathoms  of  water;  but  to  clear  the 
extreme  east  end  of  the  shoal  in  a  greater  depth.  Cape  John  must  bear 
to  the  westward  of  S.  33°  W.  (S.  55o  W.  mag.).  The  northern  side  of 
these  shoals  is  very  steep,  and  should  not  be  approached  in  a  large 
vessel,  especially  at  night,  to  a  less  depth  than  10  fathoms.  Treen 
Bluff  and  Saddle  Island  touching,  and  bearing  S.  84°  W.  (N.  74°  W. 
mag.),  lead  along  the  southern  side  in  2^  fathoms. 

Light— The  lighthouse  on  the  center  of  Amet  Isle,  a  square  build 
ing,  painted  white,  exhibits,  at  an  elevation  of  44  feet,  a  fixed  white 
light,  which  should  be  visible  10  miles. 

Waugh  Shoal,  which  from  its  position  and  steepness  is  extremely 
dangerous,  is  a  rocky  bank  nearly  H  miles  long  and  i  mile  broad, 
with  irregular  soundings  from  3i  to  5  fathoms,  excepting  toward  its 
northern  end,  where  there  is  a  patch  of  considerable  extent  with  from 
2  to  2|  fathoms,  12  feet  being  the  least  water,  unless  it  may  be  m 
unusually  low  tides.    In  this  shallowest  pait  the  shoal  is  very  steep, 
and  should  not  be  approached  from  the  northward  nearer  than  the 
depth  of  7  fathoms;  but  in  all  other  parts  vessels  may  approach  to  5 
fathoms  at  low  water.    There  are  no  clearing  marks  for  the  western 
side  of  this  shoal,  the  lead  is  the  only  guide.    The  NB.  side  is  just 
cleared  in  5  and  6  fathoms,  either  by  the  eastern  extremes  of  Amet  Isle 
and  Cape  John  in  line  or  by  the  English  church  steeple,  at  the  John 
River  in  line  with  Reef  Point,  bearing  S.  49°  E.  (S.  27"  E.  mag.).    Tlic 
SB  side  is  cleared  in  4  fathoms,  by  the  eastern  extremes  of  MuUegash 
and  Chamber  Points  in  one  bearing  S.  16°  W.  (8.  38°  W.  mag.).    AH 
these  objects  will  easily  be  made  out  excepting  Chamber  Point,  which, 
being  very  low,  is  at  times  difficult  to  distinguish  from  the  high  land 

behind  it.  ,        j  n 

Eastern  Passage  into  the  sound,  between  the  Amet  Shoals  and  Cape 


EtE. 

n  not  less  than 
ver,  be  kept  in 
ressels  of  large 
g  that  iu  every 
I  to  far  greater 

»8,  ait '1  are  much 
rto  represented, 
rard,  and  also  li 
I  there  are  rocky 
g  mile  out  from 
not  less  than  16 
iiiles  to  the  east- 
Qorth  extreme  of 
J.I90  W.  (8.41° 

3.  470  W.  mag.), 
but  to  clear  the 
I  John  must  bear 
northern  side  of 
iched  in  a  large 
fathoms.  Treen 
to  w.  (N.  740  W. 

,  a  square  build- 
et,  a  fixed  white 

less  is  extremely 
ad  ^  mile  broad, 
pting  toward  its 
extent  with  from 
ess  it  may  be  in 
oal  is  very  steep, 

nearer  than  the 
lay  approach  to  5 
s  for  the  western 

NB.  side  is  just 
smes  of  Amet  Isle 
eple,  at  the  John 
70  E.  mag.).  The 
mes  of  Mnllegash 
30  W.  mag.).  AH 
aber  Point,  which, 
com  the  high  land 

ii  Shoals  and  Cape 


AMET  SOUND. 


83 


John,  is  ^  mile  wide,  between  the  3-fathom  lines,  with  irregular  sound- 
ings from  3i  to  «  fathoms,  and  with  rock,  red  sand,  broken  shell,  and 
mud  bottom. 

It  is  difficult  to  carry  more  than  4  fathoms  through  at  low  water. 
To  safely  take  this  passage  from  the  eastward  with  a  fair  wind,  bring 
Cape  John  to  bear  to  the  westward  of  S.  33°  W.  (S.  65°  W.  mag.),  or 
bring  that  cape  and  Brul6  Point  to  touch,  bearing  S.39o  W.(S.61o  \v. 
mag.),  and  steer  for  them  till  Treen  Bluff  opens  to  the  southward  of 
Saddle  Island,  when  alter  course  to  S.  62°  W.  (S.  84°  W.  mag.),  which 
is  for  the  mouth  of  Tatamagouche  Bay,  and  the  vessel  will  sail  nearly 
through  the  middle  of  the  passage.  There  will  be  no  danger  from  the 
Amet  Shoals,  if  Treen  Bluff  be  kept  open  to  the  southward  of  Saddle 
Island,  nor  yet  from  the  shallow  water  off  Cape  John  if  it  bs  not 
approached  nearer  than  the  depth  of  4  fathoms. 

Middle  Passage.— The  Middle  Passage  into  Amet  Sound,  between 
the  Waugh  Shoal  and  Amet  Isle,  is  a  long  mile  wide  from  the  depth  of 
6  fathoms  to  5  fathoms  on  either  side,  clear  of  all  danger,  and  carries  6 
to  10  fathoms  water,  with  sand  and  mud  bottom.  An  excellent  leading 
mark  for  running  through  this  passage  with  a  fair  wind  is  Conn  House 
and  Brul6  Point  in  line,  bearing  S.  9o  E.  (S.  13o  W.  mag.)  (1860). 

Western  Passage,  between  Saddle  Island  and  Eeef  and  Waugh 
Shoal,  is  a  mile  wide,  with  irregular  soundings  from  5  to  8^  fathoms, 
the  lesser  depth  being  to  the  southward  of  "Waugh  Shoal,  where  the 
bottom  is  rocky  and  uneven,  whilst  farther  westward  it  is  of  mud. 

If  bound  to  Brul6  Harbor,  after  rounding  Saddle  Reef,  steer  for  Bruld 
Point,  or  a  little  to  the  east  of  it,  until  the  mark  for  clearing  the  NE. 
side  of  the  Brul6  Shoals,  namely,  the  English  church  steeple,  at  the  Johii 
River,  a  little  open  to  the  northward  of  Long  Point,  comes  .?n  S.  70°  E, 
(S.  48°  E.  mag.),  then  alter  course,  and  run  toward  tho  narks  till 
Brul6  Point  bears  S.36o  W.  (S.  58o  W.  mag.),  when  haul  in  to  the  south- 
ward, and  run  by  the  lead  along  the  SB.  side  of  the  Brul6  Shoals  in 
from  3^  to  3^  fathoms,  until  the  Uiichorage  is  reached.  A  pilot,  or  a 
previous  buoying  of  the  channel,  would  be  necessary  to  take  the  vessel 
into  the  harbor. 

If  bound  to  the  anchorage  off  the  bar  of  the  John  River,  it  is  only 
necessary  to  run  up  the  middle  of  John  Bay  till  the  water  shoals  to  3J 
fathoms,  which  is  as  near  as  a  large  ship  should  go,  although  distant  li 
miles  from  the  river's  mouth. 

Tides.— It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Amet  Sound  at  lOh.: 
springs  rise  8  feet,  neaps  5  feet.  The  tidal  streams  are  very  weak 
within  the  sound,  setting  regularly  up  the  bays  and  rivers.  In  the 
Western  Passage  both  tides  in  general  set  fairly  through,  the  flood 
about  west  and  the  ebb  about  east,  at  rates  never  exceeding  1^  knots 
and  usually  much  less.  In  Middle  Passage  the  ebb  sets  out  to  the 
northward  and  eastward  less  than  a  knot  and  the  flood  to  the  west- 
ward, at  the  same  rate,  over  Waugh  Shoal.    In  the  Eastern  Passage 


84 


NORTHUMBERLAND   STRAIT — flOUTH   SHORE. 


the  ebb  sets  out  to  the  NE.  and  the  flood  in  tlie  opposite  direction,  tlie 
rates  varying  from  i  to  1^  knots. 

John  Bay  rnns  in  nearly  4  uiileR  to  the  8K.  ft-om  Cape  John  to 
Mnrphy  Point,  which  Is  the  sandy  east  point  of  entrance  of  the  river. 
The  bay  is  free  from  detached  dangers,  but  the  shoals  extending  out 
from  its  shores  are  often  very  steep,  and  should  not  be  approa(!hed 
nearer  than  the  h>w- water  depth  of  3^  fathoms,  nor  without  due  cau- 
tion. Sandy  shoals  occupy  the  head  of  the  bay,  drying  out  nearly  ^ 
mile,  and  extending  1|  miles  from  the  entrance  of  the  river  to  the 
3-fathom  line. 

Cape  John,  the  northern  point  of  John  Bay,  will  be  easily  recog- 
nized by  its  sharp-pointed  cliffs  of  sandstone,  40  or  50  feet  high,  and 
by  two  high  rotiks,  always  above  water,  on  the  inner  part  of  the  reef, 
which  extends  from  it  800  yards  to  the  NW.  This  reef  is  very  steep, 
especially  at  its  western  point,  where  there  are  nearly  U  fathoms  at  low 
water  quite  close  to  it,  being  a  greater  depth  than  occurs  anywhere  else 
near  by.  Off  the  northern  side  of  the  cape  shallow  water  extends 
nearly  ^  mile,  and  as  there  are  only  15  or  16  feet  close  within  the 
3-fathom  mark,  large  vessels  should  not  approach  nearer  than  the 
low- water  depth  of  4  or  3J  fathoms. 

John  River  has  only  one  foot  at  low  water  over  its  bar  of  sand,  and 
an  iiregular  depth,  from  3  to  11  feet,  in  a  very  narrow  channel  up  to 
the  bridge,  a  distance  of  nearly  a  mile.  Several  ships  are  built  here 
annually,  and  notwithstanding  the  shallow  bar,  are  taken  out  light  and 
moored  outside  to  take  in  cargoes  of  lumber  which  are  brought  down 
the  river.  The  vessels  lie  off'  the  entrance  in  from  2^  to  3J  fathoms, 
over  mud  bottom ;  and  although  the  bay  is  completely  open  to  the  N  W., 
.are  considered  safe  in  the  summer  months.  * 

There  are  extensive  and  flourishing  settlements  on  either  side  of  this 
river.  Tlie  English  church  will  be  known  by  its  spire,  about  J  mile  to 
the  eastward  of  the  bridge,  and  the  chapel  by  its  cupola,  on  the  opposite 
or  western  bank,  ^  mile  from  the  bridge  toward  the  river's  mouth. 

Bml6  Peninsula. — Brule  Peninsula  is  wooded,  rather  low,  and  united 
to  the  mainland  at  its  8W.  end  by  a  low  and  marshy  isthmus.  Penin- 
sula Point,  its  NW.  extreme,  has  a  reef  extending  from  it  800  yards  to 
the  NW.,  in  great  part  dry  at  low  water,  and  so  bold  that  there  is  little 
warning  by  the  lead.  Brul6  Point  is  1^  miles  farther  to  thjB  eastward, 
the  intermediate  northern  shore  of  the  Peninsula  being  nearly  straight, 
and  of  clay  cliffs  8  or  10  feet  high,  the  whole  appearing  to  a  vessel  in 
the  offing  like  a  low  island  in  the  center  of  Aroet  Sound. 

Bml6  Shoals,  extending  1^  miles  to  the  north  from  Brdl^  Point,  are 
rocky,  with  irregular  soundings,  and  there  is  onily  9  feet  water  not  far 
from  their  outer  edge.  The  north  and  NW.  sides  of  these  shoals  should 
be  approached  very  cautiously,  for  they  are  there  extremely  steep,  having 
4  or  5  fathoms  close  to  the  edge,  and  no  good  clearing  mark.  The 
English  church  steeple,  at  the  John  Kiver,  just  open  to  the  northwai'd 


E. 


TATAIIAQOIJCHE   BAY. 


85 


1' 


)  (Ureotion,  the 

Oape  Jobn  to 
;e  of  the  river. 

extending  out 
bo  approached 
ithout  due  oau- 
ig  out  nearly  i 
he  river  to  the 

be  easily  recog- 
)  feet  high,  and 
jart  of  the  reef, 
ef  is  very  steep, 
«  fathoms  at  low 
rs  anywhere  else 
r  water  extends 
close  within  the 
nearer  than  the 

I  bar  of  sand,  and 
ow  channel  up  to 
lipB  are  built  here 
,ken  out  light  nnd 
ire  brought  down 
2^  to  3i  fathoms, 
open  to  the  NW., 

either  side  of  this 
•e,  about  i  mile  to 
la,  on  the  opposite 

iver's  mouth, 
ler  low,  and  united 
isthmus.    Penin- 
om  it  800  yards  to 
that  there  is  little 

to  the  eastward, 
ug  nearly  straight, 
in  g  to  a  vesseil  in 
md. 
n  Bnil6  Point,  are 

feet  water  not  far 
hese  shoals  should 
i»mely8teep,having 
taring  mark.    The 

to  the  northward 


of  Long  Point,  bearing  S.  70^  E.  (S.  48°  E.  mug.),  leads  along  their 
17E.  side  in  3  fathoms ;  tlieir  east  and  HE.  sides  may  safely  be  approached 
by  the  lead  to  3^  fathoms. 

Brul6  Harbor  runs  in  within  Brule';  Peninsula,  2^  miles,  in  a  SW. 
direction,  and  is  nearly  a  mile  wide,  but  the  far  greater  part  of  this 
large  space  is  occupied  by  flats  of  mud  and  weeds.  There  are  14  feet 
on  the  bar  at  low  water,  and  10  feet  for  a  short  distance  within,  but  the 
channel  soon  becomes  very  narrow  and  divided  iuto  several  branches. 

Anchorage. — The  anchorage  outside  the  bar,  in  3^  fathoms,  mud 
bottom,  is  the  best  sheltered  of  any,  in  the  sound,  and  a  ship  or  two 
usually  lie  there  to  take  in  lumber  every  year.  In  the  best  berth  Bruit- 
Point  will  bear  N.  00°  W.  (N.  38°  W.  mag.),  with  the  eastern  end  of 
Saddle  Island  showing  open  one  point  to  the  right  of  it  and  Cape  John 
N.  25°  E.  (N.  47°  E.  mag.). 

Barachois  Harbor.  Between  Peninsula  and  Chamber  Points,  is  the 
entrance  to  a  small  harbor  called  the  Barachois,  which  runs  in,  within 
Chamber  Point,  SW.  1^  miles,  and  is  then  contracted  to  a  very  narrow 
channel,  turning  to  the  SE.  into  a  shallow  lake  one  mile  long,  with 
steep  banks  and  an  island  at  its  head.  This  place,  which  is  seldom 
visited  by  shipping,  has  12  feet  over  its  bar  and  14  feet  within  at  low 
water. 

Tatamagouche  Bay,  2^  miles  wide  at  entrance,  between  Mullegash 
Point  and  Brul^  Peninsula,  runs  in  7  miles  to  the  southwestward, 
afibrding  everywhere  good  anchorage  over  a  bottom  of  soft  mud,  but 
with  insufiHcient  depth  of  water  for  large  ships  far  up  the  bay.  From 
5  fathoms  at  entrance  the  depth  decreases  to  3  fathoms  at  the  distance 
of  1^  miles  up  the  bay,  and  to  2  fathoms  at  4  miles,  the  remainder 
being  all  shallow,  and  in  part  dry  at  low  water,  with  the  exception  of 
boat  channels  leading  to  the  Basin  and  to  Millbrook.  The  only  detached 
danger  in  the  bay  is  a  rock  with  7  feet  least  water,  lying  700  yards  off 
the  northern  shore  and  2  miles  in  from  Mullegash  Point;  Amet  Isle 
and  Mullegash  Point  touching,  and  bearing  N.  47°  E.  (N.  69°  E.mag.), 
will  lead  to  the  southeastward  of  it.  A  stranger  may  safely  approach 
to  the  low- water  depth  of  3  fathoms  in  the  outer  part  of  the  bay,  and  to 
2^  fathoms  farther  in;  but  in  entering  should  keep  well  over  to  the 
northward  to  avoid  the  Brul^  Shoals. 

Anchorage. — In  4  £a>thoms,  good  holding  ground  (mud),  with  Cape 
John  N.  65°  E.  (N.  87°  E.  mag.),  Amet  Island  N.  31°  E.  (N.  53°  E.  mag.), 
and  Mullegash  Point  N.  47°  W.  (N.  25°  W.  mag.) 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  fUU  and  change,  at  Tatamagouche  Bay  at 
lOh. ;  springs  rise  8  feet,  neaps  5  feet. 

Tatamagouche  River,  in  the  SW.  corner  of  Tatamagouche  Bay, 
and  5  miles  from  its  entrance,  is  approached  by  a  very  narrow  channel 
through  the  flats,  obstructed  by  oyster  beds,  and  ouly  one  foot  deep  at 
low  water  in  ordinary  spring  tides;  nevertheless,  new  ships  of  consider- 
able burden  ore  brought  down  it  occasionally.    The  principal  settle- 


m 


.^&tii&^^sk  . 


86  NORTHUMBBBLAND   STRAIT— SOUTH   SHORE. 

meut  in  the  bay,  containinR  a  Bhlp-bulldlnKestobltahment  and  a  chapeK 
stands  on  the  western  bank,  and  there  is  abridge  2  miles  from  the 
entrance  of  the  river. 

Several  vessels  visit  this  river  for  lumber  every  year;  they  amhor 
off  it  where  there  are  only  U  or  12  feet  at  low  water,  and  as  the  tide 
falls  are  suflered  to  ground  on  the  soft  mud  without  injury. 

MuUeKash  Point,  tio  north  point  of  Tatamagouche  Bay,  is  one  mile 
to  the  southeastward  of  Saddle  Island ;  shallow  water  extends  from  tha 
one  to  the  other,  and  oflf  the  point  to  the  distance  of  a  long  *  mile. 

Saddle  Island  is  low,  wooded,  and  joined  to  the  shore  by  shoals  at 

^"^  Sild^e  Reef  runs  out  from  the  east  point  of  the  island  one  mile  to 
the  depth  of  3  fathoms,  and  is  very  dangerous,  having  on  it  a  round- 
backed  rock  called  the  Washball,  dry  at  low  water,  and  uistant  J  mile 
from  the  island.  There  are  only  a  few  feet  of  water  much  farther  out. 
In  approaching  this  reef  from  the  northward,  the  soundings  give  httle 
waring,  but  an  excellent  leading  mark  namely,  T;e«nBluft,  just  open 
to  the  northward  of  Saddle  Island,  and  bearing  S.  75°  W.  (N.  83o  W. 
mag.),  just  clears  it  in  4  fathoms.  The  lead  affords  the  only  guide  for 
clearing  it  to  the  eastward,  where  it  may  be  safely  approached  to  the 
depth  of  6  fathoms  with  care. 

Wallace  Harbor  is  the  finest  on  this  coast,  excepting  Pictou,  hav- 
ing 16  feet  over  its  bar  at  low  water  in  ordinary  spring  tides,  which  rise 
8  feet,  so  that  it  is  capable  of  admitting  vessels  of  large  draft.    Its 
entrance,  2A  miles  S8W.  of  Oak  Island,  an*i  between  two  sandy  spits, 
named  ckulfleld  and  Palmer  Points,  is  nearly  iOO  yards  wide  and  carries 
6i  fathoms  water;  but  the  approach  to  this  entrance,  over  the  bar  and 
through  the  bay  for  a  distance  of  3  miles,  is  by  a  crooked  channel, 
which,  although  nowhere  less  than  300  yards  wide,  is  difficult  with- 
out the  aid  of  buoys  or  sufficient  leading  marks.    The  services  of  the 
pilots  of  the  place  will,  therefore,  alwuys  be  necessary  to  insure  safety. 
Wallace  stands  on  the  southern  shore,  IJ  miles  withm  the  entrance 
of  the  harbor.    The  land  rises  gradually  in  the  rear  to  the  8n°»"^*  «f  » 
ridge  extending  to  the  eastward,  and  attaining  the  elevation  of  400  feet. 
Opposite  Wallaee  the  river  is  more  than  i  mile  broad,  whilst  the  chan- 
nel between  the  flats  is  only  60  or  70  yards  wide,  and  with  5  or  6  fath- 
oms  water.    At  the  distance  of  2  miles  higher  up  the  river  is  divided 
into  two  branches,  both  of  which  are  rendered  narrow  and  intricate 

by  oyster  beds  in  the  channel. 
Wallace,under  the  nameofRamsheg,  was  formerly  visited  annuallyby 

many  more  vesselsthan  at  present,  the  supply  of  lumber  being  then  much 
greater;  at  present  only  a  few  cargoes  are  embarked  and  two  or  three 
vessels  built  there  every  year.  There  are  no  fisheries  of  commercial 
consequence;  the  salmon  and  gaspereux,  or  alewives,  8t»"j»«*  *;^ 
river,  but  in  diminished  numbers,  and  a  few  codfish  are  caught  off  Oak 
Island  and  the  neighboring  coast  in  the  months  of  May  and  June. 


f 


E. 

it  and  a  chapc^K 
mlleii  from  the 

r;  they  anchor 

aind  as  the  tide 

ary. 

Bay,  is  one  mile 

xtends  from  tha 

long  A  mile. 

)re  by  shoals  at 

land  one  mile  to 
g  on  it  a  round- 
id  distant  4  mile 
inch  farther  out. 
dings  give  little 
I  Bluff,  just  open 
,o  w.  (N.  83°  W. 
he  only  guide  for 
pproached  to  the 

ting  Pictou,  hav- 
f  tides,  which  rise 
large  draft.    Its 
two  sandy  spits, 
8  wide  and  carries 
over  the  bar  and 
crooked  channel, 
is  difficult  with- 
le  services  of  the 
r  to  insure  safety, 
thin  the  entrance 

0  the  summit  of  a 
vationof400feet. 
,  whilst  the  chan- 

1  with  5  or  6  fath- 
e  river  is  divided 
row  and  intricate 

risited  annually  by 
)r  being  then  much 
I  and  two  or  three 
es  of  commercial 
res,  still  visit  the 
ire  caught  off  Oak 
•f  May  and  June. 


WALLACE    HARBOR. 


87 


There  ib  difllculty  in  obtaining  a  large  supply  of  fresh  water  at  Wallace, 
also  at  Pugwash;  it  is  obtained  from  wells  and  springs,  which  bouts 
can  only  approach  at  high  water. 

Tlie  United  States  is  represented  by  a  (Mtnsniar  agent. 

Ship  ChanneL — Oak  Island  Rur  is  of  sand,  and  extends  from  Oak 
island  nearly  L'.^  miles  to  tliu  southward  toward  (^ravois  I'oiiit,  which 
may  be  re<;ogiii/.od  by  its  being  the  highest  ])art  of  tlie  clay  and  sand- 
stone cliffs,  and  by  its  bearing  and  distance  from  the  east  end  of  Oak 
island,  namely,  S.  22°  E.  (south  mag.)  3  miles.  Within  or  to  the  west- 
wanl  of  the  bar  the  whole  bay  is  shallow,  excepting  tlio  Ship  or  Wal- 
lace Channel  leading  to  Wallace  Harbor.  The  outer  or  eastern  side  of 
this  bar  may  be  safely  approached  by  the  lead  to  the  depth  of  4 
fathoms. 

Ship  Channel  is  fully  (KM)  yards  wide  at  its  entrance,  between  the  south 
point  of  the  bar  and  the  shoal  which  stretches  out  800  yards  from  (Ira- 
vois  Point,  and  ."U  fathoms  in  it  at  low  water.  From  the  entrance  the 
channel  runs  to  the  northward  and  westward,  curving  round  Hort(m 
Shoal,  and  between  it  and  the  shallow  water  to  the  northward,  which 
is  continuous  from  the  bar  to  Mullin  Point. 

Horton  Shoal,  of  sand,  stretches  out  ^  mile  to  tlie  eastward  from 
Horton  and  Gantwell  Points,  and  its  northern  part,  drying  out  to  the 
distance  of  800  yards  from  the  Horton  Spit,  can  therefore  generally  be 
seen. 

Horton  Spit,  of  low  sand,  inclosing  a  marsh,  extending  to  the  north- 
ward from  Horton  Point,  and  distant  2J  miles  northwestward  of  Gra- 
vois  Point,  will  easily  be  recognized  by  a  vessel  entering  the  Ship 
Channel.  The  northern  end  of  this  spit  is  quite  bold,  the  channel  pass- 
ing close  to  it,  and  thence  f  mile  W.  by  S.  of  the  entrance  of  tiic  harbor. 

Buoys. — On  entering  Wallace  Harbor,  if  any  buoys  are  placed,  the 
black  buoys  must  be  left  on  the  port  and  red  buoys  on  the  starboard 
hand. 

Lights. — On  Mullin  Point  stands  a  square  white  building,  25  feet 
high,  exhibiting  at  39  feet  above  high  water  a  fixed  white  light,  which 
should  be  visible  11  miles. 

The  inner  leading  light  is  fixed  red,  82  feet  above  high  water  and 
visible  8  miles,  over  a  small  arc  on  each  side  of  the  leading  mark.  The 
lighthouse,  a  square  tower  48  feet  high  rising  through  a  dwelling,  is 
painted  white,  and  stands  1,473  feet  N.  76°  W.  (N.  52°  W.  mag.)  from 
the  outer  light. 

The  two  lights  in  line  lead  over  the  bar  in  9  feet  water  and  up  to  the 
entrance  of  the  harbor. 

Directions. — Approaching  from  the  northward  pass  Oak  Island  at  a 
distance  of  fully  f  mile,  or  in  5  fathoms  water,  to  avoid  the  reef  off  its 
east  point.  Approaching  from  the  eastward,  Treen  Bluff  (the  cliffy 
point  2^  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Gravois  Point)  must  be  passed  at  an 
equal  distance  or  depth  to  avoid  the  Treen  Reef,  which  is  sandstone, 


m 


88 


NORTHUMBERLAND    STRAIT — SOUTH   SHORE. 


and  stretches  out  i  mile  from  the  bluff  to  the  3-fiftthom  line  of  soundings; 
the  north  extremes  of  Saddle  Island  and  Cape  John  in  one,  bearing  S. 
870  E.  (S.  65°  E.  mag.),  lead  to  the  northward  of  it  in  4  fathoms.  In 
either  case,  approach  the  shore  about  ^  mile  to  the  eastward  of  Gravois 
Point,  taking  care  not  to  bring  the  east  end  of  Oak  Island  to  bear  less 
to  the  westward  than  N.  34o  W.  (N.  12°  W.  mag.)  until  the  south  side 
of  Saddle  Island  is  only  one  degree  open  to  the  northward  of  Treen 
Bluff,  bearing  N.  82°  E.  (S.  76°  E.  mag.). 

Steer  now  S.  82°  W.  (N.  76°  W.  mag.),  taking  all  i)08sible  care  to  seep 
the  island  as  nearly  as  possible  one  degree  open,*  but  remembering  that 
the  lead  must  be  principally  depended  upon  to  guide  the  vessel  along 
the  edge  of  the  shallow  water  off  the  mainland,  in  SJ  or  3  fathoms  at 
low  water,  or  a  corresponding  depth  at  other  times  of  tide,  until  Smith 
Point  (the  eastern  extreme  of  the  mainland  outside  or  to  the  northward 
of  Oak  Island)  appears  through  the  middle  of  the  opening  in  the  trees 
of  Oak  Island  and  over  the  low  and  narrow  neck  which  joins  the  south- 
western part  to  the  rest  of  the  island,  and  bearing  N.  31°  W.  (N.  9°  W. 
mag.).  Then  alter  course  to  N.56o  W.  (N.34o  w.  mag.),  and  a  run  of  ^ 
mile  will  place  the  vessel  within,  or  to  the  westward  of  the  south  point 
of  the  bar,  in  about  15  feet  at  low  water. 

Let  the  course  be  now  immediately  changed  to  N.  22°  W.  (north 
mag.)  for  another  J  mile,  and  when  Palmer  Point  opens  out  to  the 
northward  of  the  Horton  Spit,  bearing  west  (N.  68^  W.  mag.),  steer 
N.  70O  W.  (N.  48°  W.  mag.),  and  the  water  will  soon  deepen  to  4  and  5 
fathoms  with  mud  bottom,  affording  tolerably  safe  anchorage  under 
shelter  of  the  bar,  on  which  the  sea  breaks  in  heavy  weather.  But  if 
it  be  wished  to  proceed  to  the  harbor,  let  the  N.  70°  W.  (N.  48°  \7. 
mag.)  course  be  continued  for  ^  mile,  and  Caulfleld  Point  will  open  out 
to  the  northward  of  the  Horton  Spit;  and,  immediately  afterwards, 
Smith  Point  will  open  out  to  the  westward  of  the  west  extreme  of  the 
trees  on  Oak  Island,  when  the  vessel  must  be  kept  gradually  away  to 
the  westward,  and  toward  Palmer  Point,  so  sl6  to  run  along  the  north- 
ern  edge  of  Horton  Shoal,  which  can  generally  be  seen  until  off  the 
Horton  Spit  at  the  distance  of  200  yards,  whence  the  course  is  S.  79° 
W.  (N.  79°  W.  mag.)  for  3  mile  to  the  harbor's  mouth. 

in  entering  the  harbor  keep  two-thirds  of  the  way  over  toward  the 
northern  or  Palmer  Point,  which  is  quite  bold,  to  avoid  the  shoal  water 
extending  100  yards  from  Caulfleld  Point. 

Anchorage.— Anchor  about  500  yards  within  the  entrance,  where  the 
channel  is  300  yards  wide  and  carries  from  3  to  6  fathoms,  with  mud 
bottom.  On  either  side,  flats  of  stiff  red  clay,  dry  at  low  water,  extend 
to  the  shore  and  render  the  landing  difficult.    At  1,200  yards  within 

•This  mark  is  given  ns  only  better  than  none,  for  it  is  not  easy  to  keep  the  island 
80  nearly  one  degree  open  as  is  reouired.  If  the  island  and  bluff  be  brought  to  touch, 
the  vessel  will  be  ashore  on  Gravois  Reef,  and  if  they  be  opened  to  the  extent  of  2 
degrees  only,  she  will  be  on  the  south  point  of  the  bar. 


4t, 


RE. 


POX   HARBOR— PUGWA8H   KEEP. 


le  of  soundings; 
;  one,  bearing  S. 
4  latboms.  In 
ward  of  Gravois 
land  to  bear  less 
il  tbe  south  side 
;hward  of  Treen 

ible  care  to  Keep 
emembering  that 
the  vessel  along 
or  3  fathoms  at 
tide,  until  Smith 
to  the  northward 
ming  in  the  trees 
h  joins  the  south- 
51°  W.  (N.  9°  W. 
j^.),and  a  run  oi^ 
►f  the  south  point 

5J.  220  W.  (north 
opens  out  to  the 
p  W.  mag.),  steer 
deepen  to  4  and  5 
anchorage  under 
weather.    But  if 

0  W.  (N.  48°  \V. 
oint  will  open  out 
lately  afterwards, 
ist  extreme  of  the 
[radually  away  to 

1  along  the  north- 
seen  until  off  the 
e  course  is  S.  79° 

1. 

y  over  coward  the 

lid  the  shoal  water 

ntrance,  where  the 

athoms,  with  mud 

low  water,  extend 

1,200  yards  within 

isy  to  keep  the  island 
f  be  brought  to  touch, 
led  to  the  extent  of  2 


the  entrance,  a  middle  ground  commences  and  diminishes  the  breadth 
of  the  channel  to  100  yards.  Neaily  abreast  the  eastern  end  of  this 
middle  ground  there  i<,  a  narrow  (channel  through  the  flats  and  up  Lazy 
Bay,  which  runs  in  more  than  a  mile  to  the  SK.,  and  has,  on  the  south- 
em  shore  near  its  head,  <!liffs  of  gypsum  30  fee*'  high. 

Tides —It  IS  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Wallace  Hh  'bor  at  lOh. 
30m.;  spnugs  rise  8  feet,  neaps  5  feet.  The  rate  of  the  tidal  streams 
is  greatest  in  the  entrance  of  the  harbor,  and  there  it  does  not  excee<l 
1^  knots  during  the  summer  months;  whilst  outside,  in  the  Ship  Chan- 
nel, it  is  usually  from  IJ  to  one  knot.  The  ebb,  however,  may  be 
somewhat  stronger  in  spring  after  the  melting  of  the  winter  snows. 

Oak  Island  is  low,  wooded,  and  about  a  mile  long,  having  Jerry 
Island,  small  and  wooded,  a  long  ^  mile  to  the  westward  of  it,  and  on 
the  north  side  of  Fox  Harbor,  just  within  Mackenzie  Point. 

Fox  Harbor— Within  or  southward  of  Oak  Island  a  bay  runs  in 
to  the  westward  about  2  miles,  to  Mulliu  Point,  which  separates  Wal- 
lace Harbor  from  Fox  Harbor.  Fox  Harbor  runs  in  3  or  4  miles  to  the 
17  W.,  with  a  channel  through  flats  of  tenacious  red  clay  and  weeds, 
which  are  nearly  diry  at  low  water.  There  are  3  or  4  fathoms  water  in 
this  channel ;  but  a  depth  of  8  or  9  feet  is  all  that  can  be  carried  over 
the  bar  at  low  water  in  ordinary  spring  tides. 

The  Coast' — Mackenzie  Point  is  separated  from  Oak  Island  by  sand 
bars  and  a  guUy  i>r  boats,  nearly  dry  when  the  tide  is  ont.  From  Mac- 
kenzie Point  to  Pugwash  Point  the  coast  is  unbroken,  and  for  the  most 
part  composed  of  clay  and  sandstone  cliffs,  of  the  height  of  50  feet, 
from  which  the  land  rises  tO'  the  summit  of  a  ridge  150  feet  high. 

Pt^fMraah  Reef  extends^  mile  northwestward  from  Pngwash  Point,- 
and  dries  out  about  half  that  distance.  There  are  rocky  patches,  with 
11  and  12  feet  water,  ^  mile  off  the  point  to  the  northward,  and  others 
farther  to  the  eastward^  a  full  mile  outfroni  the  shore;  moreover,  there 
is  uneven  rocky  ground,  with  a  less  depth  than  4  fathoms,  2  miles  off- 
shore, which  renders  it  unsafe  for  a  stranger  in  a  vessel  of  large  draft 
to  go  within  the  depth  of  5  fathoms. 

Light. — The  lighthouse  on  Fishing  Point,  a  square  building,  44  feet 
high,  and  painted  white,  exhibits  at  an  elevation  of  48  feet  a  fixed 
light,  showing  red  seaward  and  white  toward  the  harbor.  It  shonid 
be  visible  8  miles. 

Pugwash  Road,  in  the  entrance  of  Pngwash  Bay,  affords  excellent 
anchorage,  in  from  16  to  19  feet  at  low  water,  with  sand  and  clay  bot- 
tom, being  sheltered  by  Phillip  Bar  and  Lewis  Beef  from  westerly  and 
by  Pugwash  Beef  from  easterly  winds.  This  anchorage  is  exposed 
between  NNW.  and  NNE.,  but  the  shallow  water  outside  prevents  any 
sea  from  coming  in  sufficient  to  endanger  a  vessel  during  tbe  summer 
months. 

Directions. — To  run  for  Pugwash  Boad  from  the  northward,  the 
vessel  being  in  not  less  than  5  fathoms  water,  bring  the  English  church 


M0!^iihiL.: 


90 


NORTHUMBERLAND   STRAIT — SOUTH   SHORE. 


iv 


steeple  at  Pugwash  so  as  to  be  seeii  oyer  and  just  within  the  west 
extreme  of  the  low  cliff  of  Fishing  Point  (the  east  point  of  the  bay), 
bearing  S.  36°  E.  (S.  13°  E.  mag.). 

Run  toward  those  marks,  taking  care  not  to  open  out  the  church  in 
the  least  to  the  westward  of  the  point  until  Bergeman  Point  (the  south 
point  of  entrance  of  the  Phillip  River)  bears  S.  34°  W.  (S.  56°  W.  mag.), 
or  until  the  depth  decreases  to  3A  fathoms  at  low  water.  The  vessel  will 
then  be  close  off  the  NW.  end  of  Pugwash  Reef,  and  must  steer  south 
(S.  22°  W.  mag.)  for  i|  mile,  when  she  will  be  in  from  16  to  19  feet  at 
low  water,  with  clay  bottom. 

Anchorage. — Directly  in  the  line  Joining  Bergeman  and  Pugwash 
Points,  and  with  Fishing  Point  N.  85°  E.  (S.  73°  E.  mag.),  distant  nearly 
*  mile.  This  is  the  best  anchorage ;  but  vessels  may  lie  ^  mile  farther  in 
to  the  southward,  or  close  off  the  bar,  in  14  feet  at  low  water.  Still 
farther  in,  the  bay  is  all  shoal,  excepting  the  narrow  channel,  which 
curves  round  its  eastern  side  and  leads  to  the  harbor. 

To  run  for  Pugwash  Road  from  the  eastward,  the  vessel  being  in 
more  than  the  low- water  depth  of  5  fathoms,  bring  Bergeman  Point  to 
bear  S.  34°  W.  (S.  50°  W.  mag.),  and  steer  for  it  until  the  church  opens 
out  to  the  westward  of  Fishing  Point,  when  immediately  alter  course 
to  the  south  (S.  22°  W.  mag.),  and  having  run  nearly  f  mile,  anchor  in 
the  same  berth  as  before  directed. 

Pugwash  Harbor,  at  the  head  of  the  bay  and  entrance  of  the  river 
of  the  same  name,  is  small  but  quite  secure,  and  has  more  than  suffi- 
cient depth  of  water  for  any  vessel  that  can  pass  the  bar,  on  which  the 
depth  is  14  feet  at  low  water  in  ordinary  spring  tides.  The  bar  is 
about  i  mile  within  the  entrance  of  the  bay,  and  a  crooked  channel, 
from  100  to  200  yards  wide,  and  through  flats  of  sand  and  weeds  for  the 
distance  of  one  mile,  leads  from  it  to  the  harbor's  mouth.  No  directions 
would  avail  for  this  channel,  and  the  assistance  of  one  of  the  able  pilots 
of  the  place  is  indispensable,  and  will  be  readily  obtained  in  answer  to 
the  usual  signal. 

^  Pi^gwash.— The  town  of  Pugwash,  with  its  wharves  and  small  wooden 
FlJnglish  church,  stands  on  the  east  side  of  the  entrance  of  the  harbor. 
Immediately  within  there  is  a  fine  little  landlocked  basin,  with  a  depth 
of  nearly  7  fathoms,  in  which  vessels  lie  moored  in  security,  to  take  in 
cargoes  of  lumber  that  are  brought  down  the  river. 

Water.— There  is  no  good  watering  place  at  Pugwash,  the  supply 
being  from  wells,  or  from  springs  which  are  frequently  dry  in  summer. 

Pugwash  River,  immediately  within  the  harbor,  extends  into  a  small 
lake  IJ  miles  long  and  one  mile  wide,  in  which  there  are  several 
small  islands  and  peninsulas.  The  channel  through  the  lake,  and  be- 
tween flats  of  mud  and  weeds,  nearly  dry  at  low  water,  is  ftom  100  to 
200  yards  wide,  and  has  2^  to  6  fathoms  water  in  it.  On  the  western 
side  the  narrow  channel  of  Limestone  Creek  leads  to  quarries  of 
limestone,  unfit  for  building,  but  which  supply  Prince  Edward  Island 


T 


thin  the  west 
t  of  the  bay), 

the  church  in 
lint  (the  south 
oGoW.uia},'.), 
rhe  vessel  will 
st  steer  south 
to  19  feet  at 

and  Pugwash 
distant  nearly 
mile  farther  in 
^  water.  Still 
bannel,  which 

asset  being  in 
eman  Point  to 
I  church  opens 
y  alter  course 
nile,  anchor  in 

je  of  the  river 

ore  than  suffl- 

on  which  the 

The  bar  is 

oked  channel, 

weeds  for  the 

!7o  directions 

le  able  pilots 

in  answer  to 

small  wooden 

f  the  harbor. 

with  a  depth 

ty,  to  take  in 

)b,  the  supply 

y  in  summer. 

8  into  a  small 

are  several 

lake,  and  be- 

B  from  100  to 

a  the  western 

quarries  of 
dward  Island 


BAY   VERTE.  OT 

as  well  as  the  neighboring  country  with  lime.  The  river  continues 
navigable  for  small  vessels  about  2  miles  above  the  lake  and  for  boats 
tt.  1  distance  of  7  miles  from  its  entrance. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Pugwash  at  lOh.  30m.; 
springs  rise  7  feet,  neaps  4  feet.  The  rate  of  the  tidal  streams,  which 
is  greatest  in  the  entrance  of  the  harbor,  does  not  exceed  2  knots,  unless 
it  may  be  the  ebb  in  the  springs  after  the  melting  of  the  winter's 
snows.    In  Pugwash  Itoiid  it  seldom  exceeds  a  knot. 

Phillip  River  enters  the  sea  immediately  to  the  southward  of  Lewis 
Head,  and  between  the  latter  and  Bergeman  Point.  Its  mouth  is  | 
mile  wide,  but  a  dangerous  bar  of  sand  and  stones  stretches  across  it, 
so  as  to  leave  only  a  narrow  and  tortuous  (channel  of  8  feet  at  low 
water,  through  which  the  new  vessels,  built  up  the  river  and  brought 
down  light,  are  taken  with  difiSculty  on  their  way  to  i'ugwash,  where  they 
take  in  their  cargoes,  and  where  also  the  lumber  and  produce  brought 
down  this  river  are  taken  to  be  shipped.  Within  the  bar  a  depth  of  12 
feet  at  low  water  can  be  carried  up  the  river  for  5  miles,  and  there  are 
in  some  places  4  and  5  fathoms;  the  channel,  between  flats  of  mud  and 
weeds,  being,  in  some  parts,  not  more  than  40  or  50  yards  wide.  Boats 
can  easily  ascend  about  9  miles,  at  which  distance  the  tiue  ends,  and 
there  is  a  slight  rapid. 

Lewis  Reef  extends  2^  miles  NNE.  from  Lewis  Head.  Its  outer  part 
is'composed  of  detached  rocky  patches,  on  which  there  are  from  14  to 
18  feet  water,  with  a  greater  depth  between  them ;  but  the  inner  part 
is  shallow,  and  has  as  little  as  6  feet  water  at  1^  miles  from  the  shore. 

Coast — From  Pugwash  and  Phillip  Biver  to  Cold  Spring  Head,  the 
south  point  of  entrance  of  Bay  Verte,  a  distance  of  10  miles,  there  is 
no  place  of  use  tc  shipping. 

Bay  Verte  is  9  miles  wide  across  its  entrance,  from  Cold  Spring 
Head,  Nova  Scotia,  to  Indian  Point,  New  Brunswick,  but  contra<;ts  to 
the  breadth  of  2^  miles  near  its  head.  It  is  11  miles  deep,  and  sepa- 
rates the  two  provinces  just  named,  their  boundary  continuing  across  the 
isthmus  from  the  head  of  Bay  Verte  to  Cumberland  Basin,  a  distance 
of  about  11  miles.  There  is  no  harbor  in  Bay  Verte,  which  is  completely 
open  to  easterly  winds,  as  well  as  very  shallow  near  its  head,  where 
flats  of  mud  and  weeds  dry  out  %  mile  from  the  shore. 

In  the  western  corner  of  the  bay  is  the  Oaspereau^  River,  a  small 
stream  only  fit  for  boats. 

There  are  thriving  settlements  on  either  side  of  Bay  Verte,  and  espe- 
cially at  its  head,  where  extensive  tracts  of  meadow  land  have  been 
reclaimed  by  diking. 

Tignish  River  is  the  most  considerable  stream  in  Bay  Verte,  which 
it  enters  on  the  south  side  near  its  head.  It  ban  only  3  feet  depth  of 
water,  in  a  very  narrow  channel,  when  the  tide  is  out,  and  it  is 
Approached  by  a  narrow  channel,  carrying  3  to  7  feet,  through  flats  of 
mud  and  weeds,  which  dry  out  a  mile  from  its  mouth.    The  river  is  crossed 


't, 


92 


NOETHUMBEBLAND   STKAIT — SOUTH   SHORE. 


by  a  bridge  2^  miles  up  from  its  eutrance,  foUowiug  the  wiiidings  of 
tlie  river;  and  about  3  miles  farther  up  the  tide  is  limited  iu  its  ascent 
by  Toby's  mill.    Tlie  spring  tides  rise  9  feet  and  the  neap  tides  5  feet. 

Marine  Transport  Rail^vay. — A  ship  railway  is  proposed  su;ros8 
Chignecto  Isthmus,  17  miles  wide,  separating  the  Bay  of  Fuudy  from 
the  headwaters  of  the  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence,  and  connecting  Nova 
Scotia  and  New  Brunswick.  Ships  up  to  1,0(>0  tons  burden,  instead  of 
sailing  round  the  stormy  coast  of  Nova  Scotia,  a  distance  of  700  miles, 
will  be  raised  by  hydraulic  lifts  upon  an  immense  iron  cradle  resting 
upon  wheels,  and  then  hauled  across  the  isthmus.  The  rai  ray  will 
lessen  by  500  miles  the  distance  between  St.  Lawrence  ports  and  New 
York,  Boston,  and  Portland. 

Nothing  doing  on  the  railway  in  1893,  or  since  that  date. 

Light. — At  35  yards  from  the  north  extreme  of  Cold  Spring  Head 
is  a  white  square  lighthouse  with  a  red  lantern,  36  feet  high,  from 
which  is  shown  a  fixed  white  light,  60  feet  above  the  sea,  which  should 
be  visible  13  miles. 

Spear  Shoal,  having  a  patch  of  rock  with  10  feet  least  water  near 
its  east  end,  and  from  15  to  1 8  feet  in  other  parts,  is  a  bank  of  sand 
and  stone,  resting  on  sandstone,  about  a  mile  long,  in  an  east  and  west 
direction,  and  ^  mile  broad.  From  the  shoalest  part  Gape  Spear  bearb 
N.  56°  W.  (N.  34°  W.  mag.)  IJ  miles  and  Indian  Point  N.  2°  W.  (N. 
20°  E.  mag.)  2^  miles.  The  lead  gives  little  warning  in  approaching 
this  dangerous  shoal  from  the  eastward,  on  which  side  there  are  from 
3J  to  4^  fathoms  close-to ;  but  vessels  will  avoid  it  by  coming  into  no 
less  water  than  4^  fathoms,  as  they  pass  to  the  southward  of  it.  There 
are  3^  fathoms  between  it  and  Gape  Spear. 

Heart  Shoal,  about  a  mile  westward  of  the  Spear  Shoal,  and  S.  14° 
W.  (S.  36°  W.  mag.)  IJ  miles  from  Cape  Spear,  has  9  feet  least  water 
and  15  feet  between  it  and  the  shore;  but  it  lies  within  the  3-fathom 
line  of  soundings. 

Laurent  Shoal,  of  rock  and  sand,  with  16  feet  least  water,  is  about 
f  mile  long  by  half  that  breadth.  From  the  shoalest  part,  Gape  St. 
Laurent  bears  N.  57°  W.  (N.  35°  W.  mag.)  2f  miles,  Ephraim  Island 
N.  70°  W.  (N.  48°  W.  mag.),  Indian  Point  N.  40°  E.  (N.  62°  E.  mag.), 
and  Cold  Spring  Head  S.  5°  W.  (S.  27°  W.  mag.).  This  shoal  is  also 
bold  on  the  east  side,  where  there  are  4^  fathoms  close-to. 

Aggermore  Rock,  with  18  feet  least  water,  and  bearing  N.  28°  E. 
(N.  50°  E.  mag.)  2f  miles  from  Cold  Spring  Head,  is,  like  the  Laurent 
Shoal,  merely  one  of  the  shallowest  points  of  an  extensive  rocky  bank, 
which  is  thinly  covered  with  mud  and  sand,  and  which  extends  out 
from  Cape  St.  Laurent  and  Ephraim  Island,  in  a  SE.  direction,  so  as 
to  leave  a  deep  channel  about  2  miles  wide  between  it  and  Gold  Spring 
Head.  At  low  water  not  more  than  19  feet  could  be  safely  reckoned 
npon  in  running  between  the  Aggermore  Kock  and  the  Laurent  Shoal, 
or  between  the  latter  and  the  Ephraim  Banks  extending  off  the  north- 
ern shore. 


TORMENTINE    REGF8. 


^ 


windings  of 
iu  its  ascent 
)  tides  5  feet. 
[)osed  iu:ross 
Fuudy  from 
lecting  Nova 
Ml,  instead  of 
of  700  miles, 
iradle  resting 
)  rai  vay  will 
arts  and  New 


Spring  Head 
it  high,  from 
which  should 


DirectionB. — Vessels  bound  up  the  Bay  Verte  should  keep  the  Nova 
Scotia  coast  aboard,  running;  up  in  6;^  and  7  fathoms  water  till  they 
'arrive  off  ('old  Spring  Head,  where  at  the  distance  of  about  li  miles 
from  tlie  shore  they  will  find  the  water  deepen  to  8  or  9  and  even  nearly 
to  10  fathoms,  as  they  pass  to  the  southward  of  the  banks  and  shoals 
which  have  been  described.  After  passing  Cold  Spring-  Head  about  3 
miles  the  depth  of  water  decreases  to  less  than  5  fathoms,  and  con- 
tinues to  shoal  gradually,  with  mud  and  sand  bottom,  to  the  head  of 
the  bay.  The  Boss  Si)it,  which  extends  5  'uile  from  the  south  shore 
between  Boss  and  Jackson  Points,  and  3^  miles  to  the  NW.  from  Cold 
Spring  Head,  is  dangerous,  as  it  dries  out  to  its  edge,  and  is  so  steep-to 
that  there  are  17  feet  water  close  to  its  outer  point.  Vessels  should  be 
careful  not  to  go  into  less  water  than  3^  fathoms  until  they  are  past  this 
sand  spit.  Farther  up  the  bay  there  is  nothing  in  the  way,  excepting 
two  patches  of  stone  with  3  and  5  feet  water  at  the  distance  of  ^  and 
J  mile  northward  of  Tignish  Head. 


ist  water  near 
bank  of  sand 
east  and  west 
»e  Spear  bear^ 

N.  2°  W.  (N. 

approaching 
there  are  from 
oming  into  no 

of  it.    There 

•al,  and  S.  14° 

^et  least  water 

the  3-fathom 

[rater,  ia  about 

part,  Cape  St. 

phraim  Island 

62°  E.  mag.), 

shoal  is  also 

j-ing  N.  28°  E. 
le  the  Laurent 
rocky  bank, 
extends  out 
lirection,  so  as 
Cold  Spring 
lifely  reckoned 
|jaureut  Shoal, 
off  the  north- 


NEW  BRUNSWICK. 

Tormentine  Reefs  are  extremely  dangerous,  and  are  rendered  doubly 
so  by  the  strong  tides.  They  extend  off  Indian  Point  rather  more  than 
3  miles  to  the  eastward,  and  there  is  rocky  ground  with  4  fathoms  fully 
a  mile  farther  oflf  shore.  The  part  of  these  roofs  which  dries  at  low 
water  is  very  small,  and  bears  N.  85°  E.  (S.  \'6°  E.  mag.)  2^  miles  from 
Indian  Point.  It  lies  about  300  yards  to  the  southward  of  the  line  join- 
ing Cape  Spear  and  the  south  side  of  Ephraim  Island,  and  the  whole 
of  that  island  open  to  the  southward  of  Cape  St.  Laurent  will  lead  more 
tlian  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  it.  The  only  sufficient  guides,  there- 
fore, are  the  lead  and  the  chart.  • 

Caution. — Vessels  running  through  Northumberland  Strait  at  night 
or  at  any  time  without  a  commanding  breeze  should  not  approach  this 
reef  from  any  direction  between  north  and  east,  nearer  than  9  fathoms 
water,  for  the  flood  tide  sets  over  it  to  the  southward,  in  Bay  Verte, 
at  the  rate  of  3  knots,  causing  a  great  rippling  over  the  part  that  dries, 
and  generally  indicating  its  position.  Nearly  midway  between  the  dry 
part  of  the  reef  and  Indian  Point  there  is  a  patch  of  rocks  with  7  feet 
at  low  water.  Small  craft  carry  a  depth  of  2^  fathoms  at  low  water 
between  that  and  Indian  Point,  and  often  take  shelter  under  the  latter 
in  northerly  winds;  but  large  vessels  wishing  to  do  the  same  must  run 
around  outside  the  whole  of  the  reef,  and  will  find  the  soundings  in  the 
chart  a  sufficient  guide. 

Directioiui.— To  run  through  the  2^fathom  channel  between  Indian 
Point  and  dry  part  of  the  Tormentine  Beefs,  bring  Indian  Point  and 
Oape  Spear  in  one,  bearing  S.  45°  W.  (S.  67°  W.  mag.),  and  run  toward 
them  until  the  east  extreme  of  Oape  Tormentine  touches  the  west  side 
of  the  outer  Jonrimain  Island,  bearing  N.  45°  W.  (N.  23°  W.  mag.); 
then  alter  course  and  run  S.  45°  E.  (S.23°E.  mag.)  with  the  last-named 


i 


94  NORTHUMBERLAND   STRAIT— WEfiT    SHORE. 

„,ark8  on  astern,  until  tbe  water  deepens  to  5  fathoms  at  low  water, 
wli«n  the  vessel  will  be  to  the  southward  of  the  reefs. 

clpTT^^^ntine  is  a  name  sometimes  applied  to  the  whole  and 
soSeSLsTmSv.rent  points  of  the  great  headland  which  forms  the 
rterextremity  of  X  Brunswick  within  the  gulf,  -^  ;»»-^ -P^ 
rates  Bay  Verte  from  the  rest  of  Northumberland  Strait;  but  it  s 
here  restricted  to  the  comp.iratively  high  central  point,  to  wh  «^  t^« 
inhabitants  alno  seem  to  confine  it;  and,  again,  in  conformiy  with  the 
usace  as  well  as  for  precision  of  description,  the  names  of  Indian  Point 
and  cape  Jonrtmain  have  been  adopted  for  the  sontheru  and  northern 

extremities  of  this  promontory.  .    t  i      i     «r...™= 

cape  Jourimain,  the  north  extreme  of  the  Jourimain  Islands,  forms 
the  XemeTSit  of  land  to  vessels  running  through  Northnmberland 
Strait  either  from  the  eastward  or  westward.  It  bears  S.  83o  E.  (S 
eiol'mag'  6i  miles  from  Oape  Bnnn;  and  there  is  good -chorage 
in  te^ay  between  them,  in  5  fathoms  sandy  bottom,  and  in  winds 
f^om  the  ESE.  round  south,  to  west.  The  islands  are  connected 
t^J^tl  er  and  with  the  mainland,  by  sand  bars  and  marshes ;  but  still 
JSfyt.pea^^^^^  inlands  when  seen  from  a  distance  suflftcient  to  sink  the 
sand  bars  below  the  horizon. 

Jourimain  Shoals  are  extremely  dangerous  to  vessels  running  at 
uighr^hout  their  leads  going;  they  commence  at  Peacock  Cove  off 
Xh  there  is  a  patch  of  3^  fathoms,  at  2  miles  off  shore     '^^-7^-^^ 
from  Cape  Jourimain  U  miles  NW.,  and  there  is  a  patch  of  4  fathoms 
13  mUes  NNW.  from  the  same  point.    They  are  of  sandstone,  thnly 
and  partially  covered  with  sand,  and  their  SE.  point,  a  narrow  ridge 
wUh  only  6  feet  at  low  water,  and  distant  1?  miles  from  the  shore,  is 
The  most  dangerous,  because  the  boldest,  part  of  the  shoals.    It  should 
TtTe  appro'ached'nearer  than  the  depth  of  9  fathoms  -the  nighty 
Tme;  but  farther  westward  the  shoals  may  be  neared  with  proper 
caution  to  C  fathoms  at  low  water.  .,11  «„♦-«« 

iTht-The  lighthouse  on  the  east  end  of  Jourimain  Island,  octago^ 
uaTTaped,  45  feet  high,  and  painted  white,  exhibits  at  an  elevation  of 
72  feet  a  flashing  white  light,  showing  a  flash  every  ten  seconds,  which 
shouW  be  visiblf  seaward  14  miles,  from  S.  76°  E.  (S.  54°  E.  mag.)  toN. 

^^iTch^iatl-sSwardof  the  Jourimain  Shoals  and  between  them 
andthe  T«tine  Reefs  there  is  good  anchorage  with  westerly  winds 
?n  from  5  to  6  fathoms,  the  bottom  being  of  sand,  with  f  y -^derneath^ 
Ice  and  Lifeboats!-A  building  has  been  erected  for  the  ice  boats 
usSfoTthe  mail  service  between  Cape  Tormentine  and  Cape  Traverse; 
X  for  the  lifeboat  stationed  at  this  point.  The  building  is  immedi- 
at^y  north  of  the  railway  track  at  Cape  Tormentine  wharf  and  close 

*'^wCpier.-ietween  Tormentine  Reefs  and  Jourimain  Shoals, 
at limiles  northward  of  Indian  Point,  the  railway  pier  of  the  .New 


BHEDIAC   BAT. 


95 


t  low  water, 

le  whole  and 
Bh  forms  the 
I  which  sepa 
ait;  but  it  is 
to  which  the 
lity  with  their 
'  ludiau  Point 
and  northern 

Islands,  forms 
>rthumberlaud 
,  S.  83°  E.  (S. 
ood  anchorage 
,  and  in  winds 
are  connected 
rshes;  but  still 
lent  to  sink  the 

lels  running  at 
pacock  Cove,  off 
).  They  extend 
ch  of  4  fathoms 
mdstone,  thinly 
a  narrow  ridge 
om  the  shore,  is 
oals.  It  should 
ns  iu  the  night- 
red  with  proper 

a  Island,  octago- 
t  an  elevation  of 
1  seconds,  which 
4°  E.  mag.)  to  N. 

ad  between  them 
,h  westerly  winds 
clay  underneath, 
for  the  ice  boats 
i  Cape  Traverse; 
lldiug  is  immedi- 
wharf  and  close 

fourimain  Shoals, 
pier  of  the  New 


Brunswick  and  Prince  Edward  Railway  projects  from  the  coast  for 
about  ^  mile  seaward  over  the  shoal  which  borders  the  shore.  The 
railway  goes  to  Sackville,  where  it  Joins  the  Intercolonial  Railway. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Jourimain  Island  at  9ii. 
30m. ;  springs  rise  G  feet,  neaps  3  feet. 

Little  and  Great  Shemogne  Rivers,  westward  from  Cape  Bruin, 
are  only  fit  for  boats  and  very  small  vessels,  having  narrow  and  intri- 
cate channels  over  shifting  bars  of  sand. 

Anchorage. — There  is  good  anchorage,  in  5  or  6  fathoms,  sandy  bot- 
tom, off  these  rivers  in  the  bay  between  Cape  Bruin  and  Cape  Bald, 
the  former  bearing  from  the  latter  S.  76°  E.  (S.  53°  E.  mag.)  nearly 
12  miles. 

Caution. — In  the  distance  just  named  the  coast  is  free  from  danger, 
the  shoal  water  extending  only  about  ^  mile  off  shore;  and  a  vessel 
may  safely  approach  at  night  to  the  depth  of  6  fathoms  at  low  water. 
But  farther  to  the  eastward  greater  caution  will  be  requisite,  on  account 
of  the  dangerous  shoals  commencing  oft'  Peacock  Cove,  which  is  in  the 
bay  between  Cape  Jourimain  and  Cape  Bruin. 

Cape  Fillet  Chiirch,  1^  miles  south  west  ward  of  Cape  Bald,  has  a 
square  tower,  and  is  a  conspicuous  mark  from  seaward. 

Kouchibouguet  and  Abouchagan  Rivers,  in  the  sandy  bay  between 
Cape  Bald  and  Bouleaux  Point,  and  C^  miles  eastward  of  Shediac,  are 
small,  and  can  only  be  entered  by  boats  at  high  water. 

Cape  Bald,  a  sandstone  cliff,  40  feet  high  and  11  miles  eastward  of 
Shediae  Island,  is  bold  and  may  safely  be  approached  by  the  lead  to 
the  depth  of  o  fathoms;  but  off  Bouleaux  Point  a  reef  extends  more 
than  a  mile  from  the  shore. 

Shediac  Bay  is  6^  miles  wide  from  Bouleaux  Point  (Birch  Point) 
to  Shediac  Point,  a  low  sandstone  cliff,  and  about  5  miles  deep.  On  it^ 
north  side  will  be  seen  the  church  and  village  of  Upper  Grandigue, 
and  along  the  head  of  the  bay,  within  the  island,  the  village  of  Shediac, 
with  its  small  church.  There  is  less  than  3  fathoms  water  in  the  greater 
part  of  this  bay;  it  is  therefore  unsuited  to  large  vessels,  and  it  is 
rendered  dangerous  to  strangers  by  shoals. 

On  Shediac  Island  there  are  two  conspicuous  trees,  ^  mile  northeast- 
ward of  the  beacon  leading  lights;  these  trees  show  in  misty  weather 
when  the  beacons  are  not  visible. 

Medea  Rock  is  very  small,  with  6  feet  least  water;  there  are  3  and 
4  fathoms  water  around  it  at  the  distance  of  200  yards,  excepting  to  the 
southward,  in  which  direction  there  are  several  rocky  patches,  with  12 
feet  water,  between  it  and  the  shore,  which  is  nearly  1'^  miles  from  it. 
Tills  dangerous  rock  lies  400  yards  within  the  line  joining  Shediac  and 
Cocagne  Points. 

Zephjrr  Rock  is  also  very  small,  with  9  feet  least  water,  and  lies 
rather  more  than  a  mile  almost  west  from  Medea  Bock.  It  is  a  long 
mile  from  the  SE.  point  of  Shediac  Island,  which  is  the  nearest  pan  uf 


wmmmmm 


96 


NORTHUMBERLAND   STRAIT — WEST   SHORE. 


the  shore.  There  are  from  14  to  22  feet  of  water  between  Medea  and 
Zephyr  Kocks,  but  the  best  channel  is  to  the  NW.  of  them  both. 

Buoys. — A  can  buoy,  painted  red  and  black  in  horizontal  stripes,  is 
moored  in  a  depth  of  8  feet,  100  yards  northward  of  the  shoalest  part 
of  Medea  Kock ;  it  may  be  left  on  either  hand  by  vessels  of  less  than 

12  feet  draft. 

A  can  buoy,  painted  black  and  red  in  horizontal  stripes,  is  moored 
in  18  feet  water,  200  yards  westward  of  Zephyr  Eock ;  it  may  be  passed 
on  either  hand. 

Clearing  Marks. — The  marks  for  clearing  Medea  and  Zephyr  Kocks 
are  the  leading  lights  and  beacons  on  Shediac  Island,  and  on  the  rail- 
way wharf,  Chene  Point,  which  lead  in  13  feet  least  water  to  the  railway 
wharf.  Grandigue  church  in  line  with  north  extreme  of  Shediac  Island, 
bearing  N.  53°  W.  (N.  31°  W.  mag.),  leads  westward  of  Zephyr  and 
Medea  Eocks. 

Cooagne  Point  can  not  be  distinguished  by  a  stranger,  but  Cassie 
Point  lighthouse,  bearing  westward  of  S.  28°  W.  (N.  6°  W.  mag.),  leads 
eastward  of  Medea  Eock. 

Shediac  Harbor  is  the  easiest  of  access  on  this  part  of  the  coast, 
being  the  only  on^  which  a  vessel  in  distress  can  safely  run  for,  as  a 
harbor  of  refuge.  It  is  superior  to  Oooagne  and  Buctouche  in  the 
depth  of  water  over  the  bar,  and  it  is  also  much  more  extensive  within 
than  the  latter;  the  space  in  which  shipping  may  be  moored,  in  from 

13  to  16  feet  at  low  water,  being  %  mile  long  and  from  300  to  600  yards 
wide.  The  depth  that  can  be  carried  in  under  ordinary  circumstances, 
by  a  good  pilot,  is  14  feet  at  low  water  and  18  feet  at  high  water,  ordi- 
nary spring  tides;  and  the  bottom  in  the  channel  is  of  mud  and  sand, 
as  it  is  also  within  the  harbor. 

The  harbor  is  unsafe  with  the  northeasterly  gales  of  autumn,  instances 
having  occurred  when  all  vessels,  whether  at  anchor  or  moored  to  the 
wharf,  were  driven  on  shore;  but,  except  on  these  rare  occasions,  it  is 
a  safe  harbor. 

A  swell  may  be  felt  in  the  harbor  at  high  water  in  a  NE.  summer 
gale,  yet  it  is  never  sufficient  to  endanger  a  vessel  with  good  anchors 
and  cables.  Even  in  the  bay  just  outside  the  bar,  a  well-found  vessel 
would  ride  safely  in  any  moderate  gale  for  the  summer  months. 

The  harbor  lies  between  the  south  point  of  Shediac  Island  and  Ohfene 
Point  (Point  du  Oh6ne),  the  latter  bearing  from  the  former  S.  45°  E. 
(8.  230  E.  mag.)  f  mile.  From  Ohfine  Point  a  long  wharf  extends,  on 
which  the  railroad  from  Moncton  terminates;  a  sandy  bar  also  runs  out 
1,600  yards  to  the  northward,  and  is  dry  for  neatly  half  that  distance 
at  three-quarters  ebb.  It  is  this  bar,  together  with  the  shoal  farther 
out,  o£f  the  SE.  point  of  Shediac  Island,  which  renders  the  harbor  so 
secure. 

The  wharf  at  Oh6ne  Point  has  been  enlarged  by  the  addition  of 
another  pier,  making  with  the  old  pier  a  safe  dock,  and  from  the  latter 


««*«. 


SHEDIAC    HARBOR. 


9T 


in  Medea  and 
11  both, 
tal  stripes,  is 
slioalest  part 
B  of  less  than 

»e8,  is  moored 
[uay  be  passed 

Zephyr  Kocks 
id  on  the  rail- 
to  the  railway 
ihediac  Island, 
if  Zephyr  and 

er,  but  Cassio 
IV.  mag.),  leads 

t  of  the  coast, 
ly  run  for,  as  a 
Btouche  in  the 
ctensive  within 
loored,  in  from 
to  600  yards 
circumstances, 
igh  water,  ordi- 
|mnd  and  sand, 

bumn,  instances 
moored  to  the 
occasions,  it  is 

k  NE.  summer 
good  anchors 
^11-found  vessel 
souths. 

1  and  Oh^ne 
Itmer  S.  45°  B. 
larf  extends,  on 
lir  also  runs  out 
that  distance 
[e  shoal  farther 
the  harbor  so 

Ihe  addition  of 
1  from  the  latter 


a  wharf  has  been  extended  eastward,  alongside  which  veMScls  must 
discharge  their  ballast. 

The  entrance  between  the  north  point  of  the  bar  and  the  edge  of 
the  shoal  water  otf  the  island  is  the  narrowest  part  of  the  channel 
and  only  250  yards  wide,  between  the  12-foot  lines. 

Sliediao  is  a  port  of  entry. 

Tides. — The  tides  in  Sliediac  Bay  are  extremely  complicated.  The 
establishment,  at  the  only  full  and  change  period  observed,  was  Oh. 
Om.  The  highest  tides  occur  at  full  and  new  moon,  and  rise  4  feet 
above  the  lowest  water.  At  other  times  the  rise  of  tide  is  about  3  feet. 
The  low  water  occurs  at  intervals  varying  from  one  to  18  hours  after 
high  water,  and  ranging  from  3  inches  to  4  feet,  without  any  apparent 
law.    The  streams  generally  are  weak.  ' 

Pilots. — Pilotage  is  compulsory  in  Shediac  Harbor. 

Ice. — Shediac  Bay  is  generally  frozen  over  from  the  first  week  in 
December  until  the  end  of  April,  being  completely  closed  between 
those  dates.  The  first  vessel  arrives  from  sea  about  April  30  and  the 
last  one  leaves  about  December  8. 

Buoys. — A  black  can  buoy  has  been  moored  on  the  northern  end  of 
the  shoal  south  of  Zephyr  Bock  and  northward  of  Ohene  Bank,  and 
near  the  line  of  Shediac  Island  beacon  lights;  the  buoy  lies  in  17  feet  at 
low  water.  A  red  can  buoy  is  moored,  in  13  feet  at  low  water,  200 
yards  to  the  northward  of  the  line  of  the  leading  lights  on  Shediac 
Island,  with  the  hotel  S.  8°  W.  (8.  .30°  W.  mag.)  It^^  miles. 

The  red  can  buoy  at  the  intersection  of  the  line  of  the  leading  lights 
on  the  railway  wharf  with  that  of  the  leading  lights  on  Shediac  Island 
is  moored  westward  of  the  former  and  northward  of  the  latter.  It 
must  be  left  on  the  starboard  hand  entering  the  harbor  in  turning 
from  one  line  of  leading  lights  to  the  other. 

Three  spar  buoys,  painted  red,  were  moored  westward  of  Chene 
Bank,  and  immediately  westward  of  the  line  of  the  railway  wharf 
leading  lights,  Gh£ne  Point,  in  line  in  1885. 

Lights. — The  beacons  on  Shediac  Island  are  white,  square  towers  UIO 
feet  apart  N.  81°  E.  (S.  77°  E.  mag.)  and  S.  81°  W.  (N.  77°  W.  mag.),  and 
exhibit  30  and  52  feet  above  high  water  fixed  white  lights,  which  should 
be  visible  11  and  12  miles. 

The  leading  lights  at  Shediac  north  channel  are  fixed  red  lights,  G02 
feet  apart,  8. 11°  W.  (8.  33°  W.  mag.)  and  N.  11°  E.  (N.  33°  E.  mag.); 
elevated  respectively,  32  and  28  feet  above  high  water,  and  visible  7 
miles.  They  are  exhibited  on  iron  masts  20  and  28  feet  high,  with 
white  sheds  at  their  base,  on  the  northernmost  part  of  Chene  Point 
(front  light). 

The  leading  lights  at  Shediao  Harbor  are  exhibited  on  the  Govern- 
ment wharf,  NW.  end,  and  Gh6ne  Point,  south  railway  \7harf.  Tlie 
lightft  are  dxed  white,  and  are  shown  from  masts  with  :-'jetls.  They 
should  be  visible  7  miles.  The  rear  light  is  about  031  feet  8. 15°  W. 
1151 7 


i 


1^ 


1 


98 


NORTHUMBERLAND    8TRAIT WEST    RHORK, 


The  front  light  is  eh'vated  32 


(8.  37'^  W.  mug.)  from  the  frout  light, 
feet  iiiul  the  rear  38  feet. 

Shediac  ViUage  (locally  known  m  The  Cape)  is  on  the  southeastern 
shore  of  Shediac  Bay.  The  village  contains  'four  churches,  the  most 
conspicuous  from  seaward  being  the  Episcopal  and  Roman  (Jatholic, 
which  are  surmounted  by  spires  and  stand  at  the  eastern  end  of  the 
village.  The  Methodist  also  has  a  spire,  and  is  situated  in  the  middle, 
while  the  Presbyterian,  a  white  building  with  a  square  tower,  is  built 
near  the  western  end  of  the  village.  Westward  of  Scoudouc  River  is 
a  Baptist  church,  a  yellow  building  with  a  small  tower,  but,  like  the 
Cape  church,  it  is  not  visible  from  seaward. 

Scoudouc  and  Shediac  Rivers,  in  the  SW.  and  NW.  corners  of 
Shediac  Bay,  respectively,  are  Small  streams  navigable  for  boats  for  a 
few  miles  to  sawmills  at  the  head  of  the  tide.  There  are  bridges 
across  each  of  these  streams  near  their  mouths,  where  there  are  oyster 

beds. 

Cbene  Point  (Point  du  OhCne)  is  a  terminus  of  the  Intercolonial 
Railway,  and  the  entrepot  of  trade  to  Prince  Edward  Island.  A  small 
village  has  been  built  at  Cht-ne  Point,  with  a  conspicuous  hotel  which 
is  surmounted  by  a  tower  and  tlagstaft';  the  place  is  much  resorted  to 
for  bathing  in  the  summer  mouths. 

Water  is  very  scarce  at  Shediac;  it  may  be  bought  from  a  con- 
tractor. At  high  water  it  may  be  obtained  with  difficulty  from  Scou- 
douc River,  but  it  is  not  very  good. 

SuppUes  of  all  kinds  may  be  obtained  at  Chene  Point. 

Coal.— About  CO  tons  of  coal  are  usually  stored  at  Ghene  Point  by 
the  railway  department,  but  any  quantity  can  be  procured  from  Pict^iu 

in  about  one  day. 

Charges.— Pilotage,  $  1.50  per  foot  (compulsory) ;  harbor  master  s  fee, 
$4;  health  visit,  $5;  tonnage  dues,  2  cents  per  ton. 

Trade.— The  exports  consist  of  lumber,  salmon,  potatoes,  and  oats. 

Repairs.— There  are  no  means  of  repairing  vessels  at  Shediac. 

Telegraph  and  Railways.— Chene  Point  is  in  telegraphic  commu- 
nication with  all  parts  of  Canada  and  the  United  States.  It  is  con- 
nected with  Halifax,  St.  John,  and  Quebec  by  the  Intercolonial  Railway, 
and,  during  the  season  of  navigation,  with  Prince  Edward  Island  by  a 

daily  steamer.  ^.  „.    j- 

Orandigue  Bank,  with  from  14  to  18  feet  water,  extends  off  Shediac 
Point  2  miles,  having  the  least  water  near  its  outer  edge.  This  extensive 
rocky  bank  is  dangerous  to  vessels  of  large  draft,  which,  however,  will 
pass  outside  it  if  they  do  not  approach  the  shore  nearier  than  the  depth 
of  5  fathoms  at  low  water. 

A  rocky  bank,  with  10  feet  least  water,  lies  ESE.  from  the  north 
extreme  of  Shediac  Island. 

Light— From  a  square  white  tovrer,  27  feet  high,  erected  on  Oassie 
Point,  is  exhibited  a  revolving  white  light  every  half  minute.  The 
lifrht  is  47  feet  above  high  water,  and  should  be  visible  14  miles; 


8HEDIAC    HARBOR. 


9» 


eli'vated  32 

)utliea8tern 
!8,  the  most 
,n  Catholic, 
end  of  the 
the  middle, 
wer,  is  built 
ouc  River  is 
mt,  like  the 

V.  corners  of 

r  boats  for  a 

are  bridges 

re  are  oyster 

Intercolonial 
lud.  A  small 
J  hotel  which 
!h  resorted  to 

i  from  a  con- 
;y  from  Scou- 


u'ue  Point  by 
I  from  ricti^u 

r  master's  fee, 

)e8,  and  oats. 
Shediac. 
[aphic  commu- 
$8.  It  is  con- 
inial  Hallway, 
rd  Island  by  a 

is  oft"  Shediac 

Chis  extensive 

however,  will 

than  the  depth 

l-om  the  north 

|;ted  on  Oassie 
minute.    The 
L4  miles; 


Anchorage. — There  is  good  anchorage  under  Slu^liac  Point  in  XW. 
winds,  in  17  or  18  feet,  nidd  bottom. 

Directions. — Vessels  approaching  Hhediat;  Harbor  sliouhl,  for  the 
first  time,  take  a  pilot;  if  one  can  not  be  obtained,  tlie  following  direc;- 
tions  will  lead  in  by  day  or  night,  but  no  other  route  than  the  one  indi- 
cated should  be  attempted : 

The  light  on  Cassie  l^oint  having  been  sighted,  the  center  of  the  bay 
should  be  steereil  for  and  the  lights  or  beacons  on  Shediac  Island 
brought  in  line,  bearing  S.  Sr^  W.  CS.IT^  W.  mag.),  faking  care  to 
keep  Oassie  Point  light  bearing  westward  of  N.  IVJ'^  W.  (N.  10°  W. 
mag.)  until  that  leading  mark  is  on. 

Keep  the  Shediac  Island  lights  or  beacons  in  line  until  near  the 
northern  red  buoy,  when  the  vessel's  courso  should  be  altered  to  the 
southward  in  time  to  bring  the  leading  lights  or  beacons  on  the  railway 
wharf  in  line,  bearing  S.  15'^  W.  (S.  'M°  W.  mag.),  just  before  reaching 
the  red  buoy.  This  mark  will  lead  up  to  the  wharf;  but  if  an  anchorage 
is  sought  by  day,  bring  the  cliflt"  of  Cape  Brftl*'  in  line  with  the  end  of 
the  grass  ott'  CM'ue  Point,  bearing  S.  78'^  E.  (S.  r>CtO  E.  mag. i,  then  steer 
westward  and  let  go  the  anchor;  by  night,  proceed  for  rather  more  than 
i  mile  with  the  railway  wharf  leading  lights  in  line  S.  15^  \V.  (S.  'M°  W. 
mag.),  and  then  anchor  slightly  eastward  of  that  line. 

Vessels  from  the  northward  may  bring  Chene  Point  range  in  line  S. 
11°  W.  (S.  33°  W.  mag.),  and  steer  in  on  this  range,  passing  west- 
ward of  Zephyr  Kock  until  the  Shediac  Island  range  comes  on,  when 
])rocoeil  as  before  directed.  A  place,  locally  known  as  the  Deep  Hole, 
with  19  to  20  feet  water,  is  ^  mile  southwestward  of  the  western  red 
buoy,  on  the  mark  of  the  wharf  lights  in  line;  vessejs  anchor  there  to 
complete  their  cargoes  or  to  wait  until  the  tide  is  high  enough  to  enable 
them  to  leave.  The  water  shoals  rapidly  eastward  of  Deep  Hole,  to  10 
and  11  feet  on  Chene  Bank. 

The  beacons  on  Shediac  Island  are  ditticult  to  distinguish  from  any 
great  distance,  and  those  on  the  railway  wharf,  from  which  the  inner 
leading  lights  are  shown,  are  often  hidden  by  the  masts  of  vessels  lying 
there. 

The  harbor  is  much  more  extensive  for  vessels  of  light  draft  than 
has  been  mentioned,  although  encumbered  by  biillast  heaps,  and  ves- 
sels drawing  7  or  8  feet  may  be  taken  through  the  bay  within  the  island 
to  the  wharf  at  the  village. 

Cocagne  Harbor  has  its  entrance  to  the  southward  of  Oocagne 
Island,  and  between  it  and  Eeiiouard  Point,  the  latter  being  formed  of 
reddish  sandstone  cliffs  50  feet  high.  It  is  a  very  small  harbor,  and 
the  channel  over  the  bar  of  sand,  gravel,  and  sandstone  is  narrow  and 
crooked,  with  10  feet  at  low  or  14  feet  at  high  water  m  ordinary  spring 
tides.  Within  the  bar  there  are  from  2i  to  4  fathoms,  in  a  very  narrow 
channel,  for  a  distance  of  about  ^  mile.  Farther  in  the  bay  is  shallow, 
with  oyster  beds  and  mud  flats,  covered  with  from  4  to  6  feet  water. 


100 


NOKTHUMUEKLANI)    STRAIT — WEST    HIIOKK. 


To  enter  thiH  harbor,  tliie  weatber  aud  ii  good  pilot  are  absolutely 
neet'Hsary. 

Cocagne  River  enterM  the  head  of  the  bay  ^  mile  Houtliward  of  the 
church.  It  iH  croHMt>d  by  a  bridge  JuHt  within  its  entrance,  and  is  uavi- 
gable  by  boatH  lor  several  miles.  The  shores  of  the  river  and  bay  are 
well  settled  by  fan d lies  engaged  in  agriculture,  together  with  lumbering 
and  shipbuilding  to  a  lindted  extent. 

Buctouche  Road,  oft'  the  entrance  of  the  Buctouche  Kiver,  aud  in 
the  widest  part  of  the  (;haunel  within  the  Outer  Bar,  is  <iuite  safe  for  a 
vessel  with  good  anchors  aiul  cables,  the  ground  being  a  stilt'  tenacious 
clay,  and  the  Outer  Bar  i)reventnig  any  very  heavy  sea  ft'om  coming 
into  the  anchorage.  It  is  here  that  vessels  of  too  great  draft  of  water 
to  enter  the  ri\  er  lie  moored  to  take  in  cargoes  of  lumber.  In  approach- 
ing  this  auchorage  there  is  nothing  in  the  way  of  vessels  that  do  not 
draw  too  much  water  to  pass  the  Outer  Bar,  excepting  the  North  Patch ; 
but  larger  vessels  will  tiud  more  water  (not  less  than  H\  fathoms)  by 
approaching  Arom  the  northward,  according  to  the  following  directions: 

Lights. — There  are  two  leading  lights  at  3  miles  north  of  Dixon 
Point,  on  the  south  side  of  the  entrance  to  Buctouche  Kiver. 

The  lights  are  fixed,  white  lights,  elevated  41  and  30  feet  above  high- 
water  mark,  and  should  be  visible  12  and  11  utiles,  respectively.  Both 
the  lights  are  exhibited  from  white  square  towers;  the  western  or 
high  light  tower  is  34  feet  high,  and  the  eastern  one,  which  is  on  the 
extreme  of  the  point,  30  feet  high.  They  bear  from  each  other  N.  19° 
W.  (N.  .'jTo  W.  mag.)  and  8.  79'^  B.  (S.  57°  E.  mag.),  distant  1,050  feet. 

Two  lighthouses  are  erected  on  Church  (Indian)  Point,  on  the  north 
side  of  Buctouche  River,  bearing  N.  48°  \V.  (N.  2(1°  W.  mag.)  and  8. 
48°  E.  (8.  26°  E.  mag.),  distant  1,980  feet  from  each  other. 

The  southern  light  is  a  fixed  white  light,  23  feet  above  high  water, 
and  should  be  visible  9  miles  upon  the  bearing  of  the  lights  in  line. 

The  northern  or  high  light  is  a  fixed  white  light,  53  feet  above  high 
water,  and  should  be  visible  when  in  line  with  the  low  light  12  miles. 

Both  lighthouses  are  small  white  square  towers,  23  feet  high,  with 
red  roofs. 

Directions. — Bring  Buctouche  steeple  to  bear  to  the  southward  of 
8. 08°  W.  (west  mag.),  aud  run  inshore  with  it  on  that  bearing,  in  order  to 
pass  to  the  northward  of  the  2s'orth  Patch.  In  running  in,  if  the  weather 
be  fjivorable,  Cocagne  steeple  will  be  observed  to  open  out  to  the  west- 
ward of  Cocagne  Island,  so  as  to  be  seen  between  the  latter  and  the 
mainland;  the  course  must  be  continued  till  the  steeple  comes  in  line 
with  the  extreme  of  Dixon  Point,  which  is  a  small,  low,  and  rocky 
peninsula  of  the  mainland,  2^  miles  to  the  southward  of  Buctouche 
8audbar.  Alter  course  immediately,  running  with  Cocagne  steeple  and 
Dixon  Point  in  line,  bearing  8.  5°  W.  (8.  27°  W.  mag.),  and  they  will 
lead  close  inside  the  Outer  Bar  and  clear  of  a  small  shoal,  which  lies 
bet^yeen  it  aud  the  shore,  and  on  which  there  are  not  less  than  2| 


Bi 


BUCTOUCHK    RIVER. 


tm 


ab8«lut«'ly 

yard  of  tlio 
iiul  is  navi- 
nul  bay  are 
I  lumbenug 

iv»ir,  and  In 
te  safe  for  a 
ift"  tenacitma 
Tom  coming 
aft  of  water 
In  approach- 

tliat  do  not 
iJortb  I'atcb; 

fathoms)  by 
I g  directions: 
rth  of  Dixon 

t  above  high- 

tively.    Both 

e  western  or 

icli  is  on  the 

other  N.  79° 

int  1,050  feet. 

on  the  north 

mag.)  and  S. 

r. 

e  high  water, 
lits  in  line. 
it  above  high 
;ht  12  miles. 
set  high,  with 

southward  of 
^ng,  in  order  to 

if  the  weather 
lut  to  the  west- 
latter  and  the 

comes  in  line 
|ow,  and  rocky 

of  Buctouche 
rne  steeple  and 

and  they  will 
loal,  which  lies 
It  less  than  2^ 


fathoms.  Take  c^are  not  to  hi,  it  tlic  steeple  in  behind  Dixon  Point,  as 
the  voHHel  runs  along  the  Hand  bur,  and  imniediiitely  aftf^r  Huctimche 
steeple  opens  out  to  the  wostwaid  of  the  Hnuill  sainly  islet  whicii  forms 
the  HW.  i)oint  of  Hnctouche  P:indbar,  two  white  liglithonseH  on  the 
mainland  rome  in  lino  N.  TO"^  W.  (N.  57'"'  W.  mag.),  the  vessel  will  he  in 
the  best  berth  for  anelioring. 

Anchorage. — Anchor  with  the  white  lighthouses  in  line,  bearing  X. 
79°  W.  (N.  o7'"'  VV.  nuig.),  and  (!ocagne  Kteeple  open  iibout  its  own 
breadth  to  the  eastward  of  I  >ixon  Point,  in  3'^  or  4  fathoms  at  low  water, 
and  with  excellent  holding  ground. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Buctouche  at  7h.  Ora,; 
springs  rise  i  feet,  neaps  2  feet. 

Buctouche  River  enters  the  sea  through  the  shallow  bay  within 
the  Buctouche  Sandbar.  The  two  white  lighthouses  by  day,  or  lights 
by  night.  Just  mentioned,  as  pointing  out  the  best  anchorage  in  the 
roadstead,  are  intended  to  lead  m  over  the  bar  of  sand  and  tiat  sand- 
stone, in  the  greatest  depth,  namely,  8  feet  at  low  and  12  feet  at  high 
water  in  ordinary  spring  tides;  and  when  the  two  lights  <m  Church 
(Indian)  Point  come  in  line  N.  48°  W.  (N.  2(io  W.  mag.),  steer  from  them, 
and  it  will  lead  to  the  anchorage  within  the  bar  or  on  through  the  luir- 
rows  off  (iiddis  Point.  Within  the  bar  is  a  wide  part  of  the  channel, 
in  which  vessels  may  ride  safely  in  2^  and  '.\  fathoms  over  mud  bottom; 
off  Giddis  Point  the  channel  becomes  as  difficult,  narrow,  and  shallow 
as  at  the  bar.  But  the  channel  is  so  narrow,  intricate,  and  encumbered 
with  oyster  beds  that  written  directions  are  useless,  as  the  assistance 
of  a  pilot  is  absolutely  necessary  to  take  a  vessel  safely  into  the  river. 
It  is  in  its  course  through  the  bay  that  the  Buctouche  is  so  shallow  and 
intricate;  higher  up  its  channel  is  fi>ee  from  obstruction,  and  in  some 
places  has  5  fathoms  of  water. 

Having  crossed  the  bar,  a  vessel  may  ascend  about  10  miles  farther, 
and  boats  13  or  14  miles,  to  where  the  tide  water  ends.  One  mile  above 
Buctouche  church  there  is  a  bridge,  but  it  is  so  constructed  as  to  per- 
mit the  vessels  which  are  built  higher  up  the  river  to  pass.  There  is 
also  a  bridge  over  the  southern  and  smaller  branch. 

The  country  on  either  side  of  the  Buctouche  is  considerably  higher 
than  at  Eichibucto,  the  ridges  attaining  an  elevation  of  about  200  feet 
above  the  sea.  The  banks  of  the  river  are  well  settled,  and  the  clayey 
soil  is  very  fertile.  There  are  saw  and  grist  mills  at  the  head  of  the 
tide.  A  few  vessels  are  built  in  the  river  annually,  and  several  visit 
it  for  lumber;  but  it  is  a  place  of  no  great  trade. 

North  Patch  of  rocks,  with  12  feet  least  water,  is  small,  with  5  fath- 
oms close  outside  of  it.  It  lies  2  miles  off  shore  on  the  NE.  point  of 
the  Outer  Bar  of  the  Buctouche,  with  Cocagne  steeple  and  the  NW. 
extreme  of  Cocagne  Island  in  line,  bearing  S.  8°  W.  (S.  30°  W.  mag.), 
the  south  end  of  Buctouche  Sandbar  S.  33°  W.  (S.  65°  W,  mag.)  and 
Buctouche  steeple  seen  over  the  sand  bar  S.  70°  W.  (N.  82°  W.  mag.). 


102 


NORTHUMBERLAND   STRAIT— WEST    SHORE. 


fix 


i 
p 


Vessels  will  pass  outside  of  it,  if  they  do  not  come  into  less  than  5 
fathoms  at  low  water. 

Outer  Bar  of  Buctouche  River  is  a  long  ridge  of  sandy  and  rocky 
ground,  carrying  24  to  3|  fathoms  of  water,  and  extending  from  North 
Patch  7  miles,  nearly  to  Cocagne. 

Richibucto  Head. -Off  Richibucto  Point,  which  is  the  SE.  extreme 
of  the  south  beach,  and  3J  miles  from  the  mouth  of  the  Richibucto,  a 
reef  of  sandstone  extends  off  shore  for  a  mile  from  the  high-water  mark, 
and  continues  2  or  3  miles  farther  southward,  to  Richibucto  Head,  which 
is  of  sandstone  and  clay  cliffs,  50  feet  high. 

From  Richibucto  1  oint,  the  SE.  extremity  of  the  Buctouche  Sandbar 
bears  S.  22°  E.  (south  mag.),  and  is  distant  14J  miles.  There  is  nothing 
requiring  notice  in  the  bay  between  them,  excepting  the  small  Chock- 
pish  River,  affording  shelter  for  boats  at  high  wat«r. 

Light— On  Richibucto  Head  stands  a  square  white  tower,  50  feet 
high,  exhibiting  at  70  feet  above  high  water  a  fixed  white  light,  which 

should  be  visible  14  miles.  .     .  r.      •     ^^ 

Richibucto  River  is  inferior  only  to  the  Lliramichi,  either  m  the 
distance  to  which  it  is  navigable  or  in  the  depth  of  water  over  its  bar. 
It  is  annually  visited  by  a  considerable  number  of  vessels  for  cargoes 
of  lumber.  There  are  flourishing  and  rapidly  increasing  settlements  on 
its  banks,  as  well  as  on  those  of  its  principal  tributaries,  the  Aldouin, 
the  St.  Nicholas,  and  the  Molus  or  Molies  Rivers.  The  population  are 
engaged  in  agriculture,  lumbering,  and  shipbuilding;  but  they  do  not 
prosecute  the  fisheries.  Traces  of  coal  are  reported  to  have  been  found 
in  the  sandstone,  which  forms  the  substratum  of  this  and  of  all  the 
neighboring  country. 
The  Aldouin  enters  on  the  northern  side,  about  2  miles  within  the 

entrance  of  the  river. 

The  entrance  of  the  Richibucto  is  about  700  yards  wide;  it  lies  be- 
tween two  s«.T.''.  >^ar8,  several  miles  in  length,  called  the  north  and  south 
beaches,  on  which  there  are  sand  hUls  as  high  as  30  feet.    Immediately 
within  the  entrance  there  is  a  wide  expanse  of  mud  and  weeds,  nearly 
dry  at  low  water,  excepting  the  channel  of  the  river.    On  the  north- 
ern side,  a  shallow  bay  leads,  within  the  north  beach,  to  tke  lagoons, 
whilst  on  the  south  side,  within  the  south  beach,  lies  French  Island, 
and  still  farther  to  the  SE.,  French  Creek  and  Low  Village,  where  there 
is  a  church,  visible  in  some  directions  from  the  sea.    Within  the  wide 
part  just  mentioned  the  breadth  of  the  Richibucto  is  rendered  irregular 
by  numerous  bays  on  either  side.    Just  below  the  town  it  is  above  800 
yards  wide,  but  contracts  to  300  yards  If  miles  farther  up,  after  which 
it  expands  again  for  a  considerable  distance,  and  is  nowhere  less  than 
100  yards  broad,  nearly  to  the  end  of  the  navigation,  although  the 
channel  between  mud  banks,  nearly  dry  when  the  tide  is  out,  is  much 
narrower.    Low  cliffs  of  sandy  clay  are  frequent  on  either  side  of  the 
river;  but  the  adjacent  country,  although  undulating,  is  everywhere  of 


liiliBiiiiTi«i<g« 


ii^»WiM'rt'iiitmiiiiB[irf(iiWiaif««i«iii«ti»ii 


T 


RICHIBUCTO. 


103 


)  less  than  5 

dy  and  rocky 
ig  from  Nortb 

B  SE.  extreme 
Bichibucto,  a 
h-water  mark, 
;oHead,whicb 

jucbe  Sandbar 
lere  is  notbing 
a  small  Cbock- 

tower,  50  feet 
ite  ligbt,  wbiob 

L,  eitber  in  tbe 
ter  over  its  bar. 
sels  for  cargoes 
y  settlements  on 
as,  tbe  Aldouin, 
I  population  are 
but  tbey  do  not 
have  been  found 
and  of  all  the 

liles  witbin  tbe 

wide;  it  lies  be- 
north  and  south 
It.    Immediately 
id  weeds,  nearly 
On  tbe  nortb- 
to  tbe  lagoons, 
Frencb  Island, 
[age,  where  there 
Iwitbiu  tbe  wide 
ludered  irregular 
|u  it  is  above  800 
up,  after  wbicb 
Avbere  less  than 
m,  altbougb  tbe 
.  is  out,  is  mucb 
^itber  side  of  tbe 
is  everywhere  of 


very  small  elevation,  not  exceeding  80,  or  at  the  utmost  100,  feet  above 
the  sea. 

The  Bicbibncto  is  navigable  for  boats  nearly  to  tbe  head  of  the  tide, 
being  a  distance  of  about  22  miles,  following  the  stream,  the  general 
direction  being  S  W.  Any  vessel  that  can  pass  the  bar  may  be  taken 
about  13  miles  up  tbe  river,  the  depth  in  the  channel  varying  in  that 
distance  from  3  to  9  fatboms,  over  mud  bottom.  Smaller  vessels  may 
ascend  to  witbin  2  or  3  miles  of  tbe  bead  of  tbe  tide,  where  tbe  river 
is  quite  shallow  and  rapid  at  low  water. 

Richibucto. — About  a  mile  higber  up,  on  the  same  side  as  the 
Aldouin,  stands  the  town  of  Richibucto  (Liverpool).  It  has  a  church, 
a  chapel,  courthouse  and  jail,  etc.,  being  the  capital  town  of  the  county 
of  Kent.  There  is  a  church  1^  miles  above  the  town,  and  opposite  to 
it,  on  the  southern  side  of  the  river,  a  shipbuilding  establishment, 
together  with  a  village  of  Micraac  Indians,  who  are  employed  as  labor- 
ers and  choppers. 

The  United  States  is  represented  by  an  sigent. 

Lights. — The  leading  lighthouses  erected  to  supersede  the  day  bea- 
cons on  South  Beach,  Bichibucto  Biver  entrance,  bear  from  each  other 
8.  39°  W.  (S.  61°  W.  mag.)  and  N.  39°  B.  (N.  61°  E.  mag.),  distant  326 
feet.  The  low  lighthouse,  33  feet  high,  square,  and  painted  white, 
exhibits  at  40  feet  above  high  water  a  fixed  white  light. 

The  upper  lighthouse,  43  feet  high,  an  open  frame  square  tower,  and 
painted  white,  exhibits  at  44  feet  above  high  water  a  lixed  red  ligbt. 

These  lights  should  be  visible  12  miles;  and  kept  in  a  line  bearing 
S.  39°  W.  (S.  61°  W.  mag.),  lead  through  the  channel  and  over  the  bar 
at  the  river  entrance. 

The  lights  are  moved  to  suit  the  bar. 

The  Bar  of  the  Bichibucto  is  extremely  dangerous,  especially  to  large, 
deeply  laden,  and  dull  sailing  vessels  outward  bound  in  tbe  fall  of  the 
year.  Taking  advantage  of  the  highest  spring  tide,  and  sailing  at  high 
water,  if  the  wind  becomes  unsteady  or  too  ligbt,  they  .ire  almost  cer- 
tain to  be  thrown  ashore  by  the  ebb  tide,  on  the  southeastern  part  of 
tbe  bar;  and  should  a  NE.  gale  occur,  to  be  destroyed  before  they  can 
get  off  again.  To  take  a  ship  in  with  a  leading  ;7ind  and  flowing  tide 
is  attended  with  no  other  difficulty  than  that  which  arises  from  the 
narrowness  of  the  channel ;  but  in  all  cases  the  assistance  of  a  pilot 
is  absolutely  necessary,  since  the  bar  is  subject  to  occasional  changes 
from  the  effect  of  heavy  gales.  The  bar  extends  from  the  north  beach, 
for  2  miles  to  the  eastward,  parallel  to  the  south  beach ;  there  is  a  rock 
in  tbe  eastern  part  of  it,  but  the  remainder  is  of  sand,  dry  at  low  water. 

No  part  of  this  bar  extends  to  seaward  so  much  as  a  mile  from  the 
lighthouses,  and  it  may  be  safely  approached  by  the  lead  to  6  fathoms 
water  at  any  time  of  tide;  but  for  the  purpose  of  anchorage  9  fathoms 
is  a  better  depth,  the  bottom  being  there  of  fine  brown  and  gray  sand, 
affording  far  better  holding  ground  than  farther  inshore.    The  situa- 


..j^ti^^ 


104 


NORTHUMBEELAND    STRAIT WK8T    SHORE. 


tion  of  the  narrow  channel  over  the  bar  (IJ  miles  eastward  from  the 
river's  mouth)  is  indicated  by  the  two  white  lighthouses  on  the  south 
beach  and  a  large  red  buoy  moored  off  in  3f  or  4  fathoms  at  low  water, 
with  the  two  lighthouses  in  line,  distant  not  quite  a  mile. 

The  depth  of  water  over  the  bar  is  9  feet  at  low  water,  or  13  feet  at 
high  water  in  ordinary  spring  titles,  and  is  gradually  becoming  deeper; 
and  there  is  not  a  continuously  greater  depth  for  the  lirst  mile  in  from 
the  red  buoy,  the  channel  being  from  100  to  180  yards  wide  between  the 
2fathom  lines,  excepting  at  the  turn  to  the  westward,  which  is  the  nar- 
rowest part,  and  only  80  yards  broad.  Farther  in  the  channel  expands 
in  breadth  to  about  370  yards,  increasing  in  depth  to  3i  fathoms;  it  then 
shoals  to  2J  fathoms  and  contracts  again  to  only  100  yards  wide  at  the 
north  beach,  where  the  depth  is  5  fathoms,  and  the  stream  of  tide 
strongest,  being  about  2^  knots.  About  ^  mile  within  the  north  beach 
the  channel  widens  for  a  short  distance  to  400  yards,  and  has  3  to  4 
fathoms  water  in  it,  with  mud  bottom.  The  depth  increases  farther  in, 
and  is  nearly  9  fathoms  in  some  places. 

Pilota.— The  branch  pilots  of  Kichibucto  River  are  able,  inteUigent, 
and  attentive  to  their  duties.    They  keep  a  good  lookout  for  vessels 
from  the  beach  at  the  mouth  of  the  river. 
Pilots  are  necessary. 

Directions.— Having  made  the  lighthouse  on  Richibucto  Head,  look- 
out for  the  red  buoy,  and  keep  outside  of  it,  in  not  less  than  5  fathoms 
water,  until  it  and  the  two  lighthouses  come  in  lint.,  bearing  about  8. 
390  W.  (S.  61°  W.  mag.);  then  steer  in  close  past  the  buoy,  keeping 
the  two  lighthouses  exactly  in  line,  and  looking  out  for  the  small  red 
buoys,  which  are  placed  along  the  southern  edge  of  the  bar,  and  must 
be  left  on  the  right  hand  going  in.  Having  run  in  about  J  mile  with 
the  two  lighthouses  in  line,  the  vessel  will  be  within  400  yards  of  the 
south  beach,  and  the  small  red  buoys  along  the  south  or  inner  side  of 
the  bar  will  be  seen  to  come  in  one  with  each  other.  Haul  up 
immediately,  passing  about  40  yards  to  the  southward  of  the  buoys. 

Having  run  to  the  west  (N.  68°  W.  mag.),  between  the  bar  and  the 
south  beach,  about  1^  miles,  the  channel  becomes  again  very  narrow, 
and  is  marked  by  small  buoys  on  either  side,  red  on  the  starboard  hand, 
black  on  the  port;  but  as  these  buoys  might  not  be  readily  made  out 
by  a  stranger,  bring  the  SW.  point  of  the  north  beach  to  bear  N.  67° 
W.  (N.  450  W.  mag.),  and  steer  for  it,  observing  that  the  channel,  which 
is  then  only  100  yards  wide,  passes  close  to  the  north  beach.  As  soon 
as  the  vessel  is  abreast  of  this  edge,  steer  to  the  SW.  for  J  mile,  when 
there  will  be  plenty  of  room  to  anchor  in  quite  a  secure  harbor.  The 
small  red  buoys  just  mentioned  are  merely  pieces  of  wood  painted  red, 
and  placed  at  convenient  distances,  according  to  the  judgment  of  the 

pilots. 

Tides.— It  is  high  water,  fUIl  and  change,  at  Richibucto  River  at  3h. 
30m.;  springs  rise  4  feet,  neaps  2J  feet. 


KOUCHIBOUGUAC   BAY    AND    RIVER. 


105 


rd  from  the 
)U  the  south 
t  low  water, 

»r  13  feet  at 
iiing  deeper; 
mile  in  from 
between  tlie 
sh  is  tbe  nar- 
luel  expands 
loms;  It  then 
s  wide  at  the 
ream  of  tide 
)  north  beach 
d  has  3  to  4 
les  farther  in, 

,e,  intelUgeut, 
it  for  vessels 


Headjlook- 
lau  5  fathoms 
•ing  about  S. 
»uoy,  keeping 
jthe  small  red 
>ar,  and  must 
t  J  mile  with 
I  yards  of  the 
inner  side  of 
er.     Haul  up 

the  buoys, 
e  bar  and  the 
_  very  narrow, 
arboard  hand, 
idily  made  out 
■o  bear  N.  67° 
shannel,  which 
ach.  As  soon 
r  i  mile,  when 

harbor.  The 
•d  painted  red, 
dgment  of  the 

to  River  at  3h. 


On  the  day  of  the  full  moon  in  July,  1839,  there  was  only  one  lii^h 
water,  at  3h.  30m.  a.  m.,  and  one  low  water,  at  4  p.  m.  But  toward  tbe 
time  of  neap  tides,  two  high  waters  in  24  hours  became  apparent  fur  a 
few  days.  There  would  seem  to  be  two  interfering  tides,  presenting 
phenomena  which  it  would  require  accurate  and  long-continued  obser- 
vations to  explain.    The  rate  of  the  tides  in  the  river  is  from  1^  to  2  knots. 

Kouchibouguac  Bay  is  nearly  20  miles  wide  from  Kichibucto  Head 
to  Sapin  Point.  Its  shores  are  exceedingly  low,  with  sand  bars  and 
beaches  inclosing  extensive  and  shallow  lagoons,  through  which  the 
river  Hows  to  the  sea.  Tlie  shoal  water  (depths  not  exceeding  3  fath- 
oms) extends  off  shore  to  a  considerable  distance  in  the  northwestern 
part  of  this  bay,  and  there  is  foul  ground,  with  as  little  as  3  fathoms 
water,  more  than  2  miles  out  to  the  eastward  from  the  mouth  of  the 
Kouchibouguac  River.  Northeast  gales  send  a  heavy  swell  into  the 
bay,  so  that  it  will  be  prudent  not  to  get  embayed  tliere,  especially  at 
night  or  in  a  dull-sailing  vessel. 

Kouchibouguacsis  River  becomes  rapid,  shallow,  and  consequently 
unnavigable  above  tbe  point  reached  by  the  tide.  It  has  saw  and 
grist  mills  and  settlements  on  its  banks.  Of  its  two  outlets  through 
the  sand  bars,  the  most  northern, 3  miles  southward  of  the  Kouchibou- 
guac, is  only  fit  for  boats,  the  channel  leading  to  it  through  the  lagoon 
having  become  nearly  filled  up  with  sand  and  weeds. 

Tbe  river,  after  entering  the  lagoon  and  running  for  some  distance 
toward  this  outlet,  turns  to  the  southward,  and  continues  its  course 
within  the  sand  bar  for  a  distance  of  3  miles  to  the  southern  and  main 
outlet,  which  is  called  Big  Cove,  and  is  6  miles  south  of  the  Kouchi- 
bouguac and  3  miles  north  of  the  Richibucto  River.  The  depth  by  a 
narrow  channel  over  the  shifting  bar  of  sand  is  0  or  10  feet  at  high 
water  in  spring  tides.  There  are  3  fathoms  just  within  the  sand  bars, 
firom  one  to  3  fathoms  through  the  lagoon,  and  2  or  3  fathoms  for  sev- 
eral miles  up  the  river.  There  is  a  communication  by  boats  at  high 
water  through  the  lagoons  and  within  the  sand  bars,  not  only  between 
the  Kouchibouguac  and  Miramichi  Rivers,  but  also  southward  to  Rich- 
ibucto and  northward  nearly  to  Marsh  River,  15  miles. 

Kouchibouguac  River,  after  flowing  for  more  than  a  mile  through 
an  extensive  lagoon,  nearly  dry  at  low  water  in  spring  tides,  enters  the 
sea  by  an  outlet  through  sand  bars  about  9  miles  SW.'  from  Bapin 
Point.  Its  bar  of  sand  not  infrequently  shifts  in  heavy  easterly  gales, 
and  the  channel  is  at  all  times  narrow  and  intricate. 

A  depth  of  9  feet  at  high  water  and  spring  tides  could  be  carried  in 
over  the  bar  at  the  time  of  the  Admiralty  survey  in  July,  1839. 

Large  ships,  which  are  occasionally  built  in  this  river,  are  taken  out 
Mght,  and  towed  by  a  steamer  to  be  fitted  at  Richibucto  or  Miramichi. 
The  banks  of  this  river  are  well  settled,  and  there  is  a  saw  mill  at  the 
head  of  the  tide. 

The  Tides  rise  fi-om  2^  to  4  feet,  flowing  about  8  miles  up  the  river. 


1 


106  NORTHUMBERLAND   STRAIT— WEST   SHORE. 

and  affording  a  depth  of  from  2  to  3  fathoms  through  a  very  nam,w 
and  crooked  channel,  for  a  distance  of  5  miles  in  from  the  bar.  It  was 
high  water  at  the  full  and  change,  in  July,  at  about  4  a.  m.,  but  the 
"diurnal  inequality,"  belonging  to  two  interfering  tides,  caused  the 

n.  m.  tide  to  nearly  disappear.  „  .  ^      •*,    .  i„„ 

Sapin  Point  is  south  H  miles  from  Escuminac  Point,  with  alow 

shallow  shore  between.  . 

Sapin  Ledge,  of  sandstone,  and  with  12  feet  least  water,  is  very  dan- 
gerous Ivinrdirectly  in  the  way  of  vessels  running  alongslu.re.  It 
fhouM  no  be  approached  nearer  than  the  depth  of  9  fathoms  m  the 
Stime,  and  at  all  times  it  should  be  remembered  that  the  5-fathom 
Une  of  soundings  is  distant  from  it  only  about  400  yards.  The  ledge  is 
14  miles  long,  tast  and  west,  and  about  i  a  mile  wide  between  the 
3  fathom  lines,  and  its  eastern  or  outer  extremity  bears  S.  1  °  E.  (S.  (. 
W.  mag.)  6  miles  from  the  lighthouse  on  Escuminac  Point,  and  east 
(S.  «7o  E.  mag.)  2^  miles  from  Sapin  Point.  There  is  a  depth  of  3i 
fathoms  between  it  and  the  last-named  point. 


a  very  narrow 

e  bar.    It  was 

a.  m.,  but  the 

)H,  caused  tbe 

nt,  with  a  low 

«r,i8  very  dan - 
klougsliiJre.  It 
fathoms  in  the 
it  the  Sfathom 
I.  The  ledge  is 
e,  between  the 
S.  17°  E.  (S.  (P 
Point,  and  east 
a  depth  of  3^ 


CHAPTER  V. 

PRINCE  EDWARD  ISLAND-NORTHUMBERLAND  STRAIT-NORTH  SHORE. 

(H.  O.  Chart  No.  1066.) 

Prince  Edward  Island  is  rendered  extremely  irregular  by  large 
bays,  inlets,  and  rivers,  which  penetrate  the  island  so  that  no  part  of 
It  IS  distant  more  than  7  or  8  miles  from  navigable  water.  Its  shape  is 
an  irregular  <!rescent,  concave  toward  the  gulf,  the  northern  shore  form- 
ing a  great  bay,  91  miles  wide  and  2ii  miles  deep,  out  of  which  the  set 
ot  the  tides  and  the  heavy  sea  render  it  very  difficult  to  extricate  a 
ship  when  caught  in  the  NE.  gales,  which  frequently  occur  toward  the 
lall  ot  the  year,  occasionally  blowing  with  great  strength,  and  at  such 
times  proving  fatal  to  many  vessels. 

In  the  interior  of  the  island  the  most  elevated  ridges  do  not  exceed 
400  or  at  the  utmost  500  feet  above  the  sea,  and  the  land  is  in  general 
much  lower,  especially  near  the  coast,  the  prevailing  feature  being 
undulating,  and  the  alternation  of  hill  and  dale  and  inlet  forming  very 
pleasing  scenery.  *       ' 

Prince  Edward  Island  is  part  of  the  Dominion  of  Canada,  but  has  a 
provincial  government  for  administering  local  aflfairs.  The  seat  of  the 
local  government  is  in  Charlottetown. 

Climate.— The  climate  is  less  severe  than  in  Lower  Canada-  not 
quite  so  cold  m  winter  nor  so  hot  in  summer,  being  tempered  by  the  sea 
breezes;  but,  on  the  other  hand,  the  advance  of  spring  is  checked  by 
northerly  winds  from  the  gulf,  driving  down  ice,  which  sometimes  fills 
the  strait  as  late  as  the  middle  of  May,  so  that  instead  of  the  sudden 
outbreak  of  vegetable  litfe  which  is  observed  in  Canada,  it  is  here  fre- 
,  quently  retarded  till  the  month  of  June  is  well  advanced,  and  there  is 
seldom  any  settled  warm  weather  much  before  July. 

Fogs—The  most  important  advantage  of  the  climate  to  the  seaman 
IS  the  rare  occurrence  of  the  dense  fogs  which  so  frequently  embarrass 
him  in  other  parts  of  the  gulf,  and  which  in  Northumberland  Strait  are 
seldom  seen.  It  is  worthy  of  remark  that  the  prevailing  SW.  wind  of 
summer,  which  in  the  Bay  of  Pundy  is  generally  accompanied  by  thick 
tog,  parts  with  its  moisture  in  passing  over  the  heated  land  of  Nova 
hcotia,  and  becomes  a  hot  dry  wind  off  its  northern  coast.  It  becomes 
tempered  in  its  passage  over  the  water  of  the  strait,  heated  and  dried 
again  m  some  degree  in  passing  over  the  island,  but  acquires  a^ain  its 
moist  and  foggy  character  long  before  it  reaches  the  coast  of  Labrador, 
and  not  infrequently  before  it  arrives  at  the  Magdalen  Islands. 

107 


108 


PRINCE   EDWARD    ISLAND SOUTH   COAST. 


Produce  and  Trade.— The  inhabitants  are  almost  exclusively 
engafjed  in  agriculture  and  the  breeding  of  horses  and  sheep. 

The  export  trade  of  the  island  consists  chiefly  of  agricultural  prod- 
uce, small  quantities  of  lumber  being  also  sent  away.  The  fisheries 
are  prosecuted  on  the  north  shore.  There  are  factories  for  canning  and 
preserving  fish  and  meat. 

The  population  in  1891  amounted  to  109,078. 

SOUTH   COAST  OF   I'EINCB  EDWARD  ISLAND. 

The  Coast  to  the  westward  of  Cape  Bear  (the  8E.  point  of  the 
island)  to  White  Sands  is  formed  of  sandstone  clift's,  which  are  in  some 
places  40  feet  high,  without  beach  or  landing,  except  at  (luernsey  Cove, 
and  from  wliich  the  shallow  water  does  not  extend  beyond  700  yards 
except  near  Cape  IJear. 

Cape  Bear  will  be  known  by  the  large  rock,  12  feet  high,  which  lies 
close  under  its  cliff's  of  red  sandstone;  and  Murray  Head,  a  mile 
farther  to  the  northward,  by  its  forming  the  extreme  northeastern 
point  of  the  cliffs,  where  they  turn  abruptly  to  the  westward  toward 
Murray  Harbor. 

Bear  Reef  runs  out  to  the  eastward,  from  between  Cape  Bear  and 
Murray  Head,  J  mile,  to  the  depth  of  3  fathoms,  and  one  mile  to  5 
fathoms,  and  is  composed  of  sandstone  and  large  stones.  There  is  but 
little  water  over  the  greater  part  of  this  extensive  and  irregularly 
shaped  reef,  which  has  7  or  8  fathoms  close  to  its  edge,  and  is  there- 
fore dangerous  to  vessels  rounding  the  cape  at  night  or  in  foggy 
weather,  when  they  s'.iould  not  approach  nearer  than  the  depth  of  10 
fathoms,  either  to  the  eastward  or  southward  of  the  reef. 

Leading  Marks.— There  are  no  close  leading  marks  for  passing 
eastward  of  this  reef,  but  Panmure  Head  and  Terras  Point  in  line, 
bearing  N.  15°  W.  (N.  8°  B.  mag.),  clear  it  at  the  distance  of  one  mile 
in  that  direction;  at  nigirt  the  light  on  Panmure  Head  must  be  kept 
open  of  Terras  Point.  Gueriisey  Point  kept  well  open  southward  of 
Black  Rock  Point  will  lead  to  the  southward. 

Light— The  lighthouse,  which  stands  on  the  headland  of  Cape  Bear,  * 
is  a  white,  square  building,  46  feet  high,  with  dwelling  attached.    A  red 
light,  revolving  every  i  minute,  is  exhibited  at  an  elevation  of  74  feet. 
It  should  be  visible  12  miles. 

Tides.— It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Capr  Be^r  at  9h.; 
springs  rise  6  feet,  neaps  3  feet.    See  Tidal  stream,  page  153. 

Water.— At  700  yards  southward  of  Murray  Head  there  is  a  fine 
little  stream  of  fresh  water  worthy  of  notice,  because  there  are  so  few 
places  on  the  island  where  a  large  ship  can  readily  water.  Boats  can 
land  there  in  westerly  winds,  when  vessels  will  find  good  anchorage 
under  the  head. 

Fishermans  Bank  is  of  sandstone,  thinly  covered  with  stone,  gravel, 
and  broken  shell.    Within  the  depth  of  10  fathoms  it  is  3  miles  long 


t  exclusively 
leep. 

niltural  prod- 
Tbe  fisheries 
r  canuiug  aud 


point  of  the 
ch  are  in  some 
uernsey  Cove, 
ond  7(K)  yards 

igh,  which  lies 

Head,  a  mile 

I  northeastern 

itward  toward 

3apeBear  and 
one  mile  to  5 
There  is  but 
nd  irregularly 
,  and  is  there- 
t  or  in  foggy 
lie  depth  of  10 
f. 

ks  for  passing 
Point  in  line, 
ice  of  one  mile 
.  must  be  kept 
1  southward  of 

I  of  Oape  Bear,  * 
tached.    A  red 
btion  of  74  feet. 

•■■  BeiT  at  9h.; 

)153. 

there  is  a  flue 

;here  are  so  few 

;er.    Boats  can 

rood  anchorage 

th  stone,  gravel, 
is  li  miles  long 


FI8HEBMANS   BANK— WOOD   ISLANDS.  ]09 

fr^m /tn^T.?^"  ^^^?  """^^  ^''^^^^  ^'^^  ^^«  ^^'"""^  "^'^tral  part,  with 
from  4  to  r.  fatlioms  at  low  water,  covers  scarcely  half  that  space.    From 

f^H        ^f  Cf  W  mag.)  7^  miles;  and  there  is  another  patch  with  5 

^0  fathoms  between  this  bank  and  Bear  Reef,  and  in  every  Uher  direct 
t.on  around  it  from  15  t«  20  fathoms.  It  is  very  darigeroL  to  ve  els 
of  large  draft  when  there  is  a  heavy  sea  running,  and  should  not  tben 
be  approached  nearer  than  the  depth  of  13  fathoms,  which  in  most 

stuTo"  water!"    '  '"'''*''"  ''^''  "°^  ""'^ ''''''  ^'^^^  *  '"''«  f-""  'I 
The  steeple  of  the  English  church  at  Georgetown,  in  line  with  Pan 

Black  Hock  and  Guernsey  Points,  ^  and  2  miles,  respectively 

rth'r  T^  "'.'^T  ''"""'  ''^^'  *^^  ^'^^^^  ^"^'"^^  -l^-ve  water  S 
oflf  their  cliffs  as  a  so  has  Oape  Bear;  but  the  rock  off  the  cape  is  muclJ 
higher  than  the  others,  its  summit  being  about  12  feet  above  the  sea  at 
bighwater  whilst  Black  Rock  is  only  7  feet,  and  the  other  stilMower 
h«rr?  ^^f  J^  *  settlement,  receiving  its  name  from  the  sandy 
beach  of  a  small  bay,  4^  miles  8  W.  of  Cape  Bear.  There  is  a  sandspit 
there,  just  covered  at  low  water,  which  affords  some  shelter  to  boats 
and  a  sandy  shoal  extending  J  mile  off  shore.  ' 

The  edge  of  this  shoal  is  so  steep  and  the  water  near  it  so  deep  that 
the  lead  gives  no  warning;  but  if  Black  Rock  Point  (the  extreme  to 
the  eastward)  be  kept  open  to  the  southward  of  Guernsey  Point  (the 
west  side  of  Guernsey  Cove),  it  will  lead  to  the  eastward  of  the  shoah 

ftsstZrdge."  '"''''"""  ""•  ^«°  ^•(^^- ^3°  E-g.),  lead  along 

From  White  Sands  to  Little  Sands,  6  miles  to  the  westward,  the  sand- 
stone  cliffs  are  40  to  50  feet  high  aud  quite  bold. 

Wood  Islands,  9  miles  westward  of  White  Sands,  are  now  only  in 
part  covered  with  timber.  They  are  two  small  islets,  and  with  their 
connec  mg  sand  bars  are  1,400  yards  in  length,  parallel  to  the  shore, 
frZ      "?  ?*^  "*'*  ^'^^^""^  '*^"*  *  "»"«•    The  eastern  or  larger  islet 

IITJ  !  ^"^  *",'^  *^^"*  ^^  ^*"*  ^'^^'  '^^^y  both  present  cliffs  of 
sandstone  to  seaward,  and  are  united  to  the  shore  by  a  long  sand  bar  at 
their  western  extremity.  The  space  between  the  islets  and  the  shore 
forms  a  secure  boat  harbor,  having  an  entrance  from  the  eastward,  but 
It  IS  all  nearly  dry  at  low  water.  • 

The  Anchorage  to  the  eastward  of  the  islands,  within  the  distance 

?Ll?  i!'  ?  V  ^  ^"?'  **^P"'  from  3  to  9  fathoms,  is  good  in  NW.  winds, 
Indian  Rocks  breaking  the  sea.  ' 

Light-The  lighthouse  on  the  south  point  of  Wood  Island  is  a  souare 
building  40  feet  high,  with  dweUing  attached,  and  exhibit  at  ancle 
vation  of  80  feet  a  fixed  white  light,  which  should  be  visible  15  miles. 


i.mm 


110 


PRINCE   EDWARD    ISLAND — SOUTH   COAST. 


«# 


,1 


Indian  Rocks,  considering  them  to  be  bounded  by  the  deptli  of  3 
fathoms,  occupy  a  space  U  nnles  in  length,  Pa-llel  to  t  -  «ho.e  b.. 
tween  Wood  Islands  and  Bell  Point,  and  f,  mile  in  breadth.     They  are 
of  sandstone,  dry  to  a  considerable  extent  at  low  wa^r,  «" ^  ITJ 
southern  edge  is  1 J  miles  oif  shore.    The  SE.  point  ot  the  Woo.l  Islands 
noJ  brought'to  bear  to  the  eastward  of  N.  45o  E.  (N  «Ho  E.  mug^,  w.ll 
lead  to  the  southward  of  their  SE.  extreme,  which  hears  S.  34o  \\ .  (S. 
570  W.  nmg.)  nearly  a  mile  from  the  west  end  ^I  *]»«  ^"f^^f  «,"^^' 
MacDougall  and  Pinette  Points  in  one,  bearing  N.  41o  W.  (N.  18    W. 
mag.),  will  lead  i  mile  westward  of  the  westi-rn  extreme,  which  bears 
from  Bell  Point  S.  34°  E.  (S.  U^  E.  mag.)  1?  miles;  but  Pmette  Point 
can  not  always  be  distinguished.  f  ^^     ,  .  „ 

Caution -The  Wi*nt  of  sutticient  leading  marks,  and  the  deep  water 
80  close  to  the  southward,  would  render  these  rocks  ..xcee.lingly  dan- 
gerous by  day  as  well  as  by  night  if  there  were  not  nearly  always 
breakers  or  a  rippling  to  be  seen  on  the  part  which  dries.  In  standing 
toward  them  at  night,  if  Wood  Islands  light  is  not  seen,  observe  tha 
there  are  10  fathoms  within  i  mile  of  their  southen.  ed-e,  and  that  U 
fathoms  is  near  enough  to  their  SE.  extreme  and  10  ftttlumis  to  thoir 
SW.  point,  taking  care  not  to  get  between  the  latter  and  the  Bell  Point 
Keef,  where  there  are  also  10  fathoms. 

There  is  a  channel  between  the  Indian  Rocks  and  the  shore  more 
than  A  iuile  wide,  and  carrying  from  4  to  16  fathoms  water;  but  it  is  of 
no  us"o  to  shipping,  the  soundings  being  irregular,  with  rocky  or 
gravelly  bottom  and  strong  tides.  ,       .  ^, 

Leading  Marks.— The  extreme  of  the  land  to  the  eastward  and  the 
inner  side  of  the  Wood  Islands  in  one  will  lead  in  between  the  lieli 
Point  Reef  and  the  rocks,  and  clear  their  northern  <dge  m  5 fathoms; 
and  the  line  of  Stewart  and  Bell  Points  in  one,  bearing  N.  63°  W.  (^. 
40°  W.  mag.),  passes  along  the  NB.  side  in  3  fathoms;  the  former  of 
those  points  must  therefore  be  shut  in  behind  the  latter  to  pass  between 
the  rocks  and  the  Wood  Islands.  «.  ^  j.      t,    ■  „ 

Buoy.-A  whistling  buoy  is  moored  in  10  fathoms  off  Indian  Rocks. 
The  buov  is  red  and  lies  with  Prim  Point  lighthouse  N.  47°  W.  (N.  24° 
W  mag.)  and  Wood  Island  lighthouse  N.  53°  B.  (N.  76°  B.  mag.). 

Tides  —The  tidal  streams  are  strong  in  the  deep  water  just  outside 
the  Indian  Rocks,  frequently  running  at  the  rate  of  3  knots  per  hour. 
It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  9h.  45m.  nearly;  springs  rise  6 

feet,  neaps  4  feet.  .  ._ 

BeU  Point,  a  mile  SE.  of  Stewart  Point,  is  a  clift  of  sandstone  40 
feet  in  height.  The  shallow  water  is  continuous  from  the  Rifleman 
Reef  to  this  point,  from  which  it  extends  a  mile  to  the  3-fathom  line, 
having  9  or  10  fathoms  close  to  its  edge. 

Rineman  Reef,  of  sandstone,  extends  2  miles  westward  from  Stewart 
Point  On  the  extreme  outer  point  of  this  reef,  in  3  fathoms,  the  hght 
on  Prim  Point  bears  N.  51o  W.  (S,  28o  W.  mag.)  8  mUes.    Just  witain 


the  depth  of  3 
»  the  »hoie  bii- 
dth.  They  are 
Iter,  aiul  their 
;  Wood  Ishuuls, 
f3  E.  mujf.),  will 
'R  S.  340  W.  (S. 
Wood  Islands; 
W.  (N.  18°  W. 
ne,  which  bears 
t  Pinette  Point 

the  deep  water 
xeeeilingly  daii- 
t  nearly  always 
>8.  In  standing 
en,  observe  that 
Ige,  and  that  1 J 
fathoms  to  thoir 
id  the  Bell  Point 

the  shore  more 
ater;  biit  it  is  of 
,  with  rocky  or 

lastward  and  the 
>etween  the  l?ell 
Ige  in  5  fathoms; 
ug  N.  63°  W.  (N. 
is;  the  former  of 
p  to  pass  between 

)ff  Indian  Rocks. 
!f ,  470  W.  (N.  240 
JG°  B.  mag.)- 
ater  just  outside 
3  knots  per  hour. 
y,  springs  rise  6 

f  of  sandstone  40 
■om  the  Rifleman 
;Ue  3-fathom  line, 

vard  from  Stewart 
fathoms,  the  light 
liles.    Just  within 


RIFLEMAN   REEF — PINETTE    HARBOR.  ^    j 

tliis  point  of  the  reef  there  are  8  feet  water,  and  halfway  between  that 
and  the  shore  only  o  fo.t,  while  between  those  and  ether  shallow 
patches  there  are  12  feet  at  low  water.  »»aii.m 

,i«f«  "**?""~;''^*'  ''®'^'  "■'■«^'»''"-  «"'"Hli"g«  off  Rifleman  Reef,  and  the 
deep  water  close  to  it  (16  fathon.s  within  less  than  ^  n.ile,  while   he  e 
sa  n,uch  less  depth  farther  out),  render  it  one  of  the  grea  est  dan  ers 
in<f  wlr  M^'f  ^'^'f-''^^-  l>-nng<,f  the  lig„ts',.n  Prin.  S 

greatly  assist  vessels  ,n  avoiding  it,  bnt  at  all  tin.es,  either  by  night 
or  by  day  ami  especially  in  thick  weather,  it  shouli  be  approached 
with  care  There  are  no  leading  marks  to  clear  its  west  extre  .  e,  which 
than  fa^n'T  f--^«'/'»t  the  soundings  give  better  warning  h^e 
^an  farther  to  the  southward.  The  wooded  point  within  and  opposite 
Wood  Island  ,n  one  with  Black  Point,  the  extreme  to  the  eastward 
bearing  east  (S.  G7o  E.  mag.),  Just  clear  tl.e  sonti.ern  side  of  the  rS' 
but  the  safest  plan,  when  approaching  it  from  the  southward,  wilH  e 

I  .r  T"  '*'  **•*  "•^'""'"«  «^"  ^''«  ''""1  t«  the  eastward  apnea  s 
within  tl^e  Wood  Islands,  bearing  N.  81°  e.  (S.  7(io  e.  mag.),  v^  tC 
vessel  will  be  1^  miles  from  the  reef. 

When  standing  toward  the  reef  at  night,  take  care  that  the  light  on 
Prim  Point  is  not  brought  to  bear  to  the  westward  of  N.  450  W  (N  '>  " 
mag.).    If  the  light  is  not  seen,  a  close  attention  to  the  soundings  can 
alone  insure  safety.    It  must  be  borne  in  mind,  in  standing  across 
the  strait  from  the  southward  toward  the  reef,  that  after  having  nd 
upward  of  20  fathoms  toward  the  southern  shore,  the  soundinjfs  will 
decrease  to  between  11  and  9  fathoms  for  several  miles,  and  1 1";  s« 
den  y  increase  again  to  from  1 4  to  10  fathoms.    When  the  vessel  arrives 
at  this  deep  water  she  will  be  less  than  a  m^le  from  the  reef,  and  if  she 
ventures  across  it  to  10  fathoms  she  will  be  only  000  yards  fvoru  its  edge! 
nfrbnl  R^^e'.  ^h'cl';^  only  flt  for  boats,  is  3  miles  SE.  from  Pinette 
entX  a  'n^^e."  "'^'^  ™°«  ^^  ^""^'^"^^^  ^^^"^'  ^*«  ^^^  P^-t  of 
Pinette  Harbor,  4  miles  eastward  from  Prim  Point,  has  only  2  feet 
at  low  water  over  its  rocky  and  exceedingly  dangerous  bar     It  is 
therefore,  flt  only  for  small  schooners,  although  itTas  from  3  t^  2 
fatlK.ms  m  its  narrow  channel,  which  runs  in  several  mill  through 
1.,  «f  n      r**  r"'*''  ^'^  ^*  ^"^  ^*^^'  «°d  then  divides  into  sev 
and  tt  p""  ?r«f '';    '^^'  ^^'  ''  "^^'•^y  ^  °^"«  ««* fr«"»  tl'e  entrance. 
?n1 1,       «*^f  ^^^'«  r«««l^  to  ^onWe  that  distance,  their  outer  point 

S^LftTth'''^'^'"^*  ''"^^•'*^°*'"  ^«y«°*l  *»»«""«  joining  Prim 
Point,  and  the  extreme  to  the  southeastward.    There  are  only  9  feet 

water  just  within  this  point,  and  only  3  feet  at  no  great  distance  the 
bottom  being  rock.  These  shoals  are,  therefore,  very  dangerous  a.ul 
shouldnotbeapproached  nearer  than  thelow-waterdeUofTSom^^ 


112 


PRINCE   EDWARD   ISLAND — SOUTH   COAST. 
(H.O.  Chart  No.  1WJ8.) 


Hillsborough  Bay,  having  in  it  the  principal  harbor  and  capital 
town,  and,  being  the  outlet  of  an  extensive  inland  navigation,  is  the 
most  important  aH  well  as  the  largest  of  any  in  Prince  Edward  Island. 

Lights— Prim  Point— The  lighthouse  on  Prim  Point,  the  BE.  i»oint 
of  Hillsborongh  Bay,  is  conical,  55  feet  high,  and  white.  It  stands  at 
100  yards  within  the  8W.  extreme  of  the  point,  and  exhibits,  at  an 
elevation  of  6«  feet,  a  tixed  white  light,  which  should  be  visible  12 
miles.  It  is  of  the  greatest  use  to  vessels,  especially  when  approaching 
ftom  the  eastward,  guiding  them,  by  its  bearing,  cleai  of  the  Rifleman 
and  Pinette  Shoals,  and  enabling  them  to  enter  the  bay  in  the  darkest 

"'naBxard  Point  leading  lights  are  both  fixed  red  liglits,  visible 

through  a  small  arc  on  each  side  of  the  line  of  direction  when  in  one. 

The  front  or  lower  light  is  elevated  46  feet,  and  should  be  /isible  8 

miles 

The  light  is  shown  from  a  square  whiti?  building,  47  feet  high,  with  a 
brown  roof,  standing  on  Haszard  Point,  35  feet  ftom  the  coast. 

The  back  or  high  light  is  126  feet  above  high-water  mark,  and  should 
be  visible  12  miles.  The  lighthouse  building  is  in  all  respects  similar 
to  the  front  onej  it  is  in  rear  of  the  farm  buildings  on  Bellevue  farm, 
at  2,244  feet  N.  20°  E.  (N.  43°  E.  mag.)  from  to«  other. 

St  Peters  Island.— On  the  south  side  of  St  Peters  Island,  an  inter- 
mittent white  light  is  exhibited  at  70  feet  above  high  water,  from  a 
square  white  building,  38  feet  high. 

The  light  is  visible  between  S.  62°  W.  (S.  85°  W.  mag.)  through  north 
to  S.  56°  E.  (8.  33°  E.  mag.)  for  10  miles. 

Blockhouse  Point— The  lighthouse  on  Blockhouse  Point,  west  side 
of  entrance  to  Charlottetown  Harbor,  is  a  square  tower,  42  feet  high, 
painted  white,  and  exhibits  at  an  elevation  of  56  feet  a  fixed  white 
light,  which  should  be  visible  12  miles. 

Brighton  Beach.— Two  red  fixed  leading  lights  are  exhibited  on  the 
eastern  side  of  York  Jtiver. 

Both  lights  are  shown  from  skeleton  towers  with  their  southern  faces 
closely  slatted  so  us  to  make  conspicuous  day  marks,  and  surmounted 
by  wooden  lanterns.  The  towers  are  painted  whit«  and  the  lanterns  red. 
The  outer  (southern)  towei',  placed  on  the  NW.  corner  of  the  break- 
water, is  40  feet  high;  and  the  light,  41  feet  above  high-water  mark, 
should  be  seen  over  a  .small  arc  on  each  side  of  the  alignment  7  miles. 
The  inner  tower  is  ao  feet  high  and  stands  on  the  old  Asylum  grounds, 
42.5  yards  N.  23°  W.  (north  mag.),  of  the  outer  tower.  The  light  is  77 
feet  above  high-water  mark,  and  is  visible,  over  a  small  arc  on  each  side 
of  the  lights  in  line,  9  miles. 

Note.— These  lights  are  maintained  during  the  season  of  general 
navigation,  and  at  such  times  in  winter  as  any  steamers  are  running  to 
Charlottetown. 


i  .iHiiiiiaiii 


nilXSIJOKOUOH    HAY. 


113 


md  capital 
tioii,  is  the 
ard  Island. 
,e  8E.  point 
It  stands  at 
libits,  at  an 
le  visible  12 
upproaching 
D\io  Rifleman 
I  the  darkest 

ghts,  visible 

wln/n  in  one. 

be  .'isible  8 

t  high,  with  a 

coast. 

:k,  and  should 

spects  similar 

Jellevue  farm, 

land,  an  inter- 
water,  from  a 

through  north 

joint,  west  side 

.,  42  feet  high, 

a  fixed  white 

shibited  on  the 

I  southern  faces 
ad  surmounted 
tie  lanterns  red. 
J  of  the  break- 
th-water  mark, 

Inment  7  miles, 
aylum  grounds, 
[rhe  light  is  77 
lire  on  each  side 

Ison  of  general 
are  running  to 


Buoys. — Oil  rntiMJii);  (Miarlottt^town  lliirlior,  iimI  buoys  must  be  left 
on  stilrlioiinl  iind  l>lii«-k  buoys  on  port  liiiiKJ. 

Caution. — Tlu'  iMioys  in  this  liurhur  iin-  li<>(|m>iitly  out  of  position; 
tlu'rcloic  in  «'I»'iir  \v«'iitli(>i  use  tlic  IciHlin^  uimI  cU-aiin^'  niiiiks. 

East  Side  of  Channel. — Prim  l'(»iiit,  is  low.  wiili  rlills  of  sinidstonc 
10  to  1.*)  t't>t't  liigli,  and  iiMy  1>(>  rocogiiizod  b\  tlio  li;;litliousu.  I 'rim 
IslaiiH.  wliit'li  has  also  lo\v  clitTs,  is  distant  I  1  miit's  XK.  Iroin  t\u' 
extremity  ol  tiic  point,  ami  is  niiitod  to  its  uorlli  side  by  .sand  beafiii's, 
imlosiii^  inai'shy  ponds. 

Prim  Reef,  of  samlsioiii',  runs  out  to  tlio  wcstwanl,  both  from  tlic 
island  and  the  point,  so  as  to  foini  a  IoiK(m1  n-cf,  nitli  very  uih-vcii 
.sonmliiifjs;  its  western  point,  in  li  fatlionis,  is  west  ..'  miles  from  I  he 
liglitlKMisu,  and  the  other  point  SW.  by  W,  1 1  mile.s:  hut  if  the  reef  is 
(•oiisi(UM<'d  as  bonmb'd  hy  the  dejith  of  .">  fathmns.  it  is  much  more 
extensive,  leaehiii;^  out  to  the  distaii>e  of  .'5  miles. 

Buoy. — A  luioy,  paintj'd  red,  mariis  the  western  extreme  of  I'rim 
Keefs;  it  lies  LJ,',,  miles  from  I'rim  Point  li<;htlionse. 

Clearing  mark. —  The  old  Scotch  ehiireh.  formerly  a  eleaiinjj  mark 
for  this  reef,  has  lu'eii  snjierseded  by  a  new  jjiaystone  e<liliee  with  a 
spile,  to  the  southward  of  the  old  building:.  Tliis  color  prevents  it 
from  beiiifj  seen  as  far  as  Prim  I'eef,  but  it  may  he  used  as  aeleariiiK' 
mark  for  Fitzroy  Kock  by  beir^i  kept  just  open  west  of  Ibittery  Point; 
therefore,  the  red  buoy  on  the  extrenuty  of  Prim  lieef  and  the  lead 
must  b(!  the  main  dependence,  the  sound iiiffs,  combined  with  the  bear 
mix  of  the  lijjht,  beiufj  amply  sufficient  for  roiiiuling  tiie  reef,  as  will  be 
seen  in  the  chart. 

Governor  Island,  lyiiip:  in  the  middle  of  llillsliorou^h  Bay,  is  low, 
in  great  part  wooded,  based  upon  sandstone,  and  has  dangerous  shoals 
round  it  on  all  sides. 

Governor  Shoals,  extending  from  (lovernorlshiud  to  the  SW.,  and 
adding  greatly  to  the  daiificis  of  the  navigation,  reipure  especially  to 
bo  noticed.  Stretching  out  from  the  west  eyd  of  the  island,  the  sand 
stone  reef  Is  dry  at  low  water  for  the  tirst  i  mile,  and  has  less  than  .'J 
fathoms  for  an  equal  distance  farther;  after  which  rocky  and  irregular 
soundings  continue  to  the  west  extreme  of  the  shoals,  in  5  fathoms, 
distant  2  miles  from  the  island. 

Buoy. — A  bell  buoy  is  moored  in  4  fathoms,  200  yards  within  the  west 
extreme  of  the  shoals. 

Fitzroy  Rock,  with  20  feet  least  water,  lies  about  200  yards  to 
the  eastward  of  t  he  above  buoy,  and  was  considered  the  principal  dan- 
ger off"  the  ishind  until  the  discovery  of  the  much  more  dangerous 
rocky  patches  which  are  scattered  over  these  shoals  farther  to  the 
southward. 

Of  these  patches,  the  Huntley  Rock,  bearing  S.  ~>^  E.  (S.  18°  W.  mag.), 
13  miles  from  the  west  end  of  Governor  Island,  has  the  least  water, 
namely,  IL'  feet  at  low  water:  but  there  are  others,  with  from  17  to  22 
'115 1 8 


114  PRINCE   KDWARn  ISLAND— BOUTH   COAST. 

feet  water,  h«  f«r  out  as  L'i  milen,  and  the  SW.  extreme  of  the  Kl.oals 
i„  5  fatl.o...H  \H  .listuut  3i  mileK  from  the  island.  The  new  ScoteU 
church,  which  .nay  be  known  by  ItH  spire,  and  Battery  I'oint  bearing 
JJ  70  W  (N  1«^  10.  niaj,'.),  leads  along  and  clears  the  west  side  ot  tue 
Governor  Sl'ioals  in  r>  fathoms,  excepting  the  small  portion  of  the  west 
extreme  to  the  westward  of  the  buoy. 

On  the  eastern  side  of  the  channel  into  Charlottetown  Harbor,  to 
the  northward  of  (lovernor  Island,  the  shallow  water  is  continuous, 
from  Sea  Trout  Voiut,  at  the  entrant^e  of  the  harbor,  to  Governor 
Island,  there  being  only  a  passage  for  boats  or  small  craft  between 
that  island  and  the  land  north  of  it.  The  edge  of  the  bank,  in  5  fath^ 
oms,  runs  to  the  south  from  Sea  Trout  Point  to  abr.-ast  the  Spithead 
buoy;  conse.,uently  parallel,  in  this  part,  to  the  bank  on  the  opposite 
side,  leaving  a  channel  with  7  to  lli  fathoms  water,  and  eituer  A  imle 
or  i  mile  wide,  according  as  It  is  conceived  to  be  bounded  by  the  5 
or  ;Vtathom  line  of  soundings.  ,       .    ^,       1  « 

Sauaw  Shoal,  with  10  feet  least  water,  approaches  close  to  the  edge 
of  the  bank  where  it  is  most  steep.  Battery  and  Sea  Trout  Points  in 
one  bearing  N.  2;P  E.  (north  mag.),  form  an  excellent  mark  for  this 
si.le  of  the  channel,  leading  along  the  edge  of  the  bank,  in  44  fathoms 
least  water,  from  near  Sea  Trout  Point  to  i  mile  beyond  the  Spithead 
buoy  on  the  opposite  si.le;  but  it  had  better  not  be  followed  farther  to 
the  southward  in  a  large  ship,  although  smaller  vessels  may  do  so, 
until  (iovernor  Island  and  Gallows  Point  are  tondiing,  bearing  m  mind 
that  it  tinally  leads  over  the  reef  off  the  west  end  of  the  island. 

West  Side  of  Channel.-St.  Peters  Island,  lying  off  the  western 
point  of  entrance  to  Hillsborough  IJay,  is  rather  more  than  3  miles  in 
circumference,  and  of  very  moderate  height,  having  cliffs  of  red  clay 
and  sandstone.  ;5.>  Ceet  high,  along  its  eastern  shore.  There  are  several 
farms  on  either  side,  but  the  central  parts  of  the  island  are  thickly 
wooded.    It  is  .joined  to  Rice  Point,  the  western  point  of  the  bay,  by 

sands  dry  at  low  water. 

Shallow  water  extends  off  this  island  H  miles  to  the  SW.  and  south, 
but  the  soundings,  deepening  out  gradually,  attord  ample  guidance  m 
that  part.  Farther  eastward  St.  Peters  Shoals  become  much  more 
extensive,  stretching  out  3^  miles  NE.  by  E.  from  the  NE.  point  ot  the 
island  For  the  first  2  miles  of  that  distance,  St.  Peters  Spit  of  san 
dries  out,  affording  shelter  to  St.  Peters  Road  which  is  fit  only  for  small 
vessels,  having  only  from  9  to  12  feet  at  low  water.  The  Spithead,  a 
rocky  shoal,  with  8  feet  least  water,  lies  off  the  end  «f  SJ;  ^^^^^^  ^pit 
and  extends  to  within  4  mile  of  the  east  extreme  of  the  St.  Peters  Shoals, 
where  the  Spithead  buoy  is  moored  in  3  fathoms. 

Caution— The  5-fathom  edge  of  the  bank,  forming  the  western  side 
of  the  channel  into  Charlottetown  Harbor,  trends  northward  24  miles 
from  the  Spithead  buoy  to  about  20(?  yards  off  Blockhouse  Point,  at 
the  entrance  of  the  harbor.    The  edge  of  the  St.  Peters  Shoals  may 


3= 


CHARLOTTKTOWN    HARHOR. 


115 


of  the  Hhortls 
B  new  Scotch 
'olnt,  benrlng 
,gt  side  of  the 
,u  of  the  west 

m\  Unrbor,  to 
is  c()Jitimioiw» 
,  to  Governor 
craft  between 
»ank,  in  5  fath- 
t  the  Spithead 
>n  the  opposite 
1  eitlicr  h  ini^« 
aniU'd  by  t\ie  5 

ilose  to  the  edge 
Trout  Points  in 
t  mark  for  this 
k,  in  44  fathoms 
nd  the  Spithead 
ilowed  farther  to 
isels  may  do  so, 
(bearing  in  mind 

10  island. 

ott"  the  western 
than  3  miles  in 

jUrta  of  red  clay 
Irhere  are  several 
jland  are  thickly 

,t  of  the  bay,  by 

L>  SW.  and  south, 
Inple  guidance  in 
jome  much  more 
NE.  point  of  the 
Iters  Spit  of  sand 
fit  only  for  small 
The  Spithead,  a 
,f  St.  Peters  Spit, 
St.  Peters  Shoals, 

the  western  side 
nthward  24  miles 
Ickhouse  Point,  at 
leters  Shoals  may 


be  safely  followed  by  the  lead  in  .'»  fathoms  as  far  in  as  the  Spithead 
buoy;  alter  wliicOi  the  bank  becomes  steep,  and  must  be  approached 
with  caution  inn  large  vessel. 

Trout  Rock,  with  7  feet  least  water,  lies  400  yards  within  the  edge 
of  tlie  bank,  and  a  long  ^  mile  from  IMockhouse  Point. 

Charlotteto^Tn  Harbor  is  000  yards  wide  at  entrance,  between  the 
cliflts  of  S«'a  Trout  and  Hlockhcuise  Points;  but  shallow  water,  extend- 
ing from  both  shores,  reduces  the  iiavigable  width  of  the  channel,  reck- 
oning from  the  depth  of  •'!  fathoms,  to  abont  loO  yards;  and  as  the 
shoals  are  very  stcei),  it  would  rerjiiire  to  be  well  buoyed  before  a  ship 
of  large  draft  could  beat  in  or  out  with  safety.  (Jlitls  of  red  sandstone, 
from  10  to  'M)  feet  high,  form  the  shores  on  either  side,  the  land  rising 
gradually  from  them  in  undulations,  and  being  partly  cultivated  and 
partly  wooded.  A  liglitiumse  and  signal  post  stand  on  Blockhouse 
Point,  the  west  point  of  entrance.  The  next  point  of  clitt"  on  the  west 
side  of  entrance  is  Alchorn  Point,  and  at  the  distance  of  ^  mile  from 
the  lighthouse  are  the  remains  of  Andierst  Fort,  on  the  hill,  'Xi  feet  above 
high  water.  On  tlie  same  side,  north  of  Alcliorn  Point,  is  Warren 
Cove,  and,  lastly,  Canseau  Point,  1.^  miles  from  the  lighthouse. 

Canseau  Spit  extends  off  Canseiiu  Point  700  yards,  and  will  be 
cleared  by  keeping  tlie  lighthouse  just  open,  clear  of  Alchorn  Point, 
observing  that  the  extremes  of  the  cliffs  of  Blockhouse  and  Alchorn 
Points  in  one  lead  over  the  point  of  the  shoal  in  1(5  feet  at  low  waj;er. 

Canseau  Spit  Buoy,  painted  black,  marks  the  eastern  extreme  of 
Canseau  Spit. 

On  the  eastern  side  of  the  entrance  and  leas  than  a  mile  within  Sea 
Trout  I'oint  is  Battery  Point,  with  its  shoal,  the  latter  running  out  400 
yards  and  having  on  its  extreme  point  a  red  buoy,  moored  in  3  fathoms 
at  low  water.  Outside  that  dei>th,  on  either  side,  the  water  deepens 
abruptly,  and  there  are  12  fathoms  in  the  middle  of  the  channel.  The 
belfry  of  St.  Dunstan  college,  in  line  with  the  flagstaff  at  Government 
house,  leads  clear  of  the  shoal  oft'  Battery  Point  in  10  fathoms  and  at 
the  distance  of  120  yards. 

Three  red  piles  mark  the  shallow  ground  off  Battery  Point  (August, 
1877). 

Middle  Q-round. — Within  the  harbor,  in  addition  to  the  flats  of  mud 
andjWeeds  extending  oil"  shore,  there  is  Middle  Ground,  with  17  feet 
least  water.  When  on  this  17-foot  patch  the  west  turret  of  the  tower 
of  the  Wesleyan  chapel  (built  of  brick  and  the  turrets  crowned  with 
high  skeleton  work)  is  just  shut  in  with  the  edge  of  the  Eomau  Cath- 
olic church  tower. 

The  lunatic  asylum,  just  open  eastward  of  the  end  of  the  railway  pier 
at  Charlottetown,  bearing  N.  37°  E.  (N.  60°  E.  mag.),  leads  southward 
and  eastward  of  Middle  Ground. 

Immediately  within  Battery  and  Canseau  Points,  which  are  the  inner 
points  of  entrance,  the  channel  expands  into  a  fine  harbor,  having  depth 


116 


PRINCE    EDWARD    IST.AND SOUTH    COAST. 


1 

I 
t 


ami  space  sufficient  for  any  number  and  description  of  vessels.  Tn  sail- 
ing in,  York  Eiver  will  be  seen  running  in  to  tlie  northwestward,  the 
Hillsborough  River  stretching  away  to  tlie  NK.  as  far  as  the  eye  can 
reach  and  I":niot  liiver  running  in  to  the  southwestward.  Tlie  conflu- 
ence of  the  streams  of  these  three  rivers  between  Canseau  Spit  and  the 
mouth  of  York  River  forms  the  Three  Tides,  where  there  is  excellent 
anchorage,  used  occasionally  by  laden  vessels  preparing  for  sea,  the 
usual  anchor'ige  beiug  ott'  the  wliarvcs  of  the  town,  where  the  channel 
is  550  yards  wide  and  carries  nearly  10  fathoms  water. 

Of  the  three  rivers  which  unite  in  the  harbor,  the  Hillsborough  is  the 
largest,  being  navigable  for  vessels  of  large  drait  lor  7  or  8  miles,  and 
for  small  vessels  14  miles  above  Charlottetown,  where  there  is  abridge 
L'  miles  from  the  head  of  the  river.  There  is  a  ptu'tage  of  less  than  a 
mile  across  from  the  Hillsborough  near  its  head  to  Savage  Harbor,  on 
the  north  coast  of  Prince  Edward  Island.  York  River,  the  smallest  of 
the  three,  is  crossed  by  Poi)lar  Island  bridge,  2^  miles  from  its  month. 
Elliot  River  may  be  ascended  4  or  5  miles  by  large  vessels  and  9  or  10 
miles  by  small  craft  and  boats.  The  shores  of  all  three  rivers  are 
settled,  and  the  counti-y  generally  fertile. 

Charlottetown,  the  <;apital  of  Prince  Edward  Island,  is  advanta- 
geously situated  on  the  north  bank  of  Hillsborough  River,  a  short  dis- 
tance within  the  entrance,  and  at  the  point  where  the  deepest  water 
approaches  nearest  to  the  shore,  the  wharves,  however,  still  requiring 
to  be  240  yards  long  to  reach  the  edge  of  the  channel.  The  city  is  well 
laid  out,  with  spacious  squares  and  wide  streets  at  right  angles  to  each 
other,  and  contains  several  fine  buildings. 

The  provincial  building  occupies  the  center  of  the  public  S(iuare,aud 
is  flanked  on  either  side  by  the  law  courts  and  post-oifice,  both  sub- 
stantial brick  structures.    The  market  house,  a  large  wooden  building, 
with  a  belfry  at  the  west  end.  is  west  of  the  post-office,  while  St.  Paul's 
church,  a  wooden  building  with  a  spire,  occupies  the  east  end  of  the 
square.    The  Presbyterian  church,  a  handsome  stone  building,  is  at  the 
NW.  end  of  the  toN.n;  and  a  convent,  built  of  brick, with  a  small  belfry 
at  the  top,  is  conspicuous  from  the  harbor.    The  Romau  Catholic  ca  the- 
dral,  a  wooden  building  with  a  large  guilt  cross  at  the  top  of  the  spire, 
and  bishop's  palace,  of  stone,  near  it,  also  show  prominently.    West  of 
the  town  stands  Government  house.    The  lunatic  asylum,  a  fine  build- 
ing of  stone,  with  a  high  tower,  stands  just  north  of  Falcon  Point. 
The  railway  station  is  at  the  east  end  of  the  town,  and  may  be  known 
by  the  wharf  in  connection  with  it,  on  Avhich  stand  large  chocolate- 
colored  warehouses.     St.  Dunstou  college  stands  on  a  hill  150  feet 
high,  1^  miles  to  the  northward  of  the  town. 
The  United  States  is  represented  by  a  consul  and  vice-consul. 
Population.— In  1S91  there  were  11,374  inhabitants. 
Telegraph.— Charlottetown  is  in  telegraphic  communication  witli 
the  principal  towns  and  ports  in  Prince  Edward  Island,  also  with 
Canada  and  the  United  States. 


^-m^itr^-tii^m'-^rri}-- 


r. 

essol.'!.  Tn  sail- 
liwestward,  tlio 
as  tlie  oye  can 
(1.  Tlie  t'oiitlu- 
au  Spit  iiiul  the 
ere  is  excellent 
iig  for  sen,  the 
ere  the  channel 

Isborou{>h  is  the 
or  8  miles,  and 
here  is  abridge 
e  of  less  than  a 
'age  Harbor,  on 
,  the  smallest  of 
from  its  mouth. 
isels  and  9  or  10 
liree  rivers  are 

nd,  is  advanta- 
A^^er,  a  short  dis- 
e  deepest  water 
r,  still  requiring 
The  city  is  well 
it  angles  to  each 

iblic  S(iuare,  and 
oiiice,  both  sub- 
TOoden  building, 
,  while  St.  Paul's 

east  end  of  the 
uilding,  is  at  the 
til  a  small  belfry 
1  Catholic  cothe- 
top  of  the  spire, 
aeutly.  West  of 
am,  a  fine  build- 
)f  Falcon  Point. 
[I  may  be  known 

large  chocolate- 
i   a  hill  150  feet 

ice-consul. 

munication  with 
;sland,  also  with 


CHARLOTTETOWN.  i^y 

Summerside  on  the  s.m«-!.«-„.f,...„         ^        ,'  '''^    iraverse  and 

England.  "*-'^*  '^^^^'"  <'o»inHmication  with 

nml  token  off  ,.l„u  J  '     '  ,,, '   '  '?•'  "'  "■''"■''"■''  ""»  »«l'"<im.,-8 

a.Kl  L.5  feet  at  lu,-,,  wat:t;;n,"„ir,!Jt      "  "'"  ''  ''■^'  '"  ""'  ™'» 

as  tanks.    TI.e.o  ia  „„  im„  f„r„,lry  '  "  ''""'"  """^ 

atTJ^ni:  t'iCrif iL-'lt::'^- ■"  ^;;'":'—  nar.o. 
ably  lMlh,ei„.e,l  by  tlio  wlial,  ,„  S  .  ,-?       ' '■''° '^ ''""'i''«- 

..ave  ..ise.,  H  feet'a,,,.  .^a  «  ar.ij.^fl  rSe»t;:'t"Z  T'  ^""^' 
extraonlinary  eases.    The  n„™  „»■  ti  t'"™  "  I«-t,  but  tlie.-!e  are 

tteir  st,eaa,s  e„uti„,^a  ,:,,"'  'air  ,,f";'    i  ""  "  """'»'  "'"""•  ?"" 
water  by  tl,e  ..here,  ™,„i   '   ,;'°  ,f 'tl,""  "°"''  f  ""■  '"s''  "'"1  low 

tow„,ana.ik,,„.si„t,ee;tt,r:':vi''ir '"  ■'  ■""■"  °«  "» 

There  is  eonsi.leraWe  diurnal  inequality  in  hei»l,t  „f  ti.e  ,i,i . .    ,  ■  , 
bowever  prineipally  aflfeets  low-water  level,   m,te  the  ,     ,        !    ' 

"i^'^  u  chrttr'^v'^- "™  "-'^^  f- ".X,iX:i;'°'° 
ie„'t:i'a;^::lx;T'°  "^  '"^■"'^■-"^'v.n,,  »„»  ,::r;e»,e, 

c"C« ''''pL",™.';"  '1"""""'  """"  f°™  Cbarlottetewn. 

banat^?;;;:;' ;-::reZ:;t:?l'!:;;:;:^f„rr' '''^";^ 

Dix,c«o«  from  the  E,stw.rd,_Ves»els  bennd  to  Charlottetown 


■rHiWiillltBMWaiMillllilllllllliiMiiM,;. 


p 

I 


118  PKINCE  EDWAED  ISLAND— BOOTH  COAST. 

buoy  on  tbe  wosterB  «''''■•■"«  ""^'^o'wN .  5o  K.  mag.)  m  thick 
tl,e  coarse  acmsB  «'r*'''y  ™'' *;  ^„„ai  "  ou  tto  »o«tben,  edge  of 
weather,  the  object  beu.g  to  f "»  =»"°*™«^°"^  ^  t„  tue  northeast- 
the  ba„k  o«  St.  l-«'«7„l^l™^r  '^..f^^nufrFLroy  Bock,  where 

ri:err;:::i:i;ro«'«;otoor..a,,d^ 

''trre7ayt,ac,.,r.ea.^^^^^^^^^ 

p,a„eca„.,otbe-n,:u,d    ™ 

steer  ^.3' W.  (>..itl    l..  i"*g.)>    ,.,„",,,,.  gi,„,i|».'    If  the  spire 

bei„s  set  to  the  "-'"^V^hTt  ^1^     -^for  clearing  Prim 
„t  the  Scotch  church  (which  13  Hie  '«»""  «  ,^,.i       jt 

Keef )  can  he  made  ont  before  arrm  g  u^MUm^      >•        ^^^ 

i„  ,i„ewi.h  ''•'''';'?''°''"^J':'"',^:^ttal  rout  are  touching,  and 

->"  »■•  "■"  7'" 'oT,"!'  i;;;;^,!",;:;;')  witti  e  «ood  tide,  or  n.  270  e. 

steer  now  ^.  ^>^  l'^-  (^^-  -^»    ^^-  "'''fe  de  of  Government  lumse 

(N.  500  E.  mag.)  with  the  e^>b'  vmtil     e  we^t  s  de  of  C  o      ^^^  ^^^ 

and  Battery  Point  -"-J';^,^"  ^^^  '^ng  We  not  to  open  out  any 
.,on  alter  he  «^^ 

n,ore  than  J'^J^,'  .  .tld  b«.,y,  which  having  passed,  continue  running 
eastward  ot  ^lie  bpitheac  ou  y,  ,  lighthouses  (day  bea- 

on  the  same  leadu.,-  mark  und  Bngh^^on  Be  ^        ^^^^^  ^.^^  ^^^^ 

cons)  are  in  line  bearnig  N.  2.P  ^^  .  (  "^^^  "'^^^^^^  Blockhouse  Point 
west  of  the  buoy  o.»  liattery  l'""!\«^«  ' ^"^^  ^;:o  k  (S.  11°  W.  mag.), 
comes  nearly  on  with  A^choru^^^^^^^^^ 

^:SieI  S^iC^ACtrSc  ^ylum  is  .iust  open  eastward  of ^^ 

Zof  the  railway  pier  at  ^'-l^J^:;:;;^;;^^  o/^^  nSdle  i^und 
,„ag.);  thisniarklcads  southwanUuumstNw  do  ^,^^,^.^„„,,„t 

r^-3:rr^rt35.^g.^i)™~ 
ii::rter<^ron'^Mf:-iir^s::^e^^^^^^^ 

+,. „  +-^„  leftdinir  liKhtB  on  Hoszard  Point  m 

.  The  best  markB  for  a  stranger  "^  *^; /^/j/^j^^^  B^rfgtton  Beach  are  in  line 
line  N.  20O  E.  (N.  43^  E.  mag.).  ""*"  *J.\  .73,l"°the  latter  line.  The  Haszard 
N.  230  w.  (north  ,nag.),  tak.ng  c^J*  "«;^^  "  J"  The  ««-«-«''•*  ^«»*'*  "  "^'"'^^ 
lightb  in  line  lead  rather  close  to  litzn.j   ivoiK. 

hidden  by  trees. 


CHAKLOTTETOWN DIRECTIONS. 


119 


,an  Keef  by 
ag  tlio  ligUt 
o  W.  mag.), 
lioms  water; 

ings. 

being  in  "ot 
8t  of  the  red 
)ue  mile,  and 
ag.)  in  thick 
hern  edge  of 
le  uortlieast- 
Bock,  wliere 
ere  tlie  vessel 

shown  on  tbe 
bovc  directed, 
ings,  to  avoid 
If  tlie  spire 
clearing  Prim 
buoy,  bring  it 
)  E.  mag.),  and 
toucbing,  and 
sll  buoy  will  be 

ae,orK27oK. 
^ernment  bonse 
js.  CP  E.  mag.), 
)  open  out  any 
will  lead  to  tbe 
nitiniie  running 
lousea  (day  bea- 
\  mark  will  lead 
lockbouse  Point 
■i.lloW.mag.), 
)>  at  nearly  200 
eiistward  of  tbe 
;7o  E.  (N.  60°  E. 
Middle  (1  round 
eep  Government 
3  E.)  unr.il  either 
'rioithmag.)or 
^df^o  of  the  trees 

-u  Hiiszaid  Point  in 

m  Beach  are  in  line 

line.    The  Haszard 

ior'»  house  is  nearly 


at  Brighton  bearing  N.  23°  W.  (north  mag.) ;  either  of  these  murks 
should  then  be  kei)t  on  till  the  belii-y  of  St.  Dunstan  college  ia  in  line 
with  the  flagstafif  at  Government  house,  which  leads  west  of  the  buoy 
on  Battery  Point  Shoal,  when  proceed  as  before.  These  marks  lead 
through  a  slightly  better  part  of  the  channel  than  the  former;  but  the 
houses  on  May  Point  are  not  easy  of  recognition  by  a  stranger. 

In  a  small  vessel  the  turret  of  the  Bomau  Catholic  college  can  not 
be  seen  more  than  400  yards  to  the  northward  of  the  buoy  off  Battery 
Point  on  account  of  the  trees. 

Caution. — In  entering  Charlottetown,  care  must  be  taken  not  to  con- 
fuse a  conspicuous  building  to  the  westward  of  Government  house 
either  for  Government  house  itself  or  the  Whitehouse  on  May  Point. 

From  the  Westward. — Approaching  from  the  westward  with  a  fair 
wind,  bring  Governor  Island  and  Pownal  Point  to  touch  bearing  N.  58° 
E.  (N.  81°  E.  mag.),  and  run  for  them  until  the  thin  spire  of  the  Scotch 
church  comes  in  sight,  and  in  line  with  Blockhouse  Point,  bearing  N.  '.i° 
W.  (N.  20  E.  mag.),  when  steer  N.  33°  E.  (N.  56°  E.  mag.)  or  N.27o  E. 
(N.  50°  E.  mag.),  according  a^  it  may  be  flood  or  ebb  tide,  until  Gov-, 
emment  house  ia  just  open  west  of  Sea  Trout  Point,  bearing  N.  17°  W. 
(N.  0°  E.  mag.),  and  then  proceed  as  before  directed. 

If  the  leading  marks  can  not  be  made  out,  follow  the  soutlieni  and 
eastern  edge  of  the  St.  Peters  Shoals  in  5  fathoms  up  to  the  Spithead 
buoy,  and  then  proceed  as  before  directed. 

With  Beating  Winds  little  difficulty  will  be  experieiured,  if  atten- 
tion be  i)aid  to  the  soundings  oa  the  chart  and  to  wliat  has  been  said 
of  the  Prim  Beef  and  the  Governor  Shoals.  On  approaching  the  narrow 
part  of  the  channel,  the  buoy,  or  the  leading  marks,  will  point  out  the 
position  of  the  Fitzroy  Bock,  the  vessel  making  short  boards  off" and  on 
.the  edge  of  the  St.  Peters  Shoals,  until  more  than  a  mile  within  it: 
after  whicli  (and  in  addition  to  the  lead),  the  west  side  of  Government 
house  and  Battery  Point  in  one  will  show  when  to  tack  in  the  board  to 
the  westward,  until  well  within  the  Spithead  buoy,  and  Battery  and 
Sea  Trout  Points  in  one  will  do  the  same  on  the  east  side  of  tlie  chan- 
nel until  the  vessel  arrives  close  otV  the  entrance  of  the  harbor.  It  has 
been  already  remarked  that  more  buoys  would  be  re<iuired  before  a 
vessel  of  large  draft  could  safely  beat  in  and  out  through  the  entrance, 
and  even  in  smaller  vessels  it  is  necessary  to  be  well  acquainted  with 
the  place,  and  to  be  constantly  on  the  guard  against,  the  flawing  and 
unsteady  wind  wliich  so  commonly  prevails  there. 

At  Night  the  buoys  would  require  to  be  seen  for  the  salety  of  large 
saiHiig  vessels. 

Keep  the  white  light  on  Blockhouse  Point  on  a  N.  (»°  W.  (X.  17°  E. 
mag.)  bearing  when  approaching  from  seaward  until  Haszard  lights 
are  in  line  N.  20°  E.  (N.  43°  E.  mag.);  the  lights  kept  so,  lead  to  tlie 
bell  buoy,  marking  the  Fitzroy  Bock,  jiass  to  the  westward  of  the  buoy, 
and  when  Brighton  Beach  lights  come  in  line  bearing  N.  23°  W.  (north 


I 


120 


PKINC  E    EDWARD   ISLAND — SOUTH   COAST. 


iDag.).  stt'fi'-  'lo'"  tli«'»  ""^>^  '*^'''''«*  Causeau  Point,  wlien  the  course 
slM.nld  be  altered  for  tbc  anchorage,  the  course  being  .judged  by  the 

town  liffhts.  1  X     rti 

Wreck  —The  wreck  of  two  steamers  sunk  in  the  channel  to  l^liar- 
h.ttft.)wn,".'ast  of  Alchorn  Point,  form  a  danger  to  navigation;  their 
position  is  marked  by  a  barrel  buoy,  which  may  be  passed  to  the  west- 

''  Anchorage.-The  best  anc^horage  ground  will  be  found  off  the  Ferry 
Pi,.r  on  tlH'  town  side,  and  in  the  tall  of  tl.e  year  it  is  advisable  to  moor 

N  \<:.  and  SW.  *  ,    ^  „.,,  . 

Tides.— It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  the  head  of  llillsbor- 

ou-li  Uiver  at  llh. ;  springs  rise  10  feet,  neaps  8i  feet. 

Squaw  Bay— The  eastern  part  of  Hillsborough  Bay  being  out  of 

the  principal  line  of  navigation,  is  bnt  little  frequented  by  shipping. 

( Ml  this  account,  and  also  because  it  abounds  with  dangers,  so  that  no 

directions  would  avail,  the  services  of  competent  pilots  there  would  be 

iiidispensable.  • 

Anchorage— Northeast  of  Governor  Island,  under  shelter  of  the 
slioal  at  its  east  point,  and  off  the  mouth  of  the  shallow  Squaw  Bay, 
tlieie  is  good  anchorage  for  small  vessels  in  from  9  to  12  feet  with  mud 

bottom.  ,    .         .    ,, 

Powiial  (Pownell^  Bay  require,  but  a  brief  notice,  being  shallow 
iuul  oi.en  ...  westerly  winds;  it  affords  shelter  to  small  craft  and  boats 
near  its  liead,  which  dries  extensively  at  low  water, 

fallows  Point,  sei.aratiiig  Pownal  and  Orwell  Bays,  has  a  long  reef 
oi  sandstone  and  extensive  shoals  off  it,  on  which  are  scattered  rocks 
covered  with  only  a  few  feet  of  water.  These  shoals  extend  m  the 
direction  of  Governor  Island  2  miles,  and  also  a  long  mile  toward  I  rim 
I'oint.  There  is,  moreover,  a  detached  shoal,  with  13  feet  least  water, 
be-iriii"-  S  73'^  W.  (N.  84°  W.  mag.)  2  miles  from  Gallows  Point. 

Orw'ell  Bay,  leading  to  Orwell,  Vernon,  and  Seal  Rivers,  is  2  miles 
wide  at  its  entrance,  between  Gallows  and  Buchanan  Points;  the  latter, 
on  the  southern  shore,  being  5  miles  within  or  to  tl.e  eastward  of  Prim 
Point.    In  proceeding  in  from  Prim  Island  toward  Orwell,  the  shallow 
water  extends  to  greater  distances  from  the  shore,  until  at  last  it 
stretches  nearly  halfway  across  the  mouth  of  Orwell  Bay.    Its  edge 
in  3  fathoms  is  there  U  miles  out  from  the  cliffs  and  has  a  rock  upon 
it  with  0  feet  least  water,  which  bears  N.  79°  W.  (N.  50"  W.  mag.)  a 
hmg  mile  from  Buchanan  Point,  and  south  (S.  23o  W.  mag.)  IJ  miles 
from  Gallows  Point.    Between  the  shoals  .Uist  mentioned  and  those 
which  stretch  over  to  the  southward  from  Gallows  Point,  the  channel 
is  SOO  yards  wide  and  carries  nearly  5  fathoms  water,  becoming  shal- 
lower and  narrower  within  the  bay  until  off  Mclnnis  Point  (U  miles  in 
from  the  entrance  on  the  northern  shore)  it  suddenly  contracts  to  less 
tlian  200  yards  in  breadth,  and  decreases  in  depth  to  14  or  15  feet  at 
low  water*  in  spring  tides.    This  is  the  bar  which  would  require  to  be 


n  the  course 
(Igt'd  by  the 

mel  to  Ohar- 
gatioii;  their 
1  to  the  west- 

otr  the  Ferry 
isable  to  moor 

il  of  riillsbor- 

beiug  ont  of 

by  shipping. 

srs,  so  that  no 

bere  wouUl  be 

shelter  of  the 
'  S(iiiaw  Bay, 
feet  witli  mud 

being  shallow 
raft  and  boats 

has  a  long  veef 
cattered  rocks 
extend  in  the 
e  towiird  Prim 
let  least  water, 
s  Point. 
vers,  is  2  miles 
nts;  tlie  latter, 
itward  of  Prim 
till,  the  shallow 
lutil  at  last  it 
Hay.    Its  edge 
las  a  rock  upon 
5G"  W.  mag.)  a 
,  mag.)  IJ  miles 
jned  and  those 
lit,  the  channel 
becoming  shal- 
)int  (li  miles  in 
iontracta  to  less 
14  or  15  feet  at 
Id  require  to  be 


Esa-: 


ORWKLl,   BAY — CRAPAUD    ROAD. 


121 


biioyed,  as  would  a]s„  the  channol,  which  becomes  only  n  little  wider 
within  the  deptli  at  the  same  time  increasing  t<,  7  or  8  lathoms  between 
steep  shoals  on  either  side. 

Just  within  China  Point  (on  the  northern  shore  and  2  miles  within 
the  bar)  ,s  the  confluence  of  the  OiM-ell  and  Vernon  liivers,  and  there 
vessels  may  lie  landl.,cke<l,  thj  channel  being  170  yards  wide  and 
carrying  5  fathoms  wifr  between  mud  Hats  dry  at  low  water.  N'essels 
can  ascend  more  than  a  mile  np  the  Orwell  and  \'ernon  L'ivers,  and  new 
vessels  are  brought  down  the  latter  with  the  tide  from  a  much  greater 

Istnloe  nf  n  .  r'^'n^  "'^^t''"^*-'^  -«*!'  ^y^ter  beds  at  the 
dLstanceof  It  miles  trom  China  Point,  and  their  channels  higher  up 
become  very  shallow  and  narrow,  the  Orwell  being  „ni(o  dry  at  low 
^ater,  as  is  also  Seal  Kiver,  which  enters  the  Vernon  from  the  north- 

Light-At  Orwell  a  fixed  red  light,  visible  8  miles,  is  shown  fn.m  a 
square,  white  lighLnouse.  22  feet  high,  on  Brush  Wharf.  The  lij-ht  is 
28  feet  above  high- water  mark. 

(II.  <).  Chart  No.  1066.) 
Coast-From  St  Peters  Island  to  Marie  Head,  a  distance  of  9  miles 
to  the  westward,  the  coast  is  straight  and  unbroken,  and  may  be 

delZl  n  '"'.'"''^'^^'r  "^'"'"•^  ''^''''  ^'««-'«-  '■>'  "-"1  that  that 
depth  IS  o<-casionally  with.ii  4()(»  yards  of  shallow  water,  extending  in 
8o:iie  places  H  mile  from  the  shore 

Marie  ^ead  has  a  reef  running  out  from  it  nearly  a  mile,  which 
81  uuld  no  be  approached  nearer  than  the  depth  of  .-,  fithonus.  Sal  lo 
Cm  e  west  of  Marie  Head,  is  nearly  dry  at  low  wafer,  ami  crossed  by 
a  bridge  one  mile  liom  its  entrance. 

Inman  Rock  with  4  feet  least  water,  lies  near  the  outer  point  ..f  this 
ree  ,  south  H  mile  from  Brockelby  Head,  and  has  from  J3  to  1!)  ice t  of 
water  around  it.  Large  vessels  should  not  approach  it  nearer  than  the 
low-water  dei)th  of  4A  lathoms. 

Koad  and  Brockelby  Piver  are  situated.    It  has  clay  clilfs,  1.5  feet  high, 
based  npon  samlstone,  which  runs  <nit  a  mile  to  the  southward,  formb.g 

nig  Lrapaud  from  the  eastward. 

Crapaud  Road  is  a  small  but  secure  anchorage  off  the  mouth  of 

th?i.t!i  ""  ?r'''  •'^'"^^^^r*^"  "'«  ^'-^^^^rn  p.ut  of  Tryon  Shoals  and 
tht  land.  Ihe  space  in  which  vessels  may  ride  in  from  12  to  15  feet  it 
low  water  is  about  i  mile  long  and  400  yards  wide;  but  the  anchora-e 
for  simUl  craft  in  from  7  to  0  feet  is  more  extensiv;  continuing  ne  U- 
a  mile  farther  to  the  westward  in  a  narrow  channel  .v  cove  in  the  sands 

point  ot  Tryon  Shoals  and  the  shallow  water  off  the  shore  to  the  east- 
ward  is  only  180  yards  wide,  and  carries  0  feet  at  h.w-watei  spWng 


.^' 


'I 


•1 


122  PR.NCE   EDWARD  I8UA»D-«0«TH   COAST. 

Brockelby  River  is  all  cl.y  ..t  io«  ^  ^^^^^^^  ^^  ^^^ 

winding  channel  through  nmd  rtats,  J^^^  ^^^.^  ,„  the  height  of  250 

bridge,  n  miles  ^-^  ^^;^ ^'^  .^^^  neighboring  country  i« 

feet  from  the  eastern  ba.ik  ot  this  rner 

Half  a  imle  N.  -'.P  ^  •  <"°""'         1,).^  „„ter  from  a  »indo«  .«  a 

the  soatl,  e.W...e  of  tl,e  bluH,  a„.  «\'*'"»  »,;^f„„^^  „°er  a  .mall 

mast  30  feet  above  l.i«l.  water,  aoil  visible  about 

arc  ill  tbe  .liveetiou  of  ''■»  '"''''"^  ''J^^- ,,  ^^  50  feet  above  MrU  water 

and  painted  white  '''* 'l'V,^°;,";,- e,hibit..d  from  a  iwst  on  Palmers 

An  Aaa«»»4>'-'\^:f 'j;:rd,  fon,  tbe  outer  «xe,l  w.,i.» 
ftharf,  aoutU  (S.  W'  w.  ma„.)  -      .  high  water,  and 

light  which  leads  over  the  bar.    "  '!  1"  '^ J.  ,„hite)  leading  light 
vrsible  2  miles.    This  light, ...  '■"''""'*"  J' °°X  (N.  23o  E.  mng.), 

fr„°ir?i,f  "5:rl"e  of'r tl.er.v  .0  the  to,,  of  the  basement  window 
by  the  full  width  of  the  tower  .^  ^^  ,,^4^^ 

;:r:^u^::::^-^S^iit:rtrt.aistri^ 

leading  lights  in  line,  bearing  N.  f  Jll^lll'l^^,^^ l^  the  leading 
buoy,  similarly  painted,  is  ^^'^^Zt^thnoyl  small  cask  buoy 
lights  in  line,  distant  i  mile  from  the  tirsl  Duoy. 
Silted  black  and  xvhite,  in  vertical  stripes,  lies  N  76   W.  (. 
mag.)  1  mile  from  the  northern  of  the  above  buoys. 


iii^^^^m'AAi 


CRAPAUD  HARBOR — DIRECTIONS. 


123 


b  ill  it,  and 
J,  wbicU  has 
close  to  the 

inhabitants, 
very  narrow, 
iscend  to  the 
heigbtof250 
II  g  country  is 

ige,  liend  of 
i  high  (with  A 
ion  of  41  feet, 

louse,  a  fixed 
a  window  in  a 
on.    The  light 

uft"  lifjht,  i8  on 
d  light  from  a 
BS  over  a  Hmall 

,vo  high  water, 
the  direitioii  of 
lag.)  from  Paul 
irer  27  feet  high, 

,0Bt  on  PaUuers 
Iter  fixed  white 
high  water,  and 
te)  leading  light 
f.  23°  K.  niag-)^ 
I  road. 

amond,  reaching 
ivsement  window 

own  is  a  slatted 
•ainted  white,  the 
the  house.    This 

uds. 

n  vertical  stripes, 

ilso  witli  Crapaud 

lag.).     A  smaller 

:k  of  the  leading 

small  cask  buoy 

6o  Wi  (N.  53°  W. 


DlrectionB. — To  enter  Cra])aud  Harbor,  vessels  should  bring  the 
two  old  ligiit.T  (which  will  be  known  hereafter  as  "Leards  range," 
and  are  both  fixed  white)  into  alignment,  and  keep  them  in  one  on  a 
N.  23°  W.  (north  mag.)  course  until  the  lights  of  Wriglits  range  are 
in  alignment  when  they  shouhl  follow  this  range  N.  (m°  W.  ( N.  42°  W. 
mag.)  until  the  red  light  on  Palmers  wharf  is  in  alignment  with  the 
front  light  on  Leards  range.  Tliese  two  in  one  will  lead  in  from  the 
blrck  buoy,  at  the  entrance  to  the  dredged  cut,  through  the  cut  to  the 
wharves,  but  strangers  entering  at  night  are  advised  to  anchor  iu  the 
road  at  this  last  described  turning  point  near  the  blai^k  buoy,  as  they 
will  be  in  good  anchorage  inside  the  shelter  of  Tryon  Bhoals,  while  it 
is  not  safe  to  attempt  the  dredged  cut  at  night. 

No  sea  of  consequence  ever  comes  into  this  anchorage,  the  sands 
outside  being  covered  only  to  a  depth  of  a  few  feet  at  high  water,  and 
the  shallow  water  to  the  eastward,  off  Inman.  Point  and  Brockelby 
Head,  overlapping  the  entrance. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Crapaud  Boad  at  lOh.; 
springs  rise  8  feet,  neaps  6  feet;  there  is,  therefore,  a  depth  of  from  15 
to  17  feet  at  high  water  in  the  entrance  or  on  the  bar  of  the  road.  Tlie 
tidal  streams  are  weak  and  irregular;  in  general,  their  rates  do  not 
exceed  J  a  knot  at  the  anchorage,  but  they  K(unetimes  amount  to  1^ 
knots  for  a  short  time  along  the  edge  of  the  shoals  and  in  the  entrance. 

Tryon  Shoals,  of  sand  upon  sandstone,  dry  out  1^  miles  off  shore 
between  the  Brockelby  and  Tryon  Rivers,  and  their  8 W.  extreme,  in  3 
fathoms,  is  south  2^  miles  from  Tryon  Head.  At  ^  mile  NNE.  from  the 
SW.  point  of  the  shoal  there  are  only  2  feet  water  over  rocky  bottom, 
and  at  twice  tliat  distance  the  sands  are  dry  at  low  water.  Tiie  SW. 
point  is  steeper  than  any  other  part  of  these  shoals,  having  4^  fathoms 
close-to;  but  there  is,  nevertheless,  sufficient  warning  by  the  lead,  since 
the  depth  of  5  fathoms  is  nowhere  less  distant  than  ft  mile  from  their 
edge. 

There  is,  moreover,  an  excellent  leading  mark,  namely.  Cape  Traverse 
and  Carleton  Head,  in  line,  bearing  N.  49°  W.  (N.  2G°  W.  mag.),  which 
clears  the  SW.  point  of  the  shoals  iu  5  fathoms,  and  at  a  distance  of  a 
long  ^  mile. 

Caution. — Farther  eastward,  these  shoals  may  be  safely  apiiroached 
to  any  convenient  deptli  by  the  lead,  which  should  never  be  neglected 
when  in  their  vicinity,  for  the  tides  round  the  island  meet  off  them, 
causing  variations  iu  the  strength  and  set  of  the  streams,  which  it 
would  require  long-continued  observations  to  understand  or  account 
for.  The  stream  of  ebb  out  of  Verte  Bay  frequently  sets  over  toward 
these  shoals,  so  that  a  vessel  standing  along  the  land  with  a  scant 
southerly  wind  will  often  find  herself  dropping  to  leeward  toward  them 
much  faster  than  her  usual  amount  of  leeway  would  lead  her  to  expect. 

Buoy. — A  whistling  buoy,  painted  red,  is  moored  south  westward  of 
Tryon  Shoals,  in  a  position  with  Crapaud  outer  lighthouse  bearing 
N.  25°  E.  (N.  48°  E.  mag.),  distant  4  miles. 


124 


prin(;e  edwakd  island — soi;th  coast. 


Tryon  River,  between  Tryou  Head  and  Birch  Foiiit,  is  appi'.ached 
by  a  very  Uiirrow  channel  tiiroufili  the  western  side  of  Tryon  Shoals. 
There  is  a  foot  water  over  the  bar  of  this  channel  at  low  water  in  spring 
tides,  but  the,  dei.th  increases  t()  11  or  12  feet  for  a  short  distance 
within,  and  tlien  the  channel  becomes  still  narrower,  windinj;  through 
tlats  of  sand,  mud,  and  weeds  to  the  bridge,  a  distance  of  nearly  .?  miles, 
following  the  channel.  Small  schooners  enter  the  Tryon,  with  the 
assistance  of  the  tidi',  which  rises  from  C  to  S  feet;  and  there  are  nour- 
ishing farms  on  each  side  of  the  river. 

Cape  Traverse,  Carleton  Head,  Sea  Cow  Head.— The  points 
b«aween  these  headlands  are  formed  of  red  sandstone  and  clay  elitts, 
with  coves  between,  affording  shelter  and  landing  for  Imats,  and  also 
anchorage  for  small  i  raft  with  the  wind  off  the  land  or  in  fine  weather. 
The  shallow  water  does  not  extend  beyond  iiOO  yards  ofi"  either  of  these 
headlands,  but  m  the  bays  its  .'J-fathom  edge  is  sometimes  twice  that 
distance  from  the  shore;  and  as  the  line  of  5  fathoms  is  sometimes  quite 
close  to  it,  the  general  rule  for  vessels  at  night  should  be  not  to  approach 
nearer  than  the  depth  of  7  fathoms.  In  the  old  charts  a  shoal  with  .i 
fathoms  water  is  shown  oft'  ("arletou  Head,  but  a  diligent  search  proved 
that  it  has  no  existence. 

Between  Tryon  Head  and  Cape  Traverse  are  tlnee  coves,  namely, 
Cumberland,  Augustin,  and  Provost,  which  are  separated  by  points  of 
cliff  and  are  dry  at  low  water. 

Light.— The  liglithouse  ou  Sea  Cow  Head,  or  Salutation  Point,  a 
white  octagonal  building,  GO  feet  high,  exhibits  at  8S  feet  above  iiigh 
water  a  fixed  white  light,  which  should  be  visible  15  miles. 

Bedeque  Bay.— Prom  Sea  Cow  Head  to  Cape  Kgmont  the  course 
is  N.  71°  W.  (\.  480W.  mag.)  and  the  distance  14.^  miles.  A  bank 
of  comparatively  shoal  soundings  commences  at  tlie  latter  and  termi- 
nates at  the  former  headland,  (uirving  to  the  southward,  so  as  to  extend 
to  the  distance  of  M  miles  offshore;  its  southern  edge,  in  5  fathoms, 
forms  an  excellent  guide  for  vessels  at  all  times;  but  if  of  large  draft, 
they  should  be  careful  of  venturing  within  that  depth,  since  there  are 
only  '.i\  fathoms,  with  rocky  bottom,  in  one  part. 

Bedeque  Harbor,  in  the  bay  to  the  northward  of  Sea  Cow  Head, 
runs  in  to  the  eastward  between  Indian  Head  and  Phelan  Point;  the 
former,  the  south  point  of  entrance,  will  be  easily  distinguished,  being 
faced  by  sandstone  cliffs  25  feet  high,  and  rising  to  double  that  height 
a  short  distance  back  from  the  shore,  whilst  the  other  is  comparatively 
low  and  wooded.  The  lloman  Catholic  church  eastward  of  Pheian 
Point  is  very  conspicuous  and  forms  a  good  mark  from  the  ofBng. 
The  entrance  between  these  points  is  H  miles  wide,  but  Indian  Spit, 
which  dries  out  A  mile  from  the  hea«l,  and  the  shallow  water  off  the 
opposite  shore  leave  oidy  a  narrow  channel  into  the  harbor.  Indian 
Island  is  a  mile  within  the  entrance,  having  no  passage  southward  of 
it,  and  Island  Shoal  extending  from  it  800  yards  in  the  opposite  direc- 
tion.   The  channel  passes  northward  of  this  shoal,  and  then  turns  to 


iipin'tju'hed 
•yoii  81i(ials. 
ter  ill  spviiig 
ort  distimce 
liiifj:  tliroiijjjli 
jiiily.'?  miles, 
111,  with  tlie 
ere  me  lloiiv- 

-The  points 
(I  (.'liiy  dills, 
ats,  aiKi  also 
fliie  weatlier. 
itlier  of  these 
!8  twice  that 
aetiines  quite 
t  to  appro  ii  eh 
shoal  with  ."5 
earcli  jiroved 

Dvcs,  iianiely, 
I  by  points  of 

tion  Toint,  a 
}t  above  iiigh 
s. 

lit  the  course 
k's.  A  banl; 
ter  and  terini- 
0  as  to  extend 
in  5  fathoms, 
)f  large  drsift, 
ince  there  are 

ea  Cow  Head, 
an  Point;  the 
fuished,  being 
le  that  height 
comparatively 
ird  of  Pheian 
jin  the  oiling, 
t  Indian  Spit, 

water  oflf  the 
irbor.  Indian 
\  southward  of 
opposite  direc- 

then  tarns  to 


BBDEQUE    n\KM()R — SUMMEUSIDE.  125 

the  southward,  witliin  or  to  th,.  -    ^tward  of  tlie  island,  where  vessels 
may  lie  quite  iiiiidlockcd  in  .".  fathmns  water. 

A  dei.t  Ii  ..!•  I'O  JW't  at  low  water,  ordiimry  spring  tid.-s,  can  be  carried 
into  t!.e  j.iirbor,  and,  since  the  tides  rise  from  r,  to  7  feet,  ilieie  is  water 
enou«|,  lor  vessels  <,f  large  dratt;  but  the  channel  is  jender.Ml  so  intri- 
eat^e  by  the  island  Shoal  and  Middle  CJround,  wliicii  lies  a  little  farther 
out  on  the  opiKisito  side  of  the  channel,  that  no  directions  w.ml.l  ena- 
ble a  stranger  to  enter  this  harbor   .itl.ont  great  risk  of  ac<i(ient 

Summerside,  a  town  of  considerable  size,  is  on  the  north  side  ot 
Bcdequ.   Harbor.     Several  wharves  extend  from  the  town,  t..  one  of 
which  the  railway  n.i.s.     This  hitter  may  be  di.ti.gni.shed  by  thelic^l.t 
tower  on  a  storehouse  n.-ur  the  extreme.     A  large  hotel  hxs  been  built 
on  Indian  Jslaiid,and  communication  is  kept  with  the  town  bv  a  steam 
terry.     There  were  L',s,s;5  inhabitants  in  IS'.U. 
The  Tiiited  States  is  represented  by  a  «-oiisular  agent 
Coal  -There  are  usually  1,0(»()  tons  in  stock,  exclusive  of  the  amount 
stored  by  the  railway  dejiartment.     Vessels  of  less  than  20 feet  draft 
can  coal  alongside  th."  railway  wharf;  coal  can  be  lightered  to  larger 
vessels  m  the  harbor,  the  lighters  being  loaded  in  bulk.     The  railway 
department  has  usually  about  1 ,100  tons  in  stock. 

Lights.-The  liglit  at  Summerside  railway  wharf  is  exhibited  from 
the  root  of  a  shed  ;}0  feet  high.  It  is  a  lixed  red  and  white  light,  ;5.{  feet 
above  high  water,  and  should  be  visible  10  miles.  It  shows  red  in  line 
ot  range,  white  over  head  of  wliarf. 

A  lixed  red  light  is  exhibited  'j  mile  N.  70o  E.  (S.  87o  i:.  mag  )  from 
the  light  on  railway  wharf.    The  light  is  shown  at  an  elevation  of  (i.l 
feet,  and  should  bo  visible  8  miles.    The  tower,  50  feet  high,  is  square 
\)ainted  white,  open  framework,  with  front  face  boarded. 
The  lights  in  line  lead  up  to  the  railway  wharf. 
Indian  Spit -A  white  octagonal  lighthouse,  42  feet  high,  has  been 
built  on  Indian  Spit,  from  which  is  exhibited  at  48  feet  above  hiirh 
r'!v  "t.fL^'f  "^^'*  '^'^^"'^  '^'*"^«'  ^-i*^  a  Sveen  sector,  between  N.  mo 

ThiT-  If  f'  Zf^  '"-i  '"'*^  ^^-  ^^°  ^'  "^'^S')'  '^^^^  Miscouche  Shoals. 
The  light  should  be  visible  13  miles. 

Buoyage.— A  black  buoy  is  moored  oflthe  southern  extreme  of  Mis- 
eonche  Spit;  it  lies  with  Indian  Head  bearing  N.  03°  E.  (N.  80°  e.  mag) 
and  Sea  Cow  Head  lighthouse  S.  50°  E.  (S.  27o  E.  mag.),  distant  3/^ 
miles.    Indian  Sp.t  buoy  is  a  can  buoy,  painted  red;  Middle  Groun 
buoy  18  painted  black,  and  Island  Shoal  buoy  is  a  can  buoy,  painted 

The  north  side  of  the  channel  opposite  Island  Shoal  is  g  nerally 
marked  by  a  stake  with  a  bush  on  the  top. 

Ice.-Tbe  harbor  is  usually  frozen  over  about  December  11  and  is 
clear  of  ice  abont  April  10,  being  completely  closed  between  tho-s^  dates. 
The  first  vessel  arrives  about  April  24,  and  the  last  one  leaves  about 
December  11. 

Directions.-As  the  assistance  of  a  pilot  is  indispensable  to  enter 


■Bsa 


^H 


126  PRINCE    EDWARD    ISLAND— SOUTH   COAST. 

Hedeuuo  Harbor,  it  would  be  advisable  to  anchor  i"  t^«  ;>»y  "7?!^; 
tead     ut     lun  ii  one  is  obtained.    The  anchorage  in  the  roads  e^l 
in- feet  at  low  water,  sand  and  clay  bottom,  is  quite  sate  dnnn,  the 
".^^ermonM  I,  altho'ugh  open  to  8W.  win.ls,  the  shallowness  <,t  the 
wate    in  I  the  land  at  the  distance  of  several  n.iles  preventing  any  v  er> 
rea:y  H  a  from  conun,  in."  Should,  however,  any  extrj^chnj^^^^  c ir^ 
cun.s'lances  render  .t  expc.licnt  to  attempt  ^^'^^^'^^'^^'^''^t^^;^;^ 
best  n.ode  of  proceeding  would  be  to  run  along  the  8E.  and  cas  .  n 
edueof  the  Miscouche  Shoal,  and  in  the  low-water  ^l«lf' «\1^  '  ;^;' 
^^il  Indian  Point  light  is  reached;  leave  the  »'ft.md  buoy  to  star 
b  ard  and  when  the  light  is  abaft  the  beam,  haul  in  N   .8o  E.  (S.  79 
E  i    until  the  range  lights  are  in  one.    The  two  reu  'jf  «^P     ' 
lh,e  N   T«P  E.  (8.  870  E.  mag.)  lead  up  to  the  radway  whuit  in  not  less 
than  iVLtt  low  water.    Vessels  wishing  to  pass  and  clear  the  ml- 
^  thl"  will  have  to  leave  the  two  lights  on  the  port  bow  atter 
ftrrivinir  opposite  llolmans  wharf. 

ft  V  ssel  be  approaching  from  the  eastward  with  an  ea«teriy  -  md 
Sea  Cow  Head  may  be  safely  rounded  at  the  distance  of  500  jards, 
Gr  il^r  1  ead  nay  be  passed  at  twice  that  distance,  and  then  the  edge 
of  e  halbw  wa  er  off  Salutation  Cove  may  be  safely  followed  by  the 
M  till  I  dhu.  Head  is  approached,  where  the  shoal  becomes  very 
X!  as  Is  taso  Indian  Spil,  which,  however,  can  frequently  be  seen, 

'•^^^  :;;Z:^^;^^om  «.  westward  can  steer  t-ani  «- ^-l^ 
as  soon  as  lidian  Spit  white  light  is  opened,  and  alter  leavng  U  on 
Jhe  starboard  hand,  the  lights  on  the  railway  wharf  will  guide.  \  es- 
!els  outside  the  light,  working  in  or  out,  should  tiu.k  immediately  the 

^Jllrrnff  tl^lu  Indian  Island  the  harbor  is  divnied  n^ 
two  arms  of  which  the  northern,  Wilmot  Eiver,  has  only  2  or  3  feet 
water  in  it  and  is  obstructed  by  oyster  beds  and  crossed  by  a  bridge 
2  mile  from  the  island.  Vessels  can  ascend  the  southern  arm  1^  miles 
LCdthe'sland ;  the  channel  then  becomes  obstructed  b^^^^^^^^^ 
so  as  to  leave  only  an  intricate  channel  carrying  4  teet  a  ^^''^l. 
At  U  miles  higher  up,  on  the  s.»uth  shore,  is  Popes  wharf,  i  nule  above 
w lidiTllis  aim,  which  is  ..ailed  Dunk  Eiver,  divides  into  wo  narrow 
and  shalhnv  channels,  crossed  by  bridges  at  the  distance  of  a  mile. 

Tides -It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Greens  wharf,  on  the 
north  shore  of  Bedeque  Harbor,  at  lOh.  15m. ;  springs  .ise  7  feet,  neaps 

■'  Miscouche  Bank  dries  out  f-  li  miles  from  Miscouche  Point,  and 
exS°?f  nines  southward  to  the  depth  of  3  fathoms,  sheltering  the 
ro^stea^  in  Bedeque  Bay,  outside  Bedeque  Harbor,  from  wester  y 
;"  ds.  ih^^  northern  extremes  of  Indian  Point  and  Indian  Is  and  in 
one  bearing  1^.  05o  E.  (N.  88°  E.  mag.),  clear  the  south  point  of  the  spit 
l^^^U  feet  wlter,  but  the  lead  will  be  a  sufficient  guide  when  a  greater 
depth  18  required.  . 


fmgBmmmmmtn 


8UNBURY    COVK — KOMONT    HAY. 


127 


l)ay  or  roftd- 
lie  roaclsteiul 
te  during  tbe 
iwneas  <>t'  tlie 
ting  liny  very 
tordinary  clr- 
le  harbor,  the 
I.  and  ea»t«'rn 
)t\i  of  18  feet, 

buoy  to  star- 
ISO  E.  (S.  790 
■lights  kept  in 
urf  in  not  less 

clear  the  rail- 
>ort  bow  after 

I  easterly  wind, 
i  of  500  yards, 
1  then  the  edge 
followed  by  tbe 
1  becomes  very 
uently  be  seen, 


ard  the  harbor 
iv  leaving  it  on 
ill  guide.  Ves- 
inmediately  the 

p  is  divided  itito 
only  ii  or  3  feet 
sed  by  a  bridge 
jin  arm  1;^  "dies 
1  by  oyster  beds, 
et  at  low  water, 
arf,  i  nide  above' 
into  two  narrow 
ice  of  a  mile. 
IS  wharf,  on  the 
/ise  7  feet,  neaps 

ouche  Point,  and 
18,  sheltering  the 
)r,  from  westerly 

Indian  Island  in 
(point  of  the  spit 

e  when  a  greater 


Sunbtiry  Cove,  9  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Cape  Kginont,  is  an  exten-. 
sive  plut'e,  but  nearly  dry  at  low  water,  excepting  a  narrow  channi'l 
through  the  Hats  only  fit  for  boats  or  very  small  «-raft.  Miscoucho 
Point  is  the  eastern  point  of  this  cove;  and  Miscouclie  ciiurch  will  be 
seen  to  the  XNE.  of  it  at  the  distance  of  2  or  .3  miles  inland. 

Fifteen  Point — The  church  and  village  at  this  point  stand  near  the 
shore  i^  miles  to  the  westward  of  Sunbury  Cove,  and  can  be  seen  at  great 
distances,  either  from  the  eastward  or  westward.  The  liomaii  Catholic 
church  may  bedistinguished  by  the  body  of  the  building  and  spire  being 
white,  the  roof  light  brown;  a  small  white  nave  with  a  black  top  is  also 
attached.  A  tall  white  beacon  stands  a  little  to  the  eastward.  At  the 
extremity  of  the  point,  one  mile  to  the  eastward  of  the  (;hnrch,  there 
is  a  low  rock  above  water,  (railed  the  Little  Dutchman,  and  shaUow 
water  to  the  distance  of  a  long  mile  oft' shore;  the  depth  then  increases 
to  near  4  fathoms  for  2  miles  farther  otl',  and  then  decreases  again  to 
34  fathoms  over  sandstone  bottom  not  far  from  the  edge  of  the  b.iuk, 
the  church  bearing  from  the  shallow  part  nearly  N.  23^  W.  (north 
mag.)  3  miles. 

Cape  Egmont  is  a  remarkable  headland  with  cliff's  of  sandstone  50 
feet  high.  About  2  miles  to  the  northward  of  it  will  be  seen  the  Dutch- 
man, an  isolated  rock  30  feet  high,  and  lying  200  yards  from  the  shore. 
The  cape  itself  is  quite  bold  to  the  southward,  but  to  the  westward 
there  is  shallow  rocky  ground  <J  mile  oft'  shore,  and  which  should  not  bo 
approached  nearer  than  the  depth  of  6  fathoms. 

Light. — On  the  extremity  of  Cai)e  Egmont  is  a  square,  white  light- 
house with  dwelling  attiUihed. 

The  light  is  a  fixed  red  light,  72  feet  above  high  water,  and  should  be 
visible  10  miles. 

Egmont  Bank,  of  fine  red  sand,  and  with  4  fathoms  least  water,  is 
very  narrow  and  2A  miles  long  SE.  and  XW.  Its  northern  end  1  tears 
S.  88°  W.  (X.  GO"  W.  mag.)  5  miles  from  Cape  l-^gmont;  its  southern 
end  S.  59°  W.  (S.  82°  W.  mag.)  -1  miles  from  the  same  headland,  and 
there  are  as  mucrh  as  8  fathoms  and  a  clear  channel  between  it  and 
the  cape. 

Egmont  Bay  is  formed  between  Cape  Egmont  and  West  Point, 
wliich  is  distant  17  jniles.  It  is  8  miles  deep,  and  attords  excellent 
anchorage,  with  off"shore  winds,  in  from  4  to  7  fathoms,  over  sand  and 
clay  bottom ;  but  vessels  should  not  anchor  in  less  than  5  fathoms  any- 
where excepting  on  the  NW.  side  of  the  bay,  because  there  is  rocky 
ground,  with  only  3^  fathoms  water  olfthe  river  at  its  head,  lying. just 
within  the  5-fathom  line,  and  iic  a  distance  of  3  miles  from  the  shore, 
whilst  along  the  eastern  shore  5  lathoms  would  be  too  near  the  edge  of 
the  shoals. 

The  eastern  side  of  Egmont  Bay  should  not  be  approached  to  a  less 
depth  than  5|  fathoms  In  a  large  vessel,  for  the  shallow  water  oft'  Rock 
Point  and  the  bar  of  St.  Jacques  extends  a  mile  from  the  shore.  The 
church  of  St.  Jacques  is  conspicuously  situated  5  miles  to  the  uorth- 


iSrOSSSU 


12S  lltlNCK    KDWAUl)    ISLAND— SOUTH    COAST 

ward  or  (^ape  K«.noMt.  ImvinR  tl..  F.v.M,hor  Anulian  s..ttU..neutalonjr 

its  sawmills,  A  mih- fnn..  it   in   tluM,,.i.,.s,r.'  di.vctiun.      llisc   n.,1   i, 

.1    ,  wi.i.  .■  n-d  roof;  tin-  tow.r,  wirl.  a  „<n-H,..  attad.ed,  is  im.n.d 

;  1,;,  and  forn,s  a  very  usHul  landn.arU.     Ualdin.and  1  -vc^r,  shaH.  w 

and  running  in    t..  tlu-  Houllnvanl  al..mt  -   n.il.-s,    is   about    halfNNaj 

::    V  :    U.e  .inucl.  and  Ca...  K,n.<,nt,  a,n<l  has  san<l  hills  on  .ts  w.s 

„,  „„,..,.  point  of  cntran.e.     Kron.  thos.,  sand  hilln  a  sand  bar,  dry  at 

,ow  wat.^-,  .xtnuls  8  or  4  ndh-s  to  th.  northward  paral   -1  ;;^';;  ^;;- 
h,.  vin-^  very  narrow  clnunuds  throuKlMt,  whu-h  ar.  sa.d  to  sh   t  at  tunes 

, .    :  heavy  wes.erly  «ah..     At  the  tin.e  of  the  Adnuralty  Hurvey 
uin<.ipa    channel  was  pointed  out  by  two  sn.all  beacons  on  the 
s In.ve  about  a  n.ile  to  the  southward  of  the  ehureh.      I  he  eourse  n 
w    h  those  bea.ons  in  one,  was  8.  T.o  K.  ^S.  o:P  K.  n.a,.,,  t-'"'"^^-^ 
to  the  southward  w.thin  the  bar  into  a  harbor  for  small  -';-';;;'; 
r,  feet  in  it  at  U)W  water,  and  esteudinK  to  the  ...tranee  ol   llaldnnand 

'' fi'm  re  :vm\  l>.r.ival  Kivers,  at  the  head  ..f  the  bay,  are  (mly  uaetul 
to  boats  and  very  sundl  eratt,  having  a  depth  of  only  4  to  7  eet  a  low 
water,  and  bein,-  approaehed  by  exeeedingly  ^^'^^^  ^'t^^f^^ 
,„annels  throu.M.  thtts  of  sand,  clay,  and  oyster  beds,  wheh  aie  dr>  m 
'art  at  low  water,  and  extend  1  .\  nules  Iron,  the  sinn  e.  IM.e  tales  tiow 
about  r>  miles  up  these  rivers,  betvN een  low  a..<l  marsliy  banks. 

On  the  northeru  shore  of  the  bay,  Brae  and  Wolf  H.vers  are  sandy 
i)laces  dry  at  low  water.  „, 

Tide3.--lt  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Kgn.ont  Bay  at  3h., 

sorines  rise  4  feet,  neaps  2  feet. 

West  Point.-The  lesteru  point  of  Prince  Edward  Island  cons.sts 
ofYri  hills  VI  feet  high.  Excepting  in  the  direction  of  the  spit,  the 
shallow  water  does  not  extend  far  from  it. 

Buoy -The  whistling  buoy  formerly  olf  North   Point   has  been 

moved  to  a  i.osition  oif  West  Point.    The  buoy  is  pan.ted  red  and 

narked  WEsi  Point  Buov,  Canada,  in  white  letters     It  is  moored 

in  13  fathoms  of  water,  !|  mile  west  of  the  middle  of  the  outer  shoal 

wiUi  WerPoint  lighthouse  bearing  S.  57°  E.  (S.  34°  E.  mag.),  distant 

^\"s.^4s  uoing  south  should  leave  the  buoy  on  the  port  hand. 

T^s-It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  West  Point  at  H  ^onrs; 
sminirs  rise  4  feet,  neaps  2  feet.  ^  .   ^.        •   j„ 

'Anchorage.-There\8  good  anchorage  under  West  Pent  m  winds 
from  between  north  and  e.ist,  in  4  fathoms,  line  sandy  t>ottom. 

Light -The  lighthouse  on  West  Point  (with  a  keeper's  dwe  bug 
atS^l),  a  squaie  building,  07  feet  high,  and  pai.^ed  in  broad  hor  - 
zontal  bands  id  and  wlute,  exhibits,  at  (U)  feet  above  high  water,  a 
revolving  light,  showing  one  red  and  three  white  flashes  everyone  and 
on.^1  nninnt^s.  the  tltshes  attaining  their  greatest  brilliancy  every 
twe.  ty  tw..  and  one-half  seconds;  the  light  slu.uld  be  visible  13  mdes. 


■■mum 


WEST   POINT,  SPIT,  AND    KK.KF 


129 


tMllUlltllloll^ 

lUMiiit'S.  with 
lis  I'  Min  li  i** 
I,  is  piiiiitnl 
iver,  Hliiillow 
out    liiillVay 
s  (HI  it^  wi'Ht 
I  Imr,  <liy  »t 
to  the  short', 
shift  at  times 
iriilty  survey 
neons  oil  tho 
h«  eonrsc  in, 
turning;  short 
liooiuMs,  with 
,f  Iliihliniiiiid 

It'  only  uactnl 
o  7  feet  at  h>w 
an<l  intrifiite 
hicli  iiie  dry  in 
riie  tides  tlt>w 
[)anks. 
nn-s  are  sandy 

it  Hay  at  3h.; 

shmd  consists 
)f  the  spit,  the 

oint  has  been 
tinted  red  and 
It  is  moored 
he  outer  shoal, 
,.  mag.),  distant 

t  hand. 
Dint  at  6^  hours; 

rointin  winds 
)ottoni. 

■per's  dwelling 
1  in  broad  hori- 
e  liigb  water,  a 
!S  every  one  and 
brilliancy  every 
visible  13  miles. 


West  Spit — The  west  spit  of  sand  upon  sandstoiu',  (covered  in 
some  parts  with  only  a  few  feet  of  water,  runs  out  from  West  I'oint.'J 
miles  U)  the  N\V.  and  then  trends  NH.  within  West  Ueef,  so  that  the 
latter  overlaps  it  at  the  distance  of  A  mile.  There  is  a  '-cnldesac" 
between  the  spit  and  th«-  shore,  open  to  the  northward,  and  in  which 
thei-o  are  from  ti  to  4  fathoms  water.  The  only  way  to  avoid  getting 
into  this  opening,  or  witliin  West  Ueef,  when  running  from  the  north 
ward,  is  not  to  approaeh  the  island  nearer  than  the  low-water  depth 
of  11  fathoms. 

West  Reef  is  a  naiTow  and  rooky  ridge,  4  miles  long,  with  irregular 
soundings  from  '2^  to  'f  fathomH.  The  least  water,  iii  feet,  is  near  the 
middle  of  the  reef,  and  there  are  18  feet  near  its  southern  extreme, 
which  bears  from  West  Point  N.  74°  W.  (N.  51°  W.  mag.)  3^  miles,  and 
is  distant  2^  miles  from  the  nearest  part  of  the  shore.  Its  northern 
end  is  3^  miles  off  shore  at  the  highest  part  of  the  clitfs  between  Mc  Wil- 
liams Cove  and  Cape  Wolfe. 

There  are  no  leading  marks  for  this  reef,  and  as  there  are  13  fathoms 
in  one  part  close  to  its  outer  edge,  it  is  very  dangerous  to  ships  round- 
ing West  Point,  and  can  only  be  certainly  avoided  at  night  or  in  thick 
weather  by  following  the  edge  of  the  bank  of  soundings  off  the  main- 
land in  9  or  10  fathoms,  which  will  lead  past  it  at  the  distance  of  3 
miles  to  the  westward.  There  is  .■%  passage  within  the  reef,  between  it 
and  the  West  Spit,  but  it  is  narrow,  with  irregular  soundings  and 
strong  tides,  and  should  therefore  never  be  attempted  in  a  large  vesHcl. 

Tides. — The  strength  and  direction  of  the  tidal  streams  about  West 
Beef  are  very  irregular,  being  influenced  by  winds,  varying  also  with 
the  time  of  tide  and  probably  with  the  age  of  the  moon.  In  the  deep- 
water  channel,  passing  close  on  the  outside  of  West  Reef,  the  rate  of 
the  stream  sometimes  amounts  to  2^  miles  per  hour,  causing  a  heavy 
sea  when  running  against  the  wind. 

The  West  Coast  of  Prince  Edward  Island,  from  West  to  North 
Points  (33  miles),  is  unbroken  and  formed  of  red-clay  and  sandstone 
cliffs,  with  intervening  saidy  beaches,  attbrding  landing  for  boats  in 
fine  weather.  There  are  several  ponds  where  boats  can  be  secured', 
such  as  North  and  South  M.nimegash,  Black,  and  Nail  Ponds,  but  their 
outlets,  through  sandy  beaches,  are  all  nearly  dry  at  low  water  and  of 
no  use  to  vessels.  The  shallow  water  runs  out  to  considerable  dis- 
tances ofP  various  parts  of  this  coast,  and,  as  a  general  rule,  for  large 
ships  it  should  not  be  approached  nearer  than  the  depth  of  11  fathoms 
at  night  or  in  thick  weather. 

Off  Nail  Pond  and  Nail  Head,  6  miles  SW.  by  S.  of  North  Point, 
shallow  water  extends  out  2  miles  from  shore. 

Minimogash  Reef  is  a  ledge  of  ro(;ks,  nearly  dry  at  low  water  and 

nearly  a  mile  in  length,  parallel  to  the  shore,  from  which  its  outer  edge 

is  distant  ^  mile.     It  lies  directly  off  the  sandy  beach  and  across  the 

outlet  of  North  Minimegash  I'ond,  which  is  15  miles  from  North  Point. 

1151 9 


F 


1 1' 


'H 


i"« 


130  PRINCE    EDWARD    ISLAND WEST    COAST. 

There  are  2^  fathoms  of  water  between  the  reef  and  the  shore,  and 
vessels  have  in  one  or  two  instances  been  moored  there  during  the 
lummer  months  to  take  in  cargoes  of  lumber,  but  it  is  a  very  unsafe 

^'iTghts  -Two  leading  lights  are  exhibited  at  Minimegash.  When  in 
line,  they  lead  to  the  outer  end  of  the  north  breakwater 

The  oLr  light  is  shown  from  a  mast  25  feet  high  with  a  white  shed 
at  its  base,  situated  on  a  sand  hill  about  500  feet  southward  o^  the 
breakwater.  The  light  is  fixed,  showing  red  seaward  between  the 
bearinffs  of  N.  20o  E.  (N.  43°  B.  mag.)  through  east  to  S.  250  E.  (».  Z 
E  mag  covering  the  whole  of  Minimegash  Keef,  and  white  from  S. 
250  E.  (S.  2o  K 1^.)  to  S.  3lo  W.  (S.  54°  W.  mag.).  It  is  30  feet  above 
the  sea,  and  should  be  visible  5  miles.  .^^  „„t 

The  inner  light  is  a  fixed  white  light  45  feet  above  high-water  mark 
and  visible  8  miles  through  a  small  arc  on  each  side  of  the  direction  of 
Zt  Hghts  in  line.  It  is  shown  from  a  mast  35  feet  high  with  a  white 
shed  at  its  base,  situated  on  Rix  Point  8. 19°  E.  (S.  4°  W.  mag.)  from 
the  outer  light,  distant  about  one  mile.  u^qvqn,«. 

Tides.-It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Mmiraegash  at  3h.  30m., 

snrinffs  rise  5  feet,  neaps  3  fe^jt.  ,  ^v.       .i 

^ection8.-Vessels  approaching  Minimegash  from  the  southward 
should  stand  along  the  coast  within  the  red  sector  of  the  outer  light, 
and  having  passed  through  it,  should  bring  the  leading  lights  in  line, 
which  kept  so,  lead  to  the  outer  end  of  the  north  breakwater. 

Aiichorage.-With  oiishore  winds,  there  is  good  anchorage  for  small 
vessels,  in  3  fathoms  water,  neap  a  spar  buoy  about  J  mile  NW.  from 
the  north  breakwater. 

North  Point  is  of  low  red  cliffs.    It  has  a  reef  extending  from  it  te 
thf  northward  and  eastward  1*  miles  to  thedepth  of  3  fathoms;  more- 
over,  rooky  and  irregular  soundings  from  6  to  7  fathoms  continue  for 
sive  al  mUes  farther  out  to  the  NE.,  causing  at  times  a  dangerous 
breaking  sea,  and  terminating  in  a  small  patch  of  ^o^ks  on  which  there 
is  little  more  than  4  fathoms  in  low  spring  tides,  and  which  bears  from 
North  roint  N.  21°  B.  (N.  44°  E.  mag.)  4*  miles.    Fishermen  report  the 
existence  of  a  shoal  of  3^  fathoms,  which  breaks  in  bad  weather  about 
TmUes  NxXE.,  which  is  most  probably  the  4-fathom  patch     Vessels 
should  therefore  always  give  this  reef  a  wide  berth  in  thick  weather 
or  at  night,  and  this  the  soundings  on  the  chart  will  enable  them  to  do, 
it  is  therefore  only  necessary  to  add  that  it  is  most  steep  on  the  west 
side,  where  there  are  10  fathoms  at  the  distance  of  *  mi  e.    The  inner 
Trtof  the  reef  dries  out  ^  mile  from  the  point,  affording  shelter  to 
fishing  schooners  which  shift  from  side  to  side  as  the  wind  changes 

Lieht  -The  lighthouse,  on  the  extreme  of  North  Point,  is  octagonal, 
60  fSt  high,  painted  white,  and  exhibits  at  80  feet  above  high  water  a 
revolving  white  light  every  minute;  the  light  should  be  visible  14 
miles. 


•  'wm^ 


;he  shore,  and 

sre  during  the 

a  very  unsafe 

ash.    When  in 

h  a  white  shed 
thward  of  the 
a  between  the 
S.  25°  E.  (S.  2° 
white  from  S. 
is  30  feet  above 

igh-water  mark 

the  direction  of 

»h  with  a  white 

W.  mag.)  from 

ash  at  3h.  30m.; 

the  southward 
the  outer  light, 
ig  lights  in  line, 
:water. 
[lorage  for  small 

mile  NW.  from 

luding  from  it  to 
fathoms;  more- 
)ms  continue  for 
les  a  dangerous 
s  on  which  there 
Fhich  bears  from 
srmen  report  the 
,d  weather  about 
patch.    Vessels 
n  thick  weather, 
lable  them  to  do; 
steep  on  the  west 
mile.    The  inner 
)rding  shelter  to 
wind  changes. 
)int,  is  octagonal, 
(ove  high  water  a 
lid  be  visible  14 


MURRAY    HARBOR. 
BAST  COAST   OF  PRINCE  EDWARD  ISLAND. 


131 


Bear  Cape  and  Reef— Pishermans  Bank.    (See  page  108.) 

^h^n^^."^"'.^"*'  *"  exceedingly  dangerous  bar  of  sand,  over 
which  10  feet  can  be  carried  at  low  water  in  ordinary  spring  tides- 
but  strong  easterly  winds  send  in  so  heavy  a  sea  as  to  render  it  at 
tunes  impassable,  a  line  of  breakers  extending  then  completely  across 
iear^72f m'SIef  ""^^  ^^^"^  northward  to  Cody  Point,  a  distance  of 

•?w7^'":^°  ^^^  ^"*^''  ®*^^®  '^^' "'®  ^^"^  »  ^"oy  is  moored  in  3  fathoms. 
With  the  xvhite  beacon  on  Old  Store  Point  (the  sandy  south  point  of 
entrance)  in  line  with  the  black  bail  on  the  white  gable  of  the  Transit 
barn  beanng  S  54°  w.  (S.  77°  W.  mag.).  The  barn  stands  on  the 
southern  shore  of  the  harbor  f  mile  within  the  entrance,  and  when  in 
ime  with  the  beacon  leads  in  through  the  deepest  water  (1860).  There 
18,  moreover,  an  inner  buoy  in  the  fairway  i  mile  within  the  outer  one 
and  which  IS  intended  to  enable  vessels  to  run  in,  when  hazy  weather 
prevents  the  leading  mark  from  being  seen. 

Lights.-The  front  light,  on  the  edge  of  the  sand  bar,  south  side  of 
Murray  Harbor,  is  a  fixed  white  light,  exhibited  at  an  elevation  of  33 
feet  visible  8  miles.  The  lighthouses  are  scjuare  white  buildings,  the 
front  one  30  feet  and  the  back  one  40  feet  high. 

The  rear  light,  exhibited  at  57  feet  above  high  water,  is  also  fixed 

Tft   ^r^^w  ^?i^.?"'''    ^^"  "^'^'^'  «"«  ™^'«  *^P'^rt'  ^^^'  fro'"  each 
other  S.  540  W.  (8.  77°  W.  mag.)  and  N.  .540  E.  (N.  77°  E.  mag  ) 

Directions.-Proceeding  in  from  the  bar,  the  channel  into  Murrav 
Harbor,  between  sandy  shoals  extending  from  the  shore  on  either  side 
contracts  gradually  in  breadth  to  120  yards,  and  expands  again  to  400 
yards  withm  the  entrance.  The  depth  also  gradually  increases  after 
crossmg  the  bar  to  6  fathoms,  as  the  vessel  passes  close  to  the  steep 
sandy  beach  of  Old  Store  Point,  on  which  the  beacon  stands. 

To  run  m,  with  the  aid  of  the  chart,  look  out  for  the  outer  buov 
or,  being  m  not  less  than  5  fathoms,  bring  the  white  beacon  and  the 

«  «..  w  r  *^®  ""^'^^  ^*^''^  ""^  *^*^  'r^a»«it  barn  in  line,  bearing 
S.  640  W  (S.  770  W.  mag.),  and  keep  them  so  exactly  until  the  vessel 
arrives  about  300  yards  from  the  beacon,  when  haul  a  little  to  the 
northward,  so  as  to  pass  Old  Store  Point  at  the  distance  of  about  50 

^^By  night,  the  leading  lights  in  line,  show  the  channel  to  the  outer 

Ti5cs.-It  is  high  water,  fhll  and  change,  in  Murray  Harbor  at  9h 
6m. ;  springs  rise  Gi  feet,  neaps  3J  feet. 

Anchorage.-Anchor  within  Old  Store  Point,  or  to  the  west  of  it,  at 
any  distance  not  exceeding  J  mile,  because  farther  in  the  channel 
which  passes  to  the  southward  of  all  the  islands  becomes  very  intricate 
and  would  be  diiiicult  to  follow  without  a  pilot.    The  depth  in  the 


•  m 


*~'""^~'™*'^-1lnmi'inii 


132 


PRINCE    EDWARD    ISLAND EAST    COAST. 


it 


i  i 


I- 


anchorage  recommended  is  from  3  to  5  fathoms,  with  saud  and  clay 
bottom,  and  a  tide  of  2  knots. 

The  entrance  of  Murray  Harbor,  between  Old  Store  Point  and  the 
long  sandy  spit  which  runs  ont  S8W.  from  Cody  Point,  is  more  than 
A  mile  wide,  but  it  is  all  nearly  dry  at  low  water,  excepting  the  chan- 
nel already  described.  Within  this  entrance  the  harbor  is  of  great 
extent,  containing  Ave  wooded  islands,  and  several  rivers  or  sea  creeks 
on  either  side,  besides  the  main  inlet,  Murray  River,  which  is  much 
larger  than  the  rest,  and  navigable  6  miles  from  the  entrance,  or  nearly 
to  the  dam  which  has  been  constructed  across  it  near  its  head.  There 
are  flourishing  settlements  all  around,  the  principal  one  being  at  South 
River,  where  the  English  church,  distinguished  by  its  steeple,  will  be 
seen  on  the  southern  shore  2  miles  within  the  entrance  of  the  harbor. 

Graham  Ledge.— At  4^  miles  north  firom  Murray  Head  is  Graham 
Point,  from  which  Graham  Ledge  runs  out  one  mile  to  the  depth  of  5 
fathoms  and  9  mile  to  3  fathoms.  The  shallowest  part  of  this  ledge, 
with  6  feet  least  water,  bears  N.  45o  E.  (N.  68°  E.  mag.)  800  yards  from 
the  extremity  of  the  point.  Tliere  is  also  a  rocky  shoal  one  mile  farther 
to  the  northward,  which  runs  out  %  mile  firom  between  Terras  and 
Smith  Points,  and  foul  ground  with  from  4  to  5  fathoms  at  low  water 
extends  off  the  latter  IJ  miles.  The  soundings  are  very  irregular  off 
this  part  of  the  coast,  between  Graham  Point  and  Panmure  Head, 
varying  from  13  fathoms,  mud,  to  5J  fathoms,  rock,  until  beyond  3  miles 
from  the  shore.  _„  , 

(H.  O.  Chart  No.  1077.) 

Cardigan  Bay  is  SJ  miles  wide  between  Panmure  and  Boughton 
Islands.  It  affords  good  anchorage  in  from  6  to  10  fathoms,  mud 
bottom,  with  winds  offshore,  but  winds  from  NE.  to  south  send  in  a 

heavy  sea.  ., 

Georgetown  Harbor,  sometimes  called  Three  Rivers,  is  on  the 
western  side  of  Cardigan  Bay,  3  miles  within  Panmure  Head,  which 
is  9  miles  northward  from  Cape  Bear.  It  is  the  finest  harbor  m  the 
southern  part  of  the  gulf,  excepting  Oharlottetown,  having  depth  of 
water  and  space  sufiBcient  for  large  ships.  The  rise  of  ordinary  spring 
tides  being  only  5  feet  is  a  great  disadvantage  as  compared  with  Ohar- 
lottetown Harbor,  but,  on  the  other  hand,  the  ice  does  not,  m  general, 
form  in  it  so  soon  in  the  fall  by  several  weeks,  and  also  breaks  up 
earlier  in  the  spring,  so  that  vessels  can  enter  later  and  leave  it  earlier, 
which  is  an  important  advantage  in  a  climate  where  the  navigation  is 
closed  by  ice  for  so  long  a  portion  of  each  year. 

Georgetown,  the  capital  of  Kings  County,  is  well  situated  on  the 
northern  shore  of  the  harbor,  just  to  the  eastward  of  Gaudm  Point. 
Its  streets  are  wide  and  at  right  angles.  The  principal  buildings  are 
the  two  churches  (the  northern  church  has  a  steeple  and  the  southern 
church  a  tower)  and  the  courthouse. 
The  United  States  is  represented  by  a  consular  agent. 
Population.— There  are  about  1 ,1  n(»  inhabitants  (1897) 


u(l  .and  clay 

>iut  and  the 
8  more  than 
ng  the  chan- 
c  is  of  great 
>r  sea  creeks 
lich  is  much 
ice,  or  nearly 
lead.    There 
ing  at  South 
seple,  will  be 
the  harbor, 
d  is  Graham 
le  depth  of  5 
)f  this  ledge, 
10  yards  from 
e  mile  farther 
1  Terras  and 
at  low  water 
'  irregular  off 
nmure  Head, 
eyond  3  miles 


nd  Boughton 
'athoms,  mud 
ith  send  in  a 

rs,  is  on  the 
1  Head,  which 
harbor  in  the 
ving  depth  of 
rdinary  spring 
red  with  Ohar- 
ot,  in  general, 
Iso  breaks  up 
save  it  earlier, 
I  navigation  is 

tuated  on  the 
Oaudin  Point. 
I  buildings  are 
d  the  southern 


0- 


GEORGETOWN. 


133 


t^^u^^^^f"^!"'''^^  *"  ^"'^^  "^ '"Pt''*«^  ""'^y  be  obtained  at  Oeorge- 

Vessels  of  less  than  24  feet  draft  can  coal  alongside  the  railway 
wharf.  In  the  summer  months,  with  short  notice,  coal  can  be  bro  S 
alongside  in  schooners  of  30  to  CO  tons.  orougJit 

sto^ck!  '*"''*^  department  has  generally  about  550  tons  of  coal  in 

f«3«\*^f  ^  ""?  Railway.-Georgetown  is  connected  with  Charlotte- 
town  by  telegraph  and  railway.  "anoue 

Communication—There  is  steam  communication  with  Pictou  once 

the  close  of  ordinary  navigation,  by  a  steamer  specially  constructed 
for  breaking  through  ice.    This  vessel  is  usually  unable  to  make  tlie 

trer  ors^r"^^-^ "  ^^^"^  '^^--^  *^'-^  -  ^y^ 

P^     The  lighthouse  on  Panmure  Head,  the  east  extreme  of 
auTeil    >,    ''  /  irT  ^^^f  "^\»>"!Wi°g,  50  feet  high,  painted  white, 

ref/Xcfpe^'^J^r^''  "'''  '^^*  ^^^"  ^'"  ^™  ^^'^'  ^^^^  *^e 
Panmure  l8land.-Panmure  Island  is  about  2  miles  long  by  one  mile 
b^^oad,  m  great  part  wooded,  and  has  cliffs  of  red  sandstone  40  feet  h^gh 
along  Its  northeastern  shore.  It  is  joined  to  the  land  to  the  sout  Wd 
by  a  narrow  sand  bar  always  above  water,  and  more  than  a  mife^n 
length.    Within  this  bar  is  StMarys  Bay,and  farther  westward  Stur 

I W  :?  t.^e"2nTh  f "''  '^'i*'"^  '^^"^"^  ^  «'^"^°^-  entrance  t^te 
^W.ot  the  .8  and,  between  Panmure  Spit  and  the  shoal  ott'  Grave 

fZ"-^^,  „r,"5;rr  -'-'  -"-"•  ■"«  -*" " "»-  -«- 

Panmure  ShoaL-Panmure  Shoal  extends  §  mile  off  the  northern  • 

We  of  hirr  '.'''"^r^''  ^"""'^'"  «P*^'  ""^'^^  f—  the  western 
Sw  J  «Mn  Ti''  •'^'*^'*'  ^'y  ""^  ^°^  ^^ter,  equally  as  far  to  the 
NVV  from  Billhook  Point,  the  NW.  extreme  of  the  island.  The  buoy 
«m  king  Its  northern  edge  is  a  black  can  buoy,  and  a  black  sp^  bZ 
marks  the  shoal  extending  eastward  from  Grave  Point 

Cardigan  Shoal,  stretehing  to  the  south  and  east  from  Cardigan 
Point,  which  separates  Cardigan  lliver  from  the  harbor,  is  an  exteSve 


^';,i;v'ri-;-C;-ii#p,i« 


"°'*''*^'"-^''"-'-  Tiir-iiTrtwfi¥tijj»iiiiLi... 


t  • 


p 


134  PKINCK    EDWARD    ISLAND— EAST   COAST. 

sl,oal  Of  sandstone;  th.  least  water  on  it  is  4  feer,  and  it  l.asonly  «  feet 
allow  water  'i  mile  ont  from  the  shore.  At  L'(U>  yards  larti.er  out  there 
are  3  fatboms.     Buoys,  m;  pape  135.  *•  .i.«  rarrliLmn 

In  a  direct  line  from  the  onter  to  the  inner  buoy  ot  t^«  ^*^'';^«;" 
Shoal  there  is  not  less  than  34  fathoms,  and  the  southern  edtie  ot  he 
sioal  5  fathoms  may  be  followed  by  the  lead  fro.n  the  one  to  tl.e 
other  From  the  iune.  buoy  the  western  e<lf?e  of  the  shoal  trends 
t nhward  to  within  ...O  yards  of  the  ^<^^^,;^^^l^l^  ""*«^ 
anchorage,  in  4*  fathon^s  mud  bottom,  between  it  an.l  the  Knoll. 

TheKnoU.  a%n,all  sandy  shoal,  probably  based  upon  sandstone  and 
wUhO  feet  least  water,  lies  just  outside  the  entrance  of  Ge<ugetown 
e  bor,  :^  diltly  u/the  Ly  of  its  navigation  To  enable^essels 
to  beat  in  and  out,  a  red  buoy  has  been  placed  on  ,ts  SW  ■  ^^^lerne 

Th^mcap  Shoal  runs  out  from  the  Thrun.cap  (which  is  a  small 
wooSTnd  clilfy  islet  Joined  to  the  eastern  point  of  entraiu.e  ot  George- 
town Harbor  by  a  sand  bar)  6()0  yards  in  a  southwesterly  direction. 
S  sh  vi,  whicl.  iH  of  sand,  and  dry  at  low  water  to  2(K)  yards  from 
the  buoy,  completes  the  shelter  of  the  harbor,  preventing  any  sea  of 
PonseoHence  fnmi  rolling  in.    Buoy,  nee  page  I3.j. 

The  Bnttance  to  Georgetown  Harbor  between  the  Thrumcap  and  St. 
AiTd'rtw  S"  Uie  souUiwestern  shore  is  H  ^^;^^'^^^:^^r^:^ 
diminish  the  breadth  of  the  chauuel  to  450  yards,  and  it  is  still  nai- 
tZrl  t  e  Knoll,  where  it  is  scarcely  400  yards;  whilst  farther  mit 
stiTl  between  the  oUigan  and  Panmnre  8hoals,  it  ,s  mile  con^de 
ing  t  to  be  bounded  by  the  depth  of  3  fathoms  on  each  side  Withm 
thrThrumcap  the  northern  shore  of  the  uarbor  forms  a  bay  ?  mile 
,^de  the  NW.  point  of  which  is  Gaudin  Point,  having  a  sandy  spit 

'"ltLTaV^4^;:^^^^  ^-^-town  Harbor 

for  largrvefsels  is  between  this  spit  and  the  Thrumcap  Shoal,  with 
Doct^rPoint  touching  Brudenell  Island,  and  the  shore  end  of  the  pier 
S  a  [«e  with  the  square  tower  of  the  English  church,  good  holding 
Iron  d,  xnud;  but  smaller  vessels  may  anchor  farther  withm  he  bay 
Td  wm  tind  2^  fathoms  within  the  distance  of  200  yards  from  the  whai- 

^'fietweeT'the  Gaudin  Spit  and  Aitkins  Point  the  channel  of  the 
harboHs  only  350  yards  wide,  between  the  3  fathom  Unes,  and  carries 
64  Mhoms  water ;  but  it  expands  again  immediately,  affording  excellent 
•  atchoi^e  all  the  way  to  Brudenell  Point,  one  mile  above  the  town. 
lS  -The  lighthouse  on  St.  Andrew  Point,  Georgetown,  a  square 
buiS  34  feet  high,  painted  white,  exhibits  at  an  eleva  ion  of  50  feet 
a  fixed  ^ght,  which  slows  red  to  seaward  and  white  mside  the  harbor 
L'ween  N  210  E.  (N.  45°  E.  mag.)  and  N.  69o  W.  (N.  45o  W.  mag.), 

which  should  be  visible  8  miles.  ,  ,.  ,  ^    ,      4.^a 

The  back  light  on  Westaway's  farm  is  a  white  fixed  light,  elevated 

62  feet,  and  should  be  visible  in  clear  weather  from  a  distance  of  12 


IS  only  Ofeet 
ler  out  there 

he  Cardifjan 
edfie  of  the 
le  one  to  the 
shoal  trends 
g  the  onter 
Knoll. 

mdstone  and 
Georgetown 
nable  vessels 
.  extreme. 
:h  is  a  small 
iceofGeorge- 
rly  direction. 
M)  yards  from 
iig  any  sea  of 

imcap  and  St. 
[)ut  the  shoals 
it  is  still  nar- 
st  farther  out 
nile,  consider 
side.  Within 
I  a  bay  f  mile 
;  a  sandy  spit 

etown  Harbor 
ap  Shoal,  with 
eind  of  the  pier 
,  good  holding 
ithin  the  bay, 
from  the  whar^ 

jhannel  of  the 
les,  and  carries 
rdiug  excellent 
,^e  the  town, 
jtown,  a  square 
ation  of  50  feet 
side  the  harbor 
ioo  \v.  mag.), 

light,  elevated 
,  distance  of  12 


GEORGETOWN   HARBOR. 

J 

miles  when  in  line  with  the  light  on  St.  Andrew   Point 
Shows  also  across  the  harbor  to  (ieorgetown 

Bulvil-      T^'r^-''  ""^T"'  '^  "•""  ^'■'''"  ^^-  ^^"^^''^^  Point  light. 

Buoyage—rhe  buoy  marking  the  northern  edge  of  Panmure  Sho«l 
IS  a  black  can  buoy,  an<I  a  bla<,k  spar  buoy  n.arks  the  hoi  ex 'em^n  j 
eastward  from  Grave  Point  »uo.us,  extending 

CaXnShri.'""'^  -rk,  respectively,  the  SE.  and  SW.  sides  of 

A  red  can  buoy  marks  the  SW.  edge  of  the  Knoll 
^^A  small  cask  buoy,  painted  red,  marks  the  western  e,ige  of  Thrumcap 

A  buoy,  ,,ainted  red,  is  moored  southward  of  Gaudiu  Point    md  « 
buoy,  luiinted  black,  is  n.oored  northward  of  Aitkin^  Point       ' 

excentirof  Z  *^'''\"^^  'V''  ""•*  ''  '^^  "^^^'^''^^'^  «--««»'  with  the 
exception  of  those  marking  Panmure  and  Knoll  SlH.als 

Caution. -Too  much  reliance  must  not  be  placed  on  the  bnnvs  n« 
they  are  Irequently  out  of  position  ""•^^'  ""^ 

andTs  d^aTofT'n'  ''"'^"v'  ''  "^'^^'^^^^ro'^^n  over  about  December  26, 
aiTtrth'e rufotipH,     ""  "'^  ^""^  '"  ''''"'  ''''  '"'^^'"^  «^  •^— ^ 

manifest  that  a  competent  pLt,  acquarerwit^^^^  '^^^^^^^^^^ 
etc    would  be  required  to  beat  a  large  ship  in  or  out.  ' 

Observe  that,  in  addition  to  the  aid  afforded  by  the  buoys  the  leul 
ing  lighthouses  in  line,  or  the  lighthouse  on  St.  indrew  PoTnt  tp  on 

ri.:;T^  otT/t:/;;-^^'  -7  ^;^^t--  west  of  the  nghtho- 
oeai  ng  ^  m   W.  (N.  o6o  W.  mag.),  leads  m  between  the  Panmure  and 
Cm^igan  Shoals  nearly  in  midchannel,  until  Brudenell  islet  ad  Doc"  t 
Point^come  ,n  one,  bearing  N.  54o  W.  (N.  ;}0o  w.  mag.>,  when  the  last 
named  objects  kept  touching  lead  into  the  harbor 
Approaching  from  the  Bantward,  pass  Boughtou  Point  th^  m? 

o.  i«  W  N.  730  W.  mag.),  and  looking  out  for  St.  Andrew  Point  lurht 
house,  which  will  be  a  little  on  the  starboard  bow.  As  soln  a7the  ts 
sel  arrives  within  one  mile  of  Panmure  Islands,  bring  Te  lighthouses 

ueuung  JM.  Ml    w.  ^s,  60°  W.  mag.),  and  steer  for  tliem.    When  Pnn 
cZ     "Irl  ?™'  Pol-tcome  m  one,  the  enteral  bWy  on  the 
Moulil  be  in  7  or  8  fathoms  water.    At  the  same  time,  the  inner  red 
belTotthrf fT".'  '"?'""'  '•""^°"  ""''-"^sLa.sLS 
^nrra'h^'Lttre:"'""'  ■-"--- -P»"-ly.-d  «.  thedi. 


£a»iffiaiWiKaaMaEMtfUi» 


136 


PRINCR    EDWARD    ISLAND EAST   COAST. 


Cuiitinue  to  run  toward  the  lighthouse  (passing  between  the  last 
named  buoys)  until  the  vessel  has  approached  within  about  ^  mile  of 
St.  Andrew  Point,  when  Brudenell  Islet  and  Doctors  Point  will  be  seen 
(up  Brudenell  River  to  the  NW.  of  the  town)  touching  and  bearing 
N.  54°  W.  (N.  .30°  W.  mag.);  the  vessel  will  then  be  near  the  black  spar 
baoy  oft'  Grave  Point,  and  the  red  buoy  on  the  SW.  edge  of  the  Knoll, 
and  also  the  one  on  Thrumcap  Spit,  should  now  be  seen ;  run  toward 
Brudenell  Islet  and  Doctors  Point  touching,  which  will  lead  about  200 
yards  to  the  SW.  of  the  two  red  buoys,  until  the  steeple  of  the  north- 
ern church  is  seen  well  to  the  NW.  of  the  tower  of  the  southern  church, 
or  until  the  latter  bears  about  north  (N.  24°  E.  mag.),  when  haul  toward 
it,  and  choose  a  berth  in  from  6  to  3  fathoms  over  mud  bottom. 

Approaching  from  the  Southward,  round  Panmure  Ledge  by  the 
lead  in  7  fathoms,  or  by  keeping  Murray  Head  open  to  the  eastward  of 
Graham  Point  till  the  north  side  of  Panmure  Island  bears  as  far  to  the 
westward  as  N.  86°  W.  (N.  61°  W.  mag.),  when  the  vessel  may  haul  in 
to  the  northwestward,  following  the  northern  edge  of  the  Panmure 
Shoal  until  the  leading  marks  can  be  made  out,  and  broaght  in  one,  as 
before  directed.  If  it  should  so  happen  that,  ft'om  thick  weather,  or 
other  cause,  this  mark  can  not  be  seen,  the  northern  edge  of  the  Pan- 
mure Shoal  may  safely  be  followed  by  the  lead,  in  6  fathoms,  to  within 
A  mile  of  the  buoy,  when  the  shoal  becomes  too  steep  to  be  safely  fol- 
lowed farther.  In  like  manner  the  southern  edge  of  the  Cardigan  Shoal 
may  be  followed,  from  the  outer  buoy  to  the  inner  buoy  on  its  SW. 
extreme,  as  already  remarked;  and  the  vessel  may  either  bring  up, 
in  the  outer  anchorage,  i  mile  within  the  latter  in  a  line  toward  the 
Thrumcap,  or  proceed  into  the  harbor,  as  may  be  expedient. 

Caution. — Give  Wheeler  Bar  a  wide  berth,  as  it  is  steep-to. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Georgetown  Harbor  at 
8h.  40m.,  by  the  mean  of  the  morning  and  evening  tides,  the  latter 
l>eing  generally  the  latest  by  about  an  hour  in  the  summer  months; 
springs  rise  5  feet,  neaps  3^  feet.  The  rate  of  the  tidal  streams  does 
not  exceed  ^  knot. 

Brudenell  and  Montague  Riven,  which  unite  their  streams  at 
Brudenell  Pomt,  to  the  westward  of  Georgetown  Harbor,  require  only 
a  brief  notice.  The  former,  the  northernmost  of  the  two,  is  navigable 
for  largo  vessels  to  Brudenell  Islet  1^  miles  up,  and  for  small  craft  and 
boats  about  3  miles  farther,  to  the  head  of  the  tide.  Vessels  of  consid- 
erable burden  can  ascend  the  Montague  nearly  to  the  bridge,  a  distance 
of  4  miles,  and  boats  about  a  mile  farther,  to  where  tlie  tide  ends.  The 
fresh-water  streams  at  the  heads  of  those  sea  creeks  are  mere  brooks. 

Cardigan  River,  which,  with  the  other  two  just  noticed,  has  occa- 
sioned Georgetown  and  harbo*  to  be  called  Three  Rivers,  is  much  the 
largest  of  the  three,  being  navigable  for  large  vessels  to  the  distance  of 
5  miles  above  Cardigan  Point;  and  smaller  vessels  can  ascend  it  \i  miles 
farther,  or  to  within  ^  mile  of  the  head  of  the  tide,  where  the  fresh 


-<^NK 


f 


CARDIGAN   RIVER HOUGHTON    RIVKR. 


137 


111  the  last 
t  J  mile  of 
nil  be  seen 
ttd  bearing 
black  spar 
'  the  Knoll, 
ran  toward 
d  abont  200 
f  the  north- 
lern  church, 
haul  toward 
torn. 

jedge  by  the 
eastward  of 
as  far  to  the 
may  haul  in 
he  Panmure 
rht  in  one,  as 
k  weather,  or 
e  of  the  Pan- 
ms,  to  within 
[be  safely  fol- 
irdigan  Shoal 
Y  on  its  8W. 
ler  bring  up, 
e  toward  the 
)nt. 
»p-to. 

wn  Harbor  at 

.J,  the  latter 

liner  months; 

streams  does 

r  streams  at 
jt,  require  only 
.,  is  navigable 
all  craft  and 
.  jIb  of  consid- 
jge,  a  distance 
jiideends.  The 
e  mere  brooks, 
jced,  has  ocea- 
ns, is  much  the 

distance  of 

jend  it  2  miles 
[here  the  fresh 


water  is  insignificant  in  quantity.  This  river,  wliicli  enters  Cardigan 
Bay  on  the  NE.  aide  of  Cardigan  Point,  is  rendered  somewhat  diflicult 
of  entrance  by  the  MacPhee  Shoal  and  tlie  Maitland  Flat,  which  are 
very  steep,  and  contract  the  navigable  channel  to  400  yards. 

Light — Cardigan  River  light  is  fixed,  and  at  an  elevation  of  43  feet 
shows  green  seaward  and  white  io  the  northeastward  across  the  river; 
it  should  be  visible  8  miles. 

The  lighthouse,  32  fet*  hi"'  lonsists  of  a  square  whitft  tower,  and 
is  close  to  the  shore  j  .«or»/  .  ince  above  South  1  '■':,  wharf  and 
below  Morrison  Beach. 

Directions. — Vessels  entering  the  river  should  stand  to  the  north- 
ward into  Cardigan  Bay  until  Paumure  Head  light  bears  S.  13°  E. 
(8.  11°  W.  mag.)  and  Cardigan  Eiver  light  N.  09°  W.  (N.  45°  W. 
mag.) ;  they  should  then  steer  toward  Cardigan  Biver  light,  keeping 
it  on  the  port  bow  and  nothing  to  the  northward  of  N.  69°  W.  (N.  46° 
W.  mag.),  thus  clearing  MacPhee  (or  Horseshoe)  Shoal  on  the  south 
side  of  the  river  entrance  and  Maitland  (or  Campbell)  Point  Shoal  on 
the  north  side.  When  Cardigan  Biver  white  light  is  opened,  safe 
anchorage  off  the  south  ferry  ship  has  been  reached. 

Boughton  Island,  at  the  north  entrance  to  Cardigan  Bay,  is  united 
on  the  NE.  side  to  Bruce  Point  by  a  dry  sand  bar  one  mile  in  length, 
and  is  divided  into  two  parts,  of  which  the  southern,  ^  mile  long,  is 
joined  to  the  remainder  by  a  double  bar  of  sand  and  shingle  inclosing 
a  large  pond.  Boughton  Ledge  runs  out  at  this  bar  to  the  distance  of 
1,200  yards  to  the  eastward,  and  has  rocks  near  its  outer  extreme  which 
always  show.  Boughton  Point,  the  SK.  extreme  of  tlie  island,  is  a 
cliff  of  red  sandstone  30  feet  high,  and  has  a  rock,  which  dries,  off  it, 
and  shallow  water  to  the  distance  of  ^  mile.  Rocky  and  irregular 
soundings,  4  to  5  fathom's,  run  out  to  the  eastward  still  farther,  and 
therefore  a  vessel  of  large  draft,  at  niglit  or  in  thick  weather,  should 
not  round  the  point  in  a  less  depth  than  9  or  8  fathoms. 

Off  the  west  side  of  the  island  a  bank,  with  from  3  to  6  fathoms, 
extends  1^  miles,  and  farther  westward  there  are  dangerous  shoals, 
which,  together  with  the  Boughton  Spit  and  the  Mosquito  Sands,  extend 
along  the  north  shore  of  Cardigan  Bay  ueariy  to  Maitland  Point  at  the 
entrance  of  the  Cardigan. 

Off  Boughton  Sand  Bar  and  Brice  Point  the  shallow  water  extends 
%  mile,  and  in  Boughton  Bay  the  line  of  3  fathoms  is  a  mile  out  from 
the  shore. 

(H.  O.  Chart  No.  1066.) 

Bonghton  or  Q>rand  Ri^er,  5  miles  north  from  Boughton  Point,  has 
a  dangerous  bar  of  sand  one  mile  out  from  its  entrance,  and  over  which 
6  feet,  at  low-water  ordinary  spring  tides,  can  be  carried  in  a  very  nar- 
row channel  marked  out  by  three  buoys.  The  outer  buoy  is  moored  in 
3  fathoms,  the  next  in  2  fathoms,  and  the  inner  one  in  11  feet,  the 


.jtam 


138 


PRINCE    EDWAKD    ISLAND— EAST    COAST. 


bar  of  0  feet  being  between  tbe  ]a»t  two  (1860).  The  buoy»  are  taken 
up  at  tbe  end  of  tbe  navigable  Heason. 

At  a  sbort  distance  within  tbe  inner  bnoy,  the  Hands  on  each  .side 
are  dry  at  low  water,  and  the  channel  generally  can  be  seen  all  the 
remainder  of  the  way  to  the  entrance,  where  it  jjasses  close  ronnd 
the  northern  {Mint  of  the  long  sand  bar  which  stretches  across  from 
the  sontiiern  shore  to  within  350  yards  ol'  lianks  Point,  where  there 
is  a  wharf  and  a  ferry. 

Inimediati  ly  within  the  entrance  the  inlet  is  a  mile  wide,  but  the 
channel  is  divided,  narrow,  and  intricate,  and  marked  out  by  stakes 
between  sandy  shoals  for  about  one  mile;  after  which  it  is  clear,  wide, 
and  has  from  3  to  5  fathoms  water  in  it,  to  the  Narrows,  3  miles  from 
the  entrance.  Boats  can  ascend  3  miles  farther,  or  to  the  brnlge.  There 
are  settlements  on  e.ich  side  of  this  extensive  inlet,  which  if  it  were  not 
for  the  shallow  bar  would  be  a  fine  hiirbor. 

In  Boughton  Bay  the  Hue  of  3  fathoms  is  a  mile  out  from  the  shore. 

Tides. — It  is  high  Wiiter,  full  and  change,  at  thc^  Perry  wharf, 
Boughton  Kiver,  at  8h.  -tOni. ;  springs  rise  5  feet,  neaps  2j^  feet.  The  rate 
of  the  tides  in  the  entrance  is  2  knots. 

Little  River,  Fortune  River,  RoUo  Bay,  and  Colville  Bay  and 
River,  occurring  in  order  in  proceeding  along  the  coast  to  the  north- 
ward, are  tide  inlets  nearly  barred  up  with  sand,  and  having  small 
streams  at  their  heads;  they  are  places  only  fit  for  small  craft  aud 
boats,  having  from  3  to  o  feet  over  their  bars  at  low  water. 

Colville  River,  in  Colville  Bay,  between  Souris  Head  and  Swanton 
Point,  and  distant  i-5  miles  NNE.  of  Boughton  Point,  is  the  most 
important,  being  the  place  where  the  produce  of  the  more  eastern 
parts  of  the  island  is  principally  shipped.  Colville  Bay  atlbrds  good 
anchorage  with  offshore  winds,  and  the  settlement  of  tSouris  and  the 
church  will  be  seen  on  its  eastern  shore. 

Sharp  cliffy  headlands  and  points  of  red  sandstone  separate  the  bays 
in  wuicb  these  rivers  are  situated,  tlie  clifts  being  from  25  to  50  feet 
high,  and  the  shallow  water  oft"  them  not  extending  beyond  the  distance 
of  000  yards,  excepting  at  Eglington  Point  (separating  Fortune  Bay 
from  Eglington  (Jove),  where  the  reef  is  very  shallow  for  the  lirst  800 
yards  out  from  the  shore,  and  continues  1,200  yards  farther  with  from 
3  to  4|  fathoms  over  rocky  bottom ;  butthis  is  within  the  line  adjoining 
Howe  Point  and  Souris  Head,  and  therefore  out  of  tbe  way  of  vessels 
running  along  the  coast. 

Souris  is  a  large  village  60  miles  NE.  by  rail  from  Charlottetown. 
It  has  a  wharf  with  three  large  fish-curing  stores  on  it.  The  eastern 
entrance  is  marked  by  a  red  flagstaff,  and  three  black  buoys  mark  the 
passage  up  the  river  for  small  craft.  In  1881  the  population  numbered 
700.  The  chief  industries  are  shipbuilding  and  the  fisheries.  In  1882 
the  depth  of  water  alongside  the  breakwater  was  about  14  feet. 

Tbe  lioman  Catholic  church  is  an  excellent  landmark;  iSouris  Head 


)ys  are  taken 

on  eiicli  side 
seen  all  the 
I  close  round 
»  across  from 
,  where  there 

vride,  but  the 
»ut  by  stakes 
18  clear,  wide, 
,  3  miles  from 
ridge.  There 
if  it  were  not 

'om  the  shore. 
Ferry  wharf, 
feet.    The  rate 

ille  Bay  and 

;  to  the  north- 
having  small 

[lall  craft  and 

er. 
and  Swauton 

t,  is  the  most 
more  eastern 

y  affords  good 

touris  and  the 

arate  the  bays 
m  26  to  50  feet 
ud  the  distance 
f  Fortune  Bay 
r  the  first  800 
ther  with  from 
i  line  adjoining 
I  way  of  vessels 

Charlottetown. 
t.  The  eastern 
)Uoys  mark  the 
ition  numbered 
leries.  In  1882 
14  feet. 
k;  Souris  Head 


80UR18 — KA8T   POINT. 


139 


Ind  b!."e';'  """"'  "^''^  *'''^'  ^''^«'  *^«  ^^-'  "«-  't  is  red  sandstone, 

The  United  States  is  represented  by  a  consular  agent. 
1   ^  ™f  V'"*^  markka  on  the  <..hart),  (..ailed  by  the  /i.shermen  the  ri,„r 

A  Shoal  patch  having  10  fathoms  water  on  it  lies  S  47o  e  rs  -no 

iriiirirr "™"  '^'--'^  ""■«'  »■■"  «--w.,r5;o"w.':„,i; 

1  'f*— '^^'l®  ^"J''^^''  '«  "sually  frozen  over  about  January  7  and  tl.« 
dls"  Piewt:  "'  '^'"•'  f  ^  ' '  '*  *^  «*^'"P>«*«'^  closed  b Jt;;:  th  se 
Tl«L«f       ^^7^'.^*'  departure  depending  on  the  prevailing  win.ls 

eaf;m.*t;;ll"wf/"^\*  «°*"''  *''^""'  '*'^  ^"''^^  ^outheastwarcl  of  the 
eastein  beak  water  at  Souris,  stands  a  s.juare  tower,  15  feet  hi..., 

Son  ot  slfS  It ";  '■  m  ^  "'^f  ^'^^^'  "^"^  *«  exhibited  at  I  e^.: 
won  ot  »o  teet;  it  .should  be  visible  15  uiil<'8 

BrtalwateT"^  "^'^  ''  "  "^'^''''"^  ""  "'^  ^"'«^  ^""^  "^^  ««-!«  East 
The  light  is  fixed  red,  elevated  21  feet,  and  visible  i\  miles  from  .li 
points  seaward.    The  lantern  is  hoisted  on  a  mast. 

to^he  Ifd  nl7' "' ■  "f  "'  *''  breakwater,  and  will  be  used  similarly 
to  the  old  light,  carried  away,  until  a  proposed  new  block  is  added  to 

wil.rbuir'"''''  breakwater.  When  a  more  permanciirst^ur: 

The  Coast  to  the  eastward  of  Coh  ille  Bay  is  bold  and  free  from  dan 
ger,  excepting  Hervey  Reef,  which  extends  800  ylTZ^r^^Z 
Pom  ,  and  has  on  it  the  Shallop  Rock,  which  always  shows     Herve^ 

east^r'noinl  Of  C  ''t'"'  ''^^'  ^"^  ""^  ^'«  ^--"  ^y  its  bef  .g  t  e 

S  sand  h  lis     mZ       n'  '"/''*''  ^'^^^^  "^^  '""^^  remarkable^and 
nign  Sana  hiHs.    At  Basin  Head,  one  mile  farther  NE.,  the  cliffs  ter 

Z^^T'v    .  r^^'".'  ""**  sandy  beach  form  the  shor;\  early  ai  the 

n  is  r  tTr  '  "  '"'""'  ''  "^'"'^  '  •""««•  ^'^  this  distance  Eat 
Lake  18  all  that  requires  notice.  It  is  a  shallow  and  narrow  pond 
within  the  sand  bars,  extending  from  Basin  Head  to  within  2  IC  of 
East  Point,  and  having  a  narrow  outlet  (2  miles  from  the  head)  which 
8  nearly  dry  at  low  water.  Boats  and  small  craft  entefit  for  p^,^^ 
the  coui^ry  being  well  settled  along  its  northern  shore.  ^  ' 

Bast  Pomt-The  eastern  point  ot  Prince  Edward  Island  is  a  rliftnf 

mile  to  the  depth  of  3  fathoms,  and  not  quite  a  mile  to  5  fatliom  ' 


'•'-Misufrnmnaildi'iUen'Xftn  >v 


140 


PRINCE    EDWARD    ISLAND EA8T   COAST. 


§ 

lit 


•fit 


m 


There  is  frequently  a  great  rippling  off  the  point,  but  the  reef  does  not 
extend  farther  than  has  been  stated.  Northward  uf  the  rwt'  the  sound- 
iug  decreases  gradually  to  8  fiithoms,  after  which  it  Hhoals  rapidly. 
The  depth  of  20  fathoms  is  as  near  as  a  vessel  should  approacli  when 
the  land  or  light  can  not  be  seen  at  night  or  in  foggy  weather. 

Caution  im  necessary  when  navigating  in  the  immediate  neighbor- 
boo«l  of  East  I'oint,  as  the  tidal  streams  are  induenced  by  strong  winds, 
and  therefore  are  reported  to  be  irregular  both  in  direction  and  velocity. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  East  Point  ftt  8h.  30m.; 
springs  rise  3^  feet,  neaps  2  feet. 

The  tides  run  at  the  rate  of  2^  knots  between  tne  north  end  of 
Milne  Bank  and  the  .point,  but  are  not  nearly  so  strong  farther  to  the 
westward. 

Light. — The  lighthouse  on  East  J'oint  stands  within  07  yards  of  the 
eastern  extreme  and  83  yards  fVom  the  south  shore  of  East  Point;  the 
dwellings,  painte<l  whit«,  with  brown  roofs,  are  50  yards  in  rear  of  the 
lighthouse;  the  buihUng  is  octagonal,  00  feet  high,  painted  white,  and 
exhibits,  at  an  elevation  of  100  feet,  a  revolving  white  light  every  three 
minutes,  which  should  be  visible  15  miles  between  the  bearingu  of  S.  58° 
E.  (S.  34°  E.  mag.),  through  west,  and  N.  49°  E.  (N.  73°  E.  mag.). 

Pog  Horn. — During  thick  or  foggy  weather  a  horn  will  give  a  blast 
of  about  eight  seconds  during  every  half  minute. 

The  fog-signal  building  is  ]>ainted  white,  with  a  brown  roof,  and 
stands  33  yards- eastward  of  the  lighthouse. 

These  two  buildings  in  Hue  indicate  nearly  the  outer  extreme  of  East 
Point  Keef. 

Anchorage. — The  anchorage  is  not  good  to  the  northward  of  East 
Point,  the  ground  bemg  either  loose  or  rocky ,  but  to  the  southward  of 
it  there  is  good  riding  with  northerly  winds  as  far  as  the  East  Lake 
outlet,  in  a  moderate  depth  of  water,  and  over  a  bottom  of  red  sand. 

Milne  Bank,  if  considered  to  be  bounded  by  the  depth  of  10  fathoms, 
is  5^  miles  long,  north  and  south,  and  1|  miles  bread,  the  bottom  being 
of  sandstone,  thinly  covered  here  and  there  with  red  sand.  The  sound- 
ings are  irregular,  between  6  and  9  fathoms,  over  the  northern  part  of 
the  bank;  but  toward  the  southern  end,  and  close  to  the  outer  edge, 
there  is  a  shallow  part,  1^  miles  in  length,  on  which  there  are  less  than 
5  fathoms;  and  it  is  here  that  the  least  depth  is  found,  namely,  4^ 
fathoms  at  low  water,  in  spring  tides.  This  shallowest  part  of  the 
bank  lies  between  SK.  by  S.  and  iSSE.  from  East  Point,  and  is  distant 
from  it  44  to  5^  miles. 

The  extreme  south  end  of  this  bank,  in  10  fathoms,  bears  8.  24°  E. 
(south  mag.)  0^  miles  from  East  Point,  and  the  north  extreme  N.  88°  E. 
(S.  G8°  E.  mag.)  2  miles.  Between  the  northern  part  of  the  bank  and 
Bast  Point  there  are  from  10  to  11  ^  fathoms,  red-sand  bottom,  the 
deepest  water  being  close  to  the  bank.  The  eastern  or  outer  edge  of 
the  bank  is  steep- tu,  there  being  from  12  to  15  fathoms  close  to  it,  and 


I'KIN*  E    EDWARD    I8LAND NORTH    COAST. 


141 


ef  does  not 

the  wountl- 

ilrt  rapidly. 

roach  when 

ler. 

e  neighbor- 

,roiigwi»*l8» 
.nd  velocity. 
atSh.  ;«)m.; 

lorth  end  of 
arther  to  the 

yards  of  the 

St  Point;  the 

n  rear  of  the 

ed  white,  and 

»t  every  three 

finga  of  S.  68° 

I.  mag.). 

ill  give  a  blact 

jwn  roof,  and 

ctreme  of  East 

liward  of  Kasi 
e  southward  of 
the  East  Lake 

of  red  sand. 
1  of  10  fathoms, 
e  bottom  being 
tl.    The  sound- 
orthern  part  of 
the  outer  edge, 
re  are  less  than 
lud,  namely,  ^ 
eat  part  of  the 
;,  and  is  distant 

bears  S.  24°  B. 
ttreme  N.  88°  E. 
of  the  bank  and 
ind  bottom,  the 
or  outer  edge  of 
8  close  to  it,  and 


there  is  ft'e(iuently  a  great  rippling  along  it,  cansed  by  tlie  abrupt  oppo- 
sition which  it  presents  to  the  flood  tide  from  the  NK.  The  sea  is  v^ry 
heavy  here,  and  also  oft"  the  point,  in  strong  NIO.  giiies. 

NUHTH   (OAST   OF   I'RINOU   EDWARU    ISLAND. 

The  great  bay  formed  by  the  nortlieru  coast  of  Prince  Edward  Island, 
and  the  difticulty  of  beating  a  ship  ont  of  it  in  heavy  and  long-contin- 
ued NE.  gales  has  been  already  mentioned.  That  ditflculty  setnis  to 
be  caused  by  an  acceleration  in  the  rate  of  the  current  so  frequently 
found  running  past  Cape  Ga8p(3,  Bonaventure  Island,  and  the  Miscoa 
Banks,  and  which  doubtless  continues  farther  south ;  or  it  may  arise 
from  an  extension  of  that  general  set  to  the  southward  so  often  expe- 
rienced by  vessels  crossing  from  the  Bird  Islands  toward  Auticosti 
or  Gape  Hosier,  and  which  has  been  observed  to  be  increased  by  strong 
NE.  winds,  as  might  have  been  iuf*-rred  from  the  great  rise  of  water 
which  they  cause  in  all  the  southern  imrts  of  the  gulf. 

The  set  of  the  tidal  streams  may  also  at  times  be  very  unfavorable 
to  a  vessel  under  the  supposed  circumstances,  for  the  stream  of  flood  is 
known  to  set  to  the  southward  into  the  bay,  in  conformity  with  the 
progress  of  the  reflux  tide  wave,  Arom  North  Point  southeastward  to 
St.  Peters,  whilst  farther  eastward  the  tide  which  comes  from  the  NE., 
from  between  the  Magdalen  Islands  and  Gape  Breton,  also  sets  toward 
the  shore,  especially  near  East  Point. 

The  reflux  course  of  the  tide  wave  on  this  coast  has  been  inferred 
from  observations  made  during  the  Admiralty  surveys  of  all  the  har- 
bors, from  which  it  appears  that  the  time  of  high  water  on  the  full  and 
change  days  becomes  later  in  succession,  in  proceeding  southeastward 
from  North  Point  to  Gascumpeque,  Malpeque,  Grenville  Bay,  Bustico, 
Tracadie,  and  St.  Pet«r8.  At  St.  Peters  the  time  of  high  water,  full 
and  change,  namely,  8h.  40m.,  is  rather  later  than  at  East  Point;  and 
as  there  is  also  a  considerable  increase  in  the  ^iso  uf  Ihe  tide,  there 
seems  reason  to  conclude  that  the  two  tide  waves  meet  somewhere 
about  this  harbor,  the  westeru  being  12  hours  older  than  the  eastern 
wave. 

With  the  exception  of  a  few  places  off  the  bars  of  the  harbors,  the 
anchorage  is,  generally  speaking,  very  bad  all  along  the  northern  shore 
of  the  island,  the  bottom  being  of  red  sandstone,  thinly  covered  occa- 
sionally with  sand,  gravel,  and  broken  shell. 

The  harbors  are  all  of  the  same  character,  having  narrow  entrances 
between  sand  bars,  with  dangerous  bars  of  sand  at  various  distances 
from  the  shore.  They  are  only  fit  for  small  vessels,  with  the  exception 
of  Richmond  Bay  and  Gascumpeque,  and  even  those  could  not  be  safely 
run  for  in  bad  weather,  and  with  a  heavy  sea  running,  at  which  times 
the  breakers  on  their  bars  extend  quite  across,  leaving  no  visible  chan- 
nel. New  vessels  are  built  in  these  harbors  almost  every  year,  the 
smaller  for  the  Newfoundland  trade,  and  besides  the  coasting  schooners 


I 


li:^ 


t;* 


51' 


^S  f 


saMH 


149  PKINCK    EDWARD    ISLAND— NORTH    COABT. 

for  prcMluce,  American  tlHhlng  Hchooners  frequently  call  at  the.n  for 
wood  and  water,  or  shelter  c.  the  approach  of  bad  weather. 

tL  Corst  froui  East  Point  to  St.  Peter  Bay,  a  distance  of  .«  miles 
in  unbrSceTfonned  of  redsandstone  cliffs,  with  occasional  patches  of 
^v^dXac    at  the  mouths  of  small  streams,  where  boats  can  land  o„>y 
Tm^  weather  or  offshore  winds.    Surveyor  Inlet  will  not  now  admit 

''  S«ir;wl' ^oe;  :;;ttend  beyond  n  miles  any  Where  oft;  this 
division  0  the  coast,  and  there  are  in  general  10  fathoms  water  w^^" 
one  mile  of  the  shore,  the  bottom  being  of  sandstone,  and  the  anchor- 

'^Cpa^Xrrgenerally  called  St.  Peter  Bay,  runs  in  7  miles  ^ 
thflTtwrrd  "ha  depth  in  some  parts  of  3  fathoms;  nevertheless,  .t 
fornra  harbor lly  for  small  vessels,  there  being  only  9  feet  at  ordinary 
hTgTwatT^^^^^^  its  bar  of  sand,  the  outer  edge  of  which,  m  3  fathoms, 

''  l;:^Z^l^i^i^  harbor  on  the  SW.  side  3  miles  in  from  the 
Jra^e  and  is  n«'  igable  for  boats  to  the  same  distance  in  and,  where 
thrplerwhirsteady  the  floating  bridge,  prevent  farther  ascent 
tLc  are  ^eral  smaller  streams  on  the  same  side  of  the  harbor  and 
at  its  beadSt.  Peter  River,  which,  like  the  rest,  becomes  a  mere  brook 

'*Th:  sJl:  oi't^^htrbor  are  well  settled,  and  there  is  a  church  on 

In^toZnelor     v^^^^^^  n^Ues  to  the  eastward;  after  which  there  are 
^o  more  Wgh  sand  hills  to  Surveyor  Inlet,  within  4  miles  of  East  Point. 

There  is  a  railway  station  at  St.  Peter. 

The  two  lights  in  one  lead  over  the  bar  at  the  mouth  of  St.  ^eter  Kay, 

,nr,,  t,^^  the  eastward  immediately  within  the  entrance,  so  that  alto- 
getheMtt  a  wy  dangerons  place  for  a  stranger  to  attempt,  or  .ndeed 

""^^r^Z^Z  eZXn  the  we-t  side  of  the  ehan,«.  ^ 
stiver  Harbor  8. 13°  E.  (8. 11°  W.  mag.)  and  N.  13=  W.  (N.  11»  B. 
fnag  H'^S  feet  apart,  exhibit  fixed  white  lights,  elevated,  respectively, 

^^CTgh^H^htout:  33  feetwgh,  is  s,aare  and  white,  near  the  end 
ofTe  brtkwater.    The  low  one  is  33  feet  high;  it  is  a  square,  white 
frame,  and  stands  on  the  sand  beach. 
The  inner  light  is  shifted  as  the  bar  alters. 


lit  them  for 

p. 

of  ;J3  miles, 

,1  patches  of 

lu  hind  only 

t  now  admit 

rhere  oft'  this 
water  within 
I  the  anohor- 

in  7  miles  to 
vertheleHH,  it 
jt  at  ordinary 
in  3  fathoms, 

(8  in  from  the 
inland,  where 
rtlier  ascent, 
e  harbor,  and 
a  mere  brook 

i  a  church  on 
lite  steeple  to 
mbered  1,299. 
of  sand  hills, 
ibove  the  sea, 
liich  there  are 
of  Bast  Point. 

St.  Peter  Bay, 
e  west  side  of 
set  at  ordinary 

ere  is  a  sharp 
s,  so  that  alto- 
mpt,  or  indeed 

the  channel  to 
'  W.  (N.  11°  E. 
d,  respectively, 

B,  near  the  end 
a  square,  white 


8AVA0P:    HAKHOR — TRACJADIR. 


143 


TIde«.-rt  Ks  hiKh  water,  full  and  .imnRe,  in  St.  Peter  Harbor  at  8h. 
30m. ;  Hprinss  rise  4  feel ,  nnipn  ^  fcet.    The  rate  of  the  tide  Htreams  in 

/knotir''^  ""''  ^"^  ^^'  ^*^*"'"  "'"'^'"'  *"  "*'*'''^'*^  ''""^'  ^""^^  "'  ''™'' 
Savage  Harbor,  at  3  niiles  westward  of  St.  Peter,  has  only  U  feet  at 

low  water  over  itn  bar,  and  is  therefore  only  Ht  for  boats  or  ;ery  small 
trait.  The  <,hur.h  here  is  a  ifoo<l  lan.lmark.  .lust  westwanl  of  its 
entrance  there  is  some  (U)mparatively  shallow  water,  4+  fathoms,  over 
rocky  bottom,  at  the  distance  of  a  long  mile  from  the  shore.  The 
distance  across  from  the  head  of  this  harbor  (which  run:  inland .{ miles) 
to  the  head  of  the  Hillsborough  River  is  less  than  on^  mile,  and  thc-e 
IS  a  road  across.  «^"«  o 

Lighta—The  two  leading  lights  are  fixed  white  lights,  .hown  on 
masts  respec  ively  I'O  and  25  feet  high,  with  brown  sheds  at  their  ■  .se 

The  outer  l^ht  on  McEachern's  farm  near  the  western  edge  of  the 
inner  shore  of  the  harbor  is  elevated  22  feet  from  high  water  The 
outer  light  is  liable  to  be  moved. 

The  inner  light  stands  110  yards  S.  29o  E.  (8.  5o  E.  mag.)  fn  n  iue 
outer  one,  and  is  30  feet  above  high  water.  b  /      "  < «» 

Both  lights  are  visible  5  miles. 

Directiona-The  lights  in  line  lead  to  the  black  and  white  striped 
bnoy  moored  ...  12  feet  water  just  outside  the  bar.  Vessels  entering 
nnist  open  the  l.ghts  about  a  point  on  the  starboard  bow  after  passing 
th.8  buoy  until  the  inner  fairway  buoy  is  reached,  whence  the  clannel 

flig  stiker-  ^'-  ''    ""'  "'''-'  "^  ^"'-^^^  ^"^  '''  -^-  ^'■^'•'*'  'o  the 
Tracadie  Harbor,  or  Bedford  Bay,  is  0  miles  fron.  Savage  Harbor 
I  8  en  ranee  , sat  the  wester.. extren.ity  of  a  remarkable rai.oe  of  sand 
hills  50  or  60  leel  high.    The  bar  of  sand,  which  sh-Ys  occ.a.;ionally  in 
heavy  ga^s,  extends  out  3  mile  from  the  entrance.  ....  has  a  varying 
depth  of  from  6  to  9  feet  over  it  at  low  water  i,.  a  chan.,el  only  80  yards 
wide  at  the  time  of  the  s,irvc;y.    Th.  place,  therefore,  is  J.ly  fit  for 
small  vessels,  and  even  they  require  the  assist,,;  ce  of  buoys  a..d  favor- 
abe  weather  to  take  the  bar  with  safety.    Tho  harbor  is  3  miles  wide 
withm  the  sand  bar  and  carries  2^  fathoms  water;  it  sends  off  a  branch 
to  the  westward  called  Winter  Cove,  and  rn.is  in  4  or  5  miles  to  the 
southward,  approaching  at  its  head  to  within  1^  miles  of  the  Hills- 
borough  River,  to  which  there  is  a  good  road  across. 
There  is  a  railway  station  at  Tracadie. 

Tr^'^J*""'^'^''.^  lighthouses  erected  on  the  west  side  of  channel  to 
iracadie  Harbor  are  white  square  structures,  28  and  21  feet  hitrh 
exhibiting  fixed  red  lights,  elevated,  respectively,  .32  and  40  feet  above 
high  water,  both  visible  8  miles. 

chann^Twfts.'''  ^'^''^"  '"  ''  '"""^'^  "'  ""^  '''^'  "  **^""^  "•^^^'^«'  ^'  ^^« 


' 


,:.> 


144 


PRINCE   EDWARD   ISLAND NORTH   COAST. 


Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  the  entrance  of  Tracadie 
Harbor  at  7h. ;  springs  rise  3J  feet,  neaps  2  feet.  These  heights  vary 
according  to  the  direction  of  the  wind.  The  rate  of  the  tide  streams 
yi  the  entrance  is  about  2  knots. 

Directions. — The  lights  in  line  lead  past  the  buoys,  leaving  the  buoy 
outside  the  bar  on  the  starboard  baud,  the  buoy  inside  the  bar  on  the 
port  hand,  and  the  red  spar  buoy  on  the  westernmost  bend  of  the 
channel  on  the  starboard  hand. 

The  channel  is  intricate  and  liable  to  change  in  any  storm,  conse- 
quently strangers  should  not  attempt  the  entrance  with  any  wind  on 
the  shore,  nor  under  any  circumstances  if  drawing  more  than  5  feet. 

Cape  Stanhope,  on  which  there  is  a  sand  hill  30  feet  high,  ^  mile 
to  the  eastward  of  the  entrance  of  Little  Bastico  and  9  miles  to  the 
SE.  from  Cape  Turner,  has  a  dangerous  reef  running  out  from  it  |  mile 
to  the  depth  of  3  fathoms  and  one  mile  to  5  fathoms.  On  some  parts 
of  this  reef  there  is  only  one  foot  of  water,  at  ^  mile  from  shore. 
Between  Cape  Stanhope  and  Cape  Turner  the  coast  forms  a  curve  or 
bay,  in  which  ire  the  entrances  of  the  Knstico  Hairbors,  and  where  the 
Sfathom  edge  of  the  shallow  water  is  seldom  less  than  }  mile  off  shore. 
Farther  out  the  holding  ground  is  bad,  being  of  red  sandstone,  with  an 
occasional  thin  covering  of  sand. 

Lights. — Cove  Head  leading  lights,  75  yards  apart,  are  a  little  to  the 
westward  of  Stanhope  Head.  The  lights  are  exhibited  on  masts  27  and 
17  feet  high. 

The  front  light  is  fixed  white,  elevated  18  feet  from  high- water  mark, 
and  visible  3  miles.  The  light  is  close  to  the  edge  of  the  sand  beach  at 
the  entrance  to  the  harbor. 

The  back  light  is  fixed  white,  25  feet  above  high-water  mark,  and 
visible  3  mUes. 

The  position  of  the  lights  is  changed  to  suit  alterations  in  the  chan- 
nel, which  has  only  3  feet  at  low  water. 

Little  Rustico  Harbor  has  its  narrow  sandy  entrance  on  the  west- 
ern side  of  Cape  Stanhope,  with  a  depth  of  only  2  feet  over  its  shifting 
bar.  It  is  therefore  only  fit  for  boatb  '>r  very  small  vessels,  the  rise  of 
tide  being  the  same  as  at  Graiicl  Rustico.  This  shallow  place  extends 
for  several  miles  within  the  sand  bars,  and  is  divided  by  Black  Point 
into  Petersham  and  Stanhope  Cc^es,  which  have  small  brooks  at  their 
heads  and  are  navigable  for  boats  3  miles. 

Grand  Rustico  Harbor  has  two  narrow  sandy  entrances  on  either 
side  of  Mc  Auslin  Island,  and  which  are  distant  3  and  5  miles,  respec- 
tively, to  the  SB.  of  Cape  Turner.  Although  vessels  of  200  or  300  tons 
are  occasionally  built  here  and  floated  light  over  the  bars  in  fine 
weather,  yet  it  is  a  place  only  tit  for  small  vessels,  for  its  shilling  bars 
of  sand  are  extremely  dangerous,  having  a  varying  depth  of  4  to  6  feet, 
and  extending  out  J  mile  from  the  shore,  at  which  distance  there  are 
3  fathoms  at  low  water.    The  line  of  deepest  water  over  each  of  these 


of  Tracadie 
leiglits  vary 
tide  streams 

ing  the  buoy 

le  bar  ou  tbe 

bend  of  the 

storm,  conse- 

auy  wind  on 
than  5  feet. 
>t  high,  4  mile 
9  miles  to  the 
i  fi-om  it  i  mile 
Ou  some  parts 
le  from  shore, 
rms  a  curve  or 

and  where  the 
I  mile  off  shore, 
idstone,  with  an 

re  a  little  to  the 
on  masts  27  and 

igh-water  mark, 
le  sand  beach  at 

rater  mark,  and 

ions  in  the  chan- 

jtnce  on  the  west- 
over  its  shifting 
[essels,  the  rise  of 
low  place  extends 
by  Black  Point 
brooks  at  their 

Ltrances  on  either 
U  5  miles,  respec- 
[of  200  or  300  tons 
Ithe  bars  in  fine 
|r  its  shifting  bars 
]Bpthof4to6feet, 
distance  there  are 
fv-er  each  of  these 


RICHMOND   BAY. 


145 


bars  is  pointed  out  by  two  buoys,  the  positions  of  wbicli  are  changed  as 
occasion  requires. 

Hunter  and  Wheatley  Rivers,  navigable  for  boats  5  miles,  with  Winter 
Greek  between  them,  run  into  this  shallow  place,  which  extends  5  miles 
along  the  coast  within  the  sand  bars  of  McAuslin  Island  and  Brackley 
Point. 

There  are  extensive  settlements  here.  The  two  churches  on  the 
western  side  of  Winter  Creek  will  be  recognized  by  their  steeples. 
Coming  from  the  eastward  these  churches  do  not  open  out  very  soon, 
but  the  harbor  may  be  recognized  by  the  remarkable  hummocks  in  its 
vicinity.  There  is  also  a  small  chapel  at  the  settlement  of  New  Glasgow, 
on  the  western  side  of  Hunter  Biver,  but  it  can  not  be  distinguished 
from  the  sea. 

Lights. — The  high  lighthouse  at  the  west  side  of  entrance  to  Grand 
Bnstico  is  a  white,  square  building,  35  feet  high,  exhibiting  a  fixed 
white  light,  elevated  40  feet,  and  visible  8  miles. 

The  low  light  is  a  fixed  red  light,  shown  from  a  mast  20  feet  high,  at 
22  feet  above  high  water;  the  light  should  be  visible  5  miles. 

The  lights  bear  S.  49°  W.  (S.  72°  W.  mag.)  and  IS.  49°  E.  (N.  72°  E. 
mag.)  from  eaeh  other,  distant  75  yajrds,  and  are  visible  from  S.  67°  E. 
(S.  44°  E.  mag.)  through  south  to  north  (N.  23°  E.  mag.).  The  outer 
or  low  light  is  subject  to  alteration  to  suit  the  channel. 

Beacon. — A  white  beacon  has  been  erected  on  the  outer  end  of  the 
breakwater  to  more  clearly  indicate  its  position,  but  it  can  not  be  other- 
wise used  as  a  guide.  It  consists  of  a  mast  25  feet  above  the  deck  of 
the  pier,  with  a  diamond-shaped  slatted  beacon  at  its  head. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Grand  Bustico  Harbor 
at  6h.  40m.;  springs  rise  4  feet,  neaps  2  feet.  The  rate  of  the  tide 
streams  in  the  entrance  is  2  knots. 

Directions. — The  two  leading  lights  in  line  lead  to  the  Bar  Buoy. 
After  passing  this,  vessels  entering  must  open  the  lights,  leaving  the 
range  on  the  starboai'd  aide. 

Vessels  of  8-feet  draft  can  only  enter  the  harbor  at  high  water  and 
in  moderate  weather. 

Cape  Turner  is  the  highest  cliff  on  the  island,  being  of  red  sand- 
stone and  conglomerate,  120  feet  high.  It  is  8^  miles  E.  by  S.  from  Cape 
Tryon,  Greuville  Harbor  lying  between. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Cape  Turner  at  6h. 
10m.;  springs  rise  4  feet,  neaps  2  feet. 

Q-renville  Harbor  has  its  entrance  at  the  northwestern  extremity 
of  a  long  range  of  sand  hills,  the  highest  of  which  is  55  teet  above 
high-water  mark.  The  entrance  of  this  harbor  is  ^  mile  wide,  and 
carries  3  fathoms  water,  but  it  is  nevertheless  only  fit  for  small  vessels, 
in  consequence  of  its  dangerous  and  shifting  bar  of  sand,  over  which, 
at  the  time  of  the  survey,  only  5  feet  at  low  water  could  be  carried  in 
a  very  narrow  channel  indicated  by  two  buoys.  The  bar  extends  out 
1151 10 


1 


146 


PRINCE   EDWARD   ISLAND — NORTH   COAST. 


li- 


!j  mile  from  the  entrauce,  and  the  shallow  water  one  mile,  at  which  dis- 
tance there  are  5  fathoms  over  sandy  bottom. 

Within  the  entrance  the  harbor  is  3  miles  wide,  branching  into  two 
principal  and  many  smaller  creeks,  with  small  brooks  at  their  heads. 
The  principal  two  of  these,  namely,  Stanley  and  Mill  Elvers,  are  navi- 
gable for  small  craft  and  boats  to  the  head  of  the  tide,  a  distance  of  U 
or  7  miles.  There  are  increasing  settlements  and  a  fertile  country 
around  the  harbor,  the  principal  settlement  being  New  London,  where 
the  English  and  Scotch  churches  are  situated  on  the  western  shore,  1^ 
miles  within  the  entrance,  the  former  being  distinguished  by  its  steeple. 

Lights. — The  inner  lighthouse  on  the  beach,  west  side  of  entrance  to 
Grenville  Harbor,  is  a  white  tower,  with  dwelling  attached,  35  feet  high, 
and  exhibits,  at  an  elevation  of  45  feet,  a  fixed  red  light;  this  lighthouse 
is  500  yards  S.  21°  W.  (S.  44°  W.  mag.)  from  the  outer  lighthouse. 

The  outer  lighthouse  is  on  the  outer  end  of  the  breakwater  on  the 
west  side  of  (Jrenville  Harbor  entrance.  The  upper  part  of  the  tower 
is  painted  white;  the  posts  and  framework  below  are  brown.  The  light 
is  a  fixed  red  light. 

The  lights  are  visible  through  an  arc  of  about  110  degrees  between 
Sims  Point  on  the  west  and  the  sand  hills  on  the  east  side  of  the  har- 
bor, and  should  be  visible  7  miles. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Grenville  Harbor  at 
Ch.  10m.  by  the  mean  of  the  morning  and  evening  tides,-  the  morning 
tide  being  the  earlier  and  highest  during  the  summer  months.  Ordinary 
springs  rise  3^  feet,  neaps  2  feet,  unless  increased  by  easterly  winds. 

Directions.— The  lights  kept  in  line  bearing  S.  21°  W.  (S,  44°  W. 
mag.)  lead  in  the  best  water  over  the  bar,  but  the  inner  light  must  be 
opened  eastward  of  the  outer  light  when  abreast  of  Sims  Point,  to 
avoid  the  rocky  ledge  off  that  point. 

Caution. — Strangers  should  not  attempt  to  enter  the  harbor  without 
a  pilot,  and  the  lead  is  required,  especially  off  Sims  Point. 

Cape  Tryon,  IJ  miles  NW.  of  Grenville  Harbor,  is  a  remarkable  cliff 
of  red  sandstone,  110  feet  high.  The  coast  between  Cape  Tryon  and 
Bichmond  Bay  is  nearly  straight,  and  free  from  detached  dangers;  but 
the  shallow  wat'^r  runs  out  a  considerable  distance,  and  a  large  ship 
should  not  approach  nearer  than  the  depth  of  7  fathoms. 

Richmond  Bay  is  of  great  extent,  running  in  about  10  miles  to  the 
southward,  and  crossing  the  island  to  within  2^  miles  of  the  waters  of 
fiedeque  Harbor.  It  contains  seven  islands  and  a  great  number  of 
creeks  or  rivers,  some  of  which  are  navigable  lor  vessels  of  consider- 
able burden,  and  all  of  them  by  small  craft  and  boats.  Grand  Biver, 
which  is  the  principal  inlet,  can  be  ascended  in  boats  to  the  bridge,  a 
distance  of  7  or  8  miles. 

There  are  fine  settlements  at  Grand  Biver,  and  also  at  Port  Hill,  in 
the  NW.  part  of  the  bay  within  Lennox  Island,  and  where  several 
vessels  load  every  year.    Thero  is  an  Indian  church  and  settlement  on 


u. 


MALPEQUE  HARBOR. 


147 


whicli  dis- 

g  into  two 
leir  heads. 
s,  are  navi- 
stance  of  0 
ile  country 
idon,  where 
rn  shore,  1^ 
J  its  steeple, 
entrance  to 
35  feet  high, 
is  lighthouse 
tthouse. 
yater  on  the 
of  the  tower 
n.    The  light 

rrees  between 
'e  of  the  har- 

lle  Harbor  at 
>  the  morning 
hs.  Ordinary 
terly  winds. 
W.  (S.  44°  W. 
light  must  be 
lims  Point,  to 

larbor  without 

it. 

emarkable  cliff 

ipe  Tryon  and 

1  dangers;  but 

d  a  large  ship 

10  miles  to  the 
■  the  waters  of 
•eat  number  of 
)l8  of  consider- 
Grand  River, 
[o  the  bridge,  a 

It  Port  Hill,  in 
where  several 
settlement  on 


Lennox  Island,  but  it  can  not  be  seen  from  the  sea.  Tbere  are  also 
large"  settlements  at  the  head  of  the  bay,  where  the  churches  of  St. 
Kleanor  and  Miscouche  are  seen  on  the  ridge  which  separates  its  waters 
from  those  of  the  Straits  of  Northumberland. 

Ice. — The  bay  is  usually  frozen  over  about  December  15,  and  the 
harbor  ice  breaks  up  about  April  1.  At  that  date  tield  ice  drives  the 
harbor  ice  back,  and  the  ice  does  not  disappear  until  May  1.  The  bay 
is  completely  closed  from  about  December  10  to  May  1. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Richmond  Bay  at  fih ; 
springs  rise  3  feet,  neaps  2  feet. 

Malpeque  Harbor,  which  is  within  the  eastern  entrance  of  Rich- 
mond Bay,  has  12  feet  over  its  outer  bar  .at  low  water  and  15  feet  at 
high  water  in  ordinary  spring  tides,  together  with  depth  and  space 
enough  within  for  a  large  number  of  vessels. 

A  competent  pilot,  or  a  chart  on  a  large  scale,  could  alone  enable  any- 
one to  navigate  a  ship  through  the  various  channels  and  inlets  of  this 
bay.  The  following  remarks  and  directions  will,  therefore,  be  confined 
to  the  principal  harbor  in  its  entrance. 

The  principal  entrance  to  the  harbor  is  to  the  southward  of  Billhook 
or  Fish  Island,  and  between  it  and  Royalty  Sand,  which  dries  out  a 
long  h  mile  from  Royalty  Point.  The  ground  is  good,  in  the  usual 
iiiu'horage.  Just  within  this  entrance,  the  bar  outside  preventing  any 
son  from  coming  in,  and  the  Horseshoe  Slioals  sheltering  them  from 
wesferly  winds  down  the  bay.  The  other  entrance,  to  the  NW.  of 
Billhook  Island,  is  called  the  West  Crully,  and  is  so  narrow  and  intri- 
cate as  to  be  only  fit  for  boats  or  very  small  craft,  although  it  has  a 
depth  of  {)  feet  over  its  dangerous  bar  of  sand,  which  is  IJ  miles  out 
fr(»m  the  shore.  There  will  be  no  probability  of  this  being  mistaken 
f(»r  the  main  entrance,  even  if  the  buoys  are  gone,  if  it  be  remembered 
that  the  main  or  ship  channel  is  to  the  SE.  of  all  the  sand  bars,  includ- 
ing Billhook  Island,  and  between  them  and  the  red  sandstone  cliffs  of 
Cape  Aylesbury,  the  SE.  point  of  the  bay. 

Malpeque,  which  has  given  its  name  to  the  harbor,  is  one  of  the 
oldest  settlements  on  Prince  Edward  Island,  and,  with  its  church,  an 
excellent  landmark,  and  the  Roman  Catholic  college,  with  its  two  spires 
to  the  eastward,  stand  on  the  neck  of  land  between  Darnley  Inlet  and 
March  Water,  2^  miles  south  from  the  entrance  of  the  bay. 

Railway. — There  is  a  railway  station  here. 

Supplies. — Abundance  of  fresh  provisions  may  be  obtained  at  Mal- 
peipie,  but  water  can  only  be  procured  from  wells  (1860). 

Lights. — Two  leading  lights  are  exhibited  at  Darnley  Point,  eastern 
side  of  entrance  to  Malpeque  Harbor. 

The  front  or  low  light  is  a  fixed  red  light,  40  feet  from  high  water, 
and  should  be  visible  7  miles. 

The  rear  or  high  light,  S.  10°  W.  (S.  33°  W.  mag.),  447  yards  from 
the  front  light,  is  a  fixed  red  light,  elevated  65  feet,  visible  7  miles. 


148 


PRINCE   EDWARD   ISLAND — NORTH    COAST. 


1«-'^ 


The  lights  are  showu  from  opeu  framed  towers  painted  white,  and  25 
feet  high. 

The  lights  can  be  seen  between  the  bearing  of  8.  43°  W.  (8.  66°  W. 
mag.)  to  along  the  North  Bar  at  the  entrance. 

The  lights  decrease  in  power  as  the  line  of  range  is  departed  from, 
and  when  not  in  range  must  be  used  as  guides  to  small  boats  only. 

Two  Axed  green  lights,  visible  3  miles  from  a  range  for  Darnley 
fiasin.  The  front  tower  is  on  the  west  side  of  the  basin  and  south  of 
the  entrance.  The  rear  tower  is  380  feet  8. 14°  E.  (8. 9°  W.  mag.)  ftom 
front  tower.  In  line  they  lead  in  with  4  or  5  feet  low  water.  Strangers 
should  not  attempt  the  entrance. 

Malpeque  Leading  Lights. — The  main  light  is  exhibited  from  a 
square,  white  lighthouse,  46  feet  high,  on  Billhook  or  Fish  Island, 
north  side  of  entrance  to  Malpeque  Harbor.  The  low  light  is  shown 
from  a  white  open  framework  building,  22  feet  high,  8.  86°  E.  (8.  63° 
E.  mag.)  100  yards  from  the  main  light.  They  are  fixed  white  lights, 
elevated,  respectively,  50  and  18  feet  above  high  water,  visible  12  and  6 
miles.  The  lights  in  line  show  the  channel  over  the  bar.  The  outer 
light  is  liable  to  be  moved  to  suit  shifting  of  the  channel. 

Buoy. — A  buoy,  painted  black,  with  N.  P.  in  white  letters,  is  moored 
in  4  fathoms  northward  of  the  bar  iit  entrance  to  Richmond  Bay. 

Ice. — The  harbor  does  not  close  until  field  ice  drifts  in,  abont  Jhe 
middle  of  January,  and  opens  only  when  the  field  ice  disappears,  about 
the  middle  of  May.  It  is  completely  closed  from  about  February  1  to 
May  1.  The  first  vessel  arrives  about  the  middle  of  May,  and  the  last 
one  leaves  about  the  middle  of  December. 

The  Bar  of  Malpeque  Harbor  runs  out  eastward  2^  miles  from  Bill- 
hook Island,  and  then  turns  to  the  southward,  so  as  to  join  the  shore  to 
the  eastward  of  Cape  Aylesbury.  It  is  of  sand  thinly  and  irregularly 
spread  upon  sandstone,  the  rock  being  in  many  places  quite  bare.  It 
is  exceedingly  dangerous  in  bad  weather,  when  all  signs  of  a  channel 
are  obliterated  by  heavy  breakers.  The  northern  part  of  the  bar,  for 
1^  miles  out  eastward  from  Billhook  Island,  is  very  shallow,  there  being 
ii)  some  places  only  4  feet  at  low  water;  but  the  extent  of  this  shallow 
part  is  well  shown  by  a  good  cross  mark,  namely, the  church  at  Malpeque 
and  Darnley  Point  in  line,  bearing  S.  10°  W.  (8.  33°  W.  mag.). 

The  narrowest  part  of  the  ship  channel  Just  within,  or  to  the  west- 
ward of  the  above-named  cross  mark,  is  200  yards  wide,  and  carries  4 
fathoms  water.  The  inner  bar  of  sandstone,  and  with  19  feet  at  low 
water,  is  ^  mile  farther  in,  and  has  in  general  a  buciy  upon  it. 

Directions.— Darnley  Point  lights  in  line,  8. 10°  W.  (8. 33°  W.  mag.), 
lead  to  the  black  can  buoy  at  the  eastern  passage  over  the  bar,  entrance 
to  Mal/oque  Harbor.  Vessels  entering  should  bring  the  lights  in  line 
outside  the  bar  and  steer  in,  keeping  them  in  line  until  Billhook  Island 
lights  are  in  line  N.  86°  W.  (N.  63°  W.  mag.);  then  alter  course  to  the 
westward,  keeping  the  Billhook  Island  lights  in  line  as  far  as  the  mid- 
channel  buoy,  above  which  the  course  is  marked  by  the  harbor  buoys. 


an 
is 

riv 
dis 
ale 
is  i 


>4>l;.' 


''^^^-r.-^r^-r 


'•^■i«s«ii«,4iA*B*«>as(hK«8S 


ffl@EffiJ 


Ssawjiitsfeai^atiji '    iM^smiS^^Ai 


MALPEQUE  HARBOR — CASCUMPEQUE  BAY. 


149 


Ite,  anrt  26 

(8.  66°  W. 

irted  from, 
ts  only, 
or  Darnley 
nd  south  of 
.mag.)  from 
Strangers 

ited  from  a 
Fisb  Island, 
rbt  is  sbown 
6o  B.  (S.  63° 
white  lights, 
Able  12  and  6 
r.    The  outer 

ers,  is  moored 
nd  Bay. 
in,  about  -he 
appears,  about 
February  1  to 
ir,  and  the  last 

liles  from  Bill- 
in  the  shore  to 
nd  irregularly 
quite  bare.    It 
IS  of  a  channel 
of  the  bar,  for 
)w,  there  being 
of  this  shallow 
chatMalpeque 

.  mag.). 

or  to  the  west- 

e,  and  carries  4 

19  feet  at  low 

»on  it. 

^.33oW.mag.), 
le  bar,  entrance 
ae  lights  in  line 
Billhook  Island 
[er  course  to  the 
far  as  the  mid- 
Larbor  buoys. 


Cantion. — The  bar  has  shifted  since  the  survey  of  1845,  and  the 
buoys  are  not  to  be  depended  on.  Strangers  should  not  attempt  to 
cross  the  bar  without  a  pilot,  or  examination  if  compelled  to  enter  the 
harbor  without. 

Anchorage. — Vessels  may  anchor  outside  the  bar  in  from  .">  to  7 
fathoms,  sand  bottom,  to  wait  for  a  pilot;  and  in  the  event  of  the  wind 
or  tide  failing,  the  anchorage  is  considered  tolerably  safe  between  the 
inner  bar  and  the  entrance,  and  probably  is  so  witli  any  wind  that  would 
prevent  a  vessel  from  running  in,  but  the  holdinjj^  ground  is  not  good 
there,  and  should  only  be  trusted  in  line  summer  weather.  Within  the 
harbor  the  bottom  is  of  sand  and  clay,  and  a  vessel  may  choose  any 
depth  from  3  to  10  fathoms,  the  deepest  water  being  close  otf  the  point 
of  the  Royalty  Sand,  the  shoal  water  being  marked  by  a  can  buoy. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  chancre,  in  Malpeque  Harbor  at 
6h. ;  springs  rise  3  feet,  neaps  2  feet,  but  the  rise  is  so  irregular  that 
it  would  not  be  safe  to  count  u^xtn  a  rise  of  more  than  2  feet  on  any 
particular  day.  Northeast  winds  cause  high  tides,  westerly  winds  pro- 
duce the  contrary  effect.  The  morning  tides  are  the  highest  during 
the  summer  months.  The  rate  of  the  tides  is  strongest  in  the  entrance 
and  off  the  point  of  the  Royalty  Sand,  running  in  spring  tides  2^  knots. 
In  the  ship  channel  from  the  entrance  to  the  bar  the  rate  is  li}  to  2 
knots.  Within  the  bay  the  tides  are  in  general  much  weaker,  seldom 
amounting  to  one  knot. 

Coast — From  the  principal  entrance  to  Richmond  Bay  the  coast 
trends  NW.  20  miles  to  Cascumpeque  Harbor,  the  intervening  shore 
being  formed  exclusively  of  sand  bars  and  sand  beaches,  from  which 
the  shallow  water  extends  %  piile  to  3  fathoms  and  one  mile  to  5  fath- 
oms. In  the  above-named  distance  there  are  two  openings  through 
the  sand  bars,  Conway  and  Cavendish  Inlets,  which  afford  shelter  to 
boats  and  are  distant  11  miles  and  7  miles,  respectively,  from  the  light- 
house at  Cascumpeque. 

Boats  can  enter  Richmond  Bay  by  Conway  Inlet,  passing  to  the 
westward  of  Lennox  Island  at  high  water. 

Lights. — The  leading  lights  at  Conway  Inlet,  north  side  of  entrance, 
are  exhibited  from  white  buildings,  30  and  20  feet  high  and  66  yards 
apart.  The  lights  are  fixed  white,  at  an  elevation  of  26  and  16  feet, 
and  should  be  visible  10  and  8  miles.  The  position  of  the  outer  light 
is  altered  to  meet  changes  in  the  channel. 

Cascumpeque  Bay  is  of  great  extent,  and  broken  into  inlets  or 
rivers  which  penetrate  the  country  in  a  variety  of  directions  and  to  the 
distance  of  many  miles.  The  chart  must  be  referred  to  for  these,  and 
also  for  the  boat  communications  within  the  sand  bars,  when  the  tide 
is  in,  southward  to  Richmond  Bay  and  northward  to  Kildare  River. 

Cascumpeque  Harbor,  sometimes  called  Holland  Harbor,  is  known 
by  the  remarkable  high  sand  hills  3^  miles  to  the  southward  of  its 
entrance;  these  are  the  remains  of  a  range  of  sand  hills  formerly  known 


:,-j„t,0ini 


ii) 


V 

•^ 


>  11" 


!l 


iP 


4 


160  PRINCE   EDWARD  ISLAND— NORTH  COAST. 

a«the  seven  SisterB,  and  are  50  feet  high.    There  are  no  high  sand 
liills  to  the  northward  of  the  harbor.  v,„t.ween  two  sand  bars 

The  entrance  to  this  harbor  is  \»«  f -^'^^/Z^^^' .^^'j^'J^Xer  which 

pass  close  to  the  «««th^*'"d"^-  ^  .    ...  ^^^^^  ^nd  between  sand  cov- 
The  channel,  from  ^^^-J.e^^^  ,f o^al' ^ide,  and  affords  tolerable 

anchorage  m  from  -i  to  ^s  mtuu  j^^ 

just  outside  the  entrance,  where  the  ««°d  ""J^  W^  in  the  sand 
water     There  is  a  second  entrance  into  the  bay,  the  Deacn  m 

C^Mc.  was  at  ..t  e«^;*^„^^%tn  rfnirfn-^LC 

ward  of  the  harbor.  .  ^  g  ^    Island  is 

•r  --i.*     Th«  liifhthouse  erected  on  the  ow.  pari,  m  oi»u«j 
Light-The  "g^;^'^'*''*;*'      ,    ,  .,   y  i^t  i8  exhibited  at  an  elevation 

rrr"irrrr"ler"or<.Utaoc»  «f  ..  »....    TM, 
rrorttt„rorbt:ruC''tl.e  »«...  ».<.  of  t^.  next  wha.f  .a^t 

"^^htZiWlng  .tand.  o»  a  st«et  of  th.  village,  1,100  f«>t  8.  72"  W. 

?h:t^;  a;d  a  dlamond..(,aped  day  bea«,-  at  the  head  of  each  n-ast, 

%t?r™:ri"r„CNE.  p.rt  of  savage  ^^^^^ 
feet  Wgr  The  light  is  3o  feet  above  high  water  and  should  be  visible 

'  Cbt'k  ml^t  :LrL  feet  S.  350  W.  (8.  58o  W  .ag  )  .W,m  *e 
J„t  o^e  and  fs  20  feet  high.    The  Ught  is  45  feet  above  h.gh  wate, 

"irr  It" tgh  LtT^  *:rH;:rOascn.pe,ne  na^bo. 
Tides.— it  18  nigu  >v<t     ,  ^  .    ^^j.  ^gguiar, 

::r.S;LTrt  ™^:hfbt;::^"g;rt'er  is  an  that  can  be  safely 


CA8CUMPEQUE   HARBOR. 


l&l 


ligh  sand 

sand  bars 
ver  which 
B8  li  miles 
rater,  in  a 
issels  must 

sand,  'iov- 
ds  tolerable 
berth  being 
s  dry  at  low 
in  the  sand 
y  HE.  gale, 
into  the  bay, 
to  the  south- 

ady  Island  is 
b  an  elevation 
I  miles.    This 

lor. 

J2  feet  above 

shown  from  a 
bea«on,  which 

,xt  wharf  east 

,  and  visible  6 
^ted  on  a  mast 
ries  a  slatwork 

Ifeet  S.  72°  W. 

Isavage  Island, 
The  lights  are 
a  small  hut  at 
of  each  mast, 

aland,  and  is  22 
lould  be  visible 

mag.)  from  the 
Lve  high  water 

Impeque  Harbor 

,  is  not  res«la'*» 
Ut  can  be  safely 


reckoned  upon  on  any  particular  day,  unless  in  'strong  easterly  winds, 
v«iiich  cause  a  nab  of  a  foot  or  more  in  all  the  harbors  of  this  coast. 

Note. — It  must  also  be  observed  that  the  rise  given  is  always  that  of 
the  best  tide  in  the  24  hours,  and  that  the  morning  spring  tides  are  the 
highest  during  the  summer  months.  It  frequently  happens  at  or  near 
the  springs  that  the  evening  tides  rise  only  a  few  inches,  and  some- 
times they  entirely  disappear,  causing  single  day  tides  for  a  short  time, 
as  at  Bichibucto  and  Shediac. 

The  morning  spring  tides  are  also  the  earliest  during  the  summer 
months,  as,  for  instance,  at  Cascunipeque  beacon  at  the  full  and  change, 
in  July,  when  the  morning  high  water  occurred  at  4h.  Ii2m.  and  the 
evening  tide  at  (»h.  58m.,  the  mean  being  5h.  40m.,  as  given  above  and 
in  all  other  similar  cases. 

At  or  near  the  neaps  the  two  tides  of  the  same  day  become  nearly 
equal  in  time  and  rise  for  a  short  time.  There  is  reason  to  believe  that 
the  diurnal  inequality  of  the  tides  ceases  for  a  time  soon  after  the 
equinox,  and  that  it  is  reversed  in  winter,  but  the  ice  has  hitherto  pre- 
vented observations  during  that  season.  These  remi<rk.s  apply  to  all 
the  harbors  of  this  island  and  of  the  neighboring  provinces;  their 
importance  to  vessels  seeking  refuge  and  taking  the  dangerous  bars  in 
bad  weather  will  be  evident.  The  rate  uf  the  tidal  streams  in  the 
entrance  of  Oascumpeque  Harbor  is  in  general  1^  knots,  but  frequently 
over  4. 

Ice. — The  harbor  is  usually  frozen  over  about  January  3  and  is  clear 
of  harbor  ice  about  April  6,  being  completely  closed  between  those 
dates;  field  ice  drifts  in  about  January  4  and  disappears  about  May  10. 
The  first  vessel  arrives  about  April  28  and  the  last  leaves  about 
December  20. 

Directions. — As  the  bars  of  Gascumpeque  Harbor  shift  so  much,  a 
pilot  would  be  indispensable  to  a  stranger  visiting  it. 

Vessels  iipproaching  Oascumpeque  Harbor  stand  along  the  shore 
until  they  bring  the  Savage  Island  range  lights  in  one.  They  then 
keep  the  alignment  S.  35°  W.  (8.  58°  W.  mag.),  until  the  red  range 
lights  near  the  wharves  are  brought  in  one;  these  lead  S.  72°  W.  (N, 
85°  W.  mag.),  directly  up  the  harbor. 

The  large  black  can  buoy  moored  outside  the  bar  will  be  found  in  5 
fathoms  of  water,  a  short  distance  south  of  the  alignment  of  the  Savage 
Island  range  lights.  At  the  intersection  of  the  Savage  Island  range 
and  the  Wharves  range  the  red  cask  buoy  marking  Maloues  Point  is 
moored.  There  avo  11  feet  at  low  water  on  the  bar  in  the  alignment  of 
Savage  Island  range  lights. 

In  strong  easterly  gales  the  bar  is  covered  with  a  continuous  line  of 
heavy  breakers. 

The  best  landmark  in  this  neighborhood  is  the  Roman  Catholic  church 
at  Tignish,  the  lofty  spire  of  which  is  distinguished  before  any  other 
feature  of  the  coast  from  the  eastward  and  is  visible  also  to  vessels  ou 
the  west  side  of  North  Point. 


-I  tw 


'.'ifj : 


''ii'i: 


152 


PRINCE   EDWARD   ISLAND— NORTH   COAST. 


Anchorage. — There  is  good  anchorage  off  the  bar  in  fine  weatner  in 
6  or  6  fiithoniM,  Hand  bottom.  Within  the  entrance  the  harbor  han 
plenty  of  water  and  a  clear  channel,  which,  after  running  in  one  mile 
to  the  westward,  tnniH  to  the  southward  within  Savage  Island  and 
between  it  and  Hill  Point,  where  there  is  a  wharf  at  which  vossels  gen- 
erally loa<l  (1860). 

Alberton,  a  small  town,  rising  in  importance,  is  on  the  west  shore  of 
Ca8ciunpe(|ue  Harbor.  There  is  a  wharf  here  in  connection  with  the 
railway.  The  churches,  courthouse,  and  buildings  generally  are  of 
wood  and  painted  white.    There  were  900  inhabitants  in  1881. 

The  United  States  is  represented  by  a  consular  agent. 

Tignish  River. — From  Cape  Kildare  to  the  north  point  of  Prince 
Edward  Island,  II  miles  north,  there  is  little  requiring  notice,  except- 
ing Tignish  River,  with  only  2  feet  of  water  in  its  narrow  sandy  entrance 
at  low  water,  and  affording  shelter  to  fishing  boats ;  and  where  also  there 
Is  a  Ashing  village  and  two  churches,  the  new  one  of  brick  (standing 
a  mile  to  the  eastward  of  the  old  one)  forming  with  its  spire  one  of  the 
best  landmarks  on  the  island.  About  a  mile  northward  of  the  entrance 
a  rocky  ledge  runs  off'  1^  miles,  with  no  more  than  3  fathoms  on  it  at 
low  water. 

The  shallow  water  extends  the  same  distance  off  Cape  Kildare,  which 
is  a  cliff  of  red  sandstone  30  feet  high,  with  the  land  about  it  red  and 
surmounted  by  clumps  of  trees;  and  generally  it  must  be  borne  in 
mind  that  there  are  rocky  and  irregular  soundings,  between  3  and  5 
fathoms,  all  along  this  part  of  the  coast,  frequently  extending  nearly 
2  miles  off  shore. 

Lights. — Leading  lights  at  Big  Tignish  Biver  entrance. 

The  high  light,  a  ilxed  white  light,  is  shown  from  a  square  building, 
painted  with  black  and  white  horizontal  bands.  The  lighthouse  is 
33  feet  high,  and  stands  on  the  beach  at  the  inner  end  of  the  north 
breakwater  pier.  The  light  is  35  feet  above  high  water,  and  should 
bo  visible  11  miles. 

The  low  light  is  a  fixed  red  tight,  elevated  18  feet,  and  visible  sea- 
ward 5  miles.  It  is  hoisted  on  a  pole  14  feet  high,  placed  on  the  outer 
end  of  the  north  breakwater  pier,  to  indicate  the  position  of  the  pier- 
head. The  light  bears  9.  73°  E.  (S.  50°  E.  mag.)  from  the  high  light, 
distant  620  feet. 

The  low  light  is  for  the  convenience  of  fishing  boats  and  light- 
dratt  vessels  only.  When  the  lights  are  in  line  they  lead  between  the 
breakwaters. 

North  Point  and  Light— <S!e«  page  130. 


at 
for 
W 
am 


NOSTHUMBEBLAND  STRAIT. 

A  ftill  description  of  Prince  Edward  Island  and  of  the  opposite 
coasts  of  Nova  Scotia  and  New  Brunswick  having  been  given,  it  now 
only  remains  to  offer  a  few  general  remarks  respecting  Northumberland 
Strait.    There  are  few  places  in  which  such  precision  of  knowledge  is 


fil, 


NORTHUMBERLAND   STRAIT. 


153 


refttner  in 
arbor  lia» 
a  one  mile 
Bland  and 
:388el8  geu- 

)8t  sbore  of 
n  with  the 
ally  are  of 
il. 

t  of  Prince 
;ice,  except- 
dy  entrance 
re  also  there 
ik  (standing 
e  one  of  the 
the  entrance 
jms  on  it  at 

ildare,  which 
ut  it  red  and 
be  borne  in 
ireen  3  and  5 
nding  nearly 


are  building, 
ghthouse  is 
of  the  north 
and  should 

id  visible  sea- 
on  the  outer 
n  of  the  pier- 
he  high  light, 

its  and  light- 
between  the 


the  opposite 
given,  it  now 
orthuniberland 
f  knowledge  is 


more  requisite  than  in  this  strait,  which  presents  a  confined  navigation 
16()  miles  in  length,  and  which,  at  Gape  Turnientine,  the  narrowest 
part,  is  but  7  niiles  from  .shore  to  shore,  and  only  .'>^  miles  wide,  if  only 
i:he  navigable  breadth  is  reckoned  between  the  shoals. 

The  description  of  the  dangers  and  of  the  soundings  have  been  made 
very  full  in  consequence,  and  the  times  of  high  water  and  the  rii^e  <^ 
the  tides  in  the  various  harbors,  together  with  the  strength  of  the  tJidn 
streams  in  their  entrances,  have  also  been  given;  but  the  tides  of  the 
strait  are  so  peculiar  that  it  will  be  both  interesting  and  useful  to  add 
a  general  view  of  the  courije  of  the  tide  waves,  an<l  of  the  strength  and 
direction  of  the  streams  which  they  occasion. 

To  this  will  be  added  briefly  the  mode  of  proceeding  recommended 
to  be  adopted  in  a  vessel  running  through  the  strait  in  a  dark  night  or 
in  thick  weather  when  the  soundings  alone  can  safely  guide  her. 

Tidal  Streams. — It  will  be  convenient  to  divide  the  strait  at  Cape 
Tormentine  into  two  nearly  equal  portions,  distingui-shed  by  the  differ- 
ent set  of  their  tidal  streams  and  by  dift'erent  tide  waves,  which,  advanc- 
ing from  opposite  directions,  meet  in  the  central  part  of  the  strait. 
The  course  of  these  waves  appears  to  be  as  follows:  The  ]>rincipal  tide 
wave,  after  entering  the  gulf  between  Cape  Breton  and  Newfoundland, 
sends  off,  laterally,  waves  to  the  SW.,  on  either  side  of  the  Magdaleu 
Islands.  The  first  of  these,  the  eastern  wave,  coming  from  between 
those  islands  and  the  western  shore  of  Cape  Breton  Island,  arrives  at 
the  eastern  entrance  of  the  strait  soon  after  8  o'clock,  and  proceeds  to 
the  westward,  making  high  water  later  in  succession  from  east  to  west 
as  far  as  Pictou,  which  it  reaches  at  10  hours.  At  the  same  nominal 
hour,  but  12  hours  later,  the  other  or  western  wave  arrives  at  Gape 
Tormentine,  having  been  retarded  by  the  loug  detour  which  it  has 
taken  to  the  northward  and  westward  of  the  Magdalen  Islands  and 
by  the  great  extent  of  comparatively  shallow  water  which  it  has  passed 
over  in  its  subsequent  progress  to  the  SW.  This  ware  makes  high 
water  later  in  succession  at  places  along  the  eastern  coast  of  New 
Brunswick,  as  we  proceed  to  the  southward,  and  after  entering  the 
strait  from  NW.  to  SE.,  contrary  to  the  course  of  the  other  or  eastern 
wave. 

Thus  it  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Miscoa  at  about  2^  hours; 
at  Escuminac  Point  and  the  North  Point  of  Prince  Edward  Island, 
forming  the  western  entrance  of  the  strait,  soon  after  4  hour.s ;  at  the 
West  Point  of  Prince  Edward  Island  at  6  hours;  at  Shediac  at  8  hours, 
and  at  Cape  Tormentine  at  10  hours. 

When,  therefore,  the  eastern  wave  arrives  between  Pictou  and  the 
Wood  Islands,  the  western  part  of  the  preceding  tide  wave  arrives 
between  Cape  Tormentine  and  Cape  Traverse.  They  then  meet  and 
combine  to  make  high  water  at  the  same  hour,  namely,  10  hours,  or  a 
little  later  in  the  harbors,  all  over  the  central  portion  of  the  strait  from 
Pictou  to  Cape  Tormentine,  causing  also  an  amount  of  rise  of  the 
tides  everywhere  more  than  double,  and  in  some  of  the  harbors  nearly 


<^., 


■I 
^^1 


ii 


m 


■'Iff: 


IM 


NORTHUMBERLAND    8TBAIT. 


three  tiuies  m  great  as  that  which  occurs  at  either  entrance  of  the 
strait. 

The  direction  of  the  tidal  streams  corresponds  generally,  and  in  fine 
weather,  with  the  progress  of  the  tide  wave,  but  is  disturbed  occasion- 
alliF  by  strong  winds.  The  eastern  flood  streani  enters  the  strait  from 
lOe  NR.,  running  at  the  rate  of  2A  knots  round  the  east  point  of  Prince 
tll\vard  Island,  but  is  mucii  weaker  in  the  oiling  and  over  toward  the 
southern  shore.  It  runs  round  Cape  Bear,  and  with  an  increasing  rate 
along  the  land  to  the  vrestward;  is  strongest  in  the  deep  wafer  near 
the  land,  and  runs  at  its  extreme  rate  of  .'t  knots  close  past  the  Indian 
Rocks  and  Kifienian  Reef.  Losing  strength  as  it  proceeds  farther  to 
the  NW.,  it  is  quite  a  weak  stream  when  it  meets  the  other  Hood  stream 
off  the  Tryon  Shoals. 

This  eastern  flood  stream  is  not  so  strong  along  the  southern  or  Nova 
Scotia  shore,  unless  it  be  in  the  Caribou  Channel  for  a  short  space  near 
the  Caribou  Beef;  and  it  is  weak,  not  generally  exceeding  ^  knot,  in 
the  middle  of  the  strait. 

The  other  or  western  flood  stream  comes  from  tiie  northward,  along 
the  west  coast  of  Prince  Edward  Island,  sweeping  round  West  Point, 
and  running  strongest  in  the  deep  water  near  West  Reef,  where  its 
rate  is  2^  knots.  Over  toward  the  New  Brunswick  shore  its  rate  sel- 
dom exceeds  1^  knots,  and  this  is  its  average  speed  as  it  pursues  its 
course  to  the  SE.,  until  near  Cape  Tormentine,  where  the  strongest 
part  of  the  stream  runs  near  the  Jourimain  Shoals,  and  thence  to  the 
southward  round  and  over  the  dangerous  Tormentine  Beefs  with  a 
great  ripple,  and  at  tlu;  rate  of  3  knots. 

Aficr  passing  these  reefs,  part  of  it  curves  round  to  the  SW.  with 
decreasing  strength,  and  unites  with  the  other  flood  stream  in  Verte 
Bay,  whilst  the  remainder  is  lost  in  the  central  part  of  the  strait.  The 
ebb  stream,  generally  speaking,  pursues  a  contrary  course  to  the  flood, 
and  at  nearly  the  same  rates. 

From  this  account  of  the  tidal  streams,  it  appears  that  a  fast  sailing 
vessel,  under  favorable  circumstances,  might  enter  the  strait  with  the 
flood,  and,  arriving  at  Cape  Tormentine  soon  after  high  water,  there 
take  the  ebb,  and  thus  have  the  stream  with  her,  with  but  slight  inter- 
ruption from  one  end  of  the  strait  to  the  other.  Or,  a  vessel  beating 
with  the  flood  might  so  time  her  arrival  at  the  same  point  as  to  be 
able  to  continue  her  voyage  in  the  same  direction  with  the  ebb. 

The  tulal  streams  were  observed  in  general  to  change  their  directions 
soon  after  it  was  high  water  or  low  water  by  the  shore;  but  not  infre- 
(juently  there  were  exceptions  to  this  which  it  would  be  diflicult  to 
account  for  with  certainty.  Strong  winds  in  the  gulf  greatly  influence 
the  strength  and  direction  of  the  streams  in  the  strait,  as  well  as  the 
height  to  which  the  tides  rise;  moreover,  as  the  two  tide  waves  which 
meet  in  the  central  parts  of  the  strait  are  12  fiours  diflerent  in  age, 
so  they  are  in  consequence  of  unequal  heights,  owing  to  the  diurnal 


"mM 


I 


NORTHUMBERLAND   8TRAIT. 


165 


ranee  of  the 

,  and  in  fine 
lecl  occasion 
I  strait  from 
nt  of  Prince 
r  toward  the 
•reasing  rate 
p  water  near 
st  the  Indian 
i8  farther  to 
•  flood  stream 

;hern  or  Nova 
irt  space  near 
ing  4  knot,  in 

;hward,  along 

I  West  Point, 

eef,  where  its 

re  its  rate  sel- 

it  pursues  its 

the  strongest 

thence  to  the 

Reefs  with  a 

the  SW.  with 
ream  in  Verte 
le  strait.  The 
je  to  the  flood, 

t  a  last  sailing 
strait  with  the 
h  water,  there 
ut  slight  inter- 
vessel  beating 
point  as  to  be 
;he  ebb. 

their  directions 
;  but  not  infre- 
be  diflicnlt  to 
■eatly  influence 
,  as  well  as  the 
e  waves  which 
ifferent  in  age, 
to  the  diurnal 


inetiuality,  each  of  them  being  aUernately  and  in  turn  the  higliest, 
and  probably  occasioning  the  stronger  stream. 

But  it  would  reiiuire  a  long  series  of  siinnltaueous  observations  at 
ditferent  points,  and  continued  through  tlie  diflerent  seasons  of  the 
year,  to  reduce  to  order  or  to  explain  satisfactorily  the  seeming  irregu- 
larities thus  produced.  Nevertheless,  enough  remains  of  general  occur- 
rence during  the  summer  months  which  it  is  higlily  useful  for  the 
seamen  to  ivuow,  and  which  has  been  stated  in  const     leuce. 

Directions. — V'essels  bound  to  Miramichi  and  tlie  i>orts  in  North- 
umberland Strait  to  the  westward  of  Cape  Tormentine,  after  entering 
tlie  gulf  (m  either  side  of  the  Island  of  St.  Panl,  usuallj'  pass  to  the 
southward  of  the  Magdalen  Islands,  and  round  North  Point  of  Prince 
l-^dward  Island.  The  reef  off  this  last-named  point  is  exceedingly  dan- 
gcnms,  and  the  lead  should  be  kept  constantly  going  when  approaching 
it  at  night  or  in  foggy  weather,  bearing  in  mind  the  probability  of  hav- 
ing been  previously  set  to  the  southward  in  crossing  from  the  Magdalen 
Islands,  especially  if  the  wind  has  been  from  the  northward. 

Under  the  same  circumstances,  after  rounding  North  Point,  the  course 
should  be  shaped  well  to  the  westward,  so  as  to  insure  clearing  West 
Keef,  which  should  be  passed  by  the  lead,  running  along  the  edge  of 
the  bank  off  the  New  Brunswick  shore.  Proceeding  southeastward, 
after  having  passed  West  Reef,  the  lead  will  atlbrd  sufBcient  guid- 
ance along  either  shore,  reference  being  had  to  the  soundings  on  the 
chart,  until  the  vessel  is  near  the  narrow  part  of  the  strait  at  Cape 
Tormentine. 

Then,  if  bound  farther  eastward,  the  shore  of  Prince  Edward  Island 
should  be  preferred,  the  lights  and  soundings  on  that  side  being  quite 
sufficient  to  guide  the  vessel  past  Carleton  Head,  Cape  Traverse,  and 
more  particularly  Tryon  Shoals,  if  the  irregular  tides  of  the  latter  and 
the  frequent  set  of  the  ebb  stream  toward  them  be  remembered.  The 
tides,  however,  in  this  narrow  part  of  the  strait  are  not  very  strong 
along  the  Prince  Edward  Island  shore,  off  which  the  anchorage  is  good 
in  the  event  of  the  wind  failing,  whilst  on  the  opposite  side  there  is 
deep  water  and  very  strong  tides  close  to  Jourimain  and  Tormentine 
Reefs. 

If  the  wind  be  adverse,  or  scant  from  the  southward,  with  the  ebb 
tide  running,  a  stranger  had  better  not  attempt  this  narrow  i>assage 
at  night  or  when  the  land  can  not  be  seen.  Under  such  circumstances, 
it  IS  recommended  to  anchor  to  the  westward  of  Cape  Tormentine  till 
daylight  or  a  change  of  tide  renders  it  less  hazardous  to  proceed. 

Vessels  bound  to  ports  in  the  eastern  division  of  the  strait  enter 
the  gulf  either  through  the  Gut  of  Oanso  or  by  the  Island  of  St.  Paul. 
In  the  iirst  case,  the  bearing  of  the  light  at  the  northern  entrance  of 
the  Gut  will  guide  them  up  to  Cape  St.  George,  from  which,  if  bound 
to  Pictou,  there  will  be  no  difficulty  in  running  along  the  land  to  the 
westward,  if  due  attention  be  paid  to  the  soundings  in  the  chart,  and 


'L 


1^1 


ll ' 


i 
1  c 


'I; 


150 


NORTHUMBERLAND   STRAIT. 


afterwards  to  the  bearing  of  Piotou  Island  and  PIctou  Harbor  lights. 
If  tlie  weather  be  thiok,  or  the  light  not  seen,  beware  of  the  reef  oft 
the  cast  end  of  Piotou  Island,  which  shonld  not  then  be  ai)proa«!hed 
nearer  than  the  depth  of  10  fatiioms,  especially  if  the  Hood  tide  be 
running. 

Vessels  approaching  from  St.  Paul  Island,  and  entering  the  strait  at 
East  Point,  should  not  approach  the  latter  nearer  than  the  depth  of  L'O 
fathoms  in  thick  weather.  If  the  night  be  clear,  the  lights  on  Sea  Wolf 
and  Chetican  Islands,  East  Point,  and  Cape  St.  (ieorge  will  be  of  service. 

Cape  Bear  and  its  reef  should  not  be  rounded  in  less  than  15  fathoms, 
under  the  same  circumstances,  regard  being  liad  to  the  light  on  Pan- 
mure  Head,  and  then,  if  bound  anywhere  to  the  westward  of  Piotou,  the 
vessel  should  be  kept  more  over  toward  Piotou  Island  and  the  southern 
shore,  where  the  soundings  will  guide  her,  till  Indian  Kecks  and  Rifle- 
man Reef  are  passed.  The  lights  on  Prim  Point  and  Wood  Island  will 
greatly  assist  in  passing  the  last-named  danger,  after  which  the  lead 
will  again  afford  sufiBcient  guidance  along  the  Prince  Edward  Island 
shore,  past  Tryon  Shoals,  and  through  the  strait  to  the  northwestward. 

On  the  opposite  or  Nova  Scotia  shore,  westward  of  Piotou,  the 
principal  dangers  to  be  avoided  are  Middle  Shoals,  between  Piotou  and 
Island  Caribou,  Amet  Island  and  Shoals,  and  Waugh  Shoal.  The 
approach  to  all  these  is  sufficiently  indicated  in  thick  weather  by  the 
soundings,  and  therefore  a  constant  use  of  the  lead  and  a  careful  ref- 
erence to  the  chart  will  enable  the  intelligent  seaman  to  pass  them  at 
all  times  in  safety,  and  also  to  conduct  his  vessel  to  any  of  the  harbors 
of  this  coast,  where  pilots  may  readily  be  obtained. 


arbor  lights, 
the  reef  oft 
tvpproa<!hed 

iood  tide  be 

the  ntrait  at 
5  depth  of  L'O 
on  Sea  Wolf 
tie  of  service. 
1 15  fathoms, 
ght  on  Puu- 
)f  Pictoa,the 
the  sontheru 
ks  aud  Bifle- 
d  Islaud  will 
licb  the  lead 
[ward  Islaud 
rth  westward. 

Piotou,  the 
m  Fiotou  aud 

Shoal.  The 
tather  by  the 
a.  careful  ref- 
pass  them  at 
f  the  harbors 


J|K3S3Sa»|.- 


CHAPTER   VI. 

OCLF  OF  8T.  LAWRENCE,  WEST  COAST-MIUAMICHI  BAY  TO  OASPfi  BAY. 

NEW  nUUNSWICK. 

(H.  O.  Chart  No.  in!».) 

Bscnmiaac  Point,  the  SK.  point  of  Miramichi  Boy,  is  of  peat  unon 
a  very  low  sandstone  cliff,  and  is  wooded  with  spruce  trees  whTrh  i^Z 
a  very  dark  ground  for  the  white  lighthouse  ou^  endTL  i  so  T 
picuous  that  it  can  be  seen  at  tin.es  from  a  distance  «t  3  or  14  m  ,es" 
It  .8  so  difficult  especially  for  a  stranger,  to  distinguish  one  poh  of 
this  low  coast  ti-om  another,  that  this  lighthouse  is  very  uefu  to 
vessels  bound  t«  Mivamichi,  and  making  the  land  ftom  sea  It  In 
pomts  out  the  position  of  the  dangerous  Escumrnac  uZ  ^''" 

lig^tru'^ro%he'3'faf "''  '  ;r"'%^  *'"  "-^heastward  from  the 
water  '  *"**  ^*  '"''"'  *«  ^  ^**»^""^«  »t  low 

B«oy.-A  black  can  buoy  has  been  moored  at  the  outer  edce  of  tl.« 
shoa  ground  off  Escuminac  Point  in  5  fatho.ns  water'wTthlcu^aae 
.ghtijouse  bearing  S.  19o  w.  (S.  42o  w.  mag.),  2^  miles.  """'"' 

reiegraph.— There  is  a  telegraph  station  at  Escuminac  Villno-A  af 
about  3i  miles  westward  of  Escuniinac  light.      ""'"""""^  ^'"»^«'  ** 

Light-The  lighthouse  on  Escuminac  Point,  an  octagonal  tn.... 
painted  white,  and  58  feet  high,  exhibits,  at  anVevaJlTf  ?i  It  a 
fixed  white  light,  which  should  be  visible  U  miles.  ' 

«n^?*  '''^histle.-The  steam  whistle,  300  feet  west  of  the  lighthouse 

ZnTT^/""''''' '"  '""''^  "^  '^^^y  -««*her  will  be  sounded  for  "' 
seconds'duration,  with  silent  intervals  of  twentynine  seconds 
agnals.-There  is  a  telegraph  and  signal  station  at  the  lighthouse 
Miramichi  Bay  is  nearly  14  miles  wide  from  Escuminac  pS  t^  the 

Tmo:;:  to^irf "'  ^t'^  ^^^  '^ ""'«« '^-p  ^--  ihit  rectos 

pir  ^  ^  .      T"  ^''^'^''*'^  of  the  Miramichi,  between  Fox  and 

sandt^l    rt'.  ^""^  ^"^  *«  '"™^''  ^y  -  senucir^ular  range  of  low 
sandy  .slauds,  between  which  there  are  three  small  Dassa^es  Ji  nZ 

Severallobster  factories  have  been  built  between  Escuminac  Point 
and  Escuminac  Village,  the  most  conspicuous  at  Herring  Covf  and 

157 


158 


GULF   OF   ST.  LAWRENCE — WEST   COAST. 


i#. 


Winter  Portage,  distant  one  and  li  miles,  respectively,  from  Escuminac 
lighthouse. 

The  Roman  Catholic  church,  west  of  Escuminac  Village,  has  a  square 
tower,  and  is  a  conspicuous  object  from  the  eastward  when  north  of 
Escuminac  Point. 

Lights. — At  rather  more  than  a  mile  eastward  from  Huckleberry 
Gully  the  N"W.  or  outer  beacon  light  at  Preston  Beach  is  exhibited 
from  a  white  beacon;  the  SE.  or  inner  beacon  light  is  exhibited  from 
the  east  side  of  a  white  barn,  which  is  made  conspicuous  by  a  black 
band  painted  down  the  center  of  the  roof. 

The  lights  are  fixed  white;  the  front  light  is  52  tv  t  and  the  back  o;ie 
66  feet  above  high-water  mark;  each  light  should  be  visible  10  miles. 

In  line,  the  lights  lead  in  the  best  water  across  the  bar,  and  to  the 
Lump  buoy;  the  day  mark  for  the  same  purpose  is  the  black  band  in 
line  with  the  outer  beacon  bearing  S.  40°  E.  (S.  17°  E.  mag.). 

Huckleberry  Islanu  is  33  feet  above  high  water  and  one  mile  long. 
Fox  Gully,  between  Huckleberry  and  Fox  Islands,  and  Huckleberry 
Gully  are  almost  dry  at  low  water.  They  are  both  only  lit  for  boats  or 
very  small  craft,  and  the  channels  leading  from  them  to  the  westward, 
up  a  bay  of  the  main  within  Huckleberry  Island,  or  across  to  the  French 
River  and  village  (where  there  is  a  wooden  church  not  easily  dis- 
tinguished from  a  barn),  are  narrow  and  intricate,  between  flats  of 
sand,  mud,  and  erlgrass,  and  with  only  water  enough  for  boats. 

Buoy. — A  black  spar  buoy  in  2  feet  water  marks  the  entrance  to 
Huckleberry  Gully. 

Fox  Island,  3^  miles  long,  is  narrow  and  partially  wooded ;  it  is 
formed  of  parallel  ranges  of  sand  hills,  which  contain  embedded  drift 
timber,  and  have  evidently  been  thrown  up  by  the  sea  in  the  course  of 
ages.  These  islands  are  merely  sand  bars  on  a  large  scale,  and  nowhere 
rise  higher  than  60  feet  above  the  sea.  They  are  incapable  of  agricul- 
tural cultivation,  but  yet  they  abound  in  plants  and  shrubs  suited  to 
such  a  locality,  and  in  wild  fruits,  such  as  the  blueberry,  strawberry, 
and  raspberry.  Wild  fowl  of  various  kinds  are  also  plentiful  in  their 
season,  and  so  also  are  salmon,  which  are  taken  in  nets  and  weirs  along 
the  beaches  outside  the  island,  as  well  as  in  the  gullies. 

Lights. — At  the  NW.  end  of  Fox  Island,  three  fixed  white  lights  are 
exhibited  from  three  masts,  40,  38,  and  28  feet  high,  with  white  sheds 
at  their  bases.    The  liglits  should  be  visible  8  miles. 

No.  1  light  is  1,830  feet  from  the  NW.  jioiut  of  the  island,  and  is  47 
feet  above  high-water  mark. 

No.  2  light  is  1,051  feet  S.  73°  E.  (S.  50°  E.  mag.)  from  No.  1,  and  is 
46  feet  above  high- water  mark. 

No.  3  light  is  954  feet  S.  43°  W.  (S.  66°  W.  may.)  from  No.  1,  and  is  30 
feet  above  high-water  mark. 

Nos.  1  and  2  lights  in  line  lead  into  bid  Horseshoe  Channel. 

Nos.  1  and  3  lights  in  line  lead  through  Portage  Island  Channel. 

Nos.  2  and  3  lights  in  line  lead  to  the  upper  buoy  of  Horseshoe  Shoal. 


MTRAMICHI    BAY. 


159 


m  Escuminac 

,  has  a  aquare 
Then  north  of 

Huckleberry 
h  is  exlubited 
xliibited  from 
>us  by  a  black 

a  the  back  o:ve 
ible  10  miles, 
bar,  and  to  the 
black  baud  iu 

nag.). 

L  one  luile  loug. 
id  Huckleberry 
■  lit  for  boats  or 
0  tlie  westward. 
sstotheFrencli 
not  easily  dis 
>etweeu  flats  of 
"or  boats, 
tbe  entrance  to 

y  wooded;  it  is 

embedded  drift 

in  the  course  of 

lie,  and  nowhere 

pable  of  agricul- 

shrubs  suited  to 

ry,  strawberry, 

plentiful  in  their 

and  weirs  along 

white  lights  are 
with  white  sheds 

island,  and  is  47 
rom  No.  1,  and  is 
m>'o.l,andi8  30 

Channel, 
and  Cbannel. 
Horseshoe  Shoal. 


Swashway  Range  Lights. — Two  white  square  skeleton  towers,  with 
horizontal  slat  work  seaward  and  sheds  at  their  bases,  are  erected  on 
the  east  side  of  Fox  Island. 

A  fixed  white  light  is  exhibited  from  the  top  of  each  tower,  showing 
over  a  small  arc  on  each  side  of  the  line  of  range. 

The  front  tower  is  1 A  miles  from  the  south  end  of  the  island,  on  ground 
e  feet  above  the  sea  and  100  feet  back  from  the  coast  line.  The  tower 
is  40  feet  high  aud  the  light  47  feet  above  high-water  mark,  and  should 
be  visible  12  miles. 

The  back  tower  is  1,220  feet  S.  81°  W.  (N.  76°  W.  mag.)  from  the  front 
one.  It  is  71  feet  high.  The  light  is  72  feet  above  high-water  mark, 
and  should  be  visible  14  miles. 

These  lights  in  line  lead  from  the  deep  water  of  the  outer  bay  through 
the  Swashway,  with  (in  1891)  nowhere  less  than  2^  fathoms  water,  to 
the  buoys  in  the  ship  channel. 

Portage  Island  is  4^  miles  long,  narrow,  low,  and  pfirtly  wooded 
with  small  spruce  trees  and  bushes.  Portage  Island  has  extended  con- 
siderably southward.  Several  conspicuous  houses  have  been  built  ou 
the  island,  the  most  prominent  a  lobster  factory,  with  dwellings  attached, 
on  the  east  coast,  about  1^  miles  from  the  south  extreme  of  the  island; 
also  a  similar  group  of  buildings  on  the  west  coast,  at  the  same  dis- 
tance from  the  north  extreme.  The  island  shows  from  a  distance  in 
three  parts,  composed  of  clumps  of  trees  61  feet  high,  with  marshes 
between. 

Light. — The  lighthouse  on  the  SW.  end  of  Portage  Island,  42  feet 
high,  and  painted  white,  exhibits  at  an  elevation  of  45  feet  a  fixed  white 
light.    The  light  should  be  visible  12  miles. 

Miramichi  Bar  commences  from  the  SE.  end  of  Portage  Island,  and 
extends  across  the  main  entrance,  and  parallel  to  Fox  Island,  nearly  (i 
miles  "^E.  It  consists  of  sand,  and  has  not  more  than  one  or  2  feet  of 
water  over  it  in  some  parts  at  low  spring  tides.  Near  Portage  Island 
there  is  water  enough  over  it  for  small  vessels,  and  there  is  a  still 
deeper  part  near  its  SE.  end,  called  the  Swashway. 

Both  the  Lump  and  Spit  are  steep  shoals,  but  between  them  a  A'essel 
may  run  along,  or  even  work  on  the  SW.  side  of  the  channel  in  4  or  3 
fathoms  by  the  lead. 

On  the  opposite  or  NE.  side  of  the  channel  the  bar  is  extremely  steep. 
The  spit  of  Fox  Island  is  gradually  extending  out. 

Horseshoe  Shoal  consists  of  sand  and  gravel,  and  is  of  great  extent. 
The  least  water  on  it  is  3  feet,  and  it  Is  separated  from  the  shoal 
on  the  inner  side  of  Portage  Island  by  a  narrow  and  intricate  channel, 
which  is  seldom  or  never  used. 

Inner  Bar.— ^To  tlie  southward,  the  Horseshoe  is  separated  from  the 
shoal  which  Jionnects  Fox,  Egg,  and  Vin  Islands  by  the  very  narrow 
Ship  Channel  (over  the  Horseshoe  or  Inner  Bar),  which  is  only  400 
yards,  having  a  depth  of  18  feet  at  low  water  (in  1885). 


^11 


isi: 


i/ii    :■■ 


,K( 


4*ii' 


160 


GULF    OF   ST.  LAWBENCE — WEST    COAST. 


Caution. — Too  muuU  reliauce  must  not  be  placed  ou  the  buoyage,  as 
it  is  subject  to  alterations. 

Pilots. — Pilotage  is  compulsory  in  Miramichi  Bay  and  Biver.  Pilots 
are  generally  to  be  met  with  in  the  entrance  of  the  bay,  though  their 
district  extends  eastward  to  Magdalen  Islands,  southward  to  Kouchi- 
bouguac  River,  and  westward  to  Miscou  Point. 

Light  —The  lightvessel,  a  schooner,  between  Fox  and  Portage  Islands, 
exhibits  at  an  elevation  of  35  feet  a  fixed  red  light,  which  should  be  vis- 
ible 8  miles.    This  vessel  is  often  out  of  position  after  heavy  weather. 

Buoys. — A  black  spar  buoy  lies  in  17  feev  water  at  the  eq>stern 
entrance  to  the  channel,  near  Portage  Island,  for  small  vessels  between 
the  bars,  and  a  red  spar  buoy  is  moored  in  19  feet  in  the  same  channel, 
at  the  SW.  side  of  the  outer  part  of  the  bar.  These  buoys  are  nearly 
on  the  line  of  the  SW.  and  NE.  beacons,  near  the  north  point  of  P'ox 
Island. 

Bar  buoy,  '^  can  buoy,  painted  black  and  white,  in  vertical  stripes, 
and  numbered  one,  is  inoored  in  22  feet  water,  at  the  south  extreme  of 
the  outer  bar,  with  Escuminac  lighthouse  bearing  S.  75°  E.  (S.  52°  E. 
mag.),  distant  6^  miles,  and  south  extreme  of  Huckleberry  Island  8. 
20°  W.  (S.  43°  W.  mag.).  Close  south  of  this  buoy  there  is  a  depth  of 
32  feet,  the  western  limit  of  a  deep  channel  from  seaward. 

Lump  buoy,  a  can  buoy,  painted  black  and  numbered  2,  is  moored  in 
16  feet  water  on  a  shoal  between  the  8E.  extreme  of  the  bar  and  Fox 
Island,  and  lies  N.  43°  W.  (N.  20°  W.  ::;ag.),  1,800  yards  from  Bar  buoy. 
A  black  spar  buoy  lies  a  short  distance  northward  of  Lump  buoy. 

A  can  buoy,  painted  red  and  numbered  3,  lies  in  29  feet  water  N. 
34°  W.  (N.  11°  W.  mag.),  about  IJ  miles  from  Bar  buoy,  and  at  the 
SW.  angle  of  the  bar,  northward  of  the  Swashway.  The  water  shoals 
rapidly  to  11  feet  northward  of  this  buoy. 

Spit  buoy,  a  can  buoy,  painted  black  and  numbered  4,  is  moored  in 
18  feet  water  at  the  east  extreme  of  a  shoal  extending  one  mile  from 
the  northern  end  of  Fox  Island,  and  lies  with  Portage  Island  light- 
house bearing  N.  40°  W.  (N.  17°  W.  mag.),  distant  about  IJ  miles,  and 
NW.  extreme  of  Fox  Island  S.  59°  W.  (S.  82°  W.  mag.). 

A  can  buoy,  painted  red  and  numbered  5,  ia  moored  in  18  feet  water, 
bearing  S.  8()0  W.  (N.  71°  W.  mag.),  distant  1  f\;  miles  from  Spit  buoy, 
and  at  the  eastern  edge  of  the  inner  bar.  Three  buoys  similar  to  No.  5, 
numbered,  respectively,  6,  7,  and  8,  mark  the  channel  southward  of 
Horseshoe  Shoal,  Nos.  6  and  7  being  northeastward  and  No.  8  south- 
westward  of  the  lightvessel.  They  are  moored  in  18,  21,  and  20  feet 
water,  respectively. 

A  can  buoy,  painted  red  and  numbered  9,  is  moored  in  23  feet  water 
at  the  SW.  extreme  of  Horseshoe  Shoal. 

Three  spar  buoys,  painted  black,  lie  southeastward  of  Grandoon 
Island :  the  two  eastern  buoys  are  in  a  depth  of  16  feet,  and  the  western 
one  in  19  feet. 


eb« 

ext 


MIBAMICHI   BAY. 


161 


buoyage,  as 

ver.  Pilots 
hough  their 
I  to  Kouchi 

tage  Islands, 
hould  be  via- 
avy  weather, 
the  eastern 
jsels  between 
lame  channel, 
ys  are  nearly 
point  of  Fox 

i'tical  stripes, 
ith  extreme  oi 
5  E.  (S.  52°  E. 
erry  Island  S. 
e  is  a  depth  of 

d. 

2,  is  moored  in 
e  bar  and  Fox 
rom  Bar  buoy, 
imp  buoy, 
feet  water  N. 
oy,  and  at  the 
le  water  shoals 

4,  is  moored  in 
one  mile  from 
e  Island  light- 
it  1 J  miles,  and 

u  18  feet  water, 

from  Spit  buoy, 

similar  to  IJlo.  5, 

southward  of 

d  No.  8  south- 

21,  and  20  feet 

in  23  feet  water 

■d  of  Grandoon 
and  the  western 


Grandoon  buoy,  a  can  buoy,  painted  red  and  numbered  10,  is  nioorod 
in  25  feet  water  400  yards  southeastward  of  a  shoal  extending  from  the 
shore  eastward  of  Oak  Point. 

Anchorage. — There  is  good  anchorage,  iu  4  or  5  fathoms,  between 
the  Horseshoe  and  the  southern  end  of  Portage  Island,  where  vessels 
may  safely  anchor  during  the  summer  months. 

Within  the  buoy,  on  the  SW.  extreme  of  the  Horseshoe  Shoal,  is  the 
usual  place  where  vessels,  bound  to  sea,  anchor,  to  wait  for  a  wind  or 
high  tide,  to  enable  them  to  cross  the  inner  bar. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Portage  Island  light- 
house at  4h.  45m.;  springs  rise  5  feet,  neaps  1^  feet,  and  neaps  range 
J  foot.  Easterly  winds  cause  the  highest  tides  and  northwesterly 
winds  the  lowest. 

It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Miramichi  Bar  at  5h.  30m.; 
spring  rise  5  feet,  neaps  3  feet. 

From  observations  made  during  the  survey  of  1886,  the  flood  stream 
was  found  to  flow  strongest  through  Ship  Channel  toward  Portage 
Island,  whence  it  divided,  a  strong  stream  that  runs  southward  along 
the  west  coast  of  that  island  meeting  the  flood  stream  there.  The 
stream  then  decreases  in  strength  and  distributes  itself  generally  over 
Miramichi  Bay,  the  greatest  velocity  being  observed  in  the  channel 
south  of  Horseshoe  Shoal,  and  between  that  shoal  and  the  Portage 
Island. 

Southward  of  Horseshoe  Shoal  the  ebb  stream  runs  in  the  direction 
of  the  channel  straight  to  seaward,  its  velocity  gradually  diminishing 
as  the  bay  is  reached.  It  is  joined  by  a  stream  running  down  the  west 
side  of  Portage  Island,  which  deflects  it  sligiitly  to  the  southward. 
The  stream  down  Ship  Channel  is  not  very  strong,  and  rv.ins  in  the  line 
of  that  channel.  There  is  scarcely  any  ebb  strtiam  ea- ;  >  ard  of  the 
Bar  buoy. 

The  greatest  velocity  of  tidal  stream  ascertained  near  IvUrainichi  Bay 
was  2^  miles  an  hour. 

At  the  anchorage  south  of  Portage  Island  the  ohb  stream  makes 
about  an  hour  after  high  water,  and  runs  7  hours,  whilst  tho  flood 
stream  begins  about  IJ  hours  after  low  water,  and  runs  5J  hours,  with 
about  ^  hour  slack  water  between  each  tide. 

DirectionB. — The  bar  of  Miramichi  should  never  be  attempted  by  a 
vessel  of  large  draft,  or  by  persons  not  thoroughly  acquainted  with  it, 
without  a  branch  pilot;  but  in  case  of  emergency  proceed  as  follows: 
Observing,  first,  that  if  the  lighthouse  on  Escumiuac  Point  has  been 
sighted  too  late  in  the  day  to  run  in  before  dark,  the  vessel  must  stan  J. 
off  and  on  till  daylight,  coming  into  no  less  than  12  fathoms  water, 
especially  with  an  easterly  wind. 

In  heavy  easterly  gales  in  the  fall  of  the  year,  especially  during  the 
ebb  tide,  there  is  a  dangerous  and  heavy-breaking  sea  on  the  banks 
extending  from  Fox  and  Huckleberry  Islands,  which  has  in  several 
1151 11 


162 


aULF   OF  ST,  LAWRENCE — WEST  COAST. 


'I  t> 


instances  proved  fatal  to  vessels,  rendering  them  unmanageable,  so 
that  they  have  been  cast  ashore  on  the  islands. 

To  avoid  this  difficult  part,  the  Swashway  is  used  by  the  pilots  as 
being  more  direct  with  vessels  of  suitable  draft. 

Escuminac  Point,  having  been  made,  should  be  rounded  in  5  fathoms 
by  day  and  10  fathoms  by  night,  or  at  distances  of  2^  and  4  miles, 
respectively;  thence  steer  for  the  Bar  buoy,  which  should  be  passed 
close-to  on  its  south  side,  and  immediately  alter  course  to  bring  tlie 
beacons  or  lights  at  Preston  Beach  in  line,  bearing  8. 40°  E.  (S.  17°  E. 
mag.). 

Keep  the  Preston  Beach  beacons  or  lights  in  line  until  the  Swashway 
beacons  or  lights  are  also  in  line,  bearing  S.  81°  W.  (N.  76°  W.  mag.); 
then  steer  N.  54°  W.  (N.  31°  W.  mag.)  for  3  miles,  which  will  lead  to 
the  Spit  buoy.  Continue  that  course  until  the  lightvessel  at  the  inner 
bar  bears  S.  72°  W.  (N.  85°  W.  mag.),  when  the  spit  off  Fox  Island  will 
be  cleared,  and  a  course  may  be  steered  for  No.  5  buoy,  at  the  eastern 
edge  of  the  inner  bar.  With  a  long  vessel,  buoys  5, 6,  and  7  should  be 
brought  in  line  before  reaching  No.  5  buoy,  and  then  to  obtain  the 
deepest  water  in  the  channel,  18  feet,  vessels  should  pass  quite  close  to 
the  buoys  and  on  the  south  side  of  them.  From  No.  7  buoy  steer  for 
No.  8  buoy,  and  thence  for  No.  9,  at  the  southwestern  extreme  of  Horse- 
shoe Sh(;al.  From  No.  9  buoy  steer  N.  82°  W.  (N.  59°  W.  mag.)  to  the 
eastern  extreme  of  Oak  Channel,  passing  600  yards  northward  of  the 
southeastern  spar  buoy.  Not  more  than  16  feet  at  low  water  will  be 
found  over  the  flats  southeastward  of  Oak  Channel.  There  are  only  15 
feet  for  a  short  distance  in  the  direct  line  from  No.  9  buoy  to  the  south- 
eastern spar  buoy,  but  the  mud  is  so  soft  that  with  a  strong  fair  wind 
vessels  can  force  their  way  when  drawing  2  feet  more  water  than  the 
apparent  depth. 

From  the  eastern  end  of  OaK  Channel  the  course  is  S.  50°  W.  (S.  73° 
W.  mag.)  to  Grandooii  buoy,  passing  close  north  of  the  northwestern 
spar  buoy;  or  if  the  spar  buoy  be  seen  steer  for  it,  and  then  for  Gran- 
doon  buoy.  Pass  close  southward  of  Grandoon  buoy,  and  then  alter 
course  to  S.  72°  W.  (N.  85°  W.  mag.)  until  Oak  Point  beacons  are  in 
line,  bearing  N.  30°  E.  (N.  53°  E.  mag.) ;  keep  these  beacons  in  line 
astern  past  Musselbed  buoy,  and  up  to  Narrows  buoy. 

The  mark,  Black  Brook  mill  chimney,  on  St.  Andrew  Point,  open 
north  of  the  trees  on  Sheldrake  Island,  now  leads  over  13  feet  water 
only,  and  Sheldrake  Island  lights  in  line  over  15  feet.  The  shoal  south, 
westward  of  Sheldrake  Island  has  apparently  extended. 

Black  Brook  mill  is  on  St.  Andrew  Point,  and  has  a  large  chimney, 
which  shows  plainly  from  Grandoon  buoy. 

The  Inner  Bay  of  Miramichi  is  of  great  extent,  being  about  13 
miles  long  from  its  entrance  at  Fox  Island  to  Sheldrake  Island  (where 
the  river  may  properly  be  said  to  commence),  and  7  or  8  miles  wide. 
The  de])th  of  water  across  the  bay  is  sufficient  for  vessels  that  can 
cross  the  Inner  Bar, 


Ha 

S. 

fori 

roiJ 

niii 

Thi 

tbel 

oi)e 

a])] 

suf 

harl 


YIN  HARBOR 


163 


igeable,  so 

le  pilots  as 

a  5  fatboms 
nd  4  miles, 
I  be  passed 
0  bring  the 

5.  (S.  17°  B. 

e  Swasbway 
JO  W.  mag.); 
will  lead  to 
L  at  tbe  inner 
IX  Island  will 
t  tbe  eastern 
i  7  sbould  be 
to  obtain  tbe 
quite  close  to 
)uoy  steer  for 
eme  of  Horse- 
r.  mag.)  to  tbe 
tbward  of  tbe 
water  will  be 
jre  are  only  16 
^  to  tbe  soutb 
•ong  fair  wind 
?ater  tban  the 

50O  W.  (S.  73° 
I  northwestern 
bben  for  Gran- 
and  tben  alter 
beacons  are  in 
leacons  in  line 

Bw  Point,  open 
r  13  feet  water 
:be  sboal  soutb. 

[large  chimney, 

being  about  13 
J  Island  (where 

Ir  8  miles  wide. 

lessels  that  can 


Sgg  taa/R.  Via  T¥^iff<^"  are  on  the  soathern  side  of  the  bay;  the  first 
small,  low,  and  swampy,  the  other  much  larger,  being  2^  miles  long, 
and  for  the  most  part  thickly  wooded. 

Vin  Harbor  is  southward  of  Yin  Island,  and  must  be  approached 
round  its  west  end,  which  is  nearly  4^  miles  firom  the  north  point  of 
Fox  Island.  It  is  quite  sheltered  from  all  winds,  and  has  plenty  of 
water  for  tbe  largest  ships  that  can  enter  tbe  Inner  Bay.  Th<  harbor 
is  a  bay  of  the  island,  f  mile  wide  and  600  yards  deep. 

The  long  sandy  Vin  Spit  and  shoal  of  the  main  runs  out  northward 
nearly  to  the  line  joining  the  sandy  i)oints  of  the  harbor,  but  leaves  a 
narrow  channel  to  the  eastward,  which  continues  for  about  2  miles,  and 
may  be  considered  as  a  prolongation  of  the  harbor  in  that  direction, 
or  toward  French  Elver  Point. 

French  River  is  small  and  shallow  and  has  a  village.  Fox  Gully  is 
difficult  to  recognize;  there  is,  liowever,  a  conspicuous  clump  of  pine 
trees  on  French  River  Point.  The  space  to  the  eastward  of  the  line 
joining  Egg  Island  and  French  River,  and  in  the  bay  to  the  southward 
of  the  latter,  is  occupied  by  ilats  of  sand,  mud,  and  eelgrass. 

Lights. — On  the  SW.  end  of  Vin  Island  are  two  fixed  white  leading 
lights,  to  enable  vessels  seeking  shelter  to  clear  the  point  of  the  shoal 
lying  off  the  island.  The  front  light  is  30  feet  above  high- water  mark, 
and  should  be  visible  in  the  range  for  10  miles. 

The  back  light  is  N.  33°  B.  (N.  56°  E.  mag.),  distant  1,222  feet  from  the 
front  one,  is  42  feet  above  the  sea,  and  should  be  visible  10  miles. 

Both  lights  are  hoisted  on  masts  with  sheds  painted  red  at  their  base, 
tbe  front  mast  being  25  teet  and  the  back  one  30  feet  above  the  ground. 

Anchorage. — Anchor  near  the  center  of  the  harbor  in  10  or  11 
fathoms,  mud  bottom. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Vin  Harbor  at  5h.  45m. 
Springs  rise  5  feet,  neaps  3  f«et,  but  the  rise  is  at  all  times  uncertain, 
neap  tides  sometimes  not  ranging  above  a  foot  and  spring  tides  not 
above  2  feet.  It  must  also  be  remijmbered  that  the  a.m.  tides  rise 
higher  in  general  by  2  feet  than  the  p.m.  tides  in  the  beginning  of 
August. 

Directions. — A  pilot  will  readily  be  procured  to  take  a  ship  into  Vin 
Harbor ;  if  unable  to  get  one,  with  the  assistance  of  the  chart  steer 
S.  50°  W,  (S.  73°  W.  mag.)  from  the  SW.  buoy  of  the  Horseshoe 
for  about  3  miles,  keeping  the  lead  going,  and  then  to  the  southward 
round  the  SW.  end  of  Vin  Island,  at  a  distance  not  less  than  J  mile, 
until  tbe  leading  lights  are  in  line  bearing  N.  33°  E.  (N.  56°  E.  mag.). 
The  vessel  will  then  be  to  the  southward  of  the  shoal  extending  from 
the  SW.  end  of  the  island.  Steer  toward  them,  keeping  the  high  light 
open  to  the  right  of  the  low  one,  and  on  shoaling  the  water  when 
approaching  the  sandy  SW.  point  of  the  island,  sheer  to  the  southward 
sufficiently  to  give  it  a  berth  of  150  yards  as  the  vessel  rounds  it  into 
harbor.     When  past  the  point,  do  not  go  to  the  southward  of  the  line 


164 


OULF  OP  ST.  LAWRENCE WEST  COAST. 


L 


sV^ 


joining  the  sandy  points  of  the  harbor,  or  she  will  be  on  shore  on  the 
sandy  shoal  which  extends  off  the  mainland  opposite. 

Vin  Bay  is  more  than  3  miles  wide  and  nearly  as  deep.  Quart 
Point,  its  western  point,  is  a  low  cliff  of  sandstone  with  high  trees,  3j^ 
miles  from  the  west  end  of  Vin  Island.  There  is  good  anchorage  in  the 
eastern  part  of  this  bay  in  3  fathoms,  mad  bottom,  and  about  f  mile  to 
the  westward  of  the  island.  The  western  side  of  the  bay  id  shallow. 
In  its  SW.  corner  is  Blacic  Biver,  into  which  9  feet  can  be  carried  at  low 
water  through  a  narrow  and  difficult  channel,  and  the  river  has  3 
fathoms  in  it  for  some  distance  within  the  entrance. 

Vin  River  ako  runs  into  this  bay  2^  miles  to  the  southward  from 
the  SW.  point  of  the  island.  It  is  a  smaller  rive''  than  Bliu^k  Biver, 
having  only  6  feet  at  low  water  in  its  entrance.  There  is  a  small  church 
on  its  eastern  shore  a  short  distance  within  its  entrance,  and  farms  on 
either  side,  where  supplies  may  best  be  obtained.  The  be,st  Materin."' 
place  will  also  be  found  at  this  river;  but  it  is  difficult  to  obtain  large 
supplies  of  good  water  in  so  flat  a  country  near,  the  isea.  There  is  a 
tolerable  road  from  Yin  Biver  to  Chatham,  the  principal  town  on  the 
Miramichi  Biver. 

Cheval  Point,  west  nearly  3  miles  from  Quart  Point,  is  sandy,  with 
a  remarkable  clump  of  high  trees  upon  it. 

Immediately  to  the  westward  of  Cheval  Point  is  the  shallow^  Napan 
Bay  and  Biver,  which  boats  can  ascend  for  several  ri/'^es,  or  as  far  as 
the  tide  reaches.  Above  that  point  the  river,  whic-^  is  small,  runs 
through  a  fertile  and  well-cultivated  valley,  extending  westward  in 
rear  of  the  town  of  Ohathan». 

Middle  Ground  is  a  long  sandy  bank,  w.tti  less  than  2  fathoms 
water,  which  stretches  down  thd  center  of  the  estuary  fiom  Cheval 
Point,  and  extends  from  it  2J  miles  to  the  rortbeastward. 

Sheldrake  Island  lies  off  Napan  Point,  at  the  distance  of  rather 
more  than  f  mile.  It  is  low,  swampy,  partly  wooded,  and  has  two 
buildings  on  its  eastern  side,  which  were  formerly  used  as  a  cholera 
hospital.  The  island  is  ^  mile  long  by  |  mile  wide,  and  is  separated 
from  the  north  shc^  by  ■  ^  hannel  ^  mile  wide,  but  with  only  one  or  2 
feet  in  it  at  low  WB';er.  ShalUw  water  extends  far  oft"  this  island  in 
every  direction — wt'srward  to  Bartib'  ,ae  Island  and  eastward  to  Oak 
Point.  It  also  sweops  round  to  the  south  and  SE.,  so  as  to  leave  only  a 
very  narrow  channel  between  it  and  the  shoal,  which  tills  Napau  Bay, 
and  trending  away  to  the  eastward  past  Cheval  Point,  forms  the  Middle 
Ground  already  mentioned. 

Zdghts. — The  two  lights  on  the  north  side  of  Sheldrake  Island  are 
hoisted  on  masts  500  yards  apart.  They  exhibit,  at  an  elevation  of  46 
and  35  feet  above  the  sea,  fixed  white  lights.  The  high  light  should 
be  visible  12  miles  and  the  low  one  10  mile^. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Sheldrake  Island  at  6  h.  ^ 
springs  rise  5  feet,  neaps  3  feet. 


m- 


MIRAMICHI  BAY. 


166 


ore  on  the 

ep.  Quart 
;h  trees,  ^k 
orage  in  tbe 
,ut  ^mileto 
id  sballow. 
irried  at  low 
river  baa  3 

thward  from 
Bliuk  River, 
small  church 
,nd  farms  on 
iQst  Materin."- 
,  obtain  large 
i.    There  is  a 
town  on  the 

is  sandy,  with 

hallow  Napan 

S8,  or  as  far  as 

18  small,  runs 

westward  in 

lau  2  fathoms 
y  fiom  Cheval 

ance  of  rather 
,  and  has  two 
d  as  a  cholera 
,d  is  separated 
b  only  one  or  2 

this  island  in 
istward  to  Oak 

to  leave  only  a 
ills  Napau  Bay, 

rms  the  Middle 

Irake  Island  are 
I  elevation  of  46 
igb  light  should 

i©  Island  at  6  h. ; 


Murdoch  Spit  and  Murdoch  Point  are  two  sandy  points  on  the 
south  shore,  ^  mile  apart,  with  a  cove  between  them,  and  about  a  mile 
SW.  of  Sheldrake  Island.  The  entrance  of  Miramichi  Biver  is  ^  mile 
wide  between  these  points  and  Moody  Point,  which  has  a  small  Indian 
church  upon  it,'  and  is  the  east  point  of  entrance  of  Bartiboque  River, 
a  mile  west  from  Sheldrake  Island. 

Above  Murdoch  Point  1^  miles,  and  on  the  same,  or  south  side  of  the 
river,  is  St.  Andrew  Point,  showing  as  the  extreme  of  the  land  from 
Sheldrake  Island.  Both  these  points  were  wooded  at  the  time  of  the 
survey  in  1837,  and  used  as  leading  marks. 

Bartiboque  River  is  |  mile  wide  at  the  entrance,  between  Malcolm 
and  Moody  Points,  but  contracts  to  300  yards  a  short  distance  within, 
where  a  wooden  bridge  is  thrown  across.  Bartiboque  Island  lies  in  the 
entrance  of  the  river,  and  has  steep  banks  or  clay  clift's  on  every  side, 
and  is  nearly  joined  to  the  shore  to  the  northward  by  a  sandy  spit. 
The  narrow  ch*»nnel  into  the  river  passes  close  to  the  east  end  of  the 
island,  and  has  not  more  than  4  feet  in  it  at  low  water. 

Lights. — The  two  lighthouses  at  Grant  Beach,  Bartiboque,  are  white 
sheds  with  masts,  34  i^et  high,  and  bear  from  each  other  east  (S.  67°  E. 
mag.)  and  west  (N.  67°  W.  mag.),  433  yards  apart.  They  exhibit  from 
an  elevation  of  140  and  120  feet  fixed  white  lights.  These  are  leading 
lights,  and  should  be  visible  10  miles. 

Oak  Point. — Returning  back  to  the  eastward  along  the  north  shore, 
the  first  point  requiring  notice  is  Oak  Point,  nearly  opposite  Cheval 
Point,  and  distant  from  it  2  miles  to  the  northward.  The  eastern  part 
of  this  point  has  dark-colored  sandstone  cliffs  about  12  feet  high,  and 
forming  an  extreme  point,  with  a  beacon  on  it.  It  is  used  as  a  leading 
mark  with  the  white  beacon  which  stands  N.  34oE.  (N.  57''  E.  mag.) 
at  §  mile  from  it  on  the  shore  of  the  bay.  The  latter  beacon  is  lofty  and 
large,  and  shows  so  conspicuously  on  the  dark  background  of  the  woods 
that  it  can  be  easily  seen  on  a  fine  day  from  Fox  Island. 

Lights. — From  a  mast  28  feet  high,  with  a  white  shed  at  its  base,  to 
the  NE.  of,  and  fron.  a  similar  mast  with  sh^d  erected  on  Oak  Point, 
fixed  white  lights  are  exhibited,  elevated,  respectively,  above  high  water 
48  and  43  feet.  These  lights  bear  from  eacli  other  N.  32°  K.  (isr.  55°  E. 
mag.)  and  S.  32^  W.  (S.  55^'  W.  mag.),  distant  000  yards,  and  point  when 
in  line  tr«  the  Narrows  Buoy.    The  lights  should  be  visible  10  miles, 

Qrandoon  Island,  low  and  marshy,  and  difficult  to  distinguish  from 
tbe  mainland  till  very  near.  It  is  NE.  2^  miles  from  Oak  Point  and  3J 
miles  north  from  Quart  Point.  Farther  eastward,  along  the  northern 
sboif^  of  tb«  Inner  Hay,  are  Burnt  church  and  the  Indian  village,  and 
sbmU  river  of  tJie  ««iBe  name;  also  Hay  Island  and  tlie  villages  of 
Upper  and  Loww  ?*^r«ac'.  There  is  a  clear  channel  with  3^  ;  i  2^^  fath- 
oms water  in  it  to  the  norniiwtird  of  the  Horseshoe  and  the  shoals  of 
Portage  Island,  a«  tiar  northci»8tw,"rd  as  J  mile  ft"om  Hay  Island,  where 
a  narrow  channel  it^ads  out  tc  sea  through  the  NegUfW!  Gully. 


166 


GULP   OP   ST.  LAWRENCE — WEST   COAST. 


\m 


Lights. — Two  fixed  white  leading  lights  have  been  established  on 
Hay  Island,  to  enable  vessels  when  seeking  shelter  to  avoid  the  shoal 
extending  from  the  east  end  of  that  island. 

The  outer  light  is  exhibited  on  a  mast  15  feet  high.  It  is  elevated 
23  feet,  and  should  be  visible  10  miles.  At  the  base  of  the  mast  there 
is  a  small  red  shed. 

The  inner  or  high  light  is  shown  at  3U  feet  above  high-water  mark, 
and  should  be  visible  11  miles.  It  is  exhibited  from  a  white,  square 
wooden  tower  21  feet  high,  210  feet  from  the  outer  light. 

Miramichi  River  may  be  said  to  commence  at  Sheldrake  Island,  for 
below  that  point  the  Inner  Bay,  with  its  low  ami  widely  receding  shores, 
bears  no  resemblance  to  a  river.  At  its  entrance  the  country  begins 
to  rise  into  gentle  undulations,  terminating  in  steep  banks  and  clitfs  of 
sandstone,  which  in  some  places  attain  a  height  of  50  feet  above  the  river. 
The  settlements,  too,  increase  in  number  and  extent,  and  soon  become 
continuous  on  either  side,  dotted  here  and  there  with  steam  sawmills. 

The  Miramichi  is  navigable  up  to  Beaubere  Island  by  any  vessel  that 
can  cross  the  Inner  Bar.  Written  diiections,  however,  will  not  much 
avail  above  Sheldrake  Island,  not  only  on  account  of  the  contracted 
nature  of  the  navigation,  but  also  because  there  are  few  leading  marks 
of  a  permanent  nature  which  could  be  certainly  recognized  by  a  stran- 
ger. Directions,  too,  are  not  requisite  for  this  inland  navigation,  for 
which  pilotage  is  compulsory,  and  there  are  a  number  of  well-qualified 
pilots. 

The  buoys  to  the  westward  of  the  St.  Andrew  Banks  have  been 
removed  and  stakes  substituted,  black  to  the  northward,  red  to  the 
southward. 

Ice. — From  observations  taken  each  year  from  1830  to  1885,  the  aver- 
age date  of  the  opening  of  navigation  at  Chatham  is  April  20,  and  of 
the  close  December  5,  the  river  being  completely  closed  between  those 
dates.  Ao  Portage  Island  navigation  opens  about  a  week  earlier  and 
closes  about  a  week  later  than  at  Chatham. 

The  first  vessel  arrived  on  May  12  and  the  last  left  on  November  26 
in  1885. 

Leggat  Shoals  lie  nearer  the  north  than  the  south  side  of  the  river, 
and  at  the  time  they  were  surveyed  had  12  feet  upon  them  »t  low  water; 
but  this  depth  is  said  to  vary,  and  also  ui)on  the  banks  of  Ht.  Andrew, 
in  consequence  of  old  trees,  logs,  and  other  lumber  lodging  upon  them. 
The  same  cause  is  said  to  render  the  depth  up  certain  to  the  southward 
of  these  shoals,  where  there  is  a  wider  channel  (1860).  The  channel  at 
the  stake  on  the  NW.  extreme  of  the  shoals  has  6  fathoms  water  in  it, 
and  is  nearly  200  yards  wide  between  the  Leggat  Shoals  and  a  shoal 
bank  which  extends  o£f  the  north  shore.  On  the  point  of  this  shoal  off 
the  north  shore  there  is  anothei-  stake,  which  will  be  seen  at  i^  mile  S. 
53"  W.  (S.  76°  W.  mag.)  from  the  former.  Vessels  must  iiass  close  to 
the  northward  of  the  first  of  these  stakes  and  close  to  the  southward 


mil 


CHATHAM NEWCASTLE. 


167 


Dlished  oD 
I  the  shoal 

,B  elevated 
mast  there 

rater  mark, 
lite,  square 

)  Island,  for 
liug  shores, 
ntry  begins 
and  cliffs  of 
(ve the  river, 
joon  become 
im  sawmills, 
y  vessel  that 
ill  not  much 
e  contracted 
lading  marks 
d  by  a  stran- 
ivigation,  for 
(^ellqualifled 

:8  have  been 
d,  red  to  the 

885,  the  aver- 
ril  20,  and  of 
)etween  those 
>k  earlier  and 

November  26 

e  of  the  river, 
at  low  water; 
)f  8t.  Andrew, 
ng  upon  them, 
the  southward 
Che  channel  at 
ns  water  in  it, 
lis  and  a  shoal 
jf  this  shoal  off 
»en  at  i  mile  S. 
.  pass  close  to 
the  southward 


of  the  second,  which  is  2  miles  above  the  Bartiboque  Biver.  The  river 
is  clear  of  detached  shoals  from  the  stakes  last  mentioned  to  Middle 
Island,  which,  together  with  its  shoal,  coutiues  the  ship  channel  to  the 
north  side  of  the  river,  where  the  shore  is  so  bold  that  there  are  7  or  8 
fathoms  close  to  the  sandstone  cliffs  until  the  vessel  is  off  the  Giliuour 
Mills  and  Cove,  nearly  opposite  the  west  end  of  Middle  Island. 

Middle  Island  is  rather  smaller  than  Sheldrake  Island,  from  wliich 
it  is  distant  5^  miles;  and  there  is  no  channel  to  the  southward  of  it 
at  low  water.  There  is  nothing  in  the  way  of  vessels  from  Gilmour 
Mill  to  the  wharves  ao  Chatham. 

Lights. — The  beacon  lightliouse  on  the  north  side  of  Middle  Island, 
painted  white,  exhibits  at  44  feet  above  high  water  a  fixed  white  light, 
which  should  be  visible  12  miles. 

A  fixed  red  light  is  exhibited  from  a  liglitliouse  on  Limekiln  Bank 
on  the  north  side  of  the  river  below  the  town  of  Newcastle. 

The  light  is  87  feet  above  high  water,  and  should  bo  visible  0  miles. 

The  liglithouse  is  a  wliite  square  tower,  23  feet  high,  with  a  red  roof. 

Chatham,  the  principal  town  on  the  Miramichi,  and  containing,  in 
1883,  about  5,762  inhabitants,  commences  ^  mile  above  Middle  Island, 
and  extends  along  the  south  shore  for  1^  miles  to  the  westward.  It  is 
conveniently  situated  for  shipping,  having  6  to  8  fathoms  water  close  to 
its  wharves.  It  is  a  straggling  but  increasing  town,  and  contains 
some  handsome  buildings,  among  others  a  college  and  hospital. 

Quarantine. — Chatham  is  a  minor  quarantine  station.  There  is  a 
seamen's  hospital  here. 

Tugs  may  be  obtained  firom  Caatham  by  signal  to  Escnminac  light- 
house, but  there  is  no  regular  charge. 

Telegraph  and  Railways. — Chatham  is  in  telegraphic  communica- 
tion with  all  towns  of  the  Dominion  of  Canada  and  the  United  States, 
and  is  directly  connected  by  the  Intercolonial  Bailway  with  Halifax, 
St.  John  in  New  Brunswick,  and  Quebec;  also  by  a  direct  railway  with 
Fredericton,  New  Brunswick. 

Douglastown,  on  the  northern  shore,  about  1^  miles  above  Chatham, 
is  a  much  smaller  place,  containing  400  inhabitants.  It  is  prettily  sit- 
uated on  a  rising  ground,  and  has  sufficient  water  at  its  wharves  for 
large  vessels.  The  most  remarkable  building  is  the  Marine  hospital, 
built  of  stone.  There  is  a  shipbuilding  establishment  1^  miles  above 
Douglastown  on  the  same  side  of  the  river,  and  opposite  to  it  on  the 
»H>utb-side  shore  is  the  church  of  St.  Paul. 

Newcastle,  2  miles  farther  up  the  river,  and  on  the  north  shore,  is 
the  county  town,  containing  the  courthouse  and  jail.  Standing  on' an 
a  5clivity  which  rises  to  the  height  of  100  feet  at  J  mile  from  the  river, 
and  commanding  a  view  over  the  lower  ground  westward  and  south- 
ward to  Beaub^re  Island  and  Nelson  town,  and  down  the  river  to  Chat- 
ham, a  distance  of  nearly  '>  miles,  Its  situation  is  as  beautiful  as  could 
have  been  iwJected,  while  at  the  same  time  it  is  not  unfavorable  for 


.1 


168 


GULF    OF   ST.  LAWRENCE — WEST    COAST. 


'I. 


u 
si: 


llfif 


mercantile  iJiirposea,  tho  channel  of  the  river  opposite  if  bring  J  mile 
wide,  clea.  of  shoals,  and  6  or  7  fathoms  water  close  to  the  »^harves  of 
the  town. 

Nelsontown,  the  last  village  within  tlie  navigable  waters  of  the 
Miramiclii,  is  a  straggling  place  with  200  inhabitantH,  and  possessing 
a  large  wooden  cliurch,  which  stands  on  the  south  shore  opposite  the 
ea«t  end  of  I'.ciiub^re  Island  and  1^  miles  above  Newcastle. 

Water  and  Supplies. — The  Rurface  water  is  quite  fresh,  on  the  ebb 
tide,  at  (Mi;ithnni.  Supplies  of  any  kind  can  be  procured  at  Chatham 
or  NewcuHtle. 

CoaL — About  1,000  tons  of  coal  are  usually  kept  in  store  at  Chatham, 
and  abmit  200  tons  at  Newcastle,  but  any  quantity  can  easily  be 
obtained  at  short  notice  by  Intercolonial  Railway  from  Springhill  or 
Picton. 

Trade. — The  chief  exports  from  Chatham  and  Newcastle  are  timber, 
deals,  palings,  salmon,  lobster,  and  extract  of  hemlock  bark  for  tanning. 

Repairs. — There  is  neither  dock  nor  slip  in  Miramichi  River,  but  at 
Chatham  there  is  a  wharf  for  heaving  down  vessels  in  need  of  repairs.' 

Beaubtoe  Island,  l^  miles  long  and  |  mile  wide,  has  steep  clay 
banks,  based  on  sandstone,  and  rising  to  about  20  feet  above  the  river. 

The  Miramichi  ia  easily  navigable  to  this  jwint  by  any  vessels  that 
can  cross  the  Horseshoe  or  Inner  Bar.  There  are  some  parts  of  the 
<"lij.)mel  above  Chatham  where  there  are  only  2J  fathoms,  and  which 
woald  h^vve  to  be  avo.ded  by  a  largie  vessel  at  low  water,  but  there  is 
only  one  detiched  shoal,  which  has  0  feet  least  water,  and  lies  less  than 
halfway  across  from  the  south  shore,  S.  28°  W.  (S.  51°  W.  mag.)  from 
the  hospital  at  Douglastown. 

Tides. — It  is. high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Beaub^re  Island  at  6h. 
30m.;  aprings  rise  6  feet,  neaps  4  feet. 

The  usual  average  rate  of  the  ebb  tide  is  2  knots  and  the  iiood  one 
knot  in  this  part  of  the  river.  The  ebb  in  some  places  rahs  2^  knots, 
and  in  <^he  spring  of  the  year  is  said  to  be  still  stronger.  In  July  and 
August,  when  the  observation  ft  were  made,  excepting  for  2  or  3  days 
at  neap  tides,  the  morning  tides  rose  2  or  3  feet  higher  than  the 
evening  tides,  and  were  of  longer  duration  by  one  or  even  2  hours 
at  a  time.  But  this  is  much  influenced  by  winds,  and  consequently  by 
no  means  regular.  The  mean  length  of  the  flood  tide  is  6h.,  and  of  the 
ebb  6^h.  The  duration  arid  length  of  the  tidal  streams  are  also  influ- 
enced by  the  winds,  but  in  general  they  continue  in  the  channel  about 
^  hour  after  it  is  high  or  low  water  by  the  shore. 

Northwest  and  Southwest  Arms. — At  Beaub^re  Island  the  two 
great  arms  of  the  Miramichi  meet.  The  Northwest  Arm  is  mnch  the 
larger,  as  respects  the  tidal  water,  although  the  Southwest  Arm  is 
considered  the  main  branch,  being  of  greater  length,  and  discharging 
more  water.  The  Northwest  Arm  would  be  navigable  for  large  vessels 
to  Shilelah  Cove.  7  miles  above  Beaubere  Island,  as  there  is  sufficient 


ru 
ne 


MIRAMICHI  BIYER. 


160 


oing  i  mile 
»vharves  of 

tors  of  the 

possessing 

pposite  the 

,  on  the  ebb 
at  Chatham 

at  Chatham, 
,n  easily  be 
Jpringhill  or 

e  are  timber, 
L  for  tanning. 
River,  but  at 
id  of  repairs.' 
IS  steep  clay 
ove  the  river. 
'  vessels  that 
I  parts  of  the 
18,  and  which 
,  but  there  is 
lies  less  than 
V.  mag.)  from 

Island  at  6h. 

the  tlood  one 
•uhs  2i  knots, 
In  July  and 
r  2  or  3  days 
;her  than  the 

even  2  hours 
nsequently  by 
6h.,  and  of  the 

are  also  influ 

channel  about 


Island  the  two 
is  much  the 
thwest  Arm  is 
nd  discharging 
)r  large  vessels 
ere  is  sutBcifent 


depth  of  water,  if  the  channel  were  buoyed  or  staked  in  the  narrow 
parts,  which  are  not  more  tiian  10()  yards  wide.  Above  Shilelnh  Covo 
there  are  from  one  to  IJ  fathoms  water,  in  intricate  and  narrow  chan- 
nels, between  shoals  of  mnd  and  low  marshy  islands,  all  the  way  to  the 
rapids,  wliich  How  in  narrow  channels  between  meadow  islands.  There 
the  tide  ends,  and  the  water  becomes  quite  fresh  13  miles  from  Beanbcre 
Island,  and  39  miles  from  the  entrance  of  the  inner  bay  at  Pox  Island. 

The  Southwest  Arm  is  not  navigable  for  \»vs<  "ssels,  as  not  more 
than  6  or  7  feet  at  low  water,  spring  tides.  n  be  carried  through 
between  Beaubi^re  Island  and  the  mainhu  nd  •  ven  above  that 

shallow  part,  although  there  is  often  mori'  thai  fatiioms  water,  yet 
the  channel  is  too  narrow  and  intricate  for  aii>  vt  ry  small  vessels. 
The  arm  is  about  ^  mile  wide  for  the  first  T)  miles,  or  up  to  Barnaby 
Island;  after  which  it  varies  ft-om  2(K)  to  400  yards  up  to  che  rapids, 
12  miles  from  Beaubere  Island.  Both  shores  of  this  arm  are  settled, 
and  many  of  the  farms  appear  to  be  in  a  flourishing  condition. 

Tides. — The  tide,  which  ends  at  tlie  rapids,  was  observed  to  rise  2 
feet  there,  and  it  was  high  water  on  the  day  of  the  full  moon  at  about 
8  hours;  as  it  was  also  at  the  foot  of  the  rapids  in  the  Northwest  Arm. 

Negnac  Gully,  between  the  sand  bar  of  the  same  name  and  a  small 
one  to  the  SW.,  is  nearly  400  yards  wide  and  carries  2  fathoms  water; 
but  a  sand  bar,  of  the  usual  mutable  character,  lies  off  it  with  7  feet 
over  it  at  low  water.  Within  the  gully  a  narrow  channel,  only  fit  for 
boats  or  very  small  'craft,  leads  southwestward  up  the  Inner  Bay. 
The  shoal  water  extends  1:^  miles  off  this  gully,  but  there  is  excellent 
warning  by  the  lead  here  and  everywhere  in  this  bay.  Shoals,  nearly 
dry  at  low  water,  extend  from  the  Neguac  Gully  to  Portage  Island,  a 
distance  of  f  mile. 

Buoys. — A  can  buoy,  painted  red,  is  moored  in  4  fathoms  at  the 
entrance  to  Negnac  Gully.  A  similar  buoy  is  nioored  northwestward 
of  the  first  buoy,  to  show  the  direction  of  the  channel. 

LightF. — The  lighthouse  on  the  NE.  side  of  Neguac  Gully  is  a  square 
building,  30  feet  high,  and  painted  white;  it  exhibits  at  32  feet  above 
high  water  a  fixed  white  light,  which  should  be  visible  11  miles. 

The  front  light  is  a  fixed  red  light,  shown  from  a  mast  with  white 
shed  at  its  base. 

The  mast  stands  900  feet  S.  12°  E.  (S.  11°  W.  mag.)  from  the  main 
light,  and  the  alignment  guides  to  the  buoy  marking  the  crossing  of  the 
outer  bar;  also  gives  the  middle  of  the  channel  and  clears  the  south 
and  north  bars. 

Lo'wer  Neguac. — The  wharf  at  Lower  Neguac  is  a  crib- work  block, 
with  about  8  feet  water  at  the  end  of  it,  which  is  connected  with  the 
shore  by  a  roadway  supported  on  temjwrary  trestles.  The  roadway 
runs  NNW.  and  is  1,050  feet  long  to  high-water  mark,  where  it  ends 
near  a  fishhonse  and  a  store. 

Lights. — A  square  tower,  painted  white,  surmounted  by  a  red  lantern, 


.■;-M!i*'--'-'.^-.- 


170 


OULF  OP  ST.  LAWRENCE — WEST  COAST. 


aud  •');{  feet  luKh,  staiuls  on  the  beuuli.  The  Mgbt  is  a  llxod  white  ligh^ 
32  feet  above  liighwater  mark,  and  shouUl  be  visible  10  miles. 

A  mast  with  oval  siat-\«  urk  day  mark  attached,  shed  at  base,  is  on 
the  Olid  of  the  wharf,  S.  50-^  E.  ;8.  L'7^  E.  mag.),  1,080  feet  from  the 
preceding  light.  A  fixed  red  light  is  shown  from  it  at  an  elevation  of 
25  feet,  which  should  be  visible  8  mileH.  The  rear  light  is  only  visibht 
over  a  small  arc  on  each  side  of  the  alignment. 

Neguac. — A  church  with  a  spire  has  been  built  at  Neguac  Village, 
about  2  j  miles  northwestward  of  Negnac  lighthouse.  There  is  a  post- 
oilice.    Population  about  150. 

Burnt  Church  Village  has  extended  westward;  a  large  white  store 
at  the  west  end,  and  a  long  white  barn  a  short  distance  inland,  are  the 
most  prominent  buildings  there.    Population,  200. 

Remarks. — Since  the  examination  of  Miramichi  Bay  in  1857,  the 
bars  have  altered  very  little  in  their  general  direction  aud  depth,  but 
the  chaunel  for  small  vessels  close  to  Portage  Island  has  become  blocked, 
whilst  the  deep-water  channel  close  westward  of  that  island  has 
extended  considerably  northward,  and  some  of  the  shoals  have  been 
deepened  by  dredging. 

Blackland  Point,  the  north  point  of  Miramichi  Bay,  is  low  aud 
swampy,  with  steep  and  black  peaty  banks,  and  there  is  a  communica- 
tion round  it  for  boats  w  bin  t  e  sand  bars  from  Tabusintac  lagoon 
into  the  Inner  Bay  of  Mi:  amichi. 

(H.  O.  (hart  No.  1079.) 

Tabusintac  River. — Tabusintac  Gully  is  about  300  yards  wide  at 
high  water,  and  has  a  shifting  bar  of  sand,  over  which  6  or  7  feet  could 
be  carried  at  low  water  when  it  was  surveyed,  and  11  or  12  feet  at  high 
water  in  spring  tides.  The  entrance  of  the  Tabusintac  River  from  the 
lagoon  inland  is  3  miles  to  the  northward  of  the  gully,  and  can  be  seen 
over  the  sand  bars.  There  is  plenty  of  water  in  this  river  when  once 
over  the  bar;  2  and  3  fathoms  is  the  depth  in  the  channel  through  th.; 
lagoon,  and  there  is  as  much  as  4  and  5  fathoms  in  some  parts  of  the 
river;  but  the  channel  is  too  narrow  and  intricate  for  anything  larger 
than  boats  or  very  small  vessels.  The  tide  flows  10  miles  up  the  river, 
through  an  undulating  country,  and  occasionally  between  steep  banks 
of  sandstone,  which  rise  to  about  100  feet  above  the  sea.  There  are 
settlements  on  either  shore,  and  there  is  a  church  on  the  south  bank  1^ 
miles  up  from  the  lagoon. 

Salmon  are  taken  in  considerable  quantities  in  the  Tabusintac.  There 
are  lobsters,  oysters,  and  other  shellfish  in  the  lagoon;  and  codfish 
come  in  upon  the  coast  early  in  the  season,  and  are  fished  for  upon  a 
small  scale. 

Raft  Qully. — There  is  an  entrance  into  the  lagoon  through  liaft 
Gully,  C  miles  to  the  northward  of  Tabusintac  Gully,  but  it  is  nearly 
blocked  up  with  sand.  Barreau  Point  lies  about  midway  between  Baft 
and  South  Tracadie  Gullies. 


..'.WiiM 


m 


^*N 


d  white  light, 

liles. 

sit  base,  is  ou 

feet  from  th« 

u  elevation  of 

8  only  visible 

siiuac  Village, 
liere  is  a  poht- 


r 


i;e  white  store 
ulaiul,  are  the 

jT  in  1857,  the 
,ud  depth,  but 
;coine  blocked, 
at  islaud  has 
oals  have  been 

ay,  is  low  and 
t  a  coinmuuica- 
lusintac  lagoon 


yards  wide  at 
1  or  7  feet  could 

12  feet  at  high 
River  from  the 
md  can  be  seen 
river  when  once 
uel  through  th ! 
»nie  parts  of  the 
anything  larger 
ies  up  the  river, 
een  steep  banks 
sea.  There  are 
e  south  bank  1^ 

jusintac.  There 
»on;  and  codfish 
ished  for  upon  a 

>n  through  Raft 
,  but  it  is  nearly 
ray  between  Raft 


^  .    ^ 


f 

'i 


V 


V] 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0 


■  50 


1.1 


1.25 


■lUU 

l'^    III  1.6 


Wir  ,.. 


Hiotographic 

Sciences 

Corporation 


23  WEST  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  N.Y.  14580 

(716)  872-4S03 


i>t»i«fiiiiiii*i*a-i. 


CIHM/ICMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 


CIHM/ICMH 
Collection  de 
microfiches. 


Canadian  Institute  for  Historical  Microreproductions  /  Institut  Canadian  de  microreproductions  historiques 


<« 

I 

t 

c 

a 

b 

e 

b 

T 

la 

* 

w 

w 

I 

n( 

i 

en 

i 

tr 

se 

ap 

th 

th 

W 

W€ 

(N 

th< 

1  ! 

re< 
^1, 

A] 
bel 


37 

an( 

ing 


ligl 
ligJ 


Mmm 


TKACADIE   RIVER, 


171 


fh  JJT  *'^"'/^  somewhat  larger,  but  in  other  respects  similar  to 
the  Pokemouche,  which  is  about  10  miles  farther  north.  It  has  a  chnrch 
and  vnlage  on  the  south  side  of  its  entrance  from  the  lagoon  inland, 
which  can  be  seen  over  the  sand  bars ;  the  church  bears  S.  32°  W  (S  56o 

w"  Tv^rno^w ''^^  *"''""  *^^  "''''**'  '''"'^  principal  gully,  instead  of  N.  80° 
W.  [N.  56°  W.  mag.),  as  at  Pokemouche,  which  will  help  to  distinguish 
the  one  from  the  other.  Both  rivers  supply  a  considerable  quantrty  of 
pme  timber  and  deals.  "^ 

The  North  Gully  of  Tracadie  is  at  present  the  principal  entrance  to 

!i!r7w  °"?  ^^^*'""'  *^""'''^''  ''^'''^'  ^^^  "^«r  flows  in  a  narrow 
channel  between  flats  of  sand,  mud,  and  weeds.  There  are  several  huts 
and  stores  at  the  entrance  to  this  gully,  which  is  300  yards  wide  at 
high  water;  but,  like  all  the  rest  of  this  coast,  has  a  shifting  bar  of 
sand  oft  it,  causing  the  depth,  breadth,  and  directions  of  the  channel 
tovary  so  frequently  in  heavy  gales  as  to  render  all  instructions  for 
entering  It  useless.    In  the  entrance  of  the  gully,  and  sheltered  by  the 

T?Z  o  '""fl  rf  ^'  ™*-^  "^  '"^^^'""'^  "'  ^^^"^  ^  ^  t«  3  fathoms  water. 
There  are  2  and  3  fathoms  in  the  channel  of  the  river  opposite  the  vil- 
lage,  but  that  can  only  be  reached  by  passing  through  the  lagoon, 
where  the  channel  in  one  part  is  so  shallow  that  boats  can  only  pass 
when  the  tide  is  in.  ^  ^ 

At  2  miles  to  the  southward  of  the  North  Gully  is  the  Old  Gullv 
now  nearly  blocked  up  with  sand,  but  which  was  formerly  the  principal 
entrance.  South  Tracadie  River,  which  discharges  its  waters,  af?er 
traversing  a  lagoon,  by  South  or  Little  Tracadie  Gully  into  the  Lea,  is 
separated  trom  the  Korth  Tracadie  by  a  point  of  the  mainland  which 
approaches  near  the  sand  bars,  but  still  leaves  a  communication  within 
them  from  one  lagoon  to  the  other.  There  are  huts  and  fish  stores  at 
the  entrance  of  this  gully,  and  settlements  at  the  entrance  of  the  river 
Within  the  sand  bars  which  inclose  the  lagoons  of  Tracadie  there  is  a 
weiisiieJtered  boat  or  canoe  navigation  for  8  or  9  miles. 

/^T^'iu^®""'^  ""^"^  *'*"  ^"°y  '^  °^«<*^^d  on  the  outer  edge  of  the  bar 
(North  Tracadie)  at  the  point  where  vessels  should  cross  it  and  pick  nv 
the  hue  of  the  range  lights.  To  mark  the  channel  over  the  bar,  three 
red  spar  buoys  have  been  placed  at  the  turn  on  the  north  side  of  the 
channel,  and  a  black  spar  buoy  and  a  red  can  buoy  on  the  south  side. 
A  red  spar  buoy  is  also  moored  on  the  east  point  of  the  sand  bar  inside 
the  gully  southwestwardly  from  the  main  light  tower.  The  channel  is 
between  this  buoy  and  the  lighthouse. 

„„^*8hte-North  Oully.-North  Tracadie  light  is  a  fixed  whit«  light 
37  feet  above  high  water,  and  visible  11  miles.  It  is  used  as  a  coast 
and  beacon  light.  The  lighthouse,  33  feet  high,  is  a  square  white  build- 
ing on  the  point  on  the  south  side  of  North  Gully  entrance. 

A  fixed  white  light,  visible  6  miles,  is  used  with  the  above  as  a  range 
light,  and  marks  the  channel  in;  the  channel  is  a  shifting  one,  and  the 
light  IS  moved  as  the  channel  shifts.  ,      u  tuo 


■■■I    ' 


%>i., 


172 


GULP   OF   ST.  LAWRENCE WEST   COAST. 


A 


Caution. — Nothing  larger  than  fishing  boats  should  attempt  to  enter 
the  gnlly  by  night,  and  no  stranger  must  attempt  the  entrance  with- 
out a  pilot. 

South  Gully. — The  leading  lighthouses  on  the  north  side  of  Traca- 
die,  South  Gully,  bear  from  each  other  IT.  51°  W.  (N.  27°  W.mag.)  and 
S.  51°  E.  (S.  27"^  E.  mag.),  distant  276  feet. 

The  upper  lighthouse,  a  square  tower,  painted  red,  exhibits  at  an 
elevation  of  20  feet  a  fixed  red  light.  The  lower  lighthouse,  an  open- 
framed  tower,  painted  white,  exhibits  at  an  elevation  of  20  feet  a  fixed 
white  light. 

These  lights  should  be  visible  in  clear  weather  from  a  distance  of  8 
miles.  Vessels  crossing  the  bar  (8'H)  yards  wide)  from  seaward  should 
keep  the  lights  in  line. 

Qreen  Point,  which  separates  the  lagoons  of  North  Tracadie  and 
Pokemouche,  has  a  rocky  shoal  extending  oflF  it  ^  mile  to  the  depth  of  3 
fathoms  .and  IJ  miles  to  5  fathoms  at  low  water. 

Pokemouche  (Pocmouche)  River,  after  traversing  a  shallow  and 
extensive  lagoon,  enters  the  gulf  by  a  gully  through  the  sand  bars  about 
200  yards  wide.  A  shifting  bar  of  sand  outside  generally  leaves  a  nar- 
row channel  with  4  or  5  feet  in  it  at  low  water  into  the  gully,  and  there 
are  from  9  to  12  feet  for  some  distance  within. 

Tides. — The  spring  tides  rise  5  feet;  and  in  fine  weather  large 
schooners  can  be  taken  in  by  a  native  pilot. 

Pokemouche  (Pocmouche).— On  the  south  side  of  the  entrance  of 
the  river  from  the  lagoon  inland,  and  If  miles  from  the  gully,  there  is 
a  church,  village,  postoffice,  and  sawmill.  The  inhabitants,  300  or  400 
in  number,  live  by  fishing,  a  very  limited  agriculture,  and  lumbering. 

Lights. — The  lighthouse  at  Pokemouche  Gully  is  a  square  building, 
37  feet  high,  painted  white,  with  a  keeper's  dwelling  attached,  and 
exhibits  at  an  elevation  of  36  feet  a  fixed  green  light,  which  should  be 
visible  8  miles. 

A  fixed  red  light  is  hoisted  on  a  pole,  23  feet  high,  arranged  to  slide 
on  a  tramway  so  that  it  may  be  moved  to  suit  c;  es  iu  the  channel. 
The  light  is  elevated  25  feet,  and  is  visible  5  miiv  the  line  of  range 
and  in  the  channel  in  entering  the  gully.  It  is  'iio  .eet  from  the  green 
light,  and  when  the  two  lights  are  in  line  they  lead  to  the  mid-channel 
buoy  which  indicates  the  outside  entrance  to  the  channel. 

Buoys. — An  iron  buoy,  painted  in  black  and  white  vertical  stripes, 
moored  in  the  middle  of  the  outside  entrance. 

A  black  can  buoy  on  the  port  side  of  the  channel  opposite  the  south 
beach. 

A  black  spar  buoy  on  the  port  side  where  the  river  turns  from  the 
eastward  inside  the  north  beach. 

A  spar  buoy,  painted  red  on  the  starboard  side,  marking  the  point  at 
the  same  turn. 

Shippegan  Qully,  5J  miles  NE.  of  the  Pokemouche,  with  its  bar  of 
sand,  its  rapid  tide,  and  dangerously  heavy  surf,  occasioned  by  easterly 


apt  to  enter 
ranee  with- 

le  of  Traca- 
r.mag.)  and 

libits  at  an 
ise,  an  open- 
I  feet  a  fixed 

listance  of  8 
ward  should 

'racadie  and 
16  depth  of  3 

shallow  and 
id  bars  about 
leaves  a  nar- 
ly,  and  there 

eather  large 

e  entrance  of 
uUy,  there  is 
ta,  300  or  400 
id  lumbering, 
lare  building, 
ttached,  and 
ich  should  be 

mged  to  slide 

the  channel. 

line  of  range 

om  the  greeu 

mid-channel 

rtical  stripes, 

site  the  south 

irns  from  the 

the  point  at 

irith  its  bar  of 
ed  by  easterly 


SHIPPEGAN   GULLY MI8C0U    GULLY. 


173 


gales,  is  20  miles  from  the  north  point  of  Miscou.  The  oar  of  sand, 
which  dries  in  part  at  low  water,  shifts  in  heavy  gales;  but  there  is 
generally  a  channel  with  4  or  5  feet  in  it  at  low  water,  and  the  tide 
rises  from  3  to  5  feet,  according  as  it  may  be  neap  or  spring  tide.  The 
3-fathom  edge  of  the  slioal  Wi>  cer  outside  the  bar  is  §  mile  oif  shore, 
after  which  the  depth  increases  rapidly. 

The  passage  over  the  bar  and  into  this  gully  is  difticult  and  dangerous 
to  strangers. 

Buoys. — The  gully  is  buoyed  with  red  and  black  buoys. 

Lights. — The  lighthouse  on  the  NE.  side  of  the  southern  entrance  of 
Shippegan  Gully  is  a  square  building,  30  feet  high,  painted  white,  and 
exhibits  at  an  elevation  of  32  feet  a  fixed  white  light,  which  should  be 
visible  11  miles. 

On  Indian  Point«are  two  leading  lights  for  entering  Shippegan  Gully. 
The  inner  light  is  a  fixed  white  light  shown  on  a  mast  at  an  elevation 
of  39  feet,  and  is  visible  11  miles. 

The  outer  light  is  a  fixed  red  light,  shown  on  a  mastr  28  feet  above 
high  water,  and  should  be  visible  4  miles. 

The  inner  mast  is  35  feet  high  and  the  outer  one  25  feet,  each  having 
a  shed  at  its  base. 

The  lights  are  148  yards  apart,  and  bear  from  each  other  N.  56°  W. 
(N.  32°  W.  mag.)  and  S.  56°  E.  <S.  32°  W.  mag.). 

These  lights  when  in  line  indicate  the  deepest  water  over  the  bar, 
and  lead  up  to  a  red  buoy  which  has  been  placed  outside  the  bar  at  the 
entrance  to  Shippegan  Gully ;  after  passing  which,  vessels  should  keep 
the  lights  in  line  until  nearing  a  black  can  buoy  moored  with  the  lights 
in  line  inside  the  bar;  thence  the  channel  inward  is  buoyed  in  the 
usual  manner. 

Miscou  Gully,  about  13  miles  northward  of  Shippegan  Gully,  only 
admits  boats  at  high  water. 

Light. — At  Sandy  Point,  on  the  north-side  entrance  to  Miscou  Gully, 
a  fixed  white  light  is  placed  to  mark  the  entrance.  The  light  is  45  feet 
above  high  water,  and  is  visible  7  miles.  The  light  is  shown  from  a 
mast,  25  feet  high,  with  a  wooden  shed  at  its  base  standing  upon  a  low 
crib-work  pier,  all  of  which  is  painted  white. 

Birch  Point — About  1^  miles  to  the  southeastward  from  North  Point 
of  Miscou  is  Birch  Point,  a  steep  cliff  of  sandstone,  about  10  feet  high, 
and  which  will  be  easily  recognized  by  the  white  birch  trees,  which  are 
higher  there  than  in  any  other  parts  near  the  shore.  A  reef  of  stones 
and  sand  extends  there  ^  mile  out  from  the  shore.  The  soundings  in 
the  chart  will  enable  the  mariner  easily  to  avoid  the'  shoal  off"  North 
Point,  either  by  night  or  by  day.  There  is  good  anchorage  on  either 
side  of  it;  under  the  North  Point  in  from  5  to  10  fathoms,  in  southerly 
winds,  and  off  the  lighthouse  on  Birch  Point,  in  from  3^  to  6  fathoms, 
in  westerly  winds,  the  bottom  being  of  sand,  which  holds  sufliciently 
well  for  offshore  winds. 


I 


174 


GULF   OF   8T.  LAWRBNCE WEST    COAST. 


;\ 


Light — The  lighthouse  on  Birch  Point,  an  octagon-shaped  building, 
74  feet  high,  and  painted  red,  exhibits  a  revolving  white  light,  showing 
four  bright  rays  every  seventy-five  seconds,  with  intervals  of  fifteen 
seconds  between  their  points  of  greatest  brilliancy,  followed  by  an  inter- 
val of  thirty  seconds,  during  the  greater  part  of  which  the  light  will  be 
eclipsed;  the  light  thus  completing  a  revolution  in  IJ  minutes,  is  of  the 
greatest  assistance  to  vessels  rounding  this  low  island  at  night,  and 
especially  to  the  numerous  fishing  schooners  which  frequent  Miscou 
Harbor.  It  is  79  feet  above  the  level  of  high  water,  and  should  be  visi 
ble  14  miles;  it  is  seen  from  the  westward  over  the  island. 

Peg  VThistle.— The  steam  whistle  107  yards  east  of  the  lighthouse 
on  Birch  Point  will  in  thick,  foggy  weather  or  snowstorms  be  sounded 
twice  in  each  minute :  First,  a  blast  of  five  seconds'  duration,  with  an 
interval  of  twenty-five  seconds;  then  a  second  blast  of  five  seconds, 
with  an  interval  of  twenty-five  seconds. 

Signal  Station. — There  is  a  signal  station  at  Birch  Point,  and  the 
lighthouse  is  connected  with  Shippegan  by  telephone. 

Coast. — There  arc  no  detached  shoals  along  this  coast,  so  that  it  may 
be  safely  approached  to  10  fathoms  water  in  the  nighttime  and  to  6 
or  5  fathoms  in  the  daytime.  Nevertheless,  shoal  water  extends  to  a 
considerable  distance  from  the  shore  in  several  places,  as,  for  instance, 
off  the  east  side  of  Miscou,  where,  at  Wilson  Point,  2J  miles  to  the 
northward  of  Miscou  Gully,  a  sandy  shoal  extends  a  mile  out  to  3 
fathoms  water;  a  depth  of  5 J  fathoms  was  obtained  by  H.  M.  S.  Spar- 
tan at  a  distance  of  3  miles  east  of  the  lighthouse;  therefore  give 
Wilson  Bank  a  berth  of  2J  to  3  miles.  Off  Miscou  Gully,  7  miles  to 
the  southward  of  the  north  point  of  Miscou,  the  shoal  water  extends 
§  mile,  and  4  or  5  miles  farther  to  the  southward,  off  the  low  sandstone 
cliffs  of  Shippegan  Island,  there  are  rocky  patches  with  little  more  than 
2  fathoms  upon  them,  and  nearly  a  mile  off  shore.  Still  farther  to  the 
southward,  along  the  coast  of  Shippegan  Island,  and  6  miles  to  the 
northward  of  Shippegan  Gully,  there  is  another  similar  patch  at  nearly 
the  same  distance  from  the  shore. 

Miscou  Banks  extend  about  22  miles  to  the  northeastward  of 
Miscou,  and  the  soundings  upon  them  will  afford  full  and  sufficient 
guidance  for  a  vessel  approaching  this  part  of  the  coast.  The  shoalest 
parts  of  the  banks  will  be  found  on  an  PNE.  line  of  bearing  from  the 
lighthouse  on  Birch  Point,  whereon,  for  the  first  6  miles  off  shore,  there 
are  only  from  5J  to  8  fathoms  on  a  rocky  bottom,  after  which  the  water 
deepens  rapidly,  there  being  from  12  to  17  fathoms,  with  red  sand,  rock, 
and  shell  for  the  next  9  miles,  at  the  end  of  which  it  deepens  to  20 
fathoms;  at  7  miles  farther,  with  deipths  between  20  and  30  fathoms, 
over  red  sand,  gravel,  shell,  and  broken  coral,  is  the  edge  of  the  bank, 
where  the  depth  increases  rapidly  to  above  40  fathoms,  and  the  sound- 
ings change  to  mud. 

The  northern  edge  of  the  banks,  in  30  fathoms,  is  7  or  8  miles  to  the 


d  buildiug, 
at,  sbowiiig 
is  of  fifteen 
by  an  iuter- 
igUt  will  be 
[68,  is  of  tbe 
;  night,  and 
lent  Miscou 
ould  be  visi- 

B  lighthouse 

be  sounded 

;ion,  with  an 

Ive  seconds, 

jint,  and  the 

,o  that  it  may 
ime  and  to  6 
•  extends  to  a 
,  for  instance, 

miles  to  the 
nile  out  to  3 
[.  M.  S.  Spar- 
herefore  give 
i  miles  to 

rater  extends 
(ow  sandstone 
more  than 

farther  to  the 
miles  to  the 

itch  at  nearly 

fheastward  of 

ind  sufficient 

The  shoalest 

}ing  from  the 

\S  shore,  there 

lich  the  water 

sand,  rock, 

leepens  to  20 

|d  30  fathoms, 

of  the  bank, 

Ind  the  sound- 

8  miles  to  the 


mum 


CHALEUR   BAY. 


175 


northward  of  the  ENE.  line  of  beariug  from  the  lighthouse  on  Birch 
Point,  and  passes  the  north  point  of  Miscou,  at  the  distance  of  4  miles, 
into  Ohaleur  Bay,  thus  affording  excellent  guidance  to  vessels.  These 
banks  continue  to  extend  off  tbe  coast  to  tbe  southward,  but  with  more 
regular  soundings  and  a  greater  general  depth  than  in  tbe  part  to 
which  the  name  of  Miscou  Banks  has  been  applied. 

Chaleur  Bay  (Bay  of  Chaleurs)  is  the  largest  bay  in  the  gulf,  being 
25  miles  wide  from  Miscou  Island  to  Gape  d'Espoir,  but  tbe  entrance  is 
more  generally  considered  to  be  at  Macquereau  Point,  from  which  tbe 
north  point  of  Miscou  Island  is  distant  14^  miles.  Tbe  depth  of  tbe 
bay  from  Miscou  to  the  entrance  of  the  Itestigoucbe  River  is  about  75 
miles. 

Tbe  northern  shore  of  tbe  bay  is  of  moderate  height,  bnt  an  irregular 
range  of  hills  of  considerable  elevation  is  everywhere  visible  a  few 
miles  back  from  tbe  coast,  tbe  predominating  features  of  which  are 
red  cliffs  of  sandstone  and  shale,  with  intervening  shingle  and  sand 
beaches.  Trap  rocks  and  limestone  are  occasionally  met  with  also,  but 
more  sparingly.  Tbe  southern  or  New  Brunswick  shore  is,  generally 
speaking,  much  lower,  and  for  tbe  most  part  composed  of  similar  rocks; 
bnt  between  Garaquette  and  Batburst  the  cliffs  of  red  sandstone  rise 
to  a  height  of  200  feet  above  tbe  sea.  Tbe  sandstone  either  belongs  to 
or  is  very  nearly  connected  with  tbe  coal  formation,  fossil  vegetable 
remains  of  which,  as  well  as  thin  vein's ,  of  bituminous  coal,  being  not 
infrequently  met  with.  There  are  numerous  settlements  all  around 
tbe  bay,  and  tbe  several  harbors,  roadsteads,  and  rivers  are  frequented 
by  numbers  of  vessels  engaged  in  the  lumber  trade  and  tbe  fisheries. 

Tbe  climate  is  warmer  and  tbe  weather  in  general  much  finer  within 
this  bay  than  it  is  outside  in  tbe  adjacent  parts  of  tbe  gulf.  Tbe  fogs, 
which  prevail  so  much  with  southerly  winds  on  Miscou  Banks,  seldom 
enter  tbe  bay,  although  rain  and  mist  accompany  easterly  gales  here  as 
elsewhere. 

The  navigation  is  by  no  means  difficult,  for  although  there  are  some 
dangerous  shoals,  yet  there  is  everywhere  good  warning  by  tbe  lead. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  the  entrance  of  Chaleur 
Bay  at  2h. ;  springs  rise  5  feet,  neaps  3  feet.  Tbe  tidal  streams  are 
regular  within  tbe  bay,  and  seldom  amount  to  the  rate  of  one  knot  per 
hour;  but  outside,  off  its  mouth,  and  especially  on  Miscou  Banks,  the 
currents  and  tidal  streams  are  so  irregular,  both  in  strength  and  direc- 
tion, that  nothing  definite  can  be  said  of  them,  and  their  dangerous 
effects  upon  tbe  course  of  vessels  can  only  be  guarded  against  by  tbe 
constant  use  of  the  deep-sea  lead  and  attention  to  tbe  soundings. 

Directions  at  Night  and  in  Fogs. — Vessels  bound  for  Chaleur  Bay 
and  approaching  its  entrance  on  a  dark  night  or  in  foggy  weather  should 
not  attempt  to  make  Macquereau  Point,  which  is  so  bold  that  there  is 
little  or  no  warning  by  the  lead,  but  should  strike  soundings  on  tbe 
Miscou  Banks,  which  extend  nearly  22  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Miscou 


^    .  '. 


176 


GULF   OV   ST.  LAWRENCE — WEST    COAST. 


Island.  A  cautious  lookout  should  be  kept  for  the  numerous  fls  ung 
schooners  which  are  generally  riding  on  the  banks  and  the  ..nrtheru 
edge  of  the  latter,  being  followed  in  30  fathoms  of  water,  w.l.  safely 
conduct  vessels  past  the  north  point  of  Miscou,  at  the  distance  of  4 
miles,  and  form  a  sure  guide  up  the  bay.  .  .     ,,       ..    . 

The  bank  of  soundings  off  the  north  shore  is  also  sufficiently  wide  to 
Kuide  vessels  everywhere  within  Macquereau  Point ;  nevertheless,  on  a 
dark  night  and  in  bad  weather,  vessels  had  better  not  approach  the 
shore  much  nearer  than  the  depth  of  30  fathoms  in  any  part  of  the  bay 
to  the  eastward  of  Carlisle  Point.  The  soundings  are  generally  of  sand 
and  shell  on  the  banks,  while  in  the  central  P^rts  of  the  bay  black  and 
brown  mud  prevail,  with  depths  between  30  and  50  fathoms  Within, 
or  to  the  westward  of  Carlisle  Point  and  the  opposite  bay  of  Nipisighit, 
the  depth  decreases  to  less  than  30  fathoms,  but  there  is  still  sufflcieut 
warning  everywhere  by  the  lead  quite  up  to  the  head  of  the  bay. 

(H.  O.  Chart  No.  1217.) 

Miscou  Flats  and  Miscou  IslaneL-The  S-fathom  edge  of  the 
Miscou  Flats  is  fully  H  miles  off  to  the  IS  W  of  Goose  1^*^^!^^*^ "«^ 
and  there  are  not  more  than  3  fathoms  at  the  distance  of  2i  miles  from 
the  same  point.    These  flats,  which  are  of  sandstone,  continue  4  or  .» 
miles  NE.  of  Miscou  Harbor,  and  near  their  northern  termination  there 
is  an  opening  in  the  trees  which  extends  across  the  island,  and  which 
has  been  mistaken  by  vessels,  at  night  or  in  foggy  weather,  either  for 
the  harbor  or  the  gully,  according  as  they  were  west  or  east  of  the 
island.    There  is  moderately  good  anchorage  during  the  summer  sea^ 
son  with  this  opening  S.  52°  E.  (S.  28o  E.  mag.)  in  10  to  11  fathoms     It 
is  easily  distinguished,  very  useful  in  pointing  out  a  ves^eFs  POSi*^«°' 
and  especially  to  clear  Miscou  Flats  when  working  out  with  a  light 
breeze  and  flood  tide.    The  remainder  of  the  shore  is  tolerably  bold, 
with  steep  sandy  beaches,  which  surround  the  north  end  of  the  island, 
where  several  stores  and  huts  of  the  fishermen  will  be  seen  along  the 
shore     The  north  point  is  distinguished  by  a  green  mound,  or  grassy 
sand  hill,  and  the  shallow  water  does  not  there  extend  to  more  than  i 
mile  off  shore;  but  immediately  to  the  eastward  of  the  point  and  front- 
ing the  outlet  of  a  small  lagoon,  where  there  are  several  f  l»mf  «t«J!f 
and  huts,  a  sandy  shoal  commences  and  stretches  off  a  mile  to  the  NE. 
At  that  distance  from  the  shore  there  are  3  fathoms  of  water,  but  it  is 
more  than  2i  miles  out  to  the  Sfathom  edge  of  the  shoal. 

Miscou  Harbor,  frequently  called  Little  Shippegau  by  the  flsher- 
men,  lies  between  Miscou  and  Shippegau  Islands,  and  just  within  the 
sandy  spit  at  the  SW.  extreme  of  Miscou,  where  the  space  of  deep 
water,  from  4  to  6  fathoms,  lorming  the  haxbor  for  large  vessels,  is  400 
Trdswide  and  upward  of  a  mile  inlength.  The  harbor  for  small  craft 
fs  more  extensive,  with  2  and  2^  fathoms  water  and  also  a  narrow 
channel  extending  eastward  through  the  flats  of  mud  and  weeds  to 


wm 


■ous  flailing 
he  iitntlieru 
,  wil  safely 
istai'ce  of  4 

jntly  wide  to 
rtheless,  on  a 
approach  tbe 
,rt  of  the  bay 
jrally  of  sand 
lay  black  and 
ms.    Within, 
ofNipisigbit, 
still  sufflcient 
the  bay. 


a  edge  of  the 
,ke  lighthouse, 
f  2i  miles  flroni 
continue  4  or  5 
rmination  there 
and,  and  which 
Lther,  either  for 
or  east  of  the 
he  summer  sea- 
11  fathoms.    It 
sssel's  position, 
Lit  with  a  light 
tolerably  bold, 
d  of  the  island, 
seen  along  the 
ouud,  or  grassy 
to  more  than  4 
point  and  front- 
[al  fishing  stores 
mile  to  the  iJE. 
water,  but  it  is 

lal. 

i  by  the  fisher 
just  within  the 
i  space  of  deep 
re  vessels,  is  400 
for  small  craft 
.  also  a  narrow 
id  aud  weeds  to 


MISCOU    HARBOR. 


within  a  mile  of  Miscon  Gully,  wliicli  bouts  ciui  only  enter  at  high 
water.  The  bottom  within  tlie  harbor  is  soft  mud;  in  tlio  chauiiol, 
just  outside  the  entrance,  sand,  and  between  the  slioals,  farther  out, 
sandstone. 

Lights. — A  fixed  white  light,  elevated  38  feet  ami  visible  0  miles,  is 
shown  from  a  maat  at  Herring  (Harper)  Point  at  the  western  entrance 
to  Miscou  Harbor.  The  mast  is  25  feet  high,  and  has  a  wooden  shed  at 
its  base  standing  upon  a  low  crib- work  pier;  the  whole  structure  is 
painted  white. 

At  Goose  Lake,  on  the  west  side  of  Miscou  Island,  a  white  light, 
revolving  every  minute,  is  exhibited  at  40  feet  above  high  water,  from 
a  square  lighthouse,  28  feet  high,  with  a  dwelling  house  attached,  aud 
painted  white.    The  light  sliould  be  visible  10  miles. 

Sandy  Point  Light — See  page  173. 

Signal  Station. — There  is  a  signal  station  at  Goose  Tiake;  the  light- 
house is  connected  by  telephone  with  Shippegan. 

Directions. — Miscou  Channel,  leading  to  the  harbor,  between  the  Mis- 
cou and  the  Shippegan  Flats,  is  in  one  part  only  350  yards  wide,  between 
shoals  so  steeiJ  that  there  is  not  the  sliglitest  warning  by  the  lead.  In 
short,  none  other  tlum  small  vessels  should  attempt  this  harbor  with- 
out having  first  buoyed  the  channel  or  secured  the  assistance  of  a  com- 
petent pilot.  A  vessel  of  12  feet  draft  may,  however,  run  in  with  the 
assistance  of  the  chart  and  the  following  brief  directions  : 

If  to  the  eastward  of  the  harbor,  cross  the  Miscou  Flats  to  the  SW., 
at  the  distance  of  3  miles  off  shore,  in  no  less  than  4  fathoms  water;  if 
to  the  westward,  follow  the  northern  edge  of  the  Shippegan  Flat,  in  4 
or  5  fathoms.  In  either  case,  open  out  the  NE.  extreme  of  the  trees  of 
Shii)pegan  Island,  just  clear  of  the  SW.  extreme  of  the  trees  of  Miscou 
Island,  or  keep  the  former  in  one  with  the  extreme  of  the  sandy  spit  at 
the  SW.  end  of  Miscou  Island,  the  latter  being  preferable  if  it  can  be 
made  out.  These  marks  will  bear  a  little  to  the  eastward  of  S.  09°  E. 
(S  45°  E.  mag.).  Steer  for  them  until  the  water  shoals  to  less  than  4 
fathoms,  which  will  be  on  a  point  of  the  Miscou  Flats.  Sheer  to  the 
SW.  for  about  4  mile,  or  so  as  to  deepen  the  water  to  4  and  5  fathoms; 
then  steer  S.  64°  E.  (S.  40°  E.  mag.),  or  for  Pandora  Point,  a  wooded 
extreme  of  Shippegan,  J  mile  within  Pecten  Point,  which  is  the  sandy 
south  point  of  entrance  of  the  harbor. 

In  running  this  course  the  vessel  will  cross  a  bay  in  the  Miscou  Flats 
in  4  and  5  fathoms.  If  the  soundings  deepen  to  more  than  the  latter 
depth  at  low  water,  sheer  to  the  eastward,  for  the  object  is  to  keep  on 
the  Miscou  and  least  dangerous  side  of  the  channel,  and  that  will  be 
effected  without  difficulty  by  the  lead,  since  there  are  8  and  9  fathoms 
in  the  channel.  After  running  a  short  mile  toward  Pandora  Point, 
the  points  on  the  north  side  of  Shippegan  will  be  observed  to  come  in 
one,  bearing  S.  49°  W.  (S.  73°  W.  mag.),  and  about  the  same  time  a 
high  sand  hill,  on  the  sand  bars  at  the  head  of  the  harbor,  will  come  on, 
1151 12 


',1 


178 


GULP   OP   ST.  LAWRENCE — WEST    COAST. 


I 


I 


with  the  bigh-water  extreme  of  the  sandy  spit  of  Miscou  hcarliip  S. 
83'^  E.  (S.  59'^  E.  mag.)>  The  vessel  will  now  be  at  the  narrow  i)art  of 
the  channel,  and  must  follow  the  edge  of  the  Miscou  I'Mats  by  the  lead, 
in  from  4  to  G  I'athom.s,  sheering  to  tlu!  eastward  the  inntant  the  dejith 
is  more  than  the  latter,  and  to  the  westward  when  less  than  the  former. 
The  general  direction  of  tlie  course  will  be  still  toward  Pandora  Point, 
until  the  points  on  the  SE.  shore  of  Miscou  within  the  harbor  open  out, 
when  the  vessel  will  be  in  safe  anchorage,  although  outside  the  entrance. 
If  wishing  to  proceed  farther,  haul  up  for  tlie  high  sand  hill  on  tlie 
sand  bars  already  mentioned,  and  when  within  the  sandy  jtoint,  steer 
for  the  gully  for  a  short  distance,  choosing  a  convenient  berth. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Miscou  Harbor  at  2h. 
30m. ;  springs  rise  5  feet,  neaps  3  feet.  The  tides  appeared  to  set  fairly 
in  and  out  of  the  harbor,  at  a  rate  seldom  amounting  to  a  knot. 

Shippegan  Flat  is  an  extensive  shoal  of  sandstone,  thinly  and  par- 
tially covered  with  sand,  and  having  in  some  parts  not  more*than  3  feet 
water.  When  on  this  3-foot  patch,  Grasse  Point  bore  S.  10°  W.  (S.  43'^ 
W.  mag.)  and  Mya  Point  S.  86°  E.  (8.  (>2o  B.  mag.).  It  is  the  most 
northern  of  the  Shippegan  Shoals,  and  extends  2^  miles  off"  the  north 
side  o^the  island,  separating  the*  channel  leading  to  the  harbors  of 
Caraquette  and  Shippegan  from  that  which  leads  into  Miscou  Harbor. 
There  is  good  warning  by  the  lead  all  along  its  northern  side,  which 
may  be  safely  approached  to  6  fathoms  in  a  large,  and  to  3  fathoms  in  a 
small  vessel. 

PokesueAie  Shoal  is  an  extensive  flat  of  sand  extending  2  miles 
to  the  northward  and  eastward  from  Pokesuedie  Island,  and  having 
only  6  or  7  feet  water  over  the  greater  part  of  it.  Caraquette  steeple 
and  the  sandy  SE.  extreme  ot  Oharaquette  Island  in  line,  bearing  S. 
66°  W.  (west  mag.),  lead  over  its  north  point  in  2  fathoms  at  low  water; 
and  if  the  steeple  be  kept  halfway  between  the  extreme  of  the  sandy 
point  and  the  extreme  of  the  trees  on  the  same  island,  the  north  i)oint 
of  the  shoal  will  be  cleared  in  4^  fathoms;  but  as  both  the  sandy 
point  and  the  trees  may  change  in  the  course  of  years,  those  marks 
should  not  be  relied  on  without  previous  examination. 

Light — Great  Pokesuedie  Island  lighthouse  is  a  square  tower, 34  feet 
high  and  painted  white,  on  the  'SE.  extreme  of  the  island.  The  light 
is  fixed  white,  elevated  41  feet,  and  visible  11  miles. 

Shippegan  Sound,  formed  by  Pokesuedie  Island  and  the  mainland 
on  the  west,  and  by  Shippegan  Island  on  the  east,  is  an  extensive 
place.  On  the  western  side,  within  Pokesuedie  Island,  is  Simon  Inlet, 
the  best  harbor  in  the  sound.  Within  its  entrance,  between  Marcelle 
and  Brul6  Points,  the  anchorage  is  quite  landlocked,  with  water  suffi- 
cient and  space  enough  for  vessels  of  large  draft.  On  the  opposite  or 
Shippegan  side  are  the  bays  of  Alemek  and  Little  Alemek.  The  latter 
is  a  shallow  place,  but  has  good  anchorage  off  its  mouth.  The  former, 
which  is  most  to  the  Houthward,  and  by  far  the  larger,  bay  of  the  two, 


1 


8HIPPE0AN    FIARHOR. 


170 


bearing  S. 
nw  part  of 
lytlielead, 
;  the  tlfii»th 
tlie  former, 
lora  Point, 
ir  open  out, 
»e  entrance, 
hill  on  the 
point,  steer 
rtli. 
irbor  at  2h. 

to  set  fairly 
IV  not. 

nly  and  par- 
re«thau  3  feet 
)oW.{S.43^ 

is  the  most 
)ff  the  north 
le  harbors  of 
scou  Harbor, 
n  side,  which 
i  fathoms  in  a 

iding  2  miles 
[,  and  having 
luette  steeple 
[le,  bearing  8. 
at  low  water; 
of  the  sandy 
le  north  i)oint 
ith  the  sandy 
[,  those  marks 

,  tower,  34  feet 
kd.    The  liglit 

the  mainland 
an  extensive 
|s  Simon  Inlet, 
Feen  Marcelle 
water  suffi- 
the  opposite  or 
tk.    The  latter 
The  former, 
Ly  of  the  two, 


is  an  oxcollcMit  harbor,  wiHi  .'J  and  1  fathoms  water,  and  secure  in  all 
winds.  There  is  a  churcli  and  vii1aK(«  at  the  h(>ad  of  this  bay;  and  on 
Alexander  Point,  its  north  point,  .stands  an  (\stablishnu>nt  and  wind- 
mill. There  is  a  bar  of  sand  and  mud  lixtendin^  across  the  sound  fnrni 
Aloxatader  Point  to  nruh'i  Point,  which  limits  the  depth  that  can  be 
carried  into  Alemck  Hay  to  2A  fathoms  and  into  Hhippe|i;an  Harbor  to 
24  fathoms  at  low  water. 

Shippegan  Harbor. — On  the  mainland,  nearly  oppo.site  tlie  south 
point  of  Alemek  Bay,  there  is  a  windmill  on  Hernacho  Point,  the  sandy 
north  point  of  Basse  Bay,  which  is  small  and  shallow.  On  the  south 
point  of  this  bay,  '^  mile  to  the  southward  of  the  windmill,  stands  the 
church  and  village  of  Shippegan;  and  off  them  is  Shippegan  Harbor, 
which  is  a  narrow  channel  with  2i  to  4  fathoms  water,  and  between 
shoals  of  mud  ami  eelgrass  nearly  dry  at  low  water.  This  narrow 
channel  continues  2^  miles  beyond  the  church,  terminating  at  Shippe- 
gan (luUy,  the  southern  entrance  of  tlie  sound.  The  gully  is  used  by 
shallops  and  fishing  boats.  The  tide  is  generally  extremely  rapid  in  it, 
and  tliere  is  often  a  heavy  surf  on  its  bar  of  sand,  wiiich  dries  in  part 
at  h)w  water,  leaving  a  channel  with  only  4  or  .'>  feet  water.  Shippegan 
Harbor  is  quite  secure  in  all  winds,  and  it  is  there  that  the  greater  part 
of  tlie  vessels  wliich  visit,  the  place  for  timber  lie  moored.  The  Avater- 
ing  ])lace  is  at  a  small  stream  in  Basse  Bay,  a  short  distance  to  the 
westward  of  the  church. 

Ice. — The  sound  is  usually  frozen  over  ab^ut  December  1,  and  clear 
of  ice  -ibout  May  10,  being  completely  closed  between  those  dates. 
The  first  vessel  arrives,  from  sea,  about  May  21,  and  the  last  one  leaves 
about  November  13.  In  1870  field  ice  drifted  into  Shipjiegan  Sound 
on  May  14,  and  did  not  disappear  until  June  4. 

Buoys. — Bla<;k  and  red  buoys  mark  the  channel. 

Lights.— See  page  173. 

Shippegan  Channel,  leading  into  the  sOnn<l  from  the  northward,  is 
dilficnlt.  The  water  is  deep,  but  the  passage  is  narrow  and  crooked, 
and  without  leading  marks.  For  3  miles  the  breadth  of  the  channel 
between  the  Pokesuedie  and  Shippegan  shoals,  which  are  exceedingly  ■ 
steep,  is  only  ft-om  4  t«  ^  mile.  The  whole  distance  from  Shippegan 
Flat  to  Shippegan  church  is  nearly  9  miles,  and  the  navigation  is  diffi- 
cult all  the  way.  No  directions  which  could  be  given  would  enable  a 
stranger  to  take  a  large  vessel  into  the  sound  without  very  considerable 
risk  of  getting  on  shore;  but  a  vessel  not  drawing  more  than  12  feet 
may  be  taken  in  by  the  lead  in  fine  weather  and  with  the  assistance  of 
the  buoys,  if  in  position,  and  the  chart. 

Directions. — Bring  Marcelle  and  I'okesuedie  Points  in  one,  bearing 
S.  1°  E.  (S.  230  W.  mag.),  and  steer  for  them.  After  passing  the  west 
end  if  the  Shippegan  Flat  the  depths  will  be  9  to  7  fathoms  in  the  chan- 
nel, but  they  will  decrease  as  the  vessel  ajiproaches  the  Pokesuedie  and 
Oaraquette  Shoals.    As  soon  as  the  depth  is  o  fathoms,  alter  course  to 


180 


GULP   OP   ST.  LAWUENCK — WKHT    COAST. 


I 


8  T)^  K  (S.  11^  I'-,  mag.),  or  «»»  us  may  be  necessary  t«>  f.-llow  the  eiist- 
eru  side  of  the  rokoHuwUo  SIkhU  in  that  «lci»tli,  until  (^iira.inetttusU't.ple 
is  optMi  clear  to  the  southward  of  the  sandy  Si:,  extreme  of  Caraqaette 
Island.     She  will  then  bo  at  the  entrance  of  the  narrow  part  ot  the 
channel  between  the  Pokesuedie  and  Shippcfjan  Shoals,  and  it  the  wnul 
be  from  the  eastward  she  had  better  haul  over  to  the  weather  side  into 
T)  fathoms  water  and  foUov  that  depth  alon- the  edfje  of  tiie  Shipi.eRan 
Shoals  by  the  lead,  as  befon';  but  if  the  win.l  be  from  the  westward, 
follow  the  cdKe  of  the  I'okesuedie  Shoal  in  the  same  manner.     The 
mode  of  proceeding  whi.h  has  just  been  recommended  would  prevent  a 
vessel  from  mistakii.fr  the  si.le  of  the  channel  which  she  misht  be  on, 
and  from  which  the  greatest  dan-er  of  running  on  shore  would  arise. 
The  depth  of  water  in  the  channel  varies  from  <J  to  1>,  and  in  one  place 
to  12,  fathoms  over  sandy  bottom,  but  changing  to  clay  and  mud  as  the 
vessel  advances  into  the  sound. 

Tides  —It  would  re(inire  a  much  longer  experience  than  was  attortlea 
by  the  few  weeks  employed  in  the  Admiralty  survey  to  become  fully 
acduainted  with  tiie  set  of  the  tides  in  the  entrance  of  the  Shippegau 
and  (  aracMiette  Channels,  where  they  doubtless  change  with  the  time 
of  tide  and  other  circumstances.  The  rate  of  the  tides,  however,  sel- 
dom e\(ee.led  a  knot  even  in  the  channels,  where,  of  course,  they  are 
stronger  than  elsewher.'.  In  Shippegau  Harbor  the  streant  was  very 
regular  in  Hue  weather,  running  in  at  the  gully  and  to  the  northward, 
through  the  sound  into  Chaleur  Bay,  from  about  half  ebb  to  half  Hood 
bv  the  shore,  and  in  the  reverse  direction,  or  to  the  southward,  from 
about  half  flood  to  half  ebb.  It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in 
Shippegau  Harbor  at  .Mi.  4Jm.,  which  is  about  an  hour  later  than  at 
Caraquette  and  Paspebiac;  springs  rise  5J  or  0  feet,  neaps  3  feet. 

Caraquette  Island  is  of  sandstone,  low  and  wooded,  and  1-^  miles 
long  in  a  direction  nearly  parallel  to  the  coast.  Sandy  points  extend 
fi-om  both  ends  of  the  island  toward  the  mainland,  or  to  the  southward, 
so  as  to  form  a  bay,  in  which  there  is  landlocked  anchorage  for  vessels 
not  drawing  more  than  l.>  feet  water.  The  island  rises  from  an  exten- 
sive bank  of  Hat  sandstone,  partially  covered  with  sand,  and  which, 
commencing  at  Mizzenette  Point,  extends  to  the  eastward  parallel  to 
the  coast  all  the  way  to  the  entrance  of  Shippegau  Sound,  a  distance 

of  8  or  9  miles.  ^  ,      i       i  n*- 

There  is  no  passage  for  vessels  between  Caraquette  Island  and  Miz- 
zeiMJtte  Point  3  miles  west;  only  a  narrow  channel  for  boats  on  the 

side  next  the  island.  ^,    t  ,      ,        i  * 

Light— The  lighthouse  on  the  west  end  of  Caraquette  Island,  a  white 
squaJe  tower,  43  feet  high,  on  keeper's  dwelling,  exhibits,  at  an  elevation 
of  49  feet,  a  fixed  white  light,  which  should  be  visible  14  miles. 

Caraquette  Shoal  extends  44  miles  to  the  northeastward  of  the 
island  from  which  it  dries  out  occasionally  in  very  low  tides  to  the  dis- 
tance of  2  miles,  and  is  shallow  in  every  part.    From  its  east  end,  Oara- 


4 


;)\v  th«  eiist- 

part  «»t'  tlio 
il  if  the  wind 

hor  »i»l«  lilt" 
«  Sliippt'Kiiii 

10  westward, 
lanner.  The 
iild  prevent  a 
initjht  be  on, 
,  would  arise. 
I  in  one  place 
lid  mud  as  the 

11  was  afforded 
,  become  fully 
tlie  Shippegau 

with  the  time 
,  however,  sel- 
jurse,  they  are 
reant  was  very 
the  northward, 
)h  to  half  flood 
mthward,  from 
,nd  change,  in 
r  later  than  at 
apa  3  feet. 
I,  and  I'i  miles 
points  extend 
the  southward, 
•age  for  vessels 
from  an  exteu- 
pd,  and  which, 
ard  parallel  to 
iund,  a  distance 

island  and  Miz- 
)r  boats  on  the 

I  Island,  a  white 
,  at  an  elevation 

14  miles. 

tastward  of  tlie 

I  tides  to  the  dis- 
j  east  end,  Oara- 


w 


CAKMlVKTi'V)    HAUnOR. 


181 


qnotte  stoeplo  and  the  HK.  extrente  of  tlie  trees  of  Oiiraqnotte  Island 
are  in  line,  hearing  S.  «».P  \V.  (8.  87'^  VV.  niag,)«  ii"d  Hhippegan  steeple 
and  Pokesuedie  Point  bearing  S.  L'(r  H,  (H,  1  W.  mag.).  Tlie  hist- 
iiained  murivs  in  line  lea<l  to  the  eastward  of  this  shoiil  in  l\  fathoinH  at 
low  water,  but  a  larg((  vessel  requiring  a  great  <lepth  of  wiit«'r  would 
have  to  pass  farther  to  the  eastward,  by  keeping  Miircelie  and  I'oke- 
Huedie  Points  in  line,  bearing  S.  1°  E.  (S.  2;P  W.  mag.). 

Caraquette  Channel,  between  the  Pokesuedio  and  ('anKpiette 
Siioals,  forms  tl*e  iMitranee  to  the  harbor  of  Caraipiette  for  a  distance 
of  I'i  miles,  and  has  W!it4!r  enough  for  vessels  of  large  draft;  but  it  is 
crooked  and  only  450  yards  wide  between  very  steep  slioala,  and  without 
sullleient  leading  mavks;  hence  it  becomes  a  very  ditllcnit  channel. 

Caraquette  Harbor  nmy  be  said  to  (commence  immediately  within 
or  to  the  westward  of  Pokesuedie  Island,  extending  westward  between 
the  mainland  and  the  Cara(|uetto  Shoal  and  Island.  The  church  at 
Caraquette  will  be  seen  standing  (conspicuously  on  the  ridge  nearly 
opposite  to  Mizzenette  Point,  and  the  houses  and  fish  stores  of  Lower 
Caraquette  nearly  opposite  to  the  island.  In  the  eastern  part  »»f  the 
harbor,  immediately  within  Pokesuedie,  the  depth  is  .">  and  <»  fatlio'us, 
and  there  is  not  less  than  3A  fathoms  till  within  ^  mile  «>f  the  8E.  point 
of  the  island.  Between  the  island  and  the  main,  the  ciiannel  is  only 
2.')0  yards  wide  and  carries  only  2.^  fathoms  water ;  but  farther  west- 
ward it  increases  to  ^  mile  and  4i  fathoms  water,  and  is  there  sheltered 
by  the  Mizzenette  Sands,  which  dry  at  low  water  nearly  across  to  the 
island.  The  bottom  is  of  mud  within  the  harbor  and  of  sand  in  the 
entrance,  or  Caraquette  Channel. 

Caraquette  Bay  extends  4  or  5  miles  to  the  southweatward  of  Miz- 
zenette Point,  being  all  shoal  water  except  the  narrow  channel  of  the 
harbor  and  terminating  in  the  two  shallow  rivers,  the  South  and  the 
North,  in  the  mouths  of  which  there  are  oyster  beds.  The  best  water- 
ing place  is  at  a  small  stream  which  descends  the  steep  banks  at  Upper 
Caraquette,  near  lirideau  Point. 

Although  this  is  an  excellent  harbor  for  vessels  of  moderate  draft, 
and  even  capable  of  attbrding  anchorage  to  much  larger  vessels,  it 
is,  nevertheless,  an  exceedingly  dangerous  place  to  a  stranger.  The 
approach  to  it  is  between  shoals  extending  several  miles  from  the  shore, 
and  there  are  neither  beacons,  buoys,  nor  competent  pilots  (1860); 
hence,  although  4  fathoms  can  be  carried  in  at  low  water  sufficiently 
far  for  vessels  of  large  draft  to  be  anchored  in  safety  in  that  depth,  yet 
it  would  not  be  prudent  even  for  vessels  of  a  moderate  draft  to  attempt 
this  harbor  unnecessarily,  nor  unless  the  circumstances  of  wind  and 
weather  be  very  favorable,  with  a  flowing  tide,  and  her  boats  ahead. 
Under  such  favorable  circumstances  the  passage  into  the  harbor  will 
be  attended  with  little  risk  to  small  vessels  prudently  conducted,  and 
having  the  assistance  of  the  plan  in  addition  to  following  the  directions. 

Ice. — Caraquette  Harbor  is  usually  frozen  over  about  December  11, 


M2 


GULF   OF   ST.  LAWRENCE — WEST  COAST. 


and  clear  of  ice  about  May  8,  being  completely  closed  between  those 
dates.  The  first  vessel  arrives  from  sea  ubout  May  12,  and  the  last 
one  leaves  about  November  25. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Garaqnette  Harbor  at 
2h.  4(»m. ;  springs  rise  6  feet,  neaps  3  feet. 

Directions. — If  bound  from  the  east  yard,  having  brought  the  en- 
trance of  Miscou  Harbor  to  bear  to  the  eastward  of  S.  24°  E.  (south 
mag.),  stand  in  toward  it  to  8  fatho'as  water;  then  run  to  the  westward 
in  that  depth  until  the  KE.  extreme  of  the  trees  of  Shippegan  Island 
opens  to  the  southward  of  the  SW.  extreme  of  Miscou  Island,  bearing 
S.  65°  E.  (S.  41°  E.  mag.)  when,  if  the  weather  be  clear,  Garaquette 
steeple  will  be  seen  in  line  with  the  north  extreme  of  Garaquette  Island, 
bearing  S.  51°  W.  (S.  75°  W.  mag.).  From  thence  steer  for  Blanchard 
Point,  the  wooded  NW.  extreme  of  Pokesuedie  Island,  which  may  or 
may  not  be  made  out,  as  it  will  be  on  with  the  mainland  and  distant  7 
or  8  miles.  Do  not  approach  the  Shippegan  Plat  nearer  than  the 
depth  of  7  fathoms;  and  having  run  about  3^  miles,  Marcelle  Point,  the 
wooded  SE.  extreme  of  Pokesuedie  Island,  will  be  in  line  with  Poke- 
suedie Point,  which  is  the  sandy  east  extreme  of  tte  same  island. 

These  points  in  line,  bearing  S.  1°  B.  (S.  23°  W.  mag.),  will  lead  west- 
ward of  the  west  extreme  of  the  Shippegan  Flat.  Steer  for  these 
points  in  line  until  Garaquette  steeple  comes  in  line  with  the  SE. 
extreme  of  the  trees  of  Garaquette  Island,  bearing  8.  63°  W.  (S.  87° 
W.  mag.),  immediately  after  which,  or  when  the  north  extreme  of  Ship- 
pegan is  in  line  with  the  south  extreme  of  Miscou,  bearing  N.  74°  E. 
(S.  82°  E.  mag.),  steer  toward  Blanchard  Point,  bearing  8.37°  W.  (S. 
61°  W.  mag  ).  Having  run  not  quite  1 J  miles  toward  Blanchard  Point, 
Shippegan  steeple  will  come  in  linj  with  Pokesuedie  Point,  bearing 
S.  24°  E.  (south  mag.),  and  at  the  same  time,  or  immediately  after- 
wards, Garacpiette  steeple  will  be  in  line  with  the  sand^  SE.  extremity 
of  Garaquette  Island,  bearing  S.  66°  W.  (west  mag.). 

The  vessel  will  now  be  within  the  entrance  of  the  Garaquette  Ghan- 
nel,  between  the  Oara(iUette  and  Pokesuedie  Shoals,  and  must  haul  to 
the  westward  immediately  for  Garaquette  steeple,  keeping  it  carefully 
in  line  with  the  sandy  SE.  extreme  of  Garaquette  Island,  until  the  wind- 
mill on  Alexander  Point  (Shippegan  Island)  is  in  line  with  Pokesue- ' 
die  Point,  bearing  S.  47°  E.  (S.  23°  E.  mag.),  when  the  course  must 
instantly  be  changed  td  S.  40°  W.  (S.  64°  W.  mag.).  The  vessel  will 
now  be  about  to  pass  through  the  narrowest  and  most  difficult  part  of 
the  channel,  and  the  course  must  be  strictly  attended  to  and  the  lead 
kept  going  on  both  sides.  If  the  water  shoals  to  less  than  4  fathoms 
after  the  vessel  has  run  upon  this  course  from  i  to  ^  mile,  it  will  be  on 
the  Pokesuedie  side,  and  she  must  therefore  steer  to  the  northward  a 
little,  or  into  5  fathoms,  and  then  resume  the  S.  40°  W.  (S.  64°  W. 
mag.)  course  again  until  Garai^uette  steeple  comes  in  line  with  the  cliff 
of  Brideau  Point,  bearing  S.  71°  W.  (N.  85°  W.  mag.).    Alter   the 


CARAQUETTE   HARBOR. 


183 


between  those 
2,  and  the  last 

lette  Harbor  at 

jrought  the  en- 
S.  24°  B.  (south 
to  the  westward 
liippegan  Island 
Island,  bearing 
lear,  Caraquette 
iraquette  Island, 
er  for  Blanchard 
1,  which  may  or 
nd  and  distant  7 
nearer  than  the 
ircelle  Point,  the 
:  line  with  Poke- 
same  island, 
r.),  will  lead  west- 
Steer  for  these 
ine  with  the  SE. 
8.  63°  W.  (S.  87° 
extreme  of  Ship- 
searing  N. 74°  B. 
■ingS.37oW.  (S. 
Blanchard  Point, 
ie  Point,  bearing 
nmediately  after- 
dj  SB.  extremity 

Caraquette  Ohan- 
and  must  haul  to 
jeping  it  carefully 
id,  until  the  wind- 
iue  with  Pokesue- 

the  course  must 
The  vessel  will 
»8t  diflicult  part  of 
id  to  and  the  lead 

ss  than  4  fathoms 

mile,  it  will  be  on 
■o  the  northward  a 

Oo  W.  (S.  64°  W. 
line  with  the  cliff 

nag.).    Alter  the 


course  again  immediately  tlie  last-named  marks  come  in  line,  and  steer 
for  them  for  ||  mile;  then  sheer  to  tho  southward  a  little,  so  that  the 
steeple  may  be  seen  a  little  within  and  over  the  extremity  of  the  point, 
or  in  line  witli  the  store  ui>on  it;  keep  it  so  until  the  cliffy  points  on  the 
NE.  side  of  Caraiiuette' Island  are  all  shut  in  behind  the  east  point  of 
the  island,  and  it  will  have  led  clear  of  the' south  extremity  of  the  Car- 
aquette Shoal.  The  vessel  will  now  be  in  safe  anchorage,  and  a  berth 
may  be  chosen  at  ])lea8ure  with  the  assistance  of  the  chart,  and  in  from 
4  to  2^  fatiioms  at  low  Avater. 

^'essel^  of  large  draft  from  the  westward  should  pass  outside  of 
Fisherman  Ledge,  not  going  to  the  southward  into  a  less  depth  than  6 
fathoms  at  low  water  until  Marcelle  and  Pokesuedie  Points  come  in 
one,  bearing  S.  1°  E.  (S.  23°  W.  mag,);  they  should  then  haul  in  upon 
those  leading  marks,  eud  proceed  as  before  directed.  A  small  vessel 
may  pass  through  Fisherman  Channel  guided  by  the  leading  marks 
and  the  remarks  which  are  given  relating  to  Fisherman  Ledge  and 
Mizzenette  Ledge.  She  need  not  run  so  far  to  the  eastward  as  a  large 
vessel,  but  as  soon  as  Shippegan  steeple  comes  in  line  with  Pokesuedie 
Point,  bearing  S.  24°  B.  (south  mag.),  she  may  haul  in  upon  those  lead- 
ing marks,  which  will  take  her  over  the  tail  of  Caraquette  Shoal  in  3 
fathoms;  and  as  soon  as  the  steeide  of  Caraquette  comes  in  line  with 
the  sandy  SB.  extreme  of  Caraquette  Island,  bearing  S.  66°  W.  (west 
mag.),  she  must  steer  for  them  and  proceed  as  before  directed.  A 
person  acquainted  with  the  appearance  of  the  objects  given  as  leading 
marks  will  find  little  ditficulty,  when  the  weather  is  favorable  for  seeing 
them,  in  following  out  these  directions.  Perhaps  Brideau  Point  will 
be  the  most  diflBcult  to  make  out,  but  it  is  well  described  in  the  chart, 
and  the  conspicuous  store  upon  it  and  the  small  bay  on  its  east  side 
will  assist  in  pointing  it  out  to  strangers. 

Fisherman  Ledge  is  a  detached, bed  of  rocks,  with  10  feet  least 
water,  lying  to  the  northward  of  the  Caraquette  Shoal  and  separated 
from  it  by  Fisherman  Channel,  which  is  one  mile  wide  and  carries  from 
4  to  7  fathoms  water.  This  dangerous  ledge,  vvhich  lies  more  in  the 
way  of  vessels  than  any  other  in  Chaleur  Bay,  is  1^  miles  long  and  ^  'aile 
wide  between  the  3-fathom  lines.  There  are  no  marks  for  it.  Its 
northern  edge  is  distant  3  miles  from  Caraquette  Island,  and  its  east 
and  west  ends  bear  north  (2J.  24°  E.  mag.)  from  the  corresponding  points 
of  the  island.  The  points  of  cliffs  at  (Jreat  Anse  and  Donax  Point  in 
one,  bearing  S.  77°  W.  (N.  79°  W.  mag.),  lead  through  Fisherman 
Channel,  which,  however,  has  not  been  examined  very  closely,  and  can 
not  in  any  case  be  recommended  to  vessels  of  large  draft. 

Mizzenette  Ledge  of  rocks,  with  5  feet  least  water,  bears  ]S'.  45° 
W.  (N.  21°  W.  mag.)  IJ  miles  from  the  west  end  of  Caraquette  Island, 
and  a  vessel  will  pass  to  the  northward  of  it,  in  3^  fathoms,  by  keeping 
Donax  Point  just  open  to  the  northward  of  Mizzenette  Point,  bearing 
S.  83°  W.  (N.  73°  W.  mag.).    These  marks  will  also  lead  to  the  east- 


184 


GULF   OF   ST.  LAWRENCE — WEST   COAST. 


1i 


ward  along  the  northern  edge  of  the  Oaraquette  Shoal  until  they  strike 
Scollop  Patch,  which  has  14  feet  least  water  over  a  rocky  bottom, 
and  on  which  the  NW.  extreme  of  Caraquette  Island  and  Caraquette 
steeple  are  in  line,  the  SE.  extreme  of  the  island  bearing  S.  4^  W.  (S. 
28^  W.  mag.),  distant  nearly  2  miles.  The  marks  for  clearing  the 
northern  edge  of  the  Caraciuette  Shoal,  to  the  eastward  of  Scollop 
Patch,  and  in  3  fathoms  water,  are  the  south  extreme  of  Miscou  Island 
kept  plainly  open  to  the  northward  of  the  north  point  of  Shippegan 
Island,  bearing  N.  77°  E.  (S.  79°  E.  mag.).  But  those  marks  are  low 
and  distant,  and  often  not  well  defined,  therefore  they  should  not  be 
trusted  alone;  neither  will  they  be  required  if  the  northern  edge  of  the 
shoal  be  not  approached  nearer  than  the  depth  of  4  ftithoms  at  low 
water. 

(H.  O.  Chart  No.  1067.) 

The  Coast,  which  for  the  most  part  is  of  high  sandstone  cliffs,  is 
very  low  near  Mizzenette  Point,  and  about  3  miles  to  the  westward  of 
that  point,  where  the  sandy  cliffs  end,  the  shoal  water  extends  to  J 
mile  from  the  shore;  but  in  general  it  does  not  extend  to  more  than 
half  that  distance,  and  the  coast  may  everywhere  be  approached  by 
the  lead  to  10  or  12  fathoms  with  care,  the  greater  depth  being  quite 
near  enough  at  nighttime.  There  are  settlements  all  along  the  coast, 
and  villages  and  fishing  establishments  at  Great  Anse  and  Pokeshaw. 
Great  Anse,  where  there  is  a  church,  is  8  miles  and  Pokeshaw  11  miles 
westward  of  Mizzenette  Point.  There  are  small  bays  at  both  places 
where  boats  find  shelter,  and  a  small  river  at  Pokeshaw. 

Norton  Shoal,  carrying  3  fathoms  water,  and  lying  J  mile  off  shore, 
one  mile  to  the  westward  of  Norton  Point  and  9  miles  eastward  of  the 
Nipisighit,  is  the  only  danger  in  the  way  of  vessels  along  the  coast 
from  Mizzenette  Point  to  Bathurst  Harbor,  a  distance  of  29  miles. 

Bathurst  Harbor,  at  the  mouth  of  the  Nipisighit  River,  is  400  yards 
wide  at  the  entrance  between  Carron  and  Alston  Points,  which  are  of 
sand,  with  several  stores  and  other  buildings  upon  them  (1800). 

The  lighthouses  on  Carron  Point  kept  in  line  will  lead  in  through  the 
narrow  channel  over  the  bar  in  7  feet  at  low  water,  or  in  14  feet  at  high 
water  in  the  best  spring  tides.  The  distance  from  the  outside  of  the 
bar  in  3  fathoms  to  the  entrance  of  the  river  is  U  miles;  and  for  the 
whole  of  that  distance  the  very  narrow  channel  is  between  sandy 
shoals,  nearly  dry  at  low  water,  and  extending  from  either  side  of  the 
rivet's  mouth. 

Within  the  entrance  there  is  an  extensive  and  well-sheltered  basin, 
nearly  3  miles  long  and  2  miles  wide,  but  nearly  all  dry  at  low  water, 
excepting  the  channels  of  the  four  rivers,  which,  after  uniting  their 
streams  below  Bathurst,  flow  through  it  to  the  entrance,  forming  by 
their  junction  what  is  called  the  Main  Channel.  On  the  eastern  side 
of  Ahe  basin  there  is  an  islet  called  the  Indian  or  Bathurst  Island. 
Half  a  mile  to  the  westward  of  the  town,  and  across  the  mouth  of  the 


P 

L 


WM 


V        irjRST. 


il  tbey  strike 
cky  bottom, 

I  Caraquette 
S.  4'^  W.  (S. 
cleiiring  the 
(l  of  Scollop 
liscou  lalancl 
)f  Shippegaii 
ark  a  are  low 
liould  not  be 

II  edge  of  the 
bhoms  at  low 


stone  cliffa,  is 
5  westward  of 
exteuda  to  J 
to  more  than 
.>proaclied  by 
li  being  quite 
»ng  the  coast, 
lid  Pokeshaw. 
ahaw  11  miles 
t  both  places 

mile  oft"  shore, 
stward  of  the 
oiig  the  coast 
'  29  miles, 
r,  ia  400  yards 
I,  which  are  of 
(18C0). 

in  through  the 
14  feet  at  high 
outside  of  the 
sa;  and  for  the 
etween  sandy 
lier  aide  of  the 

leltered  basin, 
'  at  low  water, 
'  uniting  their 
ce,  forming  by 
le  eaatern  side 
i-at  Island, 
e  mouth  of  the 


185 


Middle  and  North  Rivers,  is  x^etei-  Point,  with  its  cliun^h  and  villatre 
and  on  the  north  side  of  that  point  the  Teteagaucl.e  River  enters  a  bay 
on  the  NW.  aide  of  tlie  basin.  Tliese  streams  are  all  unnavigable  for 
any  distance.  Even  the  Nipisighit,  which  is  by  far  the  largest,  and  a 
very  coiisiderabl,  river,  ceases  to  be  navigable  U  miles  above  Bathurst, 
where  the  tide  ends  and  rapids  begin. 

Bathurst—The  town  of  Bathurst  is  well  situated  at  the  head  of  the 
basin,  2J  miles  within  the  entrance,  and  on  the  point  of  land  which 
divides  the  Nipisighit  River  from  the  Middle  and  North  Rivers  The 
salmon  fishery  is  carried  on  extensively.  There  is  a  seaman's  hospital 
at  Bathurst.  '■ 

The  United  States  is  represented  by  a  consular  agent. 

Communication.-Bathur8t  is  in  commuuic^ation  with  all  parts  bv 
the  Intercolonial  Railway  and  Telegraph  Company.  • 

Lights—Stonehaven  lighthouse,  on  the  bank  at  the  shore  end  of  the 
breakwater  at  Grindstone  Point,  is  a  square  tower,  37  feet  high,  and 
painted  white.  The  light  is  a  fixed  red  light,  88  feet  above  high-^ater 
mark,  and  should  be  visible  15  miles.  This  light,  besides  being  a 
general  coast  light,  indicates  the  position  of  the  breakwater,  which 
aftords  shelter  to  small  vessels. 

On  Salmon  (Belloni)  Point  is  exhibited  a  fixed  white  light  at  30  feet 
above  high  water,  visible  from  the  bearing  of  N.  67o  E.  (east  maff ) 

mile"       ''"'^  "^  ^"  '^°  ''^-  ^"'^"'  '""^•^'  ^^'''^  '^""'''^  ^^  ^'^'ble  !o 

The  lighthouse  is  22  feet  high,  square  shaped,  and  painted  white. 

li.hl«  .Tf%         '/^i,?  ^'  *'''  *^'  ^^'  ««!«» there  are  two  leading 
lights,  356  feet  apart.    The  outer  lighthouse,  34  feet  high,  and  painted 

To  mir        '  ^'  ""  '""'  '^"^'  ""'^^  ^"'"'  ^  ^"^^  white  lightJ^isVble 
The  inner  lighthouse  is  square  shaped  and  painted  with  red  and  white 

s  npes;  It  ex  ubits  at  an  elevation  of  43  feet  a  fixed  red  light,  which 

should  be  visible  14  miles.  ' 

Buoys.-There  is  an  outer  buoy  in  7  fathoms  water  at  about  J  mile 

northeastward  of  the  Outer  Bar  buoy.  * 

Anchorage.-In  the  entrance  between  the  sandy  points,  or  rather 
just  outside  ,t,  there  are  3  and  4  fathoms  water;  and  here  vessels  Z 

:  ^eiZ;  %  *''V"  ''t"'  ^'^'^^"•^  ^^  "-  ^-  -^  '^^  -ndy  shol 
o    either  side     Some  of  the  smaller  vessels  load  within  the  entrance. 

and  some  of  the  larger  ones  complete  their  loading  outside  the  bar 

wl^re  the  anchorage,  m  6  or  7  fathoms,  muddy  bottpm,  ia  con  .idered 

safe  .1.  the  summer  months,  although  the  NE.  gales  send  n  a  heavy  sea 

A  depth  of  14  feet  at  high  water  in  spring  tides  can  be  carr^dTip  to 

places  where  vessels  may  lie  afloat  and  load  in  14  feet  at  low  water. 
«i  ^^?*«;-T'^«r«  '"-e  Sood  pilots  for  the  Nipisighit  River,  ar-d  no  one 
should  attempt  the  bar  without  one,  excepting  in  case  of  necessity. 


"■*.., 
'•'u. 


186 


GULP   OF   ST.  LAWRENCE WEST   COAST, 


Tides.— It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Bathurst  at  3h.  15m.; 
springs  rise  7  feet,  neaps  4  feet.  The  rate  of  the  tides  in  the  main 
channel  is  about  2  knots  and  over  the  bar  about  li  knots.  The  stream 
sets  fair  in  and  out  and  over  the  bar. 

BeUedune  Point  is  about  17  miles  from  Alston  Point,  and  the 
extreme  seen  from  it  is  low  and  sandy,  and  has  shoal  water  off  it  to  the 
eastward  3  mile.  About  halfway  between  these  points,  on  the  west- 
ern shore  of  Nipisighit  Bay,  is  the  church  and  village  of  Rochette.  The 
whole  of  this  coast  is  low,  and  composed  of  sandstone,  limestone,  and 
trap  rocks.  The  shoal  water  generally  extends  to  ^  mile  from  the  shore, 
and  vessels  of  large  draft  had  better  not  stand  nearer  than  the  depth 
of  10  fathoms,  especially  at  night,  unless  it  be  in  the  head  of  the  bay, 
where  they  may  safely  approach  the  sandy  beach  to  7  or  0  fathoms. 
'  Lights.— The  lighthouse,  named  Petite  Rocher,  on  Elm  Tree  Point,  a 
square  building,  31  feet  high,  painted  white,  exhibits  at  an  elevation  of 
36  feet  a  fixed  white  light,  which  should  be  visible  12  miles. 

A  fixed  white  light  is  exhibited  from  a  mast,  28  feet  high,  on  Little 
Belledune  Point,  at  an  elevation  of  38  feet,  and  should  be  visible  11 
miles.    The  mast  has  a  white  shed  at  its  base. 

Heron  Island,  13  miles  westward  of  Belledune  Point,  is  of  moderate 
height,  wooded,  and  with  red  sandstone  cliffs  at  both  its  NW.  and  SE. 
points.  Shoal  water  extends  off  tiiis  point  to  i  mile.  The  island  is  i 
miles  long,  parallel  to  the  coast,  and  there  is  good  anchorage  in  the 
channel  between  it  and  the  mainland;  but  the  channel  is  rendered 
narrow  and  difficult  by  shoals,  which  extend  a  great  distance  out  on 

either  side. 

Heron  Channel.— At  the  western  end  the  channel  is  only  400  yards 
wide,  with  3  fathoms  water  in  it.  It  becomes  wider  to  the  eastward, 
and  the  depths  are  4  and  5  fathoms ;  but  there  the  dangerous  Heron 
Rock  lies,  nearly  in  mid-channel,  and  consequently  right  in  the  way  of 
vessels.  When  on  this  small  rock,  which  has  G  feet  least  water,  and  4 
or  r>  fathoms  all  around  it,  the  SE.  extreme  of  Heron  Island  bears  N.  44^ 
E.  (>^.  07°  E.  mag.)  about  one  mile,  and  a  rock  lying  (iOO  yards  NNW. 
of  Beaver  Point,  and  almost  always  above  water,  S.  07°  W.  (west  mag.) 
700  yards.  This  latter  rock,  which  lies  on  the  edge  of  the  shoal  oft"  the 
mainland,  is  quite  bold;  and  a  vessel,  by  sailing  within  the  distjince  of 
300  yards  of  it,  will  pass  to  the  southward  of  the  Heron  Rock,  as  she 
will  also  to  the  northward,  by  running  along  the  southern  edge  of  the 
shoal  off  the  island,  in  3  fathoms  at  low  water.  But  this  is  an  intricate 
and  dangerous  channel  for  a  vessel  of  any  size,  and  requires  the  aid  of 

a  good  pilot. 

Anchorage.— Vessels  occasionally  anchor,  for  the  purpose  of  load- 
ing wi*.h  timber,  in  the  bay  of  Nash  River,  in  4  fathoms,  mud  bottom, 
where  they  are  much  exposed  to  easterly  winds,  but  the  ground  is  so 
good  that  they  ride  safely  during  the  summer  months.  At  this  anchor- 
age the  east  point  of  Heron  Island  bears  N.  37°  W.  (N.  14°  W.  mag.)  2J 
miles  and  Black  Point  N.  68°  W.  (N.  45°  W.  mag.)  one  mile. 


RESTIOOUCHE    RIVER. 


187 


itSli.  15m.; 
a  tbe  iiiaiu 
The  stream 

nt,  and  the 
off  it  to  the 
m  the  west- 
ihette.    The 
lestone,  and 
ra  the  shore, 
n  tbe  depth 
I  of  the  bay, 
fathoms. 
Tree  Point,  a 
I  elevation  of 

iS. 

igh,  on  Little 
be  visible  11 

8  of  moderate 
NW.  and  SB. 
he  island  is  4 
borage  in  the 
si  is  rendered 
stance  out  on 

>nly  400  yards 
Ithe  eastward, 
gerous  Heron 
in  the  way  of 
|t  water,  and  4 
,d  bears  N.  440 

yards  NNW. 
(west  mag.) 
|e  shoal  off  the 
il»e  distiince  of 

Rock,  as  she 
|rn  edge  of  the 

is  an  intricate 

ires  the  aid  of 

lirpose  of  load- 
,  mud  bottom, 
ground  is  so 
it  this  anchor- 
to  W.  mag.)  2J 
kile. 


The  shoal  water  extends  off  Fowler  Point  a  mile  out  to  the  3-fathom 
line  of  soundings.  There  is  also  good  anc^liorage  in  4  fiithoms,  nuid 
bottom,  to  the  westward  of  Heron  Island,  and  nearly  midway  between 
it  and  the  Oharlo  River.    This  river  will  only  admit  boats. 

Light. — The  lighthouse  on  the  east  side  of  Heron  Island  is  a  square 
building,  20  feet  high,  painted  white,  exhibiting  at  an  elevation  of  06 
feet  a  fixed  white  light,  wliich  should  bo  visible  15  miles. 

Maguaclia  Point,  on  the  north  shore  of  Chaleur  Bay,  of  red-sand- 
stone cliffs,  is  the  NE.  point  of  entrance  of  the  Restigouche  River. 
,  Restigouche  River,  front  its  entrance  at  Maguacha  l^oint,  varies  in 
breadth  for  the  first  17  miles  from  1^  to  3  miles.  At  that  distance 
Campbellton  is  situated  on  the  southern  or  New  Brunswick  sliore,  and 
at  the  foot  of  a  remarkable  conical  mountain  called  the  Sugar  Loaf. 
Between  Oampbellton  and  Indian  Point,  on  the  northern  shore,  the 
breadth  of  the  estuary  is  only  ^  mile;  but  it  expands  again  to  1^  miles 
at  its  head,  just  below  the  islands.  At  Indian  Point,  a  mile  above 
Campbellton,  the  navigation  for  shipping  ends,  there  being  only  12 
feet  in  a  narrow  channel  at  low  water ;  but  small  craft  may  ascend 
through  very  narrow  passages,  on  either  side,  carrying  from  6  to  9  feet 
water,  to  within  f  mile  of  the  head  of  the  estuary,  where  the  Besti- 
gouche  River,  properly  so  called,  enters  it  through  narrow  channels 
between  the  islands,  21  miles  from  the  head  of  Chaleur  Bay. 

Off  Loup  River,  which  enters  a  bay  from  the  northern  shore  2  miles 
below  Campbellton,  there  is  a  shallow  part  of  the  channel  called  the 
bar,  over  which  there  is  not  more  than  13  or  14  feet  at  low  water;  but- 
the  tide,  which  rises  from  0  to  9  feet,  enables  vessels  of  moderate  draft 
to  ascend  to  Campbellton,  off  which  they  may  moor  in  from  3  to  3J 
fathoms  at  low  water.  Vessels  of  about  18  feet  draft  may  ascend  at 
all  times  of  the  tide  nearly  to  Oak  Point,  which  is  about  14  miles  up, 
and  within  a  mile  of  the  bar ;  and  larger  ves-els  might  proceed  10  miles 
up,  or  nearly  to  Guarde  Point,  with  assistance  of  buoys  and  a  good 
pilot. 

The  charts  and  directions  will  enable  the  seaman  to  take  his  vessel 
in  as  far  as  Dalhousie  Harbor,  or  the  anchorage  oft'  Fleurant  Point; 
but  to  proceed  farther  up,  the  services  of  a  pilot  should  be  engaged,  for 
there  are  no  good  leading  marks  beyond  the  above  places,  where  the 
shoals  become  too  steep  for  the  lead  to  give  sufficient  warning,  and  the 
channels  too  narrow  for  a  large  ship. 

Anchorage. — The  most  convenient  anchorage  for  men-of-war,  or 
other  vessels  visiting  the  Restigouche  for  supplies  of  wood  or  water,  is 
off  Fleurant  Point,  on  the  northern  shoi'e,  and  about  2  miles  to  the  north- 
ward of  the  Harbor.  There  a  vessel  can  weigh  in  all  winds  and  at  all 
times  of  tide;  and  no  other  directions  are  necessary  than  to  anchor 
anywhere  off"  the  point  in  6  or  7  fathoms  of  low  water.  There  is  a  toler- 
ably good  watering  place  at  a  brook  i  mile  to  the  westward  of  the 
point,  and  a  little  farther  westward  the  Mussel  Bank,  a  dangerous  reef, 
extends  out  from  the  high  cliffs,  nearly  halfway  across  the  estuary. 


utifmmmtK 


188 


GULF   OF   8T.  LAWRENCE WEST  COAST. 


Bonami  Rocks.— The  entrance  of  the  Eeati{joiiche  River,  between 
Mnjjnacha  Point  and  the  Uonami  Rocks,  is  nearly  2  miles  wide.  The 
rocks  are  steep  and  high,  and  so  rough  and  broken  that  a  stranger 
would  be  led  to  expect  danger  on  their  side  instead  of  on  the  opposite, 
where  the  steep  red  clitt's  of  Maguacha  Point  give  the  usual,  although 
in  this  case  deceptive,  iuuications  of  a  clsar  channel. 

The  extreme  point  of  the  lionanii  Rocks  may  be  safely  passed  at  400 
yards,  but  shallow  water  extends  from  the  rocks  to  Bonami  Point,  from 
which  a  reef  runs  i  mile,  and  the  shoal  continues  from  it  to  Dalhousie 

Island. 

Light— The  lighthouse  on  Bonami  Point  is  square,  33  feet  high, 
painted  white,  and  exhibits  from  an  elevation  of  49  feet  a  fixed  white 
light,  which  should  be  visible  13  miles. 

Maguacha  Spit,  of  sand  and  stone,  with  only  6  feet  at  low  water, 
runs  out  nearly  a  mile  SW.  from  Maguacha  Point,  toward  the  Bonami 
Rocks,  thus  occupying  fully  half  the  channel.  To  clear  the  SW. 
extreme  of  this  steep  and  dangerous  spit,  keep  the  highest  summit  of 
the  Scaumenac  >Iountaius  open  SW.  of  Dalhousie  Island,  for  the  sum- 
mit of  the  mountain  and  the  south  side  of  the  island  in  one,  bearing 
N.  68°  W.  (X.  45°  W.  mag.),  lead  over  the  extreme  end  of  the  spit  in 
3^  fathoms.  The  eastern  side  of  the  spit  will  be  avoided  by  not  entirely 
shutting  in  the  south  extreme  of  the  Carletou  Mountains  behind  the 
east  side  of  Maguacha  Point. 

Buoy.— A  buoy  lies  westward  200  yards  from  the  end  of  Maguacha 
Spit,  which  also  serves  to  mark  the  quarantine  ground.  (It  is  ditticult 
to  keep  this  buoy  in  position.) 

Dalhousie  (Douglas)  Island,  400  yards  long,  is  high  aud  rocky, 
round  backed,  and  wooded,  and  joined  by  a  shoal  which  dries  to  the  low 
point  of  Dalhousie.  On  that  point  there  are  large  storehouses  belong- 
ing to  the  town  of  Dalhousie,  which,  with  its  church,  will  be  seen  on 
the  side  of  a  hill  to  the  SW.  of  the  island.  Six  hundred  yards  west- 
ward of  Dalhousie  Island  (locally  known  as  Douglas  Island)  there  is  a 
small  rocky  islet,  at  the  extremity  of  a  narrow  sandy  spit,  forming  the 
western  side  of  the  small  and  shallow  bay  of  Dalhousie.  The  shallow 
water  extends  from  the  islet  to  the  island,  and  the  timber  ships  lie 
moored  along  its  edge,  in  G  or  7  fathoms  muddy  bottom,  directly  off  the 
town.  By  keeping  just  outside  these  deep  water  is  obtained.  This  is 
Dalliousie  Harbor,  which  is  quite  secure  in  all  winds. 

Dalhousie  Harbor  may  be  approached  in  two  ways,  either  through 
the  direct  but  narrow  channel  between  the  Middle  Ground  and  Dal- 
liousiie  Island,  or  round  to  the  northward  and  westward  of  the  Middle 
Orouiid,  which  last,  although  it  involves  the  necessity  of  passing  over 
a  Hat  of  3  fathoms  at  low  water,  is  the  route  usually  taken,  because  of 
tliere  being  plenty  of  room  there,  whereas  the  channel  first  mentioned 
is  only  300  yards  wide.  The  narrow  channel  has,  however,  the  advau- 
(etge  of  good  leading  marks,  and  carries  G  fathoms  water. 


rer,  between 
wide.  The 
t  a  stranger 
the  opposite, 
lal,  although 

>as8ed  at  400 
i  Point,  from 
;o  Dalhousie 

i3  feet  high, 
a,  fixed  wliite 

it  low  water, 
the  ISouaini 
3ar  the  SW. 
st  summit  of 
for  the  sum- 
oue,  bearing 
of  the  spit  in 
y  not  entirely 
s  behind  the 

of  Maguacha 
(It  is  difficult 

li  and  rocky, 
•ies  to  the  low 
ouses  belong- 
11  be  seen  on 
[  yards  west- 
nd)  there  is  a 
:,  forming  the 
The  shallow 
iber  ships  lie 
irectly  oft'  the 
ined.    This  is 

iither  through 
ind  and  Dal- 
>f  the  Middle 
passing  over 
sn,  because  of 
■st  mentioned 
er,  the  advan- 


DALHOrSIE    HARnOR. 


189 


Montgomery  Island  is  tlie  name  applied  to  the  northern  termination 
of  the  peninsula  from  which  the  railway  wharf  springs,  about  (JOO  yards 
westward  of  Daliiousie  Islaml. 

Middle  G-round,  separated  from  Dalhousie  Island  by  the  narrow 
channel  .just  mentioned,  is  1,100  yards  long  and  8(»0  yards  wide,  it 
consists  of  sand  and  stone,  Avith  6  feet  least  water,  and  is  ,'orv  -tciep  on 
its  eastern  side,  where  a  buoy  is  placed  near  its  NE.  point.  There  are 
no  sutticient  leading  marks,  but  beacons  might  be  easily  so  placed  on 
the  shore  as  to  clear  it  on  every  side.  The  main  channel  between  this 
shoal  and  tlie  shore  to  the  northward  and  eastward  is  more  than  ^  mile 
wide,  and  in  some  places  there  are  15  ftithoms  water.  The  rate  of  the 
tide,  which  is  stronger  there  than  elsewhere,  does  not  exceed  2  knots. 
Caution.— Middle  Ground  is  reported  to  have  slioaled  and  to  have 
extended  nearly  200  yards  to  the  southward,  and  the  channel  to  have 
deepened  nearer  to  Dalhousie  Island. 

Ice— Tlie  harbor  is  usually  frozen  over  about  December  5  and  clear 
of  ice  about  April  1."),  being  completely  closed  between  tliose  dates. 
The  first  vessel  arrives  from  sea  about  May  14,  and  the  last  one  leaves 
about  November  11. 

Lights.— A  fixed  white  light  is  shown  from  a  square  lighthouse, 
painted  white,  and  22  feet  high,  on  the  east  extremity  of  Dalhousie 
(Douglas)  Island.  The  light  is  30  feet  above  high  water,  and  should 
be  visible  6  miles.  It  shows  in  an  easterly  direction  down  the  river 
and  northwesterly  across  it. 

On  the  extremity  of  Dalhousie  railway  wharf  a  fixed  white  light  is 
exhibited  from  a  square  lighthouse,  34  feet  high,  which  projects  through 
the  railway  shed  and  has  a  white  lantern.  The  light  is  30  feet  above 
high  water,  and  visible  9  miles. 

The  light  is  visible  when  in  line  with  Montgomery  Island  light  bear- 
ing S.  430  E.  (S.  200  E.  mag.)  and  northward  of  that  bearing. 

A  fixetl  white  light  is  exhibited  on  the  summit  of  Montgomery  Island 
at  an  elevation  of  34  feet,  and  should  be  visible  when  bearing  S.  43°  E 
(8.  20°  E.  mag.)  0  miles. 
The  lighthouse  is  squani,  22  feet  high,  and  painted  white. 
The  above  two  lights  are  29(5  feet  apart,  and  kept  in  line  bearing 
8. 430  E.  (8.  200  E.  mag.)  leud  to  the  railway  wharf. 

Anchorage.- The  best  a,nchorage  in  Dalhousie  Harbor  is  in  6^.  or  7 
fathoms,  wJ.th  Dalhousie  Island  and  Bonami  Point  in  lino. 

Tides.— It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Dalhousie  Harbor  at 
3h.  10m.;  Hprings  rise  9  feet,  neaps  6  feet.  The  rate  of  the  tidal 
streams  in  the  entrance  does  not  exceed  2  knots. 

Dalhousia  is  the  chief  town  of  Rescigouche  County,  and  in  1891  had 
a  population  of  2,354  inhabitants. 
It  has  a  trade  in  lumber  and  preserved  salmon  and  lobsters. 
Communication.— The  Intercolonial  Railway  has  a  station  at  Dal- 
housie, and  there  is  a  telegraph  office. 


."^i^Ull^iS^^J^ 


190 


OULF   OP   8T.  LAWRENCE — WEST   COAST. 


Pilots  ciiii  be  had  at  Dalhonsio  for  the  river. 

Supplies.— I'' resli  jtrovisioiis  are  to  be  obtained  at  Dalhousie. 

Campbellton,  1«  miles  WSW.  fiojn  Dalliousie  by  rail,  in  the  north- 
ermn«)8t  town  of  New  Brnnswick.     It  has  a  trade  in  lumber  and  fish. 

The  United  States  is  represented  by  a  consnhir  agent. 

Lights.— The  leading  lighthouses  at  Campbellton  are  s(iuare  wooden 
towers,  2L'  feet  high,  painted  white,  the  outer  on  a  pier  near  the  railway 
wharf,  the  inner  on  Mottats  Wharf,  an<l  from  them  at  an  elevation  of 
24  feet  are  exhibited  fixed  white  lights.    These  lights  should  be  visible 

0  miles. 

Tides.- It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Campbellton  at  4h.; 
springs  rise  10  feet,  neaps  7  feet. 

Directions.— When  within  a  mile  or  two  of  Maguacha  Point,  bring 
the  marks  on  for  clearing  the  Maguacha  Spit;  namely,  the  highest 
summit  of  the  Scaumenac  Mountains  open  to  the  SW.  of  Dalhousie 
Island.    Stand  in  upon  this  mark  until  the  depths  are  0  or  8  fathoms 
on  the  New  llrunswick  shore,  which  will  be  when  the  Bonami  Rocks 
are  about  SSW.,  and  are  distant  about  i  mile;  then  haul  to  the  north- 
ward, so  as  to  keep  in  that  depth  until  Laliuie  Point  (the  extreme 
point  to  the  westward  on  the  New  Brunswick  shore)  comes  just  open  to 
the  northward  of  Dalhousie  Island  and  of  the  islet  and  rocks  to  the 
westward  of  it  bearing  S.  80o  W.  (N.  77^  W.  mag.);  then,  if  wishing 
to  enter  the  harbor  by  the  narrow  channel  to  the  southward  of  the 
Middle  Ground,  steer  S.  80°  W.  (N.  77^^  W.  mag.)  xipon  those  leading 
marks  until  near  Dalhousie  Island,  which  leave  to  the  southward  at  a 
distance  of  200  yards,  and  the  vessel  will  pass  safely  into  the  harbor. 
If  wishing  to  take  the  more  roomy  route  to  the  northward  of  the 
Middle  Ground,  instead  of  steering  S.  80o  W.  (N.  77°  W.mag.)  for  Lalimo 
Point,  as  soon  as  it  opens  to  the  northward  of  the  island,  sheer  over  to 
the  NE.  until  the  soundings  are  8  fathoms,  and  follow  that  depth  round 
to  the  northward  and  westward  until  Dalhousie  church  opens  out  to 
the  westward  of  the  island  bearing  8. 10°  W.  (S.  33°  W.  mag.);  then 
steer  S.  07°  W.  (west  mag.)  up  the  estuary,  until  Dalhousie  church 
appears  midway  between  Dalhousie  Island  and  the  islet  to  the  west- 
ward of  it,  bearing  S.  12°  E.  (S.  11°  W.  mag.).    Steer  now  for  the 
church,  taking  care  not  to  bring  it  to  bear  to  the  southward  of  S.  12°  E. 
(S.  11'=  AV.  mag.);  or,  with  the  two  churches  in  line,  the  vessel  will  pass 
over  the  extensive  3fathora  flat,  to  the  westward  of  the  Middle  Ground, 
into  the  harbor. 

With  beating  winds,  in  ihe  board  to  the  northward,  toward  Tracadi- 
gash  Spit,  that  danger  will  be  avoided  by  keeping  Dalhousie  Mountain 
open  to  the  southward  of  Maguacha  Point.  W>.stward  of  the  spit 
vessels  may  stand  in  to  0  fathoms  water,  but  there  will  be  no  use  in 
standing  in  to  Oarleton  Bay  out  of  the  strength  of  the  tide.  On  the 
Heron  Island  side,  observe  that  the  highest  summit  of  the  Scaume- 
nac Mountains  and  the  southern  side  of  Dalhousie  Island  touching, 


I 

i 

1^ 


is  the  north- 
)er  and  tish. 

iiare  wooden 

•  the  railway 

elevation  of 

lid  be  visible 

llton  at  4h.; 

Point,  bring 
the  highest 
i)f  Dalhonaie 
or  8  fathoms 
jnanii  Bocks 
to  the  north- 
;the  extreme 
J  Just  open  to 
rocks  to  the 
II,  if  wishing 
award  of  the 
hose  leading 
uthward  at  a 
o  the  harbor, 
liward  of  the 
g.)for  Lalimo 
sheer  over  to 
t  depth  round 
opens  out  to 
.  mag.);  then 
lousie  church 
t  to  the  west- 
now  for  the 
•d  of  S.  12°  E. 
iissel  will  pass 
iddle  Ground, 

prard  Tracadi- 
]sie  Mountain 
(I  of  the  spit 
be  no  use  in 
tide.  On  the 
'  the  Scanme- 
and  touching, 


rAHI.KTON    ROAD. 


tm 


clear  the  shoal  water  to  the  northwanl  of  Ileioi.  Isl„nd  in  4  fatlioms- 
tack,  therefore,  in  the  board  to  tlio  southward  ^^■\wn  the  mountain 
(•omes  in  line  witli  the  northern  side  of  the  island,  or  bv  the  lead  in 
(.  fiithoms.  The  vessel  will  be  clear  of  the  reef  off  ti..;  west  end  of 
Ileron  Island  when  the  Charlo  River  bears  southward  of  south  (S  2;P 
\V.nia«:.),and  may  then  stand  to  the  southward  into  1  fathon.s,  as 
long  as  the  east  side  of  Maguacha  Point  does  not  bear  to  the  east- 
wanl  of  N  J  lo  k.  (N.  340  K.  mag.) ;  after  which  she  should  tack  in  the 
board  to  the  southward  in  7  fathoms,  because  the  flat  of  from  L'A  to  3A 
hithouKs  .n  Kel  Bay  becomes  rather  steep  as  she  approaches  the 
Bonami  Rocks. 

Bonami  Itocks  may  be  approached  to  7  fathon.s  (,f  water,  and  when 
they  bear  S.  .%o  W.  (S.  79°  W.  mag.)  the  vessel  will  be  within  the  point 
of  the  Maguacha  Spit,  which  must  be  avoided  by  means  of  the  leading 
marks  already  given.  From  Bonami  Rocks  to  Dalhousie  Island  she 
may  stand  in  on  the  board  to  the  SW.  into  8  fathoms,  but  she  should 
go  no  nearer  to  the  east  side  of  the  Middle  Ground  than  10  fathoms 
and  that  w,th  great  care,  for  it  is  very  steep;  its  northern  side  may  be 
approached  to  9  fathoms.  On  the  board  toward  the  northeastern  shore 
she  may  stand  in  to  9  fathoms  between  Maguacha  Spit  and  Yacta 

n^n^  f  ^^^fTT'  ^^'  ^  ''^'y  ^^^P  ^^""'''^  ««  *t  to  the  distance 
ot  GOO  yards  NW.  of  Yacta  Point  she  can  safely  stand  to  the  north- 
ward into  0  fathoms  all  the  way  to  Fleurant  Point. 

QUEBEC. 

Carleton  Road-This  name  has  been  given  to  an  excellent  and 
capacious  anchorage  safe  in  all  winds.  It  is  east  of  Maguacha  Point 
and  on  the  west  side  of  Tracadigash  Point,  which  consists  of  sand, 
inclosing  a  shallow  lagoon  capable  of  admitting  boats  or  very  small  craft 
at  high  water  On  the  northern  shore  6f  this  lagoon  stands  the  church 
and  village  of  Carleton,  the  latter  extending  to  the  westward  to  the 
shore  of  the  bay  where  the  sand  beach  of  the  lagoon  joins  the  mainland. 
A  small  str<?am,  with  a  bridge  across  it,  there  enters  the  NW.  corner 
of  the  lagoon  and  one  mile  farther  westward,  near  the  commencement 
of  the  clay  cliflfs,  another  small  stream  will  be  seen,  which  is  the  water- 
ing place.    Immediately  in  rear  of  the  village  the  Carleton  Mountain 

the  lulls  of  the  range  trending  from  it  both  to  the  northward  and  west! 
ward  for  many  miles. 

In  1882  a  wooden  pier  was  built,  and  steamers  drawing  fl  feet  water 
could  go  alongside.    There  was  14  feet  water  at  the  head  of  the  pier. 

Light-The  lighthouse  on  Carleton  Point,  28  feet  high,  and  painted 
white,  exhibits,  at  an  elevation  of  32  feet,  a  fixed  white  light  The 
light  should  be  visible  12  miles. 

Anchorage.-Ve8sels  may  anchor  anywhere  in  from  5  to  6  fathor... 
remembering  that  although  the  sandy  beach  of  Tracadigash  Point  is 


Mm 


■fHM 


192 


flULK    OK   8T.  LAWRENCE — WEST    COAST. 


quite  bold  on  the  west  side  within  the  spit,  yet  shoal  water  extends  off 
the  niainhiiid  nearly  A  mile.  The  best  berth,  especially  with  easterly 
winds,  is  in  5^  fathoms,  mud,  with  TracadiKash  Point  bearing  S.-W^  K. 
(8. 15^  E.  nniK.),  Carleton  steeple  N.  78o  E.  (8.  79o  E.  mag.),  and  the 
wateriuR  plm^o  N.  .$7"  W.  (N.  U^  W.  mag.). 

Tides.— It  is  high  water,  full  aud  chauge,  at  Oarletou  Toint  at  3h.j 
springs  rise  0  feet,  neaps  l  feet. 
The  tides  are  weak  in  (Jarletou  Road,  seldom  exceeding  one  knot. 
Buoy —A  red  cau  buoy  has  been  placed  in  21  feet  at  low  water,  to 
mark  the  southern  extremity  of  Tracadigash  Spit. 

Directions.— Tracadigash  Spit,  of  sand,  and  running  out  jj  mile  S\V. 
from  the  sandy  point  of  the  same  name,  is  the  only  danger  in  the  way 
when  approaching  the  anchorage  in  Carleton  Koad  from  the  eastward. 
Observe  that  Maguacha  Point  and  the  summit  of  Dalhousie  Mountain 
in  line,  bearing  S.  83°  VV.  (N.  74°  W.  mag.),  pass  close  to  the  extremity 
of  the  spit  in  3  fathoms.    Therefore,  to  clear  it  keep  the  moimtaiu  well 
open,  or  at  night  go  no  nearer  than  10  or  9  fathoms  water.    As  soon  as 
Carleton  steeple  comes  in  line  with  the  8W.  extreme  of  Tracadigash 
Point,  bearing  N.  33°  E.  ( N.  'A'P  E.  mag.),  the  spit  will  have  been  passed, 
and  the  vessel  may  haul  in  to  the  northward,  going  no  nearer  than  7 
fathoms  till  the  point  bears  to  the  southward  of  N.  07°  E.  ^east  mag.). 
Cascapediac  Bay  is  of  considerable  extent,  being  13  miles  wide 
aud  5  or  0  miles  deep.    At  its  head  is  the  Cascapediac  Itiver,  a  consid- 
erable stream,  but  which  can  only  be  entered  by  boats,  in  consequence 
of  the  extensive  shoals  of  sand  and  mud,  which  dry  out  2  miles  from  its 
entrance,  and  occupy  all  the  head  of  the  bay.    lilack  Point,  bold  and 
rocky,  and  rising  400  feet  above  the  sea,  is  the  eastern  point  of  the  bay. 
The  shoals  commence  about  1^  miles  to  the  northward  of  Black  Point, 
and  at  Indian  Point,  on  the  east  side  of  Little  Kiver,  they  extend  out 
to  the  westward  nearly  IJ  miles,  shelteriug  the  anchorage  from  SE. 
winds. 

Duthie  Point,  the  east  point  of  entrance  of  the  Cascapediac  River, 
bears  M.  51°  W.  (N.  27°  W.  mag.)  5  miles  from  Black  Point.  One  mile 
eastward  of  Duthie  Point,  and  in  the  bay  between  it  and  Little  River, 
stand  the  church  aud  village  of  Richmond. 

The  Settlements  on  the  western  side  of  the  bay  are  mostly  of  French 
Canadians  and  Acadians,  and  they  extend  alongshore  all  the  way  from 
theciver  to  Tracadigash  Point,  which  is  the  west  poiut  of  the  bay.  In 
rear  of  the  settlements  the  Carleton  Mountain  range  will  be  seen  2  or 
3  miles  back  from  the  shore. 

Anchorage.— The  anchorage  in  (Cascapediac  Bay,  where  the  timber 
ships  moor  in  3  fathoms,  is  off  Uichmoud  Village,  with  Duthie  Point 
bearing  N.  24°  W.  (north  mag.)  i  mile.  Vessels  may  anchor  farther 
out  in  4,  5,  or  6  fathoms,  but  they  will  not  be  then  so  well  sheltered 
from  easterly  winds. 
Buoys.— There  are  two  black  buoys  in  the  anchorage  oft"  Richmond  j 


PAHPEHIAC    MAY. 


193 


•  t'xteiuls  otl 
itli  easterly 

ig,),  ivnd  the 

I'olnt  ttt3U.; 

ouo  knot, 
ow  water,  to 

It  i  mile  SW. 
er  in  tbe  way 
the  eastward. 
isie  MouJitaiu 
the  extremity 
uountaiu  well 
•.    As  soon  as 
r  TracadisasU 
e  been  passed, 
nearer  than  7 
W.  ^east  mag.)' 
13  miles  wide 
iver,  a  consiil- 
n  consequence 
!  miles  from  its 
oint,  bold  and 
int  of  the  bay. 
f  Black  Point, 
ley  extend  out 
rage  from  SE. 

pediac  River, 
(int.  One  mile 
d  Little  Eiver, 

[)8tly  of  Frencb 
the  way  from 
»f  the  bay.  In 
ill  be  seen  2  or 

lere  the  timber 
Duthie  Point 

anchor  farther 
well  sheltered 

I  oft"  Richmond; 


one  in  3  fathoms  water,  1.^  miles  S.  .{2^  W.  (S.  50^  VV.  mag.)  from  Dutliie 
Point,  the  other  apparently  on  the  end  of  the  spit  running  off  from 
Indian  I'oiiit. 

Directions. — In  running  for  this  anchorage  from  the  eastward, 
observe  that  the  marks  for  the  southwestern  or  outer  edge  of  the  shoid 
off  Indian  Point  (already  mentioned  as  sheltering  the  anchorage  from 
SK.  winds)  ure  Red  Point  a  little  open  to  the  southward  of  lliack 
Point,  bearing  S.  72*^  E.  (8.48^  E.  mag.).  Keep  these  marks,  therefore, 
well  open  as  the  vessel  runs  to  the  westward  with  the  lead  going,  and 
go  no  nearer  the  shoal  than  the  depth  of  5  or  4  fathoms,  until  the  churcth 
bears  N.  .'33° E. (N. 57°  E.  mag.);  then  haul  boldly  in,  steering  directly 
for  the  church  until  the  vessel  is  at  the  anchorage  already  i>ointed  out. 

Bonaventure  Point,  1(>  miles  SE.  of  Itlack  Point,  is  formed  by  a 
low  red  sandstone  cliff,  with  a  thin  superstratum  of  sand  and  clay  con- 
taiuing  tertiary  shells.  The  Honaventure  liiver,  with  only  2  feet  over 
its  bar  at  low  water,  together  with  the  village  of  the  same  name,  and 
church,  with  tall  spire  and  red  roof  will  be  seen  in  the  bay  2  or  3  miles 
to  the  northward  of  the  point.  A  rocky  shoal  extends  off  this  point 
to  the  westward  fully  a  mile,  and  continues  round  the  bay  to  the  north-' 
ward  and  westward  nearly  to  Red  Point,  a  distance  of  7  or  8  miles. 

In  the  bay  between  Red  and  Black  Points,  and  T)  miles  NW.  of  the 
former,  is  the  small  Oaplin  River,  remarkable  only  for  a  reef  which  lies 
off  its  mouth  ^  mile  from  the  shore. 

Anchorage. — There  is  good  anchorage  under  Bonaventnre  Point, 
with  easterly  winds,  in  U  fathoms,  mud  bottom,  with  the  point  bearing 
S.  74°  E.  (8.  50°  E.  mag.),  the  church  N.  27°  E.  (N.  51°  E.  nmg.),  and 
the  entrancie  of  the  river  N.  Gl°  E.  (N.  85°  E.  mag.),  IJ  miles. 

Paspebiac  Bay. — Carlisle  Point,  the  west  entrance  point  of  the  bay, 
is  5  miles  east  of  Bonaventure  Point.  Paspebiac  has  an  excellent 
roadstead,  and  is  the  principal  fishing  establishment  iu  Chaleur  Bay. 
A  triangular  point  of  sand  and  shingle  beach,  inclosing  a  lagoon, 
extends  out  from  the  mainland  to  the  distance  of  a  mile,  and  has  on  its 
west  side  several  buildings,  together  with  numerous  huts  belonging  to 
the  fishermen.  On  the  west  side  of  the  sandy  point,  and  close  to  the 
cliffs,  the  lagoon  has  an  outlet,  which  has  a  rough  bridge  across  it,  and 
will  admit  boats  at  high  water.  In  rear  of  this  the  mainland  rises  irom 
the  edge  of  dark-red  sandstone  cliffs. 

New  Carlisle,  the  county  town,  with  its  jail  and  courthouse,  stands 
on  the  ridge  in  rear  of  Carlisle  Point.  Paspebiac  Point  is  3^  miles 
from  Carlisle  Point,  and  the  roadstead  is  between  them,  but  much 
nearer  the  former.  In  this  excellent  and  convenient  anchorage  vessels 
are  sheltered  from  the  west,  round  north  and  ea.st,  to  SE.;  and  although 
it  is  completely  open  to  the  SW.  winds,  which  send  in  a  very  consider- 
able swell,  yet  the  ground  is  so  good  that  vessels  ride  here  moored  all 
through  the  season  without  accident. 

At  Paspebiac  the  United  States  is  represented  by  a  consular  agent. 
1151 13 


^^^SU^a^^.'. 


M'^ 


Mi 


mmf^ 


194  OUI-F    OF    8T.  LAWRENCE— WKBT    COAflT. 

Supplle..-At  Paspobia.-,  tUeie  is  an  exeell.'ut  wateiinK  place  at  a 
8tn.am  wl.U.,1,  will  be  neen  falling  from  tl.e  ditV.  Jnst  to  th.  wentwanl  ..f 
the  cM.tlet  .,f  tho  laKOon.    Supplies  of  all  kinds  ...ay  be  obtamed  here, 

but  to  a  limited  extent.  ^ks-- 

Li«ht.-'ri.e  liKl.tl.ouHe,  1 K)  yards  ..orth  of  the  axtrcn.ity  of  Panpeba^ 
Snit  is  white,  r,4  feet  hijjh,  aud  exhibits  at  a.,  elevation  ot  50  leet  a 
nx^i  1  U  1  iht;  the  light  should  be  visii  1.  1.  ...iles.  The  lig^^t  shows 
ml  over  the  anchorage  between  east  (B.  Oflo  K.  .nag.)  and  8.  4oO  h. 

^^'InchoxZe'-'rU^  »'«8t  anchorage  is  in  «  fathoms,  <day  bottou.,  with 
mtL  tlagstatr,  the  most  easter..  one  a.ljaceut  to  the  sto.e  w  th  a  g.ee., 
vm  nda,  atd  Siigle  Tree  Pob.t  (the  extre.ne  to  the  eastward  seen  over 
Z  s^dv  »o...t)  in  line,  beari..g  N.  OOo  E.  (east  .nag.),  a,.d  the  extre«..ty 
o  t ;  a.X  ii"t,  8.  '^70  K.  (S.  43o  E.  ,nag.).  A  sandy  spit  exte..ds 
under  water  rather  more  tha..  A  mile  southwestward  from  the  sandy 
point  and  ..early  as  far  southward. 

Buoy.-A  red  buoy  is  moored  at  thi^  western  extreme  of  the  shoal 
extondbig  southwestward  from  Paspebiac  Spit. 

Diections.-From  the  eastward,  whe..  the  vessel  has  passed  Nou- 
veUe  Kiver  and  is  approaching  within  2  or  .  miles  of  l^-peb.ac  Po^^^^^^^^ 
keep  the  sunm.it  of  l)a..iel  Hill  open  to  the  so.ithward  of  Nouyelle 
Point  bearb.g  N.41»o  E.  (N.  73o  E.  mag.),  until  tho  easter...no8t  church 
s  ee,'.  we  ope.,  to  the  westward  of  the  south  extremity  of  the  sm.dy 
oiut  ,.orth  (N.  240  E.  mag.).  Then  steer  for  Carlisle  Po.nt,  keep.ng 
irieargol..g  till  Le  Bonteliiers  store  is  on  with  the  above  mentioned 

^'^  sleer  i..  ..ow  lor  the  anchorage,  taki..g  care  not  to  open  out  the  same 
ehurch  to  t  e  westward  of  the  store  until  Single  Tree  Point  (the  extreme 
to  the  westward)  is  well  shut  in  beh.nd  the  sandy  point,  when  he  ves- 
Tel^'lbe  w.  h. .  the  spit,  and  a  berth  .nay  be  chosen  by  thelea.1,  or 
by  a  bearing  oi  the  l.ghthouse,  at  or  near  the  position  already  pointed 

"""ihere  is  nothing  in  the  way  when  approaching  this  anchorage  from 
the  westward,  but ...  standing  out  from  it  with  a  westerly  wind,  and 
esueda  iv  witi  a  lee  tide,  the  marks  for  clearing  the  spit  to  the  west- 
ward  1st  be  carefully  amended  to.  The  above  «l--^^.f -^^  "ot  be 
leiied  out  to  the  eastward  of  Le  Boutelliers  store  until  Single  Tree 
Poi  .1  is  well  open  to  the  southward  of  the  sandy  point;  nor  should  the 
vessel  belrup'to  the  eastward  of  8.  24o  E.  (south  mag.)  before  Darnel 
Hill  comes  open  to  the  southward  of  Nouvelle  Point.      .       ^  ,    „ 

NouveUe  River.  5  miles  eastward  of  Paspebiac  Point,  has  only  2 
fee^ovlr ts  bar^t  low  water,  and  will  be  known  by  the  fish  stores  and 
ragelo.!  the  sandy  beach  on  the  east  side  of  it«  -f--    ^^^«  J-^- 
em  side  is  formed  by  Nouvelle  Point,  which  is  a  high  chft  of  red  sand- 

''port  Daniel  is  a  fine  bay,  open  to  the  eastward  and  about  1^  miles 


j,;,^j^3g^S,^,e»we***»rffe5W*«*»*^^ 


PORT   DANIEI, — NEWPORT. 


195 


;  ])liic»i  at  ft 
kvestwartl  of 
taiued  liere, 

if  Pa8i)el)iac 
of  50  f«ct  a 
,  light  sllOWH 
lul  a.  45°  E. 

bottom,  \vith 
with  a  gr<'«» 
m\  weoii  over 
the  extretiiity 
'  spit  extends 
BUI  the  saudy 

5  of  the  shoal 

H  passed  Nou- 
spebiac-  Point, 
d  of  Nouvelle 
irninost  church 
y  of  the  sandy 
Point,  keeping 
)ove  mentioned 

)n  out  the  same 

[ut  (the  extreme 

,  when  the  ves- 

by  the  lead,  or 

ilready  pointed 

mchorage  from 
terly  wind,  and 
Ipit  to  the  west- 
should  not  be 
^il  Single  Tree 
nor  should  the 
r.)  before  Dauiel 

loint,  has  only  2 
le  fish  stores  and 
Ince.  The  west- 
^liff  of  red  sand- 
about  Ih  miles 


wide,  anil  deep.  In  the  northern  coiner  of  the  Iniy.  >t  mile  witliiii  White 
Point,  which  is  high  and  of  white  liin  tone,  a  snuill  river  enters  the 
bay  thnmgh  a  sandy  beach  after  deHcemliuK  '•*  valley  between  wooded 
hillH.  There  are  ninny  houses  and  Htores  near  t  he  entrance  of  the  river, 
which  will  only  admit  boats  at  IiiKh  water,  bein^  nearly  dry  when  the 
tide  is  out. 

A  shoal  extends  ^  mile  from  the  shore  all  around  the  port  from  West 
Point  to  White  Point.  West  Point  Is  of  craggy  gray  limestone,  with  a 
high  and  remarkable  semi-isolated  rock  at  its  8H.  extremity;  on  its 
north  side  there  is  a  small  cove  and  a  good  landing  for  boats.  Dauiel 
Hill,  about  one  mile  westward  of  West  Point,  and  rising  400  feet  above 
the  sea,  is  remarkable  as  the  highest  land  close  to  the  shore  on  this 
part  of  the  coast.  It  serves  to  point  out  the  situation  of  Port  Daniel, 
as  does  also  Reddish  I'oint,  which  often  appears  like  an  island  close  to 
the  shore. 

The  points  in  order  westward  from  Mai'quereau  Point,  and  between 
it  and  the  river,  are  Keddish  Point,  Pillar  Point,  and  White  Point, 
which  will  all  be  easily  recognized,  the  (irst  and  last  by  their  color  and 
the  other  by  a  remarkable  ro<'k  close  oti'  its  extremity.  The  ground  is 
not  good  ontside  the  line  joining  West  and  Pillar  Points. 

Supplies  of  wood  and  water  n»ay  be  t)btained  at  Port  Dauiel,  but 
fresh  provisions  an^  not  i)lentiful. 

Anchorage. — The  best  anchorage  in  Port  Daniel  is  in  0  or  7  fathoms, 
mud  or  clay  bottom,  in  the  line  between  West  and  White  Points,  with 
the  entrance  of  the  river  N.  28°  W.  (N.  4^  W.  mag.),  and  Reddish 
and  Macquereau  Points  in  one,  bearing  N.  74°  E.  (S.  82°  E.  mag.). 
Strong  SE.  winds  roll  in  a  heavy  swell,  but  there  is  no  difficulty  in 
getting  out  on  their  approach,  for  the  ])oints  are  all  bold,  and  in 
standing  out  or  in,  vessels  may  safely  pass  West  Point  at  400  yards. 

Macquereau  Point,  7  miles  eastward  of  Port  Daniel,  is  of  bohl  and 
dark-colored  craggy  rocks.  It  is  also  wooded,  and  rises  to  about  200 
feet  above  the  sea. 

Light — The  lighthouse  on  Macquereau  Point  is  a  scpiare  building,  27 
feet  high,  painted  white,  exhibiting  at  an  elevation  of  50  feet  an  alter- 
nating light,  showing  flashes  of  red  and  white  every  minute,  which 
should  be  visible  12  miles. 

Fog  Signal — A  hand  horn  answers  signals  from  vessels. 

Telegraph  Station. — There  is  a  signal  and  telegraph  station  at  Mac- 
quereau l*oint. 

Newport,  6  miles  north  of  Macquereau  Point  and  3i  miles  SSW. 
from  Great  Pabos,  is  another  fishing  place,  where  a  small  vessel  or  two 
may  be  moored  (under  shelter  of  a  shoal  and  at  some  risk)  to  take  in 
fish  during  the  summer  months. 

Light. — A  fixed  white  light  is  shown  from  a  lighthouse  in  the  middle 
of  an  island  off  Newport  Point.  The  light  is  elevated  3(5  feet,  and  should 
be  visible  12  miles.  The  lighthouse,  27  I'eet  high,  is  a  square  pyramidal 
building,  painted  white,  surmounted  by  a  stjuare  lantern. 


im 


GULP   OF   ST.  LAWRENCE — WEST  COAST. 


I 


Grand  and  Little  Fabos  are  fishing  places  fit  only  for  boats  or 
veiy  small  craft.  There  is  but  a  foot  of  water  over  the  bar  of  the  latter 
at  low  tide,  and  ordiJl?^'»i'T'ngs  do  not  rise  over  5  feet.  Great  Pabos, 
■which  is  a  similar  but  much  larger  place,  had  4  feet  over  its  bar  at  low 
water  when  it  was  surveyed,  but  the  depth  and  situation  of  the  very 
narrow  channel  change  with  easterly  gales. 

Grand  River,  7  miles  westward  of  Gape  d'Espoir,  is  a  considerable 
stream,  but  has  only  2  feet  at  low  water  over  its  bar.  There  is  a  vil- 
lage and  a  considerable  fishing  establishment  there,  and  immediately 
■westward  of  the  river  a  shoal  extends  fully  i  mile  out  from  the  shore. 

Light. — Grand  River  light  is  txhibited  from  a  lighthouse  erected  on 
the  eastern  side  of  the  entrance.  The  light  is  a  fixed  red  light,  ele- 
vated 52  feet,  and  should  be  visible  seaward  and  up  the  river  8  miles. 

The  lighthouse,  43  feet  high,  is  an  hexagonal  building,  painted  white, 
with  iron  lantern,  painted  red. 

The  light  is  intended  to  guide  into  the  river  as  well  as  for  a  coast 
light. 

Fog  Signal. — A  hand  horn  answers  signals  from  vessels. 

(H.  O.  Chart  No.  1109.)  . 

Cape  d'Espoir,  the  NE.  point  of  Ghaleur  Bay,  consists  of  red  sand- 
stone dill's,  without  beach,  and  is  of  moderate  height. 

Lignt.— The  lighthouse  on  Gape  d'Espoir,  a  square  building  43  feet 
high,  and  painted  white,  with  a  red  roof,  exhibits,  at  an  elevation  of  90 
feet,  a  revolving  white  light  every  J  minute,  which  should  be  visible 
15  miles. 

Fog  Signal — A  hand  horn  answers  signals  from  vessels. 

Telegraph  Station.— There  is  a  signal  and  telegraph  station  on  Gape 
d'Espoir, 

Leander  Shoal,  lying  SE.,  distant  rather  more  than  1^  miles  from 
Gape  d'Espoir,  is  about  ^  mile  in  diameter,  and  has  16  feet  least  water 
on  one  spot,  which  is  very  ditScult  to  find.  It  is  a  rocky  shoal,  and 
there  is  a  clear  passage  between  it  and  the  cape.  White  Head,  in 
line  with  the  inner  or  NW.  end  of  Perc6  Bock,  leads  just  outside  of 
the  shoal.  From  half  to  the  whole  of  the  Perc6  Bock  shut  in  behind 
White  Head  will  lead  clenr  between  the  shoal  and  Cape  d'Espoir. 

Buoy. — A  can  buoy,  painted  red,  is  moored  in  4  fathoms  water  in 
the  center  of  Gock  Gove,  the  first  beach  north  of  Gape  d'Espoir,  to 
indicate  the  limit  of  fishing  nets  and  to  prevent  vessels  from  injuring 
them  by  anchoring  Inside  it. 

Bonaventure  Island,  400  feet  high,  has  bold  and  perpendicular 
cliffs  of  red  sandstone  and  conglomerate  on  all  sides  except  the  west. 
These  ulifTs,  in  some  parts,  attain  an  elevation  of  250  feet  above  the 
sea,  and  their  ledges  and  fissures  are  the  habitation  of  innumerable 
gannets.  From  the  west  side,  shoal  water  extends  ^  mile,  and  there  is 
anchorage  in  15  fathoms  between  it  and  White  Head,  but  the  riding  is 


ly  for  boats  or 
>ar  of  the  latter 
Great  Paboa, 
iv  its  bar  at  low  r 
tion  of  the  very 

\  a  considerable 
There  is  a  vil- 
md  immediately 
from  the  shore. 
lOUse  erected  on 
sd  red  light,  ele- 
the  river  8  miles. 
,g,  painted  white, 

eU  as  for  a  coast 

essels. 


isists  of  red  sand- 

-e  building  43  feet 
an  elevation  of  90 

should  be  visiblo 

ressels. 

ph  station  on  Cape 

lan  IJ  miles  from 
16  feet  least  water 
a  rocky  shoal,  and 
White  Head,  in 
ds  just  outside  of 
3ck  shut  in  behind 
■lape  d'Bspoir. 
fathoms  water  in 
Cape  d'Bspoir,  to 
issels  from  injuring 

and  perpendicular 
b»  except  the  west. 
I25O  feet  above  the 
._  of  innumerable 
mile,  and  there  is 
fd,  but  the  riding  is 


PERCE    BAY — MAL   BAY. 


197 


insecure  and  lieavy  in  consequence  of  the  swell,  which,  in  bad  weather, 
rolls  round  the  island.  The  channel  betM'eeu  Bonaventure  Island  and 
Perec  Rock  is  about  1^  miles  wide,  and  free  from  danger. 

Light. — On  White  Head,  the  south  extreme  of  Perc<'!  Bay,  stands  a 
lighthouse,  a  square  building,  29  feet  high,  and  painted  white,  which 
exhibits,  at  an  elevation  of  149  feet,  a  fixed  white  light,  which  should 
be  visible  13  miles. 

Fog  Signal. — A  hand  horn  answers  signals  from  vessels. 

Percd  Rock  is  288  feet  high,  precipitous  all  round,  and  bold  to  sea- 
ward. It  is  narrow,  and  about  ^  mile  long,  and  is  rendered  remarkable 
by  a  large  hole  whi<'h  has  been  niade  through  it  by  the  waves,  and 
through  which  a  boat  can  pass  at  high  water. 

Perc6  Bay  is  comprised  between  this  rock  and  White  Head.  Perc6 
Reef,  ^  mile  SW.  of  Perc6  Rock,  extends  800  yards  from  the  shore. 
Small  vessels  engaged  in  the  fisheries  anchor  on  eitlier  side  of  this  reef, 
with  winds  off  the  land,  but  it  is  a  dangerous  i)lace,  and  not  to  be 
recommended  for  large  vessels.  From  White  Head  to  Perec  Rf)ck  is 
locally  known  as  South  Beach  and  the  first  small  bay  northwestward 
of  Perc6  Rock  as  North  Beach. 

Buoys. — A  can  buoy,  painted  black,  is  moored  in  17  fathoms  off  South 
Beach,  and  a  can  buoy,  painted  red,  is  moored  in  the  same  depth  oif 
North  Beach.  These  buoys  are  intended  to  mark  the  outside  limits  of 
fishing  nets.    Vessels,  therefore,  should  not  go  or  anchor  inside  them. 

Perc6,  a  considerable  village  with  a  church,  and  a  population  in  1891 
of  1,800,  principally  engaged  in  the  fisheries,  occupies  the  shores  of  the 
bay,  and  Perce  Mountain,  or,  as  it  is  sometimes  named.  La  Table  Ron- 
lante,  rises  immediately  from  it  to  the  height  of  1,230  feet  above  the 
sea.  This  mountain  is  very  remarkable,  and  can  be  seen  at  sea  from  a 
distance  of  40  miles.  A  reef  connects  Perc6  Rock  with  Perc6  Point, 
and  off  the  NE.  side  of  the  latter  small  vessels  anchor  with  westerly 
winds. 

Tides. — There  is  generally  a  regular  stream  of  flood  and  ebb,  of 
about  one  knot,  between  Bonaventure  Island  and  the  mainland,  the 
flood  stream  running  SW.  round  Cape  d'Bspoir  and  up  Chjileur  Bay, 
and  the  ebb  in  the  contrary  direction.  Two  or  3  miles  outside,  or  to 
the  eastward  of  Bonaventure  Island,  the  current  will  often  be  found 
running  to  the  southward  out  of  the  St.  Lawrence. 

Mai  Bay  is  between  5  and  6  miles  wide  by  4  miles  deep,  and  entirely 
open  to  the  SB.  On  its  SW.  side,  and  under  the  Perc<5  Mountains, 
there  are  magnificent  perpendicular  cliffs  660  feet  above  the  sea.  Its 
NB.  side  has  low  cliff's  of  sandstone,  with  occasional  beaches.  A  fine 
broad  sandy  beach  extends  across  the  head  of  the  bay  and  incloses  a 
shallow  lagoon.  A  considerable  river  and  several  small  streams  dis- 
charge their  waters  into  the  lagoon,  which  has  an  outlet  in  the  NW. 
corner  of  the  bay  called  tlie  Tickle,  admitting  boats  at  high  water  and 
in  fine  weather.    There  is  anchorage  all  round  the  shores  of  Mai  Bay^ 


i 


198 


GULF   OF   ST.  LAWRENCE — WEST   COAST. 


i 


but  as  a  heavy  sea  and  thick  fog  often  precede  a  SB.  gale,  and  render 
it  difficult  for  a  vessel  to  beat  out,  it  can  not  be  recommended.  An 
open  cove  or  small  bay  is  formed  on  the  NE.  side,  in  which  a  vessel  can 
be  occasionally  moored  close  to  the  shore  and  in  3  fathoms  water;  but 
this  is  of  no  use  for  the  general  purposes  of  navigation. 

American  Bank,  on  which  H.  M.  S.  Northampton  found  a  depth  of 
7J  fathoms,  is  reported  by  the  local  fishermen  to  have  a  least  depth 
of  5  fathoms.  This  bank  is  situated  with  Cape  Gasiw  lighthouse  bear- 
ing F.  52°  \V.  (N.  26°  W.  mag.),  distant  11  miles,  and  Cape  d'Espoir 
Lighthouse  S.  54°  W.  (S.  80°  W.  mag.). 

Q-asp^  Bay.— reter  Point,  the  south  point  of  Gasp6  Bay,  is  of  low 
sandstone  and  thickly  covered  with  the  white  houses  of  the  fishermen. 
Flat  liock,  lying  about  800  yards  off  the  point,  is  small,  low,  and  of 
sandstone.  There  is  a  clear  channel  between  the  island  and  the  point, 
but  no  good  anchorage;  for  although  vessels  occasionally  anchor  to  the 
northward  of  the  island,  yet  the  ground  is  so  foul  that  there  is  great 
danger  of  losing  an  anchor  from  its  hooking  the  rocks. 

The  bay  contains  an  excellent  outer  roadstead  off  Douglastown,  a 
harbor  at  its  head,  capable  of  holding  a  numerous  fleet  in  perfect  safety, 
and  a  basin  where  large  ships  might  be  hove  down  and  refitted. 

Light— On  the  summit  of  Flat  Kock  stands  a  sqnare  lighthouse,  50 
feet  high,  and  painted  white,  from  which  at  an  elevation  of  77  feet  is 
exhibited  a  revolving  red  light  every  thirty  seconds,  visible  10  miles. 
Fog  Signal— A  hand  horn  answers  signals  from  vessels. 
Cape  G-aspd  is  a  remarkable  headland,  of  limestone,  having  on  its 
NE.  side  a  magnificent  range  of  cliffs,  which  rise  from  the  sea  to  the 
height  of  «)92  feet.  Flowerpot  Rock  lies  close  off  the  SE.  extremity  of 
the  cape;  it  is  alw.iys  visible,  the  sea  washing  over  it  only  at  high 
water.  It  is  sometimes  named  "  Ships  Head,"  at  others  "  Old  Woman," 
by  the  fishermen,  and  is  so  bold  that  vessels  may  haul  round  it  into 
Gaspt'  Kay  within  the  distance  of  J  mile.  Boats  may  pass  between  it 
and  the  cape  when  there  is  no  surf.  The  limestone  of  Cape  G»sp6  dips 
to  the  SW.,  so  that  the  cliffs  within  the  bay  are  very  much  lower  than 
those  on  the  outside  of  the  cape. 

Light— On  Cape  Gaspc^,  at  an  elevation  of  355  feet,  is  exhibited  a 
revolving  white  light  every  minute,  showing  three  flashes,  with  intervals 
of  fifteen  seconds  between  their  points  of  greatest  brilliancy,  followed 
by  an  interval  of  thirty  seconds,  during  the  greater  part  of  which  the 
light  is  eclipsed.  The  light  should  be  visible  26  miles.  The  building, 
46  feet  high,  is  a  lighthouse  and  dwelling  combined,  the  square  tower 
rising  from  the  middle  of  the  south  face  of  the  structure,  the  walls  of 
which  are  white  and  the  lantern  red. 

Fog  Signal.— In  thick  or  foggy  weather,  or  during  snowstorms,  a 
cotton  powder  cartridge  is  fired  every  twenty  minutes.    A  hand  horn 

is  in  reserve. 

Southwest  Coast— The  SW.  shore  of  Gasp^  Bay  from  Peter  Pomt 
to  Douglastown,  a  distance  of  12  miles,  presents  a  succession  of  pre- 


t 


tiid  render 
ided.  All 
vessel  can 
vater;  but 

a  depth  of, 
Bast  depth 
lonse  bear- 
le  d'Espoir 

jr,  is  of  low 
!  fishermen, 
low,  and  of 
1  the  point, 
ichor  to  the 
ere  is  great 

glastown,  a 
ifect  safety, 
itted. 

jhthouse,  50 
of  77  feet  is 
,e  10  miles. 

aviug  on  its 
e  sea  to  the 
extremity  of 
Illy  at  high 
Id  Woman," 
ound  it  into 
s  between  it 
J  G»8p6  dips 
1  lower  than 

exhibited  a 
ith  intervals 
icy,  followed 
)f  which  the 
lie  building, 
iquare  tower 

the  walls  of 

owstorms,  a 
A.  hand  horn 

Peter  Point 
)Ssion  of  pre- 


GASP^    BAY. 


199 


cipitous  headlands,  rising  to  the  height  of  200  feet  above  the  Bei*.  The 
shoals  extending  out  into  the  bay  are  too  steep  for  the  lead  to  give 
warning. 

Douglastown,  with  a  population  of  1,468  in  1891,  is  a  village  of 
fishermen  and  farmers,  standing  on  the  rising  ground  at  the  south  side 
of  the  entrance  of  the  St.  John  River.  The  water  is  deep  in  the  outer 
parts  of  the  bay,  being  from  30  to  upward  of  GO  fathoms,  over  mud 
bottom;  but  on  approaching  Douglastown  the  depth  decreases  regu- 
larly to  the  anchorage. 

Cape  Haldimand,  2  miles  northward  of  Douglastown,  is  a  bluff 
point  of  clitf,  and  the  southeastern  termination  of  the  range  of  hills 
which  separates  the  harbor,  basin,  and  Southwest  Arm  from  the  valley 
of  the  St.  John  Biver. 

Water  may  be  obtained  by  ascending  the  St.  John  Biver  to  the 
islands,  a  distance  of  2  miles.  In  the  spring  of  the  year  there  is  often 
a  depth  of  9  feet  in  the  entrance  of  this  river,  which  is  between  two 
points  of  sand,  and  there  are  12  feet  in  the  narrow  channel  for  some 
distance  within.    At  the  islands  the  river  becomes  shallow  and  rapid. 

Anchorage.— The  roadstead  o£f  Douglastown  is  extensive;  vessels 
may  anchor  in  any  part  of  it  and  in  any  depth  from  6  to  11  fathoms, 
over  sand  and  clay  bottom,  but  the  best  berth  is  in  7  fathoms,  off  the 
entrance  of  the  St.  John  Biver.  The  riding  is  much  less  heavy  in 
southeasterly  winds  than  might  be  expected,  and,  as  the  ground  is 
excellent  for  holding,  a  vessel  may  safely  anchor  here  during  the 
summer  months. 

Northeast  Coast. — At  Grande  Greve,  3^  miles  within  Gape  Gaspd, 
the  ridge  of  land  dips  and  narrows,  so  that  there  is  a  portage  across  it, 
leading  to  the  settlements  at  Cape  Bosier.  On  the  NW.  side  of  the 
portage  a  range  of  mountains  commences,  and  chey  continue  along  the 
SE,  side  of  Gaspu  Bay  and  Northwest  Arm  till  they  are  lost  to  view  in 
the  interior  of  the  country.  Opposite  to  Gaspe  Basin  they  rise  to  the 
height  of  1,505  feet  above  the  sea. 

The  NE.  side  of  Gaspd  Bay  is  thickly  covered  with  the  houses  of  the 
fishermen  for  a  distance  of  5  miles  within  Cape  Gasp^.  A  church  has 
been  built  at  2^  miles  within  the  cape;  and  another  stands  close  to  the 
sliore  of  a  cove  2^  miles  farther  northward.  There  is  anchorage  with 
good  holding  ground,  but  in  not  less  than  17  fathoms,  except  within  ^ 
mile  of  the  shore,  abreast  of  St.  George  Cove,  Grande  Greve,  and  Little 
Gaspe.  The  word  "cove"  is,  however,  inappropriately  applied  to  any 
part  of  the  shore  between  Grande  Greve  and  the  cape,  for  though  there 
are  fishing  establishments,  there  are  no  coves  whatever.  This  side  is 
bold  and  free  from  danger  in  every  part,  with  the  exception  of  Seal 
Bock,  which  is  the  only  detached  danger  in  the  bay. 

Seal  Rock  is  6J  miles  within  Cape  Gasp^,  one  mile  SE.  by  E.  from 
Cape  Brul(^,  and  ^  mile  off  shore.  The  length  of  this  reef  between  depths 
of  3  fathoms  and  in  a  direction  parallel  to  the  shore  is  ^  mile,  and  its 
breadth  4  toUq-    The  least  water  ou  it  is  4  feet,  and  there  is  a  depth  of 


200 


GULF  OP   ST.  LAWRENCE — WEST   COAST. 


3J  fathoms  between  it  and  the  shore.  When  on  the  outer  edge  of  the 
rocks,  Cape  Brul6  is  in  line  with  the  next  clitt'y  point  up  the  l)ay,  bear- 
ing N.  00°  W.  (N.  340  W.  mag.),  and  this  only  mark  is  suflirient  for  the 
safety  of  vessels  working,  for  the  rocks  are  out  of  the  track  with  fair 
winds. 

(11.  O.  Chart  1167.) 

Gasp6  Harbor.— From  Cape  Haldimand,  Sandy  Beach  Point  extends 
northward  and  forms  Gasp^  Harbor.  It  is  a  low  and  narrow  point  of 
sand,  convex  to  seaward,  on  which  side  the  water  deepens  gradually 
from  high-wate"  mark  to  the  depth  of  3  fathoms  a  distance  of  nearly  ^ 
mile.  On  the  inside  it  is  as  bold  as  a  wall.  The  water  deepens  imme- 
diately outside  of  3  fathoms  all  along  the  outside  of  Sandy  Heacli  Point, 
and  also  off  its  north  extremity,  so  that  it  is  both  dangerous  and  diflS- 
cult  to  beat  in  or  out  of  the  harbor  at  night,  the  lead  giving  little  or  no 
warning. 

The  population  of  Gasp(5  in  1891  was  1,460. 

The  United  States  is  represented  by  a  consul. 

Llghtvessel.— Off  the  extiemity  of  Saudy  Beach  Point  is  moored  a 
lightvessel,  which  exhibits  two  lights,  namely,  on  the  foremast  a  fixed 
red  light,  29  feet  high,  and  on  the  mainmast  a  fixed  white  light,  37  feet 
high.  The  lightvessel  is  painted  red,  with  the  word  Light-ship  on 
her  sides.    The  red  light  is  visible  G  miles  and  the  white  light  10  miles. 

Fog  Signal — A  hand  horn  answers  signals  from  vessels. 

The  Peninsula,  nearly  one  mile  northward  of  Sandy  Beach  Point, 
is  a  low  sand,  covered  with  spruce  trees. 

Between  the  shoal  water  in  the  bay  eastward  of  the  Peninsula  and 
that  which  extends  from  the  extremity  of  Sandy  Beach  Point  is  the 
narrowest  part  of  the  entrance  to  the  harbor,  which  is  850  yards  wide 
between  depths  of  3  fathoms,  and  has  a  depth  of  11  fathoms  in  the 
center.  Within  Sandy  Beach  Point— that  is,  in  Gaspo  Harbor— the 
shelter  is  complete  from  all  winds;  the  bottom  is  mud,  and  the  depth 
nowhere  exceeds  11 J  fathoms.  » 

Gaspe  Basin.— The  harbor  is  divided  into  the  Northwest  and  South- 
west Arms.  The  Northwest  Arm  has  deep  water  for  nearly  3  miles 
above  the  Peninsula,  and  continues  navigable  for  keeled  boats  about  3 
miles  farther,  where  the  Dartmouth  River  enters  the  arm  between 
Marsh  and  Meadow  Islands. 

Southwest  Arm.— The  entrance  of  Southwest  Arm  is  about  300 
yards  wide,  and  between  two  sandy  points,  but  the  navigable  channel, 
which  is  buoyed,  is  contracted  by  shoals  on  either  side  tt>  about  120 
yards;  and  27  feet  of  water  can  be  carried  in  mid  channel.  The  deep- 
water  part  of  Southwest  Arm,  which  continues  for  ^  mile  within  the 
entrance,  is  named  Gaspe  Basin;  it  has  a  depth  of  from  5  to  9  fath- 
cms,  over  a  mud  bottom,  and  is  sufficiently  capacious  to  hold  a  great 
number  of  vessels.  Boats  can  ascend  Southwest  Arm  by  a  narrow 
channel,  between  shoals,  about  3  miles,  as  in  Northwest  Arm,  and  the 


%Hrm 


idge  of  the 
5  bay,  bear- 
ient  for  the 
;k  with  fair 


)int  extends 
•ow  point  of 
rt  gradually 
of  nearly  J 
»pen8  irame- 
Jeach  Point, 
us  and  diffl- 
£  little  or  no 


;  is  moored  a 

;mast  a  fixed 

light,  37  feet 

light-ship  on 

ght  10  miles. 

■I. 

ieach  Point, 

eninsula  and 
Point  is  the 
0  yards  wide 
;hom8  in  the 
Harbor— the 
nd  the  depth 

5t  and  South- 

arly  3  miles 

ioats  about  3 

arm  between 

is  about  300 
able  channel, 
to  about  120 
The  deep- 

e  within  the 
1  5  to  9  fath- 

hold  a  great 
by  a  narrow 
Arm,  and  the 


OASrK    HARnOR. 


navigation,  for  all  bnt  canoes  or  flat-bottom  boats,  is  terminated  by 
shallow  channels.  Above  this  part  of  the  river  it  becomes  contracted 
and  rapid,  and  the  wpter  fresh. 

A  small  rivnlet  in  the  bay,  on  the  inside  of  the  south  point  of  the 
entrance  of  Oasp^  liasin,  is  the  most  convenient  watering  place  in  the 
harbor.  Most  of  the  families,  as  well  as  those  of  Northwest  Ann  and 
the  harbor  generally,  are  farmers,  bnt  several  of  them  are  also  engaged 
in  the  whale  fishery,  which  they  prosecute  in  small  schooners.  The  cod 
fishery  is  carried  on  by  the  people  of  the  bay  outside. 

Buoys. — The  following  buoys  are  moored  in  Gaspe  P>asin :  A  black 
buoy  at  the  extreme  of  GaspiS  Spit;  a  red  buoy,  on  ballast  ground,  600 
yards  from  Arnold  Bluff;  a  red  buoy  at  the  south  extreme  of  the  shoal 
oft"  that  bluff,  and  a  red  buoy  to  mark  a  sunken  wharf  J  mile  westward 
of  O'Hara  Point. 

These  buoys  are  removed  on  the  approa<;h  of  winter  and  replaced 
in  the  spring  of  the  year. 

Lights. — From  a  scpiare  lighthouse,  37  feet  high,  and  painted  white, 
erected  on  O'Hara  Point,  the  north  entrance  point  to  Southwest  Arm, 
is  exhibited,  at  an  elevation  of  38  feet,  a  fixed  red  light,  which  should 
be  visible  7  miles. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water  in  Gaspd  Basin,  full  and  change,  at  2h.  40m. ; 
ordinary  springs  rise  5  feet  and  neaps  3  feet;  extraordinary  springs 
rise  7  feet.  There  are  regular  but  weak  streams  of  flood  and  ebb  in 
the  entrances  of  the  harbor  and  basin.  In  the  bay  the  streams  of  the 
tides  are  so  irregular  that  nothing  certain  can  be  said  respecting  them. 
They  are,  however,  usually  almost  imperceptible,  excepting  near  the 
shore,  and  even  there  they  are  so  weak  as  to  be  of  little  or  no  (tonse- 
quence  to  a  vessel. 

Ice. — The  harbor  is  usually  frozen  over  about  December  10,  the 
entrance  not  until  December  25,  and  is  clear  of  ice  about  May  10,  being 
completely  closed  between  the  last  two  dates.  The  first  vessel  arrives 
from  sea  ab<mt  May  11,  and  the  last  one  leaves  about  December  6. 

Directions. — On  the  NE.  side  of  Northwest  Arm  there  is  a  wooded 
point  with  low  clay  cliff',  2'^  miles  above  the  peninsula.  This  point 
appears  as  if  it  was  the  extreme  on  that  side,  when  seen  over  the  end 
of  the  peninsula  from  a  vessel  approaching  the  entrance  of  the  harbor, 
and  is  named  Panard  Point,  which,  so  seen,  is  the  mark  for  the  north- 
ern extreme  of  the  shoal  off"  Sandy  Beach  Point,  oft"  which,  as  before 
remarked,  a  lightvessel  is  moored. 

Keep  Sandy  Beach  Lightvessel  on  a  N.  54^^  W..(N.  28°  W.  mag.) 
bearing  iintil  within  one  mile  of  the  vessel,  and  passing  close  north  of 
her,  steer  into  the  harbor  when  the  lightvessel  bears  S.  71°  E.  (S.  45° 
E.  mag.). 

Caution. — The  current  down  the  St.  Lawrence  runs  strongly  past 
Cape  Oasp6  over  toward  Flsit  Kock,  especially  during  the  ebb  stream, 
which  often  increases  its  rate  to  2  knots,  and  this  should  be  remembered 


.  iiMwnwMiiatrtmiirt  wi  ^ 


202 


GULF   OF   ST.  LAWRENCE WEST   COAST. 


by  vessels  making  Ga8p6  Bay  with  a  uortUerly  wind.  This  current, 
when  it  meets  the  swell  which  so  often  prevails  from  the  soutti  and  SE., 
causes  a  high,  short,  and  breaking  sea  all  along  the  coast  from  above 
Cape  Rosier  to  Cape  Gasp^,  and  extending  across  the  entrance  of  Gasp^ 
Bay.  When  the  wind  is  light,  a  vessel  becomes  quite  unmanageable 
in  this  sea,  and  it  is  extremely  dangerous  to  be  caught  in  it,  close  to 
the  shore,  by  a  light  breeze  on  the  land. 

The  soundings  oif  this  part  of  the  coast  will  prove  of  great  use  to 
vessels  running  up  in  foggy  weather. 

In  the  prolongation  of  the  line  of  Cape  GaspiS,  nearly,  there  are 
several  rocky  patches  frequented  by  the  fishermen.  They  all  lie  in  the 
same  direction  from  Flowerpot  Kock,  SE.  The  first  is  a  small  patch 
with  8  fathoms  least  water,  the  second  has  16  fathoms,  and  the  third 
10  fathoms.  Their  distances  from  the  rock  are  |  mile,  1  J,  and  13  miles, 
respectively.  There  is  deep  water  and  irregular  soundings  between 
them,  and  the  last  mentioned  is  on  the  banks  of  soundings  which  have 
been  already  alluded  to. 

Winds. — In  fine  summer  weather  there  is  often  a  sea  breeze  blowing 
right  up  Gasp^  Bay  from  about  9  a.  m.  until  sunset.  At  such  times 
there  is  generally  a  light  land  breeze  at  night  down  the  arms,  which 
often  extends  for  several  miles  out  into  the  bay.  In  the  outer  part  of 
the  bay,  however,  it  will  generally  be  found  to  be  calm,  even  at  times 
when  a  fresh  breeze  is  blowing  outside  Cape  Gaspe  and  Peter  Point. 
The  wind  at  sea  on  such  occasions  is  generally  from  the  SW. 


sti»™™ 


Chis  current, 
utli  and  SE., 
t  from  above 
nee  of  Gasp^ 
imanageable 
n  it,  close  to 

great  use  to 

ly,  there  are 
all  lie  in  the 
i  small  patch 
ind  the  third 
and  13  miles, 
ings  between 
s  which  have 

*eeze  blowing 
Lt  such  times 
I  arms,  which 
outer  part  of 
jven  at  times 
Peter  Point. 

m. 


CHAPTER   VII. 

ST.  LAWKENCE  RIVER-SOUTH  SHORE-CAPE  GASPE  TO  GREEN  ISLAND. 

QUEBEC. 
(H.  O.  Chart  No.  1109.) 

Coast— The  bold  and  high  coast  between  Cape  Gasp^  and  Cape 
Chatte,  a  distance  of  117  miles,  will  recjuire  only  a  brief  notice,  as  it  is 
free  from  danger— with  the  exception  of  Serpent  Reef— and  destitute 
of  harbors.  The  mountains  everywhere  approach  the  shore,  which  is 
steep  and  rooky,  displaying  cliffs,  often  of  great  height,  and  without 
beach.  After  heavy  rains,  waterfalls,  which  are  not  to  be  seen  at  other 
times,  descend  from  great  heights,  and  small  bays,  with  sandy  beach 
and  rapid  streams  at  their  head,  occur  occasionally;  yet  these  features 
are  not  generally  so  strongly  marked  as  to  enable  a  stranger  to  make 
out  one  part  of  this  coast  from  another  with  facility. 

Caution.— Along  the  coast  between  Cape  Ga8p6  and  Cape  Chatte 
the  water  is  everywhere  too  deep  to  afford  sufficient  warning  by  the 
lead  for  the  safety  of  vessels.  The  shore  along  its  whole  extent, 
excepting  in  some  of  the  bays,  is  of  highly  inclined  slate  and  gray- 
wacke  rocks,  which  would  cut  through  a  vessel's  bottom  in  a  very 
short  time;  and  such  is  the  nature  of  the  country  that  those  who  might 
escape  to  shore  would  run  a  great  risk  of  perishing  from  want  before 
they  could  reach  a  settlement. 

Cape  Rosier,  If.  by  W.,  6^  miles  from  Cape  Gasp^,  is  low,  and  of 
graywacke  and  slate  rocks.  The  shoal  water  does  not  extend  off  it 
above  ^  mile,  but  in  the  bay,  If  miles  southward  of  it,  there  is  a  reef, 
which  extends  ^  mile  from  the  shore,  oft"  a  conspicuous  church.  Vessels 
may  find  shelter  under  Cape  Rosier  from  NW.  winds,  but  the  ground 
is  not  very  good,  and  the  easterly  swell  that  frequently  rolls  in  renders 
it  a  dangerous  anchorage.  There  are  fishing  establishments  on  the 
cape  and  in  its  vicinity. 

Light— The  lighthouse  on  Cape  Rosier  is  a  circular  tower  of  white 
stone,  112  feet  high.  It  exhibits  at  an  elevation  of  136  feet  a  fixed 
white  light,  which  is  visible  17  miles. 

Pog  Signal- A  horn  is  sounded  ten  seconds  in  every  minute,  with  an 
Interval  of  fifty  seconds  between  each  blast,  in  thick  weather  or  during 
snowstorms.  If  the  horn  be  out  of  order,  a  whistle  is  sounded  at  the 
same  intervals. 

Signal  Statioa— There  is  a  telegraph  and  signal  station  at  this 
lighthouse. 

203 


nmii^i^K'S^M 


204 


ST,  LAWRENCE   RIVER — SOUTH   SHORE. 


i^ 


QrifiBn  Cove  and  River  are  6^  miles  northwestward  of  Cape  Rosier. 
A  small  bay  here  affords  shelter  to  the  boats  of  the  llsherraen,  whose 
housos  willbe  seen  around  it.  There  are  from  2  to  3  fathoms  water  in 
this  bay,  over  sandy  bottom. 

Supplies.— This  bay  is  of  no  use  to  shipping,  except  to  obtain  sup- 
plies of  water,  wood,  and  occasionally  fresh  provisions. 

Great  Fox  River,  llj  miles  northwestward  from  Cape  Rosier,  is  a 
mere  brook,  which  enters  a  small  bay  about  f  mile  wide  and  i  mile 
deep.  Off  ea«!h  point  of  the  bay  there  are  reefs,  which  diminish  the 
breadth  of  the  entrance  to  less  than  J  mile,  and  afford  shelter  to 
boats,  and  to  small  schooners,  in  from  2  to  2^  fathoms,  over  a  bottom 
of  flue  dark  sand.  Round  the  head  of  the  bay  there  is  a  line  sandy 
beach.  Outside  the  reefs,  li^hich  extend  only  a  short  distance  to  sea- 
ward, there  are  15,  18,  and  24  fathoms,  over  a  bottom  of  sand  and 
broken  shell,  at  the  distance  of  J,  ^,  and  one  mile,  respectively. 

Buoy.— A  buoy,  painted  black,  is  moored  in  7  fathoms  water  in  the 
middle  of  the  bay,  off  Great  Fox  River,  to  indicate  anchorage  ground. 
Vessels  should  not  go  inside  this  buoy,  as  fishermen  lay  their  nets  out 

to  that  limit. 

Supplies.— In  fine  summer  weather  a  vessel  might  anchor  off  Great 
Fox  River  and  obtain  water,  wood,  and  supplies  of  fresh  provisions; 
but  it  is  otherwise  of  no  use  to  shipping.  This  coast  is  now  generally 
inhabited,  and  the  settlements  are  increasing  in  numbers.  A  large 
stone  church  has  beer,  erected  at  Great  Fox  River. 

Serpent  Reef,  the  only  danger  on  this  coast,  extends  one  mile  east- 
ward from  Serpent  Point,  its  outer  extreme,  in  3  fathoms,  being  'i  mile 
off  shore,  and  N.  48°  W.  ($1.  22°  W.  mag.),  3^  miles  from  Great  Fox 

River. 

Buoy.— A  can  buoy,  painted  black,  is  moored  in  6  fathoms  water  ott 
this  reef,  and  about  one  mile  from  the  shore.  Vessels  should  pass 
northward  of  the  buoy. 

(H,  O.  Chart  No.  1110.) 

Fame  Point— Light— A  square  lighthouse,  50  feet  high,  and  painted 
white,  with  one  black  horizontal  band,  is  erected  on  Fame  Point,  about 
11  miles  westward  of  Great  Fox  River,  from  which  is  exhibited,  at  an 
elevation  of  200  feet,  a  fixed  white  light,  varied  by  red  flashes  every 
twenty  seconds,  which  should  be  visible  20  miles. 

Signal  Statioa— There  is  a  telegraph  and  signal  station  at  this 

lighthouse. 

areat  Pond  (Grand  fitang)  is  a  small  creek  which  affords  shelter 
only  to  boats,  and  will  be  known  by  the  houses  and  stages  of  the  fish- 
ermen. The  creek  is  16  miles  northwestward  from  Great  Fox  River, 
and  here,  as  well  as  in  every  othei-  cove  along  this  coast  to  the  west- 
ward, are  seen  the  houses  of  the  fishermen,  by  which  the  bays  are  so 
distinctly  marked  that  a  ship's  position  in  clear  weather  may  easily  be 
determined  by  bearings  of  them,  and  of  the  beacons  on  the  coast. 


Cape  Hosier, 
erraen,  whose 
lonis  water  in 

to  obtain  sup- 

le  Rosier,  is  a 
ie  and  i  wile 
I  diminish  the 
ord  shelter  to 
over  a  bottom 
s  a  line  sandy 
istance  to  sea- 
Q  of  sand  and 
ctively. 

as  water  in  the 
liorage  ground. 
■f  their  nets  out 

ttchor  off  Great 
esh  provisions; 
J  now  generally 
ibers.    A  large 

s  one  mile  east- 
is,  being  ^  mile 
•om  Great  Fox 

bhoms  water  off 
jls  should  pass 


igh,  and  painted 
Point,  about 
jxhibited,  at  an 
kd  flashes  every 

I  station  at  this 

affords  shelter 
ages  of  the  flsh- 
^eat  Fox  River, 
t)ast  to  the  west- 

the  bays  are  so 
ler  may  easily  be 
li  the  coast. 


MAGDALEN    RIVER MOUNT   LOUIS   RIVER. 


205 


Frigate  Point  is  nearly  midway  between  Fame  Point  and  Cape 
Magdalen.  It  may  be  recognized  by  »  c(*ns])icuou8  waterfall  west  of 
tiie  point. 

Magdalen  River,  the  next  place  worthy  of  notice,  is  25  miles  ft-om 
Great  Pond,  in  a  westerly  direction.  The  mouth  of  tiiis  river  is  on  the 
NW.  side  of  a  sandy  bay,  and  close  under  Capo  Magdalen,  which  is 
rocky,  with  cliffs  of  moderate  height,  and  juts  out  a  very  short  distance 
from  a  range  of  hills  which  forms  the  coast  line.  A  reef  of  rocks, 
which  is  dry  in  part  at  low  water,  extends  froju  Cape  Magdalen  about 
400  yards  SE.,  parallel  to  the  coast,  and  shelters  the  entrance  of  the 
river  from  northerly  winds.  The  river  is  30  yards  wide  at  the  entrance, 
with  a  depth  of  7  feet  at  low  water.  Within,  for  a  short  distance,  there 
are  10  feet  over  a  clean  bottom  of  fine  sand.  Farther  up,  the  river 
becomes  shallow  and  rapid.  At  spring  tides,  13  feet  water  can  be 
carried  into  this  river,  which  is  occasionally  visited  by  schooners  of 
30  to  80  tons;  they  warp  in  when  the  sea  is  smooth  and  the  weather 
fine.  The  bay  is  not  deep,  being  merely  a  gentle  curve  with  a  sandy 
beach  for  about  one  mile  8E.  of  the  river.  Vessels  may  anchor  here 
in  7  fathoms  over  a  bottom  of  sand,  fine  gravel,  and  broken  shell,  at  % 
mile  l^om  the  sandy  beach.  The  shelter  is  from  west,  round  by  south, 
to  east,  but  it  is  only  a  flne-weather  anchorage,  which  may  be  of  use 
to  vessels  wanting  wood  and  water, 

A  shoal  with  3  fathoms  water  on  it  lies  S.  73°  E.  (S.  47°  £.  mag.),  one 
mile  nearly  from  Cape  Magdalen  and  550  yards  from  the  nearest  land. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  off  Magdalen  River  at 
Ih.  15m.  Ordinary  springs  rise  from  6  to  8  feet,  and  neaps  from  3  to  4 
feet. 

On  two  occasions  a  regular  alternation  of  the  streams  of  flood  and 
ebb  was  observed.  The  flood  extended  about  1^  miles  from  the  shore, 
running  one  knot,  and  at  the  line  of  junction  with  the  almost  constant 
downward  current  there  was  a  strong  ripple. 

Cape  Magdalen — ^Light.— ^On  Cape  Magdalen  stands  a  lighthouse, 
an  hexagonal  wooden  building,  54  feet  high,  painted  white,  with  one 
vertical  black  stripe,  which  exhibits,  at  an  elevation  ot  147  feet,  an 
alternating  light  showing  red  and  white  alternately  at  intervals  of  two 
minutes.    The  red  light  is  visible  15  miles,  and  the  white  20  miles. 

Fog  SignaL— During  thick  weather  or  in  snowstorms  a  steam  whis- 
tle will  give  blasts  of  eight  seconds'  duration,  with  intervals  of  twenty- 
two  seconds  between  the  blasts. 

Signal  Station. — There  is  a  telegraph  and  signal  station  at  this 
lighthouse. 

Pleureuse  Point  is  12  miles  westward  of  Cape  Magdalen. 

Mount  Louis  River,  4  miles  westward  of  Pleureuse  Point,  is  a 
much  smaller  stream  than  Magdalen  River,  being  20  yards  wide  at  the 
entrance,  and  capable  only  of  admitting  a  small  boat  at  low  water. 
There  are  7  feet  in  the  entrance  at  high  water,  and  for  a  short  distance 
within. 


,  !^mmtxiSiJ^i»MmsiS>iiiiiii*iii'«'^»ie.', 


i:f- 


206 


HT.  LAWRENCE    HIVER — SOUTH    SHORE. 


Till'  siiiiill  bay,  with  c  siuxly  Itt'iich  at  its  IumkI,  into  which  this  river 
rtows,  \h  oil*'  mile  wide,  iiiul  iii'iuly  "^  mile  deep.  Vessels  iimy  anchor 
ill  it  duriufj  Hue  weather,  in  from  H  to  H\  fnthoins,  mud  bottom,  nearer 
the  west  than  the  east  side.  Tlie  holding  ground  ih  excellent;  but 
8in<!e  a  vessel  ought  not  to  be  more  than  GOO  yards  from  the  west  side 
of  the  bay,  there  is  not  much  room  to  work  out,  and  therefore  it  would 
be  dangerous  for  a  vessel  to  be  caught  there  by  a  wind  on  the  land. 
Small  veasels,  having  occasion  to  stop  for  a  few  hours  for  wood  or 
water,  nniy  safely  anchor  there  in  line  weather,  and  will  find  shelter  iu 
southerly  winds. 

.Mount  Louis  Kiver  may  be  thus  recognized.  In  a  vessel  off  this 
part  of  the  coast,  four  well-marked  openings  will  be  seen  in  the  high 
land  iu  a  space  of  10  miles.  The  easternmost  opening  is  Grande  Matte 
or  IMenreuse  Kiver,  the  next  westward  is  Mount  Louis  Kiver,  and  the 
two  others  Pierre  and  Claude  Rivers;  none  of  them  afford  good  anchor- 
age excepting  Mount  Louis. 

Martin  River— Light— At  the  entrance  of  Martin  Kiver  stands  » 
lighthouse,  a  square  building,  54  feet  high,  painted  white,  with  two 
black  horizontal  bands,  and  attached  to  the  keeper's  dwelling.  From 
the  lighthouse  is  exhibited,  at  an  elevation  of  125  feet,  a  fixed  white 
light,  which  should  be  visible  17  miles. 

Si^al  Station.— There  is  a  telegraph  and  signal  station  at  this  light- 
bouse. 

St  An"**  Mountains. — Westward  of  Cape  St.  Anne  rhe  mountains 
begin  to  recede  a  little  from  the  shore  and  to  diminish  in  height.  There 
is,  however,  another  range  of  mountains  in  the  rear  of  the  coast,  named 
St.  Anne  or  Shickshoc  Mountains,  which  can  be  seen  from  80  or  90 
miles,  under  favorable  circumstances;  and  their  highest  peak,  which  is 
about  14  miles  behind  Cape  Chatte,  rises  3,973  feet  above  the  sea. 

St  Anne  River,  4.J  miles  westward  of  the  high  cape  of  the  same 
name  and  1(»  miles  eastward  of  Cape  Chatte,  can  be  entered  by  small 
schooners  at  high  water.  The  entrance  is  difficult  to  a  stranger.  A 
large  rock  above  water  divides  it  into  two  very  narrow  channels, 
through  which  a  rai)id  current  almost  always  runs.  It  flows  into  the 
sea  through  the  sandy  beach  o{  a  bay  which  affords  very  indifferent 
anchorage,  the  depth  of  water  being  too  great,  excepting  at  a  less  dis- 
tance from  the  shore  than  would  be  considered  prudent  for  any  but 
small  vessels. 

Supplies  of  provisions  can  in  general  be  obtained,  and  also  at  Chatte 
Kiver. 

Chatte  River,  2J  miles  eastward  of  Cape  Chatte,  enters  between 
large  bowlders  a  small  sandy  bay,  affording  no  anchorage  for  large 
vessels,  and  admits  small  schooners  with  difficulty  at  high  water.  The 
east  point  of  this  bay,  2  miles  eastward  of  the  river,  is  a  low  spit  with 
a  reef  off"  it  ^  mile.  Small  coasting  schooners  occasionally  anchor 
under  it  in  westerly  winds. 


a«aCTWWW«wwi)itai«sMi»r«aiai>«>aa*^ 


CAPE   CHATTR — MATANR    RIVEIl. 


207 


[ch  this  liver 
^  nuiy  anclior 
)ttoin,  nearer 
xtelleut;  but. 
the  west  side 
(fore  it  would 

on  the  land. 

for  woiid  or 
lud  sHelter  iu 

ressel  off  this 
n  in  the  high 
Grande  Matte 
lliver,  and  the 
1  good  anchor- 
liver  stands  » 
hite,  with  two 
irelling.  From 
;,  a  fixed  white 

on  at  this  light- 

riie  ifloun tains 
height.  There 
e  coast,  named 
from  80  or  90 
peak,  which  is 
B  the  sea. 
)e  of  the  same 
tered  by  small 

stranger.    A 
rrow  channels, 

Hows  into  the 
irery  indiflerent 
ig  at  a  less  dis- 
>nt  for  any  but 

1  also  at  Ghatte 

snters  between 
jrage  for  large 
gh  water.  The 
a  low  spit  with 
ioiially  anchor 


Cape  Chatt>^,  when  seen  from  the  eastward  or  westward,  so  that  it 
appears  tvs  the  extreme  point,  can  easily  bedistiii^iiisliedflteinga  round 
hill  separated  from,  hut  of  less  height  than,  tiie  land  heliinil  it. 

Light. — On  the  NK.  extremity  of  ('a|teChatte  is  a  sijiiare  li^ihtliouse, 
',V2  feet  high,  and  painted  white,  with  two  l»la«;k  vertieal  stripes,  which 
exhibits  at  120  feet  above  high  water  a  revolving  white  light  every 
h/ilf  minute.    Tlie  light  should  be  visible  IH  miles. 

Pog  Signal. — A  cotton  powder  cartridge  will  be  explo<led  every 
twenty  minutes  from  a  position  .'{5  yards  eastward  of  Cape  Ghatte 
lighthouse  during  fogs  and  snowstorms. 

Signal  Station. — There  is  a  telegraph  and  signal  station  at  this  light- 
house. 

(H.  O.  Chart  No.  1111.) 

Coast — The  coast  from  Gape  Ghatte  to  Matane  is  straight,  bold,  and 
of  the  same  rocks  as  that  which  has  been  Just  described.  Although 
not  a  high  coast,  it  is  still  of  considerable  elevation  above  the  sea,  and 
St.  Anne  Mountains  continue  iu  the  rear  of  it,  at  a  distance  of  about  15 
miles,  to  their  southwestern  termination,  which  is  l.j  miles  south  of  Gape 
Balance,  the  last  being  25  miles  southwestward  of  Gape  Ghatte.  Sev- 
eral detached  hills  will  be  seen  farther  westward,  which  are  also  at  a 
considerable  distance  from  the  coast.  Two  of  these  have  been  named 
the  Papu  of  Matane,  though  they  can  with  difficulty  be  made  out  when 
bearing  S.  20°  W.  (S.  43°  W.  mag.).  On  any  other  bearing  it  is  still 
less  easy  to  distinguish  them,  but  they  are  of  no  use  except  to  enable 
a  vessel,  obtaining  a  sight  of  land,  to  judge  how  far  she  is  up  the 
estuary. 

Capuchin  Cove  and  another  cove  on  the  west  side  of  Gape  Michanx 
attbrd  shelter  to  boats.  There  are  .settlements  at  Little  Matane,  a  small 
stream  3  miles  eastward  of  the  Matane  Eiver. 

Matane  River. — The  entrance  to  this  stream  is  33  miles  southwest- 
ward  from  Oape  Ghatte.  The  river  is  reported  to  have  its  source  iu  a 
lake  of  considerable  dimensions,  distant  about  (iO  miles,  following  the 
stream,  inland.  The  depth  over  the  bar  is  usually  4  feet  at  low-water 
and  15  feet  at  high- water  springs.  The  rise  of  the  tides  is,  however,  very 
irreguliu:,  and  although  there  is  often  12  feet  at  high-water  neaps,  yet 
there  has  b6en  as  little  as  10  feet.  The  depth  of  water  seems  to  depend 
so  much  upon  the  winds  which  prevail  in  the  estuary  tliat  it  is  iiux)OS- 
sible  to  calculate  it  at  any  time  exactly.  Kasterly  winds  were  ob.served 
to  cause  high  tides,  and  westerly  winds  the  contrary.  The  channel  is 
very  narrow,  and  there  are  several  large  bowlders  iu  it,  lying  on  the 
sand,  which  diminish  the  depth  2  feet,  and  are  extremely  dangerous 
when  there  is  any  swell.  The  bar  is  continually  shifting  from  the 
efiects  of  gales  of  wind,  so  that  no  directions  can  be  given  for  sailing  in. 

Pilots. — There  are  pilots  residing  here,  and  no  vessel  should  attempt 
the  entrance  without  one. 

Buoys. — A  can  buoy,  painted  black,  is  moored  in  7  fathoms  water 


.,.<St#JM>a!JMS$^<i£!^^S^'>''^^^i^''^~'i^''''^ 


■MRMM 


mmm^imm 


mm 


2()H 


8T    LAWRENCE    RIVEU — SOUTH    HHOUE. 


oJV  tlio  biuik  lit  Mivt-.io  Uivor,  at  about  '^  mile  from  the  Hhore.  There 
are  also  two  huuiH  <aii  buoyw  to  mark  the  entrauce  to  the  river  which 
are  Hhiftetl  with  the  «haiiKea  iii  the  sand  bankH. 

Bar.— The  bar,  when  it  was  surveyed,  extended  in  a  circular  form 
from  the  east  entrance  point,  and  was  met  so  nearly  by  another  point 
of  sand,  extending  from  the  sumll  isolated  cliff  on  the  west  entrance 
point,  as  to  leave  onlv  a  very  narntw  channel.  The  bar  dried  at  low 
water,  and  no  part  of  it  extended  more  than  «00  yards  outside  the 
entrance  of  the  river.  Inside  the  bar  the  entrauce,  between  two  sandy 
points,  is  not  more  than  (JO  yards  wide,  and  a  rapid  current  runs  out 
during  the  ebb  tide.  There  is  not  room  enough  for  a  vessel  to  lie  safely 
atioat  inside,  but,  nevertheless,  considered  as  a  tidal  harbor,  it  is  a  useful 
place  to  coasting  schooners,  which  ground  at  half  tide  on  a  good  bot- 
tom of  mud  and  stone.  To  a  vessel  which  has  lost  her  anchors,  or 
which  has  received  injury,  this  river  will  afford  a  place  of  refuge  in 
which  she  can  be  safely  repaired  and  refitted.  The  sandy  beach 
extends  about  4  mile  eastward  of  the  entrance,  and  incloses  a  large 
space  dry  at  low  water,  with  the  exception  of  tlie  narrow  and  rapid 
channel  of  the  river,  which  is  full  of  stones.  The  tide  ascends  about  one 
mile  to  a  rapid  over  a  ledge  of  rocks,  above  which  the  stream  is  swift, 
shallow,  and  navigable  for  canoes,  to  the  lake  above  mentioned.  Land- 
ing at  this  river  in  bad  weather  in  a  boat  is  very  dangerous  at  low 
water,  in  conseciuence  of  the  heavy  surf  on  the  sand  banks  at  the 
entrance. 

Lights.— A  lighthouse,  39  feet  high,  at  the  entrance  of  Matane  Kiver 
exhibits,  at  an  elevation  of  GG  feet,  a  fixed  white  light,  which  should  be 
visible  14  miles.  The  lighthouse  is  a  square  building,  painted  white, 
with  a  black  cross,  and  with  keeper's  dwelling  attached. 

A  fixed  white  light  is  also  shown  from  a  mast  20  feet  high  erected  on 
a  wharf  at  the  west  entrance  point  of  Matane  Eiver  at  an  elevation  of 
30  feet  J  it  should  be  visible  7  miles. 

Signal  Station.— There  is  a  telegraph  and  signal  station  at  this 
lighthouse. 

Supplies  of  provisions  can  usually  be  obtained  at  Matane  Kiver, 
which  will  be  easily  made  out  from  a  vessel,  since  the  entrance  shows 
plainly.  The  lighthouse  on  the  west  side  of  the  entrance  and  the  build- 
ings and  large  stone  church  will  also  serve  to  point  it  out. 

Matane  is  the  name  of  the  seigniory  which  contained  2,025  inhabit- 
ants in  1891.   The  soil  is  good,  and  gives  good  crops  of  wheat  and  other 

grain. 

Anchorage.— Outside  the  bar  there  is  anchorage  in  5  fathoms  ^  mile 
off  shore,  and  in  10  fathoms  a  little  farther  out,  the  bottom  being  of  sand 
and  clay. 

Tides.— It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Matane  Eiver  at  2h. 
15m.;  ordinary  springs  rise  11  feet,  and  neaps  7  feet. 

Little  Metis  Bay,  22  miles  southwestward  from  Matane,  is  small. 


LITTI.K    AND   ORAND    METIS   BAYS. 


209 


ore.    There 
liver  which 

ircular  form 
iiother  point 
dst  entraufM 
hied  at  h)W 

outsido  the 
ill  two  Handy 
ent  runs  out 
1  to  lie  safely 
,  it  is  a  useful 
1  a  good  bot- 
i-  anchors,  or 

of  refuge  in 

sandy  beach 
iloses  a  large 
)w  and  rapid 
nds  about  one 
;reani  is  swift, 
ioned.  Land- 
gerous  at  low 

banks  at  the 

Matane  liiver 

iiich  should  be 

ainted  white, 

igh  erected  on 
tu  elevation  of 

itatiou  at  this 

Hatane  Ittver, 
Intrance  shows 

and  the  build- 
It. 

2,025  inhabit- 
Iheat  and  other 

I  fathoms  i  mile 
I  being  of  sand 

Kiver  at  2h. 

itane,  is  small. 


and  divided  into  two  rocky  <;oveH,  which  are  open  to  tlie  eastward,  and 
dry  at  low  water.  Tln>  coast  from  Matane  to  Metis  is  low,  rocky, 
wooded,  unbroken,  and  my  be  approached  with  euro  by  the  lead,  the 
bank  of  soundings  becoming  gradually  wider  to  the  westward. 

Little  Metis  Uiviu',  a  small  stream,  is  at  the  head  of  the  southern 
cove.  There  are  several  buildings  and  a  llshing  establishment  on 
Metis  Point,  the  outer  extreme  of  the  bay.  A  reef,  which  is  bohl  on 
the  north  side,  and  has  some  of  its  rocks  always  above  water,  extends 
from  this  point  nearly  ^  mile  eastward,  and  "uables  small  vessels  to 
remain  at  anchor,  in  :<  fathoms,  over  mud  bitttou),  with  the  wind  as  far 
northward  as  NW.  In  this  berth  vesse'.s  lie  midway  between  the 
eastern  end  of  the  reef  and  a  large  Itound  liock  near  the  shore  on  the 
SE.  side  of  the  bay.  Larger  vessels  may  anchor  farther  out  in  '>  or  ({ 
fathoms  water,  but  not  in  the  stream  of  the  reef,  where  the  ground  is 
foul  and  rocky. 

The  east  end  of  the  reef  may  be  passed  by  the  lead  in  4  fathoms,  or 
with  Kound  Kock  bearing  H.  <»7°  K.  (S.  4'>°  E.  mag.),  but  vessels  of 
large  draft  had  better  not  bring  it  to  bear  eastward  of  S.  46°  E.  (S.  23° 
K.  mag.).  This  rock,  which  lies  about  lA  miles  east  (H.  68°  E.  mag.) 
from  the  reef  ott'  the  outer  point  of  the  bay,  will  serve  to  point  out 
Little  Metis  to  a  stranger.  It  can  not  be  mistaken  for  Grand  Metis 
with  the  charts,  since  there  is  no  resemblance  in  the  shapes  of  the 
bays.  Neither  place  can  be  easily  made  out  from  a  greater  distance 
than  6  or  (»  miles,  because  the  points  are  very  low. 

Metis  Point — Light — On  Metis  Point  stands  a  square  lighthouse, 
40  feet  high,  and  painted  white,  with  red  roof,  which  exhibits,  at  iwi 
elevation  of  50  feet,  an  alternating  light  showing  red  and  white  alter- 
nately  every  minute,  which  should  be  visible  13  miles.  The  keeper's 
dwelling  is  attached  to  the  lighthouse. 

Signal  Station. — There  is  a  telegraph '  and  signal  station  at  this 
lightboase. 

Grand  Metis  Bay  is  separated  from  Little  Metis  Bay  by  Metis 
Point.  Grand  Metis  Biver,  a  small  stream  5  miles  southwestward  of 
Little  Metis,  is  near  the  west  end  of  the  bay,  and  is  nearly  dry  outside 
of  the  very  narrow  entrance  at  low  water.  The  bay  is  rather  more 
than  3  miles  wide,  and  |  mile  deep;  but  it  is  all  shoal.  Small  vessels 
may  anchor  in  3^  or  4  fathoms,  under  its  east  point,  close  to  iae  edge 
of  the  shoal  water,  and  in  tolerable  shelter  from  winds  along  the  ^oast, 
but  there  is  no  shelter  for  shipping.  Nevertheless,  vessels  lie  here  all 
the  summer  months  for  the  purpose  of  taking  in  timber.  They  are 
usually  moored  in  6  fathoms,  at  low  water,  over  mud  bottom,  and  with 
the  river  bearing  about  south  (S.  22°  W.  mag.)  1^  miles.  In  this  posi- 
tion they  are  ^  mile  from  the  3-fathom  edge  of  the  shoal  water  which 
extends  from  the  shore,  and  as  they  are  outside  of  the  line  joining  the 
points  of  the  bay,  they  are  exposed  to  the  prevailing  winds  along  the 
coast,  and  must  ride  very  heavily  at  times.  There  is,  however,  seldom 
1161 14 


1./- 


'  wj'VitNtsyifWfftfT'ftf^t^*"'"^**^*^''*— ^' ' 


vpn 


mmm 


MPPi 


210 


ST.  LAWRENCE   RIVER — SOUTH   SHORE. 


i'! 


much  sea  with  these  wiuds  so  close  in  shore,  and  the  northerly  winds 
seldom  blow  strong  until  September.  This  is  a  dangerous  anchornge 
after  the  commencement  of  that  month,  but  at  other  times,  and  iu  fine 
weather,  vessels  may  safely  anchor  anywhere  off  the  bay  in  from  6  to 
12  fathoms,  the  bottom  being  everywhere  good,  and  plenty  of  room  to 
get  under  way. 

Cock  Cove  affords  good  anchorage  for  schooners,  in  3  fathoms  at 
low  water,  well  sheltered  from  the  winds  along  the  coast.  The  summit 
of  Mount  Oamille  bears  from  the  west  entrance  point  of  Cock  Cove 
S.  48°  E.  (S.  26°  E.  mag.)  8  miles,  and  will  serve  to  point  out  its  posi- 
tion to  a  stranger. 

Buoy. — A  can  buoy,  painted  black,  is  moored  in  6  fathoms  water  at 
the  etlge  of  the  shoal  off  Cock  Point. 

Anchorage. — Vessels  of  large  draft  may  anchor,  in  fine  weather,  all 
along  the  coast  from  Grand  Metis  Bay  to  Green  Island. 

Father  Point,  13  miles  from  the  west  entrance  point  of  Grand  Metis 
Bay,  is  low,  and  covered  with  houses.  There  is  a  considerable  village 
named  St.  Anne  de  la  Points  au  P^re,  with  a  fine  church,  about  ^  mile 
southeastward  of  Father  Point. 

Light. — A  square  light  tower,  52  feet  high,  and  painted  white,  with 
one  black  horizontal  band,  is  erected  on  the  extremity  of  Father  Point. 
It  exhibits,  at  an  elevation  of  48  feet,  a  revolving  white  light  every 
twenty  seconds,  which  is  visible  12  miles. 

Fog  Signal. — In  thick  weather,  or  during  snowstorms,  a  cotton  pow- 
der cartridge  will  be  fired  every  twenty  minutes,  and  a  gun  will  be  fired 
in  answer  to  signals  for  a  pilot. 

Signal  Station. — There  is  a  telegraph  and  signal  station  at  this 
lighthouse. 

Ice. — The  river  has  never  been  known  to  freeze  over  at  Father  Point. 
Drifting  field  ice  usually  arrives  about  December  9,  and  disappears 
about  April  2;  there  is  rarely  any  heavy  ice  until  the  end  of  Decem- 
ber, and  always  a  channel  of  open  water,  either  on  the  north  or  the 
south  side  of  the  river,  according  to  the  prevailing  wind,  a  light  air  of 
6  or  7  miles  velocity  being  strong  enough  to  drive  the  ice  to  mid-chan- 
nel. The  river  is  often  clear  of  ice  for  a  month  at  a  time  in  winter,  and 
is  partly  clear  for  about  half  that  season.  There  is  less  ice  than  usual 
at  Father  Point  whenever  the  "  ice  bridge  "  forms  at  Quebec.  The  first 
vessel  arrives  at  Father  Point  from  sea  al/out  April  24,  and  the  last  one 
leaves  about  November  28. 

Rimouski  Road. — The  eastern  point  of  Barnaby  Island  is  nearly  3^ 
miles  SW.  from  Father  Point,  and  between  them  is  the  anchorage  or 
road  of  Rimouski,  where  vessels  ride  throughout  the  summer  to  take  iu 
cargoes  of  lumber.  They  lie  moored  iu  4  or  5  fathoms  at  low  water,  with 
excellent  holding  ground,  and  sheltered  from  W.  by  S.,  round  by  south, 
to  ENE.  The  best-sheltered  berth  is  with  the  pier  bearing  S.  22°  E. 
(south  mag.),  in  4  fathoms  at  low-water  spring  tidss,  over  mud  bottom. 


RIMOUSKI. 


lortberly  winds 
rous  anchorage 
nea,  and  in  fine 
lay  in  from  6  to 
enty  of  room  to 

in  3  fatboms  at 
it.  The  summit 
it  of  Cock  Cove 
lint  out  its  posi- 

t'athoms  water  at 

■ 

fine  weather,  all 

d. 

it  of  Grand  Metis 
isiderable  village 
ircb,  about  i  mile 

binted  white,  with 
y  of  Father  Point, 
white  light  every 

ms,  a  cotton  pow- 
a  gun  will  be  fired 

al  station  at  this 

ir  at  Father  Point. 
J,  and  disappears 
;he  end  of  Decem- 
the  north  or  the 
;ind,  a  light  air  of 
le  ice  to  mid-chau- 
jme  in  winter,  and 
less  ice  than  usual 
iQuebec.    The  first 
14,  and  the  last  one 

I  Island  is  nearly  34 
is  the  anchorage  or 
I  summer  to  take  in 
,  at  low  water,  with 
5.,  round  by  south, 
.  bearing  S.  22o  E. 
,  over  mud  bottom. 


Small  vessels  can  anchor  farther  westward  in  3  fathoms  at  low  water, 
with  the  east  end  of  the  rocks,  oft'  the  eastern  point  of  Barnaby  Island, 
bearing  N.  80°  W.  (N.  58°  W.  mag.)  I  mile.  Tlie  reef  does  not  extend 
above  J  mile  off  the  eastern  point  of  Barnaby  Island,  and  may  be 
passed  by  the  lead  in  4  fathoms.  A  landing  pier  has  been  built  at 
Rimouski,  2,150  feet  long,  and  having  at  its  end  a  depth  of  8^  feet  at 
low-water  springs. 

Rimouski — The  European  mails  are  landed  and  shipped  at  Kimou- 
nki,  special  trains  running  with  them  to  and  from  Quebec  and  Halifax 
by  the  Intercolonial  Railway.  Both  mails  and  passengers  are  trans- 
Siiipped  by  a  steam  tender,  the  mail  steamer  stopping  about  2  miles 
from  the  pier.    The  anchorage  off  Rimouski  is  not  good. 

CoaL — Only  sufficient  coal  for  the  supply  of  the  tender  to  the  mail 
steamer  is  kept  at  Rimouski,  but  at  St.  Flavie,  distant  18  miles  north- 
eastward on  the  Intercolonial  Railway,  a  supply  of  about  1,600  tons  is 
kept  in  stock  for  the  use  of  the  railway. 

Railway  and  Telograph. — From  Rimouski  to  Quebec  the  various 
villages  are  connected  with  Quebec  and  Halifax  by  the  Intercolonial 
Railway,  which  runs  along  the  right  bank  of  the  St.  Lawrence  at  the 
average  distance  of  one  mile  inland  from  the  villages.  There  is  also 
telegraphic  communication  with  all  existing  lines  either  from  the  rail- 
way stations  or  from  t>ft>i;es  in  the  villages.  From  Rimouski  eastward 
the  Intercolonial  Railway  recedes  from  the  coast,  running  through  the 
valley  of  Metapedia  River  to  Campbellton,  at  the  head  of  Ghaleur  Bay. 

Barnaby  Island  is  3^  miles  long  and  very  narrow.  It  is  low,  par- 
tially wooded,  and  inhabited,  and  is  composed  of  slate  and  graywacke 
rocks,  like  all  the  coast  and  islands  on  this  side  of  the  estuary.  In  the 
interior  of  the  island  there  is  a  long  pond  of  fresh,  but  not  good,  water, 
which  last  mnst  be  obtained  from  Rimouski  River. 

The  channel  between  the  island  and  Rimouski  is  dry  at  low  water. 
There  is  a  depth  of  7  to  12  feet  through  it  at  high  watery  according  as 
it  is  neap  or  spring  tide,  but  at  no  time  should  a  vessel  drawing  more 
than  8  feet  attempt  this  passage,  since  there  are  rocks  and  large  stones 
here  and  there,  and  also  fish  stakes. 

The  church  of  Rimouski,  the  college  and  convent,  eastward  of  the 
river,  and  many  houses,  will  be  seen  directly  opposite  the  island. 

Off  the  outside  of  Barnaby  Island  there  is  a  shoal  with  3  fathoms 
water  over  it,  extending  out  fully  §  mile,  and  the  reef  off"  its  western 
end  runs  out  in  the  direction  of  the  island  more  than  |  mile.  Between 
the  western  end  of  the  island  and  the  mainland  there  is  a  large  high 
and  bare  rock,  which  is  distant  from  the  island  about  §  mile. 

Barnaby  Road. — Midway  between  the  SW.  points  of  Barnaby 
Island  and  Bare  Rock  there  are  2  fathoms  at  low  water,  over  muddy 
bottom,  in  Barnaby  Road,  which  affords  good  anchorage  to  small  vessels 
in  all  but  westerly  winds.  Rimouski  church  in  line  with  the  eastern 
end  of  the  roclt  will  lead  over  the  tail  of  the  reef  off  the  west  end  of 
Barnaby  Island,  and  into  this  anchorage. 


212 


ST.  LAWRENCE   BIVEB — SOUTH   SHORE. 


Old  Bic  Harbor,  7J  miles  soiithwestward  of  Baniaby  Island,  dries 
at  low  water,  and  has"  many  rocks  in  it.  Two  round  and  high  rocky 
islets,  named  Bicoques,  will  be  seen  extending  westwai-d  of  its  east 
point,  and  diminishing  the  breadth  of  the  entrance  to  §  mile. 

Midway  between  these  rocky  islets  and  the  west  point  of  the  harbor, 
small  vessels  may  anchor  in  Old  Bic  Uoad  in  3  fathoms  at  low  water, 
with  muddy  bottom,  and  with  the  point  bearing  S.  70°  VV.  (N.  89° 
W.  mag.),  distant  i  mile.  To  run  into  this  anchorage  from  the  NW., 
keep  the  western  of  the  two  rocky  islets  its  own  breadth  open  eastward 
of  the  west  point  of  the  harbor,  and  this  will  clear  the  eastern  rock  of 
Arignole  Reef,  which  is  the  only  danger  in  the  way. 

Arignole  Reef,  one  mile  westward  from  Old  Bic  Harbor,  is  composed 
of  two  rocks  lying  across  the  mouth  of  the  shallow  Arignole  Bay.  The 
western  rock  is  i  mile  long  and  very  narrow;  its  west  end  is  always 
above  water,  and  is  only  i  mile  from  the  rocks  on  the  eastern  side  of 
the  cape.  The  eastern  rock  is  small,  covered  at  high  tides,  and  i  mile 
from  the  other  rock.  There  are  5  or  6  fathoms  water  between  these 
rocks,  which  are  bold  to  the  northward,  and  vessels  might  pass  between 
them  and  the  mainland  by  keeping  close  to  them,  were  it  ever  necessary 
to  try  so  dan}i:erous  a  passage. 

Cape  Arignole  is  10  miles  southwestward  from  Barnaby  Island,  and 
the  summit  of  the  high  land  of  Bic,  1,230  feet  above  the  sea  at  high 
water,  lies  S.  29°  W.  (8. 4«o  W.  mag.)  2^  miles  from  the  JTW.  extremity 

of  the  cape. 

Ba-Ha  Bay,  on  the  8W.  side  of  Cape  Arignole,  aftords  excellent 
anchorage,  in  easterly  winds  off  its  entrance,  in  4  fathoms  at  low  wat«r, 
and  farther  in  for  small  vessels  in  3  fathoms;  but  it  is  sMom  used, 
because  the  equally  safe  and  more  roomy  anchorage  undef  Bic  Island 
is  justly  preferred. 

Bic  Island  lies  directly  off  Cape  Arignole,  at  the  distance  of  nearly 
24  miles,  and  is  about  3  miles  long,  without  including  the  reefs,  in  a 
direction  parallel  to  the  coast  and  a  mile  broad.  Its  shores  are  of  slate 
rociks;  it  is  thickly  wooded  and  uninhabited.    It  is  about  150  feet  high. 

Beacons.— On  the  SW.  end  of  Bic  Island  are  three  wooden  beacons 
painted  white.  The  beacon  in  the  form  of  a  sugar  loaf  and  the  western 
beacon  in  the  form  of  a  reversed  cross,  in  line,  lead  westward  of  North- 
west Reef,  and  the  cross  beacon  in  line  with  the  diamond-shaped  beacon 
lead  on  to  Alcide  Rock. 

Water.— Supplies  of  water  can  only  be  obtained  fi-om  the  bay 
between  the  east  and  SE.  points  of  Bic  Island,  and  not  always  there  in 
dry  seasons;  and  from  a  stream  on  the  west  side  of  a  small  bay  of  the 
mainland,  4  miles  westward  of  Cape  Arignole. 

Bicqnette  Island,  lying  ^  mile  northward  of  Bic,  is  i  mile  lonp,  i 
mile  broad,  and  about  100  feet  high  above  the  sea. 

Light— The  lighthouse,  near  the  center  of  Bicquette  Island,  is  a  cir- 
cular, white,  stone  tower,  74  feet  high,  from  which,  at  an*  elevation  of  109 


Island,  dries 
I  high  rocky 
d  of  its  east 
lile. 

f  the  harbor, 
at  low  water, 
o  W.  (N.  89° 
om  theNW., 
pen  eastward 
istern  rock  of 

",  is  composed 
)leBay.  The 
snd  is  always 
astern  side  of 
BS,  and  k  mile 
)etweeu  these 
pass  between 
iver  necessary 

l)y  Island,  and 
le  sea  at  high 
rW.  extremity 

jrds  excellent 

;  at  low  water, 

sildom  used, 

derBic  Island 

ance  of  nearly 
the  reefs,  in  a 
res  are  of  slate 
b  150  feet  high, 
ooden  beacons 
ad  the  western 
ward  of  North- 
shaped  beacon 

fi^om  the  bay 
ilways  there  In 
nail  bay  of  the 

^  mile  lonf?,  ^ 

Island,  is  a  cir- 
alevation  of  109 


BICQUETTE   CHANNEL. 


213 


feet,  is  exhibited  a  white  light  which  revolves  every  forty-flve  seconds 
and  IS  visible  17  miles.  ' 

Fog  SignaL— A  steam  horn,  17  yards  northward  of  the  lighthouse 
gives  blasts  of  ten  seconds'  duration,  with  intervals  of  fifty  seconds 
between  the  blasts,  during  fogs  and  snowstorms.    If  the  horn  be  out  ot 
order  »  similar  signal  will  be  given  from  a  building  33  yards  eastwar.l 
ot  the  lighthouse. 

Northwest  Reef— Several  large  rocks  above  water  extend  ^  mile 
east  and  SE.  of  Bicquette  Island,  and  diminish  the  breadth  of  the 
channel  between  it  and  Bic  Island  to  little  more  than  ^  mile.  Oft'  the 
SW.  end  of  Bicquette  Island,  in  a  SW.  direction,  there  are  two  large 
rocks  always  above  water,  and  a  third  which  covers  at  high  water- 
these  he  nearly  in  a  line,  and  extend  to  the  distance  of  one  mile  froin 
the  island. 

Northwest  Reef  of  Bicquette  Island  is  the  greatest  danger,  lying  U 
miles  from  the  west  end  of  the  island.  In  approaching  the  reef  from 
the  westward,  the  north  extremity  of  Cape  Arignole  should  not  be  shut 
in  behind  the  SW.  point  of  Bic  Island.  The  beacons  on  Bic  Island  in 
line  also  lead  clear. 

This  reef  is  composed  of  two  rocks  about  300  yards  long,  and  which 
just  cover  at  high  waterj  both  it  and  Bicquette  Island  are  bold  to  the 
northward.  There  is  deep  water  all  along  the  line  from  the  north  side  of 
Bicquette  Island  to  this  reef,  and  also  between  the  latter  and  the  rocks 
to  the  SE.  of  It,  but  these  are  dangerous  passages,  which  ought  not  to 
be  generally  tried,  though  it  is  useful  to  know  of  their  existence  in  case 
ot  emergency. 

Bicquette  ChanneL— There  are  no  leading  marks  for  running 
through,  but  It  may  easily  be  done  with  the  assistance  of  the  charts  in 
case  of  necessity.  The  southwestern  reef  off  Bicquette  Island  is  most 
m  the  way,  and  there  are  also  two  small  round  rocks  on  the  Bic  Island 
side,  400  yards  off  shore,  and  bearing  nearly  S.  21o  B.  (south  mag.)  from 
the  west  end  of  Bicquette  Island. 

To  avoid  the  first  of  these  dangers,  do  not  bring  the  south  extremity 

V  rio  T^  f  ****  ®^-  ^'^*  ""^^  Bicquette  Island  to  bear  eastward  of 
N.  60°  E.  (N.  710  E.  mag.);  and  if  the  north  side  of  Bic  Island,  near 
Its  east  end,  is  not  brought  to  bear  northward  of  N.  65°  E  (N  86°  E 
mag.),  the  second  will  be  cleared,  which,  however,  always  shows,  except- 
ing in  very  high  tides.  These  directions  are,  however,  insufficient  with- 
out the  chart,  which  must  be  carefully  consulted,  for  this  is  an  intricate 
and  dangerous  place.  The  best  time  to  run  through  is  at  low  water, 
when  all  the  dangers  show,  and  a  vessel,  keeping  in  mid-channel 
between  them,  will  have  from  9 J  to  6  fathoms,  with  irregular  soundings 
and  foul  ground  occasionally. 

Southeast  Reef  extends  from  the  SE.  point  of  Bic  Island  nearly 
1|  miles,  in  an  easterly  direction.  The  outer  part  of  this  reef  is  formed 
of  three  rocks  lying  in  a  straight  line,  and  always  above  water.    The 


214 


ST.  LAWRENCE   RIVER — SOUTH   SHORE. 


1 1  ■ 


r 


two  easternmost  are  the  largest,  and  are  nearly  joined  together,  whilst 
the  westernmost  of  the  three  is  deta<lied,  so  as  to  leave  a  channel 
through  the  reef  300  yards  wide,  with  a  depth  of  5  fathoms  water. 

Vessels  of  large  draft  should  not  attempt  to  pass  between  the'se 
rocks,  or  between  them  and  Bic  Island,  for  the  tidal  streams  are  rendered 
irregular  by  the  uneven  bottom,  and  there  is  much  foul  ground  about. 
Small  schooners  can  pass  on  either  side  of  the  westernmost  rock,  keep- 
ing close  to  it,  if  they  pass  to  the  westward.  The  shoal  water  does  not 
extend  beyond  200  yards  from  the  east  end  of  Southeast  Reef;  the 
rocks  above  water  are  bold,  both  on  their  north  and  south  sides.  The 
inner  part  of  the  reef,  extending  under  water  from  the  SE.  imnt  of 
Bic  Island,  reaches  farther  southward  than  the  direction  of  the  rocks, 
and  must  be  avoided  by  not  bringing  the  south  side  of  Bic  Island  to 
bear  southward  of  S.  60°  W.  (S.  81°  W.  mag.). 

Northeast  Reef  is  a  small  patch  of  black  rocks,  which  shows  at 
low  water,  lying  N.  34°  E.  (N.  050  E.  mag.)  800  yards  firom  the  NE. 
point  of  Bic  Island.  To  pass  eastward  of  this  reef,  keep  both  the  rocky 
islets  on  the  east  side  of  Old  Bic  Harbor  open  eastward  of  Southeast 
Reef,  bearing  nothing  eastward  of  S.  49°  E.  (S.  28°  E.  mag.). 

TVest  Grounds  of  Bic  are  an  extensive  flat  of  slate,  which  partly 
dries  at  low  water.  The  outer  point  of  these  ground^,  in  3  fathoms, 
lies  nearly  f  mile  S.  64°  W.  (S.  85°  W.  mag.)  from  the  8W.  point  of  the 
island,  and  they  may  be  approached  by  the  lead,  as  nearly  as  the  depth 
of  6  fathoms,  at  low  water. 

Alcide  Rock,  lying  S.  25°  W.  (8. 46°  W.  mag.)  nearly  3$  miles  tirom 
the  SW.  point  of  Bic  Island,  has  no  connection  with  that  island;  but  as 
it  is  extremely  dangerous,  and  lies  much  in  the  way  of  vessels  passing 
through  Bic  Channel,  it  is  noted  here.  It  is  a  small  rock,  about  6  feet 
long  and  2  feet  wide,  with  4  feet  on  it  at  low  water.  It  rises  from  a 
small  rocky  shoal  200  yards  long,  parallel  to  the  coast,  and  about  half 
as  wide,  which  is  so  Iwld  all  around  that  there  is  no  warning  whatever 
by  the  lead.  From  the  NW.  extremity  of  Cape  Arignole  the  rock  bears 
S.  64°  W.  (S.  85°  W.  mag.)  5  miles;  and  it  is  rather  more  than  I5  miles 
from  the  shore  to  the  southward.  Two  of  the  white  beacons  on  Bic 
Island— one  in  the  form  of  a  reversed  cross  and  the  other  in  a  diamond 
form— in  line,  lead  directly  on  Alcide  Rock;  and  the  two  white  beacons 
on  the  south  shore  of  the  river,  about  6  miles  westward  of  Cape  Arig- 
nole— one  of  which  is  of  a  diamond  shape  and  the  other  of  a  sugar 
loaf— in  line,  also  lead  on  the  rock.  These  beacons,  therefore,  should 
be  kept  open  of  each  other.  Vessels  will  be  in  no  danger  from  it  if 
Mount  Camille  be  not  entirely  shut  in  behind  Cape  Arignole. 

Buoy.— A  can  buoy  checkered  black  and  white  is  moored  in  9  fathoms 

close  northward  of  Alcide  Rock  with  the  beacons  on  the  south  shore  in 

line  and  the  white  diamond-shaped  beacon  at  the  west  extreme  of  Bic 

Island  just  open  north  of  the  beacon  in  the  form  of  a  reversed  cross. 

Anchorage.— There  is  excellent  anchorage  under  either  end  of  Bio 


TIDES. 


215 


n 


sther,  \vhil8t 
e  a  channel 
}  water, 
tween  theiSe 
iire  rendered 
ound  about, 
t  rock,  keep- 
kter  does  not 
it  Keef;  the 
sides.  The 
3E.  iM>int  of 
)f  the  rocks, 
iic  Island  to 

ch  shows  at 
•om  the  NE. 
)th  the  rocky 
of  Southeast 

nrhich  partly 
a  3  fathoms, 
,  point  of  the 
as  the  depth 

)f  miles  from 
}land;  but  as 
ssels  passing 
,  about  6  feet 
)  rises  firom  a 
id  about  half 
ing  whatever 
he  rock  bears 
than  If  miles 
jacons  on  Bic 
in  a  diamond 
rhite  beacons 
»f  Cape  Arig- 
er  of  a  sugar 
refore,  should 
;er  from  it  if 
lole. 

d  in  9  fathoms 
jouth  shore  in 
Ktreme  of  Bic 
ersed  cross, 
ler  end  of  Bio 


Island,  and  also  between  it  and  the  mainland,  according  to  the  wind; 
and  vessels  which  may  be  met  by  an  easterly  wind  Iiad  better  anchor 
than  attempt  to  beat  down  the  estuary  in  the  long  and  foggy  nights  of 
the  fall  of  the  year. 

Tides.— It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Bic  Island  at  L>h.  loin.; 
ordinary  springs  rise  14  feet,  and  neaps  8.^  feet.  The  tide  dows  5h. 
50ni.,  and  ebbs  6h.  .'Um. 

Westward  of  Bic  Island  the  first  of  the  Hood  comes  from  the  NE., 
but  there  is  but  little  stream  of  flood  in  neap  tides  between  Bic  Island 
and  the  south  shore  of  thp  river,  excepting  close  to  the  latter.  In 
spring  tides  it  runs  through  the  channel  at  the  average  rate  of  1^  knots, 
being  strongest  near  the  mainland.  It  also  runs  between  Bic  and 
Bicquette  Islands,  but  the  stream  extends  only  a  very  short  distance 
outside  the  latter  island. 

The  stream  of  flood  continues  its  course  close  along  the  mainland, 
passing  inside,  and  also  very  close  outside,  of  Bazade,  Basque,  and 
Apple  Islands,  but  nowherr  extending  a  sufficient  distance  oft' shore  to 
be  of  use  to  ships  beating  to  the  westward  much  below  (Jreen  Island. 
That  part  of  the  stream  of  flood  which  passes  farther  out  toward  Bic 
Island,  and  also  that  which  passes  between  Bic  and  Bicquette  Islands, 
runs  at  its  fnll  rate  only  until  at  half  flood,  after  which  it  becomes 
gradually  weaker,  turning  to  the  NW.,  round  the  west  end  of  the 
island,  and  finally  to  the  north  and  NE.  toward  the  end  of  the  tide. 

The  stream  of  flood  becomes  weaker  and  of  less  duration  as  you  pro- 
ceed to  the  westward  of  the  islands.  Halfway  between  Bic  and  the 
Bazade  Islets  there  is  slack  water  for  about  an  hour  at  the  end  of  the 
ebb,  after  which  a  weak  flood  makes  during  the  first  quarter  of  that  tide 
at  the  rate  of  i  knot;  and  this  is  succeeded  by  the  eddy  flood  at  tlie 
rate  of  1^  knots,  or  2^  at  the  edge  of  the  bank  of  soundings,  which 
comes  from  the  westward,  running  in  the  same  direction  as  the  ebb 
during  the  remainder  of  the  flood  tide. 

From  these  remarks  it  will  be  seen  that  vessels  will  make  little  way 
to  the  windward  against  a  westerly  wind  on  the  bank  of  soundings 
between  Bic  and  the  Bazade  Islets,  and  indeed  all  the  wav  t(»  (iieen 
Island. 

The  set  of  the  latter  part  of  the  flood  to  the  northward  past  the  west 
end  of  Bic  Island  should  be  remembered  by  vessels  weighing  from  the 
western  anchorage,  or  approaching  the  island  with  light  winds,  espe- 
cially in  the  night  or  thick  weather. 

The  first  of  the  ebb  sets  oflf  shore,  or  from  the  southward,  and  this  is 
more  particularly  remarkable  at  the  eastern  anchorage,  but  it  only  lasts 
for  a  very  short  time,  after  which  the  stream  runs  fairly  between  the 
islands,  and  along  the  coast  to  the  eastward,  for  the  remainder  of  the 
tide.  Its  rate,  in  westerly  winds,  varies  from  2  to  2.^  knots,  according 
as  it  is  neap  or  spring  tide,  but  it  does  not  run  so  strongly  in  easterly 
winds. 


216 


ST.  LAWRENCE    RIVER — SOUTH   SHORE. 


Bank  of  Soundings. — The  cbart  will  show  how  extensive  the  Hoiith 
bank  of  soundings  is,  both  northeastward  and  sonthwestward  of  Bio 
and  Bicquette  Islands,  and  the  assistance  which  the  soundings  on  it 
may  afford  to  vessels  at  night,  or  in  fogs,  will  be  evi<lent. 

There  is  anchorage  on  this  bank  in  10  or  12  fathoms,  with  good  hold- 
ing ground,  all  along  the  south  coast  from  Bic  Island  to  Green  Island. 

Caution. — The  coast  of  the  mainland  between  Bic  Island  and  liaznde 
Islets  is  high  and  rocky.  With  the  exception  of  Alcide  Rock,  it  is  free 
from  danger  to  small  vessels,  which  may  stand  close  in ;  but  vessels  of 
large  draft  should  not  stand  in  farther  than  7  fathoms  at  low  and  9 
fathoms  at  high  water,  because  of  a  long  ridge  of  rocky  ground,  extend- 
ing 5  miles  NE.  from  the  northeastern  of  Razade  Islets,  with  17  feet 
least  water  near  its  eastern  end.  To  clear  every  part  of  this  ridge, 
keep  Basque  Island  its  own  breadth  open  northward  of  the  north 
eastern  of  Razade  Islets. 

Razade  Islets  are  two  large  rocks  about  ^  mile  long;  they  are  low, 
bare  of  trees,  and  IJ  miles  apart.  The  NE.  islet  is  1^  miles  from  the 
mainland  to  the  southward.  There  is  no  passage  for  vessels  between 
them  and  the  south  shore. 

Basque  Island,  5  miles  SW.  from  the  northeastern  of  Razade  Islets, 
is  1^  miles  long,  parallel  to  the  coast,  and  400  yards  wide.  Its  greatest 
height  above  the  sea  does  not  exceed  100  feet;  it  is  rocky,  partially 
wooded,  with  a  house  at  the  west  extreme.  There  is  no  passage  for 
ships  between  it  and  the  south  shore,  from  which  it  is  distant  2  miles. 

Near  the  SW.  end  of  the  island  a  sandy  spit,  extends  J  mile  south 
ward.    Close  off  the  end  of  this  spit  there  is  a  long  and  narrow  hole 
with  4  or  5  fathoms  in  it  at  low  water,  in  which  small  craft  may  be 
secured. 

Shoal  water  extends  ^  mile  northward  of  Basque  Island,  and  there 
is  a  reef  of  rocks  to  the  westward  of  its  western  point.  On  the  western 
extremity  of  this  reef,  and  about  1,200  yards  from  the  island,  is  a  round 
rock  which  shows  at  half  tide. 

Apple  Island,  SW.  2|  miles  from  Basque  Island,  is  formed  by  one 
principal  and  several  smaller  rocks,  the  whole  covering  a  space  one 
mile  long  parallel  to  the  coa«it  by  300  yards  wide.  It  is  30  or  40  feet 
above  the  sea  at  high  water,  without  any  trees,  and  2^  miles  from  the 
nearest  point  of  mainland.  There  is  no  passage  for  ships  between  it 
and  the  south  shore,  but  its  north  side  is  bold-to,  there  being  4  fathoms 
at  the  distance  of  200  yards. 

(H.  O.  Chart  No.  1112.) 

Green  Island,  at  its  northeastern  end,  has  a  long  and  narrow  point 
of  rocks,  always  above  water,  and  extending  more  than  ^  mile  from  the 
trees  toward  Apple  Island,  which  lies  2f  miles  NE.  from  it.  Half  this 
distance  toward  Apple  Island  is  occupied  by  reeffe  of  slate  which  dry 
at  low  water.    In  the  remainder  there  are  a  few  feet  of  water,  afford- 


-» 


GREEN   ISLAND   AND   REEF. 


217 


e  the  south 
^anl  of  Bic 
idiiigs  on  it 

1  good  hoUl- 
roen  Island, 
and  Kaznde 
ick,  it  is  free 
it  vessels  of 
it  low  and  9 
md,  extend- 
with  17  feet 
f  this  ridge, 
f  the  north 

;hey  are  low, 
les  from  the 
sels  between 

;azade  Islets, 
Its  greatest 

!ky,  'partially 
passage  for 

tant  2  miles, 
mile  south 

narrow  hole 

craft  may  be 


and  there 
the  western 
id,  is  a  round 

>rmed  by  one 
a  space  one 
30  or  40  feet 
es  from  the 

)8  between  it 
ng  4  fathoms 


narrow  point 
mile  from  the 
t.  Half  this 
te  which  dry 
nrater,  aflPord- 


mg  a  passage  lor  very  small  schooners,  which  run  in  between  (Ireen 
Island  and  the  main  at  high  water;  a  line  of  shoal  water  is  continuous 
from  each  of  these  islands  to  the  other,  and  it  may  be  safely  approached 
ATitli  care  to  7  fathoms  at  low  or  10  fathoms  at  high  water,  as  may 
also  the  islands. 

Light  —A  polygonal  tower,  56  feet  high,  and  painted  white,  stands 
on  the  north  point  of  Green  Island,  nearly  2  miles  from  the  eastern, 
extremity  of  the  rocks,  above  water,  off  its  east  point.  It  exhibits,  at 
an  elevatior  of  47  feet  above  high  water,  ;„  fixed  white  light,  which  can 
be  seen  13  miles  in  clear  weather.  Behind  the  lighttower,  at  about  \ 
n)ile,  and  bearing  S.  43°  E.  (S.  23°  E.  mag.)  from  it,  there  is  a  white 
beacon  for  leading  clear  of  the  tail  of  Red  Islet  Keef,  and  southwest- 
ward  of  the  lighthouse  is  a  triangular  beacon  to  mark  the  position  of 
Red  Islet  Bank  lightvessel. 

Fog  Signal — A  cotton  powder  cartridge  is  exploded  every  twenty 
minutes  during  fog  and  snowstorms. 

Green  Island  Reef,  which  is  e.xtremely  dangerous,  extends  from  the 
lighthouse  northward  1^  miles,  to  the  depth  of  three  fathoms.  From 
the  NE.  extremity  it  trends,  with  a  serrated  outline,  E.  by  N.,  till  it 
joins  the  shoal  water  connecting  Green  and  Apple  Islands.  The  NW. 
side  is  straight,  running  SSW.  from  its  NE.  extremity,  to  the  shore 
close  westward  of  the  lighthouse,  off  which  it  extends  only  400  yards 
WNW.  Its  shape  is  therefore  irregularly  triangular,  and  the  rocks 
on  it  dry  at  low  water,  nearly  J  mile  out  from  the  high-water  mark. 

On  the  eastern  side,  this  reef  may  be  safely  approached  to  the  depth 
of  7  or  even  6  fathoms  at  low  water,  but  on  the  north  and  west  sides 
there  is  no  bottom  with  the  hand  lead  until  close  to  it.  Half  a  mile 
west  of  it  there  are  between  20  and  30  fathoms  water,  and  at  one  mile 
NW.  of  it  no  bottom,  with  40  fathoms  of  line. 

To  avoid  Green  Island  Reef  in  the  daytime' and  clear  weather,  keep 
the  summit  of  the  high  land  southward  of  Gape  Arignole  (or  the  high 
land  of  Bic)  open  northward  of  Basque  Island. 

Anchorage. — There  is  excellent  anchorage  in  westerly  winds  under 
Green  Island  Reef,  and  it  is  the  general  rendezvous  of  vessels  waiting 
for  the  flood  to  beat  through  between  Green  Island  and  Red  Islet. 
But  as  the  first  of  the  flood  comes  from  the  northward,  and  sets  on  the 
shoals,  vei£sels  had  betier  not  anchor  with  the  light  bearing  westward 
of  S.  29°  W.  (8.  49°  W.  mag.),  or  in  less  than  7  fathoms  at  low  water. 
With  that  depth,  on  that  bearing,  they  will  be  2^  miles  from  the  light, 
one  mile  from  the  eastern  edge  of  the  reef,  and  the  same  distance  ftom 
the  shoal  water  to  the  southward.  If  they  wish  still  more  room,  they 
may  choose  their  berth  in  9, 10,  or  11  fathoms,  and  will  find  a  bottom 
of  stiff  mud  in  either  depth. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Green  Island  at  2h. 
45m. ;  ordinary  springs  rise  16  feet,  and  neaps  9^  feet.  At  the  anchor- 
age northward  of  Green  Island  the  first  of  the  flood  was  observed  to 


H 


218 


ST.  JjAMWXmX  KTVER — BOUTH   SHORE. 


couie  from  the  northward;  the  vessel  then  tended  gradually  round, 
with  her  head  to  the  NE.,  east,  and  SB.  at  the  end  of  the  tide.  The 
vessel  i'outinued  to  go  round  with  the  lirst  of  the  ebb,  which  came  from 
the  southward  off  the  shoals,  to  the  SW.,  west,  and  NW.,  which  latter 
point  was  reached  at  about  4  hours  ebb;  and  she  continued  with  her 
head  in  that  direction,  from  which  the  stream  came,  until  near  the  end 
of  the  tide.  The  vessel  then  began  to  tend  again,  with  her  head  to 
theuc  Ji  and  NE.  as  before,  going  completely  round  the  compass  in  12 
hours.  It  was  never  entirely  slack  water,  the  stream  continuing  to  run 
more  or  less  during  the  whole  time.  The  rate  of  the  ebb  was  3  knots, 
and  that  of  the  Hood  2  knots.    This  occurred  in  quite  a  calm  day. 

ITote.— The  description  of  the  river  above  Green  Island  is  continued 
in  Chapter  X.  The  north  shore  of  the  gulf  will  now  be  described  from 
Belle  Isle  Strait  westward. 


l^i 


lually  round, 

iie  tide.    The 

ch  came  from 

,  which  latter 

lucd  with  her 

near  tlie  end 

her  head  to 

K>mpa88  in  12 

inning  to  run 

was  3  knots, 

aim  day. 

I  is  continued 

escribed  from 


chaptp:r  viir. 

REMARKS  ON  BELLE   ISLE   STRAIT-GULF  OF  ST.   LAWRENCE    NORTH 
COAST-BELLE  ISLE  STRAIT  TO  ("APE  WHITTLE.       ' 

(H.  O.  Chart  No.  581", ) 

Belle  iBle  lies  at  the  Atlantic  entrance  to  the  Strait  of  Belle  Isle 
It  is  about  9i  miles  long,  NE.  and  SW.,  and  3  miles  wide,  including 
Lark  Island,  close  to  its  west  side.    It  is  composed  of  a  range  of  hills 
bare  of  trees,  and  which  rise  to  the  height  of  680  feet  above  the  sea! 
These  hills  are  principally  of  granite,  alternating  with  clay  and  slate 
and  their  steep  sides  dip  into  the  sea  in  every  part,  except  at  the  Ne! 
extreme  of  the  island,  where  two  low  points  converge  so  as  to  form  a 
narrow  creek,  named  Black  Joke  Cove,  which  shelters  very  small  fish- 
ing vessels  during  the  finest  months  of  summer.    Shelter  may  also  be 
obtained  in  Lark  Harbor,  under  Lark  Island,  and  in  Valley  Cove  at  2* 
miles  SW.  of  that  island;  but  none  of  these  coves  are  considered  safe 
early  in  spring  or  late  in  autumn,  because  of  the  heavy  swell  which  rolls 
into  them  from  the  eastward. 

The  south  side  of  Belle  Isle  aflfords  no  anchorage,  and  there  is  liardlv 
a  creek  where  a  boat  might  find  shelter. 

A  small  rocky  bank,  with  5  fathoms  least  water,  is  reported  to  exist 
about  5  miles  NW.  by  N.  from  the  NE.  extreme  of  Lark  Island. 

Rock.— A  rock  upon  which  the  sea  breaks  heavilvlies  with  the  SW 
extreme  of  Belle  Isle  bearing  S.  31°  B.  (S.  r.o  w.  mag.),  distant  *  mile! 
It  was  estimated  to  have  9  feet  water  over  it,  and  is  probably  identical 
with  the  dangers  repo..<jd  in  1881  by  the  steamer  Ontario. 

Lights.— The  lighthouse  erected  on  the  sonth  part  of  Belle  Isle  is  a 
white  circular  tower,  59  feet  high,  and  exhibits,  at  an  elevation  of  470 
teet  and  between  S.  76o  W.  (N.  68o  W.  mag.)  and  S.  70°  E.  (S.  34o  b 
mag.),  a  fixed  white  light,  which  is  visible  28  miles.  • 

In  consequence  of  this  light  (from  its  great  height)  being  frequentlv 
obscured  by  fog,  another  light  is  exhibited  from  a  square  white  light- 
house, 31  feet  high,  situated  below  the  old  lighthouse. 

This  light  is  a  fixed  white  light,  elevated  137  feet,  and  should  be 
visible  1<  miles  in  all  directions,  except  where  intercepted  by  the  high 
land  of  Belle  Isle.  .r  gu 


i 


i'. 


f 
I 

fl' 


M 


219 


220 


DELLK    ISLE    STRAIT. 


Fog  Signal— From  a  point  near  the  upper  lighthouse  an  explosive 
bomb,  ."hich  will  explode  at  a  distance  of  about  ".(K)  feet  in  a  southerly 
direction,  high  in  the  air,  will  bo  fired  at  intervals  of  twenty  minutes 
during  fog  or  snowstorms. 

Vessels  in  tiio  iii'mediate  vicinity  may  also  hear  a  dull  report,  caused 
by  the  charge  tha.  throws  the  signal  into  the  air  preceding  the  loud 

report. 

Provision  Depot  —There  is  a  depot  of  provisions  at  the  lower  light- 
house for  shipwrecked  mariners. 

Northeast  Ledge  dries  at  low- water  springs,  and  lies  H  Iniles  N.  by 
E.  from  the  NE.  point  of  Belle  Isle;  there  is  deep  water  in  the  channel 

between. 

Strait  of  Belle  Isle.— The  eastern  entrance  of  the  Strait  ot  Belle 
Isle,  between  York  Point  and  Cape  Bauld,  is  26  miles  wide,  the  latter 
point  bearing  from  the  former  S.  43°  E.  (S.  7°  E.  mag.),  but  the  nar- 
rowest i)art  of  the  strait  is  southward  of  Amour  Point,  in  Forteau  Bay, 
where  it  is  only  9^  miles  wide.  The  western  entrance  of  the  strait, 
between  Greenly  Island  and  F6rolle  Point,  is  nearly  21  miles  wide, 
the  point  bearing  from  the  island  8. 11°  E.  (S.  24°  W.  mag.). 

Onter  Soundings.— During  summer  and  autumn  the  route  from  Great 
Britain  to  Quebec  through  the  Strait  of  Belle  Isle  is  much  frequented 
by  steamers,  and  the  bank  of  soundings  lying  eastward  distant  28  miles 
from  the  north  point  of  Belle  Isle  affords  a  valuable  means  of  ascer- 
taining the  position  of  a  vessel  in  foggy  weather  when  approaching  from 
the  eastward. 

The  least  water  yet  found  on  this  bank  is  80  fathoms,  mud,  with 
105  to  181  fathoms,  sand,  between  it  and  the  bank  which  stretches 
eastward  from  Belle  Isle. 

The  Soundings  in  the  strait  of  Belle  Isle  are  not  so  irregular  but 
that  they  will  afford  assistance  to  a  vessel  at  night,  or  during  the  fogs 
which  BO  frequently  prevail.  The  deepest  water  is  on  the  Labrador  side, 
as,  for  instance,  from  York  Point  to  Red  Bay,  where,  however,  it  is 
interrupted  by  the  shallow  water  off  Wreck  Bay.  It  is  also  deep  on 
that  side,  from  Pin  ware  to  Forteau  Bay,  inclusive;  but  the  line  of  deep 
water  is  not  direct,  nor  continuous  through  the  strait,  and  it  is  still 
more  perplexing  that  there  is  as  deep  water  within  2  miles  of  the  dan- 
gerous Flower  Ledges  on  the  Newfoundland  side,  opposite  Forteau  Bay, 
as  in  any  part  of  the  strait.  The  depth  of  water  varies  in  different  parts 
from  between  60  and  70  to  20  fathoms,  and  the  nature  of  the  bottom  is 
as  various  as  the  depths,  being  sometimes  of  rock,  and  at  others  of  sand, 
broken  shell,  pieces  of  coral,  or  gravel. 

Tides  and  Currents.— The  flood  and  ebb  streams  at  Cape  Bauld 

continue  running  NW.  and  SB.  inshore  3  hours  after  high  and  low 

water;  and  at  6  to  7  miles  NE.  of  the  cape  they  continue  running  5 

hours  after  high  and  low  water  by  the  shore. 

At  Cape  Norman  the  inshore  streams  run  2  hours  after  high  and 


II  explosive 
II  southerly 
ity  minutes 

[)ort,  causetl 
II  g  the  loud 

)  lower  ligbt- 

;  liiiles  N.  by 
1  tbe  cbannel 

rait  of  Belle 
le,  tbe  latter 
but  tbe  »ar- 
Forteau  Bay, 
of  tbe  strait, 
L  miles  wide, 

Bo- 
te from  Great 
;b  frequented 
stant  28  miles 
pans  of  ascer- 
:oacbing  from 

as,  mud,  witb 
licb  stretches 

irregular  but 
iring  the  fogs 
Labrador  side, 
lowever,  it  is 

also  deep  on 
le  line  of  deep 
and  it  is  still 
es  of  the  dan- 

ForteauBay, 
dift'erent  parts 

tbe  bottom  is 
)tbers  of  sand, 

t  Cape  Bauld 
high  and  low 
lue  running  5 

ifter  high  and 


TIDES  AND  CURRENTS. 


221 


low  water  by  the  shore,  and  in  the  center  of  the  strait  the  streiini  runs 
4  hours  after  high  and  low  water. 

Oft'  Fortean  and  Sandy  Bays  the  streams  turn  with  the  high  and  low 
water  on  shore,  and  turn  (luickly;  in  tbe  center  of  the  strait  the  stream 
rniiH  one  hour  later.    These  streams,  however,  are  not  constiint. 

The  dood  comes  from  tiie  northward  along  the  coast  of  Labrador  and 
also  from  the  SE.,  from  Gape  Bauld  to  Cape  Norman.  The  latter  stream, 
there  is  reason  to  believe,  is  often  turned  oft'  t«»  the  northward  by  ( 'ape 
Norman,  and  the  same  thing  takes  place  at  (Ireen  Island,  on  t\w  New- 
foundland side,  toward  Greenly  Island  on  the  (>i)p()site  side  of  the  strait. 
There  is,  moreover,  at  times  a  stream  running  from  the  SW.  for  several 
days  together  along  the  west  coast  of  Newfoundland.  This  stream 
occasionally  sets  from  Porolle  Point  obliquely  across  the  strait  toward 
Forteau  Bay.  Sometimes,  and  especially  with  NH.  winds,  the  current 
runs  directly  in  an  opposite  direction  along  tbe  west  coast  of  New- 
foundland tVom  F^rolle  Point  past  liich  Point. 

The  current  has  the  following  characteristics  in  the  summer  season, 
as  shown  by  observations  throughout  the  months  of  July  and  Septem- 
ber, 1894: 

The  current  is  fun-lamentally  tidal  in  its  nature,  and  under  normal 
conditions  turns  regularly  witb  the  tide,  and  runs  cast  and  west  with 
nearly  equal  velocities.  The  conditions  are  normal  in  moderate  weather 
and  during  the  prevalence  of  moderate  westerly  winds.  At  such  times 
the  current  attains  a  velocity  of  about  2  knots  iier  hour  in  each 
direction. 

During  heavy  winds,  especially  when  easterly  or  westerly  in  direc- 
tion, the  current  which  runs  with  the  wind  becomes  stronger  than  the 
current  against  it;  and  eventually  the  current  may  become  continuous 
in  the  same  direction  as  the  wind.  It  may  thus  run  in  the  one  direc- 
tion for  two  or  three  days  at  a  time.  The  greatest  velocities  of  the 
current  which  were  observed  during  heavy  winds  were  3^*^  knots  per 
hour  from  the  east,  and  2^  knots  per  hour  from  the  west. 

There  is  little  appreciable  difference  in  the  current  at  the  opposite 
sides  of  the  strait,  except  that  toward  the  north  side  it  may  be  a  little 
stronger  or  more  persistent  in  the  one  direction. 

While  normal  conditions*  prevail  the  difi'erence  of  flow  in  the  two 
directions  is  in  favor  of  a  greater  inward  flow  from  tbe  east.  Also  the 
actual  flow  throughout  the  year,  when  the  influence  of  the  wind  is 
included,  appears  to  be  greater  in  the  inward  direction  from  the  east 
than  outward  from  the  west. 

The  presence  of  icebergs  in  the  strait  and  the  temperature  of  the 
water  have  also  a  relation  to  the  predominant  direction  of  the  current; 
but  they  can  not  be  relied  upon  as  aft'ording  an  indication  of  its  actual 
direction  at  the  time. 

From  the  above  characteristics,  it  is  dearly  possible  for  a  vessel  to 
overrun  her  reckoning  in  either  direction  through  the  strait.   Also,  ves- 


'11 

u 


222 


BELLE    ISLE    8TRAIT. 


i^l 


;» 


»el8  entering  tbiouKh  the  strait  must  not  assume  that  the  cnrrcnt  is 
no(!e8sariIy  in  their  favor  in  making  the  run  weMtwartl  to  round  tlie 
eastern  end  of  Auticoi^ti,  as  tlie  ohHervatious  show  that  it  is  possible 
for  tlio  set  in  the  strait  itself,  and  also  in  the  northeastern  end  of  the 
Gulf  of  Ht.  Lawrence,  t«)  be  against  them  on  that  course. 

Navigation  of  the  Strait  in  Fogs. — From  these  remarks  it  will 
plainly  appear  that  the  navigation  of  the  Strait  of  Belle  Isle  is 
attended  with  great  danger  in  dark  or  foggy  nights,  during  which  no 
vessel  should  attempt  t«  run  through.  On  such  occasions,  therefore, 
it  would  lie  prudent  to  anciior  in  one  of  the  bays  on  the  north  side  of 
the  strait,  rather  than  to  continue  underway. 

A  sailing  vessel  bound  in  to  the  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence,  and  running 
with  an  easterly  wind,  will,  however,  find  no  place  lit  for  that  purpose 
until  arriving  at  the  indifferent  anchorage  of  Pinware,  for  Red  Bay 
can  not  be  entered  by  a  large  vessel  with  an  easterly  wind. 

Loup  May  is  the  first  good  anchorage  under  such  circumstances,  and 
there  the  vessel  would  be  so  far  advanced  in  her  passage  through  the 
strait  that  it  would  not  be  worth  while  to  stop,  since  everything 
might  be  easily  cleared  in  the  remaining  short  distance.  But  with  a 
SW.  wind,  at  the  approach  of  night,  and  appearance  of  fog,  a  vessel 
*  bound  out  through  the  strait  to  the  eastward  had  better  stand  off  and 
on  under  easy  sail,  tacking  by  the  deep-sea  lead  from  the  Newfoundland 
side  till  morning,  if  not  farther  to  the  eastward  than  Ferolle  Point.  If 
farther  advanced,  it  would  be  better  to  make  Forteau  Bay  before  dark, 
and  anchor  there  for  the  night.  In  light  winds  or  calms,  during  dark 
nights  or  foggy  weather,  it  is  better  to  bring  up  with  a  stream  anchor 
anywhere  in  the  strait  rather,  than  to  drive  about  with  the  tides,  with- 
out knowing  whither,  but  then  a  lookout  must  be  kept  for  drifting  ice- 
bergs. 

Fogs  occur  with  all  southerly  and  easterly  winds,  and  they  are 
frequent  likewise  with  SW.  winds;  it  is  only  when  the  wind  is  from 
between  the  north  and  west  that  clear  weather  can  be  safely  reckoned 
upon. 

Ice._The  prevalent  current  from  the  northward  comes  ^om  between 
Belle  Isle  and  the  coast  of  Labrador.  It  is  often  at  the  temperature  of 
freezing  point,  bringing  many  icebergs  into  the  strait  and  frequently 
carrying  them  as  far  as  Natashqnan,  on  the  north  shore  of  the  Gulf  of 
St.  Lnvrence.  Some  of  these  icebergs  ground  in  deep  water,  whilst 
others  are  continually  changing  their  i)ositions.  They  are  much  more 
numerous  in  some  seasons  than  in  others;  200  icebergs  and  large  pieces 
of  ice  were  counted  in  the  strait  in  the  month  of  August  one  year, 
while  there  Avere  not  above  half  a  dozen  to  be  seen  in  the  same  month 
in  the  following  season. 

The  strait  is  generally  open  to  vessels  from  the  latter  part  of  June 
to  the  first  part  of  November. 


he  curroiit  is 
u  round  tlie 
it  18  iM)SHil)lo 
n  eiul  of  tlie 

lurks  it  will 
ielle  Isle  in 
iUg  which  no 
18,  therefore, 
north  Hide  of 

and  running 
that  pur|>08e 
for  Bed  Kay 
I. 

istanceN,  and 
I  through  tlie 
9  everything 
But  with  a 
fog,  a  vessel 
itaud  off  and 
ewfoundland 
He  Point.  If 
r  before  dark, 
,  during  dark 
tream  anchor 
e  tides,  with- 
r  drifting  ice- 

»nd  they  are 
wind  is  from 
fely  reckoned 

Qrom  between 
)inperatare  of 
nd  frequently 
if  the  Gulf  of 
water,  whilst 
•e  much  more 
d  large  pieces 
ist  one  year, 
B  same  month 

part  of  June 


GULP  OP   8T.  LAWRENCE — NORTH  COAST.  228 


OULF  OF  SI.  I.AWHENCK. 
Qt'EHEC. 

(H.  O.  Chart  No.  IIOB.)  \ 

General  Observations.— The  (ioast  of  the  gulf,  which  will  form  the 
8ub.ie(!t  of  this  chapter,  lies  between  Oreenly  Island  and  South  Makers 
Ledge,  near  Cape  Whittle,  a  distance  of  1L*8  miles. 

The  mariner  is  reminded  that  in  shaping  a  course  along  the  coast  the 
variation  of  the  compass  alters  half  a  point  within  the  limits  of  tliis 
chapter,  for  which  alteration  due  allowance  should  be  made.  Attention 
should  also  be  given  to  the  soundings. 

There  are  several  detached  banks  lying  parallel  to  the  coast  at  the 
distance  of  several  miles.  They  are  very  irregular,  and  there  is  in 
general  much  deeper  water  between  them  and  the  north  shore,  and  also 
southward  for  a  great  distance,  or  until  the  opposite  coast  of  Newfound- 
land is  approached. 

Currenta  and  Icabexga.— In  navigating  along  this  coast,  the  current 
in  through  the  Strait  of  Belle  Isle  must  be  taken  into  consideration, 
and  it  should  also  be  remembered  that  in  addition  to  the  permanent 
dangers  of  the  coast  drifting  icebergs  are  firequently  to  be  met  with. 
There  is  a  weak  stream  of  flood  tYom  the  eastward  inshore  and  among 
the  islands  and  an  equally  weak  ebb  stream  in  the  contrary  direction, 
but  both  are  much  influenced  by  the  winds. 

Aspect  of  Coast— The  coast  between  Greenly  Island  and  Cape 
Whittle  is  exceedingly  dangerous  at  night  or  in  fogs,  and  even  in  day- 
time and  fine  weather  it  requires  the  intimate  knowledge,  possessed  by 
the  flshennen,  of  the  position  of  every  ledge  or  a  good  chart  on  a  large 
scale  to  navigate  along  it  with  safety.  The  mainland  and  islands  are 
of  granitic  rocks,  bare  of  trees  excepting  in  the  heads  of  bays,  where 
small  spruce  and  birch  trees  are  met  with  occasionally.  When  not 
entirely  bare,  the  mainland  and  islands  are  covered  with  moss  or  scrubby 
spruce  bushes,  and  there  are  man.v  ponds  of  dark  bog  water  frequented 
by  waterfowl  and  flocks  of  the  Labrador  curlew.  The  mainland  is 
broken  into  inlets  and  bays  and  fringed  with  islands,  rocks,  and  ledges, 
which  frequently  rise  abruptly  to  wiibin  a  f^yv  feet  of  the  surface  from 
depths  so  great  as  to  afford  no  warning  by  the  lead.  In  some  parts  the 
islands  and  rocks  are  so  numerous  as  to  form  a  complete  labyrinth,  in 
which  nothing  but  small  egging  schooners  or  shallops  can  find  their 
way. 

In  general  the  mainland  does  not  exceed  the  height  of  500  feet  above 
the  level  of  the  sea  and  is  often  very  much  lower,  as  are  all  the  islands 
excepting  Great  and  Little  Mecattina.  These  two  high  islands,  the 
High  Land  of  Mecattina,  085  feet  above  the  sea,  and  the  Bradore  Hills, 
are  all  very  remarkable,  and  serve  to  point  out  to  a  vessel  her  position 


% 


',  ¥ 


•-J*»*ii»«^'WW^<Wi*<i»«^^ 


224 


CLIMATE PRODUCTIONS. 


Vf 

i  f 


from  great  diHtauces  at  sea.  Bradore  Hills  are  three  contigaous  roand- 
backed  mountaius  situated  inland  4  or  5  miles  northeastward  from  the 
head  of  liradore  Bay.  The  NW.  summit  is  the  highest,  being  1,2G4 
feet  above  the  sea,  and  the  highest  land  on  this  coast. 

Climate.— The  climate  is  very  severe,  and  the  dangers  are  increased 
tenfold  by  the  fogs  which  accompany  the  prevalent  southerly  winds. 
It  is  probable  that  the  mean  temperature  of  the  year  does  not  exceed 
the.  freezing  point.  The  ice  does  not  usually  leave  the  coast  before 
June,  and  young  ice  begins  to  form  again  in  the  pools  and  sheltered 
small  bays  in  September,  when  frosts  are  very  frequent  at  night.  At 
midsummer  only  a  very  few  of  the  earliest  plants  were  found  in  flower, 
the  grass  had  not  sprung  up,  and  the  moss  still  retained  the  brown  color 
of  winter.  Large  masses  of  snow  still  occupied  the  ravines  and  hol- 
lows and  the  shaded  northern  sides  of  steep  hills. 

In  the  sheltered  bays  the  temperature  is  much  higher  and  the  fogs 
less  frequent  than  among  the  outer  islands,  whilst  at  the  distance  of  15 
miles  inland  the  water  is  said  to  be  quite  warm  in  summer  and  the 
country  thickly  wooded  with  spruce,  juniper,  birch,  and  poplar  trees 
which  grow  in  valleys,  where  the  soil  is  of  sandy  clay,  only  the  summits 
of  the  hills  being  of  bare  granite,  like  the  coast. 

Inhabitants  and  Productions. — There  are  a  few  Indians  of  the 
Montanes  tribe,  and  a  family  or  two  of  half-civilized  Esquimaux  occa- 
sionally visit  the  coast  from  the  northward.  There  are  deer  (caribou), 
bear,  wolves,  foxes,  martens,  otter,  beaver,  and  Canadian  porcupines 
in  the  interior,  most  of  which  are  hunted  for  their  skins  by  the  few 
inhabitants  of  the  coast.'  The  Canadian  partridge  and  the  ptarmigan, 
or  willow  grouhe,  are  also  plentiful. 

The  only  permanent  inhabitants  are  a  few  widely  scattered  families, 
residing  at  seal  and  salmon-fishing  and  fur-trading  establishments, 
which  are  visited  periodically  by  small  schooners  from  Quebec.  Seal 
and  salmon  are  very  plentiful.  The  establishments  alluded  to  are  at 
Bradore,  Esquimaux  Bay,  St.  Augustin  Harbor,  Little  Fish  Harbor, 
and  Etamarau.  These  are  the  only  places  which  could  be  relied  on  for 
much  assistance  by  the  crews  of  vessels  which  might  be  wrecked  upon 
the  coast.  There  is  a  family  residing  on  the  island  between  Bonne 
Esperance  and  Salmon  Bay  in  summer,  and  in  Old  Fort  Bay  in  winter, 
which  might  be  added  to  the  list.  The  remaining  two  or  three  families 
are  very  poor  people,  who  seem  just  able  to  make  an  indifferent  liveli- 
hood by  hunting  and  fishing. 

Codfishery. — Codfish  are  abundant  on  the  coast,  especially  to  the 
eastward  of  Mistanoque.  The  fishery  for  them  is  carried  on  not  only 
by  resident  inhabitants,  but  by  schooners  which  visit  the  coast  every 
summer. 

Greenly  Island  (He  Yerte)  consists  of  two  hillocks  joined  by  a  pla- 
teau between  two  coves,  the  northern  being  84  feet  high  and  the  south- 
srn  63  feet  high.    The  north  shore  is  bold,  but  off  the  soath  extreme 


ontigaous  roand- 
istward  from  the 
best,  being  1,2G4 

I* 

;ers  are  increased 
southerly  wiuds. 
does  not  exceed 
the  coast  before 
}ls  and  sheltered 
nt  at  night.  At 
)  found  in  flower, 
i  the  brown  color 
ravines  and  hol- 

jher  and  the  fogs 
;he  distance  of  15 
summer  and  the 
and  poplar  trees 
only  the  summits 

J  Indians  of  the 
Esquimaux  occa- 
re  deer  (caribou), 
;idian  porcupines 
skius  by  the  few 
id  the  ptarmigan, 

cattered  families, 
<;  establishments, 
m  Quebec.  Seal 
alluded  to  are  at 
itle  Fish  Harbor, 
Id  be  relied  on  for 
be  wrecked  upon 
L  between  Bonne 
)rt  Bay  in  winter, 
)  or  three  families 
indifferent  li  veil- 
especially  to  the 
rried  on  not  only 
t  the  coast  every 

s  joined  by  a  pla- 
gh  and  the  south- 
le  south  extreme 


GREENLY    ISLAND BRADORK    J?AV. 


225 


nnein  fsw  V      ?       l^/'if^tand  nhoals  that  together  extend  i 
nule  in  a  SW.  direction.    A  large  fishing  establishment  is  situated  i.i 
the  eastern  cove,    (ireenly  Island  is  the  resort  of  myria.le  of  puttin 
which  appear  suddenly  in  June  and  disappear  as  suddenly  in  October.' 
Light  -Ou  the  southwestern  slope  of  the  southern  hillock  on  Gieenlv 
Island  IS  an  octagonal  tower,  78  feet  high,  with  keeper's  dwelling 
attached  and  the  whole  painted  white.     From  this  tower,  at  an  eleva 
m^^L  r  **'^'Vr'!''?l''^  ''  '"""'"'"^^  "^'•*'  ^bowing  white  for  half  a 
the  light  .s  then  eclipsed  for  one  and  a  half  minutes,  the  revolution  thus 
occupying  three  minutes.    This  light  is  exhibited  from  April  1  to  Decern- 
ber  1.5  of  ea.h  year,  and  should  be  visible  15  miles  in  clear  weather. 

Fog  Sipal.-A  horn,  about  1,064  feet  from  the  lighthouse,  sounds 
blasts  of  ten  seconds'  duration,  with  an  interval  of  eighty  seconds 
between  each  blast,  during  foggy  weather  and  in  snowstorms 

N VW  Jf^r  ^""l^^  T  r?  ^*'™  ^'*°'*  ^'  ^^'"^  P**'"*'  «bout  U  miles 
NNW.  of  Greenly  Island,  trends  northward  fi.r  ^  mile  to  another 
rocky  point,  beyond  which  is  Sandy  Bay,  on  the  south  side  of  which 
are  a  few  houses  and  a  small  chapel,  with  a  flagstaff  near  it. 

Perroquet  Bank,  with  44  fathoms  over  it,  lies  S.  68°  W  rN  770  w 
mag.)  14  miles  from  Grand  Point. 

nl.ff®"T*«\?r^^*"*'  *^^  ^'^^  ^^^^'  *^  ***■  «°»'*»  «^t«"t'  and  is  faced  by 
cliff  on  the  SW  side,  which  is  fairly  steep-to.  The  other  sides  are  fou^ 
for  a  distance  of  200  to  400  yards.  Ifumerous  puffin  resort  here  dur- 
ing the  summer  months. 

Bradore  Bay  and  Harbor  are  formed  by  the  shore  trending  north- 

rj^f  7u  r^^  ^^^'  ^'^  '^^  ''^^"'^  "^  ^^^^'  ''"d  other  islets  and 
rocks.    The  bay  is  not  difficult  of  access  in  moderate  weather   but 

IxnotdTt!'  f  "^'''"'^  ^'  '•'""^  ^^*^*'  ^«  ".e  anchorage  spa'ce  is 
exposed  to  the  heavy  sea  that  rolls  in  with  southerly  winds.    Except 

winds,  the  anchorage  is  inferior  to  that  of  Blanc  Sablon  to  the  eastward 

mJr«hv      •.?'''*''''''^,f  *''"  "'^'■^  "^^  ^"'  ^""^  ««"«  distance,  flat  and 

TZtl:  7  'T"l  '^'^'  P"*"^"'  ^^y«"**  ^^'  '^  "«««'  ^^  sandstone 
terraces,  to  a  rocky  flat-topped  knoll,  297  feet  above  high  water 

r.Jr/«'T''  ^T^^^^^  ^y  *  Wuff  peninsula,  run  into  the  northern 

and  at  2f  miles  westward  of  the  peninsula  is  a  large  waterfall  that  is 
conspicuous  from  seaward. 

The  land  westward  of  the  peninsula  rises  to  a  chain  of  bare  stony 
hdls  nearly  500  feet   in  height,   behind  which    are  several  ponds 

which  and  the  Labrador  shore  there  are  narrow  and  shallow  channels. 
Island  of  Ledges  (Basin  Island)  is  about  54  feet  high,  and  is  sepa- 
rated from  the  Labrador  shore  by  a  channel  nearly  l,loi  yards  wWe 
Off  '*Yi^B^if «  *''«••«  i«  -  ^^^^  of  small  islands,  wiich  are  steept 


-  i----^  Jaeaa^stfaaaasiWiiafei&iaaa;- w^  '  w**ftii<wwiw<ti4fc*j..»jjMia»«(^s^^ 


I?' 


if' 


226 


GULF    OF   ST.  LAWRENCE — NORTH    COAST. 


toward  the  cbaiinel,  but  between  them  and  t  hirge  island  there  are 
depths  Irom  0  feet  tx)  3  fathoms  water  only.  Numerous  islets  and 
ledges  lie  ofi"  the  western  and  so  theru  sides,  making  it  dangerous  to 
approach  within  a  distance  of  1^  miles. 

Several  rocks  and  shoals  lie  between  Island  of  Ledges  and  the  Labra 
dor  coast  to  the  northward,  all  of  which  break  heavily  in  bad  weatl.er, 
and  no  vessel  should  attempt  to  enter  the  harbor  north  of  this  island 
under  any  circumstances. 

Frigate  Harbor  lies  at  the  NE.  extreme  of  the  Island  of  Ledges, 
and  on  its  shores  are  a  few  houses  and  fishing  stages.  The  water  is 
sufliciently  deep,  but  the  anchorage  space  is  very  snuvU. 

The  Basin  lies  southward  of  Frigate  Uarbor,  and  contains  a  fishing 
establishment  connected  with  that  at  Blanc  Sablon.  This  harbor  is 
suitable  for  small  vessels  only. 

Gull  Rock,  whit;h  dries  at  low  water,  lies  nearly  midway  between 
the  Labrador  shore  and  the  islets  off  the  SE.  extreme  of  the  Island  of 
Ledges.  Shoal  ground  extends  100  yards  southward  from  it,  and  there 
iH  a  rock  with  6  feet  water  over  it  at  that  extreme.  A  ledge  with  3jj 
fathoms  water  on  it,  and  250  yards  in  length,  extends  \  mile  southward 
from  Gull  Kock,  and  East  Kock,  with  4.^  fathoms  water  over  it,  lies 
almost  south  h  mile  from  it.  Greenly  Islaml  lighthouse,  bearing  S.  32° 
E.  (S.  3°  W.mag.),  well  open  westward  of  Perroquet  Island,  leatls 
southwestward  of  East  Kock. 

Bull  Rock,  on  the  western  side  of  the  channel  to  Bradore  Bay,  lies 
3o0  yards  from  the  SE.  extreme  of  Island  of  Ledges,  and  is  3  feet 
above  high  water.  From  it  a  shoal  extends  southward  400  yards,  with 
a  depth  of  16  feet  at  the  extreme. 

Directions.— Approaching  this  part  of  the  coast  of  Labrador  from 
the  westward,  Bradore  Bills,  several  conspicuous  summits  attaining  an 
elevation  of  1,204  feet,  will  be  easily  reitognized.  When  (ireenly  Island 
with  its  lighthouse  becomes  visible,  steer  for  it  until  Perroquet  Island 
is  distinctly  made  out.  Pass  i  mile  westward  of  it,  and  keeping 
Grei.nly  Island  bearing  S.  32^  E.  (S.  3°  W.  mag.)  well  open  of  its  west 
extreme,  proceed  toward  Bull  Rock,  which  is  easily  distinguislwd. 
Then  pass  eastward  of  the  chain  of  islets  oft'  the  east  side  of  Island  of 
Ledges,  and  if  wishing  to  anchor  in  Frigate  Harbor,  stand  in  between 
Pigeon  Islet,  the  rockv  islet  19  feet  higli  forming  tl»e  northeasternmost 
extreme  ot  the  chain,  and  Green  Island,  the  next  one  south.  Large 
vessels,  however,  should  pass  northward  of  Pigeon  Islet,  taking  care 
to  av.id  the  shoal  which  extends  nearly  200  yards  northeastward  of  it, 
and  an«!hor  as  convenient. 

.  In  bad  southerly  weather  a  heavy  swell  rolls  in  between  Gull  and 
Bull  Hocks,  and  vessels  would  then  find  better  shelter  and  an  anchorage 
easier  of  access  in  Blanc  Sablon  Bay.  " 

Tides.— It  is  liigh  water,  full  and  change,  in  Bradore  Bay  at  lOh.  3om. ; 
springs  rise  'i'i  feet,  and  neaps  rise  2if  feet. 


and  tbere  are 

)U.s  inlets  and 

dangerous  to 

md  the  Labra 
I  bad  weatlier, 
of  this  island 

ud  of  Ledges, 
The  water  ia 

tains  a  fishing 
rhis  harbor  is 

dway  between 
f  the  Island  of 
ui  it,  and  there 
.  ledge  with  3j| 
nile  southward 
:er  over  it,  lies 
bearing  S.  32° 
t  Island,  leads 

adore  Bay,  lies 
,  and  is  3  feet 
400  yards,  with 

Labra«lor  from 
Its  attaining  an 
(Ireeiily  Island 
erroquet  laliind 
i,  and  keeping 
•pen  of  its  west 
distinguislijed. 
ide  of  Island  of 
and  in  between 
jrtheasterninost 
'  south.  L;u'j>e 
ilet,  taking  care 
beastward  of  it, 

h^een  Gull  and 
11(1  an  anchorage 

Jayatl0h.35m.; 


BELLES   AMOURS    HARHOR 


227 


Aspect  of  Coast— The  country  separating  Belles  Amours.  Middle 
Bay,  and  Five  Leagues  Harbor  is  very  remarkable.  Low  granite  on 
which  are  ridges  of  bowlders,  with  coarse  grass  and  n.oss,  extends 
several  miles  seaward  frcun  the  range  of  ste.q>  granite  liills,  400  or  500 
feet  high,  which  trend  westward  from  the  head  of  Brad.ne  Bay.  Tliis 
low  country  has  a  green  and  alluvial  api)earan(e  from  tlie  sea;  and  it  is 
not  until  a  near  approach  to  it  that  the  shores  are  seen  to  be  of  ro.  k 
and  bowlders. 

BeUes  Amours  Point  will  be  easily  recognized,  being  a  mound  of 
bare  granite,  00  or  70  feet  high,  at  the  SK.  extremity  of  the  low  penin- 
sula separating  the  harbor  of  -the  same  name  from  Middle  Bay. 

Belles  Amours  Harbor.— Stony  Point,  which  is  low  and  green,  and 
Flat  Uocks,  which  lie  li  miles  southeastward  of  it,  form  the  east  side 
of  the  channel  between  them  and  Belles  Amours  Point,  leading  north 
ward  to  Belles  Amours  Harbor,  in  which  a  number  of  vessels  may  lie 
<]uite  landlocked. 

Shoai— Nearly  midway  between  Belles  Amours  Point  and  Flat 
Rocks  lies  a  rocky  patch  with  KJ  feet  least  water.  Between  this  patch 
and  the  point  tic.  ^  are  other  patches  with  3A  fatlioms,  which  is  as 
nnich  water  as  ci,?.  i       ■•..nted  on  through  the  westein  passage. 

Niobe  ShoaL— .'  u  n,.  irous  shoal  lies  about  40  )  yards  to  the  south- 
westward  of  Flat  h  _^,  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  I'ast  Passage,  into 
Belles  Amours  Harbor.  There  are  4^  fathoms  on  the  edges  of  the  shoal, 
with  15  and  11  feet  within,  and  17  fathoms  outside  this  depth.  From 
this  position,  the  rock  inside  Harbor  l>oint  was  touching  the  point. 

The  soundings  are  extremely  irregular  and  the  ground  foul  iu  the 
East  Passage. 

Harbor  Point  is  about  1^  miles  within  Belles  Amours  Point,  and  on 
the  west  side  is  a  bare  granite  hill,  about  150  feet  high,  with  several 
beacons  of  stones  upon  it,  which  are  erected  upon  almost  every  hill, 
and  are  said  to  be  for  the  guidance  of  travelers  iu  winter.    The  shore 
between  these  points  incloses  a  large  and  shallow  pond,  the  center  of 
which  18  within  Pond  Point.    The  shoal  water  extends  off  on  this  side 
300  yards  from  the  high-water  mark.    Tlie  north  side  of  Harbor  Point 
18  of  sand,  extending  (together  with  a  flat  which  dries  at  low  water) 
partly  across  the  inner  entrance  of  the  harbor.    Between  this  flat  and 
the  high  and  bold  rocky  shore  to  the  northward  the  narrowest  part  of 
the  entrance  of  the  harbor  is  200  yards  wide,  with  «  ftithoms  water  in  it 
over  muddy  bottom.    Northward  of  Harbor  Point,  about  100  yards,' 
there  is  a  small  rock  always  above  water;  at  200  yards  farther  out  in 
the  same  direction  lies  another  small  rock  which  dries  only  at  low  water 
There  is  no  passage  for  vessels  of  any  size  between  these  rocks  ami 
Harbor  Point.    The  entrance  is  to  the  northward  and  westward  round 
these  rocks,  and  between  them  and  the  mainland  to  the  northward. 
On  the  east  side  of  the  entrance  the  shoal  water  and  large  stones 
extend  from  Stony  Point  northward  to  the  point  of  North  Cove,  which 
18  only  fit  for  boats.    That  side  must  therefore  be  avoided. 


22S 


GULP  OP  ST.  LAWRENCE NORTH  COAST. 


iji 


Water  may  bo  obtained  iu  the  NW.  comer  of  Belies  Amours  Har- 
bor, and  also  from  a  considerable  stream  at  the  head  of  North  Cove, 
where  there  are  a  few  trees;  but  wood  for  fuel  is  very  scarce  on  this 

coast. 

Directions.— To  enter  Helles  Amours  Harbor  by  the  eastern  passage, 
steer  N.  48°  W.  (N.  13°  W.  mag.),  so  as  to  pass  i  mile  to  the  westward 
of  the  riat  Uocks.  Continue  this  course  until  the  east  side  of  Harbor 
Point  is  approached  within  200  yards;  then  steer  N.  36°  W.  (north 
mag.)  till  the  sandy  part  of  the  point  is  opened  out,  or  the  vessel  is 
abreast  of  the  rock  above  water  otf  it,  when  she  must  haul  a  little  to 
the  westward,  so  as  to  bring  the  east  side  of  Harbor  Point  and  Pond 
Point  in  one.  Keep  them  in  line,  in  order  to  round  the  north  extreme 
of  the  Hat,  until  Mark  Point  (the  extreme  on  the  west  side  within  the 
harbor)  comes  on  with  Peak  Point  (a  rocky  point  in  Middle  Bay),  seen 
over  the  low  land  at  the  head  of  the  harbor,  and  bearing  8. 52°  W.  (8. 
87°  W.  mag.).  As  soon  as  this  mark  comes  on,  haul  sharp  round  to 
the  westward,  keeping  at  a  less  distance  than  200  yards  ih.m  the  high 
north  shore  until  the  vessel  is  well  within  the  sandy  spit,  when  she  may 
haul  to  the  southward  and  anchor  anywhere,  the  bottom  being  of  mud 
and  the  depth  from  5  to  7  fathoms. 

To  enter  by  the  western  passage,  which  is  preferable  with  a  westerly 
wind,  approach  Belles  Amours  Point  on  a  bearing  nothing  to  the  east- 
ward of  N.  32°  E.  (N.  67°  E.  mag.),  and  take  care  not  to  shut  in  Stony 
Point  behind  it  for  fear  of  Middle  Ledges.  Pass  Belles  Amours  Point 
at  a  distance  of  400  yards,  and  go  no  nearer  the  shore  on  that  side 
until  past  Pond  Point;  then  proceed  as  before  directed.  As  soon  as 
the  marks  come  on  for  hauling  into  the  harbor  to  the  westward,  put 
the  helm  down  and  shoot  the  vessel  in  as  far  as  she  will  go ;  then  let  go 
the  anchor  and  warp  in  the  remainder  of  the  way.  It  i  s  only  with  south- 
easterly winds  that  a  vessel  can  sail  in.  The  bottom  is  good  for  anchor- 
ing outside  Harbor  Point,  but  not  outside  8tony  Point. 

Tides.— It  is  high  water,  tall  and  change,  at  Belles  Amours  Point 
atOh;  springs  rise  4i  feet  and  neaps  2J  feet. 

Middle  Point,  which  has  several  rocks  oflf  it  200  yards  westward 
and  southward,  lies  WSW.  rather  more  than  IJ  miles  from  Belles 
Amours  Point.  The  former  is  the  SW.  and  the  latter  the  8E.  extreme 
of  the  peninsula  of  low  land  separating  Middle  Bay  and  Belles  Amours 

Harbor.  ^^         ,     „ 

Middle  Ledges  lie  southwestward  of  Middle  Point.  8everal  of 
these  ledges  dry  at  low  water,  but  the  outermost,  which  is  1,200  yards 
off  shore,  has  15  feet  least  water  on  it.  There  is  no  safe  passage 
between  these  and  the  shore.  _ 

Five  Leagues  Point,  U  miles  west  from  Middle  Point,  is  the  SW. 
extreme  of  another  low  but  smaller  peninsula,  separating  Five  Leagues 
Harbor  from  Middle  Bay.  On  this  peninsula,  f  mile  N.  by  E.  of  the 
extremity  of  the  point,  there  is  a  remarkable  isolated  and  precipitous 


^inuurH  Har- 
■  North  Cove, 
carce  on  this 

item  passage, 
the  westward 
ide  of  1 1  arbor 
J60  W.  (north 
the  vessel  is 
laiil  a  little  to 
iut  and  Pond 
north  extreme 
ide  withiu  the 
die  Bay),  seen 
;  8. 5'J°  W.  (S. 
;barp  round  to 
from  the  high 
when  she  may 
I  being  of  mud 

rith  a  westerly 
iig  to  the  east- 
shut  in  Stony 
Amours  I'oint 
e  on  that  side 
1.  As  soon  as 
westward,  put 
go;  then  let  go 
Illy  with  south- 
ood  for  anchor- 
Amours  Point 

'ards  westward 
es  from  Belles 
he  SE.  extreme 
Belles  Amours 

ut.  Several  of 
1  is  1,200  yards 
o  safe  passage 

)int,  is  the  SW. 
ig  Five  Leagues 
N.  by  E.  of  the 
and  precipitous 


Mn)nLE    BAY — ISTHMUS   COVE.  220 

ex':rrnK,r::,!  ''''"'•"  """"•  ^  "-"^  """^  »•»"'.  - 

Barrier  Reefs  extend  Ijj  miles  south  westward  of  the  same  point 
but  are  not  .,oi«e.l  to  it.    The  south  extremes  of  Middle  ad  fS 
An.ours  Points  in  line,  bearing  N.  66°  E.  (S.  79°  E.  .nagt  Tead  fmZ 
southward  of  liaiTier  Reefs.  ^'''  ^    "^® 

Middle  Bay  is  a  flue  open  roadstead,  free  from  all  danger,  more  than 
one  mile  wide,  ami  extends  2  miles  t.>  the  northward.    Fof  the  first  mSe 

^^^Z^'^'r'^'^T^'"'''  be  approached  nearer  than  3^' 
yards,  but  farther  m  it  is  quite  bold,  excepting  in  the  heads  of  the  coves 

torn     M  S;.   TT  '"  ''r  ''^^  ''  '••"•"  '  '^  13  fathoms, over  sandy  bo  -' 
ton,.    Middle  Ledge,  and  Barrier  Keefs  are  the  oni;  dangers  in  the 

way  of  vessels  approaching  Middle  Bay  from  the  east  or  we^ 

Anchorage.  -The  usual  anchorage  in  Middle  Bay.  in  easterly  winri« 
js  outside  of  Lsthmus  Cove,  in  10  fathoms,  sand  boVtl  r.^^^^^^^^^^^^ 
Cove  in  westerly  winds,  and  vessels  shift  from  one  to  tl  e  other  as  the 
wind  changes  As  there  are  no  islands  off  this  bay,  and  as  it  s  uffi 
ciently  roomy  for  large  vessels  to  beat  in  and  out,  it  affords  a  very  con' 
venient  occasional  stopping  place  for  vessels.  It  is  Te  onh  open 
roadstead  on  this  coast.  ^     P®" 

dle^?w^  if  r«1 '  h'*"  ft  '*'*  ''^^  "^"  ^"*'"«  ^'^y^  S  '»'•«  -ithin  Mid- 

..•^f-^T  o^*'"^^""*'  ^^®  ^*'"*  distance  farther  in,  on  the  same  side 
ot  Middle  Bay  IS  Peak  Point,  high  and  of  granit;.  Thl  t...  L 
torked,  Its  south  extremity  is  a  ragged,  isolated  mound  or  pea      u.d 

above  wTtfr."''''  "^'  '''  '^^"^"^^  '^^  '''  ^^"'•^'  ^^^  '«  «  ^^  ^^^ 

s  ESE.of  Peak  Point.    It  is  a  small  place,  in  which  two  or  three  tish 
ng  vessels  are  occasionally  moored,  un.ler  a  reef  which  extends  mt 
the  south  side  of  the  cove  northward  towanl  Peak  Point.    Cee 
affords  indifterent  shelter  with  SW.  winds,  w;,i,.h  blow  right  m  vi  i! 
heavy  sea.    The  entrance  between  the  reef  and  Peak  Poi^t  iV  nh     W 

i^':::ti  ::^::  "-^  --'  -  --  ^—  -« ^rHOa ;.;: 

To  enter  Isthmus  Cove,  Peak  Point  must  be  kept  close  aboar,l    uul 
when    he  vessel  is  1(H)  yards  past  it  to  the  east.ar.rhaul  h"     V^^^^ 
rouMd  to  the  southward  between  the  reef  and  the  sho;e     T,^  pa" 
the  cove  which  runs  to  the  northward  of  Peak  Point  is  quit  si  o- 
^X;!^'Lr  rt: -r-^^  narbo^acssthe  low  ^thmu^^t 

dlJTw   ^iTuLT  """'  """^'l'  ''•"  «"^™"-'«'>"  tl.e  west  side  of  Mid- 
die  Baj.    Its  head  ,s  separated  by  a  low  and  swampy  isthmus  from 


■^aF.fc^.-^-^t^«>^V^V^-.-^.^-^.-^<^a>..^^.p..w,|,>,^.y.,|j,,^^^yg,^ 


mmm 


mmmsm^'^mm^mm^^iimm. 


^m'-^^^~i,'f;  V' 


230 


GULF   OP    ST.  LAWRiiNCE NORTH    COAST. 


M 


Five  Leagues  Harbor.  In  the  mouth  of  this  cove,  in  i  fathoms,  is  the 
auchoiiigo  with  westerly  winds.  A  shoal  with  3  fathoms  water  on  it 
lies  300  yards  southward  of  the  north  entrance  point  of  West  Cove. 

-Water  may  be  obtained  in  Isthmus  Cove,  as  well  as  m  the  head  of 
Middle  Bay,  where  there  are  a  few  small  trees. 

Five  Leagues  Harbor  is  altogether  unfit  for  anything  larger  than 
a  schooner  of  100  tons;  it  is  ^  mile  deep,  with  2.^  fathoms  water,  and 
is  -^  mile  nortljwestward  of  Five  Leagues  Point.  SW.  winds  roll  m  a 
considerable  swell,  and  there  would  be  no  lying  there  if  it  were  not  tor 
the  indifferent  shelter  afforded  by  Barrier  Reefs  off  its  mouth.  The 
channels  leading  in  are  about  (iOO  yards  wide,  and  on  either  side  of 
Barrier  Reefs,  either  from  the  southward  through  Kasteru  Entrance, 
between  them  and  Five  Leagues  Point,  or  from  the  westward  through 
Western  Entrance,  between  them  and  the  shore  to  the  northward. 

Directions.— The  course  into  Five  Leagues  Harbor,  through  Eastern 
Entrance,  is  north  (N.  35o  E.  mag.),  passing  200  yards  south  westward 
of  Five  Leagues  Point  and  its  reef.  Two  small  rocks,  which  just  cover 
at  high  water,  lie  southward  of  the  South  Point  of  the  harbor,  which 
is  a  rocky  islet  joined  to  the  shore  when  the  tide  is  out.  The  outer- 
most of  these  rocks  is  320  yards  from  the  point.  Leave  them  both  to 
the  NE.,  passing  between  them  and  the  west  point  of  the  harbor,  which 
is  400  yards  from  them.  As  soon  as  the  vessel  is  past  tiiese  rocks  the 
harbor  will  open  to  the  northeastward,  and  she  must  haul  into  it,  pass- 
ing midway  between  South  Point  and  a  large  rock  above  water,  300 
yards  W.  by  N.  from  the  point.  Anchor  in  the  middle,  200  yards  within 
the  entrance;  for  although  there  is  water  enough  nearly  to  the  head  of 
the  cove,  and  the  anchorage  is  more  secure  farther  in,  yet  it  becomes 
too  narrow  for  a  stranger,  and  would  require  the  vessel  to  be  moored 

head  and  stern. 

To  enter  Five  Leagues  Harbor  by  Western  Entrance,  being  to  the 
westward  of  Barrier  Keefs,  stand  in  to  the  northeastward  till  the  har- 
bor is  seen  to  open,  bearing  nothing  northward  of  N.  45°  B.  (N.  80°  E. 
mag.).  Steer  directly  for  it,  and  as  soon  as  the  vessel  is  within  the 
western  of  Barrier  Reefs,  two  ledges  will  be  seen  just  under  water,  and 
several  small  islets  on  the  side  of  the  mainland.  The  ledges  will  be 
nearly  i  mile  to  the  northwestward,  or  on  the  port  hand,  but  the  course 
will  lead  within  200  yards  of  Bis  Islet,  which  is  by  itself,  (luite  bold,  i 
mile  off  shore,  about  one  mile  from  the  entrance  of  the  harbor,  and 
opposite  the  center  of  the  Barrier  Reefs.  Pass  the  west  point  of  the 
harbor  as  close  as  is  requisite,  continue  the  course  right  in,  and  anchor 
as  before  <lirected. 

There  is  also  a  channel  ^  mile  wide  between  the  two  Barrier  Reefs, 
but  they  overlap  in  such  a  way  as  to  make  it  difhcult  for  a  strangei. 
The  two  reefs  covtu-  an  extent  of  i{  miles  in  a  NE.  direction.  There 
are  parts  of  o  i;-h  of  them  that  dry  at  h)w  water,  and  the  sea  almost 
always  breaks  on  them. 


< 


,thoins,  is  the 
s  water  on  it 
(Vost  Cove, 
u  the  head  of 

g  larger  than 
lis  water,  and 
^inds  roll  in  a 
t  were  not  for 
mouth.    The 
either  side  of 
irn  Entrance, 
ward  through 
wthward. 
rough  Eastern 
on  th  westward 
lich  just  (jover 
harbor,  which 
it.    The  outer- 
)  them  both  to 
!  harbor,  which 
iiese  rocks  the 
il  into  it,  pass- 
ove  water,  .'500 
H)  yards  within 
to  the  head  of 
yet  it  becomes 
1  to  be  moored 

!e,  being  to  the 
rd  till  the  har- 
o  B.  (N.  80°  B. 
el  is  within  the 
ider  water,  and 
J  ledjjes  will  be 
,  but  the  course 
If,  (juite  bold,  ^ 
he  harbor,  aud 
ist  point  of  the 
;  in,  and  anchor 

)  Barrier  Reefs, 

,  for  a  strangei. 

rectiou.    There 

the  sea  almost 


SALMON    HAY — HONNK    K.SPEKAN<'E    IIARUOU. 


?31 


Salmon  Bay.— Salmon  Islet  is  VVSW.  ;].^  miles  from  Five  I.cagiU'S 
Point,  and  lies  <;lose  to  the  SH.  exfrenu;  of  (Jaribou  Island,  off  wliich 
the  shoal  water  extends  nearly  .SOO  yards  eastward.  Caril)ou  Isian.l  is 
l.'2(>  feet  above  the  sea,  but  it  can  not  [u^  distinguislicd  from  the  main- 
land in  a  vessel  off  the  coast.  I'.etwocn  this  islan<l  and  the  mainland 
eastward  of  it  is  the  eastern  entrance  to  Salmon  Hay,  2()(t  yards  wide 
but  with  a  depth  of  only  C  feet  in  it  at  low  water.  The  otlier  entrance 
to  this  deep  bay  is  from  lionne  Hsperance  Hay  nmud  northward  of 
Caribou  Island. 

There  is  plenty  of  water  by  t.  lau.  -..Me,  and  also  in  tii-  h.x, 
winch  runs  inland  several  miles  NNE.;  Imu.  iis  a  vessel  will  be  already 
in  a  harbor  befon^  she  arrives  at  the  navigable  entrance  of  this  bay, 
further  remarks  respecting  it  are  not  ne<essary.  ' 

Caution.— An  inspection  of  tlie  chart  will"  show  that  s(.undin.^s  in 
moderate  depths  of  water  extend  suHicicntlv  far  off  shore  every^v^lere 
between  the  Strait  of  IJelle  Isle  and  Salmon  iiay,  to  warn  a  vessel  of 
her  approach  to  the  (!oast  at  night  or  in  fog^'y  weatiier. 

Esquimaux  Islands.— The  mainland  has  hitherto  fi.rmed  the  coast 
line,  but  at  Salmon  Bay  the  islands  c(mimen<(>.  and  continue  14  miles. 
They  are  of  all  shapes,  sizes,  and  hei-hts  (less  than  200  feet),  and  run 
m  order  westward,  under  the  names  of  l':s(|uimau.\,()ld  Fort,  and  Dog 
Islands.  They  are  bare  of  trees,  (excepting  some  of  tliose  which  are  far 
Ml  near  the  mainland.  Off  these  islands,  lie  many  small  rocks  and 
ledges,  the  outermost  of  which  are  fully  i  ,„iles  from  the  nuiinland 
To  attempt  to  describe  all  of  these  islands,  or  all  the  channels  between 
them,  would  be  useless;  and  a  good,  chart,  upon  a.  large  scale,  will  be 
far  more  useful  than  any  written  description. 

Whale  Island,  the  southeasternmost  of  lOscjuimaux  islamds,  is  the 
southernmost  of  all  the  islands;  and,  in  conse^iueiice,  shows  as  the 
extreme  to  vessels  close  in  with  the  coast,  either  to  t\w  eastward  or 
westward.  It  is  about  'I  mile  long  and  about  {  mile  broad.  It  does 
not  exceed  100  feet  in  height  in  the  highest  part  which  is  a  roun<l  hill 
near  the  center  of  tlie  island,  on  which  there  is  a  conical  beacon  30 
feet  liigh.     (Blown  down,  1,S!»7.) 

All  vessels  bound  to  Bonne  Esperance  Harbor  endeavor  to  nmke  l^his 
island.  Whale  Keef,  comi)iised  of  rocks,  Ix.th  above  and  under  water 
extends  (JOO  yards  off  the  south  point  of  Whale  Island;  but  off  its  north 
j)oint  the  shoal  water  reaches  only  70  yards.  SoTithwest  Led'-e  with  •) 
feet  water,  lies  S.  51o  W.  (S.  85o  W.  mag.),  7(K)  vanls  from  the  SW 
l)oint;  and  there  are  several  rocks,  dry  at  lo\y  water,  h  ing  I'OO  yards 
oH  shore,  on  the  east  side  of  the  same  point. 

Bonne  Esperance  Harbor.— FroTn  Salmon  Islet,  the  south  point  of 
Wl.ale  Island  bears  S.  4r»o  W.  (S.  790  w.  mag.)  4.1  .nilcs.  Within  this 
!ine,  he  the  islands  whi.h  form  Bonne  Esperance  Harbor.  Being  very 
steep,  and  of  bare  granite,  the  largest  of  these  islands  look  much 
higher  than  they  really  are;  an  effect  which  is  also  owing  to  the  eon- 


j*n:^t^»;.,^i^Bw.>*:^i#*i«s 


*>««SMBSKHJia^-i-Wj|(|S^iS(;i«H>r*.a<^i;:-£.^iSiKSJ 


232 


GULF   OF   ST.  LAWRENCE — NORTH    TOAST. 


tiastof  the  inu<;h  lower  islands  westward  of  tlu'iii.    Tliere  are  beacons, 
or  ])ile8  of  stones,  upon  almost  every  suinmit. 

The  Main  Channel  leading  to  this  harbor  is  between  (ioddard  and 
lieacon  Islets;  Goddard  Islet  being  the  westeriiintjst  of  two  low  islets 
joined  by  a  reef  to  the  SW.  extreme  of  Caribou  Island. 

Hold  Rock,  at  the  end  of  a  reef  extending  270  yards  ott"  the  south 
point  of  Goddard  Islet,  is  small,  always  above  water,  and  qHite  bold. 
Goddard  R<»ck,  whieh  is  al.so  small,  and  dries  only  at  low  water,  bears 
S.  340  E.  (south  mag.)  700  yards  from  the  sanu^  itoint.  These  are  the 
only  dangers  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  channel.  On  the  western  side 
Beacon  Islet,  which  is  low,  about  250  yards  long,  and  with  a  pile  of 
stones  on  its  summit,  will  be  seen  bearing  S.  3S''-'  W.  (S.  72°  W.  mag.), 
nerrly  a  mile  from  Goddard  Lslet.  Tail  Islet  lies  (JOO  yards  to  the 
south,  and  Link  and  another  low  islet  to  tlie  northward  of  Beacon  Islet, 
but  they  are  out  of  the  way.  To  the  south  westward  of  Beacon  Islet, 
and  distant  ^  mile,  is  Red  Head  Island,  from  which  Whale  Island  bears 
S.  32°  W.  (S.  fir.o  W.  mag.),  and  is  distant  nearly  a  mile.  Fish  Islet, 
a  large,  low  rock,  lies  south  of  Red  Head  Island. 

Within  Red  Head  Island,  and  lying  in  a  line  to  the  northward,  are 
Cliaiu  and  Bonne  Esperance  Islands,  the  former  being  two  peninsulas, 
joined  together  by  a  narrow  stony  isthmus,  and  the  latter  being  150  feet 
high  and  f  mile  long.  Lion  Island  is  ^  mile  to  the  eastward  of  Bonne 
Esperance  Island,  and  there  is  a  low  islet  and  a  narrow  and  diflicult 
3-fathom  channel  between  them.  Oft"  the  east  side  of  Lion  Island,  and 
at  tl»e  distance  of  KM)  yards,  lies  Whelp  Rock,  always  above  water. 
Between  this  rock  on  the  west  and  Goddard  and  Caribou  Islands  on 
the  east,  may  be  termed  the  inner  entrance  from  the  Main  Clianntjl;  it 
is  900  yards  wide,  and  has  from  10  to  13  fathoms  water,  over  rock,  sand, 
and  mud  bottom. 

Western  Side.— Watch  Rock,  small,  and  always  shows,  lies  i  mile 
northeastward  of  Beacon  Islet,  and  at  the  same  distance  northward  of 
it  and  eastward  of  Link  Islet  lies  Breaking  Ledge,  wliich  just  coveis 
at  high  water.  Tlie  only  other  dangers  are  two  4-fathom  i)atches,  tiie 
easternmost  of  which  (Middle  Patch)  bears  S.  30°  E.  (S.  4°  W.  mag.) 
Ij  mile  from  Beacon  Island,  and  the  other  (Whale  Patch),  N.  72°  E. 
(S.  740  E.  mag.)  3  mile  from  the  beacon  on  Whale  Island,  There  is 
fonl  and  rocky  ground,  with  from  5  to  10  fatiioms  between  these 
patches,  which  may  be  avoided  by  a  vessel  approaching  the  liarbor 
from  the  westward,  by  not  coming  into  a  less  depth  than  10  fathoms 
until  the  leading  marks  for  hauling  into  the  harbor  come  on. 

Wood  and  Water  may  be  had  in  abundance  from  tlie  mainland, 
but  not  from  the  islands. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Bonne  Esperance  Har- 
bor at9h.  15m.;  springs  rise  5  feet,  neaps  2.^  feet. 

Directions  through  Main  Channel.— Being  oil"  tlie  coast  to  the  east- 
ward, and  with  an  easterly  wind,  stand  in  toward  Caribou  Island,  the 


'  are  Iwacons, 

(ioddat-d  and 
two  low  islets 

ott'  the  south 
id  quite  bold. 
r  water,  bears 
riiese  are  the 
)  western  side 
^ith  a  pile  of 
72°  W.  mag.), 
yards  to  the 
Beacon  Islet, 
Beacon  Islet, 
i  Island  bears 
).    Fish  Islet, 

orthward,  are 
vo  peninsulas, 
being  150  feet 
ard  of  Bonne 
iv  and  diilieult 
>n  Island,  and 
above  water, 
on  Islands  on 
n  Channel;  it 
ver  rock,  sand, 

>ws,  lies  ^  mile 
northward  of 
ill  just  covers 
11  ])atches,  the 
\  4°  W.  niag.) 
ch),  N.  720  E. 
ind.  There  is 
)etween  these 
iig  the  harbor 
m  10  fathoms 
>  on. 
the  mainland, 

speratute  II  ar- 

ast  to  the  east- 
m  Island,  the 


HONNK    ESF'ERAXCE    IIAKHOR. 


233 


position  of  which  with  respect  to  Whale  Island  has  been  pointed  out. 
When  at  the  distance  of  .i  mile  from  the  south  side  of  Caribou,  the  ves- 
sel will  be  in  10  fathoms  water,  and  the  south  sides  of  Heacon  and  Bed 
Head  Isles  and  the  north  side  of  Fish  Islet  will  be  seen  to  come  in 
line,  bearing  S.  (JOo  W.  (N.  80o  W.  mag.).  Bear  up  upon  this  leading 
mark,  or,  if  not  sure  of  the  island,  steer  S.  .Wo  W.  (west  nuig.)  witli  tlie 
lead  going  and  a  good  lookout  for  Goddard  liock.  The  deptU  will  be 
abimt  9  fathoms  at  low  water  until  the  vessel  is  past  that  rock,  when 
it  will  deepen  snddenl.v  into  If)  or  10  fathoujs,  and  she  will  then  be  in 
the  channel. 

The  vessel  must  now  haul  in  immediately  N.  20°  W.  (N.  14°  E.  mag.), 
and  Whelp  Rock  will  be  seen  right  ahead,  and  in  line  with  the  west 
side  of  House  Islaiul,  which  is  low,  has  a  house  upon  it,  difiicult  to  be 
seen,  and  lies  close  under  the  nuunland  at  about  a  mile  from  Lion 
Island.  Run  in  upon  this  mark  or  bearing,  ami  when  past  Hold  liock, 
haul  a  little  to  the  eastward,  so  as  to  give  the  Whelp  a  berth  of  200 
yards.  As  soon  as  the  vessel  is  within  this  rock,  bear  up  S.  n'>  W. 
(N.  090  w.  mug.),  and  run  along  the  inner  sides  of  Lion  and  Bonne 
Esperance  Islands,  passing  between  the  latter  and  Anchor  Island  into 
the  harbor,  between  Bonne  Esperance  and  (;rand  Islands,  and  where 
the  depth  is  from  12  to  IG  fathoms,  over  muddy  bottom. 

Being  to  the  westward  with  a  westerly  wind,  pass  the  stmth  point  of 
Whale  Island  at  .^  mile,  steering  none  to  tlie  northward  of  N.  4.->o  K. 
(N.  790  K.  mag.),  to  avoid  the  4-fathoni  patches,  until  Whelp  Rock  and 
the  west  side  of  House  Island  are  brought  in  line  bearing  X.  20^^  W, 
(JSr.  140  E.  mag.) ;  then  haul  in  upon  that  bearing,  and  proceed  as  before, 
excepting  in  case  of  the  wind  not  being  free  enough  to  allow  of -)assing 
between  Bonne  Esperance  aful  Anchor  Islands,  fn  this  case,  a  vessel 
must  go  round  to  the  northward  of  Anchor  Island,  and  must  not  haul 
up  higher  than  N.  01°  W.  (N.  27o  W.  mag.),  nor  dose  in  the  Whelp 
Rock  with  the  SW.  extreme  of  Goddard  Island  until  she  is  past 
Anchor  Reef,  which  covers  at  high  water,  and  lies  400  yards  to  the 
northeastward  of  Anchor  Island,  and  is  the  only  detached  danger 
within  the  bay. 

\Vhelp  Rock,  in  line  with  the  west  extreme  of  Goddard  Island,  clears 
the  shoal  water  round  this  reef  at  the  distance  of  100  yards.  As  soon 
as  Anchor  Reef  is  passed,  a  vessel  may  haul  to  the  wiml,  and  minding 
that  shoal  water  extends  300  yards  northward  of  Grand  Island  (the 
high  and  large  island  nevtwestward  of  Bonne  Esperance  Island),  she 
may  make  a  tack  into  tlie  harbor  or  anchor  anywhere  in  the  bay,  where, 
although  the  depth  of  water  is  inconveniently  gr<'at.  yet  the  bottom  is 
everywhere  of  mud,  and  the  shelter  complete  in  all  winds.  In  short, 
tlie  whole  of  Bonne  Esperance  Hay  may  be  considered  as  a  harboi',  in 
which  there  is  room  for  a  fleet  of  ships  of  large  size. 

Shallop  Channel.— Tiie  outer  channels  into  Bonne  Ksjjerance  Har- 
bor require  only  a  brief  notice.    Shallop  Channel,  between  Bonne 


..<u.^AMK^*.>.aii..^.;^^.--^;AH».^>ri=^,,^^w:i^.....,^  ^.  ^  |--iYi'i"iin^iiiriii|il:»iiiiiiiii 


ipii 


*'^^-'.''^.* 


m 


wmmm 


234 


OULF  OF  ST.  LAWKKNCE — NORTH  COAST. 


!«' 


Espomiuu^  aiul  (iiand  Islaixls,  is  very  narrow,  and  lias  only  '2  tiitlioins 
in  it  nt  low  wattM-.  It  may  bo  approached  t'roiu  either  side  of  Wiiale 
iHland,  passiii}^  I-'ish  Islet,  and  then  keepinjf  the  western  sides  of  Red 
Head,  Cliain,  and  Bonne  Hsperanee  Islands  close  aboard  into  tlio 
harbor. 

Esquimauz  Channel  h'ads  diretM  to  the  eacttern  entrance  of  ICstpii 
maiix  Hay;  it  should  be  ai)pioaclied  through  Whale  (!haniiel,  between 
Whale  and  Tent  Islamls.  the  latter  island  beinji  the  next  westward  ot 
the  former.     Wiiale  Channel  is  '^  mile  wide,  and  has  a  depth  of  from  10 
to  I>>  fathoms  water. 

Tlie  course  throufjli  the  center  of  Whale  Channel  to  the  entrance  of 
Esquimaux  Channel  is  N.  -to  H.  (N.  .'$8^  K.  mag.).  Ksqniiiiaiix  t'lmnnel 
is  between  iJrand  and  Fair  Islands  on  the  east,  and  Sjiit  and  Stone 
Islands  on  the  west;  between  the  inner  ishinds  (Fair  and  Stone)  is  the 
narrowest  part,  only  loO  yards  wide,  and  with  o  fathoms  water.  In 
passing  through  this,  the  equally  narrow  entrance  to  Es(iuinniii\  Hay 
will  be  seen,  and  the  vessel  must  stand  close  over  to  it  belbre  she  hauls 
to  the  eastward  through  Northwest  Channel  into  iSonne  Fsperance 
Hay.  Then  keeping  within  200  yards  of  the  main  shore,  to  avoid  the 
shoal  which  extends  from  Fair  Island  fully  halfway  across  the  chan- 
nel, she  should  steer  for  the  south  side  of  the  small  and  high  Star 
Island,  and  ])assing  (dose  to  it,  continue  her  course  toward  Anchor 
Island  till  past  the  shoal,  which  extends  400  yards  oft"  Grand  Island, 
when  she  may  haul  to  southward  into  the  harbor.  Fsquiniaux  Chan- 
nel is  the  only  other  besides  Main  Channel  which  has  water  enough 
for  large  vessels,  but  it  is  too  narrow  for  vessels  of  ordinary  si/e, 
excepting  in  cases  of  emergency. 

West  Channel,  lying  between  Spit  and  Stone  Islands  (m  the  (;a8t, 
and  Esquimaux  Island  proper  on  the  west,  has  a  bar  with  only' 2 
fathoms  water  across  from  Stone  Island  to  a  i)oint  on  the  western  side 
of  the  east  entrance  to  Esquimaux  Bay. 

Esquimaux  Bay. — Esquimaux  Island  lies  in  the  nuaith  of  I'^ctqui- 
niaiix  Bay.  There  are  many  islands  outside  of  it,  and  it  can  not  be 
distinguished  from  the  mainland  in  a  vessel  off  the  coast. 

The  eastern  entrance  to  Esquimaux  Bay  is  by  a  very  narrow  channel 
between  the  island  and  mainland  to  the  eastward.  This  channel  con- 
tinues for  li  miles  northward,  and  then  opens  i^ito  a  wide  space  with 
two  islets  in  it.  But  if  the  mainland  to  the  ea.'-tward  be  followed,  it 
will  lead  to  the  entrance  of  Esquimaux  itiver,  where  a  house  and  trad- 
ing post  will  be  seen  on  a  sandy  ]»oint,  backed  with  spruce  trees  on  the 
west  side,  and  rather  more  than  2  miles  from  Esquimaux  Island.  The 
river  is  navigated  by  canoes  for  many  miles  inland,  and  abounds  with 
salmon. 

Only  small  schooners  can  pass  through  the  narrow  channel  between 
Esquimaux  Island  and  the  main  to  the  eastward,  but  there  is  water 
enough  for  larger  vessels  westward  of  the  island.    The  chart  must  be 


Bi 


OLD    FORT    BAY   AND   CH ANNUL. 


285 


y  w  t'iithoiiis 
le  of  Wliiile 
lirtes  of  H(mI 
'(I    into   tlio 

ce  of  Hstiui- 
nel,  Imtweeii 
wt'stwiinl  ot 
liof  troiii  10 

eiitniiice  of 
tjix  ('Ir.iiinel 
t  Hiul  StOlU! 
Stoiio)  i.s  tlioi 
*  water.  In 
uiniiinx  itay 
re  Hlie  liaiils 
i  K.sporance 
to  avoid  tiie 
<s  tlie  cliiiii- 
i)  liigli  Star 
ard  Anclior 
rand  Island, 
inianx  Chan- 
ater  enough 
ilinary  size, 

on  the  <;a8t, 
^vith  only' 2 
sT^estern  aide 

th  of  I'^rttjui- 
t  can  not  be 

•row  channel 
channel  con- 
B  space  with 
I  followed,  it 
iKe  and  trad- 
trees  on  the 
Island.  The 
bounds  with 

luel  between 
ere  is  water 
lart  must  be 


referred  to  for  this  route,  for  it  would  bequitc^  impossible  to  convey  any 
intelligible  idea  of  such  an  intricate  navi{,'ati()n  tlirou};li  such  a  nnilti 
tude  of  isliMids. 

There  is  a  channel  with  ."{  fathoms  water  in  tiie  shallowest  pint, 
and  in  {jeiieral  with  a  ;ji-eat  depth  of  water,  between  the  islands  and 
the  main,  from  llonno  l-lsperance  Hiiv  to  Mistano(pie  Harbor;  i»iit  it 
can  only  be  shown  <»n  a  chart  upon  a  large  scale;  no  written  descrip- 
tion would  be  of  any  avail. 

Old  Fort  Bay. — Kort  H(M!ks  arc  a  number  <»f  low  rocks  extending 
nearly  a  mile  southward  from  the  soutii  point  of  <  Hd  Fort  Island,  which 
is  of  a  very  moderat*-  height,  and  about  1.]  milea  in  diameter,  l-'rom 
this  island  a  number  of  snuiller  islands  extend  northward  into  tiie 
mouth  of  Esquinuiux  Hay.  There  are  also  a  number  of  .steep  and  hijyh 
islands  extending  north westwiird  from  Old  Fort  Islaiul  across  the  bay 
of  the  same  name.  There  are  deep-water  channels  leading  to  Old 
Fort  Bay  between  the  islands  last  mentioned,  but  too  intricate  lor  a 
written  description  to  be  useful. 

Old  Fort  Channel  leads  in  from  sea  between  the  Fort  liocks  and 
Mermot  Islet,  and  farther  in  between  Old  F'ort  Island  and  (Jhannel 
Island,  which  last,  together  with  (-rund)  Island  to  the  northward, 
must  be  kept  close  aboanl  until  a  vessel  is  in  the  wide  and  open  si)ace 
within  the  islands  and  oft'  the  mouth  of  Old  Fort  Bay.  This  wide 
opening  through  the  outer  i.slands  is  the  only  navigable  one  Ix'sides 
Whale  (Channel.  Through  it  vessels  may  run  in  between  the  islands  in 
the  way  just  mentioned,  or  westward  between  the  Dog  Islands  and  ihe 
main ;  but  this  must  be  left  to  the  chart  to  explain.  In  sonu>  ]>lace8 
between  the  islands  there  is  more  than  oO  fathoms  water,  and  the  nearer 
the  main  the  fewer  the  ledges. 

Dog  Islands.— Northwestward  of  Mermot  Islet  is  the  Kider  (Jronp, 
and  westward  of  them  the  Dog  Islands,  surrounded  by  roitks  and 
innumerable  ledges.  The  southwesternmost  of  the  Dog  Islands  are 
very  low,  but  the  highest  islands  next  the  main,  although  small,  are  of 
cousidorable  elevation.  There  is  good  anchorage  between  them  and 
the  main,  but  it  cah  only  be  got  at  easily  by  running  down  with  a  west- 
erly wind  from  Shecatica  Island,  close  along  the  mainland,  and  in  the 
channel  between  the  latter  atul  the  scattered  rocks  and  ledges  which 
lie  oflf  it,  where  there  is  very  deep  water  the  whole  way. 

Porpoise  Rocks,  the  southernmost  of  which  is  l.|  miles  from  the 
shore,  are  three  small  black  nx^ks  above  watei-,  lying  S.  78"  W.  (X.  ((8° 
W.  mag.)i  4  mili-s  i'lom  the  outermost  of  J>og  Islands,  and  an  equal 
distance  in  the  same  direction  to  the  I'.oulet.  A  sunken  rock  lies-  \ 
nnle  westward  of  the  northerinnost  rock,  and  a  shoal  with  3i  fathoms 
water  over  it  lies  ||  mile  N.  42°  E.  (X.  70°  K.  mag.)  from  the  southern- 
most rock 

The  Boulet,  about  250  yaTds  in  diameter,  is  a  smooth  round  islet, 
green  at  the  top,  and  about  70  feet  iu  height.    Together  with  the  opeu- 


i 


iw^itfWfftiWnnwi.'^ 


286 


OULK   OV   8T.  LAWRKNCK — NORTH    COAHT. 


luK  t«»  lx)b8tcr  Hiiy,  wliicli  is  N.  ;»(P  K.  (N.  7(r  K.  un\t£.)  1  j  inileH  fiom 
it,  it  Horvefi  to  point  out  tlm  position  of  h  v«<»so1  oft'  tii«  const.  Cnili 
Island  is  J  mile  WNVV.  from  it,  and  Four  IIocUh  (within  which  is  Inner 
Islet)  3  miles  WSW.  These  are  the  only  islets  between  it  and  Sheca 
ti(;a  Island;  but  there  are  nnwiy  r<)(!ks  and  ledges  between  tlieni,  and 
also  off  the  Bonlet  to  seaward. 

Peril  Rock,  which  is  very  small,  dries  at  half  tide,  and  lies  U  ndles  8. 
1-0  H.  (S.  2'2^  W.  maK.)  from  the  Bonlet,  is  the  outermost  and  greatest 
<langer  of!"  this  part  of  the  coast;  the  sea,  however,  almost  always 
breaks  upon  it,  and  also  upon  the  others  which  lie  between  it  and  Four 
Kocks.  There  is  m)  warning  by  the  hand  lead  in  a|iproaching  any  of 
these  rocks. 

Rocky  Bay,  one  nule  eastward  of  Lobster  Bay,  extends  NNE.  li^ 
miles,  and  is  about  250  yards  wide,  between  steep  and  high  rociky 
sliores.  There  are  M  fathoms  water  in  its  entrance,  but  the  «lepth  soon 
<liminishes  to  Hi  fathoms,  and  then  shoals  gradually  t(»  its  head.  One 
mile  within  the  entrance,  on  the  SK.  side,  there  is  a  house  and  fish 
stage  at  a  Hnmll  cove  in  which  small  vessels  anchor  in  5  fathoms,  mud 
bottom,  well  sheltered  from  all  winds.  A  small  stream  enters  the  head 
ol'this  bay. 

Lobster  Bay  is  a  narrow  inlet  extending  4  miles  N.  by  E.,  and  (luite 
open.  1 1  is  about  400  yards  wide,  between  high  and  steep  rocky  shores. 
In  the  entrance  there  is  a  depth  of  35  fathoms  water,  diminishing  to  14 
fathoms  halfway  up;  after  which  there  is  anchorage  quite  to  the  head, 
with  muddy  bottom  everywhere,  but  it  is  completely  exposed  to  SSW. 
winds.  Several  very  small  streams  enter  the  head  of  the  inlet.  There 
are  two  small  islets  close  off  the  east  point  of  the  entrance  of  Lobster 
Bay;  a  vessel  must  pass  westward  of  them  in  going  in. 

Napetepee  Bay  is  a  straight  and  narrow  inlet,  very  similar  to  Lob- 
ster Bay.  Its  entrance  is  abont  1;^  miles  northward  of  the  Four  Rocks, 
whi(!h,  together  with  the  Inner  Islet  just  within  them,  must  be  leftto 
the  eastward  in  apj)roaching  this  bay.  In  entering  Napetepee»Bay  a 
\essel  must  i)ass  200  yards  westward  of  some  rocks  above  Avater,  lying 
just  within  the  numth  of  tiie  bay.  At  U  miles,  within  the  entrance, 
tliere  is  a  small  islet;  pass  westward  of  it,  when  the  east  shore  nmst  be 
kept  close  aboard  until  througli  the  Narrows.  Several  small  streams 
run  into  tliis  bay,  but  the  principal  stream  is  on  the  east  side,  '<^  mile 
IVom  itis  head,  and  is  the  outlet  of  a  considerable  lake,  which  can  not 
c.isily  be  entered  by  boat  excepting  at  high  water.  A  river  abounding 
with  salmon  enters  this  lake. 

Directions. — The  three  bays  just  described  have  no  dangers  in  tbeni, 
but  they  are,  nevertheless,  by  no  means  desirable  |)laces  for  vessels  to  go 
into,  being  so  narrow  and  having  such  deep  water.  Besides,  a  sailing 
A'essel  can  not  get  out  of  them  without  a  northerly  wind,  which  in  the 
summer  n^onths  seldom  occurs.  Tvobster  and  IJocky  Bays  are  prefer- 
able to  Napetepee,  and  the  safe  and  proper  way  of  approaching  them 


'■HH||I_MJ.I 


NAl'ETEPEE    MAY — MlSTANfUiUR    HAKHOR. 


287 


iiiileH  from 
Diist.  Crab 
icli  in  Inner 
nnd  ShncH- 
1  tlieni,  and 

»  H  inihvs  S. 
.ml  greatest 
lONt  always 
it  and  Four 
liinji;  any  of 

Is  NNE,  1^ 
high  ro(!ky 
dei)fh  soon 
head.  One 
86  and  fish 
bhoms,  mud 
rs  the  head 

.,  and  <|uite 
tcky  shores, 
iahing  to  14 

0  the  liead, 
Bd  to  SSW. 
let.    There 

1  of  liobster 

ilar  to  Lob- 
''our  Rocks, 
st  be  left,  to 
epee«Haj'  a 
rater,  lying 
e  entrance, 
ore  must  be 
all  streams 
side,  '<^  mile 
id)  can  not 
abounding 

irs  in  them.  ' 
essels  to  go 
s,  a  sailing 
hicli  in  the 
are  prefer- 
shing  them 


is  from  the  westward,  with  a  westerly  wind,  passing  inshore  between 
Sheeatica  and  the  Four  Hocks,  and  then  (>iistwar(l  close  along  the  main 
land. 

The  Innor  Channel,  between  Uu^  islets  an<l  the  mainland,  is  m>t 
less  than  (MM)  yards  wide,  and  the  depth  «tf  water  is  from  Mi  to  4.S  falh 
oms,  over  muddy  bottom.  This  deep  water  cliannel,  elose  along  the 
mainland,  free  from  all  dangers,  continues  eastward  ail  the  way  to  the 
Dog  Islands.  Vessels  might  pass  between  the  latter  and  the  I'lU'imise 
Hocks  in  clear  weather,  when  shoal  water  ((mid  be  readily  seen,  and 
when  there  is  a  sea  running  heavy  en(mg]i  to  break  u|ion  the  ledges, 
but  the  other  is  the  safer  plan  of  proceeding. 

Coast— The  NK.  point  of  Sheeatica  Island  lies  west  1,',  miles  from 
Four  Hocks.  The  njainland  from  Dog  Islands  t(t  Sheeatica  Island  is  of 
steep  granitic  hills  (not  exceeding  300  feet  in  height),  with  deep  water 
close  into  the  rocks,  and  with  only  the  few  small  islets  and  ledges  off  it 
which  have  been  mentioned. 

Sheeatica  and  Mistanoque  lie  ch)se  to  the  mainland,  and  would  be 
diHl(!ultt(»  distinguish  from  it  if  it  were  not  for  the  Boulet  and  the 
opening  of  Napetepee  to  the  eastward,  and  the  Shag  lsl.;t  to  the  south- 
westward.  Sheeatica  is  the  eastern,  the  smaller,  and  the  higher  island 
of  the  two,  being  J  mile  long  and  ir>0  feet  high. 

Mistano(iue  Island,  separated  from  Sheeatica  by  au  uunavigable 
channel  300  yards  wide,  is  nearly  1^  miles  long,  parallel  to  the  coast; 
broken  into  coves  on  the  outside,  and  in  the  highest  part  120  feet  above 
the  sea.  It  lies  across  the  entrance  to  Mistanoque  Bay,  the  mouth 
of  which  is  about  300  yards  wide,  with  a  depth  of  23  fathoms  in  the 
entrance,  expands  to  the  breadth  of  .5rj()  yards  within,  and  runs  inland, 
rather  more  than  3  miles  northward.  It  is  not  until  a  vessel  arrives 
within  less  than  A  mile  of  its  head  that  the  depth  decreases  so  as  to  be 
convenient  for  anchoring.  The  bottom  is  everywhere  of  mud;  there 
are  no  dangers,  and  wood  and  water  are  plentiful. 

Mistanoque  Harbor,  directly  opposite  the  mouth  of  ;  ■  e  bay,  is  a 
small  bay  on  the  north  side  of  Mistanoque  Island,  in  which  the  depth 
is  from  15  to  20  fathoms,  mud  bottom.  Vessels  may,  however,  anchor 
in  less  water  a  short  distance  eastward,  between  the  is' aul  and  the  east 
point  of  the  bay,  where  the  depth  is  12  fathoms,  but  tie  channel  is  there 
only  160  yards  wide.    Vessels  must  moor  in  any  case. 

Mistanoque  Harbor,  though  small  and  with  inconveniently  deep 
water,  is  nevertheless  a  valuable  harbor  on  a  coast  where  good  ports, 
tit  for  large  vessels,  are  so  scarce.  The  absence  of  dangers  outside,  the 
easy  and  immediate  access,  in  either  of  the  prevailing  winds,  in  conse- 
quence of  its  having  two  entrances,  are  advantages  possessed  by  none 
of  the  other  small  harbors  to  the  westward,  which  may  be  equal  to  it 
in  other  respects. 

Enter  Island  lies  nearly  A  mile  southwestward  of  Mistanoque  Island, 
and  100  yards  farther  is  Diver  Island,  from  which  a  reef  of  rocks  extends 


i 


m 


^  -yi  ;-ii.ii.  ^  i,vii  itOiKM  *s; 


iMi 


238 


GULF  OF  ST.  LAWRENCE — NORTH  COAST. 


1' 

m, 


'a' 
I' 


l§ 


I 


270  yards  southward.  Both  these  islands  are  low.  Northwest  of 
them  S«K>  yards  lies  a  f>roup  of  small  islands.  West  Passage  to  Mista- 
no(iue  liay  is  between  this  group  and  Diver  and  Enter  Islands. 

Directions. — There  is  nothing  immediately  outside  or  oft"  Shecatioa, 
Mistauoque,  Enter,  or  Jiiver  Islands,  so  that  no  other  directions  seen. 
necessary  than  to  run  through  the  center  of  either  passittje  which  may 
be  preferred.  South  Passage,  between  Enter  Island  and  the  west  shore 
of  MistaniMjue  Island,  is,  however,  the  best  channel,  being  800  yards 
wide,  witVi  upward  of  40  fathoms  water  in  it,  and  bold  to  the  rocks  on 
either  side.  On  arriving  at  West  Passage,  which  is  about  100  yards 
wide,  with  0  fathoms  water  in  it,  give  the  NW.  point  of  Mistanoque 
Island  a  berth  of  100  yards  or  keep  well  over  to  the  mainland  side  of 
the  entrance;  but  as  soon  as  the  vessel  has  entered  this  narrow  chan- 
nel, keep  IMistanoque  Island  aboard,  because  there  is  shoal  water  ott' 
the  west  side  of  the  entrance  of  the  bay  to  the  distan<'e  of  00  yards. 

In  entering  from  the  eastward.  East  Passage  between  Shecatica 
Island  and  Four  Rocks,  which  are  quite  bold,  is  more  than  one  mile  wide, 
with  very  deep  water;  but  the  NE.  point  of  Shecatica  Island  must  be 
given  a  berth  of  200  yards  until  the  channel  between  it  and  the  main 
opens,  bearing  S.  78°  W.  (N.  68°  W.  mag.),  tor  there  are  rocks  off"  that 
point  to  the  distance  of  00  fathoms.  The  XW.  point  of  Shecatica 
Island  (on  which  there  is  the  hut  of  a  seal  fisherman)  must  be  kei)t 
close  aboard,  within  the  distance  of  20  or  30  yards,  for  there  is  shoal 
water  across  a  very  small  bay  of  the  main  opposite  to  it.  The  channel 
here  being  only  60  yards  wide  and  having  only  3  fathoms  water  in  it, 
this  East  Passage  is  only  fit  for  small  vessels. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Mistanoque  Harbor  at 
lOh.  30m. ;  springs  rise  0  feet  and  neaps  3  feet. 

Shag  Islet,  bearing  S.  44°  W.(3.  78°  W.  mag.),  7A  miles  from  Mista- 
noque, is  the  best  guide  for  making  the  latter  fiom  the  westward,  as  the 
Boulet  is  from  the  eastward.  Shag  Islet  is  small  and  high,  with  a 
round  peaked  hill  looking  green  in  the  middle.  There  are  many  rocks 
off  to  the  eastward  of  this  islet,  the  outermost  of  which,  distant  from 
the  islet  2  miles,  is  Shag  Rock. 

Coast. — The  coast  between  Mistanoque  and  Oape  Mcattina  is  broken 
into  large  bays  and  inlets,  between  large  islands  of  moderate  height 
above  the  sea,  and  partially  covered  with  moss.  Many  smaller  islands, 
islets,  and  rocks  are  inter8i)ersed,  and  outside  all  the  coast  is  lined  with 
sm  all  ■  slets,  rocks,  or  ledges,  in  groups,  or  scattered  here  and  there.  The 
greatest  difficulty  is  to  pass  safely  through  between  the  last,  for  within  the 
islands,  in  most  of  the  channels  and  wide  spaces  between  them,  as  well 
as  in  the  bays  of  the  mainland,  there  is  a  great  depth  of  water,  amount- 
ing in  one  or  two  jjlaces  to  50  or  GO  and  often  exceeding  30  fathoms. 
In  these  deep-water  channels  and  bays,  which  are  so  intricate  as  to 
prevent  any  attempt  at  a  written  description,  small  rocks  are  not  nearly 
so  numerous  as  they  are  outside,  and  are  for  the  most  part  above  water. 

From  Shecatica  Bay  to  Ua-IIa  Bay  the  mainland  does  not  ai)pear,  as 


im£ 


p. 

Northwest  of 
isage  to  Mista- 
sliinds. 

'  oft"  Shecatica, 
irectious  see'u 
*tje  which  may 

the  west  shore 
mtg  800  yards 
to  the  rocks  on 
bout  100  yards 
of  Mistanoque 
liulaiid  side  of 
s  narrow  chau- 
shoal  water  off 

of  00  yards, 
reen  ShecatiiJii 
1  one  mile  wide, 
[sland  must  be 
t  and  the  main 
i  rocks  off  that 
t  of  Shecatica 
)  must  be  kei)t 
'  there  is  shoal 
.  The  channel 
ims  water  in  it, 

Kjue  Harbor  at 

les  from  Mista- 
estward,  as  the 
d  high,  with  a 
ire  many  roeks 
h,  distant  from 

ittina  is  broken 
oderate  heiglit 
smaller  islands, 
ast  is  lined  with 
md  there.  The 
t,  for  within  tlie 
in  them,  as  well 
water,  amount- 
ing 30  fathoms. 
•  intricate  as  to 
save  not  nearly 
irt  above  water. 
s  not  appear,  as 


CUMnEKLAND    HARBOR PORT    ST.  AUGUSTINE. 


239 


the  islands,  great  and  small,  and  of  diffen-nt  heightsabove  thesea,  arc 
so  numerous  and  so  near  together  that  tlie  coast  can  not  he  <listin- 
guished  till  a  vessel  is  among  them. 

Cumberland  Harbor,  the  entrance  to  which  is  between  (Jumberland 
Island  on  the  east  and  Dukes  Island  on  tlie  west,  is  known  by  a  hiyh  iiill 
on  the  mainland  about  10^  miles  NNVV.  from  tlie  entrance.  Tliat  hill 
is  the  highest  in  the  neigliborhood,  and  resembles  a  castle  at  the  top, 
having  steep  cliffs  like  walls.  The  islands  forming  the  harbor  are  of 
moderate  height,  the  easternmost  making  in  two  round  hills.  This  is 
an  excellent  harbor,  the  best  and  easiest  of  access  on  the -coast,  (lood 
water  can  be  had  in  plenty  on  the  east  side  of  the  harbor,  but  for  wood 
you  must  go  ui>  Shecatica  Bay,  which  lies  3  or  4  miles  northeastward 
of  the  harbor,  and  runs  inland  to  the  northward  many  miles. 

Directions.— Cumberland  Harbor  should  be  approached  from  be- 
tween Shag  liock  and  Three  Rocks.  There  is  no  danger  in  the  way 
but  what  appears  above  water,  excepting  a  small  rock  lying  S.  L'3o  K. 
(S.  11°  W.  mag.),  rather  more  than  4  mile  from  tiie  west  point  of 
entrance,  which  is  about  400  yards  wide.  As  soon  as  the  vessel  is  within 
its  outer  points,  haul  over  to  the  west  sfde,  and  run  along  it  to  the 
inner  point  on  that  side,  which  is  N.  52°  W.  (N,  18°  W.  mag.)  about  ^ 
mile  from  the  outer  east  point  of  entrance.  As  soon  as  she  arrives 
there  she  m.iy  haul  to  the  eastward  and  an(;hor  anywhere  in  from  7  to 
liO  fathoms  of  water  over  good  ground. 

Sandy  Harbor,  on  the  southern  shore  of  bandy  Island,  is  a  safe 
harbor,  with  good  ground. 

Water.— There  is  no  wood  to  be  had  in  Sandy  Harbor,  but  plenty  of 
water. 

Directions.— On  approaching  Sandy  Harbor  there  are  two  ledges 
nnder  water  to  be  avoided.  The  first  of  these  bears  S.  56°  W.  (west 
mag.)  from  Shag  Rock,  and  S.  34°  K.  (south  m&g.)  from  Shag  Island, 
being  distant  from  the  latter  one  mile.  The  second  bears  S.  43^  E.  (S. 
!)o  E.  mag.),  nearly  a  mile  from  the  east  side  of  ICgg  Rocks,  and  S.  Gfi^ 
W.  (N.  80°  W.  mag.)  from  the  .summit  of  Shag  Island.  A  small  reef  with 
shoal  water  extends  J  mile  from  Shag  Island  toward  this  ledge,  leaving 
a  deep  channel  between  more  than  |J  mile  wide.  The  course  through 
the  center  of  this  channel,  direct  for  the  SW.  extreme  of  Duke  Island, 
is  N.  40°  W.  (N.  6°  W.  mag.). 

To  enter  this  liarbor,  pass  to  the  eastwaid  of  lOgg  Rocks  and  keep 
tlie  SW.  extreme  of  Duke  Island,  which  bears  N.  10°  E.  (N.  44°  E. 
mag.)  more  than  4  mile  from  Egg  Rocks,  aboard  on  going  in.  A  small 
rock  will  then  be  seen  above  water  to  the  northwestward,  lying  over 
toward  the  east  side  of  the  entrance  of  the  harbor.  Pass  on  either  side 
of  that  rock,  and  then  steer  in  for  the  harbor,  there  being  nothing  in  the 
way  but  what  appears. 

Port  St.  Augustine  is  a  little  harbor  in  which  small  vessels  may 
moor.  It  has  a  very  narrow  and  intricate  entrance,  and  is  lit  for  small 
craft  only.     The  approach  to  it  is  westward  of  St.  Augustine  Chain, 


« 


rt»  ii--t  'rt*-  >  '4«4iaiM  a-^wtiiaff  •«MtM»Q«w>d£A^'k, « 


,-Jl- 


,*] 


240 


GULP   OP   HT.  LAWRENCE — NORTH   COAST. 


which  is  a  chain  of  small  islets,  the  outermost  of  which  is  a  rouml 
smooth  rock,  with  a  high  bhick  rock  ^  mile  westward  of  it.  Between 
these  last-named  rocks  there  is  a  ledge,  which  shows  at  one-third  ebb. 
The  passage  is  on  either  side  of  this  ledge,  and  then  northward  along 
the  west  side  of  St.  Augustine  Chain,  but  it  deserves  no  further 
description. 

St.  Augustine  River. — The  south  extremity  of  St.  Augustine  Chain 
bears  S.  56°  W.  (S.  89°  W.  mag.)  about  7  miles  from  Shag  Island. 
Between  them  lies  Square  Channel,  the  largest  between  the  islands, 
toward  the  mainland.  The  channel  is  too  intricate  for  description,  but 
15  miles  up  it  in  a  WNW.  direction  is  the  entrance  of  St.  Augustine 
River. 

St.  Augustine  River  is  a  stream  of  (considerable  length,  and  empties 
into  a  bay  full  of  rocky  islands.  Its  mouth  is  full  of  shifting  sand 
banks.  Schooners  anchor  in  St.  Augustine  Harbor,  outside  the  river, 
3  miles  below  the  Hudson  Bay  Company's  post.  The  river  is  formed  of 
two  branches — the  NW.  branch  and  the  NB.,  or  main  river,  which 
receives  the  tributary  river,  ^ux  Mouches.  At  the  latter  end  of  June 
salmon  ascend  the  main  river  to  a  distance  of  80  miles  above  the  first 
rapids.  The  Aux  Mouches  is  also  visited  every  fall  by  a  large  number 
of  fish  resorting  thereto  ibr  the  purpose  of  spawning.  Both  branches 
are  easily  ascended  in  fiats  or  canoes,  but  the  river  sometimes  falls  very 
low  in  summer.    There  is  plenty  of  wood  at  this  river. 

Eagle  Harbor,  in  Long  Island,  has  room  and  depth  enough  for  large 
ships  within,  but  the  entrances  are  too  narrow  for  anything  but  small 
vessels.  The  east  passage,  between  the  islets  which  form  the  hai'bor 
and  Long  Island,  bears  about  N.  12'^  W.  (N".  21°  E.  mag.)  2^  miles  from 
Fox  Islands,  and  is  the  best  and  deepest,  but  has  only  3  fathoms  water. 
This  part  of  the  coast  is  dangerous,  being  lined  with  small  low  islets 
and  rocks,  both  above  and  under  water,  and  nothing  but  a  chart  upon 
a  large  scale  would  enable  anyone  to  find  Eagle  Harbor.  The  approach 
to  it,  however,  is  on  either  side  of  Fox  Islands,  which  are  SW.  by  W. 
about  14  miles  from  St.  Augustine  Chain. 

Ha-Ha  Bay. — Seal  Point  is  the  west  entrance  point  of  Ha  Ha  Bay. 
The  islands  to  the  eastward  contract  the  channel  into  this  bay  to  the 
breadth  of  about  J  mile,  but  there  is  plenty  of  water,  and  no  danger 
but  what  appears  above  water.  The  best  channel  is  close  along  the 
mainland,  between  Seal  Point  and  Round  Islet,  leaving  all  the  islets 
and  rocks  to  the  eastward.  The  bay  runs  in  north  about  8  miles,  with 
a  depth  of  water  exceeding  60  fathoms  in  one  part,  and  there  are  many 
good  anchoring  places,  but  it  is  entirely  out  of  the  way  of  vessels. 

Fish  Harbor. — At  4^  miles  NE.  ^  N.irom  Boule  Islet,  at  the  north 
extreme  of  Great  Mecattina  Island,  is  a  small  cove  of  the  mainland 
running  in  to  the  south  westward,  with  an  islet  covered  with  wood, 
called  Wood  Island,  lying  off'  its  entrance.  There  is  a  passage  on 
either  side  of  Wood  Island,  but  that  northward  is  the  best,  there  being 


.*] 


GREAT   MECATTINA    ISLAND. 


241 


is  a  round 
t.  Between 
e-third  ebb. 
iward  along 

no  further 

istine  Chain 
hag  Island, 
the  islands, 
jriptiou,  but 
.  Augustine 

ind  empties 
lifting  Band 
le  the  river, 
is  formed  of 
'iver,  which 
end  of  June 
ove  the  first 
irge  number 
til  branches 
es  falls  very 

igh  for  large 
ig  but  small 
1  the  hai'bor 
i  miles  from 
homs  water, 
ill  low  islets 
,  chart  upon 
he  approach 
SW.  by  W. 

Ha  Ha  Bay. 
R  bay  to  the 
I  no  danger 
e  along  the 
.11  the  islets 
\  miles,  with 
re  are  many 
vessels, 
it  the  north 
le  mainland 
with  wood, 
passage  on 
there  being 


a  ledge  in  the  bay  southward  of  the  island,  part  of  which,  however, 
always  shows,  and  a  rock  with  3  feet  least  water,  S.  62°  E.  (S.  29o  W, 
mag.),  nearly  i  mile  from  the  east  point  of  Wood  Island.  In  the  cove 
there  are  7  or  8  fathoms,  with  good  ground  and  room  to  moor.  It  is, 
however,  only  fit  for  small  vessels.  Both  wood  and  water  may  be 
obtained.  There  is  no  danger  but  what  appears  in  approaching  this 
harbor  from  either  side  of  Great  Mecattina  Island  excepting  the  ledges 
which  have  been  mentioned. 

Oreat  Mecattina  Island,  about  3J  miles  long  and  3  miles  wide,  is 
rather  more  than  2  miles  from  Red  Point,  the  nearest  part  of  the  main- 
land to  the  westward.  The  central  part  of  the  island  is  the  highest, 
and  rises  about  500  feet  above  the  sea.  The  granitic  hills  of  this  island 
are  fissured  in  a  remarkable  manner  by  empty  basaltic  dikes  travers- 
ing the  island,  in  a  north  and  south  direction,  from  one  side  to  the 
other.  These  features,  together  with  the  position  of  the  island,  in  rela- 
tion to  the  High  Land  of  Mecattina,  5  miles  westward  from  it,  distin- 
guish this  island  from  any  other  land  in  the  gulf. 

The  Boule  is  a  high  and  round  islet,  nearly  Joined  to  the  NW.  point 
of  Great  Mecattina  Island.  There  is  a  small  rock  above  water  close  oft 
it  westward,  and  about  ^  mile  in  tae  same  direction  a  patch  of  rocks 
with  about  4  fathoms  least  water.  Round  Head,  on  the  SW.  side,  is  a 
high  peninsula,  connected  to  the  island  by  a  low  isthmus.  An  islet 
and  small  rock,  at  J  and  one  mile,  respectively,  lie  off  the  SE.  point  of 
the  island.  Treble  Hill  Island  lies  ENE.,  about  3  miles  from  the  center 
of  the  island;  Flat  Island  lies  SE.  by  B.  ^  E.,  3  miles  from  the  SE. 
point,  and  the  two  Murr  Islets  lie  S.  by  W.,  about  4  miles  from  the  same 
point  of  the  island.  These  islets  are  about  J  mile  apart,  of  considerable 
height,  flat  at  the  top,  and  precipitous  all  round.  Treble  Hill  and  Plat 
Islands  are  quite  bold  all  round,  and  so  also  are  Murr  Islets,  which 
swarm  with  sea  fowl.  Murr  Rocks  are  two  small  and  low  rocks  above 
water,  lying  about  i  mile  SE.  from  the  southern  of  Murr  Islets.  A 
ledge  on  which  the  sea  generally  breaks  lies  5T.  22°  E.  (N.  55°  E.  mag.) 
more  than  J  mile  from  the  eastern  of  Murr  Rocks.  ' 

Beacoa— A  beacon,  pyramidal  in  shape,  surmounted  by  a  cone,  with 
a  vane,  the  Avhole  34  feet  high,  and  painted  white,  has  been  erected  on 
Flat  Island. 

Island  Harbor  is  a  cove  one  mile  deep,  and  about  400  yards  wide 
between  Bluflf  Head,  the  high  NE.  point  of  Great  Mecattina  Island, 
and  the  Boule.  This  harbor  is  sheltered  from  easterly  winds  by  a  cluster 
of  small  islets  and  rocks,  lying  oft'  its  mouth,  and  leaving  a  safe  pas- 
sage on  either  side  of  them.  If  the  east  passage  is  used,  keep  Bluflf 
Head  aboard,  and  if  the  west  passage,  pass  between  the  cluster  just 
mentioned  and  a  small  rock  by  itself,  lying  J  mile  west  of  it  and  200 
yards  from  the  shore  of  the  Great  Mecattina.  The  anchorage  is  near 
the  head  of  the  cove  in  from  14  to  20  fathoms  water  over  good  ground, 
and  both  wood  and  water  may  be  had. 
1161 16 


:»<;s-«>f«'>^>»^--->^l-JE<MbVVU«iari^-V»*' 


s 


242 


GULP   OF   ST.  LAWRENCE NORTH    COAST, 


Mecattiaa  Harbor  is  a  small  but  safe  harbor  between  Mecattina 
Island  and  the  mainland,  being  only  about  06  yards  wide  in  the  western 
entrance,  and  about  1.'50  yards  wide  within.  In  a  vessel  of  any  size  it 
is  therefore  necessary  to  moor  head  and  stern  and  with  hawsers  to  the 
shore.  The  depth  within  is  0  and  7  fathoms  over  good  ground,  but  only 
3  fathoms  at  low  water  can  be  carried  in  through  either  entrance. 

In  the  small  bay  between  Mutton  and  Mecattina  Islands,  wherein  is 
the  western  entrance,  there  is  no  anchorage  in  conse(|uence  of  the  great 
depth  of  water;  but  there  is  no  dsinger  in  the  way,  and  it  is  only  neces- 
sary to  keep  in  the  middle  to  pass  safely  through  the  narrow  western 
entrance.  The  eastern  entrance  is  rendered  difficult  by  a  reef  of  rocks 
under  water  running  across  it  northward  from  the  north  part  of  the 
island,  and  should  only  be  attemi)ted  in  fine  weather,  unless  by  those 
who  are  well  acquainted  with  the  place.  Strangers  in  fine  weather 
may  anchor  outside,  between  the  east  end  of  the  island  and  the  main, 
and  send  a  boat  in  to  examine  the  channel. 

Wood  and  TVater  may  be  obtained  in  Mecattina  Harbor. 

O-ull  Islet  lies  N.  67°  E.  (S.  80°  E.  mag.),  nearly  a  mile  from  the  NE. 
end  of  Mecattina  Island,  and  there  is  no  danger  between  them ;  but  if 
a  vessel  approaching  Mecattina  Harbor  from  the  eastward  wishes  to 
pass  between  Gull  ^^\et  and  the  main,  she  must  keep  cither  the  one  or 
the  other  aboard,  in  order  to  avoid  the  ledge,  with  3  feet  least  water, 
which  lies  nearly  halfway  between  them. 

Portage  Bay,  on  the  east  side  of  Gape  Mecattina,  runs  in  about  1^ 
miles  to  the  nortliward,  between  steep  and  high  hills,  fissured  like  Great 
Mecattina  Island,  and  there  is  a  rapid  river  at  its  head.  The  deep 
water,  with  space  for  a  vessel  to  anchor,  extends  only  about  400  yards 
within  the  entrance,  and  there  is  a  snug  cove  on  the  east  side  for  small 
vessels. 

Portage  Harbor  is  formed  by  a  small  and  moderately  high  islet  in 
the  mouth  of  Portage  Bay,  lying  over  toward  the  east  side.  In  this 
harbor  vessels  of  considerable  size  might  find  shelter  in  time  of  need, 
although  it  is  inconveniently  small  for  general  use,  like  most  of  the 
harbors  on  this  coast. 

Directions. — The  passage  into  Portage  Harbor,  eastward  of  the  islet, 
is  fit  only  for  very  small  vessels.  The  western  entrance  is  about  200 
yards  wide,  and  Las  from  6  to  8  fathoms  in  it.  There  is  still  more 
water  within,  over  muddy  bottom.  But  approaching  this  harbor  in  a 
vessel  of  large  draft,  there  are  two  ledges  with  15  feet  least  water  to  be 
avoided.  They  lie  in  the  line  from  the  south  extreme  of  Cape  Mecat- 
tina to  the  western  entrance  of  Mecattina  Harbor.  The  northernmost 
of  these  ledges  bears  S.  28°  E.  (S.  50.W.  mag.),  about  800  yards  from 
the  west  end  of  Mutton  Island,  and  the  other  N.  22°  E.  (N.  55°  E.  mag.), 
^  mile  from  the  south'>rnmost  Seal  Rock,  which  lies  near  the  shore  on  the 
east  side  of  Cape  Mecattina,  and  about  §  mile  north  from  its  south 
extremity.  Shoal  water  extends  about  200  yards  off  the  Seal  Eocks 
eastward,  but  Mutton  Island  is  quite  bold. 


fmmm&ff^ 


m  Mecattina 
1  the  western 
)f  any  size  it 
iwscrs  to  the 
iiud,  but  ouly 
itrance. 
8,  wherein  is 
)  of  the  great 
is  only  ueces- 
rrow  western 
reef  of  rocks 
1  part  of  the 
less  by  those 
line  weather 
Q(l  the  main, 

bor. 

from  the  NE. 
them ;  but  if 
urd  wishes  to 
ler  the  one  or 
t  least  water, 

s  in  about  1^ 
'ed  like  Great 
i.  The  deep 
)ut  400  yards 
iide  for  small 

'  high  islet  in 
side.  In  this 
time  of  need, 
3  most  of  the 

:d  of  the  islet, 
is  about  200 
is  still  more 
s  harbor  in  a 
st  water  to  be 
Cape  Mecat- 
northernmost 
►0  yards  from 
,  55°  E.  mag.)) 
e  shore  on  the 
'om  its  south 
e  Seal  Eocks 


1 


CAPE   MECATTINA. 


243 


Cape  Mecattina  is  a  long  and  remarkable  promontory  of  the  main- 
land, and  of  moderate  height  for  some  distance  from  its  extremity;  but 
about  3  miles  northward  it  rises  to  the  height  of  085  feet.    The  highest 
part  of  what  is  named  the  High  Laud  of  Mecattina,  which  rises  directly 
in  rear  of  Mecattina  Harbor,  can  not  be  less  than  700  feet  above  the 
sea,  and  is  the  highest  land  upon  this  coast  from  Bradore  Bay  west- 
ward to  the  vicinity  of  Miugau  Islands.    The  granite  of  this  promontory 
is  traversed,  from  SW.  to  NE.,  by  those  enormous  basaltic  dikes  which 
have  been  mentioned  as  occurring  in  Great  Mecattina  Island.    They 
cut  completely  through  the  promontory  into  Portage  Bay,  ascending 
again  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  latter,  till  they  arc  lost  to  view  beyond 
the  summits  of  the  hills.    In  Dyke  Island  several  of  them  are  empty 
as  low  down  as  the  surface  of  the  sea,  dividing  the  island  by  immense 
open  fissures  in  such  a  way  as  to  distinguish  it  from  all  others  in  the 
neighborhood.    There  is  a  small  islet  less  than  200  yards  from  the  end 
of  the  poiut  with  no  channel  between.     Entrance  Island,  about  400 
yards  in  diameter,  lies  nearly  400  yards  farther  out.    Dyke  Island  is 
400  yards  farther  ott"  in  tlie  same  direction,  and  is  composed  of  two 
islands  at  high  water,  but  there  is  no  passage  even  for  a  boat  between. 
It  isabout  1  ,C00  yards  long,  800  yards  wide,  and  about  150  feet  high  above 
the  sea.    At  a  mile  from  the  south  point  of  Dyke  Island  lie  the  two 
Outer  Kocks.    Tliey  are  above  water,  and  there  are  several  rocks  and 
ledges,  and  no  safe  passages  between  them  and  the  island. 

All  these  islands  and  rocks  lie  nearly  in  a  line  SE.  by  E.  from  the 
SE.  extreme  of  the  promontory,  from  which  Outer  Rocks  are  distant 
2)s  miles.  The  northern  of  Murr  Islets,  which  is  the  nearer  of  the  two, 
is  2.}  miles  from  Outer  Eocks,  and  there  is  a  clear  and  deep  channel 
between,  the  depth  of  water  exceeding  SO  fathoms.  Vessels  bound  to 
Mecattina  Harbor  either  pass  by  this  channel  or  through  between  the 
islands,  for  there  is  a  safe  passage  on  either  side  of  Entrance  Island. 
The  channel  between  Entrance  and  Dyke  Islands  is  the  best,  and  has 
13  fathoms  water  in  it.  The  shoal  water  extends  about  100  yards  oflf 
the  east  side  of  the  former  of  these  islands,  but  the  latter  is  quite  bold. 

The  Coast  from  Cape  Mecattina  to  Cape  Whittle  is  as  dangerous  as 
can  well  be  imagined  to  a  stranger  falling  in  with  it  at  night  or  in  thick 
weather,  and  even  to  those  who  are  quite  acquainted  with  it  the  navi- 
gation is  not  without  much  difficulty.  There  have  been  instances  of  ves- 
sels, after  beating  about  the  gulf  with  adverse  winds  and  bad  weather, 
in  the  fall  of  the  year,  being  wrecked  upon  it,  as  was  clearly  indicated 
by  the  quantity  of  wreck  almost  everywhere  to  be  found  on  the  islands. 

The  distance  from  Cape  Mecattina  to  Cape  Whittle  is  55  miles,  but 
the  line  between  them  passes  7  or  8  miles  within  the  outer  islands  and 
rocks,  so  that  it  would  be  necessary  to  steer  S.  47°  W.  (S.  79°  W.  mag.) 
from  Murr  Eocks  to  pass  outside  St.  Mary  Eeefs,  which  are  the  outer 
dangers  off  the  coast. 

The  depth  of  water  immediately  off,  and  even  within,  the  outer 
islands  and  rocks  is  in  general  very  great,  often  exceeding  70  or  80 


I 


-I 


244 


GULF  OF  ST.  LAWRENCE — NORTH  COAST. 


fathoms,  so  that  there  is  no  waruintj  by  the  lend;  but  at  12  or  15  miles 
oflf  shore  there  are  occasional  banks  of  sand  and  gravel,  with  from  30  to 
SO  fathoms  water.  The  outer  islands  are  entirely  bare  of  wood,  but 
there  are  more  trees  on  the  mainland  than  in  parts  farther  NE.,  indi- 
cating a  slight  improvement  in  the  climate  to  the  southwestward. 

Little  Mecattina  Island  is  nearly  7^  miles  long  and  about  3  miles 
wide.  De  Salaberry  Bay,  on  its  west  side,  cuts  it  nearly  in  two  parts. 
All  outside  the  narrow  isthmus,  namely,  two-thirds  of  the  island,  is 
high  and  remarkable  land,  which  can  be  seen  from  a  great  distance  out 
at  sea  long  after  the  other  islands  have  disappeared  below  the  horizon. 
The  highest  hill  on  the  island  is  about  570  feet  above  the  sea.  The 
part  of  the  island  within  the  isthmus  is  a  low  and  mossy  swamp,  rest- 
ing on  sand,  with  isolated  ridges  and  mounds  of  granite  piercing 
through  it  here  and  there.  Within  the  island,  to  the  north  and  west, 
are  extensive  flats  of  sand,  with  bowlder  stones  and  small  rooky  islets. 

Little  Mecattina  River  discharges  its  waters  through  these  flats 
by  several  shallow  channels,  the  largest  of  which  flows  into  Aylmer 
Sound  to  the  westward,  and  the  shallowest  into  the  Bay  of  Books  to 
the  eastward  of  the  island.  The  latter  channel  has  only  3  feet  in  it  at 
low  water,  so  that  it  is  possible  to  wade  across  it  and  from  the  island 
to  the  main  when  the  tide  is  out.  Little  Meccattina  Island,  having 
thus  no  channel  between  it  and  the  main  for  vessels,  and  scarcely  even 
for  boats  at  low  water,  may  be  considered  as  forming  the  SW.  side  of  a 
large  bay.  The  promontory  of  Mecattina  forms  the  NE.  side  of  this 
bay,  which  is  filled  with  islands  and  rocks  innumerable,  among  which 
no  vessel  could  find  her  way,  and  where  it  is  possible  to  lose  oneself 
for  a  time  in  a  boat. 

Fin  Rocks  lie  nearly  250  yards  off  Whale  Head,  the  south  extreme 
of  Gore  Islands,  and  bearing  N.  54°  E.  (N.  86°  E.  mag.)  5J  miles  from 
Antrobus  Point,  a  small  peninsula  at  the  east  extreme  of  Little  Mecat- 
tina Island.  Westward  of  Fin  Bocks,  at  2  and  3  miles,  respectively,  lie 
Herriot  Isles  and  Single  Bock,  with  two  or  three  sunken  rocks  close  to 
it.  Between  these  and  Little  Mecattina  Island  there  is  a  large  open 
bay,  the  head  of  which  is  called  the  Bay  of  Bocks.  Antrobus  Point  is 
the  SW.  point  of  this  bay,  and  has  a  ledge  off  it  200  yards  to  the  south- 
ward, which  is  the  only  danger  off  the  south  side  of  Little  Mecattina 
Island. 

Little  Mecattina  Cove,  on  the  east  side  of  Little  Mecattina  Island, 
about  J  mile  northward  of  Antrobus  Point,  is  §  mile  long,  and  from  140 
to  280  yards  wide,  between  high,  bold,  and  precipitous  rocks.  It  has  10 
fathoms  water  in  the  entrance,  and  there  are  17  fathoms  over  mud 
bottom  within.  It  is  open  to  the  NNE.,  but  as  the  islands  are  only 
distant  3  miles  in  that  direction,  there  is  no  doubt  that  a  vessel  well 
moored  would  be  quite  safe  in  it.  The  SE.  point  of  entrance  is  called 
Cove  Point,  and  is  quite  bold. 

Water  may  be  obtained  at  the  head  of  the  cove. 


2  or  15  miles 
;h  from  30  to 
)f  wood,  but 
er  NE.,  indi- 
stward. 
pbout  3  miles 
ill  two  parts, 
he  island,  is 
distance  out 
the  horizon. 
lie  sea.  The 
swamp,  rest- 
lite  piercing 
th  and  west, 
rooky  islets, 
h  these  flats 
into  Aylmer 
of  Books  to 
t  feet  in  it  at 
m  the  island 
land,  having 
carcely  even 
\W.  side  of  a 
,  side  of  this 
bmong  which 
I  lose  oneself 

nth  extreme 
^  miles  from 
Liittle  Mecat- 
pectively,  lie 
ocks  close  to 
i  large  open 
bus  Point  is 
to  the  south- 
le  Mecattina 

ttina  Island, 
ind  from  140 
s.  It  has  10 
IS  over  mud 
ids  are  only 
a  vessel  well 
ace  is  called 


-^«iiii« 


HARE    HARBOR. 


245 


Hare  Harbor,  also  on  the  east  side  of  Little  Mecattina  Island,  has 
depth  and  room  enough  fp-  largo  veast'ls,  but  has  several  rocks  and 
ledges  in  it,  which  render  it  difficult  for  strangers.  As  it  opens  to  the 
southeastward,  the  prevailing  winds  are  favorable  for  siiiling  in,  and 
are  generally  accompanied  with  a  smooth  sea  in  the  entrance.  It  is 
only  when  the  wind  is  well  to  the  southward  that  there  is  any  swell, 
and  even  then  it  never  rolls  into  the  harbor  so  as  to  att'ect  a  vessel. 

Directions.— To  enter  Hare  Harbor,  steer  N.  3^  E.,  (X.  3oo  E.  mag.), 
m  as  to  pass  Antrobus  Point  and  Cove  Point  at  )(  mile.  When  the 
vessel  has  run  f  mile  past  Cove  Point,  sue  will  be  close  to  the  eastern- 
most of  the  two  Cat  Eocks,  which  are  above  water,  about  400  yards 
apart.  At  300  yards  northward  of  the  easternmost  rock,  lies  Staff" 
Islet,  about  150  yards  in  diameter,  off"  which  there  is  a  rocky  patch  dry 
at  low  water,  about  200  yards  to  the  eastward.  This  can  always  be  seen 
from  the  rigging,  but  there  is  also  a  ledge,  with  2  fathoms  least  water, 
320  yards  N.  34°  E.  (N.  66°  E.  mag.)  from  the  NE.  extreme  of  the  islet. 
On  this  ledge  the  SE.  extreme  of  Eden  Islands  and  the  small  and  high 
Nob  Islet  are  in  line,  the  latter  bearing  from  the  former  N.  22^  E. 
(N.  540  E.  mag.)  li  miles.  These  are  the  only  dangers  on  tlie  jiort 
hand,  or  on  the  side  of  Little  Mecattina  Island ;  and  to  the  eastward  the 
nearest  dangers  will  be  more  than  a  mile  from  the  course. 

When  the  vessel  has  run  on  the  N.  3°  E.  (N.  35°  E.  mag.)  course 
one  mile  past  Cove  Point,  Staff"  Island  will  be  abeam  on  the  port  hand, 
and  ought  not  to  be  nearer  than  J  mile.  From  this  position  the  entrance 
of  the  harbor  will  be  seen  bearing  N.  39°  W.  (N.  7°  W.  mag.)  one  mile. 
It  can  not  be  mistaken,  because  there  is  no  other  channel  through  which 
a  person  can  see  clear  into  the  harbor  from  that  position.  The  entrance, 
about  340  yards  wide,  and  with  20  fathoms  water  in  it,  is  between  Daly 
and  Price  Islands,  and  the  only  other  channel  is  between  the  latter  and 
Eden  Islands.  Care  must  be  taken  not  to  take  that  channel  by  mis- 
take, for  a  vessel  would  hardly  get  safely  in  that  way,  because  of  the 
numerous  ledges.  Daly  Island,  forming  the  west  side  of  the  entrance, 
lies  close  to  the  shore,  with  only  a  boat  channel  between,  which  can  not 
be  seen  through  from  outside. 

When  the  entrance  bears  N.  65°  W.  (N.  23°  W.  mag.),  hanl  direc'ly 
in  for  it,  leaving  Eden  Islands,  and  also  Price  Island,  to  the  eastward, 
giving  the  south  extreme  of  the  latter  a  berth  of  not  less  than  60  yards. 
Daly  Island,  on  the  port  hand,  or  to  the  westward,  is  quite  bold.  About 
340  yards  within  the  entrance  on  the  east,  or  Price  Island  side,  the  small 
Watch  Eockwill  be  seen  above  water,  and  farther  in  a  very  small  islet. 
This  last  is  Bold  Islet,  about  ^  mile  within  the  entrance,  160  yards  W. 
by  S.  from  the  north  end  of  Price  Island,  and  quite  bold.  On  the  west 
side,  bearing  N.  32°  W.  (north  mag.)  400  yards  from  the  east  extreme 
of  Daly  Island,  lies  Safe  Rock,  very  small,  above  water,  and  quite  safe 
on  its  east  side. 
Nearly  midway  between  Safe  Eock  and  Bold  Islet  lies  Eag  Ledge, 


i 


i;i 


'    !• 


246 


GULP  OP  ST.  LAWRENCE — NORTH   COAST. 


which  Just  dries  at  low  water.  This  is  tlio  principal  danger  in  the  way, 
but  it  (!an  almost  always  be  seen  from  the  rigging,  and  there  is  a  clear 
channel  on  either  side  of  it,  300  yards  wide,  and  with  from  12  to  15 
fathoms  water  in  it.  The  western  channel,  however,  is  the  best;  and 
the  course  from  the  center  of  the  entrance  to  it,  so  as  to  pass  withiu 
100  yards  of  Safe  Kock,  is  N.  3(;o  W.  (N.  4°  W.  mag.)  If  mile. 

When  within  these  dangers  tlie  anchorage  must  be  chosen  by 'the 
lead,  for  there  are  several  patches  of  rock  with  from  4  to  0  fathoms, 
although  the  bottom  is  in  general  of  mud,  with  from  9  to  14  fathoms 
water.  In  doing  this,  however,  there  is  one  more  danger  to  be  avoided. 
Foul  Rock,  a  2  fathom  patch,  lying  N.  32°  W.  (north  mag.)  1,200  yards 
from  the  SW.  point  of  Price  Island.  Until  within  this  rock,  therefore, 
a  vessel  should  keep  more  than  halfway  over  from  the  islands  forming 
the  east  side  c^  the  harbor,  toward  its  western  shore.  She  may  if 
requisite  run  in  nearly  ^  mile  farther  than  this  patch,  and  anchor  east- 
ward of  Cluster  Point,  which  consists  of  some  low  small  islets  and 
rocks  extending  from  Little  Mecattina  Island,  this  position  being  the 
most  secure  in  the  harbor. 

With  an  Easterly  Wind. — When  bound  for  Hare  Harbor  with  an 
easterly  wind,  steer  S.  58°  W.  (west  mag.),  so  as  to  pass  ^  mile  south- 
ward of  Fin  Kocks.  Having  run  2J  miles  upon  this  course  after  Fin 
Rocks  were  abeam.  Scale  Rock  (a  2-fathom  ledge)  will  be  800  yards  to 
the  northward,  and  Tail  Rocks,  off  Herriot  Isles,  will  be  distant  J  mile. 
When  the  vessel  has  run  one  mile  farther  on  the  same  course.  Single 
Rock  will  be  seen,  small  and  just  above  water,  J  mile  on  the  starboard 
beam,  provided  thei'e  has  been  no  tide  or  current.  At  any  rate,  the 
rock  will  be  seen,  which  has  no  other  above  water  near  it,  being  §  mile 
southwestward  of  the  nearest  of  the  rocks  off  Herriot  Isles. 

Tliere  is  nothing  in  the  way  westward  of  the  line  from  Single  Rock 
to  Eden  Islands,  excepting  Cat  Rocks,  above  water,  and  Staff  Islaud 
and  its  ledges  lying  close  to  the  shore  of  Little  Mecattina  Island.  On 
the  contrary,  there  is  a  flue  open  bay,  with  plenty  of  room  for  large 
vessels  to  beat,  and  a  depth  in  many  places  exceeding  50  fathoms. 
Single  Rock,  however,  must  not  be  approached  nearer  than  J  mile- 
because  of  three  sunken  rocks  around  it  at  the  distance  of  300  yards, 
and  with  C  feet,  2  and  3  fathoms  of  water  upon  them,  respectively.  As 
soon  as  Single  Rock  is  made  out,  and  is  brought  abeam  steering  S.  58^ 
W.  (west  mag.),  haul  in  to  the  northwestward  by  degrees,  so  as  to  place 
the  vessel  A  mile  westward  of  the  rock,  when  the  entrance  of  the  har- 
bor will  bear  If.  55°  W.  (N.  23°  W.  mag.)  with  nothing  in  the  way;  and 
the  vessel  may  be  steered  directly  for  it,  and  proceed  as  before  directed. 

Rocks. — All  the  bay  within,  or  northeastward  of  Eden  Islands,  as 
well  as  eastward  of  the  line  from  them  to  Single  Rock,  is  dangerous, 
being  full  of  sunken  rocks  and  shoal  rocky  patches,  springing  np 
through  great  depths  of  water.     . 

Supplies. — There  is  a  good  watering  place  in  the  small  cove  on  the 


wjnwM.iiewtw'*^.}**  I'T, ") 


er  in  the  way, 
lere  is  a  dear 
rom  12  to  15 
che  best;  and 

0  pass  within 
lile. 

ihosen  by 'the 
to  0  fathoms, 
to  14  fathoms 
bo  be  avoided, 
:.)  1,200  yards 
»ck,  therefore, 
lauds  forming 
She  may  if 

1  anchor  east- 
all  islets  and 
ion  being  the 

arbor  with  an 
^  mile  south- 
irse  after  Fin 
I  800  yards  to 
iistant  ^  mile, 
sourse,  Single 
the  starboard 
1  any  rate,  the 
,  being  §  mile 
les. 

Single  Eock 
.  Staff  Islaud 

I  Island.  On 
jom  for  large 
;  50  fathoms, 
than  ^  mile; 
of  300  yards, 
ectively.  As 
teering  S.  58^ 
so  as  to  place 
ee  of  the  har- 
fche  way;  and 
ifore  directed. 
)u  Islands,  as 
is  dangerous, 
springing  up 

II  cove  on  the 


AYLMEK    SOLND. 


247 


west  side  of  Hare  Harbor,  and  wood  may  also  be  obtained  in  various 
place,',.  There  is  usually  a  couple  of  men  either  in  the  entrance  of 
Littlti  Mecattina  River  or  near  Little  Mecattina  Cove,  but  they  do  not 
remain  .firing  the  winter.  There  are  plenty  of  blue  and  cloud  berries, 
etc.,  on  tl»e  bills  of  Little  Mecattina  Island. 

(H.  O.  CImit  No.  1108.)  ^ 

Aylmer  Sound.— The  SE.  shore  of  Little  Mecattina  Island,  extend- 
ing from  Antrobus  Point  3  miles  8W.  to  Gape  .Mackinn^tn,  the  SK. 
point  of  Aylmer  Sound,  is  high  and  bold,  with  remarkable  beaches  of 
white  bowlder  stones  occasionally.  There  is  a  long  cove  close  to  the 
eastward  of  Cape  Mackinnon,  but  it  is  of  no  use  to  vessels.  Aylmer 
Sound  is  formed  by  Little  Mecattina  Island  on  the  east  and  Harrington 
Islands,  together  with  the  mainland,  on  the  west,  and  is  navigable 
about  4  miles  N.  by  W.  from  Cape  Mackinnon.  Cai>e  Airy,  the  mmth 
extreme  of  Harrington  Islands,  is  SW.  5  miles  from  Oape  Mackinnon; 
but  farther  in,  that  is,  from  Paynter  Islands  to  Craig  Point,  the  breadth 
is  only  2  miles,  and  so  it  continues  as  far  as  it  is  navigable.  Paynter 
Islands  are  small  and  are  4  miles  northward  of  Cape  Airy,  close  to 
the  mainland. 

Aid  and  Close  Islets. — There  is  no  danger  on  the  west  side  of  Ayl- 
mer Sound  but  what  appears  and  is  close  to  the  shore;  but  on  the  east 
side  there  are  two  small  islets,  the  outermost  of  which.  Aid  Islet,  bears 
N.  70°  W.  (N.  3SO  W.  mag.),  and  is  a  little  less  than  a  mile  from  Cape 
Mackinnon,  and  is  800  yards  olT  shore.  The  other.  Close  Islet,  lies 
about  halfway  between  the  cape  and  Aid  Islet,  and  about  200  yards 
off  shore. 

Spray  Reef,  small,  awash  at  low  water,  and  bold  all  round,  is  WSW. 
1^  miles  from  Cape  Mackinnon.  This  is  the  only  danger  in  the  entrance 
of  the  sound  that  can  not  always  be  seen,  and  vessels  had  better  pass 
to  the  westward  of  it  because  the  passage  between  it  and  Aid  Islet  has 
not  been  sounded. 

Doyle  Islands  are  four  in  number,  but  they  appear  from  sea  as  two 
only.  The  two  westernmost  islands  are  very  low,  and  close  together, 
being.joined  at  low  water.  The  two  easternmost  are  of  moderate  height, 
and  also  close  together.  Their  east  point  bears  N.  10°  W.  (^.  22° 
E.  mag.)  2  miles  from  Craig  Point,  which  is  the  SW.  extreme  of  Little 
Mecattina  Island,  one  mile  from  Cape  Mackinnon.  There  are  several 
small  rocks  and  ledges  in  the  channel  between  these  islands,  and  also 
between  them  and  Crescent  Point  WNW.  of  them;  so  that  the  only 
safe  passage  is  eastward  of  the  islands,  and  between  them  and  the 
ledges  which  lie  across  the  mouth  of  De  Salaberry  Bay.  This  passage 
is  i  mile  wide,  with  18  to  23  fathoms  water  in  it,  the  east  side  of  the 
islands  being  quite  bold. 

Lou  Road. — From  the  north  point  of  the  easternmost  of  Doyle 
Islands,  Boot  Point  (the  south  entrance  point  of  Louisa  Harbor)  bears 


I 


248 


GULP  OF  HT.  LAWKKNCE — NOKTH  COAST. 


N.  13^  K.  (N.  4r.o  E.  mas.),  and  is  distiint  1,LMI0  yiinls.  Within  or  to  the 
nortliwanl  of  DoyU?  Islands,  Ix'twcM-n  them  and  LouLsa  Harl»or,  there 
Ik  a  flue  ifMnny  roadstead,  named  Lon  Uoad,  in  which  vessels  may 
choose  their  anchorage  in  from  12  to  1  fathoms  over  muddv  l)ottoni, 
the  soundings  decreasinjj  {fradually  westward  from  tlu"  line. join inj,'  the 
easternmost  of  Doyle  Islands  and  Hoot  I'oint,  over  to  Crescent  Point, 
a  distance  of  alxnit  one  mile.  This  roadstead  is  lionnded  on  the  north 
by  banks  of  sand  and  stones  dry  at  low  water,  wliicli  extend  acrross 
from  Dickson  Islands,  forming  the  ^' W.  side  of  Louisa  Harbor  to  ('res- 
eent  Point.  It  is  through  these  banks  that  Little  Mecattina  River 
discharges  most  of  its  waters. 

Louisa  Harbor  is  about  400  yards  wide  at  the  entrance.  The  itoints 
of  entrance  are  (luitc  bold,  and  the  best  anchorage  is  :\m  yards  within 
them,  in  I  fathoms,  and  in  the  southern  part  of  the  harbor.  The 
harbor  is  open  to  the  southward. 

Directions.— The  oidy  directions  for  sailing  into  Louisa  Ilarbor,  or 
iuto  Lou  Hoad  between  it  and  the  Doyle  Islands,  are  to  keep  the  east- 
ern side  of  the  latter  aboard,  to  avoid  the  ledges  lying  across  the 
entrance  of  De  Salaberry  Bay.  When  once  inside  of  the  island  there 
is  nothing  in  the  way,  so  that  a  vessel  may  either  anchor  in  the  road  or 
run  into  ( lie  harbor  as  convenient.  In  the  sonnd  outside  of  the  Doyle 
Ishinds  the  oidy  thing  to  be  guarded  against  is  Spray  Keef.  There  are 
irregular  soundings  with  as  little  as  11  fathoms  over  rocky  bottom  here 
and  there,  but  in  general  the  depth  is  from  19  to  2.}  fathoms,  with  rock, 
sand,  and  mud  bottom.  The  ground  can  not  be  trusted  until  within 
Doyle  Islands. 

Harrington  Islands  extend  northward  4  miles,  from  Cape  Airy  to 
the  maiidand,  tliere  being  no  channel  within  them.  They  are  high 
islands,  the  higlu  st  being  estimated  at  .5.50  feet  above  the  sea.  Between 
the  outer  and  largest  islands  there  is  indiHerent  anchorage  and  deep 
water,  but  the  channels  leading  to  it  are  narrow,  and  too  intricate  for 
any  directions  to  avail.  It  is  a  very  dangerous  place,  and  useless, 
excepting  t<.  small  vessels  intimately  acquainted  with  the  coast. 

Black  Reef,  bearing  from  Cape  Airy  S.  16°  E.  (S.  16°  W.  mag.),  2 
miles,  is  composed  of  low  black  rocks  above  water,  about  300  yards  in 
diameter,  bold,  but  with  very  irregular  soundings  around  it^  varying 
from  6  to  70  lii  thorns  over  rocky  bottom. 

M^jor  Reef,  awash  at  low  water  and  very  small,  liears  S.  70°  W. 
(N.  78°  W.  mag.),  1 J  nules  from  Cape  Airy. 

Netagamu  Islands,  WSW.,  4^  miles  from  Cape  Airy,  are  small, 
with  a  remarkable  mound  on  the  largest  of  them.  Between  them  and 
the  Harrington  Islands  there  is  a  bay  of  the  mainland  with  clay  cliffs 
ard  sandy  beach  at  its  head  and  innumerable  small  rocks  across  its 
m  uth. 

Netagamu  River.— The  entrance  to  this  river  is  IJ  miles  NW.  from 
Netagamu  Islands,  and  may  be  known  by  the  sandy  beach,  backed  with 


-t    •:'*!^ 


thill  or  to  the 
lliirlxtr,  tliere 
1  vchsi'Ih  may 
u(ld\  liottoiu, 
iicjoiiiiii^r  tiie 
t'scciit  Point, 
on  th(^  north 
ixtt'iid  across 
irbor  to  (hes- 
cattina  River 

.  The  itointB 
yards  withiu 
harbor.    The 

la  n  arbor,  or 
ieep  tlie  east- 
ig  across  the 
)  ishiiid  there 
III  the  road  or 

of  the  Doyle 
if.  There  are 
f  bottom  here 
lis,  witii  rock, 

until  within 

Cape  Airy  to 
liey  are  high 
i;\.  Between 
ige  and  deep 
intricate  for 
and  useless, 
coast. 

'  W.  mag.),  2 
300  yards  in 
i  it^  varying 

irs  S.  70°  W. 

y,  are  small, 
en  them  and 
bh  clay  cliffs 
ks  across  its 

58  NW.  from 
backed  with 


ST.  MARY    ISLANDS — MIUDLK    ISLANDS. 


249 


a  tliick  growth  of  spruce  trees,  on  citlier  side  of  tlm  entrance.  It  is  a 
huge  Hticam  with  <leep  water  in  the  narrow  ciitraiice,  and  also  within 
close  up  to  the  falls,  which  descend  perpendicularly  m  feet,  on  either 
side  of  an  island,  and  into  a  basin  ),  mile  wide.  These  falls,  which  are 
U  miles  from  the  entrance,  can  be  partly  seen  fnmi  the  sea  when  they 
bear  N.  L';}^  E,  (N.  55'^  E.  mag.).  A  Hemicin^ular  bar  of  sand,  '.Iry  at 
low  water,  with  the  exfception  of  a  narrow  channel  with  .{  feet  water  in 
it,  extends  one  mile  out  from  the  entrance,  ami  is  extremely  dangerous 
to  boats  because  of  the  heavy  surf.  The  current  in  this  riv»  «i  rapid, 
and  the  bottom  of  the  channel  is  rock,  but  small  schooners  may  be 
secured  on  the  eastern  side,  one  mile  within  the  entrance,  where  there 
are  two  huts,  the  temporary  residence  of  salmon  flshermen  durin;,'  the 
season.  The  hills  of  the  mainland,  4  or  n  miles  westward  of  this  river, 
are  rather  higher  than  is  usual  on  this  coast,  rising  to  the  height  of  400 
or  500  feet  above  the  sea. 

St.  Mary  Islands  lie  «  miles  off  the  mainland,  and  their  NE.  extreme 
bears  S.  .370  W.  (S.  (;8-  W.  mag.),  10  miles  from  Cape  Airy.  There  are 
two  of  those  islands  so  close  together  that  they  may  be  considered  as 
one  narrow  island  about  3  miles  long.  Their  lieight  is  200  feet  above 
the  sea;  they  are  of  bare  steep  granite,  and  bold  all  round. 

Cliff  Islands  lie  ^  mile  W.  by  N.  from  the  SW.  i)oint  of  St.  Mary 
Islands.  There  is  a  ledge  which  shows  south  of  them.  Clift"  Islands 
are  one  round  and  steep  island  ^  mile  in  diameter,  with  several  small 
islets  and  rocks  close  southwestward  of  it,  and  deep  water  between 
them  all.  Between  these  and  Boat  Islands  there  is  a  safe  channel  A 
mile  wide. 

Boat  Islands,  a  cluster  of  small  islands  close  together,  lie  WSW 
2^  miles  from  the  SW.  point  of  St.  Mary  Islands.  They  occupy  a  space 
of  13  miles  in  a  SW.  direction  by  about  J  mile  wide. 

Middle  Islands  are  a  chain  of  islands,  nearly  joined  at  low  water 
with  several  small  islets  adjacent.  The  westernmost  island  is  2\  miles 
long  and  150  feet  high.  The  whole  group  covers  a  space  of  3^  miles  in  a 
SW.  direction,  by  about  one  mile  wide.  There  is  a  good  anchorage  in 
10  or  12  fathoms  between  the  westernmost  island  and  two  smaller 
islands  northward  of  it;  but  it  is  too  small  for  large  vessels  and  too 
intricate  for  description,  and  can  only  be  approached  from  the  eastward. 

Middle  Islands  lie  IJ  miles  from  the  main,  and  there  is  no  safe  chan- 
nel between,  in  consequence  of  the  numerous  islets  and  rocks.  Between 
these  islands  and  Boat  Islands  there  is  a  safe  channel,  nearly  one  mile 
wide.  In  all  these  channels  the  soundings  are  irregular  and  the  ground 
Ibul.  In  some  places  there  are  only  15,  whilst  iu  others  there  are  40  or 
50  fathoms  water. 

Tender  Reef,  small  and  awash  at  low  water,  lies  X.  50°  W.  (N.  19° 
W.  mag.)  nearly  one  mile  from  the  northernmost  of  St.  Mary  Eeefs 
and  S.  410  W.  (S.  72o  W.  mag.)  1|  miles  from  the  SW.  extreme  of  Boat 
Islands. 


f 


wm 


% 


h 


250 


GULF  OP  8T.  LAWRENCE — NORTH  COAST. 


Bt.  Mary  Reefs,  tho  inoHt  dun^roroiis  oiV  the  coiiMt,  are  four  Icdp^oH 
JuHt  under  water,  on  Bonio  of  which  tho  Hca  always  l>reakH.  From  tlio 
iiorthenuDOHt  to  the  flonthernnioHt  ledge  th«^  diHtance  in  one  mile,  and 
tho  latter  lies  S.  40°  N.  (S.  71°  W.  mag.)  2.^  miles  from  the  SW.  of  tlie 
Boat  Islands. 

Southwest  Islands  are  a  group  of  small  islets,  of  which  the  western- 
most is  high  and  round.  There  is  a  patch  of  113  fathoms  lying  '2  miles 
Honthcaotward  of  St.  Mary  Reefs,  and  another  of  8  fathoms  nearly  ns 
far  southwestward  of  them. 

Channels. — There  are  irregular  soundings  and  deep  water  around 
and  between  all  these  rocks  and  islets,  but  no  warning  by  the  hand 
lead.  There  is  a  clear  channel  between  Tender  lieef  and  Southwest 
liilands,  and  also  between  St.  Mary  Reefs  and  Boat  Islands;  at  least 
there  is  nothing  with  so  little  water  as  3  fathoms,  since  the  sea  often 
breaks  in  that  depth,  and  it  must  have  been  seen. 

Watagheistic  Island  and  Sound.— Watagheistic  Island  is  a  large 
and  hilly  island  3  miles  long  by  more  than  1^  miles  wide.  It  is  much 
broken  into  coves,  and  lies  in  the  mouth  of  a  large  bay  of  the  mainland, 
from  which  it  is  difficult  to  distinguish,  in  a  vessel  at  sea.  Wata- 
gheistic Sound  is  a  secure  harbor  between  the  harbor  and  the  main- 
land. The  eastern  entrance  is  narrow  and  intricate,  but  the  western 
entrance  is  J  mile  wide;  and  although  tliere  are  several  rocks  and 
ledges  in  it,  yet  it  may  be  safely  sailed  through,  with  proper  care  and 
the  assistance  of  the  chart.  Between  the  east  end  of  Watagheistic 
Island  and  Cliff"  Islands  are  many  islets,  rocks,  rind  reefs,  which  it  would 
be  useless  to  enumerate,  so  that  it  will  be  sufficient  to  remark  that  Cove 
Island,  whi(;li  is  the  largest  of  them,  is  J  mile  in  diameter,  and  sur- 
rounded with  rocks  and  ledges.  It  is  NW.  4  miles  from  the  north  point 
of  St.  Mary  Islands,  and  there  are  thickly  scattered  rocks,  both  above 
and  under  water,  all  the  way  from  it  to  Netugamu  Islands,  6J  miles 
northeastward. 

Caution. — If  it  were  not  that  cases  sometimes  occur  in  which  a 
secure  anchorage  is  indispensable  to  the  saf(>ty  of  a  vessel,  directions 
would  not  be  given  for  Watagheistic  Sound,  which  can  not  be  reached 
■without  passing  through  7  miles  of  dangerous  navigation.  The  follow- 
ing brief  directions  are  given,  with  the  cauti«m  that  their  use  must  be 
accompanied  with  a  good  lookout  from  tlie  rigging,  for  it  is  impossible 
to  be  certain  that  every  ledge  has  been  found  in  .such  a  place. 

Directions  for  Northern  Entrance. — Being  to  the  southwestward 
with  a  westerly  wind,  a  vessel  may  either  pass  between  Tender  Reef 
and  Southwest  Islands,  and  farther  eastward  between  Middle  and  Boat 
Islands,  or  she  may  run  down  outside  St.  Mary  Reefs,  and  then  haul  in 
to  the  northward  between  Boat  and  Cliff"  Islands,  which  is  the  safer 
route,  and  the  one  for  which  the  following  directions  are  given :  Being 
then  in  mid-channel  between  Boat  and  Clifif  Islands,  steer  N.  21°  W. 
(N.  10°  E.  mag, ),  and  that  course  will  lead  close  to  Bold  Rock,  N.  57°  E. 


^S^TP 


h:9fs: 


WATAOHKlSTfC    SOUND. 


251 


i  fonr  ledpeH 
H.  From  tlio 
)ne  niilo,  and 
e  SW.  of  tlie 

the  western- 
lying  '2  miles 
oas  nearly  an 

vater  around 
by  the  hand 
d  Southwest 
nds;  at  least 
the  sea  often 

md  is  a  large 
.  It  is  much 
;he  mainland, 
sea.  Wata- 
id  the  main- 
t  the  western 
al  rocks  and 
per  care  and 
VVatagheistic 
hich  it  would 
rk  that  Cove 
iter,  and  sur- 
e  north  point 
s,  both  above 
nds,  6^  miles 

:  in  which  a 
el,  directions 
)t  be  reached 
The  follow- 
:*  use  must  be 
is  impossible 
ace. 
uthwestward 

Tender  Reef 
Idle  and  Boat 

then  haul  in 
1  is  the  safer 
'iven:  Being 
ser  N.  21°  W. 
ck,  N.  57°  E. 


(N.  SS-^  E.  mag.),  \  mile  from  tlio  NK.jMiint  of  Midtlle  Islands.  Center 
Keef,  which  always  shows,  hmrs  X.  ir,  >  10.  (N.  7'^  K.  may.),  \.\  miles 
from  Bold  Uock,  and  there  is  a  dear  channel  between  them,  Itjit  not 
between  Bold  Uock  and  Middle  Islands. 

If  the  vessel  passes  eastward  of  Bohl  Kock  at  about  ~\  mile,  as  soon 
as  she  has  passed  that  rock  alter  course  to  \.  41°  W.  (X.  I.P  W.  mag.), 
and  when  slie  huA  run  2'1  miles  she  will  be  midway  between  Black 
Ledge  and  Bare  Uocks,  the  latter  bearing  from  the  former  X.  liT^  E. 
(N,  C80  E.  mag.),  1^  miles.  Do  n(»t  g<>  near  this  ledge,  which  has  not 
been  sounded  oft".  Alter  course  now  to  N.  .I'^  W.  (X.  2('P  l],  mag.), 
passing  westward  of  all  the  islets  to  the  northwestward  (»f  Cove  Island, 
and  when  the  vessel  has  run  If  mile.s,  Beacon  Islet  will  be  seen  (close  to 
the  SE.  extreme  of  Watagheistic  Island,  an<I  with  a  smaller  islet  \  mile 
westward  of  it)  ^  mile  ahead.  Run  past  this  islet  sufliciently  far  to 
avoid  a  reef  and  3-fathom  ])at(!h,  which  together  extend  800  yards 
NNE.  off  it;  then  haul  in  X.  54°  W,  (X,  2;P  VV,  mag.),  giving  the  islet 
a  berth  of  full  ^  mile,  when  the  deiiths  will  be  10  or  12  fathoms. 

When  the  vessel  has  run  A  mile  from  the  time  Beacon  Islet  was 
abeam,  a  deep  bay  will  be  observed  in  the  XE.  side  of  Watagheistic 
Island.  Steer  for  tlie  narrow  channel  between  the  north  entrance 
point  of  this  bay  and  two  small  islets  which  lie  nearly  300  yards  NNE. 
of  it.  As  soon  as  she  arrives  at  these  islets,  another  deep  cove  will  be 
seen  in  Watagheistic  Island,  with  an  islet  nearly  filling  up  its  mouth. 
Steer  to  pass  close  eastward  of  this  islet,  and  then  westward  for  the 
channel  between  Watagheistic  Island  and  the  islands  to  the  northeast- 
ward which  extend  across  to  the  mainland  in  that  direction,  with  the 
exception  of  a  very  narrow  3  fathom  channel.  Keep  in  the  middle  of 
the  channel,  inclining  toward  the  west  or  the  Watagheistic  Island  side. 
The  channel  is  at  first  only  about  170  yards  wide,  but  it  soon  expands  to 
320  yards,  with  a  depth  of  15  fathoms  in  the  middle  over  mud  bottom, 
where  the  vessel  may  anchor  in  great  security.  After  she  has  i»assed 
the  reef  off  Beacon  Island  there  is  nothing  in  the  way  by  this  route, 
the  islands  being  quite  bold. 

If  wishing  to  run  through  into  Upper  Sound,  beware  of  a  reef  which 
lies  across  the  mouth  of  the  channel  at  the  distance  of  300  yards.  As 
there  is  no  safe  channel  northeastward  of  Cove  Island,  a  vessel  can  not 
approach  this  anchorage  with  an  easterly  wind  without  first  beating  up 
along  the  SE.  side  of  Watagheistic  Island,  after  she  has  passed  between 
Bare  Rocks  and  Black  Ledge,  so  that  in  that  case  the  southern  entrance 
to  Watagheistic  Sound  is  to  be  preferred. 

Directions  for  Southern  Entrance.— With  an  easterly  wind,  a 
vessel  may  either  sail  in  from  sea  through  the  same  channel  as  before,  or 
eastward  of  St.  ]\Iary  Islands,  which  is  quite  safe.  Being  to  the  east- 
ward, steer  for  the  XE.  point  of  St.  Mary  Islands,  which  may  be  passed 
at  the  distance  of  400  yards,  and  then,  bringing  it  astern,  steer  from  it 
S.  88°  W.  (X.  01°  W.  mag.),  and  Center  Reef,  which  must  be  looked  out 


,1 


,,*' 


252 


GULF  OV   ST.  LAWRENCE — NORTH  COAST. 


for,  will  be  abeam  at  J  mile  to  the  northward  when  2J  miles  has  been 
run  from  the  NE.  point  of  St.  Mary  Islands.  The  reef  is  bold  all  round, 
and  it  may  be  passed  on  either  side  at  400  yards,  but  southward  of  it  is 
to  bo 'preferred 

Continue  the  S.  88°  W.  (N.  61°  W.  mag.)  course  for  one  mile  past  the 
reef,  then  haul  up  N.  47°  W.  (N.  10°  W.  mag.);  and  when  the  vessel 
has  run  ,i  miles  Seal  Islands,  forming  the  north  point  of  Boussier  Bay 
(full  of  islands),  will  bear  8.  59°  W.  (west  mag.),  distant  g  mile.  The 
channel  to  the  westward  between  Watagheistic  Island  and  the  main- 
land will  now  be  open,  and  two  small  islets  will  be  seen,  nearly  in  its 
center  in  line,  bearing  S.  7;°  W.  (N.  72^  W.  mag.).  The  nearest  of 
these  islets  will  be  distant  about  IJ  miles.  They  are  J  mile  frc  i  each 
other,  and  quite  bold ;  but  bear  in  mind  that  exactly  in  the  line  from 
the  one  islet  to  the  other,  and  TuO  yards  N.  77°  E.  (S.  72°  E.  map.)  from 
the  eastern  of  them,  is  Kettle  Rock,  very  small,  and  just  covered  at 
low  water.  This  rock  lies  exactly  in  a  line  from  Seal  Islands  to  the 
point  of  a  shoal  cove  of  Watagheistic  Island,  which  is  open  to  the 
westward;  there  is  a  rock  awash  160  yards  southward  of  the  west 
entrance  point  of  this  cove.  The  channels  on  either  side  of  Kettle 
Bock,  which  is  quite  bold,  are  each  J  mile  wide,  and  have  from  20  to 
2G  fathoms  water  in  them.  Having  brought  the  islets  in  line,  the  ves- 
sel has  only  to  avoid  Kettle  Bock,  running  in  S.  77°  W.  (N.  72°  W. 
mag.)  on  either  side  of  it,  and  the  two  islets  westward  of  it,  and  then 
hauling  up  to  the  northwar,'  under  the  SW.  end  of  Watagheistic 
Island,  where  she  may  anchor  in  from  17  to  20  fathoms  over  mud 
bottom,  with  plenty  of  room,  no  dangers  anywhere  near  her,  and  well 
sheltered  from  all  winds. 

From  both  the  anchorages  a  vessel  with  the  chart  may  sail  into 
Upper  Sound  northward  of  Watagheistic  Island,  which  is  navigable 
throughout  for  large  vessels,  with  a  convenient  depth  of  water,  and 
good  ground  for  anchoring. 

Wood  and  Water  may  be  had  there  in  abundance;  and  in  Hamelle 
Harbor,  at  the  northeastern  extremity  of  the  sound,  a  hunter  and 
salmon  tisher  resides,  and  there  is  another  in  Boussier  Bay. 

Anchorage. — There  is  no  good  anchorage  on  the  route  to,  or  outside 
either  entrance  to,  Watagheistic  Sound,  the  soundings  being  irregular, 
■with  deep  water  and  generally  foul  ground.  The  breakers  on  every 
side,  on  so  many  rocks  and  ledges,  make  the  place  look,  as  it  really  is, 
extremely  dangerous. 

Etamamu  River. — Between  Middle  Islands  and  Wapitagun,  the 
mainland  is  broken  into  coves,  and  lined  with  islets  and  rocks  innumer- 
able, among  which  nothing  but  a  very  small  vessel,  well  acquainted 
with  the  coast,  could  find  her  way.  There  is  nothing  tijere  worthy  of 
notice,  excepting  Etamamu  River,  which  enters  a  bay  open  to  the  south- 
ward full  of  islets  and  rocks.  The  river,  consisting  of  a  succession  of 
rapids,  is  generally  narrow;  it,  however^  widens  in  several  places,  form- 
ing lakes,  with  still,  deep  water. 


miT 


ST. 

^  miles  has  been 
is  bold  all  round, 
outbward  of  it  is 

)ne  mile  past  the 
when  the  vessel 
of  Boussier  Bay 
ant  §  mile.  The 
d  and  the  m<aiu- 
jen,  nearly  in  its 
The  nearest  of 
I  mile  frc  i  each 

in  the  line  from 
2°  E.  raa{».)  from 

just  covered  at 
1  Islands  to  the 
I  is  open  to  the 
ard  of  the  west 
r  side  of  Kettle 
have  from  20  to 

in  line,  the  ves- 

0  W.  (N.  72°  W. 
cl  of  it,  and  then 
of  Watagheistic 
;homs  over  mud 
ar  her,  aud  well 

t  may  sail  into 
ich  is  navigable 
h  of  water,  and 

aud  in  Hamelle 
,  a  hunter  and 
Bay. 

ite  to,  or  outside 
being  irregular, 
jakers  on  every 
i,  as  it  really  is, 

Wapitagun,  the 

1  rocks  innumer- 
well  acquainted 
tijere  worthy  of 
)en  to  the  south- 

'  a  succession  of 
ral  places,  form- 


WAPITAGUN   HARBOR. 


253 


Trading  Post— At  the  mouth  of  this  river  there  is  a  trading  and 
salmon- fishery  post,  at  which  two  men  reside  all  the  year. 

South  Makers  Ledge  is  a  small  rock  which  is  never  entirely  covered 
when  the  sea  is  smooth.  Its  whole  extent,  above  and  under  water, 
is  250  yards  east  aud  west  by  100  yards  north  and  south,  and  there  is 
no  danger  near  it  excepting  a  patch  of  4  fathoms,  bearing  from  it 
S.  60°  E.  (S.  35°  E.  mag.),  and  distant  400  yards.  The  soundings  are 
very  irregular  round  this  ledge.  It  bears  from  Cape  Whittle  S.  78°  E. 
(S.  47°  E.  mag.)  G^  miles. 

Cormorant  Rocks  lie  directly  between  Cape  Whittle  and  South 
Makers  Ledge,  leaving  a  channel  between  those  rocks  and  the  ledge 
nearly  2f  miles  wide.  There  is  no  danger  excepting  the  elates  of  Cor- 
morant Bocks,  one  of  which,  with  4  fathoms,  stretches  750  yards  8.27° 
E.  (S.  4°  W.  mag.)  from  the  southeasternmost  Cormorant  Rock ;  another, 
N.  34°  B.  (IS.  65°  E.  mag.)  from  Nest  Eock  and  S.  78°  E.  (S.  47°  E. 
mag.)  from  Slime  Rock  (the  NE.  Cormorant),  f  mile  from  each,  with 
only  2  fathoms,  and  a  2-fathom  patch  which  bears  N.  7°  E.  (N.  38°  E. 
mag.)  J  mile  from  Slime  Rock.  There  is  no  channel  between  Cormorant 
Rocks,  or  between  them  and  Lake  Island. 

"Wapitagun  Harbor.— Mistassini,  or  the  Great  Stone,  is  a  remarka- 
ble block  of  granite  lying  on  the  SE.  extreme  of  the  Outer  Wapitagun 
Islands.  It  resembles  a  mortar,  especially  when  seen  from  the  SW., 
and  has  been  called  The  Gun  by  the  fishermen.  It  serves  as  an  excel- 
lent guide  to  East  Passage  into  Wapitagun  Harbor,  the  entrance  to 
which  is  3  mile  northeastward  of  it,  and  N.  22°  W.  (N.  9°  E.  mag.)  3^ 
miles  from  South  Makers  Ledge,  Outer  Wapitagun  Islands,  which  are 
of  bare  granite,  about  70  or  80  feet  high,  are  so  close  together  and  so 
overlap  that  they  appear  like  one  island.  They  completely  shelter  the 
harbor,  which  is  a  long  and  narrow  channel  running  NE.  and  SW. 
between  them  and  Wapitagun  Island,  which  is  next  northward  of  them. 
West  Passage  of  the  harbor  is  2  miles  south  westward  from  the  Mistas- 
sini, and  N.  60°  W.  (N.  29°  W.  mag.)  4  miles  from  South  Makers  Ledge. 

It  is  about  160  yards  wide,  and  there  are  parts  of  the  channel, 
between  islets  within  East  Passage,  which  are  not  more  than  120  yards 
wide.  The  harbor  is  nowhere  more  than  280  yards  wide,  excepting 
where  there  are  small  bays;  so  that  although  the  depth  of  water  is 
more  than  sufficient  for  large  vessels,  yet  the  navigation  is  so  intricate 
that  this  harbor  is  not  fit  for  those  of  a  greater  burden  than  150  or 
200  tons. 

Water. — There  is  water  to  be  had  on  Lake  aud  Wapitagun  Islands; 
but  for  wood  the  boats  must  proceed  through  the  islands  to  the  main- 
land, northward  from  the  harbor  about  3  miles. 

Directions.— The  position  of  East  Passage  into  Wapitagun  Harbor, 
between  Outer  Wapitagun  Islands  and  others  to  the  northeastward, 
has  been  pointed  out,  aud  in  approaching  it  from  the  southward  with 
an  easterly  wind  there  is  nothing  in  the  way.  There  is  a  rock  and 
ledge  which  show  on  the  west  side  of  the  entrance.    Keep,  therefore, 


m 


wr^S'iS'i- 


254 


GULF   OF   ST.  LAWRENCE NORTH    COAST. 


IJ 


the  eastern  sule  aboard,  steeriug  in  ]S".  6(5°  W.  (N.  S^c  W.  mag.).  Three 
small  islets  will  be  seeu  j^  mile  witliiu  the  entrance,  and  northward  of 
them  a  cove  in  Wapitagun  Island  extending  westward  round  a  steep 
rocky  point,  which  has  a  small  sunken  rock  close  oft"  it  to  the  east- 
ward. There  is  safe  anchorage  in  2i  ftithoms  in  this  cove,  but  if  wish 
iug  to  run  into  the  harbor,  leave  all  three  islets  to  the  southward,  pass- 
ing close  to  them,  and  then  bear  up  southwestward,  between  them  and 
the  steep  rocky  point  of  the  cove  just  mentioned.  This  is  the  safer 
passage;  the  other,  southward  of  all  three  islets,  is  only  GO  yards  wide, 
and  has,  besides,  a  ledge  in  the  way,  which  can  only  be  avoided  by 
having  a  trusty  person  in  the  rigging,  which  is  necessary  at  all  times, 
in  entering  this  and  similar  harbors. 

To  enter  "Wapitagun  Harbor  by  West' Passage,  and  with  a  westerly 
wind,  attend  to  the  following  directions,  remembering  that  a  lookout 
for  the  ledges  from  the  rigging  is  absolutely  necessary,  even  with  the 
best  of  charts :  Eun  down  between  Cormorant  Rocks  and  South  Makers 
Ledge,  and  then  haul  in  K  31°  W.  (north  mag.),  so  as  to  pass  at  least  ^ 
mile  eastward  of  the  easternmost  of  Cormorant  Eocks,  which  will  be 
readily  known  from  Ifest  Eock,  covered  with  birds  and  stained  white 
by  them,  being  about  240  yards  westward  of  it.  Look  out  now  for  the 
small  Two-fathom  Ledge,  which  lies  800  yards  NNE.  of  this  rock,  which 
leave  also  to  the  westward ;  and  having  passed  it,  haul  up  westward  a 
little,  so  as  to  pass  not  less  than  600  yards  eastward  of  Slime  Eock 
(the  northeasternmost  of  Cormorant  Eocks),  in  order  to  avoid  the 
other  Two-fathom  Ledge,  which  bears  from  it  N.  8°  E.  (N.  39°  E.  mag.) 
4  mile. 

Having  passed  close  eastward  of  this  ledge,  steer  directly  for  the 
islet  in  the  channel,  between  the  SW.  extreme  of  Outer  Wapitagun 
Islands  and  Cormorant  Point,  taking  care  not  to  haul  up  higher  than 
N.  60°  W.  (N.  29°  W.  mag.),  to  insure  passing  eastward  of  Long  Ledge, 
which  lies  midway  between  Slime  Eock  and  Cormorant  Point,  and  on 
the  line  joining  the  SW.  end  of  the  islet  steered  for,  and  the  high  east 
end  of  Lake  Island,  which,  therefore,  must  not  be  opened  westward  of 
the  islet.  Having  passed  Long  Ledge,  bring  the  west  end  of  the  islet 
to  bear  N.  31°  W.  (north  mag.),  and  steer  for  it,  looking  out  for  the 
7-foot  ledge,  lying  300  yards  southward  from  the  SW.  extreme  of  Outer 
Wapitagun  Islands,  which  should  not  be  approached  nearer  than  400 
yards  until  the  ledge  is  passed. 

The  patch  which  lies  2-40  yards  SSW.  of  the  islet  is  quite  bold,  and 
will  be  avoided  if  the  islet  be  not  brought  to  bear  eastward  of  N.  31° 
W.  (north  mag.).  When  the  vessel  arrives  within  400  yards  of  the 
islet,  and  the  harbor  begins  to  appear  open  to  the  northeastward,  bear 
up  quickly  for  the  entrance,  leaving  the  islet  northward  of  the  vessel. 
When  once  Avithiu  the  entrances,  the  rocks  are  bold  and  the  water 
smooth,  and  an  anchorage  may  be  chosen  anywhere,  the  general  depths 
being  from  16  to  20  fathoms.    The  best  berth,  however,  is  in  a  small 


CT-jg^js^jT  I  inli  if  ■  li  niMH* "  m 


lag.).  Three 
northward  of 
)uud  a  »teep 

to  the  east- 
!,  but  if  wish- 
ihward,  pass- 
ien  them  and 

is  the  safer 
[)  yards  wide, 
)  avoided  by 
at  all  times, 

;h  a  westerly 
lat  a  lookout 
!ven  with  the 
South  Makers 
ass  at  least  ^ 
ivhich  will  be 
stained  white 
t  now  for  the 
s  rock,  which 
?  westward  a 
:"  Slime  Bock 
to  avoid  the 
39°  E.  mag.) 

ectly  for  the 
'  Wapitagun 
)  higher  than 

Long  Ledge, 
'oint,  and  on 
he  high  east 

westward  of 
1  of  the  islet 
?  out  for  the 
erne  of  Outer 
irer  than  400 

ite  bold,  and 
ard  of  N.  31° 
yards  of  the 
kstward,  bear 
)f  the  vessel, 
nd  the  water 
sueral  depths 
is  in  a  small 


WAPITAGUN   HARBOR. 


255 


bay  on  the  south  side  of  the  harbor,  1,200  yards  within  West  Passage, 
in  7  fatlioms.  The  bottom  within  the  harbor  is  everywhere  of  mud,' 
but  outside  it  is  all  rocky,  with  irregular  soundings. 

Tides.— It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Wapitagun  Harbor  at 
lOli.  30m.;  ordinary  springs  rise  5  feet,  neaps  3  feet.  The  flood  from 
the  eastward  and  ebb  from  the  westward  usually  run  past  the  entrances 
of  the  harbor,  at  a  rate  varying  from  h  to  one  mile;  but  both  streams 
are  much  influenced  by  the  winds. 


'h 


|!} 


IK' '  ■-'■  ^)^'k_._ 


CHAPTER  IX. 


GTILF   OF   ST.   LAWRENCE,   NORTH   SHORE,  CAPE   WHITTLE   TO   POINT 

DES  MONTS. 


QUEBEC. 
(H.O.  Chart  No.  1108.) 

Aspect  of  Coast. — From  Cape  Whittle,  Natashquan  Point  is  62 
miles  uearlj'  west.  With  the  exception  of  the  first  13  miles  eastward  of 
Natashquan  Point,  where  the  shore  is  of  sand,  this  coast  is  of  granite, 
which  rises  into  steep  hills  and  ridges,  with  rounded  summits,  having 
between  them  morasses  and  stagnant  ponds.  The  mainland  is  seldom 
higher  than  200  feet,  even  at  the  heads  of  the  bays,  and  it  diminishes 
in  height  toward  the  sea,  as  do  also  the  innumerable  small  islands, 
IslctM,  and  rocks  which  fringe  the  coast,  and  which  in  some  parts 
extend  fully  5  miles  from  the  nearest  point  of  the  mainland.  The 
islands  are  bare  of  wood,  and  so,  also,  is  the  main,  excepting  up  the 
bays  or  where  sandy  tracks  occur,  which  are  always  covered  with  a 
thick  g/ovvfh  of  spruce,  with  occasional  birch  and  poplar. 

Seen  from  the  distance  of  12  or  15  miles,  this  coast  presents  an  out- 
line so  little  diversif5ed  that  it  is  nearly  impossible  to  distinguish  one 
pBtt  (ff  it  from  another;  and  it  is  only  when  a  vessel  approaches  within 
3  or  4  miles  of  the  outer  rocks  that  its  broken  and  dangerous  nature 
becomes  apparent. 

Soundings. — Tlie  outer  rocks,  both  above  and  under  water,  are  so 
bold  that  there  is  no  warning  from  the  use  of  the  hand  lead;  but  there 
are  soundings  with  the  deep-sea  lead  In  moderate,  but  irregular,  depths 
off  every  part  of  this  coast.  These  deep-water  soundings  are  too  irreg- 
ular to  admit  of  a  concise  description ;  the  chart,  therefore,  must  be 
referred  to  with  the  remark  that  they  are  sufficient  to  warn  a  vessel  of 
her  approacli  toward  danger  at  night  or  in  fogs,  since  these  depths  do 
not  amount  to  siO  fathoms  at  any  less  distance  than  '  miles  from  the 
outei  locks.      . 

Tides. — The  tides  are  weak,  irregular,  and  influenced  both  in  their 
strength  and  direction  by  the  winds. 

Whittle  Rocks  are  the  outermost  of  the  many  sm.all  rocks  above 
and  under  water  lying  oft'  to  the  southward  and  westward  of  Cape 
Whittle;  tlcy  are  two  half  tide  rocks,  and  are  2iJ  miles  from  the  cai)e. 

All  these  jocksare  steep,  with  from  20  to  40  fathoms  water  between 
them ;  small  fishing  and  egging  schooners  find  their  way  among  them, 
being  guided  by  the  eye. 

256 


s'/is  A^.i-i  .iir:sfitv^*^;B«^ 


I   TO   POINT 


:»oint  is  62 
eastward  of 
of  grauite, 
lits,  having 
d  is  seldom 
;  diminislies 
lall  islands, 
some  parts 
iland.  The 
ting  up  the 
Bred  with  a 

}nts  an  out- 
inguish  one 
ches  within 
'ous  nature 

ater,  are  so 
. ;  but  there 
liar,  depths 
re  too  irreg- 
re,  must  be 
I  a  vessel  of 
i  depths  do 
es  from  the 

Dth  in  their 

rocks  above 
-rd  of  Cape 
n  tlie  cai)e. 
ter  between 
mong  them, 


i 


COACOA(  HO    HAY. 


257 


Wolf  Bay,  the  .u-st  inlet  westward  of  Cape  Whittle,  is  0  or  7  miles 
deep.  There  is  plenty  of  wat«^r  in  its  intricate  channels,  and  few 
dangers  that  do  not  show,  bnt  a  number  of  rocks  and  ledges  extend 
across  its  mouth  from  Cape  Whittle  to  Wolf  Island,  and  are  so  scat- 
tered  about  that  directions  wonld  not  be  of  the  least  use. 

■  Wolf  Island  may  be  easily  recognized,  being  higher  and  larger  than 

■  tlie  outer  islands  usually  are  off  this  part  of  the  coast.    It  is  about  •} 
mile  long,  and  ap])ears  as  two  hills,  which  are  about  loO  feet  high. 

Outer  Islet  is  small,  low,  and  lies  about  one  mile  southward  of  Wolf 
Island.  It  is  the  outermost  of  a  chain  of  islands  which  extends  4  or 
r>  miles  from  the  point  of  the  mainland,  dividing  Wolf  and  Coacoacho 
Bays.    It  lies  7  miles  W.  by  S.  from  Cape  Whittle. 

Beacon.— A  conical  beacon,  30  tVet  high  and  painted  wiute,  has  been 
erected  on  this  islet. 

Coacoacho  Bay  is  the  only  place  affording  anchorage  to  large  ves- 
sels upon  this  part  of  the  coast.  Jt  is  not  at  all  difficult  of  entrance, 
although  the  number  of  islets  and  rocks  in  every  direction  makes  it 
appear  so.  There  is  an  excellent  harbor  in  the  head  of  the  bay,  called 
the  Basin,  and  another,  formed  by  an  arm  running  into  it,  and  named 
Tertiary  Shell  Bay,  is  equally  safe.  Farther  out  than  these  harbors 
the  bay  is  more  than  I  mile  wide,  and  quite  sufficiently  sheltered  from 
the  sea  for  the  safety  of  any  vossel  with  good  anchors  and  cables. 

Q-range  Rock  is  the  southeastern  most  of  three  dangerous  ledges 
lying  off  the  entrance  to  Coacoacho  Bay.  It  is  the  shallowest  part  of 
a  narrow  ridge  of  rocks  about  >i  mile  long  in  a  SW\  direction,  and  is 
only  shown  by  breakers  when  there  is  a  heavy  sea  running.  From  the 
least  water  on  it,  15  feet,  Outer  Islet  lies  1  ,i  miles  N.  3°  E.  (N.  34o  e, 
mag.) ;  and  from  its  southwestern  end,  in  3  fathoms,  the  same  islet  bears 
N.  7°  B.  (N.  38°  E.  mag.)  1 J  miles. 

South  Breaker,  which  also  shows  only  in  heavy  weather,  lies  S.  75° 
W.  (N.  74°  W.  mag.)  2  miles  from  On*er  Islet  and  N.  (^o  W.  (N.  30° 
W.  mag.)  2  miles  from  Grange  Kock.  It  has  less  than  12  ffiet  of  water 
on  it,  and  is  near  the  northeastern  end  of  a  ridge  of  rocks,  which  ex- 
tends from  it  f  mile  SSW.,  with  1(5  feet  water  near  its  outer  exti-eiuity. 

Southwest  Breaker,  with  only  3  feet  water  on  it,  lies  N.  62°  W. 
(N.  31°  W.  mag.)  2^  miles  from  South  Breaker,  and  S.  59"  W.  (west 
mag.)  2^  miles  from  Audubon  Point.  There  are  clear  channels  between 
these  ledges. 

Directions.~To  enter  Coacoacho  Bay  by  the  most  direct  channel 
between  Grange  Bock  and  South  Breakei,  proceed  as  follows:  Being 
not  less  than  3  miles  from  Outer  Islet,  bring  it  to  bear  between  N.  18^ 
E.  (N.  490  E.  mag.)  and  N.  52°  E.  (N.  83o  E.  mag.),  and  steer  for  it  until 
the  vessel  is  within  Grange  Kock  and  South  Breaker,  or  until  Outer  Islet 
is  distant  not  more  than  one  mile,  when  the  rocks  which  lie  about  A 
mile  northward  of  the  islet  will  bo  plainly  seen.  Pass  westward  of 
those  rocks,  at  ^  mile,  and  when  abreast  of  them,  a  chain  of  low  rocks 
1151 17 


I 


ji 

|l 

111 


Jf 


S^i^^iiVflSfii^- 


■MMl 


258 


GULF   OF    ST.    LAWRENCE — NORTH    COAST. 


f 


Ifp 


which  project  SW.  from  Emery  Islaud  will  be  seeu  right  ahead.  Briiij;' 
the  point  of  this  chain  to  bear  N.  7°  E.  (N.  38°  E,  mag.),  when  it  will 
appear  in  line  with  the  extreme  i)oint  of  the  mainland  on  the  NW.  side 
near  the  head  of  the  bay. 

Steer  in  upon  tins  leading  mark  or  bearing  until  the  vessel  is  past 
some  rocks  which  lie  about  A  mile  irora  the  east  side  of  the  Audubon 
Islets,  These  rocks,  which  are  dry  at  low  water  and  can  always  be 
seen,  must  be  left  on  the  port  hand.  When  up  to  the  Emery  Eocks 
the  buy  will  be  seen  open  right  ahead  and  clear  of  danger,  excepting 
Milne  Reef,  which  is  partly  dry  in  low  tides,  and  extends  nearly  ^  mile 
out  from  the  low  rocks,  its  outer  end  lying  nearly  in  a  line  from  Terti- 
ary Voiiit  fo  Crocodile  Islet  on  the  west  side  of  the  bay.  To  pass  to 
the  westward  of  it,  keep  Audubon  Point  shut  in  behind  Milne  Point 
and  ♦  •  "codile  Islet.  The  best  berth  is  on  the  western  side  of  toe  bay, 
}  niiii!  ^  ichln  Crocodile  Islet,  in  9  fathoms  mud. 

In  ruiiuing  for  Ooacoacho  Bay  from  the  westward,  a  vessel  may 
eitler  I'^ss  between  Southwest  and  South  Breakers  by  bringing  the 
huier  f)T  NE.  end  of  Wolf  Island  to  bear  N.  58°  E.  (S.  89°  E.  mag.),  and 
Stef  ii'jg  i!>v  it;  or  by  bringing  Outer  Islet  to  bear  nothing  eastward  of 
N.  52-  E.  (^^.85^  E.  mag.),  and  running  toward  it,  until  she  is  within 
less  than  one  mile,  when  she  may  haul  in  for  Emery  Hocks,  as  before 
directed. 

Tertiary  Shell  Bay  has  nothing  in  the  way  excepting  a  small  rock 
above  water  ^  mile  within  the  entrance,  which  must  be  left  on  the  stf».r- 
board  hand.  This  bay  is  not  more  than  200  yards  wide  h  mile  from  the 
entrance,  but  it  becomes  wider  within,  with  from  5  to  11  fathoms  water 
over  mud  bottom,  and  is  there  quite  landlocked. 

Basin. — In  running  in  for  the  Basin,  keep  the  NW,  side  of  the  bay 
aboard  until  the  vessel  is  within  J  mile  of  the  island  in  the  head  of  the 
bay;  then  sheer  over  to  the  eastward,  toward  that  island,  to  avoid  a 
shoal  of  bowlder  stones  which  extend  nearly  400  yards  off  the  west  side 
of  the  bay.  The  channel  between  this  shoal  and  the  island  is  only  200 
yards  wide,  but  deep  enough  for  large  vessels.  Give  the  island  a  berth 
of  100  yards,  leaving  it  to  the  eastward.  As  soon  as  she  is  past  the 
inner  end  of  the  island,  haul  to  the  west'vard  into  the  mouth  of  a  small 
bay,  and  the  water  will  soon  sho-  ;  o  8  r; thorns,  muddy  bottom,  where 
she  must  anchor,  and  will  be  quiti.  sheltered  from  p'  ^ry  wind. 

Coacoacho  River  flows  throM:?!)  a  wide  and  shallow  channel  full  of 
bowlders,  and  discharges  the  waters  of  a  large  lake,  to  which  boats 
can  ascend  with  the  tide.  Its  shores  are  wooded  with  spruce  trees,  and 
water  may  be  obtained  near  the  western  side  of  the  entrance. 

Tides. — There  is  very  little  stream  of  tide  in  Coacoacho  Bay,  but  a 
weak  and  irregular  stream  of  flood  and  ebb  sets  through  and  between 
the  islands.  It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  lOh.  30m.;  ordinary 
springs  rise  5  feet,  and  neaps  3  feet. 

Olomanoshsebo  River. — The  coast,  for  the  first  12  miles  westward 


-^  jfaiyigwiwn 


lead.  Briii^- 
when  it  will 
;lie  NW.  side 

essel  is  past 
he  Audubon 
u  always  be 
Smery  Eocks 
jr,  excepting 
learly  ^  mile 
e  from  Terti- 
To  pass  to 
Milne  Point 
>  of  the  bay, 

vessel  may 
bringing  tlie 
S.  mag.)- and 

eastward  of 
ihe  is  within 
ks,  as  before 

a  small  rock 
b  on  the  stw- 
nile  frow  the 
ithoms  water 

[e  of  the  bay 
.'  head  of  the 
(1,  to  avoid  a 
bhe  west  side 
d  is  only  200 
sland  a  berth 
3  is  past  the 
th  of  a  small 
)ttom,  where 
ind. 

lannel  full  of 
which  boats 
ice  trees,  and 
ace. 

0  Bay,  but  a 
and  between 
m.;  ordinary 

les  westward 


WA8HSHEIXOOTAI    HAY KKGASHKA    B.\Y. 


259 


of  Coacoacho,  is  formed  of  innumerable  i.sh?t.s  and  rocks  to  Oloinano- 
sheebo,  or  Paint  River,  which  is  called  also  by  the  Canadians  "La 
Romaine."  This  is  a  considerable  river,  falling  20  feet  over  granite 
into  tlie  head  of  a  bay  4  miles  deep,  but  ho  slioal  that  boats  can  scarcely 
enter  it  at  low  water.  There  is  a  trading  i)ost  of  the  Hudson  Bay  Com- 
pany on  the  east  side  near  the  falls,  neither  of  which  can  be  seen  from 
the  sea,  being  hidden  by  the  islands;  but  the  ])lace  may  be  known  by 
the  low  sandy  alitts,  thickly  wooded  with  spruce  trees,  on  either  side  of 
the  entrance  of  the  bay.    The  tide  flows  2  miles  up  the  river. 

Treble  Islet  and  Loon  Rocks  lie  to  the  south  westward,  the  latter 
at  tlie  distance  of  6  miles  from  the  above  bay.  Loon  Rocks,  which  can 
always  be  seen,  are  3  miles  from  the  nearest  point  of  the  mainland,  and 
are  the  outermost  danger  otf  this  part  of  the  coast. 

Washsheecootai  Bay,  10  miles  westward  of  Olomanoaheebo  River, 
is  2i  miles  wide,  and  has  off  its  entrance  several  rocky  small  ledges 
whi(!h  make  it  difficult  of  entrance.  Cloudberry  Point  is  the  west 
entrance  point  of  this  bay,  and  is  formed  by  the  mainland.  The  east 
entrance  point  of  the  bay  is  formed  by  small  rocks  and  islets.  At  3 
miles  within  Cloudberry  Point  the  bay  contracts  to  a  very  narrow  inlet, 
having  several  rocks  and  islets  in  it,  and  from  4  to  2^  fathoms  water 
over  muddy  bottom  for  the  first  4  miles  up;  after  which  it  becomes 
sli allow  for  4  miles  farther,  to  the  falls  of  a  considerable  river,  where 
there  is  a  trading  post  and  salmon  fishery  of  the  Hudson  Bay  Company. 

A  rock,  with  6  feet  water  on  it,  lies  S.  79°  E.  (S.  49°  E.  mag.)  1  ,^o  niiles 
from  Cloudberry  Point.  A  conical  beacon,  25  feet  high ,  has  been  erected 
on  an  island  at  the  head  of  Washsheecootai  Bay,  which  bearing  N,  14^ 
E.  (N.  44^  E.  mag.)  leads  into  the  bay  clear  of  all  shoals  and  westward 
of  the  before-mentioned  rock. 

A  rock  is  reported  as  lying  1^  niiles  S.  8°  W.  (S.  38'  W.  mag.)  of 
I'loudberry  Point. 

This  inlet  is  completely  open  to  winds  from  southward  and  westward, 
and  affords  scarcely  any  shelter  for  the  first  5  miles  witliin  Cloudberry 
Point.  Vessels  of  considerable  burden  might  riuil  shelter  in  it  in  time 
of  need,  but  it  is  too  intri(!ate  ii,  place  for  the  general  purposes  of  navi- 
gation, or  for  any  written  directions  to  be  of  avail. 

Musquarro  River,  wiiere  there  is  a  Hudson  Bay  Company  trading 
and  fishing  post,  is  3  miles  within  the  west  point  of  a  bay  full  of  small 
islets  and  rocks.  This  river  becomes  rapid  a  short  distance  within  the 
entrance,  and  is  useless  excepting  to  boats  or  very  small  schooners.  It 
will  be  known  by  the  iiouses  which  are  ou  the  east  side  of  the  entrance, 
and  also  by  a  remarkable  r-eti  and  precipit<^us  ridge  of  grtinite,  about 
I'OO.feet  higk  and  abtmt  2  miles  westward  of  the  river. 

KefpHhka  Bay. — Theri-  .-^re  several  low  bare  rucks  and  i.  Ves  which 
always  show  ^  mile  off  Curt^w  Point,  which  is  4J  miles  westward  of 
Musquarro  River  and  is  the  wist  entrance  point  of  Kegashka  Bay. 

This  hay,  between  Curlew  and  Kegii*\ka  Points,  is  3  miles  wide  and 


■»-*--_ 


260 


GULF   OF    ST.    LAWRENCE — NORTH    COAST. 


Is* 


1^  mile!*  deep,  lu  the  western  half  of  the  bay  there  are  several  small 
islets,  too  wide  apart  to  atl'ord  much  shelter  from  the  sea.  It  is  only 
iu  the  NW.  eorner  of  the  bay,  within  Kegashka  Point,  that  a  vessel 
can  be  secure  from  southerly  winds.  There  is  room  there  for  several 
small  schooners,. but  for  only  one  vessel  of  any  size,  and  she  must  be 
moored  with  open  hawse  to  the  eastward,  with  a  third  anchor  on  shore 
to  the  SW.,  BO  as  to  be  able  to  haul  in  close  under  the  point  when  it 
blows  hard  froDi  the  southward.  The  depth  of  water  within  the  islets 
is  from,  4  to  6  fathoms  over  tine  sandy  bottom. 

Kegashka  Point  is  formed  by  an  island  separated  from  a  rocky 
peninsula  by  a  very  narrow  channel,  dry  at  low  water.  Both  the  island 
and  peninsula  are  distinguished  by  being  partly  covered  with  spruce 
trees.  There  are  also  a  few  spruce  trees  on  an  islet,  f  mile  westward 
of  the  point;  and  as  no  other  islands  on  this  part  of  the  coast  are 
wooded,  the  bay  may  be  recognized  by  that  circumstance.  There  is 
a  fine  sandy  beach  and  low  sandy  cliffs  in  the  NW.  corner  of  the  bay, 
and  there  are  also  similar  clifl's  for  about  a  mile  westward  of  the 
isthmus  above  mentioned.  This  sandy  tract  is  densely  wooded  with 
dwarf  spruce,  another  circumstance  which  serves  to  distinguish  this 
bay  and  is  the  origin  of  its  name,  which  signifies  impenetrable  woods. 
Green  Island  is  of  low  granite,  covered  with  grass,  and  is  the  outermost 
and  largest  islet  sheltering  the  bay,  being  about  600  yards  in  diameter, 
and  f  mile  eastward  of  Kegashka  Point.  There  are  several  small  islets 
and  rocks  within,  and  also  eastward  of  Green  Island,  and  one  small 
and  low  black  islet  between  it  and  the  inner  part  of  Kegashka  Point. 

Wood  and  Water  may  be  obtained  without  difficulty  in  the  western 
part  of  Kegashka  Bay,  where  there  were  several  Canadian  families, 
consisting  in  all  of  50  persons,  in  the  year  1868.  Their  houses  are  visible 
from  the  sea.  They  have  ganh-ns  and  keep  sheep  and  cattle,  and  they 
also  prosecute  the  fishenea  and  winter  liunting. 

Directions. — The  safest  channel  into  Kegashka  Bay  is  between  the 
low  Black  Islet  and  K«igashka  Point,  and  is  .340  yards  wide;  it  carries 
7  fathoms  water,  and  is  (juite  clear.  V^^hen  coming  from  the  westward, 
give  the  south  ex*re*nity  of  Kegashka  Point  a  berth  of  J  mile,  or  go 
no  nearer  than  the  depth  of  8  fathoms;  then  run  along  the  east  side  of 
the  point,  which  is  quite  bold,  leaving  all  the  islets  on  the  starboard 
hand.  A  distance  of  |  mile  on  a  X.  9^  E.  (N.  39°  E.  mag.)  course  will 
lead  to  the  narrow  chaouel  before  mentioned,  between  Black  Islet  and 
the  inner  end  of  Kegashka  Point.  Haul  round  the  latter  to  the  north- 
westward, at  the  distajice  of  100  yards,  and  when  within  it  uot  more 
than  the  same  distance,  aochor  in  5  fathoms,  and  secure  tne  vessel  by 
mooring. 

When  approaching  Kegashka  Bay  from  the  eastward,  give  the  low 
and  small  islets  off  Curlew  Point  a  berth  of  1^  miles  to  avoid  the  ledges 
off  them,  which  dry  at  low  water;  then  steer  so  as  to  pass  outside  of 
Green  Island,  going  no  nearer  than  200  yards.    Continue  on  that  course 


kkc;asi{ka  river — natash<vuan  point. 


2r,l 


several  small 
%.  It  is  only 
that  a  vessel 
re  for  several 
she  mast  be 
shor  ou  shore 
poiut  when  it 
hiu  the  islets 

rom  a  rocky 
)th  the  island 
with  spruce 
iie  westward 
he  coast  are 
ce.  There  is 
sr  of  the  bay, 
;ward  of  the 
wooded  with 
tiugnish  this 
brable  woods, 
he  outermost 
i  in  diameter, 
il  small  islete 
id  one  small 
shka  Point. 
1  the  western 
lian  families, 
les  are  visible 
btle,  and  they 

between  the 
le;  it  carries 
[le  westward, 
i  mile,  or  (fu 
e  east  side  of 
he  starboard 
.)  course  will 
ick  Islet  and 
to  the  north - 

it  not  more 
tie  vessel  by 

give  the  low 
lid  the  ledges 
,88  outside  of 
m  that  course 


fill  the  inner  or  NE.  extremity  of  Kegashka  Point  bears  N.  30'^  W. 
(north  mag.),  which  will  be  rather  more  than  li^  miles  from  the  ledges 
off  Curlew  Point;  thon  haul  in,  and  pnss  between  tlie  point  and  the 
westernmost  islet,  as  before  directed,  giving  the  south  side  of  that  islet 
a  berth  of  ut  least  2(K>  yards. 

Kegashka  Bay  has  this  advantage,  that  there  are  no  ledges  or  other 
dangers  ott'its  entrance;  so  that  a  vessel  is  no  sooner  outside  Kegashka 
Point  than  she  has  a  clear  sea  before  her. 

Kegashka  River,  alfordiii;^  shelter  only  for  boats,  is  li  miles  west- 
ward of  Kegashka  Bay.  It  has  falls  4(1  leet  high  and  a  fishing  station 
of  the  Hudson  Bay  Company  one  mile  within  its  entrance;  neither  the 
falls  nor  the  house  can  be  seen  from  the  sea. 

Natashquan  Point. — At  2.^  miles  westward  of  Kegashka  Kiver,  fine 
sandy  beaches,  in  front  of  sandy  cliffs,  70  or  80  feet  high,  and  a  country 
thickly  wooded  with  spruce  trees,  commence  and  continue  13J  miles  to 
Natashquan  Point.  It  is  a  sandy  promontorj^,  the  most  southern  point 
on  the  north  coast  of  the  gulf  to  the  eastward  of  the  Seven  Islands. 

Natashquan  Cod  Banks. — Parallel  to  the  coast  from  Musquarro 
Point  to  Natashquan  Point,  and  at  distances  varying  from  (5  to  11  miles, 
there  are  banks  of  sand,  gravel,  and  broken  shell,  on  which  the  depth 
of  water  is  between  24  and  40  fathoms.  Codfish  are  often  caught  in 
abundance  upon  these  banks. 

Caution.— Buisseau  Eock  lies  8  miles  S.  72°  W.  (N.  78°  W.  mag.) 
from  Kegashka  Point.  It  has  only  2  feet  water  on  it,  and  lies  in  line 
between  Natashquan  and  Kegashka  Points,  and'  nearly  li  miles  south- 
ward from  the  entrance  of  a  small  ..^'-eam  named  Long  River.  A 
vessel  will  avoid  it  by  not  going  nearer  to  the  shore  than  the  depth  of 
17  fathoms. 

Another  rocky  shoal  with  24  feet  least  water  is  reported  to  lie  about 
2  miles  S.  7°  W.  (S.  37°  W.  mag.),  from  the  SW.  extreme  of  Curlew 
Point. 

Cod  Bank,  a  small  shoal  with  little  more  than  4  fathoms  on  it  at  low 
water,  over  gravel  bottom,  lies  about  a  mile  southward  of  Natashquan 
Point. 

(H.O.  Chart  No.  1109.)         "  . 

Aspect  of  Coast— Prom  the  south  extreme  of  Natashquan  Point 
to  Collins  Shoal,  the  outer  danger  oft'  St.  Genevieve  Island,  the  easteru- 
inont  of  Mingan  Islands,  the  distance  is  52  miles.  The  coast  included 
ill  this  distance  is  low  near  the  sea,  rising  a  short  distance  back  into 
uiouudu  »iid  ridges,  but  nowhere  exceeding  400  feet  in  height.  It  is 
eotniK>se<i  of  [Ffimary  rocks,  with  the  exception  of  a  sandy  tract  at 
Agwani.s  and  Nabesippi  Rivers.  The  sandy  tracts  are  always  thickly 
wooded  with  spruce  trees,  and  the  country  generally  is  here  less  bare 
than  it  is  farther  eastward. 

The  coast  is  broken  into  numerous  coves  and  small  bays,  affVirding 
shelter  everywbei'  to  boats,  and  occasionally  to  very  small  schooners. 


.^J 


262 


GULF  OF  ST.  LAWRENCE — NORTH  COAST. 


I  i>' 


k 


I 


Tlie  small  and  bare  islets  and  rocks  are  inniunerablo  along  it,  but 
nowhere  extend  farther  out  from  the  points  of  the  mainland  thai.  1! 
miles. 

When  there  is  a  heavy  sea  running,  all  these  dangers  show,  or  they 
can  be  seen  from  the  inHstheiid  in  clear  weather;  but  under  other  cir- 
cumstances, the  depth  of  20  fathoms  is  as  near  to  them  as  a  vessel 
ought  to  approach,  that  depth  being  in  nimy  places  not  more  than  one 
mile  from  the  outer  le(lj;c8. 

The  banks  ii  sand,  gravel,  and  broken  shell,  which  extend  off  this 
coPiStfor  many  milt's,  ,ind  the  deei)- water  channel  between  them  and 
Anticosti,  have  been  already  mentioned  on  pa  ,c  22;  and  the  soundings 
upon  t  fm  are  too  irregular  to  admit  of  any  other  than  the  general 
descripiion  there  given  of  them.  Reference  must  be  made  to  the  charts, 
in  which  the  various  depths  and  naiureof  the  bottom  are  given  in  such 
a  way  as  can  not  fail  to  be  of  great  assistance  to  vessels  navigating  this 
channel. 

Currents  and  Tides. — The  current  down  along  the  coast  in  westerly 
winds  seldom  exceeds  A  knot,  and  is  usually  much  less;  so  that  a  vessel 
can  always  make  way  to  windward  in  moderate  weather. 

In  shore  there  are  weak  tidal  streams  too  irregular  to  be  depended 
upon.  It  is,  however,  important  to  remark  that  the  flood  draws 
strongly  into  Natashqnan  River  and  the  bay  off  Little  Natashijuan 
River,  while  the  ebb  sets  strongly  off"  Natashquan  Point  to  the  8E.  and 
causes  a  very  l.cavy  S(ia  urson  the  banks  off  it,  in  southerly  winds. 

On  approachiuj'  8t.  Genevievi,  a  strong  indraught  of  the  flood 
toward  the  channel,  bet  veen  that  island  and  the  main,  will  be  experi- 
enced, and  the  ebb  will  be  found  setting  strongly  out  in  the  contrary 
direction ;  that  is,  to  the  Sli.  The  rate  of  these  streams  seldom  exceeds 
a  mile  per  hour. 

(H.O.  Chart,  No.  1108.) 

Natashquan  River  enters  the  sea  on  the  west  side  of  the  Natash- 
qnan Point,  and  3  miles  northwestward  from  its  south  extremity.  The 
mouth  of  the  river,  between  low  sandy  points,  is  fully  one  mile  wide, 
but  nearly  the  whole  of  this  space  is  occupied  by  a  low  sandy  island, 
having  narrow  channels  on  either  side  of  it.  The  northern  channel  is 
nearly  dry  at  times,  but  the  southern  one  has  a  depth  of  6  feet  at  low 
water,  and  from  9  to  11  feet  at  high  water,  according  to  neap  and 
spring  tides.  There  is  the  same  depth  within,  and  small  schooner.s 
may  lie  alongside  the  steep  sandy  bank,  where  the  houses  of  the  Hud- 
son Bay  Company's  post  stand,  on  the  south  side  of  the  river,  ^  mile 
within  the  entrance.  The  bar  of  sand,  on  which  there  is  usually  a 
heavy  surf,  extends  out  f  mile,  and  is  exceedingly  steep  to  seaward, 
where  20  fathoms  will  be  found  within  J  mile.  Codfish  are  taken  in 
great  numbers  off  this  bar  in  the  mouth  of  June,  and  the  river  abounds 
with  salmon. 

Above  the  trading  post  che  rivev  is  full  of  sand  banks,  dry  at  low 
water,  and  only  navigable  for  boits  for  a  few  miles  tr  the  first  raiuds. 


■tt. 


i^l 


LITTLE   NATASHQUAN    HARHOR, 


263 


bloDg  it,  but 
laud  thai.  :: 

[low,  or  thty 

ier  other  cir- 

as  SI  vessel 

3re  than  one 

end  oft'  this 
n  them  and 
16  soundings 
the  general 
o  the  charts, 
;iven  in  such 
^igatiug  this 

t  iu  westerly 
;hat  a  vessel 

be  depended 
flood  draws 
Natashcjuan 
the  8E.  and 
f  winds. 
»f  the  flood 
ill  be  experi- 
;he  contrary 
dom  exceeds 


the  Natash- 
■emity.  The 
e  mile  wide, 
andy  island, 
n  channel  is 
6  feet  at  low 
:o  neap  and 
.11  schooners 
of  the  Hud- 
river,  ^  mile 
is  usually  a 
to  seaward, 
are  taken  in 
iver  abounds 

8,  dry  at  low 
first  r{ii)ids. 


Tlie  sandy  beach  continues  northward  for  li^  miles  from  the  entrance, 
terminuting  at  the  mouth  of  a  small  stream,  named  Little  Natashquan 
liiver,  which  admits  boats  only  at  high  water,  and  which  is  close  east- 
ward of  the  harbor  of  the  same  name. 

Little  Natashquan  Harbor,  formed  by  a  number  of  islets  and 
rocks,  is  only  fit  for  vessels  not  exceeding  100  tons.  The  entrances,  of 
wliich  there  are  two,  formed  by  a  reef  of  rocks  in  the  center,  are  not 
more  tliau  180  yards  wide  between  reefs,  the  extent  of  which  under 
water  can  not  be  seen,  because  the  water  is  discoloro<^  -y  the  dark 
streams  of  the  neighboring  rivers. 

The  depth  that  can  be  carried  in  at  low  water  by  i  t      annel  is 

3  fathoms,  and  5  fathoms  by  that  which  is  between  1 1  i    eef  and 

the  islets  on  the  east  side.    The  space  within  therei  ..    i  vessels 

can  ride  in  from  3  to  5  fathoms,  over  sand  and  mml  bottom,  is  only  J 
mile  in  diameter.  The  anchorage  is  protected  by  the  main  and  islets 
from  all  winds  excepting  the  SSW.,  in  which  direction  thei'e  are  reefs 
of  rocks,  some  parts  of  which  are  always  above  water.  In  a  strong  SW. 
wind,  some  sea  comes  over  these  reefs  at  high  water,  but  never  enough 
to  endanger  a  vessel  during  the  summer  months.  There  are  several 
rocky  patches,  with  from  2,^  to  3  fathoms  off"  the  harbor's  mouth ;  these, 
with  the  want  of  space  to  work  in,  and  the  difficulty  of  getting  out  with 
the  prevailing  southerly  winds  of  summer,  render  this  place  of  little 
use  for  the  purposes  of  navigation ;  but  it  is  a  valuable  harbor  for  the 
fishermen,  whose  schooners  of  from  30  to  100  tons  are  well  suited  to  the 
size  and  nature  of  the  place,  which  is  contiguous  to  excellent  fishing 
ground,  and  affords  every  facility  for  drying  fish.  The  harbor  should 
not  be  entered  by  a  stranger  without  a  pilot. 

Population. — There  were  365  inhabitants  resident  iu  this  locality  in 
1891.  The  majority  of  the  people  live  on  the  eastern  side  of  Little 
Natashquan  River,  where  there  is  also  a  Roman  Catholic  church.  There 
is  an  establishment  on  the  north  shore  of  the  liarbor. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  chatige,  in  Little  Natashquan  Har- 
bor at  llh.;  springs  rise  5  feet,  and  neaps  3  feet. 

Directions. — The  entrance  of  Little  Natashquan  Harbor  lies  4  miles 
NNW.  from  the  southern  entrance  of  Natashquan  River,  and  a  vessel 
being  oft"  the  bar  of  that  river  in  20  fathoms,  should  steer  N.  3°  E.  (N. 
330  E.  mag.)  nearly  parallel  to  the  sandy  beach.  When  she  has  run 
rather  more  than  3  miles,  and  has  decreased  her  dei)th  to  12  fathoms, 
she  will  be  about  ^  mile  from,  and  will  see,  the  islets  and  rocks  which, 
commencing  at  the  termination  of  the  sandy  beach,  lie  oft'  the  entrance 
of  Little  Natashquan  River,  and  form  the  east  side  ot  the  entrance  to 
the  harbor.  The  westernmost  of  the  islets  is  much  larger  than  those 
which  lie  farther  SE.  between  it  and  the  termination  of  the  sandy 
beach.  Bring  the  SW.  point  of  that  island  to  bear  N.  3°  E.  (N.  33^^  E. 
mag.)  in  12  fathoms  water,  and  the  southeasternmost  of  the  rocks  at 
the  termination  of  the  sandy  bcacli  will  bear  N.  53°  l-^.  (N.  83^  E.  mag.). 

From  this  position,  by  ascending  the  rigging  for  the  purpose,  the  reef 


m 


i 

I 


m 


2(;4 


GULF   OF    ST.    LAWREN<"E — NORTH   COAST. 


ft 

r- 


j-S8 


m 


will  be  mtid«  tmt  on  the  west  side  of  the  liaihor,  which  extoiulH  ratlu'r 
moio  thuii  i  mile  soiithwartl  liom  a  rather  hi^h  and  round-backed  isk't 
oi  gray  granite,  with  a  wooden  cross  upon  it,  whicih  can  be  seen  2  miles. 
ThJH  islot,  named  Keacon  Islet,  will  bear  N.  14^  W.  (N.  lO'^  K.  mag.) 
from  the  position  above  indicated,  and  Central  Ueef,  some  part  of  wliich 
is  always  above  water,  will  be  seen  between  it  and  the  islets  and  the 
jtoiiit  of  the  main,  whicli,  together,  form  the  east  side  of  the  harlxir. 
Steer  N.  14^  \V.  (N.  Kjo  e.  ,i„ig.)  for  Ik-acon  Islet,  until  abreast  of  the 
outer  ])art  of  the  n-ef  to  the  westward,  wliich  will  be  distant  a  little 
more  than  liOO  yards,  and  the  vessel  will  be  in  about  7  fathoms  Avater. 

Alter  the  course  now  sufficiently  to  the  eastward  to  pass  on  that  side 
of  Central  Keef  which  may  be  preferred,  giving  its  rocks  above  water 
a  berth  of  200  yards,  if  the  west  channel  is  taken.  Central  Iteef  is 
quite  bold  to  the  southward,  and  also  on  its  east  side,  so  that  it  may 
be  approached  within  40  yards  when  entering  by  the  east  channel;  but 
bear  in  mind,  in  hauling  round  its  north  and  NE.  ends,  that  it  extends 
140  yards  under  water  from  the  rocks,  which  always  show,  toward  the 
center  of  the  harbor.  The  best  berth  to  anchor  in  is  nearly  in  the 
center  of  the  harbor,  in  4  fathoms},  sanA  and  mud  bottom. 

Sphinx  Rock,  with  9  feet  on  it  at  low  water,  lies  with  the  beacon  on 
Beacon  Islet  bearing  N.  30°  W.  (north  mag.). 

H.  M.  S.  Mnbe  in  1809  touched  on  -i  rock  with  15  feet  water  on  it, 
which  may  be  considered  as  an  exteneic  of  i  itral  lleef;  it  lies  about 
120  yards  from  the  north  rock  (above  wuer)  of  Central  Reef,  in  a  NW. 
direction,  and  on  the  direct  lino  befw.-in  that  rock  and  the  south  end 
of  Beacon  Island;  18  and  20  feet  v  ru  found  close  to  the  rock. 

(II.  O.  Cbart  No.  1109.) 

Washtawooka  Bay,  5  miles  westward  of  Little  Natashquan,  is  full 
of  small  islets,  rocks,  and  ledges,  alTordiug  shelter  to  shallops  and 
boats.  It  is  an  intricate  and  dangerous  place,  and  may  be  known  by 
Shag  Islet,  a  large  black  rock  lying  off  it,  and  farther  out  than  the 
rest,  being  1.}  miles  S.  65°  E.  (S.  25o  E.  mag.)  from  the  projecting  point 
of  the  main. 

Agwanus  River,  10  miles  westward  of  Little  Natashquan  Harbor, 
is  a  large  stream,  having  rapids  and  falls  U  miles  from  the  entrance, 
which  is  narrow,  and  has  only  0  feet  in  it  at  low  water.  There  is  no 
bar,  but  many  small  rocks,  both  above  and  under  water,  extend  l.i 
miles  oif  its  mouth,  and  render  the  approach  extremely  dangerous". 
The  east  entrance  point  is  of  rock,  the  other  of  sand,  and  there  is  a 
small  i.slet  ^  mile  from  the  mouth  of  the  river.  From  9  to  12  feet  can 
be  carried  np  to  this  islet,  above  which  the  river  expands  into  a  basin, 
i  mile  wide,  and  carrying  5  fathoms  close  up  to  the  foot  of  the  rapids. 
There  is  a  sandy  beach  for  1^  miles  eastward  of  this  river,  and  also 
we.-<tward  of  it  to  I^abesippi  Eiver. 

Nabesippi  River,  .i  miles  from  Agwanus  Kiver,  enters  the  sea  at  tht- 
extremity  of  a  saudy  point.    It  is  much  smaller  than  Agwanus  Kiver, 


i 


tlMUlH  rutluT 
■backed  islt't 
Hcon  2  miles. 
lO'^  E.  ma},'.) 
lartof  wliicli 
ilets  and  the 

the  liurbor. 
)reaHt  of  the 
taut  a  little 
;liom8  water, 
on  that  side 
above  water 
tral  Keef  ia 

that  it  may 
ihannel;  but 
it  it  exteuds 
,  toward  the 
early  in  the 

le  beacou  ou 

water  on  it, 
it  lies  about 
ef,  in  a  NW. 
le  south  end 
Qck. 


quan,  is  full 
hallops  and 
e  known  by 
lit  than  the 
acting  point 

lan  Harbor, 
le  entrance, 
rhere  is  no 
',  extend  l.J 
dangerous, 
d  tliere  is  a 
12  feet  can 
ito  a  basin, 
the  rapids, 
r,  and  also 

le  sea  at  the 
luus  Itiver, 


i 


f 


■^^^^f^m^^^ms^^ms^^^S^s^e^ssssmmsss 


^ij^m^^i^ffj!^'  Ksf.'s 


,^ 


r^ 


•ttei—  ,ii..„. 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0 


I^IM    12.5 


w 


u&m 


m 

Sim  ■ 


I.I 


lit 


14.0 


II 


1.25 


1.4 


2.2 
2.0 

1.6 


A" 

o 

Photographic 

Sciences 

Corporation 


23  WEST  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  N.Y.  14580 

(716)  872-4503 


■ft»wftiiWh>['fiBeK.iUifc!w> 


CIHM/ICMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 


CIHIVI/ICMH 
Collection  de 
microfiches. 


Canadian  Institute  for  Historical  Microreproductions  /  Institut  Canadian  de  microreproductions  historiques 


PASHASHEEBOO    BAY MINGAN    ISLANDS. 


265 


On  tlie  west  bank,  a  short 


and  will  only  admit  boats  in  iine  weather 

distance  within  the  entrance,  stands  a  house  and  store,  the  trading 

])08t  of  the  llvidson  Bay  Company,  which  can  be  readily  seen  from  the 

sea. 

Fashasheeboo,  Mushkoniatawee,  and  Washatnagunashka  are 

small  bays,  full  of  small  islets  and  rocks,  which  render  their  entrances 
so  difficult  and  dangerous  that  directions  would  not  be  of  the  least 
avail.  They  are  occasionally,  but  not  often,  entered  by  small  coasting 
schooners  intimately  acquainted  with  the  coast,  and  none  but  those  who 
know  every  rock  and  ledge  could  either  distinguish  them  or  take  a 
vessel  in.  The  first  named  is  o])cn  to  the  southward.  The  second, 
less  intricate  than  the  other  two,  is  400  yards  wide,  with  5  fathoms 
water  in  the  entrance  and  within;  it  is  open  to  southerly  winds,  but  is, 
nevertheless,  tolerably  secure  for  small  craft,  which  may  lie  close  tothe 
rocks.  The  third  is  1^  miles  wide,  with  a  chain  of  rocks  above  and 
under  water  across  its  mouth,  not  large  enough  or  close  enough  to  afford 
much  shelter,  yet  too  close  and  too  numerous  for  a  vessel  to  find  her 
way  through  without  great  diflBculty  and  danger.  There  is  a  depth  of 
3  fathoms  in  the  entrance,  and  4  and  f)  fathoms  within. 

"Watcheeshoo,  18  miles  west  of  the  Nabesippi  Kiver,  is  a  hill  of 
granite,  127  feet  high,  and  bare  of  trees.  It  is  a  peninsula,  but  appears 
like  an  islet,  higher  than  the  rest,  when  seen  in  a  vessel  from  a  distance. 
There  is  a  fishing  post  of  the  Hudson  Bay  Company  in  a  cove  among 
the  rocks,  to  the  westward  of  it.  Watcheeshoo  and  Saddle  Hill,  which 
is  374  feet  high  above  the  sea,  serve  to  point  out  to  a  vessel  her  posi- 
tiou  off'  the  coast.  The  latter  is  6  miles  inland  from  the  former  in  a 
northerly  direction.  • 

Quetachoo-Manicouagon  and  Feashtebai  are  two  contiguous 
bays,  4  miles  westward  of  Watcheeshoo.  The  first,  which  is  the  east- 
ernmost, is  2i  miles  wide,  and  carries  from  3  to  14  fathoms  water,  but 
so  full  of  rocks  and  ledges  as  to  be  useless,  excepting  to  the  smallest 
schooners;  it  is  open  to  the  south  westward.  The  other  is  a  much 
smaller  bay,  capable  of  affording  shelter  only  to  boats,  and  open  tothe 
southward. 

Appeetetat  Bay  is  full  of  rocks ;  of  no  use  to  vessels,  because  of  the 
ledges  under  water  off"  its  entrance,  and  also  within. 

The  Mingan  Islands  are  estimated  nowheie  to  attain  an  elevation 
exceeding  300  feet  above  the  sea,  and  are  in  general  much  lower.  They 
possess  very  little  soil,  but  nevertheless  are  thickly  wooded  with  spruce, 
birch,  and  poplar  on  the  side  toward  the  mainland;  though  toward  the 
sea  barren  tracts  often  occur,  composed  either  of  bare  limestone,  or  of 
banks  and  ridges  of  limestone  gravel. 

The  Coast  of  the  mainland,  from  Mingan  Biver  to  St.  John  Eiver,  is 
of  sand  and  clay,  low  and  thickly  wooded,  and  with  a  fine  sandy  beach. 
Farther  eastward  the  shore  is  sometimes  of  granite,  and  at  others  of 
limestone,  the  lattc:'  r(;ck  lying  immediately  over  the  former.    Mount 


266 


GULF   OF   ST.   LAWRENCE — NORTH   COAST. 


St.  John,  1,416  feet  higJi,  is  the  highest  point  of  the  mainland  in  this 
neighborhood.  There  are  other  hills  rising  1,000  feet  above  the  sea, 
about  18  miles  farther  eastward,  but  0  or  7  miles  back  from  the  sea,  and 
nearly  opposite  Quarry  Island.  With  these  exceptions,  the  main  is  low, 
and  it  is  particularly  so  abreast  the  eastern  islands,  where  the  hills  are 
far  back  in  the  country. 

Wood  and  Water  can  readily  be  obtained  from  the  principal  of 
Mingan  Islands;  wild  berries  are  abundant  in  their  season,  and  so  are 
different  kinds  of  wild  fowl ;  quadrupeds  are  scarce,  but  there  arr  plenty 
of  seal  upon  the  limestone  reefs,  and  a  few  codfish  ott"  the  coast. 

Tides. — The  tides  are  not  strong  among  Mingan  Islands,  never 
exceeding  one  knot,  except  in  very  narrow  channels.  They  are  often 
rendered  irregular  by  the  winds,  but  in  line  settled  weather  there  is  a 
constant  alternation  of  the  streams  of  flood  and  ebb  between  the  islands 
and  the  main,  and  also  within  the  distance  of  2  or  .'5  miles  from  the 
southern  shores  of  the  islands. 

St.  Q-enevieve  Island,  the  easternmost,  is  about  5  miles  in  circum- 
ference. Its  NE.  point  is  a  bluff  headland,  the  termination  in  that 
dnection  of  the  highest  part  of  the  island,  which  is  about  200  feet  above 
the  sea,  and  slopes  irregularly  down  to  the  southward. 

Mount  St.  Genevieve,  332  feet  above  high  water,  is  an  isolated  table 
hill  on  the  mainland,  about  one  mile  inward  and  2J  miles  from  the  NE. 
point  of  the  island.  This  mountain  and  the  high  NE.  point  of  the 
island  distinctly  point  out  from  the  sea  the  position  of  the  channel 
between  the  island  and  the  main. 

Saints  and  Bowen  Rocks  are  two  patches  of  rocks  which  render  it 
necessary  to  approach  St.  Genevieve  Island  with  caution. 

Saints  Bocks  are  two  low  and  bare  rocks,  lying  rather  more  than  J 
mile  southward  of  St.  Genevieve.  There  is  a  chan'nel  with  5  fathoms 
water,  but  with  foul  gpround,  between  tlitem  and  the  island ;  and  reefs 
under  water  extend  fr-m  each  cf  them  fully  600  yards. 

The  Is  W.  Bowen  liock,  with  3  feet  least  water,  lies  -i\  miles  X.  78°  E. 
(S.  73°  E.  mag.)  from  East  Sair  d  with  the  south  side  of  the  latter 
in  line  with  the  center  of  Wesi         t. 

The  SE.  Bowen  Kock,  wich  (J  .eo.  least  water,  lies  S.  08°  E.  (S.  39°  E. 
mag.)  §  mile  from  the  NW.  Bowen  Rock  and  S.  87°  E.  (S.  58°  i:.  mag.) 
1§  miles  from  East  Saint,  which  is  just  open  northward  of  West  Saint. 

These  very  dangerous  rocks  lie  nearly  in  a  line  from  the  SE.  point  of 
St.  Genevieve  Island,  at  the  distances  of  li^  and  2  miles,  respectively. 
There  is  deep  water  between  and  close  to  them,  and  also  for  rather 
more  than  one  mile  southward  of  them  and  Saints  Rocks.  The  sound- 
ings are  here  extremely  irregular,  varying  from  4  to  6  fathoms,  rock,  to 
43  fathoms,  sand,  sometimes  in  a  single  cast  of  the  lead.  The  whole  of 
this  dangerous  part  should  be  avoided  by  vessels. 

Hunting  Island,  the  next  westward  of  St.  Genevieve  Island,  is  low, 
thickly  wooded,  broken  into  many  coves,  and  is  fringed  with  small 


nland  in  this 
ibove  the  sea, 
a  the  sea,  and 
le  main  is  low, 
e  the  hills  are 

!  principal  of 
•n,  and  so  are 
ere  uro  plenty 
coast. 

slanris,  never 
'hey  are  often 
tier  there  is  a 
en  the  islands 
lies  from  the 

les  in  circum- 
ation  in  that 
iOO  feet  above 

isolated  table 
from  the  NE. 
point  of  the 

f  the  channel 

hich  render  it 

more  than  J 
ith  5  fathoms 
id;  and  reefs 

tiles  X.  78°  E. 
)  of  the  latter 

5  E.  (S.  3J)o  E. 
.  58°^':.  mag.) 
f  West  Saint, 
e  SE.  point  of 

respectively. 

Iso  for  rather 

The  sonnd- 

loms,  rock,  to 

The  whole  of 

[slaud,  is  low, 
d  with  small 


ST.    GENEVIEVE    HARBOR. 


207 


islets  and  rocks  on  all  sides,  except  toward  the  mainland.  Wood  and 
Gun  Islands  lie  1^  miles  oif  tlie  SW.  point,  leaving  no  passage  between, 
and  having  reefs  extending  from  them  000  yards  southward.  They 
are  both  low,  and  the  latter  is  bare  of  trees,  but  covered  with  grass 
and  ])eat,  in  ^hich  innumerable  puffins  burrow  and  rear  their  young. 

Garde  Rock,  always  above  water,  lies  rather  more  than  one  mile 
southward  of  the  middle  of  the  soutliern  coast  of  Hunting  Island;  it 
would  be  highly  imprudent  for  any  ship  to  attempt  a  passage  between 
it  and  the  island,  as  there  are  many  ledges  scattered  along  the  southern 
side  of  the  island,  and  Garde  Eock  is  itself  the  termination  of  a  long 
ridge  of  sunken  rocks.  The  southeastern  end  of  the  island  is  likewise 
beset  with  several  reefs,  some  of  which  extend  g  mile  southward. 

Collins  Shoal,  a.  small  patch  of  rocks,  with  12  feet  least  water,  lies 
23  miles  from  the  SE.  point  of  Hunting  Island.  From  this  dangerous 
shoal  the  east  point  of  St.  (Jenevieve  Island  is  just  open  eastward  of 
W^est  Saint,  bearing  N.  9°  E.  (N.  38°  E.  mag.),  and  the  north  point  of 
Wood  Island  is  in  line  with  the  south  side  of  Garde  Eock,  bearing  N. 
730  W.  (K  440  w.  mag.). 

Caution. — Between  Collins  Shoal  and  the  reefs  off  the  SE.  point  of 
Hunting  Island  the  soundings  are  irregular,  from  4  to  17  fathoms  over 
rocky  bottom,  and  vessels  should  not  pass  between  them. 

St  Genevieve  and  Betchewun  Harbors.— The  tirst  of  these  har- 
bors is  between  St.  Genevieve  Island  and  the  mainland,  and  the  second 
between  Hunting  Island  and  the  main.  Both  are  excellent  harbors, 
not  difficult  of  access  or  egress  with  the  assistance  of  the  chart,  and 
are  fit  for  large  vessels. 

"Wood  and  Water  may  be  obtained,  the  latter  from  small  streams, 
either  on  the  main  or  on  the  islands. 

Directions. — There  are  two  channels  leading  to  these  harbors, 
namely,  East  and  Saints  Channels.  East  Channel  is  the  best  with 
easterly  winds,  and  may  be  used  with  moderate  westerly  winds  during 
the  flood  tide  by  vessels  not  too  large  to  work  in  such  narrow  channels, 
but  they  must  be  careful  in  their  boards  to  the  northward,  especially 
in  that  toward  Ledge  Point. 

By  East  Channel — To  enter  by  the  East  Channel,  bring  the  NE. 
point  of  St.  Genevieve  in  line  with  Indian  Point  (a  low  wooded  point 
of  th«3  main,  ibrming  the  east  point  of  Pillage  Bay),  bearing  N.  61°  W. 
(N.  .32°  W.  mag.).  Eun  in  with  this  mark  on,  and  it  will  lead  J  mile 
northeastward  of  the  Bowen  Eocks. 

When  the  SE.  point  of  St.  Genevieve  and  the  West  Saint  come  in 
line,  steer  a  little  tothe  northward,  so  as  not  to  go  too  near  a  flat  shoal 
which  extends  nearly  COO  yards  from  the  NK.  side  of  St.  Genevieve. 
Give  the  NE.  point  of  St.  Genevieve  a  berth  of  200  yards.  Anchor  in 
10  lathoms,  mud  bottom,  halfway  between  it  and  Anchor  Island,  close 
oft'  the  XW.  point  of  St.  Genevieve. 

Caution. — The  distance  across  frcjm  the  NE.  point  of  St.  Genevieve 


I 

1''         i 


268 


GULF  OF  ST.  LAWRENCE — NORTH  COAST. 


to  tlie  main  is  about  a  mile,  but  the  navigable  breadth  of  the  entrance 
is  reduced  to  ^  mile  by  the  rocks  and  shoal  water  otl"  Ledge  Point. 
The  shoiil  water  extends  from  Ledge  Point,  directly  across  Pillage 
Bay,  to  Partridge  Point,  and  a  vessel  must  not  approach  these  shoals 
nearer  than  7  fathoms. 

Betchewun  Harbor. — If  wishing  to  proceed  to  Betchewun  Harbor, 
pass  to  the  northward  of  Anchor  Island,  w)  ich  is  quite  bold  on  that 
side.  The  north  point  of  Hunting  Island  is  a  clifty  mound,  with  a  cove 
on  its  eastern  side.  It  is  quite  bold,  and  a  vessel  must  pass  close  to  it 
to  avoid  the  shoal  oflf  Partridge  Point,  which  extends  J  mile  southward, 
and  diminishes  the  navigable  breadth  of  the  entrance  to  700  yards. 
When  in  the  entrance,  a  low  islet  will  be  seen  in  the  center  of  the  har- 
bor;  steer  for  it  and  anchor  with  it  bearing  S.  69°  W.  (N.  82°  W.  mag,) 
and  distant  ^  mile.  The  depth  of  water  in  the  harbor  is  from  9  to  18 
fathoms,  over  mud  bottom. 

By  Saints  Channel. — To  enter  these  harbors  by  Saints  Channel, 
bring  the  west  points  of  St.  Genevieve  and  Anchor  Islands  in  line,  bear- 
ing N.  28^  W.  (N.  1°  E.  mag.),  at  not  less  than  5  miles  from  the  former, 
to  'oe  sure  that  the  vessel  is  outside  of  Collins  Shoal.  Run  in  upon  this 
leading  mark  until  the  north  sides  of  the  two  Saints  come  in  line,  bear- 
ing N.  74°  E.  (S.  77°  E.  mag.).  The  east  sides  of  Mount  Partridge  and 
of  Hunting  Island  (or  rather,  of  an  island  joined  to  it  at  low  water) 
will  come  in  one  at  the  same  time,  bearing  N.  60°  W.  (N.  31°  W.  mag.) ; 
Steer  upon  this  last-named  leading  mark  (to  avoid  a  reef  which  extends 
650  yards  from  the  SW.  point  of  St.  Genevieve)  until  the  east  side  of 
Mount  St.  Genevieve,  seen  over  the  sandy  SE.  point  of  Anchor  Island, 
comes  in  line  with  west  i)oint  of  St.  Genevieve  Island,  bearing  north 
(N.  29°  E.  mag.).  Thence  by  steering  N.  31°  W.  (N.  2°  W.  mag.)  it  will 
lead  in  through  the  center  of  the  channel  between  St.  Genevieve  and 
Hunting  Islands,  and  the  vessel  may  either  proceed  to  St.  Genevieve 
or  Betchewun  Harbors. 

The  directions  just  given  for  Saints  Channel  will  lead  a  vessel  in 
between  the  dangers  oft  St.  Genevieve  and  Hunting  Islands  in  not  less 
than  20  fathoms  water,  and  she  will  not  have  a  less  depth  until  she  is 
in  as  far  as  Anchor  Island.  The  breadth  of  the  channel  between  the 
shoal  water  off  Saints  Bocks  and  the  shoals  off  the  SE.  point  of  Hunt- 
ing Island  is  nearly  one  mile.  It  diminishes  to  ^  mile  between  the 
reef  oft*  the  SW.  point  of  St.  Genevieve  Island  and  the  east  end  of 
Hunting  Island,  which  is  the  narrowest  part  of  the  channel.  Within 
this  narrowest  part,  the  ground  becomes  good  for  anchoring,  as  it  is 
everywhere  between  St.  Genevieve  and  Betchewun  Harbors.  Indeed, 
so  little  sea  comes  in  that  the  whole  space  may  be  considered  as  a 
harbor  capable  of  holding  a  great  number  of  lossels  of  large  draft. 

There  is  an  inner  harbor  at  Betchewun,  westward  of  Low  Islet,  but 
from  thence  there  is  no  channel,  excepting  for  boats,  to  pass  out  to  the 
westward  between  Hunting  Island  and  tlie  main. 


rUFFIN    KAY TRILOBITE    ]UY. 


269 


;he  entrance 
ledge  Point, 
ross  Pillage 
these  sboals 

nin  Harbor, 
)old  on  that 
with  a  cove 
38  close  to  it 
» southward, 
>  700  yards. 
r  of  the  har- 
2ow.niag,) 
from  9  to  18 

ts  Channel, 
in  line,  bear- 
1  the  former, 
in  upon  this 
n  line,  bear- 
trtridge  and 
I  low  water) 
°  W.  mag,); 
lich  extends 
east  side  of 
chor  Island, 
aring  north 
nag.)  it  will 
nevieve  and 
I.  Genevieve 

a  vessel  in 
s  in  not  less 
until  she  is 
between  the 
ut  of  Hunt- 
)etween  the 
east  end  of 
el.  Within 
ing,  as  it  is 
•s.  Indeed, 
idered  as  a 
?e  draft, 
w  Islet,  but 
s  out  to  the 


Tides.— It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Betchewun  Harbor  at 
llh.  aoni.;  ordinary  springs  rise  5  feet,  and  neaps  .'{  feet. 

The  tidal  streams  between  St.  Genevieve  and  Hunting  Islands  and 
the  mainland  are  much  influenced  by  the  winds;  but  their  rates  sel- 
dom amount  to  one  knot  at  any  time,  and  are  usually  much  less, 
excepting  through  the  shallow  and  narrow  channel  at  the  west  end  of 
Betchewun  Harbor,  where  there  is  at  times  a  complete  ra])id. 

Charles  Island,  the  next  westward  of  Hunting  Island,  is  .'J  miles 
long,  parallel  to  the  coast,  and  1^  miles  wide.  It  is  about  200  .feet 
high,  bold,  and  free  from  shoals;  but  at  }  mile  SSE.  from  its  east  point 
there  is  a  patch  of  rocky  ground  on  which  no  less  than  5  fathoms  have 
been  found,  but  which  had  better  be  avoided  by  vessels  of  large  draft. 

FufBn  Bay.— The  east  point  of  Charles  Island  is  west  nearly  2^ 
miles  from  the  west  point  of  Gun  Island,  off  the  S\V.  extreme  of  Hunt- 
ing Island.  The  former  of  these  points  is  quite  bold,  and  so  is  the 
latter  to  the  NW.,  but  a  reef  extends  400  yards  SSW.  from  it. 
Between  them  is  the  entrance  to  Pultiu  Bay,  which  is  open  to  south- 
erly winds.  Within  the  east  point  of  Charles  Island,  and  midway 
toward  Shoal  Cove,  there  is  good  anchorage  in  7  fathoms, mud  bottom,  at 
400  yards  from  the  island;  but  SE.  winds  send  in  a  considerable  swell. 
In  the  NE.  corner  of  this  bay  is  the  narrow  entrance  (between  shoals 
off"  Bagg  Point  and  Hunting  Island)  to  Ragg  Bay,  which  has  tolerable 
anchorage  in  its  NW.  part,  but  has  very  deep  water  on  the  side  toward 
Hunting  Island,  and  is  separated  from  the  western  part  of  Betchewun 
Harbor  by  the  shoal  and  narrow  channel  for  boats  between  the  island 
and  the  main. 

Charles  Harbor,  between  Charles  Island  and  the  main,  though  very 
narrow,  is  quite  secure,  and  deep  enough  for  large  vessels,  but  its 
entrances  are  only  160  yards  wide.  Within,  the  harbor  expands  to  J 
mile  wide  by  $  mile  in  length,  parallel  to  the  shore.  Both  entrances 
have  a  depth  of  7  fathoms,  but  a  vessel  must  pass  over  4  fathoms  if 
she  enters  from  the  eastward,  through  PuflBn  Bay.  The  depth  within 
the  harbor  is  from  4  to  6^  fathoms,  Avith  mud  bottom. 

Tides. — Strong  winds  occasionally  cause  the  tides  to  run  at  the  rate 
of  2  knots  in  the  entrances  of  the  harbor,  but  in  general  there  is  only 
a  weak  stream  with  either  tide. 

Trilobite  Bay.— Whale  Island,  lying  J  mile  from  the  east  side  of 
Ammonite  Point,  and  with  shoal  water  between,  is  g  mile  westward  of 
Charles  Island.  Both  islands  are  bold  and  cliffy,  and  Trilobite  Bay  is 
between,  with  excellent  anchorage,  well  sheltered  from  all  but  southerly 
winds.  The  only  danger  to  be  avoided  when  working  into  this  bay  is 
Ammonite  Reef  off'  Ammonite  Point,  which  includes  a  small  islet,  and 
extends  ^  mile  off  shore  to  the  southward.  The  mark  to  clear  this  reef 
when  running  along  the  coast  is  to  keep  Gun  Island  open  southward  of 
Charles  Island,  and  when  hauling  in  from  the  westward  into  Trilobite 
Bay  keep  the  NW.  point  of  Charles  Island  well  open  soutliward  of 
Whale  Island. 


irli 


I, 


r 


270 


GULF  OF  ST.  LAWRENCE — NORTH  COAST. 


Directions.— To  enter  Cliarles  Harbor  from  Puffin  Bay,  bring  the 
NE.  point  of  Charles  Island,  which  is  high  and  clitty,  to  bear  X.  75° 
W.  (X.  4(5°  W.  uiag.)»  tiien  steer  for  it  and  gi\  it  a  berth  of  abont  300 
yards  as  the  vessel  hauls  round  it  to  the  westward  into  the  harbor. 

To  enter  from  Trilobite  Bay,  give  the  NW.  point  of  Charles  Island  a 
berth  of  between  120  and  280  yards  as  the  vessel  hauls  ronnd  it  into 
the  harbor.  All  the  way  from  the  eastern  narrow  entrance  into  Charles 
Harbor  there  is  a  broad  zone  of  shoal  water,  which  curves  round  paral- 
lel to  tlie  mainland  till  it. joins  Whale  Island,  and  nearly  lills  up  all  the 
NW.  part  of  Trilobite  Bay,  rendering  the  entrance  oftheliarbor  too 
narrow  for  convenient  or  general  use. 

Clearwater  Point,  2  miles  westward  of  Ammonite  Point,  is  low, 
and  the  shoal  water  does  not  extend  more  than  J  mile  otf  it  to  the 
southward. 

The  Coast  between  Clearwater  and  Es(|nimaux  Points  forms  a  large 
bay,  along  which  there  are  high  and  conspicuous  clitt's  of  sand  and 
clay  that  distinguish  this  part  of  tlie  coast  to  a  vessel  at  sea.  Shoal 
water  extends  a  cotisiderable  distance  from  the  shore  all  round  this  bay. 
and  abreast  Sea  Cow  Island  the  3-fathom  line  of  soundings  is  a  mile 
out  from  the  sandy  beach. 

Clearwater  Shoals.— 1^  miles  S.  65°  W.  (X.  86°  W.  mag.)  from 
Clearwater  Point  lies  a  rocky  3-fathom  shoal,  and  there  are  three 
others  with  2  to  3  fathoms  lying  to  the  northward  of  the  first,  and  in 
a  line  from  the  point,  toward  Walrus  Island,  the  outer  and  westernmost 
of  them  being  rather  more  than  2  miles  from  the  point.  To  pass  out- 
side these  siioiils,  at  the  distance  of  v^  mile,  keep  tiie  south  i)oints  of 
Gull  and  Fright  Islands  in  one,  bearing  X'.  83°  W.  (N.  54^  W.  mag.) 

Sea  Cow  and  Walrus  Islands  lie  about  4  miles  west  from  Clear- 
water Point.  They  are  steep  and  precipitous,  excepting  to  the  south- 
ward, in  which  direction  the  reef  off  Sea  Cow  Island  extends  J  mile, 
and  that  of  Walrus  Island  400  yards. 

Sea  Cow  Channel. — There  is  a  clear  channel  named  Walrus  west- 
ward of  Sea  Cow  and  Walrus  Islands,  and  also  between  them  and  the 
Clearwater  Shoals.  This  latter  channel,  named  Sea  Cow,  is  1;^  miles 
wide,  and,  although  not  as  good  as  the  Walrus,  may  be 'used  in  pro- 
ceeding to  Esquimaux  Harbor  from  the  eastward  by  running  upon  the 
leading  mark  which  has  been  given  for  clearing  the  shoals  to  the  west- 
ward of  Clearwater  Point,  until  the  XE.  extremes  of  Esquimaux  and 
Walrus  Islands  come  In  one.  Then  steer  for  the  NE.  side  of  Sea  Cow 
Island  and  haul  round  it  at  not;  less  than  400  yards  to  the  northwest- 
ward for  the  east  entrance  of  the  harbor. 

Green  Island,  small,  low,  and  covered  with  grass,  with  reefs  stretch- 
ing north  and  south  nearly  600  yards,  but  bold  to  the  east  and  west, 
lies  nearly  one  mile  west  from  W^alrus  Island  and  ^  mile  east  from 
Esquimaux  Island. 

Gull  Island  lies  SW.  by  W.  one  mile  from  Green  Island,  which  it 


KSQUIMAUX   ISLAND   AND    HARHOR. 


271 


ly,  bring  the 
boar  X.  75° 
of  ab(»nt  300 
e  harbor, 
rles  Island  a 
ronnd  it  into 
I  into  Charles 
round  paral- 
ills  np  all  the 
e  harbor  too 

•oint,  is  low, 
off  it  to  the 

orms  a  large 
of  sand  and 
;  sea.  Shoal 
ind  this  baj'. 
iigs  is  a  mile 

mag.)  from 
re  are  three 
tlrst,  and  in 
western  ?no8t 
To  pass  out- 
th  points  of 
W.  mag.) 
;  from  Clear- 
to  the  south- 
Bnds  f  mile, 

V^alrus  west- 
hem  and  the 
,  is  1^  miles 
ised  in  pro- 
ng upon  the 
to  the  west- 
uimaux  and 
of  Sea  (3ow 
B  north  west- 

eefs  stretch- 
8t  and  west, 
le  east  from 

nd,  which  it 


resembles,  except inj;  that  it  is  rather  smaller.  It  is  A  mile  southward 
of  the  SE.  point  of  Esquimaux  Island,  but  there  is  no  passage  for  slii|>8 
between  them.  The  south  point  of  Ciull  Island  is  bold,  and  may  safely 
be  passed  at  400  yards. 

Esquimaux  Island,  '^  miles  long,  parallel  to  the  coast,  and  1;^  miles 
wide,  is  200  cr  250  feet  high  toward  its  north  side,  sloping  to  the  south- 
ward. From  its  SW.  point  a  shoal  extends  toward  Fright  Island,  which 
also  has  a  shoal  stretching  toward  Esfjuimaux  Island.  The  channel 
between  these,  leading  northward  toward  Esquimaux  Harbo-,  is  nearly 
800  yards  wide,  with  deep  water,  but  as  there  are  no  leading  marks  for 
it,  and  the  reefs  ou  either  side  are  extremely  dangerous,  it  can  not  be 
recommended. 

Fright  Island  is  nearly  one  mile  from  the  SW.  point  of  Esquimaux 
Island,  and  about  g  mile  long,  in  a  northerly  dire.;tioii ;  it  is  bold  to  the 
southward,  on  which  side  vessels  may  pass  at  200  yards,  but  reefs 
extend  COO  yards  off  it  to  the  eastward,  and  also  off  its  XE.  and  XW. 
points. 

Quin  Island  lies  a  short  ^  mile  north  from  Fright  Island;  it  is 
nearly  1:^  miles  long,  in  a  nortlierly  direction,  and  its  shores  are  bold, 
with  the  exception  of  (^uin  Eeef,  extending  J  mile  west  from  its  north 
point. 

Fright  Channel  is  deep,  but  only  400  yards  wide  between  Quin 
Island  and  the  reefs  off  Fright  Island.  It  can  not  be  recommended, 
but  might  be  used  in  case  of  necessity  by  hauling  up  to  the  east  of 
Xiapisca  Island  till  the  south  end  of  Quin  Island  comes  in  one  v"th 
the  south  side  of  the  cove  in  Esquimaux  Island,  bearing  N.  85^  E.  (S. 
(Mjo  E.  mag.),  then  steering  so  as  to  pass  close  round  the  south  point  of 
Quin  Island,  which  is  quite  bold. 

Quin  Channel  is  the  best  for  vessels  approaching  Esquimaux  Har- 
bor from  the  westward.  The  depth  in  this  r  ininel  is  from  5  to  7 
fathoms,  over  rocky,  gravelly,  and  sandy  bottuii-  The  shoal  water 
extends  only  to  the  distance  of  200  yards  from  the  island,  but  off  Toiute 
des  Morts,  and  the  small  islets  to  the  westward  of  it,  the  reefs  extend 
400  yards  southward. 

Esquimaux  Harbor  lies  between  Esquimaux  Island  and  the  main- 
land. Esquimaux  Point,  having  the  entrance  of  a  small  river  on  its 
west  side,  consists  of  sand,  and  is  quite  bold  to  the  southward,  although 
shoals  extend  from  it  across  the  bays  on  either  side.  The  north  and 
NE.  points  of  Esquimaux  Island  are  also  bold,  and  may  be  passed  at 
the  distance  of  140  yards  by  large  vessels.  The  depth  within  this 
secure  harbor  is  from  6  to  15  fathoms,  over  a  sandy  bottom.  The  space 
in  which  vessels  may  anchor  is  nearly  1^  'miles  long,  and  the  average 
breadith  is  800  yards. 

Wator.—Supplies  of  good  water  may  be  proctired  from  the  river  as 
Esquimaux  Point,  or  from  small  streams  on  the  island,  and  wood  it 
plentiful. 


■-3531^^.^ 


272 


GULF  OF  ST.  LAWRENCE — NORTH  COAST. 


i.  \. 


SirectionB. — Uriel  <lirectionH  liavo  been  ahea<ly  given  for  Sea  Cow, 
Friglit,  and  (^>uin  Cliaunels,  leading  to  Esquimaux  Harbor.  The  beat 
channels  from  the  eastward  and  westward  will  now  be  described. 

By  Walrus  Channel.— Walrus  Gliannel,  between  Walrus  and  Oreen 
Islands,  is  the  best  with  easterly  winds.  It  is  ^  mile  wide,  with  8 
fathoms  least  water,  and  it  is  only  necessary  to  give  either  island  a 
berth  of  400  yards  to  be  clear  of  all  dangers.  Heing  2  or  3  miles  out- 
side of  these  islands,  bring  the  NE.  point  of  l*iS(|uimaux  Islan<l  to 
appear  about  halfway  between  the  two  islands  above  mentioned  as 
forming  the  channel,  and  it  will  bear  about  N.  29°  W.  (north  mag.). 
Steer  for  it,  and,  giving  it  a  berth  of  200  yartls,  haul  round  it  to  the 
northwestward  into  the  harbor,  and  anchor  in  the  depth  and  position 
which  have  been  recommended. 

By  NiapiBca«Channel. — Niapisca  Channel  is  the  best  with  westerly 
winds.  Passing  in  to  the  northward,  between  >'iapi8ca  and  Fright 
Islands,  it  leads  to  the  entrance  of  Quin  Channel,  and  thence  eastward 
to  the  harbor.  The  dangers  to  be  avoided  in  this  channel,  besides  the 
reefs  off  Fright  and  Quin  Islands,  are  the  reefs  of  flat  limestone  extend 
ing  A  mile  out  from  the  south  and  SE.  points  of  Niapisca  Island. 
Between  those  points  a  remarkable  group  of  flowerpot  rocks  will  be 
seen  standing  on  the  limestone  just  above  high-water  mark.  From  the 
east  point  of  the  island,  which  is  the  south  point  of  a  bay,  another  reef 
extends  J  mile  NE.  by  N.,  but  there  is  ample  space  between  these  reefs 
and  Fright  Island,  the  channel  being  over  one  mile  wide  in  the  narrow- 
est part,  with  30  to  40  fathoms  water. 

In  running  for  this  channel  from  the  westward,  the  leading  mark  for 
clearing  the  south  reef  of  Niapisca  Island  by  more  than  400  yards  is 
the  NW.  point  of  Fright  Island  in  line  with  the  SE.  end  of  Quin  Island. 
Do  not,  therefore,  oi)en  those  islands  clear  of  each  other  until  Moniac 
Island  {2i  miles  NNW.  from  Niapisca  Island)  is  brought  in  sight  to  the 
eastward  of  Niapisca  Island.  Having  done  so,  haul  in  through  the 
channel,  steering  N.  3°  W.  (N.  26°  E.  mag.),  and  when  Moutange  Island 
(next  westward  of  Moniac  Island)  opens  northward  of  Niapisca  Island, 
the  vessel  will  be  clear  of  the  reef  off  the  east  point. 

Haul  up  now,  if  necessary,  to  clear  Quin  Reef,  until  the  north  point 
of  Esquimaux  Island  is  not  only  open  northward  of  Quin  Island,  but 
also  till  the  north  point  .of  Sea  Cow  Island  is  open  northward  of 
Esquimaux  Island.  Run  in  between  Quin  Island  and  the  main,  with 
the  last-named  marks  Just  open,  and  Ahey  will  lead  about  400  yards  past 
tlie  north  point  of  Quin  Island. 

It  must  be  borne  in  mind  tliat  the  mark  for  the  shoals  off  Pointe  des 
Morts,  and  the  small  islets  westward  of  it,  is  the  north  and  NE.  points 
of  Es(iuimaux  Island  in  line,  bearing  S.  74°  E.  (S.  45°  E.  mag.);  if  a 
vessel  opens  them  before  she  is  as  far  eastward  as  Quin  Island  she  will 
be  ashore. 

Ha\«ng  passed  Quin  Island,  continue  th&  course  toward  the  north 


1 


« 


or  Sea  Cow, 
The  best 
aribetl. 
iH  and  Green 
?ide,  witli  8 
ler  islaiul  a 
3  miles  out- 
X  Island  to 
entioned  as 
lorth  mag.), 
nd  it  to  the 
lud  position 

itli  westerly 
and  Fright 
ce  eastward 
besides  the 
tone  exteud- 
isca  Island, 
ocks  will  be 
.  From  the 
another  reef 
1  these  reefs 
the  narrow- 

ng  mark  for 
too  yards  is 
^uin  Island, 
ntil  Moniac 
sight  to  the 
:hrough  the 
aiige  Island 
)isca  Island, 

north  point 
Island,  but 
rthward  of 
main,  with 
>  yards  past 

Pointe  des 
NE.  points 
mag.);  if  a 
ind  she  will 

the  north 


NIAPI8CA   ISLAND LARGE    ISLAND. 


273 


point  of  Esquimaux  Island,  and  haul  round  it  southeastward  into 
Esquimaux  Harbor. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  cluingu,  in  lOsquimaux  Harbor  at 
about  Uh.  3<)m.,  and  the  rise  at  springs  is  <(  feet,  mid  at  neaps  tU  ft'ct. 

The  tides  usually  run  at  the  rate  of  about  one  knot  through  Ksqiii- 
maux  Harbor,  the  flood  coming  round  ChMvr  Water  Point  from  the  east- 
ward, and  passing  to  tliu  wostwanl  between  Quiu  Island  and  the  main. 
The  eblv flows  in  the  contrary  dircdion. 

The  tidod  also  draws  in  between  Fright  and  Niapisca  Islamls,  and 
the  ebb  sets  out  thr«>ugh  the  same  channel.  Uut  these  streams  are 
much  influenced,  both  in  tlieir  rate  and  duration,  by  the  winds,  and  the 
ebb  is  much  accelerated  by  westerly  winds  in  K8<iuiinaux  Harbor,  run- 
ning there  at  times  fully  2  knots. 

Niapisca  Island,  rather  more  than  2  miles  long,  NNVV.  and  8SH., 
is  only  partially  wooded,  and  has  three  principal  hills,  not  exceeding 
2UU  feet  high. 

Quanry  Island,  nearly  2^  miles  long,  parallel  to  the  coast,  and  about 
the  same  height  as  Niapisca  Island,  is  separated  from  the  latter  by  a 
channel  nearly  800  yards  wide,  with  a  small  islet  in  it,  but  no  safe  pas- 
Siige  for  shipping,  because  of  a  shoal  in  the  bay  to  the  southward,  and 
of  a  reef  which  stretches  beyond  the  small  islet.  Other  reefs  also 
extend  ^  mile  from  the  west  side  of  Niapisca  Island,  and  from  the  south 
and  SE.  side  of  Quarry  Island.  , 

Quarry  Cove  is  on  the  north  side  of  Quarry  Island,  and  if  mile  north' 
westward  of  the  east  end  of  the  island.  It  is  about  ^  mile  wide  and 
800  yards  deep,  with  22  fathoms  water  in  the  entrance,  shoaling  gradu- 
ally to  5  fathoms  with  mud  bottom  close  to  its  head.  The  islands  itud 
shoals  along  the  mainland  are  only  3  miles  northward  of  this  cove, 
which  thus  becomes  completely  landlocked  though  a  very  small  har- 
bor. No  other  directions  are  requisite  than  keeping  the  west  side 
nearest  on  board  in  entering,  and  to  anchor  near  the  center  in  0  or  10 
lathoms. 

Water. — Good  water  may  be  obtained  from  a  small  stream  in  the 
SW.  corner  of  (Juarry  Cove. 

Quarry  Channel. — There  is  a  clear  channel  between  Quarry  and 
Large  Islands,  which  is  the  next  westward.  The  only  directions  neces- 
sary are  to  bring  the  channel  to  bear  N.  8°  W.  (N.  21°  E.  mag.),  and 
then  run  in,  keeping  in  its  center  until  ^  mile  within  the  SW.  point  of 
Quarry  Island,  after  which  that  island  may  be  kept  close  aboard,  as 
the  remainder  of  the  channel,  1^  miles,  is  quite  bold  on  that  side,  while 
the  shoal  water  extends  300  yards  from  Large  Island,  The  flood  runs 
slowly  in  through  this  channel,  and  the  ebb  as  slowly  out. 

Large  Island  is  thickly  wooded,  and  its  highest  part  about  200  feet 

above  the  sea.    lieefs  of  flat  limestone  extend  off  its  south  and  SW. 

points  nearly  f  mile,  and  the  mark  for  the  south  point  of  these  reefs,  in 

2  fathoms,  is  the  south  points  of  Niapisca  and  Fright  Islands  in  one. 

1151 18 


I 

IS 


274 


aULF   OF   8T.    LAWRENCE — NORTH   COAST. 


On  its  west  Hide,  a  iiiilo  to  the  northward  of  its  SW.  point,  thero  are 
many  tiower|K)t  and  arcbiMl  rocks,  Htaudin^f  on  the  tint  limestone  above 
the  proHent  high-water  mark. 

Middle  Reef  lies  JuHt  within  the  line  joining  the  south  points  of 
Large  and  Mingnn  Islands  and  2  miles  westward  of  the  former.  A  part 
of  this  reef  is  always  above  water,  but  it  is  not  (SO  yards  in  diameter, 
though  the  shoal  around  iti  s  ^  mile  long  and  .^  mile  wide.  From  the 
Nl'i,  side  of  this  reef,  in  I  fathoms,  the  east  sides  of  the  two  Birch 
Islinids  are  in  one. 

Large  Channel,  between  Middle  Keef  and  Largo  Island,  should  be 
used  by  a  vessel  proceeding  to  Mingan  Harbor  with  an  easterly  wind, 
and  in  doing  so  tiie  <mly  thing  necessary  to  be  observed  is  that  the 
reefs  extend  westward  off  the  shore  of  Large  Island,  from  400  to  <tOO 
yards,  as  far  in  as  the  Flowerirat  Columns,  after  which  the  island 
becomes  bold.  There  is  little  or  no  warning  by  the  lead  on  the  Large 
Island  side,  but  Middle  Keef  may  be  approached  to  the  depth  of  13 
fathoms,  which,  on  the  east  side,  is  more  than  ^  mile  from  it. 

Farther  in.  Birch  Islands  form  the  west  side  of  this  channel,  at  nearly 
2  miles  from  Large  Island.  The  east  side  of  Outer  Birch  Island  is  quite 
bold,  and  the  shoal  water  extends  only  300  yards  ott'  the  east  end  of 
Inner  Birch  Island. 

The  channel  between  the  two  Birch  Islands  is  GOO  yards  wide,  but 
the  ground  is  all  foul,  and  not  more  than  4  fathoms  could  be  carried 
through  by  a  stranger. 

Outer  Birch  Island  is  about  one  mile  in  diameter  and  about  300 
feet  in  height,  and  it  has  a  remarkable  flowerpot  rock  on  its  SW.  point. 

Inner  Birch  Island  is  rather  larger.  Its  NW.  point  is  long  and  low, 
extending  ^  mile  westward  from  the  body  of  the  island,  with  a  curve  to 
the  SW.  Off  this  point  there  is  a  reef  extending  J  mile  westward,  and 
having  12  fathoms  within  the  distance  of  200  yards  from  the  extreme. 

Hulk  Rock. — At  ^  mile  SW.  from  the  same  point  there  is  a  small 
low  islet,  close  to  the  south  point  of  which  stands  a  very  remarkable 
rock,  named  Hulk  Itock,  from  its  resemblance  to  the  hulk  of  a  wrecked 
vessel.  The  reef,  of  flat  limestone,  dry  at  low  water,  which  connects 
this  islet  and  rock  to  the  low  west  point  of  Inner  Birch  Island,  extends 
600  yards  SW.  from  the  rock,  and  also  400  yards  westward. 

Middle  Reef  Channel,  between  Outer  Birch  Island  and  Middle 
Reef,  is  almost  one  mile  wide,  with  a  depth  of  30  fathoms,  and  the  shoal 
water  extends  only  300  yards  from  the  SE.  point  of  the  former;  but 
there  is  a  dangerous  reef  off  the  SW.  side  of  Outer  Birch  Island, 
extending  §  mile  from  the  shore. 

Tides. — The  flood  stream  sets  out  to  the  S  W.  between  Birch  Islands, 
and  also  between  them  and  Middle  Beef. 

Birch  Channel,  between  Birch  Islands  and  Mingan  Island,  is  the 
best  by  which  to  proceed  to  Mingan  Harbor  with  westerly  winds.  It 
is  3  miles  wide,  and  all  deep  water. 


oint,  thero  are 
ineatono  above 

lonth  pointH  of 
>riner.  A  part 
Is  ill  diameter, 
de.  From  the 
the  two  Birch 

and,  Hhouhl  be 
easterly  wind, 
ved  is  that  the 
torn  400  to  (JOO 
ich  the  ishiud 
1  on  the  Large 
le  depth  of  13 
m  it. 

iriinel,  at  nearly 
Island  is  quite 
he  east  end  of 

ards  wide,  but 
)uld  be  carried 

and  about  300 
I  its  SW.  point. 
B  long  and  low, 
with  a  curve  to 
westward,  and 
fn  the  extreme, 
here  is  a  small 
sry  remarkable 
k  of  a  wrecked 
yhich  connects 
[sland,  extends 
ird. 

d  and  Middle 

s,and  the  shoal 

lie  former;  but 

Birch  Island, 

Birch  Islands, 

I  Island,  is  the 
)rly  winds.    It 


MINOAN    ISLAND MONIAC    ISLAND. 


275 


Mingan  Island,  4i  mih'S  to  the  westward  of  tlie  Outer  Birch  Island, 
is  abcMit  HM»  feet  in  ht'lKht  an«l  bare  of  trees.  The  shoal  water  docs  not 
extend  above  «MM»  yanls  i»lf  its  south  point,  but  to  the  HVV.  and  west 
the  reels,  including  tlie  isletx,  run  out  nearly  1,L'00  yartls.  The  island 
is  bold  on  its  north  and  east  sides. 

Mingan  Patch  lies  S.  11°  W.  (8.  4(P  \V.  nuig.)-  3i  ">'•♦'«  *'<""  ^he 
south  point  of  Mingan  Island,  and  with  the  SK.  point  of  the  Outer 
Birch  touching  the  north  point  of  Large  Island;  it  is  a  patch  of  nx-ky 
ground  with  0  fathoms  water  on  it,  yet  there  is  a  heavy  swell  upon  it 
at  times. 

The  Porroquets,  the  westernmost  of  Mingan  Islands,  are  four  snmll 
islets,  low,  and  bare  of  trees.  The  northwestornniost  is  liigiicr  than 
the  others,  surrounded  by  clitt's,  and  has  a  superstratum  of  peat  on 
Its  Hat  summit,  in  which  great  numbers  of  puflius  burrow  and  rear 
their  young. 

The  two  easternmost  of  these  islets  have  a  reef  of  flat  limestone 
extending  !J  mile  southward.  There  is  also  a  shoal  A  mile  northward 
of  tham,  and  a  narrow  channel  between  them  and  the  oilier  two,  but 
of  no  use  to  vessels.  The  northwesternmost  islet  has  shoal  water  oft'  it 
to  the  distance  of  i  mile,  both  eastward  and  westward,  but  a  vessel 
may  pass  northward  of  it,  at  400  yards,  in  14  or  15  fathoms  water. 

Light. — On  the  summit  of  the  northwesternmost  of  tlie  Perroquets 
stands  a  square  lighthouse,  painted  white,  and  55  feet  high,  with  dwell- 
ing attached,  from  which  is  exhibited  at  an  elevation  of  87  feet  a 
revolving  white  light  every  thirty  seconds,  and  visible  15  mdes. 

The  light  is  obscured  by  Mingan  Island  between  the  bearings  of 
8.  890  W.  (N.  62°  W.  mag.),  and  N.  09°  W.  (N.  40°  W.  mag.). 

Perroquet  Channel,  between  the  Perroquets  and  Mingan  Island, 
is  li  miles  wide,  and  with  depths  varying  from  30  to  40  fathoms  in  the 
center.  Both  the  Hood  and  ebb  set  out  thnmgh  the  channel,  the 
former  to  the  8VV.  and  the  latter  to  the  southward. 

Mingan  Channel— All  the  islands  just  described,  from  Niapisca 
Island,  are  bold  and  free  from  danger  on  their  north  sides,  so  that 
Mingan  Channel,  which  lies  between  them  and  the  main,  is  safe 
thrnufjhout. 

Moniac  Island,  on  the  mainland  side  of  this  channel,  is  less  than  J 
mile  in  diameter,  and  lies  nearly  abreast  Niapisca  Island,  from  which 
it  is  distant  about  2h  miles.  Moutange  Island,  IJ  miles  farther  west- 
ward, is  about  1^  miles  in  diameter,  and  off  a  bay  full  of  small  islets, 
and  in  which  there  are  several  small  rivers.  It  is  directly  abreast 
Quarry  Island,  at  the  distance  of  2^  miles.  These  islands,  Moniac  and 
Moutange,  are  J  mile  from  the  nearest  point  of  the  main,  but  shoals 
within  and  between  them  are  nearly  dry  at  low  water. 

1  he  shoals  do  not  project  above  600  yards  southward  of  these  islands, 
but  there  is  rocky  ground,  with  irregular  soundings  between  4  and  10 
fathoms  out  to  the  distance  of  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  them  both, 


11  . 


mm 


m^^m^w^^^^swms^mm^ 


276 


GULF  OF  ST.  LAWRENCE — NORTH  COAST, 


80  that  a  vessel  beating  in  tlie  Miiijjau  Channel  had  better  not  stand 
over  to  the  northward  beyond  IJ  miles  from  the  northern  shores  of  the 
onter  islands,  or  into  less  than  10  fathoms. 

Long  Point,  NNW.  of  Mingan  Islaiii',  and  on  which  is  a  fishing 
establishment,  consists  of  sand,  and  there  is  a  fine  beach  from  thence 
eastward  as  far  as  Mingan  Harbor,  inclusive.  A  sandy  shoal  extends 
oflf  the  shore,  immediately  westward  of  Long  Point,  to  within  one  mile 
of  the  PerroquetP  There  is  often  a  great  ripple  off  this  shoal,  caused 
by  the  flood  stream  being  turned  off  by  Long  Point  toward  the  SW. 
This  channel  may  be  conveniently  used  in  going  to*  Mingan  Harbor 
with  A  northerly  wind. 

Sand  Lark  Reef,  lying  3 J  miles  westward  of  Moutauge  Island, 
and  rather  more  than  a  mile  from  tbe  mainland,  is  small  and  low,  but 
always  above  water.  There  is  a  clear  channel  with  deep  water  on  all 
sides  of  it,  but  there  is  a  rocky  patch,  with  5  fathoms  water,  1^  miles 
from  it,  on  a  line  toward  the  south  side  of  Moutange  Island.  This 
shoal  water  has  not  been  particularly  examined,  and  should  therefore 
be  avoided. 

Harbor  Island  is  of  limestone,  about  100  feet  in  height,  bold  toward 
Mingan  Harbor,  but  shelving  and  shoal  to  the  southward  J  mile  from 
shore.  The  length  of  the  island  is  2  miles,  its  greatest  breadth  does 
not  amount  to  ^  mile,  and  it  is  thickly  wooded. 

Mingan  River. — The  mainland  recedes  from  the  island  in  the  eastern 
part  of  the  harbor,  which  would,  in  consequence,  be  exposed  to  easterly 
winds  if  it  were  not  for  a  sandy  shoal,  dry  at  low  water,  which  extends 
400  yards  out  from  the  entrance  of  the  Mingan  River.  This  river  is 
only  capable  of  admitting  boats  at  high  water,  and  its  mouth  is  opposite 
the  east  end  of  the  island. 

Mingan  Harbor. — The  eastern  entrance  between  the  sandy  shoal 
and  the  island  is  400  yards  wide,  the  western  entrance  between  the 
mainland  and  the  island  is  nearly  as  wide,  the  whole  breadth  in  both 
entrances  being  in  deep  water.  The  space  within,  in  which  vessels 
may  anchor  in  safety,  is  about  a  mile  long  by  rather  more  than  J  mile 
wide,  with  plenty  of  water  for  large  vessels,  over  a  bottom  of  fine  sand. 

Directions. — In  approaching  Mingan  Harbor  from  the  eastward, 
bring  the  north  or  inner  side  of  Harbor  Island  to  bear  N.  72°  W.  (N. 
43°  W.  mag.),  and  the  houses  of  the  Hudson  Bay  Company's  post  ought 
then  to  appear  open  fully  their  own  breadth  to  the  northward  of  the 
island.  Steer  for  those  houses  so  open,  leaving  the  east  end  of  the 
island  300  yards  to  the  southward,  and  taking  care  to  keep  Sandy  Point, 
at  the  western  entrance  of  the  harbor,  shut  in  behind  the  north  side  of 
the  island,  for  when  they  are  in  one  the  vessel  will  be  on  shore  on  the 
sandy  shoal  ott"  Mingan  River.  After  the  east  end  of  the  island  is 
Ijassed,  run  along  its  north  side  at  the  distance  of  200  yards,  and  choose 
a  berth  anywhere  near  the  center  of  the  harbor,  in  from  9  to  13  fath- 


oms, sand  bottom. 


T. 

Btter  not  stand 
11  shores  of  the 

ch  is  a  flshlng 
ch  from  thence 
'  shoal  extends 
nrithin  one  mile 
8  shoal,  caused 
sward  the  SW. 
tlingan  Harbor 

aitauge  Island, 
tU  and  low,  bnt 
ep  water  on  all 
water,  1^  miles 
)  Island.  This 
hould  therefore 

:ht,  bold  toward 
ard  4  mile  from 
t  breadth  does 

d  in  the  eastern 
osed  to  easterly 
,  which  extends 
.  This  river  is 
oath  is  opposite 

he  sandy  shoal 
ce  between  the 
t)readth  in  both 
I  which  vessels 
lore  than  J  mile 
om  of  fine  sand. 
I  the  eastward, 
r  N.  72°  W.  (N. 
my's  post  ought 
)rthward  of  the 
east  end  of  the 
>p  Sandy  Point, 
he  north  side  of 
on  shore  on  the 
)f  the  island  is 
irds,  and  choose 
im  9  to  13  fath- 


ST.   JOHN    1IVER. 


277 


When  running  for  the  harbor  from  the  westward,  run  in  toward  the 
sandy  beach  of  the  mainland  at  J  mile  westward  of  the  island  until 
Sandy  Point  comes  in  one  with  the  face  of  the  clay  cliffs  to  the  east- 
ward of  the  Hudson  Bay  Company's  houses,  bearing  N.  71°  E.  (S.  80° 
E.  niag.),  or  until  the  depth  is  11  fathoms.  Eun  upon  this  mark  along 
the  beach  and  give  Sandy  Point  a  berth  of  100  yards  as  the  vessel 
passes  into  the  harbor,  and  choose  a  berth  as  before  directed. 

Mingan  Harbor  is  quite  secure  in  all  winds,  and,  like  Esquimaux 
Harbor,  it  has  this  great  advantage,  that  vessels  can  enter  or  leave  it 
either  with  easterly  or  westerly  winds. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Mingan  Harbor  at  Ih. 
16m. ;  springs  rise  (J  feet,  and  neaps  4  feet. 

Soundings. — The  banks  of  soundings,  which  extend  off  Mingan 
Islands  toward  Anticosti,  have  been  already  mentioned  on  page  22, 
and  it  is  only  necessary  to  add  that  their  southern  edge,  in  .")0  fathoms 
water,  is  no  less  than  5  miles  from  the  islands,  and  that  the  banks 
become  wider,  or  extend  farther  off,  to  the  westward.  There  is  much 
greater  depth  of  water  in  some  of  the  channels  between  the  islands 
than  there  is  on  these  banks,  as  will  be  seen  by  the  chart. 

Coast. — From  Long  Point  a  broad  beach  of  fine  sand  reaches  to  St. 
John  River,  and  the  chart'will  show  that  an  irregular  band  of  shoal 
water  lies  outside  of  this  beach,  at  a  distance  of  f  mile. 

(H.O.  Chart,  No.  1110.) 

St  John  River. — This  large  stream  empties  on  the  northern  shore 
of  the  gulf,  at  6^  miles  NW.  by  W.  from  the  Perroquets.  It  is  occa- 
sionally frequented  by  fishing  schooners  early  in  the  season,  and  the 
boats  of  the  Gulnare  ascended  it  6  miles,  following  tte  winding  of  its 
channels,  with  a  dei)th  varying  from  one  to  3  fathoms  at  low  water. 
The  tide  flows  no  farther  than  the  distance  just  mentioned,  where  the 
river  becomes  too  rapid  to  be  navigated  by  other  than  canoes  or  flat- 
bottomed  boats.  The  course  of  the  river,  for  several  miles  up  from  the 
entrance,  is  between  high  cliffs  of  stratified  sand  and  gravel  over  clay, 
with  small  sandy  islands  occasionally.  The  country,  on  either  side,  is 
covered  with  a  thick  growth  of  small  8pruv;e  trees.  At  the  entrance, 
between  the  clay  cliffs  on  the  west  and  a  sandy  point  on  the  east  side, 
the  river  is  260  yards  wide.  The  breadth  increases  to  nearly  ^  mile 
immediately  within  the  entrance,  and  then  decreases  again  gradually, 
being  nowhere  less  than  200  yards  wide  in  the  first  6  miles. 

There  were  two  log  houses  on  the  west  bank,  i  mile  within  the  entrance, 
where  a  party  of  men  •occasionally  resided  to  fish  for  salmon;  and  ves- 
sels may  lie  close  to  them  in  2  fathoms  at  low  water. 

Bar. — An  extensive  bar  of  sand,  ^  mile  out  from  the  entrance,  shifts 
witii  every  gale  of  wind,  and  has  seldom  more  than  3  or  4  feet  over  it  at 
low  water;  at  high  water  there  are  7  or  10  feet  on  the  bar,  according  as 
it  may  be  neap  or  spring  tide.  Southerly  and  westerly  winds  cause  so 
heavy  a  surf  as  to  render  the  bar  impassable. 


!^ 


278 


GULP   OF    ST.    LAWRENCE — NORTH   COAST. 


Anchorage.— There  is  goo»l  anchorage  outside  tlie  bar,  which  may 
be  safely  approac^ied  by  the  lead,  the  sonndings  decreasing  gradually 
from  20  to  3  fath(ims  over  sand  and  flay  bottom,  the  greater  depth 
being  at  2^  miles  and  the  lesser  at  ^  mile  from  the  mouth  of  the  river. 
Tides— It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  the  entrance  ot  ht. 
John  River  at  lb.  20m.;  ordinary  springs  rise  7  feet,  and  neaps  4  feet. 
Aspect  of  Coast.— The  coast  between  Magpie  and  Trout  liners  is 
con.posod  of  primary  rock  rising  immediately  from  the  sea  in  steep, 
although  o^ten  rounded,  hills,  which  are  either  bare  or  partially  wooded 
with  sn.all  trees  of  the  pine  species.    The  hills  in  front,  or  next  to  the 
sea   seldom  exceed  200  or  300  feet  in  height;  but  others,  a  short  dis- 
tance back  from  the  shore,  form  a  range  of  greater  elevation,  varying 
from  500  to  700  feet,  and  nowhere  exceeding  1 ,000  feet. 

The  appearance  of  this  coast  from  a  vessel  is  slightly  undulating, 
bold,  and  unbroken,  presenting  features  so  little  diversified  that  it  is 
very  difficult  to  make  out  one  part  of  it  from  another  at  0  or  b  miles 
olf  shore;  but  upon  a  nearer  approach,  the  mouths  of  the  rivers,  taken 
in  connection  with  the  features  of  the  neighboring  land,  will  in  genera 
supply  distinguishing  characters,  by  which  the  situation  of  a  vessel 
may  be  ascertained.  . 

Local  Magnetic  Disturbance  of  the  Compa8B.-The  black  oxide 
of  iron,  besides  being  a  constituent  mineral  in  the  granitic  rocks  of 
this  coast,  is  found  abundantly  in  nests  and  veins,  particularly  in  the 
vicinity  of  SawbiU  River.  Its  magnetic  action  on  the  needles  of  com- 
passes on  shore  is  such  as  to  cause  the  variation  obtained  by  them  to 
vary  from  14o  to  29o  west.  While  sounding  in  the  boats  a  similar  dis- 
turbing  influence  on  the  compass  has  been  sensibly  felt,  but  diminishing 
or  increasingas  the  water  deepened  or  shoaled.  In  the  GM'nare,  at  2 
or  3  miles  from  the  shore,  or  within  the  contour  line  ot  50  fathoms,  the 
error  from  this  causenever  exceeded  half  a  point,  and  at  5  or  6  miles 
it  became  insensible.  . 

Caution.-This  coast  is  not  by  any  means  so  bold  as  it  appears  from 
a  distance,  for  there  are  many  rocks  along  it  both  above  and  under 
water,  several  of  which  are  very  dangerous,  and  nearly  a  mile  from  the 
shore.  Strangers  should  not  approach  the  shore  between  Magpie  and 
Bason  Rivers  nearer  than  the  depth  of  20  fathoms.  Still  greater  cau- 
tion  becomes  necessary  between  the  last-named  river  and  St.  Charles 
Point  where  40  tathoms  is  as  near  as  a  large  ship  can  approach  with 
prudence,  for  that  depth  in  several  places  will  be  found  within  a  mile 

°*  Mount  St.  John,  an  isolated  saddle-backed  hill,  1,416  feet  above  the 
se-i  is  N  by  E.  11  miles  from  the  entrance  of  the  St.  John  River. 

Coast-Between  St.  John  and  Magpie  Rivers  the  coast  consists  of 
white  cUtts  with  a  superstratum  of  sand,  which  is  fast  consolidating 
into  sandstone  by  means  of  the  red  oxide  of  iron  furnished  by  numer- 
ous  small  streams. 


MAGPIE    BAY — SHALLOP    BIVER. 


279 


r,  which  may 
iig  gradually 
;reater  depth 
of  th<5  river, 
trance  of  St. 
neaps  4  feet, 
rout  Rivers  is 
sea  in  steep, 
•ti  ally  wooded 
or  next  to  the 
s,  a  short  dis- 
ation,  varying 

y  undulating, 
sifled  thi>t  it  is 
at  0  or  8  miles 
e  rivers,  taken 
will  in  general 
ou  of  a  vessel 

he  black  oxide 
luitic  rocks  of 
iculavly  in  the 
leedles  of  com- 
iied  by  them  to 
s  a  similar  dis- 
»ut  diminishing 
e  Oulnare,  at  2 
50  fathoms,  the 
at  5  or  G  miles 

it  appears  from 
ove  and  under 
a  mile  from  the 
5en  Magpie  and 
till  greater  cau- 
md  St.  Charles 
I  approach  with 
id  within  a  mile 

6  feet  above  the 
ahn  River, 
ioast  consists  of 
«t  consolidating 
ished  by  numer- 


Magpie  Bay  is  H  miles  wide  between  St.  .John  Itiver  and  Magpie 
Point.  There  is  good  anchorage,  with  winds  ott  the  land,  in  the  bay, 
and  vessels  may  stand  in  to  7  fathoms  at  low  water  in  every  part  of  it, 
but  southerly  and  westerly  winds  roll  in  a  very  heavy  sea. 

Magpie  River,  the  entrance  to  which  is  nearly  in  the  center  of 
Magpie  liay  and  ~>  miles  W^NVV.  from  St.  John  liiver,  is  a  large  and 
rapid  stream,  with  several  rocks  above  and  under  water  ott'  its  cast 
entrance  point  and  j^  inile  ott'  shore. 

The  entrance  of  this  river,  between  steep  rocks,  is  only  00  feet  wi<le, 
and  the  ebb  tide  rnslies  out  of  it  in  a  torrent  5  fathoms  deep.  At  .'{00 
yards  within  this  narrow  entrance  the  river  falls  about  30  feet  over 
granitic  rocks.  There  are  from  7  to  9  feet  at  low  water  over  the  bar 
outside.    Tiie  river  is  of  no  use  either  to  vessels  or  boats. 

A  rock  with  3  tathoms  water  on  it  is  reported  to  lie  one  mile  from 
Magpie  Jiiver. 

llather  more  than  :f  mile  westward  of  Magpie  Kiver,  and  nearly  J 
mile  ott'  shore  on  the  west  side  of  Magpie  Bay,  there  is  a  rocky  shoal  on 
wlii(rh  the  sea  almost  always  breaks  at  low  water. 

Ridge  Point  lies  3jV  miles  W.  by  S.  Irom  Magpie  Point. 

Four-fathoms  Ridge,  a  long  and  narrow  ridge  of  rocky  ground, 
with  from  4  to  G  fathoms  at  low  water,  extends  4i  miles  westward  from 
Ridge  Point  across  a  rocky  bay,  wherein  there  is  one  large  and  several 
snniU  rocks  above  water.  The  western  side  of  this  rocky  ground  is 
nearly  one  mile  southward  of  Thunder  Point.  There  is  a  very  iieavy 
sea  upon  this  ridge  at  times,  and  it  then  becomes  dangerous  to  large 
ships.  There  are  20  fathoms  water  close  outside  it  in  some  parts,  and 
30  fathoms  is  quite  near  enough  to  its  west  end. 

Sawbill  River,  in  the  bay  between  Sheldrake  and  Ore  Points,  may 
be  distinguished  by  the  clay  cliffs  immediately  within  the  entrance  and 
by  the  peculiar  hills  on  either  side  of  it,  which  are  barren  and  of  gray 
feldspar,  thickly  studded  with  small  round  mounds. 

This  river  aft'ords  shelter  to  boats  and  small  coasting  craft,  but  it 
can  only  be  entered  in  very  line  weather  in  consequence  of  the  heavy 
surf.  It  has  scarcely  any  bar,  but  tiie  entrance,  at  the  western 
extremity  of  a  long  and  narrow  spit  of  sand  which  extends  across  the 
n)«)nth  of  the  river,  is  very  narrow,  with  depths  of  from  4  to  11  feet  in  it, 
according  to  low  or  high  water,  in  ordinary  spring  tides.  At  high 
water  neaps  there  is  seldom  more  than  9  feet.  The  same  depth  con- 
tinues only  for  a  very  short  distance  within  the  entrancte. 

Cod  Bank,  of  sand,  gravel,  and  broken  shell,  on  which  codfish 
abound,  lies  9  miles  SE.  from  the  entrance  of  Sawbill  River,  and  the 
depth  is  upward  of  GO  fathoms  between  it  and  the  shore. 

Shallop  River,  7A  miles  farther  westward,  att'ords  shelter  only  to 
boats,  and  can  only  be  entered  when  there  is  no  surf.  There  are  several 
rocks,  both  above  and  u;ider  water,  oft'  this  river,  and  also  off  Sandy 
River,  a  small  stream  about  2i  miles,  farther  westward  The  outermost 
of  these  rocks  lies  fnlly  ^  mile  from  shore. 


I 

I 


mmm 


280 


GULF  OP  ST.  LAWRENCE NORTH  COAST. 


Manitou  River,  U  miles  west  of  Shallop  Kiver,  is  the  largest  on 
this  coast,  excepting  the  St.  John  and  Moisie  Rivers,  and  may  be  readily 
distinguished  from  a  vessel  several  miles  off  the  coast  by  two  remark- 
able patches  of  clay  cliff,  one  of  which  is  close  eastward  and  the  other 
about  one  mile  westward  of  its  entrance. 

Directions.— To  enter  this  river  keep  close  along  the  rocky  west  side 
of  Manitou  Point,  leaving  on  the  port  side  the  sandy  spit  close  within 
it,  which  stretches  out  from  the  sandy  west  point  of  the  entrance.  The 
channel  is  always  in  this  position,  but  it  is  more  or  less  deep  and  wide, 
according  to  the  season  and  the  winds  which  may  have  recently  pre- 
vailed. In  general,  the  channel  fs  about  60  yards  wide, '.  ith  a  depth  of 
5  feet  in  it  at  low  water  and  12  feet  in  spring  tide^'.  Strong  southerly 
and  westerly  winds  cause  a  heavy  surf  and  render  the  entrance 
impracticable.  A  short  distance  within  the  entrance  there  are  9  feet 
at  low  water,  deepening  gradually  to  a  fathoms  at  the  first  rapid,  one 
mile  up  the  river. 

Water  will  be  found  at  a  small  stream  on  the  western  shore  a  short 
distance  within  the  entrance. 

Anchorage.— There  is  good  anchorage  off  Manitou  River.  Vessels 
may  safely  anchor  in  fine  weather  with  the  wind  off  shore,  having  the 
entrance  of  the  river  bearing  N.  21°  B.  (N.  49°  E.  mag.)  1^  miles, 
where  they  will  have  15  fathoms  over  mud  bottom  and  be  more  than 
one  mile  distant  from  Manitou  Point,  the  nearest  point  of  the  shore. 

Small  vessels  may  anchor  farther  inshore  westward  of  the  bar,  and 
in  the  bay  between  Manitou  and  Buch an  Points;  for  the  soundings 
decrease  regularly  in  toward  the  shore,  with  sand  and  clay  bottom^  and 
there  is  no  other  danger  but  a  small  rocky  shoal  which  bears  S.  65°  E. 
(S.  37°  E.  mag.)  nearly  a  mile  from  Buchan  Point,  and  is  about  J  mile 

off  shore. 

Buchan,  Fall,  and  Hotteurs  Rivers  fall  in  cascades  into  the  sea  or 
close  to  it,  and  thus  serve  to  point  out  to  a  vessel  her  position  off  the 
coast;  and  there  is,  moreover,  a  remarkable  white  patch  close  to  the 
westward  of  Buchan  River. 

Bason  River,  10$  miles  west  of  Manitou  River,  has  a  spit  of  large 
stones  extending  about  300  yards  out  from  its  east  point  of  entrance. 
The  entrance  is  very  narrow,  with  a  varying  depth,  which  is  less  or 
more  according  to  the  prevalence  or  infrequency  of  the  SW.  winds;  but 
there  is  in  general  enough  water  for  very  small  coasting  craft  or  large 
boats.    There  are  rapids  J  mile  within  the  eiitranc*;. 

Cape  Cormorant,  li  miles  to  the  westward  of  Bpson  liver,  is  a 
small  peninsula,  on  the  inner  side  of  which  there  are  •"  '  huts  of  a 
trading  post  always  occupied,  and  which  can  not  easily  i       -"en  from 

the  sea. 

Blaskowitz  Point  lies  5$  miles  westward  from  Cape  Cormorant. 
Between  them  are  Cormorant  Islets,  joined  to  the  shore  at  low  water, 
and  not  readily  distinguishable  from  the  mainland. 


e  largest  on 

ay  be  readily 

two  remark- 

md  the  other 

jky  west  side 
;  close  within 
itrance.  The 
(ep  and  wide, 
recently  pre- 
ith  a  depth  of 
ng  southerly 
the  entrance 
ire  are  9  feet 
rst  rapid,  one 

shore  a  short 

ver.  Vessels 
e,  having  the 
^g.)  1^  miles, 
)e  more  than 
f  the  shore. 
'  the  bar,  and 
he  soundings 
y  bottom,  and 
ears  S.  65°  B. 
}  about  J  mile 

ito  the  sea  or 
osition  off  the 
1  close  to  the 

I  spit  of  large 
it  of  entrance, 
liich  is  less  or 
W.  winds;  but 
:  craft  or  large 

[>!i  .liver,  is  a 
^^  '.  huts  of  a 
/  i.-     -»eu  from 

pe  (Cormorant. 
B  at  low  water. 


MOISIE    BAY    AND    RIVER. 


M 


Connorant  Reef,  which  is  small  and  dangerous,  lies  off  Cormorant 
Islets,  and  about  a  mile  from  the  shore.  It  has  12  feet  least  water  and 
bears  S.  08°  W.  (N.  8jO  W.  mag.)  3  miles  from  Cape  Cormorant.  When 
on  the  inner  edge  of  the  reef,  Blaskowitz  and  St.  Charles  Points  are  in 
line,  bearing  8.84^  W.  (N.  09°  W.mag.),  so  that  vessels  approaching 
this  part  of  the  coast  should  keep  the  hitter  point  well  open. 

The  Coast  between  Cape  Cormorant  and  St.  Charles  Point  is  broken 
into  coves,  two  of  which  are  nearly  a  mile  deep,  full  of  rocks,  and  afford 
shelter  only  to  boats.  The  shore  is  here  fringed  with  rocks  both  above 
and  under  water,  and  should  not  therefore  be  made  too  free  with. 

St.  Charles  Point  will  readily  be  known  by  the  cove  on  its  eastern 
side,  and  by  the  trending  of  the  land  on  the  west  side  northwestward 
toward  Trout  River. 

St.  Charles  Reef,  lying  off  St.  Charles  Point,  is  extremely  dangerous, 
being  so  bold  that  there  is  no  warning  by  the  hand  lead,  and  very  little 
with  the  deep-sea  lend.  It  is  composed  of  a  great  number  of  rocks  near 
to  each  other,  but  having  a  considerable  depth  of  water  between  them. 
Some  of  them  always  show,  but  the  outermost  patches  are  always  cov- 
ered. The  last  lie  rather  more  than  ^  mile  southward  from  the  southern 
extreme  of  St.  Charles  Point;  and  the  reef  continues  to  the  flrst  cove, 
1^  miles  northwestward  of  the  point,  but  does  not  there  extend  so  far 
oft'  shore  as  off"  the  point  itself. 

CautioQ.— Vessels  lieating  to  the  westward  should  take  care  not  to 
be  becalmed  westward  of  St.  Charles  Reef,  lest  the  heavy  swell  from 
the  SW.,  so  frequent  on  this  coast,  should  heave  them  toward  the  reef, 
for  the  water  is  too  deep  to  anchor  until  close  to  the  breakers. 

Moisie  Bay  intervenes  between  St.  Cliarles  Point  and  Moisie  River. 
Trout  River,  a  small  stream,  is  in  the  center  of  this  bay  and  6^  miles 
NW.  from  St.  Charles  Point.  Here  the  rocky  shores  terminate  and  the 
bold  sandy  beacli.  which  extends  6^  miles  SW.to  the  Moisie  River, 
commences. 

Seal  House  Cove,  on  the  east  side  of  Moisie  Bay  and  2^  miles  from 
St.  Charles  Point,  affords  shelter  only  to  boats.  There  are  two  log 
houses  there,  which  are  occasionally  occupied  as  a  fishing  and  trading 

post. 

The  granitic  hills,  which  leave  the  shore  at  Trout  River,  continue 
inland  until  they  join  the  ridges  in  rear  of  Seven  Islands  Bay.  Between 
the  hills  and  the  sea  there  is  an  extensive  tract  of  low  sandy  country, 
thickly  wooded. 

Moisie  River  empties  on  the  east  side  of  Moisie  Point,  which  is  the 
southern  extremity  of  the  sandy  country  just  mentioned.  It  io  larger 
than  St.  John  River,  discharging  a  great  quantity  of  water  in  the  spring 
after  the  melting  of  the  winter  snows,  and  bringing  down  from  the 
interior  great  quantities  of  sand,  which  so  obstruct  its  wide  and  shal- 
low channel  in  the  first  2^  miles  from  the  sea  that  boats  can  not  ascend 
at  low  water. 


i'   ' 


M 


v..  :y<iiiii 


282 


GULF    OP   ST.    LAWRENCE — NORTH    COAST. 


The  river  becomes  sliallow  ini mediately  within  tlie  entrance,  expand- 
ing into  ft  wide  phu-e  full  of  sand  bars  at  low  water.  In  the  above 
named  distance  from  the  sea,  the  breadth  of  the  river  decreases  from  2J 
miles  to  ^  wile,  and  at  the  end  of  that  distance  the  sand  bars  cease. 
The  river  has  then  a  clear  channel,  with  a  depth  of  9  feet  water, 
between  steep  sandy  shores  or  cliffs  for  one  mile  farther,  where  its 
breadth  is  4  mile.  The  traders  report  that  Hat-bottomed  boats  can 
ascend  18  or  20  miles  to  the  flrsfc  rapids,  following  the  stream.  The 
bar,  which  is  of  sand,  dry  at  half  tide,  extends  nearly  ^  mile  southwest- 
ward  from  the  long,  low,  and  narrow  east  entrance  point,  and  nearly 
parallel  to  the  east  side  of  the  west  entrance  point. 

The  entrauce  of  the  river  between  this  bar  and  the  west  point  is  from 
the  SSW.,  and  continues  for  the  distance  of  1,200  yards  with  a  breadth 
of  4  mile,  and  a  depth  varying  with  the  seasons  and  the  winds  which 
prevail;  those  from  the  southward  and  eastward  having  a  tendency  to 
block  up  the  channel.  It  is  supposed  that  there  is  seldom  a  less  depth 
than  9  feet  at  low  water,  the  same  as  inside,  close  under  the  west 
entrance  point,  which  is  the  only  place  where  a  small  vessel  can  find 
shelter,  close  to  two  log  houses  occasionally  employed  as  a  salmon 
fishery  by  the  people  of  the  Hudson  Bay  Company.  The  shelter  here 
is  extremely  imperfect  in  gales  of  wind  from  the  southward  and  east- 
ward, which  send  in  so  heavy  a  sea  that,  after  breaking  completely  over 
the  bar  and  across  the  entrauce,  it  still  retains  power  enough  to  seri. 
ously  affect  a  small  vessel. 

Tides.— At  the  entrance  of  Moisie  Eiver  it  is  high  water,  full  and 
change,  at  Ih.  30  m. ;  ordinary  springs  rihe  from  5  to  8  feet. 

Moisie  Shoal.— Although  the  bar  of  the  Moisie  lliver  is  so  bold  that 
there  are  50  fathoms  water  at  the  distance  of  f  mile  from  it  to  the  SE., 
yet  the  shallow  water  continues  from  it  3^  miles  southwestward  past 
Moisie  Point,  in  such  a  manner  as  to  form  an  extensive  triangular 
sandy  shoal  with  from  IJ  to  3  fathoms  on  it  at  low  water. 

Moisie  Rock,  near  the  south  extremity  of  Moisie  Shoal,  and  with 
3  feet  least  water,  lies  2j|  miles  S.  53°  W.  (S.  80°  W.  mag.)  from  Moisie 
Point,  and  nearly  If  miles  from  tlie  shore.  This  is  an  extremely  dan- 
gerous shoal,  being  as  bold  as  a  wall.  There  are  25  fathoms  water 
alongside  its  southern  edge,  and  upwards  of  30  fathoms  at  400  yards 
off.  It  can  generally  be  seen  in  fine  weather  from  the  change  in  the 
color  of  the  water,  and  from  heavy  breakers  when  there  is  much  sea 
running. 

There  is  no  close  leading  mark  for  avoiding  this  shoal  so  that  the 
only  direction  that  can  be  given  to  a  vessel  standing  toward  it  is  to 
tack  when  the  northern  side  of  Mauowiu  Island  comes  in  line  with  the 
southern  point  of  Great  Boule  Island;  she  will  then  be  one  mile  from 
the  edge  of  the  shoal,  and  in  upwards  of  30  fathoms  water. 

East  Rocks,  which  are  low,  bare  of  trees,  and  always  above  water, 
lie  in  Boule  Bay  between  Moisie  Shoal  and  Boule  Islands.    Vessels 


SEVEN   ISLANDS   AND   KAY. 


283 


ce,  expand- 
1  the  above 
ises  from  2J 
bars  cease, 
feet  water, 
',  where  its 
I  boats  can 
ream.  The 
)  southwest- 
and  nearly 

)oint  is  from 
■,h  a  breadth 
nnds  which 
tendency  to 
a  less  depth 
er  the  west 
sel  can  find 
18  a  salmon 
shelter  here 
d  and  east- 
ipletely  over 
ugh  to  seri. 

,ter,  full  and 

so  bold  that 
t  to  the  SE., 
stward  past 
e  triaugular 

al,  and  with 
from  Moisie 
.remely  dan- 
thoms  water 
It  400  yards 
lange  in  the 
is  much  sea 

so  that  the 
yard  it  is  to 
line  with  the 
le  mile  from 
r. 

ibove  water, 
ids.    Vessels 


ought  not  to  stand  into  this  embayed  place,  since  there  is  generally  a 
heavy  southerly  swell  rolling  in,  which  would  render  it  difficult  to  beat 

out.  ,  .... 

Seven  Islands  are  high  and  steep,  of  primary  rocks,  very  Ihinly 
wooded,  and  can  be  made  out  from  a  distance  of  about  L'O  miles,  being 
unlike  anything  else  in  the  gulf.  The  easternmost  of  these  are  (Jreat 
and  Little  Boule  Islands,  the  former  of  which  is  tiie  highest  ot  all.  its 
summit  being  0»r.  feet  above  high  water.  Next,  westward,  and  pinaHel 
to  these  two,  are  Little  and  Great  I'.asque  Islands;  the  Hist  named  being 
the  outer  island.  Great  Basque  Ishind  is  noo  feet  high.  Maiuwin  and 
Carousel  Islands  he  S\V.  of  Basque  Islands;  Manowm  Ishird  is  4o7 
feet  high;  Carousel  Island,  the  southernmost,  is  much  low<r.  West 
Bocks  lie  between  Manowin  Islam!  and  the  peninsula  whicl,  forms  the 
west  entrance  point  of  Seven  Islands  Baj.  They  are  too  small  and 
low  to  appear  as  the  seventh  island ;  but  the  ])eniiisula  has  that  appear- 
ance when  seen  at  a  distance  from  sea,  being  higher  than  any  ot  the 
islands,  and  737  feet  above  high  water. 

Light— The  lighthouse  on  Carousel  Island,  a  square  building  .iyteet 
high,  with  dwelling  attached,  is  painted  white,  with  one  red  horizontal 
'  baud.    At  an  elevation  of  100  feet  a  tixed  white  light  is  exhibited,  which 
should  be  visible  20  miles.  ,      ,      ,     „ 

Caution.— The  narrow  passes  between  the  Bonle  Islands,  the  Basque 
Islands,  between  Manowin  and  Carous'^1  Islands,  and  between  Manowin 
Island  and  West  Rocks,  require  no  further  notice  than  to  remark 
that  the  tide  sets  strongly  toward  and  through  them,  the  flood  to  the 
west  and  the  ebb  to  the  eastward,  a  circumstance  that  should  be 
attended  to  when  becalmed  at  night,  or  when  tacking  in  their  entrances. 
The  first  and  last  of  these  channels  have  water  enough  for  large  ships; 
but  the  one  is  subject  to  sudden  and  baffling  flaws  of  wind  round  Boule 
Islands,  and  the  other  is  rendered  intricate  by  rocks  which  nearly  cover 

at  high  water.  ,    x,    • 

Seven  Islands  Bay.— The  relative  situations  of  Seven  Islands,  their 
size,  and  the  breadth  of  the  channels  between  them,  will  be  best  seen 
from  the  charts.  They  are  so  placed  as  to  completely  shelter  the  bay 
within  them,  which  is  23  miles  wide  at  the  entrance,  between  Chass6 
Point  the  east  end  of  the  peninsula,  and  Sandy  Point,  which  is  opiw- 
site  the  northern  end  of  Great  Bascpie  Island.  From  the  entrance 
Seven  Islands  bay  extends  about  6  miles  northward  and  westward, 
being  so  nearly  landlocked  as  to  resemble  a  lake,  sufficiently  extensive 
for  large  fleets  to  lie  in  safety.  The  bottom  is  of  clay,  and  there  are  no 
shoals,  excepting  the  mud  banks,  which  fill  up  the  northern  part  of 

A  fine,  broad,  bold,  sandy  beach  extends  3  miles  northwestward  from 
the  east  entrance  point  of  the  bay  to  the  entrance  of  the  principal  river, 
near  which  stands  the  Hudson  Bay  Company's  trading  post.  The 
houses  at  this  post  can  not  be  seen  from  the  outer  parts  ot  the  bay, 


|l-|i|A! 


284 


GULP  OF  ST.  LAWRENCE — NOKTH  COAST. 


but  there  is  a  wooden  store  on  the  beach,  off  which  vessels  usually 
anchor. 

Water  can  be  obtained  ft'om  this  river  at  high  tide. 

Anchorage.— The  best  berth  for  a  vessel  of  large  draft  is  with  Sandy 
Point  and  the  north  side  of  Little  Boule  Island  in  line,  and  Chass^ 
Point  in  line  with  the  west  side  of  the  West  Ko«!k8.  The  NW.  extrem- 
ity of  the  sandy  beach  near  the  entrance  of  the  river-will  then  be  about 
north;  the  vessel  will  be  in  9  fathoms  at  low  water,  over  clay  bottom, 
nearly  one  mile  from  the  sandy  beach  to  the  eastward,  and  nearly  } 
mile  from  the  3-fathoni  edge  of  the  shoals,  which  occupy  the  northern 
part  ol  the  bay.  Smaller  vessels  may  lie  closer  to  the  shore,  in  6  fath- 
oms at  low  water,  which  is  as  near  as  any  vessel  ought  to  anchor. 

In  this  anchorage  there  is  a  considerable  swell  with  a  strong  south- 
erly Wind,  but  never  enough  to  endanger  a  vessel,  although  sufficient 
to  prevent  boats  from  landing.  Those  that  may  wish  to  lie  qnite 
smoothly  may  anchor  in  the  SW.  part  of  the  bay,  in  13  fathoms,  soft 
clay  bottom,  where  they  will  be  quite  landlocked. 

Channels  into  Seven  Islands  Bay.— There  are  threat  channels  lead- 
ing into  Seven  Islands  Bay,  namely,  East,  Middle,  and  West  Channels. 

East  Channel,  between  Great  Basque  Island  and  Sandy  Point,  may 
be  approached  from,  between  Bonle  Islands  and  East  Bocks  or  from 
between  Boule  and  Basque  Islands,  both  routes  being  entirely  free 
from  danger.  It  is  seldom  used,  having  a  rock  in  its  center,  which  is 
covered  only  in  high  tides.  A  reef,  with  from  6  to  9  feet  of  water, 
exte!ids  ^  mile  eastward  of  this  rock.  The  passage  on  either  side  of 
it  is  wide  and  has  from  13  to  15  fathoms.  Vessels  should  only  attempt 
it  with  a  fair  wind,  and  should  keep  within  200  yards  of  Basque  Island, 
or  as  near  tt)  Sandy  Point;  the  latter  is  preferable. 

Middle  Channel  (which  is  also  the  principal  and  best)  is  upward  of 
If  miles  wide,  and  so  free  from  danger  that  a  vessel  of  the  largest 
draft  may  approach  the  shore  within  100  yards  in  every  part,  except- 
ing at  Chasse  Point,  where  a  reef  runs  out  250  yards  from  the  shore. 
This  channel,  between  Basque  Islands  on  the  east  and  Carousel,  Mano- 
win.  West  Kocks,  and  the  peninsula  on  the  west,  is  preferable  in  every 
wind,  excepting  the  north  and  NW.,  with  which,  to  save  beating  (since 
they  blow  out  of  the  bay),  it  might  be  desirable  to  enter  by  the  West 
Channel. 

West  Channel,  between  the  West  Bocks  and  Croix  Point,  at  the 
sonthern  extremity  of  the  peninsula,  is  f  mile  wide  and  quite  free  from 
danger.  There  are  two  or  three  rocks  lying  200  yards  to  the  north- 
ward of  West  Bocks,  but  they  always  show,  excepting  in  very  high 
tides  and  the  smoothest  sea. 

Caution. — The  ebb  tide  is  turned  oft'  by  Croix  Point  toward  West 
Bocks,  a  circumstance  which  must  be  attended  to  in  taking  this  chan- 
nel with  a  scant  northerly  wind. 

Anchorage. — The  water  is  too  deep  for  anchorage  in  any  of  these 


m-'nnj 


SEVEN    ISLANDS   BAY. 


285 


i\a  usually 


rith  Sandy 
,nd  Cba8s6 
W.  extretn- 
;ta  be  about 
»y  bottom, 
d  uearly  J 
e  northern 
B,  in  6  fath- 
ijchor. 
pong  Bouth- 
li  sufficient 

0  lie  quite 
thorns,  soft 

uinelslead- 
b  Channels. 
Point,  may 
iks  or  from 
itirely  free 
>r,  which  is 
it  of  water, 
her  side  of 
nly  attempt 
que  Island, 

1  upward  of 
the  largest 
urt,  except- 
I  the  shore, 
use],  Mano- 
jle  in  every 
ating  (since 
y  the  West 

oint,  at  the 

be  free  from 

the  north- 

1  very  high 

>ward  West 
;  this  chan- 

ay  of  these 


channels  and  the  bottom  generally  rocky,  excepting  to  the  eastward 
and  northward  of  Houle  Islands.  The  ground  is  not  Ht  for  anchoring 
until  well  into  tlie  bay.  The  water  is  extremely  deep  outside  of  these 
islands,  and  they  are  so  bold  that  a  vessel  may  stand  in  close  to  their 
rocky  shores. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Seven  Islands  Bay,  at 
Ih.  4Um.;  springs  rise  9  feet,  and  neaps  5  feet. 

The  rate  of  the  stream  of  the  tides  in  the  bay  and  in  the  ])rincipal 
channels  between  Seven  Islands  seldom  amounts  to  one  knot;  but  in 
the  narrow  channels  between  Boule  Islands,  Basque  Islands,  and  in 
East  and  West  Channels  it  may  amount  to  2  knots  in  spring  tides,  or 
even  more  in  the  narrowest  of  tiiese  channels  when  accelerated  by 
strong  winds.  The  flood  coming  along  from  the  eastward  strikes 
Boule  Islands,  and  passes  between  them,  and  also  between  the  two 
Basque  Islands.  It  is  turned  off  by  Great  Boule  Island  toward 
Carousel  Island  and  West  Channel ;  but  the  greater  part  of  the  stream 
which  passes  within  Boule  Islands  enters  the  bay  by  East  Channel, 
between  Great  Bas()ue  Island  and  the  mainland.  There  is  very  little 
flood  in  Middle  Channel,  excepting  an  eddy  outward  stream  close 
along  the  shores  of  the  peninsula,  and  the  narrow  stream  troth  between 
Bascjue  Islands,  which  sets  across  toward  West  Channel. 

The  ebb  sets  fairly  out  of  the  bay,  part  of  it  by  Bast  Channel  and 
part  of  it  by  Middle  Channel,  where  it  meets  the  stream  through  West 
Channel,  which  turns  it  to  the  eastward,  past  the  southern  points  of 
Basque  and  Jionle  Islands. 

Winds. — In  fine  nights  the  winds  are  almost  always  light  and  baffling 
between  Seven  Islands,  particularly  if  the  wind  be  from  the  westward 
in  the  offing.  At  such  times  there  is  generally  a  northerly  land  wind 
in  Seven  Islands  Bay,  but  it  does  nut  often  reach  far  out  among  the 
islands  in  the  early  part  of  the  night,  although  It  often  does  toward  the 
morning. 

Aspect  of  Coast — The  coast  between  Seven  Islands  and  Point  de 
Monts  is  less  bold  in  appearance,  being  less  elevated,  than  that  east- 
ward of  Seven  Islands.  The  hills  arc,  for  the  most  i)art,  far  back  in 
the  country,  and  the  shores  are  of  very  moderate  height  above  the  sea. 
The  country  near  the  sea  is  formed  of  small  and  low  granitic  hills,  par- 
tially wooded  with  spruce  trees.  Marshes  and  ponds  are  frequent 
between  the  hills,  sandy  beaches  occur  occasionally,  and  the  sandy 
tracts  in  rear  of  them  are  always  the  most  densely  wooded  parts. 

This  coast  is  much  more  bold  than  its  appearance  would  promise,  and 
although  the  water  is  deep  off  every  point  of  it,  yet  in  general,  and 
with  few  exceptions,  there  are  sufficient  soundings  with  the  deep-sea 
lead  to  give  warning  to  a  vessel  of  her  ai)proach  to  the  shore. 

From  Carousel  Island  across  St.  Margaret  Bay  to  St.  Margaret  Point, 
a  distance  of  14  miles,  there  is  deep  water  all  the  way. 

St.  Margaret  River  empties  nearly  j'<  the  center  of  St.  Margaret 


286 


GULF   OF    ST.    LAWRENCE — NORTH    COAST. 


Itiiy,  beiiiR  <i  milos  from  Croix  I'oint.  Altliough  a  large  Htream,  it 
aftords  slielter  to  boats  only.  A  bar  of  sand  oxteiuls  !<  mile  from  the 
eiitriiiu'e,  ami  Iiiih  geveral  small  channels  through  it,  with  only  .J  feet  at 
low  water.  Immediately  within  the  entrance,  which  is  .'iriO  yards  wide, 
there  are  (5  feet  water,  and  only  3  feet  can  be  carried  up  to  the  low  falls, 
which  are  over  granitic  rociks,  .i{  miles  from  the  entrance.  Helow  the 
falls  the  river  H(»ws  between  cliffs  of  sand  and  clay,  and  is  full  of  sand 
bars,  dry  at  low  water.  The  water  deepens  gradually  outside  the  bar, 
with  sandy  bottom,  to  IS  fathoms  at  the  distan<^e  of  one  mile  from  the 
3-fathom  line  of  soundings.  There  is  a  8an<ly  beach  for  a  considerable 
distance  (ui  either  side  of  the  mouth  of  the  river. 

St  Margaret  Point  is  roclty,  of  moderate  height,  and  has  a  round 
hill  a  short  distance  within  its  extremity.  There  are  several  rocks, 
which  cover  at  high  water,  and  which  extend  nearly  i  mile  off  this 
point.  These  rocks  are  extremely  bold,  and  there  Is  no  bottom  with 
the  hand  lead  close  outside  of  them,  and  no  bottom  with  70  fathoms  of 
line  at  a  less  distance  than  2  miles. 

The  Coast  between  St.  Margaret  Point  and  Great  Cawee  Island  is 
low,  and  fringed  with  small  islets  and  rocks  close  to  the  shore,  which 
may  with  prudence  be  closely  approached  by  the  lead,  but  the  depth  of 
20  fathoms  is  near  enough  to  it  for  a  stranger.  Book  Biver  and  many 
other  small  streams  empty  into  the  bay  between  these  points.  The 
deep  sea  soundings  are  very  irregular  oil"  this  section  of  the  coast,  for 
in  some  parts  there  are  not  more  than  r»0  fathoms  1  or  5  miles  off  shore; 
whoieas,  in  others,  as  off  May  Islets,  «  miles  northward  of  Cawee 
Islands,  no  bottom  will  be  found  with  GO  fathoms  within  2  miles  of  the 
rocks. 

Cawee  Islands  are  two  small  and  hilly  islands  of  gray  granite,  and 
nearly  bare  of  trees.  Great  Cawee  Island,  which  is  the  larger,  thd  higher, 
and  the  northeastern  of  the  two,  is  about  ^  mile  in  diameter,  and  about 
250  feet  high.  Little  Cawee  Island,  lying  a  mile  farther  southwest- 
ward,  is  composed  of  two  islets,  which  occupy  a  length  of  ^  mile  par- 
allel to  the  coast,  it  has  several  rocks  above  water  close  off  it  to  the 
SW.,  and  a  reef  250  yards  northwestward  of  its  Avest  point. 

Water.— There  is  neither  wood  nor  water  on  Cawee  Islands,  but 
both  may  be  obtained  from  the  opposite  mainland. 

Cawee  Rock,  small,  round,  and  high,  and  i  mile  southward  of  the 
south  point  of  Great  Cawee,  is  so  bold  that  a  large  ship  might  lie  along- 
side of  it. 

Great  Cawee  Cove,  on  the  north  side  of  Great  Cawee  Island,  is 
secure  for  boats,  with  plenty  of  water,  but  too  small  and  narrow  in  the 
entrance  for  vessels. 

Qreat  Cawee  Shoal  lies  off  the  mouth  of  Great  Cawee  Cove,  400 
yards  to  the  northward.    The  least  water  on  it  is  15  feet. 

Cawee  Ledge.— Half  a  mile  north  from  this  shoal  is  a  snmll  round 
ledge,  awash  at  low  water,  and  i  mile  from  the  mainland.    From  it  the 


e  Htreatn,  it 
tile  fnim  the 
»nly  '<i  feet  at 
yards  wide, 
blie  low  falls, 
Below  the 
full  of  Hand 
side  the  bur, 
lile  from  the 
coiisiderable 

has  a  round 
tveral  rocks, 
mile  off  this 
bottom  with 
'0  fathoms  of 

ree  Island  is 
shore,  which 
the  depth  of 
er  and  many 
points.  The 
the  coast,  for 
les  offshore; 
rd  of  Oawee 
I  miles  of  the 

granite,  and 
5r,thd  higher, 
er,  and  about 
»r  south  west- 
)f  ^  mile  par- 
e  off  it  to  the 
lit. 

Islands,  but 

Iiward  of  the 
iglit  lie  along- 
wee  Island,  is 
narrow  in  the 

vee  Cove,  400 

a  small  round 
From  it  the 


(IRK.VT    CAWKK    ISLAND    ANCIIORAOE. 


287 


Boutli  side  of  the  large  ro(;kH,  between  (ireatC^awee  and  the  nmiu,i«  ia 
line  with  the  point  ol'  the  niain  to  the  wcNtwnnl. 

Large  Rooks,  MM)  yards  from  (hrat  Ciiwee  Island,  between  it  and. 
the  main,  are  two  large  rocks  clost-  together;  they  lie  . MM*  yards  from 
the  mainland,  and  have  a  reef  extending  400  yards  SW.  from  their 
8W.  point.  Nearly  A  mile  N  K.  by  N.  from  these  rocks,  and  at  the  same 
distance  from  tlie  main,  there  is  a  small  rock  whitii  always  sliows. 

Anchorage. — There  is  anchorage  in  tlie  mouth  of  the  bay  on  the 
inner  or  NW.  side  of  (heat  Cawee  Island,  in  7  fathoms,  muddy  bottom, 
at  L'(M»  yards  from  the  island.  The  shelter  is  complete  with  winds  from 
8\V.  by  VV\  round  northerly  to  NNK.,  and  tolerably  so  with  all  easterly 
winds,  although  some  swell  rolls  round  theislaml;  but  the  SW.  winds 
blow  right  in,  and  send  in  a  very  heavy  sea. 

Directions. — To  run  into  tiiis  anchorage  fnmi  the  northeastward, 
steer  N.  71°  W.  (N.  4."»o  W.  mag.)  past  the  NK.  side  of  Great  Oawee 
Island,  going  no  nearer  than  ^  mile  (to  avoid  the  shoal  otf  the  mouth  of 
the  cove),  until  the  poiJit  of  the  mainland  to  the  westward  opens  clear 
of  the  north  side  of  the  island.  Then  steer  for  the  point  of  the  nniin- 
land,  keeping  it  mi4way  between  the  north  side  of  the  island  and  the 
Large  Rocks.  Having  arrived  between  the  rocks  and  the  ishuul,  haul 
into  the  mouth  of  the  small  bay,  which  will  be  seen  on  the.NVV.  side 
ol  the  latter,  and  anchor  in  7  fathoms  at  low  water.  There  are  12  or 
13  fathoms  in  tlie  middle  of  the  channel,  and  upward  of  1)  fathoms  can 
be  <!arried  through. 

In  running  for  this  anchorage  from  the  south  westward,  a  vessel  may 
pass  between  Little  Oawee  Island  and  the  main,  by  keeping  in  mid- 
channel  ;  but  the  better  and  safer  way  is  to  run  between  Little  and 
Great  Oawee  Islands,  hauling  close  round  the  west  point  of  the  latter 
into  the  anchorage.  By  this  route  there  is  nothing  in  the  way,  except- 
ing Oawee  Rock,  which  can  always  be  seen. 

From  the  foregoing  description  it  will  be  seen  that  this  is  a  very 
dangerous  and  intricate  place;  and  the  anchorage  between  Great 
Oawee  Island  and  the  main  is  too  small  for  large  vessels,  the  channel 
being  only  400  yards  wi<le.  Still  this  anchorage,  altlM>ngh  too  small 
for  an  occasional  place  of  shelter,  excepting  for  small  vessels,  may, 
nevertheless,  be  of  great  use  as  a  place  of  refuge  for  a  vessel  in  dis- 
tress from  loss  of  nuists  or  other  cause,  for  the  ground  is  so  good  that 
a  vessel  well  moored  there  might  be  able  to  ride  out  any  gale  which 
occurs  during  the  summer  months. 

Tides.— It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Cawee  Islands  at  Ih. 
5()m. ;  springs  rise  9  feet,  and  neaps  5  feet.  The  tides  run  fair  between 
the  islands  and  the  mainland  at  a  rate  which  seldom  exceeds  1^  knots 
and  which  is  in  general  much  less. 

Sproule  Point,  ^  mile  westward  from  Little  Oawee  Island,  is  the 
eastern  point  of  Lobster  Bay.  A  reef  extends  off  its  south  side  200 
yards  toward  Little  Oawee,  but  the  principal  reef  oft'  it  runs  out  ^  mile 
to  the  southward. 


I 

n 
.1 
,1 


288 


GULF  OF   BT.   LAWRENCE — NORTH    COAST. 


Lobater  Bay  in  butweeii  Sproiile  I'oint  mid  CrookiMl  IsIaiidH,  which 
are  a  group  of  miiuiII  JMletH  and  rockH  running  out  from  thu  Hliore  3 
miles  westward  of  Sproule  Point.  All  the  northern  part  or  head  of 
LobHter  Bay  Ih  occupied  by  an  exteiisive  Hat  of  Hand  and  l>owlder8, 
dry  at  low  water,  aitd  on  which  lobsterH  abound :  but  it  in  an  excellent 
open  roadstead,  with  plenty  of  room  for  large  HhipH. 

Crooked  Xalanda  arc^  Itold  to  the  Houthward  and  eastward,  leaving 
the  mouth  of  the  bay  ciear  of  all  danger  across  the  reef  oft'  Sproule 
Point.  Vessels  may  anchor  midway  between  the  reef  and  the  islands, 
choosing  their  depth  from  5  to  112  fathoms,  according  as  they  may  wish 
to  lie,  at  ^  mile  or  one  mile  tvom  the  3-fathom  edge  of  the  flats  in 
the  head  of  the  bay.  The  bottom  is  flue  sand  over  clay,  and  the  shelter 
from  northerly  and  we.sterly  winds;  but  winds  from  east,  round  south 
to  88VV.,  blow  right  in,  with  a  heavy  sea  and  thick  weather. 

Pentecoat  River  enters  the  sea  on  the  SW.  side  of  a  rocky  point 
1^  miles  southwestward  of  Crooked  Islands.  The  opposite  entrance 
point  is  of  sand.  Alluvial  Hill  is  a  remarkable  round  and  wooded  emi- 
nence 2  miles  SSW.  from  the  mouth  of  the  river.  The  tlrst  reach  of 
the  river  is  toward  this  hill,.1eaving  a  very  narrow  sandy  ridge  between 
it  and  the  sea.  Steep  cliff's  of  sand  and  clay  form  the  banks  for  2^ 
miles,  to  which  distance  only  it  is  navigable  for  boats.  The  entrance  of 
the  river  is  only  30  yards  wide,  with  a  depth  of  7  feet  at  low  water,  and 
there  are  0  feet  within  for  a  short  distance.  At  high  water  from  12  to 
16  feet  can  be  carried  in,  so  that  this  river  is  capable  of  aff'ording  shelter 
to  coasting  schooners  as  well  as  boats;  but  it  would  be  very  difficult 
to  take  a  sailing  vessel  in  through  so  narrow  an  entrance,  and  could 
never  be  done  on  the  ebb  tide,  which  runs  out  with  great  rapidity. 

A  fine  bold,  sandy  beach  extends  7  miles  south  from  this  river  to 
English  Point. 

Engliah  Point,  1^  miles  northward  from  North  Reef  of  Egg  Island, 
has  a  shoal  of  large  stones  extending  ^  mile  off  it.  On  the  SW.  side 
this  shoal  may  be  approached  to  the  depth  of  6  fathoms  at  low  water, 
bnt  on  the  SE.  and  east  it  is  very  bold,  there  being  15  fathoms  at  the 
distance  of  ^  mile. 

Egg  laland  lies  14  miles  SSW.  from  the  south  point  of  Great  Gawee 
Island.  It  IS  low,  narrow,  and  of  granitic  rocks,  without  trees,  and  f 
mile  Itong.  North  Reef,  always  above  water,  lies  800  yards  north  from 
the  island.  It  is  a  low,  narrow,  black  reef,  which  is  600  yards  long,  in 
the  same  direction,  bold  toward  the  mainland  and  also  toward  English 
Point.  A  reef  under  water  extends  ^  mile  south  from  these  rocks, 
leaving  only  a  very  narf-ow  3-fathom  channel  between  them  and  the 
island. 

Northeast  Reef  extends  1,200  yards  f^m  the  NE.  point  of  Egg  Island, 
and  is  the  greatest  danger  between  Seven  Islands  and  Point  de  Monts. 
Some  of  the  rocks  upon  it  show  in  low  tides,  and  the  sea  generally 
breaks  on  them  at  low  water.    This  reef  prevents  the  swell  from  rolling 


iihIh,  which 
the  Hhore  3 
or  head  of 
d  Iwwhlers, 
All  ifxcellent 

jird,  leaving 
oft'  Spioule 
the  iHhiiids, 
By  may  wish 
the  Hats  in 
d  the  shelter 
round  south 
er. 
rocky  point 
}ite  entrance 
wooded  emi- 
tlrst  reach  of 
idge  between 
banks  for  2^ 
>e  entrance  of 
>w  water,  and 
ter  from  12  to 
)rding  shelter 
very  diflicnlt 
ce,  and  could 
rapidity, 
this  river  to 

f  Egg  Island, 
the  8W.  side 
at  low  water, 
fathoms  at  the  ' 

f  Great  Oawee 
lit  trees,  and  f 
rds  north  from 
yards  long,  in 
oward  English 
a  these  rocks, 
them  and  the 

of  Egg  Island, 
•oint  de  Monts. 
I  sea  generally 
ell  from  rolling 


BBS 


EOa   ISLAND— ANCHOR  AGE. 


289 


1 


In  betwoeii  North  lici'f  and  Kg^  Island,  and  thus  asHistH  in  shelterlnif 
the  iinchoruijc, 

Light — On  l._  :  Island  is  builf  Jin  octugonal  1i)>;litlu)use,  JH  feet  liigli, 
Buinioiiiiting  the  ktcpir's  dwelliiiK-  it  i»  painted  wliite,  wWU  one  red 
vertical  stripe,  and  exhibits,  at  an  t'levation  of  71  feet,  a  revolving  wliite 
light  every  minute  and  a  half,  whieh  sjionid  b(>  visiLh'  ir»  miles.  The 
lighthouse  is  2<K)  yards  from  the  south  end  of  tlie  island. 

TVater. — There  is  no  water  on  Kgj,'  Ishmd,  hut  it  may  readily  bo 
obtained  t'vom  small  streams  on  either  side  of  lioadstead  Point. 

Anchorage. — Kgg  island,  with  its  rooks  and  reefs,  forms  a  natural 
breakwater  1|\  miles  long,  which  inclines  sli}>htly  toward  the  shore  at 
its  northern  end  in  such  a  manner  as,  with  the  shoal  otf  English  Point, 
to  shelter  the  anchorage  from  NK.  winds.  The  northern  end  of  this 
breakwater  is  nearly  '^  mile  from  the  nuiiuland,  and  the  southern  end 
more  than  one  mile;  but  extensive  tiats  extend  from  the  nuiin  and 
diminish  the  navigable  breadth  of  the  channel  to  about  ^  mile  in  the 
narrowest  part,  which  is  nearly  opposite  the  northein  end  of  Kgg 
Island.  The  best  anchorage  is,  however,  south  of  this  narrow  part, 
where  the  breadth  from  the  3fathom  edge  of  the  sh'  al  off  the  main  to 
Egg  Island  is  1,200  yards. 

All  along  the  inner  sides  of  Egg  Island  and  of  North  lieef,  except 
near  their  northern  end,  the  water  is  deep,  there  being  from  17  to  24 
fathoms  at  low  tide  (tlose  to  them.  The  soundings  decrease  gradually 
toward  the  mainland,  and  the  best  depth  to  ancho*'  in  is  9  or  10  fath- 
oms, according  to  the  time  of  tide.  The  bottom  is  of  clay  in  the  deep 
water  toward  the  island,  and  of  sand  from  the  depth  of  9  fathoms 
toward  the  mainland.  There  is  little  danger  of  dragging  an  anchor  up 
hill  toward  the  main,  but,  with  violent  squalls  oft'  the  land,  vessels 
should  have  a  good  scope  of  cable  out,  for  should  the  anchor  start  they 
might  be  on  the  rocks  before  they  could  bring  up  again. 

In  order  to  have  as  much  room  as  possible,  with  a  moderate  depth  of 
water,  vessels  should  not  anchor  northward  of  a  line  joining  Poadstead 
Point  and  the  center  of  Egg  Island.  The  best  position  is  with  the  south 
end  of  Egg  Island  bearing  S.  59°  E.  (S.  34°  E.  mag.)  and  the  inner  side 
of  North  Reef  N.  20°  E.  (N.  45°  E.  mag.).  English  Point  will  then 
be  open  half  a  point  westward  of  the  latter.  In  this  anchorage  vessels 
will  lie  sheltered  from  NE.,  round  by  north,  to  SW.  by  the  mainland, 
and  from  ESE.  to  NE.by  the  island,  with  its  rocks  and  reefs.  Jhe  winds 
from  the  remaining  points,  namely,  those  between  SW.  and  SE.,  sel- 
dom blow  strong,  and  even  with  them  a  vessel  may  find  some  shelter 
by  shifting  her  berth  to  the  eastward,  where  she  will  tind  7  fathoms 
over  sandy  bottom. 

The  anchorage  at  Egg  Island  is  too  small  to  be  a  favorite  resort  for 
large  vessels,  but  in  time  of  need,  or  as  a  place  of  refuge  in  case  of 
distress,  it  would  be  found  of  great  value  on  a  coast  so  destitute  of  good 
harbors. 

1151 19 


I  ■ 


*--r--= 


iWWBiyi 


290 


GULF  OF  ST.  LAWRENCE NORTH  COAST. 


Directions  are  unnecessary  for  running  into  this  anchorage  from  the 
southward,  since  the  south  end  of  Eggr  Island  is  quite  bold.  But  if  it 
be  intended  to  run  between  the  island  and  the  main,  stand  in  to  the 
northward  to  8  or  9  fathoms,  or  until  English  Point  is  open  half  a  i>oint 
to  the  northward  of  the  North  Keef,  then  steer  for  English  Point,  giving 
the  inner  side  of  the  North  Reef  a  berth  of  200  yards  until  the  vessel 
has  passed  the  North  Keef  a  full  i  mile.  She  will  then  be  in  about  7 
fathoms  at  low  water,  and  may  haul  out  to  sea,  taking  care  to  avoid 
Northeast  Iteef. 

Tides.— It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Egg  Island  at  2h.; 
springs  rish  11  feet,  and  neaps  6  feet. 

The  rate  oi  the  tides  between  Egg  Island  and  the  main  is  from  a  half 
to  one  knot,  and  part  of  the  stream  of  ebb  sets  toward  and  out  through 
the  narrow  and  dangerous  3-fathom  channel  between  the  island  and 
North  Keef.  Part  of  the  stream  of  Hood  comes  in  through  the  same 
channel. 

Calumet  River  is  a  small  stream  2^  miles  southwestward  of  Egg 
Island ;  along  the  shore  for  one  mile  southward  of  its  entrance  there 
are  reefs  of  largo  stones  extending  out  1,200  yards  from  high-water 
mark,  and  having  15  fathoms  off  them  at  ^  mile  to  seaward.  South- 
ward of  these  rocks,  as  far  as  Trinity  Bay,  the  coast  is  free  from  dan- 
ger, and  may  be  approached  with  safety  if  due  caution  be  used.  There 
are  20  fathoms  at  from  J  to  one  mile  off  shore. 

Caribou  Point,  8^  miles  southward  from  Egg  Island,  is  a  small 
rocky  peninsula,  having  sandy  coves  on  either  side  of  its  isthmus,  in 
which  pilot  boats  find  shelter; 

Trinity  Bay,  5  miles  southward  of  Caribou  Point,  is  2  miles  wide 
and  nearly  one  mile  deep,  with  a  fine  sandy  beach  extending  from  its 
south  point  to  Trinity  Kiver,  which  is  a  small  and  rapid  stream,  abound- 
ing with  trout  and  salmon,  where  water  can  be  had  only  at  high  water, 
because  of  the  large  stones  about  its  entrance.  The  south  point  of  the 
bay  IP  ""^"Jky,  and  off'  the  NE.  point  there  are  two  low  black  rocks. 
The  depth  of  water  between  these  points  is  from  5  to  7  fathoms  at  low 
water  over  sandy  bottom. 

Anchorage.— This  bay  affords  e:fcellent  anchorage,  in  a  moderate 
depth  of  water,  with  good  ground  and  plenty  of  room  to  weigh  in  any 
wind.  It  is  a  valuable  stopping  place  in  westerly  winds  for  vessels 
bound  up  the  St.  Lawrence  to  wait  their  opportunity  to  proceed  round 
Point  de  Moutg  and  up  the  estuary. 

Directions.— In  running  along  the  land  for  Trinity  Bay,  either  from 
the  NB.  or  SW.,  come  no  nearer  than  the  depth  of  15  fathoms  until  the 
bay  opens;  then  haul  in  and  anchor  in  7  fathoms  at  low  water,  with 
the  lighthouse  on  Point  de  Monts  (seen  just  within  a  small  rock  about 
li  miles  southwestward  of  the  bay)  beariug  S.  35°  W.  (S.  00°  W.  mag.), 
and  the  outer  of  the  two  rocks  off"  the  NE.  point  of  the  bay  N.  15°  E. 
(N.  40°  E.  mag.).    The  vessel  will  be  then  rather  more  than  f  mile  from 


3T. 

jliorage  from  the 
bold.  But  if  it 
,  stand  ill  to  tbe 
►pen  half  a  point 
ish  Point,  giving 
I  until  the  vessel 
in  be  in  about  7 
g  care  to  avoid 

Island  at  2  b.; 

ain  is  from  a  half 
and  out  through 
1  tbe  island  and 
lirougb  the  same 

westward  of  Egg 
ts  entrance  there 
from  high-water 
leaward.  South- 
is  free  from  dan- 
1  be  used.   There 

land,  is  a  small 
)f  its  isthmus,  in 

t,  is  2  miles  wide 
[tending  from  its 
I  stream,  abound- 
ily  at  high  water, 
louth  point  of  the 
low  black  rocks. 
7  fathoms  at  low 

fe,  in  a  moderate 
1  to  weigh  in  any 
winds  for  vessels 
to  proceed  round 

Bay,  either  from 
fathoms  until  the 
t  low  water,  with 
small  rock  about 
(S.  00°  W.  mag.), 
the  bay  N.  15°  E. 
than  f  mile  from 


POINT   DE   MONTS. 


291 


the  south  point  of  the  bay.  Vessels  of  large  draft  may  anchor  farther 
out  and  in  deeper  water,  if  more  convenient,  and  small  schooners  in  3 
fathoms,  close  under  the  south  point. 

Point  de  Monts. — The  south  extremity  of  the  jioint  is  <i^  miles  SW. 
from  the  south  point  of  Trinity  Bay. 

•A  ledge  of  rocks  with  9  or  10  feet  least  water  lies  ESE.  from  the 
extremity  of  the  point  and  J  mile  oft"  shore.  Another  rock  with  2 
fathoms  on  it  lies  south  J  mile  from  the  lighthouse,  and  there  is  a  third, 
with  a  little  more  water  and  nearly  as  far  oft",  east  from  the  lighthouse. 
These  dangers  should  be  carefully  guarded  against  in  making  the  light 
in  thick  weather,  or  when  keeping  close  to  the  land  with  a  northerly 
wind,  and  the  depth  of  15  fathoms  is  quite  near  enough  to  them  for  a 
large  vessel  at  any  time,  being  no  more  than  400  yards  from  the  first 
and  about  twice  that  distance  from  the  two  last  of  them. 

Light. — The  lighthouse  stands  low  down  and  close'  to  the  sea,  at  5 
miles  southwestward  from  Trinity  Bay  and  NE.  rather  more  than  IJ 
miles  from  the  south  extremity  of  Point  <ie  Monts.  The  lighthouse  is 
90  feet  high,  circular  in  shape,  and  painted  white,  with  two  red  hori- 
zontal bands,  and  exhibits  at  ar  elevation  of  93  feet  a  fixed  white  light, 
which  IS  visible  1."  miles.  The  light  can  not  be  seen  when  bearing 
southward  of  N.  10°  E.  (S.  85°  E.  mag.),  as  it  is  shut  i\\  by  higher  land. 

Fog  Signal. — During  fogs  and  snowstorms  a  cotton-powder  cartridge 
IS  ex[)loded  every  twenty  minutes. 

SifOisla. — There  is  a  telegraph  and  signal  station  at  this  lighthouse. 

Tne  extreme  of  the  land  to  the  nortlieastward  near  Caribou  Point 
bears  N.  30°  E.  (N.  55°  E.  mag.)  from  the  light,  which  can  be  seen  over 
the  point,  and  that  bearing  continued  will  pass  little  more  than  2^  miles 
outside  of  Egg  Island  at  the  distance  of  20  miles  from  the  light. 

Caution. — Vessels  being  to  the  eastward  in  a  dark  night,  when  the 
land  can  not  be  seen,  had  better  tack ;  when  Point  de  Monts  light  bears 
S.  44°  W.  (S.  09°  W.  mag.)  will  be  near  enough,  if  they  be  as  near  to 
it  as  Trinity  Bay.  They  may,  however,  stand  in  nearer,  using  due 
caution  by  the  lead.  Vessels  westward  of  the  ligbt  should  tack  as 
soon  as  it  bears  N.  (50°  E.  (N.  85°  E.  mag.),  for,  as  previously  remarked, 
it  can  not  be  seen  to  the  southward  of  N.  70°  E.  (S.  85°  E,  mag.),  in 
consequence  of  the  high  land  which  interposes. 

When  the  light  disappears,  a  vessel  ofif  Goodbout  River  will  be  only 
one  mile  from  the  bar. 


II 


li 


Is 


i 


CHAPTER  X. 

8T.  LAWRENCE  RIVER,  NORTH  SHORE— POINT  DE  M0NT8  TO  8AGUENAY 
RIVER  AND  THE  SAGUENAY  RIVER. 


■:      < 


QUEBEC 
(H.  O.  Chart  No.  1111.) 

Aspect  of  Coast — The  land,  which  on  the  eaHtern  side  of  Point  de 
Monts  is  rather  low,  begins  to  rise  immediately  from  that  point  to  the 
westward;  and  granitic  hills,  very  sparingly  wooded  and  in  no  part 
above  1,000  feet  in  height,  form  the  north  coast  of  the  estuary  as  far 
as  St.  (liles  Point,  distant  30J  miles  west  of  Point  de  Monts.  The  sec- 
tion of  coast  just  indicated  is  as  bold  as  any  in  the  St.  Lawrence,  there 
being  little  or  no  warning  by  the  lead ;  neither  is  there  any  good  anchor- 
age sutticiently  roomy  for  the  occasional  use  of  shipping. 

St.  Augustine  Cove,  1^  miles  westward  of  Point  de  Monts,  affords 
shelter  only  to  boats. 

Ooodbout  River,  8^  miles  westward  from  Point  de  Monts,  enters 
the  sea  at  the  extremity  of  a  sandy  point,  and  has  a  bar  of  sand,  which 
extends  nesirly  ^  mile  from  the  eastern  entrance  point,  dries  in  great 
part  at  low  water,  and  is  bold  to  seaward.  There  is  usually  at  low 
water  not  more  tlian  4  or  5  feet  over  this  bar,  on  which  a  heavy  surf 
very  frequently  breaks,  and  the  river  is  only  of  use  to  boats  because  of 
the  difficult  and  narrow  entrance,  although  there  are  15  or  16  feet  of 
water  over  the  bar  at  high  water  springs.  There  is  a  trading  and 
salmon-fishing  post  of  the  Hudson  Bay  Company  at  this  river,  and  the 
houses  can  readily  be  seen. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  a^  Goodbout  Biver  at 
Ih.  32m.;  springs  rise  11  feet,  neaps  C  feet. 

Anchorage.— It  is  possible  to  anchor  on  either  side  of  the  bar  off 
Ooodbout  River,  but  the  anchorages  are  too  near  to  the  shore  to  be  of 
general  use.  The  anchorage  westward  of  the  bar  may  occasionally  be 
useful,  in  easterly  winds,  to  small  vesi^els.  They  should  anchor  about 
midway  between  the  bar  and  the  first  rocky  point  westward  of  it,  at 
or  about  one  mile  westward  of  the  bar. 

At  this  anchorage,  which  is  only  safe  in  summer,  the  bottom  is  of 
coarse  sand.  The  tides  are  weak  and  iri*egular,  rendering  it  difficult  to 
keei)  the  anchor  clear  in  calm  weather;  they  also  frequently  set  toward 
the  shore,  coming  in  with  long  ripplings  parallel  to  the  coast. 

Directions. — To  run  for  this  anchorage,  observe  that  the  rocky  point 
just  mentioned  and  the  east  entrance  point  of  St.  Nicholas  Harbor  in 

292 


i  TO  SAGUENAY 


ide  of  Point  de 
lat  ])oint  to  the 
and  in  no  part 
estuary  as  far 
onts.  The  sec- 
[iawrence,  there 
ly  good  anchor- 

I  Monts,  afibrds 

)  Monts,  enters 
of  sand,  which 
,  dries  in  great 
usually  at  low 
h  a  heavy  surf 
oats  because  of 
15  or  16  feet  of 
a  trading  and 
s  river,  and  the 

Ibout  Biver  at 

!  of  the  bar  off 
B  shore  to  be  of 
occasionally  be 
[I  anchor  about 
jtward  of  it,  at 

lie  bottom  is  of 

ig  it  difficult  to 

ntly  set  toward 

coast. 

the  rocky  point 

olas  Harbor  in 


\^ 


8T.  NICHOLAS   HARBOR. 


293 


line,  bearing  N.  87°  W.  (N.  63°  W.  niag.^,  just  clears  the  bar;  therefore 
keep  the  last-named  point  in  sight  until  the  houses  at  (loodbout  River 
bea«  N.  20°  E.  (N.  44°  E,  mag.),  and  then  the  bar  will  have  been  passed. 
After  which  run  in  and  bring  the  points  in  line,  inuniiig  for  them  until 
the  vessel  is  judged  to  be  in  the  position  above  mentioned,  or  until  the 
east  extremity  of  the  high  clay  and  wooded  banks  on  the  west  side  of 
the  river,  where  it  turns  inland,  and  which  can  bo  seen  ove?'  the  sandy 
beach,  bears  N.  9°  E.  (N.  a3°  E.  mag.).  The  depth  will  be  G  or  7  ftithoms 
at  low  water;  toward  the  shore  3J  fathoms  at  the  distance  of  100  yards; 
then  3  fathoms  for  nearly  400  yards  farther  in ;  and  thence  shoal  to  the 
beach,  about  ^  na'le  from  the  vessel.  To  seaward  the  water  deepens 
rapidly  to  30  fathoms  at  ^  mile, 

St  Nicholas  Harbor  lies  3  miles  northeastward  from  Cape  St. 
Nicholas,  which  is  a  high  bare  point  of  granite,  bearing  S.  79°  W. 
(N.  77°  W.  mag.),  17  miles  from  Point  de  Monts.  This  harbor  is  a  nar- 
row inlet,  between  granitic  hills  from  500  to  700  feet  in  height,  extend- 
ing IJ  miles  WNW.,  and  is  so  secure  that  a  vessel  might  be  laid  on 
shore  and  repaired  as  if  she  were  in  a  dock ;  on  the  S\V.  side  a  vessel 
may  lay  alongside  of  the  rocks  as  alongside  a  wharf.  There  is  as  much 
as  9^  fathoms  at  low  water  in  the  deepest  part  of  the  harbor,  and  the 
bottom  is  of  mud. 

The  breadth  of  the  harbor  within,  nowhere  exceeds  380  yards,  and  at 
the  entrance  is  only  150  yards.  The  shoals  on  the  east  side  of  the 
entrance  dry  out  so  far  as  to  leave  a  channel  between  them  and  Cross 
Point  only  CO  yards  wide,  and  with  a  depth  of  5  feet  at  low  water  spring 
tides. 

The  depth  that  can  be  carried  in  at  high  water  is  from  12  to  17  feet, 
according  as  it  may  be  neap  or  spring  tides.  The  bottom  in  the  entrance 
is  of  sand  with  some  few  large  stones  upon  it,  which  can  be  seen  and 
avoided  if  the  tide  be  not  high  enough  to  pass  over  them.  The 
entrance  is  in  the  center  of  a  small  bay,  f  mile  wide  and  rather  more 
than  ^  mile  deep  to  the  reeky  point  on  the  west  side  of  the  entrance  to 
the  harbor,  which  will  be  readily  seen  projecting  out  into  the  bay,  and 
is  named  Cross  Point,  ftom  a  small  wooden  cross  upon  it.  An  exten- 
sive shoal  of  sand  and  bowlders,  which  dry  at  half  tide,  extends  from 
the  east  point  of  the  bay  nearly  700  yards  to  the  SW.  and  continues 
northward  at  the  entrance  of  the  harbor.  This  shoal  can  always  be 
seen,  is  quite  bold,  and  completely  shuts  out  the  sea  from  the  harbor 
in  southerly  and  easterly  winds.  The  shoals  on  the  west  side  extend 
across  a  small  bay  on  the  SW.  side  of  Cross  Point  and  continue  off 
shore  for  200  yards. 

The  Anchorage  between  these  shoals,  in  the  bay  off  the  harbor's 
mouth,  is  only  600  yards  wide,  and  consequently  too  small  to  be  con- 
sidered a  roadstead  for  large  vessels,  but  the  ground  is  good  and  the 
depth  convenient  for  anchoring  preparatory  to  warping  into  the  harbor. 

Water. — There  are  several  small  streams  on  the  eastern  side  of  St. 


is 


294 


ST.  LAWRENCE   RIVER — NORTH   SHORE. 


1  '; 

\      'I! 


Nicholas  Harbor  where  water  can  be  obtaitiecl;  and  it  can  also  be  had 
at  hi«h  water  from  the  two  small  rivers  at  the  head  of  the  inlet, 

Tides.-It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  St.  Nicholas  Harbof,  at 
Ih.  55m.;  springs  rise  12  feet,  neaps  7  feet. 

Caution.— Southeast  winds  blow  right  into  St.  Nicholas  Harbor,  and 
are  consequently  the  most  favorable  for  running  in;  but  with  a  strong 
wind  m  that  direction,  and  at  high  water,  when  the  shoals  are  covered, 
there  is  generally  some  sea  outside  the  narrow  entrance.  A  SW.  wind 
is  the  safest  for  running  in,  for  the  entrance  and  bay  outside  are  then 
quite  smooth;  but  this  wind  will  seldom  take  a  vessel  completely  in  •  it 
will  usually  only  enable  her  to  shoot  so  far  within  Cross  Point  that  a  line 
may  be  sent  ashore,  or  a  kedge  ahead,  for  the  purpose  of  warping  in  the 
remainder  of  the  way,  which  may  be  quickly  done  if  due  preparation 
has  been  made  beforehand. 

The  entrance  should  be  attempted  in  the  last  quarter  flood;  then  if 
the  vessel  touches  the  ground  she  will  receive  no  damage,  and  there 
will  be  time  for  her  to  warp  in  before  the  tide  begins  to  fall. 

Directions.— A  vessel  wishing  to  enter  St.  Nicholas  Harbor,  and 
being  ofl-  the  mouth  of  the  bay,  should  bring  the  end  of  Cross  Point  to 
bear  N.  3°  w..(N.  21°  E.  mag.),  then  steer  so  nearly  for  it  as  to  leave  it 
not  more  than  50  yards  nor  less  than  30  yards  on  the  port  hand.  If  the 
wind  will  allow,  continue  to  run  in  at  the  same  distance  from  the  shore 
on  the  west  side  until  the  water  deepens. 

The  shoal  water  commences  at  Cross  Point  and  continues  for  400 
yards,  and  the  channel  is  rendered  narrow  by  shoals  off  the  eastern 
side  for  an  equal  distance  ftirther  up  the  harbor.  In  order  to  have  as 
much  room  as  possible,  a  vessel  should  anchor  farther  in  than  the  three 
large  rocks  which  will  be  seen  on  the  northeastern  side  of  the  harbor 
To  run  out  again,  wait  for  a  NW.  wind,  or  take  atlvantage  of  the  land 
wind  m  the  early  part  of  the  morning,  which  often  occurs  in  fine  weather 
when  westerly  winds  prevail,  or,  lastly,  warp  out  in  a  light  breeze  or 
calm  to  the  entrance  of  the  bay  outside,  and  to  a  position  from  which 
sail  can  be  made. 

St  Pancras  Cove,  9  miles  from  Cape  St.  Nicholas,  being  only  about 
320  yards  wide,  between  steep  rocks,  and  open  to  the  southward,  with 
very  deep  water,  is  of  no  use  to  vessels.  The  depth  is  32  fathoms  in  its 
entrance,  shoaling  gradually  to  17  fathoms  within  J  mile  of  its  head 
The  sea  is  never  heavy  in  it,  and  a  vessel  might  run  in  there  in  time  of 
need.    It  affords  shelter  to  boats. 

English  Bay,  between  StParicras  Point  and  St.  Giles  Point,  affords 
no  good  anchorage,  in  consequence  of  tlie  great  depth  of  water;  a  heavy 
sea  rolls  into  it  in  easterly  winds,  and  its  shores  are  high  and  rocky 
A  vessel  might  anchor  close  to  the  shore  on  its  west  side,  in  IG  or  17 
fathoms  at  low  water,  and  be  well  sheltered  from  all  but  easterly  winds- 
but  she  would  be  in  great  danger  if  a  strong  wind  from  that  quarter 
came  m,  since  there  would  be  no  possibility  of  weathering  the  eastern 
side  of  Manicouagan  Shoal  during  the  flood  tide. 


k.: 


!  * 


MANICOUAGAN   RIVER. 


295 


1  also  be  had 

t  inlet. 

8  Harbof,  at 

Harbor,  and 
nth  a  strong 
are  covered, 
A  SW.  wind 
lide  are  then 
iletelj'in;  it 
it  that  a  line 
irping  in  the 
preparation 

ood ;  then  if 
e,  and  there 
1. 

larbor,  and 
OSS  Point  to 
s  to  leave  it 
md.  If  the 
in  the  shore 

ues  for  400 
the  eastern 
■  to  have  as 
m  the  three 
the  harbor, 
of  the  land 
iue  weather 
it  breeze  or 
from  which 

only  about 
ward,  with 
bonis  in  its 
)f  its  head. 
3  in  time  of 

iut,  .affords 
r;  a  heavy 
and  rocky, 
in  IG  or  17 
srly  winds; 
lat  quarter 
he  eastern 


Manicouagan  River. — St.  CWles  I'oint,  the  northern  eutrauce  point 
to  Manicouagan  Kivcr,  is  high  and  rocky,  like  the  coas^t  to  the  eastward ; 
whi^p  Manicouagan  Point  is  low  and  thickly  wooded,  with  a  broad  sandy 
beach,  like  the  rest  of  the  coast  westward  to  Outarde  Bay.  This  com- 
plete change  in  the  character  of  the  coast  i)oints  out  to  a  vessel  her 
approach  toward  the  dangerous  Manicouagan  Shoal. 

Manicouagan  liiver  flows  out  through  narrow  channels,  between 
shoals  that  dry  at  low  water,  in  Manicouagan  Bay,  and  over  a  bar 
which  extends  from  St.  Giles  Point  to  the  NE.  end  of  Manicouagan 
Shoal.  Six  miles  west  from  St.  Giles  Point  the  shallow  channels 
between  the  shoals  unite  in  the  inner  entrance  of  the  river,  which  is 
there  narrow  and  4  fathoms  deep.  The  falls,  where  the  river  discharges 
a  great  body  of  water  down  a  narrow  and  sloping  channel  between 
steep  granite  rocks,  are  3  miles  farther  up  in  a  NW.  direction,  and  a 
boat  may  approach  close  to  them. 

Anchorage. — The  principal  channel  is  on  the  north  side  of  the 
entrance,  and  Manicouagan  Hole  is  a  deep  place  in  it,  1$  miles  long, 
ftom  i  to  4  mile  wide,  and  with  a  depth  from  3  to  5  fathoms  at  low 
water,  and  muddy  bottom.  This  large  hole  is  close  to  St.  Gileo  I'oint, 
and  extends  1^  miles  within  it.  Although  this  place  appears  completely 
open  to  easterly  winds,  no  swell  of  consequence  rolls  into  it,  and  a 
vessel  well  moored  on  its  north  side  within  St.  Giles  Point  would  prob 
ably  be  in  safety.  But  to  get  in  there  it  is  necessary  to  pa«s  over  the 
bar  which  extends  2  miles  eastward  from  St.  Giles  Point.  It  has  7  feet 
over  it  at  low,  and  from  14  to  19  feet  at  high  water,  according  as  it  may 
be  neap  or  spring  tides.  The  outside  of  the  bar  is  extrenrely  bold, 
there  being  30  fathoms,  sandy  bottom,  close  to  it,  and  50  fathoms,  mud 
bottom,  at  the  distance  of  ore  mile.  The  bar  then  sweeps  round  till  it 
joins  Manicouagan  Shoal,  which  is  dry  at  low  water  for  nearly  5  miles, 
NE.  by  E.  from  the  northern  end  of  Manicouagan  Peninsula. 

This  is  altogether  too  wild  and  dangerous  a  place  to  be  of  general 
use  to  vessels;  but  as,  nevertheless,  it  might  prove  of  use  in  time  of 
need,  the  following  brief  directions  are  given  for  entering  it. 

Directions.— With  St.  Giles  Point  bearing  S.  65°  W.  (S.  78°  W. 
mag.)  and  St.  Pancras  Point  bearing  N.  23°  W.  (north  mag.),  steer 
directly  for  St.  Giles  Point,  and  when  the  head  of  English  Bay  bears 
N.  23°  W.  (north  mag.)  the  vessel  will  be  close  to  the  bar.  Continue  to 
run  over  the  bar  on  the  same  course,  S.  55°  W.  (S.  78°  W.  mag.),  until 
the  points  on  the  west  side  of  English  Bay  bear  N.  7°  W.  (N.  10°  E. 
mag.).  She  will  then  be  within  one  mile  of  St.  Giles  Point,  and  must 
keep  away  a  couple  of  points  to  the  southward  along  the  southern  edge 
of  the  shoal,  which  dries  at  low  water  off  that  point,  until  the  points  on 
the  north  side  of  Manicouagan  Bay  are  open  out  south  of  St.  Giles 
Point;  then  haul  up  again  so  as  to  pass  that  point  at  200  yards,  and 
anchor  ^  mile  within  it,  in  3  or  4  fathoms  at  low  water. 

Tiaes. — The  ebb  runs  out  over  Manicouagan  Bar  to  the  eastward  at 


!    . 


-'■ 


i 


i  I 

"I 


296 


ST.  LAWRENCE   RIVER — NORTH   SHORE. 


the  rate  of  about  1^  knots,  and  the  flood  is  nearly  as  strong.  It  is 
high  water,  full  and  change,  at  2h.  15m.;  springs  rise  12  feet  and 
neaps  7  feet. 

Signals. — There  is  a  telegraph  and  signal  station  on  Mauicouagan 
Point. 

Manicouagan  Shoal  is  of  sand,  with  many  large  bowlders  scattered 
about  its  eastern  and  southern  parts,  and  probably  deposited  there  by 
the  ice.  The  easternmost  point  of  this  dangerous  and  extensive  shoal 
is  2J  miles  N.  88°  E.  (S.  69°  E.  mag.)  from  St.  Giles  Point,  and  5^  miles 
N.  55°  E.  (N.  78°  E.  mag.)  from  the  NB.  end  of  Mauiiouagau  Peninsula. 

The  bearing  of  S.  9°  W.  (S.  32°  W.  mag.)  from  St.Pancras  Cove 
passes  along  the  eastern  side  of  the  shoal,  which  is  so  bold  that  there 
are  60  fathoms  of  water  at  a  little  more  than  1^  miles,  and  40  fathoms 
at  half  that  distance  from  the  breakers.  On  this  side  the  shoal  dries 
nearly  out  to  its  edge  in  low  tides.  The  south  point  of  the  shoal 
extends  2J  miles  southward  of  Manicouagan  Point,  and  here  only  is 
there  any  suflBcient  warning  by  the  deep-sea  lead.  With  Manicouagan 
Point  on  any  bearing  from  N.  23°  W.  (north  mag.)  to  N.  .'iTo  W.  (N.  34° 
W.  mag.),  CO  fathoms  over  a  bottom  of  very  fine  sand  will  be  found  at  3} 
miles  from  the  3-fathom  line,  to  which  the  water  shoals  gradually,  till 
close  to  it,  where  there  is  17  fathoms.  The  shoal  dries  out  at  low  tides 
in  tliis  part,  and  also  farther  westward,  from  one  to  1^  miles  from  the 
beach. 

The  shoal  continues  from  its  south  point  16  miles  westward,  the  out- 
line of  its  edge  corresponding  to  the  shape  of  the  sandy  shore  as  far 
as  Outarfle  Point,  off  which  it  extends  l^  miles  southward,  and,  filling 
up  all  the  eastern  part  of  Outarde  Bay,  stretches  out  its  western  point 
fully  3^  miles  SW.  from  Outarde  Point. 

Tidal  Streams.— There  is  often  a  heavy  sea,  particularly  in  a  weather 
tide,  off  Manicouagan  Shoal.  The  tidal  streams  are  tolerably  regular, 
and  not  very  strong  along  the  shoal;  the  rate  of  either  stream  does  not 
exceed  2  knots  at  any  time,  and  is  usually  much  less.  But  great  rip- 
pliugs  are  met  with  occasionally,  both  near  the  shoals  and  in  the  ofling, 
where  they  are  caused,  as  in  other  parts  of  the  estuary,  by  the  unequal 
velocities  or  the  opposing  directions  of  the  streams,  as  will  be  readily 
imagined  when  it  is  remembered  that  the  current  is  always  down  on 
the  south  side,  slack  in  the  middle,  and  up  during  the  flood  on  the  north 
side  of  the  estuary.  These  ripplings  are  very  common  off  the  eastern 
and  southern  parts  of  Manicouagan  Shoal,  where  they  were  observed 
to  movie  much  faster  than  the  streams  of  the  tides,  'f '.le .  often  give  to 
the  tides  the  appearance  of  a  rapidity  which  does  not  exist. 

Outarde  Point  is  11  miles  westward  of  the  south  extremity  of  Mani- 
couagan Point,  and  the  shore  between  them  is  of  low  sandy  cliffs,  with 
a  sandy  beach. 

Outarde  River  empties  northward  of  Outarde  Point.  This  river 
can  be  ascended  by  boats  to  the  falls,  over  granite  rocks,  which  are  7 


trong.    It  is 
12  feet  aud 

Vlauicouagan 

ers  scattered 
ted  there  by 
tensive  shoal 
aud  5-^  miles 
tu  Peninsula, 
ancras  Cove 
Id  that  there 

I  40  fathoms 
B  shoal  dries 
)f  the  shoal 

here  only  is 
laiiicouagan 
oW.  (N.340 
B  found  at  3.} 
radually,  till 

at  low  tides 
iles  from  the 

ard,  the  out- 
shore  as  far 
I,  and,  filling 
'esteru  point 

in  a  weather 
ibly  regular, 
)aui  does  not 
It  great  rip- 
in  the  ofliug, 
the  unequal 

II  be  readily 
ays  down  on 
on  the  north 
'  the  eastern 
ire  observed 
>ften  give  to 

k 
J* 

iityof  Mani- 
y  cliflfs,  with 

This  river 
which  are  7 


I 

i 


OUTARDE    RIVER — BERSIMI8   RIVER. 


297 


mill's  ^K.  by  X.  from  the  point.  Those  falls  sire  only  1  fj  miles  from  Mani- 
i'onagun  Kiver.  The  two  rivers,  therefore,  form  the  low  sandy  country 
between  Outarde  and  IManicoaagan  Points  into  a  great  peninsula. 

The  entrance  to  Outarde  Kiver  is  by  several  intricate  aud  narrow 
ciiannels  through  the  western  part  of  Manicouagan  Shoal,  and  as  there 
is  only  2  or  3  feet  of  water  through  these  chiinnels  at  low  tide,  for  4. 
or  5  miles,  the  place  is  useless  to  vessels  and  therefore  requires  no 
further  description. 

The  water  of  this  river  holds  a  white  earth  suspended,  nnd  frequently 
covers  the  whole  surface  of  Outarde  liay,  floating  on  the  heavier  sea 
water  beneath,  and  giving  the  whole  bay  tlie  appearance  of  being  shoal. 
A  vessel  sailing  through  this  superstratum  of  fresh  water  displaces  it, 
and  leaves  a  blue  streak  in  her  wake. 

Outarde  Bay,  between  Outarde  and  Bersimis  Points,  has  three  small 
rocky  islands  in  it,  which  appear  as  two  from  seaward,  and  serve  to 
distinguish  the  bay  to  strangers;  they  are  far  within  the  edge  of  the 
shoals,  which  extend  quite  round  the  bay. 

Anchorage.— Good  anchorage  will  be  found  on  the  west  side  of 
Outarde  Bay  in  14  fathoms  at  low  water,  over  muddy  bottom,  with  Ber- 
simis Point  bearing  S.  9°  W.  (S.  32°  W.  mag.),  3J  miles.  Manicouagan 
Point  will  then  be  open  southward  of  Outarde  Point,  the  south  side  of 
which  will  bear  N.  61°  E.  (N.  84°  E.  mag.),  and  the  vessel  will  be  nearly 
J  mile  from  the  3-fathom  edge  of  the  shoal  on  the  west  side  of  the  bay; 
small  vessels  may  lie  closer,  in  7  fathoms. 

Directions. — In  standing  in  for  this  anchorage  with  a  westerly  wind 
beware  of  the  bar  of  Bersimis  Kiver,  which  is  extremely  steep.  If  the 
first  rocky  point  can  be  made  out  to  the  northward  of  the  river,  and 
which  bears  from  its  entrance  north  (N.  23°  E.  mag.)  4^  miles,  take  care 
that  it  does  not  bear  to  the  eastward  of  N.  25°  W.  (N.  2°  W.  mag.), 
and  the  vessel  will  clear  the  bar.  When  it  is  passed  she  may  haul  in 
to  the  northward  into  soundings,  going  no  nearer  than  10  fathoms. 
The  anchorage,  which  is  not  generally  known,  is  excellent  in  westerly 
gales,  and  may  occasionally  be  very  useful  to  vessels  bound  up  the  St. 
Lawrence.  The  tides  are  not  so  strong  as  has  been  supposed,  the  ebb 
seldom  exceeding  the  rate  of  2  knots,  and  the  flood  being  much  weaker. 
The  direction  of  these  streams  is  reversed  by  the  effect  of  Outarde 
River. 

Bersimis  River  enters  the  sea  northward  of  the  south  extremity  of 
Bersimis  Point.  The  wide  mouth  of  the  river  is  closed  by  sands  dry  at 
low  water,  with  the  exception  of  a  very  narrow  channel.  1  he  river 
within,  for  the  first  3  miles,  is  wide  and  full  of  sand  shoals. 

Lights.— Two  leading  lights  are  exhibited  from  masts  erected  on  the 
northern  side  of  the  entrance  to  Bersimis  Kiver.  Both  are  fixed  white 
lights,  visible  through  a  small  arc  on  each  side  of  their  line  of  direction, 
and  should  be  visible  5  miles.  Tiie  outer  light  is  elevated  30  feet  and 
the  inner  40  leet,  respectively.    The  masts  are  painted  white,  and  each 


298 


ST.  LAWRENCE    RIVER — NORTH    SHORE. 


is  surmounted  by  a  diamond.  The  outor  mast  is  20  feet  and  the  inner 
30  feet  high,  and  when  in  line  bear  N.  05°  W.  (N.  43°  W.  mag.)  trom 
seaward,  and  lead  in  4  feet  at  low  water  over  the  bar. 

The  Bar  is  of  sand,  which  dries  in  parts  at  low  water,  and  shifts 
frequently,  being  conii)letely  exposed  to  southerly  and  easterly  gales; 
it  extends  nearly  1 J  miles  eastward  of  the  south  entrance  point.  Direc- 
tions for  entering  the  river  are  therefore  useless;  but  it  may  bo  as  well 
to  remark  that  within  the  bar  the  channel  is  always  close  to  the  south 
entrance  point,  and  keeps  on  that  side  through  the  wide  part  within, 
with  a  depth  of  9  feet  at  low  water. 

Two  can  buoys  and  one  spar  buoy,  all  painted  black,  for  the  conven- 
ience of  vessels  to  be  laden  at  this  river  are  placed  at  its  mouth  by  the 
owners  of  the  sawmill  at  Bersimis  Point.  They  have  no  flxetl  position 
but  are  moved  as  necessary  to  mark  the  channel. 

Vessels  anchor  in  Outarde  Bay  to  load,  the  anchorage  being  marked 
by  a  can  buoy.  Small  vessels  are  taken  into  Bersimis  River  by  local 
pilots  to  load  at  the  mill  wharves. 

The  river  discbarges  a  great  volume  of  water,  especially  in  the  spring 
of  the  year,  and  the  water  2  miles  within  its  entrance  is  fresh  enough 
for  drinking,  when  the  tide  is  oat.  The  river  is  navigable  to  the  falls, 
which  are  30  or  40  feet  high,  and  over  granite  rocks.  These  falls  are 
nearly  40  miles  distant  by  following  the  windings  of  the  river.  The 
banks  of  the  river  are  high  and  precipitous,  being  either  of  granite  or 
clift's  of  sand  and  gravel  over  clay.  There  is  good  timber  to  be  met 
with  occasionally.  The  breadth  of  the  river  varies  from  200  to  600 
yards,  and  its  depth  is  usually  from  2  to  5  fathoms;  there  is  a  place  in 
which  the  depth  amounts  to  12  fathoms;  but  a  depth  of  2  fathoms  is  as 
much  as  could  be  carried  up  the  foot  of  the  falls. 

The  stream  of  the  flood  tide  is  felt  10  miles  up  the  river;  and  6  miles 
up,  the  channel  is  contracted  by  shoals  of  sand  and  bowlders  to  the 
breadth  of  100  yards  for  the  distance  of  one  mile.  Through  this  nar- 
row part  the  ebb  runs  4  knots ;  above  it  the  rate  of  the  stream  is  from 
one  to  2^  knots.  Boats  could  row  up  this  river  to  the  foot  of  the  falls 
and  a  steamer  could  ascend  it  with  ease,  but  the  winds  are  generally 
too  light  and  battling  between  its  high  banks  for  a  sailing  vessel. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Bersimis  River  at  2h. ; 
springs  rise  12  feet,  neaps  7  feet. 

Bersimis  Point  is  low,  of  sand,  wooded  with  spruce  trees,  and  diffi- 
cult to  be  seen  at  night.  On  its  east  side  the  low  south  point  of  the 
river  extends  2  miles  from  the  trees  and  the  bar  1:1:  miles  farther;  and 
to  the  southward  the  sand  shoal  extends  ^  mile  from  the  sandy  beach, 
yet  it  is  so  bold  that  the  lead  affords  no  warning,  there  being  60  fathoms 
muddy  bottom  at  one  mile  from  the  edge  of  the  shoal.  On  the  east 
and  SW.  sides  of  the  point  the  shoals  are  equally  steep  so  that  this 
point  is  very  dangerous,  especially  to  vessels  beating  at  night  or  in 
foggy  weather.  There  is  a  tug  at  Bersimis  Point  for  the  use  of  vessels 
to  be  laden  there. 


,nd  the  inner 
V.  mag.)  Irom 

er,  and  shifts 
asterly  gales ; 
point.  Direc- 
lay  bo  as  well 
3  to  the  south 
9  part  within, 

r  the  conven- 
mouth  by  the 
flxeil  position 

being  marked 
iiver  by  local 

r  in  the  spring 
fresh  enough 
le  to  the  falls, 
rhese  falls  are 
le  river.  The 
•  of  granite  or 
jber  to  be  met 
»m  2U0  to  600 
e  is  a  place  in 
]  fathoms  is  as 

r;  and  6  miles 
iwlders  to  the 
sugh  this  nar- 
stream  is  from 
ot  of  the  falls 
are  generally 
g  vessel. 
I  Biver  at  2h. ; 

rees,  and  diffl- 
\i  point  of  the 
3  farther;  and 
I  sandy  beach, 
ing  60  fathoms 

On  the  east 
[)  so  that  this 
it  night  or  in 

use  of  vessels 


BF.R8IMI8   POINT — LAVAL   HAY. 


299 


Coast. — Mille  Yairhes  Point  lies  8W.  2i>  miles  from  the  south  extrt>m- 
ity  of  Bersiniis  Point.  In  all  this  distance,  if  the  extreme  points  be 
excepted,  vessels  will  find  by  reference  to  the  chart  that  the  sound- 
ings oft'  the  shore  attord  some  warning,  although  there  are  parts  wliore 
great  caution  is  necessary. 

Tides. — The  tides  are  regular,  but  the  flood  stream  is  rather  stronger 
than  the  ebb  within  6  miles  from  the  shore,  where  the  rate  of  either 
seldom  exceeds  1^  knots,  and  is  often  much  less. 

Jeremy  Island. — From  Hersimis  Point  a  low  and  sandy  shore  con- 
tinues 6J  miles  westward  to  Jeremy  Island,  which  is  very  small,  rocky, 
and  close  to  the  coast.  There  is  a  trading  post  of  the  Hudson  Bay 
Company  on  the  main,  the  buildings  of  which  can  usually  be  seen;  but 
if  not,  its  position  will  always  be  known  by  some  patches  of  white 
sand  and  clay  chffs,  which  are  close  eastward  of  the  island.  Vessels 
may  stand  in  by  the  lead,  and  anchor  oft'  this  pla(;e;  but  it  is  a  bad 
anchorage,  and  the  shoal  water  extends  a  mile  out  from  the  shore. 

Cape  Colombier. — From  Jeremy  Island  a  rocky  and  broken  shore 
extends  8W.  5  miles  to  Cape  Colombier,  which  is  a  rocky  peninsula, 
with  a  small  islet  on  its  west  side. 

'  Gulnare  Shoal  is  a  narrow  ridge  of  granite  rock,  nearly  2  miles 
long,  parallel  to  the  shore,  and  having  from  2  to  3  fathoms  over  it  at 
low  water.  The  inner  or  north  side  of  Laval  Island  nearly  in  line  with 
Orient  Point,  the  east  point  of  Laval  Bay,  bearing  S.  72°  W.  (N.  86° 
W.  mag.)  leads  400  yards  southward  of  this  shoal  in  20  fathoms  water. 
It  is  very  dangerous,  there  being  23  fathoms  close  to  the  8W.  end  and 
also  along  its  southern  side.  There  are  4  or  5  fathoms  between  it  and 
the  shore. 

Wild  Fowl  Reef,  4  miles  SW.  from  Cape  Colombier  is  a  large  bed 
of  rocks,  extending  f  mile  from  tike  shore  between  Plougeur  Bay  and 
Laval  Bay.    There  are  9  fathoms  water  at  ij  mile  outside  this  reef. 

Plongeur  Bay,  between  Wild  Fowl  Reef  and  Cape  Colombier,  may 
be  known  by  a  round  and  rocky  peninsula  on  its  west  sidei  The  inner 
part  of  this  bay  is  full  of  rocks  dry  at  low  water,  and  the  whole  bay  is 
shoal  out  to  the  line  joining  Wild  Fowl  Reef  and  Cape  Colombier. 

Caution. — Vessels  should  be  careful  in  standing  toward  the  part  of 
this  coast  from  Wild  Fowl  Reef  to  Gulnare  Shoal  inclusive;  the  depth 
of  30  fathoms  is  quite  clear  enough,  as  will  be  seen  by  the  soundings 
on  the  chart.  But  southwestward  of  the  reef,  until  within  2  miles  of 
Portneuf,  they  may  stand  in  to  6  fathoms  at  low  water  with  safety. 

Laval  Bay,  4  miles  westward  of  Wild  Fowl  Reef,  will  be  known  by 
the  rocky  island  in  its  mouth,  and  by  the  clay  cliffs  which  commence  lA 
miles  south  of  it,  and  continue  to  within  the  same  distance  of  Portneuf. 

This  bay  within  the  island  is  all  dry  at  low  water.  Vessels  may  safely 
stand  in  toward  it,  the  water  shoaling  gradually  from  10  fathoms,  which 
is  2^  miles  from  the  shore.  There  is  good  anchorage  in  6  or  7  fathoms, 
over  clay  bottom,  off'  the  clay  cliff's  above  mentioned. 


!| 


vH*" 


! 


Hi 


1  *; 


Si 


'1^ 


300 


BT.  LAWRENCE    RIVER — NORTH   SHORE. 


Portneuf  is  8^  miles  soutVi  of  Laval  Bay.  At  this  i»oint  there  Is  an 
estHbllHliiiient  belonging  to  tlie  Hiulgou  Hay  Company.  It  stands  upon 
a  sti'cp  santly  bank,  is  4  miles  northward  of  Mille  Vaclies  Point,  and 
thert'  are  several  buildingn,  which  can  readily  be  setiu  by  a  vessel  oft'  the 
coast. 

A  low  and  narrow  sandy  peninsula,  with  a  clump  of  pine  or  spruce 
trees  upon  it,  extends  nearly  2  miles  south  from  the  sand  and  clay  cliflfs 
on  the  north  side  of  Portneuf,  the  west  extreme  being  nearly  J  mile 
SE.  from  the  church. 

Light— I'rom  a  pier  at  Portneuf  on  the  west  extreme  of  the  penin- 
sula a  fixed  white  light  is  exhibited,  at  an  elevation  of  40  feet,  which 
should  bo  visible  11  miles.  The  lighthouse  is  a  square  wooden  build- 
ing, .W  feet  high,  and  is  painted  white,  with  two  red  vertical  stripes. 

Signals.— There  is  a  telegraph  and  signal  station  at  this  lighthouse. 

Portneuf  River  is  entered  from  the  southward,  be,  rreen  the  sandy 
peninsula  and  the  post  on  the  mainland,  but  is  so  shftl'«nv  that  a  boat 
can  not  enter  it  at  low  water.  At  the  junction  of  the  iieniusula  with 
the  sand  an<l  clay  cliff's  the  river  turns  abrui)tly  inland;  its  sandy 
channel  is  too  shallow  for  a  boat  at  low  water  below  that  turn,  and 
rapids  commence  at  1^  miles  above  it.  Prom  7  to  12  feet  water  may  be 
carried  in  it  at  high  water  between  the  peninsula  and  the  mainland, 
according  as  it  may  be  neap  or  spring  tides,  and  a  small  vessel  may  lie 
safely  aground  on  the  sand. 

Tides.— It  is  high  water,  full  and  cha  i;,o,  at  Portneuf,  at  2h.  10m.; 
springs  rise  14  feet,  neaps  8A  feet. 

Portneuf  Sands  are  exceedingly  steep  on  every  bearing  southward 
of  BNE.  from  Portneuf,  and  eastward  of  SSE.  from  Mille  Vaches  Point. 
Oflf  Portneuf  they  extend  J  mile  out  from  the  sandy  peninsula.  The 
eastern  patch  of  these  shoals,  widi^S^  fathoms  least  water,  which  is 
dangerous  for  a  vessel  of  heavy  draft,  lies  1^  miles  N.  50^  E.  (N.  78° 
E.  mag.)  from  the  southwestern  end  of  the  sand  and  clay  cliff's  at  the 
entrance  of  Portneuf  River. 

Miilway  between  Portneuf  and  Mille  Vaches  Point  is  the  widest  part 
of  these  sands,  which  there  extend  IJ  miles  from  the  beach.  There  are 
from  20  to  30  fathoms  close  along  their  edge,  and  from  40  to  50  fathoms 
at  the  distance  of  one  mile. 

Mille  Vaches  Point  is  low,  sandy,  and  wooded  with  spruce  trees. 
As  the  dangers  on  either  side  are  so  bold,  and  as  the  course  of  a  vessel 
running  up  the  estuary  must  ever  be  more  or  less  uncertain  in  conse- 
quence of  the  set  of  the  tides  and  currents,  the  pass  between  this  point 
and  Bicquette  Island  is  justly  considered  dangerous  to  a  vessel  run- 
ning up  in  dark  nights  or  foggy  weather. 

Mille  'Vaches  Bay,  on  the  SW.  side  of  Mille  Vaches  Point,  is  very 
large,  with  several  small  rivers,  which  descend  by  falls  or  rapids  down 
the  granitic  shores.  The  princii)al  of  these  rivers  is  Saut  de  Mouton, 
44  miles  WSW.  from  the  point,  which  has  a  fall  of  80  feet,  visible  from 


■"m^WMMaw^WMBBBBaia 


it  there  Ir  an 
t  HtaiuU  upon 
B8  Point,  and 
vessel  oft'  the 

ine  or  spruce 
lud  chiy  cliff's 
nearly  jj  mile 

of  the  penin- 
0  feet,  which 
rooden  build- 
cal  stripes. 
s  li);hthou8e. 
en  the  sandy 
V  that  a  boat 
)uiusnla  with 
d;  its  sandy 
lat  turn,  and 
water  may  be 
he  mainland, 
'essel  .may  lie 

at  2h.  10m.; 

g  southward 
'aches  Point, 
insula.  The 
ter,  which  is 
H'^  E.  (N.  78° 
'  cliff's  at  the 

9  widest  part 
I.    There  are 

0  50  fathoms 

spruce  trees. 
se  of  a  vessel 
Eiin  in  conse- 
en  this  point 

1  vessel  run- 

•oint,  is  very 

rapids  down 

i  de  Monton, 

visible  from 


ESCOUMAINH    RIVER — SAGUKNAY   RIVER. 


TO! 


a  vcHsol  whon  alnrast  of  it.    All  the  intcricn-  of  this  bay  is  occupied  by 
shoals  of  .sand,  iiind,  and  large  bowhlcrs,  which  dry  at  low  water. 

Anchorage.— There  IS  anchorage  in  Mille  Vachcs  Hay  in  M  fathoms, 
sand  and  mud  bottom,  with  the  south  extremity  of  Millc  Vaches  Point 
in  line  with  the  inner  or  north  side  of  the  pine  trees  on  the  peninsula 
of  Portnenf,  bearing  N.  M^  K.  (N.  5(P  K.  nnig.)  li  or  ;J  miles  from  the 
point,  and  jj  mile  from  the  shoals.  The  shelter  is  from  HVV.  by  S., 
round  north,  to  NE.  by  N.  The  ground  is  good,  and  there  is  not  nnich 
tide. 

EBcoumains  Islets  are  two  large  rocks,  which  have  three  snmll 
ones  nearly  one  mile  southward  of  them,  and  are  nearly  12  miles  SVV. 
from  Mille  Vaches  Point.  The  coast  south  westward  from  thes(!  islets 
to  Little  Hergeron  Cove,  a  distance  of  10  miles,  consists  of  granite  rock, 
steep  and  bold,  and  free  from  all  danger,  excepting  a  Hat  which  occupies 
a  bay  on  the  SW.  side  of  Cape  Bondesir,  but  which  does  not  exten«l 
above  \  mile  ontslde  of  a  line  joining  the  points  of  the  bay,  and  is  con- 
secjuently  very  little  in  the  way  of  vessels.  There  are  upward  of  50 
fathoms  water  close  to  the  rocks  along  this  part  of  the  coast. 

Escoumains  River  is  5  miles  southwestward  of  Escoumains  Islets 
and  is  a  considerable  stream. 

A  settlement  with  a  population  of  607  in  1891,  and  having  a  sawmill 
and  a  church,  is  on  the  north  side  of  the  entrance. 

A  small  bank  with  7  fathoms  water  on  it  lies  off"  the  south  entrance 
point,  on  which  vessels  anchor  to  load. 

Tides.— The  tidal  streams  are  regular,  increasing  in  strength  as  the 
comparatively  narrow  pass  on  either  side  of  Red  Islet  is  approached. 
The  flood  is  the  stronger  stream  of  the  two,  the  ebb  being  deflected 
over  toward  the  southern  shore  by  the  stream  out  of  Sagucuay  River. 
The  flood  does  not  extend  above  5  or  6  miles  oft"  the  north  shore  below 
Bergeron  Coves,  and  the  closer  to  that  shore  the  stronger  is  the  stream. 
Its  rate  at  Mille  Vaches  Point,  where  it  does  not  extend  far  off  shore, 
is  from  1|  to  2  knots;  and  off  Bergeron  Coves  from  2  to  3  knots,  in 
spring  tides. 

Great  and  Little  Bergeron  Coves  are  two  small  bays  separated  by 
a  point.  They  are  both  full  of  large  bowlders,  which  dry  at  low  water, 
and  have  small  streams  at  their  heads.  Little  Bergeron  Cove  is  the 
southwestern,  and  is  6  miles  northeastward  of  the  entrance  to  Saguenay 
River. 

SAGUENAY  RIVER. 
(H.  O.  Chart  No.  1112.) 

For  the  first  50  miles  up  from  its  confluence  with  the  St.  Lawrence 
the  Saguenay  is  from  §  mile  to  2  miles  wide,  tilling  up  a  deep  transverse 
valley  through  mountains  of  syenitic  granite  and  gneiss.  These  moun- 
tains rise  everywhere  more  or  less  abruptly  from  the  water,  forming,  in 
some  parts,  precipitous  headlands  more  than  1,000  feet  in  height.    The 


f 


II 
I 

il 

I 


it     .* 


0f 


ii  ■' 


iir--^ 


802 


8T.  LAWRKNCK    UIVER NOUTH    8HOKE. 


granitic  nillsani  in  general  (|uite  barrcrn,  but  the  vailcya  throiigli  which 
the  rapid  tributary  stroanis  dcsjuMid  are  tllh-d  with  a  deep  deposit  of 
sand  and  clay,  and  are  tldeiciy  wooded.  At  lla  lla  Hay  and  at  (3hi- 
coutinu  tiiure  are  (;onHidcrabIe  tracts  of  good  hind,  as  there  are  also 
around  Lake  St.  John.    Tliis  country  is  being  rapitlly  settled. 

Within  the  same  part  of  the  Hagutiiuiy  the  water  is  almost  as  deep 
as  tlie  mountains  are  high.  Itetween  the  shoals  at  the  entrance  of  the 
river  there  is  a  bar  a<!ros8,  on  which,  however,  there  are  from  18  to  20 
fatlioms  water,  but  immediately  within  that  the  depth  incrreases  to 
upward  of  100  fathoms;  and  farther  up  for  many  miles  it  is  fully  145 
fathoms  deep  in  the  center  of  the  channel,  decreasing,'  to  100  fathoms 
on  either  side,  often  within  less  than  as  many  feet  of  the  precipitous 
shores.  It  is  this  enormous  deptli,  itt|  mountainous  shores,  and  its 
impetuous  stream,  that  have  rendered  the  Saguenay  so  celebrated,  and 
that  entitle  it  to  be  classed  among  the  most  rennirkable  features  in  the 
geography  of  (Canada.  The  bed  of  the  Saguenay  for  many  ndles  is  sunk 
more  than  100  fathoms  below  that  of  the  St.  Lawrence  at  their  point  of 
junction.  There  are  anchorages  occasionally,  but  they  are  some  miles 
apart,  and  there  is  none,  of  course,  in  the  great  depths  between  them. 
In  the  case  of  a  vessel  becalmed,  however,  there  would  be  little  or  no 
danger,  since  there  are  no  shoals  in  the  channel,  when  onee  within  the 
entrance,  and  a  boat  ahead  would  serve  to  keep  her  clear  of  the  shore. 
In  some  parts,  perhaps,  but  not  often,  a  line  might  be  made  fast  to 
the  rocks. 

The  Saguenay  is  navigable  for  large  vessels  nearly  to  Boches  Point, 
57  miles  from  the  St.  Lawrence;  and  schooners,  with  the  assistance  of 
the  flood  tide,  can  ascend  to  Chicoutimi,  8  miles  farther.  Just  above 
Roches  Point  the  river  becomes  8ud<lenly  very  shoal,  there  being  only 
7  feet  water  in  its  narrow  an<l  intricate  channels,  and  among  shoals 
composed  of  large  bowlders.  Above  this  shallowest  part,  where  at  low 
water  there  is  a  comi)lete  rapid,  the  depth  varies  from  2  to  8  fathoms, 
but  between  shoals  of  large  stones,  and  the  river  contracts  to  little 
more  than  J  mile  in  width,  retaining  that  breadth  nearly  to  the  rapids, 
6  miles  above  Chicoutimi,  where  the  tide  ends. 

The  Saguenay  discharges  the  water  of  Lake  St.  John,  contributing 
to  the  St.  Lawrence  a  quantity  of  water  only  inferior  to  that  which  is 
supplied  by  the  Ottawa. 

Tides  and  Currents.— It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Tadou- 
sac,  at  the  entrance  of  the  Saguenay,  at  2h.  45m.,  and  the  rise  in  ordi- 
nary springs  is  17  feet,  and  in  neaps  10  feet.  At  Chicoutimi  it  is  high 
water  at  4h.  11m.,  and  the  rise  in  ordinary  spring  and  neap  tides  is  12 
and  8  feet. 

The  flood  tide  is  extremely  weak  and  of  short  duration ;  above  Sfc 
Marguerite  River  it  is  almost  imperceptible,  excepting  a  weak  stream 
which  may  be  found  running  up  close  to  the  shores.  The  water,  how- 
ever, has  often  been  observed  to  be  flowing  up  at  the  depth  of  several 


BAOUENAY    RIVKR. 


303 


;hroiifi^h  which 

eep  deposit  of 

y  1111(1  at  Chi- 

there  are  also 

tied. 

most  »H  deep 

itraiice  of  the 

from  18  to  20 
I  iiicroascs  to 
it  is  fully  145 
)  100  fathoms 
le  pi'ccipitous 
lores,  and  its 
jlel)rated,and 
eatures  in  the 
'  miles  is  sunk 
their  point  of 
re  some  miles 
•etween  them. 
[>e  little  or  no 
lee  within  the 
:  of  the  shore. 

made  fast  to 

Roches  Point, 
I  assistance  of 
Jnst  above 
re  being  only 
imoug  shoals 
■where  at  low 
to  8  fathoms, 
•acts  to  little 
to  the  rapids, 

,  contributing 
that  which  is 

ge,  at  Tadou- 
e  rise  in  ordi- 
bimi  it  is  high 
ap  tides  is  12 

m;  above  Sfc 
weak  stream 
e  water,  how- 
>th  of  several 


fathoms,  while  it  was  stationary  or  ilescending  on  the  surfacp.  The 
tide  tluws  to  the  foot  of  th«  Terres  Kompiies  Itupid,  about  «i  miles  above 
Cliic<>\itimi,  and  about  71  miles  from  the  Ht.  Lawrence.  The  stream  of 
the  t ol)  tide  is  very  strong,  varying  from  .'{  to  .1  knots,  accrording  to  the 
breadth  of  tiie  river.  It  is  strongj-st  in  the  mouth  of  the  river,  where 
it  sometimes  runs  at  the  rate  of  7  knots,  and  sets  strongly  over  Lark 
Islet  8pit  and  the  SVV.  extremity  of  Vaches  Point. 

The  meeting  of  the  spring  ebb  tides  d«)WM  the  Sagucnay  and  the  St. 
Lawrence  causes  breaking  and  whirling  eddies  and  ripplings,  so  strong 
as  to  interfere  with  the  steerage  of  a  vesstl  unless  she  has  a  command- 
ing breeze.  These  st  reams,  opposed  to  a  heavy  easterly  gale,  cause  an 
exceedingly  higli,  cross,  and  breaking  sea.  On  the  flood  tide  at  snch 
tinies  there  is  not  more  sea  there  than  in  other  parts  of  the  river. 

Capt.  ().  Tramblay,  in  a  report  to  the  Oovernment  of  the  Dominion  of 
Canada,  1875,  made  the  following  remarks  on  the  currents  in  Saguenay 
Eiver : 

From  the  entrance  of  Chicoutimi  River  to  Roches  Point  the  current 
is  steady  and  even,  in  some  parts  setting  on  tlie  shoals,  but  without 
any  undercurrent. 

From  Roches  Point  to  St.  Jean  Bay,  36  miles  to  the  eastward,  the 
surface  current  is  not  strong  at  any  time.  In  many  parts  there  is  a 
strong  and  variable  undercurrent,  especially  during  8i)rings,  strong 
with  the  flood,  but  scarcely  perceptible  during  the  ebb.  This  under- 
current, acting  on  vessels  drawing  from  19  to  25  feet,  sometimes  renders 
them  unmanageable  even  when  assisted  by  a  tug. 

At  spring  tides  a  large  body  of  water  passes  over  the  Chicoutimi 
Shoals  (at  a  very  rapid  rate  during  ebb  tidts),  aud  falling  suddenly 
into  deep  water,  seems  to  strike  downward  at  once,  leaving  but  a  slight 
current  on  the  surface. 

The  strong  flood  tides  over  the  bar  at  the  entrance  of  Saguenay 
River  falling  suddenly  into  deep  water  may  also  contribute  to  a  certain 
extent  to  check  the  strength  of  the  surface  current  of  the  river. 

Communication. — There  is  steam  communication  three  times  a  week 
during  the  summer  from  Quebec,  the  vessels  calling  at  Tadousac,  Chi- 
coutimi, Ha  Ha  Bay,  St.  Jean  Bay,  and  again  at  Tadousac  in  the  order 
given. 

Bntranee  of  the  Sagnanay. — This  river  enters  the  St.  Lawrence 
oi)po8ite  Red  Islet  and  Green  Island,  as  see  pages  321, 322,  wherein  are 
described  its  entrance  poiits  (Lark  Point  and  Vaches  Point),  Lark 
Islet,  and  the  reeft  off  them,  together  with  the  leading  marks  and  buoys 
for  clearing  them,  as  far  as  re(juired  for  the  guidance  of  vessels  passing 
up  or  down  the  St.  Lawrence;  also  the  anchorages  of  Moulin  Baude  and 
of  Basque  Road;  these  anchorages  will  be  of  great  use  to  vessels 
frequenting  the  Saguenay. 

Referring  to  the  chart  for  the  shape  of  the  extensive  reefs  on  either 
side,  it  will  be  seen  that  the  entrance  channel  between  Prince  Shoal, 


1 


!•> 


I  ■ 

if 


ji 


304 


ST.  LAWRENCE   RIVER — NORTH    SHORE. 


Bar  Eeef,  and  Lark  Islet  Spit  on  the  one  side,  and  Vacbes  Patch  and 
Eeef  on  the  other,  is  i|  mile  wide,  with  deep  water  and  very  irregular 
soundings.  The  shallowest  part  is  between  Bar  Reef  and  Vaches 
Patch,  where  there  is  as  little  as  11  fathoms.  luimediately  within  it 
the  depth  increases,  and  off  Tadousac  exceeds  80  fathoms.  It  is  '^  mile 
•wide  from  Hot  Point,  the  NW.  point  of  Tadousac  Harbor,  marked  by 
a  beacon,  across  to  Noire  Point.  This  point  has  a  curious  white  mark 
on  the  south  side,  and  there  are  two  lighthouses,  now  disused.  These 
buildings  in  line  lead  close  north  of  Prince  Shoal. 

Buoys. — The  entrance  of  the  Sagueuay  is  buoyed  as  follows :  On  the 
eastern  side  of  the  entrance,  on  Vaches  Patch,  a  red  and  black  baoy 
lies  in  2^  fathoms  on  the  south  side  of  the  patch,  and  on  Prince  Shoal 
a  red  and  black  buoy.  Westward  of  the  entrance  a  red  buoy  on  the 
outer  or  southernmost  extreme  of  Lark  Beet  is  moored  in  ^  fathoms. 

St.  Catherine  Bay  is  on  the  southern  side  of  the  entrance  of  the 
Saguenay,  between  Lark  Islet  and  Noire  Point,  in  which  vessels  may 
anchor,  in  20  or  30  fathoms  of  water,  out  of  the  strength  of  the  tides, 
but  exposed  to  considerable  swell  in  easterly  winds.  On  the  NW.  side 
of  this  bay  there  are  several  large  iron  rings  in  the  steep  granite  shore, 
which  were  probably  used  for  mooring  or  heaving  down  vessels. 

Tadousac  Harbor  is  on  the  northern  side  of  the  entrance  of  the 
Saguenay  and  one  mile  within  Vaches  Point.  It  is  a  bay  between 
Bouge  and  Hot  Points,  witli  a  sandy  beach  at  its  head,  and  rather  more 
than  J  mile  wide  and  ^  mile  deep.  The  anchorage  is  in  from  7  to  18 
fathoms,  clay  bottom.  Vessels  ought  always  to  moor  and  have  a  heavy 
anchor  close  inshore,  for  the  gusts  from  the  NW.  are  at  times  exceed- 
ingly powerful,  and  should  the  anchor  start  there  would  be  little  chance 
of  bringing  up  again  before  the  vessel  had  dragged  her  anchor  down 
hill  into  dfcp  water.  Besides,  although  vessels  are  here  completely 
out  of  the  regular  streams  of  the  tides,  yet  eddies  often  set  into  the 
bay,  causing  a  vessel  to  swing  round  several  times  in  a  tide,  so  that  it 
would  be  almost  impossible  to  keep  a  clear  anchor. 

The  shelter  is  rendered  complete  in  every  direction  by  either  land  or 
reefs,  excepting  SB.,  and  there  Red  Islet,  with  the  south  coast  beyond 
it  at  no  great  distance,  prevents  any  sea  of  consequence  even  to  a  boat 
from  ever  entering  the  harbor. 

Tadousac  is  now  a  thriving  village,  with  two  churches,  an  old  one,  on 
the  site  of  the  oldest  church  in  Canada,  near  the  beach,  and  a  large 
modern  church  with  a  spire  a  short  distance  northeastward.  A  con- 
spicuous hotel,  painted  white,  stands  close  inshore  of  the  jSTW.  extreme 
of  the  beach. 

Tadousac  is  situated  on  a  semicircular  terrace  of  sand  and  clay,  at 
the  head  of  the  bay,  and  backed  by  steep,  high,  and  rugged  hills  dj 
granite.  It  was  formerly  the  principal  of  those  posts  for  trading  with 
the  Indians  which  were  known  by  the  name  of  the  "  King's  Posts,"  and 
were,  in  1829,  leased  to  the  Hudson  Bay  Company. 


'^"*^1 


SAGUENAY   RIVER. 


305 


Bbes  Patch  and 
[  very  irregular 
ef  aud  Vaclies 
lately  within  it 
IS.  It  is  f  mile 
bor,  marked  by 
3U8  white  mark 
iisused.    These 

rollows:  On  the 
md  black  baoy 
•n  Prince  Shoal 
ed  buoy  on  the 
in  4^  fathoms, 
an  trance  of  the 
ch  vessels  may 
th  of  tbe  tides, 
a  the  NW.  side 
)  granite  shore, 
vessels, 
entrance  of  the 
1.  bay  between 
ud  rather  more 
in  from  7  to  IS 
d  have  a  heavy 
t  times  exceed- 
be  little  chance 
it  anchor  down 
ere  completely 
3n  set  into  the 
tide,  so  that  it 

r  either  land  or 

h  coast  beyond 

even  to  a  boat 

,  an  old  one,  on 
h,  and  a  large 
bward.  A  con- 
B  NW.  extreme 

id  and  clay,  at 
rugged  hills  d^ 
►r  trading  with 
g's  Posts,"  and 


In  1887  twelve  vessels  loaded  at  Tadousac.  Supplies  in  small  quan- 
tities may  be  obtained  here. 

L'Anse  k  I'Eau,  the  small  cove  next  west  of  Tadousac,  has  a  wharf 
on  the  north  shore  where  the  steamers  from  Quebec  lie,  and  it  is  the 
seat  of  a  fish  hatchery.  The  telegraph  cable  that  crosses  the  Saguenay 
is  landed  in  this  cove. 

Directions. — The  buoys  placed  at  the  entrance  of  the  Saguenay  will 
be  found  of  great  assistance  to  a  vessel  beating  into  tho  river,  there 
being  no  clearing  mark  for  the  reefs  on  the  SW.  side  of  the  entrance; 
and  if  buoys  were  added  to  Bar  Eeef  and  Lark  Islet  Spit,  vessels  might 
beat  in  and  out  at  all  times  with  safety.  On  the  ^E.  or  Vaches  Point 
side  observe  that  Hot  and  La  Boule  Points  in  line,  bejiring  N".  79°  W. 
(N.  69°  W.  mag.),  pass  over  the  SW.  side  of  Vaches  Point  Keef,  and 
must  be  kept  open  to  clear  it;  La  Boule  Point  being  a  high  and  round- 
backed  hill,  forming  a  steep  headland  4  miles  above  Tadousac,  and 
the  extreme  point  seen  on  the  same  side  of  the  river. 

Winds  from  SW.,  round  south  to  NE.  will  enable  a  vessel  to  enter 
the  Saguenay  on  the  ilood  tide.  The  first,  which  is  the  prevailing 
summer  wind,  will  not  carry  her  far  up,  since  she  will  be  becalmed 
under  the  mountainous  shores;  but  the  NE.  wind,  or  wind  up  the  St. 
Lawrence,  draws  also  up  the  Saguenay,  and  is  the  only  wind  which 
C3".  be  depended  on  for  running  a  vessel  up  to  the  anchorages  above 
Tadousac.  The  NW.  wind  often  blows  down  the  river  in  furious 
squalls,  especially  in  the  fall  of  the  year. 

Being  bound  to  the  Saguenay,  approach  the  entrance  early  on  the 
flood  with  a  breeze  which  can  be  depended  on,  and  plenty  of  daylight 
to  reach  the  anchorage  off  Tadousac.  Remember  that  the  ebb  sets 
like  a  rapid  over  Lark  Islet  and  Vaches  Point  Beefs,  and  that  it  is 
dangerous  to  be  becalmed  just  within  either  of  them,  because  the  water 
is  so  deep  that  it  is  difficult  to  anchor.  If  night  be  coming  on,  or  the 
tide  or  the  wind  be  unfavorable,  anchor  off  Moulin  Baude  or  in  Baacjue 
Eoad,  according  to  circumstances,  and  wait  for  an  opportunity  for  run- 
ning in,  unless  a  vessel  has  a  pilot  suflBciently  skillful  to  beat  her  in 
with  safety. 

Whether  the  entrance  is  approached  from  the  SW.  or  NE.,  in  either 
case  bring  Brandy  Pots  open  east  of  White  Islet,  bearing  S.  14°  W. 
(S.  34°  W.  mag.).  Eun  upon  this  mark  (and  it  will  lead  well  clear  of 
Vaches  Patch,  Prince  Shoal,  and  Lark  Eeefs)  until  La  Boule  Point 
appears  just  open  southwestward  of  Hot  Point,  bearing  N.  77°  W.  (N. 
57°  W.  mag.).  Haul  in  now  for  the  last-named  leading  mark,  keeping 
the  SW.  extreme  of  La  Boule  Point  just  open,  and  it  will  lead  in  clear 
of  all  danger.  As  soon  as  the  vessel  is  as  far  in  as  Rouge  Point  she 
•may  haul  into  the  harbor,  choosing  her  berth  at  pleasure,  but  letting 
go  the  outer  anchor  in  16  fathoms  and  the  inner  one  close  to  the  low- 
water  mark;  or  she  may  lay  it  and  secure  it  within  the  low- water  mark, 
if  that  should  be  preferred  as  the  safer  plan.  The  marks  above  given 
1151 20 


11 


if 


,-^^ 


sm 


ST.  LAWRENCE   RIVER — NORTH    SHORE. 


are  often  difficult  to  distinguish,  but  the  buoys,  supposing  them  to  be 
securely  moored,  have  rendered  them  no  longer  absolutely  necessary, 
since  there  can  be  no  difficulty  with  a  fair  wind  in  running  with  their 
assistance  through  a  channel  f  mile  wide. 

ANCHORAGES  IN  THE  SAOUENAY. 

Barqns  Cove,  rather  more  than  a  mile  above  Tadonsac,  and  on  the 
same  side  of  the  river,  is  400  yards  deep.  A  vessel  or  two  might  be 
moored  in  it. 

St  Etienne  Bay  and  River  are  10^  miles  up  the  Saguenay,  and  on 
its  western  shore.  The  bay  is  a  mile  wide,  and  forms  a  harbor  where  a 
number  of  vessels  may  ride  in  from  10  to  30  fathoms,  clay  bottom,  along 
the  edge  of  the  bank  which  dries  out  J^  mile  from  the  shore. 

St  Lonis  Isle,  10  miles  up  the  river,  forms  an  excellent  anchorage, 
either  under  its  east  end  or  between  it  and  the  south  shore,  the  depth 
of  water  being  from  10  to  30  fathoms,  sand  and  mud  bottom. 

St  Barthelemi  Isle,  a  mile  higher  up,  and  on  the  opposite  side  of 
the  river,  lies  close  to  the  month  of  the  Oacard  River.  A  vessel  or  two 
might  be  secured  there,  the  place  being  small,  and  the  depth  of  water 
from  6  to  20  fathoms. 

St  Jean,  on  the  southern  shore,  and  23  miles  up  the  Saguenay,  is  a 
large  bay  with  a  small  islet  oflf  its  NW.  point.  It  is  If  miles  wide  and 
H  miles  deep.  The  St.  Jean  River  and  several  small  streams  enter  at 
its  head.  Oft  these  streams,  and  along  the  edge  of  the  bank  which  dries 
out  4  mile  from  the  shore,  there  is  good  anchorage  for  many  vessels,  in 
from  8  to  40  fathoms,  mud  bottom.  A  small  village,  with  a  pier  and  a 
church,  stands  on  the  south  shore,  and  tl  ere  is  a  prominent  waterfall 
on  the  west  side  of  this  bay. 

Light— From  a  mast  11  feet  in  height  elected  at  the  extreme  of  the 
pier  in  St.  Jean  Bay  is  exhibited,  at  an  elevation  of  16  feet,  a  fixed  white 
light.    It  is  visible  8  miles. 

^temit^  Cove,  on  the  same  side  as  St.  Jean  Bay,  and  6  miles  higher 
up  the  river,  is  J  mile  wide  and  IJ  miles  deep,  with  a  river  of  the  same 
name  at  its  head.  At  the  head  of  this  cove  vessels  may  lie  securely  in 
from  8  to  30  fathoms,  nmd  bottom,  and  as  securely  landlocked  as  if 
they  were  in  a  small  lake  surrounded  with  mountains. 

Cape  L'Eternit6  is  the  south  entrance  point,  and  Capto  A,  la  Trinity 
the  north  entrance  point  of  Etemite  Cove.  The  latter  resembles  three 
steps  when  seen  from  up  or  down  the  river.  On  the  lowest  is  an  image 
of  the  Virgin,  32  feet  high,  and  about  400  ffeet  above  high  water,  and  on 
the  next  above  is  a  cross  at  an  elevation  of  about  700  feet. 

La  Niche,  a  curious  hole  in  the  cliffs,  lies  on  the  west  shore,  about  2 
miles  NW.  of  Cape  h  la  Trinity. 

Descente  des  Femmes  is  a  cove  700  yards  long,  with  a  depth  of  20 
fathoms  at  its  entrance,  decreasing  to  5  fathoms  nearita  head  Several 
vessels  might  lie  moored  in  it  in  great  security.    It  is  42  miles  up  the 


Is 


SAGUENAY   RIVER. 


307 


ing  tbem  to  be 
tely  necessary, 
ling  with  tlieir 


sac,  and  on  the 
'  two  might  be 

fuenay,  and  on 

iiarbor  where  a 

T  bottom,  along 

ore. 

mt  anchora^'e, 

ore,  the  depth 

tom. 

)posite  side  of 

L  vessel  or  two 

iepth  of  water 

9agaenay,  is  a 
niles  wide  and 
reams  enter  at 
rik  which  dries 
Einy  vessels,  in 
h  a  pier  and  a 
nent  waterfall 

ixtreme  of  the 
;,  a  fixed  white 

6  miles  higlier 
Qr  of  the  same 
lie  secnrely  in 
idlocked  as  if 

)to  s^  la  Trinity 

isembles  three 

9t  is  an  image 

water,  and  on 

t. 

shore,  about  2 

a  depth  of  20 
ead  Several 
!  miles  up  the 


river,  and  on  its  northern  shore.  There  are  houses  round  this  cove,  and 
round  those  on  either  side  of  it. 

The  Saguenay  turns  suddenly  to  the  northward  5  miles  above  this 
cove,  between  Cape  East  and  Cape  West,  but  the  previous  direction  of 
the  river  is  continued  (>  or  7  miles  beyond  the  point  last  named  to  the 
head  of  Ha  Ha  Bay,  55  miles  from  the  entrance  of  the  river. 

Ha  Ha  Bay  is  0  miles  deep  and  from  1^  to  2$  miles  wide,  the  widest 
part  being  at  its  head,  where  four  considerable  streams  fall  into  it. 
The  best  anchorage  is  on  either  side  of  a  small  ifjlet  .joined  to  the  shore 
at  low  water  in  the  SW,  corner  of  the  bay,  and  from  7  to  30  fathoms, 
clay  bottom.  There  is  room  for  any  number  of  vessels,  but  they  are 
rather  exiwsed  in  easterly  winds. 

This  bay  is  now  fairly  well  settled,  and  is  cultivated  from  Fort  Point 
westward  and  northward  to  the  northern  cove  at  the  head.  St.  Alexis, 
a  considerable  village,  containing  a  church  with  a  spire,  and  a  sawmill, 
is  on  the  shores  of  La  Grande  Bale,  the  SW.  arm;  and  St.  Alphonse, 
which  has  also  a  church  with  a  spire,  is  on  the  NW.  arm  of  the  bay. 
There  is  a  wharf  at  St.  Alphonse  to  which  the  steamers  moor. 

In  1891  there  were  1,689  residents  at  St.  Alexis  and  1,476  at  St. 
Alphonse. 

Light. — From  a  mast  28  feet  high  erected  at  the  extreme  of  the 
wharf  at  St.  Al])house,  and  at  an  elevation  of  31  feet,  is  exhibited  a 
fixed  white  light. 

Fetites  Isles,  on  the  northern  shore  of  the  river,  52  miles  from  its 
entrance,  and  4^  miles  above  Cape  East,  are  three  small  rocky  islets 
joined  to  the  shore  at  low  water.  The  bay  on  the  east  side  of  them 
forms  a  small  but  secure  anchorage.  The  depth  of  the  water  is  from 
6  to  17  fathoms,  mud  bottom.  The  Sagueuay,  which  is  here  nearly  2 
miles  wide  and  with  a  depth  of  65  fatuoms,  is  contracted  to  %  mile  by 
a  high  rocky  point  projecting  from  its  northern  shore  at  the  distance 
of  2  miles  westward,  but  expands  again  nearly  to  the  same  breadth  in 
the  next  3  miles,  which  is  the  distance  from  the  high  point  just  men- 
tioned to  Boches  Point.  On  the  north  side  of  the  river,  from  the  high 
point  to  within  one  mile  of  Roches  Point,  there  is  good  anchorage  in 
any  depth  to  20  fathoms. 

Roches  Point  is  57  miles  ftom  the  entrance  of  the  river,  and  here 
the  navigation  ends  for  shipping,  but  continues  for  vessels  of  small 
draft  to  Chicotttimi,  7  miles  farther.  The  river  is  still  1^  miles  wide  at 
Bodies  Point,  but  contracts  rapidly  above  it,  assuming  at  the  same 
time  the  usual  character  of  a  river,  such  as  mud  banks  on  either  side 
dry  at  low  Vater,  shoals  of  large  bowlder  stones,  drift  trees,  etc.  The 
water  also  becomes  fresh  when  the  tide  is  (mt. 

Chicoutimi  is  a  large  village,  with  a  population  of  2,277  in  1891, 
containing  a  large  cathedral  with  a  spire,  a  marine  hospital,  in  front 
of  which  is  a  large  obelisk,  a  convent,  courthouse,  hotel,  and  many 
other  prominent  buildings,  as  well  as  a  wharf.    Both  sides  of  the  river 


\  ■ 


%l 


308 


ST.  LAWRENCE    RIVER — NORTH    SHORE. 


are  cultivated  for  some  distaDce  from  the  viUage,  and  farmhouses  «re 
scattered  among  the  fields. 

About  20  vessels  are  laden  here  annually.  They  lie  off  Moulin  River 
or  below  the  shoals,  as  only  7  feet  water  can  be  carried  to  Chicoutimi 
at  low  water. 

There  are  two  first-class  tugs  of  over  300  tons  and  a  small  one  of  21 
tons  to  tow  vessels  when  necessary. 

Buoys  are  laid  down  to  assist  vessels  in  navigating  from  Roches  Point 
to  Ohicoutimi. 

Lights.-There  are  five  sets  of  leading  lights  to  guide  the  local 
steamers  to  Ohicoutimi,  and  there  is  a  fixed  light  at  the  wharf,  which 
shows  red  down  the  river  and  white  abreast  the  wharf 

Chicoutimi  River  is  on  tbe  south  side  of  the  Saguenay  and  one  mile 

?r7n  f/  T'  ^^'^  "''^^  '^  *^®  ^*''S®«*^  tributary  to  the  Saguenay. 
It  tails  40  or  60  feet,  through  a  narrow,  rocky,  and  rugged  channel, 
only  a  short  distance  within  its  entrance. 

Prom  Lake  St.  John  to  within  6  or  7  miles  of  this  village  the  Sajnie- 
nay  is  said  to  be  so  full  of  heavy  rapids  as  to  be  exceedingly  dangen)U8 
to  canoes,  therefore  the  longer  and  more  circuitous  route  up  the  Ohi 
coutimi,  through  Lake  Kenogam,  and  down  the  Metabetshuan  River  is 
preferred.  At  the  mouth  of  this  last-named  river,  on  the  south  shore 
01  Lake  St.  John,  stands  another  of  the  "King's  Posts,"  leased  by  the 
Hudson  Bay  Company.  It  was  established  first  by  the  Jesuit  mis- 
sionaries in  the  sixteenth  ceiitury,  and  traces  of  their  cultivation  still 
remain. 

Directions.— No  directions  are  necessary  for  ascending  the  Sague- 
nay to  the  anchorages,  since  there  is  not  a  single  rock  or  shoal  in  the 
way  from  Tadousac  to  the  anchorage  below  Roches  Point 


wxessssmmmmmmimmim 


farmhouses  »re 

•ff  Mouliu  River 
i  to  Chicoutimi 


auiall  one  of  21 

tn  Roches  Point 

:nide  the  local 
e  wharf,  which 

y  and  one  miie 

the  Saguenay. 

igged  channel, 

age  the  Sagne- 
igly  dangerous 
te  up  the  Oui 
shuan  River  is 
le  south  shore 
'  leased  by  the 
lie  Jesuit  mis- 
uitivation  still 

tig  the  Sague- 
or  shoal  in  the 

t. 


CHAPTER    XI. 

ST.  LAWRENCE  RIVER— GREEN  ISLAND  AND  RED  ISLET  TO  SOUTH 
TRAVERSE  AND  COUDRES  ISLAND. 

yUEBEO. 

(H.  O.  Chart  No.  1U2.) 

General  Remarks. — The  estuary  of  the  St.  Lawrence  has  been  con- 
sidered to  terminate,  and  the  river  to  commence,  at  Green  Island,  not 
with  '•<ay  pretension  to  geographical  accuracy  of  definition,  but  because 
the  adoption  of  such  a  division,  at  a  pai-t  where  the  navigable  diannel 
becomes  divided,  contracted,  and  difficult,  naturally  and  conveniently 
separates  the  sailing  directions  int-o  parts  corresponding  with  that  dis- 
tinctive change  in  the  nature  of  the  navigation.  The  preceding  chapters 
w^re  intended,  with  the  aid  of  the  charts,  to  enable  the  seaman  to  nav- 
igate his  vessel  as  higli  up  the  St.  Lawrence  as  Green  Island. 

This  chapter  commences  at  what  may  be  considered  the  first  difficult 
pass  ascending  the  St.  Lawrence— the  difficulty  arising  not  only  from 
the  dangerous  reefs  off  Green  Island,  Red  Islet,  and  Saguenay  River, 
but  also  from  the  great  velocity  and  transverse  direction  of  the  tidal 
streams. 

All  light  buoys  in  the  St.  Lawrence  River  are  withdrawn  earlier  in 
the  autumn  and  replaced  later  in  the  spring  than  the  ordinary  wooden 
buoys.  Wooden  buoys  mark  the  positions  of  the  light  buoys  until  the 
end  of  the  season. 

Some  remarks  and  directions  have  already  been  given  respecting  the 
passage  on  either  side  of  Red  Islet  and  its  reef.  Green  Island  Light- 
house and  Reef,  and  the  anchorage  nnder  the  latter  (pp.  216  and  217). 

The  whole  distance  from  the  lighthouse  on  Green  Island  to  the  light- 
vessel  at  South  Traverse  is  54  miles.  For  the  first  IW  miles  of  that 
distance  the  river  is  divided  into  two  channels  (north  and  south)  on 
either  side  of  Red  Islet,  White  Islet,  and  Hare  Island,  with  the  reefs 
and  banks  attached  to  them,  or  bearing  their  names;  all  of  which, 
lying  in  the  same  direction  form  a  narrow  but  not  continued  ridge  of 
graywacke  and  slate  rocks,  nearly  in  the  middle  of  the  river.  In  the 
remainder  of  the  distance,  the  river  is  unobstructed  by  detached  shoals 
from  the  SW.  end  of  Hare  Island  Bank,  to  the  NE.  end  of  Middle 
Ground  of  South  Traverse.  The  shoals  Just  mentioned  were  supposed 
to  be  connected  together  by  English  Bank,  which,  however,  terminates 
off  Murray  Bay,  7  or  8  miles  westward  of  Hare  Island  Bank.    The 

309 


u 


f^ 


I   1 


310 


ST.  LAWRENCE   RIVER. 


islands  above  mentioned,  with  their  reefs,  banks,  and  anchorages,  will 
be  first  described,  and  afterwards  the  mainland,  and  the  channels  on 
either  side  of  them. 

(H.  O.  Chart  No.  1490.) 

Red  Islet,  W.  by  N.  oj  miles  from  the  lighthouse  on  Green  Island, 
is  small,  low,  and  of  shingle  partially  covered  with  grass  and  resting 
on  slate  rock. 

Light — The  light  tower  on  the  center  of  Red  Islet  is  a  circular  gray 
stone  tower  64  feet  high.  It  exhibits,  at  an  elevation  of  68  feet,  a  flash- 
ing white  light  showing  three  flashes,  with  intervals  of  ten  seconds 
between  tbeir  points  of  greatest  brilliancy,  followed  by  an  interval  of 
thirty  seconds,  during  the  greater  part  of  which  the  light  is  totally 
eclipsed,  thus  completing  the  revolution  in  fifty  seconds;  it  should  be 
visible  12  miles. 

Red  Islet  Bank.— Bed  Islet  is  ({uite  l>old  at  its  SW.  end,  but  a 
rocky  bank  or  reef,  nearly  dry  in  some  parts  at  low  water,  extends  2J 
miles  northeastward  and  is  1^  miles  wide.  There  is  good  warning  by 
the  lead  in  approaching  this  bank  from  the  northeastward,  but  vessels 
should  be  cautions  in  approaching  it  from  the  northward,  because  the 
water  is  deep  and  the  ebb  stream  sets  strongly  upon  it  on  that  dide. 
In  fine  summer  weather  vessels  becalmed  or  bound  up,  and  wishing  to 
wait  for  the  tide,  may  safely  anchor  east  and  SE.  of  this  bank  in  10 
fathoms  at  low  water,  where  they  will  have  good  ground  and  find  the 
strength  of  the  ebb  much  broken  by  the  bank.  In  case  of  need,  they 
may  also  anchor  in  the  same  depth  400  yards  from  the  south  side  of 
the  islet,  but  the  ebb  stream  runs  there  at  the  rate  of  6^  knots  an  hour. 

Marks. — The  lighthouse  and  beacons  on  Green  Island  are  all  white, 
and  the  southeastern  beacon,  when  in  line  with  the  lighthouse  bearing 
S.  43°  E.  (S.  23°  E.  mag.),  leads  northeastward  of  Red  Islet  Bank. 
White  Islet,  kept  twice  its  own  breadth  open  northward  of  Hare 
Island,  S.  33°  W.  (S.  53°  W.  mag.),  will  lead  to  the  southeastward;  but 
as  these  marks  are  distant  and  may  not  always  be  plainly  distin- 
guished, the  lead  should  never  be  neglected  nor  the  vessel  taken 
nearer  than  the  depth  of  9  fathoms  at  low  water.  A  red  buoy  marks 
the  SE.  extreme  of  the  bank.  There  are  no  marks  for  leading  north- 
westward of  this  bank,  nor  do  the  soundings  there  afibrd  sufficient 
warning  for  the  safety  of  a  vessel. 

LlghtvesseL — A  lightvessel  is  moored  near  the  NE.  end  of  Red  Islet 
Bank  and  exhibits  2  fixed  white  lights,  one  on  the  foremast,  34  feet 
high,  the  other  on  the  mainmast,  22  feet  high.  The  lights  should  be 
visible  11  miles. 

The  lightvessel  is  painted  red,  with  the  words  Red  Island  lightship 
in  white  on  her  sides,  and  is  moored  in  10  fathoms  in  a  northeast- 
erly direction  from  Red  Islet.  This  vessel  is  t^ithdrawn  annually  on 
November  15. 

Fog  Signal. — During  thick  or  foggy  weather  and  snowstorms  a 


TKI"*!!  liM'ilK.jl.  JlUJ!i>aili|i>i!i|iuiiiiMMapiHHaiiSHi 


MaMM 


mutm 


chorages,  will 
B  channels  on 


jrreeu  Island, 
s  and  resting 

circular  gray 
8  feet,  it  flusb- 
f  ten  seconds 
3,n  interval  of 
ght  is  totally 
;  it  should  be 

V.  end,  but  a 
ir,  extends  2^ 
id  warning  by 
d,  but  vessels 
I,  because  the 
on  that  dide. 
nd  wishing  to 
s  bank  in  10 
I  and  find  the 
of  need,  they 
south  side  of 
:uots  an  hour, 
are  all  white, 
louse  bearing 
I  Islet  Bank, 
rard  of  Hare 
astward;  but 
tiainly  distin- 
vessel  taken 
1  buoy  marks 
eading  north- 
brd  sufBcient 

d  of  Red  Islet 
imast,  34  feet 
its  should  be 

and  lightship 

a  northeast- 

t  annually  on 

inowstorms  a 


WHITE    ISLET — BRANDY    POTS. 


311 


steam  whistle  is  sounded  from  the  lightvessel  ten  seconds  in  every 
minute,  or  with  an  interval  of  fifty  seconds  between  eiioh  blast. 

White  Islet;  lying  nearly  10  miles  S8W.  ^  W.  from  Eed  Islet,  is 
small,  38  feet  high,  and  wooded.  It  presents  the  appearance  of  a  clump 
of  trees  on  Hare  Island  North  Keef.  There  are  other  small  accumula- 
tions of  bowlders  that  never  cover,  but  White  Islet  is  the  only  con- 
spicuous object  on  the  reef. 

White  Islet  Reef  is  composed  of  a  narrow  ridge  of  shite  with 
numerous  bowlders  on  and  skirting  it,  and  extends  3  miles  northeast- 
ward of  White  Islet.  The  flood  stream  sets  very  strongly  on  and  over 
the  NE.  extreme  of  this, reef.  Vessels  in  that  neighborhood  shouhl 
therefore  guard  against  this  dangerous  stream. 

At  night  or  in  foggy  weather  vessels  should  not  approach  this  reef 
nearer  than  a  depth  of  10  fathoms  at  low  water. 

LightvesseL — A  Ughtvessel,  with  two  masts,  is  moored  in  8  fathoms 
water  off  the  NE.  extreme  of  White  Islet  Reef,  and  is  painted  red, 
with  the  words  White  Island  Ueef  in  white  letters  on  the  sides. 

From  each  masthead  is  exhibited  a  fixed  white  light,  that  on  the 
foremast  at  an  elevation  of  24  feet  and  the  one  on  the  mainmnst  at 
27  feet,  respectively.  Both  should  be  visible  10  miles.  Withdrawn 
Novembei'  16  each  year. 

Fog  Signal. — In  thick  or  foggy  weather  and  during  snowstorms  a 
steam  whistle  on  board  the  Ughtvessel  will  be  sounded  as  follows:  A 
blast  of  eight  seconds,  silence  eight  seconds,  a  blast  of  eight  seconds, 
followed  by  silence  for  two  minutes  and  twenty  seconds. 

Hare  Island  is  nearly  joined  to  White  Islet  at  low  water  when  the 
passage  between  is  not  available  even  for  boats.  It  rises  apparently  in 
an  inclined  plane  from  both  ends  to  a  summit  323  feet  high.  There  are 
a  few  houses  on  the  eastern  shore  at  1^  miles  from  the  NE.  extreme, 
and  a  solitary  house  stands  2  miles  farther  SW. 

An  isolated  reef,  2  feet  high,  lies  600  yards  SSE.  of  the  NE.  extreme 
of  Hare  Island,  and  a  small  wooded  islet  is  joined  at  low  water  to  the 
SW.  extreme. 

Beacons. — A  diamond-shaped  and  a  pyramidal  beacon  stand  close 
west  of  the  eastern  houses,  and  at  one  mile  from  the  SW.  extreme  there 
are  two  pyiamidal  and  one  diamond  beacon. 

Brandy  Pots  are  three  islands  joined  together  at  low  water,  but 
separated  from  Hare  Island  by  a  channel  i  mile  wide  with  a  reef  nearly 
in  the  middle,  and  through  which  no  greater  depth  than  9  feet  will  be 
found  at  low  water,  though  there  is  a  curious  deep  hole  at  the  SW. 
entrance. 

The  westernmost  island  is  the  largest.  It  attains  an  elevation  of  170 
feet  in  a  wooded  conical  summit  and  falls  in  clitt's  to  the  northward. 
The  easternmost  islet  is  small  and  wooded  and  about  30  feet  hi^li. 
The  southernmost  islet  is  white  and  almost  bare  of  trees.  Its  south 
extreme  has  deep  water  close  to. 


l\ 


i 


a 


312 


ST.  LAWKENCE    RIVER. 


r  "  i 


1*1  .' 


Light — From  a  square  building,  3!)  feet  high  and  painted  white, 
situated  close  to  the  SK.  extreme  of  the  southernmost  ot  Brandy  Pots, 
and  at  an  elevation  of  ~)7  feet,  is  exhibited  a  flxed  white  light,  which 
should  be  visible  10  miles. 

Brandy  Pots  Bank  extends  on  each  side  of  Brandy  Pots.  An 
isolated  rock  with  12  feet  water  on  it  lies  1^  miles  8.  28°  W.  (S.  48^  W. 
mag.)  from  Brandy  Pots  lighthouse  and  1,600  yards  from  the  nearest 
point  of  Hare  Island. 

A  shoal  witli  18  feet  water  over  it  lies  3i  miles  S.  30°  W.  (S.  50°  W. 
raag.)  from  Brandy  Pots  lighthouse;  a  rock  with  16  feet  water  over  it, 
j(  mile  southwestward  of  the  shoal,  and  a  bank  with  17  feet  water  on  it 
lies  \m)  yards  S.  72°  E.  (8.  52°  E.  mag.)  from  the  SW.  point  of  Hare 
Island. 

Anchorage. — Small  vessels  seek  shelter  on  either  side  of  Brandy 
Pots,  according  to  the  wind,  in  depths  from  13  to  16  feet  water. 

Large  vessels  anchor  as  convenient  in  Brandy  Pots  Ghanitel  or  Hare 
Island  Channel  south  of  Middle  Ground.  The  holding  ground  is  good 
throughout. 

The  tidal  streams  are  not  so  strong  in  the  Southern  Ohannel. 

The  bank  northeastward  of  Brandy  Pots  has  extended  and  the  whole 
of  Pilgrim  Islands  must  be  kept  well  open  of  Brandy  Pots  to  clear  the 
outer  depth  of  17  feet. 

Hare  Island  South  Reef.— The  nearest  portion  of  the  reef  that 
dries  at  low  water  is  1^  miles  SW.  of  Hare  Island,  the  channel  between 
having  no  greater  depth  than  18  feet  at  low  water.  The  streams  sweep 
through  this  channel  with  a  velocity  of  4  to  5  knots  at  spring  tides, 
eddying  with  strong  swirls  on  the  ebb. 

The  local  steamers  use  this  channel  in  going  to  and  from  Murray  Bay 
and  Kiviere  du  Loup. 

On  this  reef  are  four  islets.  The  two  northeastemmost  covered  with 
grass  with  a  few  small  bushes  6  feet  above  high  water,  and  the  south- 
westernmost  a  sand  bank  covered  with  grass  and  4  feet  high.  The 
largest  is  between  these  and  has  some  spruce  trees  on  the  summit,  the 
highest  of  which  is  22  feet  above  high  water. 

Buoy. — A  red  buoy  is  moored  in  19  feet  water  at  the  northeastern 
extremity  of  the  shoal  water  extending  from  Hare  Island  South  Reef, 
with  the  summit  of  White  Islet  in  line  with  the  south  extreme  of  Hare 
Island,  and  with  the  northern  pyramidal  beacon  in  line  with  the  dia- 
mond beacon  of  the  group  near  the  southwestern  extreme  of  Hare 
Island. 

Hare  Island  Bank  extends  6  miles  southwestward  of  South  Beef, 
and  the  extreme  is  marked  by  a  red  buoy  moored  iu  4  fathoms  water 
with  the  west  sides  of  Hare  Island  and  Reef  in  line  and  the  two  bea- 
cons at  the  NE.  end  of  Grande  Island  Eamouraska,  both  now  painted 
white,  in  line. 

Barrett  Ledges  are  two  small  rocks  with  deep  water  between  and 


'^SteBfci. 


lainted  white, 
Brandy  Pots, 
)  light,  which 

iy  Pots.  An 
W.  (S.  480  w. 
tn  the  nearest 

iv.  (S.  mo  vv. 

water  over  it, 
set  water  on  it 
Kiint  of  Hare 

de  of  Brandy 
water. 

aunel  or  Hare 
Touud  is  good 

lannel. 

and  the  whole 

ts  to  clear  the 

the  reef  that 

mnel  between 

streams  sweep 

spring  tides, 

n  Murray  Bay 

;  covered  with 
fnd  the  south- 
Bt  high.  The 
e  summit,  the 

)  northeast^-rn 
1  South  Keef, 
trenie  of  Hare 
i  with  the  dia- 
reme  of  Hare 

f  South  Keef. 
'athoms  water 
1  the  two  bea- 
ti  now  painted 

•  between  and 


BARRETT   LEDGER — MIDDLE    HANK. 


;;i3 


around  them.  Th^i  northeastern  has  7  feet  water  over  it  and  is  U  ,'„  miles 
N.  73°  K.  (S.  87°  E.  nniir  ^  from  Brandy  Pots  lightlumse,  and  the  western, 
with  V2  feet  water  over  it,  lies  800  yards  8.  4.So  W.  (8.  08°  W.  mag.) 
from  tlie  eastern  rock. 

The  highest  liill  over  St.  Andrr,  open  of  (ireat  IMIgrim  Island,  bear- 
ing 8. 19°  W.  (S.  31>o  W.  mag.)  leads  close  east,  and  Hare  Island  Sum- 
mit, in  line  with  the  NK.  extreme  of  Hrandy  Pots,  bearing  S.  73"  W. 
(N.  87°  W.  mag.),  leads  north  of  these  ledges. 

Buoys. — A  buoy  checkered  bla<!k  and  white  is  moored  close  NB.  of 
the  eastern  rock,  and  shows  an  intermittent  white  jras  lifjht,  the  period 
of  occultation  being  about  six  seconds. 

A  can  buoy,  cLeckeretl  black  and  white,  is  moored  close  east  of  the 
western  rock. 

Manuen  Rock,  with  7  feet  water  over  it,  is  a  little  more  than  1^ 
miles  S.  73°  E.  (8.  53^  E.  mag.)  from  Brandy  Pots  lighthouse.  Middle 
Shoal,  with  9  feet  water  on  it,  lies  300  yards  SW.  by  S.  of  Marmen  Bock, 
and  Demers  Book,  with  11  feet  water  over  it,  lies  700  yards  southwest- 
ward  of  Middle  Shoal,  and  nearly  1^  miles  8.56°  K.  (8. 36°  E.  mjg.) 
from  Brandy  Pots  lighthouse.  The  apparent  easternmost  summit  on 
the  south  shore  of  the  river  in  line  with  the  north  extreme  of  Gacouna 
Island,  bearing  N.  49°  E.  (N.  69°  E,  mag.),  leads  close  SE.  of  these 
banks. 

Buoys. — A  can  buoy,  painted  black,  is  moored  close  northward  of 
Marmen  Bock,  and  a  buoy,  painted  red,  is  moored  close  southward 
of  Demers  Bock. 

Middle  Bank  extends  sonthwestward  from  Middle  Ground  to  Hare 
Island  Bank  with  no  greater  depth  than  27  feet.  A  patch,  with  17 
feet  water  on  it,  lies  on  this  bank  at  2  miles  8. 89°  E.  (8.  69°  E.  mag.) 
from  the  SW.  extreme  of  Hare  Island,  and  a  shoal,  with  18  feet  water 
over  it,  lies  800  yards  northeastward  of  that  patch,  with  the  SW. 
extreme  of  White  Islet  in  line  with  the  north  extreme  of  Brandy  Pots. 

Buoy. — A  can  buoy,  painted  red  and  black  in  horizontal  bauds,  is 
moored  in  25  feet  water  southward  of  these  shoals,  with  the  two  pyram 
idal  beacons  in  line,  and  White  Islet  showing  about  mid-channel 
between  Brandy  Pots  and  Hare  Island. 

Mark. — The  best  mark  for  crossing  Middle  Bank,  in  27  feet  water,  is 
to  keep  the  NE.  extreme  of  Hare  Island  in  line  with  the  east  extreme 
of  Brandy  Pots,  bearing  N.  9°  W.  (N.  11°  E.  mag.). 

SOUTH  SHORE — BELOW  THE  TRAVERSE. 

Green  Island  and  Ree£— See  pages  216  and  217. 

Green  Island  is  of  gray  wacke  and  slate  rock ;  wooded,  and  rising  to 
about  250  feet  above  the  sea.  The  channel  between  the  island  and  the 
mainland  is  f  mile  wide  in  the  narrowest  part,  and  dries  at  low  water, 
with  the  exception  of  a  very  narrow  channel  for  boats. 

The  island  extends  5  miles  SW.  from  the  lighthouse,  with  bold  and 


814 


8T.  LAWRENCE   RIVER. 


ro<;ky  shores.  Its  SW.  point  is  low  and  bare,  and  has  a  danperous 
reef  extending  from  it  one  mile  southwestward.  The  XW.  side  of  this 
reef  is  so  bold  that  there  is  no  warning  by  the  lead.  At  idght,  vessels 
8h()nld  come  no  nearer  to  it  on  that  side  than  25  fathoms  water,  nor 
bring  the  light  to  bear  northward  of  N.  47°  B.  (N.  (17°  E.  mag.),  until 
the  NE.  end  of  Cacouna  Island  bears  8. 43°  E.  (8. 23<^  E.  mag.),  which 
bearing  leads  to  the  westward. 

Tides.— The  (lood  stream  sets  strongly  over  the  tail  of  this  reef 
towiird  Gaconna  Island  and  the  ebb  the  contrary.  There  is  generally 
a  great  rippling  oft'  the  end  of  the  reef  oansed  by  the  meeting  of  the 
flood  tides  from  either  side  of  (Ireen  Island. 

GreMi  Island  Light~8ee  page  217. 

Anchorage.— Midway  between  the  SW.  end  of  Green  Island  Reef 
and  Gaooana  KcKsk  there  is  good  anchorage  and  shelter  from  easterly 
winds,  in  6  fathoms,  muddy  bottom,  but  there  might  be  delay  and  diiti- 
culty  in  getting  out  when  the  wind  changed  to  the  westward,  on  which 
account  it  is  seldom  used. 

Cacouna  Island  is  separated  from  the  mainland  only  at  very  high 
tides,  and  there  is  a  causeway  to  it  that  rai-ely  or  ever  covers. 

The  island  is  generally  wooded,  over  gray  rock,  and  is  faced  by  clitt's 
on  the  north  side;  it  is  281  feet  high,  and  is  conspicuous  from  its 
isolated  position  and  greater  elevation  than  the  adjacent  coast. 

Cacouna  Rock.  25  feet  high,  is  joined  to  the  north  extreme  of 
Cacouna  Island  by  a  reef  of  slate  that  dres  at  low  water.  A  depth 
of  6  fathoms  water  will  be  found  at  200  yards  from  the  SW.  point 
of  the  island. 

Cacouna,  a  village  with  a  population  of  899  in  1891,  is  on  the  main- 
land SB.  of  Cacouna  Island.  It  is  one  of  the  most  frequented  sum- 
mer resorts  of  the  Province  of  Quebec,  has  a  large  parish  (>hurch  with 
a  spire,  a  small  Episcopal  church  with  a  spire,  and  a  Presbyterian 
church  with  a  belfry;  the  last  named  is  not  visible  from  seaward. 

A  large  hotel,  with  three  projecting  wings  and  painted  wltite,  stands 
near  the  edge  of  the  clift"  that  rises  close  southwestward  of  the  pyram- 
idal beacon  which  stands  below  the  charch,  and  about  f  mile  distant 
from  the  latter.  Numerous  villas  of  the  summer  residents  and  houses 
of  the  stationary  population  line  the  road  for  some  distance  south 
westward  of  the  hotel. 

The  post  and  telegraph  oflBce  stands  opposite  the  church. 

Fercee  Rocks  are  in  two  parts  that  together  extend  l/o  miles 
parallel  to,  and  distant  nearly  one  mile  from,  the  south  shore  of  the 
river.  The  northeastern  part  is  l-^  miles  from  Cacouna  Island  and  is 
a  small  round  rock  9  inches  above  high  water.  The  southwestern  part 
is  one  foot  high,  long  and  narrow.  A  tortuous  channel  with  34  fathoms 
water  in  it  lies  between  the  reef  and  the  shore.  At  night  vessels 
should  not  approach  these  rocks  to  a  less  depth  than  8  fathoms. 

Riviere  du  Loup,  the  entrance  to  which  is  54  miles  southwestward 


WMaiijlt)I>IIMHll|>l»»!iUiMt»»MBIj! 


RIVIKKK    niJ    LOIP. 


315 


M  a  danperoiiB 
iW.  Bide  of  this 
t  idght,  vesseiA 
oms  water,  nor 
E.  mag.),  until 
E).  mag.),  which 

»il  of  this  ro4>f 
ire  is  generally 
meetiug  of  the 


en  Inlaud  Reef 
)r  ft-om  easterly 
delay  and  diffl- 
ward,  on  which 

ly  at  very  high 

iovers. 

«  faced  by  cliffs 

CUOU8  from  its 

it  coast. 

[■th  extreme  of 

Iter.    A  depth 

the  SVV.  iM)iut 

is  on  the  main- 
equented  siim- 
sh  church  with 
*  Presbyterian 

seaward, 
i  white,  stands 
1  of  tlie  pyram- 

f  mile  distant 
fits  and  houses 
listaiice  south- 


l/o  miles 


rch. 
end 

h  shore  of  the 
%  Island  and  is 
thwestern  part 
dth  3^  fathoms 
night  vessels 
athoms. 
sontliwcstward 


of  Gaconna  Inland,  i.s  a  considerable  stream,  and  lias  a  depth  of  2  foct 
in  the  entrance  at  low  wat4>r,  bnt  dries  a«-ro«ci  at  a  siiort  distance  within 
the  inner  end  of  the  i»ier.  A  deiith  of  about  10  feet  may  be  found  at 
high  water  to  the  mills  near  the  bridge  at  the  head,  a  distaufe  of  1^ 
miles.  Water  can  b*^  pro«!ured  with  considerable  dittlculty  near  the 
bridge. 

A  pier  extends  abont  1,000  feet  from  the  north  entrance  point  of  the 
river,  with  a  crosshead,  alongside  which  there  is  a  deptli  of  IH  feet  at 
low  water.  A  small  hotel  and  telegraph  office  stand  at  tht^  inner  end 
of  the  pier,  and  a  dagstaff  on  the  point. 

A  railway  in  connection  with  the  Intercolonial  system  extends  to  tlie 
end  of  the  pier. 

Light. — From  a  square  lighthouse,  35  feet  high,  and  painted  white, 
at  the  end  of  the  pier  at  Riviere  du  Loup  Point  is  exhibited,  at  an  ele> 
vation  of  30  feet,  a  fixed  whit«  light  that  should  be  visible  11  miles. 

Signals. — This  is  a  telegraph  and  signal  station. 

Anchorage. — The  anchorage  off  Riviere  du  Loup  is  very  good; 
depths  ftom  4  to  .5  fathoms  may  be  found  as  convenient,  the  former 
at  400  yards  from  the  i)ier.  The  deepest  water  will  be  fnnnd  with  the 
courthouse  in  line  with  Riviere  du  Loup  Point.  The  holding  ground  is 
very  good  in  this  vicinity. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Riviere  du  Loup  Pier  at 
3h.  10m.;  springs  rise  16^  feet;  neaps  rise  10^  feet,  and  ueaps  range  7 
feet. 

Fraserville  is  ^  small  town  close  inshore  of  the  entrance  to  the  river^ 
with  a  population  of  .4,175  in  1891.  Ther^  is  a  prominent  stone  church 
with  a  spire,  and  about  250  yards  westward  of  the  church  is  the  court- 
house, a  conspicuous  square  stone  building.  There  is  also  a  small  Prot- 
estant church  with  a  square  tower,  but  it  is  rarely  visible  from  seaward. 
There  are  both  post  and  telegraph  offices  in  Fraservllle, 

Rividre  du  Loup  Village  lies  south  of  Fraserville,  and  is  the  seat  of 
the  engineering  works  of  the  Intercolonial  Railway,  which  are  grouped 
abont  the  railway  station. 

Supplies  of  any  kind  may  be  obtained  here.  Coal  can  be  procured 
from  the  Intercolonial  Railway,  and  can  be  taken  In  from  trucks  at  the 
end  of  the  pier.  About  1,600  tons  are  kept  stored  at  Riviere  du  Loup, 
and  about  the  same  (juantity  both  at  8t.  Flavie  and  St.  Charles  Junc- 
tion, but  any  quantity  can  be  had  from  the  Pict^u  collieries  in  50  hours, 
or  from  Springhill  in  39  hours. 

Aspect  of  Coast. — The  land  in  this  neighborhood  consists  of  a  series 
of  ridges  parallel  to  the  shore,  and  separated  by  valleys  under  culti- 
vation. From  the  valley  next  south  of  the  ridge  that  terminates  in 
Riviere  du  Loup  Point  rises  a  remarkable  isolated  hill  280  foet  high 
that  from  the  westward  appears  as  a  sharp  cone.  The  coast  ridges,  all 
of  which  are  faced  by  cliff  on  the  river  side,  extend  to  Notre  Dame  du 
Portage,  the  westernmost  beiug  surmounted  by  a  tlagstaff  and  a  summer 


f.     ! 

i- 

1°!  ■' 

:<  ■: 

i  - 


816 


ST.  LAWRENCE    RIVEi'^. 


houHe  at  18(1  feet  ul)OV«  Iii^h  wnter.  Beliiiul  tbene  ridgeH  the  main  liills 
ure  aliiiost  Hat  in  outline,  and  sloyte  gradually  seaward  from  elevatioutt 
(»('  100  to  5JjO  feet  high. 

Notre  Dame  du  Portage  at^oins  the  parish  of  '<ivi<'re  du  Loup. 
The  parisli  church  with  a  spire  stands  cloHe  to  the  sliore  at  5  miles 
southwestward  of  Kivlf're  du  Loup  Point. 

Loup  Bank  extends  southwestward  from  the  entrance  to  the  river 
and  shaUowH  gradually  westward.  The  lighthouse  at  Riviere  du  Loup 
Point  well  opiin  of  the  isolated  conical  hill  bearing  N.  01^  E.  (N. 
81"  K.  mag.),  leads  NW.  of  the  depth  of  18  feet  on  this  bank,  and  of 
rilgrim  Shoal. 

Pilgrim  Shoal  extends  4^  miles  in  a  direction  parallel  to  the  south 
shore,  from  which  it  is  distant  H^  miles.  The  least  depth  found  was  13 
feet  near  the  SW.  extreme,  but  the  general  depth  is  from  10  to  18  feet. 
The  channel  between  it  and  Loup  Bank  has  only  10  feet  water  in  it, 
and  is  400  yards  wide  at  the  narrowest  part.  From  the  NE.  extreme 
of  the  shoal  the  8W.  extreme  of  Great  Pilgrim  Island  is  in  line  with 
the  NK.  extreme  of  Middle  Pilgrim  Island,  and  the  trees  near  tlie  NE. 
extreme  of  Hare  Island  are  well  open  east  of  Brandy  Pots.  The  mark 
for  clearing  Loup  Bank  leads  north,  and  Green  Island  well  open  of 
Cacouna  Rock  bearing  N.  38'^  E.  (N.  68°  E.  mag.)  leads  west  of  this 
shoal,  us  also  the  north  extremes  of  Grande  and  Burnt  Islands,  Kam- 
ouraska,  in  line  bearing  8. 31°  W.  (8. 51°  W.  mag.).  The  SW.  extreme 
of  Pilgrim  Shoal  lies  2^  miles  N.  16°  E.  (N.  36°  E.  mag.)  from  Pilgrim 
Island  lighthouse. 

Buoy. — A  buoy,  painted  black,  is  moored  in  5  fathoms  water  at  1,100 
yards  north  of  the  SW.  extreme  of  Pilgrim  Shoal,  and  exhibits  an 
intermittent  white  gas  light,  the  period  of  occultation  being  about  six 
seconds. 

Pilgrim  Islands  are  a  group  situated  7^  miles  SW.  of  Biviere  du 
Loup  Point. 

Great  Pilgrim  Island,  the  easternmost,  is  of  bare  gray  rock,  par- 
tially covered  with  turf,  and  with  small  wood  in  the  hollows  between 
the  hills.  It  is  surmounted  over  each  extreme  by  a  round  hiU,  the 
eastern  218  feet  and  the  western  223  feet,  respectively,  above  high 
water,  while  between  these  is  a  smaller  summit  faced  by  gray  cliffs. 

Middle  Pilgrim  Island  is  partially  wooded,  and  attains  an  elevation 
of  181  feet,  and  the  other  smaller  islands  present  generally  the  same 
characteristics. 

Long  Pilgrim  Island  is  the  southwesterumost,  and  is  surmounted 
over  the  NE.  extreme  by  a  partially  wooded  hill,  128  feet  high,  from 
which  it  extends  in  a  narrow  ridge  faced  by  gray  cliff  for  3  miles 
nearly,  to  the  small  bare  islet  10  feet  high  at  the  SW.  extreme.  At 
high  water  there  is  a  gap  at  1, 700 yards  from  the  SW.  extreme,  through 
which  boats  may  pass  when  the  water  is  smooth. 

Light — At  1^  miles  from  the  SW.  extreme  of  Long  Pilgrim  Island, 


BBT' 


8  the  main  IijIIh 
'rota  elevations 

vu'Tn  du  Loup, 
ore  at  5  miles 

ce  to  the  river 
iviere  du  Louj» 

N.  «lo  E.  (N. 

H  bank,  and  of 

el  to  the  south 
h  found  waH  l.'( 
n  10  to  18  feet, 
eet  water  in  it, 
e  NK.  extreme 
is  in  line  with 
s  near  the  NE. 
ts.  The  mark 
I  well  open  of 
i  west  of  this 
Islands,  Kain- 
j  8W.  extreme 
)  from  Pilgrim 

water  at  1,100 
d  exhibits  an 
eiug  about  six 

of  Biviere  du 

ray  rock,  par- 
lows  between 
ound  hdl,  the 
/,  above  high 
gray  cliflfs. 
3  an  elevation 
ally  the  same 

9  surmounted 
et  high,  from 
'  for  3  miles 
extreme.  At 
•erne,  through 

Igrim  Island, 


LONG    E'lLORIM    ISLAND — KAMOUKA8KA    ISLANDS. 


317 


and  on  the  mimmit  of  the  ridge,  is  a  H(|uar«  lightlnmHe, .'«)  feet  liiyli,  and 
painted  white,  with  the  tower  rining  from  the  center  of  the  building, 
from  which,  at  an  elevation' of  180  feet,  is  Hhown  ii  fixed  wliite  light 
that  siiould  l>e  visible  \\i  miles. 

Anchorage. — There  is  anchorage  for  HnnvU  vessels  in  westerly  winds 
under  Lon^  Pilgrim  Island  and  oil"  Great  Pilgrim  Island  in  15  feet 
water. 

Village.— The  church  of  St.  Audn-,  a  stone  building  with  a  spire, 
stands  on  the  mainland  southeastward  of  Pilgrim  Islands.  A  small 
village  surrounds  the  church,  at  the  east  end  of  which  is  a  large 
factory. 

St  Andr6  Point,  a  round  island,  ll'U  feet  high,  is  Joined  to  the 
mainland  by  a  grassy  flat,  .WO  yards  wide,  that  covers  oidy  at  high 
water. 

Several  remarkable  hills  fringe  the  coast  in  this  locality,  the  highest 
attaining  an  elevation  of  <;30  feet  in  a  conical  sumnut,  with  another 
north  of  it  565  feet  above  high  water. 

St.  Andr^  Bank  extends  from  Pilgiim  to  Kamouraska  Islands,  and 
in  many  places  dries  out  more  than  one  mile  from  the  shore.  Its 
northern  edge  is  very  steep,  but  there  is  an  excellent  mark  for  it, 
namely,  the  SE.  sides  of  Grande  and  Burnt  Islantls  in  line,  bearing 
S.  31°  W.  (S.  51°  W.  mag.),  which  leads  along  it  at  the  distance  of 
from  300  to  400  yards  from  the  3-fathom  line  of  soundings. 

Kamouraska  Islands  lie  nearly  G  miles  southwestward  of  Pilgrim 
Islands,  and  2^  miles  from  the  mainland,  to  which  they  are  Joined  by 
shoals  that  dry  at  low  water.  Grande  Island  is  the  northeasternmost, 
and,  together  with  Burnt  Island,  extends  about  '2  miles  along  the 
northern  edge  of  the  bank. 

These  islands  are  long  and  narrow  ridges  of  gray  wacke  and  are  bold 
to  the  westward,  there  being  20  fathoms  water  close  to  them.  Crow 
Island  lies  about  f  mile  south  of  Burnt  Island,  and  there  are  besides 
two  small  and  bare  rocky  islets  northeastward  of  Crow  Island,  and 
within  Burnt  Island.  Crow  Island  is  about  ^  mile  from  the  shore  at 
the  church  and  town  of  Kamouraska,  and  carts  can  cross  to  it  at  low 
water.  Tht  re  is  a  wharf  and  good  lauding  near  the  chu'-ch,  and  water 
may  be  obti  ined  at  any  time  of  tide  when  there  is  depth  enough  for 
boats  over  tht  ?>ioal8,  but  there  is  no  water  on  the  islands. 

Light— A  lighthouse  is  built  240  yards  from  the  NE.  end  of  Grande 
Island,  and  exhibits,  at  an  elevation  of  109  feet,  a  revolving  white  light 
every  half  minute.  The  light  should  be  visible  IS  miles.  The  light- 
house is  a  square  building  with  dwelling  attached,  painted  white,  and 
39  feet  high. 

Beacons. — On  the  northeastern  end  of  Grande  Island  there  are  two 
white  beacons.  When  in  line,  bearing  S.  23°  E.  (S.  3°  E.  mag.),  they 
form  a  cross  mark  for  the  red  buoy  on  the  SW.  end  of  Hare  Island 
Bank  in  4  fathoms. 


f 


318 


ST.  LAWRENCE   RIVER. 


tn     1| 
il     (I 

«    fl. 


MS     r' 


^i      i 


Kamonraska  Bay,  which  is  immediately  southward  of  the  town,  is 
well  sheltered,  and  small  vessels  may  safely  lie  aground  and  winter 
there,  on  a  mud  bottom,  which  dries  at  low  water.  Vessels  in  distress, 
when  they  have  lost  their  anchors,  may  be  saved  by  running  them  in 
at  high  water  between  the  reef  oif  Cape  Diable  ami  Crow  Ii»iau(l,  leav- 
ing the  latter  from  i  to  J  mile  to  the  northeastward  in  passing,  and 
when  within  the  reef  hauling  into  the  bay  to  the  S  W.  In  high  spring 
tides  13  or  14  feet  of  water  will  be  found  over  the  mud,  but  in  neap 
tides  there  is  seldom  more  than  9  or  10  feet. 

Anchorage. — There  is  good  anchorage  oft'  Kamouraska  with  the  pre- 
vailing winds  up  and  down  the  river,  but  exposed  to  westerly  winds. 
The  best  berth  to  anchor  in  is  where  tlie  church  of  Kamouraska  is  just 
open  of  Crow  Island,  bearing  S.  67°  E.  (S.  47°  E.  mag.),  and  Grande 
Island  just  open  northward  of  Burnt  Island,  bearing  N.  40°  E.  (N.  60"^ 
E.  mag.j,  in  7  fathoms,  over  stiff  mud.  Largo  vessels  wishing  for  more 
room  may  anchor  farther  out  anywhere  to  the  westward. 

Cape  Diable  lies  3  miles  SW.  by  S.  from  Crow  Island,  across  the 
Kamouraska  Bay.  From  it,  reels  of  slate  extend  northward,  more 
than  midway  to  Crow  Island,  and  northwestward  g  mile,  in  which  last 
direction  the  distance  out  to  the  3-fathom  edge  of  the  bank  is  nearly 
IJ  miles. 

Orignaux  Point  is  a  low  point  7J  miles  SW.  from  Cai)e  Diable, 
extending  from  some  low  hillocks.  A  pier  extends  1,200  feet  from  the 
point,  with  a  crossheud,  alongside  which  there  is  a  depth  of  11  feet 
at  low  water.  A  large  hotel  and  some  smaller  houses  stand  on  the 
hillocks  close  south  of  the  pier. 

Light— From  a  square  lighthouse  28  feet  high,  and  painted  white, 
built  at  the  end  of  the  pier,  at  Orignaux  Point,  and  at  an  elevation  of 
34  feet,  is  exhibited  a  fixed  white  light  that  should  be  visible  10  miles. 
This  locality  is  in  the  parish  of  St.  Denis,  and  is  frequently  designated 
by  the  name  of  the  parish. 

Fog  SignaL — A  hand  horn  answers  signals  from  vessels. 

Anchorage. — There  is  good  anchorage  at  a  little  more  than  one  mile 
from  the  pier  in  5  to  6  fathoms  water,  and  as  close  in  as  convenient,  a 
depth  of  18  feet  being  found  700  yards  from  the  pier. 

Vessels  loading  timber  from  Riviere  Quelle  generally  anchor  here. 

From  this  point  the  edge  of  the  shoal  water  extends  SW.  by  S., 
gradually  increasing  its  distance  from  the  shore. 

Tides.— It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Orignaux  Point  at  3h. 
47m. ;  springs  rise  17J  feet,  neaps  rise  13  feet,  and  neaps  range  9^  feet. 

(H.  O.  Chart  No.  1491.) 

Ri^bre  Otielle  is  just  southward  of  Quelle  Point,  the  westernmost 
promincoit  projection  on  the  shore  in  this  neighborhood.  The  point 
slojies  gradually  from  a  height  of  108  feet,  the  westernmost  summit  of 
a  partially  wooded  ridge  that  extends  some  distance  inland.    A  depth 


•S^SS^imSMWRMMI 


mmmmmm 


WBWHBi'W'ww^'w 


RIVIKRE  QUELLE — SHOALS  OF  ST.  ANNE. 


319 


rd  of  the  town,  is 
ouud  aud  winter 
easels  in  distress, 
running  theui  in 
'row  Iisland,  leav- 
1  in  passing,  and 
In  high  spring 
nud,  but  in  neap 

ska  with  the  pre- 
0  westerly  winds, 
tmouraska  is  just 
Ag.),  and  Grande 
N.  40°  E.  (N.  60O 
wishing  for  more 
krd. 

slaiid,  a(a"08s  the 
northward,  more 
He,  in  which  last 
lie  bank  is  nearly 

>m  Cai)e  Diable, 
200  feet  from  the 
depth  of  11  feet 
$es  stand  ou  the 

1(1  painted  white, 
t  an  elevation  of 
)  visible  10  miles, 
eutly  designated 

essels. 

)re  than  one  mile 

as  convenient,  a 

Ly  anchor  here, 
snds  SW.  by  S., 

aux  Point  at  3h. 
.ps  range  0^  feet. 


the  westernmost 
lood.  The  point 
imost  summit  of 
ulaud.    A  depth 


of  12  feet  will  be  found  in  Riviere  (Quelle  at  high  water  as  far  as  the 
wharf  which  is  on  the  south  side  of  the  river  at  IJ  miles  from  the  point. 

The  best  channel  is  south  of  a  small  islet  about  midway  to  the  wharf. 
A  church  with  a  spire  stands  close  east  of  the  bridge  that  spans  the 
river  at  2  miles  from  Ouelle  Point. 

St.  Anne  de  la  Pocatidre  is  the  parish  next  south  of  Itiviere 
Ouelle.  A  conspicuous  church  with  a  spire  and  a  large  college  sur- 
rounded by  a  village  stand  on  the  slope  of  Mont  St.  Anne,  a  prominent 
round  hill  395  feet  high.  Several  conspicuous  isolated  hills  lie  south- 
V,  ard  of  Mont  St.  Anne,  aud  Mont  Boutot,  a  remarkable  truncated  cone 
708  feet  above  high  water,  lies  2^  miles  eastward  of  St.  Anne. 

St  Roch  dee  Aulnets  (or  Aulnais)  is  a  small  village  southwest- 
ward  of  St  Anne  de  la  Pocatiere,  and  has  a  church  with  two  small 
spires,  which  stands  close  to  the  shore.  Houses  are  situated  along  the 
road  between  all  these  villages. 

Beacons. — A  pyramidal  beacon  is  built  close  to  the  church,  and  a 
similar  one  on  an  elevation  a  little  more  than  ^  mile  southeastward. 

Another  of  the  same  shape  stands  just  south  of  the  edge  of  the  clitf 
at  1^  miles  south  westward  of  the  church,  aud  inland  from  it,  another  one 
shaped  like  a  diamond. 

Coast.— The  coast  from  St.  lioch  des  Aulnets  to  St.  Jean  Port  Joli  is 
generally  bordered  by  small  cliff,  the  end  of  slopes  from  wooded  hills 
that  rise  to  heights  of  320  and  290  feet  above  high  water. 

Shoals  of  St.  Anne  extend  from  the  shore  of  that  parish,  and  are 
dangerous,  particularly  at  night  aud  with  the  first  of  the  flood  stream 
which  sets  directly  ou  to  the  shoulder  of  the  bank  at  the  buoy,  and 
obliquely  to  the  westward. 

The  water  shoals  very  rapidly  for  the  greater  part  of  the  length  of 
the  shoals,  the  distance  between  depths  of  5  and  3  fathoms  being  less 
than  200  yards,  and  to  G  feet  less  than  800  yards. 

Buoy.— A  black  buoy  is  moored  off  St.  Anne  Shoals  in  30  feet  water, 

Mark.— Cape  Diable  well  open  of  the  lighthouse  on  Origuaux  Point 
bearing  N.  5Go  E.  (N.  75°  E.  mag.)  leads  ]!fW.  of  St.  Anne  Shoals  from 
Ouelle  Point  southwestward. 

Anchorage.— All  along  the  edge  of  the  bank,  from  Kamonraska 
Islands  to  St.  Anne  buoy,  there  is  excellent  anchorage  iu  from  7  to  10 
fathoms,  stiff  mud  bottom. 

The  shoals  trend  6  miles  SW.  from  St.  Anne  buoy  to  the  lower  light- 
Vessel  at  South  Traverse,  which  is  moored  on  the  outer  point  of  St.  Roch 
Shoals. 

English  Bank  extends  about  IG  miles  northeastward  from  Middle 
Ground  with  a  general  breadth  of  one  mile.  The  least  depth  found 
was  0  fathoms,  and  6  to  6^  fathoms  may  be  met  with  at  any  part  of 
the  ridge  of  the  bank  as  far  east  as  Origuaux  Point,  where  the  survey 
terminated  in  1887.  It  affords  good  anchorage,  and  is  much  used  by 
vessels,  while  beating  in  the  river,  to  await  a  favorable  tide. 


5f 


u 


... 


320 


ST.  LAWRENCE   RIVER. 


SOUTH  CHANNEL,  BELOW  THE  TRAVERSE. 
(H.  O.  Cbarts  Nos.  1490  and  1491.) 

General  ObservationB. — South  Channel  is  jaatly  preferred  for  the 
common  purposes  of  navigation.  In  that  part  of  it  which  is  below  the 
Traverse  the  tides  are  not  so  strong  nor  the  water  so  inconveniently 
deep  as  they  are  in  the  corresponding  part  of  the  North  Channel  below 
Coudres  Island.  Moreover,  it  i>o.sses8es  good  anchorage  almost  in  every 
part,  an<l  water  enough  for  vessels  of  large  draft  at  all  times  of  the  tide. 

Vessels  of  large  draft  should  not  pass  west  of  Middle  Bank,  as  not 
more  than  21  feet  can  be  secured  at  low  water  in  crossing  Middle  Bank 
to  the  main  channel,  but  such  vessels  should  pass  eastward  of  Barrett 
Ledges,  Middle  Shoal,  and  ISIiddle  Bank,  where  the  channel  is  direct. 
With  the  assistance  of  the  buoys  in  this  channel,  large  vessels  may 
beat  up  or  down  with  .safety. 

Directions  from  Green  Island  and  Red  Islet  to  Brandy  Pots.— 
Steamers  of  all  descriptions  proceeding  to  Quebec  may  pass  between 
Bic  Island  and  the  south  shore  of  the  St.  Lawrence,  keeping  rather 
nearer  the  island  and  guarding  against  the  shoal  ott'  ]3amaby  Island. 
The  two  pairs  of  beacons  marking  the  position  of  Alcide  Bock  should 
not  be  brought  in  line  to  avoid  that  danger,  after  passing  which, 
a  course  should  be  steered  to  i>a8S  between  Ked  Islet  Bank  and 
Green  Island.  The  High  Land  of  Bic  must  be  kept  well  oi)en  north 
of  Basque  Island  to  avoid  Green  Island  Reef,  until  the  eastern  bea- 
con on  Green  Island  is  in  line  with  the  lighthouse,  when  a  course 
should  be  steered  to  pass  west  of  Barrett  Ledge.  The  highest  hill  of 
St  Andr('',  open  of  Great  Pilgrim  Island,  bearing  S.  19°  W.  (S.  39°  W. 
mag.),  leads  close  east  of  these  shoals,  and  Hare  Island  well  open  south 
of  White  Island,  leads  eastward  of  Hare  Island  North  Eeef,  while  the 
south  extreme  of  Green  Island  open  north  of  Cacouna  Ro(!k  will  lead 
west  of  Percee  Eocks.  Bring  the  north  extreme  of  Burnt  Island 
(Kamoura8ka).iust  in  sight  north  of  Grande  Island,  bearing  S.  31°  W. 
(S.  51°  W.  mag.)  before  the  isolated  conical  hill  eastward  of  liivieredu 
Loup  Point  is  nearly  in  line  with  the  lighthouse  o!i  that  iM)int,  bearing 
N.  61°  K.  (N.  81°  E.  mag.),  to  clear  Pilgrim  Shoal.  The  light  buoy  ott" 
the  latter  having  been  passed,  a  course  should  be  steered  to  pass  west 
of  Kamouraska  Islands  and  Orignaux  Point  lighthouse,  giving  the 
latter  and  the  shoals  off  Quelle  Point  a  good  berth.  Cape  Diable  must 
be  kept  well  open  of  Orignaux  Point  lighthouse,  bearing  N.  56°  B. 
(N.  75°  E.  mag.)  to  dear  St.  Anne  Shoals  until  the  Traverse  light- 
vessels  come  in  line  bearing  S.  28°  W.  (S.  47°  W.  mag.),  when  thry 
should  be  steered  for  and  left  to  the  westward.  After  passing  Upi)er 
Traverse  lightvessel,  it  should  be  brought  in  line  with  Lower  Traverse 
lightvessel,  bearing  N.  28°  E.  (N.  47°  E.  mag.),  and  this  line  followed 
to  clear  St.  Roch  Shoals.  When  the  buoy  marking  their  west  extreme 
has  been  passed,  steer  west  of  Channel  Patch  taking  care  to  open  the 


iini.iJMIM 


mn' 


^   *%Mi 


ST,  LAWRENCE    RIVER — NORTH    SHORE. 


321 


9E. 


►referred  for  the 
lich  is  below  tlie 
)  inconveniently 
h  Channel  below 
B  almost  in  every 
times  of  the  tide, 
lie  Bank,  as  not 
ing  Middle  Bank 
ward  of  Barrett 
lannel  is  direct, 
rge  vessels  may 

Brandy  Pots. — 

y  pass  between 
,  keeping  rather 
Bamaby  Island, 
ide  Bock  should 
passing  which, 
[slet  Bank  and 
well  oi)en  north 
}he  eastern  bea- 
,  when  a  coarse 
)  highest  hill  of 

=  w.  (S.  390  W. 

[  well  open  south 
1  Beef,  while  the 

Bo(;k  will  lead 
f  Burnt  Island 
laring  S.  31°  W. 
.rd  of  Biviere  du 
tiH)int,  bearing 
le  light  buoy  off 
ed  to  pass  west 
luse,  giving  the 
ape  Diable  must 
aring  N.  56°  B. 

Traverse  light- 
sig.),  when  th?y 

passing  Upi)er 
Lower  Traverse 
lis  line  followed 
lir  west  extreme 
care  to  open  the 


highest  part  of  Goose  Island  Beef  south  of  Stone  Tillar  lighthouse, 
bearing  S.  37"  W.  (S.  'i(i°  W.  mag.)  before  the  bciicou  at  St.  Jean  Port 
Joli  is  nearly  in  line  with  the  east  extreme  of  the  church.  A  course 
should  then  be  shaped  eastward  of  South  Bock  lighthouse  when  Crane 
Island  should  be  brought  well  open  of  Goose  Island  Beef,  bearing  S. 
46°  W.  (S.  65°  W.  mag.)  to  clear  the  shoals  between  South  Bock  and 
Goose  Island  Beef,  and  that  mark  should  be  opened  gradually  so  as  to 
pass  700  yards  southeastward  of  Goose  Island  Beef.  For  continuation, 
see  page  337. 

At  night,  when  the  land  can  not  be  seen  ]>lainly,  it  is  more  prudent 
to  pass  NW.  of  Bicqnette  Island,  keeping  sufficiently  far  off  to  clear 
Northwest  Beef,  when  a  course  should  be  steered  to  i)ass  between  Bed 
Islet  Bank  and  Green  Island.  Frequent  bearings  of  the  light  in  this 
locality  and  continuous  soundings  should  be  taken  to  insure  clearing 
Green  Island  Beef.  When  past  Green  Island  the  lighthouse  on  that 
island  should  be  just  shut  in  with  the  west  extreme  bearing  N.  36°  E. 
(N.  56°  E.  mag.),  and  should  be  kept  so  until  Barrett  Ledge  light  buoy 
is  passed,  when  a  course  should  be  steered  for  the  light  buoy  on  Pilgrim 
Shoal  and  the  directions  followed  as  in  daylight.  GareM  bearings  and 
:  oundings  should  be  taken  to  ascertain  the  vessel's  position,  particu- 
i  irly  in  the  neighborhood  of  St.  Anne  Shoals,  with  the  beginning  of 
ihe  flood  stream. 

NORTH  SHORE — BELOW   COUDRES   ISLAND. 
(H.  O.  Chart  No.  1112.) 

Aspect  of  Coast. — The  northern  shore  of  the  St.  Lawrence  from 
Saguenay  Biver  to  Coudres  Island  is  bold  and  mountainous.  The 
granitic  hills  in  most  parts  rise  immediately  from  the  river,  forming 
steep  or  precipitous  headlands.  Near  the  entrance  of  the  Saguenay 
these  hills  are  not  above  1,000  feet  high,  but  those  of  Eboulements 
attain  an  elevation  of  2,551  feet  above  high  water. 

At  page  301  the  coast  of  the  estuary  was  described  up  to  Little 
Bergeron  Cove.  The  description  of  the  coast  from  that  point  westward 
will  now  be  given. 

Vaches  Point,  the  east  entrance  point  of  Saguenay  Biver,  lies  6^ 
miles  NW.  by  W.  from  Bed  Islet  lighthouse.  Saguenay  Cliffs,  the 
high  clay  cliffs,  and  the  hills  covered  with  sand  at  this  point  are  easily 
recognized. 

Moulin  Baude  Anchorage,  in  7  fathoms,  mud,  is  3  miles  NE.  by  E. 
from  Saguenay  Oliffs,  and  Bed  Islet  and  the  SW.  end  of  Green  Island 
are  in  line.  The  vessel  will  here  be  800  yards  from  the  3-fathom  line  of 
soundings  sind  nearly  one  mile  off'  shore.  The  water  becomes  deep  im- 
mediately outside  this  anchorage,  which  is  of  use  to  vessels  coming  up 
under  the  north  shore  with  a  scant  NW.  wind,  at  the  end  of  the  tiood 
and  close  of  the  day,  and  wishing  to  wait  for  the  next  flood,  or  for 
daylight;  also  for  vessels  waiting  for  a  wind  to  enter  the  Saguenay. 
1151 21 


i- 


M 


822 


BT.  LAWRENCE    RIVER. 


^1    (I 


i        ■ 
'  'Si*' 


(H.O.  Chart.  No.  1490.) 

Vaches  Patch,  with  13  feet  water  over  it,  lies  lij  miles  S.  77'^  E. 
(S.  57°  E.  mag.)  from  Vaches  Point,  and  is  a  continuation  of  Vaches 
Point  Reef,  which  dries  out  i  mile  from  Vaches  Point. 

Buoy.— A  buoy,  painted  red  and  black  in  horizontal  bands,  is 
moored  southward  of  the  patch. 

Prince  Shoal  is  a  narrow  ridge  of  stones  and  bowlders  with  17  feet 
least  water.  It  extends  ^  mile  SE.  by  E.  from  what  was  considered  to 
be  the  outer  patch  at  the  time  of  the  Admiralty  survey  of  1829.  This 
shoal,  wliich  is  marked  by  a  red  and  black  buoy,  lies  2|  miles  S.  88<^  B. 
(S.  68°  E.  mag.)  from  Lark  Islet  lighthouse,  and  is  reported  to  have 
much  less  water. 

Lark  Point,  the  southwestern  entrance  point  of  the  Saguenay,  is 
2i  miles  from  Vaches  Point,  and  is  also  of  clay  cliffs,  but  nmch  lower 
than  those  of  Vaches  Point. 

Lark  Islet  is  composed  of  shingle  and  bowlders,  is  small  and  low, 
and  lies  one  mile  NE.  by  E.  from  Lark  Point,  and  is  .joined  to  it  by 
sand  and  bowlders  dry  at  low  water. 

Light— On  the  center  of  Lark  Islet  is  a  square  building,  40  feet 
high,  painted  white,  which  exhibits,  at  an  elevation  of  40  feet,  a  fixed 
white  light  visible  10  miles. 

Fog  Signal. — During  thick  weather,  fogs,  or  snowstorms,  a  fog  horn 
will  give  blasts  of  eight  seconds'  duration  every  half  minute.  The 
building  is  paiiiteil  gray,  with  a  brown  roof. 

Lark  Reef  is  of  sand  and  bowlders,  dry  at  low  water  nearly  out  to  the 
edge  of  the  shoal  water,  which  extends  Hit  miles  SE.  from  Lark  Point. 
Lark  Patch,  near  the  southern  end  of  this  reef,  never  covers,  and  out- 
side of  it,  ill  4^  fathoms  water,  lies  a  buoy  painted  red.  Between  this 
extensive  reef  and  Vaches  Point  Keef,  including  Bar  Reef  and  Prince 
Shoal,  is  the  entrance  of  Saguenay  River,  the  navigation  of  which  has 
been  described  in  the  previous  chapter. 

The  mark  for  leading  SE.  of  all  these  reefs,  including  Prince  Shoal,  is 
Brandy  Pots  open  of  White  Islets,  bearing  S.  15°  W.  (S.  35°  W.  mag.). 
Running  on  this  mark,  a  vessel  will  pass  about  J  mile  outside  Prince 
Shoal  and  Lark  Reef,  and  will  clear  the  Rocky  Patches  which  lie  IJ 
miles  eastward  of  Vaches  Patch  red  and  black  buoy.  The  least  water 
found  during  the  survey  on  these  Rocky  Patches  was  7i  fathoms,  but 
they  may  be  extending  eastward,  and  the  depth  over  them  be  decreas- 
ing, as  was  found  in  1859  to  be  the  case  with  Lark  and  Bar  Reefs,  and 
the  outer  patch  which  is  now  Prince  Shoal. 

Canard  River  is  a  small  stream,  at  the  western  termination  of  the 
clay  cliffs,  2 J  miles  8W.  from  Lark  Point,  and  can  only  be  approached 
in  a  boat  near  high  water. 

Echafaud  Islet  is  a  small  steep  and  rocky  islet,  lying  off  the  mouth 
of  a  cove  full  of  rocks  5  miles  SW.  of  Lark  Point.    Lark  Reef  termi- 


miles  S.  77°  E. 
tion  of  Vaches 

)ntal  bands,  is 

era  with  17  feet 

bS  considered  to 

of  1829.    This 

miles  S.  88^  B. 

ported  to  have 

e  Sagruenay,  is 
)at  nmcli  lower 

small  and  low, 
joined  to  it  by 

tiilding,  40  feet 
40  feet,  a  fixed 

rms,  a  fog  horn 
f  minute.    The 

early  out  to  the 
}m  Lark  Point, 
overs,  and  out- 
Between  this 
eef  and  Prince 
n  of  which  has 

Prince  Shoal,  is 
».  35°  W.  mag.), 
outside  Prince 
3S  which  lie  1^ 
I'he  least  water 
Ji  fathoms,  but 
lem  be  decreas- 
Bar  lieefs,  and 

nination  of  the 
be  approached 

J  oflF  the  mouth 
rk  Reef  termi- 


MASQITE   ROAD — MURRAY    BAY. 


323 


nates  close  southward  of  I5chafaud  Islet,  after  having  trended  for  5 
miles  SW.  by  W.  from  its  SE.  extreme. 

Cape  Basque,  the  first  mountainous  headland  SW.  of  the  Saguenay, 
lies  6^  miles  from  Lark  Point.  It  is  quite  bold,  having  -*0  fathoms 
close  to  it. 

Basque  Road,  between  Oape  Basque  and  Lark  Reef,  is  a  good 
anchorage,  well  sheltered  by  the  reef  from  easterly  winds,  and  by  the 
mainland  from  all  northerly  and  westerly  winds  as  far  southward  as 
SSW.  There  is  plenty  of  room  for  many  vessels,  but  the  best  berth  is 
with  lilchafaud  Islet  bearing  N.  88°  W.  (N.  68°  W.  mag  )  and  distant 
rather  less  than  one  mile,  where  th%  vessel  will  be  in  10  or  11  fathoms, 
with  clay  bottom,  and  nearly  ^  mile  from  the  3-fathom  line.  Vessels 
may  anchor  fsirther  out  in  13  fathoms;  but  the  farther  out  the  stronger 
the  stream.  At  the  anchorage  recommended  the  tidal  streams  are  not 
strong,  and  the  holding  ground  is  everywhere  good.  Thereis  no  anchor- 
age on  the  north  shore  SW.  of  this  to  Murray  Bay,  a  distance  of  28 
miles. 

Cape  Dogs,  5A  miles  southward  of  Oape  Basque,  is  quite  bold,  high, 
precipitous,  and  of  bare  granite.  Midway  between  tlie.se  capes  is  the 
Bay  of  Rocks,  having  an  island  and  many  large  rocks  in  it,  as  its  name 
implies,  and  affording  shelter  only  to  boats. 

Cape  Salmon  is  high  and  bold,  like  Cape  Dogs,  from  whiclf  it  is 
9jJ  miles.  SSW.  Between  these  capes  are  Shettle  Port,  Black  River, 
and  Port  Parsley,  at  2^,  4^,  and  7i  miles,  respectively,  from  Cape 
Dogs.    They  are  merely  places  for  boats. 

Light— On  the  NE.  extremity  of  Cape  Salmon,  locally  known  as 
Pointedes  Bodies,  is  a  white,  square  lighthouse  with  red  lantern.  The 
tower  rises  from  the  SE.  face  of  the  dwelling.  The  light  is  revolving 
white  every  fifteen  seconds,  elevated  77  feet,  and  visible  14  miles. 
Height  of  tower,  40  feet. 

Fog  Signal— A  steam  horn  gives  blasts  of  eight  seconds  with  silent 
intervals  of  twenty-two  seconds. 

Cape  Eagle  is  5J  miles  SW.  from  Cape  Salmon,  and  of  the  same 
bold,  high,  and  precipitous  character.  The  bay  between  these  capes  is 
one  mile  deep,  but  .iffords  no  anchorage  for  shipping  in  consequence 
of  the  great  depth  of  water.  In  it  is  Port  Salmon,  a  small  cove  which 
large  boats  can  enter  at  high  water,  about  U  miles  westward  of  Cape 
Salmon.  The  settlements  on  the  north  shore  spread  to  the  eastward 
of  this  place,  and  they  are  continuous  from  it  all  along  the  coast  to 
Quebec. 

Light— On  outer  end  of  pier,  at  east  end  of  Cape  Eagle,  a  fixed 
white  light  is  shown  from  a  mast,  it  is  elevated  38  feet  and  visible 
6  miles. 

(H.  O.  Chart  No.  1491.) 

Murray  Bay,  6J  miles  SW.  by  W.  from  Ca]ie  Eagle,  is  about  IJ 
miles  wide  and  nearly  as  deep;  but  it  is  all  dry  at  low  water,  excepting 


■i 


I 


? 


MettirriM.Tiag»iiif»iBM!iapCi 


%  iff  j-^7iiifif  fft  H«\ T^xXf'Vtif^t^Wf^'!.  '• 


magMgrnfi^ 


824 


8T.  LAWRENCE    BIVER. 


the  shallow  channels  leading  to  the  river  at  its  head.  The  river  flow- 
ing down  a  beautiful  valley  from  two  or  three  smnX\  l{ikes  among  the 
hills,  is  rapid  and  unnavigable.  There  is  a  church  and  village  round 
the  head  of  the  bay,  and  the  settlements  extend  some  miles  back  from 
the  St.  Lawrence.  There  are  grist  and  saw  mills  on  the  river.  At  the 
latter  deals  are  made,  and  are,  for  the  niost  part,  slipped  to  Quebec  in 
(}|uall  schooners,  which  lie  aground  near,  or  in  the  entrance  of,  the 
river.  Occasionally,  however,  vessels  anchor  off  and  take  in  cargoes  of 
lumber.  A  pier  has  been  constructed  here,  having  18  feet  of  water  at 
its  end  in  the  lowest  tides. 

A  shoal,  said  to  be  extending,  lies  ^  mile  NE.  of  the  pier  at  Pointe  ai^ 
Pic,  and  the  extreme  is  marked  by  a  red  can  buoy  in  2^  fathoms  water 
at  850  yards  northeastward  from  the  lighthouse.  Beween  the  buoy 
aTid  the  pier  there  is  a  shoal  with  5  feet  on  it  at  low  water.  St.  Ir6n6e 
church  well  open  of  Oape  Sain  leads  SE.  of  this  shoal,  and  vessels 
approaching  the  pier  should  keep  its  NE.  side  hidden  by  the  SE.  front. 

Slight  shocks  of  earthquakes  are  not  infrequent  at  Murray  Bay,  and. 
also  at  Eboulements,  St.  Paul  Bay,  and  the  neighborhood. 

Light — At  Pointe  au  Pic,  the  SW.  entrance  point,  from  a  lantern  on 
the  roof  of  the  freight  shed  on  the  wharf,  is  exhibited,  at  an  elevation 
of  30  feet,  a  fixed  white  light  that  should  be  visible  10  miles.  The  roof 
Qf  the  building,  which  is  27  feet  high,  is  red  and  the  lantern  white. 

Anc&orage. — The  anchorage  off  Murray  Bay  is  close  under  the  high 
rocky  shore,  a  lif^tle  eastward  of  the  bay,  with  Pointe  Heu  bearing  S. 
80°  W.  (N.  80°  W.  mag.)  800  yards.  The  bottom  is  of  clay,  good  for 
holding,  ^nd  the  depth  10  or  12  fathoms  at  about  600  yards  from  shore, 
bvit  not  above  ^  niile  from  the  edge  of  the  shoal  water.  Vessels  here 
will  be  out  of  the  strength  of  the  tides,  well  Sheltered  from  the  pre- 
vailing winds,  and  in  safety  if  well  moored,  although  inconveniently 
near  the  shore  except  in  the  case  of  a  vessel  taking  in  her  cargo.  It  is 
possible  to  anchor  a  little  farther  out  in  15  or  16  fathoms,  but  the  tidal 
streams  are  there  very  strong. 

X)irections. — In  running  up  frotn  the  northeastward  to  anchor  in 
Murray  Bay,  give  the  shore  a  berth  of  ^  mile,  in  order  to  avoid  the 
shoal  water  which  extends  nearly  4  mile  off  shore  midway  between  Oape 
Eagle  and  the  anchorage.  In  running  down  from  the  soiithwestward, 
keep  Gape  Sain,  the  first  point  westward  of  Pointe  au  Pic,  just  open 
southward  of  the  latter,  in  order  to  clear  the  edge  of  the  shoal  water 
which  fills  Murray  Bay;  and  when  the  church  bears  N.  65°  W.  (N.  46° 
W.  mag.),  a  vessel  may  haul  in  toward  the  anchorage. 

Ooose  Cape  is  the  extreme  of  a  small  wooded  bluff,  the  spur  of 
higher  coast  ranges.  It  is  bold,  and  lauding  may  be  effected  in  a  small 
cove  F6st  of  the  lighthouse  in  ordinary  weather.  The  ebb  stream 
sweeps  by  this  point  with  great  velocity. 

Zdght — From  a  square  building  42  feet  high,  with  dwelling  attached 


The  river  flow- 
l9>kes  among  the 
id  visage  round 
miles  back  from 
le  river.  At  the 
ped  to  Quebec  in 
entrance  of,  the 
ake  in  cargoes  qf 
i  feet  of  water  at 

pier  at  Pointe  a^ 
i^  fathoms  water 
leween  the  buoy 
ater.  St.  Ir6n6e 
loal,  and  vessels 
}y  the  SE.  front. 
I^urray  Bay,  and. 

LOOd. 

rom  a  lantern  on 
1,  at  an  elevation 
miles.  The  roof 
antern  white. 
le  under  the  high 
)  Heu  bearing  S. 
of  clay,  good  for 
rards  from  shore, 
)r.  Vessels  here 
ed  from  the  pre- 
h  inconveniently 
her  cargo.  It  is 
ms,  but  the  tidal 

trd  to  anchor  in 
der  to  avoid  the 
ay  between  Cape 
)  southwestward, 
u  Pic,  just  open 
'  the  shoal  water 
r.  650  W.  (N.  450 

tluff,  the  spur  of 
QTected  in  a  small 
The  ebb  stream 

L welling  attached 


CAPE   MARTIN — CAPE   BT.  JOSEPH. 


^25 


and  painted  white,  on  Goose  Ctipe,  is  exhibited,  at  an  elevation  uf  53 
feet,  a  fixed  white  light  that  should  be  visible  12  miles. 

Cape  Martin,  the  east  point  of  Eboulements  Bay,  is  a  conspicuous 
sharp  projecting  cliff.  Above  it  stands  the  church  of  Notre  Dame 
des  Eboulements  at  an  elevation  of  1,180  feet  above  high  water,  iii  the 
center  of  the  village. 

The  country  in  this  neighborhood  is  well  cultivated,  even  on  the  steep 
slopes  of  the  raneres  that  dominate  this  section  of  the  river.  3Iount 
Ebouleffip^   s,  lighest,  is  3,551  ffeet  ahnve  high  water,  and  is  sur- 

rounded ^.   Mnal'       lonical  hills. 

A  shoal  lies  in  the  bay  betwet^n  Goose  Gape  and  Gape  Martin  with 
6  feet  of  water  over  it  at  800  yards  from  the  shore. 

Anchorage. — The  anchorage  between  Goose  Gape  and  Cape  Martin 
is  good  and  well  sheltered  from  easterly  winds. 

Vessels  wishing  to  anchor  should  not  do  sd  until  the  west  extreme 
of  the  beach  of  shingle  that  extends  westward  from  Goose  Cape  bears 
N.  04°  W.  (N.  450  W.  mag.),  when  good  anchorage  may  be  had  in  7  to 
8  fathoms.  The  streams,  however,  are  irregular  here  and  occasionally 
strong.  When  at  anchor  too  far  out  in  8^  fathoms,  with  only  a  neap 
tide,  the  strength  of  which  was,  however,  aided  by  an  easterly  wind, 
the  first  of  the  flood  was  observed  coming  round  Goose  Cape  with  a 
great  rippling.  At  first  it  set  slanting  on  the  shore  at  the  rate  of  5 
knots,  but  soon  decreased  to  3^  knots.  About  one  hour  from  its  com- 
mencement the  stream  increased  again  to  4^  knots,  and  after  continuing 
at  that  rate  only  for  a  short  time,  decreased  to  2^  knots,  which  ratb 
it  retained  for  the  remainder  of  the  tide,  setting  fairly  along  shore. 
Farther  out — that  is,  in  10  fathoms — the  ebb  also  will  be  found  strong 
as  well  as  the  flood. 

Cape  St.  Joseph  in  line  with  Cape  Martin  bearing  8.  71°  W.  (west 
mag.)  leads  close  sotith  of  the  depth  of  18  feet  at  low  water  in  this 
anchorage. 

Cape  St.  Joseph  may  readily  be  recognized  by  the  sand  cliffii  facing 
it,  and  by  &  pier  extending  from  the  middle  of  the  proinbutory  with  a 
depth  of  9^  feet  at  the  eitreme  at  low  water. 

Light. — Frotti  a  mast  19  feet  high,  with  a  shed  at  the  base,  at  the 
extremity  of  the  pier  t^  Cape  St.  Joseph,  and  at  an  elevation  of  23  feet, 
i6  shown  a  fixed  white  light  that  shonld  be  visible  5  miles. 

A  eonspicuous  landslip  i^  close  to  the  shore  at  1^  miles  westward  bf 
Cape  St.  Joseph. 

The  shore  dries  at  low  water  for  a  considerable  distance  eastward 
and  Westward  of  Cape  St.  Joseph,  but  all  danger  will  be  avoided  by 
keeping  the  landslip  open  of  the  piCir  at  Cape  St.  Joseph  bearing  S.  86° 
Wi  (N.  75°  W.  mag.)  ttutil  Goose  Cape  is  in  line  with  Cape  Martili 
beftriri^  N.  64°  E.  (N.  83°  E.  mag.). 

This  latter  ihikrk  will  lead  in  mid-channel  to  St.  Paul  Bay. 


» 


i 


i 


h 


■  igii*fetwte-^^B^tf!a:i>'rJ%B-v^a»i»«.  -• 


tiMii 


S26  ST.  LAWRENCE    RIVER. 

NORTH  CHANNEL— BELOW   COUDRB8  ISLAND. 
(H.  O.  Chart  No.  1112.) 

General  Observations.— The  cbamiel  northward  of  Red  Islet  and 
its  bank,  and  between  the  latter  and  tlie  shoals  ott"  Sa^uenay  Itiver,  is 
2A  miles  wide,  between  the  .'J  fathom  lines,  and  the  water  is  very  deep. 
Farther  southwestward,  North  Channel  is  much  wider,  being  nowhere 
less  than  .'M  miles  in  breadth. 

North  Channel  from  Red  Islet  to  Coudres  Island  has  a  depth  of  water 
hsually  exceeding  30  and  sometimes  50  fathoms.  It  therefore  aflords 
no  ancliorage  except  those  described  in  the  last  section.  A  vessel,  how- 
ever,  might  anchor  on  the  NW.  side  of  Hare  Island  Bank,  and  English 
Bank  is  common  to  both  channels,  but  it  is  only  in  line  weather  that 
vessels  could  ride  in  such  exposed  situations. 

It  is  this  want  of  good  and  convenient  anchorages  which  renders  this 
part  of  North  Channel  unlit  for  general  use.  In  South  Channel  a  ves- 
sel  above  Cacouna  can  anchor  almost  anywhere  or  at  any  time  when  it 
may  become  necessary ;  but  in  North  Channel,  in  the  event  of  its  falling 
calm,  she  would  be  left  at  the  mercy  of  the  strong  tides,  and  might  be 
in  danger  of  being  set  on  shore  if  she  were  in  the  neighborhood  of  Red 
Islet  or  the  shoals  off  the  Saguenay.  In  other  respects  North  Channel 
is  a  fine,  wide,  and  straight  channel,  free  from  detached  slioals,  but 
with  easterly  winds  and  thick  weather,  or  at  night,  this  channel  should 
never  be  attempted.  Besides,  the  meeting  of  the  ebb  streams  down 
the  St.  Lawrence  and  out  of  the  Saguenay,  at  the  rate  of  5  or  6  knots, 
and  their  opposition  to  the  heavy  swell  up  the  estuary  in  NE.  gales, 
causes  a  very  heavy,  breaking  sea,  which  it  would  be  difiicult  to  dis- 
tinguish from  shoal  water. 

However,  supposing  the  circumstances  such  as  to  render  it  desirable 
for  a  vessel  to  take  North  Channel,  attend  to  the  following  directions: 

Open  the  half  of  Cacouna  Island  westward  of  Red  Islet,  and  then 
steer  so  as  to  open  Brandy  Pots  southward  of  White  Islet  about  the 
breadth  of  the  latter  and  bearing  S.  15°  W.  (S.  35°  W,  mag.).  Take 
care  to  open  Brandy  Pots  as  directed,  because  the  line  of  those  islands 
and  White  Islet  touching  passes  nearly  over  Rocky  Patches  (depth,  7J 
fathoms)  which  it  is  as  well  to  avoid,  in  case  there  may  be  less  water 
there.  The  cross  mark  for  these  Rocky  Patches  is  Red  Islet  in  line 
with  the  SW.  end  of  Green  Island.  Vessels  proceeding  against  the  ebb 
stream  will  find  no  difficulty,  with  the  assistance  of  the  charts,  in  pass- 
ing these  patches. 

Having  opened  Brandy  Pots  southward  of  White  Islet,  keep  them  so, 
as  the  vessel  runs  toward  them,  until  Green  Island  lighthouse  is  well 
open  southward  of  Red  Islet,  or  until  past  the  black  and  white  buoy 
on  Lark  Reef,  when  she  may  steer  directly  up  the  middle  of  the  chan- 
nel between  Hare  Island  and  the  north  shore.  In  the  event  of  the  wind 
and  tide  falling,  anchorage  will  be  found  on  Hare  Island  Bank,  English 


TIDES. 


327 


SD. 


r  Red  Islet  and 
uenay  Kiver,  is 
iv  is  very  deep, 
being  nowhere 

depth  of  water 
ierefore  affords 
A  vessel,  how- 
It,  and  English 
le  weather  that 

ich  renders  this 
Channel  a  ves- 
ly  time  when  it 
nt  of  its  falling 
,  and  might  be 
)orhoo<l  of  Red 
North  Channel 
ed  slioals,  but 
channel  should 

streams  down 
>f  5  or  6  knots, 

in  NE.  gales, 
litficalt  to  dis- 

ler  it  desirable 
]g  directions: 
islet,  and  then 
slet  about  the 
.  mag.).  Take 
f  those  islands 
ihes  (depth,  7J 
r  be  less  water 
d  Islet  in  line 
gainst  the  ebb 
harts,  in  pass- 
keep  them  so, 
ithouse  is  well 
id  white  buoy 
e  of  the  chau- 
nt  of  the  wind 
Bank,  English 


Bank,  Murray  Ray,  and  westward  of  (loose  Cape.    For,  dircitions  for 
North  (Channel  from  Couilres  Island  to  (Quebec,  see  page  350. 

Tides. — The  principal  stream  of  flood  ascends  along  the  northern 
sijleof  the  estuary.  One  part  of  this  stream  sets  from  beh)W  Bergeron 
Coves  toward  and  over  the  tail  of  Ui-d  Islet  Hank,  which  it  curves 
round  to  the  soutliward,  and  then  i)a88e8  into  North  (Channel  between 
Red  Islet  and  Hare  Island  North  Reef.  At  the  same  time  an  inferior 
stream  of  tlood  ascends  alony  the  sonth  shore  close  outside  Ra/.ade, 
Basque,  Apjile,  and  Clreen  Islands,  nnd  inside  of  them  also  after  the 
shoals  are  covered.  When  these  two  streams  of  flood  meet  the  last  of 
the  ebb,  and  afterwards  each  other,  between  (Ireen  Island  and  Red 
Islet,  they  cause  high  breaking  ripplings,  which  can  be  heard  iit  a 
great  distance  on  a  still  night,  and  which  appear  like  broken  water  on 
a  shoal.  Each  of  these  two  streams  of  Hood  is  strongest  near  its  own 
side,  and  there  is  consequently  little  or  no  flood  in  mid-channel,  particu- 
larly in  neap  tides  and  westerly  winds. 

Westward  of  Cacouna  Island  the  flood  in  South  Channel  sets  fairly 
up  the  river  on  either  side  of  Barrett  Ledges,  Middle  Shoal,  and  Middle 
Bank,  but  the  strongest  part  of  it  passes  up  tlie  deep  water  northward 
of  these  shoals,  between  them  and  Brandy  Pots  and  Hare  Island,  and 
at  the  rate  of  2^  or  3  knots  in  spring  tides.  On  arriving  at  Hare  Island 
Bank,  a  great  part  of  this  stream  passes  into  North  Channel  between 
that  bank  and  Hare  Island,  the  rest  over  the  tail  of  the  bank  into 
South  Channel.  The  Hood  sets  fairly  up  South  Channel,  and  between 
Pilgrim  Islands  and  Hare  Island  Bank,  but  becomes  very  weak  above 
them,  especially  in  neap  tides,  until  abreast  Orignaux  Point,  whence 
it  gradually  increases  in  strength,  beipg  aided  by  a  branch  of  the 
northern  stream  from  between  English  and  Hare  Island  Banks,  until 
it  attains  its  fiill  rate  of  7^  knots  in  South  Traverse. 

To  return  again  to  the  principal  stream  of  flood,  another  part  of  it 
passes  between  Bed  Islet  Bank  and  the  shoals  off  the  Saguenay,  while 
a  third  part  ascends  that  river  70  miles  to  the  rapids.  When  the  flood 
first  makes,  it  meets  the  ebb  down  the  channel  northward  of  Hare 
Island  and  causes  a  tremendous  rippling,  extending  from  Lark  Reef  to 
Red  Islet.  Above  that  islet  the  stream  of  flood,  after  sweeping  round 
westward  past  Rocky  Bay,  pursues  a  tolerably  fair  course  up  North 
Channel  as  high  as  Cape  Eagle,  oft'  which  it  divides,  the  southern  part 
proceeding  southward  of  English  Bank,  on  its  way  to  South  Traverse, 
while  the  northern  part  passes  between  English  Bank  and  the  north 
shore  up  to  Goose  Gape. 

Off  Goose  Cape  this  northern  part  of  the  stream  of  flood  again 
divides;  one,  the  lesser  and  weaker  part,  passing  southward  of  Coudres 
Island,  throws  oft"  at  the  first  of  the  tide  branches  to  the  southward, 
which  pass  over  the  western  part  of  English  Bank,  on  either  side  of 
Middle  Ground,  and  between  the  latter  and  the  shoals  eastward  of  the 
reefs  oft'  Seal  Islands,  into  South  Channel.    This  seems  to  arise  from  the 


d#«tiv.$«»iic>^<i.B:^s«a«&«tttwi^M 


^yi&ri^fSfi^iAti- 


ST.  LAWRENCE    RIVEB. 


flood  being  earlier  iu  North  than  iti  Bonth  Channel,  and  hence  the  first 
of  the  Hood  comes  from  the  north  at  South  TraverHe,  and  sets  for  about 
one  hour  uu  St.  Anne  and  St.  Itoch  Shoaln.  Tlie  other  and  principal 
part  passes  between  Coudres  Island  and  the  north  shore,  where  it 
attains  the  rate  of  5  knots  in  spring  tides. 

Little  need  be  added  respecting  the  ebb  stream  beyond  what  has 
already  been  said  in  the  course  of  this  chapter.  It  may,  however,  be 
remarked,  generally,  that  the  direction  of  the  ebb  stream  is  always 
nearly  the  contrary  to  that  of  the  Hood,  excepting  between  lied  Islet 
and  Green  Island  and  eastward  of  the  former.  The  principal  part  of 
the  ebb  down  North  Channel,  being  tnrned  to  the  SE.  by  Lark  Reef, 
comes  through  between  Hare  Island  iNorth  Keef  and  Ued  Islet,  setting 
over  toward  the  east  end  of  Green  Island  at  the  rate  of  r>  or  6  knots  in 
spring  tides.  The  ebb  out  of  Sagnenay  River  is  equally  strong,  and 
sets  over  toward  the  east  end  of  Red  Islet  Bank,  whence,  curving  to 
the  eastward,  it  unites  with  the  St.  Lawrence  ebb,  from  which  it  can 
be  readily  distinguished  by  the  dark  color  of  its  water,  and  both 
together  set  down  the  estuary,  as  has  been  explained  in  other  parts  of 
these  directions. 

It  may  be  useful  to  remark  here  that  the  Hood  and  ebb  are  less  un- 
equal in  duration  in  North  than  in  South  Channel,  and  that  in  both 
channels  the  streams  of  flood  and  ebb  upoh  an  average  continue  three- 
fourths  and  one  hour,  respectively,  after  it  is  high  and  low  water  by 
the  shore. 

The  times  of  the  high  and  low  water  by  the  shore  do  not  seem  to  be 
much  affected  by  winds;  but  the  amount  of  the  rise  and  fall  of  the 
tides  and  the  duration  of  the  streams  are  considerably  affected  by 
strong  winds;  nevertheless,  as  an  approximation  near  enough  for 
practical  purposes,  we  may  state  the^  when  the  stream  of  flood  makes 
in  mid-channel  the  tide  has  risen  by  the  shore,  at  Brandy  Pots  1^  fbet 
imd  at  South  Traverse  2^  feet;  and  also  that  when  the  stream  of  ebb 
tnakes,  the  tide  has  fallen  about  2  feet  by  ttie  shore.  But  as  it  is  of 
I:"portauce  to  know  the  proportional  amount  of  the  rise  and  fall  of  the 
tides  for  any  part  of  their  whole  duration,  when  a  large  vessel  is  to  be 
taken  over  certain  shallow  parts  of  the  river  above  South  Traverse^ 
this  subject  will  be  noticed  again  in  the  following  chapter. 


hetice  the  first 
1(1  setH  for  about 
r  and  princip»l 
shore,  where  it 

lyond  what  has 
iy,  however,  be 
ream  is  always 
ween  UeA  Islet 
riiicipal  part  of 
.  by  Lark  Keef, 
sd  Islet,  setting 
r>  or  6  knots  in 
illy  strong,  and 
juce,  curving  to 
)m  which  it  can 
ater,  and  both 
n  other  parts  of 

)bb  are  less  un- 

ud  that  in  both 

continue  three> 

id  low  water  by 

)  not  seem  to  be 
and  fall  of  thd 
bly  affected  by 
Bar  enough  for 
1  of  flood  makes 
idy  Pots  li  ftset 
le  stream  of  ebb 
But  as  it  is  of 
i  and  fall  of  the 
e  vessel  is  to  be 
)onth  Traverse) 
ter. 


— ^ 


1 


CHAPTER   XII. 

8T.   LAWRENC'K   RIVER,  SOUTH,   MIDDLE,   AND   NORTH   CHANNELS,  TO 

QUEBEC. 

QUEBBO. 
(rt.O.  Chart  No.  1112.) 

Wote.— The  vessel  has  now  arrived  at  the  most  difficult  part  of  the 
navigation  of  the  St.  Lawrence,  where  the  river  becomes  divided  into 
three  channels  by  shoals  and  islands.  The  eaHtern  entranccH  of  all 
three  of  these  channels  are  rendered  more  or  less  difficult,  either  by 
their  narrowness,  the  want  of  good  anchorage  in  them,  or  by  the 
strength  of  the  tides. 

South  Channel  lies  along  the  southern  shore,  and  between  it  and 
the  Mhoals  and  islands  occupying  the  central  part  of  the  river  from  the 
South  Traverse  to  Quebec.  This  channel  is  the  one  generally  used;  it 
is  buoyed,  and  is  preferable  to  the  others  for  the  general  purposes  of 
navigation,  having  excellent  anchorage  and  moderate  tides  in  every 
part,  excepting  for  a  few  miles  in  the  Traverse.  The  channel  between 
Beaujeu  Bank  aad  Crane  Island  has  also  been  buoyed  for  the  use  of 
large  vessels,  for  not  more  than  17  feet  at  low  water  can  be  carried 
through  eastward  of  that  bank,  where  nearly  all  vessels  used  formerly 
to  pass. 

Middle  Channel  lies  between  the  shoals  and  islands  which  form  the 
western  side  of  the  South  Channel  and  the  long  line  of  shoals  and  reefs 
which  extend  froia  Coudres  Island  to  Beaux  Island.  In  one  part  of  it, 
near  the  northeastern  entrance  of  the  Middle  Traverse,  there  are  not 
more  than  2J  fathoms  at  low  water.  Having  passed  this  shallow  part, 
there  is  both  room  and  water  enough  for  vessels  of  large  draft,  until 
they  arrive  at  the  group  of  islands  between  Crane  Island  and  Orleans 
Island,  where  the  Middle  Channel  communicates  with  South  Channel 
by  various  narrow  passages  between  the  islands.  There  is  plenty  of 
water  in  most  of  these  passages  at  all  times,  but  the  streams  seft  strongly 
through  them  and  they  are  too  intricate  and  difficult  for  general  navi- 
gation. The  other  and  better  channels  will  always  be  preferred  for 
general  use;  nevertheless,  Middle  Channel  ought  to  be  known  to  the 
pilots  in  common  with  every  other  channel  in  the  river. 

North  Channel  stretches  along  the  high  northern  shore  of  the  river, 
inside  Coudres  Island,  and  of  the  line  of  shoals  which  extend  from  the 
latter  to  Neptune  Eock  and  Burnt  Cape  Ledge,  and  from  thence  through 
North  Traverse  between  the  shoals  which  reach  from  Burnt  Cape  Ledge 

329 


I 
1 


i(#i«S»«fi-«SPSjl**.«*'^tt««*»#^«lvW'* 


If  ^r"ii'nitT.nriiria.iWrT"iin  -i  ■"ii<it^i^rr"ii~  -i 


i 


330 


8T.  LAWRENCE    KIVEB. 


H 


nearly  to  TJeanx  Island,  aiul  tluwo  which  Vw  otV  tho  NE.end  of  Orleans 
Island.  From  North  Traverse  this  channel  continnes  between  Keaux 
and  Madame  Islands  on  the  one  side  and  Orleans  Island  on  the  other 
till  it  unites  with  South  Channel  opposite  St.  Vallier. 

ThiH  channel  was  formerly  in  general  use,  but  it  is  now  little  known 
to  the  nuMority  of  the  pilots.  It  is  broader  than  South  Channel,  but 
the  streams  are  nnu-h  stronger,  and  the  Narrows  at  its  southwestern 
end  have  a  depth  of  only  24  feet  at  low  water ;  while,  with  the  ex(;eption 
of  the  contracted  passage  westward  of  Bea^jeu  Bank,  there  are  not  less 
than  U8  feet  in  South  Channel. 

Starting  with  the  beginning  of  a  fair  tide,  a  steamer  may,  however, 
gain  one  hour  in  the  passage  from  Green  Island  to  Quebec  by  taking 
North  rather  than  South  Channel. 

The  anch(.rage  generally  in  North  Channel  is  not  good,  the  bottom 
being  ftml  from  St.  Paul  liay  southward  to  Cape  Maillard,  also  because 
of  the  strength  of  the  tidal  streams.  Vessels  may,  however,  anchor  on 
the  western  edge  of  the  bank,  eastward  of  this  channel,  in  a  depth  of 
about  10  fathoms, 

Betw«Hni  Coudres  Island  and  the  northern  shore  of  the  river  there  is 
anch(»iuge  only  in  Prairie  and  St.  Paul  Bays,  both  of  which  afford 
security  under  all  conditions  of  wind  and  weather,  but  with  northerly 
winds  heavy  squalls  sweep  down  from  the  north  shore  hills. 

Above  Coudres  Island  there  is  a  fine  straight  channel  from  IJ  to  3J 
miles  wide,  entirely  free  from  danger.  The  water  is  not  incimveniently 
deep,  nowhere  exceeding  18  fathoms  at  low  water  in  mid-channel.  It 
is  generally  about  11  or  12  fathoms,  shoaling  toward  the  sides  of  the 
channel,  so  as  to  afford  good  anchorage  out  of  the  strength  of  the  tides. 
There  is,  however,  much  more  tide  and  more  sea  in  this  long  and  open 
reach  than  in  the  corresponding  parts  of  Simth  Channel;  and  in  the  fall 
of  the  year  the  NW.  squalls  off  the  mountains  are  heavy  and  freciuent. 
Altogether,  South  Channel  is  preferable  for  the  general  purposes  of 
navigation,  yet  North  Channel  is  good,  and  frequently  remains  free 
from  ice  some  time  after  South  Channel  becomes  unnavigable  in  the 
fall  of  the  year. 

Orleans  Channel  has  a  good  passage  for  small  vessels,  but  is  not 
available  for  those  of  large  draft.  It  is  marked  by  red  buoys  on  the 
northern  side  and  by  black  buoys  on  the  southern  side. 

SOUTH  CHANNEL,  THROUGH  THE  BOUTH  TBAVKUSE  TO  CKANE 

ISLAND. 

(H.  O.  Charts  Noa.  1491  and  1492.)  ^ 

South  Channel.— The  southern  shore  of  the  St.  Lawrence  Elver,  Irom 
St.  Roch  Point  to  St.  Thomas,  is  low  and  composed  of  slate;  inland  it 
rises  gradually  in  a  series  of  ridges  to  a  long  wooded  range,  which  is  4  J 
miles  from  the  river,  and  attains  an  elevation  of  1.220  feet.  The  houses 
are  almost  continuous  on  this  shore,  with  villages  near  the  churches. 


i'-4 


HOUIH   rFfANNKl,. 


331 


E.end  uf  Orleans 
'H  between  Koimx 
land  on  the  other 

now  little  known 
mtli  Channel,  but 

its  southwestern 
tritli  the  ex(!fpti(m 
,  there  are  not  less 

ler  may,  however, 
[Quebec  by  taking 

good,  the  bottom 
Hard,  also  because 
owever,  anchor  on 
nel,  in  a  depth  of 

f  the  river  there  is 
h  of  which  afford 
)nt  with  northerly 
ire  hills. 

nnel  from  1^  to  2J 
not  incimveniently 
ri  mid-channel.  It 
(1  the  sides  of  the 
reiigth  of  the  tides, 
this  long  and  open 
iiel;  and  in  the  fall 
eavy  and  freciuent. 
eneral  purposes  of 
ently  remains  free 
[innavigable  in  the 

vessels,  but  is  not 
red  buoys  on  the 
ide. 

BUSE  TO   OKANE 


iwrence  River,  ti'om 
[of  slate;  inland  it 
I  range,  which  is  4J 
0  feet.  The  houses 
near  the  churches. 


Snpplii'H  in  small  ciuantitics  nmy  generally  be  obtained  at  the  villages, 
with  tlic  exception  of  (umi. 

Churches.— The  churclies  at  St.  Jean,  Ht.  lOugene,  St.  Ignace,  St. 
^Thomas,  an<l  Berthier  have  each  one  8i>ire;  those  at  St.  Koch  and 
L'Islet  have  each  two  spires.  ! 

Pieri.— The  pier  at  St.  .Jean  has  a  depth  of  3  feet  at  low  water  at  its 
outer  end;  at  LTslet  the  i)ier  is  l,liOO  feet  long,  with  a  depth  of  7  feet 
at  low  water  close  to  its  outer  end;  a  wooden  frame  beacon,  painted 
black,  stands  on  the  extremity  of  this  pier.  A  small  i)ier  has  been 
erected  at  Anso  lY  Giles,  .'JJ  miles  southwestward  from  I.' Islet,  and 
another  1,^  miles  southwestward  of  Cape  St.  Ignace,  but  both  dry  at 
about  half  tide.  There  is  also  a  wharf  on  ;Iie  eastern  side  oi"  Cape  St. 
Ignace,  but  it  can  only  be  approached  at  or  near  higii  v.  iter. 

Railway  and  Telegraph.— St.  Jean  Port  .loli,  L'klot,  St,  Ignace, 
and  St.  Thomas  are  connected  with  Quebec  and  Halifax  by  the  Inter- 
colonial railway,  which  runs  along  the  right  bank  of  lae  St.  L  utrrence 
about  one  mile  inland  from  these  villages.  The  railway  sttii  ns  are 
also  connected  with  all  parts  of  Canada  and  the  United  States  by 
telegraph. 

Shoals.- The  northern  edge  of  the  shoal  grouiu  oi"  St.  Jean  Port 
Joli  is  only  .}  mile  southeastward  of  Channel  Patch. 

Two  shoals,  with  depths  of  4  and  7  feet  over  them,  reported  to  have 
been  formed  since  L'Islet  Pier  was  built,  lie  in  the  line  of  that  pier, 
300  aiid  COO  yards  respectively  from  its  outer  end.  Other  shoals,  with 
depths  of  (>  feet,  lie  SW.  of  the  extremity  of  L'Islet  Pier. 

Trois  Saumons  River,  nearly  i  miles  southwestward  of  St.  Jean 
Port  Joli,  has  a  large  sawmill  near  its  mouth.  This  river,  and  also  the 
stream  at  Port  Joli,  one  mile  northeastward,  will  admit  small  craft  at 
about  half  tide. 

L'Islet — A  conspicuous  cross  is  erected  on  a  cliff,  69  feet  high,  one 
mile  northeastward  of  L'Islet  church. 

The  telegraph  and  signal  station  at  L  '.t  is  300  yards  northeastward 
of  the  church  and  close  westward  oi  l./c  convent,  which  is  a  square 
stone  building  surmounted  by  a  turret. 

St.  Ignace.— The  church  is  OJ  miles  southwestward  from  L'Islet,  and 
nearly  f  mile  southeastward  of  Lape  St.  Ignace,  which  is  a  conical 
rocky  mound,  52  feet  high,    o-  ered  with  small  bushes. 

St  Thomas. — Two  rivers  unite  and  discharge  their  waters  here.  Bras 
St.  Nicholas  flowing  from  the  eastward,  and  Rivifere  du  Sud  from  the 
southward.  The  combined  streams  fall,  in  a  cascade  about  30  I'oet  high, 
to  a  small  bight,  ^  mile  eastward  of  the  church.  A  sawmill  is  in  opera- 
tion on  the  eastern  side  of  the  falls.  St,  Thomas  church  is  on  the  left 
bank  of  Riviere  du  Sud,  oj  miles  southwestward  from  St.  Ignace. 

The  channel  from  St.  Thomas  to  the  St.  Lawrence  River  trends  north- 
easterly in  one  bend,  and  is  generally  marked  by  cask  buoys.  It  nearly 
dries  at  low  water. 

The  high-water  bank  near  St.  Thomas  has  receded  considerably 


■)/ 


332 


ST.  LAWRENCE   RIVER. 


since  the  survey  of  1827,  about  600  feet  apparently  having  bein  waslied 
away,  and  each  year  more  is  brolcen  away  by  ice  and  «ea.  The  low- 
water  litte,  however,  is  nearly  the  same  as  at  that  date,  except  that 
bowlders  are  now  visible,  at  low  water,  beyond  the  northeastern  ex- 
treme of  St.  Thomas  Bank. 

Light. — From  it,  mast  25  feet  high^  with  a  brown  shM  at  the  base, 
built  on  the  outet  end  of  the  Government  pier,  at  the  west  etitrah(ie 
point  of  Eivi^re  dti  Sttd  is  exhibited,  at  all  elevation  of  30  fbet,  a  flied 
light  showing  red  in  the  channel  to  tlie  river  and  white  ih  all  other 
directions  seaward,  that  should  be  visible  6  miles. 

St  Roch  Shoals  join  those  of  St.  Anne  and  dontinnd  westward  in 
South  Bank,  which  extends  a  considerable  distance  from  the  shore  frdm 
St.  Boch  to  St.  Thomas.  South  Traverse  lightvessels  in  line,  bearing 
S.  27°  W.  (S.  46°  W.  mag.),  lead  westward  of  these  shoals. 

Buoys. — A  buoy,  painted  biack,  is  moored  in  28  feet  water,  2^  miles 
N,  46°  E.  (2f.  05°  B.  mag.)  from  liower  Traverse  lightvessel,  close  west- 
ward of  a  shoal  with  16  feet  water  on  it  lying  oil"  the  northwestern 
angle  of  St.  Roch  Shoals,  and  the  black  buoy  marking  the  SW.  angle 
of  these  shoals  is  now  moored  close  westward  of  a  rock  with  24  feet 
water  over  it,  with  St.  Roch  church  bearing  N.  78°  B.  (S.  83°  E.  mag.) 
and  St.  Jean  Port  Joli  church  S.  17°  B.  (S.  2°  W.  mag.). 

Lights. — Lower  Traverse  lightvessel,  with  two  masts,  is  moored  in 
24  feet  water  at  the  NB.  angle  of  the  northernmost  of  St.  Koch  Slioals. 
It  is  painted  red,  with  the  words  Lower  Traverse  in  white  letters  on  the 
sides.  From  the  foremast  a  fixed  white  light  is  shown  at  an  elevation 
of  25  feet,  and  from  the  mainmast  a  fixed  white  light  at  31  feet,  also  a 
fixed  red  light  from  a  stay  between  the  two  at  49  feet,  respectively, 
above  the  water.  " 

These  lights  should  be  seen  9  miles. 

Fog  SigttaL— A  whistle  is  sounded  for  twelve  seconds  6f  every  min- 
ute in  thick  weather,  fogs,  or  snowstorms. 

Ill  c^se  the  vessel  should  be  out  of  position  the  ball  at  the  mainmast- 
head  will  be  taken  down  and  one  White  light  only  will  be  shown  at 
night. 

Upper  Traverse  lightvessel  has  two  masts  and  is  moored  in  25  feet 
Water  ofi"  the  iiorthernmost  of  St.  Roch  Shoals^  It  is  painted  red,  With 
the  words  Upper  Traverse  in  white  letters  Od  each  side^  From  each 
of  the  mastheads  is  exhibited  a  fixed  white  light  at  elevations  of  25 
and  31  feet,  l^eSpectitely,  which  should  be  seen  6  miles. 

Should  this  vessel  be  ottt  of  positioii,  the  light  on  the  foremai^t  only 
will  be  shdWu  at  night,  and  iu  day  the  ball  at  the  foremasthead  Will  be 
taken  down. 

Fog  Signal. — A  bell  is  sounded  in  thick  weather,  fogs,  or  snowstorms. 

Biioy. — A  black  buoy  is  moored,  in  24  feet  water,  between  the  light- 
Vessels  and  NW.  of  St.  Roch  Shoals  at  1,100  yards  from  Lower  Tra- 
verse lightvessel,  with  the  two  beacons  near  the  church  in  line. 


SOUTH    CHANNEL. 


333 


Eiving  betin  washed 
md  «ea.    The  low- 
date,  except  that 
>  northeastern  ex- 

shM  at  the  base, 

the  west  eutrahce 

I  of  30  fleet,  a  flied 

white  in  all  other 

tinn6  Westward  in 
'om  the  shore  frdm 
)ls  in  line,  bearing 
ihbals. 

)et  water,  2^  miles 
fcvessel,  close  west- 
'  the  northwestern 
ng  the  SW.  angle 
i  rock  with  24  feet 
B.  (S.  83°  E.  mag.) 

tg-)- 

lasts,  is  moored  in 
if  St.  Koch  Shoals, 
yhite  letters  on  the 
vn  at  an  elevation 
it  at  31  feet,  also  a 
» feet,  respectively, 


londs  of  every  mln- 

11  at  the  mainmast- 
y  will  be  shown  at 

s  moored  in  25  feet 

[s  painted  red.  With 

1  side^    From  each 

at  elevations  of  25 

[es. 

I  the  foremast  only 

remasthead  Will  b($ 

9gg,  or  snowstorms, 
between  the  light- 
is  from  Lower  Tra- 
irch  in  line. 


South  Traverse  is  a  passage  ^  mile  wide,  between  St.  Kocli  Shoals, 
on  the  eatiterii  side  of  which  are  moored  the  liglitvessels  and  buoy. 

The  tidal  streams  run  through  the  channel  with  great  velocity,  attain- 
ing 8  knots  an  hour  in  spring  tides  with  the  ebb  and  7^  knots  with  the 
flood. 

Middle  Q-round  forms  the  NW.  side  of  this  channel  and  is  marked 
by  three  red  buoys. 

Buoys. — The  northeasternmost  is  an  intermittent  light  buoy  in  31 
feet,  the  middle  a  can  buoy  in  19  feet,  close  westward  of  Lower  Traverse 
lightvessel,  and  the  southwesternmost  a  can  buoy  in  28  feet  northwest- 
ward of  Upper  Traverse  lightvessel,  and  with  the  western  beacons  at 
St.  Jtoch  in  line. 

With  strong  winds  the  two  southwestern  buoys  are  often  difBcult  to 
distinguish  excej)t  by  the  ripple  near  them,  as  they  are  nearly  dragged 
under  %vater  by  the  velocity  of  the  stream. 

Channel  Patch,  marked  by  a  bell  and  light  buoy  checkered  black 
and  white,  and  showing  an  intermittent  white  gas  light,  the  period  of 
occnltation  being  about  six  seconds,  lies  directly  in  the  way  of  vessels; 
from  the  patch.  Stone  Pillar  bears  S.  35°  W.  (S.  54°  W.  mag.)  2^  miles 
nearly,  witli  its  north  extreme  just  shutting  in  the  highest  part  of 
Goose  Island  Eeef,  and  a  sugarloaf-shaped  beacon  near  St.  Jean  Port 
Joli  church  is  just  opened  eastward  of  the  church,  bearing  S.  60°  E. 
(S.  41°  E.  mag.).  This  buoy  alters  its  position  about  200  yards  with  the 
tides,  and  is  frequently  adrift.  The  least  depth  that  could  be  found  on 
Channel  Patch  in  1886  was  21  feet,  although  three  examinations  were 
made  of  the  locality  at  slack  water ;  probably  a  bowlder  has  been  carried 
away  frpm  the  summit,  as  the  depth  recorded  in  1827  was  only  18  feet. 

Several  shoals  with  depths  of  15  to  18  feet  over  them  lie  between 
Stone  Pillar  and  Channel  Patch.  They  may  all  be  avoided  by  keeping 
the  highest  part  of  Goose  Island  Reef  just  open  of  Stone  Pillar,  bearing 
S.  38°  W.  (S.  57°  W.  mag.).  This  mark  must  only  be  kept  on  while  a 
vessel  is  southward  and  westward  of  Channel  Patch. 

Yessels  should  not  proceed  northward  of  Channel  Patch,  several 
shoals  having  been  found  between  it  and  Stone  Pillar. 

Seal  Islands  consist  of  a  long  reef  of  slate,  which  is  covered  at  high 
water,  with  the  exception  of  three  islets,  each  of  which  is  6  feet  above 
high  water.  There  are  three  houses  on  the  easternmost  islet,  with  a 
cross  and  two  high  bushes  near  them ;  on  the  westernmost  islet  a  con- 
spicuous spruce  tree  is  surrounded  by  low  bushes.  > 

The  Pillars  are  two  small  and  steep  islets  of  graywacke,  named 
Wood  Pillar  and  Stone  Pillar. 

The  former  is  600  yards  long  and  81  feet  above  high  water.  The 
beacon  on  this  islet  is  not  painted,  and  being  partially  obscured  by 
trees,  can  only  be  seen  from  a  short  distance.  A  shoal  extends  from 
the  NE.  point  of  Goose  Island  to  Wood  Pillar,  and  continues  2J  miles 
farther  NE. 


; 


■■■■njutj.T=;  --^.':'i'' 


884 


ST.  LAWRENCE   RIVER. 


♦ 
I. »,  jf 


stone  PUlar  lies  U  miles  eastwai  d  of  Wood  Pillar,  and  is  quite  bare. 
Shoals  with  depths  from  2^  to  3^  fathoms  water  on  them  extend  in  a 
line  from  Stone  Pillar  to  Channel  Patch,  and  this  passage  should  not 
be  attempted.  Middle  Rock,  between  the  pillars,  dries  17  feet  at  low 
water',  and  is  joined  to  Wood  Pillar  by  a  shoal.  ,     .    -i^ 

LiEHt-The  lighthouse  erected  upon  Stone  Pillar  is  a  circular  build- 
ing of  gray  stone,  52  feet  high,  and  stands  about  100  yards  from  its 
south  point.  It  exhibits,  at  an  elevation  of  83  feet,  a  revolving  white 
licht  every  half  minute,  and  should  be  visible  14  miles. 

Algernon  or  South  Rock  is  steepto  on  all  sides  but  the  northeast- 
ern from  which  shoal  water  extends  300  yards  to  a  depth  of  18  feet, 
r  'oik  with  a  depth  of  18  feet  over  it,  lies  N.  34°  E.  (N  53o  E.  mag.) 
700  yards,  and  a  shoal  with  26  feet  water,  K  37°  E.  (N.  56°  E.  mag.)  3 
nile!  respectively,  from  South  Kock.  The  highest  Part  of  Goose 
Island  Reef  just  open  of  South  Rock  lighthouse,  bearing  S.  43°  W. 
rs  G20  W.  mag.)  leads  southward  of  these  shoals,  and  the  jhole  of 
Lne  Island  well  open  of  Goose  Island  Reef,  bearing  S.  47°  W  (S.  66o 
W.  mag.)  loads  southward  of  South  Rock,  and  of  the  shoals  between  it 

and  Goose  Island  Reef.  r  ,•  i,i.u  .,o« 

Lieht-Ou  Algernon  or  South  Rock  is  a  square,  white  lighthouse, 
32  feet  high,  exhibiting,  at  an  elevation  of  36  feet,  a  Axed  white  light, 
which  should  be  visible  6  miles.  . 

Qoose  Island  Reef.  2  miles  southwestward  of  Stone  Pillar,  consists 
•    of  a  ledge  of  rock,  1%  miles  in  length,  trending  with  tbe  direction  of  the 
river     Several  small  heads  are  visible  at  all  times  of  tide.   The  highest 
mrt  a  rugged  conical  mound  29  feet  high,  is  near  the  southwestern 
extreme  of  the  reef,  and  is  occasionally  surmounted  by  a  beacon     An 
isolated  rock,  which  dries  2  feet  at  low  water  lies  nearly  J  mile  N  38o 
E  (1^  570  E.  mag.)  from  the  NE.  extreme  of  Goose  Island  Reef.   There 
a^e  five  shoal  spots  between  Stone  Pillar  and  Goose  Inland  R^M^ith 
deuths  of  16, 11, 12, 13,  and  18  feet  on  them,  and  bearing  S.  49o  W.  (8. 
S  W.l^Uistant  one  mile;  S.  52°  W.  (S.  71°  W.  mag^),l*  mUes; 
S   40O  W.  (S.  590  W.  mag.),  1.%  miles;  S.  38°  W.  (S.  57°  W.  mag.),  IJ 
niiles  and  S  32°  W.  (S.  51°  W.  mag.),  distant  H  miles,  respectively, 
from  Stone  Pillar  lighthouse.    Several  small  detached  rocks  he  off  the 
southeastern  side  ot  Goose  Island  Reel,  but  they  do  not  extend  more 
fhm  200  yards  from  it.    A  rock  with  a  depth  ot  8  feet  is  midway  between 
the  southwestern  extreme  of  Goose  Island  Reef  and  Goose  Island. 

A  long  spit-  with  shoals  on  it  varying  in  depth  firom  9  to  11  feet, 
extends  for  nearly  H  miles  from  the  southwestern  extreme  of  Goose 
Islaud  Reef.  Stone  Pillar  lighthouse,  open  southward  of  the  highest 
part  of  that  reef,  bearing  N.  38°  E.  (N.  57°  E  "^^g'^'^^f^^.^f  ^^/.^.^f, 
ward  of  this  spit,  and  the  deepest  water  m  thechanne  will  be  found 
by  passing  about  8U0  yards  southeastward  of  Goose  Island  Reef  and 

^^aow'e  Island  is  composed  of  wooded  hilly  ground,  divided  by  a 


# 


id  is  quite  bare. 
8in  extend  in  a 
tage  should  uot 
s  17  feet  at  low 

a  circular  build- 
I  yards  from  its 
revolviug  white 

it  the  northeast- 
iepth  of  18  feet. 
[N.  53°  B.  mag.) 
r.  56°  E.  reag.)  k 
part  of  Goose 
aring  S.  43°  W. 
id  the  whole  of 
S.  47°  W.  (S.  66° 
ihoals  between  it 

rhite  lighthouse, 
Ixed  white  light, 

le  Pillar,  consists 
e  direction  of  the 
ide.   The  highest 
the  southwestern 
)y  a  beacon.    An 
irly  J  mile  N.  38° 
land  Reef.   There 
Island  Reef,  with 
ring  S.  49°  W.  (S. 
'.  raag.),li  miles; 
570  W.  mag.),  IJ 
liles,  respectively, 
sd  rocks  lie  off  the 
>  not  extend  more 
is  midway  between 
Goose  Island, 
from  9  to  11  feet, 
extreme  of  Goose 
ird  of  the  highest 
),  leads  close  east- 
nnel  will  be  found 
B  Island  Reef  and 

und,  divided  by  a 


MHMH 


SOUTH  CHANNEL. 


335 


valley  into  north  and  south  ranges.  Near  the  southwestern  extreme 
are  two  round  summits,  elevated  203  feet  above  high  water.  A  chain 
of  hillocks  that  from  a  distance  appear  like  islands,  and  on  wliich  are 
several  conspicuous  houses,  with  barns  near,  extends  soutliw^stward 
from  the  northern  range.  From  an  elevation  of  168  feet  tlie  northern 
range  falls  in  clifty  banks,  and  at  its  northeastern  extreme  is  a  large 
white  barn,  which  is  very  conspicuous  from  all  northerly  directions.  A 
large  sugarloaf  beacon,  painted  red,  stands  on  a  small  detached  islet 
close  southward  of  the  northeastern  extreme  of  Goose  Island. 

The  meadows  of  Goose  Island,  estending  4J  miles  southwestward 
from  its  S  W".  extreme,  connect  it  with  Crane  Island.  The  meadows  are 
only  just  aliove  high  water  of  ordinary  spring  tides  and  are  intersected 
by  numerous  streams,  that  have  cut  deep  channels  in  the  mud  and  are 
impassable  between  half  flood  and  hah'  ebb.  After  the  harvest  the 
meadows  are  covered  with  haystacks,  which,  from  a  distance,  resemble 
small  houses  and  are  erected  on  framework  to  prevent  the  loss  that 
would  otherwise  be  occasioned  by  exceptionally  high  tides. 

Several  rocks  lie  o£f  the  southeastern  shore  of  Goose  Island,  all  of 
which  cover  at  high  water,  except  Rocher  aux  Grelons  (formerly  mis- 
called Ghapei  Rock),  which  is  4  feet  above  high  water  and  on  the  outer 
edge  of  thjB  shore  that  dries  at  low  water,  and  Hospital  Rock,  which 
is  10  feet  high.  Chapel  Rock  is  on  the  meadows,  and  is  named  from  a 
church  which  formerly  stood  there,  the  foundations  of  which  are  still 
to  be  seen. 

Beacon. — A  wooden  pyramidal  beacon,  painted  white,  and  about  30 
fe^t  high,  stands  on  the  southern  shore  of  Goose  Island  meadows  at  a 
little  more  than  2  miles  southwestward  of  Hospital  Rock. 

Dunscombe  Rock,  1,700  yards  S.  by  E.  from  Hospital  Rock,  has 
14  feet  least  water,  with  5  fathoms  close  to.  From  the  rock  Mount 
Tourmente  appears  in  line  over  summit  of  Onion  Island,  bearing  3. 83° 
"W.  (N.  78'^  W.  mag.),  and  the  north  side  of  Wood  Pillar  touching  the 
south  side  of  Goose  Island. 

Crane  Island  rises  to  an  elevation  of  132  feet,  and  is  generally  flat 
in  outline.  The  lower  part  of  the  land  is  cultivated,  but  the  summit 
and  southwestern  slope  are  wooded.  Mac]>herson  (now  Le  Moine) 
house  and  the  barns  near  are  conspicuous  objects  at  the  northeastern 
extreme  of  the  island,  and  numerous  beacons  are  erected  on  the  south- 
eastern shore.  On  the  northwestern  side  there  is  an  almost  continuous 
line  of  houses,  with  a  cliurch  built  of  bricks  and  surmounted  by  a  spire 
in  the  middle  of  them.  This  church  can  rarely  be  seen  from  South 
Channel. 

Light — On  the  south  side  of  Crane  Island,  at  the  end  of  a  pier,  about 
ItV  miles  eastward  of  Pointe  aux  Pins,  the  southwestern  extreme,  is 
an  octagonal  lighthou&e,  48  feet  high,  ])ainted  white,  which  exhibits, 
at  an  elevation  of  48  feet,  an  intermittent  white  light,  showing  bright 


V0^f0^t^f 


in 


IM 


11  !W' 

!  :  f 
If  «t 


336 


ST.  LAWEENCE   RIVES. 


for  tweuty-six  seconds  and  boiug  obscured  for  four  seconds  in  every 
half  minute,  visible  12  miles. 

Prohibited  Anchorage. — On  Crane  Island,  about  f  mile  SVV.  of 
Le  Moiae  house,  are  two  white  sugarloaf  beacons,  and  two  wliite 
sugarloaf  beacons  are  situated  about  4  uiile  NE.  of  the  same  house. 
These  mark  a  space  within  which  no  ships  are  allowed  to  anchor,  as  the 
entrances  to  the  channels  north  and  south  of  Beaujeu  Bank  are  here 
much  contracted.  Between  these  beacons  two  diamond- shaped  bea- 
cons have  been  erected,  which  in  hue  led  to  the  white  light  buoy  at  the 
aouthwesteru  end  of  the  Beaiyeu  Bank. 

Beaujeu  Baiik  is  a  narrow  shoal  of  saud  and  gravel  over  slate,  and 
has  not  more  than  10  feet  at  low  water  over  some  parts  of  it.  Its  SW. 
end  approaches  to  within  f  mile  of  Grape  Island. 

Light  Buoys. — The  northeastern  extreme  of  Beavyeu  Bank  is  marked 
by  a  light  buoy  painted  red  and  black  in  horizontal  stripes,  apd  show- 
ing a  pink  light,  moored  with  L'fslet  church,  bearing  N.  70°  ^.  (N,  8y=> 
E.  mag.),  distant  4  miles,  and  St.  Iguace  ehurch,  S.  4°  E.  (S.*  15°  W, 
ipag.),  and  the  southwestern  extreme  by  a  white  pillar  buoy  surmounted 
by  a  bell  and  light  showing  an  intermittent  light,  moored  with  Crane 
Island  lighthouse,  bearing  S.  47°  W.  (S.  66°  W.  mag.),  distant  2  miles. 

Buoys. — A  buoy  paipted  red  is  moored  in  24  feet  on  the  northwestern 
side  of  Beaiyeu  Channel,  nearly  a  mile  south  westward  of  t  ie*  light  buoy 
^t  the  northeasterii  extreme  of  Beaujevi  Bank ;  and  another  buoy  painted 
red  is  moored  in  the  same  depth  200  yards  westward  of  the  light  luoy 
^t  the  southwestern  extreme  of  th^it  bi^nk,  and  on  the  western  side  of 
the  n$vrrow  channel  westward  of  Bet^ujeu  Bank, 

Channel  S:^.  of  Beaiyeu  Bank.— The  4^pth  in  this  channel  is  irreg- 
ular, varyiiig  from  £»  fathoms  to  17  feet,  p.nd  there  is  oue  rocky  patch 
of  17  feet  in  the  waiy,  and  di^cult  to  avqid,  so  that  the  latter  depth  is 
all  that  could  be  carried  through  there  without  buoys  at  low  spring 
tides  unless  the  vessel  were  conducted  by  an  unusually  skillful  pilot, 
in  which  case  3^  fathoms  might  be  reckoned  upon.  The  channel  is  ^  to 
I  mile  wide. 

Beatgeu  Channel,  NW.  of  Beaiyeu  Bank,  is  4  to  ^  mile  wide,  an4 
has  from  4^  to  9  fathomis  water,  the  shoalest  and  narrowest  part  being 
near  the  SW.  end  of  the  bank. 

Farther  southwestward  the  SE.  side  of  Crane  Island  is  so  bold  that 
it  may  be  approached  to  the  distance  of  400  yards.  A  buoy,  painted 
black,  marks  a  shoal  with  a  depth  of  IG  feet  on  the  southern  side  of 
the  channel  abreast  Crane  Island  lighthouse.  Two  sugarloaf-shaped 
beacons  at  the  SW.  end  of  Crane  Island  are  used  as  a  cross  mark  tu 
lay  this  buoy. 

St.  71^oniaB  Bank  is  that  part  of  South  Bank  which  extends  rather 
more  than  2  miles  ofl'  shore  at  the  village  of  St.  Thomas.  It  consists 
of  sand,  mud,  and  stones,  and  is  dry  at  low  water  nearly  to  its  northern 
edge,  which  is  very  steep.    The  appareu  t  northern  extreme  of  the  range 


ieconds  iu  every 

;  §  mile  SVV.  of 
aud  two  white 
the  same  house, 
to  auehor,  as  the 
I  Bank  are  here 
ond- shaped  bea- 
iight  buoy  at  the 

)1  over  slate,  and 
sofit.    ItaSW. 

I  Bank  is  marked 
iripes,  apd  show- 
!f .  TOO  js.  (X.  gijo 

40  E.  (s:  150  w. 

)i|oy  surmounted 
ored  with  Crane 
distant  2  miles, 
the  northwestern 
of  tie  light  buoy 
Iter  bupy  painted 
)f  the  light  luoy 
B  western  side  of 

I  channel  is  irreg- 
one  rocky  patch 
e  latter  depth  is 
ys  at  low  spring 
Uy  skillful  pilot, 
iie  channel  is  ^  to 

^  mile  wide,  and 
Dwest  part  being 

d  is  so  bold  that 
A  buoy,  painted 
southern  side  of 
sugarloaf-shaped 
1  a  cross  mark  to 

h  extends  rather 
nas.  It  consists 
ly  to  its  northern 
•erne  of  the  range 


SOUTH  CHANNEL. 


337 


of  liilla  on  the  southoiii  shore,  Just  oi)»'ii  soutliwiird  of  Onmo.  Island 
lightliouse  bearing,  ^\  ^J-^  ].:. ,  x.  70°  IC.  iiiajj;-.),  will  lead  northwestward 
of  «t.  1'homas  I'.ank  in  the  ileepest  water.  A  black  I)iioy  is  moored  on 
the  NVV.  extren-e  of  the  hank,  in  ;{  fathoms,  fn.m  wliich  Haystack 
Island  appears  in  line  with  the  SW.  extreme  of  Crane  Island:  and  the 
red  su-iarloaf  beacon  and  the  white  diamond  beacon  on  the  south  side 
of  Crane  Island  are  also  in  line. 

Tides.— The  rise  and  i'all  of  the  tide,  for  every  hour  after  h)w  and 
high  wiiter,  will  be  seen  in  the  table  at  paf-e  IWJ,  and  from  it  tlie  depth 
of  water  at  any  time,  over  any  shallow  iiai  t  of  the  river,  may  easily  be 
deduced.  Moreover,  large  ships  should  not  run  through  Soutli  Traverse 
at  night,  if  the  weather  be  bad  and  so  dark  that  the  buoys  and  the  land 
can  not  be  seen;  for,  although  the  bearings  of  the  light's  and  the  lead 
might  enable  a  skillful  and  exwrienced  pilot  to  take  sn<h  ships  safely 
through  on  the  last  half  of  the  streani  of  Ihtod,  yet  it  would  be  a  heavy 
charge  and  attended  with  some  risk.  It  is  desirable  for  vessels  in  gen- 
oral  coming  up  the  river,  even  with  a  fair  wind,  to  pass  South  Traverse 
.m  the  flood  tide;  for  the  ebb  is  so  strong  between  the  buoys  that  little 
progress  will  be  made  against  it,  even  with  a  strong  breeze. 

Directions  for  South  Traverse.— Ca])e  Diablc  should  be  kept  open 
of  Orignaux  Point  lighthouse  bearing  N.  06°  E.  (N.  75°  E.  mag.)  until 
(l(e  lightvessels  come  in  line  bearing  S.  L'8o  W,  (S.  47°  W.  mag.),  when 
they  may  be  steered  for.  The  lirst  of  the  Hood  will  set  to  the  southward, 
toward  St.  Koch  Shoals,  and  the  ebb  in  the  contrary  direction ;  the  mari- 
ner must  therefore  be  guided  by  the  bearing  of  the  lightvessel,  but 
more  especially  by  the  soundings  in  the  (^hart. 

Keep  the  southeastern  side  oi;'  r':o  cliauuel  aboard,  l)ut  do  not  go  into 
less  than  from  7  to  10  fatlioms  water  according  to  the  time  of  tide,  until 
up  to  Lower  Traverse  lightvessel,  lest  the  shi))  get  into  the  shallow  inlet 
in  St.  Koch  Shoals,  which  runs  in  southward  of  the  lightvessel.  In 
pasping  the  lightvessel,  steer  S.  41°  W.  (S.  00°  W.  mag.),  leaving  her 
to  the  southward  and  at  a  short  distance.  Kun  past  her  about  J  mile, 
and  then  steer  S.  I'So  yy.  (S.  17°  W.  mag.)  for  2i  miles,  or  as  may  be 
requisite  from  wind  and  tide,  to  pass  about  300  yards  northwestward 
of  Upper  Traverse  lightvessel— leaving  the  three  red  buoys  of  the 
Middle  Cround  on  the  starboard  hand— whence  the  course  to  Stone 
Pillar  is  S.  24°  W.  (S.  43°  W.  mag.).  But  here,  too,  the  course  alone 
must  not  be  trusted,  for  there  is  no  calculating  exactly  the  set  of  the 
tides.  Generally,  a  vessel  will  have  to  steer  a  little  to  the  southward 
of  S.  240  W.  (S.  43-^  W.  mag.)  with  the  flood-stream,  to  keep  along  the 
edge  of  South  Dank,  and  with  tlie  ebb  a  little  to  the  westward;  but  the 
lead,  buoys,  and  lightvessels  are  the  only  sure  guides. 

Having  passed  Upper  Traverse  lightvessel,  take  now «'»  fathoms  at 
low  water,  or  a  depth  corresponding  to  it  at  other  times  of  the  tide,  as 
a  guide  along  the  edge  of  South  Bank,  kee[)i)ig  Lower  Traverse  light- 
vessel  and  Upjier  Traverse  lightvessel  iu  line,  bearing  N.  38°  E.  (N.  47° 
llrtl 22   ' 


338 


ST.  LAWRENCE   RIVER. 


E.  mag.)  until  past  the  black  buoy  on  the  SW.  point  of  St.  Roch  Shoals, 
and  taking  care  not  to  cross  to  the  northwestward  of  the  line  of  deep 
water  (9  to  13  fathoms)  which  extends  southwestward  from  the  Narrows 
all  through  South  Traverse.    The  patches  off  St.  Jean  Port  Joli  church 
will  be  avoided  by  passing  500  yards  northwestward  of  the  black  buoy 
on  them,  or  by  not  going  southeastward  into  less  water  than  has  been 
directed,  if  the  buoy  can  not  be  seen.    If  the  checkered  black  and  white 
bell  and  gas  light  buoy  on  Channel  Patch  can  be  seen,  pass  200  yards 
southeastward  of  it;  if  not  seen,  run  along  the  edge  of  South  Bank  in 
the  depth  before  directed  until  St.  Jean  Port  Joli  church  bears  S.  40° 
E.  (S.  21°  E.  mag.);  then  open  the  highest  part  of  Goose  Island  Reef 
only  lust  sufficiently  to  be  seen  in  lino  with  the  south  side  of  Stone  Pil- 
lar bearing  S.  38°  W.  (S.  57°  W.  mag.),  and  run  upon  that  loading  mark 
until  St.  Jean  Port  Joli  church  bears  S.  56°  E.  (S.  37°  E.  mag.),  when 
the  vessel  will  be  about  300  yards  southward  of  Channel  Psitch,  and 
should  sheer  again  to  the  southward  and  follow  the  edge  of  South  Bank 
in  the  same  depth  as  before.    After  passing  South  Rock,  Crane  Island 
should  b*^;  brought  well  open  of  Goose  Island  Reef,  bearing  8.  47°  W. 
(S.  06°  W.  mag.)  to  clear  the  shoals  between  them,  and  the  vessel  may 
open  that  mark  gradually  so  as  to  pass  700  yards  southeastward  of 
Goose  Island  Reef. 

To  pass  East  of  Beai^jeu  Bank  proceed  as  follows,  remembering 
that  there  is  not  more  than  17  feet  at  low  water:  As  soon  as  the  vessel 
is  1 J  or  2  miles  past  Goose  Island  Reef,  steer  so  as  to  bring  Stone  Pillar 
its  own  breadth  open  southward  of  Goose  Island  Reef,  bearing  N.  32°  E. 
(N.  51°  E.  mag.).  Run  from  those  marks,  steering  about  S.  32°  W.  (8. 
51°  W.  mag.),  or  so  as  to  keep  them  open  as  just  described,  and  they 
will  lead  400  yards  southeastward  of  the  northeastern  light  buoy  of 
Beaujeu  Bank.  Continue  the  same  course,  and  when  St.  Vallier  Point 
opens  southward  of  Crane  Island  about  a  quarter  of  a  point,  bearing 
S.  52°  W.  (S.  71°  W.  mag.),  haul  up  for  St.  Vallier  Point,  which  will 
lead  about  800  yards  southward  of  the  southwestern  white  light  buoy  of 
Beaujeu  Bank.  Then  keep  away  to  the  southward,  and  run  along  the 
southern  shore  of  Crane  Island  at  the  distance  of  about  600  yards,  so 
as  to  pass  northwestward  of  the  black  buoy  on  the  patch  lying  1,200 
yards  from  Crane  Island  lighthouse,  or  in  from  7  to  10  fathoms  water, 
according  to  the  time  of  tide. 

To  pass  ■Westward  of  Beavyeu  Bank.— When  Hospital  Rock  bears 
N.  52°  W.  (N.  33°  W.  mag.)  bring  Stone  Pillar  lighthouse  just  open 
southward  of  the  southern  extreme  of  the  highest  part  of  Goose  Island 
Reef,  bearing  N.  38°  E.  (N.  57°  E.  mag.),  leading  between  the  light 
buoy  at  the  northeastern  end  of  Beaujeu  Bank  and  the  red  buoy  off 
Goose  Island,  also  close  to  the  white  light  buoy  marking  the  southwest- 
ern end  of  Beaujeu  Bank.  Leave  the  white  light  buoy  on  the  port 
hand,  bringing  the  beacon  on  Goose  Island  Meadows  in  line  with  the 
middle  of  La  Grosse  Montague  (the  westernmost  hill  of  Goose  Island), 


^4 


f  St.  Roch  Shoals, 
if  the  Hue  of  deep 
from  the  Narrows 
a  Port  Joli  church 
of  the  black  buoy 
ter  than  has  beeu 
stl  black  and  white 
BU,  pass  200  yards 
of  South  Bank  iu 
liurch  bears  S.  40° 
Groose  Island  Beef 

I  side  of  Stone  Pil- 
that  loading  mark 
17°  E.  mag.),  when 
hannel  Psitch,  and 
dge  of  South  Bank 
lock,  Crane  Island 
bearing  S.  47°  W. 
md  the  vessel  may 

southeastward  of 

lows,  remembering 
soon  as  the  vessel 
bring  Stone  Pillar 
if,  bearing  N.  32°  E. 
ibout  S.  32°  W.  (8. 
lescribed,  and  they 
item  light  buoy  of 
m  St.  Vallier  Point 
of  a  point,  bearing 
r  Point,  which  will 
white  light  buoy  of 
,  and  run  along  the 
ibout  600  yards,  so 
J  patch  lying  1,200 
10  fathoms  water, 

lospital  Rock  bears 
^hthouse  just  open 
art  of  Goose  Island 
between  thie  light 
[id  the  red  buoy  off 
king  the  southwest- 
t  buoy  on  the  port 
»W8  in  line  with  the 

II  of  Goose  Island), 


SOUTH   CHANNEL. 


339 


bearing  N.  8°  E.  (N.  27°  E.  mag.),  to  pass  between  that  buoy  and  the 
redb..  y  to  the  southwestward.  When  Channel  Rock  is  visiblo,  the 
beacon  should  be  its  own  height  eastward  of  the  rock  when  this  leading 
mark  is  on.    For  continuation,  see  page  363. 

If,  after  passing  the  red  buoy  on  the  shoal  off  Goose  Island,  the  upper 
buoys  should  not  be  immediately  seen,  continue  to  run  from  and  upon 
the  mark  above  given,  taking  care  not  to  open  out  the  south  side  of 
Stone  Pillar  southward  of  Goose  Island  Reef,  and  as  soon  as  the  buoys 
can  be  seen  steer  to  pass  between  them,  and  proceed  us  already  directed. 

At  Night,  Beauieu  Bank  must  be  passed  by  tlie  lead,  aided  by  tlie 
light  buoys,  along  the  edge  of  South  Bank,  or  southeastern  side  of  the 
channel,  keeping  in  3  fathoms  at  low  water  or  a  deptli  corresponding 
to  it  at  other  times  of  the  tide,  till  Crane  IsLoiul  light  bears  S.  56o  w. 
(S.  750  W.  mag.),  when  the  vessel  must  be  hauled  up  for  the  S\V.  end 
of  Crane  Island. 

Anchorage  in  South  Traverse.— Vessels  may  anchor  off  the  shoals 
of  St.  Anne  in  6  fathoms  low  water  up  to  within  a  mile  or  two  of  the 
lightvessel.  The  ground  is  better,  and  there  is  less  tide  than  on  the 
tail  of  the  Middle  Ground;  but  the  latter  is  the  better  position  for 
weighing  with  the  first  of  the  flood  in  northerly  winds.  Vessels  do 
occasionally  anchor  for  a  tide,  iu  fine  weather,  on  the  edge  of  the  bank 
of  St.  Roch,  between  the  two  lightvessels;  but  this  can  not  be  recom- 
mended, for  the  ebb  tide  runs  there  at  the  rate  of  8  knots,  and  the 
ground  is  not  to  be  depended  on;  hence,  if  the  anchor  once  started,  it 
would  be  difficult  to  bring  up  again,  and  there  would  be  great  danger 
of  losing  the  anchor.  Should  the  wind  begin  to  fail,  or  the  flood  be 
done,  it  would  be  better  to  run  down  below  Lower  Traverse  lightvessel, 
if  an  anchorage  2  or  3  miles  above  Upper  Traverse  lightvessel  can  not 
be  gained. 

Vessels  often  anchor  off  the  black  buoy  on  the  S  W.  point  of  St.  Roch 
Shoal  in  6  or  7  fathoms  in  good  ground,  but  the  anchorage  is  not  reck- 
oned  very  good  until  arriving  above  St.  Jean  church.  All  along  tlie 
edge  of  the  south  bank,  from  opposite  the  Pillars  to  Crane  Island,  the 
holding  ground  is  a  stiff  clay,  and  so  good  that  it  is  sometimes  difficult 
to  weigh  anchor.  Off  Crane  Island,  a  mile  aljove  Beaiyeu  Bank  in 
6  or  7  fathoms  at  low  water,  there  is  excellent  anchorage  iu  westerly 
winds;  and  under  the  SW.  end  of  the  island,  in  5  fathoms,  there  is 
equally  good  anchorage  with  the  winds  from  eastward.  Vessels  bound 
down,  and  meeting  a  strong  easterly  wind  anjrwhere  above  the  light- 
vessel,  had  better  run  back  to  the  anchorage. 

Tides.— The  flood  begins  much  earlier  in  the  North  Channel  than  in 
the  South,  and  the  first  of  the  stream  therefore  comes  from  the  north- 
ward, setting  at  first  about  south  upon  the  shoals  of  St.  Anne  and  St. 
Roch,  but  inclining  gradually  more  to  the  westward,  until  at  a  quarter- 
flood  it  sets  fair  to  the  SW.  by  S.  between  the  buoys  of  South 
Traverse.    After  half-flood  it  sets  SW.,  and  toward  the  end  of  the  tide 


a^ilfejA^I^!** 


■«/i»  ytr^4Jilr  T-M^iWi-'.— 


J^i,^,»Ji;>^*;fc,-^W»;^; 


b.-i?-:iJiirWa5^ji*>.«l 


340 


BT.  LAWRENCE   RIVER. 


1(1     Sj'- 


still  more  to  the  wostwanl;  peibiips  because,  tlio  time  of  l-'s'i  Ta+«r 
beiufj  somewhat  earlier  in  the  North  Channel,  the  water  huH  begun  to 
fall  before  the  tlootl  has  (juito  ceased  in  the  south. 

The  ebb  stream  nets  nearly  in  the  contrary  direction  to  the  flood,  at> 
just  stated,  the  first  of  the  ebb  setting  oft"  from  tlie  shoals  of  St.  Anne 
aud  St.  Koch,  through  the  channels  to  the  westward  o\'  the  Middle 
Ground  and  over  the  tail  of  the  latter  to  the  northward. 

Above  th"  Pillars  both  tides  set  lairly  up  and  down  the  river. 

lu  the  Narrows  of  the  South  Traverse  the  rate  of  the  ebb  is  from 
7  to  8  knots,  and  that  of  the  Hood  from  6  to  7  J  knots.  The  rates  of  the 
flood  and  ebb  tides  decrease  gradually  as  we  proceed  to  the  westward 
until  otf  the  Tillars;  the  ebb  stream,  southward  of  the  Pillars,  attains 
a  velocity  of  .">{  knots  per  hour  at  spring  tides;  aud  of  U  knots  past 
Channel  Patch  decreasing  to  3  knots  at  Crane  Island,  while  the  flood 
stream  runs  about  one  knot  an  hour  less  at  the  respective  localities. 

SOUTH  CHANNEL,  ABOVE  CUANK  ISLAND— HOTTTH  HHOllE,  ST.  THOMAS 

TO   LEVIS   rOlNT. 

(IL  O.  Chart  No.  1492.) 

St.  Thomas  Point  is  low  and  lies  3  miles  west  of  the  entrance  of  the 
Kiviere  du  Sud,  aud  the  church  aud  village  of  St.  Thomas  on  its  west 

bank.  •      v      ». 

Wye  Rock,  with  a  depth  of  one  foot  over  it  at  low  water,  is  about 
400  yards  long  in  the  direction  of  the  river,  and  100  yards  broad;  it  is 
separated  from  St.  Thouuis  Bank  by  a  channel  nearly  ^  mile  wide,  but, 
with  depths  greater  than  3  fVithtuns,  only  200  yards  wide. 

Buoy.— A  buoy,  painted  black,  is  moored  in  r>,f  fathoms  northwest- 
ward of  Wye  Rock,  and  ^  mile  northward  of  St.  Thomas  Point. 

The  mark  for  leading  westward  of  St.  Thojias  Bank  also  leads  in  the 
deepest  water  in  South  Channel  northward  of  Wye  Rock;  the  chapel 
near  the  summit  of  Cape  Tourmente  in  line  with  the  flagstaff  on  Grosse 
T«i^,  bearing  N.  39°  W.  (N.  21°  W.  mag.),  leads  jiortheastward  of  Wye 
Rock  in  L->  feet  water;  aud  the  same  chapel,  in  line  with  the  western 
wharf  on  Crosse  Isle,  bearing  N.  U^  W.  (N.  16o  W.  mag.),  leads  south- 
westward  of  that  rock.  The  Seminaire  is  now  rarely  visible  from  South 
Channel,  except  when  the  sun  is  shining  on  it. 

Trou  de  Berthier.— The  chujch  at  Berthier  has  a  single  spire  and  is 
about  i  mile  southward  of  Trou  de  Berthier,  which  latter  has  a  wharf 
at  Verte  Point,  its  eastern  entrance  point,  with  a  depth  of  U  feet  close 
to  its  outer  end  at  low  water.  The  former  site  of  the  church  at  this 
place  is  now  occupied  by  a  large  house  with  a  flagstatf  near  it. 

Rocks.— Two  rocks,  with  depths  of  one  foot  and  G  feet  over  them, 
lie  SOU  yards  oil' the  shore  between  Berthier  !<:ast  Point  aud  Berthier 
wharf.  From  the  one-foot  rock,  Bellechasse  lighthouse  bears  S.  GjO 
W.  (S.  83°  W.  mag.),  distant  U  miles;  from  the  other  rock,  Bellechasse 


iine  of  l-'s'i  Trcter 
liter  bus  begun  to 

ion  to  the  flood,  ab 
sLoiilH  of  St.  Anne 
aid  ol"  the  Middle 
ard. 

vu  the  river, 
of  the  ebb  is  from 
I.  The  rates  of  tlie 
d  to  the  westward 
the  PiUars,  attains 
1  of  4i  linots  past 
nd,  while  the  Hood 
>ectlve  localities. 

SHOllJi,  ST.  THOMAS 


'  the  entrance  of  the 
rhouias  on  its  west 

low  water,  is  about 
0  yards  broad;  it  is 
:ly  J  mile  wide,  but, 
i  wide. 

fathoms  northwost- 
bomas  Point, 
luk  also  leads  in  the 
'6  Rock ;  the  chapel 
e  iiagstaff  on  Grosse 
ptheastward  of  Wye 
e  Avith  the  western 
.  ma^;'.),  leads  soutb- 
y  visible  from  South 

a  single  spire  and  is 
li  latter  has  a  wharf 
leptb  of  14  feet  close 
'  the  church  at  this 
staff  near  it. 
d  G  feet  over  them, 
Point  and  Berth  ier 
ithouse  bears  S.  05'^ 
ber  rock,  Bellecbasse 


<^,ife« 


SOUTH   CHANNEL. 


341 


light  boars  S.  00^  W.  (S.  84°  W.  mag.),  distant  U  miles.  These  rocks 
are  beads  of  a  narrow  ledge  with  de]>tlis  of  !»  to  17  feet  over  il,  run- 
ning i)aia!Icl  to  the  shon',  and  witii  its  northeastern  extreme  bearing 
]S[.49^^  !•:.  (N.670  E.  mag.)  J  mile  from  the  one  foot  rock.  Belleciiasse 
light,  kept  bearing  soutliward  of  S.  r,no  W.  (S.  73°  W.  mag.)  leads 
northward  of  all  the  above  shoal  water. 

Bellechasse  Island,  composed  of  three  principal  and  several  small 
rocks  joined  together  at  low  water,  is  (iO()  yards  long  parallel  to  the 
shore,  from  wliich  it  is  ^  mile.  Not  m(»re  than  .'i  fathoms  water  will  be 
found  in  the  clnuiuel  between  it  and  the  main. 

Light— From  a  square  building,  40  feet  high,  and  painted  white,  on, 
the  easternmost  summit  of  ISelleehaHse  Island,  is  exiiibited,  at  an  eleva- 
tion of  54  feet,  a  fixed  white  light  that  should  be  visible  12  miles. 

Pointed  Rock,  with  6  feet  water  on  it,  lies  L'.IO  yards  northward  of 
the  center  of  the  island.  A  rock  that  dries  2  feet  at  low  water  lies  200 
yards  south  westward,  and  a  shoal  with  12  feet  over  it  lies  400  yards 
westward,  respectively,  from  the  SW.  extreme  of  liellecliasse  Island. 

St  Vallier  Point  is  the  base  of  a  wooded  bbitf  12S  feet  high,  and  is 
the  first  prominent  point  on  the  south  shore  above  the  Traverses.  The 
vdlage  and  church  of  St.  Vallier  stand  in  the  bay  next  westward  of 
St.  Vallier  Point.  A  beacon  is  built  on  the  shore  north  of  the  church, 
which  in  line  with  the  latter  leads  to  the  buoy  off  Madame  Jieef. 

St  Vallier  Bank  fills  the  whole  bay  between  St.  Vallier  and  St. 
Michel  Points,  and  extends  nearly  ^  uiile  NNE.  from  St.  iVIichel  Point. 

A  Shoal,  with  1.5  feet  water  over  it,  lies  i  mile  N.  Wo  E.  (X.  340  jj, 
mag.)  from  St.  Valliox-  Point,  and  is  the  northern  of  two  banks. 

A  rock  with  12  feet  water  on  it  lies  nearly  If,  miles  westward  from 
St.  Vallier  Point. 

The  end  of  the  pier  at  Berthier  East  Point  shut  in  with  the  SW. 
extreme  at  Bellechasse  Island,  bearing  N.  73°  E.  (S.  89°  E.  mag.),  leads 
north. 

St  Michel  Point  is  low ;  reefs  of  slate  extend  eastward,  with  shoal 
water  in  continuation,  but  there  is  deep  water  |  mile  north  of  them. 

St  Michel  Village  is  about  li  miles  south  west  ward  of  the  point, 
and  contains  a  church  with  a  spire.  A  modern  chapel  with  a  fine  spire 
stands  on  a  wooded  bluff  close  west  of  the  village.  A  pier  extends 
from  the  shore  near  the  village,  but  is  almost  dry  at  low  water.  Sev- 
eral rocks  lie  off  the  end  of  the  pier. 

Beaumont  Reefs  comi)rise  a  line  of  bowlders,  the  east  extreme  of 
which  dries  4  feet  at  low  water,  and  numerous  bowlders  extending  800 
yards  from  the  shore,  gradually  decreasing  that  distance  to  Durantaye 
Point. 

Buoy.— A  buoy,  painted  black,  is  moored  in  18  feet  water  close  north 
of  the  east  extreme  of  the  reef,  about  f  mile  from  the  shore  and  1,400 
yards  from  the  pier  at  St.  Laurent. 

Marks.- The  church  at  St.  Joseph  de  Levis  must  be  kept  v.  ell  open 


842 


ST.  LAWRENCE   RIVER. 


I       :l 


of  Martinifer©  Point,  bearing  8. 77^  W.  (N.  86°  W.  map.))  «"til  St.  TSIicliol 
I'oint  is  open  of  Dunuitaye  Point,  boariug  N.  U°  E.  (N.  82°  E.  luiijj.). 

Beaumont  cluircli,  whic-li  has  a  spire,  stands  on  a  cliff  soutli  of  tbe 
reef.  A  waterfall  runs  over  the  cliff  at  one  tnile  westward  of  the  chnr(!h 
and  close  to  a  ruined  mill  at  the  base.  Westward  of  this  mill  the  water 
is  deep  ch)8e  to  the  low-water  line,  which,  however,  is  400  yards  from 
the  hiKhwater  mark. 

Martinidre  Point  is  at  the  base  of  a  small  wooded  hillo(!k.  A 
diamond  shaped  beacon  stands  close  to  the  point. 

St.  Joseph  church  at  Levis  is  a  conspicuous  building  with  a  spire. 
A  large  college  and  convent,  each  surmounted  by  a  statue,  stand  close 
to  the  church. 

Levis  Point  Shoal  extends  in  an  easterly  direction  from  the  shore 
at  h  mile  northeastward  of  Levis  Point,  and  irregular  ground  continues 
the  shoal  for  over  ^  mile  from  the  shore  to  the  depth  of  5  fathoms.  A 
small  fall  in  the  land,  one  mile  westward  of  Durantaye  Point,  in  line 
with  the  south  extreme  of  Orleans  Island,  bearing  N.  80°  15.  (S.  82° 
E.  mag.),  leads  north;  and  the  spire  of  St.  John  church  at  Quebec,  in 
line  with  the  SVV.  extreme  of  the  immigration  offices  on  Commissioners 
wharf,  bearing  S.  56°  W.  (S.  74°  W.  mag.),  leads  west  of  this  shoal. 

SOUTH     CHANNEL,     A.KOVE     (!KANE     ISLAND— ISLANDS     AND     SHOALS 
FOBMINO  ITS  NOBTHBBN  SIDK. 

(H.O.  Chart  No.  1492.) 

The  islands  in  order  westward  of  Crane  Island  are  Haystack,  Mill, 
Race,  Margaret,  Cliff  islands,  and  Grosse  Isle.  The  highest  is  Grosse 
Isle,  which  is  214  feet  above  high  water. 

Between  these  islands  there  are  narrow  and  intricate  passes,  leading 
into  Middle  Traverse,  and  with  water  enough  for  vessels  of  large  draft; 
but  they  are  of  little  oi'  no  use  for  the  common  purposes  of  navigation. 

Westward  of  Grosse  Isle  are  Keaux  and  Madame  Islands,  of  slate 
rock,  low,  wooded,  and  connected  by  reefs  of  slate  nearly  dry  at  low 
water.  ExtendiJig  from  almost  all  these  islands  there  are  reefs  of  slate 
rock,  thinly  cov«'red  with  sand  and  mud,  and  bounding  South  Channel 
on  its  northern  side  for  nearly  14  miles  southwestward  of  Crane  Island. 

Crane  Island  Spit  has  5  feet  water  over  the  shallowest  part,  and 
extends  SW.  by  W.,  with  less  depths  than  18  feet,  IJ  miles  from  Poiute 
aux  Pins.  The  western  extreme  of  this  spit  is  marked  by  a  red  buoy, 
moored  with  two  beacons  on  the  southern  shore  of  Crane  Island  in  line. 
The  eastern  of  these  beacons,  painted  red,  is  250  yards  westward  of 
Crane  Island  wharf,  and  the  western,  painted  white,  200  yards  farther 
westward.  These  beacons  in  line,  bearing  N.  64°  E.  (N.  83°  E.  mag.), 
lead,  in  not  less  than  24  feet  water,  southward  of  Crane  Island  Spit, 
but  with  that  depth  only  as  far  westward  as  the  above  red  buoy. 
The  SE.  extreme  of  Crow  Island  in  line  with  the  western  extreme  of 


k 


80UTH  CHANNEL. 


343 


,nntllSt.MJcliol 

iliff  Hoiitli  of  Mie 

ird  of  the  chnrcli 

is  mill  the  watur 

400  yards  from 

xled  hi11o(;k.    A 

ng  with  a  spire, 
atue,  stand  close 

•n  from  the  shore 
ground  coiitiiines 
:)f  5  fatlioms.  A 
lye  Point,  in  line 
Jf.  80O  15,  (S.  82° 
roll  at  Quebec,  in 
111  Commissioners 
of  this  shoal. 

)B    AND     SHOALS 


i  Haystack,  Mill, 
highest  is  Grosse 

te  passes,  leading 
els  of  large  draft; 
(SOS  of  navigation. 
!  Islands,  of  slate 
nearly  dry  at  low 
3  are  reefs  of  slate 
iig  South  Channel 
d  of  Crane  Island, 
allowest  part,  and 
miles  from  Pointo 
ed  by  a  red  buoy, 
me  Island  in  line, 
rards  westward  of 
200  yards  farther 
.  (N.  83°  E.  mag.), 
)raue  Island  Spit, 
above  red  buoy, 
^^estern  extreme  of 


Middle  Island,  bearing  N.lQo  E.  (N.38o  E.  mag.),  leads  northwestward 
of  this  buoy  and  the  spit. 

A  bunk,  having  several  shoals  with  20  to  23  feet  water  on  them,  joins 
Crane  Island  Spit  to  the  bank  extending  southwestwanl  from  Margaret 
Tail. 

Margaret  Tail,  extending  l\  miles  SW.  from  Margaret  and  VAitY 
Islands,  which  .ire  nearly  Joined  at  low  water,  is  a  dangerous  shoal,  the 
slate  being  awnsh  in  some  parts  of  it  in  low  tides. 

Light  Buoy.— A  light  buoy,  painted  y  'i>w  and  showing  a  pink  light, 
is  moored  in  4|  fathoms,  400  yards  soutli  westward  of  a  20- foot  patch, 
at  the  southwestern  extreme  of  Margaret  Tail.  Vessels  entering  the 
quarantine  ground  should  leave  this  light  buoy  on  the  starboar-l  hand. 
If  from  any  cause  this  buoy  is  removed,  it  will  be  replaced  by  a  j'ellow 
can  buoy.  The  church  on  Crane  Island  in  line  with  the  southern 
extreme  of  Haystack  Island,  bearing  N.  ."iio  E.  (N.  70°  E.  mag.),  leads 
southward  of  Margaret  Tail  and  the  above  buoy,  but  in  a  least  depth 
of  22  feet  only.  The  northwestern  extreme  of  Two  Heads  Island  in 
line  with  the  western  extreme  of  Clitt'  Island,  bearing  N.  21°  E.  (N.  40'^ 
E.  mag.),  leads  westward  of  Margaret  Tail,  and  between  it  and  Grosse 
Isle  Patch ;  and  when  the  north  extreme  of  Margaret  Island  is  open 
north  of  Cliff  Island,  or  the  buoy  on  Grosse  Isle  Patch  passed,  the 
anchorage  between  (Jrosse  Isle  Patch  and  Grosse  Isle  may  be  rounded 
into  and  the  anchor  let  go. 

Grosse  Isle  Patch  is  a  rocky  shoal,  1,200  yards  long,  in  a  SW. 
direction,  and  with  7  feet  least  water;  it  lies  west  of  Margaret  Tail, 
and  the  channel  between  them  is  \  mile  wide,  with  a  depth  of  5J 
fathoms. 

Buoys. — A  buoy  painted  black  and  white  in  vertical  stripes,  and  in 
4  fathoms  water,  marks  the  NE.  end  of  the  patch. 

The  rock,  with  7  feet  water,  southward  of  Grosse  Isle,  and  lying  NW. 
distant  nearly  (iOO  yards  from  the  above  buoy,  is  also  marked  by  a  buoy, 
painted  black  and  vviiite  in  vertical  stripes. 

A  Rock  with  15  feet  water  over  it  lies  westward  of  Grosse  lale  Patch, 
and  with  the  outer  end  of  Grosse  Isle  West  wharf  bearing  X.  15°  E. 
(N.  340  E.  mag.),  distant  1,200  yards.  The  new  Episcopal  church  at 
Grosse  Isle  in  line  with  the  inner  end  of  the  west  wluirf,  bearing  N.  2° 
W.  (N.  170  E.  nnxg.),  leads  in  3^  fathoms  between  this  rock  and  the 
western  extreme  of  Grosse  Isle  Patch;  and  the  summit  of  Margaret 
Island  in  line  with  the  northern  extreme  of  Cliff  Island,  bearing  N.  52° 
K  (N.  71°  B.  mag.),  leads  northwestward  of  Grosse  Isle  Patch  to  the 
(innrantine  anchorage.  A  good  cross  mark  for  that  anchorage  is  to 
have  the  Episcopal  church  just  open  eastward  of  the  western  wharf. 
The  whole  of  liace  Island  a  little  open  of  Margaret  Island,  bearing 
N.  oio  E  (N.  70°  E.  mag.),  leads  in  23  feet  southward  of  Grosse  Isle 
Patch. 

Quarantine  Anchorage. — Vessels  generally  lie  between  Grosse  Isle 


..:fiii^^^i,r.V.i,.i-„,U.  ~-^^B4 


r 


11  'l" 


344 


ST.  LAWRENCE    RIVER. 


Patcli  an«l  GroHNii  Islo,  to  lie  near  tho  estuhlislmu'iit;  but  tlio  anchor- 
af?o  I'ai'thpr  ciiHtward  in  (inariiiitiiu^  i)iVH8ii;;o  northward  of  Mar^^aiot 
Island  iH  by  far  preferable.  All  incrcliunt  vt'sscJH,  as  t\w  law  now 
BtandH,  are  oldi^ed  lo  (Miininnnicato  witli  tlu^  (|iiarantino  autlioritics  at 
Itiinoiiski  or  (irosse  Isle,  from  whence,  after  e\aniiiiati(»ii,  they  aie 
allowed  to  ])ro(!eed  to  <^>uebec,  if  not  detained  at  the  (iinirantine 
anclioraKC.  Tliosei  vessels,  if  neccssaiy,  anchor  outside  (Irossn  Islo 
Patch,  and  weHtward  of  Mar-^arol  Tail,  choosinjr  tlioir  bcrtli  in  5 
fathomH,  where  there  is  one  of  the  beat  roadsteads  for  ridinj;  out  an 
easterly  gale  in  the  river. 

The  inner  anchorage  at  (irosse  Isle  in  not  otherwise  useful  than  as  a 
place  for  vessels  to  ride  quarantine;  but  the  anchorat;e  (nitside  (Irosse 
Isle  Patch  is  a  convenient  place  for  which  vessels,  on  the  ai)i>roach 
of  a  strong  easterly  wind,  may  boar  up,  when  there  is  not  tide  enough 
for  them  to  reach  the  anchorage  under  Crane  Island,  I  nnlos  farther 
eastward. 

Q>roBse  Isle  may  be  readily  recognized  by  the  number  of  buildings 
forming  the  (|uarantine  establishment.  Two  piers  are  built  on  the 
southern  shore,  one  near  the  western  extrenu*  the  other  near  the  mid- 
dle of  the  island.  The  hospital,  a  conspicuous  biick  building,  stands 
near  the  eastern  extreme  and  the  superiiitiiident's  house  is  inimedi- 
ately  behind  the  flagstati".  The  iihurches  visible  from  South  ('haiinel 
are  the  Kjiiscopal  church  a  brown  wooden  building  with  a  low  tower, 
standing  on  an  eminence  immediately  northeastward  of  the  western 
wharf;  and  the  Uonian  (Jatholic  chuich,  with  a  snuill  spire,  near  the 
middle  of  the  southern  shore,  and  visible  only  from  the  eastward  and 
westward,  being  hidden  from  the  southward  by  a  rocky  mound  in  front 
of  it. 

Qruss  Isle  Tail  is  now  joined  by  a  bar,  having  no  nu)re  than  IG 
feet  over  it  at  low  water,  to  the  banks  of  Madame  Island.  Two  shoals 
with  11  feet  of  water  on  them  lie  on  the  bar  about  midway  between 
Grosse  Isle  Tail  and  the  Hanks  of  Madame  island.  For  crossing  the 
bar  the  best  mark  is  the  western  fall  of  the  hill  over  Cape  Tourmente 
in  line  with  the  small  rock  near  the  northeastern  extreme  of  Keaux 
Island,  bearing  X.  27°  W.  (N.  8°  W.  mag.). 

Banks  of  Madam  Island,  in  their  eastern  part,  extend  Ij  miles 
southward  of  Keaux  Island,  and  from  their  SE.  extreme,  in  2i  fathoms, 
the  south  side  of  Two  Heads  Island  is  just  open  to  the  southward  of 
(iro.sse  Isle.  The  mark  for  clearing  the  southern  side  of  these  banks, 
as  well  as  Grosse  Isle  Tail  and  Grosse  Isle  Patch,  is  Ilace  Island  kept 
just  open  south  of  Margaret  Island. 

Madame  Reef  dries  7.^  feet  at  low  water,  and  is  the  extreme  of  a 
shoal  exteiuling  2:^  miles  southwestward  from  the  southwestern  extreme 
of  Madame  Island. 

Light  Buoy. — .\  light  buoy,  painted  red,  moored  in  4^^  fathoms,  and 
showing  a  lixed  white  light,  marks  the  southwestern  edge  of  Madame 


0RLKAN8   ISLAND. 


345 


but  tlio  anchor- 
11(1  of  Miir^-ai'ot 
as  tlio  law  now 
no  antlioriticH  at 
iati(»n,  tlit'y  are 
tlic  (|narantin(> 
ii(U*  (liossc  IhI« 
lioir  l)orth  in  .1 
M"  lirtiMf;  ont  an 

UHet'nl  than  as  a 
c  outsido  (Irosse 
)n  the  apjti'oach 
not  tide  enough 
I,  I  miles  farther 

iber  of  builflinjys 
re  built  on  the 
er  near  the  mid- 
buildinj;,  stands 
louse  is  iujtuedi- 
i  South  Channel 
kith  a  h)\v  tower, 
I  of  tiie  western 
1  spire,  near  tlie 
lio  eastward  and 
y  mound  in  front 

ID  more  than  1(» 
lid.  Two  shoals 
midway  between 
For  erossins  the 
Cape  Tourineiite 
itreuie  of  lieaux 

extend  Ij  miles 
lie,  in  2h  fathoms, 
he  southward  of 
i  of  the.se  banks, 
lace  Island  kept 

the  extreme  of  a 
iwesteru  extreme 

I  4*^  fathoms,  and 
edge  of  Madame 


Beef.    From  this  buoy  Ilelleehasse  lighthouse  is  almost  east,  distant 
3J\  miles. 

Uerthier  ••iiurch  open  south  of  UelleeiiasHe  Island,  bearintj  H.  88°  E. 
(8.  7(P  K.  map.),  loads  south,  and  (-ape  Toiirmente  ehapel  in  lino  with 
the  Ni;.  extreme  of  Orleans  Island,  bearing  N.  22°  K.  (N.  40^  K.  inaR.), 
leads  north  of  this  reef. 

Orleans  Island,  dividintj  the  St.  Lawrein-e  River  into  two  (ihannels, 
is  usually  well  (Miltivated  on  the  slopes  and  in  the  valleys  between  the 
hills.  The  snniinits  are  g'enerally  wooded,  and  attain  an  elevation  of 
550  feet  at ;{  miles  from  the  HVV.  extreme.  Near  the  N  IC.  extreme  the 
land  is  wooded  to  the  shore,  and  rises  jjradually  from  a  hilloek  210 
feet  high  over  that  extreme  to  about  oOO  feet  in  the  summit  over  St. 
Famille. 

The  south  shore  is  bordered  generally  by  a  small  (difC,  whieb  inereases 
in  height  toward  the  HW.  extreme  of  the  island  and  at  the  mouths  of 
the  rivers.  On  the  ncu'th  eoast  the  clitf  is  at  some  distance  from  the 
shore,  the  intermediate  space  being  tiat  and  cultivated.  Tlie  south 
shore  is  bordered  by  bare  Hat  rock  that  extends  generally  about  200 
yards  from  the  high-water  mark,  while  the  north  shore  is  fringed  by  a 
mud  Hat  on  which  a  eoarsc  grass  grows,  and  which  is  indented  by 
nnmerons  creeks.  These  are  impassable  at  about  half  tide,  and  are 
used  by  bateaux  for  loading  and  discharging  cargoes. 

St.  Francois,  the  northeasternmost  church,  has  a  spire,  and  stands 
on  the  slope  of  tiie  hill  at  lA  miles  from  the  east  I'xtrenie. 

Lights. — Two  lighthouses  are  erected  at  St.  Francois,  the  south 
western  in  a  field  .1  mile  southward,  and  the  northeastern  at  high-water 
mark  \  mile  eastward,  respectively,  of  the  church.     Both  are  square 
buildings,  painted  white,  the  former  being  30  feet  and  the  latter  28 
feet  high. 

From  the  southwestern  lighthouse  at  an  elevation  of  77  feet,  and 
from  the  northeastern  at  an  elevation  of  30  feet,  respectively,  are 
exhibited  fixed  white  lights.  Tlie  upper  light  should  be  visible  14 
miles  and  the  lower  10  miles.  Beaccuis  stand  close  to  each  of  these 
lighthouses  which,  in  line,  bearing  S.  40"^  W.  (S.  58°  w,  mag.),  lead 
close  southward  of  Traverse  Spit  in  2  fathoms,  but  over  the  shoal  just 
west  of  the  checkered  buoy. 

Bellefine  River  empties  at  2,\  miles  SW.  of  St.  Francois  into  a  small 
pool  that  affords  good  shelter  to  boats  and  small  craft.  Boats  can  enter 
about  one  hour  before  or  after  low  water  and  small  craft  according  to 
their  draft. 

There  is  good  anchorage  for  vessels  oft'  l>ellefine  River  in  5J  to  0 
fathoms,  with  mud  bottom. 

St.  Jean  is  a  long  straggling  village  having  a  church  with  a  spire, 
which  stands  close  to  the  edge  of  the  water. 

A  pier,  with  0  feet  water  at  the  extreme,  extends  from  this  village  at 
4  mile  SW.  of  the  church. 


*ii' 


Tf"'*' 


pi    'I  i. 


k  i 


H' 


m' 


11    ll: 

I  1-1: 


u 


3i6 


ST.  LAWRENCE   RIVER. 


Light.— From  a  square  lighthouse  30  feet  high,  and  painted  white, 
at  the  extreme  of  the  pidr  at  St.  Jean,  and  at  an  elevation  of  30  feet,  is 
exhibited  a  fixed  white  light  that  should  be  visible  10  miles. 

La  Fleur  River  is  entered  at  1^  miles,  and  Maheux  River  at  2^  miles, 
respectively,  westward  of  the  pier  at  St.  Jean, 

These  rivers  run  through  deep  ravines  and  generally  afford  shelter 
to  small  craft  which  lie  aground  at  low  water  within  their  entrances. 

The  anchorage  is  good  off  these  rivers;  but  parallel  to  the  shore,  and 
generally  at  600  yards  from  the  low- water  line,  is  a  rocky  ledge  with 
depths  from  5^  to  7  fathoms  over  it.  Vessels  should  anchor  between 
this  ledge  and  Orleans  Island. 

St  Laurent  is  the  village  next  SW.  of  Si.  Jean,  though  the  houses 
are  nearly  continuous  from  one  to  the  other.  A  church  with  a  spire  is 
built  close  to  the  shore  and  a  convent  just  oast  of  the  church. 

A  pier  extends  from  the  shore  near  the  church  with  13  feet  water  at 
the  outward  extreme. 

Light— From  an  octagonal  lighthouse,  40  feet  high,  and  p^iuted 
white,  and  at  40  feet  above  high  water,  is  shown  a  fixed  white  light 
that  should  be  visible  11  miles.  The  lighthouse  is  22  yards  from  the 
extremity  of  the  pier. 

St  Patrick  Hole  is  off  the  mouth  of  St.  Patrick  River,  a  small 
stream  ending  in  a  ravine  which  is  faced  by  cliffs  on  both  sides. 

Good  anchorage  may  be  had  here  in  8  to  9  fathom». 

Miranda  lilocks  consist  of  several  rocky  patches  that  completely 
fill  the  westornmost  cove  on  the  south  shore  of  Orleans  Island.  The 
chimney  of  the  lunatic  asylum  at  Beauport,  well  open  of  the  wharf 
at  the  SW.  extreme  of  Orleans  Island  bearing  N.  86°  W.  (N.  68°  W. 
mag.),  or  St.  Laurent  lighthouse  open  of  the  soutb  extreme  of  Orleans 
Island  bearing  N.  78o  E.  (S.  84°  E.  mag.),  leads  south  of  these  rocks. 

The  SW.  end  of  Orleans  Island  is  marked  by  a  large  hotel  and  a 
wharf  from  which  a  steam  ferry  plies  regularly  to  Quebec. 

St.  Petronille,  a  conspicuous  church  with  a  spire,  dominates  the 
western  point,  and  an  Episcopal  church  with  a  small  spire  stands 
between  it  and  the  hotel. 

Anchorage.— Vessels  anchor  anywhere  clear  of  the  shoals,  bat  many 
of  them  wait  a  favorable  wind  south  of  the  SW.  extreme  of  Orleans 
Island. 

With  a  strong  westerly  wind  and  ebb  stream  good  anchors  and 
chains  are  required. 

(H.  O.  Chart  No.  1207.) 

Quebec  Harbor  is  defined  by  the  act  of  incorporation  to  comprise 
the  St.  Lawrence  River  and  its  navigable  tributaries  between  St.  Pat- 
rick Hole  and  Cape  Rouge,  both  inclusive.  It  affords  excellent  anchor- 
'age  over  the  greater  part  of  this  aroa  and  is  generally  free  from  danger. 
Levis  Point  Shoal  has  been  already  described. 


.  painted  white, 

ion  of  30  feet,  is 

uiles. 

iver  at  2^  miles, 

y  afford  shelter 
eir  entrances. 
;o  the  shore,  and 
ocky  ledge  with 
inchor  between 

)Ugh  the  houses 

I  with  a  spire  is 

ihurch. 

13  feet  water  at 

h,  and  pointed 
xed  white  light 
yards  from  the 

Eiver,  a  small 
th  sides. 

that  completely 
IS  Island.  The 
u  of  the  wharf 
W.  (N.  68°  W. 
erne  of  Orleans 
f  these  rocks, 
^e  hotel  and  a 
ec. 

dominates  the 
1  spire  stands 

loals,  bat  many 
Bme  of  Orleans 

d  anchors  and 


ion  to  comprise 
jtween  St.  Pat- 
cellent  anchor- 
)e  from  danger. 


■wnni 


BEAUFORT. 


347 


Beauport  is  a  large  village  north  of  Quebec,  to  which  it  is  nearly 
joined  by  houses.  Fronting  the  village  and  extending  to  Princess 
Louise  Basin  is  a  flat  of  slate  covered  with  mud  and  sawdust  that 
extends  ii»  some  parts  §  mile  from  the  shore,  and  is  fringed  by  shoal 
water  for  a  futher  distance  of  J  mile  to  the  depth  of  8  fathoms. 

A  buoy,  painted  red,  is  moored  in  about  0  fathoms  water  off  this 
shoal  at  7,000  yards  northward  of  Princess  Louise  Basin,  and  another 
buoy,  painted  red,  is  moored  in  27  feet  water,  with  Beauport  church 
bearing  IST.  15°  \V.  (N.  3°  E.  mag.)  and  the  flagstaff  at  the  lunatic  asy- 
lum K.  74°  W.  (N.  50°  W.  mag.). 

Ko  clearing  mark  could  be  found  for  the  whole  length  of  this  shoal, 
but  for  different  parts  only.  L'Ange  Gardien  lights  in  line  bearing 
N.  25°  E.  (N.  43°  E.  mag.),  lead  between  it  and  shoals  off  Orleans 
Island.  The  spire  of  St.  John  church  in  line  with  the  north  extreme 
of  the  northern  immigration  offices  at  Princess  Louise  Basin,  bearing 
S.  480  W.  (S.  Ofio  w.  mag.),  will  clear  the  SE.  extreme,  and  the  SE. 
extreme  of  the  Parliament  house  at  Quebec  in  line  with  the  north 
extreme  of  the  immigration  offices  on  Commissioners  wharf,  bearing 
S.  39°  W.  (S.  57°  W,  mag.),  will  lead  clear  till  Beauport  church  bears 
N.  40°  W.  {'S.  22°  W.  mag.),  when  vessels  must  haul  to  the  eastward  to 
get  the  other  marks  on. 

The  water  in  the  middle  cf  the  river,  south  of  this  bank,  is  very 
deep,  and  anchorage  there  should  be  avoided  if  possible. 

The  lunatic  asylum,  a  large  collection  of  buildings,  stands  almost 
midway  between  Beauport  church  and  Quebec.  It  may  be  recognized 
by  a  flagstaff  rising  from  the  middle  of  a  mansard  roof  and  by  a  large 
black  chimney.  The  falls  of  Montmorency  are  a  short  distance  NE.  of 
Beauport. 

Prohibited  Anchorage. — ^Within  the  following  area,  covering  the 
ferry  and  electric  cables  at  Quebec,  in  the  St.  Lawrence  River,  anchor- 
age is  prohited : 

The  northern  limit  of  this  area  is  a  line  drawn  from  the  SE.  corner  of 
Crawfords  wharf,  across  the  river  in  a  S.  75°  E.  (S.  67°  E.  mag.)  direc- 
tion, to  the  SW.  corner  of  Barras  wharf. 

The  southern  limit  of  the  area  is  a  line  drawn  from  the  center  of 
Ohamplain  Market  Hall,  across  the  river  in  a  S.  75°  E.  (S.  57°  E.  mag.) 
direction,  to  the  NW.  corner  of  Simpsons  wharf. 

Anchorage. — ^The  deepest  water  is  near  the  south  shore  of  the  river, 
opposite  Quebec,  where  there  is  a  depth  of  30  fathoms.  This  depth 
decreases  soutwestward,  till  between  Hadlow  and  Wolfe  Coves  no 
greater  depth  than  15  fathoms  will  be  found.  This  is  the  best  part  of 
the  river  for  anchorage,  as  a  bank  with  less  than  10  fathoms  water  on 
it  extends  midway  across  the  river  from  the  north  shore,  the  outer  edge 
being  700  yards  from  La  Mouche  Bank. 

The  narrow  channel  westward  of  Diamond  Harbor,  between  La 
Mouche  Bank  and  the  shore  of  Quebec,  has  from  20  to  12  feet  water  in 


[    Hi.. 

I  ll4\ 


348 


ST.  LAWRENCE  EIVER. 


it,  the  deepest  water  being  generally  at  the  booms  which  are  laid 
between  the  blocks  for  vessels  to  load. 

Spar  buoys  painted  red,  mark  the  north  side  of  La  Mouche  Bank,  and 
are  laid  generally  in  a  depth  of  9  feet  at  low  water,  and  at  the  eastern 
end  both  sides  of  the  deepest  water  in  tliis  channel  are  similarly  marked. 

Pointe  au  Pavilion,  the  apparent  north  extreme  of  Orleans  Island,  in 
line  with  the  north  extreme  of  Levis  Point,  bearing  N.  39°  E.  (N.  57° 
E.  mag.)  leads  south  of  La  Mouche  Bank. 

Southward  of  the  Grand  Trunk  Railway  wharf  at  Levis,  which  is 
marked  with  the  name  of  the  company,  the  shore  dries  at  low  water 
nearly  to  the  extreme  of  the  long  Avharves  that  are  built  off  it.  Off' 
Hadlow  Cove  the  outer  part  is  composed  of  large  bowlders. 

A  shoal  bank  extends  from  the  mouth  of  the  Echemin  Kiver. 

Levis  is  a  town  of  considerable  importance,  with  a  great  number  of 
prominent  buildings,  the  most  conspicuous  of  which  are  the  college,  the 
Church  of  Notre  Dame,  and  the  Hospital  of  St.  Josepli  de  la  Dcliv- 
rance,  surmounted  by  a  statue  and  a  spire.  The  termini  of  the  Inter- 
colonial and  Grand  Trunk  railways  are  on  this  shore,  to  which  com- 
munication by  steam  ferry  is  had  with  Quebec. 

Quebec  consists  of  two  parts,  the  upper  town,  built  on  the  ridge, 
which  forms  the  north  side  of  the  river,  and  the  lower  town,  which 
stands  on  the  plateau  between  the  base  of  that  ridge  and  St.  Charles 
Eiver  and  embraces  the  parishes  of  St.  Boch  and  St.  Sauveur. 

The  highest  point  is  the  Citadel,  which  is  340  feet  above  high  water, 
and  the  most  prominent  buildings  on  approaching  it  from  the  eastward 
are  Laval  university.  Parliament  house,  and  St.  John  church.  The 
customhouse,  a  stone  building  with  a  dome  surmounted  by  a  flagstaff, 
stands  at  the  NE.  extreme  of  the  city. 

The  United  States  is  represented  by  a  consul  and  vice-consul. 

Princess  Louise  Basin  comprises  a  wet  dock  and  tidal  basin  at  the 
northeastern  extreme  of  (Quebec,  which  were  opened  to  shipping  in 
May,  1890.  The  tidal  basin  has  an  area  of  about  20  acres,  with  a  quay 
frontage  of  2,860  feet.  Immediately  along  the  face  of  the  quay  wall 
the  depth  is  24  feet,  but  at  10  feet  from  the  Avail  a  depth  of  26  feet  at 
low  water  spring  tides  may  be  obtained.  The  entrance  to  the  tidal 
basin  is  200  feet  wide.  The  inner  or  wet  dock  has  an  area  of  about  40 
acres,  with  a  general  depth  of  27  feet  water  and  a  quay  frontage  of 
3,700  feet.  Vessels  wishing  to  enter  tlie  wet  dock  can  do  so  twice  in 
each  twenty-four  hours  at  each  time  of  high  water.  Lines  of  railway 
extend  to  these  docks  for  transmission  of  freight  to  all  parts  of  Canada. 

Lights. — The  followijig  leading  lights  are  exhibited  to  guide  vessels 
to  the  Commissioners'  wharf  at  Princess  Louise  Basin : 

The  front  light  is  a  fixed  red  electric  light,  43  feet  above  high  water, 
and  visible  8  miles.  It  is  shown  from  a  mast  above  a  small  square 
brown  tower  erected  on  the  NE.  angle  of  Princess  Louise  Basin 
embankment,  near  the  immigration  offices. 

The  two  back  lights  are  fixed  red  electric  lights,  placed  vertically  16 


which  are  laid 

niche  Bank,  and 
i  at  the  eastern 
niilarly  marked, 
■leans  Island,  in 
if.  39°  E.  (N.  57° 

Levis,  which  is 
3S  at  low  water 
railt  off  it.    Oft' 
(iers. 
u  Kiver. 

great  number  of 
!  the  college,  the 
ph  de  la  Di'liv- 
ini  of  the  Inter- 
),  to  which  com- 

ilt  on  the  ridge, 
ver  town,  which 
and  St.  Charles 
Saiiveur. 

)ove  high  water, 
)m  the  eastward 
n  church.  The 
;d  by  a  flagstaff, 

ice-consul. 
;idal  basin  at  the 
to  shipping  in 
res,  with  a  quay 
)f  the  quay  wall 
pth  of  26  feet  at 
nice  to  the  tidal 
area  of  about  40 
quay  frontage  of 
,n  do  so  twice  in 
Lines  of  railway 
parts  of  Canada, 
to  guide  vessels 

[)ove  high  water, 
e  a  small  square 
ss  Louise  Basin 

iced  vertically  16 


QUEBEC. 


349 


feet  apart.  The  upper  light  is  elevated  112  feet,  the  lower  one  06  feet, 
and  they  should  be  visible  8  miles  in  and  through  a  small  arc  on  each 
side  of  the  direction  of  tiic  leading  lights  in  line.  They  arc  shown 
from  posts  erected  on  the  battery  at  the  bottom  of  Ste.  Faiuille  street, 
and  bear  about  1)65  yards  S.  oO-^  VV.  (S.  GS'^  \V.  mag.)  from  the  front 
light. 

Docks. — At  Levis  Point  is  a  stone  graving  dock  484  feet  long,  73J 
feet  wide  at  the  floor,  and  with  a  deptli  of  25  feet  water  over  the  sills 
at  higli  watei-  of  ordinary  spring  tides. 

Davie  and  Russell  lioating  do(iks  and  patent  slips  are  also  at  Levis, 
and  are  of  various  sizes. 

The  largest  vessel  hitherto  taken  by  the  floating  docks  was  1,600  reg- 
ister tons,  while  the  patent  slip  takes  only  vessels  under  tOO  tons  and 
drawing  less  than  1>  feet  water^ 

In  Wolfe  Cove  the  Roche  stone  graving  dock  is  being  constructed. 
It  is  intended  to  be  M'>  feet  long,  itl  feet  wide,  and  to  have  a  depth  of 
16  feet  over  the  sill  at  high  water.  There  are  also  Itoche  floating  docks 
in  Wolfe  Cove  similar  to  those  at  Levis. 

Pilotage  is  «;ompulsory  for  merchant  vessels  in  the  St.  Lawrence 
Eiver.  The  limits  under  control  of  tlie  (^)uebec  pilotage  commissioners 
are  from  an  imaginary  line  drawn  from  the  eastern  anchorge  off  Barn- 
aby  Island  to  the  eastern  anchorage  ground  under  Cape  Columbia  on  the 
north  shore  of  tlie  river  as  the  eastern  limit,  to  the  basin  o*  Portneuf, 
between  (^luebec  and  Montreal,  inclusive,  wliile  the  Montreal  commis- 
sioners control  the  pilotage  from  Portueuf  to  the  boundary  line  between 
Quebec  and  Ontario. 

The  eastern  cruising  gror.nd  of  the  pilots  is  in  the  neighborhood  of 
Bic  Island,  and,  as  a  rule,  in  bad  weather  one  or  more  pilot  .ichoouers 
will  be  found  at  anchor  under  the  lee  of  .'.;i'  island. 

The  flag  shown  by  these  vessels  is  a  red  ivnd  a  white  horizontal 
band,  the  white  uppermost,  and  at  night  'iie  white  light  on  the  middle 
stay  just  before  the  mainmast;  bat  they  (ue  flash  lights  at  least  every 
quarter  of  an  hour.  During  fogs  :  patent  bellows  horn  is  sounded. 
The  charges  were  originally  fixed  according  to  *lie  sea^sitn,  the  lowest 
charge  being  from  May  1  to  November  10,  from  $4.92  to  !<<6.72  per  foot 
of  draft  lor  jnlotage  from  the  eastern  limit  to  Quebec,  two-thirds  of 
these  sums  from  Brandy  Pots,  one-third  from  St.  Eoch  des  Aulnets, 
and  one-quarter  from  the  Avest  extreme  of  Crane  Island.  By  another 
enactment  the  charges  may  be  raised  until  each  pilot  can  receive  $600 
per  annum. 

Tugs  may  be  obtained  by  telegram  from  any  of  V  s  telegraph  and 
signal  stations.  There  are  12  first-class  and  30  smaller  tugs  at  Quebec, 
3  at  Chicoutimi,  one  at  Batiscan,  one  at  Bersimis,  3  at  Sorel,  and  one 
at  Three  llivers.  The  charges  are  fixed  by  agreement,  although  a 
nominal  tariff  is  in  jxistence. 

Tides. — It  is  higi>  water,  full  and  (change,  at  Quebec  at6h.  49ra.; 
springs  rise  18  feet,  neaps  rise  12^  feet,  and  neaps  range  10  feet.    The 


350 


ST.  LAWRENCE   RIVER. 


flood  stream  begins  at  Ih.  8m.  after  low  water,  and  runs  4h.  56m., 
while  the  ebb  begins  at  lb.  3m.  after  high  water,  and  runs  7h.  27m.  by 
the  mean  of  90  obssrvatious  of  each  tide. 

The  highest  tides  occur  before  noon  from  the  spring  to  the  autumnal 
equinox,  and  in  the  afterhoou  during  the  remainder  of  the  year.  The 
greatest  semidiurnal  inequality  observed  was  4  feet  in  September,  1888, 
but  the  average  dittference  between  morning  and  afternoon  heights  of 
of  high  water  is  about  2^  feet.  The  inequality  in  the  time  of  high 
water  is  not  so  marked;  the  r/jost regular  was  observed  in  June,  1888, 
when  the  evening  tides  were  found  to  be  twenty-four  minutes  earlier 
than  the  morning  tides.  There  is  very  little  inequality  in  the  height  of 
low  water,  but  that  in  the  time  is  most  marked,  a  diltereuce  of  one  hour 
having  been  observed  in  June,  1888.  The  average  diflerenije  was  half 
an  hour.  The  highest  tides  observed  were  during  the  freshets  at  the 
end  of  May  or  early  in  June,  and  at  the  autumnal  equinoctial  tides, 
October  8, 1897.  The  former  rose  2^  feet  and  the  latt«r  2  feet  above 
the  ordinary  spring  tide. 

As  a  rule,  tides  rise  higher  with  strong  NE.  Avinds  and  fall  lower 
with  SW.  winds. 

The  tidal  streams  run  generally  in  the  direction  of  the  river,  the  ebb 
stream  being  strongest  on  the  south  shore  and  the  flood  on  the  north 
shore.  There  is  a  tendency  in  the  flood  stream  to  set  vessels  toward  the 
shoal  off  Beauport,  which  should  be  guarded  against.  The  velocity  of 
the  ebb  was  found  to  attain  4^  knots  off  Levis  Point,  and  the  flood  3 J 
knots  oft'  the  Citadel.  Close  t<o  the  shore  the  stream  turns  about 
twenty  minutes  after  high  and  low  water,  the  flood  making  first  on  the 
north  shore  and  the  ebb  on  the  south  shore. 

The  highest  of  the  spring  tides  generally  took  place  on  the  second  or 
third  morning  after  the  change  of  moon,  and  the  lowest  tide  occurred 
at  one  tide,  either  before  or  after  the  highest.  These  remarks  apply 
generally  to  St.  Lawrence  River. 

The  following  table  will  show  the  tidal  data  of  the  places  where 
observations  were  taiten: 


i 


runs  4h.  56m., 
IDS  7h.  27m.  by 

0  the  aiitnmnal 
the  year.  The 
eptember,  1888, 
loou  heights  of 
le  time  of  high 

in  June,  1888, 
minutes  earlier 
in  the  height  of 
lUce  of  one  hour 
rence  was  half 
freshets  at  the 
uinoctial  tides, 
ir  2  feet  above 

and  fall  lower 

e  river,  the  ebb 

1  on  the  north 
sels  toward  the 
The  velocity  of 
id  the  flood  3J 
m  tarns  about 
ing  first  on  the 

in  the  second  or 
i  tide  occurred 
remarks  apply 

»  places  where 


'm!^ff^gmmm!ii^mm'''9^migfmi'it 


1 
I'i 

Daration 
of- 

I 

c 
1 

1 

4 

1. 
S 

0 

h.  m. 
0  29 
110 

ft.  m. 
6    5 
5  56 

ft.  m. 
6  20 
627 

6  53 
5  31 

5  9 

6  6 

4  58 
i  56 

5  9 

6  30 

9 
7 

t) 
i 
i 
i 

0  31 

1  6 
1    7 
1  10 
1    3 
1    0 

6  51 

7  12 

7  19 
726 
7  27 
713 

QUEBEC. 


351 


At  the  Lower  Traverse  lightvessel  the  ebb  stream  begins  at  Ih. 
33m.  after  high  water  at  Orignaux  Point  and  runs  6h.  42in.,  while  the 
flood  stream  begins  at  Oh.  44m.  after  low  water  at  Orignaux  Point  and 
runs  5h.  43m. 

At  the  Upper  Traverse  lightvessel  the  ebb  stream  begins  at  Ih. 
29m.  after  high  water  at  Orignaux  Point  and  runs  seven  hours,  while 
the  flood  stream  begins  at  2h.  3m.  after  low  water  at  Orignaux  Point 
and  runs  5h.  2dm. 

The  times  of  these  changes  vary  considerably,  however,  and  appar- 
ently without  law. 

Ice.— The  river  seldom,  if  ever,  freezes  across  below  Quebec,  but  is 
almost  filled  with  ice  that  fluctuates  with  wind  and  tide  from  shore  to 
shore,  the  ebb  tide  and  westerly  winds  carrying  it  to  the  south  and  the 
converse  with  the  flood  stream. 

The  average  of  fifty- eight  years'  observations,  from  1830  to  1887, 
shows  the  first  arrival  of  steamers  from  Montreal  to  have  occurred  on 
April  27,  the  first  arrival  from  sea  on  April  28,  and  the  last  departure 
for  sea  on  November  27.  The  ferry  steamers  cross  from  Quebec  to 
Levis  till  near  the  end  of  January  and  would  occasionally  run  all  the 
winter,  but  are  compelled  to  lay  up  so  that  the  ice  may  consolidate 
across  the  river.  The  bridge  thus  formed  breaks  up  late  in  March  or 
early  in  April,  though  in  1890  it  remained  till  April  24. 

Supplies.— Provisions  of  all  kinds  can  be  obtained  at  Quebec. 
Water  may  be  obtained  by  boat,  from  the  hydrants  in  the  city,  or  from 
the  river.  The  best  place  for  watei  iug  is  said  to  be  at  the  north  side 
of  Madame  Eeef,  the  impurities  of  the  river  having  principally  subsided 
before  the  stream  reaches  that  locality. 

Coal  can  bo  obt  iued  either  by  lighters  alongside  the  vessels  or  at 
the  wharves.  The  greater  quantity  is  brought  from  Scotland,  but 
Welsh  and  Nova  Scotian  coal  can  be  obtained,  and  anthracite  from 
Pennsylvania.  About  6,000  tons  are  generally  stored  at  the  various 
coal  depots.  The  depths  alongside  the  wharves  range  from  19  to  30 
feet,  but  any  vessel  can  lie  close  to  the  wharves,  regulating  the  dis- 
tance according  to  draft.  The  deepest  water  is  alongside  the  wharves 
of  the  Montreal  Ocean  Steamship  Company,  known  generally  as  the 
Allan  Line. 

Wood  can  be  bought  without  difficulty,  and  is  generally  stored  in 
large  quantities  near  the  Canadian  Pacific  Railway  station  in  the  lower 
town.  Bateaux  are  continuously  employed  in  carrying  wood  from  the 
numerous  localities  on  the  north  shore  of  tho  river  where  it  is  cut. 

Repairs.— Vessels  can  be  repaired  in  the  various  docks  and  slips. 
The  largest  foundry  is  that  of  Carriere  et  Laine.  at  Levis,  where  boilers 
of  any  size  may  be  repaired  or  made,  but  there  is  no  machinery  capable 
of  making  large  forgings,  which,  however,  are  done  at  New  Glasgow,  in 
Nova  S;;otia,  and  are  forwarded  by  rail  to  Quebec.  There  are  no  sheers 
in  Quebec,  and  the  cranes  are. only  capable  ot  unloading  vessels.  There 
are  no  convenieuces  for  heaving  down,  but  every  facility  for  docking. 


'I,,!' 


i  1^  ^d 

'  r        If 


/i 


ST.  LAWRENCE    RIVER. 


Quarantine. — Vessels  liavinj?  infectious  disease  on  Iioaid  are  in- 
spected at  liimouski  and  i)roceed  to  tlie  quiiriiiitiiie  liosjdtal  at  (Srosse 
Isle,  or.  failing  in8i)e(!tion  at  llinioiiski,  jjioceed  direct  to  Giosmb  Isle, 
where  there  is  a  large  (quarantine  estalilislmienl  with  all  the  necessary 
appliances  for  disinfection,  a  resident  i)liy8ician  and  a  staff  of  interpret- 
ers. There  is  a  depth  of  l.">  feet  at  low  water  alongside  the  western 
wharf  and  of  11  feet  at  the  eastern  ])iei'  at  Grosse  Isle. 

There  is  no  sailors'  home  at  Quebec,  but  the  control  of  shipping  for 
seamen  is  under  the  direction  of  the  marine  department.  Seamen  who 
are  sick  are  sent  to  the  Jeffrey  Hale  hospital  or  to  the  Ilotcl  Dieu, 
under  the  auspices  of  the  Itoman  Catholic  church. 

The  currency  of  the  Dominion  of  Canada  is  expressed  by  law  in  dol- 
lars and  cents,  £1  sterling  being  equivalent  to  81.806. 

The  population  of  Quebec  in  1891  was  (>;{,090. 

All  management  of  the  harbor  is  vested  in  the  harbor  commission. 

Communication. — Steamers  communicate  continuously  with  the 
United  Kingdom.  The  Allan  Line  sends  a  steamer  every  week  to  Liv- 
erpool, via  Moville,  to  Glasgow,  and  to  Loudon,  respectively,  nearly 
every  week. 

The  Dominion  Line  sends  a  steamer  weekly  to  Liverpool  and  fort- 
nightly to  Bristol,  and  additional  freight  steamers  otrcasioually. 

Steamers  of  the  Bossiere  Line  run  to  Havre  fortuiglitly,  and  there 
are  two  or  three  other  lines  that  run  regularly  to  Liverpool  or  London, 
the  i)rinclpal  being  the  Donaldson  and  Furwess  Tines. 

A  steamer  runs  fortnightly  from  Quebec  *i»  Charlottetown  and  I'ictou, 
calling  at  the  principal  ports  in  the  gulf  on  the  way. 

A  small  steamer  carries  the  mails  to  the  i^abrador  as  far  as  Esqui- 
maux Point,  calling  at  Kimouski  and  occasionally  at  Anticosti,  sailing 
every  alterunte  Saturday,  I/ocal  steamers  run  daily  to  and  from  Mon- 
treal to  Saguenay  River  about  four  times  a  week  in  summer,  to  the  near 
villages  twice  a  week,  to  St.  Anne  de  Beaupre  daily,  and  there  are 
ferries  that  run  to  Orleans  Island  and  to  Xew  Liverpool  several  times 
in  the  day. 

There  i"  lomirvnication  l>y  rail  to  all  parts  of  Canada  and  the  Tuited 
States,  iv.  •  to  tie  maritime  provinces.  A  new  railway  has  been  built 
to  Lake  S-;.  John,  and  one  '  iu  process  of  construction  to  Chicoutimi 
by  the  c   i.sfc. 

Telegrai>hic  comniuuication  can  be  had  from  Quebec  to  any  part  of 
the  world  where  there  is  a  telegraph  station,  the  otlico  at  that  place 
belonging  to  the  Great  iSorthwesteru  Company  ol'  Canada. 

Time  Signal. — A  time  signal  is  established  at  the  Citadel.  The 
signal  is  made  once  daily  except  on  Sunday,  and  is  a  ball  which  is 
hoisted  half  way  up  its  mast  at  a  quarter  of  an  hour  before  and  r^  the 
masthead  at  live  minutes  before  the  signal.  This  ball  is  dropped  at  Ih. 
mean  time  of  the  scventy-lifih  meridian,  equivalent  to  6h.  Greenwich 
meantime.  It  is  proposed  to  erect  a  time  signal  at  the  custom  iu«H» 
for  the  cou\  enieuce  of  vessels  iu  Louise  Basin. 


ill 


t^n-y 


f^:^^iiM 


II  !)oar(l  are  iii- 
)S])ital  at  (Irosse 
•t  to  Giosse  Lsle, 
all  the  necessary 
stall' of  interpret- 
>8i«le  the  western 

il  of  shipping  for 
nt.  Seamen  who 
I  the  ilotel  Dieu, 

sed  by  law  iu  dol- 


)or  conimission. 
luously  with  the 
very  week  to  Liv- 
^pcctively,  nearly 

liverpool  and  fort- 

casioually. 

tuftlitly,  and  there 

erpool  or  London, 

i. 

etown  and  rictou, 

or  as  far  as  Esqui- 
,  Anticosti,  sailing 
'  to  and  from  Mon- 
iimuier,  to  the  near 
lily,  and  there  are 
:pool  several  times 

da  and  the  United 
ivay  has  been  built 
stion  to  Chicoutlmi 

Bbe<;  to  any  part  of 
stlico  at  that  place 
lauada. 

the  Citadel.  The 
IB  a  ball  which  is 
r  before  and  t  the 
ill  is  <ln>pped  at  Ih. 
t  to  (Ml.  (ireenwich 
at  tlie  custom  lH>a»e 


QUEBEC. 


353 


Storm  Signals.— Storm  warnings  are  also  shown  from  the  Citadel  by 
the  direction  of  the  Government  observer,  who  is  instructed  from  the 
central  meteorological  office  at  Toronto.  They  consist  of  a  cone  and  a 
cylinder.  For  a  moderate  gale— that  is,  with  a  velocity  of  from  30  to  40 
miles  an  hour  from  an  easterly  direction— the  cone  is  hoisted  .vith  the 
ai)ex  down,  and  for  a  moderate  gale  from  westward,  with  the  apex  up. 
For  a  fresh  or  heavy  gale,  winds  exceeding  40  miles  an  hour  from  the 
eastward,  the  cylinder  is  hoisted  above  the  cone,  and  for  a  similar  gale 
from  tho  westward  the  cylinder  is  shown  belovf  the  cone. 

The  night  signals  for  easterly  gales  are  two  white  lights  suspended 
vertically,  and  for  westerly  gales  two  white  lights  hanging  horizontally. 

Weather.— Snow  generally  begins  to  fall  in  the  beginningof  October, 
and  the  hills  become  white  in  November,  and  continue  so  till  May. 
Patches  of  snow  remain  in  the  valleys  till  June. 

The  winds  blow  generally  up  or  down  the  river,  the  prevailing  winds 
being  from  SW.  in  the  proportion  of  199  westerly  to  157  easterly  winds. 
Fogs  prevail  principally  in  the  months  of  July  and  August,  and  smoke 
is  very  common  iu  August  and  September,  but  there  is  no  month  in 
which  immunity  from  fog  may  be  expected.  The  average  height  of  the 
barometer  for  the  year  is  29.971  inches,  the  highest  in  January,  30.042 
inches,  and  the  lowest' in  June,  29.885  inches.  The  mean  temperature 
is  38.3° ;  the  highest,  96.0°,  occurring  in  August,  and  the  lowest,  -30.5°, 
in  December  and  January. 

« 

(H.  O.  Chart  No.  1492.) 

Directions  from  Crane  Island  to  Quebec— There  is  so  little  diffi- 
culty in  the  navigation  from  Crane  Island  to  Quebec  that  scarcely  any 
further  directions  will  be  reciuisite  beyond  that  which  may  be  gathered 
from  the  foregoing  description  and  remarks,  read  with  reference  to  the 
charts,  which  they  are  intended  to  accompany  and  explain. 

With  a  fair  wind,  vessels  run  up  at  night  witliout  hesitation,  unless 
it  be  too  dark  to  see  the  land,  and  even  beat  up  in  line  weaiher.  Witli 
a  fair  Av-nd,  and  with  the  assistance  of  the  charts  and  these  directions, 
a  laijve  vessel  might  be  taken  up  tlirough  this  part  of  the  river,  even  at 
night.  With  the  land  in  sight  and  the  lead  ^oing  there  oan  not  be  any 
ditliculty.  As  soon  as  it  is  ascertained  beyond  doubt  that  the  vessel  is 
alwve  the  red  light  buoy  on  the  SW.  end  of  Madame  Reef,  haul  grad- 
n;illy  over  toward  Orleans  Island  sufficiently  to  avoid  St.  Yallier  Hank 
and  the  reef  oft  St.  Michel  Point,  and  then  steer  for  St.  Laurent  and 
keep  it  aboard  to  avoid  Beaumont  Reefs,  Under  the  circumstances 
which  we  are  supposing,  af  a  night  not  too  dark  to  distinguish  objects, 
the  light  at  St.  Laurent  will  be  seen,  which  has  deep  wa,  •■  at  200  yards 
disisftuit.  but  ott  the  point  to  the  eastward  the  shoal  water  extends 
nearh  -WH)  yards  from  the  high-water  mark,  the  edge  of  the  shoal  biMiig 
very  bold.  Vrivtt  the  lighthouse  a  berth  of  at  least  200yards,  or  do  not 
go  nearer  than  the  depth  of  10  fathoms.  If  the  black  buoy  on  Beau- 
1151 23 


-aBti?flrtPauBaMfcteaaB>2fl 


854 


ST.  LAWRENCE  RIVER. 


moiit  Eeefs  can  be  seen,  all  diflaculty  will  be  removed,  since  the  channel 
northward  of  it  is  clear  and  more  than  J  mile  wide. 

The  shore  of  Orleans  Island  should  be  "kept  aboard  after  passing 
St.  Laurent.  If  it  be  blowing  fresh  from  the  eastward,  it  will  be 
advisable  to  bring  up  off  Patrick  Hole  till  daylight,  or  under  the  west 
end  of  Orleans  Island,  rather  than  risk  running  among  the  crowd  of 
shipping  in  the  night.  When  St.  Joseph  church,  on  Levis  Point,  bears 
about  S.  44°  E.  (S.  26°  E.  mag.),  it  will  be  in  line  with  the  monnd  or 
small  hillock  at  the  water's  edge;  the  vessel  will  be  then  off  the  NW. 
extreme  of  Levis  Point  Shoal.  Southward  of  the  shoal  Levis  Point 
becomes  quite  bold.  Go  no  nearer  to  that  shoal  or  to  Beaiiport  Shoals 
than  the  depth  of  10  fathoms,  and  that  with  caution,  for  they  are  very 
steep. 

Anchorage. — Besides  the  best  places  for  riding  with  easterly  winds, 
there  is  anchorage  almost  everywhere  between  Crane  Island  and 
Quebec.  The  best  ground  for  holding  is  generally  on  the  northern  side 
of  the  channel,  and  one  of  the  best  places  in  strong  westerly  winds  is 
under  St.  Jean  Point,  Orleans  Island. 

NORTH  CHANNEL,  NORTH  TRAVERSE,  AND  ORLEANS  CHANNEL. 

I 

(H.  O.  Charts  Nos.  1491  and  1492.) 

North  Channel — The  northern  shore  of  the  river  south  westward  of 
St.  Paul  Bay  falls  steeply  from  the  summits  of  high  wooded  hills  that 
attain  an  elevation  of  2,650  feet,  close  westward  of  Petite  Riviere.  At 
IJ  miles  southwestward  from  Cape  la  Bale,  a  small  strip  of  low  flat 
land,  lying  between  the  foot  of  the  hills  and  high-water  mark,  com- 
mences and  extends  southward  to  Grande  Point,  a  distance  of  5  miles. 
NunieroiiH  lionses,  forming  a  parish  of  Petite  Riviere,  are  built  on  this 
flat,  and  among  them  is  a  church,  with  a  single  spire,  dedicated  to  St. 
Frauyois  Xavier.  Several  valleys  indent  the  hills,  the  most  marked 
being  about  2  miles  northward  of  Petite  Riviere  church. 

The  entrance  to  North  Channel,  between  the  reef  which  extends  one 
mile  NE.  from  the  NE.  end  of  Coudres  Mmu],  and  the  shoals  which 
stretch  across  Eboulements  Bay,  is  1^  miles  wide.  The  narrowest  part 
of  the  channel  between  Coudres  Island  and  the  main  is  one  mile  wide, 
between  Prairie  Shoal  off  the  west  point  of  Prairie  Bay  and  the  oppo- 
site side  near  Cape  Corbeau.  The  leading  mark  for  this  part  of  the 
passage,  as  well  as  for  clearing  the  shoal  on  the  west  side  of  Cape  St. 
Joseph,  on  the  mainland  side,  is  Cape  Martin  and  (loose  Cape  in  line. 
There  is  a  large  settlement  at  Eboalemeuts,  both  on  the  high  grounds 
around  the  church  of  Notre  Dame  and  also  on  the  shores  of  the  Inay. 
Small  craft  lie  aground  on  the  mud  in  this  bay  within  the  large  bowldars 
on  the  edge  of  the  shoals. 

St.  Paul  Bay  between  Cape  Corbeau  and  Cape  La  Bale  dries  nearly 
to  the  line  of  these  points,  and  there  is  no  passage  into  either  of  the 


iuce  the  channel 

d  after  passing 
rard,  it  will  bo 
under  the  west 
ig  the  crowd  of 
svis  Point,  bears 
ii  the  mound  or 
len  off  the  NW. 
oal  Levis  Point 
Beauport  Shoals 
or  they  are  very 

1  easterly  winds, 
me  Island  and 
he  northern  side 
esterly  winds  is 


NS  OHANI^L. 


)uthwestward  of 
^ooded  hills  that 
ite  Riviere.  At 
strip  of  low  flat 
ater  mark,  com- 
tance  of  5  miles, 
are  built  on  this 

dedicated  to  St. 
he  most  marked 
sh. 

iich  extends  one 
;he  shoals  which 
le  narrowest  part 
is  one  mile  wide, 
ay  and  the  oppo- 

this  part  of  the 
.  side  of  Cape  St, 
ose  Cape  in  line. 
he  high  grounds 
liores  of  the  bay. 
lie  large  bowldssrs 

Baie  dries  nearly 
nto  either  of  the 


NORTH  CHANNEL. 


356 


rivers  at  the  head  at  low  water.  The  point  in  the  middle  of  the  bay, 
separating  the  mouths  of  the  rivers,  is  wooded  and  has  a  conspicuous 
sand  hill  30  foet  high.  The  village  of  St.  Pierre  is  near  the  bridge 
which  (grosses  Riviere  du  Oouflre,  the  eastern  stream  at  about  one  iiiilo 
fiou)  the  entrance,  and  has  a  church  with  two  spires  which  is  seen  occa- 
sionally from  the  channel. 

The  ebb  stream  sweeps  round  this  bay  with  a  velocity  of  7A  knots  at 
si»riug  tides,  and  makes  a  dangerous  ripple  for  boats.  There  is  a  snmll 
space  between  the  northern  edge  of  the  stream  and  the  shoal  water  of 
the  bay,  where  small  vessels  will  tind  secure  anchorage  in  .')  fathoms 
water  at  about  J  mile  northward  from  the  lighthouse,  and  about  200 
yards  from  the  depth  of  18  feet  at  low  water. 

Light— Prom  a  square  lighthouse,  30  feet  high  and  painted  white, 
built  on  a  block  in  the  middle  of  St.  Paul  Bay,  is  exhibited,  at  a  height 
of  33  feet,  a  fixed  white  light  that  should  be  seen  10  miles. 
On  the  block  and  close  to  the  lighthouse  are  two  red  storehouses. 
Fog  Signal.— A  hand  horn  answers  signals  from  vessels. 
La  Baie  Bank.— A  plateau  of  rock,  covered  with  miul  and  bowlders, 
extends  1,200  yards  from  Capo  La  Baie,  and  fringes  the  shore  generally 
for  about  ^  mile  as  far  south  as  Petite  Riviere.    South  ward  of  the  church 
the  plateau  gradually  decreases  its  distance  from  the  shore  to  Saut  au 
Cochon,  wh(  re  the  water  is  deep  within  a  short  distance  of  the  coast. 
Cape  CJribanne  open  south  of  Cape  Maillard,  bearing  S.  31°  W.  (S.  r>0o 
W.  mag.),  leads  east  of  this  shoal  eastward  of  the  church  at  Petite 
Rivi(>re. 

A  buoy,  painted  rr  d,  is  moored  in  4  fathoms  water,  close  eastward  of 
Claude  Shoal,  the  highest  accumulation  of  bowlders  off  Cape  La  Baie. 
La  Petite  Butte  Ronde,  a  conical  wooded  1  ill,  774  feet  high,  rises 
above  Cape  Maillard,  and  is  conspicuous  from  the  northeastward  or 
southwestward.  Two  small  shingle  beaches,  named  Petit  Abatis  and 
L' Abatis,  are  southwestward  of  Cape  Maillard,  and  on  L' Abatis,  which 
is  1|  miles  from  that  cape,  there  are  several  conspicuous  houses.  At 
Saut  au  Cochon  there  is  another  group  of  houses,  a  small  church,  a 
disused  mill,  and  a  wharf  which  marks  the  limit  of  the  low-water  line. 
From  Cape  La  Baie  southward  to  Saut  au  Cochon,  the  flat  which  dries 
at  low  water  extends  about  ^  mile  from  high-water  mark,  and  the  water 
deepens  to  5  fathoms  above  400  yards  beyond  the  edge.  Southward  of 
Saut  au  Cochon  the  low-water  line  extends  only  a  short  distance  ftom 
high-water  mark.  The  flrst  notch  in  the  hills  northward  of  Mount 
Eboulements  in  line  with  the  northern  extreme  of  Coudres  Island,  bear- 
ing N.  34°  E.  (N.  530  E.  mag.),  leads  in  upward  of  5  fathoms  eastward 
of  the  shoal  water  off  the  northern  shore. 

Lai^ue  Point,  a  rocky  ledge,  extends  southeastward  from  the  shore 
at  8O0  yards  northward  of  Cape  Gribanne,  with  depths  of  8, 12,  and  21 
feet,  at  distances  of  600,  800  and  1,000  yards,  respectively,  from  the 
shore.    The  houses  at  L' Abatis  well  open  of  the  wharf  at  Saut  au 


m 


b-:'-\: 


LAWRENCE   RIVER. 

Ooclion,  bearing  N.  23°  E.  (N.  42°  B.  mag.),  leads  close  sontbeustward 
of  tbis  le<lge,  iu  about  7  fatboius.  A  buoy,  )[)aiuted  red,  is  uioored  in  5 
fatboHis  water  close  SB.  of  tbis  ledge. 

Landing  may  be  efiected  in  boats  after  bflli  liood  at  L' Abatis,  Petit 
Abatia,  and  Grande  Toiute,  and  generally  along  tbe  coast  of  Petite 
Jjivii're;  but  care  must  be  taken  in  approacbing  tbe  sboie  to  avoid  tbe 
bowlders  tliat  Ht;ind  above  tbe  general  level  of  tbe  flat  ground  between 
liigb  and  low  water  marks.  Petit  l)ebiir(juement  is  tbe  best  landing 
place,  on  either  side  of  a  small  mound  joined  to  tbe  main  by  a  sandy 
beach  at  one  mile  northward  of  Cape  Gribanne. 

Cape  Bnil6 — ^Lights. — On  tbe  edge  of  the  cliff  at  Cape  lirule  stands 
a  sciuaro  light  house,  ^i  feet  high  and  ])aiuted  white,  from  which,  at  an 
elevation  of  148  feet,  is  exhibited  ii  fixed  white  light.  Northward  of  this 
lighthouse ;  ire  two  open  framework  structures,  the  eastern  34  feet  and  the 
western  24  feet  high,  both  painted  white,  from  each  of  which  is  exhibited 
a  fixed  white  light  158  feet  and  128  feet,  respectively,  above  high  water. 
These  lights  are  110  yards  S.  14°  W.  (S.  33°  W.  mag.)  and  N.  14°  E. 
(N.  33°  E.  mag.)  from  each  other.  All  these  lights  should  be  visible 
15  miles,  and  are  known  locally  as  those  of  Montee  du  Lac. 

Coudres  Island  is  surmounted  by  wooded  hills  390  feet  above  high 
water  that  slope  steeply  to  the  north  shore.  A  cuitivated  valley  lies 
south  of  these  hills  and  separates  them  from  a  ridge  02  feet  high,  and 
fs/ced  by  cliff  that  extends  generally  along  the  south  shore.  A  round 
atone  mill  stands  near  the  middle,  and  numerous  houses  are  built  on 
tills  ridge. 

Tbd  SW .  points  are  at  the  base  of  bold  blufts,  and  a  mound  90  feet 
iiigli  known  as  la  Butt  A  Gaillard  rises  north  of  le  Havre,  the  northern 
co^'e  at  the  SW.  extreme.  Tbe  extreme  SW.  i»oint  slopes  from  a  wooded 
hillock  40  feet  high,  and  the  NE.  point  from  a  similar  mound  63  feet  high, 
both  of  which  appear  as  islands  from  a  short  distance.  Cape  Branche, 
the  western  extreme,  is  under  a  steep  wooded  bluff  180  feet  high. 

A  new  church  with  two  spires  dedicated  to  St.  Louis  has  been  built 
on  the  north  shore  of  L'Anse,  tbe  southern  cove  at  the  SW.  extreme. 

Coudres  Island  is  surrounded  by  reefs,  on  several  of  which  are  large 
rows  of  stakes  with  nets  affixed  to  catcb  the  marsouin,  or  whiteflsh, 
whicb  frequent  this  part  of  the  St.  Lawrence  Itiver  iu  the  early  part  of 
the  summer. 

Prairie  Bay,  on  the  NW.  side  of  Coudres  Island,  is  comprised 
between  Cap  a  L'Aigle  and  Prairie  Point,  and  is  one  of  the  best  shel- 
tered anchorages  in  the  river.  Vessels  may  anchor  in  10  fathoms,  or 
less  as  convenient,  f  mile  from  the  shore.  The  shore  dries  at  low  water 
300  yards  from  the  high-water  mark,  and  depths  less  than  5  fathoms 
extend  600  yards  further.  The  tidal  streams  decrease  in  strength  as 
the  shore  is  approached. 

Light — From  a  mast,  35  feet  high,  at  the  end  of  a  small  pier  at  Cap 
^  L'Aigle,  the  eastern  entrance  point  of  Prairie  Bay,  and  at  38  feet 


)8e  sontbesistvvard 
ud,  is  moored  in  5 

at  r/ Abatis,  Petit 
le  coawt  of  Tetite 
Hhoie  to  avoid  the 
it  ground  between 

I  the  best  binding 
main  by  a  sandy 

Cape  Brulr';  stands 
from  which,  at  an 
Northward  of  this 
tern  34  feet  and  the 
wliich  is  exhibited 

above  high  water, 
ig.)  and  N.  140  E. 

should  be  visible 
du  Lac. 

',)()  feet  above  high 
tivated  valley  lies 
3  02  feet  high,  and 

I I  shore.  A  round 
ouses  are  built  on 

d  a  mound  90  feet 
avre,  the  northern 
ipes  from  a  wooded 
nound  63  feet  high, 
e.  Cape  13ranche, 
80  feet  high, 
mis  has  been  built 
the  SW.  extreme, 
of  which  are  large 
louiii,  or  whiteflsh, 
u  the  early  part  of 

and,  is  comprised 
10  of  the  best  shel- 
r  in  10  fathoms,  or 
1  dries  at  low  water 
ss  than  5  fathoms 
ase  in  strength  as 

I  small  pier  at  Cap 
ay,  and  at  38  feet 


NORTH  CHANNEL. 


357 


above  high  water,  is  exhibited  a  fixed  white  light  that  should  be  visible 
6  miles. 

Prairie  Shoal  extends  •;  mile  westward  of  Prairie  Point,  and  termi- 
nates in  numerous  bowlders  that  dry  at  low  water. 

A  buoy,  painted  black,  is  moored  in  13  feet  water  ott'  this  shoal.  Tlie 
church  of  Notre  Dame  dcs  Eboulements  open  north  of  the  inner  end 
of  the  pier  at  Cape  St.  Joseph,  bearing  N.  uOo  E.  (N.  69°  E.  mag,),  leads 
close  N  VV.,  and  L'IsIet  d'en  Haut,  at  the  west  extreme  of  Coudres  Island, 
open  west  of  Cape  Brauche,  bearii  .  140  E.  (S.  5°  W.  mag.),  leads 
west  of  this  shoal. 

When  approaching  Prairie  Baj  Mi.   southward,  vessels  should 

not  turn  in  until  the  two  points  on  t  •  ide  of  St.  Paul  Bay  are  in 

Une,  bearing  N.  67°  W.  (N.  48°  W.  iuug.),  u  lieu  the  vessel  may  steer 
for  the  anchorage. 

Anchorage.— Goose  Cape  shelters  Prairie  Bay  from  easterly  gales  and 
prevents  any  sea  of  consequence  from  rolling  in,  so  that  this  anchorage 
is  quite  safe  in  all  winds,  the  ground,  of  clay,  being  good  for  holding, 
and  the  tides  easy  if  the  vessel  be  not  anchored  too  far  out.  There  is 
room  for  many  vessels,  the  space  to  anchor  in  being  almost  one  mile 
long  and  about  i  mile  wide,  reckoning  from  3-fathom  mark  to  10  fath- 
oms, beyond  which  the  water  deepens  rapidly  and  the  streams  are  of 
great  strength.  The  best  berth  is  in  6  fathoms,  near  the  center  of  the 
bay,  where  the  tides  are  not  nearly  so  strong  as  at  (Quebec,  and  where 
the  surveying  vessel  Oulnare  rode  out  a  gale  from  the  eastward  (so 
heavy  as  to  do  great  damage  to  the  shipping  off  that  city)  with  ease 
and  safety.  Ships  meeting  with  an  easterly  wind  below  South  Traverse 
will  find  this  a  good  anchorage  to  run  tor  and  should  proceed  as  follows: 

Directions.— Being  below  Middle  Ground,  stand  over  toward  Eboule- 
ments, going  no  nearer  to  the  reef  off  the  NE.  end  of  Coudres  Island 
than  the  depth  of  10  fathoms.  Having  passed  the  reef  and  opened  out 
the  channel,  bear  up  along  the  shore  of  Coudres  Island,  passing  close 
to  Cap  }\  L'Aigle  into  the  anchorage.  Approaching  this  anchorage  from 
the  southwestward,  bring  the  leading  marks  on  for  clearing  Prairie 
Shoal,  namely,  the  church  of  Notre  Dame  des  Eboulements,  open  north 
of  the  inner  end  of  the  pier  at  Cape  St.  Joseph  bearing  N.  60°  E.  (N. 
69°  E.  mag.).  Run  upon  these  marks  until  St.  Pierre  church  is  shut 
in  behind  the  NE.  side  of  St.  Paul  Bay,  or  the  points  on  the  NE.  side 
of  that  bay  are  in  line,  when  the  vessel  may  haul  to  the  southeastward 
into  the  aucho^rage.  The  anchorage  under  Coudres  Island  in  easterly 
winds  is  very  good,  the  best  position  being  in  7  fathoms,  with  the  south 
point  of  Coudres  Island  bearing  about  N.  05°  E.  (N.  84©  E.  mag.). 

Tides.— In  Prairie  Bay  the  Hood  stream  by  the  shore  is  longer  than 
the  ebb,  the  water  flowing  for  6h.  20m.,  and  ebbing  only  6h.  Om., 
which  is  contrary  to  the  observations  taken  in  every  other  part  of  the 
river.  The  stream  of  flood  at  the  anchorage  in  6  fathoms  is  stronger 
than  that  of  the  ebb,  and  about  4  knots  in  spiing  tides.    The  stream  of 


I  <    I        I     M 


358 


ST.  LAWBENCE  RIVER. 


the  ebb  ig  turned  off  in  great  meanure  by  Prairie  Shoal.  Its  rate  for 
the  tlrrtt  two  liuurs  of  tlie  tide  in  about  2  IcnotH.  It  then  Hlacks  for 
about  live  minates  no  coin])lctely  that  a  vessel  will  swing  to  tho  wind. 
After  this  thn  stream  be<;oines  stronger  aud  regular  during  the  remain- 
der of  the  tide,  its  rate  being  about  3^  knots  in  spring  tides.  Vessels 
should  moor  at  Prairie  Bay,  or  at  least  have  a  kedge  out  to  insure 
keeping  a  clear  anchor. 

Coudres  Bank  extends  southwestward  from  Coudres  Island  and 
shoals  ra])id)y  within  tho  doi)th  of  5  fathoms.  There  is  good  anchor- 
age on  tho  west  side  of  it  in  7  to  8  fathoms.  The  landslip  near  Cape 
St.  Joseph  open  of  Cape  Branche,  bearing  N.  20°  E.  (N.  45°  IC.  mag.), 
will  lead  west  of  thin  bank  till  abreast  Cape  Maillard.  Vessels  anchor- 
ing  may  swing  into  this  line,  but  not  farther  north  than  the  SW. 
extreme  of  Coudres  Island  bearing  S.  41'^  E.  (S.  22°  E.  mag.). 

Neptune  Rock  (liocher  de  Saut  an  Cochon)  lies  nearly  15  miles  firom 
Coudres  Island,  and  about  1,200  yards  southeastward  of  tho  edge  of 
Coudres  shoals.  It  has  two  heads  both  of  which  are  one  foot  above 
high  water  spring  tides. 

Burnt  Cape  Ledge  is  an  extensive  chain  of  graywacke  and  slate 
rocks.  The  western  extreme  is  an  islet  12  feet  above  high  water,  and 
on  the  reef  eastward  of  this  islet  a  hut  has  been  built,  the  roof  of 
which  is  -^  -let  i  3ve  high  water.  The  SW.  end  is  nearly  abreast 
Cape  Bruh',  irom  which  it  is  distant  1^  miles. 

BruV-  i  ;.ink  is  a  sand  flat  which  dries  5  feet  at  low  water  and  lies 
westw^^id  of  Burnt  Cape  Ledgie,  to  which  it  is  joined  by  shoal  water. 
The  channel  between  this  bank  and  the  north  shore  is  1,200  yards 
wide,  and  has  from  7  to  10  fathoms  water  in  it.  This  Is  the  only  chan- 
nel, but  between  the  northeastern  part  of  Brule  liank  and  Burnt  Cape 
Ledge  is  Brule  Cul  de  Sac,  an  inlet  in  the  banks,  which  must  be 
avoided  by  keeping  the  north  shore  aboard,  after  arriving  oft'  the  east- 
ern part  of  the  ledge.  The  black  buoy  marking  the  northeastern 
extreme  of  Brule  Bank  is  moored  in  4  fathoms,  with  Cape  Brule  prin- 
cipal lighthouse  bearing  S.  60°  W.  (S.  79°  W.  mag.),  distant  1,%  miles. 

The  depth  of  18  feet  at  the  northeastern  end  of  Brul(^  Bank  is  on  the 
line  of  the  western  end  of  Two  Heads  Island  in  line  with  the  south' 
western  end  of  Burnt  Cape  Ledge,  bearing  S.  28°  E.  (S.  9°  B.  mag.). 

Eastern  Narrows  of  North  Traverse,  between  the  SW.  extreme  of 
Brule  Bank  and  the  NE.  extreme  of  Traverse  Spit,  lie  1^  miles  south 
from  Cape  Touruiente.  Great  part  of  Traverse  Spit,  as  well  as  of 
Brul^  Bank,  dries  soon  after  half  ebb,  and  thereby  greatly  lessens  the 
difficulty  of  the  passage.  This  shoal  lies  on  an  extensive  reef  of  slate 
extending  from  the  NE.  end  of  Orleans  Island.  The  passage  is  only 
300  yards  wide  with  depths  greater  than  3  fathoms,  and  Traverse  Spit 
is  apparently  extending  northeastward.  A  black  buoy  marks  the 
eastern  side  of  the  Narrows,  at  the  southwestern  extreme  of  Brul^  Bank 
in  IS  feet  water,  and  a  red  buoy  is  moored  at  the  northeastern  end  of 


!*  .  " 


Shortl.  Its  rate  for 
It  then  Hlacks  for 
I  swing  to  tlio  wind, 
r  (luriuK  tiie  remain- 
•ring  tides.  Vessels 
tcdge  out  to  insure 

Coudres  Island  and 
I  ere  i.s  good  anchor- 
)  landslip  near  Cape 
E.  (N.  45°  K.  mag.), 
ird.  Vessels  anchor- 
north  than  the  SW. 
2°  K.  mag.). 
i  nearly  15  miles  from 
itward  of  the  edge  of 
h  are  one  foot  above 

graywacke  and  slate 
bove  high  water,  and 
len  built,  the  roof  of 
lid  is  nearly  abreast 

it  low  water  and  lies 
)ined  by  shoal  water, 
shore  is  1,200  yards 
This  is  the  only  chan- 
liank  and  Burnt  Cape 
anks,  which  must  be 
■  arriving  oft'  the  east- 
ing the  northeastern 
with  Cape  Brule  prin- 
»g.),  distant  1,%  miles, 
f  Brul6  Bank  is  on  the 
a  line  with  the  south 
0  E.  (8.  9°  B.  mag.), 
sn  the  SW.  extreme  of 
}pit,  lie  1^  miles  south 
se  Spit,  as  well  as  of 
aby  greatly  lessens  the 
extensive  reef  of  slate 
The  passage  is  ouly 
ams,  and  Traverse  Spit 
)lack  buoy  marks  the 
extreme  of  Brul6  Bank 
Dhe  uortheasteru  end  of 


-»te!^ssEs?s69»ai^*sa'!<^jsfeS 


,m,\'im>»fiuttm,iimiim^,m»mMtiiMh*mr\ii-\dffMiitHai^iiit 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


«' 


CIHM/ICMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 


CIHM/ICMH 
Collection  de 
microfiches. 


Canadian  Institute  for  Historical  IVIicroreproductlons  /  Institut  Canadian  de  microreproductions  historiques 


laaMii 


NORTH   CHANNEL. 


359 


Traverse  Spit,  and  on  tbe  western  side  of  Eastern  Narrows.  The  lights 
at  St.  l''ran(;ois  in  line  lead  between  Brule  Kank  and  Traverse  Spit. 
This  alignment  passes  over  the  north  end  of  West  Sand  in  2  fathoms. 

Western  Narrows  are  only  300  yards  wide  with  depths  over  18  feet, 
and  are  comprised  between  West  Sand  and  Traverse  Spit.  West  Sand 
has  extended  eastward  a  considerable  distance  since  the  survey  of 
1827,  and  at  its  northeastern  extreme  is  a  shoal  with  a  depth  of  12  feet. 
A  buoy  checkered  black  and  white  is  moored  in  28  feet  water  close 
northeastward  of  this  shoal.  The  southern  and  eastern  extremes  of 
Orleans  Island  just  open  of  ea<5h  other,  bearing  S.  35°  W.  (S.  54°  W. 
mag.),  leads  northwestward;  and  tlie  islet  at  the  SW.  extreme  of 
Goose  Isle  in  line  with  the  eastern  extreme  of  Reaux  Island,  bearing 
S.  72°  E.  (S.  53°  E.  mag.),  leads  close  northeastward  of  West  Sand. 

Cape  Tourmente  marks  the  western  extreme  of  the  steep  fall  to  the 
river.  It  is  surmounted  by  a  densely  wooded  hill  1,874  feet  high,  on 
the  slope  of  which  and  at  an  elevation  of  1,692  feet  above  high  water 
is  a  small  chapel,  the  spire  of  which  can  generally  be  seen  from  the 
river. 

Directions  for  North  Channel.— To  sail  up  North  Channel  by  atten- 
tion to  the  leading  marks  given  in  page  354,  there  will  be  no  diflBculty 
in  passing  between  Coudres  Island  and  the  main.  When  St.  Pierre 
church  opens  out  westward  of  the  northeastern  side  of  St.  Paul  Bay,  a 
vessel  will  be  up  to  the  north  extreme  of  Prairie  Shoal,  and  when 
L'Islet  d'en  Ilaut,  the  small  islet  at  the  SW.  end  of  Coudres  Island 
opens  westward  of  Cape  Branche,  she  will  be  past  it,  and  may  haul 
to  the  SW.  up  the  channel. 

If  wishing  to  keep  Coudres  Island  aboard,  givo  Cape  Branche  a 
berth  of  J  mile  in  passing,  or  go  no  nearer  than  10  fathoms  water,  and 
that  with  due  caution,  for  the  bank  will  be  found  extremely  steep-to 
until  the  vessel  is  abreast  the  SW.  end  of  the  island.  After  passing 
Coudres  Island  she  may  approach  the  edge  of  the  bank  to  7  fathoms, 
as  far  up  as  Neptune  Rock. 

If  desirous  of  keeping  the  mainland  aboard,  keep  the  extremes  of 
the  capes  to  the  southward  open  southward  of  Cape  Maillard,  in  order 
to  clear  the  shoal  off"  Cape  La  Bale,  and  also  as  far  westward  as  Petite 
Riviere.  Farther  southward,  as  off  Cape  Maillard,  where  the  shoal 
extends  nearly  f  mile  off  shore,  the  first  notch  .in  the  hills  north  of 
Mount  Eboulemeuts  must  be  kept  in  line  with  Cape  Branche  bearing 
N.  340  E.  (N.  530  E.  mag.),  till  she  is  past  Saut  au  Cochon,  after  which 
the  shore  becomes  quite  bold. 

After  passing  Saut  au  Cochon  the  houses  at  L' Abatis  must  be  kept 
well  open  of  the  wharf  at  Saut  au  Cochon,  bearing  N.  23°  E.  (N.  42° 
E.  mag.),  to  clear  Longue  Point,  after  which  the  northern  shore  should 
be  kept  weil  on  board  until  abreast  Cape  BrnU.  The  leading  light- 
houses on  that  cape  (the  northernmost  and  the  easternmost  of  the 
three)  must  then  be  brought  in  line,  bearing  N.  14°  E.  (N.  33°  E.  mag.), 


■  'isu-^i^jfii^Jai^aa^fc^iS 


^**^^*'^*fevi'*-J---ft-;'^>-4^--^Tfi-^fiHWr*4i«^-^4 


360 


ST.  LAWRENCE    RIVER. 


and  kept  so  through  Eaatern  Narrows,  between  the  buoys  there  and 
until  St.  Franyois  beacons  or  lighthouses  are  in  line,  bearing  S.  40°  W. 
(8.  68°  W.  mag.).  Then  steer  for  those  lighthouses  with  the  upper  one 
slightly  open  southward  of  the  lower  one,  and  before  the  islet  at  tbe 
western  extreme  of  Grosse  Isle  is  in  line  with  the  eastern  extreme  of 
Reaux  Island,  bearing  S.  72°  E.  (S.  54°  e,  mag.),  the  southeastern 
extremes  of  Orleans  Island  must  be  brought  nearly  in  line,  bearing 
S.  35°  W.  (S.  53°  W.  mag.),  to  pass  between  West  Sand  and  Traverse 
Spit.  When  St.  Vallier  church  opens  westward  of  Madame  Island, 
haul  a  little  to  the  southward  and  keep  J  mile  from  Orleans  Island 
farther  on. 

Tides.— The  stre;  nis  set  fairly  through  North  Traverse,  attaining  a 
rate  of  3^  to  4  knots  at  spring  tides.  These  streams  increase  in  strength 
in  North  Channel  farther  northeastward,  attaining  their  greatest  veloc- 
ity between  Coudres  Island  and  St.  Paul  Bay,  where  a  rate  of  7J  knots 
was  found  with  the  ebb  tide  and  of  about  G  knots  during  the  Hood 
stream.  In  strong  breezes  opposed  to  these  streams  there  is  a  high 
breaking  sea  that  is  very  dangerous  for  boats. 

Besides  Western  Narrows  there  is  an  inferior  channel,  named  West 
Sand  Passage,  between  West  and  Center  Sands,  as  wide  as  Western 
Narrows,  but  it  has  only  3J  fathoms  water  in  it. 

Orleans  Channel  is  suitable  only  for  vessels  drawing  15  feet  or  less 
water,  as  there  are  several  shoals  nearly  in  mid-channel  with  that 
depth,  and  it  should  not  therefore  be  attempted  for  the  first  time  with- 
out a  local  pilot. 

Lights.— The  following  lights  have  been  erected  to  facilitate  the 
navigation  of  this  channel. 

St.  Anne  de  Beauprd— From  a  mast  20  feet  high,  at  the  south 
extreme  of  the  wharf  at  St.  Anne  de  Beaupre,  is  exhibited,  at  25  feet 
above  high  water,  a  fixed  red  light  that  should  be  visible  5  miles.  At 
the  base  of  the  mast  is  a  wooden  shed,  painted  white,  with  a  red  roof. 
This  light  is  temporarily  discontinued. 

St  Famille.— From  a  square  !  .-use,  21  feet  high  and  painted 

white,  standing  a  short  distance  r-  rd  of  the  church  at  St.  Famille, 
and  at  an  elevation  of  245  feet,  id  exhibited  a  fixed  white  light  that 
should  be  visible  IG  miles. 

At  the  base  of  the  cliff,  below  this  light  and  2,671  feet  S.  52°  W. 
(S.  70°  W.  mag.)  from  it  and  near  a  stone  mill,  is  a  mast  50  feet  high, 
from  which  a  fixed  white  light  is  shown  at  50  feet  above  high  water, 
that  should  be  visible  12  miles. 

St.  Pierre  Point. — On  this  point,  and  close  to  the  high- water  mark, 
is  a  square  liglithouse,  23  feet  liigh  and  painted  white,  from  which  a 
fixed  white  light  is  shown  at  20  feet  above  high  water. 

At  539  feet  S.  40°  W.  (S.  58^  W.  mag.)  from  this  hghthouse  is  a  mast 
50  feet  high,  from  which  a  fixed  white  light  is  shown  at  60  feet  above 
high  water.        / 

These  lights  should  be  visible  9  and  12  miles,  respectively. 


)Uoys  there  and 
earing  S.  40°  W. 
til  tbe  upper  one 

the  islet  at  the 
stern  extreme  of 
;he  southeastern 

in  line,  bearing 
nd  and  Traverse 
Madame  Island, 
I  Orleans  Island 

Terse,  attaining  a 
irease  in  strength 
lir  greatest  veloc- 
1,  rate  of  7J  knots 
during  the  flood 
s  there  is  a  high 

nel,  named  West 
wide  as  Western 

ng  15  feet  or  less 
lannel  with  that 
le  first  time  with- 

to  facilitate  the 

gh,  at  the  south 

libited,  at  25  feet 

lible  5  miles.    At 

with  a  red  roof. 

ligh  and  painted 
ch  at  St.  Famine, 
white  light  that 

1  feet  S.  52°  W. 
last  50  feet  high, 
)ove  high  water, 

ligh-water  mark, 
ite,  from  which  a 

ithouse  is  a  mast 
at  50  feet  above 

jtively. 


NORTH    CHANNEL. 


361 


L'Ange  Q-ardien. — Two  square  wooden  lighthouses,  21  and  23  feet 
high  and  paintcul  white,  sliow  fixed  white  lights  at  elevations  of  33  and 
20  feet,  respectively,  and  are  visible  11  and  9  miles.  The  back  light  is 
1,120  feet  N.  250  E.  (N.  13o  E.  mag.)  from  front  light. 

Buoys. — The  following  buoys  are  described  in  the  order  they  should 
be  seen  when  approaching  from  the  eastward.  A  red  buoy  is  moored 
at  the  SB.  extreme  of  Seminaire  Spit,  and  a  black  buoy  at  the  north 
extreme  of  Traverse  Spit. 

A  bla(!k  buoy  marks  the  NE.  extreme  of  the  shoal  which  lies  in  mid- 
channel  south  of  St.  Anne  River.  A  black  buoy  is  moored  at  the  south 
extreme  of  the  bowlders  that  dry  at  low  water  on  the  shore  SE.  of  Les 
Islets.  A  red  buoy  is  moored  at  the  SB.  extreme  of  Les  Islets,  the 
bank  of  bowlders  that  dries  at  low  water  eastward  of  St.  Pierre  Point, 
and  another  red  buoy  south  of  the  east  extreme;  while  a  third  red  buoy 
is  moored  to  show  the  limit  of  the  shoals  extending  westward  from  Les 
Islets.  A  black  buoy  marks  the  NW.  limit  of  the  bowlders  off  Pointe 
an  Pavilion,  but  not  of  the  shoal  lying  eastward  of  it. 

A  red  buoy  is  moored  off  the  east  extreme  of  the  sand  bank  that 
extends  from  the  north  shore  off  Beauport. 

Directions. — Having  passed  Cape  Brule,  a  course  should  be  steered 
to  pass  between  the  red  buoy  off"  Seminaire  Spit  and  the  black  buoy  off 
Traverse  Spit,  until  the  apparent  NW.  extreme  of  Orleans  Island  west 
of  the  pier  at  the  north  end  of  the  island  is  in  line  with  the  end  of  that 
pier,  bearing  S.  62°  W.  (S.  80°  W.  mag.).  Continue  on  this  mark  until 
the  church  at  St.  Anne  de  Beaupro  is  in  line  with  the  sharp  peak  on 
the  west  summit  of  the  ridge  westward  of  Riviere  aux  Chieus,  bearing 
S.  77°  W.  (N.  85°  W.  mag.),  when  that  mark  must  be  followed  to  pass 
between  the  mid-channel  bank  oft'  St.  Anne  River  and  the  north  shore. 

The  course  must  be  changed  when  Chateau  Richer  church  is  in  line 
with  the  north  fall  of  the  hills  over  L'Ange  Gardien,  bearing  S.  55° 
W.  (S.  73°  W.  mag.),  and  this  mark  followed  till  the  Parliament  house 
at  Quebec  is  in  line  with  the  Pointe  au  Pavilion,  bearing  8.  44°  W.  (S. 
62°  W.  mag.).  This  line  will  lead  in  mid-channel  between  the  shoals 
until  the  lights  at  St.  Pierre  are  in  line,  bearing  S.  40°  W.  (S.  58°  W. 
mag.),  when  they  must  be  steered  for  until  the  lights  at  St.  Famille  are 
in  line,  bearing  N.  52°  E.  (N.  70°  E.  mag.).  Keep  these  lights  in  line 
astern  until  Beauport  church  south  spire  is  midway  between  the 
extremes  of  the  two  westernmost  of  Hairs  wharves  at  Montmorency 
Falls,  bearing  S.  55°  W.  (S.  73°  W.  mag.).  This  mark  will  lead  north 
of  the  shoal  lately  found  to  extend  northwestward  from  Pointe  au 
Pavilion,  and  should  be  followed  until  L'Ange  Gardien  lights  are  in 
line,  bearing  N.  25°  E.  (S.  43°  E.  mag.)  nearly,  when  the  latter  lights 
should  be  kept  in  line  astern  until  the  basin  of  Quebec  is  reached. 

The  tidal  streams  run  generally  in  the  line  of  the  channel,  and  attain 
a  velocity  of  3  to  4  knots  at  spring  tides. 

Tides. — The  following  table  has  been  formed  from  the  mean  of  the 


.  -mmtwrnmsn 


^j«aiiMwratr«iih»Vi-f'j)*i»VtfiSiigasfieia^^ 


362 


ST.  LAWRENCE   RIVEB. 


observations  of  several  spring  tides.  The  neap  tides  rise  and  fall 
nearly  at  tlie  same  rate  as  in  ordinary  spring  tides — so  nearly  that  any 
diii'erence  that  there  may  be  is  far  e.xceeded  by  the  action  of  strong 
winds;  but,  as  in  neap  tides,  the  whole  rise  and  fall  is  not  so  great  as 
in  the  ordinary  springs  sliown  in  the  following  table,  therefore  the  pro- 
portionate part  of  the  rise  and  fall  for  every  hour  after  low  and  high 
water  will  also  be  less,  and  an  allowance  must  be  made  accordingly. 

Table  shotting  approximately  the  height  of  the  title  at  every  hour  after  low  and  high  water 

in  ordinary  spring  tidet. 


Place. 

Honra 
after  low 

Flood  title. ;    Honrs 

Ebb  tide. 

alter  tuna 

water. 

Heigbt. 

water. 

Height. 

ft,  m. 

ft.  in. 

h.  m. 

ft.  in. 

Oiinlinp  4      ..      ....■-•..■.•■■•••■■>••■■•■•••■••*■■■■•■>>-- 

0  0 

1  0 

0  0  1.  w. 
5    6 

0  0 

1  0 

17    Oh.w. 

WUUUvLi       ,,«,,,,»■■■••••■•••••••■■•••••"••••■••"•■""•■ 

16    0 

2    0 

10    6 

2    0 

11    4 

3    0 

14    9 

3    0 

8    0 

4    0 

16    3 

4    0 

5  10 

4  45 

17    6h.w. 

5  0 

6  0 

7  0 
7  36 

3    4 
1    6 
0    2 
0    0 1.  w. 

Cf   l^nrli  t\ AM  A nlnciis        ..>■>>>■■■■■■■•■•■■•■•■■•■••>•■•■ 

0  0 

1  0 

0  0  1.  w. 
2    0 

0  0 

1  0 

17    Oh.w. 

i3b>  XVUCiIl  UVO  *» UlUvuo  •■■•■••••••••••••••••••••••■■••■•■"■ 

14    9 

2    0 

5    3 

2    0 

11    g 

3    0 

9    6 

3    0 

8    6 

* 

4    0 

13    S 

4    0 

5    6 

6    0 

16    3 

5    0 

3    0 

s 

6  35 

17    uh.w. 

6    0 
6  50 

1    6 

0    0  1.  w. 

Ttrandv  Potfl      ............■■•>■•••■•••>■••■■•>•>•>••■••"• 

0  0 

1  0 

0  0  1.  w. 

1  3 

0  0 

1  0 

17    Oh.w. 

A>rf%UU V    f  UW>  ■■■•■■••••«•••••••••••■•••■■••■■■■■■»■"■■■" 

15    0 

2    0 

4    7 

2    0 

12    0 

3    0 

9    5 

3    0 

8    6 

4    0 

13    8 

4    0 

5    6 

6    0 

16    0 

5    0 

3    0 

6  50 

17    Oh.w. 

6    0 
6  34 

1    0 

0    01.  W. 

'Pnfl/^iiaaA   nnfrflTiPA  Ctf  RfHtliMXAV  HI  VOIP  .  ..■>■■>■■■«■••>•■ 

0  0 

1  0 

0  0  1.  w. 

1  3 

0  0 

1  0 

17    Oh.w. 

XMUvUnUvi  tJii iriuiijtJ  ui  oui£''"u**j'  ■»■"' •  ^j*  •  •■•■■••"■•■■••"•■ 

15    0 

2    0 

4    6  ' 

2    0 

12    0 

3    0 

8    0 

3    0 

8    0 

4    0 

12    0 

4    0 

4    0 

6    0 

15    6 

5    0 

1    0 

0    8 

17    Oh.w. 

1 

6  16 

0    0 

*The  tides  of  Orosge  Isle  were  observed  to  rise  and  fall  nearly  in  the  same  manner,  excepting  that 
the  rise  after  low  water  was  not  quite  so  rapid. 

The  use  of  the  table  will  appear  evident  from  a  consideration  of 
what  has  been  said  in  page  337,  but  to  render  it  still  plainer  we  will 
suppose  a  case.  A  ship  bound  up  the  river,  and  drawing  23  feet 
water,  weighs  from  off  St.  Anne  buoy  just  as  the  stream  of  flood 
begins  to  make;  and  it  is  judged  from  an  estimation  of  her  rate  of 
sailing,  in  addition  to  that  of  the  stream  of  flood,  that  she  will  be  up 
to  Channel  Patch  in  IJ  hours,  and  at  Beaujeu  Bank  in  3  hours.  Will 
she  have  water  enough  to  pass  over  Channel  Patch,  and  afterwards  to 
the  southward  of  Beaujeu  Bank,  and  how  much  at  each  place?  Now, 
ttie  stream  of  ebb  at  St.  Eoch  (see  p.  340)  runs  down  IJ  hours  after 
low  water  by  the  shore,  but  it  is  not  low  water  until  about  a  quarter 
of  an  hour  later  at  the  Pillars.  The  flood  had  therefore  been  rising 
about  one  hour  there  when  the  ship  weighed.    The  tide  will  therefore 


les  rise  and  fall 
o  nearly  that  any 
action  of  strong 
is  not  so  great  as 
therefore  the  pro- 
pter low  and  high 
lie  accordingly. 

»■  low  and  high  water 


e.! 

Honrfi 

Ebb  tide. 

after  high 

water. 

Height. 

h.  m. 

ft. 

in. 

w. 

0    0 

V 

Oh.w. 

1    0 

16 

0 

2    0 

11 

4 

3    0 

8 

0 

4    0 

S  10 

w. 

S    0 

3 

4 

6    0 

1 

S 

7    0 

0 

2 

7  36 

0 

01.  W. 

w. 

0    0 

17 

Oh.  w. 

1    0 

14 

9 

2    0 

11 

9 

3    0 

8 

6 

4    0 

6 

« 

6    0 

3 

0 

w. 

6    0 

1 

6 

6  50 

0 

0  1.  yr. 

w. 

0    0 

17 

Oh.w. 

1    0 

15 

0 

2    0 

12 

0 

3    0 

8 

6 

4    0 

6 

6 

5    0 

3 

0 

w. 

6    0 

1 

0 

6  34 

0 

01.  W. 

w. 

0    0 

17 

Oh.w. 

1    0 

15 

0 

3    0 

12 

0 

3    0 

8 

0 

4    0 

4 

0 

6    0 

1 

0 

w. 

«  16 

0 

0 

le  maimer,  excepting  that 

i  consideration  of 
111  plainer  we  will 

drawing  23  feet 
e  stream  of  flood 
ion  of  her  rate  of 
dat  she  will  be  up 

in  3  hours.  Will 
and  afterwards  to 
>ach  place?  Now, 
ivn  IJ  hours  after 
ii  about  a  quarter 
refore  been  rising 
tide  will  therefore 


TIDES. 


363 


have  been  rising  2^  hours  when  she  arrives  at  Channel  Patch,  which 
may  be  considered  the  same  as  the  Pillars.  Eeferring  to  the  fore- 
going  table,  it  will  be  found  that  the  rise  from  low  water  answering  to 
2J  hours  is  about  one  fathom,  which,  being  added  to  3J  fathoms,  the 
depth  (shown  on  the  plan)  over  Channel  Patch  at  low  water,  gives  4J 
fathoms  as  the  depth  over  it  at  the  time  when  the  ship  is  expected  to 
pass,  which  is  only  4  feet  to  spare. 

Again,  it  is  not  low  water  at  Crane  Island,  near  Beaujeu  Bank,  until 
40m.— say  three-quarters  of  an  hour,  later  than  at  St.  Koch;  the  tide 
had  therefore  only  risen  half  an  hour  at  Beaiyeu  Bank  when  the  ship 
weighed;  which,  being  added  to  3  hours,  the  time  she  expects  to  be 
going  there,  will  give  3^  hours  flood  at  the  time  of  her  arrival.  Now, 
for  3i  hours  after  low  water  the  table  gives  about  2  fathoms  rise,  there 
will  therefore  be  5  fathoms  to  the  southward  of  Beaujeu  Bank  at  3^ 
hours  flood  in  ordinary  spring  tides,  to  which  the  table  is  adapted,  and 
consequently  water  enough  for  large  ships. 


-  ■■■»teWBiia^&tifeii!afc6te«»b».awaiife:Mi>iiiM^ 


^ 


CHAPTER    XIII 


ST.  LAWRENCE  RIVER,  ABOVE  QUEBEC.  ' 

QUEBEC. 
(H.  O.  Chart  No.  1360.) 

Sault  Pass.— 'Inst  above  the  eutrance  of  the  Chandii^re  Biver 
(which  is  on  the  southern  shore,  5  miles  above  Quebec),  the  St.  Law- 
rence is  rather  less  than  800  yards  wide,  between  steep,  high,  and  par- 
tially wooded  banks,  composed  of  graywacke  and  slate  rocks;  the 
channel  of  the  river  is  still  farther  reduced  at  low  water  by  rocky  shoals, 
which  dry  out  from  the  shore  on  either  side.  The  breadth  of  the 
sti'eam  is  then  only  550  yards,  but  the  depth  is  nearly  30  fathoms,  and 
the  rate  of  the  stream  of  ebb  about  6  knots.  This  narrow  pass  is  called 
the  Sault ;  and  it  is  here  that  the  drift  ice  packs  and  forms  an  ice  bridge, 
over  which  a  sleigh  road  is  formed  almost  every  winter. 

Anchorage. — AtOarouge  Point  (Cap  Eouge),  on  the  northern  shore, 
and  about  8  miles  above  Quebec,  there  is  an  excellent  anchorage;  and 
the  river  here  begins  to  expand  into  a  magnificent  reach,  from  2  to  2J 
miles  wide,  which  extends  westward  as  far  as  the  eye  can  reach.  The 
high  and  steep  banks  on  either  side  form  occasionally  precipitous 
headlands. 

Tremble  Shoals. — The  navigation  of  the  river  is  devoid  of  all  diffi- 
culty as  far  as  the  dangerous  shoals  of  Pointe  aux  Trembles  on  the 
northern  shore,  and  18  or  19  miles  above  Quebec.  These  shoals  extend 
westward  for  many  miles  up  the  river,  leaving  a  channel  between  them 
and  the  southern  shore  in  some  places  only  800  yards  wide.  Still  there 
are  no  difficulties  in  the  navigation  that  may  not  be  easily  overcome, 
even  in  large  ships,  as  high  as  Portneuf,  which  is  on  the  northern  shore, 
and  32  miles  above  Quebec. 

Richelieu  Rapids. — The  first  great  difficulty  in  the  navigation  is 
Richelieu  Rapids,  which  commences  just  above  Portneuf,  and  extends 
nearly  to  Grondines,  41  miles  above  Quebec.  In  the  narrowest  part  of 
Biciielieu  Rapids  the  channel  at  low  water  is  between  extensive  shoals 
of  immense  bowlder  stones,  and  only  4G0  yards  wide.  There  is  water 
enough  for  any  vessel,  but  there  is  only  about  one  hour  of  very  weak 
stream  of  flood,  while  the  ebb  runs  in  spring  tides  at  the  rate  of  fully 
7  knots;  this  is,  therefore,  a  difficult  and  dangerous  pass.  The  steam- 
ers regulate  the  time  of  their  departure  from  Quebec  so  as  to  arrive  at 
the  foot  of  Richelieu  Rapids  with  the  flood  tide. 
364 


LIQHTS. 


865 


'  J  :v 


c. 


Ohauditire  River 
>ec),  the  St.  Law- 
ip,  high,  and  par- 
slate  rocka;  the 
r  by  rocky  shoals, 
)  breadth  of  the 
T  30  fathoms,  and 
row  pass  is  called 
cms  an  ice  bridge, 
jr. 

le  northern  shore, 
b  anchorage;  and 
sach,  from  2  to  2J 
>  can  reach.  The 
ually  precipitous 

levoid  of  all  diffl- 
Trembles  on  the 
ese  shoals  extend 
lel  between  them 
wide.  Still  there 
easily  overcome, 
e  northern  shore, 

;he  navigation  is 
leuf,  and  extends 
narrowest  part  of 
extensive  shoals 
,  There  is  water 
our  of  very  weak 
;  the  rate  of  fully 
tass.  The  steam- 
so  as  to  arrive  at 


No  greater  depth  than  22  feet  water  can  be  counted  on  between  St. 
Croix  iind  Itichelieu  Kapids.  Two  beacons  have  been  erected  on  Platon 
Point  to  indicate  the  middle  of  the  ship  channel  at  the  Barre  ix  Boulard, 
liiclielieu  Kapids. 

The  two  lighthouses  at  Portneuf,  on  the  northern  shore  of  the  river, 
in  luH',  lead  up  Richeheu  Rapids,  through  the  middle  of  the  channel,  to 
abreast  Kiohelieu  Islet,  on  which  is  shown  a  fixed  white  light;  after 
which  the  two  lights  at  Platon  Point,  on  the  southern  shore,  li  miles 
below  Richelieu  Islet,  kept  in  line,  lead  through  the  remainder  of  the 
channel. 

Lights.— Between  Quebec  and  Lake  St.  Peter  the  following  lights 
are  exhibited,  namely — 

Southwest  side  of  the  channel: 

St.  Antoine.   Two  fixed  white  lights,  visible  10  miles. 

Trembles  Shoal.  A  light  and  bell  buoy,  painted  red,  with  Trembles 
Shoal  in  white,  and  showing  at  an  elevation  of  14  feet  above  the  water 
an  intermittent  whfte  light,  is  moored  off  the  SE,  extreme,  visible  8 
mil'js. 

Paget  Bank.  A  similar  buoy,  with  the  words  St.  Croix,  is  moored  oflf 
the  Avest  extreme. 

St.  Croix.    A  fixed  white  light,  visible  0  miles. 

Platon  Point.  Two  fixed  white  leading  lights,  visible  12  miles.  These 
lights  in  line,  N.  58°  E.  (N.  74°  B.  mag.),  lead  up  Richelieu  Rapids. 

Richelieu  Island.  A  fixed  white  light,  visible  6  miles.  This  light  and 
the  two  leading  lights  on  Platon  Point  are  very  nearly  on  the  same  line 
of  bearing,  namely,  N.  58°  E.  (N.  74°  E.  mag.). 

Lotbinitire.  Two  fixed  white  lights,  visible  10  and  8  miles,  bearing 
S.  43°  W.  (S.  59°  W.  mag.),  lead  through  Richelieu  Channel. 

Langlais  Point,  A  fixed  white  light,  visible  5  mik^s.  To  show  off 
Batture  des  Grondines,  and  to  avoid  Batture  Gordi; 

St.  Emelie.  Two  leading  lights,  to  be  exhibited  when  new  channel  is 
completed.  The  rear  light  tower  is  3,000  feet,  8. 86°  E.  (S.  70°  B.  mag.), 
from  front  light  tower. 

Cape  Charles.  Two  fixed  white  leading  lights,  N.  80°  W.  (N.  64°  W. 
mag.)  and  S.  80°  E.  (8.  64-  E.  mag.)  of  each  other,  visible  6  miles. 

St.  Pierre  des  Becquets.    A  fixed  white  light,  visible  5  miles. 

Port  St.  Francis.  Two  fixed  white  leading  lights,  visible  4  miles. 
These  lights  in  line,  bearing  N.  62©  E.  (N.  76°  E.  mag.),  lead  through 
a  newly  dredged  channel. 

North  side  of  the  channel: 

Portneuf.  Two  fixed  white  leading  lights,  visible  5  miles.  These 
lights  in  line,  N.  29°  E.  (N.  45°  E.  mag.),  lead  up  Richelieu  Channel  to 
the  light  on  Richelieu  Island. 

Grondines.  Two  fixed  white  leading  lights,  N.  52°  E.  (N.  68°  B.  mag.) 
and  8.  52©  W  (8.  68°  W.  mag.)  of  each  other,  visible  5  miles. 

Batiscan.   Two  fixed  white  leading  lights,  visible  4  miles.    These 


-  fs^KMi=riMSaui^-n^i^l^iei»»imiai^Sm,0!ii'' 


r 


366 


BT.  LAWRENCE  RIVER. 


lights  in  liue,  S.  61°  W.  (8.  77°  W.  mag.),  will  lead  from  their  point  of 
iuterHection  with  Grondines  Upper  Bange  lights  through  the  wide  part 
of  the  channel  clear  of  St.  Anne  Shoals. 

Citrouille  Point.   A  fixed  white  light,  visible  11  miles. 

Champlain  Lower  Range  lights.  Two  fixed  white  leading  lights, 
visible  6  miles.  These  lights  are  in  line  N.  40°  B.  (N.  50°  E.  mag.),  lead 
through  B<5cancour  Traverse. 

Cape  Madeleine.  Two  pairs  of  fixed  white  leading  lights.  Lower 
lights  2^  miles  below  the  cape,  in  line  bearing  N.  42°  E.  (N.  58°  E.  mag.), 
visible  0  miles.  Upper  lights  2  miles  below  the  cape,  in  line  N.  70°  E. 
(N.  80°  E.  mag.),  visible  0  miles. 

Point  du  Lac.  A  fixed  white  light,  visible  12  miles.  In  line  with 
East  lightship  8.  55°  W.  (8.  70°  W.  mag.),  shows  center  of  dredged 
channel  from  Middle  Traverse  up  to  White  Buoy  Bend. 

Tides.— At  Portneuf  the  spring  tides  rise  14  feet,  while  at  Grondines 
they  only  rise  9  feet;  there  is,  therefore,  a  great  difference  in  the  rise 
of  the  tides  at  the  foot  and  head  of  Richelieu  Rapids— namely,  5  feet  in 
0  miles — so  that  it  seems  that  the  descent  in  the  bed  of  the  St.  Lawrence 
is  there  very  considerable. 

The  navigation  above  Richelieu  Rapids  continues  more  or  less  diffi- 
cult, and  is  so  embarrassed  by  shoals  and  large  bowlders  that  at 
Livreur  Point  (opposite  St.  Anne  River,  and  47  or  48  miles  above 
Quebec)  the  ship  channel  is  reduced  to  the  breadth  of  360  yards. 

The  villages  of  Champlain  and  Gentilly  are  opposite  to  each  other 
and  58  miles  from  Quebec,  the  former  being  on  the  northern  and  the 
latter  on  the  southern  shore.  They  may  be  said  to  mark  the  extent 
of  the  stream  of  flood  tide,  which  was  not  observed  above  Gentilly 
Shoals,  where  the  ordinary  springs,  unless  assisted  by  an  easterly  gale, 
do  not  rise  above  2  or  3  feet.  Here  also  a  considerable  change  takes 
place  in  the  character  of  the  country,  for  the  high  banks,  which  had 
continued  to  form  the  southern  shore  of  the  river  all  the  way  from 
opposite  Quebec,  turn  back  into  the  country,  and  the  shores  on  both 
sides  become  low  and  of  an  alluvial  appearance. 

At  the  town  of  Three  Rivers,  68  miles  above  Quebec,  the  ordinary 
spring  tides  rise  one  foot,  and  it  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at 
llj  h.  In  the  spring  and  -fall,  easterly  gales  often  occur  with  the 
spring  tides  and  cause  them  to  rise,  it  is  said,  one  or  2  feet  higher. 

At  Point  du  Lac,  at  the  lower  entrance  of  Lake  St.  Peter  and  75  miles 
from  Quebec,  the  neap  tides  are  almost  imperceptible,  and  the  spring 
tides,  unless  assisted  by  an  easterly  gale,  do  not  rise  above  3  or  4  inches. 
The  effect  of  the  tides  may  be  said  to  be  lost  in  Lake  St.  Peter,  since  no 
alternate  rise  and  fall  of  the  water  that  could  be  attributed  to  their 
influence  was  observed  among  the  islands  at  its  head.  It  would  be 
possible  to  take  large  vessels  to  the  lower  entrance  of  Lake  St.  Peter, 
since  4  fathoms  could  be  carried  up  by  buoying  the  channel. 


om  their  poiut  of 
Lgh  the  wide  part 

es. 

B  leading  lights, 

>G°  E.  mag.)»  lead 

g  lights.    Lower 

(N.  68°  B.  inag.), 

,  in  line  N.  70°  E. 

es.    In  line  with 

Buter  of  dredged 

d. 

bile  at  Grondines 

irence  In  the  rise 

-namely,  5  feet  in 

the  St.  Lawrence 

more  or  less  diffl- 
bowlders  that  at 
:  48  miles  above 
f  360  yards, 
ite  to  each  other 
northern  and  the 
mark  the  extent 
d  above  Gentilly 
r  an  easterly  gale, 
hble  change  takes 
banks,  which  had 
all  the  way  from 
le  s  bores  on  both 

(bee,  the  ordinary 
11  and  change,  at 
n  occnr  with  the 
2  feet  higher. 
Peter  and  75  miles 
le,  and  the  spring 
bove  3  or  4  inches. 
St.  Peter,  since  no 
ittributed  to  their 
)ad.  It  would  be 
of  Lake  St.  Peter, 
haunel. 


iM 


LAKE   ST.  PETER. 


367 


Lake  St  Peter.— The  disfiuice  np  this  lake  from  Point  du  Lac  to 
the  islandH  is  about  18  niilcs,  of  wliich  iibout  4  miles  are  over  ti  Mat  of 
sand  and  clay,  tlirougli  which  a  siiip  «haniiel  .'{(K)  feet  wide  mid  1*7^ 
feet  deep  has  been  dredged. 

The  chanuel  above  Lake  Ht.  Peter  is  often  narrow  and  diflicult  for 
sailing  vessels,  and  the  ciiricnt,  the  average  rate  of  whicli  docs  not 
excee<l  li  or  3  knots,  is  in  some  narrow  i)Iaces  of  considerably  greater 
strengtli.  At  St.  Mary  l{a])id,.iust  below  the  city  of  iM<njtreal,  the  rate 
of  the  current  amounts  to  7  knots.  The  whole  river,  as  well  as  Lake 
St.  Peter,  is  now  so  well  buoyed  and  liglited  that  sailing  vessels  are 
towed  night  and  day  withont  stopping,  except  in  togs,  thronKh  the 
narrowest  parts  of  the  channel,  and  the  whole  distanc«^  (about  1.18 
miles)  from  Quebec  to  Montreal  is  often  accomplished  in  twenty-four 
hours,  by  leaving  Quebec  so  as  to  arrive  at  Kichelieu  Kapids  with  the 
flood  stream. 

Code  of  Semaphore  Signals,  showing  depth  of  water  in  feet  in  Cap 
^  la  liocho  New  Channel. 

Looking  downeiream. 

51  22  23  24  25         26       27  28 

iimifr 


29  30  31  32 


33  34  35 


ifttnr 


23' 3"     23' 6"    23' 9" 


The  lower  arm  indicates  inches  to  be  added  to  the  feet  shown  by  the 
upper  arm. 
Ball  at  head  of  flag  pole  indicates  rising  tide. 


-  '•^ife»j»jifew^i».;iiswfetf«&^t'-''wfewrw^ 


I 
I 


I 

I 


i 


I 


'i 


368 


ST.  LAWRENCE   RIVEB. 

Lookiuy  upstream. 

21         22  23  24  25  26  27  28 

hrfTtHt 


29         30       31  32 


84  85 


rmw 


//        nn,  Qit 


23'  3"     23'  6"     23'  9 

M 


The  lower  arm  indicates  iucbes  to  be  added  to  tlie  feet  sbowu  by  the 

upper  arm. 

Ball  at  bead  of  Hag  pole  indicates  rising  tide. 

Tbe  deptb  of  water  in  tbe  center  of  tbe  old  or  nortb  cbannel  at  Cap 
il  la  Uocbe  is  6  feet  less  tban  in  tbe  new  or  soutb  cbannel. 

Lightvessels  and  Lights.— Tbe  dredged  cbannel  tbrougb  Lake  St. 
Peter  is  marked  by  tbree  lifrbtvessels,  namely:  East  ligbtvessel,  No.  3, 
in  latitude  4Co  15'  56"  nortb,  longitude  72°  42'  15"  west;  Center  light- 
vessel,  No.  2,  in  latitude  46^  11'  35"  north,  longitude  T2o  53'  20"  west; 
West  ligbtvessel,  No.  1,  in  latitude  4(io  9'  3;"  nortb,  longitude  72o 
66'  45"  west.  Each  exhibits  a  fixed  white  light,  visible  9  miles  m  clear 
weather.  The  cbannel  of  Lake  St.  Peter  is  also  marked  by  two  fixed 
white  leading  lights  shown  from  He  anx  Raisins.  These  lights  in  line 
S.  10°  W.  (S.  25°  W.  mag.)  lead  through  the  cbannel  above  the  West 

lightvessel. 

St.  Francis  Eiver.  Two  fixed  lights,  tbe  outer  white  and  the  inner 
red,  and  each  visible  4  miles,  when  in  line,  lead  into  St.  Francis  Eiver. 

Lights  are  shown  at  the  following  places  between  Lake  St.  Peter  and 
Montreal,  namely : 

Stone  Island,  or  He  a  la  Pierre.  One  fixed  white  light,  visible  12  miles. 

He  de  Grace.  One  fixed  white  light,  visible  8  miles. 


27  28 


34  35 


23'  6"      23'  9" 


feet  sbowu  by  the 


tU  channel  at  Cap 
nnel. 

through  Lake  St. 
lightvessel,  No.  3, 
est;  Center  light- 
>  72°  53'  20"  Avest; 
th,  longitude  72° 
ble  9  miles  in  clear 
rked  by  two  fixed 
liese  lights  in  line 
el  above  the  West 

jite  and  the  inner 
St.  Francis  Eiver. 
Lake  St.  Teter  and 

ht,  visible  12  miles. 


mitammmim^/t 


MONTREAL. 


369 


0 

g 


Sorel.  Two  fixed  red  leading  lights.  Two  beacons  are  erected  to  lead 
to  the  entrance  of  Uichclicu  iJiver. 

Nortli  Halfway  Point.  Two  (Ixed  white  lights,  visible  .{  miles. 
.St.  Valeiitiiu'.  Two  fixed  wliite  leading  lights,  visible  2  njiles 

and  one  mile. 
Lacolle.  Two  (Ixed  wllit(^  leading  lights,  visible  (5  and  I  miles. 
Ash  Lsiand.  One  fixed  wiiite  light,  visible  4  miles. 
IMoody  Island.  One  fixed  white  light,  visible  4  miles. 
La  Valtrie.  Two  Hxed  white  leading  lights,  visible  10  and  8  miles. 
Traverse  {2^  miles  above   Contreca'ur).   Two  fixed   white  leading 

lights,  visible  11  and  13  miles. 
rie  aux  Prunes.  One  fixed  white  light,  visible  10  miles. 
Uepentigny.  Two  fixed  white  leading  lights,  visible  4  miles. 
lie  11  laBague.  One  fixed  wiiitt^  light,  visible  4  miles. 
He  St.  Therese.  Two  pairs  of  fixed  wliite  leading  liglits,  visible  13 

and  10  miles  (lower),  0  miles  (upper). 
Pointe  aux  Trembles.  Two  fixed  white  leading  lights,  visible  4  miles. 
Montreal  Harbor  is  the  terminus  of  the  ocean  navigation  of  the 
St.  Lawrence  Kiver,  and  is  capable  of  ^sheltering  a  large  number  of 
vessels. 

The  channel  leading  to  it  from  Quel)ec  has  been  dredged,  so  that  in 
the  part  of  the  river  aftected  by  tides  the  least  depth  is  22  feet  at  low 
water,  but  in  the  part  of  the  river  above  tidal  infiuencethe  least  depth 
is  27^  feet  at  low  water  of  m  feet  on  the  flats  of  Lake  St.  Peter, 
which  occurs  in  autumn.  Ojdy  a  portion  of  the  excavation  at  Cap  lY  la 
Roche  now  remains  to  be  done  to  give  a  de|»th  of  27^  feet  at  all  stages 
of  the  tide  between  Montreal  and  Cape  Charles.  Below  the  latter 
'  point  it  has  been  ascertained  that  a  few  places  will  require  dredging  to 
enable  deep-draft  vessels  to  pass  at  low  water. 

Immediately  above  Montreal  the  navigation  is  closed  by  the  com- 
mencement of  Lachine  Kapids.  At  <?  mile  south  of  the  harbor  is  the 
Victoria  tubular  bridge,  which  crosses  the  river.  It  is  0,600  feet  long, 
and  rests  on  piers  35  feet  above  the  ordinary  level  of  the  river! 
Extensive  alterations  are  in  course  of  being  made,  which  will  largely 
increase  the  wharfage  of  the  harbor  and  furnish  shelter  for  vessels  iu 
winter. 

Directions.— As  pilotage  is  compulsory  for  merchant  vessels,  and 
continuous  alterations  are  made  in  buoys  to  suit  the  newly  dredged 
channel,  it  would  be  useless  to  give  instructions  for  the  navigation  of 
the  channel  to  Montreal.  Numerous  lighthouses,  lightvessels,  and 
buoys  mark  the  course. 

Pilotage.— The  tariff  is,  for  each  vessel  in  tow  of  a  steamer,  $2,  for 

steamers  $2.50,  for  sailing  vessels  upward,  $4.20,  and  downward  $2.80, 

respectively,  for  each  foot  of  draft  of  water,  while  $5  are  charged  for 

moving  a  vessel  from  one  wharf  to  another,  or  from  the  harbor  into 

1151 24 


tri 


370 


ST.  LAWRENCE   UIVER. 


Lachiuo  Oaual.    Proportionate  amouuts  are  charged  for  pilotage  to 
Portueuf,  Three  Rivers,  and  Sorel. 

•Wintering.— Great  damage  is  sometimes  done  at  Montreal  from 
the  ice  taking  the  ground  and  damming  back  the  water  so  as  to  over- 
flow the  wharves  and  storehouses  in  the  lower  parts  of  the  city,  and 
thus  exposing  them  to  the  pressure  of  the  drift  ice.  Hence  it  is  that 
vessels  can  not  winter  at  Montreal,  except  in  the  canals,  and  that  the 
steamers  are  sent  either  to  Sorel,  at  the  entrance  of  the  Richelieu  River, 
or  to  Bouoherville  Islands,  those  being  the  only  places  where  they  or 
other  large  vessels  can  be  safe  from  the  ice,  although  tliere  are  many 
places  where  Durham  boats  and  other  small  river  crait  may  be  secured. 
There  is  no  doubt  but  that  large  stones  are  moved  by  the  ice,  and  that 
the  depth  of  water  over  shoals  will  vary  in  consequence;  but,  from  all 
that  can  be  gathered,  there  has  been  no  material  change  in  the  main 
channels  of  the  river  for  many  years.  The  islands  and  flats  of  Lake 
St.  Peter  are  doubtless  extending  eastward  or  down  the  lake,  but  with- 
out as  yet  aflfecting  the  depth  of  water  in  the  channel. 

Time  Signal.— A  time  signal  is  established  on  the  tower  of  the 
harbor  commissioners'  building.  The  signal  is  made  once  daily,  except 
on  Sunday,  during  the  season  of  navigation;  and  is  a  ball,  which  is 
hoisted  close  up  as  preparatory  about  five  minutes  before  signal,  and 
.  dropped  at  noon  mean  time  of  the  seventy-fifth  meridian,  equivalent  to 
5h.  Greenwich  mean  time. 

There  is  no  seaman's  hospital  at  Montreal,  but  the  sick  are  sent  either 
to  the  general  hospital  or  to  Notre  Dame. 

Montreal  is  the  largest  city  in  Canada,  and  the  advantages  of  its 
situation  make  it  one  of  the  great  centers  of  trade  on  the  American 
continent  It  contains  factories  of  all  kinds,  several  shipbuilding 
establishments,  and  machine  shops  for  construction  of  steam  engines 
and  boilers.    Supplies  of  all  kinds  may  be  procured  for  vessels. 

In  1891  the  census  showed  the  population  to  be  216,650,  of  whom  the 
greater  number  are  of  French  descent. 

The  United  States  is  represented  by  a  consul-general  and  vice-consul- 
general.  . 

Wharfage.— Along  the  bank  of  the  river  is  an  extensive  line  ot 
quays  and  warehouses,  which  are  in  course  of  extension.  There  are 
about  4^  statute  miles  of  wharfage  for  vessels  of  21^  feet  draft,  and 
over  a  mile  for  drafts  of  10  feet.  And  in  addition,  the  basins  of  Lachine 
Canal  afford  to  vessels  of  18  feet  draft  a  wharfage  of  §  mile,  and  for 
vessels  of  12  feet  draft  2%  miles.  This  wharfage  is  afibrded  by  the  locks 
described  hereafter. 

Docks.— There  are  two  docks,  but  only  one  is  suitable  for  seagoing 
vessels;  that  is  300  feet  long,  45  feet  broad,  and  has  a  depth  of  10 
feet  water  over  the  sills.  There  are  two  machine  establishments  con- 
nected with  the  dry  docks,  and  several  smaller  ones  along  the  river 
front. 


■3. 


a  tor  i^ilotage  to 

\,t  Montreal  from 
ter  so  as  to  over- 
3  of  the  city,  and 
Hence  it  is  that 
lals,  and  that  the 
B  Richelieu  Itiver, 
BS  where  they  or 
I  there  are  many 
ft  may  be  secured. 
'  the  ice,  and  that 
mce;  but,  from  all 
ange  in  the  main 
and  flats  of  Lake 
the  lake,  but  with- 
1. 

the  tower  of  the 
once  daily,  except 
s  a  ball,  which  is 
before  signal,  and 
dian,  equivalent  to 

jick  are  sent  either 

advantages  of  its 
on  the  American 
reral  8hii)building 
1  of  steam  engines 
for  vessels. 
6,650,  of  whom  the 

:al  and  vice-consul- 
extensive  line  of 
onsion.  There  are 
VI^  feet  draft,  and 
e  basins  of  Lachine 
)  of  %  mile,  and  for 
forded  by  the  locks 

itable  for  seagoing 
has  a  depth  of  10 
sstablishments  con- 
ies along  the  river 


ST,  LAWRENCE   RIVER  ABOVE   MONTREAL.  371 

Navigation  opens  about  April  23  and  closes  December  16.    The  first 

ST.  LAWRENCE  BIVEB  ABOVE  MONTREAL. 

f««?t°«!r*  Remark8.-Under  ordinary  conditions,  vessels  drawing  9 

dTl?H  ^*'''''*\'^'*'^^''  ^^^"^^*  fr^"^  *^'>°tr«''^'  to  Ogdensbfrg 
during  the  season  of  navigation  (May  to  November,  inclusive).    OcJL 
sionally  however,  the  water  falls  to  a  level  renderiig  it  impracticaWe 

tZ     TuZ^t::  ''''''T''''  "''^"  ^^^^^°^  -«-  th'an  8  feet  6 

J^^  ?rrf  ?'  ""^  *^*  Morrisburg  Lock  No.  23  are  such  that  pro- 
fZ  i;        '>;^'l'  ''  ''  ''''  ^^''^'"'  ^"d  paddle  boats  180  feefw 

tt  bck  fnTlir  r  ^''^7f  """''  '  ''''^  «^"  P^««-  Tins  is  the  smaS: 
est  lock  m  the  system  and  determines  the  size  of  the  largest  vessel 
tha  can  pass  through;  it  is  also  the  governing  point  for  load^  ' 
The  distance  from  Montreal  to  Ogdensburg  is  119  miles,  of  which 
75^  IS  river  and  43^  canal  navigation.  '  ^ 

and  orr,T  ''""^  '"•'^"''"'^  ^'^  ™^^^"  '^^  ^'^''^Se  between  Montreal 
and  Ogdensburg  ,s,  gomg  up,  8  days;  going  down,  6  days-  both  eVd 

po'siir'"'^  the  time  in  dock  necessai/to  place  the'pio„:t 

Jn^ZVLmT:^"''  ^,7'?'  ""'^  P""'*^"^  '''"^  P«^"t  to  point, 
going  up  ,s  $400  for  the  smallest  vessel  that  requires  pontooning  and 
from  that  up  to  $1,200  for  vessels  of  600  tons  nooning,  and 

Steamers  going  through  will  shorten  the  passage  by  turning  over  the 
propeller,  although  this  is  not  required.  In  any  event  tie  sunplv  o^ 
coal  need  not  exceed  that  required  for  three  days^  f„ll  steairing^"^  The 
company  assumes  no  liability  whatever  for  the  safety  of  the  wssels 
while  in  their  hands,  but  they  propose  to  furnish  powerfu   tugs  and 

"""r*'°V';-'''?  '"^  ""  '^^''''^  '^''^  l'«««'»^'«  precaution  ' 

The  facilities  for  coaling  at  Ogdensburg  are  good ;  Revnoldsville  soft 
coal  averages  about  $4.25  per  ton  of  2,000  poumls,  ;nd  iL  besrlrade^ 
of  anthracite  average  from  $5.50  to  $5.75  per  sh^-t  to  There  i^  an 
ample  water  front  of  13  feet  depth  alongside  the  storehouses  and  coa" 
will  be  furnished  there  or  from  a  scow  in  the  stream 

Sea  stores  and  vessels'  supplies  can  be  had  in  Ogdensburg,  and  there 
IS  ample  service  in  the  way  of  repairs  to  machinery.  ^'  "^ 

feetlonrfitir/'"?/''  ^l''^' ^^t«»-«ght  wooden  tanks  about  40 
Sfp^H^'f  T^^^^  °"  *^^  "'""^  *^'"^^^«  *«  «»«  «l"P's  shape:  one  is 
placed  under  each  quarter  while  the  ship  is  in  dock,  and  tlfe  wo  are 

re"ktl7  re?^*^^^^^^  "'^'""^  '''^  «"^-  side!'"ndTi„r 

forward  ton  ends  of  thi  I"  ''"''  ''"""'  ''''  *''«»  «««"red  to  the 
lorward  top  ends  of  the  pontoons,  passed  through  the  hawse  pipes. 


miimjti»tmmm^BHM»' 


372 


ST.  LAWRENCE   RIVER. 


I'- 


taken  to  the  capstan,  and  hove  well  taut  to  prevent  the  pontoons  from 
sagging  astern.    The  joint  capacity  of  the  pontoons  is  140  tons  net. 

The  lock  chambers  of  the  St.  Lawrence  Canals  are  now  being  enlarged 
from  their  present  dimensions  of  200  feet  by  45  feet,  with  9  feet  water 
on  the  sills.    Several  of  these  lock  chambers  are  already  completed. 

Starting  from  Montreal  the  first  canal  reaches  Lachine,  extending 
from  Montreal  to  the  village  of  Lachine,  overcoming  the  St.  Louis 
Bapids,  the  first  series  of  rapids  which  bar  the  ascent  of  the  St.  Law- 
lence.    This  canal  is  8J  statute  miles  in  length. 

The  Beauharnois  Canal  commences  on  the  south  side  of  the  St.  Law- 
rence, 15  miles  from  the  head  of  the  I-achine.  It  connects  Lakes  St. 
Louis  and  St.  Francis,  and  passes  three  rapids  known  as  the  Cascades, 
the  Cedars,  and  the  Coteau.    The  length  of  this  canal  is  llj  statute 

miles. 

From  the  head  of  the  Beauharnois  Canal  to  the  foot  of  the  Cornwall, 
the  next  in  order,  there  is  a  navigable  stretch  through  Lake  St.  Fran- 
cis of  nearly  33  miles,  at  the  end  of  which  are  the  Long  Sanet  Rapids, 
beyond  whicli  extends  the  Cornwall  Canal,  11^  statute  miles  long. 

Five  miles  from  the  head  of  the  Cornwall,  Farran  Point  Rapid  is 
overcome  by  a  canal  ^  mile  long.  Ten  miles  beyond  this  the  Rapide 
Plat  Canal,  4  statute  miles  long,  enables  vessels  to  avoid  the  Plat  Rap- 
ids. Five  miles  further  the  asceudlug  vessel  reaches  the  Galop  Canal, 
7g  statute  miles  in  length. 

As  before  stated,  under  ordinary  circumstances  vessels  drawing  9 
feet  can  be  brought  from  Montreal  to  Ogdensburg,  but  during  a  low 
river,  usually  occurring  in  the  fall,  only  8^  feet  can  be  carried  between 
these  points. 


he  pontoons  from 
s  140  tons  net. 
)w  being  enlarged 
with  9  feet  water 
ady  completed, 
achine,  extending 
ng  the  St.  Louis 
t  of  the  St.  Law- 

le  of  the  St.  Law- 
)nnects  Lakes  St. 
1  as  the  Cascades, 
aal  is  11^  statute 

t  of  the  Cornwall, 
gh  Lake  St.  Fran- 
>ng  Sauet  Bapids, 
te  miles  long. 
,n  Point  Rapid  is 
i  this  the  Bapide 
eoid  the  Plat  Rap- 
}  the  Galop  Canal, 

vressels  drawing  9 

but  during  a  low 

)e  carried  between 


CANALS. 


J 


5    «    «       ««  ti,-a 


I 


5 


^S3       0>  JJ  8»  Jj  J*  t- 1- 0>  0>  01    lO 


^'Qi'S     !S!SI!S!3tS!3$|!3!S$  S3      U 


•50-0 


1-9  V, 


.s 


a 
I 


I 
i 

e 
I 


^ 


i%%  %i%%%t^%ii  3  s 


Is     a«i2  §S  agi2«§     s 


I 


f^  w     ^f 


■  el 

I  n 
•  o 

• « 

II 


:  H  ?  : 

:«?  ;  : 

•  £"3  "    .5 


o  be 

"  3 


J 


4S 

e 

II 


el 
a  «  « 


:£^ 


:  :  :r^ 
i  I  :..5^  . 

M  :•!  :  :«  "Sis 

el    '    '  el  9  •"SO*"'^ 


0000  o^  e  ?  o  e  S  ef  V 


c4^iA<Dc<*aoa>o>He4c4 


5SL 


373 


i 


MMi 


NiiiiMHiiii'Ti'riiiiifiMiliiiii 


IliM 


r 


»        :      /-  -»', 


M 


"^ 


I>TDEX. 


Abatis 355 

Petit 355 

Abouchagan  River 95 

Aggermore  Rock 93 

Agwanus  River 264 

Aid  Islet 247 

Airy  Cape 247 

Aitkins  Point 134 

buoy 135 

A  I'Aigle  Cape 356 

light.... 356 

Alberton 152 

Alchorn  Point 115 

AlcideRock.. 214 

buoy 214 

Aldouin  River 102 

Alemek  Bay 178 

— : Little  Bay 178 

Alexander  Point 179 

Algernon  or  South  Rock 334 

light 334 

Alluvial  Hill 288 

Alright  Cape 39 

Island 39 

Reef 39 

Alston  Point 184 

American  Bank 198 

Amet  Isle 81 

light. 82 

Shoals 82 

Sound 81 

directions 83 

tides 83 

Amherst  Fort 115 

Harbor 40 

directions 45 

■ ice  .-• 41 

tides  ...i 45 

Island 40,42 

ice  report 43 

light 43 

Ammonite  Point 269 

Reef 269 

Anchor  Island 233,267 

Keef 233 


I'age. 

Andromache  Rocks 42 

Ange  Gardien  lights 361 

Anse  k  Giles _ 331 

Anticosti  Island 46 

aspect  of  coast- .  50, 53 

banks  off   north 

coast 22 

caution £3, 24 

climate 47 

communication ...    47 

currents 23 

direction  boards..    48 

exports 47 

fisheries 47 

harbors  . .  1 47 

ice  report 48 

lights.. 48 

north  coast 58 

North  Point,  bea- 
con     54 

passage  north  of. .    22 

passage  south  of. .    28 

population 47 

productions 47 

provision  posts...    48 

Rivers 47 

South  Point,  bea- 
con      50 

Southwest  Point . .    51 

telegraph  signal 

stations 48 

tides 56 

to  Point  de  Monts.    24 

West  Cliff, beacon.    54 

West  Point 53 

Antigonish *. .    70 

Harbor 70 

tides 70 

Antrobns  Point 844 

Appeetetat  Bay 265 

Apple  Island 216 

Arignole  Bay 212 

Cape. 212 

Reef 212 

ArisaigPier 71 

Village 71 

375 


mmtum 


mmiM^aismmmeimm^m^mwmmm^isgsima^fss^^- 


376 


INDEX. 


5^ 


Paga 

Arnold  Bluflf  buoy..' 201 

Artimon  Bank.    31 

Atlantic  Cove 32 

Audubon  Isle 258 

Point 257 

Rocks 258 

Augustin  Cove 124 

Aux  Mouch^a  River 240 

Aylesbury  Cape. 147 

Aylmer  Sound 247 

BagotBlufif 50 

fog  signal 50 

light 50 

Rock 50 

BalanceCape. 207 

Bald  Cape 95 

BallantyneCove. 70 

Banks  Point 138 

Banquerau  Bank -    20 

Bar  Reef 804,322 

Barachois  darbor 85 

Bare  Rock 211 

Rocks 251 

Bamaby  Island 211 

Road 211 

Shoal .-—  211 

Barometer 9 

Barque  Cove 806 

Barre  d,  Boulard 365 

Barreau  Boint 170 

Barrett  Ledges 812 

buoys 313 

Barrier  Reefs 229 

Barrio  Head 68 

Bai-tiboqne  Island 165 

lights 165 

River 165 


Pajte. 

Bathurst  Harbor 184 

anchorage 184 

Bar 185 

buoys 184 

communication  ..  185 

lights - 185 

(or  Indian)  Island.  184 

pilots 185 

River 185 

tides 186 

Batiscan  lights 365 

Battery  Point  (Charlottetown) 113 

(Pictou) 74 

Shoal 119 

Batture  des  Grondines 365 

Gordin 365 


Basin  (Amherst  Island) 42 

(Coacoacho  Bay) 258 

(Frigate  Harbor) 226 

. r  (Tatamagouche  Bay) 85 

Head 139 

Island 325 

Bason  River 280 

Basque  Cape 323 

Harbor 40 

Island 216 

Islands. 283 

— Reefs 216 

Road 323 

Basse  Bay - 1"9 

Bathurst 185 


Bauld  Cape 220 

Bay  of  Rocks 244,323 

Verte 91 

directions 93 

Bayfield  Island 68 

Beacon  Island 251 

Islet  (Bonne  Esperance  har 

bor) 

(Little  Natashquan) . . 


Bear  Bay. 
Cape . 


light, 
tides. 


232 

364 

54 

108 

108 

108 

54 

54 

beacon 54 

Hill 58 

Reef.. -  108 

marks 108 


Head. 


Cliff. 


Beaubdre  Island 168 

— -tides 168 

Beanjen  Bank. 


buoys 336 

Channels. 336,338 

■  to  pass  east  of 338 

to  pass  west  of 338 


Beaumont 343 

Reefs... 343 

. buoy 343 

Beauport  ......?... 347 

Bank. 347 

buoy -  347 

Beaver  Point 186 

B6caucour  Traverse 366 

Becket  River 61 

Becscie  River 52 

telegraph 48 

BedequeBay : 124 


Pajje. 

184 

nchorage 184 

Jar 185 

luoya 184 

otninunication  ..  185 

ights - 185 

3r  Indian)  Island.  184 

lilots 185 

185 

les 186 

865 

darlottetown) 113 

tctou) 74 

oal 119 

lines 365 

865 

220 

244,323 

91 

itions 93 

68 

251 

ne  Esperance  har- 

r). 232 

;le  Natashquan)  - .  264 

54 

108 

108 

108 

54 

54 

)eacon 54 

58 

108 

1 108 

168 

tides 168 

336 

loys 336 

liannels. 336,338 

i  pass  east  of 338 

i  pass  west  of 338 

342 

342 

buoy 342 

?... 347 

347 

noy -  347 

186 

erse 366 

61 

52 

egraph -  -  -    48 

.■ 124 


INDEX.  377 


Page. 

Bedeque  Bay  buoyage 125 

directions 125 

Harlxjr 124 

directions 126 

ice 125 

lights 125 

tides 126 


Bedford  Bay.. 143 

Bell  Point no 

Reef 110 

River 50 

Belle  Chasse  Island 341 

light.--. 341 

Belledune  Point 186 

Bellefine  River 345 

Belle  Isle 219 

fog  signals 220 

lights 219 

provision  depot 220 

Strait 220 

currents 13,200 

fogs 222 

ice 232 

navigation.. 222 

soundings 220 

tides  220 

Belles  Amours  Harbor 227 

directions...  228 

Point 227 

Shoal 227 

tides 328 

water 228 

Belloni  Point  light 185 

Bergeman  Point 90 

Bergeron  Coves 301 

Bernache  Point 179 

Bersimis  Point 393 

River 297 

Bar 298 

lights 397 

tides 298 

Berthier 340 

East  Point 340 

Rocks 340 

Betchewun  Harbor. 268 

directions 268 

— tides.. 269 

— — Inner  Harbor 268 

Betty  Point 73 

tides 73 

Bic  Island 212 

anchorage 214 

— ; beacons 213 

—  northeast  reef 214 


Vage. 

Bic  Island  northwest  reef 213 

soundings 316 

southeast  reef 313 

tides J 215 

water 213 

west  grounds  - 214 

Old  Harbor. 313 

Road. 312 

Bicoiiues  Islets 313 

Bicquette  Channel 213 

directions 26 


Island 212 

fog  signal 213 

light 212 

Reefs 213 


Big  Cove 105 

—  Dick  Rock 33 

—  Tignish  River 133 

lights 152 

Billhook  Island 147 

lights 148 


Point. 133 

Birch  Channel 274 

Islands 374 

Point  (Miscou) 173 

(Prince    Edward     Is- 
land)  134 

(Shediac  Bay) 95 

fog  whistle 174 

light... 174 

signal  station 174 

- 33 

caution 34 

fog  signal 84 

light 34 

soundings 34 

tides 34 


Bird  rocks 


toAnticosti 21 

Bislslet 230 

Black  Islet 260 

Jack  Cove 319 

Ledge 251 

Point  (Cascapediac  Bay) 192 

(Heron  channel) 186 

(Little  Rustico) 144 

(St.  Lawrence  Bay) ...    58 

Pond 139 

Reef 348 


River 164,323 

Rock 58,109 

Rock  Point 108 

Blackhouse  Point 112 

lights 112 

Blackland  Point 170 


•  111  WIOTMIIlTrill'iIlllliWlTi'J 


bi^fe5»aA<riaii«^ 


378 


INDEX. 


Page. 

Blanchard  Point 182 

Blanc  Bablon  Bay 226 

Blaskowitz  Point 280 

Bine  Cape 68 

Blnff  Head 241 

Boat  Harbor 75 

Islands 249 

Bold  Islet 245 

Rock 282 

Bonami  Point 188 

light 188 

Rocks 188 

Bonaventure  Island lOfi 

Point... 193 

anchorage 198 

River 198 

BondesirCape 801 

Bonne  Esperance  Harbor 281 

directions-  282,288 

. snpplies 282 

tides 282 


Island. 


Boot  Point 247 

Boss  Point 98 

Spit 98 

Boucherrille  Islands 370 

BoughtonBar 137 

Bay 187 

Island 137 

Ledge 187 

Narrows 188 

Point 187 

River 137 

tides 137 

settlements 138 

Spit 187 


Bonle  Bay 282 

Islands 282 

Islet 240 

Bonleanx  Point -    95 

Boulet  Islet 235,241 

Boussier  Bay 252 

Bowen  Rock 26'; 

Bowman  Bank 69 

Head -    68 

Brackley  Point 145 

BradoreBay 325 

. Harbor 225 

aspect  of  coast 227 

directions 226 

tides 226 

Hills 226 

Branche  Cape 856 

Brandy  Pots 311 


PaKO. 

Brandy  Pots  Bank 818 

anchorage 812 

Channel 812 

light 312 

Bras  St.  Nicholas 331 

Breaking  Ledge 238 

BricePoint 137 

Brideau  Point 181 

Brighton  Beach 118 

lightB 113 

Brockelby  Head 181 

River 122 

Bmce  Point.   - 137 

Brudenell  Island 184 

Point 134 

River 186 

Bmin  Cape 95 

Bml6  anchorage 85 

Bank. 858 

Cape 199,856 

lights 856 

CnldeSac 858 

Harbor 85 

Peninsula 84 

Point  (Northnmberland 

Strait) 84 

(Shippegan  Harbor)  .  178 


Shoals 84 

Bryon  Island 84 

fishing  grounds 85 

Reefs. 85 

' Shoal 35 

tides 85 

water 85 

Buchan  Point 280 

River 280 

Buchanan  Point 120 

Buctouche  anchorage . . : 101 

directions 100 

Outer  Bar 102 

River 100 

lights 100 

Road 100 

tides 101 


Bull  Rock 286 

Buoyage,  system  of 8 

Burnt  Cape  Ledge 358 

Church  Village 170 

Island 317 

Butt  k  Gaillard 856 

Butte  de  Portage  Hill 44 

Ronde 89 

.LaPetite .355 


* 

J: 


:L.., 


818 

anchorage 313 

lel 812 

312 

331 

232 

187 

181 

112 

;hte 112 

121 

122 

187 

184 

134 

186 

95 

85 

858 

199,856 

856 

858 

85 

84 

irthninberland 

;rait) 84 

ppegan  Harbor)  .  178 

84 

84 

ng  grounds 35 

!g 85 

»1 35 

s 85 

Br 85 

,. 280 

280 

120 

■age..: 101 

—  directions 100 

Bar 102 

100 

ights 100 

100 

101 

226 

of 2 

B 358 

llage 170 

317 

356 

Hill 44 

89 

>etite .355 


INDEX. 


B*i*«p»!*!M*r(«i«i».". 


W«  Page. 

Cabane  Bay 43 

Cabot  Strait 5 

ice 5 

Cacard  River 806 

Caconna 314 

Island 314 

Rock 814 

Calnmet  River 290 

Camille  Monnt 210 

Campbell  Point  Shoal 137 

Campbelltown 190 

lights 190 

■  tides 190 

Canals  ( St.  Lawrence  River) ...  871 ,  378 

Canard  River 822 

CanseaaPoint 115 

Spit 115 

bnoy 115 

Ganso  Bank 2I 

Qnt 65 

Cantwell  Point 87 

CapAl'Aigle 866 

^  light 856 

laRoche 868 

Rouge 864 

Cape  (see  proper  names). 

Bretonlsland 57 

west  coast 67 

— ' caution..    67 

— ■ currents.    67 

■ fisheries  .    67 

leTrou 44 

The,  village 99 

Caplin  River.  193 

Capuchin  Cove 207 

Caraquette  Bay isi 

ice 181 

— ■ Channel isi 

directions 182 

Harbor igi 

Island 180 

light 180 


Shoal 180 

tides 180,182 

Cardigan  Bay 132 

Point.... 133 

River 136 

—directions 137 

light 137 

Shoal 133 

buoys 135 

Caribou  Channel 80 

directions 80 


Caribou  Harbor . 


379 

I'age. 
-.    79 


directions 79 

tides 80 

Island 78,331 

light 79 

Point 80,200 

Reef 81 

River 79 

West  Gully 79 

Carleton 191 

Bay 190 

Head 124 

Mountains 124, 191 

Point 191 

ligbt 191 

Road 191 

anchorage 191 

—directions 193 

tides 198 

Carlisle,  New 193 

Point 193 

Carouge  anchorage 364 

Point 364 

Carousel  Island 283 

light 283 

Carron  Point 134 

light 185 

Cascapediac  Bay 192 

anchorage 192 

buoys 192 

— • — ■ directions 193 

— ■ settlements 192 

River 193 


Cascnmpeque 152 

anchorage 152 

Bay 149 

'■ directions 151 

Harbor 149 


■Ice 

lights 
tides  . . 


note 


Cassie  Point. 


-  anchorage 
light . 


151 
150 
150 
151 


98 


Cat  Rocks 245 

Catherine  Pond 54 

Caulfield  Point 86 

Caveau  Point 59 

Shoals  59 

Cavendish  Inlet 149 

Cawee,  Great,  an  .uorage 287 

Cove 286 

Island 286 


»w»imJ?iriiiKtr!itei 


380 


INDEX. 


i 


1 


I  '^ 


Page. 

Cawee,  Qreat,  Islands 280 

anchorage...  287 

directions ...  287 

tides 287 

Shoal 286 

Ledge 28fl 

Little  Islands 28fl 

Rock 286 

Center  Reef 251 

Sand 860 

Central  Reef 264 

Chain  Islands 232 

ChaleurBay 176 

climate 176 

directions 176 

settlements 175 

soundings 176 

tides 175 

Chamber  Point 85 

Champlain  Village 366 

lights 306 

Chance  Harbor 73 

Channel  Island 285 

Patch 888 

buoy 838 

Shoals 838 

Chapel  Rock 885 

Charles  Cape  lights 365 

Harbor 209 

directions 270 

tides 269 

Island 269 

Charleton  Point 54 

Charlo  River 187 

Shoal 139 

Charlottetown 116 

anchorage 120 

caution 119 

- — charges 117 

coal 117 

communication 117 

directions 117 

Harbor 115 

buoys 113 

caution 113 

hospital 117 

lights 112 

ice 117 

pilots. 117 

population 116 

quarantine 117 

supplies 117 

telegraph 117 

tides 117 


CTia886  Point 2S8 

Chatham 107 

coal 108 

quarantine 107 

repairs 108 

supplies 168 

telegraph 107 

tugs 167 

Cliatte  Cape 207 

fog  signal 207 

light 207 

signal  station 207 

to  Matane  River,  aspect 

of  coast 207 

River 206 

Chaudiere  River 864 

Chtoe  Bank 97 

buoys 97 

Point 98 

coal 98 

railroad 98 

supplies 98 

telegraph 98 

Chetican  Harbor 59 

tides 60 

Island 69 

lights 60 

Point 59 

supplies 60 

Cheval  Point 104 

Chicoutimi 808 

River 308 

Lights 808 

China  Point 121 

Chockpish  River 102 

Church  Point 100 

lights , 100 

Citrouille  Point  light 806 

Claude  River 206 

Shoal 355 

buoy 355 

Clearwater  Point 270 

Shoals 270 

CliflE  Islands 249 

Close  Islet 247 

Cloudberry  Point 259 

Shoal 258 

Cluster  Point 246 

Coacoacho  Basin 258 

directions 257 

Bay 257 

River 258 

tides 258 

Coal  Mine  Cove 62 


'«U.*t«*L'i<B  Wrv^#i4  M>H!f  ■  4: 


P«gn. 

, 2H'.\ 

107 

168 

ine 1«7 

168 

168 

h 167 

107 

207 

gnal 207 

207 

1  station 207 

tane  River,  aspect 

oast 207 

206 

864 

97 

s 97 

98 

98 

)ad 98 

lies 98 

raph 98 

59 

ides 60 

59 

ights 60 

oint 59 

applies 60 

164 

808 

308 

Lights 308 

121 

102 

100 

ts 100 

ght 866 

206 

355 

Y 355 

270 

1 270 

249 

247 

259 

--  256 

246 

258 

lirections 257 

257 

258 

tides 258 

62 


INDEX. 


381 


Pagv. 
Coal  Point 72 

CotaKiiHUiirhor nil 

■ Isliiml 00 

Point iMJ 

River km) 

Cock  Covo 10(1, 'JIO 

buoy 11)0,210 

Pf)int  .- 2)0 

Cod  Bank 201. 2T» 

Cody  Point i;{i 

Coffin  Island 38 

Cold  Spring  Head IM 

light i)3 

Cole  Point t.^ 

buoy 77 

Collins  Shoal(Mingan  Islands) .  .261.207 

caution 267 

Colombier  Cape 299 

Colquhonn  Point 72 

Columbine  Shoals 88 

Cohnlle  Bay 133 

River .' 138 

Contrecci'ur 309 

Conway  Inlet 149 

lights.- 149 

Corbeau  Cape a,'54 

Cormorant  Cape 280 

Islets 280 

Point  (Anticosti) 49 

(WapitagTin  Har- 
bor)   254 

coast ,50 

tides 56 

Reef 281 

Rocks ^. .  253 

Coudres  Bank 358 

Island 350 


Cove  Head 1 44 

lights 144 

Island 250 

Point 244 


Crab  Island 236 

Craig  Point 247 

Craignish .■ 64 

Crane  Island 335 

— beacons 336 

light  - : JJ35 

prohibited  anchorage .  336 

Spit ,342 

Crapaud 122 

anchorage 123 

buoyage 122 

Channel 122 

directions 123 


Craiiaiid  lightM. 
Road  . 


Ill-c 


tidt'H 


Crescent  Point 

Crocodile  Met 

Croix  Point 

caution  

Crooked  Islands 

CroMH  Point 

Crow  Island 318 

Cnunb  Island   . 

Cumberland  Cove 

Harbor 

directions 


Island . 


Curlew  Point. 


121 
123 
247 

25H 
284 
284 
288 
21>3 
342 
235 
124 
230 
230 
239 
259 


D. 


Dalhousie i89 

communication 180 

Harbor  . .    188 

anchorage 189 

directions 190 

ice 189 

tides 189 

Island 188 

light 189 


Mountain 73. 190 

pilots 189 

Point - 188 

supplies 189 

Daly  Island , 245 

Daniel  Hill 195 

Port ... 195 

anchorage 195 

supplies 195 

Darnley  Basin 148 

lights 148 

Inlet 147 

Point 147 

lights 147 

Dartmouth  River 200 

Deadraan  Pond 43, 58 

Dean  Shoal 03 

buoy 63 

Deep  Bay 55 

Hole 99 

Demers  Rock  313 

buoy 313 

Demoiselle  Hill 40 

Descente  des  Femmes  Cove 306 

D'Espoir  Cape 196 

fog  signal 196 

light 196 


I 


I 


ma-^nT^»iUirta»a»fi«..r«ftfj^,^ -;(jrtff  f 'aft11iintefM'tni(-wnf»II!Bfetf 


882 


INDEX. 


I'Mgl', 

D'EHiM)ir  Caiw  telegraph IIW 

tide* m 

De  Hiiliiberry  Bay 244 

Deviatimi  of  the  compaHS 1 

Diiil>le('ui»e 818 

Diamond  Ilarlwr 847 

Dickson  Wands 948 

DivwWet 237 

Dixon  Point 100 

Doctor  Inland 81 

Point 70 

Reef 81 

Spit 70 

Doc-tors  Point 134 

Dog  Islands 335 

DogsOtpe 333 

Donaxl'oint 188 

Douglas  Island 188 

light 180 

Roadstnad 100 


Douglaotown 167,100 

p.nchorage 100 

Doyle  Islands 347 

■ Reef 37 

Du  Lac  Point 866 

light 366 

Duke  Island  230 

Dunk  River 126 

Dnnscombe  Rock 335 

Durantaye  Point 341 

Dutchman  Little  Rock 127 

. Rock 127 

Duthie  Point 102 

Dyke  Island 248 

B. 

Eagle  Cape 52,323 

light 823 

. Reef 53 

Harbor 240 

East  Cape  ( Anticosti ) 48 

(Saguenay  River) 307 

Channel - 267 

Island 36 

Lake 130 

Patch 82 

Point  ( Magdalen  Islands) 37 

(Pictou  Island) 78 

(Souris) 130 

anchorage 140 

caution  - 140 

fog  signal 140 

light - 140 

tides 140 


East  River 73 

buoy 77 

Rock 226 

Rocks 282 

Saint  Island 267 

Eastern  Harbor 60 

lights.   60 

Passage 82 

tides 83 

Narrows 358 

Eboulements  Bay 325 

Mount 325 

settlement 825 

Echrtfaud  Islet 822 

Echemin  River 848 

Eden  Islands 245 

Egg  Island 163,288 

anchorage 280 

directions 300 

light 280 

tides 200 

water 280 

Rocks 230 

EglingtonCove 188 

Point 188 

Egmont  Bank 127 

Bay 127 

tides 128 

Cape 127 

light 127 

Eider  Group 235 

Elliot  River 110 

Ellis  Bay 52 

anchorage 62 

directions 52 

Reefs 62 

tides 52 

Elm  Tree  Point  light 186 

Emersion  Point 64 

Emery  Island 258 

Rocks 258 

English  Bank 810 

Bay  204 

Point 288 

Enmore  River 128 

Enragee  Point 50 

Enter  Islet 237 

Entrance  Island 248 

Entry,  Grand,  Harbor 88 

Island 42 

anchorage 42 

light 42 

supplies 42 

Ephraim  Banks 93 


I'aii«. 

78 

77 

886 

883 

867 

60 

<htH 60 

fiHHHge 88 

les 88 

858 

885 

int 885 

ement 825 

, 883 

848 

845 

163,888 

rage 289 

ions 890 

289 

290 

289 

839 

188 

188 

127 

187 

1 188 

187 

it 187 

835 

110 

58 

ige 63 

ns 62 

62 

52 

ight 186 

64 

258 

858 

819 

294 

888 

138 

59 

837 

...  843 

irbor 38 

48 

shorage 42 

It 43 

(plies 48 

93 


INDEX. 


883 


Ephraini  InlAnd U'.' 

EsconinainH  Islets 801 

Hlver 801 

Escmriinac t .j7 

Point 157 

bnoy 157 

fog  signal 157 

light 157 

Reef 157 

signals 157 

tolograph 157 

tides 157 

Es<iuinmux  Bay 234 

Cliannel 234 

Harbor 271 

(lireotions..  234,378 

supplies 271 

tides 278 

Island 271 

Islands 281 

Point 271 

River 234 

Etamamu  River 853 

Etang  du  Nord  Inlet 43 

Etemit6Cove 306 

Evaua  Point 72 

Fair  Island 235 

Falcon  Point 116 

Fall  River 280 

Fame  Point 204 

light  204 

signal  station 204 

Father  Point 210 

fog  signal 210 

light 210 

signal  station 310 

F6rolle  Point 331 

Fifteen  Point 127 

.-beacon 127 

settlement 127 

Fin  Rocks 244 

Fish  Harbor 340 

Island 147 

light , 148 

Islet 233 

Little,  Harbor 334 

Fisherman  Channel 183 

--Ledge 183 

Fishermans  Bank 108 

Fishing  Point 89 

Fishing  Point  light 89 


Fitzroy  Rack 113 

— buoy 118 

I  Five  Leajines  Harbor 330 

—  directions 330 

j Point 828 

Flat  Inland 241 

beacon 341 

Point 65 

I  -—River lU 

!  Rock 11)8 

j light 198 

i Rocks 227 

Flenrant  Point 187 

Flowerpot  Columns 874 

' Rock 198 

i  Fogs 7 

Fort  Old,  Bay  ...  885 

Channel 335 

Island 235 

Point 307 

Rocks 235 

Forteau  Bay 220 

Fortune  Bay 138 

River 138 

Foul  Rock 3t6 

Four  Rocks 230 

Four- fathoms  Ridge 279 

Fowler  Point 187 

FoxBay 55 

Gully l,-)8 

Harbor 89 

Island 158 

lights 158 

Islands 340 

Point 55 

River 50 

Eraser  Farmlights 76 

Fraserville 315 

French  Creek 108 

Island 102 

Point 55 

River 73,163 

Point 103 

Village 163 

Frenchman  Barn  Rock 71 

Frigate  Point 305 

Fright  Channel 336,271 

Island 271 

Q. 

Gallows  Point 130 

Gamache  River 53 

Garde  Rock 267 


!!    !' 


!  ■ 


ii  ■ 


.'S>^«4>4i£,7ftMiirj*»«arr  BO^^)t:JA-    ifj.t  -nfj-n.-^^ 


384 


INDEX. 


Pago. 

Gasp^  Basin 200 

buoys 201 

caution 201 

tides 201 

Bay 198 

anchorage 190 

directions 201 

winds 202 

Cape 198 

light  and  fog  signal 198 

current 16 

Harbor.... 200 

ice 201 

Little 199 

Spit 201 

buoy 201 

Gaspereaux  River. 01 

Gaudin  Point 133 

Spit _.  134 

Gentilly  Shoals 366 

Village 366 

Georgetown 132 

anchorage 134 

buoyage 135 

coal 133 

directions 135,136 

lights 134 

Harbor 132 

entrance 134 

ice 135 

population 132 

railway 133 

supplies 133 

telegraph 133 

tides 136 

Giddis  Point 101 

Gilmour  Cove 167 

Godbout  River 292 

anchorage 292 

directions 292 

tides 292 

Goddard  Islet 232 

Rock.. 232 

Goose  Cape 324, 357 

anchorage 325 

light 324 

Island 334 

beacon 335 

meadows 335 

Reef 334 

Lake 177 

light 177 

signal  station  .  _ 177 

Point 50 


Vape. 

Gore  Islands 244 

Gouifre  River 355 

Governor  Island 113 

Shoals 113 

buoy 113 

Graham  Head 120 

Ledge 132 

Point 132 

Grand  Anse 58 

Entry  Harbor 38 

fitang 204 

Greve 199 

Island  .. 233,317 

beacons 317 

light 317 

Metis  Bay 209 

River 209 

Pabos 196 

Point ...  225 

River  (Boughton  Bay) 137 

(Chaleur  Bay) 196 

(Richmond  Bay) 146 

fog  signal 196 

-light 196 

Rustic© .  _ 144 

beacon 145 

Harbor 144 

directions  .  _  145 

lights. 145 

tides 145 

Grande  Matte  River 306 

Point  .: 356 

Grandique  Bank 98 

Grandoon  Island 165 

Grange  Rock 257 

Grant  Beach  lights 165 

Grasse  Point 178 

Grave  Point 133 

buoy 135 

Gravois  Point 87 

Reef 88 

Great  Anse 184 

Bay 184 

Basque  Island 283 

BergeronCove 301 

Bird  Rock 34 

fog  signal 34 

light. 34 

Boule  Island 283 

CaweeCove 286 

Island 286 

Shoal 280 

Fo.x  River  .    ..    204 

buoy 204 


aBiWat/l'i  Tifiili'^'llrfiiriTll 


tsatsetmuBSsmeigm 


Vape. 

244 

5)55 

113 

113 

buoy 113 

13(> 

183 

132 

58 

rbor 38 

204 

199 

233,317 

aeons 317 

:ht 317 

T 209 

■er 209 

IW) 

225 

3ughton  Bay) 137 

baleurBay) IflO 

ichmondBay) 14(1 

;  signal 198 

ht 19f) 

144 

leacon 145 

larbor 144 

directions  .  _  145 

ights. 145 

ides 145 

iver 308 

350 

c 98 

1 165 

257 

[its 165 

178 

133 

y 135 

87 

88 

184 

184 

iland 883 

Cove 301 

I 84 

fog  signal 34 

■light. 34 

,nd 283 

ve 286 

and 28i4 

loal 280 

r 204 

buoy 204 


INDEX. 


Page. 

Great  Fox  River  supplies 304 

Lagoon.. , 87 

Mecattina  Island 341 

Pilgrim  Island 316 

■ Pokesuedie  Island    178 

light 178 

Point , 173 

Pond 204 

Shemogue  River ft5 

Stone 353 

Green  Island  (Esquimaux  Harbor).  370 

(Kegashka  Bay) 360 

— ; (St.  Lawrence  River), 

216,313 

anchorage 217, 314 

fog  signal 317 

light 317 

Reef 217,313 

tides 317,314 

Point 172 

Greenly  Island 234 

fog  signal 285 

■ light 335 

Granville  Harbor 145 

caution 146 

directions 146  j 

lights 146 

tides 146 

Qribanno  Cape  355 

Griffin  Cove 204 

supplies 304 

River  _ 304 

Grindstone  Island 40 

light 40 

Point  light 185 


Gull  Island  (Magdalen  Islands) 

Islet  (Labrador) 

Rock 

Gulnare  Shoal 

caution 

Gun  Island 35; 

Gut  of  Canso _  _ 

directions 

light 

tides 


Grondines  lights 365 

tides 366 

GrosCap 43 

Cape 59 

Grosse  Isle  (Magdalen  Islands) 44 

(St.  Lawrence) 344 

qiiarantine 343 

Patch 343 

buoys 343 

Rock 343 

Tail 344 

Guarde  Point I87 

Guernsey  Cove 108 

Point 109 

Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  (see  St.  Law- 
rence Gulf). 

Gull  (Caribou)  Island 79 

light 79 

Island  (Esquimaux  Harbor)..  270 

1151- 25 


Harper  Point  light 
Harrington  Islands 
Harry,  Old.  Head 
Haszard  Point 

lights 

Havre  Bouche 


Hay  Island 


Haystack  Island 
Heart  Shoal 
Heath  Point 

caution 

fog  signal 

light 

Reef 

soiindings 

tides 

Heffernan  Point 
Henry  Cape 

Island 

Reef 


Hadlow  Cove 

Ha-ha  Bay  (Bic  Channel) 

(Labrador) 

(Saguenay) 

Haldimand  Cape 

River 

Hamelle  Harbor 

Harbor  Island 

Point 

Hare  Harbor 

anchorage, 

directions 

supplies 

Island 


r 


386 


INDEX, 


Page. 

Heron  Channel ^^^ 

Islana.-J 1^8 

anchorage 186 

light 

Rock 

Herring  Cove  _ 

Point  light 

Herriot  Isles 

Hervey  Cove 

Point 

Reef 


187 
186 
157 
177 
244 
139 
139 
139 
54 
42 


Hot  Point 804 

Indian  Heart  ..- 1^4 

Island      .- 134 

(Bathurst). 1^4 

Point  (Bay  Verte) «=' 

406 
100 
187 


HighCliflf  Point 

Rock 

Hill  Point 1^^ 

Hillsborough  Bay      1^2 

-caution.. H"^ 

lights -  112 

River H^* 

^  tides 120 

Holland  Harbor 1;^^ 

Horseshoe  Shoal 1*^" 

. Shoals 148 

HortonPoint ^7 

. Shoal  (Miramichi  Bay) ....  159 

(Wallace  Harbor) ...    87 

. -  buoys 100 

. Spit 87 

44 

335 

44 


(Buctouche  River) 

.. lights 

(Restigouche) 

(St.   Genevieve  Har- 
bor)  

(Shippegan    Gnlly) 

lights 


267 


173 


Rocks 11*^ 

buoy 110 

caution HO 


marks HO 


tides 


Spit 


buoy 
light 


110 
124 
125 
125 


Inman  Point 12*^ 


Rock 


121 


Inner 


Hospital  Cape. -- 

—  Rock  (Goose  Island) 

. (Grindstone  Island) . 

Hotteurs  River 280 

House  Harbor 40 

Island 238 

Hov^re  Point 1^ 

Huckleberry  Gully 158 

. . bitoy 158 

____ Island 158 

Hulk  Rock 274 

Hunter  River 145 

Hunting  Island 266 

Huntley  Rock H^ 

Hydrographic  Office,  U.  S.  agents. .  "' 
.^ publica- 
tions . 


Birch  Island 274 

Islet 286 

Island  Harbor 241 

of  Ledges 225 

Shoal 125 

125 


buoy 


Isthmus  Cove 229 


water . 


■  Point. 


J- 


230 
63 


68 


Jack  Cape 

Shoal - ---    ®® 

—  caution 


68 


411 


406 


I. 


5 
369 


Ice 

He  a  la  Bogue  light 

Pierrelight 308 

—  aux  Prunes  light 369 

Raisinslight 368 

-de  Grace  light. 308  ;  Judique  Bank 


Jackson  Point ®'^ 

Jeremy  Island 299 

Jerome  Ledge 59 

Jerry  Island ^9 

John  Bay °* 

. Cape 

. -River 

JoliPort 

I  Jourimain  anchorage 

I  _ Cape 

i  __ Islands  ®4 

liglit 94 

tides 05 

Shoals 04 

—  anchorage 04 

65 


84 
84 
331 
94 
94 


-St.  Th6rese lights. 
•  Verte 


369 
224 


—  clearing  marks 65 


Shota. 


64 


•Pftg''- 

304 

124 

" 124 

lurst). 184 

Verte) »=» 

oucheEiver)  -..  40(J 

lights  100 

igouche) -  •  187 

Oenevieve  Har- 

) 367 

ppegan    Gnlly) 

Its 178 

110 

110 

on 110 

■s 110 

110 

124 

125 

""' , 125 

123 

...-  121 

d"! 374 

286 

'"[   241 

"//. 225 

125 

r... 125 

229 

tor" 230 

63 

J- 

68 

\[ 68 

on -  88 

93 

299 

59 

89 

84 

84 

] 84 

'/_"_ 331 

orage 8* 

> 94 

ids  91 

—  light 94 

—  tides 95 

lis 94 

—  anchorage 94 

65 

ilearing  marks 65 

64 


INDEX. 


Vane. 

Jnditiue  Shoal  buoy 65 

Pond 04 

Jtipiter  River  ... ,., 47 

telegraph .  48 

Just  au  Corps ($3 


K. 


Kamourasca  Bay. 


318 

anchorage 318 

Islands :{18 

beacons 318 

Kegashka  Bay -iaQ 

directions 260 

supplies 260 

Point 260 

River 361 

Kenogam  Lake 308 

Kettle  Rock 050 

Kildare  Cape t53 

River 149 

King  Head 71 

Knight  Point 139 

lights 139 

Knoll  Shoal 134 

l>«oy 135 

Konchibouguac  Bay 105 

River 105 

tides 105 

Kouchibougnacsis  River 105 

Kouchibougnet  River 95 

L. 

L'Abatis  Beach 335 

L'Ange  Gardien  lights 361 

L'AnsetH'Eau 305 

LaBaieBank 355 

Cape .  355 

—  Bonle  Point 305 

—  Croix  Poini 50 

—  Fleur  River 345 

—  Grande  Bale 307 

—  MoucheBank 347 

—  Niche 306 

—  Petite  Butte  Ronde 355 

—  Romaine  River C39  ! 

—  Valtrie  lights 359  i 

Labrador  climate 034  ! 

coast-. 323 

codflshery 324 

currents 333 

inhabitants 324 

productions 324 

Lake  Island 354 

Lalime  Point 190 


I'ttge. 

Langlais  Point  light 365 

LurgeChannel 374 

Island. 378 

Rocks 287 

Lark  Cove 319 

Island _  219 

Met 303,  .•)"-2 

fog  signal .' 332 

light 323 

Spit 304 

Patch 323 

Point 303 

Reef 388 

Laurent, St.,  Caiie 92 

Shoal 93 

Laval  Bay 399 

anchorage 399 

Island 899 

Lawrence,  St.,  Gulf  (we  Gulf  of 

St.  Lawrence). 
Riv«r  (see  St,  Law- 
rence River) . 

Lazy  Bay.. 89 

Le  Havre  Cove 356 

Leagues  Reef. 339 

Leander  Shoal. 196 

Leards  Range 133 

Ledge  Point 357 

Leggat  Shoals I66 

Lennox  Island 146 

settlement 146 

L'fiternite  Cove 306 

Les  Islets  buoys 361 

Leslie  Cove 49 

Levis _ 348 

Point 342,349 

docks 349 

Reef 843 

Shoal 343 

Lewis  Head 91 

Reef 91 

Light,  Al'Aigle 356 

Algernon  or  South  Rock 334 

Amherst  Island. 43 

Ange  Gardien. 361 

Anticosti  Island 48 

Bagot  Bluff    50 

Heath  Point    49 

SW.  Point.     51 

West  Point    53 

Bartiboque I65 

Bathurst  Harbor 185 

Batiscan 365 

Bear  Cape 108 


I 


I 


I 


^ 


f 


388 


Light. 


INDEX. 


I'ttgO. 

BelleChasse 341 

We 319 

Belloni  Point l^"* 

Bersiiuis  River 297 


Page. 

Light,  Flat  Rock ^^ 

—Fox  Island 1^ 

FraserFarra "^^ 

198 


. •  Bicquette  Island -  -  212 

Big  Tignish  River 152 

Billhtfok  Island W8 

Birch  Point  ----  ^''^ 

BirdRocks. » 34 

Blackhouse  Point 112 

Bonarai  Point l^^ 

. Brandy  Pots  _ 312 

-Brighton  Beach 112  j 

Bnile  Cape 3.)0 

-Buctouche  River 10^ 

Campbelltown 1^0  i 

Capal'Aigle 356 

Caraqiiette  Island 180 

^  Cardigan  River 187  j 

Caribou  Island 79  ; 

■ Carleton  Point 1^1  | 

Carousel  Island 283  j 

Carron  Point 1^5  j 

Cascumpeque  Harbor 150  j 

ChatteCape.. 207  , 

Champlain  village.. 366  I 

Charles  Cape 365  j 

_- Charlottetown 112  j 

. Chetican  Island 60  1 

_ Chicoutimi  River 308 

Church  Point 100 

Citronille  Point 366 

Cold  Spring  Head 92 

Conway  Inlet 149 

CoveHead 144 

Crane  Island 335 

_ Dalhousie  Island 189 

_ Damley  Basin 148 

—Point 147 

d'EspoirCape 1^6 

—Douglas  Island 189 

DuLacPoint. 366 

_ Eagle  Cape 323 

EastPoint 140 

_ EaBtern  Harbor 60 

Egg  Island 289 

. EgmontCape 127 

Elm  TreePoint 186 

Entry  Island  42 

Escuminac  Point -  -  -  157 

FamePoint 204 

Father  Point 210 

Fish  Island. 148 

Fishing  Point 89 


QaspeCape 

Georgetown 134 

-GooseCape 324 

■  Grand  Island    317 

River 196 

Rnstico 145 

-Grant  Beach 1^5 

-  Great  Bird  Rock 34 

Pokesuedie 178 

-  Green  Island 217 

-Greenly  Island 225 

-  Grenville  Harbor 146 

-Grindstone  Island 40 

Point 185 


Grondines.-- 365 

•  Gull  (Caribou  Island) 79 

•  GutofCanso 67 

-Harper  Point 177 

-  Haszard  Point 112 

-  Havre  Bouche  Harbor 67 

-Hay  Island 166 

-Heath  Point 49 

-Heron  Island 187 

-Herring  Point,. 177 

-  Hillsborough  Bay 112 


IleAlaBogue 80« 

.. Pierre 368 

a>ix  Prunes 369 

Raisins .--  368 

de  Grace 368 

St.  Th6rese.     369 

-  IndianPoint 100, 173 

Spit 125 

-  Jourimain  Islands 94 

-Knight  Point.-- 139 

-L'Ange  Gardien 361 

-LaValtrie 369 

-Langlais  Point 365 

-Lark  Islet 322 

-  Lighthouse  Point 76 

-Limekiln  Bank 167 

-  Little  Belledune  Point 186 

-Long  Pilgrim 316 

-  Lotbiniere 365 

-  Lower  Neguao 169 

-MabouHarbor - 62 

-  Macquereau  Point .  195 

-  Magdalen  Cape 205 

-  Malpeqiie  Harbor 147, 148 

-  Margaree  River 61 

-Martin  River 206 


Page. 

198 

168 

\ 76 

198 

""" 134 

334 

a" 317 

196 

ICO 145 

h 165 

lock 34 

uedie l'''^ 

i 217 

and 235 

arbor 146 

Island 40 

Point 185 

865 

onlsland) 79 

3o 67 

at 177 

int 112  • 

ihe  Harbor 67 

166 

It 49 

id 187 

nnt 177 

jhBay 112 

[ue 369 

rre 368 

unes 369 

lisins  ---  368 

ce  .  ^     368 

jrese  .- 369 

at    100,173 

t 125 

Islands 94 

•int.- 139 

ardien..- 361 

, 369 

Point 365 

; 332 

se  Point 76 

Bank 167 

ledune  Point 186 

rrim 316 

B    365 

iguac 169 

irbor 62 

lau  Point-  195 

I  Cape.-- 205 

(Harbor 147,148 

(River 61 

liver '-JOtt 


INDEX. 


389 


Page. 

Light.  Matane  River 208 

Meat  Cove 5S 

Metis  Point 209 

Middle  Island lOT 

Miramichi  Bay 158.  l.W 

River ...  107 


■  Oak  Point - . .  165 

-  O'Haiii  Point ...  201 

•  Origneaux  Point 318 

■  Orleans  Channel 360 

■Orwell ...  131 

Panmure  Head. - . ,  133 

Paspebiac  Spit 194 

PaulBhiff 123 

Perroquet  Islet 375 

PetiteRocher 186 

Pictou  Harbor 76 

Island 78 


PlatonPoint-- 365 

Point  de  Monts 291 

Pointe  au  Pic 334 

aux  Trembles 309 


Pokeraoitche  River  _ 173 

Pokesuedie  Island 178 

Pomquet  Island 69 

Port  Hood 63 

St.  Francis 365 


Portage  Island 159 

Portneuf  _ 300,365 

Prairie  Bay 356 

Preston  Beach 158 

Prim  Point 112 

Princess  Lonise  Basin 348 

Qnelwc 348 

—  Red  Islet 310 

Bank 310 

Richeliea  Island 365 

River. 369 


Richibncto  River 102 

Rividro  du  Loup 315 

Sud 332 

Rosier  Cape 203 

St.Alphonse 307 


Miscou  Gully 173, 177 

Montee  du  Lac 356 

Montgomery  Island 189 

Monts,  Point  de 391 

Mullin  Point 87 

Murray  Bay 333 

Harbor 131 

Neguac  Gully 109 

Newport  Point 195 

NorthCape 58 

Point 130 


'  I 'ago. 

Light,  St.  Andrew  Point 1 34 

Anne  do  Beaupre. .  - 360 

Antoine 305 

—  Croix 365 

Emelie 305 

Famille 360 

Francis  River 368 

Frangois 345 

George  Cape 70 

Jean 346 

Bay 306 

Joseph  . 335 

Laurent 346 

Lawrence  Cape 58 

Paul  Bay 354 

Island 33 

Peter  Bay 143 

Lake 368 

Peters  Island 112 

Pierre 360 

des  Becquets 365 

Salmon  Cape 333 

Point 185 

Salutation  Point 134 

Sandy  Beach  Point 200 

Island 150 

Point 173 

Savage  Harbor.. 143 

Island 150 

Sea  Cow  Head _ 124 

Wolf  Island 61 

Seven  Islands 283 

Shediac  Island 97 

Sheldrake  Island  _ 164 

Shippegan  Gully 173, 179 

Sorel 364 

Souris  Head 139 

South  Beach :  103 

Cape 43 

Rock  -. 334 

Traverse 332 

Southwest  Point 51 

Stone  Island 308 

Pillar  Island. 334 

Stonehaven  _ 185 

Summerside 135 

Swash  way  Channel 159 

Tignish  River 152 

Tracadie  Harbor 143 

River 171, 173 

Traverse. 333,369 

Tremble  Shoals 365 

Vinlslands 163 

Wallace  Harbor 87 


<: 


ll 


mmmtifi^, 


mm 


390 


INDEX. 


i^> 


Page, 

Light,  Weat  Point ^y^,  1-8 

White  Head 197 

Islet  Reef 811 

York  River --  118 

Lighthouse  Point ---    76 

buoy 76 

light 76 

Lights,  period  of  exhibition 1 

Limekiln  Bank 187 

light 1«7 

Limestone  Creek. - 00 

Link  Islet -     2"~ 

Linzee  Cape ^'^ 

Lions  Island 333 

L'Islet  church 831 

331 

331 


—  cross 

—  pier. 


r  signals 881 

Little  Alemek  Bay 178 

Basque  Island 383 

Belledune  Point  light 186 

-Bergeron  Cove 301 

Boule  Island 283 

Cawee  Island 888 

Dutchman  Rock 127 

. Fish  Harbor 834 

— Gaspe 189 

Harbor 73 

Matane 207 

-Mecattina  Cove --  244 

water 844 

. Island.- --..  244 

River 844 

Metis  Bay 208 

Point 809 


-Natashquan  Harbor 263 

.. River. 263 


Pane. 

Long  Ledge 854 

Peguin  Island 316 

anchorage —  3i7 

light 316 

P<  int  ( Amet  Sonnd) 83 

—  (Mingan  Island) 376 

(St.  George  Bay) 64 


-Pabos -  196 

-River  (Caspediac  Bay) 192 

(Pomquet  Road) 69 

(Prince  Edward  Island)  138 

-  Rustico  Harbor 144 

-Sands -  -  109 

-Shemogne  River 95 

-Shippegan  Harbor 176 

-Tracadie  Harbor 68 


(Sandy  Bay) 235 

River - 361 

Spit - 37 

Longue  Pointe 355 

buoy 356 

Loon  Roclis 259 

Lotbiniere  light 365 

Lou  Road. 247 

Loudon  Beach 75 

Louisa  Harbor - 248 

directions 248 

Loup  Bank 316 

Bay 382 

River 187 

Low  Islet ' 268 

Village 102 

Lower  Neguac -  -  -  169 

lights. --  169 

M. 

Mabou  Cape 61 

Harbor 68 

lights    62 

Highland 61 

~  River 61 

tides 68 


Liverpool  (Richibucto) 103 

Livingstone  Bay 133 

Livreur  Point - 386 

Lobster  Bay 336,288 

anchorage 386 

directions 336 

Logan  Point 7^^ 

Long  Island 340 


Macdonald  Reef 77 

buoy   77 

Macdougal  Point HI 

Maclsaac  Point 70 

Rock 70 

Mackenzie  Head 73 

buoy 77 

Point 89 

Shoal 75 

Mackinnon  Cape —  847 

Macphee  Shoal 137 

Macquereau  Point    .     195 

i  jg  dgnal 195 

light 195 

. telegraph 195 

Madame  Island 344 

Banks 344 

Reef 344 

buoy 344 

Magdalen  Cape 305 

fog  signal 205 


KMii.^niWi 


Page. 

864 

td 816 

lorage —  3i7 

t... 816 

t  Sonnd) 88 

an  Island) 276 

eorge  Bay) 64 

jrBay) ^35 

361 

_ 37 

355 

oy 356 

' 259 

365 

247 

75 

_ 248 

ections 248 

.. 816 

222 

187 

268 

102 

169 

ghts --  169 

M. 

61 

62 

;hts    62 

61 

61 

s 62 

77 

juoy  77 

Ill 

70 

70 

73 

bnoy 77 

._ 89 

75 

: 247 

137 

Qt 195 

—  i  js  signal 195 

—  light 195 

—  telegraph 195 

344 

lanks 344 

344 

loy 344 

305 

og  signal 205 


INDEX. 


391 


Page. 

Magdalen  Cape  light 305 

signal  station 305 

Islands 30 

anchorage 45 

bars 3« 

climate -Wl 

directions 45 

Harbors ',".7 

popnlation 36 

seals 36 

supplies 36 

tides 45 

River 205 

tides 205 

Magnetic  attraction  of  shore 278 

Magpie  Bay 279 

anchorage 279 

Point 279 

River 279 

Magnacha  Point 188 

Spit  - 188 

buoy 188 

Maheux  River 346 

Maillard  Cape.  188 

MaitlandFlat 137 

-Point 137 

Shoal 137 

Major  Reef 348 

Mai  Bay 197 

Malcolm  Point 165 

Malignant  Bay 71 

Mallard  Cape 355 

Malpeque 147 

anchorage 149 

Bar 148 

caution 149 

directions 148 

Harbor 147 

lights 147,148 

railway    147 

supplies 147 

tides 149 

Manicoiiagan  Bar 395 

tides 395 

Bay 295 

Hole 295 

Peninsula 295 

Point. 295 

signals 296 

River 295 

anchorage 295 

directions 295 

tides 205 

Shoal 296 


I'nKi-. 
Maniconagan  Shoal  tidal  stream       396 

Manitou  Point . .  280 

River 280 

anchorage 280 

directions 280 

water 280 

Manowin  Island 388 

Marcelle  Point 178 

Mai'garee  River. 60 

light...- 61 

tides 60 

Margaret  Island 348 

Tail 343 

buoy 343 

Marine  Railway 93 

Mark  Point 228 

Marie  Head 121 

MarmenRock 318 

bnoy 318 

Marsh  Island 200 

River 105 

Martin  Cape 325 

anchorage 325 

River 306 

light... 206 

signal  station 206 

Martiniere  Point 342 

Matane 208 

Little,  settlement 207 

Papsof 207 

River 207 

anchorage 208 

Bar 308 

buoys 207 

lights. .  208 

pilots 207 

signal  station _ . .  208 

supplies  208 

tides 208 

Matte,  Grand,  River 306 

May  Islets 286 

Point _ 118 

McAusIin  Island.. 145 

Mclnnis  Point 120 

Mc Williams  Cove 129 

Meadow  Island 200 

MeatCove 58 

lights 58 

telegraph  and  signal  sta- 
tion  58 

Mecattina  Cape  . .  i 243 

Cove,  Little.  244 

Harbor 243 

directions 242 


■Uf. 


■':':f 


392 


INDEX. 


ft 


I'ago. 

Mecattina  Harbor  supplies 24:2 

High  Land 248 

Island,  Great 341 

Little 244 

River,  Little 344 

Medea  Rot-k  95 

buoys 96 

clearing  marks 96 

Merigomish- 78 

Harbor..     71 

tides..  73 

Island 73 

Point 71 

Mermot  Islet  .-    335 

Ledge 335 

Motabetshnan  River 308 

Motis,  Grand,  Bay 309 

River 309 

Little.  Bay 308 

Point 309 

River 308 

Point 309 

light 309 

signal  station .  _ 209 

Meule  Cape 40 

Rocks. 40 

MichauxCope 307 

Middle  Bank 318 

buoy 318 

Bay 339 

anchorage 329 

Channel _  339 

Ground  (Bedeque  Harbor) .  135 

(Charlottetown)...  115 

(Dalhousie) 189 

caution.  189 

(South  Traverse)..  333 

buoys 333 

(VinBay) 164 

Island 167 

lights 167 

Islands 349 

Ledges 228 

Passage 83 

tides 83 

Patch 233 

Pilgrim  Island 316 

Point 238 

Reef... 374 

Channel 274 

River    _ 73,185 

buoys 73 

Rock 334 

Shoal 78 


Pace. 

Middle  Shoal  buoy 79 

Traverse 820 

Millbrook 85 

Mill  Creek 63 

Island 843 

River 140 

Mille  Vaches  Bay 300 

anchorage 300 

Point 300 

Milne  Bank 140 

Point 258 

Reef 258 

Mingan  Channel 275 

Harbor.. 276 

directions 270 

trading  post. 276 

Island 375 

Islands 365 

banks  of  soundings.  377 

supplies 366 

tides 266,377 

Patch      .. 375 

River. 376 

Minimegash  anchorage 130 

directions 130 

lights 180 

Ponds 139 

Reef.... 139 

tides 130 

Miramichi  Bar 159 

Bay 157 

anchorage 161 

buoys 160 

caution 160 

directions 161 

lights 158, 159 

lightvessel 160 

pilots 160 

tides 161 

Inner  Bay 163 

directions 163 

River   166 

ice 166 

light 167 

Northwest  Arm. .  168 

pilots 160 

quarantine 167 

Southwest  Arm  .     168 

tides 168,169 

Miranda  Rocks .  346 

Misaine  Bank 31 

Miscou  anchorage 176 

Banks 174 

Channel 177 


sa.ftiays)CT^»p«iiM*ai 


jBMCTjiigjKftTyitiaaMBffWffiWiflfWTiiiwt^waw^ 


Page- 
79 

820 

85 

68 

842 

140 

800 

jhorage 800 

800 

140 

258 

258 

, 275 

276 

ictions 270 

ling  post. 276 

275 

265 

kaofsotindingB.  277 

plies.. 266 

s 266,377 

..   275 

276 

age 130 

oas 130 

130 

13» 

139 

180 

159 

157 

orage 161 

•8 160 

--  caution 100 

itions 161 

8 158,159 

vessel -.  160 

8 .-  160 

161 

^y 162 

-  directions 163 

166 

i 166 

[ht 167 

jrthwest  Arm. .  168 

lots 160 

larantine 167 

iithwest  Arm .     168 

ies 168,169 

.  346 

21 

176 

174 

177 


■;jrai»(a^taii.'ns'-' 


1 


INDKX. 


393 


ra({i'. 

Miscou  Channel  directions 177 

Flats 1 76 

Oully 178 

lights 173,177 

Harbor 176 

Island  176 

signal  station 177 

tides 178 


Miscoxiche  Bank 126 

Point 136 

Hpit 125 

buoy 125 

Mistanocine  Bay 337 

■ Harbor 237 

:_  directions 288 

tides 238 


Island 387 

Mistaasini,  or  Qreat  Stone 358 

Mizzenette  Ledge 188 

Point 188 

Sands.. 181 

Moisie  Bay 281 

Point 281 

River 281 

Bar 283 

tides 388 

trading  post 382 

Rock. 282 

mark 383 


Shoal 282 

Molies  River 103 

Molns  River 103 

Money  Point 58 

Moniaclsland 275 

MonkHead 69 

Montague  River. 136 

MontBoutot 319 

St.  Anne 319 

Montee  du  Lac  lights 356 

Montgomery  Island 189 

light 189 

Montmorency  Falls 347 

Montreal 369 

directions 369 

docks ;ifl9 

Harbor 369 

navigation 371 

pilotage 369 

time  signal 369 

wharfage 370 

wintering 870 

Monts,  Point  do 291 

aspect  of  coast. : . . .  293 

,  caution 391 


I'uge. 

Monts,  Plant  de,  current 35 

fog  signal 291 

light 291 

signals  - 291 

to  Bicquette  Island    35 

to  Green  Island         27 

Moody  Point  165 

Morrell  Rivor  ..   148 

Morrison  Beach 187 

Mosquito  Sands   187 

Moulin  Baude  anchorage ,132 

River 308 

Mount  Louis  River 205 

Moutango  Island 375 

Mullcgash  Point 80 

Mullin  Point 87 

lights 87 

Murdoch  Point 165 

Shoal 76 

Spit 165 

Murphy  Point.  84 

Murr  Islets 341 

Rocks 241 

Murray  Bay _ 328 

anchorage 828 

directions 833 

light  .  328 

Harbor .  181 

anchorage 181 

buoys    181 

directions 181 

lights. 131 

tides 131 

Head 108,131 

River 132 

Mushkoniatawee  Bay 265 

Musquarro  Point 261 

River  . .  269 

Mussel  Bank 187 

Mutton  Island 343 

Mya  Point 178 

N. 

Nabesippi  River : 264 

trading  post 365 

Nail  Head 129 

Pond 129 

Napan  Bay 164 

Point 164 

River 164 

Napetepee  Bay 336 

directions 236 

Narrows,  the . .   236 


If 

J  f 


l\ 


i 


Ww.-««6»>P&^*»tacu *3fci/. 4 mtiitiff'^.iJijii.if^ftMifiKri^ii * » gja3a;dPg':'a<ai'!«K»^rfMiP^'^^-*sg-'gJ^^'^    iii- ,."-=■  -i^"-* W- ' 


pi 


r 


394 


INDEX. 


ir 


Pagr. 

NashRlver    tSfl 

Nata8h<i\tAU  Banks .  361 

.  Little,  Harbor 3tt8 

rtirtxtioiiM     -  368 

tides 36« 

■ —  settlement  .  363 

. Point 361 

River 368 

currents   and 

tides 363 

trading  post 363 


Negua*.  (iully 1«» 

buoys 

lights 


Lower 


169 
160 
160 

Upper 169 

villages 170 


lights 


Nelsontown - i88 

Neptune  Rock 35H 

Nest  Rock 354 

Netagamu  Islands 348 

River 248 

New  Carlisle 198 

(Hunter  River) 145 

Glasgow  ( Pictou  Harbor) 74 

London  settlement 146 


Paga 
North  Mlnimegash  Pond  ia» 

Patch 101 

Point  (An ticosti) M 

(Miscou)    178 

(Prince Edward  Island)  liiO 

boacon  .   54 

light  .     180 

Reef »88 

River IWJ 

Traverse 830 

tides 860 


Newcastle 167 

Newport 105 

Point 195 

light 195 

Niapisca  Channel 372 

Island 273 

Niobe  Shoal 337 

Nipisighit  Bay 186 

River 184 

Nob  Islet 245 

Noire  Point -  -  304 

Norman  Cape 230 

North  Beach --  107 

buoy 197 

BirdRock 34 

Cape 44,57 

anchorage 45 

icereports 45 

lights -    58 

Rocks 45 

tides 58 

water 45 

Channel   (see  St.   Lawrence 

Riror). 
coast  of  Gulf  (.see  St.  Law- 
rence Gulf). 


Northeast  Cape 87 

Ledge 880 

Reef    888 

Northumberland  Strait 71, 107, 153 

vi.ution   ...    08 

oirections..  165 

tides 158 

Northwest  Bowen  Roci'.. 386 

Spit 42 

Norton  Point  .   184 

Shoal 184 

Notre  Dame  du  Portage 818 

Nouvelle  Point 194 

River 194 


Oak  Channel 182 

Island 89 

Bar  87 

Point  (Miraraichi  Bay) 165 

(Restigouche) 187 

lights 185 

TreePoint 79 

Observation  Cape 54 

River 53 

Ogdensburg 371 

O'Hara  Point  buoy 201 

light 201 

Old  Bic  Harbor : 212 

Road... ---  213 

FortBay 285 

Channel 235 

Island - 235 

Harry  Head - 88 

Store  Point 131 

anchorage -  -  -  181 

Woman  Rock 198 

Oldinglsland  . 71 

Olomanosheebo  River .  - 268 

Onion  Island 835 

Ore  Point - 279 

Orient  Point 399 


'«i» 


p*g« 

Pond ia» 

101 

»ti) M 

1)    178 

Edward  iHland)  130 

54 

180 

asH 

185 

820 

I. 860 

87 

...   320 

388 

rait 71,107,153 

vj.ation   ...    08 

—    oijections..  155 

--t!de« 158 

Rock 386 

43 

184 

184 

•tage 818 

194 

194 

0. 

182 

89 

87 

ichi  Bay) 165 

inche) 187 

165 

79 

54 

52 

371 

' 201 

201 

212 

212 

285 

285 

235 

88 

181 

chorage -.-  181 

198 

71 

Lver .- 268 

886 

279 

399 


INI>K\. 


3!>5 


Orignranx  Point 81H 

anchorage 81H 

fog  siKnal 818 

light 818 

tldos 818 

Orleiinw  C'hannel ;W0 

lights 300 

Island JW5 

anchorage 346 

Orwell 120 

Bay 120 

light 131 

River 120 

Otter  River 50 

Quelle  Point 818 

River.. 318 

Ontarde  Bay 297 

anchorage 297 

directions 397 

Point 3«« 

River.   396 

Outer  Birch  Island 274 

tides 274 

Islet 257 

beacon  357 

Rocks 348 

Wapitagun  Islands 353 

OysterPond 38 

P. 

Paget  Bank  buoy 865 

Paint  River 259 

Palmer  Point  ..  86 

Palmers  Wharf  light 122 

Panard  Point 201 

Pandora  Point 177 

PanmureHead.. 108,133 

light  133 

Island 133 

Ledgo 138 

ahoal 183 

buoy _. 135 

Spit 133 

Papsof  Matane 307 

Parsley  Port 338 

Partridge  Mount 268 

Point '. 268 

Pashasheeboo  Bay 365 

Paspebiac 193 

anchorage 193 

Bay 198 

directions 194 

Point 193 

Spit 194 


l'Ul!C. 

Pasimbiac  Spit  buoy 104 

light Itt4 

i  Paul  Bluff  light     199 

Pavilion  River SO 

! Iwacon SO 

Paynter  IslumlH ttS 

,  Peacock  Cove  . 94 

I caution .      05 

Peak  Point    229 

PoarlReff 89 

PfHshtebai  Bay 265 

j  Pectcu  Point 177 

I  Peninwula  Point 84 

! the 200 

Pentacopt  River. 388 

Perc6 197 

Bay m 

tides 197 

Mont,  or  La  Table  Ronlante    197 

Point .  197 

Reef 197 

Rock 197 

Perc^e  Rocks 814 

Percival  River 128 

Peril  Rock 286 

Perro(inet  Bank. 235 

Channel 375 

Island 325 

Islets 375 

lights 875 

Peter  Point  (Bathurst  Harlwr) 18") 

(Qespe) 198 

Petit  Abatis  beach 355 

D^barquement 356 

Petite  Riviere.. _  354 

Rocher  light 186 

Petites  Isles 307 

Phelan  Point 194 

Phillip  Bar .    89 

River 91 

Pic  Point 324 

Pictou 74 

Bar , 75 

coal 74 

directions _ TO 

Harbor _ 73 

customhouse  lights.    76 

directions 77 

ice 77 

lights    (south    en- 
trance point) 76 

— ; tides 77 

hospital 75 

Island 78 


JL.,., 


*  1 


•SI     I 


,p* 


m 


896 


INURX. 


I'M"- 

Pictou  iHlanil  Bank 78 

lifeboat 7« 

light 78 

caution 78 

liunling 74 

pilotage 74 

j>il()tH   74 

port  ohiirgt'B 74 

(luaruntiue 75 

repairs 74 

Road. 75 

anchorage 75 

HupplieH 74 

telegraph 74 

Pierre  do  GroH  Cap  Reef 44 

River  ...  2()6 

Pigeon  Islet 236 

Pilgrim,  (ireat,  Wand 310 

Islands 316 

Long  Island 810 

Middle  Wand..... 810 

Shoal 816 

bnoy 810 

Pillage  Bay 267 

Pillar  Islets 883 

Point 195 

PilletCape 95 

Pilots,  stations 19 

Pinette  Harbor Ill 

tides Ill 

Point 110 

Shoals Ill 

Platon  Point  lights 365 

Pleasant  Bay 41 

anchorage 41 

Pleureuse  Point 205 

River 206 

Plongeur  Bay 299 

Point  (.see  proper  name). 

duChene 96 

Lac 806 

Pointe  au  Pavilion 848 

buoy 361 

Pic 334 

light 324 

an.x  Pins 335 

Trembles 364 

lights 369 

desMorts 372 

Roches 333 

Heu 824 

Pokemouche  (Pocmouche)  172 

Gully 173 

Lagoon 173 


Pokemouche  River 173 

—  buoyH 172 

lights 178 

tides na 

Pokeshaw 184 

River 184 

Pokesueclie  Island 178 

,  Great,  light .     .  178 

-Point 179 

Shoal 178 

Pomqnet  Banks 69 

Harbor 09 

tides 69 

Island 09 

light 69 

Point 68 

River 69 

Road 68 

anchorage 68 

directions 69 

Pond,  Great 204 

Point  .  227 

Poplar  Island 116 

Porcupine  Cape 65 

Porpoise  Rocks 285 

Port  Daniel 194 

anchorage 196 

supplies 195 

Hill 146 

Hood.. 62 

anchorage 63 

buoyage 68 

caution 68 

directions 64 

ice 64 

light 68 

supplies 68 

tides 64 

Joli - 381 

Parsley 838 

St.  Augustine 289 

Francis  lights 365 

Salmon 828 

Shettle 823 

Portage  Bay 242 

Harbor 242 

directions 242 

Island 159 

light 159 

tides 161 

Portneuf 800 

light 300 

lights 356 

River 800 


I'agB. 

173 

buoyn 173 

liKhts 17a 

lidea 173 

184 

184 

178 

Great,  liRht .  .  178 

179 

178 

69 

09 

lea .  69 

69 

lit 69 

68 

69 

68 

oraRe 68 

tions  -. 69 

304 

237 

116 

..,- 65 

335 

194 

'age 195 

js 196 

..- 146 

63 

ige 63 

9 68 

-  caution 68 

ns 64 

64 

68 

I 68 

64 

331 

328 

239 

?ht8 865 

323 

.  323 

243 

242 

Bctions 242 

159 

t 159 

i 161 

300 

300 

356 

.  800 


«tei«ai<,'ifei]ffiSsaiia»8afe 


INDKX. 


I'liKf. 

Portneuf  tti vor  tideH 8(K) 

Sands 800 

xi>  nalB 800 

PortMimiutli  Point.* 63 

Spltbnoy  68 

Powell  Point  75 

Powiml  (Pownell)  Bay 120 

Point 119 

Pruirie  Day » 856 

aticliorage  857 

directions 857 

li^ht 856 

tides 857 

Point     356 

Shoal 857 

buoy 357 

Presqu'ile 59 

Preston  beach 158 

lights 158 

Price  Island ...  245 

Prim  Island  113 

Point 113 

lights 112 

Reef 113 

buoy 118 

clearing  mark 118 

Prince  Edward  Island 107 

climate 107 

East  Coast..  131 

fogs 107 

government  107 

North  Coast  141 

produce 108 

South  Coast  108 

tides 153 

trade 108 

West  Coast.  139 

Shoal 804,323 

buoy 304,322 

Princess  Louise  Ba.sin 348 

lights 848 

Provost  Cove 124 

Puffin  Bay 269 

Pugwash , 90 

anchorage 90 

Bar 90 

Bay 89 

directions 89 

Harbor 90 

Point 89 

Reef 89 

River 90 

tides 91 

water 90 

Road 89 


Q. 


397 


Paifa. 


Quarry  (.'hannel 378 

Cove 978 

water 919 

Island 878 

Point 60 

Quart  Point-..*.,,,*. 164 

Quebec    848 

anchorage 847 

BaHin 848 

communication 8S9 

Cove 851 

directions .  858 

dcK'ks  and  harbor  works iUO 

Harbor 846 

ice ..  351 

lights 848 

pilotage 849 

port,  limits  of 84« 

prohibited  anchorage :547 

quarantine  anchorage  .  343,353 

repairs 351 

signals 853 

supplies 851 

tides 849 

time  signal 353 

tugs 849 

weather 353 

Quetachoo-Manicouagon  Bay 365 

Quin  Channel 271 

Island 271 

R. 

Race  Island 342 

Raft  Gully 170 

Rag  Ledge 245 

Ragg  Bay 269 

Point 269 

Ragged  Point 63 

Ramsheg 86 

Razade  Islets 216 

Reaux  Island 344 

Red  Bay   ..   220 

Cape 40 

Island 233 

Islet 310 

light 310 

.-Bank 310 

lightvessel 310 

fog    sig- 
nal.... 310 

marks 310 

Point 193.341 

Reddish  Point 195 

Reef  Point  ( Amet  Sound) 82 


§ 


% 


'  t 


nil 


398 


INDEX. 


Page. 

Reef  Point  (Fox  Bay) 50 

Benouard  Point 99 

Eestigonche  River '. .  187 

anchorage 187 

directions 190 

Rice  Point 114 

Richelieu  Island  light 365 

Rapids --  384 

River 369 

lights -  309 

Richibncto - .  103 

anchorage 103 

Bar 103 

buoys . .  104 

directions 104 

Head... 102 

light.. 102 


pilots 104 

Point 102 

River.. 102 

lights 102 

tides 104 

Richmond  Bay 146 

buoy 148 

ice 147 

tides.. 147 

Village 192 

buoys 192 


Ridge  Point. 279 

RiflemanReef .  HO 

caution HI 

Rimouaki 211 

coal.. 211 

mail 211 

pier 211 

River.... 211 

water 211 

Road 210 

telegraph 211 

Riviere  du  Gouff  re 314 

Loup 315 

anchorage 315 

Point 315 

light 315 


signals 315 

supplies 315 

tides 315 

Village 315 

Sud.. 331 

light... 332 


Rix  Point 130 

Roadstead  Point 289 

water 289 

Roaring  Bull 73 


I'age. 

Robert  Cape 55 

Rocher  aux  Qr^lons 385 

de  Saut  au  Cochon 358 

Roches  Point • 307 

Rochette 180 

I  RockRiver 280 

!  Bocks,  Bay  oe. 244,323 

'  Rocky  Bay 236 

1 directions 230 

I  Roger  Point 78 

j  Bogers  Hill 78 

I  BolloBay. 138 

I  Bomaine,  La,  Biver 259 

'  Bosier  Cape 203 

I fog  signal... 20;! 

i light 203 

signals. 203 

Bouge  Cape 346 

Point 304 

Bound  Head 241 

Islet... 240 

Bock 209 

Boy  Island 73 

Ledge 72 

Eoyalty  Point 147 

Sand 147 

Buisseau  Bock 261 

caution 261 

Bustico,  Grand 144 

settlements... 145 

tides 145 

,  Little 144 

S. 

Sable  Cove 121 

Saddle  Hill 265 

Island 86 

Beef 86 

Sate  Bock 245 

Saguenay  Cliffs 821 

Biver 801 

anchorages 306 

buoys 304 

comm.unication . . .  303 

currents 302 

directions 305, 308 

tides 302 

Sain  Cape 324 

St.  Alexis  village 307 

—  Alphonse  village 807 

light 307 

—  Andr6Bank 317 

Point 817 

village 317 


•iiliuiu^ 


I*ag«. 

55 

as 385 

Cochon 858 

307 

186 

280 

244,323 

236 

ons 230 

78 

78 

138 

er 259 

203 

Sfnal... 20;! 

203 

s.. 203 

346 

304 

..   - 241 

240 

209 

73 

72 

147 

147 

261 

ition 261 

144 

fclements... 145 

Bs 145 

144 

S. 

121 

265 

86 

8C 

245 

821 

301 

Dchorages 306 

uoys 304 

omnvunication . . .  303 

urrents 302 

irections 305, 308 

ides 303 

324 

307 

ige 807 

—  light 307 

317 

, 317 

-  317 


INDEX. 


399 


Page. 

St.  Andrew  Bank  166 

Point 134, 165 

light .-  134 

—  Anne  Cape 206 

de  Beaupre 360 

light --  360 

de  la  Pocatiere 319 

Pointe  an  Pere 210 

Mountains 20'*>,  319 

River ..  206.366 

buoy 361 

supplies 206 

Shoals 319,360 

buoy 310 

—  Antoine  lights 865 

—  Augustine  Chain 339 

Cove 293 

Harbor 239 

Port 289 

River 289 

—  Barthelemi  Isle 300 

—  Catherine  Bay 304 

—  Charles  Point 381 

Reef 381 

caution 281 

—  Cioi;f  light 365 

buoy 365 

—  Denis 318 

—  Emelie  lights 365 

—  Etienne  Bay 306 

River 300 

—  Eugene.  _ 331 

—  Famine 360 

light 360 

—  Flavie. 211 

—  Francis  River  lights 368 

—  Frangois  lights 345 

—  Genevieve  Harbor 366 

caution 307 

directions  . . .  267 

Island 366 

Mount 266 

supplies 267 

—  George  bay 64.67 

anchorage 67 

Cape 70 

light... 70 

tides 60,70 

Cove 199 

—  Giles  Point 394 

—  Ignace 331 

Cape 331 

—  Jacques  Bar  _ 138 

River 129 


Pajcp. 

St.  Jean 345 

Bay...- - 306 

light... 306 

light 346 

Port  Joli - 331 

River 306 

—  John  Lake —  308 

Mount 300.378 

River  (Gaspe  bay) 199 

(Labrador) 277 

ancliorage 378 

Bar 277 

tides - 378 

water 199 

—  Joseph  cape 335. 354 

de  Levis 341 

light 335 

—  Laurent .  346 

light. 346 

—  Lawrence  Bay 58 

Cape 58 

light 58 

Gulf 1 

barometer 9 

buoyage 2 

caution . .      3 

currents 13 

deviation 1 

fogs 7 

general  directions    19 

ice 5 

islands  in 33 

li.-hts  ...  1 

magnetic  attrac- 
tion       1 

North  Coast 333 

aspect   of 

coast...  233, 
350,361,378 

caution  . . .  278 

climate 324 

codfishery .  834 

currents. . .  223 

general  ob- 

s  e  r  V  a  • 

tions 223 

icebergs . .  _  223 

inhabitants  334 

p  r  o  d  u  c  - 

tions 334 

soundings .  356 

signal  station 3 

telegraph 3 

variation 1 


mt 
I'm 


! 


..tS- 


400 


INDEX. 


Vane. 

St.  Lawrence  Gulf  winds 8 

. River  above  Quebec. .  364 

Montreal  3*1 

barometer » 

buoyage 3 

caution.      3 


r 


■Canals 371,373 

-caution 30 

-  churches 331 

-  directions 35, 

30,330,353 
-fogs 7 

-  general  remarks  309 

-ice  - -      5 

-lights  .....  1,36.5,368 
-Middle Channel.  330 

-  North  Channel .  384 

-  (below  Coudres 

Island)...  336,339 

-  buoys -  361 

-directions..  336,3.>9, 

361 
-tides...  327,339,360, 

361 
-North  Shore...  393 
— aspect  of  coast.  398, 

331 
— (below  Coudres 
Island) 831 

-  Orleans  Chan- 

nel   330 

-  piers 331 

-  pilots 19 

-  railway 331 

-  semaphore  sig- 

nals    367 

-  signal  station.      3 

-  South     Channel 

(above   Crane 

Island)  340 

(below   the 

Tra\orse)....330, 


directions  . . 

i  li  r  o  n  g  h 

South 
Channel . . 

tides  . .       . . 

South  Shore  (be- 
low the  Trav- 
erse)   

—  telegraph 


330 


330 
339 


.  313 
3,331 
tidal  streams  .    35 

tide  table 802 

tides  ..  30,301,360 


Pag". 

St.  La^vrenoe  River  Traverse,  North  339 

South  333 

winds. .  - 8 

—  Louis  Isle 306 

—  Margaret  Point 386 

River 385 

—  Marguerite  River 802 

—  Mary  Cliffs.. 52 

beacon 52 

Islands 249 

Rapid 867 

Reefs 250 

—  MarysBay :  183 

-Michel  Point 841 

Village 841 


—  Nicholas  Cape 

Harbor 298 

anchorage 293 

caution 294 

directions 294 

tides 294 

water 293 

River 102 


PancraceCove 294 

Point 294 


Patrick  Hole 846 

River 846 


—  Paul  Bay 324,354 

fog  signal 355 

light 854 

Island 82 

anchorage 82 

beacons 83 

caution 19 

fogsignal 83 

ice  report 83 

■ lights 83 

provision  depot  —     83 

—  Peter  Bay 143 

. Harbor 143 

lights 142 

tides 143 


Lake 


lights 868 

River 143 


semaphore  signals 


•  Peters  Island 113 

"light 112 

Road 114 

Shoal 114 

Spit 114 


Pierre 355 

buoy 361 

des  Becquets  lights 865 


ffiifiif  rjiWrtftfiWitti-  fliiti'|t>iafiiii(-ifc<gsii  iwrttfitii!ini<i<iuc^^  ■  ■ 


raverse,  North  329 

South  333 

inds 8 

, 306 

286 

285 

r 302 

52 

m 52 

249 

867 

250 

:  133 

841 

341 

293 

298 

inchorage 293 

laution 294 

lirections 294 

ides 294 

ivater 293 

102 

294 

294 

846 

846 

324,354 

nal 355 

854 

82 

lorage 32 

ons -    83 

ion 19 

lignal 83 

eport --    83 

ta 83 

dsion  depot  —     32 

142 

142 

hts 142 

les 143 

367 

bs 868 

142 

3  signals 367 

112 

ht 113 

114 

114 

114 

355 

361 

aets  lights 865 


INDEX. 


401 


Pane. 

St.  Pierre  Ught 360 

Point 360 

—  Roch 331 

buoys 332 

des  Aiilnets 310 

beacons 319 

Shoals 332 

Thomas. 33(t 

Bank 336 

Point 340 

—  Vallier 341 

-: Bank 341 

Point 341 

Saints  Channel 268 

Rocks 266 

SalaberryBay 244 

Salmon  Bay 231 

caution 231 

Cape 323 

fog  signal 323 

lights 323 

Islet 231 

Pointlight 185 

Port 323 

River 57 

Salt  Lake  Bay. 50 

beacon  near 50 

telegraph  station 51 

Salutation  Cove 126 

Point 124 

light 124 

Sand  Lark  Reef 276 

Top  Cape 56 

Sandy  Bay 225 

Beach  Point 200 

fog  signal 200 

lightvessel 200 

Harbor 239 

directions 239 

water 239 

Hook 40 

Channel 41 

directions 41 

Flat 41 

Shoal 41 

Island 150 

light 150 

Point  ( Mingan  Harbor) 276 

(Miscou  Gully) 178 

(Seven  Islands  Bay) ...  283 

light 173 

SapinLedge 106 

Point 106 

SatUtPass 364 

1151 26 


Saut  au  Cochon 355 

deMouton 300 

Savage  Harbor 143 

directions 143 

lights 143 

Island 150 

lights 150 

Point 71 

Sawbill  River 279 

Scale  Rock.... 246 

Scaumenac  Mountain 188 

Scollop  Patch 184 

Scoudouc 98 

Sea  Cow  Channel 370 

Head.... 124 

light 124 

Island 270 

Trout  Point 114 

Wolf  Island 61 

caution 61 

light 61 

Seal  House  Cove 381 

Islands... 333 

Point 240 

River 120 

Rock 199 

Rocks  (Caribou  Harbor) 81 

(Portage  bay) 243 

Seminaire  Spit  buoy 361 

Serpent  Point 204 

Reef 204 

buoy 204 

Seven  Islands 283 

—  Bay 283 

anchorage 284 

aspect  of  coast. . .  285 

tides 285 

caution 283 

Channels 284 

light 283 

tides 285 

trading  post 283 

winds 285 

Sisters 150 

Shag  Island  (Magdalen  Island) ...    39 

(Sandy  Harbor) 239 

Islet  (Mistanoque) 238 

(Washtawooka) 264 

Rock 238 

Shallop  Channel 234 

Cove 229 

Creek 48 

telegraph 48 

River 379 


,11 


I 


402 


INDEX. 


"I 
I 


% 

71 


F 

'  i 


i 

i 


Page. 

Shallop  Rock 189 

ShecaticaBay 239 

Island 337 

Shediao 98 

97 

95 

07 


Bay. 


ice . . . 

tides . 

— ■  charges  . . 

—  coal 

—  Harbor.. 


Smith  Island  (St.  George  Bay) . 
(Wallace  Harbor). 


Pago. 
..  03 
..    88 

Point 03 

buoy 03 

Sorel 370 

lights 369 


96 

buoys 97 

directions C9 

pilots 97 

Island 95 

beacons 97 

lights... 97 


Point  anchorage 99 

River 98 

. -supplies 98 

telegraph 98 

tides. 97 

Village 98 

water 98 

Sheldrake  Island 164 

light 164 

tides 164 

. Point 279 


Shemogue  River,  Great 95 

Little 95 

ShettlePort 828 

biiickshoc  Mountains. 206 

Shilelah  Cove.. 168 

ShippoganBar 172 

Channel 179 

-^ directions 179 

Flat 178 

Gully 172 

buoys 173,179 

lights 178 

Harbor 179 

Island 178 

Sound 178 

ice 179 


tides 180 

Ships  Head  Rock 198 

Shoal  Cove 269 

Signal  stations  for  passing  ships. . .      4 

Simon  Inlet 178 

Sims  Point 146 

caution 146 

Single  Rock 244 

Tree  Point 194 

Skinner  Reef  buoy 77, 81 

Slime  Rock ---  254 


Souris 138 

Head 138 

ice 139 

lights 139 

South  Bank 336 

(Perc6Bay) 107 

buoy ....  197 

Beach  (Richibucto River)...  103 

lights.  103 

Breaker 257 

Cape  ( Amherst  Island) 48 

light.. 48 

Channel  (  see  St.  Lawrence 

River). 

tides.. 839 

Makers  Ledge 258 

Minimegash  Pond 129 

Point 50,230 

beacon 50 


River 132 

Rock,  or  Algernon  Rock 334 

light 334 

■  Traverse 833 

anchorage 839 

— buoys 383 

directions 837 

fog  signal 832 

lightvessel 382 

Narrows 388 

tides 887 


Southeast  Bowen  Rock 266 

Southwest  Arm  ( Mabou  River)  —    61 

Breaker 257 

. cape  (Amherst  Island) . .    45 

Islands 250 

Ledge 231 

Point  (Anticosti) 51 

-anchorage 51 

caution 51 

light 51 

Spear  Cape 92 

Shoal 93 

Sphinx  Rock 364 

Spithead  (Charlottetown) 114 

(Port  Hood) 62 

buoy 03 

clearing  marks 02 

Spit  Island 284 


^^iLm 


mmxemmmiimsm 


INDEX. 


403 


wgeBay) 03 

le  Harbor)....    88 

02 

03 

370 

369 

138 

138 

139 

139 

336 

Bay) 197 

buoy....  197 

3ucto  River)...  103 

lights.  103 

257 

Bt  Island) 48 

48 

I  St.  Lawrence 
,iver). 

339 

e 258 

?ond 139 

50,230 

50 

132 

srnon  Rock 334 

334 

383 

orage 339 

B 333 

itions 887 

lignal 332 

vessel 332 

■OW8 338 

387 

ock 266 

ibou  River)  —    61 

257 

iherst Island)..    45 

250 

281 

nticosti) 61 

chorage 61 

ition 61 

ht 51 

92 

93 

264 

jtown) 114 

^) 62 

63 

narks: 03 


Pajje. 

Spray  Reef 347 

Sproule  Point 287 

Squaw  Bay 120 

anchorage 120 

Shoal 114 


Squirrel  Mount 60 

Pond 60 

StaflP  Islet 245 

Stanhope  Cape 144 

Cove 144 

Stanley  River 146 

Star  Island 234 

Stewart  Point 110 

Stone  Island 284 

light 868 

Pillar  Island 334 

light 834 

Stonehaven  light 185 

Stony  Point 227 

Sturgeon  Bay 183 

Sud,  Riviere  du 331 

Sugar  Loaf  Hill  ( Malignant  Bay) . .    71 

Mountain 187 

Summerside 125 

coal 125 

lights 125 

Sunbury  Cove 127 

Surveyor  Inlet 142 

Susan  Cape 64 

Creek 64 

Swanton  Point 138 

Swashway  Channel 159 

lights 159 


Table  Head 55 

tides 56 

Roulante,  or  Perc6  Mont 193 

Tabusintac  Qnlly 170 

Lagoon 170 

River 170 

settlement 170 

Tadoussac 304 

Harbor 304 

trading  post 304 

Tail  Islet 332 

Rocks 246 

Tatamagouche  Bay 85 

anchorage 85 

Basin 85 

tides 85 


River 85  I 

Village 85  j 

Telegraph  and  sigoal  stations 4  ! 


Tender  Reef 249 

Tent  Island 243 

Terraa  Point 108 

Torres  Rompues  Rapid 803 

Tertiary  Point 258 

Shell  Bay 258 

Teteagouche  River 185 

Three  Rivers,  town 132, 366 

Rocks 239 

Tides,  the 116 

Thrumcap  Islet 134 

Shoal 184 

buoy 185 

Thunder  Point 279 

Tide  table  from  Saguenay  River  to 

Quebec 863 

TignishHead 98 

River 91,153 

lights 153 

Tormentine  Cape 94 

lifeboat 94 

Reefs 93 

anchorage 94 

caution 93 

directions 93 

Tourmente  Cape 340 

Mount 335 

Tower  Point 55 

Rock 43 

Town  Point 74 

buoy 77 

Tracadie  Harbor  (Prince  Edward 

Island) 143 

directions 144 

lights 143 

tides 144 

(St.GeorgeBay).    68 

Lagoons 171 

River  (Prince  Edward  Isl- 
and)   171 

.Little  Gully 171 

.North  Gully 171 

buoys  .  171 

caution  173 

lights  .  171 

.Old  Gully 171 

(St. .  George  Bay) . .    68 

.South  Gully 171 

lights..  173 

Village(St. GeorgeBay)..    68 

Tracadigash  Point 191 

Spit 193 

buoy 193 

Traverse  Cape 124 


n 


i 


^' 


^ 


404 


INDEX. 


Page. 

Traverse  Cape  buoys 882-333 

fog  signals 333 

lights 869 

lightvessels 333 

.Middle 329 

.North 839 

Narrows,  East  —  358 

buoy  358 

,West...-  359 

— buoy  359 

tides 360 


-,South 338 

anchorage 339 

directions 887 

Narrows 338 

tides 837,360 

-Spit 358 


Page. 

VachesPoint 808,831 

Reef 304,333 

Valley  Cove 219 

Variation  of  compass 1 

Vernon  River  120 

VerteBay 01 

directions 93 

Victoria 123 

Vin  Bay 164 

Harbor 183 

anchorage 168 

directions - 168 

tidefi 163 

Island 163 

lights 168 


buoy , 


361 

Trebble  Hill  Island 341 

Islet. 259 

TreenBlufiE 82,87 

Reef 87 

Tremble  Shoals 364 

buoy 365 

light 365 

Trembles,  Pointeaux,  Shoals 864 

TrilobiteBay 269 

Trinity,  k  la.  Cape 306 

Trinity  Bay 290 

anchorage 290 

directions 390 

Cove 32 

River 290 

Trois  Saumons  River 831 

TroudeBerthier.. 840 

leCape 44 

Trout  River 281 

Rock 115 

Tryon  Cape 146 

Head 123 

River : 124 

Shoals 123 

buoy -  123 

caution 133 

Turner  Cape 145 

tides 145 

Two  Heads  Island 343 

Two-fathom  Ledge 254 

U. 
Upper  Grandigue  Village —    95 

V. 

Vaches  Patch 304.323 

buoy 304,322 


River 164 

W. 

Wallace 86 

anchorage 88 

Channel 67 

directions 87 

Harbor 86 

buoys 87 

light 87 

tides 87 


Walrus  Channel 272 

Island 270 

Wapitagun  Harbor 253 

directions 253 

tides 255 

water 253 

Island 253 

Outor 253 


Warren  Cove 115 

Waahatnagunashka  Bay 265 

Washball  Rock w 86 

Washshecootai  Bay 259 

trading  post . . .  259 

Washtawooka  Bay 264 

Watagheistic  Island — 250 

Sound 250 

anchorage 252 

caution 250 

north  entrance  250 

south  entrance  251 

supplies 252 

(Bonne    Esperance 

Harbor) 282 

(Hare  Harbor) 245 

Watcheeshoo  Hill 265 

Peninsula 265 

. trading  post 265 

Waugh  Shoal 82 


Watch    Rock 


'<& 


l)iWW«M-!>)tll»!.H»»Wj;tiil8amilWBMl|i,»!IIMCIM^ 


Page. 

803,321 

304,323 

219 

IS 1 

120 

91 

3 93 

123 

164 

163 

age 163 

jns - 168 

163 

163 

163 

164 

V. 

86 

88 

87 

reotions... 87 

86 

jys 87 

(it 87 

es 87 

373 

270 

: 353 

directions 253 

tides 255 

water 353 

353 

Ouior 353 

115 

:aBay 365 

86 

f 359 

—  trading  post . . .  359 

J 364 

id.... 250 

id 350 

—  anchorage 353 

—  caution 250 

—  north  entrance  250 

—  south  entrance  351 

—  supplies 252 

Sonne    Esperance 

Harbor) 332 

[are  Harbor) 345 

1 265 

insula 263 

ling  post 265 


Wesi;  Cape  (Amherst  Island) 42 

(Saguenay  River) 807 

Channel 285 

CliflE 64 

. beacon 54 

tides 56 

Cove 329 

Gully 79,147 

Lake 48 

Point  (Anticosti) 68 

fog  signal . .    58 

light 68 


INDEX.  405 

Pagk 

White  Islet  Reef  lightvessel 811 

'fogsignal.  811 

Point -  195 

Sands 109 


(PortDaniel) 195 

(Prince  Edward  Island)  128 

anchorage 128 

^ buoy 128 

light 128 

tides 138 

Reef 129 

tides 129 

River 73 

buoys : 77 

Rocks 288 

Saint 267 

Sand 860 

Passage 860 

Spit 129 

Western  Narrows 859 


Passage. 


tides. 


Whale  Channel 284 

Head 244 

— Island 281,269 

Patch 282 

Reef 281 

Wheatley  River 145 

Wheeler  Bar 186 

caution 136 

Whelp  Rock 282 

White  Buoy  Bend 866 

CliflE 53 

Head :  196 

■ fog  signal 197 

light 197 

HorseReef 44 

Islet 811 

Reef 811 


Whittle  Cape 258 

Rocks 256 

Widow  Point 79 

Wild  Fowl  Reef 299 

caution 299 

Wilmot  River 126 

Wilson  Bank 174 

Point 174 

Winds 8 

Winter  Cove 148 

Creek 145 

Portage 158 

Wolf  Bay 257 

Island  ( Labrador) 257 

( Magdalen  Islands) 44 

River 128 


WolfeCape 129 

Cove 847 

Wood  Island  (Fish  Harbor) 340 

(St.GenevieveHarbor)  267 

Islands 109 

anchorage 109 

light 109 


-Pillar  Island.  883 

beacon 833 


Wreck  Bay  (Anticosti)  48 

(Belle  Isle  Strait) 220 

Cove 58 

Point 58 


Wrights  Range 123 

Wye  Rock 340 

buoy 340 


Yacta  Point 191 

York  Point 330 

River 112 

lights 112 

t. 

Zephyr  Rock 95 

buoy 96 

clearing  marks 96 


LIST  OF  HYDROGRAPHIC  OFFICE  PUBLICATIONS,  ETC. 


No. 


22 


45 


99 


100 


104 


86 


64 


73 


78 


23 


Title  of  book. 


102 


105 


NORTH  ATLANTIC  OCEAN. 

Qenoral  Examination  of  the  Atlantic  Ocean.  Br  Capt.  Charles 
Philippe  De  Kerhallet,  I.  F.  N.    Translated  by  Capt.  R.  H. 

Wyman,  U.  S.  N.    8vo.    1870.    Hydrographic  Office 

Supplement  No.  1 .    1886.    Hydrographic  Office 

Oeneral  Directions  for  the  Atlantic  Ocean.  From  the  French 
of  F.  LabroHse.  Second  edition.  Translated  by  Lieat.  Com- 
mander J.  B.  Coghlan,  U.S.  N.  8vo.  1873.  Hydrographij 
Office 

Nova  Scotia,  Bay  of  Fundy,  and  South  Shore  of  Gulf  of  St. 
Lawrence  to  Miramichi  Bay.  Second  edition.  Comi)iled  by 
R.  C.  Ray,  U.  S.  N.    8vo.    1897.    Hydrographic  Office 

Gulf  and  River  St.  Lawrence  and  Cape  Breton  Island,  includ- 
ing Cape  Breton,  Magdalen,  and  Anticosti  Islands.  Second 
edition.  Compiled  by  R.  C.  Ray,  U.  S.  N.  Svo.  1897. 
Hydrographic  Office 

The  Depths  that  Can  be  Carried  into  the  Harbors  and  Anchor- 
ages on  the  Atlantic  and  Gulf  Coasts  of  the  United  States. 
Prepared  by  Gustavo  Herrle.  (Pamphlet.)  1893.  Hydro- 
graphic  Office 

The  Navigation  of  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  and  the  Caribbean  Sea. 
Vol.  I.  The  West  India  Islands,  includic^  the  Bahama  Banks 
and  Islands,  and  the  Bermuda  Islands.  Third  edition.  Com- 
piled by  R.  C.  Ray,  U.  S,  N.    8vo.    1892.    Hydrographic 

Office 

Supplement.    Third  edition.    1896.    Hydrographic  Office. 

The  Navigation  of  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  and  the  Caribbean  Sea. 
Vol.  II.  The  Coast  of  the  Mainland  from  Key  West,  Florida, 
U.  S.,  to  the  Orinoco  River,  Venezuela,  with  the  Adjacent 
Islands,  Cays,  and  Banks.    Third  edition.    Revised  by  R.  C. 

Ray,  U.  S.  N.    8vo.    1896.    Hydrographic  Office 

Supplement.    1897.    Hydrographic  Office 

Newfoundland  and  Labrador.  Compiled  by  Lieut.  W.  W.  Gill- 
patrick  and  Ensign  John  Gibson,  U.  S.  N.  Svo.  1884. 
Hydrographic  Office 

Newfoundland  and  Labrador.  Supplement.  8vo.  1886.  Com- 
piled by  Lieut.  R.  G.  Davenport  and  Ensign  John  Gibson, 

U.  S.  N.    Hydrographic  Office 

Supplement  No.  2.    1891 .    Hydrographic  Office 

Supplement  N  o.  3.     1895.    Hydrographic  Office 

Winds,  Currents,  and  Navigation  of  the  Gulf  of  Cadiz,  the 
Western  Coast  of  the  Spanish  Peninsula,  and  the  Strait  of 
Gibraltar,  by  Capt.  R.  H.  Wyman,  U.  S.  N.  Svo.  1870. 
Hydrographic  Office 

General  Examination  of  the  Mediterranean  Sea.  By  Capt.  A. 
Le  Gras,  I.  F.  N.  Translated  by  Capt.  R.  H.  Wyman,  U.  S.  N. 
Svo.    1870.    Hj'drographic  Office - 

The  Azores,  Madeiras,  Salvages,  Canaries,  and  Cape  Verde 
Islands.     Second  edition.     Revised  by  R.  C.  Ray,  U.  S.  N. 

Svo.    1892.    Hydrographic  Office 

Supplement.    1895.    Hydrographic  Office 

West  Coast  of  Africa.  From  Cape  Spartel  to  Cape  Agulhas, 
including  the  Islands  in  Bight  of  Biafra,  Ascension,  St.  Hel- 
ena, Tristan  da  Cunha,  and  Gough  Islands.  Second  edition. 
Compiled  by  R.  C.  Rav,  U.  S.  \ .    Svo.    1;'93.    HydrograpWc 

Office 

Supplement.      Second    edition.     1897.     Hydrographic 
Office 


Price. 


53.00 
.10 


2.00 


.25 


1.50 
.20 


1.50 
.20 


i.oa 


.60 
.30 
.20 


1.00 
2.00 


.80 
.10 


1.50 
.20 


406 


■■'3«fe^ 


IONS,  ETC. 


Price. 

)t.  Charles 
apt.  R.  H. 

ce — 

9    

$3.00 
.10 

le  French 
lent.  Com- 
rographij 

3.00 

ulf  of  St. 
mpiled  by 
jffice 

d,  inclad- 
;.    Second 
vo.     1897. 

d  Anchor- 
ed States, 
t.    Hydro- 

.25 

ibean  Sea. 
ana  Banks 
on.    Com- 
Irographic 

1.50 

phic  Office. 
)bean  Sea. 
t,  Florida, 
Adjacent 
idbyR.C. 

.20 
1.50 

.20 

T.  W.  Qill- 
vo.     1884. 

i.oa 

386.    Com- 
n  Gibson, 

.60 

« 

.20 

e 

.20 

Cadiz,  the 
e  Strait  of 
3vo.    1870. 

1.00 

y  Capt.  A. 

ai,  U.S.N. 

2.00 

ape  Verde 
r,  V.  S.  N. 

.80 
.10 

)  Agulhas, 
.n,  St.  Hel- 
ad  edition, 
irographic 

1.50 

irograpMc 

.20 

HYDROORAPHIC   OFFICE   PUBLICATIONS,    ETC. 


407 


No. 


15 
98 


Title  of  book. 


^4 


55 


NORTH  ATLANTIC  OCEAN— Continued. 


(Pani- 


Memoirof  the  Dangers  and  Ico  in  the  North  Atlantic, 
phlet.)     !««».     Bureau  of  Navigation 

Ice  and  Ice  Movements  in  North  Atlantic  Ocean.  By  Ensign 
Hugh  Rodman,  U.S.N.  (Pamphlet.)  1890.  Hydrographic 
Office 


SOUTrl  ATLANTIC  OCEAN. 

East  Coast  of  South  America.  From  the  Orinoco  River  to  Cape 
Virgins,  including  Falkland,  South  Georgia,  Sandwich,  and 
South  Shetland  Islands.    Second  edition.    Compiled  by  R.  C. 

Ray,  U.  S.  N.    8vo.    1894.    Hydrographic  Office 

Supplement.    1895.    Hydrographic  Office 

Navigation  of  the  Strait  of  Magellan.  Translated  from  the 
French  by  Commodore  J.  C.  P.  de  KrafiEt  and  Commander 
William  Gibson,  U.  S.  N.  (Pamphlet.)  188a.  Hydro- 
graphic  Office -  -  - 

Remarks  by  Capt.  M.  A.  Lef^vre,  of  the  French  Navy,  on  the 
voyage  of  the  Vaudreuil  through  Patagonian  Channels  and 
Magellan  Strait.  Translated  by  Lieut.  George  M.  Totten, 
U.S.N.    (Pamphlet.)    1874.    Hydrographic  Office 


68 


89 


84 


96 


41 


4,11) 


41a 


92 


20 


PACIFIC  OCEAN. 

General  Examination  of  the  Pacific  Ocean.    By  Capt.  Charles 
Philippe  De  Kerhallet,  F.  I.  N.    Translated  under  the  direc- 
tion of  Commodore  Charles  Henry  Davis,  U.  S.  N.    Svo.   1867 
Supplement  No.  1.     1886.    Hydrographic  Office 

The  Navigation  of  the  Pacific  Ocean.  Translated  from  the 
French  of  Mons.  F.  Labrosse,  by  Lieut.  J.  W.  Miller,  U.  S.  N. 
8vo.     1874.    Hydrographic  Office.    Republished  1898 

The  West  Coast  of  South  America,  including  Magellan  Strait, 
Tierra  del  Fuego,  and  the  Outlying  Islands.  Second  edition. 
Compiled  by  R.  C.  Ray,  U.  S.  N.  8vo.  1896.  Hydro- 
graphic  Office -.  -  -  -  V 1:  ■  ■  v;  ■  -r  ■  i  ■ 

West  Coast  of  Mexico  and  Central  America,  from  the  United 
Stat«s  to  Panama,  including  the  Gulfs  of  California  and 
Panama.    Second  edition.    Compiled  by  R.  C.  Ray,  U.  S.  N. 

8vo.    1893.    Hydrographic  Office 

Supplement.    1896.    Hydrographic  Office 

The  Coast  of  British  Columbia.  From  Juan  de  Fuca  Strait  to 
Portland  Canal,  including  Vancouver  and  Queen  Charlotte 
Islands,  Compiled  by  R.  0.  Ray,  U.  S.  N.  8vo.  1891,  Hy- 
drographic Office  ----- i-.-A-^--- 

Supplement.    Third  edition.    1895.    Hydrographic  Office. 
Supplement  No.  2.    1897.    Hydrographic  Office 

List  of  Reported  Dangers  in  the  North  Pacific  Ocean.    8vo. 

1871.    Hydrographic  Office - 

Supplement  No.  2.    1891.    Hydrographic  Office.     

Supplement  to  Reported  Dangers  in  the  North  Pacific  Ocean. 
Compiled  and  arranged  by  Commander  William  Gibson, 
U.S.N.    8vo.     1880,    Hydrographic  Office - 

List  of  Reported  Dangerri  in  the  South  Pacific  Ocean.  Com- 
piled and  arranged  by  Lieut,  J.  E.  Pillsbury,  U.  S,  N.    8vo, 

1879.    Hydrographic  Office 

Supplement,    1891 .    Hydrographic  Office 

Ice  and  Ice  Movements  in  Bering  Sea  and  the  Arctic  Basin,  By 
Ensign  E.  Simpson,  U.S.N.  (Pamphlet.)  1890.  Hydro- 
graphic  Office -  -  -  - - 

Supplement  No.  2  to  Directory  for  Bering  Sea  and  Coast  of 
Auwka,    1895.    Hydrographic  Office 


Price. 

!^0.  JO 

.20 


1.50 
,10 


.20 


.20 


i.m 

.10 


1.50 


1.20 


1. 50 
.10 


1.50 
.20 
.10 

1.00 
.15 


1.00 


1.00 
.15 


.20 
.20 


I! 


}^i 


-'aftiMiiifJiSli'V  • 


it 


24 


108 


108 
Part  III. 
Snpp. 


SO 


81 


72 

9 

f 

18 

•-' 

17 
71 

'u' 

106 

f 

66 

57 
90 


INDIAN  OCEAN. 

Sailing  Directions  of  the  Indian  Ocean,  the  Winds,  Monsoons, 
Currents,  and  Passages,  including  also  the  Java  Sea.  8ulu 
Sea,  Arafnra  Sea,  and  the  Philippine  Islands.  Compiled  by 
Lieut.  F.  E.  Sawyer,  U.  8.  N.    8vo.    1887.    Hydrographic 

Office 

Revised  Supplement.    1894.    Hydrographic  Office 

Oeneral  Examination  of  Indian  Ocean,  with  Directions  for  the 
Navigation  of  Torres  Straita.  etc.  By  Capt.  Charles  Philippe 
De  Kerhallet,  I.  F.  N.  Translated  by  Capt.  R.  H.  Wyman, 
U.S.  N.    8vo.    1870.    Hydrographic  Office 

LAKES. 

Sailing  directions  for  the  Gh-eat  Lakes  and  Connecting  Waters. 
Second  edition.    Revised  by  R.  G.  Ray,  U.  S.  N.    8vo.    1896. 

Hydrographic  Office 

Supplement.    1897.    Hvdrographic  Office 

Sailing  Directionfl  for  North  Channel  of  Lake  Huron  and 
Qeorgian  Bay.  Prepared  by  Lieut.  D.  H.  Malian,  U.  S.  N., 
assisted  by  R.  C.  Ray,  U.  S.  N.  8vo.  189S.  Hydrographic 
Office 

LIGHT  LISTS. 

List  of  Lights  (No.  1)  of  North  and  South  America  (excepting 
the  United  States),  including  the  West  Indies  and  Pacific 
Islands.  Compiled  by  Boynton  Leach.  4to.  1896.  Hydro- 
graphic  Office  

List  of  Lights  (No.  2)  of  South  and  East  Coasts  of  Africa  and 
theEastlndies,  inolndingthe  East  India  Islands,  China,  Japan, 
Australia,  Tasmania,  and  New  Zealand.  Compiled  by  Boyn- 
ton Leach.    4to.    1896.    Hydrographic  Office 

List  of  Lights  (No.  8)  of  the  West  Coasts  of  Africa,  Europe,  and 
the  Me^terranean  Sea,  including  the  Adriatic,  the  Black  Sea, 
and  the  Sea  of  Azof.  Compiled  by  Boynton  Leach.  4to. 
1897.    Hydrographic  Office 

NAVIGATION  BOOKS. 

List  of  Oeographical  Positions.  By  Lieut.  Commander  F.  M. 
Green,  U.  S.  N.    4to.    1888.    Bureau  of  Narigation 

The  New  American  Practical  Navigator.  By  Nathaniel  Bow- 
ditoh,  LL.  D.    8vo.    Edition  of  1896.    Bureau  of  Navigation. 

Bowditoh's  Useful  Tables.  8vo.  Edition  of  1896.  Bureau  of 
Navigation 

Projection  Tables.    8vo.    1869.    Bureau  of  Navigation 

Azimuth  Tables  for  parallels  of  latitude  between  61°  N.  and 
61°  S.  By  Lients.  Seaton  Schroeder  and  W.  H.  H.  Souther- 
land,  U.  S.  N.    4to.    Edition  of  1897.    Hydrographic  Office.. 

Azimuth  Tables  for  pandlels  of  latitude  between  40°  N.  and 
60°  N.    For  the  Great  Lakes.    4to.    1894.     Hydrographic 

Office 

Supplement  to  106.  Equation  of  Time  for  the  years  1894, 
1895, 1896,  and  1897 

Arctic  Azimuth  Tables  for  p.aTallelB  of  latitude  between  70°  and 
80°.  Prepared  by  Lieuts.  Seaton  Schroeder  and  Richard 
Wainwright,  U.  S.  N.  12nio.  1881.  Hydrographic  Office- 
Tables  for  Finding  the  Distance  of  an  Object  by  two  Bearings. 
(Pamphlet.)    1874.    Hydrographic  Office , 

The  Development  of  Great  Circle  Sailing.  By  G.  W.  Little- 
hales.    8vo.    1889.    Hydrographic  Office 


11.00 
.20 


2.00 


1.00 
.20 


1.00 


.25 


.25 


.25 


.75 

2.25 

1.25 
1.60 

4.25 

.50 
.10 

.80 

.20 

1.00 


'■'Mr^- 


'^^kS^^s&wssf^ssei-^maiism^iiiti'- 


Price. 

Monsoons, 
Sea.  Hula 
mpiled  by 
rographio 

11.00 

flee 

ns  for  the 
8  Philippe 
.  Wyman, 

g  Waters, 
vo.    1896. 

.80 

a.  00 

1.00 

.20 

nron  and 

U.  8.  N., 
Irographic 

1.00 

excepting 
ad  Pacific 
.    Hydro- 

.25 

Lfrica  and 
aa,  Japan, 
I  by  Boyn- 

arope,  and 
Black  Sea, 
ach.    4to. 

.25 
.25 

tder  F.  M. 
>n 

.76 

miel  Bow- 
lavigation. 
Burean  of 

a.  25 
1.25 

ion... 

(1°  N.  and 
.  Sonther- 

W°  N.  and 
Irographic 

1.50 

4.25 

.60 

irears  1894, 

.10 

en  7(P  and 

i  Richard 

lie  Office.. 

Bearings. 

.80 
.20 

W.  Littlfr 

1.00 

HYDROOHAPHIC   OFFICE   PUBLICATIONS,    ETC. 


No. 


91 
109 
109a 
114 

111 


77 


112 


113 


101 


87 


110 
65 


Title  of  book. 


NAVIGATION  BOOKS— Continued. 

Table  of  Meridional  Parts  for  the  Terrestrial  Spheroids,  Com- 
presHion  WfiT-  By  G.  W.LittlehalesandJ.S.  Siebert.  bvo. 
1880.    Hydrographic  Office 

Contributions  to  Terrestrial  Magnetism — The  Variation  of  the 
Compass.  Compiled  by  Lieut.  Chauncey  Thomas,  U.  S.  N. 
8vo.    1894.    Hydrographic  Office 

Contributions  to  Terrestrial  Magnetism— Tho  Variation  of  the 
Compass.  Compiled  by  Q.  W.  Littlehales,  C.  E.  8vo.  1895. 
Hydrographic  Office 

Contributions  to  Terrestrial  Magnetism— The  Magnetic  Dip  or 
Inclination.  As  Observed  at  Thirty  Maritime  Stations.  To- 
gether with  an  Investigation  of  the  Secular  Change  in  the 
Direction  of  a  Fully  Suspended  Magnetic  Needle  at  Twenty- 
nine  Stations.  ByO.W.  Littlehales,  C.E.  8vo.  1897.  Hy- 
drographic Office 

Tables  showing  the  Local  Mean  Time  of  the  Sun's  Visible  Ris- 
ing and  Setting  for  Each  Degree  of  Latitude  between  60°  N. 
and  60°  S. ,  and  for  Each  Degree  of  the  Sun's  Declination.  Pre- 
pared by  Ensign  George  Wood  Logan,  U.  S.  N.  4to.  1896. 
Hydrographic  Office 

METEOROLOGICAL. 

Practical  Hints  in  regard  to  West  India  Hurricanes.  By  Lient. 
G.  L.  Dyer,  U.  S.  N.  1887.  (Pamphlet.)  Hydrographic 
Office 

Nautical  Monograph  No.  5.  The  Great  Storm  off  the  Atlantic 
Coast  of  the  United  States,  March  11-14, 1888.  By  Everett 
Hayden,  U,  S.  N.    1888.    Hydrographic  Office 

Illustrative  Cloud  Forms  for  the  Guidance  of  Observers  in  the 
Classification  of  Clouds.  Prepared  by  Capt.  C.  D.  Sigsbee, 
U.  S.  N.,Hydrographer.  12mo— 4to.  1897.  Hydrographic 
Office 

The  Treatment  of  Marine  Meteorological  Data,  with  Special 
Reference  to  the  Work  of  the  Unit«d  States  Hydrographic 
Office.  Prepared  by  Mr.  James  Page.  (Pamphlet.)  1807. 
Hydrographic  Office 

SURVEYS. 

The  Methods  and  Results  of  the  Survey  of  the  West  Coast  of 
Lower  California  by  the  Officers  of  the  U.  S.  S.  Ranger  during 
the  Season  of  1889-90.  By  Lieut.  O.  W.  Lowry,  U.  S.  N.,  and 
G.  W.  Littlehales.    8vo.    1892.    Hydrographic  Offici°> 


SIGNALS. 

International  Signal  Code.  Revised  and  Corrected  to  1894, 
including  the  Semaphore  and  Storm-signal  Service  of  the 
Maritime  Conntries,  the  Life-Saving  Service  and  Time-Bfdl 
System  of  the  United  States.  8vo.  1894.  Bureau  of  Naviga- 
tion  


MISCELLANEOUS  PUBLICATIONS. 

The  Gulf  Stream.  By  Lieut.  Commander  John  E.  Pillsbnry, 
U.S.N.    (Pamphlet.)    1894.    Hydrographic  Office 

Report  on  the  Telegraphic  Determination  of  Differences  of 
Longitude  in  the  West  Indies  and  Central  America.  By 
Lieut.  Commander  F.  M.  Green,  U.  S  N.  4to.  1883.  Burean 
of  Navigation , 

•  Not  for  sale. 


409 


Price. 


$1.20 
1.00 
1.00 


.80 

.10 
(*) 

1.00 
(*) 


(*) 


8.00 


.10 


(*) 


.1 


51 


410 


HYDROORAPHIC   OFFICE   PUBLICATIONS,    ETC. 


I 

'I 
* 


I' 


97 


04 
95 


108 


107 


MISCELLANEOUS  PUBLICATIONS— Contlnnod. 

Report  on  the  ToleKraphic  Determination  of  Longitudes  in 
Mexico,  Central  America,  the  We«t  Indies,  and  on  tlie  North 
Coast  of  South  America,  witli  the  Latitudes  of  the  Sevenil 
Stations.  By  Lieuts.  J.  A.  Norris  and  Charles  Laird,  U.S.N. 
To  which  is  appunded  a  Report  on  Magnetic  Observations  in 
Mexico  and  tlie  West  Indies.  By  Lieut.  Charles  Laird  and 
Ensigns  J.  H.  L.  Holcombe  and  L.  M.  Garrett,  U.  S.  N.  4to. 
181)1 .    Bureau  of  Navigation 

Rei)ort  of  the  International  Meteorologic  Congress  at  Paris, 
IM81).    By  Lieut.  Aaron  Ward,  U.  S.  N.    (Pamphlet.)    18U0. 

The  Average  Form  of  Isolateil  Submarine  Peaks,  and  tlio  Interval 
which  should  obtain  Between  Deep-Sea  Soundinjcs  taken  to 
Disclose  the  Character  of  tlie  Bottom  of  the  Ocean.  By 
G.  W.  Littlehales.    8vo.     18U0.    Hydrographic  Office 

Report  on  Uniform  System  for  Spelling  Foreign  Geographic 
Names.  By  Lieut.  C.  M.  McCarteney,  U.  S.  N.,  Boynton 
Leach,  and  Gustave  Herrle.  (Pamphlet.)  1891.  Hydro- 
graphic  Office 

Smnnarine  Cables;  Instruments  and  Implements  Employed  in 
Cable  Surveys;  Theory  of  Cable  Laying;  Specifications  and 
Costs;  Submarine  Cable  Systems  of  the  World.  Prepared  by 
G.  W.  Littlehales.    8vo.    1893.    Hydrographic  Office 

Wrecks  and  Derelicts  in  the  North  Atlantic  Ocean.  1887  to 
1 893,  inclusive.    4to.    1894.    Hydrographic  Office 


*  Not  for  sole. 


I>rloe. 


AGENTS  FOR  THE  SALE  OF  HYDROGHAPHIC  OFFICE  CHARTS, 
SAILIiNG  DIRECTIONS,  ETC. 


(*) 

$0.20 


,70 


(•) 


1.00 

(*) 


AGENTS  IN  UNITED  STATES. 

Alexandria,  Va.—R.  Bell's  Sons,  South  Fairfax  street. 

Apalachicola,  Fla.— J.  E.  Griidy. 

Ajitoria,  Oregr.— Qriffen  &  Reed. 

Baltimore,  Md.— F.  J.  Sloane  &  Co.,  corner  Pratt  street  and  Spear's  wharf. 

M.  V.  O'Neal,  503  East  Pratt  street. 
Bangror,  Me.— Snow  &  Nealley  Company. 
Bar  Harbor,  Me.— Albert  W.  Bee. 
Bath,  Me.— Charles  A.  Harriman. 
Block  Island.— C.  C.  Ball. 

BoBton,  Ma»«.— Charles  C.  Hutchinson,  153  State  street. 
L.  Prang  &  Co.,  286  Roxbury  street. 
Samuel  Thaxter  &  Son.  125  State  street. 
Boothbay  Harbor,  Me.— William  O.  McCobb. 

Buffalo,  N.  Y.— Matthews,  Northrup  «&  Co.,  179-188  Washington  street. 
Charleston,  S.  0.— James  Allen  «&  Co.,  285  King  street. 
Chicago,  111.— George  Carpenter  &  Co.,  202-208  South  Water  street. 
H.  Channon  Company,  24  and  26  Market  street. 
Rand,  McNally  &  Co. ,  160  and  168  Adams  street. 
The  Western  News  Company,  204-206  Madison  street. 
Cleveland,  Ohio.— Burrows  Brothers  Company,  23  Euclid  avenue. 

The  Marine  Record  Publishing  Company,  Western  Reserve 

Building. 
The  Marine  Review,  516  Perry  Payne  Building. 
Detroit,  Mich.— H.  D.  Edwards  &  Co.,  16-24  Woodward  avenue. 

J.  W.  Westcott,  foot  Woodward  avenue. 
Duluth,  Minn.— A.  Hirsch. 
Eastport,  Me..— C.  E.  Cummings. 

East  Tawas,  Mich  —Howard  C.  Bristol,  United  States  signal  observer. 
Erie,  Pa.— William  T.  Sell,  830  State  street. 
Eureka,  Humboldt  Couuty,  Cal.— James  E.  Matthews. 
Fernandina,  Fla.— J.  W.  Howell,  customhouse. 
Galveston,  Tex.— Charles  F.  Trube,  2415  Market  street. 
Gloucester,  Mass.— P.  A.  Chisolm,  161  Main  street. 
Jacksonville,  Fla.— The  H.  &  W.  B.  Drew  Company. 
Keywest,  Fla.— Alfred  Brost,  office  of  lighthouse  inspector. 

H.  B.  Boyer,  weather  observer. 
Los  Angeles,  Cal.— StoU  &  Thayer  Company,  139  South  Spring  street. 
Marquette,  Mich.— A.  O.  Kruger. 
Millbridge,  Me.— N.  C.  Wallace. 
Milwaukee,  Wis.— Joys  Bros.  &  Co.,  205  East  Water  street. 

411 


il 


.1' 


;!■ 


AGENTS  FOR  HYDROGRAPHIC  OFFICE  CHARTS,  ETC. 

Mobile,  Ala.— Costello  &  Bates  Company,  24  Front  street. 

E.  O.  Zadek  Jewelry  Company. 
New  Bedford,  Mass.— C.  R.  Sherman  &  Son. 
New  London,  Conn.— Axel  F.  Anderson,  57  Bank  street. 
New  Orleans,  La.— Frigerio  &  Schully,  411  Royal  street. 

L.  Frigerio  (widow),  1019  Canal  street. 
Woodward,  Wight  &  Co.,  406-418  Canal  street. 
Newport,  R.  1.— J.  M.  K.  Southwick,  185  Thames  street. 
New  York  City.— E.  Steiger  &  Co.,  25  Park  place. 

John  Bliss  &  Co.,  138  Front  street. 
Michael  Rnpp  &  Co.,  39  South  street. 

R.  Merrill's  Sons,  110  Wall  street.  ' 

Thomas  Manning,  45  Broadway. 
T.  S.  &  J.  D.  Negus,  140  Water  street. 
New  Whatcom,  Wash.- Charles  M.  Sherman. 
Norfolk,  Va.— C.  F.  Greenwood  &  Bro.,  158  Main  street. 

Vickery  &  Co.,  124  Main  street. 
Ogdensburgr,  N.  T.— George  Hall  Coal  Company. 

Oswego,  N.  Y.— John  S.  Parsons,  comer  West  Cayuga  and  Water  streets. 
Palmbeach,  Fla.- E.  M.  Brelsford. 
Pascagoula,  Miss.— James  I.  Friar. 
Pensacola,  Fla.- Henry  Horsier  &  Co.,  706  and  708  South  Palafox  street. 

McKenzie  Oerting  &  Co.,  599  South  Palafox  street. 
Philadelphia,  Pa.— Riggs  &  Bro.,  231  Walnut  street. 
Portland,  Me.— William  Sentei  &  Co.,  51  Exchange  street. 
Portland,  Oreg.— J.  K.  Gill  &  Co.,  Third  and  Alder  streets.  Masonic  Temple. 
Port  Huron,  Mich.— Kendall  Marine  Reporting  Company. 
Port  Townsend,  Wash.— Waterman  &  Katz. 

W.  J.  Fritz,  830  Water  street. 
Providence,  A.  L— George  A.  StockweU,  12  Board  of  Trade  BuUding,  Market 

square. 
Punta  Oorda,  Fla.— K.  B.  Harvey. 
Rockland,  Me.— Spear,  May  &  Stover,  408  Main  street. 
Sag  Harbor,  N.  Y.— Charles  Philip  Cook. 
San  Diego,  OaL— E.  M.  Burbeck,  corner  Fifth  and  D  streets. 
San  Francisco,  Cal.— Dillon  &  Co.,  310  California  street. 
Louis  Weule,  418  Battery  street. 
S.  S.  Amheim,  8  Stuart  street. 
San  Pedro,  Cal.— W.  L.  Banning. 
Santa  Barbara,  Cal.— H.  A.  C.  McPhail. 
Sault  Ste.  Marie,  Mich.— P.  M.  Church  &  Co. 
Savannah,  Oa.— J.  P.  Johnson,  customhouse. 
Seattle,  Wash.— G.  Beninghausen,  First  avenue  south  and  Washington  stnet. 

Lowman  &  Hanford. 
Sitka.  Alaska.- Edward  De  Groff. 
Stonington,  Conn.— James  H.  Stivers,  73  Water  street. 
Sturgeon  Bay,  Wis.— Frank  Long. 
Tacoma,  Wash.— Vaughan  &  Morrill. 
Tampa,  Fla.— Babbitt  &  Co.,  Franklin  street. 
Tarpon  Springs,  Fla.— C.  D.  Webster,  88  and  85  Tarpon  avenue. 
Titusville,  Fla.— Robert  Ranson. 
Tremont,  Me. — Frank  McMuUen. 
Vineyard  Haven,  Mass.— E.  St.  Croix  Oliver. 
Waldoboro,  Me.— George  Bliss. 


LRTS,   ETC. 


al  street. 


I  Water  streets- 


Palafox  street, 
fox  street. 


},  Masonic  Temple. 


ade  Building,  Msrifcet 


i  Washington  stanet. 


venne. 


AGENTS  FOR   HYDROGRAPHIC   OFFICE   CHARTS,    ETC.         413 

Washington,  D.  C— J.  J.  Chapman,  608  Thirteenth  street. 

W.  H.  Lowdermilk  &  Ck). ,  1424  F  street  NW. 

William  Ballantyne  &  Son,  428  Seventh  street. 

Brentano's,  1015  Pennsylvania  avenue. 
West  Superior,  Wis.— Charles  S.  Barker. 
Wheeling,  W.  Va.— Frank  Stanton. 
Wilmington,  N.  C— Godfrey  Hart,  24  South  Front  street. 

W.  N,  Harriss,  with  George  Harrisa  &  Co.,  North  Water 
street. 

AGENTS  IN   FOREIGN  PORTS. 

Calleo,  Peru.— John  Newton,  2  Calle  de  la  Constitucion. 

Glasgow,  Scotland.— Alexander  Dobbie  &  Son,  18  Clyde  place. 

OuaymM,  Mexico. — Conrad  Eimbeck,  C.  E. 

Halifax,  Nova  Scotia.— Robert  H.  Cogswell. 

Hamburg,  Germany. — Eckardt  &  Messtorflf. 

Hamilton,  Ontario. — Hunter  &  Grant. 

Habana,  Cuba.— Edwin  W.  Wilson,  41  and  43  Obispo  street. 

Havre,  France.— V.  &  M.  Lepetit,  15  Rue  de  Paris. 

Honolulu,  Hawaiian  Islands.- Frank  S.  Dodge. 

Hongkong,  China.— Charl»»s  Gaupp  &  Co. 

Kingston,  Jamaica. — James  Gall. 

Liverpool,  England.— Philip,  Son  &  Nephew,  41  to  51  South  Castle  street 

Manila,  Philippine  Islands.— Russell  L.  Webb. 

Montevideo,  Uruguay.- T.  Bottini  &  Co.,  Calle  Rompla,  95-07. 

Montreal,  Canada.— Heam  &  Harrison,  1640  Notre  Dame  street. 

Nassau,  Bahamas.— T.  Darling  &  Co. 

Para,  Brazil. — At  the  consulate. 

Pemambuco,  Brazil. — Arthur  B.  Dallas. 

Port  Hawkesbury,  C.  B.  I.,  Nova  Scotia.— Alexander  Bain. 

Port  of  Spain,  Trinidad,  West  Indies.— John  A.  Donnatien. 

St.  Helena  Island.— At  the  consulate. 

St.  John,  New  Brunswick.— J.  &  A.  McMillan. 

St.  Johns,  Newfoundland.— Garrett  Byrne. 

St.  Thomas,  West  Indies.— J.  P.  Thorsen. 

Turks  Island.— E.  J.  D.  Astwood. 

Vancouver,  British  Columbia.— Albert  Uflford,  58  Cordova  street. 

Victoria,  British  Columbia.— T.  N.  Hibben  &  Co.,  69  Government  street. 

Zanzibar,  East  Africa.— Dorsey  Mohun,  United  States  consulate. 


y 


